The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutR2017-059 2017-04-10 RESOLUTION NO. R2017-59 A Resolution of the City Council of the City of Pearland, Texas, awarding a construction services contract for the Tom Reid Library Expansion Project to Construction Masters of Houston, Inc., in the amount of$3,319,200.00. BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS: Section 1. That competitive bids for the construction of the Tom Reid Library Expansion Project have been reviewed and tabulated. Section 2. That the City Council hereby awards the bid to Construction Masters of Houston, Inc., in the amount of$3,319,200.00. Section 3. The City Manager or his designee is hereby authorized to execute a construction services contract for the Tom Reid Library Expansion Project. PASSED, APPROVED and ADOPTED this the 10th day of April, A.D., 2017. TOM REID MAYOR ATTEST: - Yo LNG L�� ING, C =� �� `n= Y SE i TARY /1"11,111 tioNNNN APPROVED AS TO FORM: DARRIN M. COKER CITY ATTORNEY Project Manual IL) for: TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION 0" 4�! T E X A k. A k AS dts Bid No. : 1117-08 January, 2017 Prepared By: DewberrylWilson Architects 5051 Westheimer, Suite 200 Houston, Texas 77056 4 Project Manual for: TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION 10 Pt Olt 94P, Lk AO V 4 T E X A S 4.S r, 1s9 % Bid No. : 1117-08 January, 2017 Prepared By: DewberrylWilson Architects 5051 Westheimer, Suite 200 Houston, Texas 77056 I Project Manual --rik' for: TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION ' 'a-:''''''' ' � x ta 4 XW`. , . .�. 5 +4 re e 'r) ' 'A\ --- L N D r--- rk \ r` ri %' -".'1''';'S•:.: q',-,*,,,..i;fill.S K,,,. Bid No. : 1117-08 January, 2017 Prepared By: DewberrylWilson Architects 5051 Westheimer, Suite 200 Houston, Texas 77056 Project Manual for: TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION COP Project No. : F20002 Bid No.: 1117-08 APfri January, 2017 r * r A,�j ••• zola9.••- I ' Prepared By: '►.,, F Of 1 ,U11 DewberrylWiIson Architects 5051 Westheimer, Suite 200 Houston, Texas 77056 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO PROPOSE (,, \ Section 00100 INVITATION TO PROPOSE CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Competitive Sealed Proposal Electronic Sealed Competitive Proposals will be accepted for the following project, in the City's E-bid System. Electronic proposals shall be submitted through the City's web site at: https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. All interested Offerors are required to register as a "supplier" on the City's E-bid System at the above web address and clicking on "Supplier Registration". Registration provides automatic access to any changes to the Plans, Specifications or Submission time and date. However, submission of an E-bid requires completing a short registration questionnaire found on this web site. When prompted to add or remove commodity codes registrants must add the codes listed below: * Building Construction Services, New (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, General (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, Heavy (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services,Trade(New Construction) For more information regarding registration instructions, see INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS, Section 00200, included in the project bid documents viewable on the web site. Questions regarding electronic proposals should be directed to City Purchasing Officer at ebids@pearlandtx.gov. All Proposals submitted electronically will remain confidential until the opening date and time when they will be opened and read into the public record. Proposals shall be submitted on the form provided in the E-bid System and submitted electronically through this system to the City Purchasing Officer, City of Pearland, City Hall located at 3519 6 - I - '- • - t• exas 77581. Electronic Proposals will be accepted until 2:00 p.m., Thursday, March 2, 2017. •:11 Proposals shall reference the following project information in the :• :• '. - . • • .rovided electronic format. All properly submitted proposals shall be publicly "opened" and read aloud into the public record following the closing of the acceptance period for the construction of: zt�t'd1Luti II,. Tom Reid Library �.�=��Q�►��AFro„"01, Addition Renovation y�N• �i�`�c A�►r City of Pearland,Texas ; wAD, r COP PN: F20002 lr ` BID NO.: 1117-08 y 9 f 47 41,60 A Mandatory Pre-Proposal Conference will be held at the Tom Reid Library at ►dririve, Pearland, Texas 77581 at 2:00 p.m. on February 2, 2017. The project will entail the addition and renovation of the existing Tom Reid Library in Pearland, Texas. As a part of the scope of work,we will add approximately 8,560 square foot to the building, expanding the northwest side of the building. In this addition, we will enlarge the stack areas in 02-2015 00100- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO PROPOSE the children's, adult and teen areas,increase the lounge seating,provide new computer desk areas, ''-‘ "�, provide new check out kiosk, new help desks and additional restroom facilities. New interior / finishes and lighting will be added to the library to include: wall and floor finishes, new LED lighting throughout the space and parking lot, new ceiling tile and extending new ceiling grid to match existing. A new HVAC system will be supplied as a part of this project. Upon award of a contract, the successful Offeror will be required to utilize the City's web based project management software, "Pro-Trak" for the administration of the construction project, including but not limited to, all transmittals and material submittals,RFI's,RFC's,Change Orders, Applications for Payment and all project communications with the City, its Construction Manager and Engineer. This system has certain hardware, internet access and operation requirements that form the basis for all project communications,documentation and records for the project.For more information, see INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS, Section 00200. Electronic Proposal Documents: including Contract Documents, Plans and Technical Specifications are available for download on the City's Website at: https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx upon registration. The documents are NOT viewable without registration. These same documents are also available at the following locations. City of Pearland, City Hall (281) 652-1600 Purchasing Department 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland,Texas 77581 !, Amtek Plan Room (713) 956-0100 4001 Sherwood Houston,TX 77092 The Associated General Contractors of America,Inc. (713) 334-7100 2400 Augusta, Suite 350 Houston,TX 77057 ��zztiiutul�lt ~~co'C Virtual Builders Exchange C� � a•�'�`� ?e▪ t 0 (832) 613-0201 7035 W.Tidwell Building J, Suite 112 got Houston,TX 77092 r r r r • * ••.20.a9.•••'• 1-800-393-6343 McGrawHill Construction—Dodge Reports�,,�gr •• •• -�.P_�" F OF Civcast Z•Z to{ https://www.civcastusa.com No plan fees or deposits are required for plans and proposal documents obtained through the City's E-bid System. OFFERORS MUST REGISTER AS A SUPPLIER ON THE CITY'S E- BID SYSTEM IN ORDER TO SUBMIT A PROPOSAL EVEN IF PROPOSAL DOCUMENTS ARE OBTAINED VIA ONE OF THE PLAN HOUSES. Offerors accept sole responsibility for downloading all of the required documents, plans, specifications proposal forms and addenda required for submitting a proposal. 02-2015 00100-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO PROPOSE Each proposal must be accompanied by a Proposed Schedule and Contractors Qualification Statement. No proposal may be withdrawn or terminated for a period of sixty (90) days subsequent to the proposal opening date without the consent of the City of Pearland. Unless otherwise expressly provided herein, all references to "day(s)" shall mean calendar day(s). Bid Security and Bonds: Bid Security in the form of Cashier's Check, Certified Check, or Bid Bond payable to the City of Pearland in the amount of 5% of the total base proposal price must accompany each proposal. Bidders submitting proposals electronically through the E-bid System shall scan and up-load a copy of the sealed Bid Bond as an attachment to their proposal. Original documents for Bid Security shall be requested by the City from the lowest two offerors and delivered to the City's Purchasing Officer within 48 business hours of the Proposal Opening. Bid Security shall be delivered to: Office of City Purchasing,Finance Department, 2nd Floor City Hall, 3519 Liberty Drive, Pearland,Texas 77581. Performance and Payment Bonds: The successful Offeror must furnish Performance and Payment Bonds as required by Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code or other applicable law,as amended,upon the form included in the Contract Documents,in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the final contract price, such bonds to be executed by a corporate surety duly authorized to do business in the State of Texas, and named in the current list of"Treasury Department Circular No. 570", naming the City of Pearland, Texas as Obligee. Additionally, the successful Offeror shall be required to provide a one year Maintenance Bond for the improvements installed as part of this work, as provided in the Special Conditions of Agreement. Equal Opportunity: All responsible Offerors having submitted complete proposals will receive consideration for award of contract without regard to race, color,religion, sex,or national origin. Selection Criteria: The Contract is to be awarded based on provision of "Best Value" to the Owner. Within 30 days after receiving the Proposals, the Owner will consider and rank each proposal and select the Proposal that offers the best value to the Owner using the following criteria: 1) Price: The quoted price or cost methodology, alternatives proposed 52% and markup for changes Schedule: The contractor's ability or commitment to deliver or sequence 18% 2) delivery by a specific date(s). Coordination to work around uninterrupted facility operations. 3) Reputation: The contractor's reputation and past relationship with the 7% City. tok 4) Experience: Demonstrated ability to meet schedules on similar proj s.4 N gs�GO�,hrrr�� - � pig F 5 C9 .i. _ - r to `r r 5) Personnel: Experience and qualifications of key project personnels * (.16\ 6) Approach: Proposed approach to performing the work �f'�,s► ' 2� ,.•'� 02-2015 00100-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO PROPOSE 7) Subcontractor: Qualifications and Work History of proposed 4% subcontractors with General Contractor 8) Safety: Quality Assurance Program and Safety Record 3% Upon selection of a primary Offeror, Owner will attempt to negotiate a contract with the most qualified Offeror. The Owner may discuss with the selected Offeror options for a scope or time modification and any price change associated with the modification. If the Owner is unable to negotiate a contract with the selected Offeror, the Owner may end negotiations with that Offeror and proceed to the next Offeror in the order of the selection ranking until a contract is reached or all proposals are rejected. The Owner may make such investigations as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the Offeror to perform the work, and the Offeror shall furnish the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any proposal if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, such Offeror fails to satisfy the Owner that such Offeror is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the work contemplated therein. Conditional proposals will not be accepted. The City of Pearland reserves the right to award a contract based on its sole assessment and ranking of the above factors in its own best interests or reject any or all proposals. A proposal that has been "opened" may not be changed for the purposes of correcting an error in the proposed price. State Sales Tax: The Owner qualifies for exemption from State and Local Sales Tax pursuant to Section 151.311 of the Texas Tax Code for material incorporated into the project. Nondiscrimination: The City, in accordance with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, 78 Stat. 252, 42 U.S.C. 2000d to 2000d-4 and Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Department of Transportation, Subtitle A, Office of the Secretary, Part 21, Nondiscrimination in Federally- Assisted programs of the Department of Transportation issued pursuant to such Act, hereby notifies all bidders that it will affirmatively insure that in any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority business enterprises will be afforded full opportunity to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, or national origin in consideration for an award. Young Lorfing,TRMC "0.i'.101t1'a$aidt d City Secretary, y.��,�0 ......... %..4 rrd City of Pearland .. .c, c4. 4-7 C9 .Za First Publication date January 25, 2017 ItZ Second Publication date February 1 , 2017 ...................... :• 7 '�r�� of g� tZ 02-2015 00100-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND `--- v�ED 44,04/e BRAZORIA COUNTY,TEXAS 4.� o c •• ; odA TABLE OF CONTENTS ittOse r � • v SECTION TITLE ° * gt to s. DIVISION 0—BIDDING AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS frrr, `Q '.?Ot84..�•'•P�� OF 00100 Invitation to Propose ' .�leo 00200 Instructions to Offerors 00220 Geotechnical Report (and report) 00300 Bid Proposal 00500 Standard Form of Agreement 00500-A Appendix A 00610 Performance Bond 00611 Payment Bond 00612 One-Year Maintenance Bond 00615 Partial Waiver of Lien and Payment Affidavit 00700 General Conditions of Agreement. 00700-A General Conditions Table of Contents Attachment No.1 to General Conditions of Agreement Attachment No.2 to General Conditions of Agreement Attachment No.3 to General Conditions of Agreement 00800 Special Conditions of Agreement. 00811 Wage Scale for Engineering Construction 00811-A Wage Scale and Payroll Requirements for Building Construction 00850 TxDOT Local Government Project Procedures Requirements 00900 Addendum Template DIVISION 1 —GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 Summary of Work 01100 Summary of Work 01140 Contractor's Use of Premises 01200 Measurement and Payment Procedures 012200 Unit Prices 012300 Alternates 01290 Change Order Procedures 01310 Coordination and Meetings 01350 Submittals 013516 Alteration Project Procedures 01380 Construction Photographs 014000 Quality Requirements 01440 Observation Services 01420 Referenced Standards 01430 Contractor's Quality Control 01440 Observation Services 01450 Testing Laboratory Services 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01505 Mobilization 01550 Stabilized Construction Exits 01554 Street Signs 01555 Traffic Control and Regulation 01560 Filter Fabric Fence 01561 Reinforced Filter Fabric Barrier 01562 Waste Material Disposal 01563 Tree and Plant Protection 01564 Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 01565 TPDES Requirements 01566 Source Controls for Erosion&Sedimentation Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 00010-1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND TABLE OF CONTENTS 01570 Trench Safety System 01580 Project Identification Signs 01600 Material and Equipment 01630 Product Options and Substitutions 01720 Field Surveying 01750 Starting Systems 01760 Project Record Documents 01770 Contract Closeout DIVISIONS 2—EXISTING CONDITIONS 02200 Site Preparation 02220 Site Demolition 02252 Cement Stabilized Sand 02255 Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 02316 Excavation and Backfill for Roadways 02317 Excavation and Backfillfor Structures 02318 Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 02330 Embankment 02335 Subgrade 02370 Geotextile 024119 Selective Demolition 02415 Augering Pipe or Casing for Sewers 02417 Augering Pipe or Casing for Water Lines 02510 WaterMains 02511 Water Meters 02512 Polyethylene Wrap 02513 Steel Pipe and Fittings for Large Diameter Water Mains 02514 Fire Hydrant Assembly 02515 Water Tap and Service Line Installation 02520 Valve Boxes,Meter Boxes,and Meter Vaults 02530 Gravity Sanitary Sewers 02531 Sanitary Sewer Service Leads or Reconnections 02532 High Density Polyethylene(HDPE)Solid Wall Pipe 02533 Sanitary SewageForce Mains 02534 PVC Pipe 02540 Tapping Sleeves and Valves 02541 Water and WastewaterLine Valves 02542 Concrete Manholes and Accessories 02582 Thermoplastic Pavement Marking 02603 Frames,Grates,Rings,and Covers 02624 Structural Plate Culvert Structures 02628 Jacking Pipe or Box 02629 Safety End Treatments 02630 Storm Sewers 02631 Precast Inlets,Headwalls,and Wingwalls 02632 Cast-in-Place Inlets, Headwalls,and Wingwalls 02633 Adjusting Manholes,Inlets,and Valve Boxes 02634 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings �d1a, ��ttz,ti... 02635 Steel Pipe and Fittings 40: ED,k nit 02636 Polyurethane Coating on Steel or Ductile Iron PipePavement '4� r;rid' jlll 02741 Asphaltic Conc02710 Base Courseforete Pavement .� � � •�a 'VA 0 02742 Prime Coat ' 0 02743 Tack Coat * ''� 02744 Single Course Surface Treatment % j a 02751 Concrete Pavement �' A a..,.o1 Bq•••''.5.� 02762 Temporary and Removable Reflectorized Pavement Markings Za6 ems« Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 00010-2 of 5 CITY OFPEARLAND TABLE OF CONTENTS 02770 Curb,Curb&Gutter,and Headers 02771 Concrete Sidewalks 02775 Concrete Driveways 02811 Landscape Irrigation 02820 Wood Fences and Gates 02821 Chain Link Fences and Gates 02910 Topsoil 02921 Hydromulch Seeding 02922 Sodding 02931 Landscape and Tree Planting 02980 Pavement Repair 02981 Blast Cleaning of Pavement DIVISION 3—CONCRETE 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete 033000 Cast-In-Place Concrete 03310 Structural Concrete DIVISION 4—MASONRY 042000 Unit Masonry DIVISION 5-METALS 051200 Structural Steel Framing 052100 Steel Joist Framing 053100 Steel Decking 054000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 055000 Metal Fabrications 055813 Column Covers DIIVISION 6—WOODS,PLASTICS&COMPOSITES 061000 Rough Carpentry 061600 Gypsum Sheathing 061601 Plywood Sheathing 064000 Interior Architectural Woodwork 066116 Solid Surfacing Fabrications.. DIVISION 7-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 071113 Bituminous Dampproofing 072100 Thermal Insulation 072216 Roof Board Insulation 075216 Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 076200- Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 078413 Penetration Firestopping 078443 Joint Firestopping %vuV19.4 et�t1..• 079200 Joint Sealants titi•-,�IaE�4, ,4 r�1f1 079513.16 Exterior Expansion Joints s��,,5 "'••.• Z' l� DIVISION 8-OPENINGS C\ 081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 081210 Prefabricated Interior Aluminum Frames 6,. 11 ...,•�189�•�,,:,� �" 081400 Wood Doors •i T�O F �%_.. - 084113 Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts ' `"? ,2214 Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 00010-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND TABLE OF CONTENTS 087111 Door Hardware 088000 Glazing tgEt DIVISION 9-FINISHES 092116 Gypsum Board Assemblies 092400 Cement Plastering 093000 Tiling 095100 Acoustical Ceiling Systems 096500 Resilient Flooring 096813 Tile Carpeting 099113 Exterior Painting 099123 Interior Painting 099323.15 Sealed Concrete DIVISION 10-SPECIALTIES 102113.16 ToiletCompartments 102800 Toilet Accessories DIVISION 11 —EQUIPMENT 115116 BookDepository DIVISION 12-FURNISHINGS 123640 Stone Countertops DIVISIONS 13-30—NOT USED. 1.'"11) DIVISION 31 —EARTHWORK 311100 Clearing and Grubbing 312200 Grading 312300 Earthwork 312313 Subgrade Preparations 312316 Excavation Filling and Backfilling for Site Utilities 312323.15 Cement Sand Backfilling 212343 Trench Safety System 316329 Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts DIVISION 32—EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 321113.13 Lime Stabilization of Subgrade 321313 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement 321313.15 Concrete Sidewalks 321613 Concrete Curbs 321713 Concrete Pavement Joints ',�(OD Ae�;trrlr 323129 Wood Fencing 11:14M$• 'f'.i .1f 323113 Chain Link Gates • .0 DIVISION 33--UTILITIES II/ 330513 Manholes '•• A••'••..�o18q..••''•p`P�5��~ 331100 Water Distribution Mains " ~ �} 334000 Storm Drainage O P •--E''�4��Ir 2'1 Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 00010-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND TABLE OF CONTENTS. END OF SECTION C C t``�titt.:tai:i:if;rF s •^ wrr r FOF1� Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 00010-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS Section 00200 INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS 1. Defined Terms 1.1 The term "Owner" hereinafter is defined as the City of Pearland and is used interchangeably with the term "the City". Both terms are synonymous and refer to the City. 1.2 The term "Offeror" means one who submits a Proposal directly to Owner, as distinct from a sub-bidder, who submits a proposal to an Offeror. The term "Successful Offeror" means, on the basis of Owner's evaluation as hereinafter provided,the Offeror submitting a proposal that represents, in the Owner's opinion, the Best Value to the City. The term "Proposal Documents" includes the Invitation to Propose, Instructions to Offerors, the Proposal (Parts A through F), and the proposed Contract Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipts of proposals). 1.3 The term "E-bid System" refers to the City's electronic bidding system. This is a web-based system that provides all Proposal Documents electronically to potential Offerors and forms the pathway for interested Offerors to submit proposals in response to advertisement and invitation. The term "e-bid" and/ or "electronic bid" means the Offerors' electronic proposal submitted to the Owner by way of the E-bid System. The terms "electronic bid" or "e-bid" are used inter-changeably to describe the above proposal process to submit an authorized proposal to the City in response to an Invitation to Propose. 1.4 The term "Pro-Trak" means the City's web-based contract administration and construction records management system used by involved parties to administer the project. This system serves as the web accessed centralized information distribution hub for communications and document management, pay application processing and record retention for all project documentation. Operational instructions for this system will be issued to the successful Offeror at the pre-Construction Meeting. 1.5 All other definitions set out in the Contract Documents are applicable to terms used in the Proposal Documents. 1.6 Unless otherwise expressly provided herein, all references to "day(s)" shall mean consecutive calendar day(s). 1.7 The term "Alternate(s)" or "Add Alternate(s)" as used here interchangeably is defined as an additive work item that may be selected or rejected by the Owner based solely on the Owner's acceptance or rejection of the price proposed for this item. Alternate bid prices shall include all labor, material, equipment and overhead costs to perform the work as specified, complete in place. When selected by the Owner, the costs for an Alternate shall be added to the Base Proposal and made a part of the Contract price. 11-2013 00200-1 of 11 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS 2. Registration for E-bid System 2.1 The Owner's E-bid System is accessible via the City's web site A1.4) at https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. Proposal documents can be viewed by simply selecting a specific project from the BID OPPORTUNITIES list and clicking on that project AFTER registration as a Supplier. Potential Offerors MUST REGISTER as a "Supplier" by clicking on the Supplier Registration button and completing the registration form. When prompted to add or remove commodity codes registrants must add the codes listed below: * Building Construction Services,New(Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services,General(Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services,Heavy(Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services,Trade(New Construction) Select the appropriate Time Zone for the Offeror's location and whether that location observes Daylight Savings time. Complete the registration information providing all required contact information and establish password security for the E-bid System. Once complete, "suppliers" will receive emails notifying of proposal opportunities. Downloading any project proposal data will automatically place the Offeror's contact information on the list of plan holders list and the E-bid System will automatically send any and all updates, changes or addenda associated with that project. 2.2 The electronic Proposal can only be submitted through this system. The form can be printed for Offeror's use, but the Proposal MUST be submitted on the electronic form within the E-bid System. 2.3 Questions regarding use of the E-bid System may be directed by email to:ebids @pearlandtx.gov. 3. Copies of Proposal Documents 3.1 Complete sets of "electronic" Proposal Documents are available for download to registered Offerors at No Cost from the City's E-bid System at: https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. Interested Offerors must register as a "Supplier" on this site in order to receive the Proposal Documents, and all Addenda or other notifications of changes, including communications from the Owner or Engineer. All Proposal Documents are available to download and print. 3.2 The Offeror accepts sole responsibility for ensuring that he obtains a full set of these documents by completing the registration and executing a full and complete download of the project documents. Downloading of Proposal Documents automatically ensures receipt of any and all subsequent communications from the City or its Engineer. 3.3 Copies of Proposal Documents are available or may be viewed at any of the Plan Houses listed in the Invitation to Propose. It is recommended that all interested Offerors, whether proposing directly to the Owner or Sub-bidders proposing to an Offeror,register as a Supplier and download the project Proposal Documents. 3.4 Complete sets of Proposal Documents must be used in preparing Proposals; neither Owner nor Engineer assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations 11-2013 00200-2 of 11 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Proposal Documents including, but not cp.\ limited to all Addenda issued prior to bid. f 3.5 Owner and Engineer, in making copies of Proposal Documents available on the above terms, do so only for the purpose of obtaining Proposals on the Work, and do not confer a license or grant for any other use. 3.6 Proposal Documents include but may not be limited to Section 00300 Proposal — Parts A, B, C, D, and E. 4. Examination of Contract Documents and Site 4.1 It is the responsibility of each Offeror before submitting a Proposal, to (a) examine the Proposal Documents thoroughly, (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work, (c) consider federal, state and local laws and regulations that may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work, (d) study and carefully correlate Offeror's observations with the Contract Documents, and (e) notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors, omissions or discrepancies in the Contract Documents, (f) to recognize and plan for use of the City's "Pro-Trak" software to administer the construction process and perform the work of the project. 4.2 Any reports of explorations and tests of conditions at the site which have been utilized by the Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents will be made available to Offerors for review, but such reports are not part of the Contract Documents. Offeror Cw\. may not and should not rely upon the accuracy of the data contained in such reports, interpretations or opinions contained therein, or the completeness thereof, for the purposes of bidding or construction. 4.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to underground utilities, equipment or other underground facilities at or contiguous to the site is based upon information and data furnished to Owner and Engineer by owners of such underground facilities or others, and Owner does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof. 4.4 Before submitting a Proposal, each Offeror will, at Offeror's own expense, make or obtain any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface and underground facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work and which Offeror deems necessary to determine its Proposal prices for performing and furnishing the Work in accordance with the Contract Time, Contract Price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 4.5 On request in advance, Owner will provide each prospective Offeror access to the site to conduct such explorations and tests as each prospective Offeror deems necessary for submission of a Proposal. Prospective Offerors shall fill all holes, clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations. C 11-2013 00200-3 of 119 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS 4.6 The lands upon which the. Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by Contractor in performing the Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands, access thereto or contractual arrangements for use by the Contractor required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by Owner unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 4.7 The submission of a Proposal will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Offeror that Offeror has complied with every requirement of this Article 4, that without exception the Proposal is premised upon performing and furnishing all of the Work required by the Contract Documents and such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in, required by or reasonably inferred from the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. 5. Interpretations and Addenda 5.1 All questions about the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to Engineer via the City's E-bid system. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda delivered or transmitted by electronic means to all registered Offerors in the City's E-bid System. Questions received less than five (5) days prior to the date "oak for opening of Proposals may not be answered. Only questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. 5.2 Addenda may also be issued to modify the Proposal Documents as deemed advisable by Owner or Engineer. Addenda will automatically be made available to all registered Offerors that have downloaded Proposal Documents from the City's E- bid System. 6. Contract Time 6.1 The number of days in which the Work is to be Substantially Completed, as set forth in the Proposal form and the Standard Form of Agreement, subject to such extension of time as may be due under the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents ("Contract Time"). All references to "time" or "days" shall be interpreted as consecutive calendar days. 7. Liquidated Damages and Early Completion Bonus 7.1 Provisions for liquidated damages and early completion bonus, if any, are set forth in the Standard Form of Agreement. 11-2013 00200-4 of 11 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS 8. Substitute or"Or-Equal"Items 8.1 The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of the selected materials and equipment described in the Plans or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or-equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Plans or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or "or-equal" item of material or equipment may be furnished or used by the Contractor if acceptable to Engineer. Application for such acceptance will not be considered by Engineer until after the Agreement becomes effective. All "or-equal" references shall be interpreted to mean "or approved equal". The procedure for submission of any such application by Contractor and consideration by Engineer is set forth in the Contract Documents. 9. Proposal Form 9.1 The Proposal form (Section 00300 — Proposal — Parts A, B, C, D, & E) is included with the Proposal Documents when downloaded. This Document must be printed and signed, as required below, and then uploaded as an Attachment to the Proposal. All E-bid and Proposals must be submitted on the City's official E-bid System Proposal document. All blanks on the Proposal form must be completed or filled in. The Offeror shall propose for all Alternates, if any. Incomplete Proposals may be cause for rejection. 9.2 Proposals by corporations must be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice-president (or other corporate officer accompanied be evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal must be affixed and attested by the secretary or an assistant secretary. The corporate address and state of incorporation must be shown below the signature. Once executed,the document is to be uploaded as an attachment to the Proposal. 9.3 Proposals by partnerships must be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general partner, whose title must appear under the signature, and if a corporate general partner, executed as required above for corporations and the official address of the partnership must be shown below the signature. All names must be typed or printed below the signature. Once executed, the document is to be uploaded as an attachment to the Proposal. 9.4 The Offeror shall acknowledge receipt of all Addenda (the number of which must be filled in on the Proposal form). 9.5 The address and telephone number for communications regarding the Proposal must be shown on the Proposal form. 9.6 Bid Security and Bonds: Bid Security in the form of Cashier's Check, Certified Check, or Bid Bond payable to the City of Pearland in the amount of 5% of the total base bid price must accompany each proposal. Bidders submitting bids electronically through the E-bid system shall scan and upload a copy of the sealed Bid Bond as an attachment to their bid. 11-2013 00200-5 of 11 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS 10. Submission of Proposals 10.1 The place, date and/or time designated for opening Proposals may be changed in accordance with applicable laws, codes and ordinances. Any such changes to the Proposal Schedule shall be made by Addenda. 10.2 Electronic Proposals shall be submitted per the requirements, instructions, terms and conditions as stated in the registration and submittal instructions of the City's E-bid System electronic bidding software. All Offerors utilizing this system MUST register as a potential supplier. E-Bids are submitted directly via the City's Web .based system located at https://pearland.ionwave.net/Lozin.aspx. Proposals submitted after the proposal date and time will be rejected. Offerors are advised to submit their proposal in advance of the closing time and allow for the electronic transfer to complete prior to the closing deadline. 11. Modification and Withdrawal of Proposals 11.1 Prior to submission, E-bid Proposals may be modified or withdrawn without prejudice. 11.2 Once submitted, Proposals may only be modified by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a Proposal must be executed) and delivered to Office of City Purchasing, Finance Department, 2nd Floor City Hall, 3519 Liberty Drive, Pearland,Texas 77581 and submitted any time prior to the opening of Proposals. 11.3 An Offeror may not modify or withdraw its Proposal by facsimile or verbal means. A withdrawn Proposal may be resubmitted prior to the designated time for 'dr, opening Proposals. No proposal may be withdrawn or terminated for a period of sixty (90) days subsequent to the proposal opening date without the consent of the City of Pearland. 11.4 If, within twenty-four (24) hours after Proposals are opened, any Offeror files a duly signed, written notice with Owner and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner that there was a material mistake in the preparation of its Proposal,that Offeror may request to withdraw its Proposal. Thereafter, that Offeror will be disqualified from further proposing on the Project to be provided under the Contract Documents. 12. Opening of Proposals 12.1 Proposals will be opened and (unless obviously non-responsive) read aloud publicly to identify the names of the offerors and their respective cost proposals, only. An abstract of the amounts of the base Proposals and major alternates (if any) will be made available to Offerors after the opening of Proposals. Proposals, in their entirety, shall be open for public inspection after the contract is awarded, with the exception of any trade secrets or confidential information contained therein, provided Offeror has expressly identified any specific information contained therein as being trade secrets or confidential information. 11-2013 00200-6 of 11 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS 13. Proposals to Remain Subject to Acceptance c, 13.1 All Proposals will remain subject to acceptance for sixty (60) days after the day of the Proposal opening, but Owner may, in its sole discretion, release any Proposal prior to that date. 14. Award of Contract 14.1 Owner reserves the right to reject any and all Proposals, to waive any and all informalities not involving price, time or changes in the Work and to negotiate contract terms with the Successful Offeror. Owner may reject a bid as non-responsive if: 1) Offeror improperly or illegibly completes or fails to complete all information required by the Proposal Documents; 2) Offeror fails to sign the Proposal or improperly signs the Proposal; 3) Offeror qualifies its Proposal; 4) Offeror tardily or otherwise improperly submits its Proposal; 5) Offeror fails to submit the Contractor's Qualification Statement and Technical Proposal as required under section 3 of these Instructions to Offerors; or 6) The Proposal is otherwise non-responsive. 14.2 Best Value. The Contract is to be awarded based on provision of "Best Value" to the Owner. Within 30 days after receiving the Proposals, the Owner will consider and rank each proposal and select the Proposal that offers the best value to the Owner using the following criteria: 1) The Offeror's cost proposal 2) The Offeror's proposed subcontractors; 3) The Contractor's Qualification Statement; 4) The Offeror's Technical Proposal; 5) The Offeror's demonstrated administrative ability and financial resources to perform the work; 6) The qualifications and experience of the project team the Offeror firm proposes to manage the project; 7) The Offeror's demonstrated experience in constructing similar projects; 8) The Offeror's demonstrated ability to suitably schedule the project and to meet the required schedule; 9) The Offeror's past performance on other construction contracts for the City; 10)The Offeror's safety record supported by accurate and verifiable data; 11)The methodologies for the Offeror's quality assurance program; 12)The Offeror's ability to start and complete construction of the project in a timely manner; and 13)All other relevant criteria specifically listed in the Proposal Documents. (116\ A contract to be awarded to the Offeror providing the Best Value may be let on either a lump sum basis or a unit cost basis dependent on the Proposal format. 11-2013 00200-7 of 11 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS 14.3 Offeror is required to submit for approval a full schedule of values for the project as component of contract negotiations. 14.4 Within 30 days after the date of opening the proposals, the Owner will evaluate and rank each proposal with respect to the selection criteria contained in this Competitive Sealed Proposal document. After opening and ranking, an award may be made on the basis of the proposals initially submitted, without discussion,clarification or modification, or, the Owner may discuss with the selected responder, offers for cost reduction and other elements of the responder's proposal. If the Owner determines that it is unable to reach a contract satisfactory to the Owner with the selected responder, then the Owner will terminate discussions with the selected responder and proceed to the next responder in order of selection ranking until a contract is reached or the Owner has rejected all proposals. 14.5 Owner may conduct such investigations as Owner deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Proposal and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of Offerors,proposed Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, to Owner's satisfaction,within the Contract Time. 14.6 Offeror Attendance. The successful Offeror or its representative is required to attend the City Council meeting in which the contract will be considered for award. Owner will establish a schedule for the award with Offeror. 15. Contract Security 15.1 When the Successful Offeror delivers the executed Standard Form of Agreement to Owner, it must include the required Performance, Payment, Maintenance and Surface Correction Bonds (if required) by the Contract Documents. Bonds may be on the forms provided herein or an equal form containing no substantive changes, as determined by Owner. 16. Workers'Classification 16.1 Texas Government Code § 2155.001 authorizes a penalty of $200 per misclassified individual to be imposed on a person who contracts for certain services with a governmental entity and fails to properly classify their workers and subcontractors.This is effective January 1, 2014. 17. Signing of Agreement 17.1 When Owner gives a Notice of Intent to Award to the Successful Offeror, it will be accompanied by the required number of unsigned counterparts of the Standard Form of Agreement, and the required Performance and Payment Bond forms. Within ten (10) days thereafter Contractor shall sign and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Standard Form of Agreement to Owner with the required Bonds. Within ten (10) days thereafter, Owner shall deliver one fully signed counterpart to Contractor. There "- shall be no contract or agreement between Owner and the Successful Offeror until proper execution and attestation of the Standard Form of Agreement by authorized representatives of the Owner. 11-2013 00200-8 of 11 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS 18. Pre-Proposal Conference 18.1 A pre-proposal conference will be held as indicated in the Invitation to Propose. Attendance at the pre-proposal conference is MANDATORY to fulfill the prerequisite requirements for Offerors bidding directly to the Owner. 19. Retainage 19.1 Provisions concerning retainage are set forth in the Contract Documents. 20. Award 20.1 The contract, if awarded, may be awarded to the eligible Offeror submitting the lowest and best responsible bid for the Owner, complying with these Instructions to Offerors and other bidding requirements in the Documents. By submitting a Proposal, each Offeror agrees and consents that the Owner, in determining the Successful Offeror and his eligibility for the award, may consider the Offeror's experience and facilities, conduct and performance under other contracts, financial condition, reputation in the industry, safety record and other factors as stated below,which could affect the Offeror's qualifications to perform the work. 20.2 Pursuant to Statute 2269.151 of the Local Government Code, the City will evaluate the proposals to determine which proposal provides the best value for the Owner. In making said determination, the Owner will consider Criteria (as further defined or explained in these rib\ Instructions to Offerors and Bid Proposal, including the Equipment Selection Table, Contractor's Qualification Statement,Safety Questionnaire, and Technical Proposal. 20.3 The evaluation will be carried out by an evaluation team consisting of the Owner and Engineering Consultant. These team members will assign rating values to each of the criteria that range from 0-5, distributed as shown below: 5 =Exceeds Expectations 4=Above Expectations 3 =Meets Expectations 2=Does not quite Meet Expectations 1 =Does not meet Expectations 0=Non-responsive or does not meet minimum Expectations 20.4 The average of the team member's individual rating values will be multiplied by the relative weighting points for each of the criteria below,and the total used to rank the Offerors. The Offeror with the highest ranking will be the Offeror considered to provide the best responsible value to the (^ Owner and will be recommended to the City for contract award. 11-2013 00200-9 of 11 9 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS 20.5 Price—52 Points—The Offeror with the lowest price will be awarded a full 52 Points. All other bidders will be awarded a rating value based on a weighted percentage based on the difference from the low bidder. Price will be given as either a quote or cost methodology, accompanied by proposed alternatives and markups for changes. 20.6 Schedule—18 Points—The Offeror's ability or commitment to deliver or sequence delivery by a specific date(s) / coordination to work around uninterrupted facility operations. Provide three (3) recent examples of proven ability to schedule and phase work properly to minimize impact to owners, use of Critical Path Method scheduling and experience meeting deadlines. Provide past performance during project close out phase on three projects of similar size, scope, complexity,and value noted on 20.8 below. Indicate how long each project took from Substantial Completion to Final Completion and a brief explanation as to why. Provide name, address, and telephone number of points-of-contact for verification. 20.7 Reputation—7 Points —The Offeror's reputation and past relationship with the City. The satisfactory completion by the Offeror over the last ten years of five or more major retrofit, rehabilitation or expansion projects at libraries or similar public facilities. A major project is defined as having a construction value of at least $15,000,000 and will be required to meet the expectations and be awarded a ratings value of 3. The Offeror's historical ability to successfully control cost and schedule,and perform QA/QC will also be considered in awarding rating values for this criterion. Offeror should provide at least three(3)references for the company and for key personnel and include in the references company name,contact person(s), address and telephone number. Owner reserves the right to contact references for verification.The Offeror's reputation among other governmental entities, owners,suppliers, and sub-contractors will be considered for awarding of rating value points. Strong consideration will be given to first-hand experience on prior City projects. A positive prior experience will be awarded an "exceeds expectation"rating of 5 points. Offerors with a negative past experience with Owner will be awarded a "does not meet expectations"rating value of 0 points. 20.8 Experience — 6 Points — Demonstrated ability to meet schedule on similar projects. Contractor must demonstrate past ability to meet contract schedule on similar projects included in this proposal to meet the minimum past experience qualifications. If the comparison reveals a disparity between the initial and final construction schedules provide an explanation. Contractor must provide a summary level schedule for this Project indicating the Offeror firm's proposed construction schedule that meets required substantial completion time.Meeting all of these criteria objectives will be required to be awarded a"meets expectations"rating of 3 for this criterion. 20.9 Personnel — 5 Points — Experience and qualifications of key project personnel. At least three key staff personnel, including at least one safety representative as indicated on the list contained herein shall have had at least 20 years combined experience,with no one person having less than 5 years of experience,in retrofit,rehabilitation or expansion projects at public facilities of similar size and scope as proposed by the Owner. The Project Superintendent shall have at �*'� least 10 years of experience in retrofit, rehabilitation or expansion projects at public facilities of 11-2013 00200-11 of 11 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS similar size and scope and shall have been the Project Superintendent on at least two such satisfactory completed projects within the past 10 years. The key staff personnel must be committed to this Project for the duration of the project, and cannot be removed from the project by the contractor except with the Owners approval. The contractor will allocate 100% of the work hours of the Project Superintendent to this project. Meeting all of these criteria objectives will be required to be awarded a"meets expectations"rating of 3 for this criterion. 20.10 Approach—5 Points—Proposed approach to performing the work. Offeror must provide a Project Plan or Approach. Owner will assess the quality and clarity of the Offeror's work- plan including schedule, logistics/phasing plan, understanding of the work and sensitivity to ongoing operations in the facilities. Meeting these objectives will be required to achieve a "meets expectations"rating of 3 for this criterion. 20.11 Subcontractor — 4 Points — Qualifications and work history with Offeror on similar projects. The Offeror is required to provide a schedule of subcontractors for any subcontractor scheduled to perform 5 percent or more of the Project and provide subcontractor references. The contractor is required to provide references for similar projects where the subcontractor and Offeror have work together.The Offeror acknowledges that it is in the best interest of the Owner and Contractor to have the work performed by experienced personnel in each particular construction discipline with particular interest and attention to the Electrical Subcontractor. Therefore,the Electrical Subcontractor must have a minimum of ten (10) years of experience in the Texas Gulf Coast area of 10 generator installations, 500 kw or larger, and must have completed at least 10 projects of $1,000,000 or more in value, either as an electrical subcontractor or as a prime/general contractor.All reference projects shall be libraries or similar public facilities for cities, regional authorities or other governmental agencies or political subdivisions of the State of Texas. Additionally, the Electrical Subcontractor must be in good standing with the City of Pearland, and must not have any pending or contemplated litigation with the City of Pearland, including any subsidiary or parent organizations, past or present. Electrical Subcontractor MUST have a satisfactory or better work history within Brazoria, Harris, and/or adjoining counties or Proposal shall be considered non-responsive. Satisfactory work history includes evaluation of workmanship, schedule, and litigation history. Failure to provide verifiable documentation of experience shall be grounds for disqualification of Offeror. Meeting all of these criteria objectives will be required to be awarded a "meets expectations" rating of 3 for this criterion. 20.12 Safety — 3 Points — Quality assurance program and safety record. The Offeror and the subcontractors that they plan to use on this job with the lowest Experience Modification Rate (EMR) will be awarded a 2 rating. Any Bidder with an EMR above 1.0 or with a planned subcontractor with an EMR above 1.0 will be awarded a 0 rating valve. All other Bidders will be awarded a rating value based on how their EMR compares to the Offeror with the lowest. The Offeror must provide a summary of the Offeror firm's Quality Assurance Program and how this plan includes subcontractors. Meeting all of these criteria objectives will be required to be awarded a"meets expectations"rating of 3 for this criterion. 11-2013 00200-11 of 11 CITY OF PEARLAND INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS 20.13 Maximum Possible Ranking Points= 100 Points 20.14 In evaluating proposals, Owner will consider the qualifications of the Offerors, whether or not the proposals comply with the prescribed requirements, and such alternates, and other data (e.g., safety record, subcontractor qualifications, experience on similar projects, etc.), as requested in the Bid Proposal. END OF SECTION 11-2013 00200-11 of 11 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 DOCUMENT 00220 - GEOTECHNICAL REPORT 1.01 GENERAL: A. The sub-surface soil investigation and geotechnical report following this page is furnished by the Owner from an independent testing laboratory. B. The data included in the report may be used by the Contractor for general information only. The Architect and the Owner are not responsible for the accuracy of the data given therein. END OF DOCUMENT 00220 GEOTECHNICAL REPORT 00220-1 RABA 6, • C GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING STUDY FOR TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION 3522 LIBERTY DRIVE PEARLAND, TEXAS KpRABA CONSULTANTS C/1"\, Project No.AHA15-024-00 lama Kistner April 23, 2015 Consultants,Inc. 3602 Westchase Houston, TX 77042 www.rkci.com Ms. Cara Davis, Project Manager City of Pearland P 713 :: 996::8990 F 713:: 996 :: 8993 3519 Liberty Drive TBPE Firm F-3257 Pearland,TX 77581 RE: Geotechnical Engineering Study Tom Reid Library Addition 3522 Liberty Drive Pearland,Texas Dear Ms. Davis: Raba Kistner Consultants, Inc. (RKCI) is pleased to submit the report of our Geotechnical Engineering Study for the above-referenced project. This study was performed in accordance with RKCI Proposal No. PHA15-010-00, dated February 03, 2015. Written authorization to proceed with this study was received by our office with the notice-to-proceed letter dated March 27, 2015. The purpose of this study was to drill borings within the proposed footprint of the new building structure, to perform laboratory testing on selected soil samples to classify and characterize subsurface conditions, and to prepare an engineering report presenting foundation design and construction recommendations for the proposed building structure. (11.\) The following report contains our design recommendations and considerations based on our current understanding of the finished floor elevation, design tolerances, and structural loads. If any of these parameters change,then there may be alternatives for value engineering of the foundation system, and RKCI recommends that a meeting be held with the CLIENT and the design team to evaluate these alternatives. We appreciate the opportunity to be of service to you on this project. Should you have any questions about the information presented in this report, or if we may be of additional assistance on the materials testing-quality control program during construction, please call. 40?-,��titrtZ��l Very truly yours, �Ef°OF RABA KISTNER CONSULTANTS, INC. .7* 9"s� te� JOHN DOUGLAS BROWN am; �l`` 96185' 'or • Phu T.Tran John D.Brown, P.E. 41IAl.• Graduate Engineer Manager, Geotechnical Services • ,., PTT/JDB/dar Attachments 01ft\ Copies Submitted: Above(3) 01. San Antonio . Austin - Brownsville • Dallas • Freeport -Houston • McAllen .Mexico -New Braunfels•Salt Lake City 1 Cit'N. GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING STUDY For TOM REID LIBRARY.ADDITION 3522 LIBERTY DRIVE PEARLAND,TEXAS Prepared for CITY OF PEARLAND Houston,Texas Prepared by RABA KISTNER CONSULTANTS, INC. Houston,Texas PROJECT NO.AHA15-024-00 April 23, 2015 RABAKISTNER Project No.AHA15-024-00 April 23, 2015 TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTION 1 PROJECT DESCRIPTION 1 LIMITATIONS 1 BORINGS AND LABORATORY TESTS 2 GENERAL SITE CONDITIONS 3 SITE DESCRIPTION 3 GEOLOGY 3 SEISMIC COEFFICIENTS 3 STRATIGRAPHY 3 GROUNDWATER 4 CORROSIVITY POTENTIAL 5 Corrosion of Steel 5 Degradation of Concrete 6 FOUNDATION ANALYSIS 6 EXPANSIVE SOIL-RELATED MOVEMENTS 6 OVEREXCAVATION AND SELECT FILL REPLACEMENT 7 DRAINAGE CONSIDERATIONS 7 FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS 8 FOUNDATION CONSIDERATIONS 8 SITE GRADING 9 DRILLED-AND-UNDERREAMED PIERS 9 GRADE BEAMS 9 FLOOR SLABS 9 FOUNDATION CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS 10 SITE DRAINAGE 10 SITE PREPARATION 10 SELECT FILL 11 DRILLED PIERS 11 Reinforcement and Concrete Placement 12 SHALLOW FOUNDATION EXCAVATIONS 12 EXCAVATION SLOPING AND BENCHING 12 EXCAVATION EQUIPMENT 12 C116.‘' UTILITIES 13 AREA FLATWORK 13 RABAKISTNER I'. Project No.AHA15-024-00 April 23, 2015 TABLE OF CONTENTS ADDITIONAL CONSIDERATIONS 13 CONSTRUCTION RELATED SERVICES 14 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS TESTING AND OBSERVATION SERVICES 14 BUDGETING FOR CONSTRUCTION TESTING 14 ATTACHMENTS Boring Location Map Logs of Borings Key to Terms and Symbols Results of Soil Sample Analyses Important Information About Your Geotechnical Engineering Report "I") RABAKI TNER Project No.AHA15-024-00 1 April 23, 2015 INTRODUCTION RABA KISTNER Consultants, Inc. (RKCI) has completed the authorized subsurface exploration and foundation recommendations for the proposed Tom Reid Library Addition to be located at 3522 Liberty Drive in Pearland, Texas. This report briefly describes the procedures utilized during this study and presents our findings along with our recommendations for foundation design and construction considerations. PROJECT DESCRIPTION The existing library is approximately 20,800 ft2 and will be expanded by about 11,100 ft2 with construction of a building addition on the north, west and south sides of the existing building structure. Tom Reid Library is located at 3522 Liberty Drive in Pearland,Texas. The proposed metal-framed building addition is expected to create relatively moderate loads to be carried by the foundation system, which is anticipated to consist of a shallow or deep foundation system, such as isolated spread footings or drilled-and-underreamed piers. Floor systems consisting of slabs-on-ground or slabs-on-fill are expected to be preferred, provided soil-related, potential vertical movements will not cause structural performance problems. LIMITATIONS This engineering report has been prepared in accordance with accepted Geotechnical Engineering practices in the Houston area by Geotechnical firms conducting similar work under similar circumstances and is meant for the use of CLIENT and its representatives for design purposes. This report may not contain sufficient information for purposes of other parties or other uses and is not intended for use in determining construction means and methods. The recommendations submitted in this report are based on the data obtained from three borings drilled at this site and our understanding of the project information provided to us by others. If the project information described in this report is incorrect, is altered, or if new information is available, we should be retained to review and modify our recommendations. This report may not reflect the actual variations of the subsurface conditions across the site.The nature and extent of variations across the site may not become evident until construction commences. The construction process itself may also alter subsurface conditions. If variations appear evident at the time of construction, it may be necessary to reevaluate our recommendations after performing on-site observations and tests to establish the engineering impact of the variations. The scope of our Geotechnical Engineering Study does not include an environmental assessment of the air, soil, rock, or water conditions either on or adjacent to the site. No environmental opinions are presented in this report. RKCI's scope of work does not include the investigation, detection, or design related to the prevention of any biological pollutants. The term "biological pollutants" includes, but is not limited to, mold,fungi,spores, bacteria, and viruses, and the byproduct of any such biological organisms. RADAKI STN ER Project No.AHA15-024-00 2 April 23, 2015 If final grade elevations are significantly different from those provided to us by others by more than plus or minus 1-ft, our office should be informed about these changes. If needed and/or if desired, we will reexamine our analyses and make supplemental recommendations. BORINGS AND LABORATORY TESTS Subsurface conditions at the site were evaluated by 3 borings (designated as B-1 through B-3) drilled on April 08, 2015 at the locations shown on the Boring Location Map, Figure 1. The boring locations are approximate and were located in the field by an RKCI•representative based on a site plan provided by the CLIENT, and by measuring distances from existing references and by using a hand-held GPS. Latitude-longitude at the boring locations was estimated using Google Earth imagery dated 2015. The coordinates are shown on the Boring Location Map and on the boring logs. The borings were drilled to the depth of 30-ft below the ground surface elevation existing at the time of our study using a truck-mounted drilling rig.The borings were drilled utilizing a straight flight auger and were backfilled with the auger cuttings generated during the drilling activities. During drilling operations,the following samples were collected: Type of Sample Number Collected Undisturbed Shelby Tube(ST) 27 The ST samples were obtained in general accordance with accepted standard practices. Representative portions of the samples were sealed in containers to reduce moisture loss, labeled, packaged, and transported to our laboratory for subsequent testing and classification. In the laboratory, each sample was evaluated and visually classified by a member of our Geotechnical Engineering staff in general accordance with the Unified Soil Classification System (USCS).The geotechnical engineering properties of the strata were evaluated by the laboratory tests tabulated in the following table: Type of Test Number Conducted Natural Moisture Content 27 Atterberg Limits 7 Unconfined Compression 4 Corrosivity(Including pH, Electrical Resistivity,and 1 Sulfate and Chloride Content Determinations) With the exception of the corrosivity laboratory test result (including pH, electrical resistivity, and chloride and sulfate content determinations),the laboratory tests are presented in graphical or numerical form on the boring logs illustrated on Figures 2 through 4. A key to the classification of terms and symbols used on the logs is presented on Figure 5. The results of the laboratory and field testing are also tabulated on Figure 6 for ease of reference. Samples will be retained in our laboratory for 30 days after submittal of this report. Other arrangements may be provided at the request of the CLIENT. RABAK1STNER Project No.AHA15-024-00 3 (11111''' April 23, 2015 GENERAL SITE CONDITIONS SITE DESCRIPTION The project site is a plot of land located on the north, west and south sides of the existing building structure.The site is relatively flat and grass covered. GEOLOGY The Bureau of Economic Geology, Geologic Atlas of Texas, Houston Sheet (Revised 1982) shows the subject site to be located on the Beaumont Formation. The Beaumont Formation is the youngest coast- paralleling Pleistocene unit in the Texas Gulf Coast. Most of the Beaumont Formation was deposited as an overlapping group of fluvial or deltaic plains by ancestors of modern streams now draining into the Gulf of Mexico. The Beaumont formation is comprised of clay, silt, and sand; includes mainly stream channel, point-bar, natural levee, backswamp, and to a lesser extent coastal marsh and mud-flat deposits; concretions of calcium carbonate, iron oxide, and iron-manganese oxides in zone of weathering; surface almost featureless, characterized by relict river channels shown by meander patterns and pimple mounds on meanderbelt ridges, separated by areas of low, relatively smooth, featureless backswamp deposits without pimple mounds;formation thickness is+/- 100 ft. SEISMIC COEFFICIENTS On the basis of the soil borings conducted for this investigation, the upper 100 feet of soil may be characterized as stiff soil and a Class D Site Class Definition (Chapter 20 of ASCE 7) has been assigned to this site. On the basis of the United States Geological Survey (USGS) websitel which utilizes the International Building Code (IBC) and U.S. Seismic Design Maps to develop seismic design parameters, the following seismic considerations are associated with this site. • S5=0.071g • S,=0.038g • Sm5=0.113g • Sm1=0.091g • SIB=0.075g • SDI=0.060g Based on the parameters listed above as well as Tables 1613.3.5(1) and 1613.3.5(2) of the 1012 IBC, the Seismic Design Category for both short period and 1 second response accelerations is A. As part of the assumptions required to complete the calculations,a Risk Category of"I or II or III"was selected. STRATIGRAPHY oisP", The subsurface conditions encountered at the boring locations are shown on the boring logs, Figures 2 http://geohazards.usqs.qov/designmaps/us/application.php RABAKISTNER Project No.AHA15-024-00 4 April 23, 2015 """) through 4. The boring logs should be consulted for boring specific (detailed) stratigraphic information. These boring logs represent our interpretation of the subsurface conditions based on the field logs, visual examination of field samples by our personnel, and laboratory test results of selected field samples. Each stratum has been designated by grouping soils that possess similar physical and engineering characteristics. The lines designating the interfaces between strata on the boring logs represent approximate boundaries. Transitions between strata may be gradual. The subsurface stratigraphy at this site can be broken in to two generalized stratum, as follows: Stratum I soils consist of cohesive, moderately to highly plastic, but mostly highly plastic, firm to very stiff consistency, reddish brown to yellowish brown to gray to dark gray, fat clay (CH), and to a much lesser extent, lean clay (CL). Roots, sand seams, silt seams, silt pockets, clay stones, ferrous stains, and calcareous and ferrous nodules were noted at varying depths within the stratum I soils. Measured moisture contents range from 18 to 32 percent. Measured plasticity indices (PI) range from 13 to 44. Based on unconfined compression test results, undrained shear strength values range from 0.49 to 0.98 tsf.The tested samples had dry unit weight values ranging from 99 to 112 pcf. Stratum I soils comprised a majority of the soil encountered during our field investigation. Stratum II soils consist of cohesionless silty sand (SM) and stiff consistency, yellowish brown to gray to dark gray, semi-cohesive sandy silty clay (CL-ML). Measured moisture contents range from 17 to 28 percent. Measured plasticity index (PI) was 6. Stratum II soils were present from the ground surface elevation existing at the time of our study to the depth of 6-ft and between 15-ft and 18-ft depths in boring B-3. GROUNDWATER Groundwater was observed in all three borings (B-1 through B-3) located within the proposed building footprint. Groundwater depth readings for these borings are listed in the following table: Boring No. Depth Groundwater Water Level Depth Encountered(ft) after 15 Minutes (ft) B-1 18 9 B-2 17 15 B-3 13 4.5 It is possible for groundwater to exist beneath this site at shallow depths on a transient basis, particularly in interbedded sand seams following periods of precipitation. Fluctuations in groundwater levels are possible due to variations in rainfall and surface water run-off. The construction process itself may also cause variations in the groundwater levels. Based on the findings in our borings and on our experience in this region, we believe that groundwater seepage encountered during site earthwork activities and foundation construction may be controlled using temporary earthen berm and conventional sump-and-pump dewatering methods. RABAKISTNER Project No. AHA15-024-00 5 April 23, 2015 CORROSIVITY POTENTIAL Steel and concrete elements in contact with soil are subject to degradation from corrosion or chemical attack. The corrosivity characteristics of the upper soils were preliminarily evaluated using pH, electrical resistivity,sulfate content, and chloride content laboratory tests. Corrosion of Steel The measurable soil properties that indicate the corrosion potential for steel in contact with soil are soil pH, chloride ion concentration, and soil electrical resistivity. Corrosion of steel is most likely to occur in environments that have chloride ions, even in low concentrations, very low or very high pH, and/or low resistivity. The table below presents general guidelines concerning the corrosion potential of a soil as a function of chloride ion concentration, pH, and electrical resistivity. Each of the columns on this table should be used independently of the others when evaluating corrosion potential. For instance, it is not necessary to have an electrical resistivity of less than 1,000 ohm-cm and a pH of less than 4.0 to indicate a Very High potential for corrosion. Soil Corrosion Potential Electrical Resistivity Chloride (2) Corrosion Ohm-cm(1) Content,ppm pH Potential <1,000 Very High 1,000-3,000 >500 <4 or>10 High 3,000-10,000 <500 Moderate >10,000 >4 or<10 Mild (1)After Roberge,2000 (2)After DOE-HDBK-1015/1-93 Soil pH, chloride and sulfate content, and electrical resistivity laboratory tests were conducted on a relatively undisturbed cohesive soil sample obtained from boring B-1 within the proposed building footprint from a depth of about 2-ft to 4-ft below the ground surface elevation existing at the time of our study. The laboratory test results are shown in the table below. Chemical and Electrical Resistivity Test Results Boring Sampling - Ion Concentration Ion Concentration Els. Soil Type `- pH stivity No. Interval(ft) Chloride(ppm)� Sulfate(ppm) Re Electricals (ohm-cm) B-1 2—4 Fat Clay 8.44 BRL 25.4 1,370 *BRL—Below Recordable Limit RABAKISTNER Project No.AHA15-024-00 6 April 23, 2015 JJ Based on the chemical and electrical resistivity laboratory test results and the general guidelines from the table titled "Soil Corrosion Potential", the shallow natural soils appear to have a "high" potential for corrosion of unprotected steel. Degradation of Concrete The degradation of concrete is caused by chemical agents in the soil or groundwater that react with concrete to either dissolve the cement paste or precipitate larger compounds which cause cracking and flaking. The concentration of water-soluble sulfates in the soils is a good indicator of the potential for chemical attack of concrete. Sulfate concentrations in soil can be used to evaluate the need for protection of concrete based on the general guidelines shown in the table on the following page. Sulfate Attack Potential Sulfate Ion Concentration,ppm or mg/kg AggressivenessM >20,000 Very Severe 2,000 to 20,000 Severe 1,000 to 2,000 Moderate <1,000 Negligible (1)ACI 318-05/ACI 318R-05 On the basis of soil sulfate concentration data shown on the table titled "Chemical and Electrical Resistivity Test Results" and the general guidelines from the "Sulfate Attack Potential" table, the soils have a "negligible" potential for attacking concrete. Based on the measured soil sulfate concentration, the American Concrete Institute (ACI) Committee Report 201.2R indicates that special requirements for sulfate resistance are not needed (that is, American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) C 150 Types I and II are applicable). Degradation of concrete can also be advanced by the aggregates selected for the concrete mixtures. Alkali-silica reactivity (ASR), a chemical reaction between Portland cement concrete and certain aggregates, can directly cause expansion damage in concrete structures or can expedite other reactions that in turn cause damage, such as rebar corrosion. Three requirements must be met for ASR expansion to occur: (1) reactive forms of silica or silicate in the aggregate; (2) sufficient alkali (sodium and potassium) primarily from the cement; and (3) sufficiently available moisture in the concrete. If one of the three requirements is not met, expansion due to ASR cannot occur.The concrete aggregates should be checked for ASR characteristics. FOUNDATION ANALYSIS EXPANSIVE SOIL-RELATED MOVEMENTS The anticipated ground movements due to swelling of the underlying soils at the site were estimated for slab-on-grade construction using the empirical procedure, Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) RABAKISTNER Project No.AHA15-024-00 7 Col• April 23, 2015 Tex-124-E, Method for Determining the Potential Vertical Rise (PVR). A PVR value of about 1% to 21/4 inches was estimated for the stratigraphic conditions encountered in our borings. A surcharge load of 1.0 psi (6-inch concrete slab and sand cushion), an active zone of 7-ft, and average to dry moisture conditions were assumed in estimating the above PVR values. The TxDOT method of estimating expansive soil-related movements is based on empirical correlations utilizing the measured plasticity indices and assuming typical seasonal fluctuations in moisture content. If desired, other methods of estimating expansive, soil-related movements are available, such as estimations based on swell tests and/or soil-suction analyses. However, the performance of these tests and the detailed analysis of expansive soil-related movements were beyond the scope of the current study. It should also be noted that actual movements can exceed the estimated PVR values due to isolated changes in moisture content (such as due to leaks, landscape watering....) or if water seeps into the soils to greater depths than the assumed active zone depth due to deep trenching or excavations. OVEREXCAVATION AND SELECT FILL REPLACEMENT To reduce expansive, soil-related movements in at-grade construction, a portion of the upper highly expansive subgrade clays within the building area can be removed by overexcavating and backfilling with a suitable select fill material. PVR values have been estimated for overexcavation and select fill replacement to various depths below the ground surface elevation existing at the time of our study and are summarized in the table below. Recommendations for the selection and placement of select backfill (111 ' materials are addressed in a subsequent section of this report. Depth of overexcavation and Select Fill Estimated PVR Replacement(ft)* ' (in.) 0 2% 2 1%z 3 1 *below the ground surface elevation existing at the time of our study. The building's finished floor elevation (FFE) is unknown and is assumed to match the existing building structure, which is assumed to be 1-ft above the existing ground surface elevation.Therefore,the depth of clay to undercut to reduce the estimated PVR value to 1-inch or less would be 2.5-ft, assuming a 6- inch concrete slab and sand cushion. DRAINAGE CONSIDERATIONS When overexcavation and select fill replacement is selected as a method to reduce the potential for expansive soil-related movements at any site, considerations of surface and subsurface drainage may be crucial to construction and adequate foundation performance of the soil-supported structures. Filling an excavation in relatively impervious plastic clays with relatively pervious select fill material creates a "bathtub" beneath the structure, which can result in ponding or trapped water within the fill unless good surface and subsurface drainage is provided. i4P"\ RABAKISTNER Project No.AHA15-024-00 8 April 23, 2015 ""1") Water entering the fill surface during construction or entering the fill exposed beyond the building lines after construction may create problems with fill moisture control during compaction and increased access for moisture to the underlying expansive clays both during and after construction. Several surface and subsurface drainage design features and construction precautions can be used to limit problems associated with fill moisture. These features and precautions may include but are not limited to the following: • Installing berms or swales on the uphill side of the construction area to divert surface runoff away from the excavation/fill area during construction; • Sloping of the top of the subgrade with a minimum downward slope of 1.5 percent out to the base of a dewatering trench located beyond the building perimeter; • Sloping the surface of the fill during construction to promote runoff of rain water to drainage features until the final lift is placed; • Sloping of a final, well maintained, impervious clay or pavement surface (downward away from the building) over the select fill material and any perimeter drain extending beyond the building lines,with a minimum gradient of 6-in. in 5-ft; • Constructing final surface drainage patterns to prevent ponding and limit surface water infiltration at and around the building perimeter; • Locating the water-bearing utilities, roof drainage outlets and irrigation spray heads outside of the select fill and perimeter drain boundaries; and • Raising the elevation of the ground level floor slab. Details relative to the extent and implementation of these considerations must be evaluated on a project-specific basis by all members of the project design team. Many variables that influence fill drainage considerations may depend on factors that are not fully developed in the early stages of design. For this reason, drainage of the fill should be given consideration at the earliest possible stages of the project. FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS FOUNDATION CONSIDERATIONS Review of the borings and test data indicate that the factors discussed below will affect foundation design and construction at this site. • Highly expansive clays within the active zone. Lightly-loaded shallow foundations would be susceptible to excessive movement from shrink-swell with variation in soil moisture. • Existing building structure is supported on drilled-and-underreamed piers. We recommend that the foundation for the new building addition match the existing building's foundation system: drilled-and-underreamed piers. RABAKISTNER Project No. AHA15-024-00 9 April 23, 2015 SITE GRADING Site grading plans can result in changes in almost all aspects of foundation recommendations. We have prepared the foundation recommendations based on the existing and proposed finished floor elevations discussed throughout this report. If site grading plans differ from those discussed in this report by more than plus or minus 1-ft, RKCI must be retained to review the site grading plans prior to bidding the project for construction. This will enable us to provide input for any changes in our original recommendations, which may be required as a result of site grading operations or other considerations. DRILLED-AND-UNDERREAMED PIERS We recommend that piers extend to a depth of 8-ft below the ground surface elevation existing at the time of our study, or to a depth that includes the thickness of any select fill to achieve final ground surface elevation, whichever is greater. The piers should be designed as end bearing units using a maximum allowable bearing pressure of 3,000 psf.This bearing pressure was evaluated using a factor of safety of 3 with respect to the design shear strength. The allowable uplift shear resistance provided by the soils below the active zone and the dead load exerted by the structure might not provide sufficient resistance to counteract the maximum potential uplift force resulting from possible heaving of the expansive clays within the active zone. As a result, the recommendation to use drilled and underreamed piers is predicated on the assumption that the upper 2.5-ft to 3-ft deep fat clay soils will be removed and replaced with inert select fill. If the native clay soils are to remain in place, our office should be informed, so that we can adjust the pier lengths or provide recommendations for alternate foundations. We recommend that the bell-to-shaft diameter ratio be a minimum of 2.5,and not exceed 3. Reinforcing steel will be required in each pier shaft to withstand a net force equal to the uplift force minus the sustained compressive load carried by the pier. We recommend that each pier be reinforced to withstand this net force or an amount equal to 1 percent of the cross-sectional area of the shaft, whichever is greater. GRADE BEAMS Grade beams interconnecting the piers may bear on properly prepared native soils or select fill and should be sized to support the design loads. Grade beams should have a minimum width of 12-inches and a maximum allowable bearing pressure of 2,200 psf. FLOOR SLABS As discussed previously in the Overexcavation and Select Fill Replacement subsection of the Foundation Analysis section of this report, the floor slabs may be supported on a 3-ft thick suitable select fill pad to reduce the estimated PVR value to about 1 inch. We recommend that a vapor barrier comprised of polyethylene or polyvinylchloride (PCV) sheeting be placed between the supporting soils and the concrete floor slab. RABAKISTNER Project No.AHA15-024-00 10 April 23, 2015 FOUNDATION CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS SITE DRAINAGE Drainage is an important key to the successful performance of any foundation. Good surface drainage should be established prior to and maintained after construction to help prevent water from ponding within or adjacent to the building foundation and to facilitate rapid drainage away from the building foundation. Failure to provide positive drainage away from the structure can result in localized differential vertical movements in soil supported foundations and floor slabs (which can in turn result in cracking in the sheetrock partition walls and shifting of ceiling tiles, as well as improper operation of windows and doors). Current ordinances, in compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), may dictate maximum slopes for walks and drives around and into new buildings. These slope requirements can result in drainage problems for buildings supported on expansive soils. We recommend that, on all sides of the building,the maximum permissible slope is provided away from the building. Also to help control drainage in the vicinity of the structure, we recommend that roof/gutter downspouts and landscaping irrigation systems not be located adjacent to the building foundation. Where a select fill overbuild is provided outside of the floor slab/foundation footprint, the surface should be sealed with an impermeable layer (pavement or clay cap) to reduce infiltration of both irrigation and surface waters. Careful consideration should also be given to the location of water bearing utilities, as well as to provisions for drainage in the event of leaks in water bearing utilities. All leaks should be immediately repaired. Other drainage and subsurface drainage issues are discussed in the Expansive Soil-Related Movements subsection of the Foundation Analysis section of this report and under the Pavement Construction Considerations section of this report. SITE PREPARATION All areas to support select fill should be stripped of all vegetation,topsoil, and other deleterious materials. After stripping and grubbing, the exposed subgrade should be thoroughly proofrolled in order to locate and densify any weak, compressible zones. A minimum of 5 passes of a fully-loaded dump truck or a similar heavily-loaded piece of construction equipment should be used for planning purposes. Proofrolling operations should be observed by the Geotechnical Engineer or his representative to document subgrade condition and preparation. Weak or soft areas identified during proofrolling should be removed and replaced with suitable, compacted on-site clays, free of organics, oversized materials, and degradable or deleterious materials. Upon completion of the proofrolling operations and just prior to fill placement or slab construction, the exposed subgrade should be moisture conditioned by scarifying to a minimum depth of 6 in. and recompacting to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) D698. The moisture content of the subgrade should be maintained within the range of optimum moisture content to 3 percentage points above optimum moisture content until permanently covered. RABAKISTNER Project No.AHA15-024-00 11 April 23, 2015 SELECT FILL Materials used as select fill for final site grading preferably should be inert cohesive/semi-cohesive sandy lean clays (CL)/clayey sands (SC) as classified according to the USCS, may be considered satisfactory for use as select fill materials at this site. Select fill materials shall have a maximum liquid limit not exceeding 40 percent, a plasticity index between 7 and 20 percent, and a maximum particle size not exceeding 4 in. or one-half the loose lift thickness, whichever is smaller. In addition, if these materials are utilized, grain size analyses and Atterberg Limits must be performed during placement at a minimum rate of one test each per 5,000 cubic yards of material due to the high degree of variability associated with pit-run materials. If the above listed materials are being considered for bidding purposes, the materials should be submitted to the Geotechnical Engineer for pre-approval at a minimum of 10 working days or more prior to the bid date. Failure to do so will be the responsibility of the contractor. The contractor will also be responsible for ensuring that the properties of all delivered alternate select fill materials are similar to those of the pre- approved submittal. It should also be noted that when using alternative fill materials, difficulties may be experienced with respect to moisture control during and subsequent to fill placement, as well as with erosion, particularly when exposed to inclement weather. This may result in sloughing of beam trenches and/or pumping of the fill materials. Soils classified as CH, MH, ML, SM, GM, OH, OL and Pt under the USCS are not considered suitable for use as select fill materials. The native clays observed in the borings are not suitable for use as select fill materials. Select fill should be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 8 in. in thickness and compacted to at least 95 percent of maximum density as determined by ASTM D 698. The moisture content of the fill should be maintained within the range of 2 percentage points below to 2 percentage points above the optimum moisture content until final compaction. DRILLED PIERS Groundwater level, as measured in the open boreholes, ranged from 4.5-ft to 15-ft below existing ground surface elevation. The most effective way to evaluate water and drilling conditions is to drill test piers. Test piers should not be located at/or within three pier diameters of a planned pier location but may be within the footprint of the building or as near the building footprint as possible, provided it is not within three pier diameters of designated pier location. The geotechnical engineer or an experienced soil technician should observe test pier installation. Test piers may be backfilled with cement stabilized sand, low-strength flowable fill, or on-site soil provided it doesn't contain roots or debris. If implemented, each drilled pier excavation must be examined by an RKCI representative who is familiar with the geotechnical aspects of the soil stratigraphy, the structural configuration, foundation design details and assumptions, prior to placing concrete.This is to observe that: • The shaft and/or bell have been excavated to the specified dimensions at the correct depths established by the previously mentioned criteria; • The bell is concentric with the pier shaft; RABAKISTNER Project No.AHA15-024-00 12 April 23, 2015 • The shaft has been drilled plumb within specified tolerances along its total length; and • Excessive cuttings, buildup and soft, compressible materials have been removed from the bottom of the excavation. Reinforcement and Concrete Placement Reinforcing steel should be checked for size and placement prior to concrete placement. Concrete should be placed in the excavation shortly after drilling to reduce changes in the moisture content or the state of stress of the foundation materials. In any circumstance, the foundation excavation should not remain open for more than 2 hours prior to concrete placement. Based on the water level information gathered during the fieldwork, we do not anticipate water seepage into the pier holes. However, if more than 1-inch of perched water accumulates at the bottom of the excavation, the water should be pumped out before concrete placement. No foundation element should be left open overnight without concreting. SHALLOW FOUNDATION EXCAVATIONS Shallow foundation excavations should be observed by the Geotechnical Engineer or his representative prior to placement of reinforcing steel and concrete. This is necessary to document that the bearing soils at the bottom of the excavations are similar to those encountered in the borings and that excessive soft materials and water are not present in the excavations. If soft pockets of soil are encountered in the '11,14� foundation excavations, they should be removed and replaced with a compacted non-expansive fill �� material or lean concrete up to the design foundation bearing elevations. Disturbance from foot traffic and from the accumulation of excess water can result in losses in bearing capacity and increased settlement. If inclement weather is anticipated at the time construction, consideration should be given to protecting the bottoms of beam trenches by placing a thin mud mat (layer of flowable fill or lean concrete) at the bottom of trenches immediately following excavation.This will reduce disturbance from foot traffic and will impede the infiltration of surface water. All necessary precautions should be implemented to protect open excavations from the accumulation of surface water runoff and rain. EXCAVATION SLOPING AND BENCHING If utility trenches or other excavations extend to or below a depth of 5-ft below construction grade, the contractor or others shall be required to develop a trench safety plan to protect personnel entering the trench or trench vicinity. The collection of specific geotechnical data and the development of such a plan, which could include designs for sloping and benching or various types of temporary shoring, are beyond the scope of the current study. Any such designs and safety plans shall be developed in accordance with current Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) trench safety guidelines (29 CFR 1926 Subpart P Appendix A) and other applicable industry standards. EXCAVATION EQUIPMENT Our boring logs are not intended for use in determining construction means and methods and may therefore be misleading if used for that purpose. We recommend that earthwork and utility contractors RAi3AKISTNER Project No.AHA15-024-00 13 April 23, 2015 interested in bidding on the work perform their own tests in the form of test pits or test piers to determine the quantities of the different materials to be excavated, as well as the preferred excavation methods and equipment for this site. UTILITIES Utilities which project through slab-on-grade, slab-on-fill, or any other rigid unit should be designed with either some degree of flexibility or with sleeves. Such design features will help reduce the risk of damage to the utility lines as vertical movements occur. These types of slabs will generally be constructed as monolithic, grid-type beam and slab foundations. Our experience indicates that significant settlement of backfill can occur in utility trenches, particularly when trenches are deep, when backfill materials are placed in thick lifts with insufficient compaction, and when water can access and infiltrate the trench backfill materials. The potential for water to access the backfill is increased where water can infiltrate flexible base materials due to insufficient penetration of curbs,and at sites where geological features can influence water migration into utility trenches. To reduce the potential for settlement in utility trenches, we recommend that consideration be given to the following: • All backfill materials should be placed and compacted in controlled lifts appropriate for C the type of backfill and the type of compaction equipment being utilized and all backfilling procedures should be tested and documented. • Curbs should completely penetrate flexible base materials and be installed to a sufficient depth to reduce water infiltration beneath the curbs into the pavement base materials. • Consideration should be given to wrapping free-draining bedding gravels with a geotextile fabric (similar to Mirafi 140N or CONTECH C-Drain Geocomposite) to reduce the infiltration and loss of fines from backfill material into the interstitial voids in bedding materials. AREA FLATWORK It should be noted that ground-supported flatwork such as walkways, driveways, courtyards, sidewalks, etc., will be subject to the same magnitude of potential soil-related movements as discussed previously (see Expansive Soil-Related Movements subsection of the Foundation Analysis section of this report) for this site. Thus, where these types of elements abut rigid building foundations or isolated/suspended structures, differential movements should be anticipated. As a minimum, we recommend that flexible joints be provided where such elements abut the main structure to allow for differential movement at these locations. Where the potential for differential movement is objectionable, it may be beneficial to consider methods of reducing anticipated movements or to consider structurally suspending critical areas to match the adjacent building's performance. ADDITIONAL CONSIDERATIONS As with any project where new additions are to be connected to an existing structure, differential movements between the existing structure and addition should be anticipated. To reduce possible differential movements, it is typically desirable to match the old and the new foundation types. RABAKISTNER Project No.AHA15-024-00 14 April 23, 2015 However, this will not eliminate the potential for differential movements. Therefore, the recommendations and options discussed in this report should be carefully considered by the design team to obtain the desired performance of the new structural system. As a minimum, control/expansion joints are recommended at connection points between the old and new structures and between architectural trim materials along walls/ceilings. Should excavations adjacent to existing structures be required, precautions should be taken not to undermine or damage existing grade beams,footings, and/or utility lines. CONSTRUCTION RELATED SERVICES CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS TESTING AND OBSERVATION SERVICES As presented in the attachment to this report, Important Information About Your Geotechnical Engineering Report, subsurface conditions can vary across a project site. The conditions described in this report are based on interpolations derived from a limited number of data points. Variations will be encountered during construction, and only the geotechnical design engineer will be able to determine if these conditions are different than those assumed for design. Construction problems resulting from variations or anomalies in subsurface conditions are among the most prevalent on construction projects and often lead to delays, changes, cost overruns, and disputes. These variations and anomalies can best be addressed if the geotechnical engineer of record, RKCI, is retained to perform construction observation and testing services during the construction of the project. This is because: • RKCI has an intimate understanding of the geotechnical engineering report's findings and recommendations. RKCI understands how the report should be interpreted and can provide such interpretations on site, on the CLIENT's behalf. • RKCI knows what subsurface conditions are anticipated at the site. • RKCI is familiar with the goals of the CLIENT and project design professionals, having worked with them in the development of the geotechnical work scope. This enables RKCI to suggest remedial measures (when needed) which help meet the CLIENT's and the design teams' requirements. • RKCI has a vested interest in client satisfaction, and thus assigns qualified personnel whose principal concern is client satisfaction. This concern is exhibited by the manner in which contractors' work is tested, evaluated and reported, and in selection of alternative approaches when such may become necessary. • RKCI cannot be held accountable for problems which result due to misinterpretation of our findings or recommendations when we are not on hand to provide the interpretation which is required. BUDGETING FOR CONSTRUCTION TESTING Appropriate budgets need to be developed for the required construction testing and observation activities. At the appropriate time before construction, we advise that RKCI and the project designers meet and jointly develop the testing budgets,as well as review the testing specifications as it pertains to this project. RABAKISTNER Project No.AHA15-024-00 15 April 23, 2015 Once the construction testing budget and scope of work are finalized, we encourage a preconstruction meeting with the selected contractor to review the scope of work to make sure it is consistent with the construction means and methods proposed by the contractor. RKCI looks forward to the opportunity to provide continued support on this project, and would welcome the opportunity to meet with the Project Team to develop both a scope and budget for these services. * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * The following figures and appendix are attached and complete this report: Figure 1 Boring Location Map Figures 2 through 4 Logs of Borings Figure 5 Key to Terms and Symbols Figure 6 Results of Soil Sample Analyses (111h\' RABAKISTNER I �1 ATTACHMENTS RABAKISTNER F / •Mm a.rxe x "' NOT TO SCALE .5. .u::1 Chv-,rt,C.1e>'+ G �Cr 2vtt,fpY*Mabntt y. c li IJ u u Lr LI L I: LI 0 2 K E el 0 PROPOSED ADDITION: B—� Q.) 11,136 SF • B-1 j11 u u . c C ••:• • L - - - - ❑ _ - - - '- r ��I II II _ • 1 ■ •als 1 r • •• (' STI LIBRARY: ••• •• •.• I i\ • • • L — —20,776SF V i ❑ 0 i I rT 1 I C li LIB TOTAL,914 RYSF�, I pOo. f I I I (413 k I I 1 1 I 1 B-3 Mile ...... - L a.j j: r '%."111ty � n � N r, n 7 A A REVISIONS: PROJECT No.:4.1 K I S - N E P BORING LOCATION MAP No. DATE DESCRIPTION AHA15-024-00 OtMU ,, T ISSUE DATE: 04/14/15 DRAWN BY: PTT Engineering•Testing•Environmental Facilities•Infrastructure TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION CHECKED BY: �' 3602 Westchase 3522 LIBERTY DRIVE REVIEWED BY: `. Houston,Texas 77042 (713)996-8990 TEL FIGURE (713)996-8993 FAX PEARLAND,TEXAS www.rkcr.com TBPE Firm F-3257 ©2010 by Raba—Kistner Consultants, Inc. L LOG.OF BORING NO. B-1 , Proposed Tom Reid Library Addition ;4 1 KISINER Pearland,Texas TBPE Firm Registration No.F-3257 C1116\ DRILLING METHOD: Straight Flight Auger LOCATION: N 29.55181;W 95.25848 SHEAR STRENGTH,TONS/FT2 I& - J m }a — 0 ——(0—— ——❑ 2 2 DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL �= 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 W g p Eh in < 3 Z PLASTIC WATER LIQUID g z N S LIMIT CONTENT LIMIT SURFACE ELEVATION:Exisiting grade,ft m 10 20 30 40 50 6P 70 80 a 7FAT CLAY(CH),stiff to very stiff,dark gray -w/roots to 4 ft - 0 OS - -w/ferrous nodules and calcareous nodules to 6 ft - _ - O. X - 44 -yellowish and reddish brown below 4 ft - —5 -w/silt seams from 4 ft to 10 ft — 1 — - w/ferrous stains from 6 ft to 13 ft - - X-0--09------X - 35 z O a Lu 107T ®•0 - cG —10 — w _ / O a w 7° F- LEAN CLAY(CL),stiff,gray and yellowish o brown,w/sand seams7 - O X�—X _ 13 2 —15 — w r'; _ LU _ 0_ a — 17 a FAT CLAY(CH),very stiff,gray and reddish brown,w/calcareous nodules • 0 w —20— co�/ — a O z 8 / - Nx -J J C9 - (.9-25 — O — w / N w 0 13 0 I— w ��pp z •W Boring Terminated at a depth of about 30 ft - - NOTES: _ 1.Free water was encountered at a depth of - - 18 ft during drilling operations. The - _ water level then rose to the 9 ft depth 15 —35— minutes after the initial reading. — - �( - DEPTH DRILLED: 30.0 ft DEPTH TO WATER: 9 ft PROJ.No.: AHA15-024-00 DATE DRILLED: 4/8/2015 DATE MEASURED: 4/8/2015 FIGURE: 2 LOG OF BORING NO. B-2 A Proposed Tom Reid Library Addition 1'--NI KISTNER Pearland,Texas TBPE Firm Registration No.F-3257 DRILLING METHOD: Straight Flight Auger LOCATION: N 29.55213;W 95.25820 SHEAR STRENGTH,TONS/FT2 t t -9---0---®----- ----o- LL W W z° 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 u,x„ o 2 DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL 3 z PLASTIC WATER LIQUID g? c m O '3 LIMIT CONTENT LIMIT n m X -• SURFACE ELEVATION:Exisiting grade,ft 10 2,0 30 0 E0 60 79 80 FAT CLAY(CH),stiff to very stiff,dark gray _ _ 39 w/rootsto2ft -gray and yellowish brown from 2 ft to 4 ft -w/calcareous and ferrous nodules from 2 ft ® • to 6 ft _ /. -reddish brown from 4 ft to 13 ft 5 /' -w/ferrous stains from 4 ft to 6 ft — X•0 -X 34 / -w/clay stones from 6 ft to 20 ft ® • OO I110 :.ill/ -10 O gray and reddish brown below 13 ft 0 • ® r 15 / _1Q w N 0 w IA • ® w m 20 / — p z 0 0 -w/calcareous nodules from 23 ft to 30 ft 25 /0 w I- O I- z 30 ---- Boring Terminated at a depth of about 30 ft NOTES: _ 1.Free water was encountered at a depth of 17 ft during drilling operations. The - water level then rose to the 15 ft depth 35 15 minutes after the initial reading. — DEPTH DRILLED: 30.0 ft DEPTH TO WATER: 15 ft PROJ.No.: AHA15-024-00 DATE DRILLED: 4/8/2015 DATE MEASURED: 4/8/2015 FIGURE: 3 LOG OF BORING NO. B-3 Proposed Tom Reid Library Addition 1 KISINER Pearland,Texas TBPE Firm Registration No.F-3257 DRILLING METHOD: Straight Flight Auger&Mud Rotary LOCATION: N 29.55200;W 95.25796 SHEAR STRENGTH,TONS/FT2 LL of J re }a 9---0---0-- --❑ a 2 DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL �= 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 �W o p H N 3 z W PLASTIC WATER1 LIQUID g z N 3 LIMIT CONTENT LIMIT SURFACE ELEVATION:Exisiting grade,ft m 1,0 20 39 40�50 .0 70 89 SANDY SILTY CLAY(CL-ML),stiff,dark gray -w/roots to 2 ft - •o ® - r_ -gray and yellowish brown below 2 ft - - -w/calcareous and ferrous nodules from 2 ft 30-SI - 6 to6ft ® -w/silt pockets from 4 ft to 6 ft ® - 5 — 19 • — LEAN CLAY(CL),stiff,yellowish brown -w/calcareous nodules to 8 ft ® • - H 0 -w/ferrous stains from 8 ft to 10 ft - W 112 - �® • - H 10 - - w cc O ✓ = `�/ I- H cc FAT CLAY(CH),firm,yellowish brown 0 - ® X-0- ->C U- / 35 LL 15 — J La • SILTY SAND(SM) - ' DRILLER'S NOTE: cc - - Sand was encountered from 15 ft to 18 ft. l c Set up rotary wash drilling at 18 ft. - - N o �/ FAT CLAY(CH),firm to very stiff,reddish vwi �/ brown,w/clay stones 99 C® ® • m 20— -w/slickensides to 20 ft — m I- 0 o //// _I1 0 2 N • 0 ® w 25 — — J I- N - I- Li; I- z 0� Boring Terminated at a depth of about 30 ft - - NOTES: - 1.Free water was encountered at a depth of - 13 ft during drilling operations. The - - water level then rose to the 4.5 ft depth 35— 15 minutes after the initial reading. — — 1 1 Cib\ - DEPTH DRILLED: 30.0 ft DEPTH TO WATER: 4.5 ft PROJ.No.: AHA15-024-00 DATE DRILLED: 4/8/2015 DATE MEASURED: 4/8/2015 FIGURE: 4 KEY TO TERMS AND SYMBOLS MATERIAL TYPES A") SOIL TERMS ROCK TERMS OTHER I' p /,/• 0i, p 1 1 ziz, CALCAREOUS PEAT p CHALK I LIMESTONE ASPHALT ', CALICHE SAND ////' CLAYSTONE // MARL n A ' BASE 'i �� . CLAY SANDY _` CLAY-SHALE ///� METAMORPHIC Q'.o CONCRETE/CEMENT oci° CLAYEY SILT {o CONGLOMERATE SANDSTONE BRICKS/ o� PAVERS v • op.' / �/ !,a 0 C ArN 0 Q GRAVEL SILTY / // DOLOMITE SHALE {�,l' WASTE v ( M" x xIII x • Mb < x x o GRAVELLY -./�/-- FILL x x x IGNEOUS III SILTSTONE NO INFORMATION n�� WELL CONSTRUCTION AND PLUGGING MATERIALS j x x CUT CUTBENTONITE& BLANK PIPE BENTONITE CUTTINGS CUTTINGS SAND i ••o N Ds-) SCREEN CEMENT GROUT p•.• CONCRETE/CEMENT o00 GRAVEL \ VOLCLAY SAMPLE TYPES STRENGTH TEST TYPES n N i ® POCKET PENETROMETER '\/ 'A' N AIR 'A' MUD SHELBY TUBE ti ROTARY n ROTARY O TORVANE GRAB NO h SPLIT BARREL ® UNCONFINED COMPRESSION SAMPLE RECOVERY A TRIAXIAL COMPRESSION 11 UNCONSOLIDATED-UNDRAINED CORE NXCORE SPLIT SPOON I I ❑ TRIAXIAL COMPRESSION ® CONSOLIDATED-UNDRAINED GEOPROBE PITCHER ICI TEXAS CONE /�,) I NOTE: VALUES SYMBOLIZED ON BORING LOGS REPRESENT SHEAR I I SAMPLER PENETROMETER STRENGTHS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED itROTOSONIC ROTOSONIC DISTURBED DAMAGED INTACT PROJECT NO. AHA15-024 00 REVISED 04/2012 'R A B A K I S T E R FIGURE 5a KEY TO TERMS AND SYMBOLS (CONT'D) TERMINOLOGY Terms used in this report to describe soils with regard to their consistency or conditions are in general accordance with the discussion presented in Article 45 of SOILS MECHANICS IN ENGINEERING PRACTICE, Terzaghi and Peck, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 1967, using the most reliable information available from the field and laboratory investigations. Terms used for describing soils according to their texture or grain size distribution are in accordance with the UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM,as described in American Society for Testing and Materials D2487-06 and D2488-00, Volume 04.08, Soil and Rock; Dimension Stone; Geosynthetics;2005. The depths shown on the boring logs are not exact,and have been estimated to the nearest half-foot. Depth measurements may be presented in a manner that implies greater precision in depth measurement, i.e 6.71 meters. The reader should understand and interpret this information only within the stated half-foot tolerance on depth measurements. RELATIVE DENSITY COHESIVE STRENGTH PLASTICITY Penetration Resistance Relative Resistance Cohesion Plasticity Degree of Blows per ft Density Blows per ft Consistency TSF Index Plasticity 0 - 4 Very Loose 0 - 2 Very Soft 0 - 0.125 0 - 5 None 4 - 10 Loose 2 - 4 Soft 0.125 - 0.25 5 - 10 Low 10 - 30 Medium Dense 4 - 8 Firm 0.25 - 0.5 10 - 20 Moderate 30 - 50 Dense 8 - 15 Stiff 0.5 - 1.0 20 - 40 Plastic > 50 Very Dense 15 - 30 Very Stiff 1.0 - 2.0 > 40 Highly Plastic > 30 Hard > 2.0 (111111'\1 ABBREVIATIONS B = Benzene Qam,Qas,Qal = Quaternary Alluvium Kef = Eagle Ford Shale T = Toluene Qat = Low Terrace Deposits Kbu = Buda Limestone E = Ethylbenzene Qbc = Beaumont Formation Kdr = Del Rio Clay X = Total Xylenes Qt = Fluviatile Terrace Deposits Kft = Fort Terrett Member BTEX = Total BTEX Qao = Seymour Formation Kgt = Georgetown Formation TPH = Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons Qle = Leona Formation Kep = Person Formation ND = Not Detected Q-Tu = Uvalde Gravel Kek = Kainer Formation NA = Not Analyzed Ewi = Wilcox Formation Kes = Escondido Formation NR = Not Recorded/No Recovery Emi = Midway Group Kew = Walnut Formation OVA = Organic Vapor Analyzer Mc = Catahoula Formation Kgr = Glen Rose Formation ppm = Parts Per Million El = Laredo Formation Kgru = Upper Glen Rose Formation Kknm = Navarro Group and Marlbrook Kgrl = Lower Glen Rose Formation Marl Kh = Hensel)Sand Kpg = Pecan Gap Chalk Kau = Austin Chalk (11.6\' PROJECT NO. AHA15-024-00 R A B A K I S T N E R REVISED 04/2012 FIGURE 5b KEY TO TERMS AND SYMBOLS (CONT' )) TERMINOLOGY SOIL STRUCTURE Slickensided Having planes of weakness that appear slick and glossy. Fissured Containing shrinkage or relief cracks,often filled with fine sand or silt;usually more or less vertical. Pocket Inclusion of material of different texture that is smaller than the diameter of the sample. Parting Inclusion less than 1/8 inch thick extending through the sample. Seam Inclusion 1/8 inch to 3 inches thick extending through the sample. Layer Inclusion greater than 3 inches thick extending through the sample. Laminated Soil sample composed of alternating partings or seams of different soil type. Interlayered Soil sample composed of alternating layers of different soil type. Intermixed Soil sample composed of pockets of different soil type and layered or laminated structure is not evident. Calcareous Having appreciable quantities of carbonate. Carbonate Having more than 50%carbonate content. SAMPLING METHODS RELATIVELY UNDISTURBED SAMPLING Cohesive soil samples are to be collected using three-inch thin-walled tubes in general accordance with the Standard Practice for Thin-Walled Tube Sampling of Soils(ASTM D1587)and granular soil samples are to be collected using two-inch split-barrel samplers in general accordance with the Standard Method for Penetration Test and Split-Barrel Sampling of Soils(ASTM D1586). Cohesive soil samples may be extruded on-site when appropriate handling and storage techniques maintain sample integrity and moisture content. STANDARD PENETRATION TEST(SPT) A 2-in.-OD,1-3/8-in.-ID split spoon sampler is driven 1.5 ft into undisturbed soil with a 140-pound hammer free falling 30 in. After the sampler is seated 6 in.into undisturbed soil,the number of blows required to drive the sampler the last 12 in.is the 111 Standard Penetration Resistance or"N"value,which is recorded as blows per foot as described below. SPLIT-BARREL SAMPLER DRIVING RECORD Blows Per Foot Description 25 25 blows drove sampler 12 inches,after initial 6 inches of seating. 50/7" 50 blows drove sampler 7 inches,after initial 6 inches of seating. Ref/3" 50 blows drove sampler 3 inches during initial 6-inch seating interval NOTE:To avoid damage to sampling tools,driving is limited to 50 blows during or after seating interval. PROJECT NO. AHA15-024-00 REVISED 04/2012 R A B A K I S T I R FIGURE 5c RESULTS OF SOIL SAMPLE ANALYSES PROJECT NAME: Proposed Tom Reid Library Addition Pearland, Texas C, FILE NAME: AHA15-024-00.GPJ 4/23/2015 Boring Sample Blows Water Liquid Plastic Plasticity %Dry Unit Shear No. Depth per ft Content Limit Limit Index USCS Weight -200 Strength Strength (ft) (%) (pcf) Sieve (tsf) Test B-1 0.0 to 2.0 23 0.75 TV 2.0 to 4.0 23 63 19 44 1.00 TV 4.0 to 6.0 23 1.25 TV 6.0 to 8.0 21 52 17 35 1.50 TV 8.0 to 10.0 23 107 0.98 UC 13.0 to 15.0 18 29 16 13 0.50 TV 18.0 to 20.0 26 1.75 TV 23.0 to 25.0 30 1.25 TV 28.0 to 30.0 27 1.50 TV B-2 0.0 to 2.0 23 57 18 39 0.60 TV 2.0 to 4.0 25 0.60 TV 4.0 to 6.0 20 51 17 34 1.00 TV 6.0 to 8.0 20 0.60 TV 8.0 to 10.0 21 110 0.80 UC 13.0 to 15.0 20 1.75 TV 18.0 to 20.0 25 1.63 TV CI 23.0 to 25.0 32 1.50 TV 28.0 to 30.0 28 2.00 TV B-3 0.0 to 2.0 17 1.00 TV 2.0 to 4.0 20 20 14 6 0.75 TV 4.0 to 6.0 27 0.80 TV 6.0 to 8.0 23 0.80 TV 8.0 to 10.0 22 112 0.49 UC 13.0 to 15.0 20 51 16 35 0.25 PP 18.0 to 20.0 26 99 0.78 UC 23.0 to 25.0 24 1.50 TV 28.0 to 30.0 28 1.25 TV r PP=Pocket Penetrometer TV=Torvane UC=Unconfined Compression FV=Field Vane UU=Unconsolidated Undrained Triaxial CU=Consolidated Undrained Triaxial PROJECT NO. AHA15-024-00 RABAKISTNER FIGURE 6 ortant InfOrmation About Your � Geotechnical Engineering Subsurface problemsare a principal cause of.construction delays, cost overruns, claims, and disputes. The following information is provided to help you manage your risks Geotechnical Services Are Performed for • elevation,configuration,location,orientation,or weight of the Specific Purposes, Persons, and Projects proposed structure, Geotechnical engineers structure their services to meet the specific needs of • composition of the design team,or their clients.A geotechnical engineering study conducted for a civil engi- • project ownership. neer may not fulfill the needs of a construction contractor or even another civil engineer.Because each geotechnical engineering study is unique,each As a general rule,always inform your geotechnical engineer of project geotechnical engineering report is unique,prepared solely for the client.No changes—even minor ones—and request an assessment of their impact. one except you should rely on your geotechnical engineering report without Geotechnical engineers cannot accept responsibility or liability for problems first conferring with the geotechnical engineer who prepared it.And no one that occur because their reports do not consider developments of which —not even you—should apply the report for any purpose or project they were not informed. except the one originally contemplated. Subsurface Conditions Can Change Read the Full Report A geotechnical engineering report is based on conditions that existed at Serious problems have occurred because those relying on a geotechnical the time the study was performed. Do not rely on a geotechnical engineer- engineering report did not read it all. Do not rely on an executive summary. ing report whose adequacy may have been affected by:the passage of Do not read selected elements only. time;by man-made events,such as construction on or adjacent to the site; or by natural events,such as floods,earthquakes,or groundwater fluctua- A Geotechnical Engineering Resort Is eased on tions.Always contact the geotechnical engineer before applying the report A Unique Set of Project-Specific Factors to determine if it is still reliable.A minor amount of additional testing or Geotechnical engineers consider a number of unique,project-specific fac- analysis could prevent major problems. tors when establishing the scope of a study.Typical factors include:the client's goals,objectives,and risk management preferences;the general Most Geotechnical Findings Are Professional nature of the structure involved,its size,and configuration;the location of Opinions the structure on the site;and other planned or existing site improvements, Site exploration identifies subsurface conditions only at those points where such as access roads,parking lots,and underground utilities.Unless the subsurface tests are conducted or samples are taken.Geotechnical engi- geotechnical engineer who conducted the study specifically indicates oth- neers review field and laboratory data and then apply their professional erwise,do not rely on a geotechnical engineering report that was: judgment to render an opinion about subsurface conditions throughout the • not prepared for you, site.Actual subsurface conditions may differ—sometimes significantly— • not prepared for your project, from those indicated in your report. Retaining the geotechnical engineer • not prepared for the specific site explored,or who developed your report to provide construction observation is the • completed before important project changes were made. most effective method of managing the risks associated with unanticipated conditions. Typical changes that can erode the reliability of an existing geotechnical engineering report include those that affect: A Report's Recommendations Are Not Final • the function of the proposed structure,as when it's changed from a Do not overrely on the construction recommendations included in your parking garage to an office building,or from a light industrial plant report. Those recommendations are not final,because geotechnical engi- to a refrigerated warehouse, neers develop them principally from judgment and opinion.Geotechnical ) engineers can finalize their recommendations only by observing actual I subsurface conditions revealed during construction. The geotechnical have led to disappointments,claims,and disputes.To help reduce the risk engineer who developed your report cannot assume responsibility or of such outcomes,geotechnical engineers commonly include a variety of (FINN\ liability for the report's recommendations if that engineer does not perform explanatory provisions in their reports.Sometimes labeled"limitations" construction observation. many of these provisions indicate where geotechnical engineers'responsi- bilities begin and end,to help others recognize their own responsibilities A Geotechnical Engineering Report Is Subject ect to and risks. Read these provisions closely.Ask questions.Your geotechnical !Misinterpretation engineer should respond fully and frankly. Other design team members'misinterpretation of geotechnical engineering reports has resulted in costly problems. Lower that risk by having your geo- Geoenvironmental Concerns Are Not Covered technical engineer confer with appropriate members of the design team after The equipment,techniques,and personnel used to perform a geoenviron- submitting the report.Also retain your geotechnical engineer to review perti- mental study differ significantly from those used to perform a geotechnical nent elements of the design team's plans and specifications.Contractors can study. For that reason,a geotechnical engineering report does not usually also misinterpret a geotechnical engineering report. Reduce that risk by relate any geoenvironmental findings,conclusions,or recommendations; having your geotechnical engineer participate in prebid and preconstruction e.g.,about the likelihood of encountering underground storage tanks or conferences,and by providing construction observation. regulated contaminants. Unanticipated environmental problems have led to numerous project failures.If you have not yet obtained your own geoen- Do Not Redraw the Engineer's Logs vironmental information,ask your geotechnical consultant for risk man- Geotechnical engineers prepare final boring and testing logs based upon agement guidance. Do not rely on an environmental report prepared for their interpretation of field logs and laboratory data.To prevent errors or someone else. omissions,the logs included in a geotechnical engineering report should never be redrawn for inclusion in architectural or other design drawings. Obtain Professional Assistance To Deal with !Mold Only photographic or electronic reproduction is acceptable,but recognize Diverse strategies can be applied during building design,construction, that separating logs from the report can elevate risk. operation,and maintenance to prevent significant amounts of mold from growing on indoor surfaces.To be effective,all such strategies should be Give Contractors a Complete Report and devised for the express purpose of mold prevention, integrated into a corn- Guidance prehensive plan,and executed with diligent oversight by a professional Some owners and design professionals mistakenly believe they can make mold prevention consultant. Because just a small amount of water or contractors liable for unanticipated subsurface conditions by limiting what moisture can lead to the development of severe mold infestations,a num- riw\ they provide for bid preparation.To help prevent costly problems,give con- ber of mold prevention strategies focus on keeping building surfaces dry. tractors the complete geotechnical engineering report,but preface it with a While groundwater,water infiltration,and similar issues may have been clearly written letter of transmittal. In that letter,advise contractors that the addressed as part of the geotechnical engineering study whose findings report was not prepared for purposes of bid development and that the are conveyed in this report,the geotechnical engineer in charge of this report's accuracy is limited;encourage them to confer with the geotechnical project is not a mold prevention consultant; none of the services per- engineer who prepared the report(a modest fee may be required)and/or to formed in connection with the geotechnical engineer's study conduct additional study to obtain the specific types of information they were designed or conducted for the purpose of mold proven- need or prefer.A prebid conference can also be valuable. Be sure contrac- Lion. Proper implementation of the recommendations conveyed tors have sufficient time to perform additional study.Only then might you in this report will not of itself be sufficient to prevent mold be in a position to give contractors the best information available to you, from growing in or on the structure involved. while requiring them to at least share some of the financial responsibilities stemming from unanticipated conditions. Rely on Your ASFE.Nlember Geotechncial Engineer for Additional Assistance Read Responsibility Provisions Closely Membership in ASFE/The Best People on Earth exposes geotechnical Some clients,design professionals,and contractors do not recognize that engineers to a wide array of risk management techniques that can be of geotechnical engineering is far less exact than other engineering disci- genuine benefit for everyone involved with a construction project.Confer plines.This lack of understanding has created unrealistic expectations that with you ASFE-member geotechnical engineer for more information. ASFE The Best People on Earth 8811 Colesvil!e Road/Suite G106,Silver Spring,MD 20910 Telephone:301/565-2733 Facsimile:301/589-2017 re-mail:info@asfe.org www.asfe.org Copyright 2009 by ASFE,inc.Duplication,reproduction,or copying of this document,in whole or in part,by any means whatsoever,is strictly prohibited,except with ASFE's specific written permission.Excerpting,quoting,or otherwise extracting wording from this document is permitted only with the express written permission of ASFE,and only for purposes of scholarly research or book review.Only members of ASFE may use this document as a complement to or as an element of a geotechnical engineering report.Any other firm,individual,or other entity that so uses this document without being an ASFE member could be commiting negligent or intentional(fraudulent)misrepresentation. IIGER06045.OM CONSULTANTS • ENVIRONMENTAL • FACILITIES • INFRASTRUCTURE San Antonio, TX Austin, TX Dallas , TX McAllen, TX Brownsville, TX El Paso, TX Mexico Corpus Christi , TX Houston, TX Salt Lake City, UT RABAKISTNER CITY OF PEARLAND PROPOSAL Section 00300 1111 PROPOSAL Part A Date: 2/21/2017 Pro osal of Construction Masters of Houston, Inc. , an individual proprietorship/a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Texas/a partnership consisting 0 , for the construction of: Tom Reid Library Addition &Renovation City of Pearland, Texas COP PN: F20002 . PROPOSAL NO.: 1.117-08 (Submitted in Electronic format) To: The Honorable.Mayor and City Council of Pearland City of Pearland 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland, Texas 77581 r.* Pursuant to the published Invitation to Propose, and Instructions, to Offerors, the undersigned Offeror hereby proposes to perform all the work and furnish all necessary superintendence, labor, machinery, equipment, tools and materials, and whatever else may be necessary to complete all the work described in or reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents for the construction of the Tom Reid.Library Addition &Renovation with all related appurtenances, complete, tested, and operational, in accordance. with the Plans and Specifications prepared by Dewberry, for the unit prices or applicable prices set forth in Part B, the electronic proposal form as contained in the City's E-bid system, which, once fully executed and submitted shall. constitute a legal and executable proposal from the Offeror. It is understood that, in the event any changes are.ordered on any part of the Work, the applicable unit prices,if any, shall apply as additions to or deductions from the total prices for the parts of the Work so changed. The Offeror agrees to submit to the Owner the Contractors Qualification Statement, Part C and the Technical Proposal, Part D, including the Financial Statement of Offeror, as required by the Instructions to Offerors if requested to do so as a condition of the Proposal.review. The Offeror binds himself, upon acceptance of his proposal, to execute the Standard Form of Agreement and furnish an acceptable Performance and Payment Bond and Maintenance Bond if required - See Section - 00800 Special Conditions, each in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the total Contract Price, according to the forms included in the Contract.Documents, for performing and completing the said.work within the time stated and for the,prices stated in Part B of this proposal along with all required.insurance in the required amounts. r\- The undersigned Offeror agrees to commence work within 10 days of the date of a written Notice to Proceed. It is understood that the Work is to be Substantially Complete wi •'- E.e. Offeror's I f 00300-Part " --1 of 3 i CITY OF PEARLAND PROPOSAL i hundred and sixty five (365) calendar days after the date of the Notice to Proceed. Time for 4 Substantial Completion shall begin on the date established by the Notice to Proceed. The YYj Contractor will pay liquidated damages in the amount(s) specified in Document 00500 — Standard Form of Agreement, in the event the Work is not Substantially Complete within the Contract Time. The undersigned agrees that the amounts proposed in this Competitive Seal Proposal will not be withdrawn or modified for ninety (90) calendar days following date of Proposal opening, or such longer period as may be agreed to i.n writing by the City of Pearland and Offeror. I It is understood that in the event the Successful Offeror will enter into the Standard Form of Agreement and/or to furnish an acceptable Performance and Payment Bond, each in the amount of one hundred(100) percent of the Contract Price, along with all required insurance in the stateditamounts within ten (10) days of the Notice of Award.. Unless otherwise expressly provided herein, all references to "day(s)" shall mean calendar day(s). 1 The Offeror acknowledges that the following Addenda have been received. The modifications to the Offeror Documents noted therein have been considered and all costs thereto are included in L the Proposal prices. Addendum No.: 1 Date: 2/7/2017 Addendum No.: 4 Date: 2/17/2017 Addendum No.: 2 ,Date: 2/10/2017 Addendum No.: 5 Date:2/21/2017 Addendum No. 3Date: 2/16/2017 Addendum No.: 6 Date: 2/23/2017 The undersigned, as an Offeror, declares that the only person or parties interested in this proposal "645 as principals are those named herein; that this proposal is made, without collusion with any other person, firm, corporation; that he has carefully examined the form of contract, instructions to offerors, profiles, grades, specifications, and the drawings therein referred to, and has carefully examined the locations, conditions and classes of materials of the proposed work. i< Proposal amounts shall be shown in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy the amount , shown in words shall govern. 1 I Firm Name: Construction Masters of Houston, Inc. By: Justin Davis 1,1 Title: Vice President Address: 3908 3rd Street, Pearland, TX 77581 ri ti Phone No: 281-997-2640 1 ATTEST: Justin Davis 11 l' (Typed or Printed Name) i (-- , 7 6 i= Signatu er Ail r Offeror's I itiat 00300-Part 2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND PROPOSAL rih\' Date: 2/21/2017 (Seal,if Offeror is a Corporation) END OF SECTION Offeror's Iu42 00300-Part► -3 of 3 Construction Masters QTY UOM Unit Extended Line# Description , _ , , , - ` --1,_-,...,_ 1' base Bid : ,., • - - ,.., ,• Mobilization and Demobilization: Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required for the Contractor to mobilize and demobilize.Shall include all 1.1 costs for Contractor?s insurances and bonds, -- - , construction/building and stormwater permits and fees, job trailers and site administration expenses and ----,--, -. - utilities.This item shall not exceed more than three (3) percent of the Total Bid amount of this contract. ,•,., 1 LS $6,,8,784:00 $6:3::784( :00_ ,,,,,,,,,_ , 7,-, --, '7,•,''''" ,.-,"_,, ,,C:-.-• ,. ::•,---,••,"„:,, .--.._ _ :----7 •---7, , '':. , - ' • "--• , --.'" -:.: ' , ' ' ' '' '2': '-.- :- .: '••• -•._. '-'-,-;,-,-' '':. ''2••• - '„,-''''''' ;•,'','' 2-1"'-' : •° • ' ' •: ' ' ' ' 2, ' , ' '' • ' --1 ' '-;•-• , --- - •..t."' ' ' '----'''. - Demolition Furnish all labor, material!,equipme.,nt,pnd r---- - - incidentals required for.major demolition activities to ll 1 2 the extent shown on the drawings, including, . . demolition activities associated with the existing facilities.The demolition shell be performed so asto not, ' • •'' This item disrupt operation of the existing facilities. item shall.,, not include dem °litia n activities associated with specific•,,_ ' - , .., '7 -.. - process areas listed in Bid Iteris.'„4ttispygt1-12._ ;,-:: : LS; '.-, ,-- $§§,515--!°0 $66 1slsoo--- - - Renovation Summary of Work: Furnish and install all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required for 1.3 renovations to the buildings and their systems as shown on the construction documents, including but not limited to, replacement and new construction for mechanical, electrical, plumbing, building and structural. 1 LS 5.2,764,7074,71.0.0 $,,..,77:,64, ,7::0:71,-..p., 0: -7:2 ' Alternate Workite7s _ _ - 1 --- Additive Alternaie-#1: General Contractor to remove Endicott Pavers in Lobby 105 and the entries to the restroom and apply a self-leveling float to floor and prep 11 for new floor finishes. Install new scheduled flooring -_, over prepared floor area. Endicott Pavers in Vestibule 100 to remain. 1 LS_ $8,600.00 r! "f '$8,600.00, Altcrnatc 7----''77- eneeal Contractor to 1pavo xistingEndicbttPaverc in the Lobby 105 andppl o 2. 2 self IPvoting float atop of thcEndicott Pavcrs.in prep for 1 t _ .,.;,., ,,,, ,,(4',, ,...: ts.: __,,,„: L,..$5"409:_00 , z. i $0.00 bc installed over sclflsycling f oa . , illb. 1117-08 Addendum 6- Page 1 Additive Alternate#3: General Contractor to remove existing carpet and base in Conference/Multi-Purpose 2.3 Room 107 and prep for new scheduled floor finishes. New scheduled floor finish and base to be installed. New scheduled paint on all walls in this room. 1 LS $4,900.00 $4,900.00 Additive Alternate tf4: Provide floor to ceiling 1 " prefabricated interior aluminum frame with"thick clear tempered glass located on backside of half height book shelf host walls in children's area. Refer to 21/A.1.21, 22/A.1.21, 18/A.1.21,& 19/A.1.21 for location. 8 kS $9;�00 00 0 __� Additive Alternate#5: Pressure wash,sand, prime and .__ repair as required to bring to "like new" appearance to 2.5 the cross members at the metal canopy above entry. Paint scheduled color. 1 LS $13,300.00. -" $13,300.00 Additive Alternate#6: Remove existing light poles and 2.6 light fixtures in the parking lot. Replace with new light poles and fixtures to match. 1 LS $62,30000 $62 300.00 Additive Alternate#7: Provide new 130 ton air-cooled 2.7 chiller in lieu of specified split DX equipment and packaged RTUs. Refer to MEP specifications for details. 1 LS $100,000.00 $100,000.00 Additive Alternate#8: Demolish all ceiling tile and grid in 2.8 library stack area. Replace with all new ceiling tile and grid. Refer to section 01230.3.1.A.8 1 LS $28,100.00 $28,100.00 Additive Alternate#9: Provide card readers. Refer to A.1.40 for locations. I CR I Symbol denotes locations. Section 281300 is provided in Section 01230. Contact: 2.9 Michael Huffman w/Convergint Technologies C: 832- 524-6024, michael.huffman@convergint.com, 1420 North Sam Houston Parkway E. Suite 190 Houston,TX 77032 1 LS $22,000.00 $22,000.00 4 CashAllowances 4.1 Cash Allowance: Provide an allowance of($150,000)for additional work approved/requested by owner. 1 LS $150,000.00 $150,000.00 Exterior Signage Allowance: Provide an allowance of 4.2 ($10,000)for the replacement of the existing exterior signage "TOM REID LIBRARY" located on the right side of the entrance. Match font type, style, &size, provide in aluminum finish, pin mounted to exterior brick. 1 LS $10,000.00 $10,000.00 1117-08 Addendum 6-Page 2 Chiller MEP Fee:Add an allowance of($20,000)for design fees for the chiller option. Should this Alternate 4.3 Option be selected,the awarded General Contractor will contract directly with their engineer of choice to design and implement. 1 LS $20,000.00: . $20,000.00 $3,319,200.00 Cga. 1117-08 Addendum 6- Page 3 CITY OF PEARLAND PROPOSAL Section 00300 r1.6\' CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT PART C (Required with all Proposals) Submitted to: City of Pearland By: Construction Masters of Houston, Inc. /Justin Davis, Vice President. INDIVIDUAL/PARTNERSHIP/CORPORATION/JOINT VENTURE The signatory of this questionnaire guarantees the truth and accuracy of all statements and of all answers to interrogatories hereinafter made under a penalty of perjury. A. GENERAL Principal Office Address: 3908 3rd Street Pearland, TX 77581 Telephone Number: ( 281 ) 997-2640 Fax Number: (281 ) 485-4702 Email address: justin@cmhou.com Indicate as Applicable: A Corporation A Corporation A Partnership An Individual If a Corporation, complete this section: Date of incorporation: 11/25/1987 State of Incorporation: Texas Chief Executive Officer's Name: N/A President's Name: Robert Campbell Vice President's Name(s): Justin Davis Offeror's Ini 00300-Part J of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND 1 Secretary's Name: N/A Treasurer's Name: N/A If a partnership, complete this section: Date of organization: State whether partnership is general or limited: Name and address of each partner: If an individual, complete this section: Name and business address: 1. How many years has your organization been in business as a general contractor under your. present business name? 29+years 2. How many years' experience in this type of construction work has your organization had: (a) �Ef as a general contractor? 29 + (b) as a subcontractor? 3. Are you a member of the BBB, International Standards Organization (ISO), or other quality associations or quality certifying organizations? No 3908 3rd'Street, Pearland TX 77581 4. Where is your main office located? 5. Have you ever failed to complete any work awarded to you? No 6. If so, where and why? B. OFFEROR'S ORGANIZATIONAL EXPERIENCE provide satisfactory evidence that the following minimum qualification Offeror shallp v y g requirements are met, in order to be awardedthe project: (1) The satisfactory completion by the Offeror over the last five or more of major renovation /-mb protects at"fully occupied and operational municipal facility.. Offeror's Ilia is 0000-Parl. 2 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND (fib\ The listing of contact names shall indicate that your organization has no objection to contacting the named individuals. Additional information may be submitted. Label "Attachment A- PART C",if appropriate. PROJECT 1: Owner's Name and Contact Information: Mike Harris, 281.998.6338 Project Name: San Jacinto College Renovation's Construction Cost: Annual Aggregate of$2MM Scope of Work: Open renovations of occupied classroom and faculty buildings Year of Completion: Each of the past 9 years Location(City and State): Pasadena,Texas PROJECT#2 Owner's Name and Contact Information: Kelley Trimble, 713.539.0151 Project Name: South Main Baptist Church Construction Cost: $1,357,697 Scope of Work: Major renovation to 100,000 SF church while the building remained occupied. Year of Completion: 2010 Location (City and State): Pasadena, Texas PROJECT#3 Owner's Name.and Contact Informations Brazoria County, Gerald Hendrick II, 979.215.4840 Project Name: Justice of the Peace Addition and Renovation Construction Cost: $850,000 Scope of Work:. Major addition and renovation while building remained occupied. Year of Completion: 2010 Location (City and State): Pearland, Texas C. OFFEROR'S KEY PERSONNEL EXPERIENCE Offeror shall provide satisfactory evidence that the following minimum qualification requirements are met, in order to be awarded the project: Key Personnel Experience=Provide qualifications of the project personnel who will perform key functions. Minimum information to be contained on the resume of each individual, if applicable, shall include:technical experience, managerial experience, education,position occupied on each assignment, description of duties on each assignment, and number of years with the organization. The following positions on your project team shall be identified below and shall be binding throughout the duration of the project unless otherwise approved by the Owner. **Refer to Attachment: Resumes Offeror's Initi ls• 00300-Part -3 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND What is the name and percentage of time allocated to the following personnel? For Project Manager? Justin Davis For Project Superintendent? Dennis Busby For Scheduler? Justin Davis For QA/QC.Personnel? Bob Campbell For Safety Officer? Dennis Busby. D. OFFEROR'S PROJECT APPROACH 1. In what manner have you investigated this proposed work and inspected the site conditions? Explain in detail. We have attended the site visit coordinated by Pearland. We have diligently studied the bid documents to develop an accurate cost estimate and realistic sequencing strategy. During this time,we have consulted with our major subcontractors and suppliers to ensure we have the most accurate information available for basis of our pricing. and schedule. Due diligence and effective cost analysis will enable us to provide our most competitive proposal. 7i) 2. Explain your methodology for.performing the proposed work, including Cost and Schedule control and QA/QC Control. We have developed a comprehensive master schedule which we will use to complete this project. Each week, the project manager and superintendent will meet to discuss project progress. At each meeting,we will review work forecasted for the following 2 weeks and overview work beginning within the next 2 months. We will require applicable subcontractors to attend these progress meetings. While reviewing schedules,we will discuss manpower, potential conflicts,workmanship expectations and impact to existing.operations. By keeping our focus 2-8 weeks in the future we should be able to stay on schedule,in budget and avoid costly mistakes. . 3. What portions of the work do you intend to sublet? (List subcontractors' names,specialties and percentage of work below). 80%of this project will be subcontracted. Supervision,project management, rough carpentry and doors will be handled by our own forces.. SCHEDULE OF SUBCONTRACTORS Offeror proposes the following subcontractors to.be used for the Project (list others as applicable). All subcontractor specialties indicated below and any subcontractor scheduled to perform 5 percent or more of the Project work must be listed and submitted with the proposal.. Offeror may change subcontractors after bid submittal only as approved in writing by the Owner. The infOrmation provided will be used in the evaluation of the Offeror. The references shall include name of project; Owner contact information, Engineer contact information and General Offeror's Initi 00300-Part C of 6 i� CITY OF PEARLAND Contractor contact information. The contact information shall include name, phone number and address. TABLE 00300-2 SCHEDULE OF SUBCONTRACTORS PERCENTAGE OF SUBCONTRACTOR SPECIALTY WORK Luke Ditta, 113-882-5021 1. Leggio Electric Electrical 6329 Dixie Dr.,Houston,TX 77087 20% 2. Airflow Design Solutions Mechanical Jon Horner,281-831-117t 250 GR 129 Alvin,TX 77511 35% 3. Innovative Plumbing Plumbing 2429iPark8ew Dr Pearland,TX 77581 10% 4. Fort Bend Drywall Gypsum Assemblies Biane McNally, 713-702 3700 3014 The Highlands Dr. Sugar _and,TX 77478 8% 5•Applied Finish Systems Acoustical Ceilings Mark Lucchese,713-937-8019 2% PO Box 801028, Houston,TX 77C15 Eddie Perdomo,713-627-2112 6'Architectural Floors Flooring 1803 Allen Parkway,Houston,TX 77019 2% 7•Diversified Finishes Painting Ed Cudworth,713 Z45 6928 17 13715 Harvest Brook Court. Houston,TX 77059 8'Allied Fire Protection Fire Protection Raymond Delling,281-485-6803 PO Box 2842, Pearland,TX 77588 4% 9. CWW Woodwork Millwork Brian Morales,832 E 1068 2% 11353 Dover St.,Houston,TX 77031 1° Travis Schultz 713 Cherry Companies Demolition 6131 Selinsky,Houton,TX 87-00007704815 2% 4. What method(s) do you have to control your subcontractors? Each of the subsisted above has worked for us in the past and will want to work for us in the future. Their (11111b\, desire to keep our business is generally the only leverage we need to maintain control. We partner with subcontractors who value the same fundamental principals we do. Honesty and integrity. We will come in to this project with a team all committed to a common goal. 5. Have you used these subcontractors before and what have your experiences been? We have teamed with each of the subcontractors listed above on a minimum of 5 projects. Each of those projects have been a positive experience. We are confident each of the subcontractors will bring value to this project by working as a team,forecasting schedules,managing costs and developing solutions to potential issues before they become project delays. 11. Please supply references of these proposed subcontractors. ** Refer to Attachments: Subcontractor's References Offeror's Ini al 00300-Part -5 of 6, CITY OF PEARLAND 1 E. OFFEROR'S CURRENT WORKLOAD 1 List the construction projects your organi.zation.has underway on this date. l i i Project 1: Owner's Name and Contact Information: City of Pearland,Jennifer Lee,Project Manager Location: 3519 Liberty Dr.,Pearland,TX 77581 Project Name: City Hall Complex Renovation Li Construction Cost: $6,124,000 Scope of Work: Remodel of City Hall Complex(City Hall and Annex)while'occupied Percent Completion: 2% K Engineer Contact/Phone No.: Susan Dieterich/ZCA/713.374.0152/sdieterich@zieglercooper.com 11 Project 2: Owner's Name and Contact Information: ' Heritage Bank Growth/Alamo Title/Cordoba Law Firm Location: 85 Oak Drive,Lake Jackson,TX 77566 i Project Name: Heritage Bank Growth and Lease Space Finish Out Construction Cost: $295,502 P Scope of Work: Interior finish of Banking Growth Space&(2)adjacent lease spaces Percent Completion: 54% Engineer Contact/Phone No.: Civil Engineer:Cobb;Fendley&Associates/713.462.3242' Project 3: Owner's Name and Contact Information: Sheldon Independent School District,.Juan Mendoza,Jr.(JMendoza@Ian-inc.com Location: Cravens ECA:13210 Tidwell Rd.,Houston,TX 77049/Sheldon ECA: 17010 Beaumont Hwy,Houston,TX 77049 111 Project Name: Sheldon ISD Driveway&Canopy Renovations ii Construction Cost: $263,525 l 14 Scope of Work: Renovation of Driveway&Canopy on 2 Campuses 9 E Percent Completion: 5% s Engineer Contact/Phone No.: Civil Engineer: Stantec/Joseph 5chwieterman/713.212.0011 '� Project 4: Owner's Name and Contact Information: Dickinson Independent.School District,Jim Rubach(jrubach@dickinsonisd.org) 41 Location: 3303 Owens Drive, Dickinson,TX 77539 Project Name: DISD Food Nutrition Warehouse li Construction Cost: $698,486 Scope of Work: Removal and replacement of existing food service equipment to include:mechanical,electrical,communicatic 11 Percent Completion: Mobilizing 2/13/2017 Engineer Contact/Phone No.: CJG Engineers/713.780.3345 il Are you currently in litigation concerning any of your projects? No f H Offeror's Initia : 00300-Part _ 6 of 6 I %- ,z_ .' ON STRUCTION fi S! S . tob Cali s t el ,,OF HOUSTON, INC. President bob@cmhou.com 713-253-7045 Employment History Construction Masters of Houston,Inc.,Owner/President November 1987-Present Arrowhead Builders, Inc.,Owner/President September 1978-October 1987 Super Value Store, CEO/President August 1978-May 1996 Project History Sheldon IS.D-Cravens ECA/Sheldon ECA Renovations Houston,TX $263,525.30 Dickinson ISD-Food Nutrition Warehouse Dickinson,TX $698,486.00 Pearland City Hall Complex Renovation Pearland,TX $6,124,000.00 Heritage Bank-Growth&Lease Spaces Build-out Lake Jackson,TX $295,502.00. Texas Gulf Bank- Lake Jackson-Teller Line Lake Jackson,TX $142,000.00 Texas Gulf Bank-Clute-Teller.Line Clute,TX $176,5.00.00 ACU-Brenham-Disaster Recovery Center Brenham,TX $640,800.00 Nottingham County Elementary-Life Skills Remodel Katy,TX $375,818.00 Heritage Bank. Lake Jackson,TX $2,315,791.00 Traylor Office Building Pearland,TX $861,000.00 San Jacinto College-North-Baseball Facility Houston,TX $622,648.00 ACU-Deer Park-Remodel Deer Park,TX $768,545.00 ACU-La Marque-New Roof&Mechanical La Marque,TX $256,698.53 NCI-5th St. Stafford,TX $24,973.31 NCI-Austin St. Richmond,TX $82,514.59 MGArchitects Office Houston,TX $799,388.20 Texas Gulf Bank-Voss Houston,TX $1.10,269,42 Texas Gulf Bank-Angleton Angleton,TX $246,426.09 Westbound Bank-FM 529 Branch Houston,TX $1,149,307.00 Westbound Bank-Conroe Branch Conroe,TX $1,170,350.00 NCI-Rosenberg Workforce Solutions Rosenberg,TX $767,634.96 Brazoria County Courthouse Restroom Remodel Angleton,TX $272,645.94 Texas GulfBank-Town&Country(Demo&Remodel) Houston,TX $884,575.36 ACU Corporate Driveway Expansion League City,TX $272,320.83 Ashford Crossing/Lincoln Properties Houton, TX $138,885.00 Brazoria County Sheriffs Office Angleton,TX $155,000.00 Brazosport College Welding Lab Lake Jackson,TX $3,730,000.00 PinnacleAlS Phase III Pasadena,TX $1,531,894.00 Brazoria County Pct.4 Manvel,TX $2,442,000.00 Pearland Westside Library Expansion Pearland,TX $290,000.00 NCI-Almeda Workforce Solutions Iouston,TX $607,000.00 PinnacleAlS Phase.II. Pasadena,TX $2,978.375.00 Max Road Sports Complex Pearland,TX $2,521,315.38 r„,,\ Anytime Fitness League City,TX $108,271.00 Creekside Shopping Center League City,TX $847,910.02 t 1 . '-•'.;ONSTRUCTION s M ASTERS • lF. OF HOUSTON, INC. -I Booster Pump Station Webster,TX $1,186.000.00 1 ) Ipswich.Road Repairs at Hobby Airport Houston,TX $143,905.32 Associated Credit Union Fry Rd. Cypress,TX $1,166,409.00 Progressive Commercial Aquatics Houston,TX $162,375.00 First Community Credit Union Parking,Lot Expansion Houston,TX $270,100.00 • Pinnacle AIS/New Construction Pasadena,TX $1,229,962.00 Manvel EMS Facility/New Construction Manvel,TX $1,542,398.00 SJC Central Child Care/New Construction Pasadena,TX $2,900,000.00 SJC YUM Renovations Pasadena,TX $948,248.00 Urology of Houston Pasadena,TX $1,800,000.00 Brazoria Co. PCT 3 /New Construction Alvin,TX $2,575,830.00 San Jacinto College District/Hurricane Recovery Multiple Sites $7,000,000.00 Associated Credit Union of Texas/Renovation La Marque,TX $850,000.00 Broadway-518 Business Center/New Construction Pearland,TX $1,877,000.00 San Jacinto College District/Renovation Multiple Sites $2,280,984.00 Bobcat of Houston/Renovation Houston,TX $879,000.00 Bach Facility Addition/New Construction $705,500.00 Silver Pear Strip Center Phase I/New Construction Pearland,TX $1,706,700.00 Grady B.Rasco Middle School/New Construction Lake Jackson,TX $2,142,300.00 University of Texas Medical Branch/New Construction Galveston,TX $1,001,000.00 BenekeElementary School-Spring ISD/New Construction $1,983,000.00 JSC Credit Union/Renovation $150,000.00 Aerodome Sugar Land/Renovation Sugar Land,TX $374,740.00 it LaPorte Fire Station/New Construction La Porte,TX $782,850.00 McReynolds&Grady Middle Schools- Houston 1SD/Renovation $4,544,789.00 �a K&G Retail Center Phase II/New Construction - $800,000.00 Compaq Center/Renovation(Flood Damage) Houston,TX $5,000,000.00 li Compaq Center/Renovation Houston,TX $1,450,000.00 Muilenburg Prosthetics/Renovation $440,000.00 GolfcrestCountry Club Pearland,TX $60.1.,000.00 Friendswood Administration Building/Renovation Friendswood,TX $740,000.00 K&G Strip Center-Phase I/New Construction $600,000.00 Matrix Rehabilitation/Renovation $170,000.00 Pearland High School-Pearland ISD/Renovation Pearland,TX $1,161,500.00 Brazoria County Jail/New Construction $1,100,000.00 Brazoria County Substation/Renovation $272,938.00 References. Jack Click Associated Credit Union of Texas 409-945-4474 jclick@acutx.org Mike Harris San Jacinto College District 281-998-6338 mike.harris@sjcd.edu 7) i ONSTRUCTION OF ASHOC. USTONTERS ,, INC. (1 I 1 I I I I 6\ , Juan. i I Avis Vice President; Lead Project Manager Justin@cmhou.com 281-960-4491 Employment History Construction Masters of Houston, Inc. - 1998 -2004&2006-Present Project History Sheldon ISD-Cravens ECA/Sheldon ECA Renovations Houston,TX $263,525.30 Dickinson ISD-Food Nutrition Warehouse Dickinson,TX $698,486.00 Pearland City Hall Complex Renovation Pearland,TX $6,124,000.00 Heritage Bank-Growth&Lease Spaces Build-out Lake Jackson,TX $295,502.00 Texas Gulf Bank-Lake Jackson-Teller Line Lake Jackson,TX $1.42,000.00 Texas Gulf Bank-Clute-Teller Line Clute,TX $176,500.00 ACU-Brenham-Disaster Recovery Center Brenham,TX $640,800.00 Nottingham Country Elementary-Life Skills Remodel Katy,TX $375,818.00 Heritage Bank Lake Jackson,TX $2,315,791.00 Traylor Office Building Pearland,TX $861,000.00 San Jacinto College-North-Baseball Facility Houston,TX $622,648,00 ACU -Deer Park-Remodel Deer Park,TX $768,545.00 ACU-La Marque-New Roof&Mechanical La Marque,TX $256,698.53 NCI-5th St. Stafford,TX $24,973.31 NCI -Austin St. Richmond,TX $82,514.59 MGArchitects Office Houston, TX $799,388.20 Texas Gulf Bank-Voss Houston,TX $110,269.42 Texas Gulf Bank-Angleton Angleton,TX $246,426.09 Westbound Bank-FM 529 Branch Houston,TX $1,149,307.00 Westbound_Bank-Conroe Branch Conroe,TX $1,170,350.00 NCI-Rosenberg Workforce Solutions Rosenberg,TX $767,634.96 Brazoria County Courthouse Restroom Remodel Angleton,TX $272,645.94 Texas Gulf Bank-Town&Country(Demo &Remodel) Houston,TX $884,575.36 ACU Corporate Driveway Expansion • League City,TX $272,320.83 Ashford Crossing/Lincoln Properties Houston,TX $138,885.00 Brazoria County Sheriffs Office Angleton,TX $155,000.00 Brazosport College Welding Lab Lake Jackson,TX $3,730,000.00 PinnacleAlS Phase III Pasadena,TX $1,531,894.00 Brazoria County Pet. 4 Manvel,TX $2,442,000.00 Pearland Westside Library Expansion Pearland, TX $290,000.00 NCI-Almeda Workforce Solutions Houston,TX $607,000.00 PinnacleAlS Phase II Pasadena,TX $2,978.375.00 Max Road Sports Complex Pearland,TX $2,521,315.38 Anytime Fitness League City,TX $108,271.00 Creekside Shopping Center League City,TX $847,910.02 Booster Punip Station Webster,TX $1,186..000.00 Ipswich Road Repairs at Hobby Airport Houston,TX $143,905.32 Associated Credit Union Fly Rd. Cypress,TX $1,166,409.00 : ONSTRUCT ION 1 ,ASTE1'i OF HOUSTON, INC. _Progressive Commercial Aquatics Houston,TX $162,375.00 First Community Credit Union Parking Lot Expansion Houston,TX $270,100.00 Integrity Bank Pasadena Pasadena,TX $1,740,733.00 MidSouth Bank-Magnolia Magnolia,TX $299;506.00 Integrity Bank Woodlands Shenandoah,TX $534,994.00 Pearland.ISD Turner HS Renovations Pearland,TX $254,477.00 First Community Credit Union- Woodlands The Woodlands,TX $107,300.00 MidSouth Bank-Veterans IIouston,TX $198,134.00 Texas Gulf Bank-West University Houston,TX $344,256.00 Pearland Westside Library Pearland,TX $380,726.00 Northwest Pines Houston,TX $856,000.00 Southwest Water Reclamation Facility League City,TX $2,586,590.00 South Main Baptist Church Pasadena,TX $1,000,000.00 Manvel EMS Manvel,TX $1,542,398.00 Texas Gulf Bank of Friendswood Friendswood,TX $1,411,278.00 San Jacinto College District Child Care Lab School Pasadena,TX $2,900,000.00 PinnacleAIS Office Complex Pasadena,TX $1,229,962.00 Associated Credit Union of Texas-Headquarters League City,TX $6,137,582.00 Brazoria County EMS Facility Manvel,TX $1,542,398.00 San Jacinto College YUM Kitchen Renovations Multiple Sites $958,154.00 Brazoria County Commissioner's Office Alvin,TX $2,575,830.00 San Jacinto College Hurricane Repairs Multiple Sites $7,145,019.00 '7 Brazoria County Justice of the Peace Office Pearland,TX $828,000.00 Urology of Houston Medical Clinic Pasadena,TX $1,800,000.00 Broadway 518 Business Center Pearland,TX $1,877,000.00 I Cooperative Purchasing Approximately$1,750,000 Annually 1 I 1 References =. Troy Kennedy Arcon Architects 281-316-6392 troy@arcon-solutions.com Eric Batte MGArchitects 713-552-0707 ebatte@mgarchitects.com Mike Harris San Jacinto College District 281-998-6338 mike.harris@sjcd.edu Steve Cory PinnacleART 281-598-1330 steve.cory@pinnacleart.com II Dave Ferguson Manvel EMS 281-489-6144 dferguson@manvelems.org Gerald Hendrick II Brazoria County 979-864-1676 geraldh@brazoria-county.com Rich J.ochetz Texas Gulf Bank 713-595-7401 jochetz@texasgulfbank.com Raymond Burroughs Architecture Etc.* 979-297-1184 rurroughs@archetc.com Education & Certifications 1-louston Baptist University: Bachelors ofBusiness Adminstration; Marketing ,J ,1 :ONSTRUCTION MASTERS ..OF HOUSTON, INC. D0 �n 1 ;fls uSby Project Manager/ Superintendent - dennisRcmhou.com 281-780-3871 Employment History Construction Masters of Houston, Inc. August 2008-Present Northwinds Construction February 2007-August 2008 Teal Construction September 2005 -February 2007 K.D. Development July 2002-September 2005 Wood Master Building Company October 1999-May 2002 Project History Sheldon ISD-Cravens ECA/Sheldon ECA Renovations Houston,TX $263,525.30 Dickinson ISD-Food Nutrition Warehouse Dickinson,TX $698,486.00 ACU -Brenham-Disaster Recovery Center Brenham,TX $640,800.00 ACU-Deer Park-Remodel Deer Park,TX $768,545.00 ACU-La Marque-New Roof& Mechanical La Marque,TX $256,698.53 NCI-5th St. Stafford,TX $24,973.31 (01"1") NCI-Austin St. Richmond,TX $82,514.59 MGArchitects Office Houston,TX $799,388.20 Texas Gulf Bank-Voss Houston,TX $110,269.42 Texas Gulf Bank-Angleton Angleton,TX $246,426.09 Westbound Bank-FM 529 Branch Houston,TX $1,149,307.00 Westbound Bank-Conroe Branch Conroe,TX $1,170,350.00 NCI-Rosenberg Workforce Solutions Rosenberg,TX $767,634.96 Brazoria County Courthouse Restroom Remodel Angleton,TX $272,645.94 Texas Gulf Bank-Town &Country(Demo&Remodel) Houston,TX $884,575.36 ACU Corporate Driveway Expansion League City,TX $272,320.8.3 Ashford Crossing/Lincoln Properties Houston,TX $138,885.00 Brazoria County Sheriffs Office Angleton,TX $155,000.00 Brazosport College Welding Lab Lake Jackson,TX $3,730,000.00 PinnacleAlS Phase III Pasadena,TX $1,531,894.00 Brazoria County Pct. 4 Manvel,TX $2,442,000.00 Pearland Westside Library Expansion Pearland,TX $290,000.00 NCI-Almeda Workfoce Solutions Houston,TX $607,000.00 Associated Credit Union Fry Rd. Cypress,TX $1,166,409.00 Progressive Commercial Aquatics Houston,TX $162,375.00 First Community Credit Union Parking Lot Expansion Houston,TX $270,1.00.00 Integrity Bank Woodlands Shenandoah,TX $534,994.00 Harris County ESD#1 (Fire Station&Clinic) Houston,TX $97,525.00 (lib\ MidSouth Bank Phase II/Veterans/Greenspoint Branch Houston,TX $198,134.28 Northwest Pines Club House Houston,TX $957,157.00 League City SWWRF League City,TX $2,586,590.00 Manvel EMS Manvel,TX $1,542,398.00 Texas Gulf Bank Renovation Lake Jackson,TX $213,983.50 .'ONSTRUCTION MASTERS .0F HOUSTON, INC. 1'7) References Dave Ferguson Manvel EMS 832-73.1.-6355 dferguson@manvelems.org Rich Jochetz Texas Gulf Bank 713-595-7401 jochetz@texasgulfbank.com Troy Kennedy Arcon Architects 281-316-6392 troy@arcon-solutions.com Eric Batte MGArchitects 713-552-0707 ebatte@mgarchitects,com i Education & Certifications Certified: Fork Lift 7.) ij S 3 l 1 hi p '17/2/14 12:44 PM 250 CR 129 Alvin,TX 77511 281-817-5770 Fax:281-817-5780 February 14, 2017 Letter of Reference: 1. DaySprings Management 15127 Timbershire Ct. Magnolia, Tx 77355 281-477-6544 (phone) 281-259-4806 (fax) Georgette Elwell 2. Mike Bricker&Associates PO Box 1467 Dickinson, Tx 77539 281-337-1856 (phone) Alecia LaRose 3. Winter Park Construction 221 Circle Drive . Maitland, Florida 32751 407-998-8923 (phone) 407-645-1972 (fax) Barbara Respress 4. Crain Group 3801 Knapp Road Pearland,Tx 77581 713-436-8727 (phone) 713-436-8730 (fax) Susan Maignaud PROTECTION"' --17) TEXAS SCR-G-0519,ACR-3429, ECR-2021 i July 25, 2016 Ref: Credit References 18. List five(5)General Contractor references for which you have worked: Company Name Contact Telephone/Fax No. Address �rrtbh�- and -713-W1o5- BSSb g58BKul � � 54-d `\ / c s ^V45 e 11a ri S 1`IVW1Crar1. 5w r�ie7"bu _._ . • S ;v ` Lir(1Unce enearv)3 Ds\-1ll-lcot (PS51rultu Ir(al ►3Vc Cr -'Beirut kior, 3dccia+n Sut`-ave.\and 'IV '1 t g `"l"e 1\epsQ r) ii i 11 ,s t-1419-15100 --i-m eQnrnur DL goo P)1Ai\dPr5 \Jein-,ttnr\ \aDus r, -lx Mo(Lib Nitorn 'Wily .Zgi- 11(43-(o32r7 tuiZb c\.1st,otr- c1 o-J C r,SrruC*tc A ©\well Uotxs n-"Ix '-lbtob 5-e3,Axir'. --rcycncr, ivy(183-13Hi ci 1tos15 V1\\abe t kti\c eys AL(\-rarrrI \r,t x��p1-‘-It, '710-1j) 19. ust rive(b) f raae(credit)rererences: Company Name Contact Telephone/Fax No. Address a81 To labx a0I810 PC j(12,d Son4,. Ng i;e:?aL p $qq�- co LI Rous TO nI,-N o-)--016 . C-,u\-C CPas�Skab►Il%, 1.s. 5- I3 , I Z,u.c,e&Aa d:� lY 7- _ U r - 3 i c a fre tlows rz c . i ii me'cr ---Q__er\-alS e 301n95 '3b 15fh gou5 n —fx '"1-1oU`7 -113 To e:0X -1 i xsq11 RurY---, C-vV 1Coc wobt1A 6.1 - qgr7 --I1pb' 1�ocisto `1x -T-la 41-ISM E! sh�oh 9310-. ?011 (r 1 rport-Rcii Pt . awin(7) 11-14,5 - Id C, . -Ty 71361 o i E ll it 1 P www . alliedfireprotection . com P.O. Box 2842 0 Pearland,TX 77588 0 Phone 281-485-6803 0 Fax 281-412-9668 0 Corporate 2363 Merritt Drive#1300 0 Garland,TX 75041 0 Phone 972-840-1700 0 Fax 972-840-1750 P.O. Box 47864 0 San Antonio,TX 78265 0 Phone 210-646-6716 0 Fax 210-646-67347 P.O.Box 4875.0 McAllen,TX 78502 0 Phone 956-631-4208 0 Fax 956-631-9680 li 1515 Dungan Lane Suite 208 0 Austin,TX 78754 0 Phone 512-719-4872 0 Fax 512-719-4462 1 I 0 i rf _Air 1 _if:4T:- -77'. ,., Li , ,. rli , 1 ro., /2"'-'—.7. _ 1 k .., ..i .!„r 'i v ci V,.,, i 1 t 1 ' 4 111 '—4 ti 1 li ''T 1 L'i 1 SYSTEMS, LLC GENE L C 4 MIRA CT ?" fla EFEot 1E CES , 4° General Contractor: Brookstone . Contact: Andy Richardson Phone: 713-683-8800 General Contractor: Bartlett Cocke .f - ` _ • Contact: Raymond Heath Phone: 713-996-951.0 , . a4 ° General Contractor: Vaughn Construction i °- 41 Contact: Tom Vaughn Phone: 713-243-8300 , General Contractor: Tema development Inc. Contact: Havtham Haidar Phone: 713-526-6846 li fi VI * ` M General Contractor: Westfall Constructors . Contact: Tim Westfall Phone: 713-681-6160 y A4 • 1 i 1 3 rI fps®\ P.O. Box 801028 19 Houston,TX 77280-1028 0 TEL: 713-937-80.19 ri FAX: 713-937-0717 www.appliedfinishsystems.com 6131 SeHusky . fiRRIWY Office (713) 987-0000 Houston, Texas 77048 IDIETVILWATTIIIK* Fax (713) 991-6236 Commercial Division Toll (800) 444-1123 COMMERCIAL RESIDENTIAL SITE WORK A DBA of CMC GENERAL CONTRACTOR REFERENCES D.E. HARVEY BUILDERS 713-783-8710 3630 WESTCHASE DR. KELLY HALL HOUSTON, TX 77042 kellylialkalarveybuilders.coni ANSLOW-BRYANT CONSTRUCTION 713-626-1216 840 GESSNER, STE. 250 JAMES BRYANT HOUSTON, TX 77024 ibryanaanslowbrvant.com rd.) W.S. BELLOWS CONSTRUCTION 713-680-2132 1906 AFTON LAURA BELLOWS HOUSTON, TX 77055 lbellowsamsbellows.com BROOKFIELD PROPERTIES 713-336-2350 12 SMITH ST. STE. 1200 WAYNE HARNER HOUSTON, TX 77002 wayne.harner(&,brookfield.coan r.") LEGGIO ELECTRIC CO. 6329 DIXIE DR. HOUSTON, TX 77087 713-6.44-2051 FAX: 713-644-0976 CUSTOMER REFERENCES BRUSH MECHANICAL: P.O. BOX 79412, HOUSTON, TX 79412 CONTACT: DEWAYNE BRUSH, OFFICE: 713-937-9027 FAX: 713-937-6286 MACO CONSTRUCTION: 1718 HUMBLE PLACE DR, HUMBLE,TX 77338 CONTACT: DUANE CANNON, OFFICE: 713-453-1234 FAX: 713-450-4499 PINNACLE CONSTRUCTION: 308 WEST PART<WOOD AVE. STE 108A FRIENDSWOOD,TX 77546 CONTACT: CODY OWEN, OFFICE:281-993-2500 FAX: 281-993-2507 WISENBAKER BUILDING SERVICES: 14323 REEVESTON RD., HOUSTON 77039 CONTACT: JOHN WISENBAKER, SR., OFFICE: 281-590-1256, FAX: 281-233-6776 U. S. BUILDERS: 7600 SAN FELIPE, HOUSTON 77063 CONTACT: CHARLES MORMINO, OFFICE: 713-661-1987, FAX: 713-661-1988 CONSTRUCTION MASTERS: P.O. BOX 1587, PEARLAND 77588 CONTACT: JUSTIN DAVIS, OFFICE: 281-997-2640, FAX: 281-485-4702 CHRISTIANS DEVELOPMENT: 1213 WEST LOOP N. SUITE 150, HOUSTON 77055 CONTACT: MIKE BENESTANTE, OFFICE: 713-952-2228, FAX: 713-952-2228 SELLER BROTHERS: 4580 SOUTH WAYSIDE, HOUSTON 77087 CONTACT: JOEY SELLERS, OFFICE: 713-640-1611, FAX: 713-640-1254 CITY OF PEARLAND PROPOSAL rb\ Section 00300 SAFETY QUESTIONAIRE PART D 1. List your Fiim's Worker's Compensation Insurance Experience Modification Rate for the three most recent years as evidenced in Workmen's Compensation Insurance premiums. If your company is not Interstate rated, provide your intrastate EMR. 2013: .84 2014: .84 2015: .84 The above-mentioned information should be confirmed by a letter from your Worker Compensation Insurance Carrier. ** Refer to Attached. 2. Are accident reports (OSHA 300) and report summaries sent to the following? And if so, how often? • Field Superintendent: Yes,weekly • Vice President— Operations: Yes,weekly • President of Firm: Yes,weekly (111 3. How are accident records and summaries.kept? How often are they reported? • Accidents totaled for entire Company: Quarterly • Accidents totaled for Project: Quarterly • Accidents Totaled by Superintendent.and/or Foreman: Quarterly 4. Existing Safety and Orientation Programs: • Summarize and submit the Offeror firm's safety program execution plan (1 page). Outline the training requirements and frequency, meeting types and frequency,.and personnel responsible for executing the plan on site as a minimum. ** Refer to attached: Safety Plan Overview (11.6\ Offeror's Ini 00300-Part - 1 of 1 ii, .. WARRINER & ASSOCIATES 0)21Le alza8, July 12, 2016 Re: Construction Masters of Houston, Inc. c/o Resourcing Edge 1, LLG Experience Rating To Whom It May Concern, Below are the following Experience Modifiers for Construction Masters of Houston for the time they have been Insured with their PEO, Resourcing Edge 1 LLG: • 6/24/2013 to 10/1/2013— ,84 • 10/1/2013 to 10/1/2014— .84 • 10/1/2014 to 10/1/2015 - .84 • 10/1/2015 to 10/1/2016 - .81 Please contact me if you have any questions or concerns. Sincerely, Judith Paine Senior Account Manager 11111 Merest Green,Suite 101 * Houston, Texas 77042-4739 * 713.785 5252 * FAX 713.785.0688 www.wains.com Construction Masters of Houston PROJECT MANUAL OVERVIEW It is our policy to provide a work environment that is inherently safe -- free from conditions that are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to the health and safety of our personnel and the subcontractors with whom we work. Prior to performing work, job site personnel will be made aware of our safety and health policies as well as appropriate safety standards to prevent accidents and injuries. Accident prevention demands a commitment from all personnel. That commitment includes an awareness of proper work methods, use of personal protective equipment, and proper use of tools and equipment. Competent persons will, on an on-going basis, review work procedures and adherence to safety standards and immediately address areas in which deficiencies are found. Defective tools and equipment will be immediately taken out of service. Only those qualified by training or experience may operate machinery and equipment. We want all personnel to become actively involved in our safety program. Suggestions for improved safety procedures are welcome. Safety meetings will be held on a regular basis and they will address safety issues appropriate to the work at hand. During these meetings, employees are encouraged to raise any safety related question or concern. On multi contractor job sites, safety meetings may, depending on the circumstances, -'~ focus on the hazards created by other contractors and how those hazards may impact on our personnel. Project manuals will be kept at individual job sites to enable the supervisors, competent person(s), employees, and subcontractors to have quick reference to major safety requirements of items of equipment or work procedures. This manual is not a complete safety program; our complete detailed safety program is maintained at our main office located at: 3908 3rd Street Pearland, TX 77581 } On the job site, safety concerns should be resolved by your supervisor or I' the competent person. All personnel are free to, and encouraged to, review appropriate OSHA safety standards maintained in our safety program. Immediately following this manual are job site forms appropriate for our work. Construction Masters of Houston PROJECT MANUAL ©2008 U.S.Compliance Systems,Inc. (888)475-5353. Permission is granted to copy for internal use. CITY OF PEARLAND PROPOSAL rib'' Section 00300 TECHNICAL PROPOSAL PART E A. ECONOMY OF PREPARATION. Proposals should be prepared simply and economically, providing a straightforward, concise description of the Offeror's ability to meet the requirements for the proposal. Elaborate bindings, colored displays, promotional materials and so forth are not desired. Emphasis should be.on completeness and clarity of content. Vague and equivocal statements will be viewed unfavorably. This section needs to be uploaded as a separate document with the proposal in E-bid as a pdf. B. CONFIDENTIALITY. The Offeror may designate any portion of its proposal that contains trade secrets, or other proprietary data as confidential. If an Offeror includes data that is not to be disclosed to the public for any purpose or used by the Owner except for evaluation purposes,the Offeror shall: 1. Mark the title page of the proposal with the following legend: "This proposal includes data that shall not be disclosed outside the City of Pearland and shall not be duplicated,. used or disclosed in whole or in part for any purpose other than to evaluate this proposal." 2. Mark each sheet of data it wishes to restrict with the following legend: "Use-or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restriction on the title page of this proposal." Offerors should note that despite such restrictions,the disclosure of such restricted information may be required under applicable laws, including, without limitation, applicable freedom of information laws. C. FORMAT. Proposal must be organized and submitted.in the eight-section format as follows: 1. Offeror Firm 1.1 Organization 1.1.1 Give the legal name, address, and telephone number of Offeror firm. Construction Masters of Houston, Inc.,3908 3rd Street, Pearland,TX 77581 /281.997.2640 1.1.2 State whether the Offeror firm is an individual,partnership, corporation, or a joint venture. If Offeror finn is-a corporation, give state of incorporation. Construction Masters of Houston, Inc. is a Corporation, incorporated in the State of Texas. 1.1.3 Give number of years Offeror firm has been in business as a construction contractor. 29 plus years as a Commercial General Contractor. 1.1.4 Give number of years Offeror firm has-been in business under its present business name. 29 plus years;since 1987. (.6‘ 1.1.5 Give any other names under which Offeror firm has operated. N/A Offeror.'s Ipiti/ Ad ter 00300-Part h-Rof4 CITY OF PEARLAND 1.2 Claims and Suits. (If the answer to any of the questions below is yes, attach details.) 1.2.1 Has Offeror firm ever failed to complete any work it was awarded? No 1.2.2 Are there.any judgments, claims, arbitration proceedings or lawsuits pending or outstanding against Offeror film or its,officers? No 1.2.3 Has Offeror firm filed any lawsuits or requested arbitration with regard to construction contracts within the last five years? No 1.3 Financial Status 1.3.1 Provide a letter from Offeror firm's Surety stating Offeror firm's ability to acquire bonding in the full amount of the contract. ** Refer to Attached: Surety Letter 1.3.2 Provide a photocopy of the current Dunn &Bradstreet report showing Offeror's financial rating for the Offeror firm. N/A 2. Offeror's Project Team 2.1 Provide an organization chart showing the Offeror firm's key personnel positions and lines of authority. ** Refer to attached: Construction Masters Team 2.2 Give names, qualifications, and experience of Offeror firm's key personnel positions proposed for the project. ** Refer to attached Resumes: Bob Campbell,Justin Davis, Dennis Busby 3. Offeror's Experience with Other Similar Projects 3.1 Give examples of Offeror firm's experience in constructing other similar projects within the last five (5) years. Provide examples as follows: Owner's Name: Project Name: Construction Cost: ** Refer to Proposal Part C Year of Completion: Location (City and State): 3.2 Give references for Offeror firm's experience in constructing other similar projects. Provide references as follows: Full Name and Title: Firm Name: ** Refer to Proposal Part C I Mailing address: Telephone Number: 4. Offeror's Project Schedules for Proposed Project and Other Similar Projects: 4.1 Provide a summary level schedule for the project indicating the Offeror firm's proposed construction schedule. Base the schedule on calendar days, starting with the Owner's notice to proceed and end with final completion of the work. Owner is I looking for.365 calendar days for substantial completion with Certificate of .1 Occupancy. ** Refer to attached: Construction Schedule Offeror's Initi•4 s: 00300-Par -2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND (.11h\ 4.2 Provide a summary level schedule for each similar project given under 3.1 comparing the Offeror firm's.initial construction schedules with the final construction schedules. Base the schedules on calendar days, starting with_the Owner's notice to proceed and end with final completion of the work. If the comparison reveals a disparity between the initial and final construction schedules explain why. 5. Offeror's Safety Program 5.1 Give the Offeror firm's primary insurance provider as follows: Full Name: Hotchkiss Insurance Agency Mailing Address: 13430 Northwest Freeway,Suite 600, Houston,TX 77040 Telephone Number: 713.292.5722 5.2 Give the Offeror firm's Experience Modifier Rate:(EMR) and Recordable Incident Rate (RIR). EMR: .84 RIR: N/A 5.3 Summarize the Offeror firm's safety program execution plan (1 page). ** Refer to Attached: Construction Masters of Houston-Project Manual Overview. 6. Offeror's Quality Assurance Program 6.1 Summarize the Offeror firm's quality assurance program (1 page). ** Refer to Attached: Construction Masters of Houston-Quality Manual. 7. Offeror's Current Workload 7.1 Summarize the Offeror firm's current.workload and state the Offeror's availability to rth'`. start construction of the project. Current workload is provided in Proposal Part C. We have a major project at Substantial Completion as well as smaller projects finalizing in the next few weeks so we have Immediate need for backing. 8. Offeror's Proposed Subcontractors 8.1 Provide a schedule of subcontractors, including the work they will perform and percentage of overall work they will perform. See table on Proposal Part C, Page 5 of 6. D. EVALUATION CRITERIA Explanation of Award based on the Evaluation Criteria is included in Section 00200 Instructions to Offerors. The evaluation criteria for all proposals are as follows: Cost Proposal 52% Schedule 18% Reputation 7% Experience 6% Personnel 5% Approach 5% Sub-contractors 4% Safety 3% Offeror's Initi OP 00300-Part E Hof. 4 • CITY OF PEARLAND E. ACCEPTANCE OF EVALUATION METHODOLOGY Submission of a proposal indicates Offeror's acceptance of-the evaluation technique and Offeror's recognition that some subjective judgments must be made by the Ownerr during the evaluation. Understood and Agreed. F. QUESTIONS TO OFFERORS Offerors are requested to submit a complete answer to each of the questions listed in Section D. The answers to these questions will be the basis for the Owner's evaluation of the proposal and selection of the successful Offeror. Understood. • END OF SECTION 4i Offeror's Initi.41 } 00300-Part E-4 of 4 f° \ 1 usf - �i wing �� AnsurI=nee err•Tiri1e'"'�tdetiirkirn r d. r a i itr "-. A e_ ..EV "__,_ _,.T- _�. February 3,2017 City of Pearland,Texas 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland,Texas 77581 RE: Tom Reid Library Addition & Renovation Project Gentlemen: Please be advised Construction Masters of Houston, Inc. currently has an established surety relationship with United Fire & Casualty Company and Rust Ewing Insurance is one of their authorized agents. United Fire & Casualty Company has an "A Excellent" rating from A.M. Best Company and qualifies as an acceptable surety on the Department of the Treasury Federal Register. (illik\ United Fire & Casualty Company believes Construction Masters of Houston, Inc. maintains a very experienced management team and they have successfully completed all projects in a professional manner. United Fire & Casualty Company has previously approved bonding single jobs up to $15,000,000 along with a $20,000,000 aggregate capacity for Construction Masters of Houston, Inc. United Fire & Casualty Company will consider bonding the above captioned project for Construction Masters of Houston, Inc. subject to a satisfactory review of financial underwriting guidelines and specific contract details at the time of such request. Please call me directly at (409) 934-8040 if you have any further questions or need additional information. Thanks again for your consideration of our client. Sincerely, bikla tae41---0 Donna Weinel, ACSR Surety Bond Manager (.1b\ 7900 Lowry Expressway • Texas City,Texas 77591 (409) 934-8000 • (800)561-5211 • Fax:(409)935-1883 • www.rustewing.com The stru t o ( l M .l seers Te;4 i t I Bob Campbell President (713) 253-7045 . bobPcmhou.com VP/Lead Estimator/ Justin Davis. Project Manager (281) 960-4491 justin@cmhou.com Dennis Busby Project Manager (281)780-3871 dennis@cmhou.com Ed Cudworth J.O.C. Manager (713)245-6928 edcudworth@netzero.com Bob Nimmo Superintendent (281)780-9510 bobnimmo@cmhou.com Mike Zavala Superintendent (832)904-5610 mike(ajemhou.com Saul Villanueva Project Foreman (281) 802-2091 Marji Carns Office Manager (281) 997-2640 marji@cmhou.com Lynnette McLain Project Coordinator (281) 997-2640 reception@cmhou.com Office Phone (281) 997-2640 Office Fax (281)485-4702 Physical Address Mailing Address 3908 3rd Street P.O. Box.1587 7 Pearland,TX 77581 Pearland,TX 77588 www.cmhou.com INC.• C ONSTRUCTION M ASTERS OF HOUSTON, ONSTRUCTION M ASTERS rb": „lob Campbell OF HOUSTON, INC. President bob@cmhou.com 713-253-7045 Employment History Construction Masters of Houston,Inc., Owner/President November 1987-Present Arrowhead Builders,Inc.,Owner/President September 1978-October 1.987 Super Value Store, CEO/President August 1978 -May 1996 Project History Sheldon ISD-Cravens ECA/Sheldon ECA Renovations I-Iouston,TX $263,525.30 Dickinson IS.D-Food Nutrition Warehouse Dickinson,TX $698,486.00 Pearland City Hall Complex Renovation Pearland,TX $6,124,000.00 Heritage Bank-Growth&Lease Spaces Build-out - Lake Jackson,TX $295;502.00 Texas Gulf Bank-Lake Jackson -Teller Line Lake Jackson,TX $142,000.00 Texas Gulf Bank-Clute-Teller Line Clute, TX $176,500.00 ACU-Brenham-Disaster Recovery Center Brenham,TX $640,800.00 Nottingham Country Elementary-Life Skills Remodel Katy, TX $375,818.00 Heritage Bank Lake Jackson,TX $2,315,791.00 Traylor Office Building Pearland,TX $861,000.00 San Jacinto College-North-Baseball Facility Houston,TX $622,648.00 Cm\ ACU-Deer Park-Remodel Deer Park,TX $768,545.00 ACU-La Marque-New Roof&Mechanical La Marque,TX $256,698.53 NCI-5th St. Stafford,TX $24,973.31 NCI-Austin St. Richmond,TX $82,514.59 MGArchitects Office Houston,TX $799,388.20 Texas Gulf Bank-Voss Houston,TX $110,269.42 Texas Gulf Bank-Angleton Angleton,TX $246,426.09 Westbound Bank-FM 529 Branch Houston,TX $1,149,307.00 Westbound Bank-Conroe Branch Conroe,TX $1,170,350.00 NCI-Rosenberg Workforce Solutions Rosenberg,TX $767,634.96 Brazoria County Courthouse Restroom Remodel Angleton,TX $272,645.94 Texas Gulf Bank-Town&Country(Demo&Remodel) Houston,TX $884,575.36 ACU Corporate Driveway Expansion League City,TX $272,320.83 Ashford Crossing/Lincoln Properties Houton,TX $138,885.00 Brazoria County Sheriffs Office Angleton,TX $155,000.00 Brazosport College Welding Lab Lake Jackson,TX $3,730;000.00 Pinnac.leAlS Phase III Pasadena,TX $1,531:,894.00 Brazoria County Pct. 4 Manvel,TX $2,442,000.00 Pearland Westside Library Expansion Pearland,TX $290,000.00 NCI-Almeda Workforce Solutions Houston,TX $607,000.00 PinnacleAlS Phase II Pasadena,TX $2,978.375.00 Max Road Sports Complex Pearland,TX $2,521,315.38 ri*\ Anytime Fitness League City,TX $108,271.00 Cteekside Shopping Center League City,TX $847,910.02 � � ' ONSTRUCTION l ` ,�i< OF HOUSTON, INC. Booster Pump Station Webster,TX $1,186.000.00 Ipswich Road Repairs at Hobby Airport Houston,TX $143,905.32 Associated Credit Union Fry Rd. Cypress,TX $1,166,409.00 Progressive Commercial Aquatics Houston,TX $162,375.00 First Community Credit Union Parking Lot Expansion Houston,TX $270,100.00 Pinnacle AIS I New Construction Pasadena,.TX $1,229,962.00 Manuel EMS Facility/New Construction Mauve!,TX $1,542,398.00 SJC Central Child Care/New Construction Pasadena,TX $2,900,000.00 SJC YUM Renovations Pasadena,TX $948,248.00 Urology of Houston • Pasadena,TX .$1,800,000.00 Brazoria Co.PCT 3/New Construction Alvin,TX $2,575,830.00 San Jacinto College District/Hurricane Recovery Multiple Sites_ $7,000,000.00 i Associated Credit Union of Texas/Renovation La Marque,TX $850,000.00 Broadway-518 Business Ceniter/New Construction Pearland,TX $1,877,000.00 1 San Jacinto College District/Renovation Multiple Sites $2,280,984.00 1 Bobcat of Houston/Renovation Houston,TX $879,000.00 Bach Facility Addition/New Construction $705,500.00 Silver Pear Strip Center Phase I/New Construction Pearland, TX $1,706,700.00 1 Grady B.Rasco Middle School/New Construction Lake Jackson, TX $2,142,300.00 University of Texas Medical Branch/New Construction Galveston,TX $1,001,000.00 Beneke Elementary School-Spring ISD/New Construction $1,983,000.00 JSC Credit Union/Renovation $150,000.00 Aerodome Sugar Land/Renovation Sugar Land,TX $374,740.00 LaPorte Fire Station/New Construction La Porte,TX $782,850.00 McReynolds&Grady Middle Schools-Houston ISD/Renovation $4,544,789.00 K&G Retail Center Phase II/New Construction $800,000.00 Compaq Center/Renovation(Flood Damage) Houston,TX $5,000,000.00 Compaq Center/Renovation Houston, TX $1,450,000.00 Muilenburg Prosthetics/Renovation $440,000.00 Golfcrest Country Club Pearland,TX $601,000.00 Friendswood Administration Building/Renovation Friendswood,TX $740,000.00 K&G Strip Center-Phase I/New Construction $600,000.00 Matrix Rehabilitation/Renovation $170,000.00 Pearland High School-Pearland ISD/Renovation Pearland,TX $1,161,500.00 Brazoria County Jail/New Construction $1,100,000.00 Brazoria County Substation/Renovation $272,938.00 References Jack Click Associated Credit Union.of Texas 409-945-4474 jclick@acutx.org Mike Harris San Jacinto College District 281-998-6338 mike.harris@sjcd.edu ., ONSTRUCTION MASTERS (illib'' •OF HOUSTON, INC. Justin ail{avis Vice President; Lead Project Manager justin@cmhou.com 281-960-4491 Employment History • Construction Masters of Houston,Inc. 1998-2004&2006-Present Project History Sheldon ISD-Cravens ECA/Sheldon ECA Renovations Houston,TX $263,525.30 Dickinson ISD-Food Nutrition Warehouse Dickinson,TX $698,486.00 Pearland City Hall Complex Renovation Pearland,TX $6,124,000.00 Heritage Bank-Growth&Lease Spaces Build-out Lake Jackson, TX $295,502.00 Texas Gulf Bank-Lake Jackson-Teller Line Lake Jackson,TX $142,000.00 Texas Gulf Bank-Clute-Teller Line Clute,TX $176,500.00 ACU-Brenham-Disaster Recovery Center Brenham,TX $640,800.00 Nottingham Country Elementary-Life Skills Remodel Katy,TX $375,818.00 Heritage Bank Lake Jackson, TX $2,315,791.00 Traylor Office Building Pearland,TX $861,000.00 San Jacinto College-North-Baseball Facility Houston,TX $622,648.00 ACU-Deer Park-Remodel Deer Park,TX $768,545.00 (10."\ ACU-La Marque-New Roof&Mechanical La Marque,TX $256,698.53 NCI-5th St. Stafford,TX $24,973.3,1 NCI-Austin St. Richmond,TX $82,514.59 MGArchitects Office Houston,TX $799,388.20 Texas Gulf Bank-Voss Houston,TX $110,269.42 Texas Gulf Bank-Angleton Angleton,TX $246,426.09 Westbound Bank-FM 529 Branch Houston,TX $1,149,307.00 Westbound Bank-Conroe Branch Conroe,TX $1,170,350.00 NCI-Rosenberg Workforce Solutions Rosenberg,TX $767,634.96 Brazoria County Courthouse Restroom Remodel Angleton,TX $272,645.94 Texas Gulf Bank-Town&Country(Demo &Remodel) Houston,TX $884,575.36 ACU Corporate Driveway Expansion League City,TX $272,320.83 Ashford Crossing/L ncoln Properties Houston,TX $138,885.00 Brazoria County Sheriffs Office Angleton,.TX $155,000.00 Brazosport College Welding Lab Lake Jackson,TX $3,730,000.00 PinnacleAlS Phase III Pasadena,TX $1,531,894.00 Brazoria County Pct. 4 Manvel,TX $2,442,000.00 Pearland Westside Library Expansion Pearland, TX $290,000.00 NCI-Almeda Workforce Solutions Houston,TX $607,000.00 PinnacleAlS Phase II Pasadena,TX $2,978.375.00 Max Road Sports Complex Pearland,TX $2,521,315.38 Anytime Fitness League City, TX $108,271.00 t Creekside Shopping Center League City,TX $847,910.02 Booster Pump Station Webster,TX $1,186.000.00 Ipswich Road Repairs at Hobby Airport Houston,'TX $143,905.32 Associated Credit Union Fry Rd. Cypress,TX $1,166,409.00 ; . CONSTRUCTION MASTERS OF HOUSTON, INC. Progressive Commercial Aquatics Houston,TX $162,375.00 First Community Credit Union Parking Lot Expansion Houston,TX $270;100.00 Integrity Bank Pasadena Pasadena,TX $1,740,733.00 MidSouth Bank-Magnolia Magnolia,TX $299,506.00 Integrity Bank Woodlands Shenandoah,TX $534,994.00 Pearland ISD Turner HS Renovations Pearland,TX $254,477.00 First Community Credit Union- Woodlands The Woodlands,TX $107,300.00 MidSouth Bank-Veterans Houston,TX $198,134.00 Texas Gulf Bank-West University Houston,TX $344,256.00 Pearland Westside Library Pearland,TX $380,726.00 Northwest Pines Houston,TX $856,000.00 Southwest Water Reclamation Facility League City,TX $2,586,590.00 South Main Baptist Church Pasadena,TX $1,000,000.00 Manvel EMS Manvel,TX $1,542,398.00 Texas Gulf Bank of Friendswood Friendswood,TX $1,411,278.00 San Jacinto College District Child Care Lab School _ Pasadena,TX $2,900,000.00 PinnaceeAlS Office Complex Pasadena,TX $1,229,962.00 Associated Credit Union of Texas-Headquarters League City,TX $6,137,582.00 Brazoria County EMS Facility Manvel,TX $1,542,398.00 San Jacinto College YUM Kitchen Renovations Multiple Sites $958,154.00 Brazoria County Commissioner's Office Alvin,TX $2,575,830.00 San Jacinto College Hurricane Repairs Multiple Sites $7,145,019.00 Brazoria County Justice of the Peace Office Pearland,TX $828,000.00 Urology of Houston Medical Clinic Pasadena,TX $1,800,000.00 Broadway 518 Business Center Pearland,TX $1,877,000.00 Cooperative Purchasing Approximately$1,750,000 Annually References Troy Kennedy Arcon Architects 281-316-6392 troy@arcon-solutions.com Eric Batte MGArchitects 713-552-0707 ebatte@mgarchitects.com Mike Harris San Jacinto College District 281-998-6338 mike.harris@sjcd.edu Steve Cory PinnacleART 281-598-13'30 steve.cory@pinnacleart.com Dave Ferguson Manvel EMS 281-489-6144 dferguson@manvelems.org Gerald Hendrick II Brazoria County 979-864-1676 geraldh@brazoria-county.com Rich Jochetz Texas Gulf Bank 713-595-7401 jochetz@texasgulfbank.com Raymond Burroughs Architecture Etc.* 979-297-1184 rurroughs@archetc.com Education & Certifications Houston Baptist University: Bachelors of Business Adminstration; Marketing ONSTRUCTION MASTERS OF HOUSTON, INC. Den is us1sy Project Manager / Superintendent dennis@cmhou.com 281-780-3871 Employment History Construction Masters of Houston, Inc. August 2008-Present Northwinds Construction February 2007-August 2008 Teal Construction September 2005 -February 2007 K.D.Development July 2002-September 2005 Wood Master Building Company October 1999 -May 2002 Project History Sheldon ISD-Cravens ECA/Sheldon ECA Renovations Houston,TX $263,525.30 Dickinson ISD-Food Nutrition Warehouse Dickinson,TX $698,486.00 ACU-Brenham-Disaster Recovery Center Brenham,TX $640,800.00 ACU -Deer Park-Remodel Deer Park,TX $768,545.00 ACU-La Marque-New Roof&Mechanical La Marque,TX $256,698.53 NCI-5th St. Stafford,TX $24,973.31 rh.‘ NCI-Austin St. Richmond,TX $82,514.59 MGArchitects Office Houston,TX $799,388.20 Texas Gulf Bank-Voss Houston,TX $110,269.42 Texas Gulf Bank-Angleton Angleton,TX $246,426.09 Westbound Bank-FM 529 Branch Houston,TX $1,149,307.00 Westbound Bank-Conroe Branch Conroe,TX $1,170,350.00 NCI- Rosenberg Workforce Solutions Rosenberg,TX $767,634.96 Brazoria County Courthouse Restroom Remodel Angleton,TX $272,645.94 Texas Gulf Bank-Town&Country(Demo &Remodel) Houston,TX $884,575.36 ACU Corporate Driveway Expansion League City,TX $272,320.83 Ashford Crossing/Lincoln Properties Houston,TX $138,885.00 Brazoria County Sheriffs Office Angleton,TX $155,000.00 Brazosport College Welding Lab Lake Jackson,TX $3,730,000.00 PinnacleAlS Phase III Pasadena,TX $1,531,894.00 Brazoria County Pct.4 Manvel,TX $2,442,000.00 Pearland Westside Library Expansion Pearland,TX $290,000.00 NCI-Almeda Workfoce Solutions Houston,TX $607,000.00 Associated Credit Union Fry Rd. Cypress,TX $1,166,409.00 Progressive Commercial Aquatics Houston,TX $162,375.00 First Community Credit Union Parking Lot Expansion Houston,TX $270,100.00 Integrity Bank Woodlands Shenandoah,TX $534,994.00 Harris County ESD#1 (Fire Station&Clinic) Houston,TX $97,525.00 MidSouth Bank Phase II/Veterans/Greenspoint Branch Houston,TX $198,134.28 Northwest Pines Club House Houston,TX $957,157.00 League City SWWRF League City,TX $2,586,590.00 Manvel EMS Manvel,TX $1,542,398.00 Texas Gulf Bank Renovation Lake Jackson,TX $213,983.50 : ,, .ONSTRUCTION f MASTERS �� OI HOUSTON, INC. 'r."7, References Dave Ferguson Manvel EMS 832-731-6355 dferguson@manvelems.org Rich Jochetz Texas Gulf Bank 713-595-7401 jochetz@texasgulfbank.com Troy Kennedy Arcon Architects 281-316-6392 troy@arcon-solutions.com Eric Batte MGArchitects 713-552-0707 ebatte@mgarchitects.com i I Education & Certifications Certified: Fork Lift i I 9 • ID 1 Task Task Name �� Duration Start October November December i lanuaiy 0 Mode ___. B l M l E © M E 8 M E B M E 1 1534 Tom Recd Library 210 days Mon, el 2 a Front End Documents 35 days Mon i 3 1v4 Issue Subcontracts 5 days Mon 1 4 Er 4 Critial Submittals 30 days Mon i 5 Egi.a Mobilization 2 days Mon i 6 I t Construction Fence 1 day Mon 1 , 7 I to% Office Trailer 1 day Tue 4) I I 8 epa SWPPP 1 day Tue 4) I 9 Temporary Controls 1 day Tue 4) 10 ez. 4 Building Addition 198 days Wed 4 1.1 Building Shell 76 days Wed 4 I 12 w. Prepare Site 2 days Wed 4 13 sr 4 Excavate Pad Site 2 days Fri 4/2 I 14 Import Fill Dirt 4 days Tue 4/ I (171 15 au. 4 Building Piers 5 days Mon 51 16 tv. 4 Underslab Plumbing 5 days Mon 5; 17 Building Foundation 8 days Mon 5) 1 18 a Erect Structural Steel 15 days Thu SA1 79izpa Install roof decking 5 days Thu 6/? 20 i Set roof curbs 1 day Thu 6/e— 21 itlt. CFMF at Exterior Walls 4 days Thu,6/2 i 22 ! -1,3 Wood Blocking at 2 days Wed I Parapets 6/28/11 23 , ; Exterior Sheathing 4 days Fri 6/36 24 OF. Roofing 10 days Fri 6/3d 25 115. Waterproofing 7 clays Y Thu 7/6 26 NP4Brick Veneer 5 days Y Mon 7/ 27 EP 4 Stucco Veneer 8 days Mon 7/; Project:Project Schedule 2-15- Task t Manual Progress wimaesuasaatemeremoreat Date:Wed 2/15/17 Split --�_®_ Milestone �,iiiiiiiiiira.iiii Pi it r I ID Task Task Name Duration start October i November I December January ----.._ _.Mode _ I_ e 1 M �_ E i B I M E B _..�e_ M E B ! M __�— 28 ter, Install exterior 5 days Thu 71 windows 29a Interior Buildout- 29 days Thu 7 Addition j 30 u34 a Sheet Metal Ductwork 3 days Thu 7/ 31 Insulate Ductwork 3 days Fri 7/1 32 l Frame Interior Walls 2 days Wed 7 1 33 Electrical Wall 7 days Fri 7/2 Rough-in 34 E7.4 Plumbing Wall 7 days Fri 7/2 Rough-in —35~ ram, Insulate Walls 2 days Tue 8/, ' I 36 mr=4 Drywall installation 3 days Thu 8/ 37 MIS Install Door Frames 2 days Tue 8/ i 1 38 BM Tape&Float Drywall 6 days Tue 8/ I j 39 154 Above ceiling electrical 10 days Tue 8/I rough-in 40 IA Eq.1 Last Day of Summer 0 days Tue 8/ Reading Program 41 air a Demo exterior wall at 4 days Tue 8A existing building I 42 Interior Buildout-All 110 days Mon 81 I I 43 633 Demo ceilings 3 days Mon 81 44 up Demo ductwork 3 days Thu 8 i 1 45 EP a Demo Interior Walls 2 days. Thu 8/ 1 Frame New Walls 3 days Mon 8f Electrical at New Walls 4 days Thu 8 Drywall at New Walls 7 days Wed 9), 49 Install Sprinkler Piping 17 days Tue 8/2 j I 10 days I 1 Duct Work Tue 8/2 51 1 ElEt4 Insulate Ductwork 3 days Tue 9 1 52 Overhead Electrical 20 days Wed g 1 53 i / E ACT GridMII 5 days Wed 10 54 } 1 Install Lights 7 days Wed 10 i Project:Project-Schedule 2-15- i 3 Task = Manual Progress Date:Wed 2/15/17 split ' Milestone ..;............. .„ P.' p ham--- r i ID ;Task Task Name Duration Start i October I November !December I Janua ' :Mode B M _-E__1_._B__. M E B M L E __g.... ..._I 1 �___E 55 tzi. a Flex,Registers&Grilles3 days Wed 1 i , 56 Ceiling Tiles 4 days Fri 10) 1 ri S7 Trim Ceiling Devices 3 days Thu 1� 58 Millwork 10 days Thu 1b S9 Flooring 15 days Thu 11 ;s_ 1 60 a Plumbing Fixtures 3 days Thu 11 jwfit Paint Walls 10 days Thu 11 ""' i 62 I to. Trim Electrical Devices 4 days Thu 1 12/14) 63 r3. , Swing Doors 3 days Thu 11 Sri 63 64 Toilet Partitions/ 2 days Thu `r Accessories 11/302 I E 65 r Rubber-Base 2 days Thu 12 ri ; ' i iT 66 cg. 4 Interior Glazing 2 days Thu 101 67 I E Punch Out 7 days Thu 11j :, .1—68 i EA Added Time for 30 days Mon i Coordinating with 12/11/ rib\ Library Schedule ! I 69 zy, 4 Site Work 76 days Wed 4) 70 EP 4 Enlarge Detention 6 days Mon 5) J Pond 71 Seed Pond 1 day Tue 5/5 72 RI Demo Islands 4 days Tue 5/S 73 Prepare Subgrade at 5 days Mon ' Paving 5/15/1; 74 Iz4 Place Paving 10 days Thu 5/2- 75 ` Install Pole Light Bases 3 days Thu 6/f _ I 76-1 Pole Lights 3 days Y Tue 6/1 77 EEPDumpster Enclosure 2 days Thu 6 8 78 Exterior Painting 10 days Thu 7/2 _ 79 24 Water Line Installation 20 days Wed 4/ 80 EPSanitary Sewer 7 days Installation Y Wed i — =—�.-- — 5/17/1i _ _____ Task n r, Progress Manual Pro Project:Project Schedule 2-15- � � 4 si Date:Wed 2/15/17 Spilt L Milestone ® Ir i I 1 Construction 'asters of Huston PROJECT MANUAL OVERVIEW It is our policy to provide a work environment that is inherently safe -- free from conditions that are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to the health and safety of our personnel and the subcontractors with whom we work. Prior to performing work, job site personnel will be made aware of our safety and health policies as well as appropriate safety standards to prevent accidents and injuries. Accident prevention demands a commitment from all personnel. That commitment includes an awareness of proper work methods, use of personal protective equipment, and proper use of tools and equipment. Competent persons will, on an on-going basis, review work procedures and adherence to safety standards and immediately address areas in which deficiencies are found. Defective tools and equipment will be immediately taken out of service. Only those qualified by training or experience may operate machinery and equipment. We want all personnel to become actively involved in our safety program. Suggestions for improved safety procedures are welcome. Safety meetings will be held on a regular basis and they will address safety issues appropriate to the work at hand. During these meetings, employees are encouraged to raise any safety related question or concern. On multi- contractor job sites, safety meetings may, depending on the circumstances, focus on the hazards created by other contractors and how those hazards may impact on our personnel. Project manuals will be kept at individual job sites to enable the supervisors, competent person(s), employees, and subcontractors to have quick reference to major safety requirements of items of equipment or work procedures. This manual is not a complete safety program; our complete detailed safety program is maintained at our main office located at: 3908 3rd Street Pearland, TX 77581 On the job site, safety concerns should be resolved by your supervisor or the competent person. All personnel are free to, and encouraged to, review appropriate OSHA safety standards maintained in our safety program. Immediately following this manual are job site forms appropriate for our work. Construction Masters of Houston PROJECT MANUAL ©2008 U.S.Compliance Systems,Inc. (888)475-5353. Permission is granted to copy for internal use. 'ONSTRUCTION Clis"\ MASTES '''S .OF HOUSTON, INC. Quails; Manual 1.0 Scope and Exclusions Scope This Quality Manual contains policies that have been implemented at Construction Masters of Houston, Inc., 3908 Third St. Pearland, TX 77581 2.0 Quality Management System The organization has established, documented, implemented and currently maintains a quality management system. The organization: • has determined the processes needed for the quality management system and their application throughout the organization, • determined the sequence and interaction of these processes, • determined criteria and methods needed to ensure that both the operation and control of these processes are effective, o ensures the availability of resources and information necessary to support the operation and monitoring of these processes, o monitors, measures where applicable, and analyzes these processes, and • implements actions necessary to achieve planned results and continual improvement of these processes. 3.0 Management Responsibility Top management, Justin Davis and Bob Campbell, provides evidence of its commitment to the development and implementation of the quality management system and continually improve its effectiveness by: Communicating to the organization the importance of meeting customer as well as statutory and regulatory requirements, establishing the quality policy, ensuring that quality objectives are established, conducting management reviews, and ensuring the availability of resources. 4.0 Resources Management The organization determines and provides the resources needed to implement and maintain the quality management system and continually improve its effectiveness and to enhance customer satisfaction by meeting customer requirements. 5.0 Product Realization In planning product realization, the organization determines the following, as appropriate: Quality objectives and requirements for the product, the need to establish processes and documents, and to provide resources specific to the product, required verification, validation, monitoring, measurement, inspection and test activities, specific to the product and the criteria for product acceptance, records needed to provide evidence that the realization processes and resulting product meet requirements. 6.0 Measurement, analysis and improvement The organization plans and implements the monitoring, measurement, analysis and improvement processes needed: To demonstrate conformity to product requirements, to ensure conformity of the quality management system, and to continually improve the effectiveness of the quality management system. This includes determination of applicable methods, including statistical techniques, and the extent of their use. The Quality Department is responsible for systems related to monitoring, measurement, analysis and rb\ improvement. Printed copy valid for 24 hours front time of printing unless stamped"CONTROLLED COPY"in red Date printed 7/19/16 3:05 PM Page 1 of 1 Title VI Nondiscrimination Assurances APPENDIX A During the performance of this contract, the contractor, for itself, its assignees and successors in interest (hereinafter referred to as the "contractor") agrees as follows: (1) Compliance with Regulations: The contractor shall comply with the Regulations relative to nondiscrimination in Federally-Assisted programs of the Department of Transportation (hereinafter, "DOT") Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 21, as they may be amended from time to time, (hereinafter referred to as the Regulations), which are herein incorporated by reference and made a part of this contract. (2) Nondiscrimination: The contractor, with regard to the work performed by it during the contract, shall not discriminate on the grounds of race, color, or national origin in the selection and retention of subcontractors, including procurements of materials and leases of equipment. The contractor shall not participate either directly or indirectly in the discrimination prohibited by Section 21.5 of the Regulations, including employment practices when the contract covers a program set forth in Appendix B of the Regulations. (3) Solicitations for Subcontracts, including Procurements of Materials and Equipment: In all solicitations either by competitive bidding or negotiation made by the contractor for work to be performed under a subcontract, including procurements of materials or leases of equipment, each potential subcontractor or supplier shall be notified by the contractor of the contractor's obligations under this contract and the Regulations relative to nondiscrimination on the grounds of race, color, or national origin. (4) Information and Reports: The contractor shall provide all information and reports required by the Regulations or directives issued pursuant thereto, and shall permit access to its books, records, accounts, other sources of information, and its facilities as may be determined by the Sub-Recipient or the Federal Highway Administration to be pertinent to ascertain compliance with such Regulations, orders and instructions. Where any information required of a contractor is in the exclusive possession of another who fails or refuses to furnish this information the contractor shall so certify to the Sub-Recipient, or the Federal Highway Administration as appropriate, and shall set forth what efforts it has made to obtain the information. (5) Sanctions for Noncompliance: In the event of the contractor's noncompliance with the nondiscrimination provisions of this contract, the Sub-Recipient shall impose such contract sanctions as it or the Federal Highway Administration may determine to be appropriate, including, but not limited to: (a) withholding of payments to the contractor under the contract until the rjb.\ contractor complies, and/or (b) cancellation, termination or suspension of the contract, in whole or in part. (6) Incorporation of Provisions:The contractor shall include the provisions of paragraphs (1) through (6) in every subcontract, including procurements of materials and leases of equipment, unless exempt by the Regulations, or directives issued pursuant thereto. The contractor shall take such action with respect to any subcontract or procurement as the Sub-Recipient or the Federal Highway Administration may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions including sanctions for non-compliance. Provided, however, that, in the event a contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or supplier as a result of such direction, the contractor may request the Sub-Recipient to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the Sub-Recipient, and, in addition, the contractor may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States. CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT • Section 00500 STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT is by and between City of Pearland (hereinafter called OWNER or City) and Construction Masters of Houston.Inc. (hereinafter called CONTRACTOR). OWNER and CONTRACTOR, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree as follows: Article 1. WORK CONTRACTOR shall complete all work as specified or indicated in or reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents (hereinafter the "Work"). The Work is generally described as follows: Tom Reid Library Addition &Renovation City of Pearland,Texas COP PN: F20002 BID NO.: 1117-08 Article 2. ENGINEER The Work has been designed by Dewberry Architects, who is hereinafter called ENGINEER and who is to assume all duties and responsibilities and have the rights and authority assigned to ENGINEER in the Contract Documents in connection with completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Article 3. CONTRACT TIME 3.1 The Work will be Substantially Complete (as defined in Article 1 of the General Conditions) within 365 days (including weekends and holidays) from the date when the Contract Time commences to run as provided in paragraph 5.01 of the General Conditions (as revised in the Special Conditions if applicable), and completed and ready for Final Payment within 425 days from the date when the Contract Time commences to run. No work will be allowed on Sundays. 3.2 Liquidated Damages. OWNER and CONTRACTOR recognize that time is of the essence of this Agreement and that OWNER will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in paragraph 3.1 above, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 5 of the General Conditions. OWNER and CONTRACTOR also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration preceding the actual loss suffered by OWNER if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that as liquidated damages for �'` delay (but not as a penalty) CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER five hundred 4 dollars ($500.00) for each day that expires after the time specified in paragraph 3.1 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. After 4-2015 00500- 1 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT Substantial Completion, if CONTRACTOR shall neglect, refuse or fail to complete the remaining Work within the time set out in the Certificate of Substantial Completion or any proper extension thereof granted by OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall pay OWNER one thousand dollars ($1,000.00) for each day that expires after the time specified in the Certificate of Substantial Completion for completion and readiness for Final Payment. 3.3 Inspection Time. Working hours for the Pearland Inspection personnel are from 7:30 a.m. to 4:30 p.m., Monday through Friday, excluding City approved holidays. The Contractor shall notify the OWNER of any required inspection overtime work at least 48 hours in advance and shall pay the overtime wages for the required City inspections. Article 4. CONTRACT PRICE 4.1 OWNER shall pay CONTRACTOR for completion of the Work in strict accordance with the Contract Documents in current funds $3,319,200.00 (the "Contract Price"). The Contract Price includes the Base Bid and Alternates #1, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, and 9, as accepted by OWNER and as shown in Document 00300—Bid Proposal. Article 5. PAYMENT PROCEDURES CONTRACTOR shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Section 6.0 "Measurement and Payment" of the General Conditions. Application for Payment will be processed by ENGINEER as provided in the General Conditions. 5.1 Progress Payments. OWNER shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Price on the basis of CONTRACTOR's Application for Payment as recommended by ENGINEER as provided below. All progress payments will be on the basis of the progress of the Work and actual quantity of Work completed, in accordance with Article 6 "Measurement and Payment" of the General Conditions. 5.1.1 Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount equal to the percentage or actual quantity of Work complete, but, in each case, less the aggregate of payments previously made and less such amounts as ENGINEER shall determine, or OWNER may withhold, in accordance with the General Conditions. The OWNER shall make payment within 30 days of receipt of application for payment by the ENGINEER. 5.1.2 Each progress payment shall be less retainage as specified in Paragraph 6.06 of the General Conditions, and further less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by the OWNER under the terms of this Agreement. It is understood, however, that in case the whole work be near to completion and some unexpected and unusual delay occurs due to no fault or neglect on the part of the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER may upon \ written recommendation of the ENGINEER pay a reasonable and equitable portion of the retained percentage to the CONTRACTOR, or the 4-2015 00500-2of7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT CONTRACTOR at the OWNER's option, may be relieved of the obligation to fully complete the Work and, thereupon, the CONTRACTOR shall receive payment of the balance due him under the contract subject only to the conditions stated under"Final Payment." 5.2 Final Payment. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work in accordance with paragraph 6.09 of the General Conditions, OWNER shall pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by ENGINEER as provided in said paragraph 6.09. Article 6. INTEREST Interest on any overdue payment from OWNER to CONTRACTOR shall be paid in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2251.025 of the Texas Government Code, as amended. Article 7. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS In order to induce OWNER to enter into this Agreement CONTRACTOR makes the following representations: 7.1 CONTRACTOR has familiarized himself with the nature and extent of the Contract Documents, Work, site, locality, and all local conditions and Laws and Regulations that in any manner may affect cost, progress, performance, or furnishing of the Work. 7.2 CONTRACTOR has studied carefully all available surveys, assessments, reports of explorations, investigations, and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions of the site. Such technical reports and drawings are not Contract Documents, and Owner makes no representations or warranties as to the accuracy of such documents or information, or to whether or not they are complete, comprehensive, or all-inclusive. 7.3 CONTRACTOR has obtained and carefully studied (or assumes responsibility for obtaining and carefully studying) all such examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, and studies (in addition to or to supplement those referred to in paragraphs 7.2 above) which pertain to the subsurface or physical conditions at or contiguous to the site or otherwise may affect the cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the Work, and CONTRACTOR assumes the risk of such subsurface and physical conditions, and shall furnish the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents; and no additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, and studies or similar information or data are or will be required by CONTRACTOR for such purposes. 7.4 CONTRACTOR has reviewed and checked all information and data shown or indicated on the Contract documents with respect to existing underground facilities at or contiguous to the site and assumes responsibility for the accurate location of said underground facilities. No additional examinations, investigations, 4-2015 00500-3 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT explorations, tests, reports, studies or similar information or data in respect of said underground facilities are or will be required by CONTRACTOR in order to perform and finish the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 7.5 CONTRACTOR has correlated the results of all such observations, examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, reports, and studies with the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 7.6 CONTRACTOR has given ENGINEER written notice of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents of which Contractor knew or should have known, and CONTRACTOR shall perform the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Time and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including any written resolution of any such conflict, error or discrepancy by ENGINEER. In the event of a conflict that was not brought to the OWNER's or ENGINEER's attention prior to the bid, the CONTRACTOR is assumed to have bid the most expensive alternative. Article 8. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents, which comprise the entire agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR concerning the Work, consist of the following, each of which are incorporated herein by reference: ` 1 8.1 Standard Form of Agreement(Section 00500). 8.2 Performance, Payment, and/or Maintenance Bonds (Sections 00610, 00611, and 00612). 8.3 General Conditions of Agreement (Section 00700), including Attachment No. 1 Workers' Compensation Insurance Coverage, Attachment No. 2 Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release, and Attachment No. 3 Owner's Insurance Requirements of Contractor. 8.4 Special Conditions of Agreement(Section 00800). 8.5 Plans, consisting of sheets numbered 1 through 87 (refer to "Drawing List" on cover of drawing set) inclusive with attachments with each sheet bearing the following general title: Tom Reid Library Addition &Renovation 8.6 Instructions to Bidders and CONTRACTOR's Bid Proposal, including any Addenda referenced therein. 8.7 Technical Specifications for the Work. 8.8 The following, which may be delivered or issued after this Agreement becomes eh\ effective: Any Change Orders or other documents amending, modifying, or supplementing the Contract Documents in accordance with the General Conditions. 4-2015 00500-4 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 8. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified or supplemented as provided in the General Conditions. Article 9. MISCELLANEOUS 9.1 Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in Section 1, "Definitions and Interpretations" of the General Conditions will have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions. 9.2 No assignment by a party hereto of any rights under or interests in the Contract Documents will be binding on another party hereto without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and specifically but without limitation moneys that may become due and moneys that are due may not be assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent to an assignment, no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or responsibility under the Contract Documents. 9.3 OWNER and CONTRACTOR each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representative to the other party hereto, its partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives in respect of all covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. 9.4 CONTRACTOR agrees to warranty the Work for a period of one (1) year from Substantial Completion against defects in materials and workmanship. CONTRACTOR agrees to repair or replace any defective work within this warranty period immediately unless such repairs require long lead time materials and equipment in which case CONTRACTOR shall provide an agreeable schedule for repairs at no additional cost to OWNER. 9.5 The Work will be completed according to the Contract Documents and in accordance with codes, ordinances, and construction standards of the City of Pearland, and all applicable laws, codes and regulations of governmental authorities. 9.6 In the event any notice period required under the Contract Documents is found to be shorter than any minimum period prescribed by applicable law, the notice period required shall be construed to be the minimum period prescribed by applicable law. 9.7 This Contract and the Contract Documents, insofar as they relate in any part or in any way to the Work undertaken therein, constitute the entire agreement between the parties hereto, and it is expressly understood and agreed that there are no agreements or promises by and between said parties, except as aforesaid, and that any additions thereto or changes shall be in writing. \ 9.8 The provisions of this Contract shall be applied and interpreted in a manner consistent with each other so as to carry out the purposes and the intent of the parties, but if for any reason any provision is unenforceable or invalid, such 4-2015 00500-5 of 7 • CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT provisions shall be deemed severed from this Contract and the remaining provisions shall be carried out with the same force and effect as if the severed provision had not been part of this Contract. 9.9 The headings of the paragraphs are included solely for the convenience of reference and if there is any conflict between the headings and the text of this Contract, the Contract text shall control. 9.10 The waiver of any breach hereof shall not constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach of the same or any other provision hereof. Failure by the OWNER in any instance to insist upon observance or performance by CONTRACTOR shall not be deemed a waiver by CONTRACTOR of any such observance or performance. No waiver will be binding upon OWNER unless in writing and then will be for the particular instance only. Payment of any sum by OWNER to CONTRACTOR with knowledge of any breach or default will not be deemed a waiver of such breach or default or any other breach or default. 9.11 The CONTRACTOR acknowledges that the OWNER (through its employee handbook) considers the following to be misconduct that is grounds for termination of an employee of the OWNER: Any fraud, forgery, misappropriation of funds, receiving payment for services not performed or for hours not worked, mishandling or untruthful reporting of money transactions, destruction of assets, embezzlement, accepting materials of value from vendors, or consultants, and/or collecting reimbursement of expenses made for the benefit of the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR agrees that it will not, directly or indirectly; cause an employee of the OWNER to engage in such misconduct. 9.12 The CONTRACTOR agrees to comply with Appendix A (attached) of the City of Pearland's Title VI Nondiscrimination Plan Assurances. 4-2015 00500-6 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT IN WITNESS WHEREOF, OWNER and CONTRACTOR have signed this Agreement in duplicate. One counterpart each has been delivered to OWNER and one to CONTRACTOR. This Agreement will be effective upon execution and attestation by authorized representatives of the City of Pearland and upon the following date: 4/7/ c.25. , 20/7. OWNER: CONTRACTOR: CITY OF P A CONS ION ASTERS OF HOUSTON, INC. By: By • Title: / a..vi e Title: V a President Date: q. 26-. /7 Date: April 19, 2017 (Corporate Seal) ATTEST filth/ ATTEST LC 14— Address for giving notices •Wlq,y�•,, P. O. Box 1587 Pearland, TX 77588 /\ co; .. ..'''fin \\\N```,`� Phone: 281-997-2640 Fax: 281-485-4702 Agent for service of process: J ". v�5 t \e END OF SECTION 4-2015 00500-7of7 Bond No. 54-216168 I_ CITY OF PEARLAND PERFORMANCE BOND Section 00610 PERFORMANCE BOND STATE.OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF BRAZORIA KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Construction Masters of Houston, Inc. of the City of Pearland , County of Brazoria , and State of Texas, as principal, and United Fire&Casualty Company authorized under the laws of the State of Texas tO act as surety on bonds for principals, are held and firmly bound unto City of Pearland as Obligee (Owner),in the penal sum of$ 3319,200 for the. payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors, and assigns,jointly and severally,by these presents: WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Owner,effective as of the 10th day of April , 2017 , (the "Contract") to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: Tom Reid Library Addition&Renovation City of Pearland,Texas COP PN: F20002 BID NO.: 1117-08 which Contract,.including the Contract Documents as defined therein, is.hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein: NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform said Contract Work and shall in all respects duly and faithfully observe and perform all and singular the covenants, conditions, and:agreements in and by said Contract agreed and covenanted by the Principal to be observed and performed, and according to the true intent and meaning of said Contract and.Contract Documents,then this obligation shall be void;otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Statute to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein: Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time,alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the Work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications, or drawings accompanying the same, shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond,and it does hereby waive notice of any such change,extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract,or to the Work to be performed thereunder. l 2/2007 00610- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEA RLAND PERFORMANCE BOND IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this 17th day of April , 2017 Principal: Surety: Cons tion Masters of Houston,Inc. United Fire&Casualty Compan By: By: / C� Title:: J stin Davis, Vice President Title: Donna Weinel,Attorney-in-Fact Address: Address: 3908 3rd Street 118 Second Avenue S.E. Pearland,Texas 77581 Cedar Rapids,Iowa 52401 Telephone: (281)997-2640 Telephone: (800)343-9130 Fax (281)485-4702 Fax: (888)726-9738 NOTICE: THE ADDRESS OF THE SURETY COMPANY TO WHICH ANY NOTICE OF CLAIM SHOULD BE SENT MAY BE OBTAINED FROM THE TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF INSURANCE BY CALLING ITS TOLL-FREE TELEPHONE NUMBER; 1-800-252-3439. END OF SECTION 12/2007. 00610-2 of 2 • U1NIEFEIJ FIRE&CASUALTY COMPANY,CEDAR RAPIDS,IA UNITED FIRE&INDEMNITY COMPANY,WEBSTER,TX Inquiries: Surety Department I18 Second AveFINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY,ROCKLIN,CA SE CERTIFIED COPY OF POWER OF ATTORNEY Cedar Rapids,IA 52401 (original on file at Home Office of Company-See Certification) KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS,That UNITED FIRE&CASUALTY COMPANY,a corporation duly organized and existing under he laws of the State of Iowa; UNITED FIRE& INDEMNITY COMPANY, a corporation_duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of exas; and FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY, a corporation duly organized and existing under the lawn of the State of California --therein collectively called the.Companies),and having their corporate headquarters in.Cedar Rapids;State of Iowa,does make,constitute and appoint A.A., SHOTWELL, JR.', MARK SMITH, BETTY BUSH, JOSEPH CHARLES BLACKSHEAR,' JR, DONNA WEINEL, EACH INDIVIDUALLY of TEXAS CITY TX • • their true and lawful'Attomey(s)-in-Fact with power and authority hereby conferred to sign,seal and execute in its behalf all lawful bonds,undertakings and other obligatory instruments of similar nature provided that no single obligation shall exceed $15,000,000.00 and to bind the Companies thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such instruments were signed by the duly authorized officers of the Companies and all of the acts of said Attorney,pursuant to the authority hereby given and hereby ratified and confirmed. • The Authority hereby granted is continuous and shall remain in full force and effect until revoked by UNI I EL)FIRE&CASUALTY COMPANY, UNITED FIRE&INDEMNITY COMPANY,AND FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY. . This Power of Attorney is.made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the following bylaw duly adopted on May 15,20.13'by the Boards of Directors of UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY, UNITED FIRE & INDEMNITY COMPANY, and FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY. "Article VI-Surety Bonds and Undertakings" Section 2,Appointment of Attorney-in-Fact. "The President or any Vice President, or any other officer of the Companies may,from time to .time, appoint by written certificates attorneys-in-fact to act in behalf of the Companies in the execution of policies:of insurance, bonds, undertakings and other obligatory instruments of like nature. The signature of any officer authorized hereby, and the Corporate seal, may be affixed by facsimile to any power of attorney or special power of attorney or certification of either authorized hereby;such signature and seal, when so used,being adopted by the Companies as the original signature of such officer and the original seal of the Companies,to be valid and binding upon the Companies with the same force and effect as though manually affixed. Such attorneys-in-fact, subject to the limitations set forth in their respective certificates of authority shall have full power to bind the Companies by their signature and execution of any such instruments:and to attach the seal of the Companies thereto. The President or any Vice President,the Board of Directors.or any other officer of el.'', - the Companies may at any time revoke all power and authority previously given to any attorney-in-fact. "",„,,,,,,,,,,. \11\�'w" / IN WITNESS WHEREOF,the COMPANIES have each caused these presents to be signed by its o` t ,` ,IC-�*.aPo' yc''';;vice president and its corporate seal to be hereto affixed this 28t h day of April., 2015 iz-e CORPORATE `,' E o coaronATE S ='1/EO �l",1n' —•— =Z ;_ ;�- ,u.Ya�0.1 = UNITED FIRE&CASUALTY COMPANY �`y' SEAL .�: •_° SEAL �:.• .sae UNITED FIRE& INDEMNITY COMPANY '/'' 1RBAPtDs a\`4 '''%4„E+a 6'`,`�� 's;Y'n4UF .•••��,,.�' FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY• ''!//!Il1111111111\\\\'` By: ✓ I�'�'GVIwM1.a , State of Iowa,.County of Linn,ss: Vice President On-28th day of April , 2015, before me personally came Dennis J. Richmann to me known,who tieing by me duly sworn,did depose and say; that he resides in Cedar Rapids;State of Iowa; that he is a Vice President of UNITED FIRE&CASUALTY COMPANY, a Vice President of UNITED FIRE& INDEMNITY COMPANY, and a Vice President of FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY the corporations described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seal of said corporations; that the seal affixed to the said instrument is such corporate seal;that it was so affixed pursuant to authority given by the Board of Directors of said corporations and that he signed his name thereto pursuant to like authority,and acknowledges same to be the act and deed of said corporations. . .e‘ . - ','Judith A.Davis. o - Iowa Notarial Seal ' . e Commission number 173041 . • • '�'` A. Notary Public or►. My Commission Expires 04/23/2018 My commission expires:04/23/2018 I,David A. Lange, Secretary'of UNITED FIRE&CASUALTY COMPANY and Assistant Secretary of 1.' ITED FIRE &:INDEMNITY COMPANY, and Assistant Secretary of FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY, do hereby certify that I have compared the foregoing copy of the,Power of Attorney and affidavit,and the copy of the Section of the bylaws and resolutions of said Corporations as set forth in said Power.of Attorney,with the • ORIGINALS ON FILE IN THE HOME OFFICE OF SAID CORPORATIONS,and that the same are correct transcripts thereof,and'of the whole of the said originals,and that the said Power of Attorney has not been-revoked and is now in full force and effect. In testimony whereof I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the corporate seal of•the said Corporations _ this 17th day of April ,20 17 . - ° o6y .` a Q:•O (:(fj�•.m' CORron ru c�= W =CORPORATE 'g'=4 Y `�- • By: ..,,,i9,-..21's7 -tom =z —� Tz. E '. I286 }�' j SEAL .e: '' SEAL oI,A.P h`F } /'� ' �/,RRAPIDs%dr • •`` /`r�k��S7TR Ttf�p��.� -- '•�(/F0 J. Secretary, VF&l. Assistant Secretary,OF&I/FPIC BPOA0049 01 I . , • • United Fire&Casualty Company United Life Insurance Company is Isura Company LafayetteAddon Insurance nce Company Insurance Broke►s&Managers Inc. UNITED FIRE GROUP American Indemnity Companies IMPORTANT NOTICE TO OBTAIN INFORMATION OR MAKE A COMPLAINT You may call United Fire Group's toll free telephone number for information or to make a complaint at: 800-343-9130 You may also write to United Fire Group at: United Fire.Group Attn: Bond Department PO. Box 73909 Cedar Rapids, IA 52407-3909 -or street address- United Fire Group Attn: Bond Department 118 Second Avenue SE Cedar Rapids, IA 52401 • You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain information on companies, coverages, rights or complaints at: 800-252-3439 You may write the Texas Department of Insurance at: P.O. Box 149104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR BOND.This notice is for information only and does not become a part or a condition of the attached document and is given to comply with Section 2253.48, Governmental Code, and Section 53-202, Property Code, effective September 1, 2001: (9°1‘ HOME OFFICE:118 Second Avenue SE, PO.Box 73909, Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52407-3909. Phone:319-399-5790 . :FAX:.31.9-399-5425 Bond•No. 54-216168 CITY OF PEARLAND PAYMENT BOND Section 00611 PAYMENT BOND STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF BRAZORIA § KNOW.ALL MEN BY THESE.PRESENTS; That Construction Masters of Houston,.Inc. of the. City of Pearland , County of Brazoria , and State of Texas, as principal,and United Fire.&:Casualty:Company authorized under the laws of the State of Texas to act as surety on bonds for principals, are held and firmly bound unto City of Pearland as Obligee (Owner),in:the penal sum of$ 3,319,200 for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors,and assigns,jointly and severally,by these presents: WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Owner,effective as of the 10th day of April , 2017 , (the "Contract") to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: Tom Reid Library Addition&Renovation City of Pearland,Texas COP PN: F20002 BID NO.: 1117-08 which Contract, including the Contract Documents as defined therein, is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein: NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH,that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor or material to him: or a subcontractor in the prosecution of.the Work provided for in said Contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED,HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the.Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Statute to the same extent as if it were copied.at length herein. Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the Work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications,or drawings accompanying the same, shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the Contract,or to the Work to be performed thereunder: 07/2006. 00611 - 1.of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND PAYMENT BOND (Pk', IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this 17th day of April , 20 17. Principal: Surety: Construe asters of Houston,Inc. United Fire&.Casualty Compan BY: By: /6LZ ("0 Title: Justin Davis, Vice President Title: Donna Weinel,Attorney-in-Fact Address: Address:' 3908 3rd Street 118 Second Avenue S.E. Pearland,Texas 77581 . Cedar Rapids,Iowa 5240.1 Telephone: (281)997-2640 Telephone: (800)343-9130 Fax (281)485-4702 Fax: (888)726-9738 NOTICE: THE ADDRESS.OF THE SURETY COMPANY TO WHICH ANY NOTICE. OF CLAIM SHOULD BE SENT MAY BE OBTAINED FROM THE TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF INSURANCE BY CALLING ITS TOLL-FREE TELEPHONE NUMBER; 1-800-252-3439. END OF SECTION 07/2006. 00611 -2 of 2 UNITED FIRE&CASUALTY COMPANY,CEDAR RAPIDS,IA UNITEDFINANCIAL P FIRE&ACIFIC INDEMNITYINSURANCE C COMPANY,OMPANY WEBSTER,TX Inquiries: Sureh'Department �� ,ROCI{LIN,CA 118 Second Ave SE g CERTIFIED COPY OF POWER OF ATTORNEY Cedar Rapids,IA 52401 • (original on file at Home Office of Company—See Certification) KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS,That UNITED FIRE&CASUALTY COMPANY,a corporation'duly organized and existing under be laws of the State of Iowa; UNITED.FIRE&INDEMNITY COMPANY,a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of 2xas; and;FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY, a corporation duly organized and.existing under the-laws of the State of California -therein collectively called the Companies)),and having their corporate headquarters in Cedar Rapids, State of Iowa,does make,constitute and appoint A.A. SHOTWELL, JR., MARK SMITH, BETTY BUSH, JOSEPH CHARLES BLACKSHEAR, JR, DONNA WEINEL, EACH INDIVIDUALLY of TEXAS CITY TX . their true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact with power and authority hereby conferred-to sign,seal andlexecute in its behalf all lawful bonds,undertakings and other obligatory instruments of similar nature provided that no single obligation shall exceed $15,000,000.00 and to bind the Companies thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such instruments were signed by the duly authorized officers of the Companies and all of the acts of said•Attorney,pursuant to the authority hereby given and hereby ratified and confirmed.' , • The Authority hereby,granted is continuous and shall remain in full force and effect until revoked by UNITED FIRE&CASUALTY,COMPANY, UNITED FIRE&INDEMNITY COMPANY,AND FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY. ` This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the following bylaw duly adopted on May 15, 2013,by the Boards of Directors of UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY, UNITED FIRE & INDEMNITY COMPANY, and FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY. . "Article VI—Surety Bonds and Undertakings" •Section 2,Appointment of Attorney-in-Fact. "The President or any Vice President, or any other officer of the Companies may,from time-to time, appoint by written certificates attorneys-in-fact to act in behalf of the Companies in the execution of policies of insurance, bonds, • undertakings and other obligatory instruments of like nature. The signature of any officer authorized hereby, and the Corporate seal,may be aflized by facsimile to any power of attorney or special power of attorney or certification of either authorized hereby; such signature and seal, when so used,being adopted by the Companies as the original signature of such officer and the original seal of the Companies,to be valid and binding upon the Companies with the same force and effect as though manually affixed. Such attorneys-in-fact, subject to the limitations set forth in their respective certificates of authority shall have full power to bind the Companies by their signature and execution of any such • - instruments and to attach the seal of the Companies thereto. The President or any Vice President,the Board of Directors or any other officer of ed'''': the Companies may at any time revoke all power and authority previously given to any attorney-in-fact. `+++ yusutyr.1;, , ++oUiNoe ,,i ,aaunnun q ��•• „ IN WITNESS WHEREOF,the COMPANIES have each caused these presents robe signed by itsp 4` , °;; " ,- ; °,o+F,pPo�,,,,, vice president and its corporate seal to be hereto affixed this 28th day of Apr i 1 ; 2015 ` ' CORPORA7E 'o:�= UNITED FIRE&CASUALTY COMPANY SEAL a S t -SEAL o�: 1986 `�•;:E` UNITED FIRE&INDEMNITY COMPANY °�°, E �5 y °+(r P�. <,. FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY • ,,"",mmnnun"` i1 By: Ri+... /�LG//twy v.s� �1�_. • State of Iowa,County of Linn,ss: Vice President On 28th day of Apri1 , 2015, before me personally came Dennis J. Richmann to me known,who being by me duly sworn,did depose and say; that he resides in Cedar Rapids, State of Iowa; that he is a Vice President of UNITED FIRE&CASUALTY COMPANY, a Vice President of UNITED FIRE& INDEMNITY COMPANY, and a Vice President of FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY the corporations described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seal of said corporations;that the seal affixed to the said instrument is such corporate seal;that it was so affixed pursuant to authority.given by•the Board of Directors of said corporations and that he signed his name-thereto pursuant to like authority,and_acknowledges same to be the act and deed of said corporations. i• • ''• "Judith A.Davis Iowa Notarial Seal , ' - _ A. • Commission number 173041' • Notary Public • or.� My Commission Expires 04/23/2018 My commission expires:04/23/2018 I,David A. Lange, Secretary of UNITED FIRE&CASUALTY COMPANY and Assistant Secretary of'1' ITED FIRE&INDEMNITY COMPANY, and:Assistant'Secretary of FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY,do hereby.certify that I have compared the foregoing copy of the Power of Attorney and affidavit,and the copy of the Section of the bylaws and resolutions of said Corporations as set forth in said Power of Attorney,with the ORIGINALS ON FILE IN THE HOME OFFICE OF SAID CORPORATIONS,and that the same are correct transcripts thereof,and of the whole of the said originals,and that the said Power of Attorney has not been revoked and is now in full.force and effect. In testimony whereof I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the corporate seal of the said Corporations - this 17th day of April ,20 17 . ```++WlIU,,,,,� • `,,,nWlnnn,,, _EJ4 co4 �.`� t,;^� 3y4;4pRPOFtq`j"W.E's�; • 4._...,,c2 CORPORATE b S L� CORPORATE y • sQ:.5OLY 22.��;o= By:U S7 • � -- to ?�di ran •T'- SEAL.' �`z SEAL $Z\0 r:' !'',� %";A u°f „";4.,rt;tos` '"",,,,,,,,,,,,o,„ Secretary,UF&C Assistant Secretary,OF&UFPIC BPOA0049 0115 • 101 United Fire&Casualty Company United Life Insurance Company Addison Insurance Company Lafayette Insurance Company 1 Insurance Brokers.&Managers,Inc UNITED FIRE GROUP American Indemnity Companies IMPORTANT NOTICE TO OBTAIN INFORMATION OR MAKE A COMPLAINT: You may call United Fire Group's toll free telephone number for information or to make a complaint at: 800-343-9130 You may also write to United. Fire Group at: United Fire Group Attn: Bond Department P.O. Box 73909 Cedar Rapids, IA 52407-3909 -or street address- United Fire.Group Attn: Bond Department 118 Second Avenue SE Cedar Rapids, IA 52401 You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain information on companies, coverages, rights or complaints at: 800-252-3439 You may write the Texas Department of Insurance at: P.O. Box 149104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR BOND.This notice is for information only and does not become a part or a condition of the attached document and is given to comply with Section 2253.48, Governmental Code, and Section 53-202, Property Code, effective September 1, 2001. HOME OFFICE:118 Second Avenue SE,PO Box 73909, Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52407-3909 Phone: 319-399-5790 FAX:.319-399-5425 Bond No. 54-216168 • CITY OF PEARLAND ONE-YEAR MAINTENANCE BOND i Section 00612 ONE-YEAR MAINTENANCE BOND. STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY.OF BRAZORIA § KNOW ALL MEN.BY THESE PRESENTS: That Construction Masters of Houston,.Inc. of the City of Pearland , County of Brazoria , and State of Texas; as principal, and United Fire.&Casualty Company authorized under the laws of the State of Texas to act as surety on bonds for principals, are held and firmly bound unto City of Pearland as Obligee (Owner),in the penal sum of$ 3.319,200 for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors, and assigns,jointly and severally,by these presents: WHEREAS; the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with.the Owner, effective as of the 10th day of April , 20 17 , (the "Contract") to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: Tom Reid Library Addition&Renovation City of Pearland,Texas COP PN: F20002 BID NO.: 1117-08 which Contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS .OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully correct all such work not in accordance with the Contract Documents discovered within the one-year period from the date of substantial completion,then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Statute to the same extent as if it were copied.at length herein. Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications, or drawings accompanying the same, shall in any way affect its obligation on this bond,and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the:contract, or to the work to be performed thereunder: 07/2006 00612- 1.of 2 • CITY OF PEARLAND ONE-YEAR MAINTENANCE BOND IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal andSurety have signed:and sealed this instrument this 17th day of April ,20 17. Principal: Surety: Con io Masters of Houston, Inc. United Fire&Casualty Company By: By: hatil4 - Title: Justin Davis, Vice President Title: Donna Weinel,Attorney-in-Fact Address: Address: 3908 3rd Street 118 Second Avenue S.E. Pearland,Texas 77581 Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52401 Telephone: (281) 997-2640 Telephone: (800)343-9130 Fax: (281)485-4702 Fax: (888)726-9738 tow NOTICE:THE ADDRESS OF THE SURETY COMPANY TO WHICH ANY NOTICE OF CLAIM SHOULD BE SENT MAY BE OBTAINED FROM THE TEXAS DEPARTMENT OF INSURANCE BY CALLING ITS TOLL-FREE:TELEPHONE NUMBER; 1-800-252-3439. END OF SECTION 07/2006 00612-2 of 2 U1111Cu ricce,&LASUALI'Y COMPANY,CEDAR RAPIDS,-IA • : '. . lift ' .UNITED FIRE&INDEMNY COMPANY,WEBSTER,TX Inquiries: Surety Department IT FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY,ROCKLIN,CA 118 Second Ave SE CERTIFIED COPY OF POWER OF ATTORNEY Cedar Rapids,IA 52401 (original on file at Home Office of Company—See Certification) KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS,That UNITED FIRE&CASUALTY COMPANY,a corporation duly organized-and existing under �'th'e laws of the State of Iowa; UNITED FIRE& INDEMNITY COMPANY, a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of exas; and FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY, a corporation duly organized and existing•under the laws'of the State of California --therein collectively called the.Companies),and having their corporate headquarters in Cedar Rapids, State of Iowa,does make constitute and appoint A.A.. SHOTWELL, JR.., MARK SMITH, BETTY BUSH, JOSEPH CHARLES BLACKSHEAR, JR, DONNA WEINEL:;. EACH INDIVIDUALLY of TEXAS CITY TX • • their true and lawful Attorneys)-an-Fact with power and authority hereby conferred to sign,seal and execute in its behalfall lawful bonds,undertakings and other obligatory instruments of similar nature provided that no single obligation shall exceed ' $15,000,000.00 and to bind the Companies thereby as fully and to the same extent as if such instruments were signed by the duly authorized officers of the Companies and all of the acts of said Attorney;pursuant to the authority hereby given and hereby ratified and•confirmed. . The Authority hereby.granted is.continuous and shall remain in full force and effect.until revoked by UNITED FIRE&CASUALTY COMPANY, UNITED FIRE& INDEMNITY COMPANY,AND FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY. - . This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the following bylaw.duly.adopted on.May 15,2013,'by the Boards of Directors of UNITED FIRE & CASUALTY COMPANY, UNITED FIRE & INDEMNITY COMPANY, and FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY. "Article VI—Surety Bonds and Undertakings" . •Section 2,Appointment of Attorney-in-Fact. "The President or any Vice President, or any other officer of the Companies may, from time to time, appoint by written certificates attorneys-in-fact to act in behalf of the Companies in the execution of policies of insurance, bonds, undertakings and other obligatory instruments of like nature. The signature of any officer authorized hereby, and the Corporate seal, may be affixed by facsimile to any power of attorney or special power of attorney or certification of either authorized hereby; such signature and seal, when soused,being adopted by the Companies as the original signature of such officer and the original seal of the Companies,to be validand binding upon the Companies with the same force and effect as though manually affixed. Such attorneys-in-fact, subject to the limitations set forth in their.respective certificates of authority shall have full power to bind the Companies by their signature and execution of any such ,instruments and to attach the seal of the Companies thereto. The President or any Vice President,the Board of Directors or any other officer of the Companies may at any time revoke all power and authority previously given to any attorney-in-fact. --` wn'i r ' pnumupr ``` IN WITNESS WHEREOF,the COMPANIES have each caused these presents to,be signed by its `��pF 7k 4�' \`.``„iNory�"i4 a,,,�` INSUr"'�ri .. q�Sqq e" }� ,.,C,,,Po•,',+.y,,, vice president and its corporate seal to be hereto affixed this 28t h day of Apr i 1 , 2015 ��c CORPORATE ' i. Cp CORPORATE V. ' Q+=C,O rd�ni- i= =t . s ,uLY ..o_ UNITED FIRE&CASUALTY COMPANY SEAL SEAL 19E6 ;;= UNITED FIRE& INDEMNITY COMPANY ''�ia,4RAp p�`sos ' •••• 4,,,,,,,,,,' -%': ••••C'i/FOP'' T=• ' FINANCIAL1 • PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY • By: _ State of Iowa,County of Linn,ss: Vice President On 28th day of -April , 2015, before me personally came Dennis J. Richmann to me known,who being by me duly sworn,did depose and say; that he resides in Cedar Rapids, State of Iowa; that-he is a Vice President of UNITED FIRE&CASUALTY COMPANY, a Vice President of UNITED FIRE& INDEMNITY COMPANY, and a Vice President of FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY the corporations described.in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seal of said;corporations; that the seal affixed to the said-instrument is such corporate seal;that it was so affixed pursuant to authority given by the Board of Directors of said corporations and that he signed his name thereto pursuant to like authority,and acknowledges same to be the act and deed of said corporations: • - " �[g • Judith A.Davis Iowa Notarial Seal . Aigcc • Commission number 173041 �I`,_ Notary Public My Commission Expires 04/23/2018 My commission expires:04/23/2018 I,David A..Lange, Secretary of UNITED FIRE &CASUALTY COMPANY and Assistant Secretary of ITED FIRE& INDEMNITY COMPANY, • and Assistant Secretary of FINANCIAL PACIFIC INSURANCE COMPANY,•do hereby.certify that,I have compared the foregoing copy of the Power of Attorney and affidavit,and the copy of the Section of the bylaws and resolutions of said Corporations as set forth in said Power of Attorney,with the ORIGINALS ONFILE IN THE HOME OFFICE OF SAID CORPORATIONS;and that the same arecorrect transcripts thereof,and of the whole of the said originals,and that the said Power of Attorney has not been revoked_and is now in full,force and effect. In testimony whereof I have hereunto subscribed my name and affixed the corporate seal of the said Corporations ' • this 17th day of April ,20 17 • ira '1,iHo0�ry Rt'(21 ORC - (tj ) ct :2 p.0 . • 'Z: WV(Zz :0s . By1:: .yA., V.'':C �h'?r. 4 y ''.o'..:/UFOP •:T�..� %/leitA'`P`.�`'� ''''%,`$7TR;1:1t: ` °" " ` . Secretary,UF&C • Assistant Secretary,OF&I/FPIC BPOA0049 0115 • - United Fire&Casualty Company United Life Insurance Company Addison Insurance Company Lafayette Insurance Company Insurance Brokers&Managers Inc. UNITED FIRE GROUP American Indemnity Companies IMPORTANT NOTICE TO OBTAIN INFORMATION OR MAKE A COMPLAINT: You may call United Fire Group's toll free telephone number for information or to make a complaint at: 800-343-9130 You may also write to United Fire Group at: United Fire Group Attn: Bond Department P.O. Box 73909 Cedar Rapids, IA 52407-3909 -or street address- United Fire.Group Attn: Bond Department 118 Second Avenue SE Cedar Rapids, IA 52401 You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain information on companies,.coverages, rights or complaints at: 800-252-3439 You may write the Texas Department of Insurance at: P.O. Box 149104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR BOND.This notice is for information only and does not become a part or a condition of the attached document and is given to comply with Section 2253,48, Governmental Code, and Section 53-202, Property Code; effective September 1 2001.. HOME OFFICE:118 Second Avenue SE, PO.Box.73909,,Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52407-3909 Phone: 319-399-5790 . :FAX:.31.9-399-5425 CITY OF PEARLAND PARTIAL WAIVER OF LIEN I (.11.'" Section 00615 PARTIAL WAIVER OF LIEN ` AND PAYMENT AFFIDAVIT The undersigned contracted with City of Pearland to furnish in connection with certain improvements to real property located in the City of Pearland, TX and owned by the City of Pearland which improvements are described as follows: In consideration of Pay Estimate No. in the amount of$ the undersigned, on oath, states that all persons and firms who supplied labor and materials to the undersigned in connection with said Project will be fully paid within 30 days of the date of this document by the undersigned for such work through In consideration of the payment herewith made, the undersigned does fully and finally release and hold harmless the City of Pearland and its surety, if any, through the above date from any and all claims, liens, or right to claim or lien, arising out of this Project under any applicable bond, law or statue. It is understood that this affidavit is submitted to induce payment of the above sum and for use by the City of Pearland in assuring the Owner and others that all liens and claims relating to the said Project furnished by the undersigned are paid. Signature Printed Name&Title Company Name State of County of Subscribed and sworn to, before me, this day of , 20 . My Commission Expires: Notary Public 5-12-12 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL, CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Section 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 1.0 DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 1.01 OWNER, CONTRACTOR AND ENGINEER. The OWNER, the CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER are those persons or organizations identified as such in the Agreement. The term ENGINEER as used in these General Conditions shall refer to the Engineer or Architect identified in the Agreement, as applicable, and means a person authorized to act as a representative of the entity designated by the OWNER to provide professional services required in connection with the preparation of plans and specifications of this Contract. The term CONSTRUCTION MANAGER as used in these General Conditions shall refer to the Construction Manager identified in the Agreement, as applicable, and means a person authorized to act as representative of the entity designated by the OWNER to provide professional services required in connection with the performance of the work of this Contract. The Owner's representative on the project site shall be the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER or ENGINEER as designated. 1.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Contract Documents shall consist of all of the documents identified in Article 8 of the Standard Form of Agreement, which documents, excluding such documents as may be delivered or issued after the Effective Date of the Agreement, as referenced in Article 8, shall be bound together in a Project Manual for the Work. All references to the "Contract" or the "Agreement" in these General Conditions of Agreement shall include the Contract Documents. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be binding as if required by all. In the event of any conflict among the Contract Documents, the Contract Documents shall govern in the following order: (1) Modifications in writing and signed by both parties, including any Change Orders; (2) Standard Form of Agreement; (3) Special Conditions of Agreement; (4) General Conditions of Agreement, including Attachment No. 1 — Workers' Compensation Insurance Coverage, Attachment No. 2 — Agreement for Final Payment and CONTRACTOR'S Sworn Release, and Attachment No. 3 — Owner's Insurance Requirements of Contractor; (5) Addenda, if any; (6) Plans and Specifications referenced or included in the Project Manual; Ow, (7) Instructions to Bidders; (8) Bid Proposal; and 10-2012 00700- 1 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL, CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (9) Exhibits: The following Exhibits, if any, attached hereto, are incorporated herein, and are a part of this Contract: '417) In the event a conflict or inconsistency remains between or within the Contract Documents, or the Contract Documents and applicable standards, codes and ordinances, CONTRACTOR shall provide the greater quantity or better quality, or CONTRACTOR shall comply with the more stringent requirements, as determined by ENGINEER. Terms or phrases used in the Contract Documents with a well-known technical or construction industry meaning shall have such recognized meanings. References to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the laws or regulations of any governmental authority, shall mean the latest in effect on the effective date of the Contract, unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. 1 .03 SUBCONTRACTOR. The term "subcontractor", as employed herein, includes those entities having a contract with the CONTRACTOR or a subcontractor for performance of work on the Project. OWNER shall have no responsibility to any subcontractor for performance of work on the Project contemplated by these Contract Documents, and any such subcontractor shall look exclusively to CONTRACTOR for any payments due subcontractor. 1.04 WRITTEN NOTICE. Written Notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person or by electronic means through the Pro-Trak to the individual or to a partner of the partnership or joint venture, or to an officer of the corporation or company for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent by Certified Mail, Return Receipt Requested, to the last known '74 business address or registered office of such individual, partnership,joint venture or corporation or company, or to the address for giving notices listed in the Standard Form of Agreement. 1.05 WORK. Unless otherwise stipulated, the CONTRACTOR shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, services, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities or services of any nature whatsoever necessary for the execution and completion of the Work described in the Standard Form of Agreement. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new, and both workmanship and materials shall be of good quality. The CONTRACTOR shall, if required by the ENGINEER as representative of the OWNER, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well-known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer to such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials shall be furnished in strict conformity with the Contract Documents. 1.06 EXTRA WORK. The term "Extra Work", as used in this Contract, shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the ENGINEER as representative of the OWNER, to be performed by the CONTRACTOR to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work shown in the plans. Extra work shall be authorized in writing by the ENGINEER prior to commencement. Extra Work items are paid for on an as needed, as authorized basis only. 1.07 WORK DAY: As used herein, a "Work Day" is defined as any Monday through , Friday, not a legal holiday, and any Saturday or Sunday specifically approved by the OWNER, in which the CONTRACTOR can perform six or more hours of work per the current construction schedule. CONTRACTOR agrees to request specific approval from the Construction Manager or 10-2012 00700-2 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Owner, in advance, to perform work on Saturdays or Sundays and in so doing agrees to pay all (.111'\ charges and costs for Inspection and or Construction Management services required during the performance of any such approved work. Refer to paragraph 7.05 for procedure to determine cost for Construction Management and Inspection Services for work on non-work days. 1.07-1 RAIN DAY: As used herein, is defined as any WORK DAY during which weather related conditions prevent the CONTRACTOR from performing four (4) or more consecutive hours of work on critical path items as identified in the current construction schedule. CONTRACTOR shall record Rain Days on the Pay Application each month for the review and possible approval by the OWNER. The approved Rain Day is then added to the Contract Time. (See 1.12 Contract Time below) 1.07-2 IMPACT DAY: As used herein, is a day that is added to the CONTRACT TIME by the OWNER by Change Order to extend the Contract Time by one full Work Day. (See 1.12 Contract Time below) Impact Days, once approved by the OWNER, shall extend the Contract Time on a one-to-one basis to replace a Work Day lost to conditions that prevented the CONTRACTOR from performing four (4) or more consecutive hours of work on critical path items. Impact Days are added to the Contract Time by Change Order only at the end of the work and then only if, in the opinion of the OWNER, a time extension is warranted due to delays beyond the control of the Contractor and required to complete the work within the Contract Time. 1.08 CALENDAR DAY. A "calendar day" is any day of the week, month or year no days being excepted. Unless otherwise expressly provided, all references to "day(s)" shall mean calendar day(s). 1 .09 SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED: The terms "Substantially Completed", or "Substantially Complete" or "Substantial Completion" as used in this Contract, shall mean that all major process components of the facility or work have been made suitable for use or occupancy, including appropriate documentation from the equipment suppliers that all of the individual components have been installed in accordance with the specifications and manufacturer's recommendations, the installations have been approved by the ENGINEER and the items have met the start-up and testing requirements of the contract documents or is deemed to be in a condition to serve its intended purpose or requires only minor miscellaneous work and adjustment to achieve Final Completion and Acceptance as determined by the ENGINEER. Upon compliance with the above referenced criteria, ENGINEER shall issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion. PARTIAL SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: designation will be given on components of the Work that must be placed into service prior to the completion of the entire Work. The contractor's One Year Warranty period for these items shall begin on the date of Partial Substantial Completion as designated by the ENGINEER. The ENGINEER shall determine and make all such designations. 1.10 INTERPRETATION OF WORDS AND PHRASES. Whenever the words "directed", "permitted", "designated", "required", "ordered", "considered necessary", "prescribed" or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, opinion designation or prescription of the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative is intended. Similarly, the words "approved", "acceptable", "satisfactory" or words of like import shall mean that no exception is taken by ENGINEER, but does not relieve CONTRACTOR of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Documents. 10-2012 00700-3 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Whenever in the Specifications or Plans of the Contract Documents, the terms of description of various qualities relative to finish, workmanship or other qualities of similar kind which cannot, from their nature, be specifically and clearly described and specified, but are necessarily described in general terms, the fulfillment of which must depend on individual judgment, then, in all such cases, any question of the fulfillment of said Specifications shall be decided by the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative, and said work shall be done in accordance with his interpretations of the meaning of the words, terms or clauses defining the character of the work. 1.11 REFERENCED STANDARDS. No provision of any referenced standard specification, or manual shall be effective to change the duties and responsibilities of the Owner, Engineer, Contractor, or their consultants, employees, or representatives from those set forth in the Contract Documents, nor shall it be effective to assign to the Engineer or its consultants, employees, or representatives any duty or authority to supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibilities contrary to provisions of the Contract Documents. 1.12 CONTRACT TIME The term Contract Time as used herein, refers to the number of Calendar days provided to complete the work or the date, stated in the Agreement: (i) to achieve Substantial Completion, and (ii) to complete the Work so that it is ready for final payment as evidenced by ENGINEER's written recommendation of final payment in accordance with Paragraph 6.09 and as modified as a result of any authorized Extensions. The established Contract Time includes 40 Rain Days per year, based on the average number of rain days per year for the period of June 1898 to December 1996 as recorded by the Alvin Weather Center Record. The Contract Time shall only be extended by (a) the addition of Rain Days equal to the number of actual Rain Days in excess of 40 days per year and (b) the number of Impact Days granted for delays, in the opinion of the Owner, beyond the control of the Contractor. The extension of the Contract Time shall be the CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy for delays. 1.13 CONSTRUCTION INSPECTOR The term "Construction Inspector" here in includes those professionals engaged by the OWNER to ensure CONTRACT work's compliance with the specifications and any applicable statutory requirements. 1.14 BALANCING CHANGE ORDER is a change order executed during the close-out process that may add/remove pay items, or adjust quantities of existing items or remove unused pay items or quantities Balancing Change Orders are used to reconcile the unit cost of the work performed or installed by the Contractor. 2.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE OWNER 2.01 NO WARRANTY OF DESIGN. It is understood that the OWNER MAKES NO WARRANTY OF THE ADEQUACY, ACCURACY OR SUFFICIENCY OF THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS OR ANY OTHER DESIGN DOCUMENTS, AND OWNER HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY SUCH WARRANTY, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. Prior to commencing each portion of the Work, CONTRACTOR shall carefully study and compare the relevant Contract Documents, shall observe conditions at the site affecting the Work, and shall take field measurements of existing conditions related to the Work. Any errors, omissions or 10-2012 00700-4 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT inconsistencies in the Contract Documents noted by the CONTRACTOR, and/or any variance rb.\ between the Contract Documents and applicable codes, standards or ordinances, shall be promptly reported by CONTRACTOR to ENGINEER in writing as a Request for Information. Work performed prior to a Request for Information shall be at the Contractor's risk. If CONTRACTOR fails to perform its obligations under this paragraph, CONTRACTOR shall pay such costs and damages to OWNER as would have been avoided if CONTRACTOR had reported any errors, omissions, inconsistencies or variances in the Contract Documents noted by CONTRACTOR or which should have been noted by a careful study of the Contract Documents. CONTRACTOR shall comply with the Contract Documents, all approved modifications thereof and additions and alterations thereto approved in writing by the OWNER. The burden of proof of such compliance shall be upon the CONTRACTOR to show that he has complied with the requirements of the Contract Documents and approved modifications thereof and all approved additions and alterations, thereto, as the same shall have been interpreted by the ENGINEER. 2.02 RIGHT OF ENTRY. The OWNER reserves the right to enter the property or location on which the work herein contracted for is to be performed, constructed or installed, for itself or such agent or agents as it may select, for the purpose of inspecting the work, or for the purpose of performing, constructing or installing such collateral work as the OWNER may desire. The OWNER shall have the right to make inspections at all reasonable times, and the CONTRACTOR hereby waives any claims for extension of time and/or compensation for any loss or damage if his work shall be delayed by reason of such inspection, performance, construction or installation of collateral work. (1.1 \ 2.03 OWNERSHIP OF PLANS. All plans, specifications and copies thereof furnished by the OWNER shall not be reused on other work and, with the exception of the sets forming the part of the signed Contract Documents, are to be returned to the OWNER on request at the completion of the Work. All plans and models are the property of the OWNER. 2.04 CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS. The CONTRACTOR further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations, additions and deletions as the OWNER may see fit, in the Work, including but not limited to changes in line, grade, form, dimensions, plans or specifications for the Work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of construction, without affecting the validity of this Contract and the corresponding Performance and Payment Bonds. If such changes or alterations or deletions diminish the quantity or the value of the Work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for compensation or damages, including lost or anticipated profits on the Work that may be affected. If the amount of Work is increased and the work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid for according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price, if any, established for such work under this Contract, otherwise, such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Article 7 hereof for Extra Work. In case the OWNER shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any Work already done or material already furnished or used in said Work, then the OWNER shall compensate the CONTRACTOR for any material or labor so used and for any actual loss occasioned by such change due to actual expenses incurred in preparation for the Work as originally planned. 2.05 DAMAGES. In the event the OWNER is damaged in the course of the work by the act, negligence, omission, mistake or default of the CONTRACTOR, or should the 10-2012 00700-5 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT CONTRACTOR unreasonably delay the progress of the work being done by others on the job so as to cause loss for which the OWNER becomes liable, then the CONTRACTOR shall reimburse the OWNER for such loss. 3.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE ENGINEER 3.01 OWNER-ENGINEER RELATIONSHIP. The ENGINEER shall serve as the OWNER'S representative during construction. The duties, responsibilities and limitations on the authority of the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents; and the ENGINEER shall not have authority to extend the OWNER's liability or to bind the OWNER for any additional liability of any nature whatsoever without the written consent of the OWNER. Any communications by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR regarding the Work shall be issued through the ENGINEER. It is the intent of this Agreement that there shall be no delay in the execution of the Work; therefore, written decisions or directions rendered by the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative shall be promptly carried out, and any claim arising therefrom shall be resolved as provided in Article 7. Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the OWNER'S representative shall have the authority to issue written stop work orders whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.02 KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE. The ENGINEER shall furnish the CONTRACTOR with four (4) copies of all Plans and Specifications ^*, without expense to the CONTRACTOR, and the CONTRACTOR shall keep one full size copy of the same constantly accessible on the job site, with the latest revisions noted thereon. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for preserving the Plans and Specifications, timely and accurately updated, for reference and review by the OWNER or the ENGINEER and submittal of redlines during closeout. 3.03 PRELIMINARY APPROVAL. The ENGINEER shall not have the power to waive the obligations imposed under this Contract for the furnishing by the CONTRACTOR of new material of good quality, and for good and workmanlike performance of the Work as herein described, and in full accordance with the Contract Documents, without alteration, deletion or change. No failure or omission of the OWNER'S representative to discover, object to or condemn any non-conforming or defective work or material, or to stop work, shall release the CONTRACTOR from the obligation to fully and properly perform the Contract, including without limitation, the obligation to at once remove and properly replace any defective work or material at any time prior to final acceptance, upon discovery of such non-conforming or defective work or material. Any questioned Work may be ordered taken up or removed for inspection by the ENGINEER prior to final acceptance, and if found not to be in accordance with the Contract Documents, all expense of removing, inspection and repair or replacement shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR; otherwise the expense thus incurred shall be allowed as Extra Work and shall be paid for by the OWNER, provided that where inspection or approval is specifically required by the Specifications prior to performance of certain work, should the CONTRACTOR proceed with such work without requesting prior inspection or approval, he shall bear all expense of taking up, removing and replacing this work if so directed by the ENGINEER. 10-2012 00700-6 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 3.04 INSPECTION BY ENGINEER. The ENGINEER will make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress and quality of the executed Work and to determine if such Work generally meets the essential performance and design features and the technical, functional /or engineering requirements of the Contract Documents, and is in all other respects being performed in compliance with the Contract Documents. However, the ENGINEER shall not be responsible for making any detailed, exhaustive, comprehensive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality and/or quantity of the work, nor shall the ENGINEER be in any way responsible, directly or indirectly, for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, quality, procedures, programs, safety precautions or lack of same incident to the Work being performed or any part thereof. The ENGINEER shall use reasonable care to prevent deviation from the intent and substance of the Contract Documents by the CONTRACTOR in the performance of the Work and any part thereof and, on the basis of such on-site observations, will keep the OWNER informed of the progress of the work and will endeavor to guard the OWNER against defects and deficiencies in the Work of the CONTRACTOR. Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement or any other Contract Document, the ENGINEER shall not be in any way responsible or liable for any acts, errors, omissions or negligence of the CONTRACTOR, any subcontractors, agents, servants or employees or any other person, firm or corporation performing or attempting to perform any of the Work. 3.05 DETERMINATION OF QUESTIONS AND DISPUTES. In order to prevent delays and disputes and to discourage litigation, it is agreed that the ENGINEER shall, in all cases, determine the quantities and qualities of the several kinds of Work, which are to be paid for under this Contract. The ENGINEER shall address all questions in relation to said Work and the construction thereof, as well as all claims, disputes and other matters in question between the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER relating to the execution or progress of the Work or the interpretation of the Contract Documents. In the event the ENGINEER shall become aware of or shall receive information that there is a dispute or a possible dispute as to the reasonable interpretation of the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, or any other dispute or question, the ENGINEER shall, within a reasonable time, provide a written interpretation of the Contract Documents or a written decision on all questions arising relative to the execution of the Work, copies of which shall be delivered to all parties to the Contract. If the CONTRACTOR or OWNER desires to take exception to any directions, order, interpretation or instructions of the ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR or OWNER shall present any such claim to the ENGINEER in accordance with the provisions of Section 7.04. 3.06 RECOMMENDATION OF PAYMENT. The ENGINEER shall review the CONTRACTOR's application for payment and supporting documents, shall determine the amount owed to the CONTRACTOR and shall provide written recommendation to the OWNER for payment to the CONTRACTOR in such amount. Such recommendation of payment to CONTRACTOR shall constitute a representation to the OWNER of the ENGINEER's judgment that the work has progressed to the point indicated, to the best of his knowledge, information and belief; however, such recommendation of an application for payment to CONTRACTOR shall not be deemed an acceptance of any defective or non-conforming Work. Any recommendation of payment by the ENGINEER shall be subject to OWNER's rights to withhold payment under Section 6.11 and as otherwise provided in the Contract. 10-2012 00700-7 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR 4.01 INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR is, and shall remain, an independent contractor, solely responsible for the manner and method of completing the Work under this Contract, with full and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise and control his own employees and to determine the means, method and manner of performing such Work, so long as such methods comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, and do not adversely affect the completed improvements or any other property abutting or adjoining the Work area, the OWNER and ENGINEER being interested only in the result obtained and conformity of such completed improvements to the Plans, Specifications and Contract Documents. The fact that the OWNER or ENGINEER as the Owner's representative shall have the right to observe CONTRACTOR's work during his performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the OWNER and the ENGINEER hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or affect the status of the CONTRACTOR as an independent contractor with respect to either the OWNER or the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative or to the CONTRACTOR's own employees or to any other person, firm or corporation. 4.02 CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING. It is understood and agreed that the CONTRACTOR has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the Work, the conformation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of the materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the Work, the general and local conditions, including but not limited to weather, access, lay down and storage areas, and all other matters which in any way affect the Work under this Contract. It is further understood that the CONTRACTOR has satisfied himself as to the ^4) terms, meaning, intent and requirements of all of the Contract Documents, and applicable laws, codes, regulations and ordinances. CONTRACTOR hereby warrants and represents that it has taken into consideration all of the foregoing factors, and CONTRACTOR shall perform the Work for the Contract Price and within the Contract Time. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent or employee of the OWNER or the ENGINEER, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. 4.03 LAWS AND ORDINANCES. The CONTRACTOR shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state or local laws, codes, ordinances, permits and regulations, regardless of whether the same are adopted before or after the execution of this Contract, which in any manner affect the Contract or the work, and shall indemnify, save and hold harmless the OWNER and the ENGINEER against any claim arising out of the violation of any such laws, ordinances and regulations, whether by the CONTRACTOR or his agents, employees, subcontractors or vendors. If the CONTRACTOR observes that the Plans and Specifications are at variance with federal or state laws or codes or the ordinances or regulations of the City, he shall promptly notify the ENGINEER in writing, and any necessary changes shall be made as provided in the Contract for changes in the work. If the CONTRACTOR performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, codes, ordinances, rules or regulations, or if CONTRACTOR reasonably should have known of any such violation, and without such notice to the ENGINEER, CONTRACTOR shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The OWNER is a Political Subdivision of the State of Texas, and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the OWNER may enter into contracts, shall be controlling and shall be considered as part of this Contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. Neither the act 10-2012 00700-8 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT of OWNER entering into this Contract, nor OWNER's performance hereunder, shall constitute a (lb.\ waiver of any immunity from suit enjoyed by OWNER under applicable law, all such rights and defenses being hereby expressly reserved, notwithstanding any term or provision herein to the contrary. The Code of Ordinances and other applicable regulations of the OWNER shall be deemed to be embodied in this Contract. The prevailing wage rates applicable to this Project shall be either Document 00811 —Wage Scale for Engineering Construction, or Document 00813 —Wage Scale for Building Construction, or both, as set out in the Project Manual. 4.04 ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING. The CONTRACTOR further agrees that he will retain personal control and will give his personal attention to the fulfillment of this Contract and that he will not assign, by power of attorney or otherwise, or sublet said Contract, or any rights, duties or obligations arising thereunder, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of the OWNER, and that no part or feature of the Work will be sublet to anyone objectionable to the ENGINEER or the OWNER. In addition, the OWNER reserves the right to disapprove the subletting of this Contract or any portion hereof on any basis whatsoever. The CONTRACTOR further agrees that the subletting of any portion or feature of the Work or materials required in the performance of this Contract shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from his obligations to the OWNER, as provided for by this Agreement. 4.05 PERFORMANCE, PAYMENT AND MAINTENANCE BONDS. In the event the Contract Price shall be in excess of $25,000.00, the CONTRACTOR shall execute separate Performance, Payment and Maintenance Bonds, each in the sum of one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract Price, and each in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code. If the Contract Price does not exceed $25,000.00, the statutory bonds will not be required. All required Bonds shall be payable to OWNER and on forms approved by the OWNER, and shall be executed by a corporate surety in accordance with Article 7.19-1 of the Texas Insurance Code. It is agreed that the Contract shall not be in effect until such original Performance, Payment and Maintenance Bonds are delivered to and approved by the OWNER. The cost of the premium for the Performance, Payment and Maintenance Bonds, should Maintenance Bonds be required, shall be included in the CONTRACTOR's Bid Proposal. All bonds shall be issued by Texas Department of Insurance approved surety companies. 4.06 INSURANCE. The CONTRACTOR, at his own expense, shall procure, maintain and keep in force throughout the duration of the Work, and throughout the Guarantee Period, insurance as specified in Attachment No. 1 hereto with regard to Workers' Compensation Insurance, and as specified in Attachment No. 3 hereto with regard to all other Insurance. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this Contract, whether performed by the CONTRACTOR or a subcontractor, or others for whom CONTRACTOR is responsible. 4.07 PERMITS AND FEES. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits, licenses, and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, and which are legally required at the time bids are received. Permits required by the City of Pearland will be issued as a NO FEE permit. (°w' 4.08 TEXAS STATE SALES TAX. Materials incorporated into this project are exempt from State Sales according to provisions of the Texas Tax Code, Chapter 151, Subsection H. 10-2012 00700-9 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit or exemption certificate which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the Work without paying tax at II due time of purchase. 4.09 CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE. The CONTRACTOR shall give adequate attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this Contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to the ENGINEER as the OWNER'S representative. The superintendent shall represent the CONTRACTOR in his absence and shall act as the agent of the CONTRACTOR, and all directions given to him shall be binding as if given to the CONTRACTOR. Adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the CONTRACTOR is essential to the proper performance of the Work, and lack of such supervision shall be an act of default, and grounds for suspending operations of the CONTRACTOR. The Superintendent cannot be removed from the project without the consent of the Owner; the Superintendent must speak and understand the.English language; the Superintendent must be on site when any work on the project is being done, even when a subcontractor is performing the work. The Work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the CONTRACTOR, and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR. Neither the OWNER nor the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative will be responsible for the acts or omissions of the CONTRACTOR, its subcontractors or any of its agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the Work. 4.10 CHARACTER OF WORKERS. The CONTRACTOR agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the performance of the type of work required under this Contract, to do the Work, and agrees that whenever the ENGINEER shall inform him in writing that any worker or workers on the Work are, in his opinion, incompetent, unfaithful or disorderly, or in the ENGINEER's opinion, are not using their best efforts for the progress of the Work, such worker or workers shall be discharged from the Work and shall not again be employed on the Work without the ENGINEER's written consent. OWNER reserves the right to bar any person, subcontractor, or supplier found to be incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or not using their best efforts to progress work or considered to be a threat to the health, safety and welfare to the project or workforce. 4.11 LABOR, EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS, CONSTRUCTION PLANT, AND BUILDINGS. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, services, tools, equipment, machinery, supplies, facilities, utilities and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this Contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that the OWNER shall furnish same; and further, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, all means of construction and any and all parts of the Work, whether the CONTRACTOR has been paid, partially paid or not paid for such Work, until the entire Work is completed and accepted. The building or placement of structures for housing workers or offices, or the erection of tents or other forms of protection, will be permitted only with the ENGINEER's written permission, and at 10-2012 00700- 10 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT such places as the ENGINEER shall direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structures shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the ENGINEER. Any structures of any nature constructed, placed or erected by the CONTRACTOR for the purposes herein set out, shall be the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR as to the proper erection, placement or construction thereof; and the CONTRACTOR agrees to indemnify and hold the ENGINEER or OWNER harmless from any claims of any nature whatsoever brought against either of them for damages allegedly sustained by anyone by reason of the erection, placement, construction or maintenance of CONTRACTOR's buildings or structures. 4.12 SANITATION. Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers and others on the Work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the CONTRACTOR in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the ENGINEER, and their use shall be strictly enforced. Any structures of any nature constructed or erected by the CONTRACTOR for the purposes herein set out, shall be the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR as to the proper erection or construction thereof, and the CONTRACTOR agrees to indemnify and hold the ENGINEER and OWNER harmless from any claims of any nature whatsoever brought against either of them for damages allegedly sustained by anyone by reason of the erection, construction or maintenance of CONTRACTOR's buildings. 4.13 CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE. The CONTRACTOR shall at all times keep and maintain the premises free from accumulation of debris, trash and waste. The CONTRACTOR shall remove waste, debris and trash at the end of each work day. CONTRACTOR shall remove all such debris, trash and waste, tools, scaffolding and surplus materials, and shall leave the Work broom-clean or its equivalent, upon completion of the Work. The Work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute, the OWNER may remove the debris, trash, waste and surplus materials, and charge the cost to the CONTRACTOR. 4.14 PERFORMANCE OF WORK. It is further agreed that it is the intent of this Contract that all Work must be done and all material must be furnished in accordance with the generally accepted practice for such materials furnished or work completed, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 4.15 RIGHT OF OWNER TO ACCELERATE THE WORK. If at any time the methods or equipment used by the CONTRACTOR, or the work force supplied are found to be inadequate to achieve the progress required to Substantially Complete the Work within the Contract Time, the OWNER or the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative, may order the CONTRACTOR in writing to supplement its forces and/or equipment, or work shifts or overtime, or otherwise improve its efficiency and rate of progress to achieve Substantial Completion of the Work within the Contract Time, and the CONTRACTOR shall comply with such order, at its own cost and expense. 4.16 LAYOUT OF WORK. Except as specifically provided herein, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for laying out work by means of construction surveying and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the ENGINEER and in conformance with the Contract Documents. rbs\ 4.17 SHOP DRAWINGS. The CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER, with such promptness as to cause no delay in his own Work or in that of any other contractor, six (6) checked copies, unless otherwise specified, of all shop and/or setting drawings and schedules 10-2012 00700- 11 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT required for the work of the various trades. Contractor will check and approve shop drawings for compliance with requirements of Contract Documents and will so certify by stamp on each drawing prior to submittal to ENGINEER. Any drawings submitted without Contractor's stamp of approval will not be considered and will be returned to him for proper submission. The ENGINEER shall pass upon them with reasonable promptness, indicating desired corrections. The CONTRACTOR shall make any corrections required by the ENGINEER, file with him two (2) corrected copies and furnish such other copies as may be needed. The ENGINEER's approval of such drawings or schedules shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR from responsibility for deviations from the Contract Documents, unless he has, in writing, called the ENGINEER's attention to such deviations at the time of the submission, and the ENGINEER has acknowledged and accepted such deviations in writing, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors of any sort in shop drawings or schedules. It shall be the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to fully and completely review all shop drawings to ascertain their effect on his ability to perform the required Contract Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, and within the Contract Time. Such review by the ENGINEER shall be for the sole purpose of determining the apparent sufficiency of said drawings or schedules to result in finished improvements in conformity with the Contract Documents, and shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of his duty as an independent contractor as previously set forth, it being expressly understood and agreed that the ENGINEER does not assume any duty to pass upon the propriety or adequacy of such drawings or schedules, or any means or methods reflected thereby, in relation to the safety of either person or property during CONTRACTOR's performance hereunder, and any action taken by the ENGINEER shall not relieve the CONTRACTOR of his responsibility and liability to comply with the Contract Documents. OWNER, CONSTRUCTION MANAGER, ENGINEER, and CONTRACTOR shall make all submittals, review comments, notes, corrections, schedules and updates, testing results, payment applications, instructions and other communications by means of the OWNER'S Pro-Trak. The OWNER, ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR shall each retain such hard copies form this system as are required for their specific record keeping requirements. No documents shall be removed from this system or destroyed except those being replaced by the systems protocols as a latest version document. All requirements for written communications, submittals, comments, instructions or other documents processed by means of this system shall have the same legal or time sensitive status as if they had been hand delivered in hard copy to their intended addressee. 4.18 ENGINEER-CONTRACTOR RELATIONSHIP; OBSERVATIONS. It is agreed by the CONTRACTOR that the ENGINEER, as the OWNER's representative, shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint such subordinate engineers, representatives or observers as the said ENGINEER may from time to time deem proper to observe the materials furnished and the Work done under this Agreement. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, representatives or observers for the proper observation and examination of the work. The CONTRACTOR shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, representatives or observers so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and the Contract Documents, provided, however, should the CONTRACTOR object to any orders by any 10-2012 00700- 12 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT subordinate engineer, representative or observer, the CONTRACTOR may, within three (3) days, make written appeal to the ENGINEER for his decision. 4.19 OBSERVATION AND TESTING. The OWNER or the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative shall have the right at all reasonable times to observe, inspect and test the Work. The CONTRACTOR shall make all necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation, inspection and testing at any location wherever Work is in preparation or progress. The CONTRACTOR shall ascertain the scope of any observation, inspection or testing which may be contemplated by the OWNER or the ENGINEER and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the Work will be ready for such observation, inspection or testing. The OWNER or the ENGINEER may reject any Work found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such deficiencies, and regardless of whether the ENGINEER has previously accepted the Work through oversight or otherwise. If any Work is covered without approval or consent of the OWNER, it must, if requested by the OWNER or the ENGINEER, be uncovered for examination, at the sole expense of the CONTRACTOR. In the event that any part of the Work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for the OWNER or the ENGINEER to make observations of such Work or require testing of said Work, then in such event, the OWNER or the ENGINEER may require the CONTRACTOR to furnish the OWNER or the ENGINEER with certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by independent persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may 111 ) be required by law or the Contract Documents. If any Work, which is required to be inspected, tested or approved, is covered up without written approval or consent of the OWNER or the ENGINEER, it must, if requested by the OWNER or the ENGINEER, be uncovered for observation and testing, at the sole expense of the CONTRACTOR. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR unless otherwise provided herein. Any Work which fails to meet the requirements of such tests, inspections or approval, and any Work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approval but does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents shall be considered defective. Such defective Work and any other work affected thereby shall be corrected at the CONTRACTOR'S expense. Neither observations by the OWNER or by the ENGINEER, nor inspections, certifications, tests or approvals made by the OWNER, the ENGINEER or other persons authorized under this Agreement to make such inspections, tests or approvals, shall relieve the CONTRACTOR from his obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 4.20 DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES. It is further agreed that if the Work or any part thereof or any material brought on the site of the Work for use in the Work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the ENGINEER as unsuitable or not in conformity with the Contract Documents, the CONTRACTOR shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the ENGINEER, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such Work so that (11.'‘ it shall be in full accordance with this Contract, It is further agreed that any such remedial action contemplated herein shall be at CONTRACTOR's expense. 10-2012 00700- 13 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.21 LIABILITY FOR PROPER PERFORMANCE. Engineering construction drawings and specifications, as well as any additional instructions and information concerning the Work to be performed, passing from or through the ENGINEER, shall not be interpreted as requiring or allowing the CONTRACTOR to deviate from the Contract Documents, the intent of such drawings, specifications and any other such instructions being to define with particularity the agreement of the parties as to Work the CONTRACTOR is to perform. CONTRACTOR shall be fully and completely liable and contractually bound, at his own expense, for design, construction, installation and use or non-use of all items and methods incident to the performance of the Contract, including, without limitation, the adequacy of all temporary supports, shoring, bracing, scaffolding, machinery or equipment, safety precautions or devices, similar items or devices used by him during construction, and work performed either directly or incident to construction, and for all loss, damage or injury incident thereto, either to person or property, whether such damage be suffered by the ENGINEER, the OWNER or any other person not a party to this Contract. Any review of Work in progress or any visit or observation during construction, or any clarification of Contract Documents by the ENGINEER or OWNER, or any agent, employee or representative of either of them, whether through personal observation on the Project site or by means of approval of shop drawings for construction or construction processes, or by other means or methods, is agreed by the CONTRACTOR to be for the purpose of observing the extent and nature of Work completed or being performed, as measured against the Contract Documents, or for the purpose of enabling the CONTRACTOR to more fully understand the Contract Documents so that the completed construction Work will conform thereto, and shall in no way relieve the CONTRACTOR from full and complete responsibility for proper performance of his Work on the Project, including, without limitation, the propriety of means and methods of the CONTRACTOR in performing said Contract, and the adequacy of any designs, plans or other facilities for accomplishing such performance. Any action by the ENGINEER or the OWNER in visiting or observing during construction, or any clarification of Contract Documents shall not constitute a waiver of CONTRACTOR'S liability for damages as herein set out. Deviation by the CONTRACTOR from Contract Documents, whether called to the CONTRACTOR's attention or not, shall in no way relieve CONTRACTOR from his responsibility to complete all work in accordance with said Contract Documents, and further shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of his liability for loss, damage or injury as herein set out. 4.22 PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC. The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for the safety of himself, his employees and persons entering the project site, as well as for the protection of the improvements being erected and the property of himself or any other person, as a result of his operations hereunder. The CONTRACTOR shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The CONTRACTOR shall at all times exercise reasonable precautions for the safety of employees and others on or near the Work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded, as a minimum, in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of the Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The CONTRACTOR shall ^, provide all necessary machinery guards, safe walkways, ladders, bridges, gangplanks, barricades, J fences, traffic control, warning signs and other safety devices. 10-2012 00700- 14 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT No alcoholic beverages, non-prescription drugs, or unsafe practices shall be allowed on the Work site. CONTRACTOR shall dismiss anyone participating in any of the above from the Work site for the duration of the Project. Only prescription drug uses with a doctor's authorization to perform construction activities shall be allowed on the Work site. Violation of this provision is a default under the Contract. The use, possession, sale, transfer, purchase or being under the influence of alcohol, drugs or any other illegal or unlawful substance by CONTRACTOR or CONTRACTOR's employees, or CONTRACTOR's subcontractors and employees at any time at the Work site or while on company business is prohibited. CONTRACTOR shall institute and enforce appropriate drug testing guidelines and program. All accidents or injuries to CONTRACTOR's employees working on the job site must be reported verbally and in writing to the ENGINEER immediately, and within no more than eight (8) hours. The safety precautions actually taken and their adequacy shall be the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR, in his sole discretion as an independent contractor. Inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the OWNER or the ENGINEER as the OWNER's representative concerning omissions under thus paragraph as the Work progresses, are intended as reminders to the CONTRACTOR of his duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty by ENGINEER, or OWNER's representative to supervise safety precautions by either the CONTRACTOR or any of his subcontractors. 4.23 PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY. The CONTRACTOR shall employ proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which might be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this Agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and he shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent or adjoining property. THE CONTRACTOR AGREES TO INDEMNIFY, DEFEND, SAVE AND HOLD HARMLESS THE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER, OWNER AND ENGINEER AGAINST ANY CLAIM OR CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES, LOSS, COSTS OR EXPENSES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ATTORNEY'S FEES, DUE TO ANY INJURY TO ANY ADJACENT OR ADJOINING PROPERTY, ARISING OR GROWING OUT OF THE PERFORMANCE OF THE CONTRACT, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER OR NOT SUCH DAMAGE, LOSS, COST OR EXPENSE IS CAUSED IN PART BY THE NEGLIGENCE, GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY OF OWNER AND/OR ENGINEER. 4.24 PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS, LABORERS, MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES. THE CONTRACTOR AGREES THAT HE WILL PROMPTLY PAY WHEN DUE, AND WILL INDEMNIFY, SAVE AND HOLD THE OWNER AND THE ENGINEER HARMLESS FROM ALL CLAIMS GROWING OUT OF THE DEMANDS OF SUBCONTRACTORS, LABORERS, WORKERS, MECHANICS, MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY AND PARTS THEREOF, EQUIPMENT, POWER TOOLS AND ALL SUPPLIES, INCLUDING COMMISSARY, INCURRED IN THE FURTHERANCE OF THE PERFORMANCE OF THIS CONTRACT. When so desired by the OWNER, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. If the CONTRACTOR fails to do so, then the OWNER may, at the option of the OWNER, either pay directly any unpaid bills of which the OWNER has written notice, or withhold from the CONTRACTOR's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably 10-2012 00700- 15 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT sufficient to liquidate any and all such claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payments to the CONTRACTOR shall be resumed in full, in accordance with the terms of this Contract. l Any and all communications between any parties under this paragraph shall be in writing. Nothing contained in this paragraph or this Agreement shall create, establish or impose any relationship, contractual or otherwise, between OWNER and any subcontractor, laborer or supplier of CONTRACTOR, nor shall it create, establish or impose any duty upon OWNER to pay or to see to the payment of any subcontractor, laborer or supplier of CONTRACTOR. 4.25 PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENTED INVENTION. The CONTRACTOR shall pay all royalties and license fees and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright, by suitable legal agreement with the patentee or owner thereof THE CONTRACTOR SHALL DEFEND ALL SUITS OR CLAIMS FOR INFRINGEMENT OF ANY PATENT OR COPYRIGHT AND SHALL INDEMNIFY, SAVE AND HOLD THE OWNER AND THE ENGINEER HARMLESS FROM ANY LOSS OR LIABILITY ON ACCOUNT THEREOF, EXCEPT SUCH SUITS AND CLAIMS ARISING OUT OF A PARTICULAR DESIGN, DEVICE, MATERIAL OR PROCESS OR THE PRODUCT OF A PARTICULAR MANUFACTURER OR MANUFACTURERS SPECIFIED OR REQUIRED BY THE OWNER; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, IF CHOICE OF ALTERNATE DESIGN, DEVICE, MATERIAL OR PROCESS IS ALLOWED TO THE CONTRACTOR, OR IF CONTRACTOR KNEW OR SHOULD HAVE KNOWN OF THE PATENT OR COPYRIGHT AND FAILED TO PROMPTLY NOTIFY OWNER IN WRITING, THEN THE CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND, SAVE AND HOLD THE OWNER HARMLESS FROM ANY LOSS OR LIABILITY ON ACCOUNT THEREOF. 4.26 INDEMNIFICATION. THE CONTRACTOR AGREES TO DEFEND, INDEMNIFY AND HOLD THE ENGINEER AND THE OWNER HARMLESS FROM ANY CLAIMS OR DEMANDS OF ANY NATURE WHATSOEVER MADE BY ANY EMPLOYEE, EMPLOYEES, AGENTS OR SUBCONTRACTORS OF CONTRACTOR, OR BY ANY UNION, TRADE ASSOCIATION, WORKER'S ASSOCIATION OR OTHER GROUPS, ASSOCIATIONS OR INDIVIDUALS, ALLEGEDLY REPRESENTING EMPLOYEES OF THE CONTRACTOR, IN ANY DISPUTE BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS EMPLOYEES, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY INVOLVING, GROWING OUT OF OR ARISING FROM CLAIMS BY SUCH EMPLOYEES FOR WAGES, SALARY, COMPENSATION, BENEFITS, WORKING CONDITIONS OR ANY OTHER SIMILAR COMPLAINT OR CLAIM WHICH MAY BE MADE. THE CONTRACTOR, HIS SURETIES AND INSURANCE CARRIERS SHALL DEFEND, INDEMNIFY AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER AND THE ENGINEER AND THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS, REPRESENTATIVES, AGENTS AND EMPLOYEES FROM AND AGAINST ALL DAMAGES, CLAIMS, LOSSES, DEMANDS, SUITS, LIABILITIES, JUDGMENTS AND COSTS OF ANY CHARACTER WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING REASONABLE ATTORNEY'S FEES AND EXPENSES, AND SHALL BE REQUIRED TO PAY ANY JUDGMENT THEREFOR, WITH COSTS, WHICH MAY BE OBTAINED AGAINST THE OWNER AND/OR THE ENGINEER OR ANY OF THEIR OFFICERS, REPRESENTATIVES, AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES, ARISING OUT OF OR RESULTING FROM OR ALLEGEDLY ARISING OUT OF OR RESULTING FROM THE PERFORMANCE 10-2012 00700- 16 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT OF THE WORK, PROVIDED THAT ANY SUCH DAMAGES, CLAIM, LOSS, DEMAND, SUIT, LIABILITY, JUDGMENT, COST OR EXPENSE: (A) ARISES OUT OF OR RESULTS FROM IN WHOLE OR IN PART, OR ALLEGEDLY ARISES OUT OF OR RESULTS FROM IN WHOLE OR IN PART, ANY BREACH OF THIS AGREEMENT OR BREACH OF WARRANTY BY CONTRACTOR; OR (B) IS ATTRIBUTABLE TO BODILY INJURY, SICKNESS, DISEASE OR DEATH.OR INJURY TO OR DESTRUCTION OF TANGIBLE PROPERTY, INCLUDING THE LOSS OF USE RESULTING THEREFROM; AND IS CAUSED IN WHOLE OR IN PART OR IS ALLEGEDLY CAUSED IN WHOLE OR IN PART BY ANY NEGLIGENT ACT OR OMISSION OF THE CONTRACTOR, ANY SUBCONTRACTOR, THEIR AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES OR ANYONE DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY EMPLOYED BY ANY ONE OF THEM OR ANYONE FOR WHOSE ACTS ANY OF THEM MAY BE LIABLE, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER OR NOT IT IS CAUSED IN PART OR ALLEGEDLY CAUSED IN PART BY THE NEGLIGENCE, GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY OF OWNER, ENGINEER AND/OR A PARTY INDEMNIFIED HEREUNDER. (117 Notwithstanding the foregoing or anything in the Agreement to the contrary, in accordance with the provisions of Section 130.002 of the Texas Civil Practice and Remedies Code, CONTRACTOR shall not be obligated to indemnify or hold harmless the ENGINEER, his agents, servants or employees, from liability for damage that is caused by or results from defects in plans, designs or specifications prepared, approved or used by the ENGINEER, or negligence of the ENGINEER in the rendition or conduct of professional duties called for or arising out of any construction contract and the plans, designs or specifications that are a part of the construction contract, and arises from personal injury or death, property injury, or any other expense that arises from personal injury, death, or property injury. This indemnity agreement is a continuing obligation, and shall survive notwithstanding completion of the Work, Final Payment, expiration of the warranty period, termination of the Contract, and abandonment or takeover of the Work. CONTRACTOR's indemnification obligations hereunder shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the CONTRACTOR or a subcontractor under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts, and shall not be limited by any limitation on amounts or coverage of insurance provided or to be provided under this Contract. 4.27 LOSSES FROM NATURAL CAUSES. All loss, cost, expense or damage to the CONTRACTOR arising out of the nature of the Work to be done or from any unforeseen circumstances in the prosecution of the same, or from the action of the elements, or from unusual obstructions or difficulties which may be encountered in the prosecution of the Work, shall be sustained and borne by the CONTRACTOR at his own cost and expense. 10-2012 00700- 17 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.28 GUARANTEE. The CONTRACTOR hereby guarantees all the Work under the Contract to be free from defects or deficiencies in material in every particular and free from defects or deficiencies in workmanship; and against unusual damage from proper and usual use; and agrees to replace or to re-execute without cost to the OWNER such Work as may be found to be defective, deficient or otherwise not in conformance with the Contract Documents, and to make good all damages caused to other work or material, due to such defective Work or due to its required replacement or re-execution. This guarantee shall cover a period of one year from the date of Substantial Completion or Partial Substantial Completion of Work under the Contract, as evidenced by the Certificate of Substantial Completion. Neither the Certificate of Substantial Completion, Final Payment, nor any provision in the Contract Documents shall relieve the CONTRACTOR of the responsibility for defective, deficient or non-conforming material or workmanship during the period covered by the guarantee. The one-year period of guarantee will not limit the OWNER'S other rights under common law with respect to any defects, deficiencies or non-conforming Work discovered after one year. If this one-year guarantee conflicts with other warranties or guarantees, the longer period of warranty or guarantee will govern. 5.0 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS 5.01 TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION. It is the meaning and intent of this Contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the CONTRACTOR shall be allowed to prosecute his Work at such times and seasons, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conducive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and the time of prosecution shall be such that the Work shall be Substantially Completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this Contract and the Contract Time; provided, also, that when the OWNER is having other work done, either by contract or by his own forces, the ENGINEER may direct the time and manner of constructing the Work done under this Contract, so that conflict will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the OWNER shall be harmonized, and the CONTRACTOR shall fully cooperate and coordinate its Work with OWNER or such other contractors. The CONTRACTOR shall submit, an updated schedule with every pay estimate for review by the ENGINEER, schedules which shall show the order in which the CONTRACTOR proposes to carry on the Work, with dates on which the CONTRACTOR will start the several parts of the work, and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. Such schedules shall show completion of the Work within the Contract Time, and/or shall show such recovery efforts as CONTRACTOR intends to undertake in the event Substantial Completion of the Work is delayed. 5.02 EXTENSION OF TIME. The CONTRACTOR agrees that he has submitted his Bid Proposal in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this Project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions as hereinafter set forth, and that he shall not be entitled to, nor will he request, an extension of time on this Contract, except when Substantial Completion of the Work has been delayed solely by strikes, lockouts, fires, Acts of God, or by any other cause which the ENGINEER shall decide justifies the delay. The CONTRACTOR shall give the ENGINEER prompt notice, in writing and within three (3) days of the start of any such delay, of the cause of any such delay, and its estimated effect on the Work and the schedule for completion of the Work. Upon receipt of a written request for an extension of the Contract Time from the CONTRACTOR, supported by relevant and all requested documentation, the 10-2012 00700- 18 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT ENGINEER shall submit such written request, together with his written recommendation, to the (111.6\ OWNER for consideration. If the delay is not attributable in whole or in part to any act or omission of CONTRACTOR, its subcontractors or suppliers, and if the OWNER determines that CONTRACTOR is entitled to an extension of time under the terms of the Contract, the OWNER shall grant an extension of time for Substantial Completion of the Work, sufficient to compensate for the delay, and such extension of time shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy, except as may be otherwise provided herein. No extensions of Contract Time shall be made for delays occurring prior to the Contractor's mobilization as defined in Section 01505 MOBILIZATION. The Contract Time as defined in the Bid Proposal and other sections herein incorporates 40 Rain Days per calendar year or an average of 3.33 days per calendar month. The CONTRACTOR is required to keep record of all weather related delays and to submit the monthly count on each Pay Application. The Owner's Representative shall review and sign off on this record as a part of the Pay Application approval process every month. If, during preparation of the Balancing Change Order, the status of the work progress requires an extension of the Contract Time, Impact Days shall be added to the Completion Date equal to the total number of Weather or Impact Days approved less the original 40 days resident in the original Contract Time. The Addition of Weather or Impact Days will only alter the Contract Time when added by Change Order. If the Work is completed prior to the Completion Date, No Days will be added. The addition of Weather or Impact Days shall be the CONTRACTOR's sole remedy for delays to the completion of the Work and their addition to the Contract Time shall not affect the Contract Price through any "per diem" adjustment to the General Conditions costs, Temporary Facilities costs or any other costs associated with the extension of the Contract Time. 5.03 HINDRANCES AND DELAYS. In executing the Contract, the CONTRACTOR agrees that in undertaking to complete the Work within the time herein fixed, he has taken into consideration and made allowances for all interference, disruption, hindrances and delays incident to such Work, whether growing out of delays in securing material, workmen or otherwise. No claim shall be made by the CONTRACTOR for damages, loss, costs or expense resulting from interference, disruption, hindrances or delays from any cause during the progress of any portion of the Work embraced in this Contract, except where the Work is stopped or suspended by order of the OWNER's representative and such stoppage or suspension is not attributable to any act or omission of CONTRACTOR. 5.04 SUSPENSION OF WORK. OWNER may, without cause, order the CONTRACTOR in writing to suspend the Work, in whole or in part, for such period of time as OWNER may request. The Contract Price and/or Contract Time shall be adjusted for any increase in the cost of or the time required for performance of the Work caused by such suspension. No adjustment shall be made to the extent performance was or would have been suspended by a cause for which CONTRACTOR is responsible, or to the extent an adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract Documents. 5.05 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR DELAY: It is understood and agreed that time is of the essence, and that the CONTRACTOR will commence the Work on the date specified herein or in any Notice to Proceed, and will Substantially Complete the Work within the Contract Time. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER, that the time for the Substantial Completion of the Work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The CONTRACTOR further 10-2012 00700- 19 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT agrees that a failure to complete on time will cause damage to the OWNER and that such damages cannot be accurately measured or that ascertainment will be difficult. Therefore, the parties agree that for each and every calendar day the Work or any portion thereof shall remain uncompleted after the expiration of the Contract Time, the CONTRACTOR shall pay, as liquidated damages and as a reasonable estimate of OWNER's damages, and not as a penalty, the amount set out in the Standard Form of Agreement. However, the foregoing agreement as to liquidated damages constitutes only an agreement by the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR as to the amount of damages which the OWNER will sustain by reason of the CONTRACTOR'S failure to complete the work within the Contract Time. Should the OWNER suffer damage by reason of any other breach by CONTRACTOR, the OWNER may recover such actual damages in addition to any liquidated damages due. The OWNER shall have the right to deduct and withhold the amount of any and all such damages whether it be the minimum amount stipulated above or otherwise, from any monies owing by it to said CONTRACTOR, or the OWNER may recover such amount from the CONTRACTOR and the sureties of his bond; all of such remedies shall be cumulative and the OWNER shall not be required to elect any one nor be deemed to have made an election by proceeding to enforce any one remedy. 5.06 CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIME: The Contract Time may only be changed by a Change Order. Any claim for an adjustment of Contract Time shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making such claim to the other party and to the ENGINEER promptly, but in no event later than ten (10) days after the event-giving rise to the claim. Notice of the extent of ''44) the claim, along with supporting data, shall be delivered within thirty (30) days of the occurrence and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written representation that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in Contract Time shall be determined by the ENGINEER in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. Contractor shall submit, as a minimum, the following data: A. Information showing that the time requested is not included in the existing Contract and in addition to the Contract. B. Information documenting that the number of days requested is accurate for the event. C. Revised, current construction schedule showing that the time requested affects the project's critical path. 5.07 DELAYS BEYOND OWNER'S AND CONTRACTOR'S CONTROL: Where CONTRACTOR is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Time due to delays beyond the control of the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR, including, but not limited to, interference by utility owners or other contractors performing other work, Contractor shall be entitled to an extension of the Contract Time in an amount equal to the time lost. CONTRACTOR shall not be entitled to any increase in Contract Price as a result of such delays. IN NO EVENT SHALL OWNER BE LIABLE TO CONTRACTOR FOR DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF OR RESULTING FROM (i) Delays caused by, or within the control of, the CONTRACTOR, or (ii) Delays beyond the control of both parties including, but not limited to, interference by utility owners or other contractors performing other work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God, even if such delays are due in part to the negligence, other fault, breach of contract or warranty, violation of the Texas Deceptive Trade Act, or strict liability without regard 10-2012 00700-20 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT to fault of OWNER. An extension of Contract time shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive �, remedy for any such delays. Delays attributed to, and within the control of, a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of the CONTRACTOR. 6.0 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 6.01 DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS. If the CONTRACTOR knows or reasonably should have known of any discrepancies or omissions in the Contract Documents, he shall notify the ENGINEER and obtain a clarification by Addendum before the bids are received, and if no such request is received by the ENGINEER prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be considered that the CONTRACTOR fully understands the Work to be performed and has provided sufficient sums in his Bid Proposal to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. It is further understood that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) days prior to the opening of bids. 6.02 QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS. No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured and/or computed length, area, volume, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. 6.03 ESTIMATED QUANTITIES. This Agreement, including the Contract Documents, and including any estimates contained therein, is intended to convey all Work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown for the various classes of Work to be done and material to be furnished under this Contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the Work and for comparing the Bid Proposals offered for the Work. It is understood and agreed that the actual amount of Work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this Contract may differ from the estimates and that the items listed or estimated quantities stated, and/or any difference between estimated and actual Work, shall not give rise to a claim by the CONTRACTOR against the OWNER for loss, cost, expense, damages, unit price adjustment, quantity differences, unrecovered overhead or lost or anticipated profits, or other compensation. 6.04 PRICE OF WORK. It is agreed that it is the intent of this Contract that all Work described in the Bid Proposal, and Contract Documents, is to be done for the prices bid by the CONTRACTOR and that such prices shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the Work in accordance with the intent of these Contract Documents as interpreted by the ENGINEER, and all costs, expenses, bond and insurance premiums, taxes, overhead, and profit. In consideration of the furnishing of all the necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all Work by the CONTRACTOR, and upon the completion of all Work and the delivery of all materials embraced in this Contract in full conformity with the Contract Documents, the OWNER agrees to pay to the CONTRACTOR the prices set forth in the Standard Form of Agreement, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that the Contract is a unit cost agreement, unless stated otherwise, and that the final Contract amount is equal to the unit cost multiplied by the number of units authorized, installed and approved by the Owner. (11/1'`, The OWNER does not assume any obligation to pay for any services or material not actually authorized and used. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to receive such prices as payment in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid Work, and for 10-2012 00700-21 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT all expenses incurred by him, and for full performance of the Work and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this Agreement, Contract Documents, and the requirements of the ENGINEER. 6.05 PAYMENTS. No payments made or approvals or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the Contract, either in whole or in part, nor shall any certificate, approval or payment be considered as acceptance of defective, deficient or non-conforming Work. CONTRACTOR shall, at any time requested during the progress of the Work, furnish the OWNER or the ENGINEER with an affidavit showing the CONTRACTOR's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the Work. Before Final Payment is made, the CONTRACTOR shall satisfy the OWNER, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no unpaid claims due subcontractors, suppliers or laborers by reason of any Work under the Contract. Acceptance by CONTRACTOR of Final Payment shall constitute a waiver of any and all claims of whatsoever nature against OWNER, arising out of or related to the Contract, or the Work, or any acts or omissions of OWNER or ENGINEER, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this Contract. 6.06 PARTIAL PAYMENTS. When the Contract Price is a lump sum amount, prior to the first Application for Payment, CONTRACTOR shall submit to ENGINEER for review and approval a Schedule of Values, which shall fairly allocate the entire Contract Price among the various portions of the Work and shall be prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the ENGINEER may reasonably require. The Schedule of Values shall follow the trade divisions of the Specifications so far as practicable. Upon approval, this Schedule of Values shall be used by ENGINEER as the basis for reviewing the Contractor's Application for Payment. Applications for Payment shall indicate the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment. On or before the tenth day of each month, the CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit to the ENGINEER, for approval or correction, an application for partial payment, being a statement showing as completely as practicable, the agreed unit quantities and extended total value of the Work done by the CONTRACTOR up to and including the twenty-fifth day of the preceding month; said statement shall also include the value of all conforming materials to be fabricated into the Work and stored in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as approved by the OWNER or ENGINEER at the Work site only. No payment will be made for materials stored until OWNER has approved in writing storage at the Work site. The ENGINEER shall then review such statement of unit quantities and application for partial payment and the progress of the Work made by the CONTRACTOR and, within ten days after the date ENGINEER receives CONTRACTOR's application for payment, if the application is found to be accurate and correct and the WORK conforming to the requirements of the Contract Documents, the ENGINEER shall certify the application for partial payment and shall deliver his preliminary certification for payment to the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR; or, if the ENGINEER finds that CONTRACTOR's application for payment contains an error or is otherwise disputed, he shall notify CONTRACTOR of such error or dispute, and shall prepare a preliminary certificate for partial payment for the undisputed amount of the application for payment due CONTRACTOR, and deliver it to the OWNER and CONTRACTOR. ENGINEER'S notice to CONTRACTOR that a bona fide dispute for payment exists shall include a list of the specific reasons for nonpayment. All payment applications made by CONTRACTOR and delivered to ENGINEER and all verifications and certification of such applications shall be made and transmitted within the Pro- Trak system and signed with the appropriate electronic signatures as provided for in the software. 10-2012 00700-22 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Such applications for payment shall not be considered complete unless accompanied by the CONTRACTOR'S Partial Waiver of Lien and Payment Affidavit, Section 00615, duly executed by an authorized representative of the CONTRACTOR and reflecting the correct corresponding amount of the payment application. The OWNER shall then pay the CONTRACTOR, within thirty (30) days of the date of ENGINEER's receipt of the application for payment, the undisputed balance due, less applicable retainage, and further less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained or withheld by the OWNER under the terms of this Agreement. CONTRACTOR may submit a corrected application for payment after its receipt of the ENGINEER's notice of error or dispute, and such corrected application for payment shall be reviewed by the ENGINEER and disputed or paid under the same procedure and within the same time limits set out above. As a condition of any progress payment under this Agreement, CONTRACTOR shall execute and deliver to ENGINEER and OWNER a full release of all claims, direct or indirect, at law or in equity, arising out of or related to the Work to date, excluding retainage or any claims previously submitted as required under the terms of the Contract, and specifically identified and excluded by CONTRACTOR in the release. OWNER shall be entitled to retain from each progress payment five percent (5%) of the amount thereof. Such retainage shall be retained until Final Completion and satisfaction of all conditions for Final Payment. It is understood, however, that in case the whole Work be near to completion, as certified by the ENGINEER, and some unexpected or unusual delay occurs, through no neglect or fault on the part of the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER may, upon written recommendation of the ENGINEER, pay a reasonable and equitable portion of the retained percentage to the CONTRACTOR, or the CONTRACTOR, at the OWNER'S option, may be relieved of the obligation to fully complete the Work, and thereupon, the CONTRACTOR shall receive, at the OWNER'S option, payment of the balance due him under the Contract for Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, subject to OWNER's rights to otherwise withhold or retain payments, and subject to the conditions set forth under"6.08 FINAL PAYMENT." The Owner at its option and in compliance with Texas law may reduce retainage to less than the above-stated percentages. 6.07 USE OF COMPLETED PORTIONS & PUNCHLIST. The OWNER shall have the right to take possession of and use any completed or partially completed portions of the Work, notwithstanding that the time for completing the entire work or such portions may not have expired; but such taking possession and use shall not be deemed an acceptance of any work not completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. If such prior use increases the cost of or delays the Work, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly and within three (3) days of OWNER's taking possession, give OWNER written notice of same, and CONTRACTOR may be entitled to such extra compensation or extension of time, or both, as may be determined in accordance with the provisions of this Agreement. 6.08 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER AND ENGINEER, by letter executed by a duly qualified officer of CONTRACTOR, that in CONTRACTOR's opinion, the Work of the Contract, or an agreed portion thereof, is "Substantially Complete". Such notification shall include a list of all outstanding or incomplete items. Upon receipt, and within a reasonable time thereafter, of such notice, the ENGINEER and the CONTRACTOR shall jointly perform a walk-through and inspection of the Work to determine 10-2012 00700-23 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT the status of all or the identified portion of the work, and the ENGINEER shall prepare a detailed list of unfinished, incomplete, defective and/or non-conforming Work ("Punchlist"). If the ENGINEER determines that the Work is Substantially Complete in accordance with the Contract Documents, the ENGINEER shall issue to the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR a Certificate of Substantial Completion. OWNER shall have seven (7) days after receipt of Certificate to make written objection to the ENGINEER as to any provision of the Certificate or the attached list of non-conforming work. If ENGINEER concludes that the Work is not Substantially Complete, ENGINEER will, within fourteen (14) days, notify CONTRACTOR of the reason he believes the Work is not Substantially Complete. Upon Substantial Completion of the Work, ENGINEER will deliver to OWNER and CONTRACTOR a written recommendation as to division of responsibilities, pending final payment and acceptance, with respect to security, maintenance, utilities and damage to the Work, except as otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. NEITHER THE SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION OF THE WORK, NOR THE OMISSION OF AN ITEM FROM THE PUNCHLIST, SHALL EXCUSE THE CONTRACTOR FROM PERFORMING ALL OF THE WORK UNDERTAKEN, WHETHER OF A MINOR OR MAJOR NATURE, AND THEREBY COMPLETING THE WORK IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall establish the time period within which CONTRACTOR shall complete the Work for Final Acceptance by the Owner and ENGINEER. 6.08-1 OWNER shall have the right to exclude CONTRACTOR from the Work after the date of Substantial Completion, for security requirement reasons. OWNER may establish an access procedure to facilitate CONTRACTOR's uninterrupted access to the Work for the purposes of completing and correcting all items on the Punchlist in an expeditious manner. 6.09 FINAL PAYMENT. Final payment of the Retainage withheld from the Contract Price shall be made by the OWNER to the CONTRACTOR at such time as: (a) the Work, including all Change Orders and including all Punchlist work, has been fully completed in strict accordance with the Contract Documents; (b) the Contract has been fully performed except for the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to correct nonconforming Work during the warranty period set forth in the Contract Documents, and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which necessarily survive final payment; (c) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be cancelled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to OWNER; (d) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER a Consent of Surety, if any, to final payment; (e) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER a complete set of As-Built Drawings, reflecting all deviations from the Plans, Specifications and approved shop drawings in the Work actually constructed, and delivers all maintenance and operating manuals and/or instructions; 10-2012 00700-24 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF.AGREEMENT (f) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER all building certificates required prior to Cib.\ occupancy and all other required inspections/approvals/acceptances by city, county, state governmental entities or other authorities having jurisdiction; (g) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER assignments of all guarantees and warranties from subcontractors, vendors, suppliers or manufacturers, as well as names, addresses and telephone numbers of contacts for each subcontractor, vendor, supplier or manufacturer; (h) CONTRACTOR removes all equipment, tools, temporary facilities, surplus materials and rubbish from the site, and final cleans the site to OWNER's satisfaction; (i) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER a Full and Final Release and Affidavit of Bills Paid in the form attached hereto as Attachment No. 2, executed by CONTRACTOR; (j) CONTRACTOR delivers to OWNER all other documentation required to be submitted to OWNER pursuant to the Contract Documents, including but not limited to any special guarantees or warranties, operation and maintenance manuals, etc'. in each case in a form satisfactory to OWNER as determined in OWNER's sole discretion; and (k) the Final Application for Payment has been approved by the ENGINEER and OWNER. Acceptance of Final Payment by the CONTRACTOR shall constitute a waiver of all claims by CONTRACTOR against OWNER other than any claims previously made in writing by CONTRACTOR against OWNER, and still unsettled, and except for claims arising out of third party actions, cross-claims and counterclaims. No interest shall be due or payable by OWNER to CONTRACTOR on any sums retained or withheld by OWNER pursuant to the terms or provisions of the Contract Documents, except as otherwise provided by applicable law. Neither the Certificate of Substantial Completion nor the Final Payment nor possession or acceptance of the Work shall relieve the CONTRACTOR of its obligation for correction of defective or non- conforming Work, or for fulfillment of any warranty, which may be required by law or by the Contract Documents. 6.10 CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT. The CONTRACTOR shall promptly remove from OWNER's premises all materials, equipment or Work which is defective or otherwise not in conformance with the Contract Documents, whether actually incorporated in the Work or not, and CONTRACTOR shall, at his own expense, promptly replace such materials, equipment or Work with other materials conforming to the requirements of the Contract. The CONTRACTOR shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of CONTRACTOR or other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If CONTRACTOR does not remove and replace any such unsuitable Work within ten (10) business ("I's days after receipt of a written notice from the OWNER or the ENGINEER, the OWNER may remove, replace and remedy such work at CONTRACTOR's expense. 10-2012 00700-25 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 6.11 CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT. If within one (1) year from the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by law or by the terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be defective or not in accordance with the Contract Documents, CONTRACTOR shall, at its sole cost, correct it and any other work affected thereby promptly after receipt of a written notice from OWNER to do so. In addition, CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for any damage to building contents, when such damage results from the CONTRACTOR's use of faulty materials or defective workmanship; to the extent such damage is not covered by OWNER's insurance. This warranty period shall renew and recommence for each corrected item of Work upon completion of the remedial work. This time period for correction by CONTRACTOR is in addition to, and not in lieu of, all warranties or remedies, which exist at common law or by statute. These warranty obligations shall survive the termination of this Contract, and shall be enforceable by a decree of specific performance, in addition to such other rights and remedies available to OWNER at law or in equity. 6.12 PAYMENTS WITHHELD. The OWNER may withhold, or on account of subsequently discovered evidence nullify and demand immediate repayment of, the whole or part of any certificate for payment or payment, to such extent as may be necessary to protect OWNER from loss on account of: (a) Defective or non-conforming Work not remedied; (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims; (c) Failure of the CONTRACTOR to make promptlyto subcontractors or payments for material or labor; (d) Damage to another contractor, OWNER, existing improvements on the site, or to adjacent or adjoining property; (e) Reasonable doubt that the Work can be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract amount; (f) Reasonable indication that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time; (g) Failure on the part of the CONTRACTOR to execute any and all documents, releases or other documents presented to the CONTRACTOR for execution, as provided for herein or otherwise; (h) Liquidated or other damages due to late completion; and/or (i) Any breach by CONTRACTOR of this Contract or any other agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. When the above grounds are removed to OWNER's satisfaction, the withheld payment shall be made promptly. If the said causes are not so remedied, OWNER may remedy the same for CONTRACTOR's account, charge the entire cost thereof to CONTRACTOR and deduct such cost 10-2012 00700-26 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT from the Contract Sum or from any payments due or to become due under any other agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. 6.13 DELAYED PAYMENTS. Should the OWNER fail to make payment to the CONTRACTOR when payment is due in accordance with the terms of the Contract Documents, any interest due CONTRACTOR for late payments shall accrue and be paid in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 2251 of the Texas Government Code, as amended, and payment of such interest shall fully liquidate and compensate any injury to the CONTRACTOR growing out of such delay in payment. Should OWNER fail to pay CONTRACTOR an undisputed amount due within the time limits provided in the Contract or applicable law, CONTRACTOR shall give the notice required and comply with the provisions of Section 2251.051 of the Texas Government Code, and shall thereupon be entitled to the rights and remedies provided therein. 7.0 EXTRA WORK AND CLAIMS 7.01 DIFFERING SITE CONDITIONS. During the progress of the work, if subsurface, latent physical conditions or unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature are encountered at the site that differ materially from those indicated in the contract or from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in the work provided for in the contract, the CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER's Representative in writing within three (3) calendar days of the specific differing conditions before the site is disturbed and before the affected work is performed. (a) Upon written notification, the ENGINEER will investigate the conditions, and if it is determined that the conditions materially differ and cause an increase or decrease in the cost or time required for the performance of any work under the contract, an adjustment, excluding anticipated profits, will be made and the contract modified in writing accordingly. The ENGINEER will notify the CONTRACTOR in writing of the determination whether or not an adjustment of the contract is warranted. (b) No contract adjustment which results in a benefit to the CONTRACTOR will be allowed unless the CONTRACTOR has provided the required written notice. (c) No contract adjustment will be allowed under this clause for any effects caused on unchanged work. 7.02 SUSPENSIONS OF WORK ORDERED BY THE ENGINEER. If the performance of all or any portion of the work is suspended by the ENGINEER in writing for seven (7) calendar days and the CONTRACTOR believes that additional compensation and/or contract time is due as a result of such suspension, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a written request for adjustment to the ENGINEER within seven (7) calendar days of receipt of the notice to resume work. The request shall set forth the reasons and support for such adjustment. (a) Upon receipt, the ENGINEER will evaluate the CONTRACTOR's request. If the ENGINEER agrees that the cost and/or time required for the performance of the contract has increased as a result of such suspension and the suspension was caused by conditions beyond the control of and not the fault of the CONTRACTOR, its suppliers, or subcontractors at any approved tier, and not caused by weather, the ENGINEER will make 10-2012 00700-27 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL, CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT an adjustment (excluding profit) and modify the contract in writing accordingly. The CONTRACTOR will be notified of the ENGINEER's determination, in writing, whether or not an adjustment of the contract is warranted. (b) No contract adjustment will be allowed unless the CONTRACTOR has submitted the request for adjustment within the time prescribed. (c) No contract adjustment will be allowed under this clause to the extent that performance would have been suspended by any other cause, or for which an adjustment is provided or excluded under any other term or condition of this contract. 7.03 CHANGE ORDERS. Without invalidating this Agreement, the OWNER may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions to the Work; such changes will be authorized by Change Order to be prepared by the ENGINEER for execution by the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR. The Change Order shall set forth the basis for any change in Contract Price, as hereinafter set forth for Extra Work, and any change in Contract Time, which may result from the change. 7.04 In accordance with paragraph 1.07 CONTRACTOR'S request to work weekends, the Owner's Construction Manager shall, upon receipt of written notice by the CONTRACTOR of the need to conduct work on otherwise non-Work Days, prepare a cost estimate for providing Construction Management and Inspection services during the requested period and submit this to both OWNER and CONTRACTOR. If approved by both parties the Construction Manager shall prepare a Deductive Change Order in the amount stated in the estimate for the signature of the CONTRACTOR and the OWNER for inclusion in the next Pay Application. The Deductive Change Order must be signed and executed by both the OWNER and CONTRACTOR prior to start of work on any non-Work Day. 7.05 MINOR CHANGES. The ENGINEER may authorize minor changes in the Work not inconsistent with the overall intent of the Contract Documents and not involving an increase in Contract Price or time. If the CONTRACTOR believes that any minor changes authorized by the ENGINEER involves Extra Work or entitles him to an increase in the Contract Price or the Contract Time, the CONTRACTOR shall give notice of same by written request to the ENGINEER for a written Work Order, with a copy to OWNER. Any such notice and request by the CONTRACTOR shall be given prior to beginning the changed work. CONTRACTOR's commencement of any minor change in the Work prior to such written notice and request shall constitute a waiver of any and all claims for an increase in the Contract Price or the Contract Time arising out of or related to such changed work. 7.06 EXTRA WORK. It is agreed that the CONTRACTOR shall perform all work when presented with a written Change Order, Work Change Directive or Work Order signed by the ENGINEER, subject, however, to the right of the CONTRACTOR to require written confirmation of such Change Order, Work Change Directive or Work Order by the OWNER. It is agreed that the basis of compensation or adjustment to the CONTRACTOR for work either altered, added or deleted by a Change Order or Work Change Directive, or for which a claim for Extra Work is made, shall be determined by one or more of the following methods: Method (A) --By Contract unit prices applicable to the work, if any; or 10-2012 00700-28 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL, CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Method (B) --By agreed unit prices or agreed stipulated lump sum price; or Method (C) --If neither Method (A) nor Method (B) can be agreed upon before the Extra Work is commenced, then the CONTRACTOR shall be paid the "Actual Field Cost" of the work plus: a) For subcontractors performing work mark-up shall be limited to fifteen percent, ten (10%) for the subcontractor plus five (5%) for the General Contractor or b) For the General Contractor alone, self-performing the extra work, without subcontractor, the mark-up shall not exceed ten percent (10%), as full and final compensation for the Extra Work and all costs and expenses, direct or indirect, arising out of or related thereto. In the event said Extra Work or Change Order or Work Change Directive work is performed and paid for under Method (C), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "Actual Field Cost" is hereby defined as the cost to the CONTRACTOR of all workers, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, and materials, supplies, trucks, rentals of machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such Extra Work or Change Order or Work Change Directive work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred together with all power, fuel, lubricants, water and similar operating expenses, plus all necessary incidental (°111'\ expenses incurred directly on account of such Extra Work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits and other payroll taxes, and a rateable proportion of premiums on Performance and Payment Bonds and Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation, and all other insurance as may be required by law or ordinance, or the Contract Documents, plus all payments to subcontractors for such work. The ENGINEER may direct the form in which accounts of the "Actual Field Cost" shall be kept and the records of these accounts shall be made available to the ENGINEER. The ENGINEER or OWNER may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise these matters shall be determined by the CONTRACTOR. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using one hundred percent (100%), unless otherwise specified, of the latest schedule of Equipment Ownership Expense adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America where practicable. The mark-up of the "Actual Field Cost" to be paid to the CONTRACTOR, shall cover and compensate him for his profit, overhead, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the "Actual Field Cost" as herein defined, save that where the CONTRACTOR's field office must be maintained solely on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "Actual Field Cost." No claim for Extra Work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered by the ENGINEER in a written Work Order. In case any orders or instructions, either oral or written, appear to the CONTRACTOR to involve Extra Work for which he should receive compensation or an adjustment in the Contract Time, he shall make written request to the ENGINEER for a written Work Order authorizing such Extra Work within ten (10) days of ENGINEER's orders or instructions, otherwise the orders or instructions will be considered minor changes. The issuance 10-2012 00700-29 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT of a Work Order by the ENGINEER shall not constitute or be construed as an agreement or acknowledgement by the ENGINEER that the work which is the subject of the Work Order is Extra Work outside the scope of the Contract Work, but shall merely constitute a direction to the CONTRACTOR to perform the work, and the CONTRACTOR shall proceed with the work, and shall keep an accurate account of the "Actual Field Cost" thereof, as provided under Method (C). Upon completion of the alleged Extra Work, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly and within ten (10) days submit his claim to the ENGINEER by proper certification and attestation, on forms provided by the ENGINEER. The ENGINEER shall render a written decision on CONTRACTOR's claim within ten (10) days. It is mutually agreed between the parties that the ENGINEER's decision on all claims or questions in relation to the Work, CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work, any changes in the Work or Extra Work, the Contract Price and/or the Contract Time, shall be final and conclusive and binding upon the parties. If the ENGINEER shall fail to respond in writing to CONTRACTOR's claim within thirty (30) days of the date of submission, or if CONTRACTOR shall dispute or object to ENGINEER's decision on any claim, and CONTRACTOR fails to file a Request for Mediation of such claim in accordance with the provisions of Article 9.0, within sixty (60) days after the date of submission to the ENGINEER, or such longer period as the parties may agree to in writing, the CONTRACTOR shall lose and forfeit his right to make such claim for Extra Work at any later date, and all such claims held by the CONTRACTOR shall be deemed waived, forfeited and forever barred. CONTRACTOR shall continue to diligently prosecute the Work notwithstanding any pending claim, dispute, or dispute resolution process between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. 7.07 TIME OF FILING CLAIMS. Except as otherwise provided herein, all questions of dispute or adjustment shall be made within the Pro-Trak system and filed with the ENGINEER within three (3) days after the ENGINEER has given any directions, order or instruction to which the CONTRACTOR desires to take exception. The ENGINEER shall reply within thirty (30) days to such written exceptions, and render his final decision in writing. It is mutually agreed between the parties that the ENGINEER's decision on all claims or questions in relation to the Work, CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work, any changes in the Work or Extra Work, the Contract Price and/or the Contract Time, shall be final and conclusive and binding upon the parties. In case the CONTRACTOR should desire to appeal from the ENGINEER's decision, the CONTRACTOR may request a meeting between representatives of the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR for the purposes of appealing the ENGINEER's decision directly to the OWNER, such meeting to occur within ten (10) days after the date of the CONTRACTOR's request, or such longer period as may be agreed to by the parties in writing. If the CONTRACTOR shall still be aggrieved after a meeting with the OWNER and/or his representative, the CONTRACTOR shall have sixty (60) days after the date of the meeting, or such longer period as the parties may agree to in writing, to file a Request for Mediation of such claim in accordance with the provisions of Article 9.0. In the event the CONTRACTOR shall fail, for any reason, to timely file a Request for Mediation, the OWNER shall be released of any and all liability, and the CONTRACTOR's failure to timely file a Request for Mediation shall constitute a waiver, forfeit and final bar of all such claims held by the CONTRACTOR against the OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall continue to diligently prosecute the Work notwithstanding any pending claim, dispute, or dispute resolution process between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. 10-2012 00700-30 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS.OF AGREEMENT rk"'I 8.0 DEFAULT 8.01 DEFAULT BY CONTRACTOR. In case the CONTRACTOR should abandon and fail or refuse to resume Work within five (5) days after written notification from the OWNER or the ENGINEER, or if the CONTRACTOR fails to comply with the orders of the ENGINEER when such orders are consistent with the Contract Documents, or if the CONTRACTOR otherwise defaults on its obligations under the Contract, OWNER shall have the right, if it so elects and without prejudice to any other rights it may have, after giving five (5) days written notice of default to CONTRACTOR and any surety, to terminate the Contract or any part thereof and/or to take over or cause others to take over the Work or any part thereof, and to complete such Work for the account of CONTRACTOR. Where Performance and Payment Bonds exist, the sureties on these bonds shall be directed to complete the Work in conjunction with the notice of default, and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the CONTRACTOR. After receiving said notice of default, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly and within no more than three (3) days, remove from the Work any machinery, equipment, or tools then on the job, not intended for incorporation into the Work. Should CONTRACTOR fail to promptly remove such machinery, equipment or tools, OWNER may remove such machinery, equipment or tools and store same at CONTRACTOR's expense; return such machinery, equipment or tools to their purported owner; or otherwise dispose of such machinery, equipment or tools as OWNER sees fit. Any materials, supplies and/or equipment delivered for use in the Work, may be used in the completion of the Work by the OWNER or the surety on the Performance Bond, or another contractor in completion of the Work; it being understood that the use of such equipment, supplies and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the Work and be reflected in the final settlement. Where there is no Performance Bond or in case the surety should fail to commence compliance with the notice for completion hereinabove provided for within ten (10) days after the service of such notice, then the OWNER may provide for completion of the Work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The OWNER may thereupon employ such force of workers and use such machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as the OWNER may deem necessary to expeditiously complete the Work, and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said CONTRACTOR, and expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the OWNER out of such monies as may be due or that may thereafter at any time become due to the CONTRACTOR under and by virtue of this Agreement or any other agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this Contract if the same had been completed by the CONTRACTOR, then said CONTRACTOR shall be credited with the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this Contract if the same had been completed by such CONTRACTOR, then the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall promptly pay the amount of such excess to the OWNER upon demand; or 10-2012 00700-31 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (b) The OWNER, under sealed bids, under the times and procedures provided for by law, may let the contract for completion of the Work under substantially the same 'wie) terms and conditions which are provided in this Contract. In case of any increase in cost to the OWNER under the completion contract, as compared to what would have been the cost under this Contract, such increase shall be charged to the CONTRACTOR, and the amount of such increase may be deducted by the OWNER out of such monies as may be due or that may thereafter at any time become due to the CONTRACTOR under and by virtue of this Agreement or any other agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR, or the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall promptly pay the amount of such increase to the OWNER upon demand. However, should the cost to complete any such completion contract prove to be less than what would have been the cost to complete under this Contract, the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall be credited therewith. In the event of a default by CONTRACTOR, no further payments shall be made to CONTRACTOR under the Contract until the Work is Finally Completed. When the Work shall have been Finally Completed, the CONTRACTOR and his surety shall be so notified. A complete itemized statement of the Contract accounts, certified by the ENGINEER as being correct, shall then be prepared and delivered to the CONTRACTOR and his surety, whereupon the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement. The OWNER, prior to incurring an obligation to make payment hereunder, shall have such statement of completion attested to by the CONTRACTOR and the surety as accurate, and in exchange for payment of the sum stated therein, the OWNER shall be entitled to a full and final release of any claims or demands by the CONTRACTOR or the surety. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the OWNER had the work been completed by the CONTRACTOR under the terms of this Contract, or when the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the OWNER, then all machinery, equipment, tools or supplies left on the site of the Work shall be turned over to the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety. Should the cost to complete the Work exceed the Contract Price, and the CONTRACTOR and/or his surety fail to pay the amount due the OWNER within the time designated above, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies which are the property of CONTRACTOR on the site of the Work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials, shall be mailed to the CONTRACTOR and his surety at the respective addresses designated in the Contract, provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the CONTRACTOR and his surety, subject only to the duty of the OWNER to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) days from the date of such notice, the OWNER may sell such property, equipment, tools, materials or supplies, and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the CONTRACTOR and his surety. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the OWNER may elect. The OWNER shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies, which remain on the Work, and belong to persons other than the CONTRACTOR or his surety, to their reputed owners. 8.02 SUPPLEMENTATION OF CONTRACTOR FORCES. If CONTRACTOR at any "'") time shall, in OWNER'S sole opinion, fail to furnish skilled workers, suitable materials, supplies or adequate equipment sufficient for the prompt, timely and diligent prosecution of the Work in 10-2012 00700-32 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT accordance with OWNER's direction, OWNER shall have the right, without prejudice to the exercise of other remedies for the same default and without fully taking over the Work, to supplement CONTRACTOR's forces and to expedite delivery of and to procure and furnish such workers, materials, tools, supplies or equipment for CONTRACTOR's account by employing other contractors and suppliers engaged in the same class of work and charge the entire cost thereof to CONTRACTOR, said cost to be deducted from sums due or to become due to CONTRACTOR under the Contract or any other agreement with OWNER or any parent, subsidiary or affiliate of OWNER. 8.03 CUMULATIVE REMEDIES & SPECIFIC PERFORMANCE. All rights and remedies of OWNER, under the terms of the Contract and/or available at law or in equity, are cumulative. In the event CONTRACTOR or any of its subcontractors, vendors or suppliers fails or refuses for any reason to provide timely manufacture, fabrication, delivery, installation, erection, construction or completion of any supplies, materials, expendables, equipment, machinery, accessories or appurtenances to be furnished hereunder, CONTRACTOR acknowledges and agrees that such items are required, necessary, essentially unique to the Project and the Work and will cause irreparable harm to OWNER and the Project if not furnished in accordance with the Contract, and OWNER shall have the right to obtain a decree of specific performance and mandatory injunctive relief from any Court of competent jurisdiction to ensure the timely furnishing of such items. 8.04 CROSS-DEFAULT. If, for any reason, CONTRACTOR is declared in default and/or terminated by OWNER under any other agreement with OWNER, whether related to the (.1111 Project or not related to the Project, OWNER shall have the right to offset and apply any amounts which might be owed to OWNER by CONTRACTOR under any other such agreements against any earned but unpaid amounts owing to CONTRACTOR by OWNER under the Contract, any retainage earned by CONTRACTOR under the Contract or any unearned, unpaid amount under the Contract. 8.05 INSOLVENCY. It is recognized that if CONTRACTOR becomes a debtor in voluntary or involuntary bankruptcy proceedings, makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors, or if a receiver is appointed on account of his insolvency, such events could seriously impair or frustrate CONTRACTOR's performance of the Work. Accordingly, it is agreed that should CONTRACTOR become a debtor in bankruptcy, either voluntary or involuntary, CONTRACTOR shall notify OWNER in writing within twenty-four (24) hours of the filing with the bankruptcy court. Further, it is agreed that upon occurrence of any one or more such events, OWNER shall be entitled to request of CONTRACTOR or its successors, trustees or receivers, adequate assurances of future performance. In the event such adequate assurances are not given to the reasonable satisfaction of OWNER within seventy-two (72) hours of such request, OWNER shall have the right to immediately invoke the remedies of this Section 8 or as provided by law. Pending receipt of such adequate assurances of such future performance, OWNER may proceed with the Work on a temporary basis and deduct the costs, plus reasonable overhead and profit, from any amounts due or which may become due to CONTRACTOR under the Contract or any other agreement with OWNER. In this regard, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree that delays in performance could result in more damages to CONTRACTOR than would be sustained if OWNER failed to exercise such remedies. 8.06 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT. CONTRACTOR hereby assigns to OWNER, all of CONTRACTOR's rights under and interest in any and all subcontracts and/or purchase orders 10-2012 00700-33 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT entered into by CONTRACTOR pursuant to this Agreement, such assignment to become effective upon CONTRACTOR's default under this Agreement or OWNER's termination of this Contract, and OWNER's acceptance of such assignment. Upon CONTRACTOR's default or OWNER's termination of this Contract, OWNER may, in the event there is no performance bond for the Contract, or in the event the performance bond surety fails to complete the Contract, or if OWNER otherwise so elects in its sole discretion, accept such assignment by written notice of such acceptance to CONTRACTOR and subcontractor, and may require subcontractors to perform all of the then unperformed duties and obligations under the subcontract, for the direct benefit of OWNER. In the event OWNER requires such performance by a subcontractor, then OWNER shall be obligated to pay such subcontractor any amounts due and owing under the terms of the subcontract/purchase order, at the subcontract prices and rates, and subject to any rights of withholding or offset and other terms and conditions of the subcontract, for all work properly performed by such subcontractor, to the date of OWNER's acceptance and thereafter. OWNER's liability in this connection, however, shall not exceed the amount obtained by subtracting all payments made by CONTRACTOR to subcontractor from the Subcontract Price at the time of CONTRACTOR's default or OWNER's termination of CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall include a provision in its subcontracts that allows such assignment and allows OWNER to take these actions, and further provides that in the event of CONTRACTOR's termination for default, the subcontractor agrees to give the OWNER or its agent the right to inspect all books and records of subcontractor relating to the Work. 8.07 WAIVER OF CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. CONTRACTOR expressly waives any and all claims for consequential damages against OWNER arising out of or related to this Contract, or any other agreements between CONTRACTOR and OWNER, including, but not limited to, claims for damages incurred by CONTRACTOR for principal office expenses, including the compensation of personnel stationed there, losses of financing, bonding capacity, business and reputation, and claims for lost profit, whether on this Contract or otherwise. 8.08 TERMINATION FOR CONVENIENCE. OWNER may at its sole discretion, upon five (5) days written notice to CONTRACTOR, terminate this Contract, in whole or in part, if and when OWNER determines that it is in the best interest of OWNER to do so. Upon receipt of such written notice from OWNER, CONTRACTOR shall cease all terminated Work and take reasonable precautions to protect and preserve such work, and shall take all reasonable measures after consultation with OWNER to terminate or assign to OWNER all subcontracts, purchase orders or other commitments related to the Work or the Project on terms and conditions acceptable to OWNER. CONTRACTOR will be paid for all Work performed in strict accordance with the Contract Documents, based upon the Contract Price and the percentage of completion on the date of termination, and less amounts previously paid, subject to any reasonable backcharges attributable to CONTRACTOR's failure to comply with any of the provisions of this Contract and further subject to the other terms of this Contract regarding payment. In no event will CONTRACTOR receive or be entitled to any payment or compensation whatsoever for interruption of business or loss of business opportunities, any other items of consequential damages, for overhead or loss of profits on the unperformed Work and/or services and unfurnished materials or for any intangible, impact or similarly described cost, damages or expense, and under no circumstances shall the total sum paid to or received by CONTRACTOR under this Contract exceed the Contract Price. The compensation provided herein shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy arising out of a termination for convenience. 10-2012 00700-34 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 8.09 DEFAULT BY OWNER. In case the OWNER shall default on its material obligations under this Contract, other than OWNER's failure to pay CONTRACTOR a disputed amount due within the time limits provided in the Contract or applicable law, as addressed by Section 6.13 of this Agreement, and shall fail or refuse to cure, or to commence and diligently pursue cure of such default within fifteen (15) days after written notification by the CONTRACTOR, then the CONTRACTOR may suspend or wholly abandon the Work, and may remove therefrom all machinery, tools and equipment, and all materials on the site of the Work that have not been included in payments to the CONTRACTOR and have not been incorporated into the Work. And thereupon, the ENGINEER shall make an estimate of the total amount earned by the CONTRACTOR, which estimate shall include the value of all Work actually completed by said CONTRACTOR (at the Contract Prices), the value of all partially completed Work at a fair and equitable price, and the amount of all Extra Work performed at the prices agreed upon, or provided for by the terms of this Contract, and a reasonable sum to cover the cost of any provisions made by the CONTRACTOR to carry the whole Work to completion and which cannot be utilized. The ENGINEER shall then make a final statement of the balance due the CONTRACTOR by deducting from the above estimate all previous payments by the OWNER and all other sums that may be retained by the OWNER under the terms of this Agreement, and shall present the same to the OWNER, and OWNER's payment of said sum to the CONTRACTOR, on or before thirty (30) days after OWNER's receipt of such statement, shall satisfy any and all rights, claims or causes of action of CONTRACTOR arising out of or related to such default by OWNER, and shall be CONTRACTOR's sole and exclusive remedy for such default. A disputed or unilateral claim by the Contractor cannot by itself constitute a default hereunder. 9.0 DISPUTE RESOLUTION Any dispute or pending claim or dispute resolution process between OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall not excuse or relieve CONTRACTOR of its obligations under the Contract, and CONTRACTOR shall diligently prosecute the Work notwithstanding any pending claim, dispute, or dispute resolution process between OWNER and CONTRACTOR. All claims, disputes and other matters in question arising out of or relating to, the Contract, or the breach thereof, shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to any other dispute resolution process as may be selected by OWNER. Unless mutually agreed otherwise the mediation shall be conducted by a third party who will be selected by agreement between OWNER and CONTRACTOR, and Request for Mediation shall be filed with the other party. The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally. If a claim, dispute or other matter in question between OWNER and CONTRACTOR involves the work of a subcontractor or supplier, OWNER or CONTRACTOR may join such subcontractor or supplier as a party to any mediation proceeding between OWNER and CONTRACTOR hereunder. CONTRACTOR shall include in all subcontracts and/or purchase orders related to the Work a specific provision whereby the subcontractor or supplier consents to being joined in mediation between OWNER and CONTRACTOR involving the work of such subcontractor or supplier. This Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of Texas and shall be considered performable in Brazoria County, Texas, for venue purposes. Further, the OWNER and CONTRACTOR stipulate that venue for any dispute resolution proceeding involving or touching upon the Contract other than the conduct of an arbitration hearing shall be in Brazoria County, 10-2012 00700-35 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Texas, or, if such choice of venue is prohibited or unenforceable by law, shall be held in the county where the Project is located. CONTRACTOR agrees to pay OWNER all reasonable attorneys' fees incurred by OWNER in the event OWNER seeks to enforce any provision of this Contract whether by arbitration or other dispute resolution process. Further, in the event OWNER defends any claim instituted by CONTRACTOR against OWNER, whether in arbitration or other dispute resolution process, CONTRACTOR agrees to pay OWNER all reasonable attorneys' fees incurred by OWNER in defending such claim provided OWNER is the prevailing party, in whole or in part, in such proceeding. 10-2012 00700-36 of 36 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Section 00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page No. 1.0 DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 1. 1.01 Owner, Contractor and Engineer 1.02 Contract Documents 1.03 Subcontractor 1.04 Written Notice 1.05 Work 1.06 Extra Work 1.07 Work Day 1.07-1 Rain Day 1.07-2 Impact Day 1.08 Calendar Day 1.09 Substantially Completed 1.10 Interpretation of Words and Phrases 1.11 Referenced Standards 1.12 Contract Time 1.13 Construction Inspector 1.14 Balancing Change Order 2.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE OWNER 4 2.01 No Warranty of Design 2.02 Right of Entry 2.03 Ownership of Plans 10-2012 00700-i CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 2.04 Changes and Alterations 2.05 Damages 3.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE ENGINEER 6 3.01 Owner-Engineer Relationship 3.02 Keeping of Plans and Specifications Accessible 3.03 Preliminary Approval 3.04 Inspection by Engineer 3.05 Determination of Questions and Disputes 3.06 Recommendation of Payment 4.0 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR 8 4.01 Independent Contractor 4.02 Contractor's Understanding 4.03 Laws and Ordinances 4.04 Assignment and Subletting 4.05 Performance and Payment Bonds [and Maintenance Bond] 4.06 Insurance 4.07 Permits and Fees 4.08 Texas State Sales Tax 4.09 Contractor's Duty and Superintendence 4.10 Character of Workers 4.11 Labor, Equipment, Materials, Construction Plant and Buildings 4.12 Sanitation 4.13 Cleaning and Maintenance 4.14 Performance of Work 4.15 Right of Owner to Accelerate the Work 10-2012 00700-ii CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.16 Layout of Work 4.17 Shop Drawings 4.18 Engineer-Contractor Relationship; Observations 4.19 Observation and Testing 4.20 Defects and Their Remedies 4.21 Liability for Proper Performance 4.22 Protection Against Accident To Employees and the Public 4.23 Protection of Adjoining Property 4.24 Protection against Claims of Subcontractors, Laborers, Materialmen, and Furnishers of Equipment, Machinery and Supplies 4.25 Protection Against Royalties or Patented Invention 4.26 Indemnification 4.27 Losses From Natural Causes 4.28 Guarantee 5.0 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS 18 5.01 Time and Order of Completion 5.02 Extension of Time 5.03 Hindrances and Delays 5.04 Suspension of Work 5.05 Liquidated Damages for Delay 5.06 Change of Contract Time 5.07 Delays Beyond Owner's and Contractor's Control 6.0 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 2I 6.01 Discrepancies and Omissions rih\ 6.02 Quantities and Measurements 10-2012 00700-iii CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 6.03 Estimated Quantities 6.04 Price of Work 6.05 Payments 6.06 Partial Payments 6.07 Use of Completed Portions &Punchlist 6.08 Substantial Completion 6.08-1 6.09 Final Payment 6.10 Correction of Work Before Final Payment 6.11 Correction of Work After Final Payment 6.12 Payments Withheld 6.13 Delayed Payments 7.0 EXTRA WORK AND CLAIMS 27 7.01 Differing Site Conditions 7.02 Change Orders 7.03 Change Orders 7.04 Request for Work Approval for Work on Non-Work Days 7.05 Minor Changes 7.06 Extra Work 7.07 Time of Filing Claims 8.0 DEFAULT 30 8.01 Default by Contractor 8.02 Supplementation of Contractor Forces 8.03 Cumulative Remedies & Specific Performance P-") 8.04 Cross-Default 10-2012 00700-iv CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 8.05 Insolvency ri6\ 8.06 Contingent Assignment 8.07 Waiver of Consequential Damages 8.08 Termination for Convenience 8.09 Default by Owner 9.0 DISPUTE RESOLUTION 35 ATTACHMENT NO. 1: WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE COVERAGE Al ATTACHMENT NO. 2: AGREEMENT FOR FINAL PAYMENT AND CONTRACTOR'S SWORN RELEASE B 1 ATTACHMENT NO. 3: OWNER'S INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS OF CONTRACTOR Cl 10-2012 00700-v CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT ATTACHMENT NO. 1 TO GENERAL CONDITIONS rib\ WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE COVERAGE A. DEFINITIONS: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") . A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83 or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project for the duration of the Project. Duration of the Project .includes the time from the beginning of the Work on the Project until the contractor's/person's work on the Project has been completed and the Project warranty period has expired. Persons providing services on the project includes persons or entities performing all or part of the services the contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with due contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, motor carriers and owner- operators, (as defined at Section 406.121 of the Texas Labor Code), leasing companies, and employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. B. The CONTRACTOR shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Title 5 Workers' Compensation, Subtitle A Texas Workers' Compensation Act, for employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. C. The CONTRACTOR must provide a certificate of coverage to the OWNER prior to being awarded the Contract. D. If the coverage period shown on the CONTRACTOR's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the CONTRACTOR must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the OWNER showing that coverage has been extended. E. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain from each subcontractor or other person providing services on a project, and provide to the OWNER: (I) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the Project, so the OWNER will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the Project; and 05/2007 00700-Al CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (2) no later than seven days after receipt by the CONTRACTOR and prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project. F. The CONTRACTOR shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter. G. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the CONTRACTOR knew or should have known, of any changes that materially affect the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project. H. The CONTRACTOR shall post on each Project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the Project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. NOTICE REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512) 440- 3789 to receive information on the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." The CONTRACTOR shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, too: (1) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Title 5 Workers' Compensation, Subtitle A Texas Workers' Compensation Act, for all of its employees providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project; (2) provide to the CONTRACTOR, prior to that person beginning work on the Project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the Project: 05/2007 00700-A2 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT (3) provide the CONTRACTOR, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage, showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; (4) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the CONTRACTOR: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the Project; and (b) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; (5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter; (6) notify the OWNER in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project; and (7) contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (1) - (7), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. J. By signing this Contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the CONTRACTOR is representing to the OWNER that all employees of the CONTRACTOR who will provide services on the Project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the Project, that the coverage agreements will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the CONTRACTOR to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. K. The CONTRACTOR's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the CONTRACTOR, which entitles the OWNER to pursue all rights and remedies available to it under the Contract, at law or in equity, if the CONTRACTOR does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the OWNER. 05/2007 00700-A3 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT ATTACHMENT NO. 2 TO GENERAL CONDITIONS AGREEMENT FOR FINAL PAYMENT AND CONTRACTOR'S SWORN RELEASE In consideration of the Final Payment under that certain contract between [Contractor's Company Name] (hereafter "CONTRACTOR") and the City of Pearland (hereafter "OWNER") for the Project known as Tom Reid Library Addition & Renovation (the "Contract"), the CONTRACTOR makes the following representations to OWNER, either individually if a proprietorship, or jointly and severally by all general partners if a partnership, or if a corporation, by action of the president and secretary of said corporation, as duly authorized by appropriate action of the stockholders and/or board of directors of said corporation, their signatures hereon constituting a representation under oath by said individuals that they have the authority to execute this Agreement for and on behalf of the said corporation: 1. The undersigned CONTRACTOR represents to OWNER that the Application for Payment for the Final Payment under the Contract, and the final Change Order issued under the Contract if any, whether or not modified, corrected or changed in some way by the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR or the OWNER, a copy of which are attached hereto and marked Exhibit "A", are true, correct and accurate, and that CONTRACTOR has received payment in full for all other Applications for Payment submitted under the Contract, and that CONTRACTOR has been fully compensated for all labor, materials, equipment and/or services furnished in (1/118 , connection with the Contract, except for the Final Payment. 2. It is agreed and stipulated by the undersigned CONTRACTOR that upon the receipt of Final Payment in the amount as set out on the attached Application for Payment, the CONTRACTOR, by execution of this instrument of release, does, therefore, RELEASE and FOREVER DISCHARGE OWNER of and from all manner of debts, claims, demands, obligations, suits, liabilities and causes of action of any nature whatsoever, at law or in equity, in contract or in tort, now existing or which may hereafter accrue, arising out of or related to the Contract, any Change Orders or Work Orders, the Work, or any labor, materials, equipment or services furnished by CONTRACTOR to OWNER. 3. The CONTRACTOR, acting by and through the person or persons whose names are subscribed hereto, does solemnly swear and affirm that all bills and claims have been paid to all materialmen, suppliers, laborers, subcontractors, or other entities performing services or supplying materials or equipment, and that OWNER shall not be subject to any bills, claims, demands, litigation or suits in connection therewith. 4. It is further specifically understood and agreed that this Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release shall constitute a part of the Contract, and it is also specifically understood and agreed that this Agreement shall not act as a modification, waiver or renunciation by OWNER of any of its rights or remedies as set out in the Contract itself, but this Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release shall constitute a supplement thereto for the additional protection of OWNER. 05/2007 00700-B 1 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT SIGNED and EXECUTED this, the_dayof , 20 . CONTRACTOR: By: Signature Print Name: Title: [If CONTRACTOR is a proprietorship, owner must sign; if a partnership, each general partner must sign; if a corporation, the following language should be used.] SIGNED and EXECUTED this, the day of 20_by , a Texas corporation, under authority granted to the undersigned by said corporation as contained in the Charter, By-Laws or Minutes of a meeting of said corporation regularly called and held. CONTRACTOR: By: President ATTEST: Corporate Secretary (Corporate Seal) [This form is for use by either a proprietorship or a partnership. In the event CONTRACTOR is a partnership or a joint proprietorship, additional signature lines should be added for each individual.] 05/2007 00700-B2 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT AFFIDAVIT STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF § BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, on this day personally appeared the person or persons whose name(s) are subscribed to the above and foregoing Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release, who each, after being by me duly sworn, on their oaths deposed and said: I (We) am (are) the person(s) who signed and executed the above and foregoing Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release, and I(we) have read the facts and statements as therein set out and the representations as made therein, and I(we) state that the above and foregoing are true and correct. CONTRACTOR- Affiant SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBED TO before me, the day of 20_. (.1.1h\ Notary Public, State of Texas My Commission Expires: [This form is for use in the event CONTRACTOR is a corporation.] 07/2006 00700-B3 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT AFFIDAVIT STATE OF TEXAS § COUNTY OF § BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, on this day personally appeared the persons who signed and executed the above and foregoing Agreement for Final Payment mid Contractor's Sworn Release, whose names are set out above, who each, after being by me duly sworn, on their oaths deposed and said: We each are the persons whose names are subscribed above, and hold respectively the offices in the corporation as set out above, and each state under oath that we have the authority to execute this Agreement for Final Payment and Contractor's Sworn Release for and on behalf of said corporation, pursuant to authority granted to us in the Charter of said corporation, the By-Laws of said corporation and/or the Minutes of said corporation; and the facts, statements and representations as set out in the instrument to which this Affidavit is attached, are true and correct. SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBED TO before me this, the day of 20 rh\, Notary Public, State of Texas My Commission Expires: 07/2006 00700-B4 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT ATTACHMENT NO. 3 TO GENERAL CONDITIONS OWNER'S INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS OF CONTR ACTOR 1. Definitions. For purposes of this Agreement: 1.1 Owner Parties. "Owner Parties" means (a) the City of Pearland, its successors and assigns, and the Engineer, (b) any officers, employees, or agents of such persons or entities, and (c) others as required by the Contract Documents, if any. 1.2 Contractor. "Contractor" shall mean the vendor providing the service or work to be performed under this Agreement. 1.3 Subcontractor. "Subcontractor" shall include subcontractors of any tier. 1.4 ISO. "ISO" means Insurance Services Office. 2. Contractor Insurance Representations to Owner Parties 2.1 It is expressly understood and agreed that the insurance coverages required herein: 2.1.1 represent Owner Parties' minimum requirements and are not to be construed to void or limit the Contractor's indemnity obligations as contained in (11/111‘) this Agreement nor represent in any manner a determination of the insurance coverages the Contractor should or should not maintain for its own protection; and 2.1.2 are being, or have been, obtained by the Contractor in support of the Contractor's liability and indemnity obligations under this Agreement. Neither the requirements as to insurance to be carried as provided for herein, the insolvency, bankruptcy or failure of any insurance company carrying insurance of the Contractor, nor the failure of any insurance company to pay claims accruing, shall be held to affect, negate or waive any of the provisions of this Agreement. 2.2 Failure to obtain and maintain the required insurance shall constitute a material breach of, and default under, this Agreement. If the Contractor shall fail to remedy such breach within five (5) business days after notice by the Owner, the Contractor will be liable for any and all costs, liabilities, damages and penalties resulting to the Owner Parties from such breach, unless a written waiver of the specific insurance requirement(s) is provided to the Contractor by the Owner. In the event of any failure by the Contractor to comply with the provisions of this Agreement, the Owner may, without in any way compromising or waiving any right or remedy at law or in equity, on notice to the Contractor, purchase such insurance, at the Contractor's expense, provided that the Owner shall have no obligation to do so and if the Owner shall do so, the Contractor shall not be relieved of or excused from the obligation to obtain and maintain such insurance amounts and coverages. r'N 10-2012 00700-Cl CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 3. Conditions Affecting All Insurance Required Herein 3.1 Cost of Insurance. All insurance coverage shall be provided at the Contractor's sole expense. 3.2 Status and Rating of Insurance Company. All insurance coverage shall be written through insurance companies authorized to do business in the state in which the work is to be performed and rated no less than A-: VII in the most current edition of A. M. Best's Key Rating Guide. 3.3 Restrictive, Limiting, or Exclusionary Endorsements. All insurance coverage shall be provided to the Owner Parties in compliance with the requirements herein and shall contain no endorsements that restrict, limit, or exclude coverage required herein in any manner without the prior express written approval of the Owner. 3.4 Limits of Liability. The limits of liability may be provided by a single policy of insurance or by a combination of primary and umbrella policies, but in no event shall the total limits of liability available for any one occurrence or accident be less than the amount required herein. 3.5 Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal, or Material Reduction in Coverage. All insurance coverage shall contain the following express provision: In the event of cancellation, non-renewal, or material reduction in coverage affecting the certificate holder, thirty (30) days prior written notice shall be given to the certificate holder by certified mail or registered mail, return receipt requested. 3.6 Waiver of Subrogation. The Contractor hereby agrees to waive its rights of recovery from the Owner Parties with regard to all causes of property and/or liability loss and shall cause a waiver of subrogation endorsement to be provided in favor of the Owner Parties on all insurance coverage carried by the Contractor, whether required herein or not. 3.7 Deductible/Retention. Except as otherwise specified herein, no insurance required herein shall contain a deductible or self-insured retention in excess of $25,000 without prior written approval of the Owner. All deductibles and/or retentions shall be paid by, assumed by, for the account of, and at the Contractor's sole risk. The Contractor shall not be reimbursed for same. 4. Maintenance of Insurance. The following insurance shall be maintained in effect with limits not less than those set forth below at all times during the term of this Agreement and thereafter as required: 10-2012 00700-C2 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.1 Commercial General Liability Insurance 4.1.1 Coverage. Such insurance shall cover liabilityarisingout of all locations and operations of the Contractor, including but not limited to liability assumed under this contract (including the tort liability of another assumed in a business contract). Defense shall be provided as an additional benefit and not included within the limit of liability. 4.1.2 Form. Commercial General Liability Occurrence form (at least as broad as an unmodified ISO CG 0001 0798 or its equivalent). 4.1.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with limits of not less than: Each Occurrence Limit $1,000,000 General Aggregate Limit $2,000,000 Product-Completed Operations Aggregate Limit $2,000,000 Personal and Advertising Injury Limit $1,000,000 4.1.4 Required Endorsements a. Additional Insured. Additional insured status shall be provided in favor of the Owner Parties on any of the following: i. ISO form CG 20 10 11 85; or ii. ISO form CG 20 26 11 85; or iii. a combination of ISO forms CG 20 33 10 01 and CG 20 37 10 01; or iv. any form providing equivalent protection to Owner. b. Designated Construction Project(s) Aggregate Limit. The aggregate limit shall apply separately to this Agreement through use of an ISO CG 25 03 03 97 endorsement or its equivalent. c. Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal or Material Reduction in Coverage, as required in 3.5, above. d. Personal Injury Liability. The personal injury contractual liability exclusion shall be deleted. e. Primary and Non-Contributing Liability. It is the intent of the parties to this Agreement that all insurance required herein shall be primary to all insurance available to the Owner Parties. The obligations of the Contractor's insurance shall not be affected by any other insurance available to the Owner Parties and shall seek no contribution from the Owner Parties' insurance, whether primary, excess contingent, or on any other basis. The Contractor's insurance coverage shall be endorsed to provide such primary and non- contributing liability. f. Waiver of Subrogation, as required in 3.6, above. 10-2012 00700-C3 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.1.5 Continuing Commercial General Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall maintain such insurance in identical coverage, form and amount, including required endorsements, for at least one (1) year following Date of Substantial Completion of the Work to be performed under this Agreement. The Contractor shall provide written representation to Owner stating Work completion date. 4.2 Auto Liability Insurance 4.2.1 Coverage. Such insurance shall cover liability arising out of any auto (including owned, hired, and non-owned). 4.2.2 Form. Business Auto form (at least as broad as an unmodified ISO CA 0001 or its equivalent). 4.2.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than$1,000,000. 4.2.4 Required Endorsements a. Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal or Material Reduction in Coverage, as required in 3.5, above. b. Waiver of Subrogation, as required in 3.6, above. 4.3 Employer's Liability Insurance 4.3.1 Coverage. Employer's Liability Insurance shall be provided as follows: 4.3.2 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than: Employer's Liability: $1,000,000 each accident and each disease. 4.3.3 Required Endorsements a. Notice of Cancellation, Nonrenewal or Material Reduction in Coverage, as required in 3.5, above. b. Waiver of Subrogation, as required in 3.6, above. 4.4 Umbrella Liability Insurance 4.4.1 Coverage. Such insurance shall be excess over and be no less broad than all coverages described above and shall include a drop-down provision for exhaustion of underlying limits. 4.4.2 Form. This policy shall have the same inception and expiration dates as the commercial general liability insurance required above. 10-2012 00700-C4 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.4.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than $5,000,000. 4.4.4 Continuing Umbrella Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall maintain such insurance in identical coverage, form and amount, including required endorsements, for at least one (1) year following Date of Substantial Completion of the Work to be performed under this Agreement. The Contractor shall provide written representation to the Owner stating Work completion date. 4.5 Professional Liability Insurance 4.5.1 Coverage. The Contractor shall provide professional liability insurance for any professional design or engineering drawing required by the work. Such insurance shall indemnify the Owner from claims arising from the negligent performance of professional services of any type, including but not limited to design or design/build services as part of the Work to be performed. 4.5.2 Form. This insurance shall include prior acts coverage sufficient to cover all services rendered by the Contractor and by its consultants under this Agreement. It is recognized that this coverage may be provided on a Claims-Made basis. (11116. 4.5.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided with a limit of not less than$1,000,000. 4.5.4 Continuing Professional Liability Insurance. The Contractor shall maintain such insurance in identical coverage, form and amount for at least one (1) year following Date of Substantial Completion of the Work to be performed under this Agreement. The Contractor shall provide written representation to the Owner stating Work completion date. 4.6 Builder's Risk 4.6.1 Insureds. Insureds shall include: a. Owner, General Contactor and all Loss Payees and Mortgagees as Named Insureds; and b. subcontractors of all tiers in the Work as Additional Insureds. rb\ 10-2012 00700-C5 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL. CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.6.2 Covered Property. Such insurance shall cover: a. all structure(s) under construction, including retaining walls, paved surfaces and roadways, bridges, glass, foundation(s), footings, underground pipes and wiring, excavations, grading, backfilling or filling; b. all temporary structures (e.g., fencing, scaffolding, cribbing, false work, forms, site lighting, temporary utilities and buildings) located at the site; c. all property including materials and supplies on site for installation; d. all property including materials and supplies at other locations but intended for use at the site; e. all property including materials and supplies in transit to the site for installation by all means of transportation other than ocean transit; and f. other Work at the site identified in the Agreement to which this Exhibit is attached. Form a. Coverage shall be at least as broad as an unmodified ISO Special form, shall be provided on a completed-value basis, and shall be primary to any other coverage insurance available to the insured parties, with that other insurance being excess, secondary and non- contributing. b. No protective safeguard warranty shall be permitted. c. Required coverage shall further include: i. Additional expenses due to delay in $ TBD completion of project (where applicable) ii. Agreed value Included without sublimit iii. Damage arising from error, omission or Included without sublimit deficiency in construction methods, design, specifications, workmanship or materials, including collapse iv. Debris removal additional limit 25% of direct damage loss v. Earthquake (where applicable) $ TBD vi. Earthquake sprinkler leakage (where $ TBD applicable) vii. Expediting expenses $ TBD viii. Flood (where applicable) $ TBD ix. Freezing Included without sublimit x. Mechanical breakdown, including hot & Included without sublimit cold testing (where applicable) xi. Notice of cancellation, non-renewal or Included 10-2012 00700-C6 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT material reduction—60 days prior written notice to each insured xii. Occupancy clause, as required in F, Included below xiii. Ordinance or law Included without sublimit xiv. Pollutant clean-up and removal $ TBD xv. Preservation of property Included without sublimit xvi. Replacement cost Included xvii. Theft Included without sublimit xviii. Waiver of subrogation as required in G, Included below. 4.6.3 Amount of Insurance. Coverage shall be provided in an amount equal at all times to the full replacement value and cost of debris removal for any single occurrence. 4.6.4 Deductibles. Deductibles shall not exceed the following: a. All Risks of Direct Damage, Per $5,000 Occurrence, except b. Delayed Opening Waiting Period 5 Days c. Flood, Per Occurrence $25,000 or excess of NFIP if in Flood Zone A, B or V d. Earthquake and Earthquake Sprinkler $25,000 Leakage, Per Occurrence 4.6.5 Termination of Coverage. The termination of coverage provision shall be endorsed to permit occupancy of the covered property being constructed so long as such occupancy does not exceed 20% of the usable area of the property. This insurance shall be maintained in effect, unless otherwise provided for in the Contract Documents, until the earliest of the following dates: a. the date on which all persons and organizations who are insureds under the policy agree that it shall be terminated; b. the date on which final payment, as provided for in the Agreement to which this Exhibit is attached, has been made; or c. the date on which the insurable interests in the Covered Property of all insureds other than Contractor have ceased. 10-2012 00700-C7 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL. CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 4.6.6 Waiver of Subrogation. The waiver of subrogation provision shall be endorsed as follows: a. A waiver of subrogation shall be provided in favor of all insureds. b. The waiver of subrogation provisions shall be endorsed as follows: Should a covered loss be subrogated, either in whole or in part, your rights to any recovery will come first, and we will be entitled to a recovery only after you have been fully compensated for the loss. 5. Intentionally left blank. 6. Evidence of Insurance 6.1 Provision of Evidence. Evidence of the insurance coverage required to be maintained by the Contractor, represented by certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements issued by the insurance company or its legal agent, and must be furnished to the Owner prior to commencement of Work and not later than fifteen (15) days after receipt of this Agreement. New certificates of. insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements shall be provided to the Owner prior to the termination date of the current certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements. 6.2 Form 6.2.1 All property insurance required herein shall be evidenced by ACORD form 28, "Evidence of Property Insurance". 6.2.2 All liability insurance required herein shall be evidenced by ACORD form 25, "Certificate of Insurance". 6.3 Specifications. Such certificates of insurance, evidence of insurance, and endorsements shall specify: 6.3.1 The Owner as a certificate holder with correct mailing address. 6.3.2 Insured's name, which must match that on this Agreement. 6.3.3 Insurance companies affording each coverage, policy number of each coverage, policy dates of each coverage, all coverages and limits described herein, and signature of authorized representative of insurance company. 6.3.4 Producer of the certificate with correct address and phone number listed. 6.3.5 Additional insured status required herein. 6.3.6 Amount of any deductibles and/or retentions. 6.3.7 Cancellation, non-renewal and material reduction in coverage notification as required by this Agreement. Additionally, the words "endeavor to" and "but failure to mail such notice shall impose no obligation or liability of any kind upon Company, it agents or representatives" shall be deleted from the cancellation provision of the ACORD 25 certificate of insurance form. 10-2012 00700-C8 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT 6.3.8 Designated Construction Project Aggregate Limits required herein. 6.3.9 Personal Injury contractual liability required herein. 6.3.10 Primary and non-contributing status required herein. 6.3.11 Waivers of subrogation required herein. 6.4 Required Endorsements. A copy of each of the required endorsements shall also be provided. 6.5 Failure to Obtain. Failure of any Owner Party to demand such certificate or other evidence of full compliance with these insurance requirements or failure of any Owner Party to identify a deficiency from evidence that is provided shall not be construed as a waiver of the Contractor's obligation to maintain such insurance. 6.6 Certified Copies. Upon request of any Owner Party, the Contractor shall provide to the Owner a certified copy of all insurance policies required herein within ten (10) days of any such request. Renewal policies, if necessary, shall be delivered to the Owner prior to the expiration of the previous policy. 6.7 Commencement of Work. Commencement of Work without provision of the required certificate of insurance, evidence of insurance and/or required endorsements, or without compliance with any other provision of this Agreement, shall not constitute a waiver by any Owner Party of any rights. The Owner shall have the right, but not the obligation, of prohibiting the Contractor or any subcontractor from performing any Work until such certificate of insurance, evidence of insurance and/or required endorsements are received and approved by the Owner. 7. Insurance Requirements of Contractor's Subcontractors 7.1 Insurance similar to that required of the Contractor shall be provided by all subcontractors (or provided by the Contractor on behalf of subcontractors) to cover operations performed under any subcontract agreement. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any modification in these insurance requirements as they apply to subcontractors. The Contractor shall maintain certificates of insurance from all subcontractors containing provisions similar to those listed herein (modified to recognize that the certificate is from subcontractor) enumerating, among other things, the waivers of subrogation, additional insured status, and primary liability as required herein, and make them available to the Owner upon request. 7.2 The Contractor is fully responsible for loss and damage to its property on the site, including tools and equipment, and shall take necessary precautions to prevent damage to or vandalism, theft, burglary, pilferage and unexplained disappearance of property. Any insurance covering the Contractor's or its subcontractor's property shall be the Contractor's and its subcontractor's sole and complete means or recovery for any such loss. To the extent any loss is not covered by said insurance or subject to any deductible or co-insurance, the Contractor shall not be reimbursed for same. Should the Contractor or its subcontractors choose to self insure this risk, it is expressly agreed that the Contractor hereby waives, and shall cause its 10-2012 00700-C9 CITY OF PEARLAND GENERAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT subcontractors to waive, any claim for damage or loss to said property in favor of the Owner Parties. 8. Use of the Owner's Equipment. The Contractor, its agents, employees, subcontractors or suppliers shall use the Owner's equipment only with express written permission of the Owner's designated representative and in accordance with the Owner's terms and condition for such use. If the Contractor or any of its agents, employees, subcontractors or suppliers utilize any of the Owner's equipment for any purpose, including machinery, tools, scaffolding, hoists, lifts or similar items owned, leased or under the control of the Owner, the Contractor shall defend, indemnify and be liable to the Owner Parties for any and all loss or damage which may arise from such use. 9. Release and Waiver. The Contractor hereby releases, and shall cause its subcontractors to release, the Owner Parties from any and all claims or causes of action whatsoever which the Contractor and/or its subcontractors might otherwise now or hereafter possess resulting in or from or in any way connected with any loss covered by insurance, whether required herein or not, or which should have been covered by insurance required herein, including the deductible and/or uninsured portion thereof, maintained and/or required to be maintained by the Contractor and/or its subcontractors pursuant to this Agreement. 10-2012 00700-C 10 ACCORD CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE(MMIDD/YYYY) . _ 9130120.16 iiiw\ THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER.THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED,the policy(ies)must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED,subject to the terms and conditions of the policy,certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER SUNZ Insurance Solutions LLC . NAME:et 1301 6th Avenue W PHONE FAx Bradenton, FL 34205 C No.Erg: 941-306-3077 (A/C,No): E-MAIL ADDRESS: INSURER(S)AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# • LN$URSRA; SUNZ Insurance Company 34762 INSURED ENSURER a: Aspen Re-London-Best Rating"A+" • - Resourcing Edge I, LLC 1309 Ridge Road INSURER C: Chaucer Syndicate-Lloyds-Best Rating"A+" Rockwall TX 75087 ,INSURER D: Faraday Syndicate-Lloyds-Best Rating"A+" INSURER E: • INSURER F: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: 32166844 REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT,TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN,THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.• ILTR I TYPE OF INSURANCE INED SUER POLICY NUMBER I IMMIDCY BEE DIYYYYLI(MMIDD )GYECP LIMITS COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ DAMACLAIMS-MADE OCCUR PREMISES(Ean nce). $ ' MED EXP(My ono parson) $ PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $ GENII_AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: GENERAL AGGREGATE $ POLICY I I JECOT I I LOC PRODUCTS-COMP/OPAGG $ $ •OTHER: ��pp ..-. •_... co eEkiEgsmet.E-LtMIr $ Cw'\I AUTOMOBILE LIABILITYANY AUTO BODILY INJURY(Per person) $ OWNED SCHEDULED BODILY INJURY(Per accident) $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS HIRED NON-OWNED PROPERTY DAMAGE $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS ONLY Per acddentt $ UMBRELLALIAB OCCUR EACH OCCURRENCE $ EXCESS LIAB I I CLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE $ DED RETENTION S $ A WORKERS COMPENSATION WCPE0000042501 10/1/ STAT 2016 10/1/2017 1STATUTE I ERH_ AND EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY ANYPROPRIETORIPARTNERIEXECUTIVE Y/N N/A E,L,EACH ACCIDENT $ 1,000,000 OFFICER/MEMBEREXCWDED7 n El,DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE\$ 1,000,000 (Mandatory In NH) If yes,describe under E,L DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $ 1,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below B Workers Compensation This is for Informational purposes C Excess Coverage and nothing shall create any right D under such reinsurance. DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS/VEHICLES(ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,maybe attached If more space Is required) Coverage provided for all leased employees but not subcontractors of:Construction Masters of Houston Inc.3909 3rd St. Effective date:10/1/2016 CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE City of Pearland THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN $5 9 Liberty dr. ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. Pearland TX 77581 �`f • AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE �� Y �,i ` rr. ) Glen J Distefano ©1988 2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25(2016/03) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD 32166844 1 Master Certificate 1 Karen Nield 1 9/30/2016 4:33:02 PM (EDT) 1 Page 1 of 1 DATE(MMIDDIYYYY) A`O CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE 2/27/2017 ITHIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES 1/ BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED,the policy(ies)must be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED,subject to the terms and conditions of the policy,certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). CONTACT PRODUCER NAME: Certificates Houston Hotchkiss Insurance Agency, LLC-Houston iA PHONE Fit)•713-956 9800 FAX No):713 956 0331 13430 NW Freeway,Suite 600 E-MAIL certsh@hiallc.com Houston TX 77040 Anr1RFAS: INSURER(S)AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# INSURER A:Depositors Insurance Company 42587 INSURED CONSMAS-03 INSURER B:Travelers Lloyds Insurance Company 41262 Construction Masters INSURER C: of Houston, Inc. INSURER D: P.O. Box 1587 Pearland TX 77588 INSURER E: INSURER F: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER:800866944 REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT,TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR ADDL SUER POLICY EFF POLICY EXP TYPE OF INSURANCE LTR INSD WVD POLICY NUMBER (MMIDDIYYYY) (MM/DDIYYYY) LIMITS A x COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY GLD07264799735 2/24/2017 2/24/2018 EACH OCCURRENCE $1,000,000 DAMAGE RENTED CLAIMS-MADE X OCCUR PREMISESO(Ea occurrence) $100,000 MED EXP(Any one person) $5,000 PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $1,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: GENERAL AGGREGATE $2,000,000 POUCY X LOC PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG $2,000,000 OTHER: $ A AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY BAPD7264799735 2/24/2017 2/24/2018 CO accident)SINGLE LIMIT $1,000,000 (Ea .....e, X ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY(Per person) $ ) ALL OWNED SCHEDULED BODILY INJURY(Per accident) $ X HIRED AUTOS XNON-OWNED PROPERTY DAMAGE $ AUTOS (Per accident) $ A UMBRELLA LIAB X OCCUR CAD7264799735 2/24/2017 2/24/2018 EACH OCCURRENCE $5,000,000 EXCESS LIAB CLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE $5,000,000 DED X RETENTION$0 $ WORKERS COMPENSATION PER OTH- AND EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY Y/N STATUTE ER ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? N/A E.L EACH ACCIDENT $ (Mandatory In NH) E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE $ If yes,describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $ B Builders Risk QT6607997P545TLC17 3/1/2017 3/1/2018 Per Location 5,000,000 Per Occurrence 5,000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS I VEHICLES(ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,may be attached if more space is required) The general liability policy includes blanket additional insured endorsements(CG7323 1214&CG7434 0512)that provide additional insured status for ongoing&completed opeartions when required by written contract.The auto liability policy includes a blanket additional insured endorsement that provides additional insured status when required by written contract. The general liability and auto policies include blanket waiver of subrogation endorsements that provide this feature when required by written contract. The general liability policy includes a special endorsement with Primary and Noncontributory wording, (CG7323 1214).The certificate holder is named as loss payee/mortgagee with regard to the Builders Risk policy and is subject the terms and conditions applicable to this policy. Umbrella will follow the underlying policies See Attached... CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE City of Pearland THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN 3519 Liberty Dr. ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. d/ Pearland TX 77581 1 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE ,-'�. 111 ) 44.11,-. -66W-----. i ©1988-2014 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25(2014/01) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD AGENCY CUSTOMER ID: CONSMAS-03 LOC#: ACORD ADDITIONAL REMARKS SCHEDULE Page 1 of 1 'r AGENCY NAMED INSURED Hotchkiss Insurance Agency, LLC-Houston Construction Masters POLICY NUMBER of Houston, Inc. P.O.Box 1587 Pearland TX 77588 CARRIER NAIC CODE EFFECTIVE DATE: ADDITIONAL REMARKS THIS ADDITIONAL REMARKS FORM IS A SCHEDULE TO ACORD FORM, FORM NUMBER: 25 FORM TITLE: CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE subject to the policy terms and conditions. The general liability and auto policies include a notice of cancellation endorsement,providing for 30 days'advance notice if the policy is cancelled by the company other than for non-payment of premium, 10 days'notice after the policy is cancelled for non-payment of premium. The endorsement does not provide for notice of cancellation if the named insured requests cancellation. +fell ACORD 101 (2008/01) ©2008 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD CITY OF PEARLAND SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT Section 00800 SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT The following Special Conditions modify the General Conditions, Document 00700. Where a portion of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by these Special Conditions, the unaltered portions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect. ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 1.01 Add the following paragraph to the end of Article 1.01: The OWNER'S representative on the project site is: Cara Davis telephone: 281. 652. 1642 The CONSTRUCTION MANAGER is: telephone: The CONSTRUCTION INSPECTOR is: telephone: ARTICLE 4 RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR 4.05 Add the following paragraph to Article 4.05: A Maintenance Bond in accordance with Document 00612 of the Project Manual is required for this Project. The cost of this bond shall be included in the CONTRACTOR'S Bid Proposal. Attachment No. 3 To General Conditions, Owner's Insurance Requirements of Contractor, Article 4.6 Builder's Risk—Builder's Risk Insurance is Required for this project. ARTICLE 5 PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS 5.08 Add Article 5.08: The Contract Time as defined in the bid and other sections of the Contract Documents includes a certain number of rain days. Based on the Alvin Weather Center Records, the average annual rain days from June 1898 to December 1996 is 40 days calculated from all precipitation days of record. The CONTRACTOR is required to keep a record of rain days at the site. The record of rain days must be accepted and signed by the City Inspector monthly, and shall be reported on the monthly pay estimate submittal. At the end of the contract, the CONTRACTOR will be credited only for the number of accepted rain days that exceed 40 rain days per year, proportionate to the original Contract Time. General Notes: Sections 00100 Invitation to Bidders, 00200 Instructions to Bidders and 01505 Mobilization all make reference to provision by the CONTRACTOR of a laptop computer for use by the OWNER'S representative or CONSTRUCTION MANAGER. BIDDER is Not Required to 2-24-12 00800- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF AGREEMENT provide this equipment or include this cost in the Bid. See Section 13730 for full details regarding this computer equipment. 'al") Section 01500 Temporary Facilities requires CONTRACTOR to provide high speed internet access in the Field Office. BIDDER is Required to provide either a Field Office or any internet access for this project. All other requirements remain and will be required per the section. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate with the Owner for all Traffic Control Documents. Contractor to coordinate with the Owner for procurement of Traffic Control Documents prior to permitting. Contractor is to keep a minimum of one lane open at all times,in both directions. No lane closures to extend beyond the defined workday. Contractor Will be required to provide an on-site construction office for the duration of this project. END OF SECTION /"..) 2-24-12 00800-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND WAGE SCALE FOR ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION Section 00811 (P.* WAGE SCALE FOR ENGINEERING CONSTRUCTION 1.01 In accordance with the Prevailing Wage law on Public Works (Article 2258 of the Texas Government Code), the public body awarding the contract does hereby specify the rates shown in Table 00811-A following to be the general prevailing rates in the locality in which the work is being performed. 1.02 This prevailing wage rate does not prohibit the payment of more than the rates stated. 1.03 The wage scale for engineering construction is to be applied to all site work greater than five (5)feet from an exterior wall of new building under construction or from an exterior wall of an existing building. 1 (1111.6 l.`ti\i\llil.iltlttt �]f,;(•(.0', * rN is OF10 1 2,3. Z®17 Addendum #1 02.03.2016 10-2012 00811 -1 of 1 General Decision Number: TX170282 01/13/2017 TX282 Superseded General Decision Number: TX20160282 State: Texas Construction Type: Building County: Brazoria County in Texas. BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories) . Note: Under Executive Order (EO) 13658, an hourly minimum wage of $10.20 for calendar year 2017 applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2015. If this contract is covered by the SO, the contractor must pay all workers in any classification listed on this wage determination at least $10.20 (or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on the contract in calendar year 2017. The EO minimum wage rate will be adjusted annually. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Modification Number Publication Date 0 01/06/2017 1 01/13/2017 ASBE0022-009 12/01/2016 Rates Fringes ASBESTOS WORKER/HEAT & FROST INSULATOR (Duct, Pipe and Mechanical System Insulation) $ 23.42 12.26 BOIL0074-003 01/01/2014 Rates Fringes BOILERMAKER $ 23.14 21.55 CARP0551-009 04/01/2016 Rates Fringes CARPENTER (Excludes Drywall Hanging, Form Work, and Metal Stud Installation) $ 23.05 8.78 ELEC0716-005 08/29/2016 00811-2 Rates Fringes ELECTRICIAN (Excludes Low Voltage Wiring and Installation of Alarms) $ 31.25 9.11 ELEV0031-003 01/01/2016 Rates Fringes ELEVATOR MECHANIC $ 39.24 29.985+a FOOTNOTES: A. 6% under 5 years based on regular hourly rate for all hours worked. 8% over 5 years based on regular hourly rate for all hours worked. New Year's Day; Memorial Day; Independence Day; Labor Day; Thanksgiving Day; Friday after Thanksgiving Day; Christmas Day; and Veterans Day. ENGI0450-002 04/01/2014 Rates Fringes POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR Cranes $ 34.85 9.85 IRON0084-011 06/01/2015 Rates Fringes IRONWORKER, ORNAMENTAL $ 23.02 6 .35 IRON0135-002 12/01/2014 Rates Fringes IRONWORKER, STRUCTURAL $ 28.25 9.25 PLAS0079-004 01/01/2015 Rates Fringes PLASTERER $ 19.92 1.00 PLUM0068-002 10/01/2016 Rates Fringes PLUMBER $ 34.35 9.79 * PLUM0211-010 10/01/2016 00811-3 Rates Fringes PIPEFITTER (Including HVAC Pipe Installation) $ 33.53 11 .11 SHEE0054-003 07/01/2014 Rates Fringes SHEET METAL WORKER (Excludes HVAC Duct and Unit Installation) $ 25.67 12.39 SUTX2014-008 07/21/2014 Rates Fringes ACOUSTICAL CEILING MECHANIC $ 16.41 3.98 BRICKLAYER $ 19.86 0 .00 CAULKER $ 15.36 0 .00 CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER $ 13.33 0.00 DRYWALL FINISHER/TAPER $ 16 .30 3.71 DRYWALL HANGER AND METAL STUD INSTALLER $ 17.45 3.96 ELECTRICIAN (Alarm Installation Only) $ 17.97 3 .37 ELECTRICIAN (Low Voltage Wiring Only) $ 18.00 1.68 FLOOR LAYER: Carpet $ 20.00 0.00 FORM WORKER $ 12.57 0.00 GLAZIER $ 19.12 4.41 INSULATOR - BATT $ 14.87 0.73 IRONWORKER, REINFORCING $ 12.10 0.00 LABORER: Common or General $ 10.55 0.00 LABORER: Mason Tender - Brick $ 13.37 0.00 LABORER: Mason Tender - Cement/Concrete $ 10.86 0.00 LABORER: Pipelayer $ 12.94 0.00 LABORER: Roof Tearoff $ 11.28 0.00 00811-4 LABORER: Landscape and rib* Irrigation $ 9.49 0.00 LATHER $ 19.73 0. 00 OPERATOR: Backhoe/Excavator/Trackhoe $ 15.56 0.00 OPERATOR: Bobcat/Skid Steer/Skid Loader $ 13.93 0.00 OPERATOR: Bulldozer $ 20.77 0.00 OPERATOR: Drill $ 16.22 0.34 OPERATOR: Forklift $ 15.64 0.00 OPERATOR: Grader/Blade $ 13.37 0.00 OPERATOR: Loader $ 13.55 0.94 OPERATOR: Mechanic $ 17.52 3.33 OPERATOR: Paver (Asphalt, Aggregate, and Concrete) $ 16.03 0.00 OPERATOR: Roller $ 16.00 0.00 rik'\ PAINTER (Brush, Roller and Spray) , Excludes Drywall Finishing/Taping $ 16.77 4.51 ROOFER $ 15.40 0.00 SHEET METAL WORKER (HVAC Duct Installation Only) $ 20.05 4.19 SHEET METAL WORKER (HVAC Unit Installation Only) $ 19.67 2.24 SPRINKLER FITTER (Fire Sprinklers) $ 22.17 9. 70 TILE FINISHER $ 12.00 0.00 TILE SETTER $ 16 .17 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER: 1/Single Axle Truck $ 14.95 5.23 TRUCK DRIVER: Dump Truck $ 12.39 1.18 TRUCK DRIVER: Flatbed Truck $ 19.65 8.57 TRUCK DRIVER: Semi-Trailer Truck $ 12.50 0.00 00811-5 TRUCK DRIVER: Water Truck $ 12.00 4.11 WATERPROOFER $ 14.39 0.00 WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. Note: Executive Order (EO) 13706, Establishing Paid Sick Leave for Federal Contractors applies to all contracts subject to the Davis-Bacon Act for which the contract is awarded (and any solicitation was issued) on or after January 1, 2017. If this contract is covered by the EO, the contractor must provide employees with 1 hour of paid sick leave for every 30 hours they work, up to 56 hours of paid sick leave each year. Employees must be permitted to use paid sick leave for their own illness, injury or other health-related needs, including preventive care; to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is ill, injured, or has other health-related needs, including preventive care; or for reasons resulting from, or to assist a family member (or person who is like family to the employee) who is a victim of, domestic violence, sexual assault, or stalking. Additional information on contractor requirements and worker protections under the EO is available at www.dol.gov/whd/govcontracts. Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii) ) . The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of "identifiers" that indicate whether the particular rate is a union rate (current union negotiated rate for local) , a survey rate (weighted average rate) or a union average rate (weighted union average rate) . Union Rate Identifiers A four letter classification abbreviation identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than "SU" or "UAVG" denotes that the union classification and rate were prevailing for that classification in the survey. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2014. PLUM is an abbreviation identifier of the union which prevailed in the survey for this classification, which in this example would be Plumbers. 0198 indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable, i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 00811-6 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing (Pi\ the wage determination. 07/01/2014 is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate, which in this example is July 1, 2014. Union prevailing wage rates are updated to reflect all rate changes in the collective bargaining agreement (CBA) governing this classification and rate. Survey Rate Identifiers Classifications listed under the "SU" identifier indicate that no one rate prevailed for this classification in the survey and the published rate is derived by computing a weighted average. rate based on all the rates reported in the survey for that classification. As this weighted average rate includes all rates reported in the survey, it may include both union and non-union rates. Example: SULA2012-007 5/13/2014. SU indicates the rates are survey rates based on a weighted average calculation of rates and are not majority rates. LA indicates the State of Louisiana. 2012 is the year of survey on which these classifications and rates are based. The next number, 007 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 5/13/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. Survey wage rates are not updated and remain in effect until a new survey is conducted. rig \ Union Average Rate Identifiers Classification(s) listed under the UAVG identifier indicate that no single majority rate prevailed for those classifications; however, 100% of the data reported for the classifications was union data. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 08/29/2014. UAVG indicates that the rate is a weighted union average rate. OH indicates the state. The next number, 0010 in the example, is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. 08/29/2014 indicates the survey completion date for the classifications and rates under that identifier. A UAVG rate will be updated once a year, usually in January of each year, to reflect a weighted average of the current negotiated/CBA rate of the union locals from which the rate is based. WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1. ) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * an existing published wage determination * a survey underlying a wage determination 00811-7 * a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter * a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2. ) and 3. ) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2. ) If the answer to the question in 1. ) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7) . Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc. ) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3. ) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board) . Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4. ) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. END OF GENERAL DECISION 00811-8 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Section 00900 (.1b' ADDENDUM NO. 1 Date: February 3, 2017 PROJECT: Tom Reid Library Addition & Renovation BID NO.: 1117-08 BID DATE: February 16, 2017; 2:00 pm FROM: Dustin O'Brien, AIA Debbi Mulcahy Dewberry Architects 5051 Westheimer, Suite 200 Houston,Texas 77056 To: Prospective Bidders and Interested Parties This addendum forms a part of the bidding documents and will be incorporated into the Contract Documents, as applicable. Insofar as the original Contract Documents, Specifications, and Drawings are inconsistent, this Addendum shall govern. Please acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Proposal form, Section 00300 submitted to the City of Pearland. FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ON THE BID PROPOSAL FORM MAY BE CAUSE FOR DISOUALIFICATION. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: 11�ZtttUUflltl�l NIA �. �0AED qRG''rlir SPECIFICATIONS: b j 61, cc1. 01230.3.1.A.4- Change Alternate #4 t i * -Er t1:1z° `'L'':-.�in CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS: '3 j CIVIL Shifted the Back Flow Preventer 3' outside of the new 25' Sanitary • _ __r_ __ __ " Sewer Easement. Reissued sheets that represented the location of the C1.2 BFP. C2.1 C3.I 2-22-12 00900- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM C4.1 C5.1 i --- C6.1 ! � C7.1 ARCHITECTURAL A.0.02 Removal of note in reference to monument sign. A.0.03 Note in reference to monument sign modified. A.1.60 Clarification of spot elevations and detail location on roof plan. A.6.02 Roof Parapet details revised. • A.8.02 Change to finish note in Conf/Multi-Purpose 107 A.8.03 ' Change to finish remark on Conf/Multi-Purpose 107 GENERAL: 1. Release of Sign-in sheet from the February 2, 2017 mandatory pre-proposal meeting. 2. Dates meeting room must be accessible to the public for voting. a. 2017 Elections i. Saturday, May 6, 2017 —Election Day—7 a.m.—7 p.m. ii. Early Voting 1. Monday, April 24,—Friday, April 28, 8 a.m. —5 p.m. 2. Saturday, April 29, 7 a.m. --7 p.m. 3. Monday, May 1, Tuesday May 2, 7 a.m.—7 p.m. iii. Runoff Election Day Saturday, June 10,2017—7 a.m. —7 p.m. iv. Early Voting 1. Tuesday, May-30,—Friday, June 2, 8 a.m.—5 p.m. 2. Saturday, June 3, 7 a.m. —7 p.m. 3. Monday, June 5,—Tuesday June 6, 7 a.m.—7 p.m. v. Canvass Meeting for Runoff Election—Monday, June 19,2017 at 6 pm 111�Zzt�ant�,c�t b. Current Library Hours are as follow: cteD Ao,„ I. Monday 10 am—9 pm 4 g� Cel o•�••.`ie>, , ii. Tuesday 10 am—9 pm • <0. .co�, iii. Wednesday 10 am—9 pm cc iv. Thursday 9 am-�6 pm * v. Friday 9 am—6 pm cS, ••'•.. �89••;.•' = vi. Saturday 10 am— 6 pm �.OF "��- vii. Sunday CLOSED . -• t c. Last day of Summer Reading Program at the Library is August 15, 2017 END OF ADDENDUM NO. 1 2-22-I2 00900-2 of 2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternates: 1. Additive Alternate Bid #1: Remove Endicott pavers in Lobby 105 and all the entries to the rest rooms and apply a self- leveling float (refer to Section Alteration Project Proce- dures) to floor in prep for new scheduled flooring over prepared floor area. Endicott pav- ers in Vestibule 100 to remain. 2. Additive Alternate Bid #2: Retain existing Endicott pavers in Lobby 105 and apply a self- leveling float (refer to Section Alteration Project Procedures) atop of the pavers in prep for new floor finishes to be installed over self-leveling float. 3. Additive Alternate Bid #3: Remove carpet and base in the Conference/Multi-Purpose Room 107 and prep for new floor. Provide new scheduled floor finish and base and new scheduled paint on all walls in this room. 4. Additive Alternate Bid #4: Provide floor to ceiling 1-'/z" prefabricated interior aluminum frame with '/z' thick clear tempered glass located on backside of half height books shelf host walls in children's area. 5. Additive Alternative Bid #5: Pressure wash, sand, prime and repair as required to bring to "like new" appearance the metal frame work and metal canopy above the entry. Paint scheduled color. 6. Additive Alternative Bid #6: Remove existing light poles and light fixtures in parking lot. Provide new light poles and fixtures that match those used at the City Hall: Lithonia Lighting `D' series, size 3 LED flood luminaire on 25'#SSS square straight steel pole, to meet building criteria of 110 mph. Add new wiring as required for new fixtures. 7. Additive Alternate Bid #7: Provide new 130 ton air-cooled chiller in lieu of specified split DX equipment and packaged RTU's. Refer to Attachment Exhibit A and the Drawings. END OF SECTION 01230 (11111.1. 1 Addendum #1 02.03.2017 ALTERNATES 01230-2 "II /41 t41111 — ' _ ..... KEY NOTES §iiiie VENOM/MN. ci/ k.”10.4.70.72,is. KCI Tochnology l`Z.Tell t'''I''' 77):5EfiFL'i'il : ';',`Vi:;,:,11','V,,';'::1:-. Adkr.V;P.1.57trtZ.5157.M5 ce ......•00...20•• NOW==MOW•PAWS COPPAPP 1.5.114.1 Pinnacle Structural Engineers (VOL WOO Pc..le 3 CPR) •••• _......... , gl ' ' 7.. .1,0111. C, 7 .4 MIA Word, Getz&Associates Civil Elooers ,../ P1'',' 'V•FAIr? / t "'- , -- -- - - t :::/;;;;;..-.., ND. DATE SCSCRIPTIO I •= t c h•• I; 1 I PROP PVT Uri-._ 1' tItE111:2'4.tiEri51711*' I it' ... '. ? - i r',* r T.... i ....2.- • \ . . It7,-. l' N \ ;.'1.'* .4 /—i , ., 1 ,-,--- N, .7 -,,47-,,---,)--. 1, ! , • .••• • ,, I : •I , —1 i ! i 1 1 ..,: "A,..v___ as . .. , I, II 10.30.15 ISSUE FOR DO FRICIAG I 31 02 01.29.16 SOPC CO REVIEW : , ... . 03 01.11.17 ISSUED FOR SIDS,PERIM'1.1.0 CONStRUCIION coxstRucnoti i 1 1 11'1' -4,,--V .' n. F.I14.' ..• ,4;c.---- lc' .11- '.. 7..i..7.7.a I 3,S rnn, 0.,.,. 11';: II. .''.:./ ".r' 1 ,i',..21 i • ,c°',E1.17*j,',,,-.;'.; ..:3' ,A••Il./.1:1....;27,3;',' 'lc'''. ,:a.- P31"11,1VX\f..li'.42111 , 'I'l'i . ''' '....:r" /.°i. °•'•tP?:.-ij ....'"'. ,III! 41-.0,4 _:,..,.,,.. r.,---,,,,I(''').04 .A. -?,,,- 111'i•,:',1' .-.- i '''''------- 4,41Er--7:•,,,,,r,---!-,r..n.1,P,- e: -41'T's')'•'.,;71.3.,:kti ,F .i.-- I 3--- . „0"---:.' i‘,..._‘#t.' 0,.-..-..1' ,.. ,. ! ,, ,...... .,,I,• A4. o 1 WGA. .... .., 'r .4.4-t;.' ::',43-0--ioli.. ,"i- . -......... , •.1...,9..#:/.4,.. . , "----,- I •-• , • 110 1 i I ' i 1 1 '1711 1' -A0Tf".71''i'i-.:71- 4.,,, .4...., I ....erg,;1!AtISSOallaS,.11P ,: : : ' *', , 1 I .-1 i • , 1- -.pi% ..,...., I-. . 1'3.',,•111 :.; ji, II1 . 1 , ; 1 , ! : 1 : ! l''''':"''' 'Iil'" F.' '-'' '''''''----' 1-'---'-2-N.,.,,, , 1 t,': k;•;4:^ti. .,' .,,-.„4 :;.:,,,:-....--,.• i.....h.,"_-!_,,,, _.,-.... ...,.. .. ............... ....,....., . i;--r id-i 1... ,----.. r ! , , .r„,-,-.1' : . , . , ! , I. r.,..747,..., , , 1 1•0, i i,. _ • , r.'"''' . i ii ..-......,1,4 , , ,-,....-: ; ; i . I 'a. .,,,,,, , • • , ' ' , . i i n ,,,,,' J.,1- ,r. •l ±cr...v.,' , i . ! . , , , , - — - SHEET NOTES -. ,,,,„,cr 1-0aa,m,,,.=,,,,,,,A 0'1,..,._L..•"2-_"—_•——tr':-.'!'''T;nc.',"',,''":P-.=,p,/,,.„,,,_,'i,[11 51l1 4sl,i .::•se.i.,,,e-.- -.-__5_"T..'. :)A.. . :I--- :1 '"'''''7I.` -" a 7i—."!:-_ • C..g.. 0S4 260g I..;E;s'I,s.o ' ''' ii [e .) 0213/11 ! (..e.s...) —/Ma,137AVOP PT.IL 1":,i, P il 1 1 I ,,,,,..,„,„ If.`,74',.`"4",', • , li -0.I,1W117Or 42,1,1"7 ",..Li AL l'OM REID LIBRARY i (05-o..15200) 3522 IIBERTY DRIVE.1,,,11.--,!-,,-- : ...__ - PEARLAND, TX 77581 /f.4-:., r''. I-11 t. ,1, 1 S— — s 7-7-7 •— A ' . . • i 1 • TOM I2EII) LIBRARY 4 4 1 6 /F,--...- 5..7.*-:.:.--\\ i !,i' i 11 ! 4.A.-P.1.1t,t•gol=OP 1 'i ..,I_ .... ADDITION & .,... RENOVATION l itri .7nr... 1 A-swerno,i P0.3 MM. 1 4.,,t,'=, g., ir—,,-- 2.-,. -- 16 ili A____,(..,:: 1 -- .71-.=____,_,,L7-..„,_,773.7.7,173,..'.7- 27.E=7.A-C46Z;4173...1-P',2 ,._6:77,22.7:FE777- .=--17=iSic_3113.,...,,,,;71-.A.6=__ EEL__ 1--js_-='*±_77__•'_.-:31.7.7:- __ __-.-=.4._,_".Lej..,7-,7!.%:.:i..".-37.c_..,3:.:6.4-:' tI.,-_;_-. --_,_,-..74.7E6,_ _ 6-.--,,-.--$.4E_'_'__•'°17' _!!!!!.:_ _______._____ ;_ i_ ---US f",--- URY DRIVE ..:0 ti>" .. Z— • OVERALL : t RACP.PUOLICWATER-, ser ser ed, ",..4 I car-rarrnTie mr, Em 1 I i I SITE PLAN ..p , """"-tti.4:, "' '"' '"" - - :,,I.-,:,;',41,0 7--1.11;7"'- ---1,iiik•:.::"'"RFTT.:-..t. ,...;5... . ,0_:,,,,.. ..!•- ": -....,,„, - Ar.,... ,4.41 -:-i-";1 ws-r./ .11. l''--.' -'')4 i'>'41- ,, • WAG PROJEGt NO. DRAWING NO. DATE C1.2 33502013 ,Dr7•1 1:`1 I t i • • KEY NOTES • OFFICIDIARKS: ECI TeChnolog0- "Z . l'Zirtrift=i2iTc•Saff,iffialitztx Lichar.icci,gicoLriccl. recretarc=irsfigoccuco...sloroce &Plumbic. Encore r-a...,.84710 ACM' / ...............0 AAling PASTE,...Y Mr,.To TOO TILT Pinnacle Structural Engineers (1 c.ceuTFocte..cFs•cac„mcsesFor . IIIMI=V LEIIMG A POI=CO.WAVI. VL IliZZ...N.4 ACIAI r J • ,, 7 a.: r. ,,:7...,,,,g,,,0 ,,,,,,7, Structural engineara • Ward.Solo it Associates — --------------''--'— — --,--- '"-'::: . :., -;, s_. ,-_ :::- 0 ,.1...,....,....', /4 IC.'0 , O.1141:2 F4214 0.4.3t7.t 8 Fik r . ":,..... ] t, 1,, I, FLOOD PLAJN ROIL: . ' 1 I taggiggiitigifiltpt?1_ I . 1 a ef • 1 17, • I% ..',..-rs. ' NO. DATE DESCRICT____Ie Nirr. a) I:I I 1 1 0'-' 01 10.30.15 ISSUE FOR 00 1RIC*0 02 04.20.16 SO%CD RE21312 • —• • 01"., '?5 ..:. '.V"• ) ,, 1 _a, 04 0011..21,1.1177 iIOSSSSMUU EEc 0C FeOFOSR RTR 00 g : (. CONSTRUCTION . F -N . CI DRSAO.N NCK ONG OS 02.03.17 ADDEND:As#1 ,rc i‘I r..• i ii 1.. i•--- ,1 . I , _.!----11 - • ,_..,,I, .- .iF. aka.z iii-: , . , el) 'fr ' • 1 .1. • • ' 1 . , , '! I "•‘-;!7_7_, - ,-,,,,,-`, `,•,./r-'"' , ::. -• ,,,-,,! _ ,..! !tiF-;,7,,,,,,,:,,, ,,- --\!!----„.... , -'7.:-.---Tir,I.;•"4----7,1',`-' s'',I_ : • T ill , .-,- ?',....---,,fr -•••.`,,:.kr•-,\,--,,.., -Lf.z.-,,:,,,it.:__•-•:-::.±..-.._5_,____„io--:,,-,,, ______ , 2-'.g...,,c I L- --•=1---7 ----------- . L i iks 1 4 l_......,....,,L, ,.- L7--,III---1 , I-- 1 -1 .`--/ ---?v, C\--\-- :---7-----,-1,--,k-.--, 1 , —d•-- .,, •,,,,,J , .--,.-.. .... ,....,....0 -21) -..--- .,... , . I s...... W G A . , , .. ,__.,. . 1 r I, .. : i , . , , ; , , ] ! , , . , r I ILH iiiiiHij : iii , 'i il 1 1 . ta-r-FT77-71-1 1 -, ' ' ' ' Iii I ' 1 ' • ,11 \ .„, .___,,, , _, I.:, i • , .,,,,,,,A,. . 1' ''Ll n ...... '- 'kzir-f, I -- :1 -..„- : • • .. ' , , ' ' '.....,• ....4, ' ',74.27'ir SHEET NOTES .1 ' t•=--- ' -,f- - - .- , . e ,r, - 2 - tr, O . . -1. * 0143/1/ / 1 ,..e ,... •... ;' r ,1 .. 0 , 11.7021 AC.= I .1,f4 ,10,1P° . 1E050 ' -----.-- _ 8 i , 1 • 1- 1so 1 . I,-6,-.-II12"°" I P li MiTE,I;Vg•7.., • . i i - -o- 1 ..,_, 1........,..,....T 1 • e., ` cl-T-Zi.,'" ; . ,.. -!* . i i 071'OP PrAREA,r.... .._.., !FEW Om I TOM REID LIBRARY i 1 i 1--.„.. r-',. 11 0=-1 119 AGRA Pr-MA.102.7 SE570...a SP AL . . 3522 LIBERTY DRIVE I ..ig.g.iggiEKt".;::: PEARIAND, 1X 77581 • I i . 4 , ,,"--•': -,-4314.4, ti! l'w.:-. - , Efflig01,72,:::'..F117 • 0 .z.t.=..- -L I! ........ ._ • • c,,, .. . !. t Z I 'r'tle 5:75-737,1FX-eli;:::I --- TOM REID LIBRARY l , „„--,---.. '---_, ADDITION & --•,,,, ,..n ei I.1 I °.=.:,... ..,,.......,:„..,...._ p01-, .--- _.,i_ ._..._ . RENOVATION ,, „,:_-. 1.,, a II .,------- i_.,........ ....-. r..{.131F104,•26 •111111 ,,.,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, , .....-.-..................................................------. '''''''' ftgainli'F•il..7.,-, ____ . _ _ _ _ _ --vv.::i '4=74'....7`.==1,.• 2=0 fI -" STORM WATER , .T.a LBERTYDRVE e POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN . ii7,.—.-_,,---.------- — 'r--:67---1--". • 1.-"L.,,,,,,c —ift-../, "‘ "'".":. 1gy,,,__. .2._.'- .7177,,(..E .ZT, 7:77:7;;V4-------- ------------4""'' WAG FROJECT NO. caawam Nc. I IF 1 _/1 i a'ar.../:3'1". . 14171 .3, I Fos,I s'T,T.''s,:'•11.::I''''''''')I '''LTe/ DATE C2.1 10.30.2013 050001 03'1:11 1 • on ,F I" ; . . . j \sea) \LAII) (4111111) (Aliii) (.411 KEY NOTES PEP:ailliaj.'n,--] BENCHMARKS MilneggiFiT—Ti3EZIEEiiii,EAVOVi IT'1, .hn'h'gY •/ i,Iiir:F.feat.r.iref:igifglteVS:4-trBF Sr*F1111%,27::;;Z:;.. lc a'1;ct`itE";`,2'_.,,cg".;.'..';';"" rt,4,..tils..,;_vat4474..,,..i. .s.Toizo, Islrs.nnotT,I,er.?trtLetottrm,alar!ngineers el ee i.............. . r .SUG —1 . C . ..... EtTaTILtILM,LezuL.i.1 . Ward.Getz &Atizociatee 1.o.Nt ma EiTil linNineors 1 --1 ,0 .4, ,.,,-•1 r 7cc-,'NC PAO .0 th0 ION KIDUSLAPILITSALL4 PO..NEM ON Lk ITAILLEST .„..n. N !TT T:77 ....... A.',.: '''v,,S Rr • , T fiL.391.*Nr).ti.VoluMEL„...,IN„NE...0„..c. I N. '''' PILTAIL1.1110A1.111211 LiL•LIAMIL TA MILANO i : 1:•:".;2'. ..-PRCAL.FOC PLUMB, !, ZIC.TVLS7;WLM:cr.L'Arg•Ta;g1'.T.'L=Tiel 0. ........‘'i f . 1 . ri, FA, [1• ,s,.',..11.. _UST E DESCRIPTION _ CI 10.30.15 ISSUE FOR DO 7110150 , • I -1 i . .1, 02 '04.1116 50%CD REVIEW : I rua`Vir ..j 1 03 01.11.17 ISSUED roil 01DS,PEHtlir \ i 1 1 1----1 1 •'.Z.S.'t I : • ',II ! .,.. „ A.CONSTRUCTION . 01.25.17 ISSUE f ON SID ANC CONSTRUCTION '2J01 i . CS— k 02.03.17 ACOENEEN It . I 1 I..........,IL :4'- • 3::, 1-,`NN )--- — 1 \ 1 lic.K.'. 1 ` • 44?-4, 2.%:".2.7::.- 1 It i : ,.... .•• TL L.r.,)I, -\, , I [.... 1_,„„,,,e.,. ' ..., . I 1 ..,.._ ,. ,..m. e..42,4, ; . 'd,,4 '.',7•,..' , ;:..il.,/,,....S....4.,;‘,',..., i i 1 ' • ',...:7-Vre,l'.. ''',.,..!..'-‘.,,„77.,',7\..;.41.1:r!"!!!i'l I!„ ,L__.,1•!•••••••3;,!,i t ' `.!iii!••••••••3 V;.73",;•-•-i,....... •"!1"--•!! ----------""•-•"- ,----... !,.,.!--,-- ,1)„....,i.„.„ ii......- i i :,, ‘,„, .„........!..ei.:.,i I , / (c,-,•,,, '\ ..\•71:1,,,,,,,nrr .,''' '. .:'.... ,,. 1 i! :,,,...-: • .,v.k.,.I'.!is,.±1.-1..--,...tz-__‘,.e......,_ v.z.L.,..I__-_,....-.. ,.ki- -, . 1 L..._. . rf- '''..... I '1•••---11. '?'''''''''' W 1 G A I 1 "'”elglfsLatl°07,1'.11."P 1 , •-1}-..c. 1", ': `7.1',?,::,•2-1;1:::" .• t ' II; i . di i ' ' ' ' ' ' i.i , I ' '"I .tI • ! HI l !a: 11 ; 1 . ! I ! ! ! ! ! ! •s_ff ... l ,!,..,., ; ! ---: -'" •'`-"-'‘. 4 -I. :4, ....._ : igi.. , • . . 4...t.-..r.---1.ti--... ... ,--,,:-., ,,,,f 5 c I c`i • 1 i - c c c co 1 .,:rliccicc c c F3clicct ccic cc c . \ , 4,,,,accl . tccic,'):';11-ri...L., SHEET NOTES .,,V,..fr,....,',.....,,, - ''r-- ''''''''.7•Z ..3.s, 3.,9' ,....... "ktEci;"" 02,3P, - . . .• , 101 • r .Llli'4r,-I 60,to' ........._ MOT I-CALIZO 19.2 AGM@ i ! I i • 11 I ' ! Waal:.1 AL 1,4 0101,4'' i LEGEND, I • OW OP PEANSWA=QS i 1.1 I TS t: f....'''''' 1.-- 0131rNSION COST POI I SCE., I .47.7 0iSTNT.SFP A 1 1. I 1.1 . , t• P Algijil i ii :1 1 , i i 1 itr.gFif.da.' i 1 MILT I-CALM:0 MGM,elOPAY I:7,-. SHEET NOTES. ILVC20.57 i ! X 1 i GUT OT P.EattrAlvt,nr..4 VS T '''- ''," '''"'''"°'"'"" TONI REID LIBRARY 119 ICRSV PILL,LALLT!Oar IDIVR4 Si.... 3522 LIBERTY DRIVE I, 1.__,,,,,,,,_. --,,.•:-.,,..,111•••••,., ' • .: • .,...,.-,' ',:ii — '••••-•- PEARLAND, TX 77581 i I 4,FI-17,,Ft1 Igi I '----- . .. igr2j41,4.'"tv,1,4T4....fit-t,—___._— ...____ ..nr•'7: • • !I I ........... 1 ! la; 0 i 11 !i t• TOM REID LIBRARY ,_ ,.......-...... s---- ADDITION & 4 N..rrrn-r val., r r r2 1 0 , '... .La.,man=we LI I i . I 4 i ....._ _ RENOVATION . if N.,...,13..........:. 1 ti 1 I " 1.,i Lr4srL. 1 I --...0 Iv n.w.,1•4 ......, ..._ rig',`;•,`.=141%, • SIUS 127.1.,:_.... .... 4?-7,cL :::::: .• :7!!E:::::::::::::::: E:::::::::::::::::::::::WT:,KE:::::#K?f'...::::::::::.......: ::::: fs..."-:7:71:::7'7,=:4- 7-=' LIBERTY DRIVE : I .i .,r,":72.,....J DIMENSION CONTROL &FIRE LANE PLAN fa. .. i • 6 .. • 1't,-:' i ..,.,..,:falro WAG PRO.Her NO. DRAWING NO. 14171 u.pr. AN 1 DATE C3.1 10.30.2015 Tvr 1 - I I I I 1 3 i I Cer I i KEY NOTES rriiiiiiiti • DENCHLSARMS: KCI Technology• . .------ ' •:: - --- / MITIV=tigegirm„-..risolj51,7"..rx Mechanical.Elsetrical. CALLED 9.8 elai. . ,...<11'1.1.11.11C 1,91.9Tbd Pinnacle Structin.al Engineers m :a.ciai:a BOO ISTAV LICARIVG.0'Orr,COZIPAAT OM 110,L1.41348.7.1) L.-;-:•.1 " '=" "' W .rra SOSS/5 ard,Gets lc Associates Lisa ISIT Civil Engineers . ?.,..* *•'...r.tter'':*,..P.l;"••••,747fill ? '"." 'Ie./ r. 'ATTENTION' a LaViri, ",Jj!jfAjWit yy.,;r4,,j1j,:.,J-L,tjtJt,t,ta Lii,../..,,,,,!!,,,,,,._!„,_,014,,,,,,,„,,, '' ,'---7;71,"'J.,..'"4: *'... ' 4J44 4:4:j,jk 4a::,,j''..-.tjitt-4 •m ir0..0..40.0 ,e, 8 , c1440,,10711CimbRNIUNra,4 . =i SIZOTallIISSASSIT00. 1•5 1 IMMION1°'"' , ArAllASOOM WOW f•. -t 'di,I t 1'a.1'.„l:,,MIIl,,,i,u.t lxNar.r•e... Mr-I..:(. ,!1 .a1r,.rN.r.0,4ti•'..-----1I --Tz,-,7:-t ,,,,7,,- ',,,,,,t..4.'/„.,i.•7 I. •.•` ..•..• •'d.1.t7i- ii 1 ' -' , , , „? 4„ : , SHEET t NOTES Oi=TEi1SUn raLr4trAr***- N0OOA1. D0010A11..T121E051..111577 liIDISSSgESSSUUCEEEg RFFIOPOTRlRI OOSNDaI O_PD _,SRA6IN_C,DN T E 4 P _EG_R 0 LII_T OS 070117 ADDENDUM 01 10-;A' i•' i'''' '4'0,0'-1-- 1) '''' 1."':' t'. t".1""-Niuk'IP' , ? °T1'..,-- l'-'" GRADING LEGEND: '1,,,' _L 5 1-. --- ...... - 1 2..,. r•••••••-• ,,..._: , ,7)1 ter,,,,, ,.„ ti- s---, • , ,• t. , wrat„,..... .!it - 1 1 e 1 ,,,...,..6,/ ,,..., .144!,..,''---1 ii• .1//', tjj,ft,..,-.0.ct'...!•-U ',i la!a: ] rj-I..'" ... :..s!........,aa.J. J lt" •-=',:•.: t !- • -I I "jt0" J•t^rrtt•Ft•••••••••• t'a•!j%,! ' j ' --Jaw •-J....J.,. • • • ..•-•4"/ •:j.4.- rt'-';'---- Wei al Mr,MI (MI MIU ,4 i rjj,--•,:j.j•i ..,_ t t tt• '''•. , •• •••!J L r>.-....,. ! ! ,.._.;,0, :12,,- 1---7.,„71,A.,'*„,1117 —"\I!;,-...„;4,4 T4•''' 77:thi••••,-,, ,i J t j-i l• J„. J‘ortc.,.,t.,,• tralc-Jot•'ijja,- 1 ""r,,,,t i•••4' 't,' :A., -,z, :r.:;i1•!•1 !;,0,, ,k I---,..- . ii,....-.,,,,-„,.• ,ii, ••.• ,:,-.v y --,..... _,--v_,:. :...i.l.....,„7,,,,l,i.i.....t__±.1„..,.....„„• 4!.,t.4.-••••• ; . ' '--- ' •; 1 11 41-0),,,:•;-.r.,4---, 011 04\1/;FiqL.t1:111:;,.,--.,,,ez.-7: 77;1----------'---- .••• .•• • 1 11 „;_,_‘:,..'riz...,;li'.2.11,-,.,,;-;,;•4,'"/),,__,7,, fj-:\,::::ti--,,,c,„1-41y--,-, 1 -1.i.....:t.--_=_. ono,NOTES.. 'ITN awcw-1-itT- 1 4 ;•Ari,",-.1,-::fk". n--1.--i,,,-- ,(.:--,o, ',--)v—\.-- -,:t.,Li ----' . WIG A ' .,; • ' k'gr";:i'''', ''''S.-1, ' ' .---"-" 0— ,0- - 145".........i4' 1' - 1,'N .„, o' •'''''1 40" .0, 1 --.', 4'0' t?'" / -4';'' •-'410,j '•t kt j 7": Lows . :77- :.: . : --.--1- 1 ---•i.;:fhi'',°, i: ,'''':--,-- WALD.GOTS A ASSOCIATES./LP CONSULTING StiOISPLAS . r**.•* '• S.Amer csirSON POND SOF.SIO.C7.1 .5* i ii le'',...A•",eriL:gr I 1 I 'I I i I i I I I 1 I i •ToTiZwea-1•4 '•••••71 ** ---1 r- ,i _ :Lifil:::::i:Jninfol.;:i4":::::: I 4:.0 0 • .%S/E:.=7••=e0.r'" • ,.. /IIIIMr.J.; 141 III 'l 'iiiIIIIi / I . : IIIIII ,.,:i , g •—.... H I ; i H I ! ',...„,„th'‘ , -,' sit.---- -• ,t ill 43"..t.,•4`21 , i .° ''''.-."...„._...' ErS'? I /u.G-'is''1.'1 kii,„: ,.." . EtS*,.., ','111,1241 „,:,,4..- '-,•''' /-7-1)---- .....-. .F.F.n,,........,,,,,..._ :.,,,........., .;::„......2...—,,...,„ L'Iti, ---. . . . . ,z:-.2:,1 . • p," 4, . , ,,,,o,,,,, 1 li ....,,- ,'•:,..,-. .,,.".; ire-1,, ; I 1 : 1 , . . . 1 1 I i i 1-...--:- . 1 : . , , i 1._- '°,•:",&.s,.•4•N , - 01.0A1, • ' ^ . ' .' •-,r••'***•*,-• -*.• 4°e....-- • . ------ ••• .- - Inn,z-nsssis..essr../SO= I 7--- 0'. .72fikar°51Efigi.7: it-.-4v4,,,,, . ;N. .7=11:ortjf=r4"'"'"w" IP •• • i 1 ATM 10114.741.LT AS 4**;.`'l, I tt" Ol • ! .'1.00-21-1.099 f , : ,. , i ii i '`. 1 \ 1 .!--- itiT"..4V-riT•:Arr., GRADING NOTES AVIS...718GLINT i ..1 , ...• ... 044 " 1 ,,,,DI....)...2.4., ... ‘.2 .- - B. '°6Y . ....1 1 .. I 819 dat.P80.1./.2 JINAT ATM.SS AL I , ,r.-....: , ... i:LIL.,, " ms-svassr ACII.R..) 09-8I-1880 ...........- .1:=F4ELTAW.Tir...V.,°474--,,'. p315EAR%:'21 LIB:DED,RTITI1BRARD7P.75D.,Y8,Ei. ri....,-...,-4 l'1111. ..- -r-,------r-,.. -.. - 1 .... ......... al.,,117-ft, --- V.,=.1e' Ztisstn! Z'srsitqu'r,sn gr= •••-- ••=f,......L,"I•I'VrAI',1=1,1'1:::,,, . 1 i trrEign 1;I •- - z...-g-..'...- TOM REID LIBRARY . , 1 -- • '--„, _____... „MT,I., ,...V= •ADDITION & ',"'-"° 1. 5: • I il4;! 11 .. ;.,-1f, ----- ........ '.. - a RENOVATION t A 44070074411007. • v,, ,i, . . ..--: -7.-, ,,...„ ,4!..:.,...„ .-7...ow w..o-ri\-.:L...,-• ,..?...0M-i-J'Aj'Jr-1:4- •r•!`'''-Nk'"T,af••••• '-'•'.'7' ' 'i' ''''''' s""•'"'""'!..t....'......1:::';':_7.J.::::::Lf.:27:717..7.7j.E'_7'.J.7.1.E• ,j1:44--,,,, . ---•••• •-.:4-. .....-.. .._.. —41:' L , •',,,,4,---------- ------41), .....,,-;z- ullERrr DRIVE , 1 I GRAD I NG/UTILITY /P. .'"—;T•71.r.irtirrOrg9Ls, g'-1.„,,,,,,, i ..... ... ‘1"1.,-••=1 . 1 .10; 40 ___________,74:,;40 .,..,,,,,,0....„...._ 0 eg,-? 4$,_ y ,,,,.0 A je,..• „..............._ •sg,,,,,,et.___ jf-4_....____,,,eu.s.,, •a....--:=4,--ia,;•::----•------ ---- --,. -,,,,,,,...,.,,0- ,....2,-;:ii, a;‘,••,,,;:,--:;,;;;F::-. .III.L.,-,..z. ..?.t.-,;:-.....---___._.!--.2.":-.;*;\;-a.4,X.._i,"2_,".....,__ --. -.- - -- -••••.-..,4- WAG PROJECT NO. DRAWING NO. Pr 1,71 1 '7:4-" .....,.. 1 11 I'4'1 • . DATE C4.1 10.10.2015 • i I • . , 1 , I . • \-41) J • \-.41) .. AI 41 /Al, 1 1 1 1 I KEY NOTES I I \ nctiewocu IPII-i: I u IC01 Technology '1 I 4 I \ iSPALISktiffetert&ttriffa Pc Plumbing ......oxorx.x.x.xxxx.xxxx.,,,,,,,,nxxx,,,,,,,,, Plumbing Engineers If Il e-cI I '• ' x Imml cu,d,r....,...co.xx.xxx ',C", I •f li Pinnacle Structural Englneere l.',.. .fl 1\I1I iII 31i;.I i1I 'I /r=in11-ig1 ,o.gnTIvIIMxxodl;ITla -lagirigSnggi% W'ard",'G'eIlId dW. 9 .• gEa Civil EnOne'u'r'An''. en 10t?'g 1 ..1 ph V 11 ii ,,,,„ e ,1,A. fir...m.1....,......issa., J. .,, .k.j ii• /rniirVon'tcfneVorInepaf ex aluevmou PERETATIOggC2- ' -..i.§r, ,Ti!i i L -4> .i., i 1 t -.4,„ 7...,'- -'';'" '::74,T4'417.?1&''''''' NO. DATE ocrscpcnon ____ , .V. !OS I..1.1,. 21g,,1 i Fi74%"117:1?"411, g'''''. 0 1 10.30.15 LSSUE FOR DO PRICING 1 ,TT 'IIIId.- tI'. ' . Is qI 12. 02 04•29.16 son co REVIEW OS 01.11.11 *SUED roil PIPS,PSALM. AND CCNSTRUCIION _ ;TIII—*"..1.....117..1.:11........____.11:..LITTEHT7a I'.I 4'.Ti.i I: / " ,..4 R Cu 01•25.17 ISSUE iON PIO ano ..0. 5.-.. ..,..i CONSTRUCTION N CS 02.0111 ACCENCIN It—i ,..' — : .a., ''-1--, I 7.- ',"•::i II ""'' 1.i _,,,,,... . ,"" .:•1 ,;.9 2 t1 " 1( .I7 ''''' r ''' '%eif.• c6.j: "''''''',f•fj."cV,r 1/ :5'i ° 'E 111.:. =-.'::' ' :.: .L.1.i' •v•-.; ..;0 •-•:, :a.. 1 ,,,i, oZtriwk7fg1°;3•,ITe`; ;.•el l'$il ,...ild :',' ill-- '4; ,.•.,, ...`5 is' . ,-, ,,,,,,,, •,,,.., ,,,,, •*,,,I .1 i i!!•Cr%' ":.R: hlii, _z -, ,,, ...,! )i al,..„_ 1..., 4.7.,.R.,1,,:ii...i, N7:11,1X1,--i W I G IA 1 I-7,;•,17.:,.7"' SHEET NOTES PROFILE-8"WATER 02,60 . • . . : : . • • . . : 7 • • : • =La'i orr 48 Is : Igi/Ii=i • . .., .. ALL EXISTING UTIU DES OrliE en en TO cc T.bEST OF OUR KNOWLEDGE THE . . •••• ••• CONTRACTOR MUST FIELD vEPIF y ALL USTI. P .• ,... • . • 46 . .:.• '• I • 'I I I • •I " • ' • 46 COgNONETDRIAAC1ETLOYR ITF aA CCl MIJO LSTICTIFTR 44 44 T ATCNPTIESIOUENSN .I GTHINEE ER TOM R.EI.TI.D,SeL IBRxA R1 I I 3522 LIBERTY DRIVE42 1: . 1:. ' : 4.1•:.7:‘-\.' . l'.14*/ ..........**,. : 42 PEARLAND, TX 77581 A/ i• 11 reconocoominnon. , . , ..:. . • 40'Rua:sow rmpRop.r.. I : . III I • ,I. . • . •, .,./I.V....,...x.,,, , , • • TOM REID LIBRARY : . 38 ADDITION &, NermiXamonortil . RENOVATION 36 " I I. I• ' : If 1"—;:f.'ilsVNIRZ • •I : I - : k,. NM...CRS All SIC< • 34 . , .....v.-,g..'• • . . , L..... ... PLAN A PROFILE- 1 r.,,,,,,,, , . Ir WATER as.ssms,...D : . 32 32 , ,L I . . MICWAIII11.21, . . . . . . . s . . . . ' 30 WAG PROJECT NO. DRAWING NC. 30 . , . • . L. .: ... . .. .. .. 1,11 . .. . • DATE C5.1 • : •. • : 10.10.201S ,, . . , 28 28 0.00 1.00 I I --- KEY�—— KEY NOTES p n—G—i. Srr—1 DENCnnARn S: ECI Technoiog}• _�.-.__. wrazvnu .............. ..._....._ —. __.__ .. _....__..._--_._._....._. -_..—__..__ _ / u..nri.o.'+...xa w Elealrienl, y �.x•na.nau.n�ur.�.n Fleehnn.cul. Y' &I'lumhlnp Gnpincere _PW'Tr:. w o.....1 n Pinnacle Structural Englnear6 Ot.;l • .11:_i:.. ......Hi," t„ —� inn,um,wl.c arun.ua.aeua.nc. atruelwnl Cnalnaarz 11.01 J ,, .,.. •n �.xx" -�� Ward.Get+&AenuciatCN _ F. war y - ,a...MIA f .° ° J da d p I y ,d r "n wm�"ou:::,'w...i.W w.,�o��w.a.oWwv' Tsai Inl.. '� Sr(dw°� -.!'° dtJ . -. : S P .S/"r�r�- e�ea,eI S •aooDv ann6 ,uv`T,. Dzi Fa®urwa.dwxp .. a... ...." °- ✓ ua. .0' r N0. OAtE '+ESCRIPTION1' :r,! - 'O° ° DI 10.30.15 SSUE ECR DD RIC 1.0 I I '' --_ ° _�`` • I n�w ° 02 04.2116 50%CD NEnEa j ju„ 0 01:1.17 ISSUED FOR SIDS,PERMIT A.CCIi51H1.Ci. °d1"'" 04 01.25.1] ISSUE FON BID AND `�" I qa C0n51FUCiICN i"' �d I d 4dJ#,*— 1 c— J _. JI 1. ,g v"" 'J S�' Ds o:a11T AcocnD,.M 4 J "11 v. 8 r c' e r ,,.,�...,... ra A., r �J a Er t x t %aI of 1;3 .d:.l.,.o � C YL Jv IT''' 1 �J J 6 ...... .e. a: -N— t:'J 1 f V V 17 „r.. f II,✓!tit. .° �*✓i ram....., ,� +4 w"y^ 11-i rga — A1n,0y7 m AD O f : , '' Sn 4". ♦ L,Kb f i - 9 0 s ^ T r47f0 fr v SHEET NOTES o a 4 ' .-s ' d'f'° E s'k.;;.,.j Jr 1r..�.�ps I --- d'"ef°P rtecervD. ! Jrl I 11lt E — �", a '°tra°.,.xnd It -1I ° IFGEND: P I'f °j. 4 " I P � ca. ...:1� I ♦ .«sn°. i 15AC i; ® -nl un 5 LIBRARY i a;'° °,e° I® zsfu01 �er r•rur913 �.IL 37 LIBERTY . a,,,_° ; j - Inaau_,,aeaa d,, n a °°-r-J•'° PEARLAND, TX 77581 il j>f id:d' I•.ivy: . { i _ . :."_ ..-. t I I — TOM REID LIBRARY I I I ._ c�' ' f, ADDITION & °�nrmax ` N�Gx. f. -� a4''' o f r�_--$-1 �.. • �% Y1n. REtiUVATIUN I I .n --- — T " d 4`� v1 7� ti� --i"""•r" LIBERII'DxrvE I '';'es 4`j , _ DRAINAGE AREA MAP --i ___ �z�9• 9—C..._ ...__ _��, mom-:, ��4x9S �� _._ d 3 DRAWING NO. ' rrr_ „_.,. f -d — — — Ia — — _ WAG PROJECT NO. AN I DAIS C6x1 10.30.2015 1 I I 1 r I i • .,....) /410 • KEY NOTES 5� R!13.4iirey7 DEIICIMAR%1 e oo o. KCI TechnOlOgv aumr rue:TN,rsv.r neel,Nnlvsl.Elevtrienl, .m Rp' a g,A Pam CO R'Jn2• �> .0 ucr.ean.uLm,:.v.w..uear.,u.e ro,nue &P1Ombing Engineers 'n..,. Plnnacl0 StructurR1 En 1 0 ETENTION POND CROSS w..��vo„x:,..,w,.ao..-,'a—,k m:w,:.nr., E ncere C ...___._.. .__ SECTIONS sc:nrm Ene,neOre 'h3, ,�' a 'ppr''t a ^- 1 Ward,Getz &Associates � �� ,•�•� 4•' we v unn Clan Engineers J��, -� r — a.narx.gDaD , '.. .. ,..\ _oEieN, w° , .w,o ---mow •s —1-- — v J e.nw Ilia._ 4,1 \ Rw;S� EF[I PFAI E i l e ., 'ITV. ° POND CROSS SECTION-A-A ' ��'..� .I I NO. DATE DESCRI?DON _ {, I ".m,m J. K ��"� CI 'V.30.15 155VE rOs DD PE:DNG ii • 03 EA35,13 SSU CD GO 2N j ,3 " .e... I OS D•;1.12 55UEC feR SIDS,EERN T i i ,. r GAND V IFry, �ji' ' ,, C. mmwxas Os D:.15,"2 155UE r0FrNID1 N. B ' Ne,ervrN. 6 rr' m n " •.�EL_w ADDENDUM/1 A •� r: Iy '. ... I S- i, u. 5� °A b,i% - m 1�_'fL1\ xe co 02.011) ADDENDUM Ii ilt PROP. . '0 - -i�J�:i 91 I sl 1 •� 1++ POND CROSS1EEC77ON 9 g DETENTiONFOND E d ... wr • , w'krl 1 p A i fay 3 C .1 G I pAiD,GRSZ tr A550<[aSR3,LLP (ji �.o I C , ,. I ' I'_ PoAm CUT/FDi SECTION 1 a. t `m r 6 3 _L.� ADZ" r Nfe ItlPFPVp9591NGPCE. -gr� r — , NO,nN,oc:TION o_o... kiPT5VPIr3 ,r:'�r-,�y r �'—..—, I, 4" , .,,�sr� n.,<.erv,.m.x SHEET NOTES , ` rrcl:r:-rut�'%zun.Drry I� ji 1 !=',oms x.nl ._. ,o,a o�,r NUN r Eg( ,ux nmeJaerr 5' ` ! ' _FnmwN nE.99n€o: nrr rra.003037 SU. 2+ I. ,I Al a...SRC,. — .aJararuvoVS 3 P' 1 II s .Oc atAX:.,O1, '• id 1 �✓'r' m. I v we.a�,., d 1 :' , awes.a,R.cri e„e<n �.,*� // Ii rx. .sg I !w RfIE�DwwsOrNOlgeoerNeeaw:xo Nv,roscrP 11d]]] ,o _ , err a•as,nu.s"•iJ.rlr. 1etDise ib'cu eu.aro se.,lw •••,"�,`•': ;�', ,x.._._..1_ I— crs 'o�Ti x,S 's RFn.�np,.N:e.,,Too,,,,,,,,, , n �,l TOM P,EID•L[BRAEtT \ >� e_.F,- l"I` �-",.`_a, nu e 3522 LIBERTY DRIVE �+I 14 lid"r' f �.. ` ... PEARLAND, TX 77581 ee,l�n 'a"� ei La1 a L e, ... TOM REID LIBRARY z — RENOVATION ,,,., \ f 3 1 ADDITION & 1 y3' + L..m. LJDENTY DRIVE _._�_. fr ! :'P NOL qr..rgac yy ..^ 5;,. .. N LAD 6 $� �...` ;l .:;4`- $� .�_ ,It� — - �,-�'- - ❑ETENTIO O❑T -nc�.-s � s:.®.1F:. kp..... -a'-Y I .�',�•uca __w � .�..�f. - S u l rylyy... •' ^" ""'";i WAG PROJECT NO. DRAWING NO. IV), DUE CD.1 1D.3o.1D 1s m'I N`I ; [Ming UN Q Dewberry' am..m t:cs.T o recxecourearz Bo 1 o ma Dane ma,r nu An o uzr moms,*saa mama wawa IN k GC 10 P10.101911.no m g s.nes no ma Yoa m �Dan toor.M MGM Me.FM W. KCI Technology MOORm 1.RC lY l®.m[acoal[m TO 644 10,6 Pe MR Dmmc BOUM.MO.%MOE IV OJIOrt ¢ mart Mechanical.Electrical, WO MI VTR I &Plumbing Engineers ¢mo.Bs Pinnacle Structural Engineers Structural Engineer. MUM Ward,Sets&Associates Civil Engineers SITE ADDITION ALTERNATE BID NOTES Nrs 15 LEGEND N.T.S. 05 • NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 01 10.30.15 ISSUE FOR 00 PRICING 02 01.26.16 SOX REVIEW SET U I I I I I I I I U U I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I U OS 01.25.17 ISSUE fOR RID AND I C0N51RUC00N l� 1 02.0l.IT A00ENDUY/I 1IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII-IIIIIIIIIIIIIj —I 0 • MI riM MAW °fTh• = IIII I I I I�° °o Kowa �!• ———— �—I OP 6 �a ¢nBR _ , F • • im AMO,o Maw m IICI COMMIT MO. ° ' IIMP IMIRM MD PO.ID AIM a .;--- Mlili 1 ° O ° PA O /L 1 —I_ % � = d m n mom.• le . "`•• e e^p 1:— �� JIIIII . IM I.P.r RIM NO "�"°�� '�LEran •�;a xeravir¢�8.., ��8� I n I TOM REID LIBRARY •• I' "-^IROMSMI5 YNO , l I I l 3522 LIBERTY DRIVE /a ) ¢ KM S 01, :,'glum, PEARL AND, TX 77581 I p II I— n'E.. • 1_ 1. ,1,164E DEM Or.11011 Ae WWI e<R: t. C-A ) I TOM REID LIBRARY ¢R6 ADDITION & f-,• . , _ IIIII RENOVATION • \ • • m I 1 IIIII RENOVATIONR SITE a I nu_ nWAG PROJECT NO. ,DRAWING NO. . nul MIMI 14171 DATE A.0.02 10.30.2015 OVERALL SITE PLAN ' I/22•a i'-0•101 IA,r7"I a:°I \i ..,...) . .• -s- �SM Dewberry v n''''�'•u WI Technology �I Mechnnic1 Electrlenl, g10 ®m"' �"�� &Plumbing Englneare /"igii:4.. Pinnacle StructuraI En `41) td) 1 r..... I glneera .. \�.. ;;. Structural Engineers � •• ... .. ,Q i ■ ., :. :' � Cetz&Associates 4 8 \ M ...': C3N1 Enelnaere MI d tit r11111.M©NEM©NIELE0111 NO. DATE DESCRIPTION ■ 01 1U10.15 ISSUE POP OD PADDING 02 0126.16 5Ug REVIEW SR 0J 01.25.11 ISSUE PUP PIA MIS ■ CONSTRUCDON 1Q 02.05.11 ADDENDUM•I ENLARGED SIDEWALK PLAN I/6•=Y-D.114 �m z ENLARGED SIDEWALK PLAN vP_=r-D 03 II / 0 i -gym S MOOR T �� a,maa.,a:,ao ..:—gin ,LA.."---kil_ ' / ktij -. —b ,. TOM REID LIBRARY 3522 LIBERTY DRIVE I WA PEARLAND, TX 77581 k • eimo e.n� �'emc mu sm.,a.a `I J TOM REID LIBRARY N ADDITION SC RENOVATION I a o ,�� _ � ° �n ENLARGED SITE .�� § `A PLANS I \ ► WAG PROJECT N0. DRAWING N0. P.wall 14171 DATE A.0.03 10.30.2015 ENLARGED SITE PLAN I/O.=r-A•111 ENLARGED SITE PLAN or a r-D•101 D A A I 14.'1 • i l Dewberry. ECI Technology Mechanical,electrical, &Plumbing Engineer. Pinnacle Structural Engineers Structural Engineer. Ward,Getz&Associates Civil Engineer. N0. DATE DESCRI]tION O1 ID.30.15 t55UE FOR D0 PRICING 0 01 Ot36.16 30%REVICW 3[] O O O OS 0135.17 ADDENDUM 11 AN0 _ _• _ Q1 OlA3.l] ADDENDUM�1 ivnm v mor I om.o wor a1� r.l • n'' o ...._._ .. .-z,]r ,r-., a o asmc o MO. >u as, POW aaa • • i 1 • • ro " o . \_,r, 0S T a 101�"\ 0 t' a i o a �,r iR 17 tas h]"�M^ p000 \.;�°$ 1 • • : . a TOM REID LIBRARY o o- o +*), 1.1 3522 LIBERTY DRIVE j PFARLAND, TX 77581 ii,TZ: Net ,. ..a4 , • ... _ .,.„-- : : : V I.� TOM REID LIBRARY kb. ' \ ADDITION & ds ' b ' ,� RENOVATION A Q a N�a IIIII MIN SUN % III MONSPOOTO / A\ ROOF PLAN 17£10J1 NI, , . '' 'r Al Ill,LICNO '4A)* ' iMAeQ Ill m • W_ DSOCEA PWaPP Sin W`1;ROJECT N0. DRAWING N0. Ll O L/ U O Dp E `mil V ® 10.30.2015 FLOOR PLAN l/D-=i'-D-Pr, "I iioI 3 J ....... . (-44) (") (.41111) WET.MEET WILL 1.1.111-CIIP�„� Dewberry wo¢, KCI J SUPPINGCOON ION WO.SECSONy yly y°�'� Mecha Technology EI 0tricnl, SW.PO NCN-Sliat &Plumbing Engineers fLASION4 �I Pinnacle Structural Engineers i r.i�.�11V. rl,i 1 1t1, °� PLY Structural Engineers �iY:162 hail �LeYi, ri jigniik Y / �44500 Ward, Get.&Associates UV - 1 'I a `. A ow Civil Engines NUN nnS MIDI Pm i=O.so. NU• III .. wLuiweuM TN CIT.10 NOT USED N.Ts.I 25 TYP. PITCH PAN DTL 3..i•-0•120 I = ,D• ///�� NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 0 ® /1\' I pM ® r��ro�P �� / OI 14.26.16 ISSUE FOR DD PRICING A„P 1 02 01.26.16 50%REVIEW SET r OS 01.25.17 ISSUE FOR BID AND fON nrAnn vom ( ' CONSTRUCTION wuPO ww Y P.M H,Mo Q 02.03.17 ADDENOUY/1 �s ( Ir�•� N�Na P a�TOP �.rIA�.P.I�Anu,mw,a,. � C.o� o. ��• - �� ..: ( rms. "�R' D.V. PL now MCA.AT�10 AZT II "'m'.nx Pw AN,nvA..II.�N,PPem l4 — r�,.. ( a+ I _ ' �i' MC MGM.�o N•GM ano W,o�P, �J .........,_t .., .., -,-,-, ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, ,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,",„.,„:„.„, ( ., .s „,,„......„.„.„,,4...,4 6 . , _____ _ DPn i�.�lelPn.DDnsD I ............ ...... ( I..r K _ _- —�— t {1 .._U \__/ 1 . _ _"_____ __ITS Ir‘--::''''' L---.1--- , 's,', . . --1— , -.' ,:,-,,,,,„,,:,,,:,-,,„/,-,,,.,,,„,,r,„,,"„,1',.,-',,I:,,,„:,„I„1::,:,::,.1 u�a �! < ( Ns...IP uc w.vl..r c.c.lalma„Pu ® ( .,P.� U U. \ / \ (( '''' ' /i/ 'NEW ADDITION EXIST)NG BU LDI�' `I T c1 q 0 ( '14, ssE5;.,BRICK ROOF PARAPET DETAIL D•=r-D•118L EXPANSION JOINT COVER ® LOWER POINT ON NEW & EXIST. ROOF s =Y-D 103< ( I DmnP �_nN,� W�ra�O r�A NNDa�.... "' is },.} Y_ Y ii'?�';i� rDE ( rb� , W,�n«w•norm sop �.��rPse..s7tr PI- PrG il..49.1NO OVER PAMPLT MO MIEN < A °�� r� MOO GMT ( aid '{�a w w _ n m N r�<�D `d 3522TOM REID LIBERTY LIBRARY N.��P� \\- rO� E "� 1 TY DRIVE rcgern.GC.P'. r .541,110.1 o0 g Y o< AN,Ra 1I P,A�D & i r PEARLAND, TX 77581 (A. a I� r g�m.om ..DW j \ / \ emLP10W I COMOL MU1 RUIEVADDXS ,5 ..., .m e � 7 { T { 1 TOM REID LIBRARY w U L/ DDITION & TOP Of RENOVATIONmlo—mo - SS 0 I l/ NEW ADDITION , XIISITNG BUILDING EXTERIOR DETAILS arc �.�. N�OIC .- l < 111 , JWAG PROJECT NO. DRAWING NO. J., ! . l DATE A.6.02 r r ' ' r r", 10.30.2015 PLASTER ROOF PARAPET DETAIL D•=r-a•118 EXPANSION JOINT ® HIGH POINT ON NEW & EXIST. ROOF 0•-i•_R•I 0Y °TvrI r11 of • e Dewberry • • KCI Technology Nlechsnlcal,Eleetrleal. &Plumbing Engineers Pinnacle Structural Engineers Structural Engineers • • Ward,Getz&Associates civil Engineers Inrviri ■ - • NO. DATE DESCRIPTION O■l.�� 0 x G ■ 01 ID W.IS 0000 FOR OD PEeNG ■■■nsomii. II■■■■■I1I■_■■■■,I■■■■■■.I./ I y6 f1 Q 02.03.17 ADDE o �...� ei.._. _ .... — — �.g� II��La.6:1J1 LSSUE FOP BID AN MliraC Mi F CONSTRUCTION ADDENDUM/1 I I � _I' I I I E MITI ,�. . ' 114, ), . LIan I I,! I F-3 I I I I r� 12 i WM am.tar.m ta ■ ill. ' , � O : II! _ IL_; a< _ _�'_' _ P_ - _q _-„' Or — I � : �F j 1311, [ Vie; ill nl W �, marii .�.'I`-z O'. 3-3 m. }P3 4:1 9r gg m, II F I :, I�■/i I I I f:z;mn •----, -r,-; —It I. I I I I I - I I I i ' 1,t r ti�a► J r�ru I TOM REID LIBRARY /l /vouh 4 3522 LIBERTY DRIVE I 1 p I I IrNov< ti«ti G _ III ! r� _ - 3 ,1Agc*^:" :..�7�N i =, • PEAR 77581 oJ. I LAND TX ,, rm� IIpI , - .s_.�.. .\ O,M._'A'1 it 46 'vn r o< o<> e` �. n ■ i/r 1 �-,i T �' "< °a"ti< TOM REID LIBRARY �, nfy I }„^ I � ~o y • ...N ADDITION & ,,,.* noti rvr ' RENOVATION O t- ys'. I mr 1 p • ,yJ J ! ■ h vo a I ® :;I � � A 1101:' '� * I •"ti v o U°,>1o` FINISH PLAN �; _ . _ is Q °�V>°ti�rti� ■.■■■i .. I ;rvryvtiJ v v ,,,<>cs-,,,,,,,i1 III 1 F D 0 ix ( �7 WAG PROJECT NO. DRAWING N0. 10.3' A.8.02 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I n .1 DATE10 2015 FINISH PLAN i/g•=r-D•101 Irl lN0 • • • J .N 3 • .7) 71) • 0 Dewberry XCI Technology Mechanical.Electrical, FRGSS SaEouu ROW 30...0 &Plumbing Engineers • . TAG MOM " `AC""ER ' CO. Mama "CM R00P BASS rAn _ ®"` cawrzmwe wnr..sass as A1051,0 ewmus Pinnacle Structural Engineers ACT-I.4311C.NOUNS Emmm0 0ISnxG w-I EEmma __ - Structural Engineers 030,43 mGTNG DEMO G' rt' PL' - 10101 Ward, Cetz&Associates 0-1 RUBBER BASE Bo COVE BASE 103 axrx BROM .'.v/slw, dlw nx c 0 10 wsc MST. _ _ - Civil Engineers w[ 103 103 100 `-, CA" Rm2nu2 r-z o-1 r-1 - PL-z/sr-I PL 1 r-1 GMwT(1500 1) PAT.. 0110 PROLE 00303 11A5/O mr n-Aw 7-e/r-0 B-1 r-1 Eae1wO vmOR: CorBr usE wowTm nwS¢s m 1� NO. DATE DESCRIPTION r-2 WVn(Ms 1) P00Rr 1 mIB cexux0Bu4 lease aRGw - B_, r_I - - 01 I0.30.15 ISSUE FOR 00 PRICING r-3 Om5T OI22» w1OPrT ono 0.m1 00307 FL0130 NR I. uaA r-I/r-A 0-I .-I PL-x/sr-I rt-1 OS 004.25.137 ISSUEREVI UPSET gli MID r-A Wn u,T a (AODO I) PAi° OIM Le. .Hale 51051 xWrt f-e B-I r-I _NEW 02 - - A02.D3.1T ADOENOUgn/1 STOR.r-5 WEFT(.*COO 21 PATOan nuo 1mEA 46420 NOROc r-II B-2 .-R/r_I "P.Q°AiRI°�` PL-z/Ss-I1110. R-1 r-e r2BPET(ACCvs al PAM . 01Ae MLA 3025 GOs CawexR r-n B-2 .-A/v-I _VI - - r-E MKT(Rase Al PnP1T O 01.1/10. 46614 RUSSETT ,aE M0 r 113 1-1I 0-2 r-.M-I `W'F°Jxf°1°I` PL_2/33-I10 PL_I r o w1n CO003 01 TOE mos.. PRGO¢snre Hsu o.TEE STCmr IS r-2 B-1 r_I _ _ TIES 20 ACOUSTICAL - PINT r-I0 SM.mNO¢g sTuvi Is r-2 B-1 r-1 _ _ r-I I PORCELAIN1lE A.cwcw TILE SUPPLY suer MOO. oar¢1012 ,00 03 -3 sTlnir N r-z B-I Ts-, _ _ 01.I, r-x o-1 r-I _ _ AT 2 GRwrt V.. 35 SIGMA siwil2 r-2 B-1 ._1 _ %ILA PL-I PLASTIC 1.alwnrz 2Ouw ne-ea rvRSNm CM122 STwy II r-z e-I r-1 10 wrW te.1 PL-s Russo O.0arz NL0NP.G wn00n GRIMM w1Re LUST/S,O r-e B-1 r-I - - .-1 SONS SURFACE CORM n.1I SMu rAIROY A. r-z 0-1 ._2/v_t tt-1 R 1 tanife — S re TE0 AREA 126 B_I r, r-I PANT IMMO s20R0u rum mass MO WINE e2WE snmr - - i:z:aon 120 r-a 0-1 ._1 _ r-2 PAW.nnm g�aM.N.B. sm. TERRA RONOCO Cw®oR .-a PANT(CM.) alloam rILxaRa seamsNroa of,WE aNBT.a>«r.RBw r-aINS B-I r-I _ _ - — 44 r-. PoRG2.Vry,RE 02000W,RESUPPLY 3e1a3 wmw TM I I BaE Gr-I G r-a B-I ._I _ _ — '14 G, \ '�Pa�..1 4000E SUPPLY SUM� ,M 1Il ME GT-I 131 0_1 .-I TOIATa Fw „! • � COSTING 03330 e W G CONING naW _ MIST.ADIVW11011W 113 wGR wGN Ewa COWING o TOM REID LIBRARY nG WGN gGWn �R sm< «BR Na COSMIC cos. W mC Ft-3 PL_a — 3522 LIBERTY DRIVE .-I Ens GB P BB 1 a D.w WYV 6 .eIG, We B Ts. cam B BGW 33 "�"` a w °�" Damn — PEARLAND, T%77581 Mt?GLUM cesnm COSINC CONING COSTING . r-a a BGR P m a 30000.3000 re1IL1 sMm G Rol emT.�RON nG m x0131110 G WG — - 13031116 COSTING TOM REID LIBRARY BR-I ®m1 YAMS Ens. YAWN 0I5IWG w1a COSMO CAVE . n.SMO 0e730 03330 Daan„G - - — ADDITION & 140 g Gnw DEMO 0731114 O M - RENOVATION • R e15.0 =m2G =300, 0300G _ ROOM FINISH e133.XX NAP E efHG Dam COSTMG E.aGNG - _ SCHEDULE WAG PROJECT NO. DRAWING N0. IAI)1 DATE A.8.03 10.30.2015 FINISH SCHEDULE a=l-D I 01 °a" I cg:GI I r) ""--) Sign-In Sheet . N ' f9,p�9 Pre-Bid r t. -' . Tom Reid Library Addition & Renovation a a` . '' COP Project#F20002 February 2, 2017 °- s:r i a. httpa/pearlandtx.gov/departments/engineering-and-capital-projects/projects Name(Print) Company Phone Number FAX Number �'bZ,i 4 . !mil .� . ,<< ._ 1 MIACSUin -6.A.*Ze4,1 TI E 041,ire'. ?0,1),L>/ vo.' Ca 01.4,4--&c 7t3 -23Z® eve ,etrociYf ..g P efin�. -,,.., s = .0 pq r 'me,t- 'l-t tact PO id � Pf'd. -pTeot,,S-rRi:rciicJ , • ��f-S af7� /90A -re di Ccw5—kke-e®c .0 IAnrr L i 0..„_._ FwA.1- • Ttwtt ILA- ' L. A. . --! Lexa tn.kr..g,el-.,.a.-F+�`t •� r p•cr,,:s•4,...,4'C.-1 eva i cam- c4. ,(o•.^ - # a @ rl.i felt 5 S e4 /vio ( 1. c4-,it�Feo.�y - 6Kit4irot.�M.. ' ALL l _ .iceti., ifcAs • Br t eA \ 1w21Q.Ch0►It i ' _ • g ,°"` o I'I,:cv-uc. -1 ilc..6% • 5i./ K ///EST UIDiTa-s"e-f.J i,',4a.z4•,./,his." c:u,'tn t--` \.5VmNAc,1c.Ai Vxy'aU.v‘A.cl \ck eh SIoC Ic", Jol. vt%?4 Zvi 02-3Av1:e✓1 1:::3Msw .er 2.EA-2:2 9 -G1 1°1 Yo 1- 0-3 83 .0 ()n-t-Q �tv� .. i , •• .-C.- „ i WI 1 ®,aVlSark GOP l (Q (75 , ohncDn& J`cl f ; f j I Admin 1 of 2 4.Revised 7/25/08 Name(Print) Company Phone Number FAX Number Email 9 7.c-C e0g-2-C7---3€1-.5—c cifc-A2-C,T- 0 tc p- v\IC( _ eit te146/1161'41'a:. ' 143 411549000 IVOORigte l' tinke:it" C\e*" MitketeL ' ,, ild C 1113610 k. '. fir. ,i0ei•70133% im.cx"-tattle5 seraftkoe.c.apn„ 1,43,24 47t,ez.yr t s 0 CL-S • 632-4- :MgA- , 0,4;!Plor'Iravo"w ‘oTri,p(aiocis • 1,64 x, vS ""bp,KAl 5 (-) ‘ • _ .., 2,6ici 7,74,4to Z .1 • (-)c3C, 4,, 70z- ;usi 1 ii cipto.'in 1r),,,(.1. .6-split/A, ' '. 6/ -Thl'il,/ ) 7, - ,2_,2,-061Z) 2,9,/-Z,z,2-Oa)V A;41,717 1/6? ;1,----5/-6.'::-.:fi. , (2.0 C0111 ., K CO i to . a- 32/ •12q3a,,;-`) n 40 q- go(c5 dauldowg cx,r, e , c ocp. c-Dr)1 1A6bvt_. 1m 14eLo Cfsiqs7gucri siv 281- 650- 1`)37 A& I- S'71- 6677 i ktocunsryucilot.V1mdi.1.C0111 . fik dorew Fe aro 9 a- ,--d_8-(-G5-•?--id-76' 4-feairii bc/c,. a,4-4 1 54_1 e- Zi 61c-14-1-Lot,-e-- C.,Q•e e iolci,5""D peaty la,,Lci4-4... 9 e.1 v V; LiC) Y -...,c try.tin- 06,4. -14Ar,kv51,4-e,, g3 2 -)47-4.,• 4.71/3 '7 r3 Siiniii".0,OAS11 ivioturtraQ l'it s 6-1--,... V 411R:0‘16 -141 IKLZ eo-ItS71,Zt)LTI'611•- Xi.'tcok - I q 31 Di k- 311- 17-1 tKi_o C.,OSS-(RuCct 6 e 6111A-Q-05V *To be included in consultant's meeting minutes *Consultant can add incorporate their information to bring to meetings Admin 2 of 2 4.Revised 7/25/08 -3 '-----) CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Section 00900 ADDENDUM NO.2 Date: February 10, 2017 PROJECT: Tom Reid Library Addition&Renovation BID NO.: 1117-08 BID DATE: February 16,2017; 2:00 pm Revised:February 21,2017;2:00 pm(visit City of Pearland's website to confirm) FROM: Dustin O'Brien, AIA Debbi Mulcahy Dewberry Architects 5051 Westheimer, Suite 200 Houston,Texas 77056 To: Prospective Bidders and Interested Parties This addendum forms a part of the bidding documents and will be incorporated into the Contract Documents, as applicable. Insofar as the original Contract Documents, Specifications, and Drawings are inconsistent, this Addendum shall govern. Please acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Proposal form, Section 00300 submitted to the City of Pearland. FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ON THE BID PROPOSAL FORM MAY BE CAUSE FOR DISQUALIFICATION. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: 1. Section 00100 Invitation to Propose—Revision to electronic proposal due date. 2. Section 00300 Proposal Form Part B-Revisions to Table 00300-1 `�..t►1111i17i!! SPECIFICATIONS: .�'`;o ED iloogi<i, ram.�54jra'a= 'TVA 1. 01230.3.1.A.8-Addition of Alternate#8 VA 2. 01 21 00 Allowances has been added. "�'Ficri ` • .n � ••••.� ag ..'• cos CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS: em ' '° .I)e is ip lone . ,� e �-� s . (4111 . I ARCHITECTURAL A.0.04 Provided bollard detail. Revised CMU wall detail. 2-22-12 00900-1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM A.1.00 Change to existing dumpster note, finish note in Women 101, and finish note in Men 134 A.1.20 Revised dimension on toilet partition detail. A.6.00 Revised details: sill detail at brick façade, horizontal mullion at brick façade, head detail at brick façade,jamb detail at brick façade, and plaster to brick detail. A.6.01 Change to details' notes: plaster base detail, expansion joint at plaster, I and door head at plaster wall. Revised details: sill detail at plaster façade, horizontal mullion at plaster façade, head detail at plaster façade, plaster control joint detail,and jamb detail at plaster facade. A.6.03 Revised column details A.6.04 Revised column details A.7.03 Revised interior elevations A.7.11 I Added millwork sections. A.8.01 I Revised door schedule and opening types. Added head detail. A.8.03 I Revised finish schedule. MECHANICAL M.3.01 (Change to Mechanical Schedule M.4.00 I Change to Acceptable Vendors note. M.4.01 Change to Mechanical Specifications GENERAL: • Attachments - Bidders comments &answers - Contract Documents-Section 00100- Invitation To Propose - Contract Documents-Section 00300- Proposal Form Part B - Specifications- Section 012100-Allowances - Specifications- Section 01230-Alternates .•131i1i� iflopjek END OF ADDENDUM NO. Z Cret 44) � rrt 2 ;20fI 2-22-12 00900-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO PROPOSE Section 00100 INVITATION TO PROPOSE CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Competitive Sealed Proposal I j r Electronic Sealed Competitive Proposals will be accepted for the following project, in the City's E-bid System. Electronic proposals shall be submitted through the City's web site at: hops://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. All interested Offerors are required to register as a "supplier" on the City's E-bid System at the above web address and clicking on "Supplier Registration". Registration provides automatic access to any changes to the Plans, Specifications or Submission time and date. However, submission of an E-bid requires completing a short registration questionnaire found on this web site. When prompted to add or remove commodity codes registrants must add the codes listed below: * Building Construction Services,New(Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, General (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, Heavy(Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, Trade (New Construction) For more information regarding registration instructions, see INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS, r Section 00200, included in the project bid documents viewable on the web site. Questions regarding electronic proposals should be directed to City Purchasing Officer at ebids@pearlandtx.gov. All Proposals submitted electronically will remain confidential until the opening date and time when they will be opened and read into the public record. Proposals shall be submitted on the form provided in the E-bid System and submitted electronically through this system to the City Purchasing Officer, City of Pearland, City Hall located at 3519 iat3�T >n �, pertziEtr.. a.as 77581. Electronic Proposals will be accepted until 2:00 p.m., Tuesda Februa 21 2017. All Proposals shall reference the following project information in s MIP1er a i as oWW provided electronic format. All properly submitted proposals shall be publicly "opened" and read aloud into the public record following the closing of the acceptance period for the construction of: Tom Reid Library Addition & Renovation City of Pearland, Texas COP PN: F20002 BID NO.: 1117-08 A Mandatory Pre-Proposal Conference will be held at the Tom Reid Library at 3522 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581 at 2:00 p.m. on February 2, 2017. The project will entail the addition and renovation of the existing Tom Reid Library in Pearland, Texas. As a part of the scope of work,we will add approximately 8,560 square foot to the building, expanding the northwest side of the building. In this addition, we will enlarge the stack areas in 02-2015 00100- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO PROPOSE the children's, adult and teen areas, increase the lounge seating,provide new computer desk areas, provide new check out kiosk, new help desks and additional restroom facilities. New interior finishes and lighting will be added to the library to include: wall and floor finishes, new LED lighting throughout the space and parking lot, new ceiling tile and extending new ceiling grid to match existing. A new HVAC system will be supplied as a part of this project. Upon award of a contract, the successful Offeror will be required to utilize the City's web based project management software, "Pro-Trak" for the administration of the construction project, including but not limited to, all transmittals and material submittals,RFI's,RFC's, Change Orders, Applications for Payment and all project communications with the City, its Construction Manager and Engineer. This system has certain hardware, internet access and operation requirements that form the basis for all project communications, documentation and records for the project. For more information, see INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS, Section 00200. Electronic Proposal Documents: including Contract Documents, Plans and Technical Specifications are available for download on the City's Website at: https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx upon registration. The documents are NOT viewable without registration. These same documents are also available at the following locations. City of Pearland, City Hall (281) 652-1600 Purchasing Department 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland, Texas 77581 Amtek Plan Room (713) 956-0100 4001 Sherwood Houston, TX 77092 The Associated General Contractors of America, Inc. (713) 334-7100 2400 Augusta, Suite 350 Houston, TX 77057 Virtual Builders Exchange (832) 613-0201 7035 W. Tidwell Building J, Suite 112 Houston, TX 77092 McGrawHill Construction—Dodge Reports 1-800-393-6343 Civcast https://www.civcastusa.com No plan fees or deposits are required for plans and proposal documents obtained through the City's E-bid System. OFFERORS MUST REGISTER AS A SUPPLIER ON THE CITY'S E- BID SYSTEM IN ORDER TO SUBMIT A PROPOSAL EVEN IF PROPOSAL DOCUMENTS ARE OBTAINED VIA ONE OF THE PLAN HOUSES. Offerors accept sole responsibility for downloading all of the required documents, plans, specifications proposal forms and addenda required for submitting a proposal. 02-2015 00100-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO PROPOSE Each proposal must be accompanied by a Proposed Schedule and Contractors Qualification Statement. No proposal may be withdrawn or terminated for a period of sixty (90) days subsequent to the proposal opening date without the consent of the City of Pearland. Unless otherwise expressly provided herein, all references to "day(s)" shall mean calendar day(s). Bid Security and Bonds: Bid Security in the form of Cashier's Check, Certified Check, or Bid Bond payable to the City of Pearland in the amount of 5% of the total base proposal price must accompany each proposal. Bidders submitting proposals electronically through the E-bid System shall scan and up-load a copy of the sealed Bid Bond as an attachment to their proposal. Original documents for Bid Security shall be requested by the City from the lowest two offerors and delivered to the City's Purchasing Officer within 48 business hours of the Proposal Opening. Bid Security shall be delivered to: Office of City Purchasing, Finance Department, 2'd Floor City Hall, 3519 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581. Performance and Payment Bonds: The successful Offeror must furnish Performance and Payment Bonds as required by Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code or other applicable law,as amended,upon the form included in the Contract Documents, in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the final contract price, such bonds to be executed by a corporate surety duly authorized to do business in the State of Texas, and named in the current list of"Treasury Department Circular No. 570", naming the City of Pearland, Texas as Obligee. Additionally, the (", successful Offeror shall be required to provide a one year Maintenance Bond for the improvements installed as part of this work, as provided in the Special Conditions of Agreement. Equal Opportunity: All responsible Offerors having submitted complete proposals will receive consideration for award of contract without regard to race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. Selection Criteria: The Contract is to be awarded based on provision of"Best Value" to the Owner. Within 30 days after receiving the Proposals, the Owner will consider and rank each proposal and select the Proposal that offers the best value to the Owner using the following criteria: 1) Price: The quoted price or cost methodology, alternatives proposed 52% and markup for changes Schedule: The contractor's ability or commitment to deliver or sequence 18% 2) delivery by a specific date(s). Coordination to work around uninterrupted facility operations. 3) Reputation: The contractor's reputation and past relationship with the 7% City. 4) Experience: Demonstrated ability to meet schedules on similar projects 6% 5) Personnel: Experience and qualifications of key project personnel 5% 6) Approach: Proposed approach to performing the work 5% 02-2015 00100-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO PROPOSE 7) Subcontractor: Qualifications and Work History of proposed 4% subcontractors with General Contractor 8) Safety: Quality Assurance Program and Safety Record 3% Upon selection of a primary Offeror, Owner will attempt to negotiate a contract with the most qualified Offeror. The Owner may discuss with the selected Offeror options for a scope or time modification and any price change associated with the modification. If the Owner is unable to negotiate a contract with the selected Offeror, the Owner may end negotiations with that Offeror and proceed to the next Offeror in the order of the selection ranking until a contract is reached or all proposals are rejected. The Owner may make such investigations as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the Offeror to perform the work,and the Offeror shall furnish the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any proposal if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, such Offeror fails to satisfy the Owner that such Offeror is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the work contemplated therein. Conditional proposals will not be accepted. The City of Pearland reserves the right to award a contract based on its sole assessment and ranking of the above factors in its own best interests or reject any or all proposals. A proposal that has been "opened" may not be changed for the purposes of correcting an error in the proposed price. State Sales Tax: The Owner qualifies for exemption from State and Local Sales Tax pursuant to Section 151.311 of the Texas Tax Code for material incorporated into the project. Nondiscrimination: The City, in accordance with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, 78 Stat. 252, 42 U.S.C. 2000d to 2000d-4 and Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Department of Transportation, Subtitle A, Office of the Secretary, Part 21, Nondiscrimination in Federally- Assisted programs of the Department of Transportation issued pursuant to such Act, hereby notifies all bidders that it will affirmatively insure that in any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority business enterprises will be afforded full opportunity to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, or national origin in consideration for an award. Young Lorfing, TRMC City Secretary, City of Pearland First Publication date January 25, 2017 Second Publication date February 1, 2017 02-2015 00100-4 of 4 (-) (7) .41 CITY OF PEARLAND PROPOSAL PROPOSAL FORM PART B TABLE 00300-1 PROPOSAL FORM PART B Qua Spec ntity UOM Description Reference Unit Price Total Amount PKHD 1 Base Bid 1 Base Bid Mobilization and Demobilization: Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals required for the Contractor to mobilize and demobilize. Shall include all costs for Contractor's insurances and bonds, PKLN 1 1 Base Bid 1 LS construction/building and stormwater permits 01505 and fees,job trailers and site administration expenses and utilities.This item shall not exceed more than three(3)percent of the Total Bid amount of this contract. Demolition: Furnish all labor,materials,equipment,and incidentals required for major demolition activities to the extent shown on the drawings, PKLN 1 2 Base Bid 1 LS including all demolition activities associated 024119 with the existing facilities.The demolition shall be performed so as to not disrupt operation of the existing facilities.This item shall not include demolition activities associated ' ec. is process areas listed in Bid Item 4 t ou h 1. Renovation Summary of work: Furnish and install all labor,materials, equipment and incidentals required for renovations to the buildings and their systems as Complete PKLN 1 3 Base Bid 1 LS shown on the construction documents,including Contract but not limited to,replacement and new Documents construction for mechanical,electrical, plumbing,building and structural. PKHD 2 Alternate 2 Alternate Work Items Work Items PKLN 2 4 Alternate 1 LS Additive Alternate#1: Section Work Items General Contractor to remove Endicott Pavers in 01230 ;c< 2 Offeror's Initials: 00300-Part B- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND PROPOSAL Qua Spec ntity UOM Description Reference Unit Price Total Amount Lobby 105 and the entries to the restroom and apply a self-leveling float to floor and prep for new floor finishes. Install new scheduled flooring over prepared floor area. Endicott Pavers in Vestibule 100 to remain. Additive Alternate#2: General Contractor to leave existing Endicott PKLN 2 5 Alternate 1 LS Pavers in the Lobby 105 and apply a self- Section Work Items leveling float atop of the Endicott Pavers in prep 01230 for new flooring finishes. New scheduled floor finishes to be installed over self-leveling float. -< Additive Alternate#3: .( General Contractor to remove existing carpet Alternate and base in Conference/Multi-Purpose Room n ` PKLN 2 6 Work Items 1 LS 107 and prep for new scheduled floor finishes. Section 01230 New scheduled floor finish and base to be installed. New scheduled paint on all walls in this room. Additive Alternate#4: Provide 1-1/2"Aluminum frame with'/"-thick PKLN 2 7 Alternate 1 LS tempered glass at the halfwall enclosures for Section '< Work Items bookcases in Area 109,floor to ceiling. Support 01230 - as required. Refer to 21/A.1.21,22/A.1.21, 1: . .2 : :: 4. .01 br oc.Yio ` Additive Alternate#5: Pressure wash,sand,prime and repair as Alternate Section PKLN 2 8 Work Items 1 LS required to bring"like new"appearance to the / 01230 cross members at the metal canopy above entry. / .1 Paint scheduled color. (iiett1`Ve t;itefllidgI`: PKLN 2 9 Alternate 1 LS Remove existing light poles and light fixtures in Section Work Items the parking lot. Replace with new light poles 01230 4 and fixtures to match. Additive Alternate#7: Dwgs PKLN 2 10 Alternate 1 LS Provide new 130 ton air-cooled chiller in lieu of M.3.01, Work Items specified split DX equipment and packaged .4.00,& RTUs. Refer to MEP specifications for details. M.4.01 2 Offeror's Initials: 00300-Part B-2 of 4 7") (7) CITY OF PEARLAND PROPOSAL Qua Spec ntity UOM Description Reference Unit Price Total Amount _ Additive Alternate#8: PKLN 2 11 Alternate 1 LS Demolish all ceiling tile and grid in library stack Section Work Items area.Replace with all new ceiling tile and grid. 01230 Refer to section 01230.3.1.A.8 PKHD 3 Cash 3 Cash Allowances Allowances Cash Allowance:Provide an allowance of Cash Section PKLN 3 12 Allowances 1 LS ($150,000)for additional work 012100 approved/requested by owner. Exterior Signage Allowance:Provide an allowance of($10,000)for the replacement of the existing exterior signage"TOM REID PKLN 3 13 Cash 1 LS LIBRARY"located on the right side of the Section Allowances 012100 entrance.Match font type,style,&size,provide in aluminum finish,pin mounted to exterior brick. Chiller MEP Fee:Add an allowance of ($20,000)for design fees for the chiller option. PKLN 3 14 Cash 1 LS Should this Alternate Option be selected,the Section Allowances awarded General Contractor will contract 012100 directly with their engineer of choice to design and implement. 2 Offeror's Initials: 00300-Part B-3 of 4 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 11111 SECTION 01230 -ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement. 2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates. C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Project Manual Specification Sections contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. ALTERNATES 01230 - 1 TOM REED LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 '`� PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternates: 1. Additive Alternate Bid #1: Remove Endicott pavers in Lobby 105 and all the entries to the rest rooms and apply a self- leveling float (refer to Section Alteration Project Proce- dures) to floor in prep for new scheduled flooring over prepared floor area. Endicott pav- ers in Vestibule 100 to remain. 2. Additive Alternate Bid #2: Retain existing Endicott pavers in Lobby 105 and apply a self- leveling float (refer to Section Alteration Project Procedures) atop of the pavers in prep for new floor finishes to be installed over self-leveling float. 3. Additive Alternate Bid #3: Remove carpet and base in the Conference/Multi-Purpose Room 107 and prep for new floor. Provide new scheduled floor finish and base and new scheduled paint on all walls in this room. 4. Additive Alternate Bid #4: Provide floor to ceiling 1-'/2" prefabricated interior aluminum frame with '/z" thick clear tempered glass located on backside of half height books shelf 5. Additive Alternative Bid 5: Pressure wash, sand, prime and rep it s r q ire t bring to "like new" appearance to the cross members at the metal canopy above entry. Paint scheduled color. • iL e`2 #6:--nrdl " t '4PUhg-16. 2 Provide new light poles and fixtures that match those used at the City Hall: Lithonia Lighting `D' series, size 3 LED flood luminaire on 25'#SSS square straight steel pole, to meet building criteria of 110 mph. Add new wiring as required for new fixtures. 7. Additive Alternate Bid #7: Provide new 130 ton air-cooled chiller in lieu of specified split DX equi.ment and sackased RTU's. Refer to Attachment Exhibit A and the Drawings. 8. 2Additive Alternate Bid #8: Demolish existing ceiling tile and grid in the library stack area. Provide new Armstrong 5/16" exposed ceiling grid and 24"x 24" Cortega acoustical ceiling tile. 2 END OF SECTION 01230 2Addendum #2 02.10.2016 ALTERNATES 01230-2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 EXHIBIT A TO SECTION 01230: ISO 9001:2008 CERTIFIED d ENGINEERS • PLANNERS • SCIENTISTS • CONSTRUCTION M A N A G E R S KI801 Travis Stem.Suire 2000• I iouston,TX 77002 • Mice 713-237-9800• Fax 71.3-237-9801. Debbi Mulcahy, RID,NCIDQ, RAS Dewberry I Wilson 5051 Westheimer Rd, Suite 200 Houston,TX 77056 dmulcahy(idewberiy.com RE: Tom Reid Library Chiller Add Alternate Provide new 130 ton air-cooled chiller in lieu of specified split DX equipment and packaged RTUs. Air cooled chiller shall be Carrier 3ORBF130 6 2 with dual-7.5 hp integral pumps equipped with VFD, or equal. Chiller shall be mounted on a new concrete equipment pad in existing exterior equipment yard. New chiller shall be provided with factory mounted DDC controls and shall comply with City of Pearland points lists and controls sequence of operation(as installed by Climatech). Indoor DX air handling units shall be removed from the scope and new chilled water AHUs with electric heat shall be provided. Chilled water AHUs shall be provided with three-way control valves. Roof mounted packaged DX 100% outside air equipment shall be removed from the scope and new chilled water 100% OA RTUs with direct gas fired heat shall be provided. Chilled water piping on the roof shall be minimized.New AHUs and RTUs shall be provided with factory mounted DDC controls and shall comply with City of Pearland points lists and controls sequence of operation(as installed by Climatech). New 6"chilled water piping shall be provided between new air-cooled chillers, existing east mechanical room, and new west mechanical room. Outdoor piping shall be provided with cellular glass insulation manufactured in accordance with ASTM C552-03 (Foamglas or equal)installed per manufacturer rec- ommendations. Indoor piping shall be provided with Cellular Phenolic Insulation(Koolphen or equal). Piping shall be provided with aluminum jacketing in accordance with ASTM B209. Acceptable chiller manufacturers are: Carrier Corporation,The Trane Company, JCU York, and Daikin. Acceptable air handling unit manufacturers are: Carrier Corporation,The Trane Company, JCl/York, and Daikin. Acceptable 100% OA unit manufactures are: Aaon, Carrier Corporation,The Trane Company, JCU York, and Daikin. ALTERNATES 01230 -3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 SECTION 01 21 00 ALLOWANCES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances. B. Types of allowances include contingency allowances for unforeseen conditions. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance. B. Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor time and cost for installation of allowance items that include installation as part of the allowance. C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to coordinate installation. 1.5 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES A. Use the contingency allowance only as directed by Architect for Owner's purposes and only by Change Orders that indicate amounts to be charged to the allowance. B. Contractor's overhead, profit, and related costs for products and equipment ordered by Owner under the contingency allowance are included in the allowance and are not part of the Contract Sum. These costs include delivery, installation, insurance, equipment rental, and similar costs. C. Change Orders authorizing use of funds from the contingency allowance will include Contractor's related costs and reasonable overhead and profit margins. D. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the contingency allowance to Owner by Change Order. 1.6 ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, prepare a Change Order proposal based on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final ALLOWANCES 012100 - 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 measurement of work-in-place where applicable. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses,tolerances, mixing wastes,normal product imperfections,and similar margins. 1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance. 2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead costs and other margins claimed. 3. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent quantity survey, measure, or count. B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation, overhead,and profit. 1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents. 2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower- priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work. 3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance No. 1 — Cash Allowance: Include the sum of one hundred and fifty thousand and no/100 dollars ($150,000.00)for additional work approved/requested by owner. B. Allowance No. 2 — Exterior Signage Allowance: Include the sum of ten thousand and no/100 dollars($10,000.00)for the replacement of the existing exterior signage "TOM REID LIBRARY" located on the right side of the entrance. Match font type, style, and size, provide in aluminum finish, pin mounted to exterior brick. C. Allowance No. 3 — Chiller MEP Fee: Include the sum of twenty thousand and no/100 dollars ($20,000.00)for design fees for the chiller option. Should this Alternate Option be selected, the awarded General Contractor will contract directly with their engineer of choice to design and implement. END OF SECTION ALLOWANCES 012100-2 1 . 7111 Dewberry- Old Technology ' Mechanical.Electrical, &Plumbing Engineeru Pinnacle Structural Engineers . l us ( structural Englneere YYY 7'rt.'''. — - cw mra xW a Ward,Getz&Associates Civil Engineers N NO. DATE DESCRIPTION • 01 10.30.15 ISSUE FOR OD PRICING t wsa:rtr 03 0A26.16 SOg REVIEW SEi ir 03 D1.25.12 ISSUE FOR OID T smcluRn ` ADDENDUM/2 ND C NOT USED N.Ts 24 NOT USED • N.T.D.I 14 '11 t t x.I •y`,:r.... 1. qua y'%' NOT USED N.Ts.108 CMU WALL TYP 1 0-=r-D�03 • w v l s r ,x __ _ ;y'f3,: tt "r".js x35�: ,, am ..a,: Ida° '," �1 i":4;;i10• ,�I.M 3'2'': —1-1 t° .-p to 1. `°° =o'mn r 1 e 1 1 �D�N as MOO DO § SC I I I I I I I — 0y TMT . ,DUMPSTER ENCLOSURE SWING GATE ELEVATION 0'=r-o•112 E — — O 0 �iy1� I�j '? — Q — — -"a a.ID a l . § — _/—friir tO... TOM REID LIBRARY CMNM 3522 LIBERTY DRIVE WK Pn1 11 — I 2 — PEARIAND, TX 77581 �m rW a ( a" I•_�I•I•_I_M��_■ = O — v n / ■ _- , oa I ci • TOM REID LIBRARY ��M��M� Naomi e -- vrw sox ��==�M�■ —� �— a ADDITION & AMaa� < ■ I•Mv11111111M RENOVATION _ONI ____■ ____��■ SITE DETAILS — I♦M�=�� ■ ■_--�� DUMPSTER a ` ��=��M■ � csng�a,<a.n ,v0.01 ,„�,a•N, ENCLOSURE < \ WAG PROJECT NO. DRAWING NO. I evx RI. 11171 A.0.04 DATE </� - 10.30.2015 BOLLARD DETAIL I V3=,•-cr 121 DUMPSTER ENCLOSURE ELEVATION, TYP. 1/2•=r-D•111 ENLARGED DUMPSTER ENCLOSURE PLAN I/z•=r-0•101 DOSS I :::°I ... 0 Z°l °r_ �I Dewberry. MUM rA,u..xml vmw _ 1..11 NM .0w 054..ePiav`M.N 11541.'o"" • — A I © ECI Technology McI Technology Elmtrio.l. h Plumbinehanth 1, Engineers ME 01.0 ��,� ro,.r 05D'M mrnT vao;� �I / \ Pinnacle Structural Engineers P1011G1O ��ertw Pinnacle ucturalEnginee E sl1, 1H91 v "A.c v vu. .® I - 00 no.OR FalucE ^ti Ward,Cetz&Associates L civu n..ineerA " m" ..ws ° _� �RM.PII1111.0_R ME �w I l l l l l l l l l l l l l I MLR.EARRI .IC K, w N�R o T.a.. �� .1. N.. ..w.Rm n.,o.A a WPM.OMPAIE . fM VP1.,WW.PROR TO ND4Dw. ■III ' '`" �...e.., GENERAL DEMOLITION NOTES N.*s'1 25 I ro.D.. NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 11 01 04.25OR ONlfiI1" .03 01§ su.,0 osArt sb vu -- nws ISSUE CONSTRUCTION r L// ———— —_—— — —— —--——— _� rw¢ws,°pa,. Q 01.10.17 ADDENDUM/2 MOM anew ox.w,. III ,ro. I III I -- III Dw. .m. 111 :1:.�{II FFF .•5 �"wDD.w--..N. m�r� _�I I _ It] I { I( I III I ` a n I III BE I_ I I I. �.��Naw.TO BE �I III main, ,7 I_ • o SMI § III 1 , I L a{, L III .�wl .�w.'// trr-Tago=grcusrwo asau COMM TO Ii II,I . vamtn,.a..Tç/4 III '�'. WM.10 ..'_fi,;,,,1 • _d E. mcro..10SE Ii I I .n .�.. I ro��. D „L,•,, 1.4020, . �.. am.sm..,,orwX,..e.., 11I I I u1,` 1,.. —__ NNW 560.5. .. I" u�,.RD. i 1111111�� f�`• TOM REID LIBRARY —— 1 ,.,M.,.0 p„n I III - 10/4k PA I I IIII�I�1#*.�4j�� T.c.c © 3522 LIBER Y DRIVE t ••11. .10•4,Ik•. �. DWI PEARLAND TX 77581 N. pul— �'1*1 11r 01tumor Nil ,i•_s,,i s-a , n . �1114, '� -- ■,11111111111111 TOM REID LIBRARY DX i� j i ADDITION Sc ® CPS. EC.0100VO.,,DRa...N..D .�,Dn J �� 4�: .�. RENOVATION o Mir . 0.., — sib it . I DEMOLITION FLOOR C'J I — — I � !II ill .I PLAN DV m .nwx�e.a ro _o �I L �w 8. 1 1 I —L V�8 WAG PROJECT NO. DRAWING NO. 14171 ro�0�• DATE A.1.00 mn 55-s m.R .rt..EON rHE Dw2 \\`\\ 10.30.2015 - LEGEND N.T.5.I26 DEMOLITION FLOOR PLAN • ........_....... 3 • Y. a Wmrr>a� PRODUCT/Win NO. m R x YN AMITS - R a II Dewberry. .Ron.om,m mennox r °rw�a/ scum sm - - KCI Technology -- — : ::neer. al, n ears - u-e wet l me10/I C,wm"we �R� u 1P'°''°ora ur. — Word,Cetz&Aae cietee Civil Engineers 0 TOW n°a,saa TAXER. 0.1.4•"r/n",wvSYL 's"sOXiMS 0...0 v tY,x.R n'1°l pw NM. ALCM NO g Arkkt _my wt.rb O.1®,mI EMI g�"�"�" Al u¢rvi m.ieo-us t: �' e/ hil TLT PART. DETAIL e•=1•-D•115 ACCESSORY SCHEDULE I/O•=e-n'105 • t — — 0 NO. DATE DESCRIPTION " • '•�' •'op — • -- - _P�1 I 01 10.10.15 ISSUE FOR DO PRICING Pt r eL_W_J 02 p1.26.16 50%REVIEW SE( '^.,N S¢_ Q ' OS 01.25.11 CONSiR ltrI A"D i1 L —ir Q 02.10.17 ADDCNDUY/2 /00Proa • m�a �1.4.. mm�N 1I — +�D,/Asa r\�, -,,� Ia-e\ '`�•I, E----r- - - � 0 \ —11:17:77,gui. i• ul i 1 bq I 17 4I \J ,a .., .0 EXISTING MENDS RESTROOM I/2•=r-p•1 18 I L ,e —G s 0 t .4 u 1 KO T Y-Y 1_,i�' (.�• Imo_ f.WEovy Al,• LLJ '-m,s nr wn au -- \,su dcZ•t cvP :i wmmw .. M1� m wwo --- m,om ,osa. 15p 2UJvZ0C1 . . ��y I r,I w m I M'iti`� qiN .._... .. ;��k te . —OT oTOM REID LIBRARY °mTe maW \:•`r-1" 3522 LIBERTY DRIVE I e of PEARLAND, TX 77581 C ..off :°m. ^ E we)anmaYY . I Y �¢ e� / TOM REID LIBRARY r 1 ADDITION 8c RENOVATION / /� / III _ --o • e I V „ I ENLARGED FLOOR ro tIt1itI!LAL: e o §`/ m%mm PLAN 013eq awu m.umk mmR m ME — I I)— Er....._ I„....:- rt. ' — — �� ' ' \ WAG PROJECT N0. DRAWING N0. E J Pxamrsl DATE A.1.20 1w ID.30.2015 . EXISTING WOMEN'S RESTROOM 1/2•=1'-p•1 16 CHILDREN'S TOILET ROOM 1/2•=1'-cal 01 ","I `a°I Y l+R awoTX.. $ \ : ol m De�wrberry. I; _ 11 lg..' 1,..A.t. KCI Technology 1,101! NI. \ V°.NM MOO Mechanical,Electrical, �' 0 w \:;5 I.ro .&Plumbing Evglneara90.4 11/11301COSS WI SD ' MOS Di 01,11111. t C r Pinnacle Structural Engineers 110 van r 1.MEN r ' \`\ Structural Engineers DM 4-1 e4aw MG MO s6uµr Ward,Getz&Associates WWI NM. Civil Engineers MIX DERR B4.Mw LA �°a[R PJwG.0 op.say NOT USED N.rs.l 25 NOT USED x.rs.l 20 PLASTER TO BRICK DETAIL �n a� 09 JAMB DETAIL AT BRICK FACADE s•=1'-0' 05 NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 01 . .1 ISSUE FOR 00 PRICINGNay 10 V uum eu IU a vgi. 03 04 0l36.16 SOY REVIEW SET r i� a � OS 01.35.1] ISSUE FOR MO MO e CONSTRUCTION D a= v' • stuuesm II. ,5tos 03.IO.i) AODENOU412 =av a=,oa _— unw ANT MGMn..wsc `�l III' • Ma GO...ETAL Taw IN 5 10 WA. NOT USED x.rs.l24 NOT USED Nall 19 EXPANSION JOINT ® BRICK s'=1•-0 09 HEAD DETAIL AT BRICK FACADE COOK.101.OM AM..BRICR NON MONO= R aa—� �anR ePaa,.N 4a. m°R I 1/ - — PrOfr linr1Orit/71.' ::1710.11.4110 CUSS DI ate.PANT TR.. . - .; °. .10 W NOT USED N.r.6.123 NOT USED x.r l 18 NEW DOOR HEAD @ EXIST. WALL s'=l'-0•l 08 HORIZ. MULLION AT BRICK FACADE s•=1•-0•103 ~r`�=mot • I I -1- BY RN4mw,a a>. I �i;1-,�;1.,1 ..°..6�DW4 a nay , aY Rm N4 TO REID LIBRARY r CMBOASO„ti:°r 3522 LIBERTY DRIVE Now Nam...,a :i MO Mao PEARLAND, TX 77581 NEW ear 6 n � .:..:. P.N.ICOWA B000. .. • NOT USED N.TS.l 22 NOT USED N.r.s.I 17 NEW DOOR SILL ® EXIST. WALL 3'=r-0•107 SILL DETAIL AT BRICK FACADE s'=r-D'0 TOM REID LIBRARY M00 002 TROTT.aa ® ADDITION & .e,m MOOWS M.SS.n tp .;,.r wail r1. RENOVATION �P. o _ M1 � API ER D. 1111 111111111111 �f1 EXTERIOR DETAILS aw 4 0144 !id �•� -.4 ft, — snore IVSOD,.EEO Or 1.1 IIIIII1 �m MIL / I - 141 PROJCLT N0. DRAWING NO.. ▪ Amx • xn snNco �� 1l111 MOW MN NOM• vYB g. DATE A.6.00 MINN ......... 1 10.30.2015 NOT USED N.T.H 121 NEW DOOR JAMB 10 EXIST. WALL s•=1•-o•116 NEW DOOR JAMB ® EXIST. WALL s•=1'-D•106 BRICK BASE DETAIL s'=l'-0'101 a 02I °=:° 3 . .v,,-.) • j rtP�6:71).e f Dewberry . TIMMIMS mum, fiut OM TO nuns ECI Technology Mechanical,Electrical, &Plumbing Engineers N g. • Pinnacle Structural Engineers Mo.OW 10 IT MOM.MOS "a Structural Engineers L'slirillairi,', Ward,Cele&Associates SM..10.110.4. Civil Engineers 'meriresiois 2 NOT USED N.3.3.125 NOT USED N.r.R.J 20 NOT USED N.T.s.l 09 JAMB DETAIL AT PLASTER FACADE 3•=1'-0 ... TONO. DATE DESCRIPTION �Nm r SCLORPONE ® 01 10.ralt.r30.15 ISSUE FOR OD PRICING SttmoRO10 O `r NW •rsmV 02 01.26.16 50%REVIEW SET am N LIMN. r ' 01.25." SSUE FOR BID/MO p/1eau,5s """00 ON CONSTRUCTION r MP. 0R e• MM. 3Q 02.10.11 ADDENDUM 12 JOIVIS IN .,a aursi�r0o0®0,,,,,/rmrROuss ""aKMIK. "Ir 'ua RUM, i' /� RWIN MU.14101 R.PNR � ` �a� „n�R� • a• r-i- I_ II NOT USED N.3.3.124 NOT USED N.T.s.l 19 DOOR HEAD ® PLASTER WALL a•=1•-0•109 HEAD DETAIL AT PLASTER FACADE s•=v-041111 I I m 0 C „,s,"... r, NM NAOMI 7\ • • ....... as l I .�REE1 • NOT USED N.r.s.123 NOT USED N.3.3.118 DOOR SILL ® PLASTER WALL 3•=1'-D•108 HORIZ. MULLION AT PLASTER FACADE a•=r-o 103 �z7a'.an I ® , wErAt om-N a � ` � TOL OM OR moons MOOG M MOOT momm NMI MI MOSS r Pas,n "`a' aNAG TOM REID LIBRARY M. ,R< " a uC. •WI e.1e 3522 LIBERTY DRIVE N NaV IT aat U.IN IT r)OT rut,MD PEARLAND• TX 77501 MOM MO RRwRaa��,,, N ,a o STIMS NOT USED N.T.W 122 NEW DOOR HEAD ® PLASTER WALL 3•=r-o•117 PLASTER CONTROL JOINT DETAIL w a•e r-o l •ILL'uDETAIL AT PLASTER FACADE 3'=r-o 02 2 TOM REID LIBRARY AMMO 0.Ill. MM.OM PLAIT 2 ® ADDITION & 1 O.NORM 1e"® Sall. RENOVATION ROMN a aw a n W ��l�,I Fume .)1«f a iiR•-o• IN as 4"i.1455 stir"°°" E T rPMK© • ' EXTERIOR DETAILS S. a,Ran.Na Pe m.o... I RN r"Wraa,i„nt 6 m rN . ...... ... . T 1 s1 .....' rn.r,v"rNUovro . fl MOM.SDI UM TO PROJECT N0. DRAWING N0. • / 161)1 -' / '.. •' ,p]D.2015 A.6.01 NOT USED N.r.s.l 21 NEW DOOR SILL ® PLASTER WALL 3•=r-o•116 EXPANSION JOINT ® PLASTER a•=r-o•106 PLASTER BASE DETAIL 3•=r-o'101 "W.","I earDI , 0 Dewberry' I ECI Technology I Mechanical,Electrical, Ah Plumbing Poen.... -(W Mu W �• G MM.wnrRn v sRmAm nRi Q mi I msY Pinnacle Structural Engineers • - EW Etructurn] Englneere ▪ •� 1'1�� r nu r N -- :nmaA:a y Lgiii �� ilkia .JV �I�� evw ciir..:m� 0 I■ 0 °"cy,vNmNR Word,Cetz 8 Associates nexw ItA !I c ® g.RA„o` ; I�I � i 7VIry iI► w mown KW. i p2pill i1llIriww._�I� r__AA III .. '•\\ �1iiirfloir♦�� `"Q\\\0��\\O\�� \9�VJA�\\W� \ P1I)�1�I NO. DATE DESCRIPTION \��\�"""p�"`\�\�� 11�� I 0,. S r 01 10.10.15 ISSUE FOR ID PRICING \��Ni, ��\ .110.0.41 Mt...ma — 6 a _. 02 Ox.3fi.16 SOS RUNIC SET &WM MO asuNt ism r � m 1011��1411 .N 03 01.2511 Mira BN AND 1 �m�I�A6 Off - 02.IO.I7 ADDENDUli COLUMN DETAIL 124 COLUMN DETAIL 1 0'=1'-0•114 COLUMN DETAIL 1 0'=1'-0•104 �� t'-o- N ,I iiia .,� _ III t = II ��,��t _■I JrN.,NcOD ■ OI■ ■\'' I rR.mum ....,.,..,gym.- — L, rfkitNi ram 1 II • AG' -' \\\ ��p��\\m .▪o•...a▪ "` t44 I.—M ----= •off Z. 1 ■I — —® //aa s ,1,, st• ©W WA w :.-` �-,� '0 0 VAL Ii. Tar r,R°µ cuss 1WI WI�iw g:l�,�l, • Ol N P ea�. N m�111.51/55,N ,°/imp 0 rj COLUMN DETAIL 1 u2•.1'-D•122 COLUMN DETAIL 1 I/O•=r-D•112 COLUMN DETAIL 1 ve='•-0'102 TOM REID LIBRARY A 3• PS22 LIBERTY DRIVE EARLAND, TX 7 581 rm. w'ca, E. rig R aI. Y �_�I rr:MCP... R.'LSKE4:, / ro.� uo,;°•g TOM REID LIBRARY • .,rn..,1ADDITION & ,. ° 1 ,�I 0 a v1.R�R p • g..PM,R.el 1.:_-.41 � I RENOVATION © I�, qii © a O "" Q , ram"MOS EXTERIOR DETAILS ir Attakok ., 015•. � R;R�R n =1. p �. R a WAG PROJECT N0. DRAWING N0. ▪ 10 N.m m,ImmAa Rrt 14171=TO1"O1°61' DATE A.6.03 MOM_ 10.30.2015 5110,1110 "� 10 WO R 2•=r-D 11 COLUMN DETAIL 1 102•=r-D•101 °rr I . 1:°I ria sumo.ma COLUMN DETAIL /2 =r-D•121 COLUMN DETAIL 1 1/ • j .j . if Dewberry KCI Technology Mechanlcel.Electrical. h Plumbing Engineers I Pinnacle Structural Engineers Structural Engineers Ward,Gets&Associates Civil Engineers NO. DATE DESCRIPTION D1 10.60.15 ISSUE FOR OD PRICING 02 04.26.16 50%RENEW SET CONST 03 01.25.17 ISSUE FORTION RIO AND RUC 02.10.17 ADDENDUM/2 NOT USED N.T.S. 04 F°n.wR.WA,PLATE i. Z. COW FUME EEL." rPL �• IMAM kiO ; ►pit '[ ' rj 1117 .III .),DNr l Yc 'I,-I. �� I� I� ar. 0 'NEB = -rMab, made,wM u'� 5 ,'m,..70.5 2.10.2.11 L r r i .„).4 COLUMN DETAIL I a='=..-0.1 02 TOM REID LIBRARY LOANS.° i W 3522 LIBERTY DRIVE AT PEARLAND, TX 77531 -_ . --� �� 0f 3r0aU005 TOM REID LIBRARY r�„., ADDITION & mp �I �� RENOVATION 1 :2.. ©� © 'ill N I1�-�'-��` . ..I �I,-�• I EXTERIOR DETAILS P..MIMEO TO Prl %¢ISI.GAL,irR4 T°N>wl WAG PROJECT N0. DRAWING N0. mN.NUN cow.,,,,, 0, y s171 DOTE A.6.04 AXON 10.30.201fop F5 NOT USED N.T.s.I 21 COLUMN DETAIL ='=i-D I 01 °ar:"1 a° • IJ Dewberry ECI Technology Nech"atcat.Etcetrlcul, &Plumbing Enalaarre Pinnacle Structural Engine°. Slruclurnl Englncare Ward,Getz&Associates • CivilEngiaecre NOT USED N.Ts. 20 NOT USED N.Ts.I 15 NOT USED N.rs.I 10 NOT USED Nas.l 05 / ur[oul.m c[nac rt / ra°o u�ccbiv� scx[�,In ctM1ii."c NO. DATE DESCRIPTION x--}c°a,�nc ncc[x,,n[ I ;� 10.10.15 ISSUE FOR DO PRICING / 02 04.2316 SOY REVIEW SET v2'`,:" 03 01.03.10 ISSUE FOR RID AND CONSTRUCTION • ui,a[ vu,,er Q 02.10.17 ADDENDUM 12 • 1.-c lI} l-s- ue- 2 c=v[ cx[s I c,R�, orsrtnssa 9 \ \ \ \ ax east I`` : I� I�„�, ra,n '6- ens[l oa NOT USED Nas.119 INTERIOR ELEVATION—WOMEN V2•=r-D•114 INTERIOR ELEVATION—WOMEN u2•_a'-o•109 INTERIOR ELEVATION—WOMEN 1/2•=r-D•104 I Ny"[°a»c. r ii i* r VI Lolli ,_,_ ,,,,,, to NOT USED Nas. 16 INTERIOR ELEV.—MEN =".I13 I-NTERIOR ELEVATION LIEN z =rc0 I OB INTERIOR ELEVATION—MEN vz•-r-D '`03 2`oxel/ + � ®.an " ex� �_eD w rti • — I x.aDR e,x.N� u�",�6,a ---- ux,",ra=,a � y�l �r� I - �x.[[.e TOM REID LIBRARY �IIII " 3522 LIBERTY DRIVE t i�n I_�—^�, D"s -odlit�t© ,' -,D„, [a a,a l[" xl�x 3522LIIIBE TX DRIVE__failliRN . ,� P.� q▪ fir, CD_ ! R["[arx°e „ . INTERIOR ELEVATION—MEN 1iz•= '.-a-117 INTERIOR ELEVATION—MEN 1/2•=r-o•l 12 INTERIOR ELEVATION—MEN 1/2•=r-D•107 INTERIOR ELEVATION—MEN 0•_E-o'102 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & I RENOVATION vim,,, •\ DDra INTERIOR � �eC a r E \\ a,q,ya ELEVATIONS * ° IN-I ,•: .1.NI 1�n."[P Dx� /N D eS.M. o © - �t `"[a D.a —I— p rj�=—ssIIIIIIIM niox ' O �� xC VE°�,. 4 / i/ e:,x curt eau WAG PROJECT N0. DRAWING N0. + _ �' .--. 1]R�, e.,x cvx BASE — / wsc °iE �j DATE A.7.03 is t� 0.30.201s INTERIOR ELEVATION—WOMEN 1A2•=r-0•l 16 INTERIOR ELEVATION—WOMEN u2•=r-D•111 INTERIOR ELEVATION—WOMEN Jr=r-D•106 INTERIOR ELEVATION—WOMEN lit•=r-D'101 a+,"l WI \..4) J xi 1 1 _ e Dewberry' • PRO.COPITAMS gy MAT maxi oasts xi: 1 IC/ x.a Me 3.210,7.14 ni 1.1 El Mennll,Electrial, °IA SAM.PROM I -0_liI__Ire II1I11 §_ WA mz I CINI Enelneare 2112 gigEO4 CK ,,µ — weave nN002 �.: m. x,l ,a ° —�1 .,a anm ��//®�J a• �TM n� nJ � ° �Wp m maxae9xa II Yw , 5�STfEL 1224.MO STEMYlwnnom lr.9x�e�4_ 1 02 IN �o ax TO AS m / g7 °T sup°w V� ��° x „ rr°sc0,a�I a N0. GATE DESCRIPTION S1m 1u2° r TOP Nro S TO tV I. 1p rxln sxox,m 01 10.]6.15 IS50C fOR 00 PRICING c..To`2.220 / Ipmw m '✓ II. 0] OI.R6.Ifi 50%REVIEW 6Ei Y. xaeP a,,am w•alum � I■■ scan.eu[ O3 01.35.1) CONSIROCiION ANO F. icavum nets�E 1 O2.10.17 AppENROY/I 1 ro I�,»z,v. o r�.. aau a.rw°x �w I". II4._ -I. SINK W/ SOLIDT SURF. COUNTERTOP 1-v=.=r-o•124 Y ' BABY CHANGING COUNTER 1-0 =r-0•109 ADA SINK i-1i:•=1'-0 I04 2.0.12 WOW • NEE ..Icaaca221122.3020 Q TO aw aia I'my 01 c`:oi [ Y-a vw1 w° I. cast.N",1 a,ev Y:P.vnp°2. u.sE.ssom,eowo sx. .a. �. °I' ", °°^,a ewww.9 MO Of WWI Yc ie mxlmlro y . I .0 rru T_ _ "wa a,9 I - I. I. aw • I�' CIIISIOVIALITILLITAg w, CO... I Ysw+nnm wa�a�w Fe , WY avAr.7.Rw.a.i Na �w� ■� , 46,4 \\_ _\_ ..I.,I. .w°cu 9m ua GrP: � -�— .;�am.a� o ��■ �a. a°�t w a%x2wR ....A/A.: I*�Inw ,° z.QW � www.N�� .90�.•w.�.,�a9e09 °°Z,,a,. al .s:..a°Y"sza 0IMO= ) TO V. TO PE Naww w� ,VQ1s24, 22. //_ R NaR w��m�n.mw �w mmaYeN M.m . .20 TO rozli SINK W/CANTILEVER POST wWR vvi--l-u= v1.122PULL HEIGHT CABINET i-vo•a 1'-0•117 TYP. KNEE SPACE W/ SPEEDBRACE 1-l/R•=1-0•107 TYP. BASE CAB.(1 DRAWER/1 DOOR)1-o/r=r-0•102 [i " % r 12.PLYWOOD smarm, _row_ TOM REID LIBRARY nl �FEW OF SLOWIT : a 3522 LIBERTY DRIVE COOT..[ : W PEARLAND, TX 77581 ax" °"°"" ----- " - —-� ma rUM CO .P02.11 'i Y a Ki ww .wPw I'NII�an a 9 Pi // nwm 0aIII' 1162120 1 nocell,,,uaala axm ✓ """ �0 w •,..,, .... TOM REID LIBRARY it:i/ c " o ii 112(III lai0I INTERIOR DETAILS w" / w PIPSOC Ewa r a avowwou = �m.wa _ @ � Nu 9mPxmw222. �aaaa,w TOaa,.l,an.IPTO EE PLAI CAB TO ,aa-I S II/ r.'I .;N �;e D��4e�■ fi a uRl.,%a.R.Pn�6r 1 m'wLLs ,°a _new E:wl� WAG PROJECT NO. DRAWING NO. OMER R°IA. °6s I'a"u uenn. avow 6171 g, a PROMS SP.saw.wars se mwvs 1 1 aea+a wa alnd on,ma nurtu 1°OF 1•n,,u M.S. DATE A."7.11 10.30.2015 TOP OF TILE DETAIL e•=r-0•121 TYP. KNEE SPACE i-i/c =r-0•116 TYP. BASE CAB.(3 DRAWERS) 1-0•=r-D•106 TYP. BASE CAB. 1-0'=1-0•101 m00I 0":°I inn, $ Dewberry _ 1---� n (.--_ 1 • is/D`aIool ml nasm ram, KCI Technology r� ...... ' r� W. sue.m„ Mechanical,Elena ical. ifn 1 0 D...,C Runlnn9 IJIIIINRIII � Pinnacle Structural Engineer% p.9 M5I LA COPS, - �� structural Engineers Car;re us or 15/w'o o. I JZ.0Iw Iwua.° .m , f mo.""OPonxc S. n0 0 3 EA 10..1 MO (IMITMC I LA SWOON ECM m rumx �I�, 3. SCHEDULED ./P.Au cmoonc w/Puu cvaDINO 4DOs4°s'c0oo5.re..nr „..0 DISIING pp°oa n" ma%. Tex Exmwa FY 51 °'tl1..., 1' L asas vce DONEDUtEn - Ward,Getz&Associates •__ '-_ •row •i is I Li P/mve 110 vswmi PRgME CIWl Engineers 1I51 II tI 1 maaO NMw I: II '.3 )WINDOW HEAD r=e-a*110 DOOR JAMB 3•=1'-a•105 it c0 w Osumi i cCwR irtvav i e0p�wei1�1 a 1tIn TART s _ cam� omtt ME N0. DATE DESCRIPTION 2u.55 w Tr%PFgEo uss w Ji.YPER♦D V5 w TART SCE aYl E DV. 3 u w¢Me°3w I u s2WvoI1 ml ur[m uwll 01 10.30.15 ISSUE FOR OD PRICING Ia Oa%av rs.3lear Ns 02 t3fi1 50 REVIEW SET •` Ii u Dusksna0 I In.Asia[ ww..g1[slop I I 03 01.25.17 CONSTRUCT Nµ0- 3Pnartmb _ savaaxs DCA D. nem __ 1■■■ 1-- MI 4WD nnvl '. S rPM1E �I� lQ ozla.n ADDEND"uu I2 ! Am1 s/ �I `� Ili �� a 3imvmw m1 Gas m r c"moon'' smev CMIW.IDeIT Mrz nm vas %owes I¢v.I _ '� oMwO.a4 a�np a .i !. _ � Ir � • �I �1 3 � E � YID I. E. v3„a..LCD 11.14 DV. w ill iwi tu5�. w LW 22 . l• "a.rraE g w a awn W�RR e OPENING TYPES N.Ts, 24 DOOR(HARDWARE SETS N.ns•119 HEAD D•=1'-a• 14 )WINDOW SILL a•=1'-a•109 WINDOW JAMB D•=1'-a•104 •—Il- ll} 1�f71 ..,.. 1---- . . . ,7:1T7SCIED.CEPS. h J. LL ,l = • fll■� OPENCHE I I ._ 1 iii . 0 1 r , fi_i, _ .. p ....•.„ .n• 1 , ,..• I yr..... MR ;mo w" d :.�i• l— • MX MI•MN iLT �m ams •a ................. .W.a.15ra W II a/«MEP nw OPME SIDE 5•ri °E'zsra,13n FRAME TYPES a-=1'-0•123 JAMB s•=r-el18 HEAD r=3•-D•113 JAMB r=E•-D•108 THRESHOLD a•=r-D•103 OPENING n;Mal DADOCRE M �0m OrTAI REwR DARE w M'. �i,�` n -- L'Fn SILL PAC RE.O REN.R55 mr s`P NOP r-.. .. —:f`- ".�. .. .. .o.Fri—�^� - _ „a DI I5/. 1,0/.sa1 .ED ..al I0/Mal 1o/Mw TOM REID LIBRARY w vMa ./50141./i�a11 �� :/Pa m°€ `-' _ _ a.0o1 n/aa1 10/.501 3522 LIBERTY DRIVE wa1 v sa1.1./Mal rrv.m - . epos. ,o/Mal 1033, PEARL AND, TX 77581 • ;d,;� - ,p0a1 °/.001 I5/M01 • ./D..� - - 0/.0.0110/Mal10/01 OP D3 - 3/.0.01 ./.0a1(1°/.0a1 VA.ME - 0/M0110/0.0110/.01 03 - 3/Mal 5/401 wwa1 .m..a..a2 r..0-o _ _ vMa1 1aM0110.01 r• -r.ax a - 3/M01 0/M.w41.m. 4,55/,mrz - 0/M01 1..110/.01 o.,r-,. w - 3/Mal 5/.0a1 10/wal ./.NmNaE TOM REID LIBRARY - 0/M0I Waal ..P o1 2 5/P%Mat ADDITION & 13 _ ,,..01 ./w01 I./M01 WAD..�E RENOVATION 03 _ iSeol .p0o1((14.01 ./Pwn ow ram vMal ./Mo(1./Mal 5/NM _ I3 1 -0.Y-D• es u - 3/Ma1 ./Mal 13/MDI C• 03 - 3/Mal •/u91 1°/M01 .%Pm'a HPr. Ma /Mo1!1vM,1 WPC ONE WINDOWS & DOOR - 3/M01 5/Ma1.1WMai CPI.AM SCHEDULES & _ 3/43a1 3/..01 1.1.1 rnwnMwr DETAILS - 3/M01 3/M01 of 1 - 3/M0I 5/.01 I3/Ma - • Y.Yd w - 3/MOI s/MOT n/MDT - 3° 3b,rb' _ _ - - - ttlnas WNW CAR WAG PROJECT NO. DRAWING N0. _ I4121 8 'E DATE A. .O 1 10.30.2015 OPENING SCHEDULE N.r.s.I01 r1 0T1°1 ,.....i 3 . • (Ill ® Dewberry KCI Technology Mechanical.Electrical. k Plumbing Engineers TM MU wRw.c.wm srn3 came NE.o.3 Rpm, FIRD. .SE xM - - Pinnacle Structural Engineers WALL cu mwomT03 KR1w.y su3rpc15 u mnxc e[4wxs Structural Engineers D.W. DanxM Exam, 0-x w-3 w-3 - Woril, cPc2 ai Aa6PPiat03 Px Civil EnHlneere 0-1 OW.a.sE WPM cwc 03sE 103 6VON BRO. D 1A02 /imR. CWINO DInWD CO WL DS3x. _ - _ 103 103 100 c-3 rpy.,mW` RECEPTION MD f-] a-1 Y-t - �, w-x/sT-t P[-t F-I CARPET(D[i0 1) vnatn Wife WELL mmx FLAW c3NFNUT,-pue F-e/F-s a-1 N-1 v ENSTWR Dams. DSWNM OW USE w0r_Tm WSW W Am OCT NO. DATE DESCRIPTION F-2 uwm(0PP 3) POW. 10213 WNUxwu( I3Me PIMP n - 0_I r-, - - 01 10.30.15 ISSUE 004 OD PRICING �a °n 02 04.26.16 50S REVIEW SET -1 CARPET(Fm 3) PAW.. 0110 WIm mJm...BOOM m . F-1/F-. 3-I v-I - w-1_ pE_z/s+-1 0! 01.25.1] i55UE FOR ND AIID r-. MKT(ccPIT O PROWS 01.e UN. .e010 P.S.WM F e e I , Q CONSTRUC210N N- - © 02.03.17 ADOEN004/I F-3 CARPET WW1 2) POOL. 101.3 LND 034.20 NOR= N F-lt a-x Y-./N-I Pa''''° Q 02.10.1) AODCNDUY/I f-e rl0wl(.ccEM J) PTEwR lol.e VW ]BJzf GD5 COWL. F-11 a-z N-./N-1 - 2 F-2 USW(Acme.) PAW. 101.e UND WI.Russcrr M YEN F-11 B. Y-./N-1 punt .-1 pl-x 5137 IM f-s Wt.WOW.nE uwxa a PROWS.. 3]u1RSa0FrzE _STUDY le F-i 0-1 Y-1 _ _ _ - r-I0 woo co... Is F-2 a-1 N_t ToUN_ _ _ i-f 1 Po.mAw TILE wsR,wx TEE SUPPLY axwr w0mx mna ln,] °sE C1_2 shot 1. F-x a-I Y_, 7.3'ily,--LsiL _ _ m11 le F-z a-1 .-I - _ mWo unwcTE 33 No0a MY110 ./z F-2 0-I W_1 _ _ w 1 wont LAMINATE FO.. Ite es WSW OMsluor/1 F-z a-1 w-I ro wra Dmwc NEW 232 w-3 PLASMtwW.H xtvewe Wnmli .eEm WIeW m3T/smPM6 F-e 0-I W_1 _ _ OVaill NU? In SS-1 SOW 9013013 COP. Ctw SMELL 124 WILY MD F-2 0-1 N-2/.-I IKW 222 ola-, w-1 w-I °'v+t4 n-I non[ Ism op,.vaaxm .2xnux co,,, NM,c120 0-1 N. - rt I w I e N. P.xT gees.) Deem mime 5'Y6wB PAC..Nn[ lAe4 slum F-J a-1 v_1 _ _ _ 2s 02.10..Z.O0 123 N-z WIT(WENT) P60Ww Pius snsse SCR.Rmv000 mpW,°P3 F-3 a-1 r_1 - _ 1. r-3 Deer(plmm0e) s3[Rvv mews SNN101 WOO ]UST.mrvr.BOON F-3 a-1 r- _ _ /�� rer r-. PCAFVLV TEE wiRIP.W TEE SUPPLY SYPLY u00mx USE m-, F-3 a-, r_t _ _ _ / 3 P203 9011005E A4[.nw 1t2 SUPPer PNPB1 MN. M , U.m_1 .i�_�r i. PW M 12 O1,PE o PT<N Dmw. / gw„Y. PM. EXIST. DmwM MST. DJma COSTING I m133 Wa M. DWG Pa W0 IXa WO Dmw. TOM REID LIBRARY EN,ma.M.s..3 F 1I..1 D030 PO W1. D0100 MST. w_3 PI-3 3522 LIBERTY DRIVE TAO MM a P6e n m cow MNNW3 - D .IT e3m D,W. D,�M D,m. LUST. PEARLANDT TX 77581 pppop, P,_2 w pp.,2 mm.W„pp., aN1R1 W.OF WT.TOR Wm DmW. D M DawM maw. I EV1-3 OW.PAW 3 PmNwN as N1°1 SANDS m TINE WT.1.I'EC9X.ROOS OW. BST. DmW. COWL - - TOM REID LIBRARY 3.1 BA. 1....1.1.10 Pi DmwM wTEx MOWDm"9 mN COST. Da1W. D5TW1 erg. - - ADDITION & D 10 OWN POST. Ms.. WWT. Dmw. _ _ RENOVATION m • PISMO EWING �© Dm.cMR.Mm DmWM Dmw. DI P.MmW. Dana ROOM FINISH p EXIST. DaIW. MST. Dat0M - - SCHEDULE ' WAG PROJECT NO. DRAWING NO. 14171 DATE A.8.03 10.30.2015 FINISH SCHEDULE 0•=,•_D•I01 °a""I VI •• Dewberry DX SPLIT SYSTEM SCHEDULE DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR UNIT P.M.TOM REIN REBRI ANN LIBRARY SYSTEM NIPIBER FRO.T'TONI REI[•FE4NAFIOLitHARv XCI amea1,i Ele 2 3 3 E $/SEEN TAG 400 OLELZ uaan9Jffam,eleRtt Leal. 2ERVM1CCS CONFERENCE CHILD..AREA AU%tiN INTERIOR NOTARY T[EN AFE4 SI W'I/NEY.LIBPAFI AZT) - LIBRARY LNG[ ---' SINGLE ZONE SXIG,E2CNE !:P:vazDivL xvC TYPE SINGLE ZONE SINGLE ZONE SINGLE ZONE SING.ZONE SINGLE ZONE SINGLE N ONE MOLE ZONE - VAR.... VTSLIP-',LE 'a<AI<BLE STAINABLE VMIF3L VAR.. ',AE,. V00:ABLE 0015 SERVED \A MEC0 RMt G4 MECH RAI2 AF 1AJJOLEk DISOWN.CONFIGURATION1 DOWN DOVN Pinna 01e$00 tlCtnr B!F:ngtnCnts SAG 4U1 ,L1U} AN. NHU4 AHV3 M'J6 rWV] fN10ATA Su9,0=9,•al eeG4v+=rs CCri1GURAP.G4 9TICAL 1kRlt. NERi:CAL VE11111 VERDC6. VEPTCAL SUPPLY. 4E70 2d30 PAD MOUNTED AD:3.N100 PAD MGU = UNITED PP.MOUNTED PAD MOUNTED PTO MOUNTED EXTERWLS. TANAWC IIStU CF STINPL r M 2303 -W0 5433 --- 32W 3W 3W 0 EVAP FAN HP 3 15 War d,Getz A 14a S OC iate'a JA C.=ht 400 1 >)O l55 1630 OtU :on 04014 iNC.,erc EX TERNAL S?4IIC PRE4Su0E,WG IS' IS' I15' 15' IS' DX COOLING COIL 5 35 25 V.LTSPH.4TCLE5 4scrma 481gLD 4E0350 4671.6. - 3 4f03.7 4000b0 JW3ft1 AIR E EV.,DEMO'F SEM _ • - SENSIBLE G?4:ITY,"?V.Y 54,100 AA.A01 1401}Z01 75,100 SA,VA MEN AIR LVG FVAP,DD"ND'F 55,54 3. • 51 TOTAL CAPACR r,DM }D,]IO WSW ADAM 106.701 WON MI. 1132E0 SET..M01 UN 2.1 T39.1 ENT DOA..A 75.1E11 75 363.1 • 76.31.4 73653.5 75 5E3 7 :6.1.2 ]:].E:.4 TOTAL COOLING IABTUN. 33E7 3632 REr OBV/13., 76B ]-G TO 0d ]li 77.5 7E5 ANQeNT TEMP., !Oo AD _ 1,0 DEW.,'E 5.1 U. c2R1 SZ51 '}fit Sit 9fi1 ,IT CCAUHG STAGES DIGITAL SC ROLL DIGITAL 309CLt 1 ___ ._.__.-..__._-..---..-__._.__.-__ NO. SATE . DESCRIPTION ELECTRIC HEAT - -- ---�- REFRIGERANT RIMA RAIN, TOTAL.. 1 10 IJ Ct CAS.1 61 ENVE tOR DD PFICIND STAGES - ., } ]} .. 2 N.OUTPUT REGUREO 't4C !W DENULADLFICATIG:: 1 1 - OS 0+.2]E, R®> 0 510D,HOT GASRELM,T YES TES YES 'YES YES YES 1ES STAGES '0• ICI 9131 ADSTNDUU 02 UM DATA EACCEOSOF03 p4 4; INN ARI EEG FILTER TYPE 2",MOP.--- f'.MEWO }'.M1IER'A0 ]'.MENvO -.�!'MENVO7.T.METIVE T _--.. NW AR,ESP PB 1i2 FAQT CPT DMCCNNECT YE5 YES 'YES YES YES 1ESOPERATE...TO,A `J CONDENSATE AW950 __ -W^. SINGLE PT.V21.0 CONNECTION YES YES YES YES WS YE5 1E0 _ CONCEALED CONDENSE PUMP NO \NO NO NO NO NO NO EATERS MEATS N'cPVO REPRICER,vAI 11.410A R,19A 2-411A R410A R410> R-410A RAID? DEH!HAIOINC4TION CONTROL N.J.GAS REHEAT TACO HOT DAS REHEAT CARRIER MODEL OR EOrUAL 4ORUA.D7 GIFU,. 4.3092 40RUMOD 411.AA3 IC... AORLVAD ECO:OMEEP YES YES rER,.CURB YS C0:1DQ43ING UNIT EL E:DISCONNECT - T. CU: r CA3 CU C A a CUE CU) CryIT NITD,EG CONDENSER CONE NO NO,AL TONS TE 10• 15 10 IO 125 O EN MOTORIZED G:,DWAF[T. TES YES NALLENT YS 105 .5 105 1ILLPGv:ERED COW.OUTLET YES YES UMSYSTEM API SEER 124 122 00 12' 1U 117 - I. BAROMETRIC RELIEF NO NO - STAGES SEE NOTE SEE NOTE SEE NOTE SEE NOTE SEE NOTE SEE NOTE SEE NOTE 'SINGLE PONT ELEC CONNECTION YE2 'FES - OPERArfSOLYC:MA' 44 14- IJ ...R.ANA,PERIOD 5TR2 -YR- SS`IJ Ie t9 ti VOLTSPH,CTClE6 eE0350 4Wgb0 --- 460360 4Wgb0 4E0191 1803E0 ''' 460340 CM'nIEP MODEL OP EOIIAl LZOPE035 6-<0TE033 Lg9RIER MODEL...AL 3F4:0A03 00w10M3 3041Jg12 31AUDAA 30P.UON00 11000J06 :*AVU0J13 5 REGUIP.STUNS APE DROSS AYO INCLUDE FAN HEAT 3.w77,-, ETA NOTES T ERN,STA1lINNCLUDES CA606.WET COIL.B FILTERS �•LE PREMIUM E.FROGOE THUS NAIL FACTORY INSTA.LE':YrU • REG..OT1NHSARE GNOSBAND u:CLUDE FAN HEAT Ev 1rHALR4IDA REFRIG-RANT Gs•. EXTERNAL STAT'0 WOLLIDES tAte.,WET rOA,I-FILTERS uM MOTORS SNJAL EE PREMIUM OF. "'�'h ws1Ja/Mern... U" EAP OTC SHALL BE E4^1 E F RO DL " M ORYINSALEOVED TS TO 1,5E W POINT KTC I MTS.IF MODEL NUMBER T HEDULE C.I.2010 STRINGENT LLSHUT DCA H D E CONFLICT;MOST '" - C FLOAT SN'T'CH A105HALSHVi DD1\T IF UNITS SHALL SE DE nTD TO LIMIT FLOAT NO DOWN AN 80 TGREESFEEr,Oh ES PE^PiCTED PRIMARY0 a'1 BECOMES T=+ro4.AbaA-rc taesn ELECTS CHE.T_:VLL..,.SCROLL COMPRESS. L COMPRESSOR LIFO AL D NSING SF STALES PROVIDE GIGRAL SCROLL COMPRESSOPhS LEAD v'ON1PR'ESSUR FOP All.CONDENSING UNITS • TOM Imo F TAP LAND VORAPY CUM.AL Euc CLAIM Pm aN•✓P.,.P„Pe.e t VENTILATOR SCHEDULE FAN SCHEDULE it' PROJECT TO REID FEHILANO LISRM 1 FRC..TON:REID PDAPLAND DEWAR) rcC� libraw I P NAG PPE. F RELIEF SOLACE ENH>USl EXHAUST El HAT. SUPPLY SUPPLY 4 I v. A. 0 - Canlar.xa I 14t0 I ED i Allat SERVED UDR./ ARE/SERVED RESTROOM CUSTODIAN SCONONI ENH - O SUPPLY ECON ,SUPPLY • Lady aan>I AS i 3i 5 !r r I aPC PP i _ FAITrPE N_GCEtu ArPcEF ME ROOF MUUN c0 CA-I4ET FAN RJUF.,»i'EO ROOFMOUNTED -C .•yT • E nA.=%a nA:.0 ' Yl •TNp.P+. li HOODED PROP II.L•DEO PROP 'cd �N A AR FLOW CFO 5DW AP FLOWCiUN :UI 200 SRO 1]WO 5:W • , €r :' rq - RES COCA WG EXI STATIC PRES 05,, .'oz!'Ariz-1 R3t]5 E%:.STATIC Fr" OJ"wG 05'V:,, p5'V:L OS'!1G - eV4r}R+. THROAT WEAN JIENGTH,IN. 0444£ DRIVE O:RECT D:PEC1 D:0CT DIRECT O:PECT VOA+0.110140.-994%A. `00 MOTOR DATA 14HF 03V/ 2HP 3HP ]HP • € TOM REID LIBRARY v..,,,,,,,,,,..4. 1 ,,,,, 4.:..V.v24.m......450451e JDJ].v,Z0151MC! ACCESE'L'RES 40 0,+H/CYCLES 5/U5O 11L00 IWO.. 3W3L1 469,0E 5 x.PP:.wN:. j Dias MAX EIRDSCPEE4 ES 3522 LIBERTY DRIVE 1M PP,nmPap- I i 1. ROCS CURD YE5 ACCESSORIES PEARLAND, TX 77581 a 9.•30 U. .. aII,a f 1".n. 1 d UtU V. 1 :05 EAC4WAFT DM1PER11 YES P.T0aYU5 O-4c_CT YES- YES YES TES ITS 333 r0.95 e) NOTES 1.2 n EP YES NO NO 6 0,..113.. .,:,v.escisp........N7 GUN i To B «e< E _,<rn.J. n..JT •DA A, YES N .3.BL'20133,XI�Ix.N..s,- oJt „ - . mH lOfC EL OR SO FOR URIZED D,iM11P=P. NO _ 'fE5 YES . - Val 1.Lv NOTES)OC40,_C '^ ..1 SPEED CONTRCil1EP lE. YES YES YES • TES .,RA Y EXACT LOCATION OF YENTMIUR PRIOR TO _ TOM REID LIBRARY YP414F']AI-OVA 'JAi9 INSTALLATION PCAPDE UNR WITH ALL TRANSIT... NOTES 3 3 3 • Na:klCakcuntry nv-x tc a!rc:kin.-zl F:?TI.ANi ACCE SCR.AS REONREG FOR FULL 4.00FN< OPER,.SEAL RCMP PENE1MAiONVA3EP AGM GREEN.CM MODEL ON EU. .5✓u S,A250 GX36 .L-_40Si4.1 RCS'.14.51]-A-!. - ADDITION u PPOODE-6.00 OA LAP OR EQUAL FOR AIR PRESSURE NIECHANICALGENERAL NOTES RELIEFNOTES' LDECONTRULtECEYRMECCLO.ON RELAY PANEL RENOVATION E 2 FAN MALL BE CONTROLLED BY ALIGHT SNITCH • 'FAN SIN,!BE CON TROLLEDEY ECONOORTER MODE ON OM.SEE SPECINCATIrO,45. 2 A. REMOVE..UNUSED EXISTING CUCTWORN CAP EXISTING TAPS OF CO.MAINS W.SHEET META- --- 3 B. META- CAPS 4:DGEA,a'Rn.Br: . c. CONTRACTOR 51tiliop;e�YSED+LEw'ii cAEP"auuuusE•D midi BE REUSE.ewt uucTWGRI: AIR DEVICE SCHEDULE MECHANICAL ^ CONTRACTOR SHALL REPLACE ALL DAMAGED EISTJJG FLEZ DUCT ASFEOUIPED. • 5L tLOTHER AREAS.THE LIMP NOT INTHIN THE SCOPE OF\YORkG1ALL RENNIN 1,CHANGE0. T.I SE.. MANUFACTURER AND:AJ'DEL FACE SUE NECKS. CFM FINISH MATERIAL NOTES SCHEDULES E CONTRACTOR DNA,PEPNRLEXSTYG DUCTWORK LEA.A DAMAOEO INSULATION AS 24'v24' 6', OHM REQUIRED. CONTRACTOR IX' ASUPPLY SIDS tACD LAr RI 24'll4" B•4 4 "-+ \ STEEL 12.3 W ., m :P.M A•GD.LT DRAB S AND INNS '^ •• p•e. 5.3 SHALLFCW MERIFY EXACT UVLTWORYCOND.TIONS 4 4 G WILDING ISA COTCRETE STRUCTURE WITH THE2.HOUR RATING Ai THE CCNCRET E SLAE.CEILING NOT U PEN. TITUS PITPW11•1 2,,,I• •• .0 WHITE STEEL 13 • E B WART OF 111E RATED ASSEMES,CEILING FALLATLON FIRE DAMPERS APE NOT FEOUIPEO. AIR ISRETURNED TO THECQ W..PLENUNIANDTHEN TO TEE HUT L G LIGHTING FIXTURE.. :4'.Z4' E'a 0.103 • RETURN ROC G CONTRACTOR A '[ "V R SAP= C EXHAUST TAUS PM :4'.}4' 0'a 101 Tn 1'/MITE STEEL 1,2,3 PROVIDED INPLLE"/R.' S LIVE CELII- CP E OPENINGS NOT USEO.>R NFWAS PROJECT NO GRAN.":,1Iu PP SHALL 6 USE N.A. 10a }}E33 • IA1TI l u e i ALL A.Ol9C WALL SE E J1.E NEW SEE _E NOTES' M301 } N VL SS SHOWN D.E.. CUTE E. PRO ME FRDLADE 0.1E5E,EU,OVEPLY OR Ex 11 UNLESS E44:CMG(WAFER ISPR01^DEO AT RUN0UT T4.EOFF NU C GFLM IiE PEH El 01 GI>C TWG w40 RENOVATED SPACE IS COMM ONLU LU.WINC. 3 VERIFY EXACT TYPE ANO FINISH rrH ARCPTECT PRIOR TO ORDERING 10.30 SDI! L1 .�� R EN`/E,OF[[ALCUTATIONS ARE HOf R[OUNEC AY F - T HNI • XHN N I I r 'I- x lel 11 la) I _ 1 1 I j��app�p� yg iIVA1,RF+ E N NE W NOTES NOV, ) 1N1 a awn g ", Dewberry tN'ArI - ..'S 0U1:T2'x HEATING E SlAtnPAMMAT Mi CONSMOtoweia.sA AND .0NTHE MELD Ronda ornorela or prefab..barta for ell ground rnorre.admen.: Wp 1 • el.0111.S TO DE :FR.4E SAME„ZE ASAR OEMCE NEC. IC...mermel alwol and smaing arn,inder lin.0 A fUMO CONTROL:THIS...CT 'DFECT CONTROL Of 041L,e Ofo.ory BUT • OrnOT F-'LE obeys Ore¢.a .o ea.mewed SOI Teehnol gy NIMAM ON OF Hl1A'Ma' SEE ARVHI Tl REFLECT'EL CEILING PLANE FOP TYPO OF CE_N3NJ0LOCATION vensrwJai bap depth J „h Me char.:cal,Steer,era:, OR"SET POINT N'h OF CEILING oencES. RATION ANO SEISMIC CONTROLS MARV.MINS It MIA I. Vapor • SEE ARCH ELEVATIONS FOR LOCATION OF WA;�•ITD F. f Fe remanded or rope - p I ere arremirleire runs tested SA rant u Ptunatar,y Pnshumerc OVTOGCRDE:GIf-MiNDi(VI5(PEg2LM,DTEx4 • PLENUMSARE CROWDED AAG NOT.OESTM.LES GI TEO.iJLOW FOR d f to A d Afi"F DEGREE 009l'/A'FR,2Bm OD Jr ALTER SE000LNN UL Ci or:PPF Ff&ETS E TRANSITIONSNOT WOWED ON DPAVANGS P J fray.,LrUL n.a,r,M1.nver mutiny mom uJlrnr mere Arm•Y ^ g TS.IJ TERSE DATSvOCLING13'1 DEOFE?OATS HEATING • SEAL ALL 10050ATONG OF FLOORS.RA•EDWALLS,AS:NAT.ALLS rlaaJ oc V 03 30 1 A3 ' C M1 E ONE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUS MIT ORAWN05SOR..PERKTS IN A T .,MANLIER AND en re commanda 4 by rneuNsen manuriouren Emoted rereferelne mash erre nu.,Vex le seal alr Pl nna die Str la e dll r al r:Dgtnrern PAY.PERMIT FEES 731.53 IDENTIFICANON FOR HMO MING 8 EVUIPAtiNT Seems,ralenv heada.egorprront .: - .g Ste us:bur al rimy-Ina er'a`�NFNFOA TIOUL • PRO,.NT O D TEMPORARY UTILITIES a tMel Won:,nn tad c,naravedfaa:lw'-u Mg a na as carder d F ABLE CODES NOW.EV ARE NOT LMITEDTC. HE US-N0O PRODUCT MAW:WIRERS ALATERAL9N.G METHODS ARE THE eey,„HweJ S carry.. er ostm Mel.aF rb,Glaeisr .as010,oe CITY OF REAR..P.D.CODE.:05ISO AMENDED SASSOF DESIGN AND ARE INTENDED TO ESTAC45H A STANDARD OF OJ41T d THE LINT OF PE..PLANO 00041:LAL CODED I.IMC,AMENDED ENGINEER^-HALLDETNEEOLEJUDOEOF OUAUTT MO EGVIVILENCE OF EOUIRMENT, Z305a3TESTING,ADJUSTVIG AND BALANCING RBIFORINAe ton dorm Scatnrhaad.IUllaOINWownenle.. .14,calluNl Oahe,feteleed.Mo :l enlei CRY OF PEAFuW COMMERCWL ENERGYCONEEPVAPCN CODE SONS IECC IMTER nS AND METHODS WHERE SL9'.,'TINT ED Or.ALTERNATIVE EOJPVENi, O mat ,alrudamaope ef, contractor recien-doll be.AG t geees saewe Fos. Fester POLbJ Oraf•i,Selz&An.0r:1?. AMENDED PROPOSED ON 0 BEFORE MONO IT SHAM.THECONTRACTORB '.'a -' d CS. Eno..di ��FFn _ l,_��5g� P N^Ft TY VERIFY THAT THE EOIPMENT WILL FIT THE SPACE AVAILABLE. Metal LOAD,. 5 RAP.o Cff 34T COORDINATE AltALL REWIRES 0010 0 RF1UIP.F40NTSWTH OT EP CUNLANNTENANCEGLEaRANCERACTORS.AND TO B : w" E P ad UJ. .un oi:Alum tv B g P Eu, OF' d n F nS LO_E! 5 -MV-.3J CN Ore:.d.,FT • INSTALL.CO P I�IT TO PROW.CL-rRNICEARCUNG ALL HOAC w F}R,}H Hoosier..stir Edam.la•,avn:I xs.nY UN.4lv:aJurvr larE 2 1 h N b- d1 r l e are ECU'FMCNf F. MSS,CF CP 0 CORRILORr b'4IPOFT CONFORMING !PAIR' HE 0 C E P FOP achieve Irsat la P'eebre end ,cLvr a as a ..n deO P>! r ra rot. CONFERENCE- 5 LFP.VEROJJff F 10 FT 0400RORREP4000NAFLOW/WO 0m EMEN "TON SERVICE, f UMme zoos Aauata,cAaa..d arbor: PLIH Pal.r La luve�ar ,. UDFAGA SGFIayEJr"u.1L nf.aa Fl E OR EPU SALT R UT CI 'NG fL-1UJ FF •ENt C J 330103 f0UWAfLH11115VLgig11 r e ITC GE. 0.2 CNA/SOFT .0, TRUCTION UFL.aBLNG THE FUNCTIS'J OFf RE RESISTANCE RATED 1 '3 .r a corny..,Alen bad Me adp4me, x rra MO.. fame Lp gad le,ama:$rroN aereluyuJ esaarr,SO aapa•ACi'A FEa NFPA}6 ULi}3 ASSEMBLIES earmOal Lone, p 0 r-nnE PER,R1ermen.AFTFP 5,NOT ASH.,on to MIMDSTORI. • 00 NOT RUN EVICT OR...HOVE ELECTRICAL PANELS. va DVCTWORN INSULATION PEARL/WE IC Z NE 2 WA>14-HVIAS, • ALL MR!,N O.ABOVE OCCUPIED AREAS SHALL SET OWNERS CONVENIENCE ANC Lin.Slats Amil.Irmo Ineirairdovortmely adjusted,dupentne...lion In Nome Fe, FM.A-d Nos Men 2.6 NneMedweloped as es Man SO es p T EF NFPACS>UL'v3 r S BEDIF E✓EtetIGS OR aEEE DS E SLLE L- INTERRUPTIONS IN r N31.L i Na end cooing lnads.Enoketi las pad.nld MM.ead ADVANCE Vat,o ,ER h 1 A oai rm.,. . aA d and Me Ya 1 1 ., h). .R55Rarrndona N4_CATE DESCRIPTION calcutheons us.ELM or,. • OC1YOWNERSREaR.N7ATI T SHUT ow EO, E F DISCONNECT airstream wpolies are noniontalle ernes Me ss ka LI Dole loomed :mod:E ConOticnodo,side al,PE 0 10311 Souk..Mabee Hz' -up• -aFcdT•lel,be e, nsrmua BEFORE I be adies.1 to Cupp) taya m 9eMern,n E C aaO vapor adrR cadara•u,Ietloo0ort 503.•I rt^ a r•gr • SC'OM•TNO AD'OC':' E EE' A5 FOR EA_d0ONTA_ r+MOSE ...Aar cornea Led St carte u5 wen a t^ 40N323 HVAS utub'ran`ulVmarsul Itennm Ed....,rre.ttla mr un, SNVOLVED•O VISIT THE SITE AND C FOR HM-ELF THE CO,GWONS toll.No EENGU D[ • I - V' F 0,` m.1 IO3i3 NVAD controls. -e aro TOSE METN'NSTALLMO THE WORK MID MANORROVISONSIOR THE CONDITIONS N 1 C- AAEC remat ands tau rand mr,a S IC b I.F J iN. 03 Of ,U ,I 0 podded NSF.WL FFCE FAILURE OF THE CONTRACTOR TO G-. LlR REOUPEMENT G J Ma.J p, dm..wooly,ev t01 mm ana.r JUSTIFICATION FOR TIE- C F V N,al 1 1 aver aaa 111 A.0 rbeisAMmini,.men enbadd V ire Illhamrnr,ammns0H.Tte ewpy et nravD NETALLAi0N„F AMMON000a^EPEr,eV THE CONTRACTDOCUMENTS THE purLar Larder 2.e r.,.xUUVtre C. m •c ...INCLOSE ALL tH OR REOJpE00R NECESSARY TO COMPLY I.O. 0. J I ee.rupPYand..oar remp.avme and mato mem - `Moor Rani.C F 3JG. Permvfi;.o b' J „gas onohums.<u e WORM.SH r IE DN- OSANL DEJI FEU 1 S F ION,.t v R,_ d hr.Ouade op,C _M1 or„pw.or,,,eaerr be cnI^ da.n Marl be promded Mrea.ben.,oenteal hyoem wLL SE ALLOWED FOR CONDITIONS THAF COULD BE READLr OBSERVED ON condensint rots Condon,. emenn. Le0Ene De ' DX 4e:haled uolei Sun.and rot omen,reamee a.O.pm sour,Ind.,.rpm 4032A JS a WAG S OAOCANONS.i REQUIREM amp,am:den:mg omerno,undo amps OdIsree err erns ENTS d SI NHG domt anc bans.cam..ebeg uem .co FN.M. v.,na p,... 0 rtu ewceew• ON.(15 OMn P L I A' F - 5 Al ....MN,Cured ve•HeeHae....ed.aL MA r n a r 4 t owed...for neon, Fpr .nav,.0 Ae end np p elan mmipmenllu O.n I Mere.dow row,. to v . ed.. r. 103,0Offbeat vino..Ease zone an all L es Refrigerame eater..property Mehe Controsor and A v a..per EFArau.am end P.. dude ELTOG4IC moor Ek:tGems oAdam.,u0Ot , a a e yaeess de nano„hurmr she.. p, m etee labor anddye,Iwo ran xa l o.YN,arLP..,. tb.A1 rHl Novmuae a e ae Y z m come . '3daC a E Slop 33C11TIamostWe seam.eaVabOhNs.l...As, S� art d er k-internmeen on.ohuiPment.or Waite,duct e.o.m.and MM.:con.a.m.shell ba Molaa M en..Met cm, +es ateOVislon AteMocies are Me responobilrt,cll.enestarmal...tot Motor Nader,are OM..lov ao ,or,.Wee.al,e.o.m.Movida 133 we paver lo sycem...ars and pt,up meneereM,:pe-,Ms'I F building R we c Sanal lest 0. .czar. C,ad!v.: eceere,+nep shag be orsnum rated k eJ,and ee.n.aa 0 rn p to Orr. la. team yard, ? 0 on cabling Seamed. - 1031.t32 Autnmanc se..end utdo=cevetr m.Adomrre tree Cese Ur Oueewns dam P .,fp na Me snrs end an Y are`ru AM..a.tlout Om.s he.... ro Owtc i 0 d of era - LdfxaM.e ylr, ;al s. an ENC. c durumearly ode..per meek and eetwalq Mel:0,grarnming and tone sonine a las ti- sad w J Of PIPING INSULATION Dn Dm.Me se 1 J statingd ¢tea,aMop Lesurations.masks nvnonnoma a pee n, d r e o M1 I I ( 'of 25 and mammon!moll Eaaceanae,dr ecee . We hemp a to '^a nor , a perm.wen and internenne.rg:Wu,Neea.edema,_a o33a co.. e . Ma.e «d e ce and a,JCs 9 a a a .a on er r(o.e oc Lhr,n mowed. F �. rra ev.Ec , nP:dDewed .irq Wren., m oa, ,203 3 G .. 0 " - P 4!'0"T'Y"e}TWAL ~ -`Y-''-1 wends Y, ,,.A-w`�..,Co., Yr`` K C I as at,no al is Med. y Climates a0316 Aston. em R -T t.) j Re...INTWISORIO ...O0'OAur_...OF r.rrn r n dby,.,peaor Me FP r g 5 designed cu 2Cameo 1oil .. L+.�'"1ni,S' S"�r^ �'+`tn'nna.4nn:�4d+',',�.e,a'-�,.r^l..r-\✓-r-'� ngines,to,a lea Worn ee.Mashed Ode yP' h. m mowed R ce en ea^a ' p t.F f e rA a f 403.E 0. prese 1 5 I. f pnrdea a C a k type.Sera .dec<raln purposesMoir bo h. Semen,salaams!eadromart to man.,aster u. renne rrardinvion,Pm,.Elers.,Ceram.en,eraorisur ormarenrenta stammvesagropmenla. d Cbange arraing Inota.Add,dalma.ur donee no.Aamm each noel.un!1•0,141ine,In eta,in.meta.or ti,mod.:ea wool,or not 51 n C 1 to r.e.emk Chan. a l..dwerroomAireux,are.darted..end laved Lma a e ''''S..., Mode s arSI en!nOrnorterrance...Mod...Soh umee .Evan..I y der: d g o.. .ems...( a-ties - N Y CI :2 J. A .., sal..Am. r, parrar SrrAwme oh.he perel K'.re 1 J .. g r si In31A 0 p M e ; 0 p PI P yr Y �`. n P tl sheet ste.nenAurn 1.1:',1s.up F restaged Re,. Oman.: bo per Me Od,energy cede. a. dare cermn1 web a min..ORO Osulokar Mir....ouNiln L.la ir,Winq Ewe...W.. samaras3 ...One nee 15 L%7I'rel n a. he al.. n n003'i p F_ _0 p he warrvia lammed and he,.AS,mods,gear. 4ca(a mdelaM pre a Pnh drained r d, 4 a l 1 erahea 1 Condensate control.mot mowed unit.nada _ dron to normal permemera Awn Deena,M..,n normal Eng,.and identity...dee.C r,uee �I Yv scams ens y E E.. connoceese or or.,and ma.once opera,al a...mow,rem.than cr ahua TA f "^0 a nMug,.,acN d bye.Nord;American mcuMben I M.o..s,bm...row d e.ova am. 't ,.an on cut, S r r.t..e,0 r. - (I/'�yE,y' s 3 shall. d 9 rs'ee e. d nt (VAIN .En9 w A -��" 'Ir e J p.. J rrn n iume 1' O N b n , mare P 6p Armen Y4. 2 S 1 nd. eery...demand here proem. } 3.3aWnw en des.,nW ._a A,.M .r i TOR RCEOUIREAtF."Sf0 DI3A4FXi a -5. p Forming•DmW } f e CIJY ...war 12.212 Jwamesifi.}SM1F Non dnP1 Aa pro...,.r Nona T 'd F ea andpreenAr r,n vuriNcr,J one Y t ,Sae M a J A u • UJa agree •el e'0%ra ( l Y a s Rum r Or wale a conamaa Y I - .1ns. 0 0 aeo as y Warer sans.1033E E 3T incerde C 1 T' eaeemau MaoCCdeem, d75 n- 0S'F'm N conned seITO meamot Mad � tan a,ba TOM REID LIBRARY etatrarroa.OMOn Or ter..Halicapaceo,run Vapor tl 033. e n d a.nF vol.aer r g b t nano r u l lol e.- i r wy or hOlb Orange 3.AM,.us m- 3522 LIBERTY DRIVE Mn rF In por,l::pl..pwe elm a:an supply air quanta,asJr Jdu r PI 1 E O EP , 1 d. 1 A lSe (AS I.hpi ea d Concha..old hat.,extern in n fur J d dindicateds F S \ II .• I n I E a prowls an rr:al PEARL",ND, TX 77581 OB^534 P T p d 0 g C3 3 h C. Nn 51 Y j' 'I Egal ,abermwe lb I J m b Y ..r tracer Tla E Wen,NE1 f5 C eh u 1 t1 Y Y 3 mernow owe.and.Stare.wierny J Y C D T A p EVu I W T Jb ! e C CI IS PION 2'. .m pad.¢. de,Weer er alma or allm treble,ch F dl a er 3 P4 d 5 F L- 1 Pretharnehrem system. M d Jweer...aintanaerma rod roger..ado..Ardumne reY Cs embedded " F Amt.ChM Y `Nmm a' T na b di AE 3 n -n omD (except..d) c.a t' t s J A N.H..iIx! E EnemaJ Je men!5 RON13.01E. TOM REID LIBRARY Woman..nernmarta taws a!rude,a e,e am F 91 J M1 E d FCC F. M T& IJ nn f cA EIAB Pr..,TA A:. Csheared,l Acu.r t ntva Co rterJn r e MIA N Slam 5 - to Cords.. :.rg to i err n. .ar,nc a. a rzn era T ,r,B O JEDm L L an I as i J d r 2 033A Cunard el a bem tan to corn, r to, Noes on n,p.Seund a - dam r r limy(IOW: -g r ADDITION Sc. g m.r ta,.ca.m.',alp. and in op+ aln"g:endn.,aneln a..m•r.tr.,b Me L rubber. I.' t, G.den Inbl e1rareAnal. Irleoninerod tnn,nern Jerre, RENOVATION 6 Jo 3n 1 en. w 2 053 NA SENS AND SUPPO i F C P E E., and mien..termem sr.supped,strea be par Oa J 3 e P J barrier.al P applied rmin,pe, AEFI 001E O E J F R J I� A- A d retied F or D WIND F5E N D AGE 1 and latent N0L00OND on 1J M1YN canner 011,1A nn¢ere Scow attached t b h JI a b Parse E t l I P p C Id C'B. j O Y 0 9 1 Rw slab J a J 1 .0 rng.N.apeerfo.1 in me larldurg code 1 d 0 3 S ( J -.. ECM .-_...-._ .-.-.-..- E Pao M d '-5 5 5 H J.. , ( e P. '.+a dJ t Ever mr J d.. • MECHANICAL Pa Le a,a ,and T ,N. nyrnJ. ep miren au ee R dYD._ SPECIFICATIONS fi A I ( ! tl l A A l ra Oren 1 d 1 gp w a.r.Foa LurDeJ n t a oo pl aria A.Lo rp•I am, F J n l .oMd FWJI Fa nr hbond. 111.pp., Reeve ammo applied vapor ratordes and .,hal:sea:ire temp and semuhrtedeMener,Eyeten:moos dela air Ow wo.),dirt,erree Ss.hen,.me. e owe..fAitil M.N.sm.),oh.de.demo. 3p 8 04L en 1t n,a,n Aar a.Lln .B¢ erjectot seams J y E J duelerI d la and +M ch M1 t o In AddA.eOm Natl. st d "I.trot. J y 3 A d rg,8Meru amen an ao...darn, *..J Ingo fra.bx f'.Y+I F aw ra ulsamr nrwrfad..., m,..ar r Mr.I rJdY WAG PRO.,NO. 'u a ouint n;� uor For bo gm martAmmalarm,Nats,amain:atlluatme .arm M400 nor each vermale armednone.VirtitIC13.eawg amp,.alarm meMocumularree IN. cJi W.201S E • b�E uRanII ear,A? +: w . . . . . . , 83 01.1 93 SBOUBBLES OF OPERATION E The olMies hall be aguipag.co,.fa c.o.oparat.p...fora...a A B.umaach in EreASTIRATOF 81.1001....arn00 or aregod 0.1.onmuhon 441,caPiron or lamBded • 1. 41.6 SYSTEM 0.ohltud am.0...lg./hag.hod.to La MO..0 ccerruseriddl by:ha chi. 44.1,1gada day educe ope.:tho or rod 004 lub..00 MI..frneholud or ham..int. V- Dewberry ay...arger 91.2600 MA atedeu ton.lamthe smoke dB..in so.er d.F.T.F3T. 11011.,.... Mg hood Damign,No,.gamy racer.olds for 335 h.*ohne hum.and Rabat sid.let Fn..=Own upc'n a...cathe...Doe...Dots al avolaa.k.Delano.leech In rabon mud. ISO.0 yen:0..004,0 1.ar Dona a xi..AWES...W.fr...10 110.1 4.0.3 Frar., Kci Tcchc,,,,,,,, luta.pier to MN..ourvil.. 5101AUST MI haler era:.connablian did Mu rammotem.la leriderahatir conlrorlar and Imo londarcure cob. NICChamcal.El..-1.1. , b. Dog Ban,NiTion war.con.hoth mar.ant haling...pg.cearaporar yema lhalrnagIallL ,.dranullg ahodula for iu000. en11.12.411.c.a.0 bro..a lemecracre ronoo cc Oead bancl of 0 loadt TFAA which to mod EN...fans 410/1.100.b.sod cn h..0chancy schedule. CONDEMNER COT.,FF.MD BOTORE Coto:Alumhom fins rhoeinnically Weed 0 see.. 1:Plumbing Engine dr 3 ., .1 Mahe=na tooling mcdhlo ha yona 4 WA.or gad.lo a nriemum Eaceetions.chapetraborm thertnomadcallt hal..lans hall a..guan seah cootng hip.6.1661 is mach. 40......,11,11.,<OClin1,ci.,113.aborihble.I.st ugerwath 0 426 ode and . *Med Nile marmeraturo mnpea ad not ametabia Coderrere huge.dota pro0.7moacces,and or Oehydram Seal Thh CPO.narpou Pane:Vag.hem driyan Jrtp1.1110.11,tend..hns.1,Ian . 11.4 M10001 iron)and are an..by.adhordy harbao lurisclice.n 23 23 00 RELBIGERANTRIRINBAND 6.016671ES Mard On dd..41..c....therprool motha avilablmoa outdoor use,am.ehag...re 101 F Autondll.3104,10..EahlIVAC syuem ahall ha.*controls hal eh 00:arg cop.,.ender Sia pot ak,o3 una manufacm.mrperouculsrnh.unglued.c.a.oguprbanl mbrogalida, cepahor 0 1 1/11,./,,.11,1/11,./1,1.11ea.,.0 11.1,na,d.111,11 c.411ant 111,1,1,1.1111111 1..1,1.1, Find.Cie Rt.00E3 a 1 Engineer 9 000.........or oat.diflerant.3.0 part amot,Recap..or...no bra...and.. Inc..mouirommit for long Tina applichont 1,...le talon...01r.andour ac.0100r Oen pro.. Sir uctur al Engineer u sollingifining lois A orm.Mr a 64.Of al Ird,1 TO hours,.0.1 rehodo an ikons..mawal gran.,or roconurrondubl by coda..on....10,,dr g Os mdmormind 1...Rya.riodiched tilor . echrtgant.honhuot al..tem.,oteraTion oft,oystmagar'0 B.hours retigvarit blerne Mr.oh thigogg Moh Um facory ha.Ina has,reduct sizu ea didanc. RE7730E1,191•STRCUF-Fah.6rMahed aud Cued Forgh loot..Fefr1,er.1 cisal. . d. Setback Controls.Head.sysdreara.Mu tapabilil.automatics.madd ao01.rotodrily eu cam acce.a.1 acory sh oradabil.Rot.hidden hors via..Ia.,.soar....Ss ul doll pon cc., 1 lig.ins aolheid... . h...lo mai..yhe 14rearabdue Ca.a lirreed hhoint aoludrible down 0E60 or 1.0.Cording 2. Frihr Jr.trablactabla cora wad War d,Ca et.14 A69,3C ict.9 bytteng h..the chabliay to htomad.a rePart and lomnerrely cum.....sc..to Chod thiperASTIal MO,Type AXE nag M.or moduled hieing,.MINE 61623 wrought 3 Lioordle•Pahr 004.nd mmatar.in.., maintain Obrolemeeralutos[dor"coring Woo,adhathlo be to 660 or higher AL,pray.llash som cooper.SAPS Ewe,AAR.A613 60,40.141mahoruPeopoor alle.th melt.M.111.0 1460 X ,11.1,1,e....1111.1. Ornil Fe.1.• Chdl Encl.c r o 5iume010011. dog:erg F,V..,ileuget,and ecup1.0 copporocurbrheahoIderadtanb. 5. C.o..all. . Gcadatr I...Nen.,anal Vontllatots.AT outdoor...cola and exhauct boo!.onls,and ventlatora 6. 1111,10,..110:110 a. • .11.0 mehrized Mane.OE ago...oho..Piasermeag.in um Ehumogund....Ling to 743 inch CD ASTril B06,Type N.paan afai Firiaga AV...ME caot 7. 0 dhargo ha chech Naiad la 66.00ampor OnaccoldEch othcor ad cogy end mad.cydend hail.acuipeo 0 mat:moioriud ocppartcomegadon the hints Flared. 8 Corn....chargo sem.mare • ' dampers Mad agornadcallt hul Oen tile 14..12 el-,,,ueE tvtivet.1.11,,e.Vol..ca..ot ora 9. Fres.dile da.o. dampara h.adromaidally hut adoring chomps.Lb,.bd.up hoot down,and aorta, 33 31 00 NBAC DUCTS ' • EadoiNnar Do 4.1140.duct frornMah a...curdbm.0 di....ado......iu Idle C014070.0.On cheur.armonl stook..nand.NEAA2E0 Ty.3I3 and.,0rua bard I 81,111.....CM daralThra Ora accerlabra in 01.4.10.1ema in A.100,10.1 31107 Omar. Cludndenc Von Orb dramings de mage Nee areadthet togal g regor en 1000 Jed L.1311L11144.1, dal..powd a...coral...whoa edeo diconoccl.10.101Orymmdaah 1dniopornlnewar yards 1.33. lc hare 46 0.0.orgy,.wer archarad darn.60000 be raids,.drth mininerm cendrhe ...on.For eboacomnressoN Ormsh dodo,No.ceche cornommor overt.,darter rola.. - 0 C16•4111nen.rn.:11.1,1dampen are actabtabra in syslams A.a Basgn cegoor litigate or exhaul rad.1.9 Or...0 ndorad Ohm...angle hicknesmermng runes a gral.Aar Irandorrner omernahal for...D.,Ourn.magualreceixortary me000 , cap00.12.01 elm Or 00. FroMhou.Fernich dhicas on control pahl lam 3. Adjust..to um.of operation.NI.progaamaring,oel pran.a.ohm..... Ph.nardat Us,galranFed heel 000,conform.lo egientEMPONAtor COSSPUCtiOn,18000., • . T,',7,===,'ZI12f:,',:27..;','=""'''"""dr"'"'"'"."-"'"'" gl.,°•2,30=f,"`'`. a thcroprecomor Web nOrl,c1,111¢na.mory.BalTery bacttip,plern 7.11.be OCCeptte NO. MU DESCRIKION . • b. Edam:.10 hual DID..pow hil M., , Supple from einglo iona unur dr .. Control tharidorroor 0 some XI obnindled,re...control compononla. 01 04304 lb r6301 I OR DO PFIC1/11 2. DEDICATED OUTDOBR 4117 URI 9/ABIABLE VOLUME A2-.1,01.-ASED) J. 0.09F cogrol.00. 07 ..3.6 ION RE,AV Sri - a. the Nob...am harl monalar tne apace tamped.am humid.arm.0.10 ai holing...Ping 0 Ehaust-hue mean,0 fan,1 1 ilowndream e Rep..,a.m.mnbollad main.mace M...end huroday CUL,SERENA 1 ?rms.mused elyal.RM..r..1,:tura e,ierl and Mahar.ores..E....hug 6. . r.”...+7 :Ems,oR E.,. b. Dm.tan.am yard.volb.ane PJ,cog....ME is ache U..roam...61E063.S SE010.0ENT Whir..a 2.11, .00.10 rne.asuP a 15ele,age.and leatmeSme lorneeratures bed.az ohona:heal he. CONSTRUCT. c. Cool.mode Factory mniroN cacte and Vape un,./..1011.1e ommoin65 surply atlemeholug Lmol A AP Man...oh and lonerruh.0,0,and ail due wair.endraboos co.,.agar,.loaving Nil tompo.a...0.30.1 pomp dawn pr..and 04 02.10 la .000.11 f: . (0.0.1,T.rooeulMng hob.to..7011.,1410.to nddream 0.Cense Sup.,611PBE The Sealtbead 13 All ion.rbojcinl.and.2,001.1.40. th1000. Epp y1.0,13.11 boss oporal.at Me 14..WO Cool:87S..(030 de7aul0 and modulate b.eon recond or fiat oval huh ham.need not be Sealed Ms seteoihar4 100,a anoe.x mod..Leming.Tempera.6.00 Tr....lomlo ancrade connoonons Oncluding Om nm,rniled te ommes,aaps,branch.,ammo.: 2 1.111,01,15.2111.1dde the 10110,,11,1aions, ri. fitalin,ode:lac,c,n,:c1:urr.clo.gare tehollo maid.apace lomporaluda framec,,louneurche to eq... 0.01 wail peneration.inciode but are.11.,led 10 scrawahapo,thessmd.berreo Roc:,hi,ealing a. A.m.crag 10.0 3 00.1 801601 EXPANSION AIR 11.81110ERISINGLE BONE VA. auac„,, la Marmot,shoe omormanra are rraddentarad Ir.and p.c..an aurdaday.co... . A rho h utora cotsiat or a log ka,110r.,eadrIt 15dalar and DX.01,and drhar shou...or ...a mg..,10, O. %acra Whim hail h....ane hoe..audgros. Suu,ly And while ar du4.11.aIrletidiOn,revrn er oan au al cdds,ot.d.oric SealLoyelA . 0000 Centrerband ma Imumphdleeduct Whs..and combo..by gib ol cnaeg.a . C. 1 hog hall be 26 db..(40.)0calbane boatmen bohng ma com.haeo,rm ran NE..ahm Roam c meau.d..indhap StalOmor 61 clam tog lemn.r.loro a.temperature....era ego 7.1.F. Om.OMR. -.Oa motel 400 usi Hag..or alba,mash has 16001.cirn. 0 Erni..chi.MA rempiratum p.c.rale aT Parm,to an adhParde roase CB 71 F1,21P per rprode to,ICV,,19.05,,,•eci.mand cage at Ped. 0 In c.oling nags, Seal.Fchor33,13 air C.d.Clo.I.6.Do not ma oil or hr.:bah boalada in..lam..Do e. Smaudray lime she... I, Bo.shommoduthes au volume 0 mernamn cool.01poda,down 0 a anoomon:030, not a cog LEEDISCAOMD rola.mph::corr..iirmly inst....ra”seal.are nol t tgavalg hided turd tomeerslore/25011Forr,Fair,.and...lir le^112OT.10. 2. TI0 modulating cutup boureo.11.141.0 0 rdelntoin he Coding Suepla Air gdpoudias aupply la VF0 all.. g tinited.0 pump he oplionel heel NV.conecnoo.ccr pump Corgetcp chbol and . ‘1,111,1111111,11111.11 A 1111111,1nimum SA;I/Ce.lino Sm.0016 Ada.nal rno.g1)01,00,11111%,,,,oint abd ErumAymnalcual mod..be baalbe Womb..in...Sualatig of ma.rim dent Ea:11mm u prirdar.andho m 000.1.an..acial nom.run limu CU%h nead.to ma..a Ike Soa.Ter...ore ay.,.Soo.Conlin/Rmat P...dad. valor and aigight 00,tone lo Ma.141.44.110....vehnl..4f..11.h.., h. .41al.Ult.,.fkilaiiti 01.1•Dplwatinnf+.40..111mn cl ItsktrAle mcaulan.nd C0.01 1 0.10.3 a Spam Caors0 MTh,and a.So.Coo:.Imo 17.1Source$400,44 ovvice temporal,Thee 0-30h 1.17575 0 moo.ta dbact sunligmhoalag short,uhane Panaltdadarbonar tMendrorshr.e.are mow., i ozone,86,141:1.Poder33,19 cr Chigora CP146. i. Th.mamma.oho..I.Ei.,1,rraintenar.ce 2,1,1.1,pumps,ra in.rd...ard : e• F be..5.778- usenlefm,d main...we t...1,1. . . 1-1 1 EpaC,6.111Ser rr.pddiMes air..rolen..,,,manairl,e1,,,,,d41.11,a s,n011117 v X, DUD,0Na1 Oral,.SONEBBLE j Thai auclog p.a.to.orgile coe.au.option..rod.0 Isapronc.0.0 hod. 1- • d I.MOderhng heatel,Seutil,111111,d121e10 Tao,.tne S /..,0 Suppl.P.Setpc.1.64.111,,,I1 F.haulaTar ao00.Unhnod adomatar 0......11101 75 00 doh..th Or ala Unla Sball b. h. 11.4.1.2 Pad 0 enome tome hala.........000 hoo.a.W.0. - .begin oporeldra oh.Idiom,V90 rhatiegpeod E00 0.0011anednodulata hchoon h.selecinl aDo Awn..Mod . . I. Outel.ace dB..6.0...0.1.0 by..contael eloece .bleadnumNE dealing Speed(00%Demob.not.to maintain rho...londoratugdehd. Found,pi,Bylinochwernerly osuralud ut Cochran ha to 10 vdc.aign al Ty control 3.ya gra pc...omiegal Nal reclaim it..... Soo.noaang 107,and a Space 11.11,Lew Ref el....Shoor, Roar,.Intern.. n Ng..hend mod.to miloca ins hund oft.macnins by a usergahrmd.4.0 . Eatar.Nu her..inyored,eam RI thal 0.0001.14.01.e.a:tios shad ho datornagy d=7:ViN7YarlTd.gurnte=ta.'deVF .:41:11;;;V:V:),' ter,-Untsnd.n dem.M..d,...NA 19Inor.40114 a ran aNal....gy In. 3 r'l'7:' • .............Eachoy. maam*5303.337 1 Assomated Oulage ihr one 0.06e 00.occupod......hong uncc...hoed Ohs.au Bum..spoCie.d m duct 0.chg.aboa0 S..a unb io olt 2.0 I.yobtar is rn Marrn ....1 6 Fr,ttcon s.cubp kw)a.m...thersrass cordmmuta 0 ABM CI 1, aruld.Mame ....... he..he cleanal,und had merrat rrtmobiai 0.0 ger NITTA C31 022.Afiwted.r1.adhes.r.• 13. leforramoun 400.1.To,display Oh. eV •. 4 VAX 6111.1.200,369 AIR Ht001.611(SINGIEZONE VA. (1,1,13,613.0111.,,,s1,127.nr tEL.13.1,4,..1:,09,coverage and Mad,.12.0 minirn.nu,s. A The 5c..unitica.Adila a f,r1,,nicp.elec.D,eat.a,01111ed auter..1 Or DX.11 reddcian Eund ace olA671401071.the,edgea aud rhaderma..be halee,7..81,42. I.. Compromarlacherd de....,,-.. TT,il=7 . B 11,0 sxmou.had.04.00Jand unocc...laarroffar PEI,CF.6101,1 1,440),DP186 1004,0 01,Aard C Pere MaN.a 5 erg.MI...bu.on hearind.nil cool.mho,lanyde rIfl!Ilal ohm 3 Ltn.01,1116w during d•adband tinao Rd,.chub an.ersci rodula non us..400.0 in macion 23 07 03.:al.40.14 m.o.R. •t. ,Otlief....I ohlotal had red.:ru hormaza.brann • 0 1,palin,mud.. ratuni,11,1,11e.vin,mmirr.,1,.....a 4.11111q,a,nlamed 1,at.nellie torucns.S.,mr.011 6 Cooler am point a Space unser rrdAloas...mu lb mamtah h.,hi cog,do..to a minimum c13614 Roman hod 10.wept ha:Ahir.16.1 or Ian or.unit 1:.1•Returt air aoorg Pah.1 T E. C..:bse mg.le 7.1 2. leaving air 1,,..,,W0 is hairclIse 1,4,by modulaVan of the Ed..,....aie a,JO t.Ly 7 Ontided-her maelearedmdm acival.of geol.Mahn,cod(sea......., Flex auct E. tberrn,00 and...ma mMuncbon il5-'4-5 E In heariop mow Shaun.:entod ABC Ml.rd(8 dor be Ohl more Can 80 degres 4 7.dun shad.samo Toy.as a Enlan,anfl,V1,1.1111.1Pd1,11111.1.11. ....ir*-\•••1. 4,,ger.rnodularda.x4..To maintarn ha uoig,eown 0 a minimum or 260, ,dirturoar.A.510.0,001 68,610.66,614,661,8h1 01,tryled CIE OF Mhbursia0/4.00r 10.Edo..and Band..WWI:. 2 la..tir iMfircoucture ir conlmeg.1 9...Min 0 grahichuarrnet01(SCR cone. larthala.eabolod by telicaliCamonal.00.0 4.1.01.roblas immlubbn.m.bart.film From. yr Syalmn re........ F. Fro.NOT..AMR 4.110.0.4.0.0101.hhadradorcoll,04110.nwsidu, hag heed Ks.ma..arlhei or ut and hall have Muirnurn26/00 71,60/2..Weide. 17: dder rmi hum. demear and doscia.4,06.0 urdia ano........en rer4.04,.....(adamba o ET. O bra). Padere RAM,Edmarao PrE peghe,10,01.WE I.ovao e e.riapor Don.Perraratim..1.10 Or 1.5 13 Corn...nap hoary d • 7 c occ.,„ per duSTrat 016 prehoure A insole,.12 val.to romdthdrdourra....dart Imer cora hart 14.:Coehreahr...et of cadu . a Tama Oulaido air.is Abbro eurarg ase1.1<al 14...a.ia5cti.duo,hoc..home C.c.. maintain,ape snd%Hr.Wed RISC oegmb bends will,.el..r roird... . 15 tun.g day. • • 107 N at a.411.0.10 in alhall , • a DiL,P,rodult.in conju.tlion with to mcmpro.00.001.Ea c.a.,of disulayng 10 1_ • - 33 33 00 BRUM.ACCESSORIES ourag 8•0001 or•hem..Rervico co der.,opection of scary ordh.110.1.40,1an;NC . OXS10156-263614 M..manual Wm.0.04 rn se shwy ane ehmed n.,,,,Fmaideinaraglea..,, mr,,,,,,14 Imp Oillar 19 man.. , . Therm..fro.......rala 5,14v1,110,1:dde 7,muniels.7yees oar day...system is on,lan e.do. 0.......:1,1fe1.,Rt Cutla:e each a'Ir unit.Po..040..006,0 dart.g hch 4 Dragnos.hall rm...hilit.to 0.4 a Da:of rho 30...r froont alarrao of....a... I •.116.001.0 cornerudarral.TM..Oh.Mawr au ma.,no.M.o..gaire • druyinri.don dam.Coaliod 5Cri,i51 f of 0.al.here Diarday of amen codes who,dre D.0.afaar...age dei,,,Iti I Ai."''.'i..kk AeIronAla:d.oin1.1up e,stbarif daraq11111J.Lyelia,i3.1111 For Adrarna a 2000.1 or hot.mig VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS-our sidocraAamc . oat conam Cariaards-goal.81.60 hae Da ph..• r! corailoruglagodle mg,de000 0 boop0PF106 50.4315 BRANCHES)Amt.air(MDR 73 Rinelo Mg.Dar........aria:tra to 6 436:not blultiElma D.:.101 hoovad Pah 401, u ,aldrrhiolod he,r had alloxibe ahr Li alora na lets Ilan 33,.......clow : _reer&"''4 OUTSEERa 414.4011 down..mad..get..a f...tan. ,hart.........dinmee Mc.in mr.coa144 4r garrandad rd.clunahlw.andhlo aanguag.00.1.17.00 er,0.8:Par.400+MI. hared.Ehoplrn rm.eundorli13 rm...dm..am n.una bear,.,arrich clo.org 1 Th.Otto ontmoor hat ine4d51111,9111.,1110n p,//for uo.nuntca1inry yr.tna iomi 1 .P " • A r, ,,,,,,1 70 WAITII SYSTEM b....dorm..Er..dad,.nod 2 10.. PMF11111t10.46,..SAS Dad...a la[1.111.Lona.Iona..Iran,my point on.Chor. I I A The chikd am.00.consischord 01 whet hritinemachM0 Each hid.has a d g d a 1 e d is 0 0 r al rt,'''d:a7,11t'lt r's qo'n",-;41'711t1.Tnl'in '.rat,1'1.17:111t l':1171 htl',1'iof. '''''''''''''' : . I pummy horma amtur bomb.Th.bdiTE.opmator halithaothe option to opo.Ma hillg water Card rnarmall,or agornolichy fla•car...Mora ma lanalha ea..30 inchara furnish mghalcr A 1,-:11 wads. '4...ea' . Alladancy camper owls.oh.0......i.a.m.panal.10.0 caddy or rar.ca. a. Bre En all.1.10.1.6 Met...I.,,1111.31.5111/hug..la conionc...b. .5.hrted Ada.lr PuThe a.,hi,hall ha,a aranar mon.(p11,i)4,01.1 pardal moan.Ondled obertar.........11`...4 A..at...le rag.1inel 0:04 lax air Md. 11.00..1-10.01,141,Arian.80....01,,,pod.,...or chillo conhollird hall mnahl.0.,h moat,Pg una hth ha thlogn a cr... ' TOM REM LIBRARY E be hopped and durrod by.ENICS,0400 AM.M..BOA 4...in Me Hon.meroomed hom Ouldra.supply.)eut:.51a,darrmora hall have...urn Tea...410.3 dm.sem. 1 burg of ralugur hi charge or hi.Mae ba manu....d.maajna to carroty inter.. 00 • 3 F.a...arron 3522 LIBERTY DRIVE C.rdanuol hulled Walor 634ratran BAC...DAPPER,FaraTtobacion,gragyddanted,046,0 gap Mck areal or talr,a0 3 L...tuid rum... . PEARLAND, TX 77581 5 Each MUM.0:eurag is indarid,iy aimed bar cc..Run ho ESICS Each...end her La alUI111.11,11.,4.1,11 a PmiLle Bad s.a.e.s B14.1.0.11....ralllafree memo reida 6. aligh p11551.1111, g harm..inladehad a.AM.,.pur,to alati 20 accords gm.000 41:10 or 00.delchoi in Mgerirob ciap,onalbag beam....pla-Ad 0.41.6:ern.Adjuhnom dorlee ty pon.thing Cr 6 Eludricalmerlog. 1 Cu chg.was:rho..Illrei‘iler 0111,,,Val.,.,.:10.f IL,0.1.116.NIEr“Vz ha ro da....,1 v.s.Carmahar hard pras,e, b.irr.doally horror..110:101.00,..ou c.c.0 maint.a yarn.cnitad.1.00pla 7. 11,0 hod roclaird Waring turd lumen:arc . . i tor.:hum.12,10,0.0 the h....0:111%slopped..hilted.40 purnps agall hulott Phu chilloa onlinue.obor,Worried damn of:a.chi.date..han an nom..air.hall Id genera. FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS per 614.11A.Fab A odmusil.34 gage chi,.magi edging drip. . 00.0e ran reml 1 Amry p.m rim,.sl.have balornal overcuriont yrdechm Fabachphne 3 inchesh,UL b1I,e1-0000.0...or.ooaloo orraaran ala.rfhat rm. cog..To 67,604, . Fuarth 0.4.1 gage board MTh mum,gagster Copia,dr Sr:a..1n and k1,1,11,01.4frigaraM- . . Z µash..and 01 pre cc.141.6.rrwor Fornsh alarm pada.son loat hubm,ar4 li,I.II 0 .309 ..5d00pon10r.JIM.Ch..Unif. Who..chiral Mt.begam ovec.:n.-300.0,,I1911,1t semndac pumps shElbe 333100 AR REMAND ourLErs red:Ming con.0.7 d o rapparl,comp..Pa dun.....1.1Ande a1.1.1151,earn and a.,it. REID LIBRARY For air devices located in lay.d 0 ihgo,ventld had tog...grid a.one tin prdr to cd.r. Tom.04,3 licht ugh d Hee:.0.0modsserrnallonotondevothilied dr001.02.1610,or eau.. h T.1-1A 0 ad.ated and controllod by.4 yaria.Meed i:neaTeSpar.rig1t1systee,pie....11 be1115pe,1.8,0 la del,,. ...,..... e.p hail b.ahroo. 1 ADDITION & i • .n.„..1.,,d,,,,Ith.„.;„,„,,on,J..,,mt,,..,,o,,1‘.2.1„to,71,./,1,1„ 22,12e:P.M=2:V•.10/,AsHrtAs sr:.1.,„,,,,,,,,, ,,, '21IT,"17.1.I'ZI!,W,,rr°T "°'°"'''''s RENOVATION i r,=`,;,17.=II'Z'47:17:11'1,11A'a*".Iii .',,i., T,AV•trt'IIIt'II=VI' ""'''''''''"''"""''' P.a.(60.41).Cooper rat a,alaminorn I Do co..Ego..hoed and raid/deeph,orardo. hag.eid Magog rough.,limo J•1.11.1V,01.111,cp,10.11,51,1?1,b1,,,,Or ar,C141.1.11,1 F.' flow Ihroaf.10 hi,is proven..bine oolay gray'0 30 anconna adj)4 an orgime:Chan lb...y.0 E.g.mare..1.0.0:he duration orrei.b..in aft ah We B..31,1114,131. oohing Dual reernoroamm lor unda graabar Than mt..Patit m.o..carAddo 024 Paula tont. ‘; U1.1141 kled 0.111a,,,,nlgois.,,rgized Vahan the luad cadger dectuda Wra....10.4.0orbd Reg.reid new hem agar bidanhig and adjoaring la h..Frhida m.o..Illoimedia 4.40 ad Mr.melee ugh il rog...140..4 hu in oonduit Slacally did Eynarnimhy balanaddhdioalahla by a hrtml yens,.Ihe Warn dolor remeerathe exceeds sehoim the 10 DM..0.80..9 clum or mtg.diem in prom.area,.{ace cons,Pim dual od 0 air castems. heavo sup.On arAnurbod.isolator,701.yr11.iied dicharg........c.c.,UM. di.. s p PAO ad.cr.2 ha.cm.ed ha same nnor a.I lead..Wie. h.aOf aropriato relaya ta all.0.09.2 ol Unir be dm.energy managemr-m.clem , MECHANICAL Oil.riontaciv ad..maded,a 20 111,1.(a4)...,Is acmatuit.hi,.A mo LB 03 mod.Mk. 23 61 11 PACKAGED ViATHICHILLERS-AIR COOLED 7 can ba dMenergrad. Cara.9.1..Turn.XI/Va. 73 01 26 611.17.63920JA01.601113111131.46 SPECIFICATIONS ai httroorecoosor con...0.0001 Nag Oho Mr ought n ..4162ing 30 Pi I011191,,,01, AZ.On Carr.0.1..X.I.,ra.Trar. • 5 4401,1%C.1171====4'0741tV1=oty'fb'tV.1.7=Udr:121Za! Ted Bourg fant and hydro.pump ads...I.shall!.4.0.0.1 wilidiariably cage lh Md. arslora CH.hfraara hag ba operTAcald dmelcoad F....ehanal Ian h.,applicadoo OX FAN COIL UNITS:Factory parnbee ph..dud.Maga.-0.0 oduod main phi EN,Act. • ial.. e.g.and ormi,rafrahrard hcba oe.zabanhereaking hr hhh.adload ht.. ad,,,,,1 n1,11epard et,ar.contre,andOnner,cuppiy•Ind re1.,I.ducl fran5a,,,,,1,,,,ndtn fin,and . .....o for., rriu,ludarer,Card.reaphord...or fnrilori,g drai.A.Coil 1010,46,0 0 condensing. i! 48=oltreTusfneg'UN'N'ctIO?ga'o7o'bttn714=trirTafl:"4""''''''"'''''"' . a=Vo tzg'.1.12=;'2' t1 '?"'"'''''"'"°°F--°""- CO CO Igi 14i [ , • The theing CHW copply ternbcraturachallt00 as.bd..BTU Cod change: Eacb ab M13ndle:car1.1,,o1111,ran,n111,19.1101!,e ct.,.1,.1,,el314,..8i1"0.71,reuhttnera, ocutrul eanet Caregupal roll ump..oil leder cilloa el 9ght 200.char ohm... Ana aro a of Se buging hat ra ur 0 maws.cooling eumion araltrardrtril a signal lo he chg.manager to tor a.rrmor bearing Mauled lohdeation far.,iilld....1,1,5,ChB.rah.1.,N[101, gYV,[111rYtf:ItZly'SP:ZgriTI'SZ2i2"'""'''''''"""°"'"'""'r""" Ms..,pr.140or shall.oudicregato ocolodhcmgically saial..quidal.ago rnduction. ...day.relay AP hoe Tanjore:ion 101.hall b o pm..Dr.dualCO..... . . . , 000 FROJE63 00. DRAW1113 ITO. , 14171 DATE ' 10 30.2D1S . M401 i-6 ,'V"I - <,,,,•Et ill . 1 I . 1 i 1 , • 1 j i . . ,........) . II Dewberry I I L S O N Tom Reid Library Addition&Renovation Project No. 98114171 Bidders Comments - Addendum#2 02.10.2017 1.While looking at the opening schedule, drawing A.8.01, doors#02 and doors#04 thru door#20 say to have a panel above in the remarks column, but none of the frame details show a panel above it. Is this something that is existing or something new?Also, can you please help identify the locate door#2 on the floor plan? Reply: Doors 1 & 2 are not used in the project. Refer to 14/A.8.01 for the panel detail for doors#03-#10, #12-#15, #17-#20. 2.Can you please clarify the scope of work for the detention pond, if any? Reply: Refer to sheet C7.1 Detention for the pond modifications. See attachment A. 3. Drawings CO.1 and C4.1 refer to landscaping or irrigation, but the detailed information of the scope of work is unclear and there is no landscaping drawing. Can you please clarify the scope of work for landscaping and irrigation or its location in the project documents? Is there to be a landscaping drawing to be issued? Reply: Refer to drawing 01/A.0.03 for clarification on scope of landscaping and irrigation. No landscape drawings will be issued. 4. Drawing S3.02 Foundation Details, appears to indicate the installment of six bollards. Which are not called for in the drawings or details. Also drawing A0.04 Site Details—Dumpster Enclosure, indicates the existing slab is to remain, while drawing S3.02 shows a new slab in detail #13. Can you please confirm the installment of the bollards and their details? Also, please confirm the existing dumpster slab should be demolished and re-poured in accordance with the structural plans? Reply: Refer to 21/a.0.04 for bollard detail. Existing slab at dumpster enclosure to be demolished. Refer to drawing A.1.00. 5. The room finish schedule A8.03, indicates the wall and floor finishes for women's bathroom 101 are to be kept as existing. While on drawing for the demolition floor plan, A1.00, specifically notes to"remove wall and floor finishes and prepare for new finishes." Please clarify if we are to keep the existing finishes, or to remove the finishes and prepare for new one. Reply:The existing finishes in the women's toilet room are to remain. 6. Men's 134-The demo plans call for toilet partition and accessories to be removed, but the enlarged plans call for existing to remain—what is the scope of specialty work in this restroom? Reply:The existing toilet partition and accessories to remain. 7.Women's 101-The plans call to replace the ADA stall and the detail shows the panel attached to the (1111111'') new pilaster with a 1" offset between the existing and the new pilaster. If a new panel is required to extend the new pilaster out to match the offset detail,then offset would need to be a minimum of 1- 3/4". 5051 Westheimer,Suite 200 Houston,Texas 77056 Phone 346 231 0102 Fax 713 621 8716 mmcfarland@dewberry.com Dewberry WILSON Tom Reid Library Addition& Renovation Project No. 98114171 Bidders Comments - Addendum #2 02.10.2017 - Is there a reason why there has to be an offset? Couldn't we just pick up the existing line and extend it through the ADA front so that all partitions are in line? Reply: Refer to drawing 15/A.1.20.The offset of the toilet partition is to accommodate the 5'-0" clearance needed inside of the stall for ADA. 8.Which of the 3 plastic laminates on the in the finish schedule is assigned to the toilet partitions? Reply: Refer to drawing 01/A.8.03. 9. Division 95100 nor A.8.03 indicates what type of ceiling tile and grid to bid. Please clarify. Reply: Match existing ceiling tile and grid. Refer to drawing 01/A.8.03. 10.The finish schedule and RCP conflict as to new ceilings, existing ceilings, and drywall ceilings. Please clarify extent of new tile and grid. i.e. 107, 108, 111, 113, 126-131. Reply: Refer to 01/A.8.01 and 01/A.9.00 11. What is the extent of ceiling work at main library existing areas? Reply: Refer to 01/A.9.00. 12. E3.01, E3.02 and E3.03 show lighting controls.The sensors and key pads do not show up on E3.00 Lighting Plan. Where do these go? Reply:Once the project is awarded, it is common practice from all of the control manufacturers to provide a layout showing the locations of the packs, keypads, sensors, and panels, etc. Crestron has confirmed a layout will be provided. 13.The lighting control panel does not show up on the electrical one line diagram E4.00. please indicate how this is to be wired. Reply:The lighting control panel is to connect to Space 6 from the Distribution Panel "DPA". It requires a 3-phase,4-wire, 277/480V circuit as shown on the one line diagram on Sheet E.3.02. 14.While reviewing the electrical drawings, we noticed no plans indicating how the new light pole at the end of the street is to receive power. Would you prefer cable to be run from new panels LD,TLB, HB, or from the closet light pole (circled)? Reply: Please run cable from the closest light pole. 16.What was the scope of work concerning the fire alarm system. Is there a note addressing how the new is tied into the existing? Reply:We provided a performance specification for the fire alarm system work on sheet E.1.00. Provide new fire alarm devices as required tied into the existing system. 5051 Westheimer,Suite 200 Houston,Texas 77056 Phone 346 231 0102 Fax 713 621 8716 mmcfarland@dewberry.com Dewberry WILSON Tom Reid Library Addition&Renovation Project No. 98114171 Bidders Comments - Addendum #2 02.10.2017 17. We did not find any allowances indicated in the manual for this project. Please confirm if this is correct, or if there should be allowances for change orders. If there are no allowances, is each change order to be approved directly by the city council? Reply: Refer to specifications Section 01 21 00. 18.Please refer to drawing A6.01 Exterior Details, detail#7 Plaster Control Joint Detail,this drawing calls for Plywood, OSB Sheathing, cement board and base coat plaster with embedded mesh. However all the other details(#1, 2,4, etc.), call for%:gypsum sheathing with a bituminous plaster damproofing. Please confirm which design is correct,the plywood/cement board or the%gypsum sheathing. If the plywood/cement board is correct, please define the limits for this detail. Reply: Refer to 07/A.6.01. 19.Will any IT/Data Communication work be the responsibility of the General Contractor or will this all be provided by the owner? If this is to be done by the GC,will there be any additional addendums issued showing the IT/Data Communications scope of work? Reply: IT/Data Communication work will be installed by Brazoria County. (11111 20.Addendum#1 revised alternate#4 to provide floor to ceiling tempered glass in the children's area (Drawing A.1.01, area 104/Drawing A.1.14, area 109). Is this glass to be segmented to the cabinets' design or installed as a strait wall?We would also appreciate if you could provide the limits and a sketch for review. Reply:The full height glass is to be segmented behind the cabinets. 5051 Westheimer,Suite 200 Houston,Texas 77056 Phone 346 231 0102 Fax 713 621 8716 mmcfarland@dewberry.com ifii Dewberry' W I L S ON Tom Reid Library Addition&Renovation Project No. 98114171 Bidders Comments - Addendum #2 02.10.2017 N 41'34'15" E 800.72' Hui 90.15' `� tx` ` d' �: 7OF of SLOPE0 41.80 :. 10.50, 'NI l 41.4z5 p 1`0.50' a o, +00 0 RY 1 +00 0 1 -•' , - I I - I 4lI ii � a f..' O p C Attachment A J 5051 Westheimer,Suite 200 Houston,Texas 77056 Phone 346 231 0102 Fax 713 621 8716 mmcfarland@dewberry.com CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Section 00900 ADDENDUM NO.3 Date: February 16, 2017 PROJECT: Tom Reid Library Addition & Renovation BID NO.: 1117-08 BID DATE: February 16,2017; 2:00 pm Revised:February 21,2017; 2:00 pm(visit City of Pearland's website to confirm) FROM: Dustin O'Brien,AIA Debbi Mulcahy Dewberry Architects 5051 Westheimer, Suite 200 Houston,Texas 77056 To: Prospective Bidders and Interested Parties This addendum forms a part of the bidding documents and will be incorporated into the Contract Documents, as applicable. Insofar as the original Contract Documents, Specifications, and Drawings are inconsistent, this Addendum shall govern. Please acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Proposal form, Section 00300 submitted to the City of Pearland. FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ON THE BID PROPOSAL FORM MAY BE CAUSE FOR DISQUALIFICATION. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: 1. Section 00300 Proposal Form Part B—revised. SPECIFICATIONS: 1. Table of Contents—revised. sREDAR 2. Section 02 41 19 Selective Demolition�-added. � ��.••�tN e• yo 'fr 3. Section 05 58 13 Column Covers—added. �� Si• �` r% gb 4. Section 09 93 23.15 Sealed Concrete—added. r 1 •�0 r 5. Section 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation—revised. * 6. Section 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies—revised. 1:"A,(P.1:\ if 7. Section 09 30 00 Tiling revised. • .. ... ;�Q;:- CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS: 2, I(p 12D 144,,r•,74,74.43==r7; t,,4' 74140,57? -4 ascription! ARCHITECTURAL 2-22-12 00900- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM A.3.1 After reviewing the opening schedule on drawing A8.01,Windows& Door Schedule&Details, we noticed a few contradictions when matching door frame types and opening types. The smaller table to the right,referencing all the aluminum frame types,is also confusing when checked against the drawings. Can you please review and confirm the correct schedule for both charts of page A8.01? Reply: Refer to drawings 01/A.1.01,01/A.8.01, and 24/A.8.01. A.3.2 On bid form Part B, items#2,the Demolition section states: Demolition: Furnish all labor,materials, equipment, and incidentals required for major demolition activities to the extent shown on the drawings,including all demolition activities associated with the existing facilities. The demolition shall be performed so as to not disrupt operation of the existing facilities. This item shall not include demolition activities associated with specific process areas listed in Bid Items 3 through 12.Is this supposed to be list as bid items 4-11 (the alternates)?If this is correct, can you please clarify what bid items 3 through 12 are? Reply: Refer to Section 00300 Proposal Form Part B -Table 00300-1. A.3.3 What is the approximate age of the existing roof? Reply: About 6 months. A.3.4 Refer to 02/A.2.00& 03/A.2.00 for revisions to notes. A.3.5 Added alternate#9 on Proposal Form Part B—Table 00300-1.Refer to' Section 01230 & Section 281300. A.3.6 Revised Symbols Legend on A.1.01 &A.1.40 A.3.7 Removed/Added notes on 02/A.2.00 West Elevation& 03/A.2.00 East Elevation. . O"feele GENERAL: b C9 � 'Q®�, 10 r Attachments r f -4 i - Architectural Drawings r I p • - Contract Documents-Section 00300-Proposal Form Part'ti ° / - Specifications-Section 01230 Alternates ° �' °'•'.2 .8 •''�.le� o Section 281300 Access Control OF 1 "0 Specification-Section 02 41 19 Selective Demolition t C1 - Specification—Section 05 58 13 Column Covers - Specification—Section 09 93 23.15 Sealed Concrete - Specification—Section 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation - Specification—Section 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies ^� - Specification—Section 09 30 00 Tiling - Specification—Table of Contents 2-22-12 00900-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM (11.1h\ END OF ADDENDUM NO. 3 7 63 ,�i,.b'8�%�F�drr� CC tV,. y -rt.."' of (11", 2-22-12 00900-3 of 3 `��1'latttii;ip CITY OF PEARLAND lores QED Aikt4r,r BRAZORIA COUNTY,TEXAS ,4.$ .46;�i�r`��rff� TABLE OF CONTENTS =`�' r (.116 SECTION TITLE • • �rrrPNQr•. o DIVISION 0—BIDDING AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS \,1 00100 Invitation to Propose �s 00200 Instructions to Offerors 00220 Geotechnical Report (and report) 00300 Bid Proposal 00500 Standard Form of Agreement 00500-A Appendix A 00610 Performance Bond 00611 Payment Bond 00612 One-Year Maintenance Bond 00615 Partial Waiver of Lien and Payment Affidavit 00700 General Conditions of Agreement. 00700-A General Conditions Table of Contents Attachment No.1 to General Conditions of Agreement Attachment No.2 to General Conditions of Agreement Attachment No.3 to General Conditions of Agreement 00800 Special Conditions of Agreement 00811 Wage Scale for Engineering Construction 00811-A Wage Scale and Payroll Requirements for Building Construction .. 00850 TxDOT Local Government Project Procedures Requirements 00900 Addendum Template DIVISION 1 —GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 Summary of Work 01100 Summary of Work 01140 Contractor's Use of Premises 01200 Measurement and Payment Procedures 012200 Unit Prices 012300 Alternates 01290 Change Order Procedures 01310 Coordination and Meetings 01350 Submittals 013516 Alteration Project Procedures 01380 Construction Photographs 014000 Quality Requirements 01440 Observation Services 01420 Referenced Standards 01430 Contractor's Quality Control 01440 Observation Services 01450 Testing Laboratory Services 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01505 Mobilization 01550 Stabilized Construction Exits 01554 Street Signs 01555 Traffic Control and Regulation 01560 Filter Fabric Fence 01561. Reinforced Filter Fabric Barrier 01562 Waste Material Disposal 01563 Tree and Plant Protection 01564 Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 01565 TPDES Requirements 01566 Source Controls for Erosion&Sedimentation Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 00010-1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND TABLE OF CONTENTS 01570 Trench Safety System 01580 Project Identification Signs t".+, 01600 Material and Equipment J 01630 Product Options and Substitutions 01720 Field Surveying 01750 Starting Systems... 01760 Project Record Documents 01770 Contract Closeout DIVISIONS 2--EXISTING CONDITIONS 02200 Site Preparation 02220 Site Demolition 02252 Cement Stabilized Sand 02255 Bedding, Backfill,and Embankment Materials 02316 Excavation and Backfill for Roadways 02317 Excavation and Backfill for Structures 02318 Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 02330 Embankment 02335 Subgrade 02370 Geotextile 024119 Selective Demolition 02415 Augering Pipe or Casing for Sewers 02417 Augering Pipe or Casing forWater Lines 02510 Water Mains 02511 Water Meters 02512 Polyethylene Wrap 02513 Steel Pipe and Fittings for Large Diameter Water Mains 02514 Fire Hydrant Assembly 02515 Water Tap and Service Line Installation 02520 Valve Boxes,Meter Boxes,and Meter Vaults 02530 Gravity Sanitary Sewers 02531 Sanitary Sewer Service Leads or Reconnections 02532 High Density Polyethylene(HDPE)Solid Wall Pipe 02533 Sanitary SewageForce Mains 02534 PVC Pipe 02540 Tapping Sleeves and Valves 02541 Water and WastewaterLine Valves 02542 Concrete Manholes and Accessories 02582 Thermoplastic Pavement Marking 02603 Frames,Grates,Rings,and Covers 02624 Structural Plate Culvert Structures 02628 Jacking Pipe or Box 02629 Safety End Treatments 02630 Storm Sewers 02631 Precast Inlets,Headwalls,and Wingwalls 02632 Cast-in-Place Inlets, Headwalls,and Wingwalls 02633 Adjusting Manholes,Inlets,and Valve Boxes 02634 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 02635 Steel Pipe and Fittings 02636 Polyurethane Coating on Steel or Ductile Iron Pipe • 'i r�., ITO+ 02710 Base CourseforPavement ,�:• , .¢ ..A r 02741 Asphaltic Concrete Pavement "° ' A ttr., 02742 Prime Coat .e- 02743 Tack Coat. ti * g 02744 Single Course Surface Treatment �• ° a 02751 Concrete Pavement �, e0181),...,...... .�, 2. 02762 Temporary and Removable Reflectorized Pavement MarkingsG.F � 2,,l6 Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 00010-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND TABLE OF CONTENTS 02770 Curb,Curb&Gutter,and Headers 02771 Concrete Sidewalks 02775 Concrete Driveways 02811 Landscape Irrigation 02820 Wood Fences and Gates 02821 Chain Link Fences and Gates 02910 Topsoil 02921 Hydromulch Seeding 02922 Sodding 02931 Landscape and Tree Planting 02980 Pavement Repair 02981 Blast Cleaning of Pavement DIVISION 3-CONCRETE 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete G33000 Cast-In-Place Concrete 03310 Structural Concrete DIVISION 4--MASONRY 042000 Unit Masonry DIVISION 5-METALS 051200 Structural Steel Framing 052100 Steel Joist Framing 053100 Steel Decking 054000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 055000 Metal Fabrications 055813 Column Covers DIIVISION 6-WOODS, PLASTICS&COMPOSITES 061000 Rough Carpentry 061600 Gypsum Sheathing 061601 Plywood Sheathing 064000 Interior Architectural Woodwork 066116 Solid Surfacing Fabrications DIVISION 7-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 071113 Bituminous Dampproofing 072100 Thermal Insulation 072216 Roof Board Insulation 075216 Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 076200- Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 078413 Penetration Firestopping 078443 Joint Firestopping 079200 Joint Sealants slaL?.49 .itNr 079513.16 Exterior Expansion Joints ~�c.5 CN ip- L'•f,�11r� DIVISION 8-OPENINGS cc Q 081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames ... ... ....; . 081210 Prefabricated Interior Aluminum Frames ■'1► .:.,,.0789 .vt.::g 081400 Wood Doors 7.2* '••••.••.. P,�` 084113. Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts OF , 17 Addendum No.3-2/16/2017 00010-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND TABLE OF CONTENTS 087111 Door Hardware 088000 Glazing DIVISION 9-FINISHES 092116 Gypsum Board Assemblies 092400 Cement Plastering 093000 Tiling 095100 Acoustical Ceiling Systems 096500 Resilient Flooring 096813 Tile Carpeting 099113 Exterior Painting 099123 Interior Painting 099323.15 Sealed Concrete DIVISION 10-SPECIALTIES 102113.16 ToiletCompartments 102800 Toilet Accessories DIVISION 11—EQUIPMENT 115116 Book Depository DIVISION 12-FURNISHINGS 123640 Stone Countertops DIVISIONS 13-30—NOT USED. DIVISION 31 —EARTHWORK 311100 Clearing and Grubbing 312200 Grading 312300 Earthwork 312313 Subgrade Preparations 312316 Excavation Filling and Backfilling for Site Utilities 312323.15 Cement Sand Backfilling 212343 Trench Safety System 316329 Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts DIVISION 32—EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 321113.13 Lime Stabilization of Subgrade 321313 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement 321313.15 Concrete Sidewalks 321613 Concrete Curbs 2.iZtltt`""'4i}��?••• 321713 Concrete Pavement Joints o`.' E15'$R,C arrT 323129 Wood Fencing 323113 Chain Link Gates �'� �fiPfr ...�.. . ' $� r DIVISION 33—UTILITIES 330513 Manholes 94'•.�'>► '•••.?0189..••''••�a~ 331100 Water Distribution Mains '1 -9Pto ® 4" .. {� 334000 Storm Drainage 2.,-.;,�� Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 00010-4 of 5 CITY OFPEARLAND TABLE OF CONTENTS END OF SECTION • ti��y��R�D Agt'yrl�r C9� 5ttd•O•se o rr o f * r •• . ,r r ti5- O F I �•1 Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 00010-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND PROPOSAL PROPOSAL FORM PART B TABLE 00300-1 PROPOSAL FORM PART B Qua Spec ntity UOM Description Reference Unit Price Total Amount PKHD 1 Base Bid 1 Base Bid Mobilization and Demobilization: Furnish all labor,materials,equipment and incidentals required for the Contractor to mobilize and demobilize. Shall include all costs PKLN 1 1 Base Bid 1 LS for Contractor's insurances and bonds, 01505 construction/building and stormwater permits and fees,job trailers and site administration expenses and utilities.This item shall not exceed more than three(3)percent of the Total Bid amount of this contract. Demolition: Furnish all labor,materials,equipment,and incidentals required for major demolition activities to the extent shown on the drawings, PKLN 1 2 Base Bid 1 LS including all demolition activities associated 024119 with the existing facilities.The demolition shall be performed so as to not disrupt operation of the existing facilities.This item shall not include demolition activities associated with spec' process areas listed in Bid Items 4 throug 12. Renovation Summary of work: Furnish and install all labor,materials, 2 equipment and incidentals required for renovations to the buildings and their systems as Complete PKLN 1 3 Base Bid 1 LS shown on the construction documents,including Contract but not limited to,replacement and new Documents construction for mechanical,electrical, plumbing,building and structural. PKHD 2 Alternate 2 Alternate Work Items Work Items PKLN 2 4 Alternate 1 LS Additive Alternate#1: Section Work Items General Contractor to remove Endicott Pavers in 01230 Offeror's Initials: 00300-Part B- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND PROPOSAL Qua Spec ntity UOM Description Reference Unit Price Total Amount Lobby 105 and the entries to the restroom and apply a self-leveling float to floor and prep for new floor finishes. Install new scheduled flooring over prepared floor area. Endicott Pavers in Vestibule 100 to remain. Additive Alternate#2: General Contractor to leave existing Endicott Alternate Pavers in the Lobby 105 and apply a self- Section PKLN 2 5 Work Items 1 LS leveling float atop of the Endicott Pavers in prep 01230 for new flooring finishes. New scheduled floor finishes to be installed over self-leveling float. Additive Alternate#3: General Contractor to remove existing carpet Alternate and base in Conference/Multi-Purpose Room Section PKLN 2 6 Work Items 1 LS 107 and prep for new scheduled floor finishes. 01230 New scheduled floor finish and base to be installed. New scheduled paint on all walls in this room. Additive Alternate#4: Provide 1-1/2"Aluminum frame with''Y2"-thick Alternate tempered glass at the halfwall enclosures for Section PKLN 2 7 Work Items 1 LS bookcases in Area 109,floor to ceiling. Support 01230 as required. Refer to 21/A.1.21,22/A.1.21, 18/A.1.21 & 19/A.1.21 for location. Additive Alternate#5: Pressure wash,sand,prime and repair as Section PKLN 2 8 Alternate 1 LS required to bring"like new"appearance to the Work Items 01230 cross members at the metal canopy above entry. Paint scheduled color. Additive Alternate#6: Alternate Remove existing light poles and light fixtures in Section PKLN 2 9 Work Items 1 LS the parking lot. Replace with new light poles 01230 and fixtures to match. Additive Alternate#7: Dwgs Alternate Provide new 130 ton air-cooled chiller in lieu of M.3.01, PKLN 2 10 Work Items 1 LS specified split DX equipment and packaged M.4.00,& RTUs. Refer to MEP specifications for details. M.4.01 Offeror's Initials: 00300-Part B-2 of 4 U U (-) (") CITY OF PEARLAND PROPOSAL Qua Spec ntity UOM Description Reference Unit Price Total Amount Additive Alternate#8: PKLN 2 11 Alternate 1 LS Demolish all ceiling tile and grid in library stack Section Work Items area.Replace with all new ceiling tile and grid. 01230 i Yk- Addi ive Alternate#9: Provide card readers.Refer to A.1.40 for locations. CR Symbol denotes locations. Alternate Section 281300 is provided in Section 01230. Section PKLN Work Items 01230 Contact:Michael Huffman w/ Convergint Technologies C: 832-524-6024, michael.huffinan6i;,convergint.com, 1420 North Sam Houston Parkway E. Suite 190 Houston, TX 77032 PIPWIIIIIPIPIIIIIIIINPIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIPIPIIIIIPIIMIAIPIPIIIIMAIIPINPIIIIIIIIIIPIIMIIIIIIMUIIIMIIIMIPIMIPIPIIIIIIII PKHD 3 Cash 3 Cash 2 Allowances Allowances Cash Cash Allowance:Provide an allowance of ($150,000)for additional work Section PKLN 3 12 1 LS Allowances 012100 approved/requested by owner. Exterior Signage Allowance:Provide an allowance of($10,000)for the replacement of Cash the existing exterior signage"TOM REID Section PKLN 3 13 Allowances 1 LS LIBRARY"located on the right side of the 012100 entrance.Match font type,style,&size,provide in aluminum finish,pin mounted to exterior brick. Offeror's Initials: 00300-Part B-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND PROPOSAL Qua Spec ntity UOM Description Reference Unit Price Total Amount Chiller MEP Fee:Add an allowance of ($20,000)for design fees for the chiller option. PKLN 3 14 Cash 1 LS Should this Alternate Option be selected,the Section Allowances awarded General Contractor will contract 012100 directly with their engineer of choice to design and implement. Offeror's Initials: 00300-Part B-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND PROPOSAL 1 PROPOSAL FORM PART B Project Name Tom Reid Library Addition & Renovation Project Contractor: Project No. F20002 Proposal No.: 1117-08 1. OWNER will award contract in accordance with Section 00100 Instructions to Offerors and based on OWNER selected Bid Alternate. 2. The above prices shall include all labor, materials, removal, equipment, temporary measures, overhead,profit, insurance and incidentals required to complete the Work. (.111 3. The Offeror agrees that extra work, if any, will be performed in accordance with Article 7 of the Conditions of the Contract and will be paid for in accordance with Article 6 of the Conditions of the Contract. 4. The Offeror shall provide an additive amount for alternate items listed in Table 00300-1, Proposal Form B (Additive Alternates#1,2,3,4,5,6, 7, &8). Additive alternate bid items are depicted in this project manual and not to be included in the price for work under Base Bid Items. 5. Explanation of Award: Explanation of Award based on the Evaluation Criteria is included in Section 00200 Instructions to Offerors. The OWNER reserves the right to award the contract for an amount equal to the lump sum base bid amount plus the price for any combination of Alternative Bid Items. Offeror's Initials: 00300-Part B-5 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND The minimum award will include the TOTAL Base Bid. It is the desire of the OWNER to award the base bid and OWNER selected additive alternates. However, project funds are limited and the OWNER reserves the right to choose any or all of the additive alternate items listed in Table 00300-1 and base the award on the package most beneficial to the OWNER. IT IS UNDERSTOOD that the City of Pearland will award the project based on the Total Proposal amount. The City of Pearland reserves the right to reject any or all proposals for any or all products and/or services covered in this proposal and/or to waive informalities in such proposals. The City further reserves the right to accept any proposals deemed to be the Best Value to the City. Offeror's Authorized Signature Offeror's Initials: 00300-Part B-6 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND PROPOSAL Section 00300 CONTRACTOR'S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT PART C (Required with all Proposals) Submitted to: By: INDIVIDUAL/PARTNERSHIP/CORPORATION/JOINT VENTURE The signatory of this questionnaire guarantees the truth and accuracy of all statements and of all answers to interrogatories hereinafter made under a penalty of perjury. A. GENERAL Principal Office Address: ("k\ Telephone Number: ( ) Fax Number: ( ) Email address: Indicate as Applicable: A Corporation A Partnership An Individual If a Corporation, complete this section: Date of Incorporation: State of Incorporation: Chief Executive Officer's Name: President's Name: Vice President's Name(s): Offeror's Initials: 00300-Part C- 1 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND Secretary's Name: Treasurer's Name: If a partnership, complete this section: Date of organization: State whether partnership is general or limited: Name and address of each partner: If an individual, complete this section: Name and business address: 1. How many years has your organization been in business as a general contractor under your present business name? 2. How many years' experience in this type of construction work has your organization had: (a) as a general contractor? (b) as a subcontractor? 3. Are you a member of the BBB, International Standards Organization (ISO), or other quality associations or quality certifying organizations? 4. Where is your main office located? 5. Have you ever failed to complete any work awarded to you? 6. If so,where and why? B. OFFEROR'S ORGANIZATIONAL EXPERIENCE Offeror shall provide satisfactory evidence that the following minimum qualification requirements are met, in order to be awarded the project: (1) The satisfactory completion by the Offeror over the last five or more of major renovation projects at fully occupied and operational municipal facility. Offeror's Initials: 00300-Part C-2 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND The listing of contact names shall indicate that your organization has no objection to contacting the named individuals. Additional information may be submitted. Label "Attachment A- PART C", if appropriate. PROJECT 1: Owner's Name and Contact Information: Project Name: Construction Cost: Scope of Work: Year of Completion: Location (City and State): PROJECT#2 Owner's Name and Contact Information: Project Name: Construction Cost: Scope of Work: Year of Completion: Location (City and State): (1.6\, PROJECT#3 Owner's Name and Contact Information: Project Name: Construction Cost: Scope of Work: Year of Completion: Location(City and State): C. OFFEROR'S KEY PERSONNEL EXPERIENCE Offeror shall provide satisfactory evidence that the following minimum qualification requirements are met, in order to be awarded the project: Key Personnel Experience -Provide qualifications of the project personnel who will perform key functions. Minimum information to be contained on the resume of each individual, if applicable, shall include: technical experience, managerial experience, education, position occupied on each assignment, description of duties on each assignment, and number of years with the organization. The following positions on your project team shall be identified below and shall be binding throughout the duration of the project unless otherwise approved by the Owner. C Offeror's Initials: 00300-Part C-3 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND What is the name and percentage of time allocated to the following personnel? For Project Manager? For Project Superintendent? For Scheduler? For QA/QC Personnel? For Safety Officer? D. OFFEROR'S PROJECT APPROACH 1. In what manner have you investigated this proposed work and inspected the site conditions? Explain in detail. 2. Explain your methodology for performing the proposed work, including Cost and Schedule control and QA/QC Control. 3. What portions of the work do you intend to sublet? (List subcontractors' names, specialties and percentage of work below). SCHEDULE OF SUBCONTRACTORS Offeror proposes the following subcontractors to be used for the Project(list others as applicable). All subcontractor specialties indicated below and any subcontractor scheduled to perform 5 percent or more of the Project work must be listed and submitted with the proposal. Offeror may change subcontractors after bid submittal only as approved in writing by the Owner. The information provided will be used in the evaluation of the Offeror. The references shall include name of project, Owner contact information, Engineer contact information and General Offeror's Initials: 00300-Part C-4 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND Contractor contact information. The contact information shall include name,phone number and address. TABLE 00300-2 SCHEDULE OF SUBCONTRACTORS PERCENTAGE OF SUBCONTRACTOR SPECIALTY WORK 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 4. What method(s) do you have to control your subcontractors? (111. 5. Have you used these subcontractors before and what have your experiences been? 11. Please supply references of these proposed subcontractors. (11111b.‘ Offeror's Initials: 00300-Part C-5 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND E. OFFEROR'S CURRENT WORKLOAD List the construction projects your organization has underway on this date. Project 1: Owner's Name and Contact Information: Location: Project Name: Construction Cost: Scope of Work: Percent Completion: Engineer Contact/Phone No.: Project 2: Owner's Name and Contact Information: Location: Project Name: Construction Cost: Scope of Work: Percent Completion: Engineer Contact/Phone No.: Project 3: Owner's Name and Contact Information: Location: Project Name: Construction Cost: Scope of Work: Percent Completion: Engineer Contact/Phone No.: Project 4: Owner's Name and Contact Information: Location: Project Name: Construction Cost: Scope of Work: Percent Completion: Engineer Contact/Phone No.: Are you currently in litigation concerning any of your projects? Offeror's Initials: 00300-Part C-6 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND PROPOSAL Section 00300 SAFETY QUESTIONAIRE PART D 1. List your Firm's Worker's Compensation Insurance Experience Modification Rate for the three most recent years as evidenced in Workmen's Compensation Insurance premiums. If your company is not Interstate rated,provide your intrastate EMR. 2013: 2014: 2015: The above-mentioned information should be confirmed by a letter from your Worker Compensation Insurance Carrier. 2. Are accident reports (OSHA 300) and report summaries sent to the following? And if so, how often? • Field Superintendent: • Vice President—Operations: • President of Firm: CIP6 3. How are accident records and summaries kept? How often are they reported? • Accidents totaled for entire Company: • Accidents totaled for Project: • Accidents Totaled by Superintendent and/or Foreman: 4. Existing Safety and Orientation Programs: • Summarize and submit the Offeror firm's safety program execution plan(1 page). Outline the training requirements and frequency, meeting types and frequency, and personnel responsible for executing the plan on site as a minimum. (11111'\ Offeror's Initials: 00300-Part D- 1 of 1 CITY OF PEARLAND PROPOSAL Section 00300 TECHNICAL PROPOSAL PART E A. ECONOMY OF PREPARATION. Proposals should be prepared simply and economically,providing a straightforward, concise description of the Offeror's ability to meet the requirements for the proposal. Elaborate bindings, colored displays, promotional materials and so forth are not desired. Emphasis should be on completeness and clarity of content. Vague and equivocal statements will be viewed unfavorably. This section needs to be uploaded as a separate document with the proposal in E-bid as a pdf. B. CONFIDENTIALITY. The Offeror may designate any portion of its proposal that contains trade secrets, or other proprietary data as confidential. If an Offeror includes data that is not to be disclosed to the public for any purpose or used by the Owner except for evaluation purposes, the Offeror shall: 1. Mark the title page of the proposal with the following legend: "This proposal includes data that shall not be disclosed outside the City of Pearland and shall not be duplicated, used or disclosed in whole or in part for any purpose other than to evaluate this proposal." 2. Mark each sheet of data it wishes to restrict with the following legend: "Use or disclosure of data contained on this sheet is subject to the restriction on the title page of this proposal." Offerors should note that despite such restrictions, the disclosure of such restricted information may be required under applicable laws, including, without limitation, applicable freedom of information laws. C. FORMAT. Proposal must be organized and submitted in the eight-section format as follows: 1. Offeror Firm 1.1 Organization 1.1.1 Give the legal name, address, and telephone number of Offeror firm. 1.1.2 State whether the Offeror firm is an individual, partnership, corporation, or a joint venture. If Offeror firm is a corporation, give state of incorporation. 1.1.3 Give number of years Offeror firm has been in business as a construction contractor. 1.1.4 Give number of years Offeror firm has been in business under its present business name. 1.1.5 Give any other names under which Offeror firm has operated. Offeror's Initials: 00300-Part E- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND 1.2 Claims and Suits. (If the answer to any of the questions below is yes, attach details.) 1.2.1 Has Offeror firm ever failed to complete any work it was awarded? 1.2.2 Are there any judgments, claims, arbitration proceedings or lawsuits pending or outstanding against Offeror firm or its officers? 1.2.3 Has Offeror firm filed any lawsuits or requested arbitration with regard to construction contracts within the last five years? 1.3 Financial Status 1.3.1 Provide a letter from Offeror firm's Surety stating Offeror firm's ability to acquire bonding in the full amount of the contract. 1.3.2 Provide a photocopy of the current Dunn &Bradstreet report showing Offeror's financial rating for the Offeror firm. 2. Offeror's Project Team 2.1 Provide an organization chart showing the Offeror firm's key personnel positions and lines of authority. 2.2 Give names, qualifications, and experience of Offeror firm's key personnel positions proposed for the project. 3. Offeror's Experience with Other Similar Projects 3.1 Give examples of Offeror firm's experience in constructing other similar projects within the last five (5) years. Provide examples as follows: Owner's Name: Project Name: Construction Cost: Year of Completion: Location (City and State): 3.2 Give references for Offeror firm's experience in constructing other similar projects. Provide references as follows: Full Name and Title: Firm Name: Mailing address: Telephone Number: 4. Offeror's Project Schedules for Proposed Project and Other Similar Projects: 4.1 Provide a summary level schedule for the project indicating the Offeror firm's proposed construction schedule. Base the schedule on calendar days, starting with the Owner's notice to proceed and end with final completion of the work. Owner is looking for 365 calendar days for substantial completion with Certificate of Occupancy. Offeror's Initials: 00300-Part E-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND (.111**.\ 4.2 Provide a summary level schedule for each similar project given under 3.1 comparing the Offeror firm's initial construction schedules with the final construction schedules. Base the schedules on calendar days, starting with the Owner's notice to proceed and end with final completion of the work. If the comparison reveals a disparity between the initial and final construction schedules explain why. 5. Offeror's Safety Program 5.1 Give the Offeror firm's primary insurance provider as follows: Full Name: Mailing Address: Telephone Number: 5.2 Give the Offeror firm's Experience Modifier Rate (EMR) and Recordable Incident Rate (RIR). 5.3 Summarize the Offeror firm's safety program execution plan (1 page). 6. Offeror's Quality Assurance Program 6.1 Summarize the Offeror firm's quality assurance program(1 page). 7. Offeror's Current Workload 7.1 Summarize the Offeror firm's current workload and state the Offeror's availability to start construction of the project. 8. Offeror's Proposed Subcontractors 8.1 Provide a schedule of subcontractors, including the work they will perform and percentage of overall work they will perform. D. EVALUATION CRITERIA Explanation of Award based on the Evaluation Criteria is included in Section 00200 Instructions to Offerors. The evaluation criteria for all proposals are as follows: Cost Proposal 52% Schedule 18% Reputation 7% Experience 6% Personnel 5% Approach 5% Sub-contractors 4% Safety 3% (.11"I\ Offeror's Initials: 00300-Part E-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND E. ACCEPTANCE OF EVALUATION METHODOLOGY Submission of a proposal indicates Offeror's acceptance of the evaluation technique and Offeror's recognition that some subjective judgments must be made by the Owner during the evaluation. F. QUESTIONS TO OFFERORS Offerors are requested to submit a complete answer to each of the questions listed in Section D. The answers to these questions will be the basis for the Owner's evaluation of the proposal and selection of the successful Offeror. END OF SECTION Offeror's Initials: 00300-Part E-4 of 4 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 SECTION 01230-ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. (11/11'\ 1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement. 2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates. C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Project Manual Specification Sections contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. (1111'\, ALTERNATES 01230 - 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternates: 1. Additive Alternate Bid #1: Remove Endicott pavers in Lobby 105 and all the entries to the rest rooms and apply a self- leveling float (refer to Section Alteration Project Proce- dures) to floor in prep for new scheduled flooring over prepared floor area. Endicott pav- ers in Vestibule 100 to remain. 2. Additive Alternate Bid #2: Retain existing Endicott pavers in Lobby 105 and apply a self- leveling float (refer to Section Alteration Project Procedures) atop of the pavers in prep for new floor finishes to be installed over self-leveling float. 3. Additive Alternate Bid #3: Remove carpet and base in the Conference/Multi-Purpose Room 107 and prep for new floor. Provide new scheduled floor finish and base and new scheduled paint on all walls in this room. 4. Additive Alternate Bid #4: Provide floor to ceiling 1-Y2" prefabricated interior aluminum frame with '/z' thick clear tempered glass located on backside of half height books shelf host walls in children's area. 5. 2 Additive Alternative Bid #5: Pressure wash, sand, prime and repair as required to bring to "like new" appearance the metal frame work and metal canopy above the entry. Paint scheduled color. ^� 6. Additive Alternative Bid #6: Remove existing light poles and light fixtures in parking lot. Provide new light poles and fixtures that match those used at the City Hall: Lithonia Lighting `D' series, size 3 LED flood luminaire on 25'#SSS square straight steel pole, to meet building criteria of 110 mph. Add new wiring as required for new fixtures. 7. Additive Alternate Bid #7: Provide new 130 ton air-cooled chiller in lieu of specified split DX equipment and packaged RTU's. Refer to Attachment Exhibit A and the Drawings. 8. 2Additive Alternate Bid#8: Demolish existing ceiling tile and grid in the library stack area. Provide new Armstrong 5/16" exposed ceiling grid and 24"x 24" Cortega acoustical . ,'e. 9. Additive Alternate Bid#9: Provide card readers. CR Symbol denotes locations. See attached Section 281300. Contact: Michael Huffman with Convergint Technologies C: 832-524-6024, michael.huffman@convergint.com, 1420 North Sam Houston Parkway E. Suite 190, Houston, Texas 77032. END OF SECTION 01230 2 3Addendum #3 02.16.2016 ALTERNATES 01230 -2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 (.111 EXHIBIT A TO SECTION 01230: ;�� ISO 9001:2008 CERTIFIED ENGINEERS PLANNERS • SCIENTISTS • CONS"CRUCTIO \ MANAC, GRS KC I 801 Travis Street,Suite 2000• Houston.TX 77002 . Office 713-237-9800•Fax 713-237-9801 Debbi Mulcahy, RID,NCIDQ,RAS Dewberry I Wilson 5051 Westheimer Rd, Suite 200 Houston, TX 77056 dmulcahy((r dewberry.com RE: Tom Reid Library Chiller Add Alternate rib'\ Provide new 130 ton air-cooled chiller in lieu of specified split DX equipment and packaged RTUs. Air cooled chiller shall be Carrier 3ORBF130 6 2 with dual-7.5 hp integral pumps equipped with VFD, or equal. Chiller shall be mounted on a new concrete equipment pad in existing exterior equipment yard. New chiller shall be provided with factory mounted DDC controls and shall comply with City of Pearland points lists and controls sequence of operation(as installed by Climatech). Indoor DX air handling units shall be removed from the scope and new chilled water AHUs with electric heat shall be provided. Chilled water AHUs shall be provided with three-way control valves. Roof mounted packaged DX 100% outside air equipment shall be removed from the scope and new chilled water 100% OA RTUs with direct gas fired heat shall be provided. Chilled water piping on the roof shall be minimized.New AHUs and RTUs shall be provided with factory mounted DDC controls and shall comply with City of Pearland points lists and controls sequence of operation(as installed by Climatech). New 6"chilled water piping shall be provided between new air-cooled chillers, existing east mechanical room, and new west mechanical room. Outdoor piping shall be provided with cellular glass insulation manufactured in accordance with ASTM C552-03 (Foamglas or equal)installed per manufacturer rec- ommendations. Indoor piping shall be provided with Cellular Phenolic Insulation(Koolphen or equal). Piping shall be provided with aluminum jacketing in accordance with ASTM B209. Acceptable chiller manufacturers are: Carrier Corporation,The Trane Company, JCU York, and Daikin. Acceptable air handling unit manufacturers are: Carrier Corporation,The Trane Company,JCl/York, and Daikin. Acceptable 100% OA unit manufactures are: Aaon, Carrier Corporation,The Trane Company, JCU York, and Daikin. ("lb.\ ALTERNATES 01230-3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 '"'`� ALTERNATES 01230 -4 CITY OF PEARLAND PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. The contractor shall furnish and install a complete microprocessor based access control system as specified herein. The system shall include, but not be limited to, all control equipment, power supplies, power circuits, electronic door locks, signal initiating and signaling devices, conduit, wire, fittings, and all other accessories required to provide a complete and operable system. 1.2 WORK INCLUDES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, apply to this Section. B. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, software, licensing, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of a card reader operated door access control system, as shown or indicated on the drawings and as specified. C. This access control system shall provide for controlled entry doors to be released when a valid proximity card is presented to the proximity card reader located adjacent to the door. This system shall monitor for unauthorized entry attempts, control access to the building, and log entry information. The system shall in no way impede free emergency exit from the building. Exit from the building shall not require special effort or knowledge. D. In shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to obtain all required approvals and certifications C1116. from authorities having jurisdiction. E. It shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to provide and install all conduit systems, stadard electrical boxes, and operating power for the building access systems as outlined on the project drawings. This Contractor shall coordinate all system requirements with and provide special back boxes to the Electrical Contractor prior to installation of conduit. F. The electrical contractor shall provide 120-volt power as required to the security system through separate dedicated branch circuits, maximum 20 amperes each. Each such circuit shall be labeled at the power distribution panel as ACCESS CONTROL. The location of all circuit breakers serving the system shall be posted in the control unit cabinets. Each cabinet shall be grounded securely to the building grounding system. G. Provide all testing, documentation, training, and warranty service as outlined in these specifications. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 26 - Provisions of conduit for communication, security&safety Systems. —General Contractor will be responsible to provide& install required conduits for communication, security&safety systems as it pertains to the card reader. B. Section 27 - Data Cabling. General Contractor will be responsible to provide & install required data cabling as it pertains to the card reader. 281300—Access Control CITY OF PEARLAND 1.4 CODES AND REGULATIONS A. Perform all work in strict accordance with the requirements and recommendations stated in the codes and standards except when requirements are exceeded by the contract documents. B. The equipment, materials, and installation shall confirm to the latest version of all applicable codes, standards and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction including the following: 1. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. 2. NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code. 3.Americans with Disabilities Act. 4. Texas Accessibility Standards. 5. International Building Codes (IBC). 6. Local and State Building Codes. 7.All requirements of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal procedures B. Submit a complete submittal package within 30 calendar days after award of this work for approval. Equipment is not to be ordered without approval. Partial submittals are not acceptable for review. Each submittal shall include a dated transmittal. C. Submittal may be electronically transmitted in PDF file format(preferred) or paper copies may be provided in quantities indicated in Division 1. Paper copies shall be organized including index tabs in a 3-ring black binder of sufficient size. D. Quality Assurance Submittal: 1. Letter from manufacturer stating that the Contractor is an Authorized Factory Distributor for the area where the project is located. 2. The Contractor and Manufacturer shall supply sufficient information to indicate that the proposed system is based on the latest hardware, software technology available. 3. Current copy of the Contractors Electronic Access Control Device Security Company license issued by the Texas Department of Public Safety Private Security Board. 4. Calculations for device circuit current drop and battery backup calculations. E. Product Data Submittal including special boxes, cable, and other material as requested by the Architect including: 1.A cover sheet with the name and location of the project, the name, address, and telephone number of the Contractor, and the name, address, and telephone number of the submitting sub-contractor. Include on or after the cover sheet sufficient space for review stamps. 2. An indication of any deviations from Contract Document requirements, including variations and limitations. Show any revisions to equipment layout required by use of selected equipment. 3. A product data index and complete equipment list including for each product submitted for approval the manufactures name and part number, including options and selections. 4. Cut-sheets or catalog data illustrating the physical appearance, size, function, compatibility, standards compliance, and other relevant characteristics of each product on the equipment list. Indicate by prominent notation (an arrow, circle, or other means)on each sheet the exact product and options being submitted. 5. Submit design data, when the scope of work requires, including calculations, schematics, risers, sequences, or other data. 281300—Access Control CITY OF PEARLAND (117 6. Any resubmittal shall include a complete revised equipment list and any product data that is revised. F. Submit shop drawings locating all components of the system, indicating circuit routing, cable type, and gauge. Shop or coordination drawings shall include information that will allow to the Contractor to coordinate interdisciplinary work and when necessary guide the manufacturer or fabricator in producing the product. Shop or coordination drawings shall be specifically prepared to illustrate the submitted portion of work, this may require diagrams, schedules, details, and accurate to scale equipment and device layouts prepared usinga CAD or BIM engineering drawing program. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS OF A PROPOSED CONTRACTOR A. Proposed contractors who do not currently possess the necessary qualifications, trained and experienced personnel, financial capacity, and meet the other requirements herein described will be disqualified. B. The Contractor shall be currently licensed under the Texas Department of Public Safety Private Security Board as an Electronic Access Control Service Installer Company to sell, install, and service private security systems. C. The proposed contractor, as a business entity, shall be an authorized distributor and designated representative of the security panel manufacturer, with full warranty privileges, and shall have been actively engaged in the business of selling, installing, and servicing commercial building alarm systems for a period of at least 5 years. D. Recently formed companies are acceptable only if specific pre-approval is requested, and granted by the Architect/Engineer, based on experience of key personnel, current and completed projects, and all licensing requirements are met 10 working days prior to the contract proposal date. E. All employees working on the project must be registered alarm system installers. The Contractor shall employ factory trained technicians capable of supporting the maintenance of the system. No contract employees are allowed unless they have been to the factory service school within the last 18 months.A certificate of this training shall be provided with the Contractors submittal. F. The contractor shall employ full time local technicians and installers. The manufacturer shall Maintain a full time factory employed service staff for product support and service. G. The proposed Contractor shall have an office within 100-miles of the job site, staffed with trained technicians who are qualified and licensed to supervise the installation, to be responsible that the system is installed as submitted, to conduct system start up and perform a 100 percent operational audit of all installed devices, to instruct the Owners representatives in the proper operation of the system, and to provide service throughout the warranty period. The contractor shall be capable of dispatching technicians to repair a system within six hours of a service request. H. The proposed contractor shall be fully experienced in the design and installation of the type of security system herein specified, and shall furnish with the contract proposal an itemized list of the installations of the type specified herein. The list shall include the name of the project, date of completion, the amount of the contract, the name, and telephone number of a qualified person to contact for reference I. The Contractor shall employ factory-trained technicians capable of supporting the maintenance of the system. No contract employees are allowed unless they have been to the factory service school within the last 12 months. A certificate of this training shall be provided with the contractors' 281300—Access Control CITY OF PEARLAND Submittal. J.The Proposed Contractor shall not have any grievances or complaints of record regarding workmanship, code compliance, or service response. A Proposed Contractor that has any prior finding(s) of a code or license violation, or has any litigation in process concerning the installation of a communication system is unacceptable. K.The ability of a proposed Contractor to obtain plans and provide a performance bond shall not be regarded as the sole qualification of the Contractors' competency and responsibility to meet the requirements and obligations of the contract. L. The Builder shall be satisfied that a proposed Contractor meets all the requirements expressed herein before including the Contractor's proposal in the project. M.The Owner may investigate, as they deem necessary to determine the ability of the proposed Contractor to perform the work.The proposed Contractor shall furnish to the Owner with any information or data requested for this purpose. N. The Owner reserves the right to reject any contract proposal if the evidence submitted, or their investigation, fails to indicate that the Contractor is qualified to fulfill of any part of the contract or to complete the work contemplated therein. O. The Owner reserves the right to reject the proposal of any Contractor who has previously failed to perform properly, or complete on time, contracts of a similar nature. 1.7 PRE-APPROVAL A. Proposed Contractors wishing to propose systems which differ in manufacturer, features, functions, or operating characteristics other than those outlined in these specifications must do so in writing to the specifying authority at least ten (10) days prior to the proposal opening. B. For manufacturers equipment or models other than that specified, the Proposed Contractor shall supply proof that such substitute equipment equals or exceeds the features, functions, performance, and quality of the specified equipment. Proposals must include detailed information showing all deviations from the system as specified. C. Proposed Contractors that do not obtain prior approval will not be considered an acceptable supplier for this project. Final approval of the alternate system shall be based on the decision of the Owner and Architect. Prior approval to make a proposal for this project does not automatically insure the system will be an acceptable equivalent. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. The system shall be fully compatible and integrated expansion of the existing City Wide Open Options Inc. software platform incorporating Mercury Security Systems Access hardware. Provide complete and satisfactorily operating Access Control System as described herein, using materials and equipment of types, sizes, ratings, and performances as indicated. Use materials and equipment that comply with referenced standards and manufacturers' standard design and construction, in accordance with published product information. Coordinate the features of all 281300—Access Control CITY OF PEARLAND materials and equipment so they form a functional system, with components and interconnections matched for optimum performance of specified functions. C. The system and all components shall be tested and found suitable for the specified purpose as part of a commercial building security system by a nationally recognized approvals agency acceptable to the AHJ. D. The control units, power supplies, batteries, subassemblies, software, firmware, and all cable, devices control units, power supplies, batteries, subassemblies, software, firmware, cable, and all accessories provided shall be listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. for commercial security system use under the latest appropriate testing standard. E.All date keeping hardware,firmware, and software provided shall be fully compliant with the calendar year designated in four-digit date format. Any time equations must function normally, leap year, and daylight savings time must be supported. F. Only equipment devices have been shown on the contract drawings. Specific wiring between equipment has not been shown. G. The system shall include but not be limited to all control units, power supplies, batteries, subassemblies, card sensors, software, firmware, and all cable, door release equipment, and all accessories required to provide a complete operating system. H. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with manufacturers' recommendations and the requirements of the components UL listing. Consult the manufacturer's installation manuals for all wiring diagrams, schematics, electrical requirements, cable types, and physical equipment sizes, etc., before beginning system installation. Refer to the manufacturers' riser/connection diagrams for all specific system installation/termination/wiring data. I. All equipment and components shall be new, and the manufacturer's current model.All like devices shall be of the same manufacturer and model number. J.All equipment shall be attached to walls and ceiling/floor assemblies and shall be held firmly in place (e.g., detectors shall not be supported solely by suspended ceilings). Fasteners and supports shall be adequate to support the required load. 2.2 RELATED WORK- NETWORK CONNECTIVITY A. The system shall be utilizing the customer's existing Ethernet system backbone for all security devices communications. B. No Ethernet cabling, network RJ-45 jacks, or patch cords are included in the scope of this Specification Section. C. The Owner will provide this Contractor with a terminated network drop at security devices, and the required TCP/IP configuration settings: static IP address, domain, gateway, and subnet mask. D. This contractor will program and test all access control system devices for connection to the network. E. This contractor will provide complete programming of all device parameters in accordance with the Owners requirements. 281300—Access Control CITY OF PEARLAND 2.3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES A.All references to manufacturer's model numbers and other pertinent information herein are intended to establish minimum standards of performance,function, and quality. With approval, equivalent, compatible, UL listed equipment from other manufacturers may be substituted for the specified equipment as long as all requirements are met. B.The system herein specified is an expansion of the existing City Wide Open Options Inc. Carrolton, Texas software platform incorporating Mercury Security Systems Access hardware,fully licensed solution, and this shall constitute the functionality, quality, compatibility, and performance of the system to be furnished, no exceptions.Any other proposed suppliers systems must be preapproved. 2.4 BUILDING ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM SOFTWARE A.The building access control system software suite, hereafter"System", system shall utilize Open Options software designed to secure facilities, people, and assets across multiple offices, buildings, or locations from any web browser. The total system expansion capacities shall include up to 500,000 individual credential identities, 50 concurrent web client connections for system operators, 2,048 card readers, 5,060 alarm input points, 5,060 relay output points, and shall store an on-line event history log of up to 150,000,000 events. B. The System shall provide a highly resilient, scalable software platform and enable seamless integration with IT and physical security including an OpenLDAP directory based credential database, Microsoft Active Directory Services user access authorization, operator activity logging, and auto-logout. The System shall support future implementation of additional survivability/ redundancy options including replication, IAM and SIEM integration, or hot standby/auto fail-over C. The System shall allow Administrators to configure how each alarm and event is announced by priority in the Alarm Monitor window with their associated event type and trigger source. Events may be conditionally configured to automatically send email message notifications, shunt/un-shunt doors, or activate mass denial of credentials ("lock down"). D. The System shall feature a web-based user interface and provide for identity management, digital video integration, and event and alarm monitoring that can incorporate graphical maps and floor plans. E. The System shall include an embedded calendar and be configurable to allow credential holders access to particular secure areas by access group, reader location, and day/time schedule. The System shall support up to 255 schedules, each with up to 10 intervals and 8 holiday types. Individual credential holders may be assigned to up to 16 access groups out of 255 possible access groups. F.The System shall support role-based reporting from the event database which may incorporate configurable parameters including door groups, door forced filters, alarm masking, door held open pre-alarm, extended cardholder strike times by credential holder and reader location, and custom device mapping/local alarm group assignments. G. Administrators shall have the ability to assign local alarm groups a unique group of alarm attributes for specific device-alarm combinations that will override the global settings for specific events including forced door, off schedule, or invalid credential presented. Input Control Module relay input or output events may be assigned options by location, including; 281300—Access Control CITY OF PEARLAND debounce time (a delay to prevent the natural reverberation of an electrical contact from being registered as a separate event), end of line resistance, normally open, normally closed, supervised, unsupervised, hold time, alarm masking, and whether to log all change of state events or only when the event is not masked. I. Output Control Module relay input or output events may be assigned options by location, including whether the System shall consider the output an active component of the on-line system, relay output mode, pulse time, and active by schedule. J. The System shall support input/output/event linkage whereby an input/output/event in an enterprise Intelligent Field Controller can trigger an action within the same enterprise Intelligent Field Controller. All linkage decisions shall be made local to the Intelligent Enterprise controller. Administrators shall be able to create macros linked to events and including up to 30 actions, each consisting of a sequence of actions to be performed, such as changing card reader modes and activating outputs. 2.5 BUILDING ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM DATABASE SERVER A. Utilize the existing city wide system and IP networking connection, provide additional licensing as required for this expansion. 2.6 ACCESS SYSTEM INTELLIGENT CONTROLLER/CARD READER INTERFACE A. Provide as required Open Options model SSP-D2 Intelligent Controllers with a built-in reader interface module allowing control of two doors off the board and a total of 64 using additional reader and/or 10 modules. B. Provide as required Open Options model RSC-2 Dual Reader Sub-controllers which provide the interface between door devices and the SSP Series Intelligent Controllers, each shall support two readers for two completely separate doors and also include additional inputs and outputs beyond the requirements for a typical door configuration allowing for system expansion. 2.7 PROXIMITY CARD READERS A. Controlled access door location as indicated on plans shall be provided with an entry card reader to allow access to authorized individuals as scheduled. Readers shall a weatherproof design capable of operation in indoor or outdoor environments with a temperature range of-31 to 150° F and a relative humidity range of 5 to 95%. B. Each proximity card reader shall mount on a standard single-gang electrical wall box, mullion, or on the surface of an interior or exterior wall and feature a read range of 6 to 9 inches. The electronics shall be potted with UL Listed potting compound to protect the reader from harsh environmental conditions. C. Outdoor weatherproof back boxes shall be flush mounted and connected to a '/z'threaded rigid pipe conduit and sealed. The reader casing shall be grounded to prevent electrostatic discharge from interfering with the operation of the reader. D. Threaded conduit is required for outdoor applications and dielectric grease shall be used to coat field connections. E. Provide low profile proximity card readers, black in color, designed for standard wall mount or narrow mullion mount as required. Standard size readers shall mount on a standard single-gang 281300—Access Control CITY OF PEARLAND electrical wallbox,weatherproof for outdoor installations. Standard size reader to be 3.0"x 4.7"x 0.68". p Narrow mullion mount size reader to be 1.7"x 6.0"x 1.0 F. Manufacturer/Model: 1. For all wall mount locations provide HID multiclass SE RP 40 readers standard single gang proximity card readers with mounting plate and gasket for outdoor installations. 2. For all mullion mount locations provide HID multiclass SE RP 15 readers narrow mullion mount prox- imity card readers with mullion mounting plate and gasket for outdoor installations. 3. For all outdoor gate reader locations provide HID multiclass SE RP 40 readers with mounting plate and gasket for outdoor installation. 2.8 DOOR CONTROLLER MODULES A. The following Mercury Security Corporation open platform controllers shall be configured to automatically receive policy and schedule updates for all identities and hardware configurations as distributed by the Open Options software platform.The controllers shall ensure security is enforced at the controlled doors -even when upstream network communications are temporally interrupted. B.All system programming shall be maintained in non-volatile memory such that program information is maintained even if all external AC and battery power is removed. C. Provide as required Power-over-Ethernet and/or RS-485 serial interface controllers and door modules that include a door/reader interface module all in one unit and support standard reader technologies, including Wiegand, clock and data, magnetic stripe, keypads, LCD and biometrics. D. Each module shall be housed in a wall enclosure and connected, internally or adjacently, to a 12 VDC battery backed up power supply. E. Intelligent door controllers (Network Controllers)—EP series control modules shall include an Ethernet port for communication with the Physical Access Control System Enterprise Appliance (EPACS)server network and an RS-485 serial output interface for communication with a group of door reader interface sub-modules. 1. One Door PoE Capable Controller, expandable to host a total of Seventeen doors, with data network Ethernet communications port, requires 12 VDC input or may be PoE IEEE 802.3af powered- 150mA maximum. RS-485 serial output control port for MR series interface modules and includes two onboard reader ports (for a single opening), two tamper inputs, and two outputs. Shall be Open Options/Mercury Security model EP1501. 2. Two Door Controller, expandable to host a total of Sixty-Four doors, with data network Ethernet communications port, requires 12 VDC input- 500mA maximum. RS-485 serial output control port for MR series interface modules and includes two onboard reader ports, eight tamper and power monitor inputs, and four outputs. Shall be Open Options/Mercury Security model EP1502. 3. Controller to host up to Sixty-Four doors, with data network Ethernet communications port, requires 12 VDC input-300mA maximum. RS-485 serial output control port for MR series interface modules, but does not include any onboard reader ports, inputs, or outputs. Shall be Open Options/Mercury Security model EP2500 intelligent controller. F. Door reader interface sub-modules (Interface Modules) - MR series interface modules shall include card reader ports, input monitor points, and control relay outputs. The following door controllers shall be auto-addressable, directly managed by an assigned Mercury Security EP series intelligent host controller, and shall be capable of elaborate processes and procedures 281300—Access Control CITY OF PEARLAND without host intervention, provide as follows: 1. One Door Ethernet interface controller, requires 12 VDC input or may be PoE IEEE 802.3af capable-300mA maximum, includes two onboard reader ports (for a single opening), four inputs, and two outputs. Shall be Open Options/Mercury Security model MR51 E. 2. One Door RS-485 serial interface controller, requires 12 VDC input- 150mA maximum, includes one onboard reader port, two inputs, and two outputs. Shall be Open Options/Mercury Security model MR50. 3. Two Door RS-485 serial interface controller, requires 12 VDC input-450mA maximum, includes two onboard reader ports, eight inputs, and six outputs. Shall be Open Options/ Mercury Security model MR52. G. Input Modules: 1. Open Options/Mercury Security model MR16IN EP series RS-485 serial interface multidevice panel providing the ability to monitor high concentrations of system auxiliary inputs. Each shall be capable of supporting 16 general purpose input circuits which can be individually set for normally-open or normally-closed operations and can be declared supervised and non-supervised. Individually configurable parameters can be set for sensitivity ranges, timing parameters, and end-of-line resistance values. H. Output Modules: 1. Open Options/Mercury Security model MR16OUT EP series RS-485 serial interface multidevice panel providing the ability to control high concentrations of system auxiliary outputs. Each shall provide 16 general purpose outputs as Form C relay contacts, each with individually configurable parameters, which may be set for timing and for fail-safe vs. fail (.111 ' secure modes. Each relay output can be configured to control outboard devices and can be activated by the condition of selected system devices locally or regionally without host intervention. 2.9 MODULE ENCLOSURES AND POWER SUPPLY/BATTERY BACKUPS A. Provide as required to house all modules, enclosures that shall be 19 gauge high grade steel with textured black finish enclosures for indoor use, suitable for surface wall mounting, and shall include battery backup power supplies where required. Each enclosure shall include a removable back plate for module mounting, a keyed lock, and tamper switch. Access power enclosures shall include a single AC power connection (for power supply), a pre-wired LSP power section. Each tamper switch shall be wired to a module input circuit for monitoring by the System. B. Provide UL 294 listed power limited source, filtered and electronically regulated 12 VDC output power supplies with short circuit/thermal overload protection, and automatic switch over to standby battery backup when AC fails. Each power supply shall include a built-in charger and sealed type battery. C. Power supply/chargers and batteries shall operating and emergency power to the system. Provide sufficient battery capacity for operation without AC power for all control modules, card readers, and electric unlocking/locking devices for a minimum of 4-hours (design calculations required). Include a 20% safety factor in battery calculations to ensure adequate performance for the service life of batteries. D. Enclosures and power supplies shall be LifeSafety Power Inc., FlexPower, MCLASS Mercury series, Unity/Altronix. 281300—Access Control CITY OF PEARLAND I. Power Controller Modules (Lock Controller Modules), multiple modules can be daisy chained from an expandable FPO series power supply to provide additional outputs that are relay controlled by the System with fault detection and reporting to host power supply. Each input may be programmed to respond to: normally open dry contact transition, normally closed dry contact transition, application of voltage between 9 and 33VDC, or removal of voltage between 9 and 33VDC. Each output circuit output may be programmed for the following modes: voltage output from power supply one, voltage output from power supply two, fail-safe, fail-secure, normally open dry contact, normally closed dry contact, or fire alarm over ride for egress lock: 1. C4P, Power Controller Module with 4 inputs/4 Class II (Power Limited) 12VDC controlled outputs (2.5A each output). 2. C8P, Power Controller Module with 8 inputs/8 Class II (Power Limited) 12VDC controlled outputs (2.5A each output). J. Batteries: Provide an up to 12Ah size sealed maintenance free battery per power supply/charger sized as required. 2.10 LOCAL ALERT SOUNDER A. Specifically identified individual controlled door locations as indicated on plans shall include a local alert sounder to indicate a propped open or held open too long alert. Provide at these locations adjacent to the door and affixed to a standard single gang electrical box concealed above the finished ceiling B. Provide an Edwards Signaling model 15 series, low voltage Miniature Lungen Buzzer with adjustable volume, chrome cover, and zinc plated base. Mount buzzer concealed above the ceiling, immediately above the related door. 2.11 DOOR SWITCHES (ACCESS SYSTEM DOOR CONTACTS) ll A. Provide door switches where indicated on floor plans with conduit run to a nearby, accessible, junction box located above ceiling. B. Door frame flush mount: Provide recessed magnetic contact door switch -GE UTC 1078-M switch to support access control system with wire leads as required or equivalent. C. Doors surface mount, heavy duty armored: Provide magnetic contact door switches -Sentrol, Inc. 2500 series as required or equivalent. 2.12 DOOR RELEASE HARDWARE A. Install all wiring and control devices necessary to enable limited access to the indicated points of entry. Each controlled access door shall be fitted with a door switch (above), control relay, and an electric latch or strike. Each controlled door shall be setup to allow entry as permitted by the building access system, to prevent unauthorized entry, and to allow free exit from the building without special knowledge or effort. Magnetic force holding or'mag' locks are prohibited by this specification. B. NOTE:All electric door locks shall be configured for fail-safe un-delayed free egress operation and fail-secure to prevent unauthorized entry on loss of power. C. Verify 281300—Access Control CITY OF PEARLAND D. Only when the door hardware does not include an integrated Request-to-Exit Switch, provide a request-to-exit sensor when required (see below). 2.13 REQUEST-TO-EXIT SWITCH OR SENSOR A. The system shall not be programmed to unlock a door automatically from a request to exit signal, as this presents a security breach. The request to exit signal shall be used only to indicate a normal exit status, as opposed to a forced entry. Exit shall be made with the normal door hardware and shall not be impeded or assisted by the electronic system. Exit shall not be affected if the power is off and the battery backup exhausted. When no request-to-exit switch is provided integrated into the door hardware (see above), provide at the exit side of each controlled door a request-to-exit passive infrared detector with x-y targeting and digital signal pro B. Request-to-Exit Switch Manufacturer/Model: Von Duprin/Sargent option request-to-exit switch or equivalent. E. Request-to-Exit Sensor Manufacturer/Model: Provide Kantech T.Rex model T.REX-LT or Bosch Security Systems DS150i series, PIR request-to-exit detectors, or equivalent. 2.14 CABLING A.All wiring shall be NEC type CM low voltage cable. B.All exterior cabling shall be in threaded rigid metallic conduit. All connectors must be fastened, tied, and crimped for maximum reliability. C. Avoid if at all possible junctions or splicing -all junctions in cable shall be made by proper splicing techniques in a junction box. D.All cabling is to be concealed where construction permits. E. This contractor shall provide and install new and unused ASTM bare stranded copper conductor wire per ANSI/NEMA codes. Follow the manufacturer's instructions.All wire shall recommended by the manufacturer for the application. F. All cable shall have a machine printed label located within 2"from every terminal block and within 6"from all other connections utilizing self-laminating flexible vinyl film labels. G.Wire gauge shall be selected per circuit based on cable length and current requirements based upon manufacture requiremetns LOW VOLTAGE CABLE TYPES Device Conductors Min.AWG Description RS-485 Serial Interface* 1-Pair Twisted 24 Overall Shield Point Contact/Relay 1 Pair-twisted 18 Overall Shield Card Reader(TTL)6-Wire 18 Overall Shield Low Voltage Power Combined 2-Pair Twisted 18 Unshielded Composite cable preferred at Card Reader locations to accommodate reader, door contact, rex, and (1111b.\ Electronic door lock power 281300—Access Control CITY OF PEARLAND Tappan, Commscope, Belden approved cabling manufacturues 2.15 Electronic door locking hardware and power supplies A. The access control c contractor will provide the door power supplies for the new electronic latch retraction, electric strike, mortise, and conventional exit devices. Reference the door hardware spec- ifications for any information regarding the power supplies or door hardware. The electrical contractor will be responsible for connection power to these power supplies B. The access control contractor will provide all Electronic door locking hardware including installation unless otherwise noted by the City of Pearland. C. The access control contractor will wire/connect the power supply to both the provided power source, to the EPT transfer hinge (if applicable—refer to the door hardware specs for pathways for all door locations) and to the door hardware for a complete circuit. The EPT or armored loop will be provided and installed by the door hardware contractor. Coordinate all installation wiring with the hardware contractor. D. Contractor will review the door hardware specifications to ensure there are no support issues with the door power supplies and the access control system. Report any conflicts to the Architect immediately. E.Acceptable manufactures 1. Schlage (SC), Sargent (SA), Vonduprin (VO), Folders Adam (FO), HESS (HS); as directed by City ^� of Pearland for each building. a. Electromechanical Mortise locks- Sargent Manufacturing (SA)—8200 Series.Schlage (SC)— L9000 Series b. Conventional Push Rail Exit devices—Sargent Manufacturing (SA)—80 Series.Schlage (VD— Vonduprin 35a/98/99 QEL series c. Security RIM Strike—Sargent Manufacturing (SA)—90 Series (FO)—Foldger Adams—310 Series d. Electric strikes- HES 2.16 CABLE TIES A. HALAR Fluoropolymer cable ties shall be furnished and installed to attach wire bundles to supports and for appropriate wire management as required. 1. HALAR wire tie, 4.0", miniature- Panduit PLT1 M-C702 or equivalent. 2. HALAR wire tie, 7.4", standard - Panduit PLT2S-C702 or equivalent. 3. HALAR wire tie, 11.6", standard - Panduit PLT3S-C702 or equivalent. 2.17 SURGE AND AMPERAGE PROTECTION A. Electrical surge protection shall be provided for all service entrance connections and on each copper pair that connects one building to another(i.e. any other portion of a building complex not under one continuous roof) at both exit points to prevent damage to equipment. 281300—Access Control CITY OF PEARLAND C`, B. System circuit surge protectors shall be mounted in a standard grounded metallic electric box. Shall be Ditek, 12345-A Starky Road, Largo, Florida 34643 model numbers as follow, multiple pair units are available, or equivalent: 1. Part No. DTK-1LVLP-X 2 wire protector for 12 Volt circuits. 2. Part No. DTK-1 LVLP-D 2 wire protector for 5 Volt circuits. 3. Part No. DTK-Z8LVLP-GP 8-pair protector for RS-485 serial circuits. All electrical surge protection handled by Electrical contractor 2.18 CABLE ROUTING, INSTALLATION, AND SUPPORT A. System wiring and equipment installation shall be in accordance with good engineering practices as established by the NFPA. Wiring shall meet all state and local electrical code requirements. B. Cable pathways, conduit, and cable support systems shall be complete with bushings, de-burred, cleaned, and secure prior to installation of cable. C. Before energizing the system check all cables for correct connections and test for short circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation. D. In all exposed areas such as gymnasiums, shops,field houses,janitors' closets, or mechanical/ electrical rooms all access system cable shall be fully enclosed in conduit. E. Ring and String: For low voltage Class 2 devices, indoor use in non-corrosive environments, in non-fire rated fishable walls only„ ring and string open cable placement may be utilized with a metal bracket/mounting plate with wing attachments in the drywall opening, provide in wall cable management where cable passes through metal studs and top plates, and a pull wire in lieu of an electrical back box and conduit stub. Mounting plate brackets shall be Caddy MP1S single gang or MP2S two gang for attachment to wall studs, and for cut-in Caddy MPLS single gang or MPLS2 two gang, no exceptions. Plastic or flimsy thin metal brackets are not acceptable. F. In wall cable management for open cables may include, but shall not be limited to: 1. Arlington Industries SB series non-metallic stud bushings and 440#plastic snap-in bushings. 2. Caddy ESG series easy snap grommets. 3. Carlon Plenum-Gard plenum rated lightweight corrugated conduit. 4. Panduit MSG and CSM series cable stud managers and grommets. G.Access system cables shall be run in conduit stubs from wall boxes to accessible areas above finished ceilings. Conduit shall be required only within walls and concealed spaces to provide access. Provide bushings to protect the cable from damage for conduit ends, box openings, and passage through metal studs. H. Access system cables shall be run in bundles above accessible ceilings and supported from building structure by j-hooks, conduit or cable tray. Cabling shall be loosely bundled with cable ties randomly spaced at 30 to 48 inches on center, cable ties shall not be tight enough to deform cabling and shall not be used to support the cabling. I. Do not attach any supports to joist bridging or other lightweight members.The support system shall provide a protective pathway to eliminate stress that could damage the cabling. J. Mount all equipment firmly in place such that vibration or jarring will not interfere with system operation. Route cable in a professional, neat, and orderly installation. 281300—Access Control CITY OF PEARLAND K. The cable shall not be crushed, deformed, skinned, crimped, twisted, or formed into tight radius bends that could compromise the integrity of the cabling. L.Access system cable must not be fastened to electrical conduits, mechanical ductwork/piping, sprinkler pipes, or routed to obstruct access to hatches, doors, utility access panels, or service work areas. Do not route cables through fire doors, ventilation shafts, grates, or parallel for more than four-feet with line voltage electrical conductors. Access system cables shall not be run loose on ceiling grid or ceiling tiles. M. Support shall be provided by mounting appropriate fasteners that may be loaded with multiple cables. If the weight load is carried by the support rod or wire, the support assembly may attach to the ceiling grid for lateral stabilization. The required support wires for the ceiling grid or light fixtures shall not be utilized. Any fastener attached to the ceiling grid shall not interfere with inserting or removing ceiling tiles. The cable pathway of supports must be positioned at least 12 inches above the ceiling grid. N.All cable shall have a label on both ends utilizing self-laminating, flexible vinyl film, non-smear, machine printed labels. O. Each cable run shall include a three-foot service loop with wire tie located in the ceiling above the control unit panel. This is to allow for future re-termination or repair. P. Provide for adequate ventilation to all equipment housings and take precautions to prevent electromagnetic or electrostatic hum. Q. All conduit, ducts, track, and raceways shall be supported from the structure at industry standard intervals for the size specified, utilizing proper anchoring devices. Cable fill may not exceed the manufacturers' instructions for each type of support. R.All conduit, duct, track, and raceway runs shall be spaced apart to allow for maintenance, such as the installation of couplings,without disturbing adjacent pathways. S. Each cable run shall be free of splices. No terminations, splices, or equipment will be installed in or above ceilings. T. All cabling will be placed with regard to the environment, EMI/RFI interference, and its effect on communication signal transmission. U. Do not route any communication cable within two feet of any light fixture, HVAC unit, service access area, electric panel, or any device containing a motor or transformer. V.Access system cable will not be installed in the same conduit, duct, or track with line voltage electrical cable. W. Maximum cable pulling tension should not exceed 25 pounds force (110 N) or the manufactures recommendation, whichever is less. X.Any pulling compounds utilized must be approved by the cable manufacturer and shall not degrade the strength or electrical characteristics of the cable. 2.19 TERMINATION PRACTICES 281300—Access Control CITY OF PEARLAND A. Strip back only as much cable jacket as required to terminate. B. Do not"loop" over wiring terminals, the cable could come loose and the condition not be detected as an open circuit or disconnected device. C. Preserve wire twists as closely as possible to point of termination (0.5" maximum)to keep signal impairment to a minimum. D. Avoid twisting cable jacket during installation. 2.20 BUSHINGS A. Provide a plastic snap in bushing at each box opening, passage through a metal stud, and at the end of all open conduit stubs or sleeves prior to cable installation to protect the cabling from damage: 1. Box openings-Thomas& Betts Knockout Bushing Series 3210, or equivalent. 2. Metal stud passage -Thomas & Betts Twist It Bushing Catalog Number SB1216-SC, or equivalent. 3. Conduit ends -Thomas& Betts Anti-Short Bushing Series 390 or Tite-Bite Combination Coupling Series 442, or equivalent. 2.21 CEILING MOUNTED DEVICE BOX HANGERS A. All ceiling mounted devices including: smoke detectors, heat detectors, remote power/status LEDs, ceiling mounted strobes and horn/strobes, et cetera, when mounted in a drop ceiling shall rft4\, be supported by an electrical box hanger(Caddy#512 or#512A for deep boxes -24"span), or equivalent. Box hangers shall be attached to the ceiling grid only for lateral stabilization, separate support wires shall be provided. The required support wires for the ceiling grid or light fixtures shall not be utilized. The backbox shall be flush and level with the bottom of the ceiling tile and the hole neatly cut for a finished appearance when the device is installed. B. Device and box hanger assemblies shall not be supported solely by suspended ceilings. Fasteners and supports shall be adequate to support the required load. 2.22 J-HOOKS A.Attachments for cabling support shall be spaced at approximately 48 to 60 inches on center. Each cable bundle shall be routed with enough slack to prevent damage to cables but not allowed to sag more than 12 inches mid-span between attachments.Attachments shall be sized as follows: Single cables or bundles up to four cables may be supported directly by the building structure. Bundles up to 1/2" dia. (Ten 1/4" cables)2" bridle ring, Caddy#4BRT32 or equivalent Bundles up to 3/4" dia. (Sixteen 1/4" cables) 3/4"J-Hook, Caddy#CAT12 or equivalent Bundles up to 1-5/16"dia. (Fifty 1/4" cables) 1-5/16"J-Hook, Caddy#CAT21 or equivalent Bundles up to 2"dia. (Eighty 1/4"cables)2"J-Hook, Caddy#CAT32 or equivalent Split bundles greater than 2"dia. or provide cable tray. B. Do not mix different signal strength cables on the same J-Hook (i.e. access system with telephone/data cable). Multiple J-Hooks can be placed on the same attachment point, up to the rated weight load of the attachment device. 2.23 FIRE STOPPING, DRAFT/NOISE STOPPING, PENETRATIONS, AND CORING (11111'\ A. UL Listed fire stopping methods that match the fire rating of the wall or floor being penetrated are 281300—Access Control CITY OF PEARLAND to be used at all fire barrier penetrations. Seal the interior of the conduit sleeve around the cables and around the outside of the sleeve on each side of the penetration with fire-stop caulk or putty, install according to the manufacturers' instructions. B. All penetrations through fire rated walls or floors shall feature a suitable length of metal conduit. Hole diameter shall not exceed '/2' larger than the conduit or sleeve to be installed. The hole shall be neatly cut, not oversize or irregular. Do not share wall/floor penetrations with ductwork, piping, line voltage electrical conduits, etc. C.All gypsum board or plaster penetrations shall tool cut using an appropriate hole saw/mandrel or manufactured assembly. D. Draft/Noise Stopping -All penetrations through non-rated walls shall include draft/noise stopping to minimize the transfer of air and sound between enclosed areas. This shall include but not limited to: 1. Neatly cutting all non-rated wall penetrations with a 1" maximum clearance. All gypsum board or plaster penetrations shall be tool cut using an appropriate hole saw/mandrel or manufactured assembly. The hole shall be neatly cut and not oversize or irregular. Do not share wall penetrations with other types of ductwork, piping, line voltage electrical conduits, communications cabling, etc. 2. Provide and install non-combustible mineral wool, fiberglass, cellulose insulation, caulk, and/or sealant as required. Seal the interior of conduit sleeves around the cables and around the outside of the sleeve on each side of the penetration with caulk or putty, install materials according to the manufacturers' instructions. E. The Contractor shall make every effort to coordinate with the building Architect, Engineer, Builder, and Electrical Contractor to have sleeves placed in new construction so that later coring or drilling of building structural members will not be required. The Contractor must consult with the building Architect, Engineer, and Builder prior to drilling, coring, or sawing of any wall, floor, etc. All penetrations shall be made at approved, appropriate, locations. F. Upon approval, the Contractor shall be required to supply all labor, equipment, tools, and materials to create any additional penetrations, and shall provide the sleeve, temporary and final fire stopping. Special care shall be taken not to stress, overheat, or penetrate any building support member. Coring shall be made with equipment appropriate for the dry penetration of concrete and block materials. Under no circumstances shall penetrations be made utilizing a chisel or percussion type equipment. Concrete, block, or plaster cores shall be made by dry saw methods only. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Scheduled automatic door unlocking/locking of specific entry doors shall be programmed to require verification before being enacted. A card from a select group at the local facility(including the principal/vice principals, etc. as requested) must be presented at the facility within a two-hour period prior to the scheduled unlocking event. This is to prevent the entrance doors from be unlocked when no one is present to supervise the students, such as due to a snow day or other unsched- uled occurrence. If a scheduled unlocking event is delayed, and a card from the select group is presented within two hours after the unlocking event was scheduled, the unlocking shall be enacted immediately. 281300—Access Control CITY OF PEARLAND IBUILDING ACCESS SYSTEM A. This access control system shall provide for controlled access through entry doors and into restricted areas when a valid proximity card is presented to the proximity card reader located adjacent to the door, only if the users' group access rights and time schedules allow for access. This system shall monitor for unauthorized entry attempts, control access to the building, and log entry information. The system shall in no way impede free emergency exit from the building. Exit from the building shall not require special effort or knowledge. Controlled door locks shall fail secure from outside entry on loss of power and backup power. B. The scheduling of unlocking/locking exterior doors and closing/opening gates for normal operating hours and after hours events should be the responsibility of each facility. Scheduled automatic door unlocking/locking of specific entry doors shall be programmed to require daily verification before being enacted. A card from a select group at the local facility(including the principal/vice principals, etc. as requested) must be presented at the facility within a two-hour period prior to the scheduled unlocking event. This is to prevent the entrance doors from be unlocked when no one is present to supervise the building, such as due to a snow day or other unscheduled occurrence. If a scheduled unlocking event is delayed, and a card from the select group is presented within two hours after the unlocking event was scheduled, the unlocking shall event be enacted immediately. C. The system shall provide the capability for individual controlled door locations as noted on plans to include a local sounder. Unless otherwise required, the local sounder shall annunciate when a 11116. door is held open, left ajar, or propped open for over one minute. If the door remains held open for over three minutes, a system Door Held Open Alarm alert shall pop-up and generate an entry in the log file for later review, the alert shall be automatically silenced and cleared once the door is closed. D. Door Forced and/or Door Held Open alarms shall have the capacity to be locally annunciated via Auxiliary Output relays on the individual controllers. This annunciation shall be controlled as follows. A direct one-to-one relationship shall be able to be programmed between the Door Forced and/or Door Held Open alarm and the auxiliary output. When either condition exists, the auxiliary output is energized.When either condition is cleared, the auxiliary output is de-energized. E. The system shall provide the capability for individual controlled door locations as noted on plans to include a local sounder. The local sounder shall annunciate when a door is held open, left ajar, or propped open for over one minute. If the door remains held open for over three minutes, a system Door Held Open Alarm alert shall pop-up and generate an entry in the log file for later review, the alert shall be automatically silenced and cleared once the door is closed. F. Controlled doors using a retractable latch strike shall, on a valid card read, activate the output to retract the door latch and immediately allow the exit door to be entered by standard pull lever operation; the door may then be opened without retracting the latch bolt.When the door closes, the latch bolt shall ride over the strike lip. The installation shall include dual switch monitoring, the strike shall have two SPDT contacts; one switch shall monitor the tripper, which is depressed when the latch bolt is inserted into the strike pocket. The second switch shall monitor the condition of the strike lip, indicating open or closed and locked conditions. G. Controlled doors with frame or mullion retractable strike, on a valid card read, activate the output to retract the door strike and immediately allow the exit door to be entered by standard pull lever operation; the door may then be opened without retracting the latch bolt.When the door closes 281300—Access Control CITY OF PEARLAND the beveled latch bolt shall ride over the lip and fall into the electric strike pocket. The installation shall include dual switch monitoring, the strike shall have two SPDT contacts; one switch shall monitor the tripper, which is depressed when the latch bolt is inserted into the strike pocket. The second switch shall monitor the condition of the strike lip, indicating open or closed and locked conditions. H. Controlled doors with a crash bar shall include electric latch retraction and a request-to-exit switch, the access control system shall, on a valid card read, activate the output to retract the latch bolt and immediately allow the door to be entered by standard pull handle operation. I.Where required, the system shall interface with electric door openers utilized for ADA access. This interface shall interconnect to door control interface to mechanically open the door when a valid card is read and the exterior door button is pressed. The exterior button shall also open the door when the door is scheduled to be unlocked without a card read. The interior door open button shall always be functional, allowing full egress, regardless of the status of the access control system; the interior button shall also be interfaced to the request to exit function. J. The request-to-exit switch or sensor shall provide a means for the system to monitor the status of the controlled door and detect a forced entry condition. The request-to-exit signal shall be used only to indicate a normal exit status, as opposed to a forced entry. Exit shall be made with the normal door hardware and shall not be impeded or assisted by the electronic system. Exit shall not be affected if the power is off and the battery backup exhausted. K.The access system door contact switch shall provide a means for the system to monitor the open/closed status of the controlled door and detect if the door is held open or left ajar after a valid card read. L. This system shall allow for normal exit, but also detect door held open too long (propped)and door forced entry conditions. Either situation shall generate a status condition event that is logged and acted upon in accordance with the system programming. M. The system shall have the capability of mapping inputs to outputs in a one-to-one capacity. When the input is triggered, the output turns on.When the input clears, the output turns off. N. Individual door switches shall also have the capability of being monitored for status. When the door is opened, the door switch shall trigger an internal controller timer.That timer will set a fixed uninterruptible time frame for another interlocked output to be turned on. This output is to be energized on any one of the three following situations: 1.A normal situation when there is a legitimate card read and the door is opened. 2. A situation where a key is used to open the door without a legitimate card read. 3.A situation where an ordinary Door Forced event occurs. O. The building access control shall be controlled, accessed, and updated via the web-based Client Software Application via a PC and the facility Ethernet network and by an Internet connection (if the network is configured for access). P. The building security system shall be controlled from its own internal software. Interface to the building access control shall be via hard-wired interface points. Q. All system programming shall be maintained in non-volatile memory such that program information is maintained even if all AC and battery power is removed. The master system database shall reside on the server and shall be constantly updated to all the Access Control System Panels via the Ethernet network connection. In the event the Ethernet network connection goes off line, the 281300—Access Control CITY OF PEARLAND system shall continue to operate in accordance with the latest copy of the master system database until the network connection is restored and the database updated. R. The web-based Client Software Application shall provide for authorized operators password protected access to the functions and operation of system including real time monitoring of status messages, verify and controlling settings and conditions, and for generating reports. S. The web-based Client Software Application Graphical User Interface shall include a real-time system status monitor that graphically depicts all logical devices on dynamic graphical maps with indicator icons to represent input/output points, and logical devices. The interactive maps shall display the state and condition of alarm points and the ability to monitor system status and event logs. T.The web-based Client Software Application software shall allow authorized operators to add and delete users, assign users into and out of various groups, to disable cards reported lost or stolen, and to re-enable recovered cards. Authorized operators shall be able to adjust the operating parameters of the system including group access rights and scheduling. 3.4 SYSTEM SOFTWARE A. Develop, install, and test hardware configurations, software settings, and databases for the complete and proper operation of systems involved. Assign software licensing to the Owner. The Contractor is responsible for the entire programming and setup of the system such that no additional programming is required. Programming shall include the setup of all available features of the software. C. Perform a full system back-up at completion of initial programming and deliver the configuration to the Owner. D. Perform field software changes after the initial programming session to "fine tune" operating parameters and sequence of operations based on any revisions to the Owners' operating requirements. E. The contractor is responsible for providing any additional software license to complete a project. 3.5 TESTING, WARRANTY SERVICE A. A factory trained representative of the manufacturer shall supervise the final connections and testing of the system and it shall be subject to the final acceptance of the Architect/Engineer and Owner. B. This contractor will thoroughly test all components of the systems and devices proposed herein to assure equipment specifications are met. This contractor will start up, test, and debug systems to ensure that all aspects of the system are working, documented, and reporting properly. C. This Contractor shall make a thorough inspection and test of the complete installed security system including all components and controls to ensure the following: 1. Complete and functional system. 2. Installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Verify proper operation and processing of signals. D. The installation will be verified through use of testing procedures designed to test all specific 281300—Access Control CITY OF PEARLAND functions and requirements of your system under various operating conditions. E. This Contractor shall provide a warranty of the installed system against defects in material or workmanship for a period of one (1)year from the date of substantial completion. Any equipment or wiring shown to be defective shall be replaced, repaired, or adjusted free of charge. All labor and materials shall be provided at no expense to the Owner. All equipment will carry a one-year warranty or manufacturer's warranty whichever is greater. 3.6 DRAWINGS, MANUALS, AND TRAINING A.As-built drawings and operating and maintenance manuals may be electronically transmitted in PDF file format(preferred) or paper copies may be provided in quantities indicated in Division 1. Paper copies shall be organized including index tabs in a 3-ring black binder of sufficient size. B. Upon completion of the installation, and prior to final inspection, the Contractor shall furnish asbuilt drawings. The architect/ Engineer must submits CAD background to the contractor to provide engineered drawings per the As-builts. C. In addition, the contractor shall furnish complete operating and maintenance manuals listing the manufacturer's name(s), including technical data sheets. Manuals shall include wiring diagrams to indicate internal wiring for each device and the interconnections between the items of equipment. Provide a clear and concise description of operation that gives, in detail, the information required to properly operate the equipment and system. Provide a parts list with manufacturer and model number for commonly replaced parts. Include complete instructions for the inspection, testing, and maintenance of the system. Include copies of all programming sheets used to configure the system. D. Provide the Owner a copy of the panel control software including the licensed program, site specific data file, and passwords that the Owner may require to maintain the system. Formal on-site training sessions shall be conducted by this Contractor. It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to coordinate time and location of training sessions with the Owner. Provide documented general instruction as follows: 1. Provide instruction to designated personnel on the functions and operation of the building access system including capabilities, limitations, reporting, monitoring, and the meaning of status messages. State the proper procedure for testing, routine maintenance, and request for service. Provide detailed instruction on the operation of the system including group scheduling, adding users, deleting users, and changing passwords. Provide a minimum of two (2) hours—two 2-hour sessions separated by a minimum of two weeks. 3. Provide the maintenance personnel to include the location, inspection, maintenance, testing, and operation of all system components. Provide a minimum of four(4) hours—two 2-hour sessions separated by a minimum of two weeks. END SECTION 281300—Access Control TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 (111 . Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 SECTION 02 41 19- SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Refer also to Section 02220—Demolition for site demolition work. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated (.11.7) to be salvaged or reinstalled. B. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. C. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician. B. Engineering Survey: Submit engineering survey of condition of building. C. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control and for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. D. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of elevator and stairs. 5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work. E. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition operations. Comply with Section 01380 "Construction Photographs." Submit before Work begins. F. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered. G. Warranties: Documentation indicating that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 -2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 rib\ Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and. Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS (111116\ A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Engage a professional engineer to perform .an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations. 1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. C. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs or video. 1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01380 "Construction Photographs." SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119-3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 2. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs or video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations. 3. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.3 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material and leave in place. c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material and leave in place. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 -4 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 5. Maintain fire watch during and for at least two hours after flame-cutting operations. 6. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 7. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 8. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 9. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 10. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. C. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 -5 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.6 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, and then remove concrete between saw cuts. B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, and then remove masonry between saw cuts. C. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, and then break up and remove. D. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings." Do not use methods requiring solvent-based adhesive strippers. E. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than what can be covered in one day by new roofing and so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight. See Section 07 52 16 — SBS Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing for new roofing requirements. 1. Remove existing roof membrane, flashings, copings, and roof accessories. 2. Remove existing roofing system down to substrate. 3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA-approved construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. 3.8 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. 3.9 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE A. Remove and Reinstall: Refer to Drawings. B. Existing to Remain: Refer to Drawings. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 -6 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 END OF SECTION 02 41 19 ("6\ SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 -7 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 SECTION 055813-COLUMN COVERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes snap-together metal column covers. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including finishing materials. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for column covers. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or design. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on 6-inch- (150- mm-) square Samples of metal of same thickness and material indicated for the Work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing column covers similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. B. Organic-Coating Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in successfully applying organic coatings of type indicated to metals of types indicated and that employs competent control personnel to conduct continuing, effective quality-control program to ensure compliance with requirements. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver column covers wrapped in protective coverings and strapped together in suitable packs or in heavy-duty cartons. Remove protective coverings before they stain or bond to finished surfaces. COLUMN COVERS 055813 - 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 ^� PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SNAP-TOGETHER COLUMN COVERS A. Manufacturers and Types: Provide Pittcon Industries EEC Snap-Lock Column Covers (basis of design), or subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Fry Reglet Corporation. 2. MM Systems Corporation. B. Form column covers to shapes indicated from metal of type and minimum thickness indicated below. Return vertical edges and bend to form hook that engages continuous mounting clips. 1. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), with not less than strength and durability properties of Alloy 5005-H32, 0.063 inch (1.60 mm)thick. a. Finish: High-performance organic coating. 2. Column covers may be fabricated from prefinished metal sheet in lieu of finishing after fabrication provided unfinished edges are concealed from view. 3. Increase metal thickness or reinforce with concealed stiffeners, backing materials, or both, as needed to provide flat surfaces where indicated. 4. Support joints with concealed stiffeners as needed to hold exposed faces of adjoining sheets in flush alignment. 5. Form returns at vertical joints to accommodate backer rod and sealant. 6. Fabricate column covers without horizontal joints. 7. Fabricate base ring to match column covers. 8. Fabricate with calk stop/stiffener ring. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Fabricated from same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with materials joined. 1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting column covers and for attaching them to other work unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method. B. Sound-Deadening Materials: 1. Insulation: Unfaced, mineral-fiber blanket insulation complying with ASTM C 665, Type I, and passing ASTM E 136 test. 2. Mastic: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M. C. Backing Materials: Provided or recommended by column cover manufacturer. COLUMN COVERS 055813 -2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Coordinate dimensions and attachment methods of column covers with those of adjoining construction to produce integrated assemblies with closely fitting joints and with edges and surfaces aligned unless otherwise indicated. B. Form metal to profiles indicated, in maximum lengths to minimize joints. Produce flat, flush surfaces without cracking or grain separation at bends. 2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Apply organic and anodic finishes to formed metal after fabrication unless otherwise indicated. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2604 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of column covers. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place column covers plumb and in alignment with adjacent construction. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install column covers. 1. Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return items with such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete refinishing, or provide new units as required. B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. COLUMN COVERS 055813 -3 TOM REED LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 C. Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide reveals and openings for sealants and joint fillers as indicated. D. Corrosion Protection: Apply bituminous paint or other permanent separation materials on concealed surfaces where metals would otherwise be in direct contact with substrate materials that are incompatible or could result in corrosion or deterioration of either material or finish. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new units. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes from damage during construction period. Remove temporary protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 055813 COLUMN COVERS 055813 -4 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 SECTION 072100 -THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Glass-fiber blanket. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET A. Glass-Fiber Blanket, Kraft Faced: ASTM C 665, Type II (nonreflective faced), Class C (faced surface not rated for flame propagation); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), 3-1/2 inch and 6" thickness, where indicated. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. 3. Knauf Insulation. 4. Owens Corning. THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids: 1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of puncturing insulation or vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time. C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION A. Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation. 4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm), support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs. 5. Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder facings, and seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation. a. Exterior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward exterior of construction. THERMAL INSULATION 072100 -2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials: 1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu.ft. (40 kg/cu. m). 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 072100 THERMAL INSULATION 072100 -3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No. 3 —2/16/2017 SECTION 092116 — GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes furnishing and installing: 1. Screw type steel drywall framing and ceiling system. 2. Gypsum drywall board. 3. Gypsum drywall accessories. 4. Gypsum drywall finishing. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Coordinate work of this Section with work of other Sections as required to properly execute the Work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of other Sections. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit product data for each drywall material and accessory required, including specifications showing compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 092116- 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No. 3 — 2/16/2017 A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Metal Support Materials; a. Clark Dietrich Building Systems. b. National Gypsum Co. c. Maverick Steel Inc. d. Unimast, Inc. 2. Gypsum Board and Related Products: a. Georgia Pacific Building Products. b. National Gypsum Co. c. USG. 3. Direct Suspension Systems: a. Armstrong World Industries. b. Chicago Metallic Corp. c. United States Gypsum Co. 2.2 FRAMING AND SUPPORT SYSTEMS A. Screw Type Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, fabricated from minimum 0.0179" thick zinc coated steel in sizes indicated. Provide 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" angle runner at perimeter of ceiling suspension panels for support of drywall panel edge and extruded aluminum ceiling panel edge closure trim. B. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system required. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; 640/660 Drywall Ceiling Suspension. c. United State Gypsum Company; Drywall Suspension System. 2.3 BOARD MATERIALS B. Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M. 1. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Flexible Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396, manufactured to bend to fit tight radii and to be more flexible than standard regular-type panels of the same thickness. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 092116-2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No. 3 —2/16/2017 1. Thickness: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Location: As indicated. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS, ACCESSORIES, AND TRIM A. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033- to 0.112-inch (0.84- to 2.84-mm) thick. B. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. 2. Acceptable Products: US Gypsum "Thermafiber Sound Attenuation Blanket" or Owens-Corning "Sound Attenuation Batts", or equal by CertainTeed. . C. Acoustical Sealant: See Section 079000 —Joint Sealants: D. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding (111.6 power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. E. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following: 1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), non-perforated. 2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size. F. Galvanized steel casing beads, corner beads, and other metal trim accessories as required. G. Extruded Aluminum Trim: Fry Reglet Corp., Norcross, GA; MM Systems Corp, Tucker, GA; or Pittcon Industries "Softforms," Riverdale, MD. Provide shapes as indicated. H. Joint Tape: ASTM C 475, plain or perforated. I. Interior Joint Compound: ASTM C 475 in two grades; one for bedding tape and filling depressions and one for topping and sanding. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION (1111 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 092116-3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No. 3 — 2/16/2017 A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow- metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Suspended Ceilings: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers at spacing required to support ceilings and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devises indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction. 3.3 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Installation Standards: ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation, except as follows: 1. Partitions With Brittle Finishes: Use stud manufacturer's published limiting heights for construction and single span conditions with a limiting deflection of L/360 and uniform transverse load values as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Partitions Without Brittle Finishes, More Than 10'-0" High: Use stud manufacturer's published limiting heights for construction and single span conditions with a limiting deflection of L/240 and uniform transverse load values as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Do not bridge building expansion joints with support system. Frame both sides of joints with supports as indicated. 4. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at terminations in the work and for support of fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, and similar work to comply with details indicated or if not otherwise indicated, to comply with applicable published recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, or if not available, of "Gypsum Construction Handbook" published by US Gypsum Co. 5. Isolate stud system from transfer of structural loading to system, both horizontally and vertically. Provide slip or cushioned type joints to attain lateral support and avoid axial loading. 6. Install runner tracks at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum drywall stud system abuts other work, except as otherwise indicated. 7. Terminate partition stud system at ceilings, except where indicated to be extended to structural support or substrate above. 8. Space studs 16-inches on center, unless otherwise indicated. 9. Frame door openings to comply with details indicated. If not shown, comply with applicable published recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer or of "Gypsum Construction Handbook" published by U. S. Gypsum Co. Attach vertical studs at jambs with screws either directly to frames or to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for jack studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. 10. Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated or if not indicated, in same manner as required for door openings; and install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. B. Curved Partitions: GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 092116-4 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No. 3 —2/16/2017 1. Cut top and bottom track (runners) through leg and web at 2-inch (50-mm) intervals for arc length. In cutting lengths of track, allow for uncut straight lengths of not less than 12 inches (300 mm) at ends of arcs. 2. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs. 3. Support outside (cut) leg of track by clinching steel sheet strip, 1-inch- (25-mm-) high-by-thickness of track metal, to inside of cut legs using metal lock fasteners. 4. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs at stud spacing recommended in writing by gypsum board manufacturer for radii indicated. On straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. 3.4 INSTALLING CEILING SUPPORT SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. 3.5 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216. B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. D. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place. E. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. F. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. G. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. H. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members using resilient channels, or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. (111.b\ GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 092116- 5 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 r-211) Addendum No. 3 - 2/16/2017 I. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. J. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8-sq. ft. (0.7-sq. m) in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant. 4. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. 5. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. t-w") 6. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.6 SINGLE LAYER APPLICATION A. Partition/Walls: Apply gypsum board vertically with vertical joints located over supports, but offset at least one stud space on opposite faces of partition/walls. Use maximum practical length boards to minimize end joints. B. Wall Tile Base: Where drywall is base for thin-set ceramic tile and similar rigid applied wall finishes, install glass mesh mortar units. Space fasteners not more than 8-inches on center. C. Curved Partitions: 1. Install panels horizontally and unbroken, to the extent possible, across curved surface plus 12-inch- (300-mm-) long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to them. 2. Wet gypsum panels on surfaces that will become compressed where curve radius prevents using dry panels. Comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations for curve radii, wetting methods, stacking panels after wetting, and other preparations that precede installing wetted gypsum panels. 3. On convex sides of partitions, begin installation at one end of curved surface and fasten gypsum panels to studs as they are wrapped around curve. On concave side, start fastening panels to stud at center of curve and work outward GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 092116-6 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No. 3 —2/16/2017 to panel ends. Fasten panels to framing with screws spaced 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. 4. For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws spaced 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. 5. Allow wetted gypsum panels to dry before applying joint treatment. 3.7 DOUBLE LAYER APPLICATION A. Mechanically Fastened Layers: Fasten both layers to supports with screws. For base layer, do not exceed 24-inches on center spacing at edges and intermediate supports, and for face layer do not exceed 16-inches on center spacing along supports of non-fire rated construction. At fire rated construction, comply with requirements of fire rated design indicated. B. On walls, apply both layers vertically with vertical joints staggered on opposite side of partitions and offset not less than 12-inches between layers. 3.8 INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL TRIM AND ACCESSORIES, GENERAL A. Where feasible, use the same fasteners, to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fasten gypsum board to the supports. Otherwise, fasten flanges by nailing or stapling in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 1. Install metal corner beads at external corners of drywall work. 2. Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or semi-exposed. Provide type with face flange to receive joint compound. Install L-type trim where work is tightly abutted to other work, and install special kerf-type where other work is kerfed to receive long leg of L-type trim. Install U-type trim where edge is exposed, revealed, gasketed, or sealant- filled (including expansion joints). Locate control joints (expansion joints) at the following locations and as indicated on the drawings: a. Where a partition, furring, or column fireproofing abuts a structural element; b. Where a ceiling or soffit abuts a structural element, dissimilar wall or partition, or other vertical penetration; c. Where construction changes within the plane of the partition or ceiling; d. Where a partition or ceiling run exceeds 30 feet; e. Where ceiling dimensions exceed 50 feet in either direction with perimeter relief, or 30 feet without perimeter relief; f. Where wings of L-, U-, and T-shaped ceiling areas are joined. 3. Install extruded aluminum trim at locations indicated. Cope and miter joints for neat appearance without voids. 3.9 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Apply treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions), flanges of trim accessories, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare work for decoration. Prefill open joints and rounded or beveled edges, if any, using type of compound recommended by manufacturer. (1111 \ GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 092116-7 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No. 3 — 2/16/2017 B. Exposed Drywall to Receive Paint and Other Finishes: Apply joint compound in 3 coats (not including prefill of openings in base), and sand between last two coats and after last coat. C. Concealed Drywall: Omit third coat and sanding on concealed drywall work that is not indicated for drywall finishing or for which finishing is not required to achieve fire- resistance rating, sound rating or to act as air or smoke barrier. D. Provide the following levels of gypsum board finish per ASTM C 840 and GA-214: 1. Level 0: Gypsum board within unfinished areas; taping, floating and trim is not required. 2. Level 1: Gypsum board within ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, unless a higher finish is required for fire resistance rated assemblies and sound rated assemblies. 3. Level 2: Gypsum board substrates to receive ceramic tile and similar solid finish materials. 4. Level 3: Gypsum board ceiling and wall surfaces specified to receive flat and satin paint or heavily textured wall coverings over non-textured surfaces. 5. Level 4: Gypsum board wall surfaces to receive flat or semi-gloss paint and light textured wall coverings. 6. Level 5: Gypsum board ceiling and wall surfaces specified to receive gloss paint and other reflective applied finishes over non-textured surfaces. E. At all corridor partitions, smoke-stop partitions, horizontal exit enclosures, and fire walls, permanently mark both sides of wall construction above ceilings with the words "Fire and Smoke Barrier- Do Not Penetrate". Use stencils and paint letters 3" high with message repeated every 10'-0"o.c. unless otherwise required by applicable Code. END OF SECTION 092116 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 092116- 8 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 SECTION 09 30 00-TILING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Tile floor, walls and base. 2. Tile backing panels at walls. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified. (11117: B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in its "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile." 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For grout, and accessories involving color selection. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Make samples at least 36 inches (900 mm) square, but not fewer than four tiles. Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed Work. 2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory. TILING 093000 - 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. 2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages. B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided. D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type, color or finish from single source or producer. 1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area. B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from single source or producer. 1. Obtain setting and grouting materials, except for unmodified Portland cement and aggregate, from single manufacturer. TILING 093000 -2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 (1.16\ Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise indicated. 2. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction, ANSI A137.1: Not less than 0.42. B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified. C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back-or edge-mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance. 2.3 TILE PRODUCTS (111' A. Porcelain Tile- Refer to Drawings. 1. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Mounting: Factory, back mounted. 3. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable. a. External Corners for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, same size as adjoining flat tile. b. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners. For coved base and cap use angle pieces designed to fit with stretcher shapes. B. Manufacturers: American Tile; Dal-Tile, or equal by American Olean; a division of Dal-Tile Corporation, or Crossville, Inc. 2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C 1325, Type A, in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 2. SETTING MATERIALS AND GROUT B. Dry-Set Mortar (Thin Set Floors): Bostik "Tile-Mate 710/760" with "Hydroment 425 Multi- Purpose Acrylic Additive," complying with ANSI A 118.1 and ANSI A 108.5 installation specifications. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide equivalent products by C- TILING 093000-3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 Cure, Mapei , Laticrete International, or Texas Cement Products will be acceptable as approved. C. Organic Tile Adhesive (Thin Set Walls): Bostik"Hydroment Ultra-Premium Ceramic Tile Mastic," complying with ANSI A 136.1, Type I. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide equivalent products by C-Cure, Mapei, Laticrete International, or Texas Cement Products will be acceptable as approved. D. Grout: Prepackaged standard unsanded Portland cement grout designed for joints 1/8 inch or narrower, conforming with ANSI A118.6 Color as selected by Architect. 1. Manufacturers: Laticrete International, Inc.; Bostik Construction Products; C-Cure Corporation. 2.5 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers'written instructions. B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions. C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Metal Edge Strips(Corner Guards): Bull-nose type profile. Material and Finish stainless steel Schluter No.E100EB. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Blanke Corporation. b. Ceramic Tool Company,Inc. c. Schluter Systems L.P. (Basis of design RONDEC). PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. TILING 093000-4 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 (11."\ Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified. b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed.by sanding or grinding. 3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed. 4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer. B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot(1:50)toward drains. C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and (.11116\ packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. 3.3 TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. 1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: a. Tile floors in wet areas. B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. (1111114N, D. Where available, provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges. TILING 093000-5 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 E. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting-bed thickness so that tiles are flush. F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. 1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work. 2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints. 3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated. G. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). 2. Quarry Tile: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). 3. Pressed Floor Tile: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). 4. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). 5. Porcelain Tile: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). H. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them. 3.4 TILE BACKING PANEL INSTALLATION A. Install panels and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. Use latex-portland cement mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. Th TILING 093000 - 6 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed. C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces. 3.7 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor: 1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA F113; thinset mortar. a. Thinset Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. b. Grout: As specified. B. Interior Wall Installations, Metal Studs or Furring: 1. Ceramic Tile Installation : TCNA W244C; organic adhesive on cement board. a. Grout:As specified. END OF SECTION 09 30 00 TILING 093000 -7 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No. 3 —2/16/2017 SECTION 09 93 23.15 — SEALED CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes furnishing and installing sealer to all areas indicated to receive sealed concrete finish. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Coordinate work of this Section with work of other Sections as required to properly execute the Work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of other Sections. 1.4 DESIGN/PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Performance Requirements: Provide a uniform application of water repellent sealer over areas indicated that prevents water absorption into the treated substrate and does not deteriorate in excess of limitations published by the manufacturer. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data for each stained finish system component required. Include application instructions applicable to Project conditions. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Arrange for work of this Section to be applied by an applicator specializing in water concrete staining work for at least 3 years, with a minimum of 3 successful installations similar to work required for Project. B. Products: Provide primary products, including each type of concrete stain and sealer produced by a single manufacturer,which has produced that type product successfully for not less than 3 years. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Schedule concrete sealing near the end of construction when construction operation will permit sealing without damage or deterioration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER AND PRODUCT A. Sealer: SEALED CONCRETE 099323.15- 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No. 3 —2/16/2017 1. Sealer: Clear, odorless, water-based, 0.0 VOC, penetrating "silconate" water- repellent sealer/hardener treatment for concrete, formulated to provide chemical hardened and densified surface that will not yellow, discolor, chip, peel, or show unsightly wear patterns with use. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide L. M. Scofield "Cementone" clear sealer, Houston, TX, (Tel) 800-800-9900, or equivalent by H & C Concrete Coatings, Cleveland, OH (Tel) 800-867-8246, or ProSoCo "Consolideck LS". PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Confirm that substrate is clean, dry, and free of substances that might interfere with penetration/adhesion of sealers. B. Test for moisture content in accordance with sealer manufacturer's instruction, to ensure that surface is sufficiently dry. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect adjoining work, including drywall, paint, cabinets, base, aluminum frames, wood doors, and similar work, from spillage or blowover of stains and sealers. B. Clean sealers from adjoining surfaces immediately after spillage. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning. C. Restore contaminated surfaces to new condition or replace contaminated assembly, at no additional cost to Owner,whichever, in the opinion of the Architect, is necessary to restore the work to new condition. 3.3 CONCRETE SEALER SYSTEM APPLICATION A. Apply materials in accordance with material manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations, using materials and procedures, including number of coats. 3.4 PROTECTION A. After completion and curing of sealed finish, cover completed floor stain with Kraft paper or other suitable protection so the completed floors will be without damage or deterioration at time of final acceptance. END OF SECTION 09 93 25.15 SEALED CONCRETE 099323.15-2 til 1 1 I' Im'0 i Iimo1 N..a x„• xrN xo-reDn nxal weNv 0 Dercm.Omw lR.xx . ' Io.xi iw.n�s axw nlmam wxF.NSAua anm��AN. �e.A,nmexN„AalRrxa, .�, chaDewberry. ROM O /1 KC1 Technology e 101 �w �/gym O M M� a n¢rc no me nu MU o m i w a v sa Me P1umILInQ ElEne nacre 1 �Rnu MUMS ` ® 1 rta.s w.m, �/(1u/7 m.NM.Rope xo Alma xw W.Rn .amlmam W.on mlmlmamw0 .mvavwtm.Ix M mamulNxmm.x nuou�a° Pinnacle Structural Engineers runilu um lmwror•mm•N newt —v— Structural Engineers /.4111 RYA NM 011/mars.lmut AU RI.>Y'MS.No -1---1 mrz sax 101..v1 rig gem x.m Onex�q orslw p.m",10 • a WV mm m rms OW.TO Ward,Getz &Associates 1 tor MAMA •,E,�,"ma„ „� Civil Engineers 0 SUB A.1 AMMO 10 PRO. 5105111 D¢rvc Aww SP111771117 mu. 7 �„/, wi vi Ammo aelm 1 s xm[ai.Imn m m Pal mmcpgxl v M.Ac SYMBOLS LEGEND N.T.s-I 20 NOT USED N.rs.I 10 GENERAL NOTES N.T.S. 05 • NO. DATE DESCRIPTION III• O O 01 10.30.15 ISSUE FOR DD PRICING ■ 03 04.36.16 505 REVIEW SET • 03 01.25.17ISSUE fOfl RID AND 11 1 l r. ■ ail pinsimmarimi r_e ,-,�• r-a, ,�._,. / QS 02.16.17 ADOENDU./1 •_ I " s'rie�r milmi p - E1• O 1 _gi - '� - O L a.".--- Lam_SIA. .1mn� - G O OI It O I O "177T il 1 i+, ri; m�, Y „"f1 I < L �OOjQI_.., r L7 r. 1 rA — .lL _ — — {F—T -T1.1_ T — rr � _-[ ,N [O - o out a �� RN!H C` _ •�� [©} O 'R 1i1/ . y ,_A' LO• I I 1 I I I `��` �`` I O \Q a `® ,.. iO'iJ:ry�u�� O \Q ❑ m�_ _-1 - - L- -J t-f7 �, " 0 O (z TSI"'aE`,'1 �O g 1 - 1 1 I h I VA 0 ::C 4 1 1, 1 1 I �% x.w.rcn D 1. 1 n 10 a 1 I 1: I #I Ice 0 1 1 1 I I I MI'•1 �m pl na r--I-- ---Jr- -� I r-- -, L- --L,,, O lI T i e• Y �j I 1 1 8 —Ili • -=--J L— --� — SIR/,.,, ..(0cr41 �IOAI I I 1 I e'mf" , .`\� TOM REID LIBRARY a y(�� u—°l m 0 aP :r e''' I 3522 LIBERTY"DRIVE r-1--O f�]_ I. \O iQ`4 PEARLAND, TX 77581 I i 11 Wit.-- I s I I / \v0 --- 1 I ---- v 7, I TOM REID LIBRARY riq6 '-e' I:/aL» 1 .P r-o0 �z& Q �` � �, 1 ADDITION & �L 1i IL� I I �� ^ -- ' RENOVATION (Mi I •y AI. ' 1 0O / Q _ O ay �� I I�i i r®�E�1 _l ��* o \` I ,� I ■ mr,1.m„ O "' I I«I LI' —I LJ ♦( ‘13 \ ■ RENOVATION FLOOR 1®- LD I 1i i -Im,,F a r❑-e" ' 07 1 En ■ PLAN s Il = I mJ _eL ] O I - I • ,_y-- u1..i1 1 �� g] Te,9 R241-� ,,r_q s07xT- [� ri-—, 0 g' O� -�z,_in a�� — 1 � —' A■ avat.m�_ iliet�s11�•1p� n�sii�w� o L0 Lm I-N m4. • ,,q,. 0-ava ea' IR'-qv. R� '"N. _ axe e n¢I,iaoal ,�'i WAG PROJECT NO. DRAWING NO. • 1,171 { E I_e'I. IT-�' , 1.-I 1 II I ny , N-f , n I p 1.t I s 1 1� . DATE A.1.O 1 ai/,�m i. 10.30.2015 I RENOVATION FLOOR PLAN i/0•=I-a•I O1 RF`:"I `mAI S. -awnro KA...saxRwaa po.a S L.W.1w N aRwa w D.WN�wN.O0TMA.VM LUC MCP TO M TM Dewberry' N_—mawwn wmu,e°�+uo— i.. racnmm,rawuww,Omw wmemw,auammug .OP. EC!Technnl STA � .imlIgyp�. .. Alechonlenl.0E1 ctricol. ashy P.w,nv,ro Imuvr 4 M i1Mw¢wa. n5,en sloe[ro Ram.use ,O hR rc nrow m,eiminnN'LE''' &plumbing Engineers "`MST. %e""'O,9 AT 1p° ® TO rm,.1e,V. eRnnhs m aces Na ww,rem mk. ...... Pinnacle Structural Engineers 4 'o-�s,R� :.Rr wo r •wW. v.w.Ie Mt.a:rola D cmm.Wlm.m„a ro Rclxw,wwu. Structural engineers L - — avvn o%wr WOO Associates Ward,Getz&Ass emrumule II,Vol a rw Civil Engineers 0 N.TO MST.COW.ALOOS VAS VIM.PAT..TM • Q as m a •SMOOTH 9...1.11.1 n # D.mrss wd tasma veae,O a'Di W ra :. SYMBOLS LEGEND Nn e aInf an «mn D N.T.s.120 N.*.%I 10 GENERAL NOTES NSJ 05 \ NO. DATE DESCRIPTION _ I 01 10.30.15 ISSUE FOR DO PRICING 02 0..2G.IR 50%RENEW SET 1.I - -1 03 01.35.1] ISSUE FOR BID AND 1 I e, CONSTRUCTION • yM. �1,...u■■■-... ,, —I "'RC'''. rm 1 0211G.1: ADDCND / I --- �,_:aMil el+ voi� _.;e3 DN I I— I I 1 _ I In' -m�ja_ — — 0402 II 1 [n1 = I :m' a� mrmn arm o �� I4MEM _ - - �G las U ICI mm 11 �I� mt:':u; 1 1 11 I — — T - , • I I 999. I • — /(%, — 'a '1' E 0 a- _. _ -F-T,-----7 7 _ 461P •••••• fit' e - - II - - _ - - 5 I81 :.' Q .�. a zi ° I_ I ? illIII — — — — _ O I BSI I : tr III Il — a II II _ _� Sul [ 0 ml m g m `IT:,+11L4 a �. `"Eelti. L 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 L 4,. a �7—.` IY k �IhI I�IhI •• O' `11 O '"' O 9 I l l t 1 1 1 6 6 m m - Rb ml7 d. . . ,�®I 1 �� 1 I1II� 1 I i I l 1 1 1 11 , I 1 I I I ' 1 m _II cp ir';: — 'ii M. —iti— . lt18-1 • // W lid I � I semeiHnos I „ �� d• TOM REID LIBRARY I — z ® / r�rn 3522 LIBERTY DRIVE p�_� I 1 IIII — — — — — II PEARLAND, TX 77581 ii ; � TOM REID LIBRARY IIIII II :sr. I ,�, I°""" '® y' ADDITION & �f I e I,112 I v 1111 �, +'+ I RENOVATION mom I I °„ FURNITURE, • ®' ;�; u J� ' 1°°' ELECTRICAL AND I B a 1_ m�— — O acl i► DATA FLOOR PLAN _/—. r m,,,„, ....; ll I WAG PROJECT NO. DRAWING NO. _. ._, _ ._ (f-1 6= t DATE • IIIIIIIIIIII 1 1 1 1 1 II 10.30.2015 • FURNITURE, ELECTRICAL AND DATA FLOOR PLAN A.=1'-0•101 Trrr I e:=el • • ,,,_..,) 3 J 'fig, /14) • OI.In...CIDA,tanma n,n —.WAN WN Min MR ro Ne1»nl n MI 200,0 N>wx ® Dewberry. I. _ Il'II i, KCf Technology Mil sn �/ '�.\ \\\�\ \\V/A' 0....2010 naw 1 • Me chnn, �i, �MON ;;:;::06ne8r. neers� �.1hh- i II _ __- _... _. - ,, 1a wNn sere n Ward,Getz Si Associates ® 10©M� _e - I I I -1 _ - - --- - - TOC1vi1 Engineers DOOR MO MI6 NO. DATE DESCRIPTION LEGEND N.r.s.I 30 EAST ELEVATION I6 _r D 01 mao.ls ISSUE rOF OD PRICING 04 02 04.26.16 50%REVIEW SET 03 01.25.17 ISSUE rOR ON AND CONSTRUCTION Q3 02.16.17 AOOENOUN/3 I MM.200r 10 MY. C\ 4 m I .a ///1��//%% � iarZ n era a.n �mNa.. II r I 1 I I I I I I I I _m, nmmmmm+:emmramamme I _,_��Af� I VIDi.y'�uL'�'. ,I.Ilea 0� e e •1 s !0, a f A, 3, e - ` ` 1 u _.�- 1....10111. H � _._ _fe°alSNhMC N8 °n�¢ mrtP —mxrur,N arem ___ `:Stara V murex Omwc as. POwN ' roJ I SOUTH ELEVATION wo w,,'1v" 1.0.001,2 BMW m d + Ie p \% .� ��L\`:� \` // v<\` m Mt I I I II 1 1— 1I 1 I I I M. - I --., -- °� ��8 I 1 b-I II I I II I I I I I I� ld Al aF md,°R § H � 1, lw��wrrw Air rrE.w:r.�l.�ew� _ _U � �ro — =-1 —Ir L' 1_-i—_4 H= --I � j ®m a 1.mP rl o oeoII �— TOM REID LIBRARY 3522 LIBERTY DRIVE PEARLANDI TX 77 501NOT USED N.r.s.I 27 WEST ELEVATION '/6''r'-D'102 I., TOM REID LIBRARY n°oR�OIn 44 °' ��\ // \�j/j�j/j�/ D��///a I rox ADDITION & __ � Q I 1 ie RENOVATION DWW P o a - o I , .�J_-"u , EXTERIOR 1 w�nm " _ __ "' - I ___ _-- I i 1-°—y ELEVATIONS I — — _ — L , ___ n PROJECT N0. DR nm to rorxo� _� osros amens mussx musty eomT Dunm r °V W60 PRO AWING N0. TO w,cx asnm DOTE A.2.0 0 30.2015 NORTH ELEVATION or=r-o 101 °a."I WI I . I - NDmn1 .1Ia�. P �m4 } Dewberry. ORD Men III v ® KCI apical El r T {' Macb.nhno Electrical. 1 fl I 1 i I la nce h Plumbing so Engineers 1• I 1 1 1 �os1.0 max m"[w"m ile114M 200 D. Im[b' IIIlllllllljut lllllll III ..O1 m.¢ �� Pinnacle Structural Engineers 1I3//.•T. .A of I.3/.ROOD COCO SOte CORE.>x I i/e]wl rm or]}4. I:m USED s�`1 - Structural Engineers ./a..M.S. ./al.aWmc e,DOOR INICUL •,max .1550. rm]oa Na M o' F.U.. O0 0.51.1D w sv.. - I III, a.rt smr DOOR SCHEDULED _ --- _ 4.443 wn US l SCHEEltED Ward, Engineers &Associates ,.- ,�- FRAME CI.11 Geta&.A '1 ,,mI I ', 1,�I- a 1111 I�KK 0.1 • 'I�, : 1�1�' I�II1 11 ju^ TM ,x�a�a '�F�� \ WINDOW HEAD �'=]'G'I1O DOOR JAMB �'=1'G'IO5 �� [Y Uhi,m Aumw.. G.�srs[w uu.wU. LAM 4ulo.w I U1417.u. ®'. Ip}G [ [ ( , N0. GATE DESCRIPTION 1 ana m[ 01 10.30.I3 ISSUE FOR DO PRICING .Y I I - EVIDY SET , I 'a 3I is ['� .am,Aaz s61 1 I 03 01.2,17 6SUCRfOR BID AND I,-•-- ■■■ •- retsaCSELER 3 Ns.541 MU-♦ l.m1U 'xoco¢o°Kas �10F 000000/A gO ��1 �� 1G ACM=6110.eO S.M. S \ Q 03.10.17 ADDENDUM/1 Ts -- „, I II. I AA�®aN .r»Ie1 - �1 . . 1 u mr I.Ole.rmu �I / • 16R A IIMIII.I QS 0z1a.17 AD0Ex0Uu/3 i 0R+e.al �rPE. r 00. x - nee•�• .. I. 1E1 ® 'n, TM[a. LOVrarac w SEW .66..TR. .1U.W..F=.", a x. III DOOR HERM2,2 IAI OPENING TYPES N.rs. 24 DOOR HARDWARE SETS N.Ts 119 HEAD 3'=1'-0'[14 WINDOW SILL 3-=r-a•109 WINDOW JAMB . 3-=1'-a'104 3 A t'3. 1� i--t- �� I -fill II r 1-' t �tp , I V.... .. I ti I LL u D 00.0 4606. r - 0 ,._,_II ll-- DDDR & "06"4 1..6u0. r..a .a...31a lwxa1.ga.n...11 mall I..a.m nn. I I muss Roos 0 424' e.,.i`F Rz s..'/.17 FRAME TYPES a•=1'-a•123 JAMB D•=r-0•118 HEAD 0-=e-a•113 JAMB 0•1'-a•108 THRESHOLD 3-=1'-D'103 .D N r.DmG ,"�, �1 1:/� A� Jule RED SIZE Dna. °°"° �a .�..Ri n,..1 SE' LD a „u. MUMS �� 0 _ - - .401 12/401104001 3. .D-O tom0, open 10/O01- - TOM REID LIBRARY a f JY m = ]/on01 ]/.n01 1./.a .nn.DD.e e _ o - - 4A01 Ie/in01 10401 04 ,e01 ./..4 1./..01 ..a ma V.am 1n/601.0/.301 3522 LIBERTY DRIVE 1 a .0 anal ,w3.01 WOO..eD2 RI 1 •A C-al - - 0/110 1442201 10/..01 PEARLAND, TX 77581 6 - •2-0' 03 - 3431 ./ram 4401 .P.5.4 - - - 1001 10201 1540.01 6 /A m - 0101 ./6.01 0401 .m.a3.m11 t _ - vuol 14.01 10001 -(�' - 3n01 3/A601 e/A801 .AW AD. ./.nm 16/44 100331 n r-0• rb• m - 34601 3/.n01 1y..0 0.1.a. w•-G.ra - - 1/.n01 w.n01 m/An04 10 W - 3oa01 5..01 IA/AM© .n.n.mp N r-0..-o• - - ./0..01 I0/0101 10/w01 II r-.•.per - - w.ODI I/aol10n.01 TOM REID LIBRARY 12 r4.pd a - V,... 4/..01 10101 A .m.1ma A 56 - .per• - - ./.n01 1060,1043.01 ADDITION & w 3/An01 pa 44201 0454 Ams - - v.,04 1e/.01 10/1a01 . 14 rc.r--0. E - 3001 4400114/.n01 .m.1.34 330 3 - - 060113/A.01ciao RENOVATION n -• 3/A601 4/4.01 WM01 .m...M. ,L 3. n - - - ./4601 la/0.01 104601 7, m - 3/4.01 ./6.01 13/4a1 - w - A - - 001 10/xa01 104601 3/3801 4/101 14/4.01 ./nm A.I 1C-p..rvm - - 4.01 ;Wm wpm la rp,•-0 - 34501 ./A.01 1./.n01 ./P6aAm.E 00 Io'�.np-r - - 1na01 1a.n01100.01 WINDOWS & DOOR .0 3nn0 14/60 .m.a.. Vaal mom w/301 SCHEDULES & • rcps 3/.,01 3pm1 1060 ./r.1.m2 1p4.11, ./.nn 14/26.01 10/..01 .+-o. - v.n01 3/.a01 anal, - . .- . - - 4.01 14..01 104n01 • DETAILS it r-o'.r-0- 3 - y.Dl 3/.m1 1]/ra01 - y.p-o• - - 1/Anal 1aDnm Ic/.nm • r-0..r-• 3/.013/ba 13/.01 - ,0-0...-0. - - . /.010/An01 . - _ _ U.S.dww u3[ WAG PROJECT Na. DRAWING NO. DATE A.8.01 lo.O.201s OPENING SCHEDULE N.T.s.I 91 ""I `::DI • .,.) . J CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Section 00900 ADDENDUM NO. 4 Date: February 17, 2017 PROJECT: Tom Reid Library Addition&Renovation BID NO.: 1117-08 BID DATE: February 21, 2017; 2:00 pm Revised to: February 28, 2017; 2:00 pm FROM: Skipper Jones, Assistant Director of Projects City of Pearland. 3519 Liberty Drive, Suite 300 Pearland, TX 77581 To: Prospective Bidders and Interested Parties This addendum forms a part of the bidding documents and will be incorporated into the Contract Documents, as applicable. Insofar as the original Contract Documents, Specifications, and Drawings are inconsistent, this Addendum shall govern. Please acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Proposal form, Section 00300 submitted to the City of Pearland. FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ON THE BID PROPOSAL FORM MAY BE CAUSE FOR DISQUALIFICATION. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: 1. Section 00100—Date proposals due revised to February 28, 2017; 2:00 p.m. SPECIFICATIONS: N/A CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS: N/A GENERAL: N/A.11 ' S 'per Jones (lib\ Assistant Director of Projects END OF ADDENDUM NO. 4 2-22-12 Addendum 4 00900- 1 of 1 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO PROPOSE Section 00100 INVITATION TO PROPOSE CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Competitive Sealed Proposal Electronic Sealed Competitive Proposals will be accepted for the following project, in the City's E-bid System. Electronic proposals shall be submitted through the City's web site at: https://pearland.ionwave.net/LoQin.aspx. All interested Offerors are required to register as a "supplier" on the City's E-bid System at the above web address and clicking on "Supplier Registration". Registration provides automatic access to any changes to the Plans, Specifications or Submission time and date. However, submission of an E-bid requires completing a short registration questionnaire found on this web site. When prompted to add or remove commodity codes registrants must add the codes listed below: * Building Construction Services,New(Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services,General(Includes.Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services,Heavy(Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services,Trade(New Construction) For more information regarding registration instructions, see INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS, Section 00200, included in the project bid documents viewable on the web site. Questions regarding electronic proposals should be directed to City Purchasing Officer at ebids(a),pearlandtx.gov. All Proposals submitted electronically will remain confidential until the opening date and time when they will be opened and read into the public record. Proposals shall be submitted on the form provided in the E-bid System and submitted electronically through this system to the City Purchasing Officer, City of Pearland, City Hall located at 3519 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581. Electronic Proposals will be accepted until 2:00 p.m., Tuesday, February 28, 2017. All Proposals shall reference the following project information in the appropriate locations in provided electronic format. All properly submitted proposals shall be publicly "opened" and read aloud into the public record following the closing of the acceptance period for the construction of: Tom Reid Library Addition&Renovation City of Pearland,Texas COP PN: F20002 BID NO.: 1117-08 A Mandatory Pre-Proposal Conference will be held at the Tom Reid Library at 3522 Liberty Drive, Pearland, Texas 77581 at 2:00 p.m. on February 2, 2017. (1111"\ The project will entail the addition and renovation of the existing Tom Reid Library in Pearland, Texas. As a part of the scope of work,we will add approximately 8,560 square foot to the building, expanding the northwest side of the building. In this addition, we will enlarge the stack areas in 02-2015 Addendum 4 00100- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO PROPOSE the children's, adult and teen areas, increase the lounge seating, provide new computer desk areas, provide new check out kiosk, new help desks and additional restroom facilities. New interior finishes and lighting will be added to the library to include: wall and floor finishes, new LED lighting throughout the space and parking lot, new ceiling tile and extending new ceiling grid to match existing. A new HVAC system will be supplied as a part of this project. Upon award of a contract, the successful Offeror will be required to utilize the City's web based project management software, "Pro-Trak" for the administration of the construction project, including but not limited to, all transmittals and material submittals, RFI's,RFC's, Change Orders, Applications for Payment and all project communications with the City, its Construction Manager and Engineer. This system has certain hardware, internet access and operation requirements that form the basis for all project communications, documentation and records for the project.For more information,see INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS, Section 00200. Electronic Proposal Documents: including Contract Documents, Plans and Technical Specifications are available for download on the City's Website at: https://pearland.ionwave.net/Loain.aspx upon registration. The documents are NOT viewable without registration. These same documents are also available at the following locations. City of Pearland, City Hall (281)652-1600 Purchasing Department 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland,Texas 77581 Amtek Plan Room (713)956-0100 4001 Sherwood Houston,TX 77092 The Associated General Contractors of America, Inc. (713)334-7100 2400 Augusta, Suite 350 Houston,TX 77057 Virtual Builders Exchange (832)613-0201 7035 W. Tidwell Building J, Suite 112 Houston,TX 77092 McGrawHill Construction—Dodge Reports 1-800-393-6343 Civcast https://www.civcastusa.com No plan fees or deposits are required for plans and proposal documents obtained through the City's E-bid System. OFFERORS MUST REGISTER AS A SUPPLIER ON THE CITY'S E- BID SYSTEM IN ORDER TO SUBMIT A PROPOSAL EVEN IF PROPOSAL DOCUMENTS ARE OBTAINED VIA ONE OF THE PLAN HOUSES. Offerors accept sole responsibility for downloading all of the required documents, plans, specifications proposal forms and addenda required for submitting a proposal. Each proposal must be accompanied by a Proposed Schedule and Contractors Qualification Statement. 02-2015 Addendum 4 00100-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO PROPOSE rib.\ No proposal may be withdrawn or terminated for a period of sixty (90) days subsequent to the proposal opening date without the consent of the City of Pearland. Unless otherwise expressly provided herein, all references to "day(s)"shall mean calendar day(s). Bid Security and Bonds: Bid Security in the form of Cashier's Check, Certified Check, or Bid Bond payable to the City of Pearland in the amount of 5% of the total base proposal price must accompany each proposal. Bidders submitting proposals electronically through the E-bid System shall scan and up-load a copy of the sealed Bid Bond as an attachment to their proposal. Original documents for Bid Security shall be requested by the City from the lowest two offerors and delivered to the City's Purchasing Officer within 48 business hours of the Proposal Opening. Bid Security shall be delivered to: Office of City Purchasing, Finance Department, 2nd Floor City Hall, 3519 Liberty Drive,Pearland, Texas 77581. Performance and Payment Bonds: The successful Offeror must furnish Performance and Payment Bonds as required by Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code or other applicable law, as amended,upon the form included in the Contract Documents, in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the fmal contract price, such bonds to be executed by a corporate surety duly authorized to do business in the State of Texas, and named in the current list of"Treasury Department Circular No. 570", naming the City of Pearland, Texas as Obligee. Additionally, the successful Offeror shall be required to provide a one year Maintenance Bond for the improvements installed as part of this work, as provided in the Special Conditions of Agreement. (1111. Equal Opportunity: All responsible Offerors having submitted complete proposals will receive consideration for award of contract without regard to race, color,religion, sex, or national origin. Selection Criteria: The Contract is to be awarded based on provision of"Best Value" to the Owner. Within 30 days after receiving the Proposals, the Owner will consider and rank each proposal and select the Proposal that offers the best value to the Owner using the following criteria: 1) Price: The quoted price or cost methodology, alternatives proposed 52% and markup for changes Schedule: The contractor's ability or commitment to deliver or sequence 18% 2) delivery by a specific date(s). Coordination to work around uninterrupted facility operations. 3) Reputation: The contractor's reputation and past relationship with the 7% City. 4) Experience: Demonstrated ability to meet schedules on similar projects 6% 5) Personnel: Experience and qualifications of key project personnel 5% 6) Approach: Proposed approach to performing the work 5% 7) Subcontractor: Qualifications and Work History of proposed 4% subcontractors with General Contractor 8) Safety: Quality Assurance Program and Safety Record 3% 02-2015 Addendum 4 00100-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO PROPOSE Upon selection of a primary Offeror, Owner will attempt to negotiate a contract with the most qualified Offeror. The Owner may discuss with the selected Offeror options for a scope or time modification and any price change associated with the modification. If the Owner is unable to negotiate a contract with the selected Offeror, the Owner may end negotiations with that Offeror and proceed to the next Offeror in the order of the selection ranking until a contract is reached or all proposals are rejected. The Owner may make such investigations as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the Offeror to perform the work, and the Offeror shall furnish the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any proposal if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, such Offeror fails to satisfy the Owner that such Offeror is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the work contemplated therein. Conditional proposals will not be accepted. The City of Pearland reserves the right to award a contract based on its sole assessment and ranking of the above factors in its own best interests or reject any or all proposals. A proposal that has been "opened" may not be changed for the purposes of correcting an error in the proposed price. State Sales Tax: The Owner qualifies for exemption from State and Local Sales Tax pursuant to Section 151.311 of the Texas Tax Code for material incorporated into the project. Nondiscrimination: The City, in accordance with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, 78 Stat. 252, 42 U.S.C. 2000d to 2000d-4 and Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Department of Transportation, Subtitle A, Office of the Secretary, Part 21, Nondiscrimination in Federally- Assisted programs of the Department of Transportation issued pursuant to such Act, hereby notifies all bidders that it will affirmatively insure that in any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority business enterprises will be afforded full opportunity to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, or national origin in consideration for an award. Young Lorfing,TRMC City Secretary, City of Pearland First Publication date January 25,2017 Second Publication date February 1,2017 02-2015 Addendum 4 00100-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM(.1k\ Section.00900 ADDENDUM NO.5 Date:February 21,2017 PROJECT: Tom Reid Library Addition&Renovation BID NO.: 1117-08 BID DATE: February 16,2017; 2:00 pm Revised: February 21,2017;2:00 pm Revised: February 28, 2017;2:00 pm(visit City of Pearland's website to confirm) FROM: Dustin O'Brien, AIA Debbi Mulcahy Dewberry Architects 5051 Westheimer, Suite 200 Houston,Texas 77056 To: Prospective Bidders and Interested Parties This addendum forms a part of the bidding documents and will be incorporated into the Contract Documents, as applicable. Insofar as the original Contract Documents, Specifications, and Drawings are inconsistent, this Addendum shall govern. Please acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Proposal form, Section 00300 submitted to the City of Pearland. FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ON THE BID PROPOSAL FORM MAY BE CAUSE FOR DISQUALIFICATION. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: �.•�t"``"i'�ii++if tskeD itie r. CC SPECIFICATIONS: r ',..'F OF S'.• 17 CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS: Z1.7,d ,7- 5 a�, �` c ,ate € r `Itemescr+ Lions = STRUCTURAL S.3.02 Added Pier Reinforcement Schedule.Refer to 15/S.3.02 (°111°.\ 2-22-12 00900- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM J ARCHITECTURAL A.4.2 Revised Add Alternates.Refer to 15/A.0.02. GENERAL: Attachments - Bidders Comments/Answers - Drawings-A.0.02 - Drawing-S.3.02 END OF ADDENDUM NO.5 tfe cc i qq n nn E.o F 1 2-22-12 00900-2 of 2 orst Dewberry. W I L S O N Tom Reid Library Addition&Renovation Project No. 98114171 Bidders Comments - Addendum#5 02.21.2017 1._ Drawing 04/S.3.01 Drilled Pier Typical Detail. Please provide pier reinforcement schedule for five (5) different piers: 12/36, 14/42, 16/48, 18/54, 20/60. Reply: Refer to drawing 15/S.3.02 2. After reviewing addendum #2, there still are contradictions between the opening schedule and the plans (drawing A1.01 —Renovation Floor Plan). For instance, door#12 is noted as an aluminum door while the opening type A, however on the plans, it is noted as opening type D. After comparing the openings scheduled to the plans, there are roughly ten doors that have this type of conflict between the schedule and plans. Can you please review and confirm the correct openings types for each door? Are we to follow the plans or the schedule?Also door#4 and door#5 are right next to each other, however they are two different types of door frames. #4 is hollow metal and#5 is aluminum. This seems unusual to one of our subcontractors and wonder if this is an error, if this is due to high traffic, or for some other reason. Please advise. Reply: The door schedule was revised in Addendum #3. 3. In specification section 012200 —Unit Prices, four unit prices are asked for. However, there are no entry spaces for these prices on the bid form or on the e-bids system. Please advise. (.11') Reply: The unit prices should be included in the awarded bidders' final schedule. The Section 012200 is the format in which the unit prices are to be broken down. 4. There is 4 alternate proposals shown at 15/A0.02. These do not match up with the alternates in the bid form. Are they to be included? Reply: See revised drawing 15/A..0.02. 5. Demolition plans call out removal of HVAC ducts and grills but does not say anything about ceiling. Reply: The intent is for the existing ceiling to remain unless Alternate#8 is selected. 6. Nothing about ceiling removal is mentioned in Architectural Demolition Plan. Reply: Refer to Proposal Form Part B Table 00300-1, Alternate#8. 7. Electrical plans call for new fixtures but nothing mentioned if these fixture will be laid in existing Ceiling Grid or new Ceiling grid. Reply: The existing building will have fixtures that are to be laid in the existing ceiling grid, and the fixtures in the new addition will be laid in the new ceiling grid. 5051 Westheimer,Suite 200 Houston,Texas 77056 Phone 346 231 0102 Fax 713 621 8716 mmcfarland@dewberry.com frfi Dewberry WILSON Tom Reid Library Addition&Renovation Project No. 98114171 Bidders Comments - Addendum#5 02.21.2017 8. Plans also do not provide about existing Fire Sprinkler System. Do we need to provide new Fire Sprinkler throughout the new and existing building or just to extension portion. In such case we need to know the contractor who did original work/. Reply: The scope of work for the fire sprinkler system was addressed in Addendum #2 Item #16. The awarded G.C. is responsible for plans & permit(s)from Firetron Monitors. 9. Low voltage Electrical controls are shown in plans but their location is not clear. Reply: Refer to Addendum #2's Bidder Comments/Answers Item #12. 10. Alternate No. 7 has supplemental equipment information in Specification Section 01230, however no power required are shown for any of the equipment. This equipment will require completely different power standards, and such information does not seem to be readily available on the manufacturer's web site. Please provide a one-line for the new equipment involved in Alternate No. 7. Reply: Refer to Proposal Form Part I3 Table 00300-1, Cash Allowance Chiller MEP Fee. 11.Some of our subcontractors are have some difficultly with the measurements for the panel '1.4) above the door. Can you please confirm if the below sketch is what you are wanting? Is the panel made from the same material as the door, or another material? Reply: Refer to drawing 24/A.8.01. i 5051 Westheimer,Suite 200 Houston,Texas 77056 Phone 346 231 0102 Fax 713 621 8716 mmcfarland@dewberry.com PROAo•02101m0E3a401aNx,R310..aa,Nan,mNaaA�P,a m N,,xmO a_aPW a OOPD,RxmamnPxMNa _.._• to Dewberry. amui 1sam,m rjEoxm "im 1%mw mDags mm MSax i01 ROOM Im MO xm FOR P.wmam WAR B LOFT POLL 1011 2 x x nx[ a.WY OMRCI Technology mvn TO ROM xmRum SO TO WW1 I-Pry•xlRmax Rnx 1'Mx mvam oAv AI M rwnxl vn ozam m R WO.. PRO �r Mechanical. Electrical. bing ers RIME MOSS linF3R5 AT MI ® mxiONII ximx2®amen MIMS=MO Ion POLE AV Vert Ima6.NM ivx IMm1AS xM i[MO Nn MD 1mV2STO mnaa 12 mowS 1 Pinnacle Structural Engineers ALTERNAL Structural Engineers m P.nc m PRn.II xoxvm®m vsxv NEW In my ve-mom vvvuo x uU OF svnm SW m mown NO PO.RRa ®ix°c m FRAM/411F 7 m m 00461 xA ova ill HO v®x ra LW.Si.xrx w I.EOM iR.E MO am War R Roma 1um we, Get& &=ssociates Civil e ay.lv.RIM.WOW/OD N tlE ww u ¢rot r,m CAI.w b1/%1xu rurxw RI cwurt nOxvaus,a Enai SITE ADDITION ALTERNATE BID NOTES N.rs•115 LEGEND N.r.s.105 • NO. DATE DESCRIPTION 01 I 10.30.15 ISSUE FOR OD PRICING RIC• ING 02 04.26.16 REVIEWSET _ ! ! 1 1 I I IU U1 ! I 1 1 1 ! 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 U 14 OS 01.25.17 IcS,,, CR IND AND 1 _ Q 01.50.17 ADDENDUM/I I I I_ IIII I I I' I I I II 1 I_I - - ,L 02.21.17 ADDENDUM l5 — . . _—._— --.-- - ,, , O t' 'll°.°alII 0 °o d —, E v...<m, O O t C _ mI rm�� emaROs _' oo O i 1,- ______ F,, ,,,,,a 1,0 ——J — I .•mITa103 a o I IDIVIC MSS awn / I n Ii rlI riEii1'7_Lk k 14 PP. A.AY.P.T1 x _ TOM REID LIBRARY ° J mnRC SPEC�m•xm.aY CM VAL I I I 3522 LIBERTY DRIVE I \ I PEARLAND, TX 77581 I__�_ —� _ ADDITION & I I uvs°� R a maMRD. ER A�<m ` ll I TOM REID LIBRARY J I RENOVATION 0 RENOVATION SITE WAG PROJECT NO. DRAWING ND. pav reRm I4101 DATE A.0.02 OVERALL SITE PLAN 10.30.2015 v.'=1-D'101 it I VI e Dewberry 00.1s Kw KO Technology ��'��`\ Mechanical.Electrical. 4 Plumbing aboginectric l Flu• �]l6CSO[�,� r• g=' �� _I 1,f o _ �. EWOLveea] Ecturol Engineers • wiW�®I lam . �_ .- .� .'� — L-, _ { I' I Ward.Getz ke Associates 0.11 11,: © +ua aaw Civil Engineers r —SV'''1ePs"o YaC a 1 _ r (.) oi v/N sita�Ps o 121 o.bon PI Pi VFW I (i COMl/N SfrarvSa I/ !I 1t 6c f„q TYPICAL DETAIL 1 ADDITIONAL STIRRUPS AT CHANGE TYPICAL DETAIL TYPICAL DETAIL NO. DATE DESCRIPTION IN GRADE BEAM WIDTH rT TIE-BEAM � 11E-BEAM 01 10.37.1S ISSUE FOR Ru PRICING SO.UC•no. 20 Min ao.-ra. 16 sue Ur•rd 12 [We Cif•rd O uro Ur•ra 4. 4A (NOTED) D] 01.25.17 SSUE R rre110 CONSTRUCTOR IS DRILLED PIER VERTICAL \/�J Qi 00.21.1) RDOFXwIN/5 REINFORCEMENT SCHEDULE 7 _r1---9— <yt ROL I 1 rroaud = / �" �, Seer 1xo[s)t T NOOSIY I.. ..N aeIY Et 4 G�¢x.,rt Na1Y ' I 22 N.OS f.N N•Dwi a,, N.or.: if N alt 2. if 'r a"•I TT SuM. s Nely 0 Not, SrE P 1 _ YE 1 , NOIf - f owq b .e a f0 NOIY a s PNN Hfd i. I.PO Ne rr I I +,r',.,, illr g.J11 Neff t', -� COLUMN SCHEDULE [r P eau.IY J. er,,,PxEx I v fm[a n 11Ig Put[ molt aaT n II-JD eau.NOIT - uea�1 .O,Mews (q�n Dart IwIll 1el�G ,o. Le,le (4) S/r.r • 'Fa' &°.. n * _ 'NSeanps — /Nmmws r.,6,Mir .I JNv r4fVdl. S.�- tY nr! °I1 nc I;66 a IC,'/r (.) ]:1'. } wt: � ta> : ra 1y to. 1,: n/.I,NII x.D I g ..1 1I , JC�..., A•00 j— �irrulo vI`DIr121.`.r0 O."n r1.20 K. molt ea[MA.. `1' .'1 °"M0'T TYPICAL DETAIL TYPICAL DETAIL TYPICAL DETAIL PINNACLE SHAFT BAR PLACEMENT PLANS �(y,�,. EXTERIOR GRADE BEAM EXTERIOR GRADE BEAM BASE PLATES AT W14 WIDE FLANGE COLUMNS ,I ,•,-I„••,34)421 N. o ralC 19 aDyr-w lIJ r vr.rc 1'r eu_vr-ra �ca.r-re •i �15034 s• 1 s%r R CONT. ---}}} w m1a,.�Ra,I / FPE, :.71;�•. `" {{771i �_ / �,e �w.�x wr 1 .2;1% eR - @ �.. 2. Zvi TO m0 manx0 "s" `=T. .` c.c.u.Tt vw1. -�`- PUN v�Ew y ' Rol19221. SCHEDULE 4La....711.......0.141 .1 �� m 1 Y I' tia ° ,. 11■I rceiesrr sa).) .a.r It.It.a/.1 1I"�r{�II ur eVi ��i■■� . e Ir«r/Nanxva T;u1<),IF I _ q'� ale ne Prtq o 1 : u FENT NiD.0119.TO da(I/r nclm N. 1XO"iPP151.20 G.0..0 KUM TOM REID LIBRARY e. m„Re� HrAe[IX no.1artor MI No-t PEST M.P. 1t TYPICAL DETAIL S.0((IA 3522 LIBERTY DRIVE TYPICAL DETAIL EXTERIOR GRADE BEAM TYPICAL DETAIL TYPICAL DETAIL HAMAN% TX 77581 GRADE BEAM AT DUMPSTER ENCLOSURE AT COLUMN INTERIOR COLUMN WITH PIER CAP BASE PLATES AT HSS COLUMNS o.,D 18 —,,,...ra 14 meVf•rs 10 mea/r-M. 6 aae r-w 2 1t-TI f 1u/a10J LotIa/00 'IL:`air ..7PI,.1 i TOM REM LIBRARY ADDITION & o� a"'°aI' DOWN PER a0I RENOVATION ITS Or 0.192 P.13 ` N/slr:1 LI; a ' �11 - FOUNDATION LL W } oe W1xot m I'_ m o� � J aI DETAILS x gC r Onw ea.T r oaf w r. a r'D.c Rm. 1 l ,7—Trn a nw •.RsKfo./lm[YIWia1YI ' I r R 1 } W su WAG PROJECT NO. DRAWING NO. 71 J1 TYPICAL DETAIL I47 53.02 DUMPSTER ENCLOSURE TYPICAL DETAIL EXTERIOR GRADE BEAM TYPICAL DETAIL I0.0.20le FOUNDATION PLAN EXTERIOR GRADE BEAM AT COLUMN ANCHOR BOLT NO Mks 17 azM I r.ra 1 YV a s/r.MO 9 p.:..a/r.fir Fi neat 1 °�'i a I F0 arcel n ` .i J CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM Section 00900 ADDENDUM NO. 6 Date: February 23, 2017 " ,i,,i' PROJECT: Tom Reid Library Addition&Renovation y,�`y.c�� .. 0444. � , BID NO.: 1117-08 fr BID DATE: February16 2017. 2:00 m r p 115;'• ..2o1s9.• 63 Revised: February 21,2017; 2:00 pm '•.91'e�o F Revised: February 28,2017; 2:00 pm 2.i2S.Z0(7 Revised: March 2,2017; 2:00 pm(visit City of Pearland's website to confirm) FROM: Dustin O'Brien,MA Debbi Mulcahy Dewberry Architects 5051 Westheimer, Suite 200 Houston, Texas 77056 To: Prospective Bidders and Interested Parties This addendum forms a part of the bidding documents and will be incorporated into the Contract Documents, as applicable. Insofar as the original Contract Documents, Specifications, and Drawings are inconsistent, this Addendum shall govern. Please acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Proposal form, Section 00300 submitted to the City of Pearland. FAILURE TO ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT OF ADDENDA ON THE BID PROPOSAL FORM MAY BE CAUSE FOR DISQUALIFICATION. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: 1. Section 00100—Date proposals due revised to March 2, 2017; 2:00 p.m. 2. Pre-Approved Equal: Substitutions are required to be PRE-APPROVED and submitted NO LATER THAN Monday,February 27,2017 by 5:00 p.m. Request for Substitution Submittals must be in a comparative format listing the specified manufacturer and substitute manufacturer with comparative information side by side. Include the substitute specifications in your submittal. SUBMITTALS RECEVED AFTER 5:00 pm ON FEBRUARY 27, 2017 • WILL NOT BE CONSIDERED. Plans are to review submittals on Tuesday,28 February, 2017. Notifications of acceptance or rejection will follow shortly after. SPECIFICATIONS: N/A 2-23-17 00900- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND ADDENDUM CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS: 1 MECHANICAL i M.3.01 1 Equipment revised to "Carrier model or pre-approved equal." { M.4.01 Note added: "Carrier or pre-approved equal." ELECTRICAL F_ E.4.0& j Note added:"All panels shall he GE or pre-approved equal." GENERAL: • Attachments - Contract Section 00100 - Drawing—M.3.01 - Drawing—M.4.01 - Drawing—E.4.00 END OF ADDENDUM NO. 6 4 ��D A leery e. ..7 ��S IN 6/1h�`y,1)4,0 . . il, a,.. --- _��67 z.2-23-17 00900-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO PROPOSE Section 00100 INVITATION TO PROPOSE CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Competitive Sealed Proposal Electronic Sealed Competitive Proposals will be accepted for the following project, in the City's E-bid System. Electronic proposals shall : be ,submitted through the City's web site at: https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx. All interested Offerors are required to register as a "supplier" on the City's E-bid System at the above web address and clicking on "Supplier Registration". Registration provides automatic-access to any changes to the Plans, Specifications or Submission time and date. However, submission of an E-bid requires completing a short registration questionnaire found on this web site. When prompted to add or remove commodity codes registrants must add the codes listed below: * Building Construction Services, New (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, General (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services, Heavy (Includes Maintenance and Repair Services) * Construction Services,Trade(New Construction) For more information regarding registration instructions, see INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS, Section 00200, included in the project bid documents viewable on the web site. Questions regarding electronic proposals should be directed to City Purchasing Officer at ebids@pearlandtx.gov. All Proposals submitted electronically will remain confidential until the opening date and time when they will be opened and read into the public record. Proposals shall be submitted on the form provided in the E-bid System and submitted electronically through this system to the City Purchasing Officer, City of Pearland, City Hall located at 3519 �• IIi - ' • - • exas 77581. Electronic Proposals will be accepted until 2:00 p.m., Thursday, March 2, 2017. ..11 Proposals shall reference the following project information in the • : . - a ;• • ' - .rovided electronic format. All properly submitted proposals shall be publicly "opened" and read aloud into the public record following the closing of the acceptance period for the construction of: �titiat�taettiati Tom Reid Library ti: Q4E® Alietife 0 Addition &Renovation ?oco .• ��o� / .��`jr City of Pearland,Texas , Y' „�r COP PN: F20002 cc • BID NO.: 1117-08 ,: A Mandatory Pre-Proposal Conference will be held at the Torn Reid Library O dr Prive, Pearland, Texas 77581 at 2:00 p.m. on February 2, 2017. The project will entail the addition and,renovation of the existing Torn Reid Library in Pearland, Texas. As a part of the scope of work,we will add approximately 8,560 square foot to the building, expanding the northwest side of the building. In this addition, we will enlarge the stack areas in 02-2015 00100- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO PROPOSE the children's,adult and teen areas, increase the lounge seating,provide new computer desk areas, "") provide new check out kiosk, new help desks and additional restroom facilities. New interior finishes and lighting will be added to the library to include: wall and floor finishes, new LED lighting throughout the space and parking lot, new ceiling tile and extending new ceiling grid to match existing. A new HVAC system will be supplied as a part of this project. Upon award of a contract, the successful Offeror will be required to utilize the City's web based project management software, "Pro-Trak" for the administration of the construction project, including but not limited to, all transmittals and material submittals,RFI's,RFC's,Change Orders, Applications for Payment and all project communications with the City, its Construction Manager and Engineer. This system has certain hardware, internet access and operation requirements that form the basis for all project communications,documentation and records for the project.For more information, see INSTRUCTIONS TO OFFERORS,Section 00200. Electronic Proposal Documents: including Contract Documents, Plans and Technical Specifications are available for download on the City's Website at: https://pearland.ionwave.net/Login.aspx upon registration. The documents are NOT viewable without registration. These same documents are also available at the following locations. City of Pearland, City Hall (281) 652-1600 Purchasing Department 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland,Texas 77581 Amtek Plan Room (713) 956-0100 4001 Sherwood Houston,TX 77092 The Associated General Contractors of America, Inc. (713) 334-7100 2400 Augusta, Suite 350 Houston,TX 77057 `Z�Lilll�liltj�l� Virtual Builders Exchange b•e`p4r.At�rlrri, (832) 613-0201 7035 W.Tidwell Building J, Suite 112 r -r Houston,TX 77092 d * McGrawHill Construction. —Dodge Reports,,q ............ -}. 1-800-393-6343 rFZE Civcast 2•Z ( https://www.civcastusa.com No plan fees or deposits are required for plans and proposal documents obtained through the City's E-bid System. OFFERORS MUST REGISTER AS A SUPPLIER ON THE CITY'S E- BID SYSTEM IN ORDER TO SUBMIT A PROPOSAL EVEN IF PROPOSAL DOCUMENTS ARE OBTAINED VIA ONE OF THE PLAN HOUSES. Offerors accept sole responsibility for downloading all of the required documents, plans, specifications proposal forms and addenda required for submitting a proposal. 02-2015 00100-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO.PROPOSE Each proposal must be accompanied by a Proposed Schedule and Contractors Qualification Statement. No proposal may be withdrawn or terminated for a period of sixty (90) days subsequent to the proposal opening date without the consent of the City of Pearland. Unless otherwise expressly provided herein, all references to "day(s)" shall mean calendar day(s). Bid Security and Bonds:Bid Security in the form of Cashier's Check, Certified Check, or Bid Bond payable to the City of Pearland hi the amount of 5% of the total base proposal price must accompany each proposal. Bidders submitting proposals electronically through the E-bid System shall scan and up-load a copy of the sealed Bid Bond as an attachment to their proposal. Original documents for Bid Security shall be requested by the City from the lowest two offerors and delivered to the City's Purchasing Officer within 48 business hours of the Proposal Opening. Bid Security shall be delivered to: Office of City Purchasing,Finance Department, 2°a Floor City Hall, 3519 Liberty Drive, Pearland,Texas 77581. Performance and Payment Bonds: The successful Offeror must furnish Performance and Payment Bonds as required by Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code or other applicable law,as amended,upon the form included in the Contract Documents,in the amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the final contract price, such bonds to be executed by a corporate surety duly authorized to do business in the State of Texas, and named in the current list of"Treasury Department Circular No. 570", naming the City of Pearland, Texas as Obligee. Additionally, the successful Offeror shall be required to provide a one year Maintenance Bond for the improvements installed as part of this work, as provided in the Special Conditions of Agreement. Equal Opportunity: All responsible Offerors having submitted complete proposals will receive consideration for award of contract without regard to race, color,religion, sex, or national origin. Selection Criteria: The Contract is to be awarded based on provision of "Best Value" to the Owner.Within 30 days after receiving the Proposals, the Owner will consider and rank each proposal and select the Proposal that offers the best value to the Owner using the following criteria: 1) Price: The quoted price or cost methodology,alternatives proposed 52% and markup for changes Schedule: The contractor's ability or commitment to deliver or sequence 18% 2) delivery by a specific date(s). Coordination to work around uninterrupted facility operations. 3) Reputation: The contractor's reputation and past relationship with the 7% City. �`�11tituuttt�s D A lt itt 4) Experience: Demonstrated ability to meet schedules on similar proje' � N gs� ..> 0r 5) Personnel: Experience and qualifications of key project personnel- 'k 6) Approach: Proposed approach to performing the work co.20 ••°' 02-2015 00100-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND INVITATION TO PROPOSE 7) Subcontractor: Qualifications and Work History of proposed 4% subcontractors with General Contractor 8) Safety: Quality Assurance Program and Safety Record 3% Upon selection of a primary Offeror, Owner will attempt to negotiate a contract with the most qualified Offeror. The Owner may discuss with the selected Offeror options for a scope or time modification and any price change associated with the modification. If the Owner is unable to negotiate a contract with the selected Offeror, the Owner may end negotiations with that Offeror and proceed to the next Offeror in the order of the selection ranking until a contract is reached or all proposals are rejected. The Owner may make such investigations as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the Offeror to perform the work,and the Offeror shall furnish the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any proposal if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, such Offeror fails to satisfy the Owner that such Offeror is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the work contemplated therein. Conditional proposals will not be accepted. The City of Pearland reserves the right to award a contract based on its sole assessment and ranking of the above factors in its own best interests or reject any or all proposals. A proposal that has been "opened" may not be changed for the purposes of correcting an error in ^� the proposed price. State Sales Tax: The Owner qualifies for exemption from State and Local Sales Tax pursuant to Section 151.311 of the Texas Tax Code for material incorporated into the project. Nondiscrimination: The City, in accordance with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, 78 Stat. 252, 42 U.S.C. 2000d to 2000d-4 and Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Department of Transportation, Subtitle A, Office of the Secretary, Part 21, Nondiscrimination in Federally- Assisted programs of the Department of Transportation issued pursuant to such Act, hereby notifies all bidders that it will affirmatively insure that in any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority business enterprises will be afforded full opportunity to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, or national origin in consideration for an award. Young Lorfing,TRMC ,tt4ttsk utaiai t City Secretary, a.�' CL�E 4�Atrr� City of Pearland 4c 14 First Publication date January 25, 2017 r � : Second Publication date February 1 , 2017 dl �.,.;� co �qpe of �` ~4 -EAC1 t 02-2015 00100-4 of 4 (:141) eDewberry DX SPLIT SYSTEM SCHEDULE DEDICATED OUTDOOR AIR UNIT W ECT:TOM REID PEARLAND LIBRARY SYSTEM PROJECT:TOM REID PEARL.°LIBRARY NCI TIWt`11.1;, NUMBER 1 2 ] a 5 6 ] SYSTEM TAG SERVICES CONFERENCE CHILDRENSAR. ADMIN INTERIOR LIBRARY TEEN AREA STUDY/NEW LIBRARY le. INTERIOR LIBRARY TYPE SINGLEZONE N 1 11..I.IUy 4:IIK1,,,,,,• TYPE SINGLE°ONE SINGLE ZONE SINGLE ZONE SINGLE ZONE SINGLE ZONE SINGLE ZONE SINGLE ZONE VPRLABLE` VARIABLE VARIABLE VARIABLE VARABLE VAR.. VMMBLE VARIABLE AREA SERVED OA MECH RM + OA ME.RM2 IR AHANOLER DISCHARGE CONFIGURATION 00WN DOWN Pill Hitch.till55111pn1 5Cg,I.I.lH'. TAG A AHU.] RHOS NI AHU.T FAN DATA I11I I+II•W�I I:IIMIII�...I'. CONFIGURATION VERTICAL VERTICAL VERTICAL VERTICAL VERTICAL VERTICAL VERTICAL SUPPLY CFM PAD MOUNTED PAD MOUNTED PAD MOUNTED PAD MOUNTED PAD MOUNTED AO MOUNTED EXTERNAL STATIC7WC 1.0 SUPPLY CFM 5aan 3200 P D P EVAP FAN HP ] 15 1111T(I.Eie!2 N\H.HSill l vs OA 1715 +'ivil I:IIy1 H��F+ EXIERNAL STATIC P.SSURE,•WG So DX COOLING COIL AN MP) 1112 5 3 5 d VOLTSIPH/CYCLES 5 6018'E0 450DI0 460/3/50 460.6D AIR ENT EVAP.138/21.7 SENSIBLE CAPACITY,BTUN 54.400 60300 'sass° 77,700 76,700 94,400 rEsoo AIR 11. •F EVAP,DOANE 65/54 55. TOTAL CAPACITY,BTUN 70,300 80800 165.100 109.700 100,700 116.500 113200 SENSIBLE RETCH 220.1 139.1 EN DQWB,•F 75.3/61.7 /5.2//62.1 8.9/Bt dS52 5.5/62.2 T /BLT 73.7l82A TOTAL COOLING BTUH 4331 RET 1BF 76.6 77A TT5 77.5 785 • AMBIENT TEMP,F 105 105120 DEWGF 52/51 5., 5261 52/51 52J5 5L51 52/51 MIN COOLING STAGES DIGITAL SCROLL DIGITAL SCROLL NO. DATE DESCRIPTIOn ELECTRIC HEAT PEFPIGEPANT RA10A Ra10A TOTAL.KW 7 10 30 14 18 21 15 GAS HEATINGG STAGES I 2 ] 2 2 2 2 H OUTPUT REQUIRED 240 OZ 04.26.16 505 Ewry/SETpILIxG OHOT UMIDIFIGTION 0] 01.2537 ISSUE FOP BID ANO MOD.OT..5 REHEAT YES YES YES YES YES YES YES UNIT DATA a ACCESSORIES STAGES 10., tp1 '6 I6 CONsiPu[UOn 04 22.10.17 A09E8E34 µ 05 02.13.17 .F3.6 a FILTER TYPE RVB MERVB 23 MERVB 2•,MERVB Y.MERVB RVB SEER FACTORY DISCONNECT Y YES YES MIN. 12 OPERATESVOWNTG•F 98 110 SINGLE Pr.WIRING CONNECTION YES SmwH2 4606N0 460/Y60 CONCEALED CONDENSATE PUMP NO NO NO NO NO NO NO FILTERS MERVA MERVB REFRIREFRIGERANT RA10A RA1OA 10A DEHUMIDIFICATION CONTROL MOO.HOT GAS REHEAT MOD HOT GAS REHEAT ER MODEL OR EQUAL 40RUAA07 40RUAA09 nORUAAt2 40RUAA68 dORUAA. .RUAA08 ,O..8 pE ECONOMIZER YES YES CONDENSING UNIT U VIBRATION CURB ELEC DISCONNECT TAG YYES YES • ES NOMINAL CUT C. CU3 CU-T COATED CONDENSER COIL NO +05 5MOTORIZED OA DAMPER YES YES AMBIENT TEJART 105 105 105 1 EM NRISSR 121 POWERED CWVEN.OURET YES t05 OMETWCPELIEF YES NO NO STAGES SEE NOTE SEE NOTE SEE NOTE SEE NOTE SINGLE POINT CONNECTION YES OPERATES DOWN TO.•F td S. SEE 5 YES - GR9vN[C'2C _ dE0IL60 CBN15p dEN160 Sd6N.LE0 Sa601Y60 � N/w /I4Z3'WOC 5YR3 SVRS G4 PR 1'.'FOV Bn UAL 3eAUM08 38AUDA08 30AUDA12 354UDA08 38AUDA00 30AUDA00 30A OA00 CARRIER MODEL Oft I, 820AE0]0 ODEL OR PRE-APPROVED EQUAL '7.- 38 40T SCOURED C ER 8510550E GROSS WOE FAN HEAT � r M GPOSSPNDINCLUOE FAN HEAT SAREGRSS AND IN LUDEFNIFILTERS m•!�K•IMt6� MOTORS SHALL BE PREMIUM EFF.PROVIDE AHUS WITH FACTORY INSTALLED VED STATIC ARE SLASING WETCOIL,aFILTER9ET Nu.„.,,, RMOTQERS 1BAREFRGERANT C„TER S A REFRIGERANT K C I" I mN./I..t AP NORALLM TOP ASH.M 901.2010 ANUS FACTORY INSTALLED VFD IT MOTORS SHALLLE PREMIUM EFF. LIN.MUST ETACO 010 MO HAVE A UST CONFORMTOASHR.90E POINT EL EC LDNx UNITS IFMODEL NUMBER eVIDED WITH INTERNAL FLOAT MOOT HAND HALLRON.SHUT TOASHRAE90.1-SOW FLI SHALL BESROv PROVIDED WITH INTERNAL FLWTSWTCHAND SHALL 6HUT DOWN IF PRIMARY DRAIN BECOMES RESTRICTED MODEL NUMBEReSCNEDULE DATACWFLICT:MOST BTIEINGFNi REARS APPLY Tw M1 4 L nnll ELECTRIC H.T E SDED TO LIMIT LEAVING TEMPERATURES TO NO MORE THAN 89 DEGREES F. L BE PROVIDED..INTERNAL FLOAT SWITCH AND SHALL SHUT DOWN IF sry STAGES.PROVIDE DIGITAL SCROLL COMPRESSOR.LEAD COMPRESSOR FOR ALL CONDENSING UNITS PHI BECOMES RESTRICTED • TOM REIDPTAP.NO UBIMRTGu19(I AIR CALCULATIONS PERASHCOT 52.18 C.AMMONDMENTS VENTILATOR SCHEDULE FAN SCHEDULE + ^ ii..„-..+ OF/al Faople CF MR.wn Room• PROJECT.TOM REIO PEAUAND LIBRARY PROJECT:TOM PEG PFARIANO LIBRARYJ6.`` /.rase �U0 8 12 TAG OV Gt TAG EF-1 EF.2 SF- SF-2 IhaFJc ulmaN R SERVICE BLDG PRESS.RELIEF SERVICE EXHAUST • I025 O. EX11AU EX EX SUPPLYSUPPL Con.. 006 55 AREA SERVED LIBRARY AREA SERVED RESTROOM CUSTOOUW ECONOM.EXH ECOxOM.SUPPLY ECON.&SUPPLY 90 63,4 ,...APma 485 v66 = 0 V FAN TYPE HODOEOGMVRELIEF FAN TYPE ROOF MOUNTED CABINET FUN RODFMOunIED ROOF MOUNTED gWFMWNO I`Y 0ta•Lroom 95 0.06 5 5 00.505 nAe• 31 RP• 05I0 3395 HOODED PROP HOODED PROP - E 55. aR FLOWN CFM 6500 AIR FLOW CFM 300 _ 200 6460 300 5200 ��„„�.�FM Vbs/F2 B • EXT.STATICPTES 0.05 WG EXT.STATIC PRES COWS 0A•WO VS WG VOWS 0.57 WC �Kp> y Val(Vp1• 03176 THROAT WIDTH II LENGTH,IN. ]Ba,B DRIVE 01 p 01 WV D•Ps(EP1° 0831 DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT DIRECT RECT y Vou=DII;FP.P.4.2Ra11A1 39E, MOTOR DATA 1/511P 83W 2HP 3HP 2HP _ YpljpOmaT JHlowj• 258W yum MNAIIINtbn ER..(.1.601.6.1,30351Mq ACLEs50RIE5 VOLTSIPH/C..S 11v1100 11NIrt0 d6NYb0 d6WL00 deOF o TOM I{EID LI III VI PLNptemI5 UI15lenl• 565 FP:-TPFaoOpwALmR1= 9 MAX Es BIRD SCREEN Es 3522 LIBERTY DRIVE FPI•F(( F I Ors N)3(tane areaII ROOF CURB YES ACCESSORIES TES YE:1RL\�ID, TX 7i581 IQ. :RimA;Yl• I ]e :/.e.OdT OE M 10. ^ BACKDPPFT DAMPERS YES B�iCO OOONNEtt YES YES YES TES NO NO NO ji h4 aL.8L iO 8T NOTES DAMPER Ea(Jane f.neas)= 5 ;TebM 3 lt5 ) •b5 64030 GREENHECK MODEL OR EQ. MOTORIZED DAMPER NO NO •YES VES YES NOTES.VERIFY CONTROLLER YES YES YES YES YES L•. - Vm•You JFv IF Y EXACT LOCATION OF PRIOR TO FAN SPED t 3 3 5S Y,UFmI.� G dT9 NsrNGgTUON.PRwGEQNITWOHA RANSRIONs,ED FOR FULL ores 2 3 TOM RGID LIDR:\RY ookisss Poasss m✓.L best mininsrs TAT9 CFM OPERATION.SEY ROOFF PENETRATIONSORIES AS R WATER TGHT. GREENHELK MODEL OR E. G09SVG SP.p250 G20SB RCS316Btd-C]0 RCS]3481T PID @ 22.PROVIDE W.00 DAMPER OR EQUAL FOR AR PRESSURE • .`D DITION MECHANICAL GENERAL NOTES RELEF 00AN SHAN ALL BECONT"ROLLLEDBYTIME CY A LIGHT LOCK ON.1AYPANEL ItEVOV.1TIOV REMOVEP. ALL UNUSED EXISTING DUCTWORK.CAP EXISTING TAPS OF DUCT MAINS W RH SHEET METAL 3.FAN SHALL BE CONTROLLED BY ECONOMIZER MODE ON OAU.SEE SPECIFICATIONS. • CAPS AND SE4MRTIGHT. C. COMOVE ALL NTRACROS SHALL PROVILESAND EAL A IPMENT AND ALL UN SE DUCTOY TAPSSE AND NEW TER MECHANICAL`.___C. CONTRACTORRsnALL PROPERLY sEALANo CAP ULuxusf0pucr rAPSANONEw DUCTWORK. AIR DEVICE SCHEDULE • CONTRACTOR SHALL REPLACE ALL MMAGED EXISTING FLEX DUCT AS PEWIREO. SERVICE MANUFACTURERANOMODEL FACE SIZE NECK SIZE CFM FINISH MA IAL NOTES SCHEDULES D. ALL OTHER M.S.OF THE FLOOR NOT WITHIN THE SCOPE OF WORK SHN.L REMAIN UNCHANGED. E. CONTRACTOR �uIPACT0F15HALLftEPAIRALL EXISTING DUCTWORK LEAKS M'O DAMAGED INSULATION AS A24.°24. Cm 10-100 STEEL EXISTINGWLTTIUHK WAS TAKEN FROM AS-BUILT DRAWINGS AND FIELD INVEST GATGN:CONTRACTOR SUPPLY TAUS SED LAY-IN 24.824. WHITE 1.28 F SHALL NQEID VERIFYRE%FCDUCTVQRKCONOITOxS. 2d'.c1d• 23.05 a G. N STRUCTURE WITH THE 24+OUR RATING AT THE CONCRETE SLAB.CEILING NOT a RETURN TTUS PXP LAY-IN 2012a• - 500 WHITE STEEL 1,3 9 PART OF THE RATED ASSEMBLY.CEILING RAO WTON FIRE DAMPERS ARE NOT REQUIRED. (�-.��/ y AARISIq RETURNED TO THE CEILING PLENUM AND THEN TO THE AHU THROUGH LIGHTING FIXTURES AND EXHAUST T 247.• Bb .00 e! INNINGS.CONTERCTOR SHALL VERIFY THAT SUFFICIENT RETURN AIR OPENINGS ARE C TUS PAR Ot�225 PROVRED MONO WALLS ABOVE CEILING.ARCHTECTJRAL OPENINGS NOT USED FOR AIR SUPPLY SHALLBE USED FOR RETURN AIR. 26#<' t0'o 32S]25 WHILE STEEL L3.] PROJECT NO. V/AL PRO DRAWING N0. 3S I. PILNRDEVKtS SHALL BE REPLACED WITH NEW.SEE SCHEDULE. NOTES: I,I>t M3O1 i I NOTE TO ENVELOPEP VERIFY UNLESS TMNOWN DIFFERENT 2. P E.°OMPESATEACH SUPPLY OR EKH UNLESS BALANCING DAMPER IS PROVIDED AT RUNON TAKEOFF 2L115 [1�� PLAN BUILDING ISF%ISTND AND RENOVATED SPACE IS CONDITIONED.BUILDING WITH ARCHITECT PROF TO ORDERING.CALLuuTONS MENOTREQUREO. fl 30.I B�I r �a,».e,.a. g Dewberry. aru urto9▪iwm 1. wxearlwaCle¢bo u lt,t aut.yaeatnwaaax KCt Technology Mechanical.Ele ctreal. Ai Plumbing Eng:neara Pinnacle Ste uc bur al Engineer B _ Sir,a.tur al Erigm.•ra m...w. ...... . n.aan .w.w ." .. UMW ... a.. Tau IMO •e..0 PANEL C PANEL'l1A EISI.PAIIELBOAXE"EPA' r.q _mowUmmmm — a-T a!—en A.,e — u„ Txr d G ..Z. 1ss cla._e �,nl Engineer o m▪arimo • .nm w , .wnm r .. "a J a»,.r „ I wavava o, Ins J_..J_ .. .. �.A »,., 1 mom— •• - a,- — — .a,.a .a YEMPEIEEMet ;s �a M1.. a a.,a•. ..v i. .• a•qww .n e e u.n rao.,na :•» , o �, I - �fy f. WE GESCE14 10R C: . w u•..... •e••.I..*grata l u ,n y,) _ =h `a. eI r __ a=1.,;: 7417 -- I. L ....� OI E130.I.IS .::bE[OPn M. lea �- �..� —{ r .. 01 na.2'1., P[1,.S Y. i 01 .SLL raD 99. ._ 4.- -- - _ m _ gm.PmimmEm, — ..—_.....___ a..nnw• utm PANEL•RB' •n..n•.—.•.....—. mv.•••••••..•....• PANEL,lr area rri '~ ,.1.•. .... r —~ 0 ,..n•w...-...e._ wuw - ie• r, ... 'v„w rare, a , ®oi1EEmEBEfinili===1® _,.Pea . , ..,. ».... ®m®® mD[1D®=� 1 ra..esr , •..rw.,w..�:r.u.a:. col RImeL]f D= �i ., „ .••••.1.».,••••••......,..,a...,,.a.,a� ®m®®®i.'IdOo®m�ao® nl. .'rT" z: �Q��. a. ,__., is • - aa �aAv�a —-- w... _._„ ._. .. �. . rEn,ro�naP,a�aB ) ua,. 1_m. m TOM REID LIBRARY 3522 LIBERTY DRIVE y PEARLAND, TX 77581 MD L g �.-. a a G � J — - — _ [ TO 9 REID LIBRARY' • R Zi LEAEAAPaa. = 1e»arimr..Pty I ADDITION & 0:,"twaa urF rAaRas' RENOVATION i S I -ELECTRICAL PANEL- 1 SCHEDULES&ONE 6 LINE DIAGRAM a 'a Ea i WAG PROJECT uu. ERPwRIc Ila- t, s nn E.4.00 Ua(j PATE F[N4G4Vi! :0.5E.301: J j . . 7) f•Arilill SSO RACES OF OPERATION bea•gaopedWM compete fancy operatig.safety m.o..A lbwea.n APORATOR:SaladTube hypo,seamless w welded steel m...onwn coal Iron. f Dewberry 1. N«L•STEMS.sha cell do.mon eu n]OOD CFM:prawalwsecomrypa wp.v eel«min• ..11.1en be provided m be NleMOea vs TecnneMed W me chider acre.steel,heae•.D2.maerw.a w red brass aetian Weg4 Om,riled or a. una..amdwaa.w umd,i0edwa de a.,test she damp refrlOvaci Maw 226.2 Pt ,9 press.and M presence apraau[ta of m.waam.Dawon•bmud Nr6an rag be braved side pa4w,..assre,In accordance 5enonw.Nubile m prevent M.T1•f LNnID.Y bOpaeponoM Whereas.,y cakean. Matin9aM md'up.mmiaac E0.099 FADE ...Mash ward.mvncnm and nemambr weld hebmpeteoee mnuvoe'en. d dwgecer sore arc .. .d agmad.la Max. temperature aloe. r.r.irrraal•.,rl. El.. m.•h corals pacbdprovldlp a wmeraM.rape,mad a..e°ca lea 5'Fw..n 00248 soppy e..17 m a.7wnedm.. of Mang era..Panpa Peale ol.nd.v.lea anima Emmaus:Special 9140 won• Tenwaabay controlled • cooling selpwe MP.read. CONDENSER COLLO.FANS ANDMOTONS:Cadw.min anlm mechanically bonded m seamless n Ilrrrrrlrlrry IF:rrllirrr.r'r. elemeaver.g..ocol acceptable Debra.a.l hmros.b aae•sa.anew.,ad a mppna.Fv1NNew.a 04..4m m amumeb.a al uMtwww.m 4250a9.0M aMet tdmenl.0 a apawea WM.m.4.ha'ngas.. nDD REFWGERANT PIPING ANO SPECIALTIES del....Seal an aging charge.Fans:Va.Men dam papa c0eneumns dip, C. k.51m Earn 488 system Man.23218 a al..and I1Op0M•yamrmaw 4PoraC...maeuer•rear.mw n M egM>M raw. ca...wminaN•y 32.12....roe.Mda°:W.....2/....mm°v.um,1003 prom 11ill11111.r•HIt'Nr.1111.1 Engilteers sas yy4s Per a..twempdeetlrsMni.paaa.m9,,and 41 vole reawrerne I.lorg l'ua appimama.Pmwead.wa 3vn,traps and.amna.m Pomade�taplat«aan'°Iasa,an amnia wmmtea Ma beano.aM.rowel omen.. wing du.loss tl paw Wepe.ed•ofalIaasi lO nom..Made m...aable manual ommn,w win by condensing una.ra.such as awaerawma lines.Provide dedicated col HI11n.timecoma era,zinr.r.,.� Walatur0 NM.mown,321 opera.of 4M sawn.up m 1,244 of refrigerant 283 la each renlper.n1Naal. se Many codes led eeb,wue•a size or distance tMmgm 02 DdMel Controls.Healing systems have ampe.Lty to auto...rear and Imam.,operate e,meaalacwy stilealaduly.Hate Man ran view.Ulnae.S . led.Seal wad pene..s. REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT:Factory furnished aM piped.FwN.nror ead,rerrleemanl mast •yaem tOM.gn zone temperatures Ma.ahaung selp°IM adjustable drum lo667 a bear.Cooling . avi ane soda valve. paeans.have M ..310 aulomeam%res.and temporarily operate Me system n Tequlmdm Rang:ASIA 0260,Type AOC..drawn ennead.Fimmps:ASMEGIB.43woupI, elreplace°.owe lyp 11,11.lir•IP A'.\w+rr[•imllr•n melna.Ma tempera..beam a c arp selnal«Iustable ups.SWF w higher Or to ravening/1 apace pm.hat. Brae AWE ADD 004P0mrl wpp1.......919.1.11110m ]. LIW In I'n'll l:Na humblty bola. lA degrees F.Ilan.rangee.d=ma r sense 01.1........... A ` ...b,w.7...7.9P.6.. aNM .ymHanda Va sedal•ntilaton.All mbar air au.naam83 awlarn the spacesserved am a in ur�.aedvmWlas 9ebe„wo,.e copper 43in4m>/8M.00:ASTM MD,Type 6. Charging sudden 1. SMt4O Deasy Con 083 BON coat e0suppyana Kau. s shall be equipped MNmdon0ed raid ,compression 1300.1ONr:Flared. Yen N,waded.Finings:ASME Bt826 eunoadne. e.r°eanpnee 0.1 0.BNo°atcaly shut van Msysum cus0ems served arergn use.Vermudon.Ada aV r 8. edagsor0aharpas W d.a.g Orocapory.......0.mdeon,. .0.81. 23 3100 TOAC DUCTS e. Aro.02,,l.Mf deMe ewbveM. Ea0O4.w:Mad...My Dom b..mte dud non nese dnwnps.mnNm Mama.and avou,34 sp.NMd. O3804,)«nmanael)dam.•an au...41040 1 systems 1 ASTIRAE 90.1 2007 agar ary..sarena drawiigamena1e tree twee,sheet meals larger mdaa OM.0M.W lalwns CONTROLS:Ow aWpm..m Melmnud ' _ L�G1.2.3.mvsrrgahaN)derrWs.va� randavt5tdegree eavane°eMw•uderma ENawem be fa.ry 0 atmnrMumcenenra pan.corn.s I....7Reazmu sage.244 eapm,ytl]admwbxa. pademsy.lmu aN alma eon...or .mwmed,ase.smMls.wN.lawayamed an eh,glepd.I pod sera Vanes.Maio vanes. . o,,Gmina °corNnawmaba6•wur nay, 4 a4muamw cosequences of oarabn.Maopraaanimg.sapaal ad one...m Me 0588(ma.c Usa07Maaed.01rmuL0N.mN9le.maM SMACNA lamnstnwm,runww9. Mar d con.wee, enims ar anon.panednel el pO"'.Fua.,nwaw r..l.p«tavero.a SaRmaons of Operation n a,ead ME.... .atlagn.V Mop..V.g review,mrnis4nng era"%U10 oar asa2Poa+. NO. DATE DESCRIPTION annals .v..M . Microprocessor w�n y.adam amc.y..B4ve.[map•ysnm sale not aa®ped. Sway.I.M.e acme 0um:•1' tO.sC.1s KSUC To]. DEDIICATED 0UI00040IT UNITIVAR00LE VOLUME NC PACKAGED) Reams-1' . Cana aanalam2113 serve o mm.Www relays.canal comma.. P DC P rvc a. The the pats lmpename and nme.1y.1 conrl Me cool.a Maungb dla t dowmsa nun ON/OFF pad sal... 02 0z,:6.1I. Kn.REVIEw SETPE b.Supplytans areema*O0 velure and rapMumsyalen Inn iaetine. O°amagnaa((p.,40HRAE SYSTEMS.E0UIPMENT 2008 TABLE 1., L Measure sWaeta��voMn. OS 01.23.17 CONE l00 BID N erv0 1.c. Coo..mode:Factory condom k sl.sen mW00 bmeaw.mmad4.wrga aas.m.Tmwsw a.ua SERUET132 (adjustable).The m.4MMg cool cycle and mamnN65 Sp ply AV .T Seal Level 6A6 MI nunevene jWe aMbn9itudinal seams, ad pe.vdlanaease,entering M aemeavin9M1m lempm eniul as all pump dam paona.atrela'un 08 02.23.17 ^CCEN330 ae eu017..UFOww cooling MeM amMWaroMW peed OM Supply modle.be sae :Naval mi.«eams e.ab.IlmN.sea. aM bNnq 6,d leaanabvea,aM relMemlpurpdonn pressure and OS m.11.1T CC[x0 u Ifi agar need01Mnithe...cMTempera.a S awmpaM modMb.Ivvvn RoutswezlV.dspudcom.edmMtsakd 1elpenwrs,manure Ipdng mode: e:f..ededmm Tang.ream. i•mp.awrsdperaL transverse dugcame.to egalrmw'og But nel wprdlp sp.la taps.araaJn•,OM. a Heamg node:mamyeawd con main. lemperaave Oa.m penead. a d°anm�attm m sores,ppa ma wn•.rmma.ce 2.colt[mtrpa Wrl,Nae Mr awe Van =amg fallowing l.gga: 3 VVAV DIRECT 6zi3ISION MI HANDLED(SINGLE 200E YAM mst.ers a.mwa deaseem,arm.agate.800022adqude0odmrven0 saw Hanes . 0ommp ma4Mumv bee as prole.W anwd0Ma.ae mad Na B. Someseaat.Man lavaaated Ta.vv+.pvd sea.. Supyad....dura.M...:ram.edanma.,02.cu..:Sea Levi.. izes om son wear.•m• . a Verne laide m8d0..e0Maug end lag tspcll°r,lan a man adwe .Mal m.rdc•:sal Levale . Cepa oo.rol•'M��lavig..M.ut temperau.e and compensated a Madman Seal..fru.du.us.9 Ha0aaal osoda mastic as filmaSs ram n m1Rw8Me setaau scmxym D.1'F. Wyrsr adage. 0. Iva 88124.: Sedans Foster 32.19 a Cnlmn CP.146.Do mum..soNml Mse sealaw nsae.utltrgo Do ° p"pet rrramna e`m aern chided 0ill eenc. demandsaid lermeame mm•r•mamnupmmaapomee urge o101'Fb YF magi..ca.•elpdd,dam...mwmre]0% de egad mrymed nails N.M twangs.Tape ma...ea .day Wm sc... aW.al Wallop. 2. laa`mma.c.cocMgsoma al modulate m...ma Lag Soppy Aa Selmau TMeuppym1VFD a0oa.0 LEE65GGMD rIa wed lmrmr0M.reel dose m.19............ a M9aw......112.nVFOCamElial(0V%0elaw)and m1Mdale between as seats.and Externally a uMed awaaa1 be sealed bare tag ins a02.Sa..ee of enema d,aawd faun r pump and wama1Ming. ce...... 104%24ree5.Po era 0001 Spam Tempeete.W..Spam Coda Rese1Wnaaw..al.4W a.amtsal.be.to M metal.e0red,remain 6ea hem.meal movement aM.rea n �/pauatm°Nimfw aq«�a�e.a pump run 44. a°"°aMv.mpm.l+M 'n9 High and a Spam Cm1g as Reset Samsemmnl. Derrage oaDFto•1767.11ea0D2Mb[Wen plght s2Mnis..IN al rant ranprapm•avue meow l0wdwan med,M•and cc.. E. Ds..reels.F .19 a Cinders CP•t46. pan.ledaa.g M0miamn and weds are rspmwe). - . Spam ems.manna air volume men.sal mint donna a mamma'30% R/IINSULATION SCHEDULE: I uOOae,Med ma�mleiwlm acates.CO. 2teneneea«van.for pumps.erWner Mnhara.m eM H.3.9....r..p..L Tea Supply Fan UFO Recagunr0 07 UNaua.externally Ns...ezrfp1.125 feel Wsest.fano,Mats Mad be I. .Mknt 61231gl pec9Ue akr aMpp..i.....almmnyd.3.4.0rm Mar. wo•ebgin tip ap a eMaM0n.LiioOmFOltemi°`ewg Speed(2Xaefam)are]mod...Maan.•cep.and NAM linen `v' p.weWman4MaewM art......°a. • Pe edam°Speed(I00X Default)a nee«m 03410maLaa space temperal...1nw uph4 enema.Insulated 5�st demand WA. Dar.paged W rem.cceacaowm. Spero Heat.Hid eM a Spam Header Low Repel source.... of 0 b 10 vdcshg.l to mad 3-ay valve moon wan opamil a.m..Is wRplAC4.[Abw lont vvhmsrathg ua.ape d MdadM water mild RaOlom 8500,0V P^•r.noWs...except at e.twnl dorm mmordi.ea dyed Med be away m dater aria m alarm mmwmga0•F1apeniMe led/wad.L Outside sw-anned.enewaynvrema.mcen.n.16 ke10mal to lam Mall mnmmaly.heir Mat.F. Fre e miaha mmemreawaMmuddMmawn Wemmrae6.avMmml.. G. e air: I. Alec aa0OM neM.�aan swap awned Ian.6am.a damp unmated Mum On1ev Wen.Po.l.a na.dem..Maul:Schuller Pennimro 0umua3e'Csaaimesa Tag. 3.DI`�0'he': awiaaaw Damn ,Mk otdl AHu ,m. Una, 1.5 PC 917...m.ncic)dem......en a.s mew..lo ASTM C1071: a D..ad pea Mai adage,.sladaa,aw0ag mamas dappym.ne of 0m0Wlg M Om coating m be cleanable and TAM arm.nio«ha mo3N per Ascot 031.G4......cam �ety wa,em by Ow1W1 a coda aa.an rrwa0m may be soon..Me mazy GrLLEn WATER MRHANDLE(B GLLEZONEYV (�. . 23TMDear °)al9DXm..ageada034004Meel KC I als at 1.eam8ms mamawjo6.1pa sealed, a. nam/atiw amaea 4321340yaud ▪ - - e Spa setmiMl0 DSahe.cammled am.nmplee0 Wpm..•ntemu.Gams FFoos.81�2.(ale).CP.500001,(w�m1el.CP-135 Mdek..wl1Wmt M. a smP •r�w1 a.1u„ 7.107 vgree.1,.)aee ba.ae.vnnu.,and cooling sepoinm:ien al rem..wt. . Ew�mca•'4 w00300. Do gdamn d •° meet OMinBW80n yam speed Inseam M]a303.0ma,unb...Mg R- 2 . Spaceseens`oDor leadales airman.meMenand amW Rein rd.. Ian15feo/sses l.1 cab.o.,on Sup. ,'. : C•rme M2Ogers Teperatues...dad 105.E by ea wafer 048.22000650 In m.alM,sf..ldimmm and opUwW Mwr«mvrrm0lroeze pdmgm. .....w�a�vv E.rIahtlMn c.a.g m,(5C0.mnlg) V° y .Fled _ e. CChilmeda tt Cooler sel nm cam.all. 7. ter reset 21. .pace maser beery,ulatsebmlumet`bWin m1poarwnd to a Mad or 2593 .wer ea.exceed 50.SD.eB a.O Me .N an 90 MO.C'...97.9...s.be same `a' a The..am a.amerrnguram wa F. Free.Prolec.Aar I.Manta..upne.n of a..waimm mti,Pa.°m.ueM nallha 1vee Dad by ham.bamac ER,caws:fiberMad nme suntionia'.yeas Mae hen. En.np and or.con muid ser.. . damper.d deal.. W.I.rarer an Wmnm _ We9Mroslai1 WOnegaa.Va0.oar Parma°of 0.amr .te.lsmy0aMes.• TO • • G. Outside M: IMO or less seating w•F tompeal.e(edluMmk TM E90 moasre.Ins.oMmwan to eun..n dame Pemna.In n �n�•• < . .Ygmap,«noes,active awe 0.aee0 core Wad nano nd..nwlam.:R.0Obnea.glnu.alwamlwon.war ez.a'w0esscan rM1, • . .aIm,fAHufeezremi.inalam'°° °'nf�aMpewdnmdlma�ataoaepeeae.awtll.eg,a.aneW.m,mr1. 14.Cmpressornun.,of '�001.34. Compressor del stns. mays - .GUCTWOR0ACCESSOMESA DE 15.imed.y PLPESYSTEM 4W.vxN+maKa c6ra+ �mw span.mf nm balancing dampers n ad amply twd eaM,eldan.es P.deavmal balancing c. Dray... meson 3No.poms..M.ala.be capable Man..M . �grks 0049'n'aluM hen ages electric fan Mee .m waade.and 5041, memnarl.a Prom manual Ira ncip damper atm. caul ) ate onsmie M orenlm d eva sma lMulut.. .am •Waco.setiartn48030 mselback dwa,Mmned park systems 200000 awn.g sere VOLUME matemed°COVITIOL PAM0�ERspe SM.CNAHVAO Duct Cwouum.h Slande0e.Mean and compressor before tomato a Bid of M 30Matr«enl Damn sundae, I . OUTSIDE 16 euppOIPROR TO Y BRANCHES)8nnma,(PROFIT° FkeLe0.1te Mee dormers for 4u ass ups.0•]0Ndm ul10130e Daa0I opposed Wale pa't90 v1.m•Durry - WIS/O A/Rlaan unit Own upon presence of anal of oadn0m pain Asmm0 Gear eded.anped dam Nprwe coaled a.NanIIea Dame...Ir.N a�ua.°es0p' d apaydalarm menaMlMawLryl.dew ��p��-Cis hardware.Enman round eunaw.l]traes.d mal,hash end e. AnpParm'Dist.bun.ed. I'6-�3dl.�O.✓g 1'm11FO MAT.SYSTEM: Dosed beams co ducts hang Weace.s.ilvs50n over 2 Naea wg.0°aNm9a.Furnish Ivy W6..amwM cave .t.e.kvlMn]O dam ermb woo M. y6 FUM.nmcoi.gmMr wadaa reg.M°on sale and mum'aade dam I.TheeeAr con.OA Tease HarmAepteclmar. A.me Weed wane system cons.l one 3Twar W9lnp MCMnea.Eafl[Nae.se dada.lel.. .aunt a mpuldan.em.M hew dampers. egarnentneear.Ole Bedend Include 30ptemnaag.pWwmm.aWmMendw local \TIT 8� Mr...wafer0000. The bulldog operator Mall have M 0pa0n m operate the Weave wan.plant Wclass..Where mMl a^9d°sel;Damswada0nnmonowlM Nsuhelbn �aana I oda software upgWuewiPoul iwcunsr new hydwarenMNlller. 1 7C manually.mMMamry °rpm Bacons]O wee M1nNan,epldaotMNe.e. ronwlsnmm shoal odmr whwMwwme wNwlM need lw..Mawwe n,Mulaa. cane 4. 1 E.Hand�MaledwaeMp a.auraew0O....PA.Mwled faun.)on DRUM panel mussed/W0er) A00ato antelance°•4mnma°`damperarts 330 access..a..I and t�YTnma w der. ."°°°..°d.stlo arb eyaEtACm8°/nlnl"a°Aprati•whr'W°henihee11e Auto w'�I.NaH°ndro. °. pus. Oua°aaealpy.d°.naaalaler� F m con 'hall tmmmw equipped 1MawtM9 Wrs ang .ymmp.,emdnmmjagmwNM TO)I LIBERTYREID LIll12:11t1' on MmaeYeunee,su4wluwerywenrde. list dampers Mad here.em.mvnbaa9e rebel pet Naar • lodo.IM pruGw: �7 g. C.I40 w.a°p.a.n RAFTEAMPES:PaaMlamm,®aaynaltwna.I,.16ga.M.sleaorevdmn z: IH.y,4,M°'0nt0080 3S _ . DRIVE 33 a.lmpb0,8uad81042.ymamatonaVACS.Each wm,gwd0dbe a..ratm.a . .Manorshealededges.Bladeslamam0e dam to Lowa of daatemperaMe i . PE.1kL\\Der TX ii�dl hardware Moaned.toB2.30(alag aacal3Pewrle..0244a..a.All•rerad erea..I.•P.1.1a:ns.d ..v.gOwlema slop.aandma,pe..dwl.a steel pad pea.Aaw.nelea.,mmnem.rrm b. cow fan be ad waagraa4ed by M 3OuyMmled coact*m maNM1 a canna rnmawarn may raa:g a,ne.tw sandman. s. pesvre team..lar F.wMmM clueing aalb.m 020.MWad raherp,npalav Nulart.nM WMr CONNECTIONS:pen S.C.Fa.k crimped gage gat.M.Mw Mg,g . Hyn heal..leaving PM lanp.ame. pe��m0pematembsigehutaownlM Wlrawatepmp,ahemewrm.rdvm MM. s.P880m�.3IrMa•wide...bsad 6n•elader0 neoprene mated woven glass fee fabric and Isar pap hem.amen Mau mtemd wa.m.nl prd«Mn. D.A.matc Opera.of Water Chiding Unit.MAutaretic 0WMn. 233700 A. BETS AND MMUS Furnish Pala. wIC30 0 gages.supra.lot saaoo and dischae nlegeant When a mad erode selector al.Is In M..mMaya..Mad. canes.1 Mae.elm.r.cw.ggedtypeands se assure, for eachcompr«aw.Fun.ial.gammpackageMble.u.a, b TO)1 (ION LIDIZ.\IZ1" ated.a paraded by OM varable speed saes me.ponding.!im m pus..IlaN speed drives lad Oerlwa0�NIaN IlaIL.M control opriomit le edeglzn.cmryvessomia wma.,eM acids alas.and activates w X,MnmyO.onm.3...dbeedoe. Melig.up.dolar dmmpressor ADDITION a ` Y HVAC AIR CLEANING DEVICES °sera Ted warrbmp°tempera... i i.operating erred allene�M delemaned W a lead.log 2 selector.Me lead.. fan atene.a Y,30 percent°Hanby as per ASHRAE 522.1d99,Madman wad re Mace ce al SDD 1°`m`;"�1'�-,"�1�'�'{' 1 uergbefMe a.<.14/92rota.m n.TMleaa ca.water prnpa.m0eaaem..daY a n0157. renelPleatI/CM6aequd.Una.ters,s.ea ed M IZENO\".1TION be sing...umn.M man carol panel.When Mprap Gas.aM `W , Comer orprea PACKAGED epee, Papz CONORfOrNG Uafs APAvi,MWm0o dry AYM ter IA6mg10,When en relay Woe Tars for Maura.e ill.®Lama.........prated Area ( 1 e M1n°am8.,p.mou g 0awnvM return..amp.A W Xd...no as mean. Replace MN my Etasc8 I g adansry ac90eteP.4elengw/fa Mein . no CP.... Wdaaaepa.erwd car. eve Me. Ipmt mariner 0.1.1.170 b .When me v. m dreyalem•. Mead outdoors.rra b Bwu F6.rGm Y avwge I.P..contra dWd m�°kareegl.9.each�:mfat.l.l°Wier a.mnergized In a..the 'at.f.D m before /r_ w;ESA aN.Waa N N sddd.pa lempera.mnma . am MECHANICAL m2e..an0200pre-approved qua) Ne spa"°"ypnd:'nlar.m.�:.mb°I,aa""apa 'ate Waded dm.a9e..mavaM.m.ada .m°Wad�"1 mpm aapnadd.,.pea,.eWM.mom contr. a9« p aa((yy9ump n�°m� ��0(ena B W a 4eea°° °°°'... SPECIFICATIONS sel8dd.Herd ece1 Iapedne.lMl mpeaond Weed w.lerstw uN below med�Charrsdwae Mal..�mWrauy°eva0ped tone.°hale op..Ian eanodpee.a aa.Mn G..i.Co:.P;m,d.004 ,inn co w, aped rag..can rorntim.. aa.3..0m 0.a...a.d paa.aapp tee t28040 0 vues..m410Tetrwnany we aooesensor brdui reuse M FAME t000emrgm M MMdel.1.. `sell uolvs.> • pe°m,°Lal0iun4pe°wma�w:r°iie' ryCtl r ens.to meet. n NOTE'Hp col 4m,kaagla i o=tctt13GRe06G190...Hydro.pump packages manufaMma MMaa expand.raie.wintering e.col Tim factory armed m caeainp.al. The laming GHW away temper..Maur.).Mpwmd.BTU b*Wmpe.. ^° na e a W ce« . AM DOLED CONOEoa 6903LLW.:uL.1CSA listed and ARImfiad.Copper tube,Mmlmhum En °apedmeld Wllerm..por Mtr.atsteaMwd'mprseulneMnW. SCROLL COMfPRESSOR:Da.edn,hermetic,fixed mnpn.lm,well motmmnpresea win at se move as peal«erndelayr aMn sigh sa and c POJECT N0. DRAWING 0. 1l .7amoo ...9. boom..mpMgp.WmatransmitasignalleaMarra.n.,In for del �� M II.M Mxicaticnp.e.pmh}aur lwlms1el Nga,edW770.1.val.onsc. . .nIW.A r�9.rM,Drone.al„w.dwNe4�prs:mrs. :T M401 wide addlu ®ling_ M rsal.suavass o loaherr..g Nang. vdwwww i manage NM mmlaMdtlM Wo,maum ncelved and reset chaPo pan.MoseramOMv,ru.y.wood,Mmet'Imnywded.«anal mpalMmtbn. DATE 1 .aupavcepdu.MA.. r 1 0 [ �� t0.30.015 o e�: CITY OF PEARLAND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 04/2008 CITY OF PEARLAND SUMMARY OF WORK Section 01100 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A A summary of the Work to be performed under this Contract, work by Owner, Owner furnished products, Work sequence, future Work, Contractor's use of Premises, and Owner occupancy. 1.02 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A Work of the Contract is for the construction of: the addition and renovation of the existing Tom Reid Library in Pearland, Texas. As a part of the scope of work, we will add approximately 8,560 square feet to the building, expanding the northwest side of the building. In this addition, we will enlarge the stack areas in the children's, adult and teen areas,increase the lounge seating, provide new computer desk areas, provide new check out kiosk, new help desks and additional restroom facilities. New interior finishes and lighting will be added to the library to include: wall and floor finishes, new LED lighting throughout the space and parking lot, new ceiling tile and extending new ceiling grid to match existing. A new HVAC system will be supplied as a part of this project. 1.03 WORK BY OWNER A The owner is to remove and store the books and stacks are to be coordinated with the contractor and done by the owner chosen company. 1.04 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A Computer equipement will be supplied by the owner. Data connections will be installed by library IT personell. 1.05 WORK SEQUENCE A Not used. B Contractor to submit project schedule to Engineer & Owner for approval as specified in Section 01350—Submittals. C Contractor shall coordinate the Work with the Engineer and Owner as specified in Section 01310 - Coordination and Meetings. 1.06 FUTURE WORK A Not used. 08/2016 01100- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND SUMMARY OF WORK 1.07 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES A Comply with procedures for access to the site and Contractor's use of rights-of-way as specified in Section 01140 - Contractor's Use of Premises. B Contractor shall be responsible for all utilities required for construction. 1.08 OWNER OCCUPANCY A Cooperate with the Owner to minimize conflict, and to facilitate the Owner's operations. Coordinate Contractor's activities with Engineer. B Schedule Work to accommodate this requirement. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 08/2016 01100-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES Section 01140 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A General use of the Project Site including properties inside and outside of the limits of construction, work affecting roads, ramps, streets and driveways and notification to adjacent occupants. B References to Technical Specifications: 1 Section 01350—Submittals 2 Section 01730—Cutting & Patching 3 Section 01555 —Traffic Control &Regulation 4 Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal 5 Section 01720—Field Surveying 6 Section 02980—Pavement Repair 7 Section 02770—Curbs, Curb & Gutter, &Headers 8 Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill, &Embankment Materials 9 Section 02922—Sodding 10 Section 02921 —Hydromulch Seeding 1.02 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.03 LIMITS OF CONSTRUCTION A Confine access,operations,and storage areas to limits of construction as shown on the Plans provided by Owner as stipulated in Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement; trespassing on abutting lands or other lands in the area is not allowed. B Contractor may make arrangements,at Contractor's cost,for temporary use of private properties,in which case Contractor and Contractor's surety shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner against claims or demands arising from such use of properties outside of the limits of construction. 1. Improvements to private properties made for the Contractor's use must be removed upon completion of the Work. a. No fill material may be placed in temporary work areas or on adjacent private properties without the written permission of the Engineer or the issuance of a Fill Permit by the City of Pearland or other governing entity. (1111'\, C Restrict total length which materials may be distributed along the route of the construction at any one time to 1,000 linear feet unless otherwise approved by Engineer. 02/2008 01140- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES 1.04 PROPERTIES OUTSIDE OF LIMITS OF CONSTRUCTION A Altering the condition of properties adjacent to and along the limits of construction will not be permitted unless authorized by the Engineer and property owner(s). B Means,methods,techniques,sequences,or procedures which will result in damage to properties or improvements in the vicinity outside of the limits of construction will not be permitted. C Any damage to properties outside of the limits of construction shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer and at no cost to the Owner. D Contractor shall protect or replace all property corners, monuments or other demarcations disturbed, damaged or lost as a result of his activities. The replacement of these devices shall be properly documented to the satisfaction of the City by a Registered Public Land Surveyor with copies delivered to the Owner or private property owner. 1.05 USE OF SITE A Obtain approvals of governing authorities prior to impeding or closing public roads or streets. Do not close consecutive intersections simultaneously B Notify Engineer 48 hours prior to closing a street or a street crossing. Permits for street closures are required in advance and are the responsibility of the Contractor. C Maintain access for emergency vehicles including access to fire hydrants. D Avoid obstructing drainage ditches or inlets; when obstruction is unavoidable due to requirements of the Work, provide grading and temporary drainage structures to maintain unimpeded flow. E Locate and protect private lawn sprinkler systems which may exist on rights-of-ways within the Project Site. Repair or replace damaged systems to condition equal to or better than that existing at start of the Work. F When required by the Work, cutting, patching, and fitting of Work to existing facilities,accommodating installation or connection of Work with existing facilities,or uncovering Work for access, inspection, or testing shall be performed in accordance with Section 01730—Cutting &Patching. G Fires are not permitted on the Project Site. 1.06 NOTIFICATION TO ADJACENT OCCUPANTS A Notify individual occupants in areas to be affected by the Work of the proposed construction and time schedule. Notification shall be 24 hours,72 hours and 2 weeks prior to work being performed within 200 feet of the homes or businesses. 02/2008 01140-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES B Include in notification names and telephone numbers of two representatives for resident contact,who will be available on 24-hour call. Include precautions which will be taken to protect private property and identify potential access or utility inconvenience or disruption. C Submit proposed notification to Engineer for approval. Consideration shall be given to the ethnicity of the neighborhood where English is not the dominant language. Notice shall be in an understandable language. 1.07 EXCAVATION IN STREETS AND DRIVEWAYS A Avoid hindering or needlessly inconveniencing public travel on a street or any intersecting alley or street for more than two blocks at any one time, except by permission of the Engineer. B Obtain the Engineer's approval when the nature of the Work requires closing of an entire street. Permits required for street closure are the Contractor's responsibility. Avoid unnecessary inconvenience to abutting property owners. C Remove surplus materials and debris and open 1000 feet or less for public use as work in that block is complete.. D Acceptance of any portion of the Work will not be based on return of street to public use. E Avoid obstructing driveways or entrances to private property. F Provide temporary crossing or complete the excavation and backfill in one continuous operation to minimize the duration of obstruction when excavation is required across drives or entrances. G Provide barricades and signs in accordance with Section 01555 —Traffic Control & Regulation. 1.08 CLEAN-UP A Maintain Project Site in a neat and orderly manner. B Perform daily clean-up in and around construction zone of dirt,debris,scrap materials, other disposable items. C Leave streets, driveways, and sidewalks broom-clean or its equivalent at the end of each work day. D Promptly remove barriers, signs, and components of other control systems that are no longer being utilized. E Dispose of waste and excess materials in accordance with requirements of Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal. 02/2008 01140-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES 1.09 RESTORATION A Restore damaged permanent facilities to pre-construction conditions unless replacement or abandonment of facilities is indicated on the Plans. B Repair/Replace removed or damaged pavement in accordance with Section 02980— Pavement Repair and removed or damaged curbs, gutters, and headers in accordance with Section 02770 — Curbs, Curb & Gutter, & Headers. Repair/Replace with like materials to match existing style, lines, grades, etc., unless otherwise directed by Engineer. C Repair turf areas which become damaged by Contractor's operations at no additional cost to Owner. Level with bank sand or topsoil, conforming to Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill, & Embankment Materials, as approved by the Engineer. Provide sodding in areas of residential land use over the surface of ground disturbed during construction and not paved, or not designated to be paved, in accordance with Section 02922—Sodding. Use only block sodding; do not use spot sodding or sprigging Provide hydromulch seeding in areas of commercial, industrial or undeveloped land use over the surface of ground disturbed during construction and not paved, or not designated to be paved, in accordance with Section 02921 —Hydromulch Seeding. Water and level newly sodded areas with adjoining turf using steel wheel rollers appropriate for sodding. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 02/2008 01140-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES Section 01200 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Procedures for measurement and payment of Work. B Conditions for nonconformance assessment and nonpayment for rejected products. C References to Technical Specifications: See Bid Proposal Sheet D Reference Standards: 1. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) 2. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) 1.02 AUTHORITY A Units and methods delineated in this Section are intended to complement the criteria of the Technical Specifications and Section 00300—Bid Proposal. B In the event of conflict, the unit specified for Bid Items in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal shall govern. C Measurements and quantities submitted by the Contractor will be verified by the Engineer. D Contractor shall provide necessary equipment, workers, and survey personnel as required by Engineer to verify quantities. 1.03 UNIT QUANTITIES SPECIFIED A Quantity and measurement estimates stated in Section 00300 —Bid Proposal are for contract purposes only. Quantities and measurements supplied or placed in the Work, authorized and verified by Engineer shall determine payment as stated in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. B If the actual Work requires greater or lesser quantities than those quantities indicated in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal, provide the required quantities at the unit prices contracted except as otherwise stated in Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement or in executed Change Order. 1.04 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES A Measurement by Weight: Reinforcing steel, rolled or formed steel or other metal shapes will be measured by CRSI or AISC Manual of Steel Construction weights. Welded assemblies will be measured by CRSI or AISC Manual of Steel Construction or scale weights. 05/2007 01200- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES B Measurement by Volume: 1. Stockpiles: Measured by cubic dimension using mean length, width, and height or thickness. 2. Excavation and Embankment Materials: Measured by cubic dimension using the average end area method. C Measurement by Area: Measured by square dimension using mean length and width or radius. D Linear Measurement: Measured by linear dimension, at the item centerline or mean chord. E Stipulated Price Measurement: By unit designated in the agreement. F Other: Items measured by weight, volume, area, or lineal means or combination, as appropriate, as a completed item or unit of the Work. 1.05 PAYMENT A Payment includes full compensation for all required supervision,labor,products,tools, equipment,plant,transportation,services,and incidentals;and erection,application or installation of an item of the Work; and Contractor's overhead and profit. The price bid shall include the total cost for required Work. Claims for payment as Unit Price Work not specifically covered in Section 00300—Bid Proposal will not be accepted. B Progress Payments for Unit Price Work will be based on the Engineer's observations and evaluations of quantities incorporated in the Work multiplied by the unit price. C Progress Payments for Lump Sum Work will be based on the Engineer's observations and evaluations of the percentage of quantities included in the schedule of values incorporated in the Work. D Final Payment for Work governed by unit prices will be made on the basis of the actual measurements and quantities determined by Engineer multiplied by the unit price for Work which is incorporated in or made necessary by the Work. 1.06 NONCONFORMANCE ASSESSMENT A Remove and replace the Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to the Contract Documents. B If, in the opinion of the Engineer, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, the Engineer will direct one of the following remedies: 1. The nonconforming Work will remain as is, but the unit price will be adjusted to a lower price at the discretion of the Engineer. 2. The nonconforming Work will be modified as authorized by the Engineer, and the unit price will be adjusted to a lower price at the discretion of the Engineer, if the modified Work is deemed to be less suitable than originally specified. 05/2007 01200-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES C Individual Technical Specifications may modify these options or may identify a specific formula or percentage price reduction. The authority of the Engineer to assess the nonconforming Work and identify payment adjustment is final. 1.07 NONPAYMENT FOR REJECTED PRODUCTS A Payment will not be made for any of the following: 1. Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable to Engineer. 2. Products determined as nonconforming before or after placement. 3. Products not completely unloaded from transporting vehicle. 4. Products placed beyond the lines and levels of the required Work. 5. Products remaining on hand after completion of the Work, unless specified otherwise. 6. Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected products. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - Not Used END OF SECTION (11°6\ 05/2007 01200-3 of 3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 C SECTION 01 21 00 ALLOWANCES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances. B. Types of allowances include contingency allowances for unforeseen conditions. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submit proposals for purchase of products or systems included in allowances, in the form specified for Change Orders. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Submit invoices or delivery slips to show actual quantities of materials delivered to the site for use in fulfillment of each allowance. B. Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor time and cost for installation of °7\' allowance items that include installation as part of the allowance. C. Coordinate and process submittals for allowance items in same manner as for other portions of the Work. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to coordinate installation. 1.5 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES A. Use the contingency allowance only as directed by Architect for Owner's purposes and only by Change Orders that indicate amounts to be charged to the allowance. B. Contractor's overhead, profit, and related costs for products and equipment ordered by Owner under the contingency allowance are included in the allowance and are not part of the Contract Sum. These costs include delivery, installation, insurance, equipment rental, and similar costs. C. Change Orders authorizing use of funds from the contingency allowance will include Contractor's related costs and reasonable overhead and profit margins. D. At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the contingency allowance to Owner by Change Order. 1.6 ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance Adjustment:To adjust allowance amounts, prepare a Change Order proposal based on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final ALLOWANCES 012100 - 1 (ADDENDUM #2; ISSUED: 2.10.17) TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 measurement of work-in-place where applicable. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting losses,tolerances, mixing wastes,normal product imperfections,and similar margins. 1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance. 2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead costs and other margins claimed. 3. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent quantity survey, measure, or count. B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount or Contractor's handling, labor, installation,overhead,and profit. 1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents. 2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher- or lower- priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine products covered by an allowance promptly on delivery for damage or defects. Return t.'") damaged or defective products to manufacturer for replacement. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with related work. 3.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance No. 1 — Cash Allowance: Include the sum of one hundred and fifty thousand and no/100 dollars ($150,000.00)for additional work approved/requested by owner. B. Allowance No. 2 — Exterior Signage Allowance: Include the sum of ten thousand and no/100 dollars($10,000.00)for the replacement of the existing exterior signage "TOM REID LIBRARY" located on the right side of the entrance. Match font type, style, and size, provide in aluminum finish, pin mounted to exterior brick. C. Allowance No. 3 — Chiller MEP Fee: Include the sum of twenty thousand and no/100 dollars ($20,000.00)for design fees for the chiller option. Should this Alternate Option be selected,the awarded General Contractor will contract directly with their engineer of choice to design and implement. END OF SECTION t.") J ALLOWANCES 012100-2 (ADDENDUM #2; ISSUED: 2.10.17) TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 SECTION 012200-UNIT PRICES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Unit price is an amount incorporated in the Agreement, applicable during the duration of the Work as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment, or services, or a portion of the Work, added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if the scope of Work or estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or (111111 decreased. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, overhead, and profit. B. List of Unit Prices: A schedule of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES A. Description of Drilled Pier Unit Prices: Provide labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals required excavation, trimming, shoring, casings, dewatering, reinforcement, concrete fill, testing and inspecting, and other items for a complete drilled-pier installation, in accordance with Section 316329 "Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts." B. Unit Price No. 1: Provide soil excavation and disposal required for additional drilled pier work. 1. Unit of Measurement: Cubic yard of soil excavated and removed. UNIT PRICES 012200 - 1 TOM REED LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 C. Unit Price No. 2: Provide concrete reinforcing steel,in place required for drilled pier work. 1. Unit of Measurement: Pound, in place. D. Unit Price No. 3: Provide poured-in-place concrete required for drilled pier work. 2. Unit of Measurement: Cubic Yard. E. Unit Price No. 4 — For drilled piers - classified rock excavation and disposal off site and replacement with satisfactory fill material or engineered fill from off site, as required, and Section 316329"Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts". 1. Unit of Measurement: Cubic yard (Cubic meter) of rock excavated, based on survey of volume removed. END OF SECTION 012200 UNIT PRICES 012200 -2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 (11"*\ SECTION 01230 -ALTERNATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. (.1116\ 1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement. 2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates. C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Project Manual Specification Sections contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. ALTERNATES 01230- 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 PART 2- PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternates: 1. Additive Alternate Bid #1: Remove Endicott pavers in Lobby 105 and all the entries to the rest rooms and apply a self- leveling float (refer to Section Alteration Project Proce- dures) to floor in prep for new scheduled flooring over prepared floor area. Endicott pav- ers in Vestibule 100 to remain. 2. Additive Alternate Bid #2: Retain existing Endicott pavers in Lobby 105 and apply a self- leveling float (refer to Section Alteration Project Procedures) atop of the pavers in prep for new floor finishes to be installed over self-leveling float. 3. Additive Alternate Bid #3: Remove carpet and base in the Conference/Multi-Purpose Room 107 and prep for new floor. Provide new scheduled floor finish and base and new scheduled paint on all walls in this room. 4. Additive Alternate Bid #4: Provide floor to ceiling 1-Y2' prefabricated interior aluminum frame with '/2' thick clear tempered glass located on backside of half height books shelf host walls in children's area. 5. Additive Alternative Bid #5: Pressure wash, sand, prime and repair as required to bring to "like new" appearance the metal frame work and metal canopy above the entry. Paint scheduled color. 6. Additive Alternative Bid #6: Remove existing light poles and light fixtures in parking lot. Provide new light poles and fixtures that match those used at the City Hall: Lithonia Lighting 'D' series, size 3 LED flood luminaire on 25'#SSS square straight steel pole, to meet building criteria of 110 mph. Add new wiring as required for new fixtures. 7. Additive Alternate Bid #7: Provide new 130 ton air-cooled chiller in lieu of specified split DX equipment and packaged RTU's. Refer to Attachment Exhibit A and the Drawings. 8. 2Additive Alternate Bid#8: Demolish existing ceiling tile and grid in the library stack area. Provide new Armstrong 5/16" exposed ceiling grid and 24"x 24" Cortega acoustical ceiling tile. 9. 3Additive Alternate Bid#9: Provide card readers. CR Symbol denotes locations. See attached Section 281300. Contact: Michael Huffman with Convergint Technologies C: 832-524-6024, michael.huffman@convergint.com, 1420 North Sam Houston Parkway E. Suite 190, Houston, Texas 77032. END OF SECTION 01230 3Addendum #3 02.16.2016 ALTERNATES 01230 -2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 r' EXHIBIT A TO SECTION 01230: ISO 9001:2008 CERTIFIED ENGINEER' • PI ANNERS • SCIENTISTS • f. oNSTR uCTiO N MANAGERS K C I 801-leay's Street,Suite 2000. Houston,1X 77002 • Office 713-237-9800•Fax 713-237-9801 Debbi Mulcahy,RID,NCIDQ, RAS Dewberry I Wilson 5051 Westheimer Rd, Suite 200 Houston,TX 77056 dmulcahy<ii dewberrs.com RE: Tom Reid Library Chiller Add Alternate r. Provide new 130 ton air-cooled chiller in lieu of specified split DX equipment and packaged RTUs. Air cooled chiller shall be Carrier 3ORBF130 6 2 with dual-7.5 hp integral pumps equipped with VFD, or equal. Chiller shall be mounted on a new concrete equipment pad in existing exterior equipment yard. New chiller shall be provided with factory mounted DDC controls and shall comply with City of Pearland points lists and controls sequence of operation(as installed by Climatech). Indoor DX air handling units shall be removed from the scope and new chilled water AHUs with electric heat shall be provided. Chilled water AHUs shall be provided with three-way control valves. Roof mounted packaged DX 100% outside air equipment shall be removed from the scope and new chilled water 100% OA RTUs with direct gas fired heat shall be provided. Chilled water piping on the roof shall be minimized.New AHUs and RTUs shall be provided with factory mounted DDC controls and shall comply with City of Pearland points lists and controls sequence of operation(as installed by Climatech). New 6"chilled water piping shall be provided between new air-cooled chillers, existing east mechanical room, and new west mechanical room. Outdoor piping shall be provided with cellular glass insulation manufactured in accordance with ASTM C552-03 (Foamglas or equal) installed per manufacturer rec- ommendations. Indoor piping shall be provided with Cellular Phenolic Insulation(Koolphen or equal). Piping shall be provided with aluminum jacketing in accordance with ASTM B209. Acceptable chiller manufacturers are: Carrier Corporation,The Trane Company, JCU York, and Daikin. Acceptable air handling unit manufacturers are: Carrier Corporation,The Trane Company,JCl/York, and Daikin. Acceptable 100% OA unit manufactures are: Aaon, Carrier Corporation,The Trane Company, JCU York, and Daikin. ("RI\ ALTERNATES 01230 -3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 ALTERNATES 01230 -4 CITY OF PEARLAND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES Section 01290 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Procedures for processing Change Orders, including: 1. Assignment of a responsible individual for approval and communication of changes in the Work; 2. Documentation of change in Contract Price and Contract Time; 3. Change procedures, using proposals and construction contract modifications, Work Change Directive, Stipulated Price Change Order, Unit Price Change Order, Time and Materials Change Order; 4. Execution of Change Orders; 5. Correlation of Contractor Submittals. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01760—Project Record Documents C Other References: 1. Rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment(Data Quest Blue Book). Rental Rate is defined as the full unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.03 RESPONSIBLE INDIVIDUAL A Contractor shall provide a letter indicating the name and address of the individual authorized to execute change documents, and who shall also be responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ and Subcontractors of changes to the Work. The information shall be provided at the Preconstruction Conference. 1.04 DOCUMENTATION OF CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE AND CONTRACT TIME A Provide full information required for identification and evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs of proposed changes in the Work. B Contractor shall document each Proposal for Change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow for its evaluation. 02/2008 01290- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES C Proposal for Change shall include, as a minimum, the following information as applicable: 1. Original Quantities of items in Section 00300—Bid Proposal with additions, reductions, deletions, and substitutions. 2. When Work items were not included in Section 00300—Bid Proposal, Contractor shall provide unit prices for the new items, with supporting information as required by the Engineer. 3. Justification for any change in Contract Time. 4. Additional data upon request. D For changes in the Work performed on a time-and-material basis, the following additional information may be required: 1. Quantities and description of products and equipment. 2. Taxes, insurance and bonds. 3. Overhead and profit as noted in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement, 7.03 "Extra Work". 4. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom. 5. Time records and certified copies of applicable payrolls. 6. Invoices and receipts for products, rented equipment, and subcontracts, similarly documented. E Rented equipment will be paid to the Contractor by actual invoice cost for the duration of time required to complete the extra work. If the extra work comprises only a portion of the rental invoice where the equipment would otherwise be on the site, the Contractor shall compute the hourly equipment rate by dividing the actual monthly invoice by 176. (One day equals 8 hours and one week equals 40 hours.) Operating costs shall not exceed the estimated operating costs given for the item of equipment in the Blue Book. F For changes in the work performed on a time-and-materials basis using Contractor- owned equipment, compute rates with the Blue Book as follows: 1. Multiply the appropriate Rental Rate by an adjustment factor of 70 percent plus the full rate shown for operating costs. The Rental Rate utilized shall be the lowest cost combination of hourly, daily, weekly or monthly rates. Use 150 percent of the Rental Rate for double shifts (one extra shift per day) and 200 percent of the Rental Rate for more than two shifts per day. No other rate adjustments shall apply. 2. Standby rates shall be 50 percent of the appropriate Rental Rate shown in the Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed. 1.05 CHANGE PROCEDURES A Changes to Contract Price or Contract Time can only be made by issuance of a Change Order. Issuance of a Work Change Directive or written acceptance by the Engineer of changes will be formalized into Change Orders. All such changes will be in accordance with the requirements of Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement, 7.01 "Change Orders". 02/2008 01290-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES B The Engineer will advise Contractor of Minor Changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Price or Contract Time as authorized by Section 00700 - General Conditions of Agreement, 7.02 "Minor Changes", by issuing supplemental instructions. C Contractor may request clarification of Plans, Technical Specifications or Contract Documents or other information. Response by the Engineer to a Request for Information does not authorize the Contractor to perform tasks outside the scope of the Work. All changes must be authorized as described in this Section. 1.06 PROPOSALS FOR CHANGE AND CONTRACT MODIFICATION A The Engineer may issue a Request for Proposal,which includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Plans and Technical Specifications.The Engineer may also request a proposal in the response to a Request for Information. Contractor will prepare and submit its Proposal for Change within 7 days or as specified in the request. B The Contractor may propose an unsolicited change by submitting a Proposal for Change to the Engineer describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work, with a statement describing the reason for the change and the effect on the Contract Price and Contract Time including full documentation. 1.07 WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE A Engineer may issue a signed Work Change Directive instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. B The document will describe changes in the Work and will designate a method of determining any change in Contract Price or Contract Time. C Contractor shall proceed promptly to execute the changes in the Work in accordance with the Work Change Directive. 1.08 STIPULATED PRICE CHANGE ORDER A A Stipulated Price Change Order will be based on an accepted Proposal for Change including the Contractor's lump sum price quotation. 1.09 UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDER A Where Unit Prices for the affected items of the Work are included in Section 00300- Bid Proposal , the Unit Price Change Order will be based on unit prices as originally bid, subject to provisions of Section 00700-General Conditions of Agreement. B Where unit prices of the Work are not pre-determined in Section 00300 - Bid Proposal, Work Change Directive or accepted Proposal for Change will specify the unit prices to be used. 02/2008 01290-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 1.10 TIME-AND-MATERIAL CHANGE ORDER A Contractor shall provide an itemized account and supporting data after completion of change,within time limits indicated for claims in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. B Engineer will determine the change allowable in Contract Price and Contract Time as provided in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. C Contractor shall maintain detailed records of work done on time-and-material basis as specified in this Section, 1.04 "Documentation of Change in Contract Price and Contract Time". D Contractor shall provide full information required for evaluation of changes,and shall substantiate costs for changes in the Work. 1.11 EXECUTION OF CHANGE DOCUMENTATION A Engineer will issue Change Orders, Work Change Directives, or accepted Proposals for Change for signatures of parties named in Section 00500 — Standard Form of Agreement. 1.12 CORRELATION OF CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A For Stipulated Price Contracts, Contractor shall promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Price. B For Unit Price Contracts,the next monthly Application for Payment of the Work after acceptance of a Change Order will be revised to include any new items not previously included and the appropriate unit rates. C Contractor shall promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, and shall revise schedules to adjust time for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit for review. D Contractor shall promptly enter changes to the on-site and record copies of the Plans, Technical Specifications or Contract Documents as required in Section 01760 — Project Record Documents. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 02/2008 01290-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND COORDINATION AND MEETINGS Section 01310 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Section includes general coordination including Preconstruction Conference, Site Mobilization Conference, and Progress Meetings. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01100—Summary of Work 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Coordination is required throughout the documents. Refer to all of the Contract Documents and coordinate as necessary. 1.03 ENGINEER AND REPRESENTATIVES A The Engineer may act directly or through designated representatives as defined in Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement, 1.01 "Owner, Contractor, and Engineer", and as identified by name at the Preconstruction Conference. 1.04 CONTRACTOR COORDINATION A Coordinate scheduling,submittals,and work of the various Technical Specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements. B Coordinate completion and clean up of the Work for Substantial Completion and for portions of the Work designated for Owner's partial occupancy. C Coordinate access to Project Site for correction of nonconforming work to minimize disruption of Owner's activities where Owner is in partial occupancy. 1.05 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A Engineer will schedule a Preconstruction Conference. B Attendance Required: Engineer's representatives,Consultants,Contractor,and major Subcontractors. C Agenda: 1. Distribution of Contract Documents. 2. Designation of personnel representing the parties to the Contract, and the 11116‘' Consultant. 3. Review of insurance. 02/2008 01310- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 4. Discussion of formats proposed by the Contractor for Schedule of Values, and Construction Schedule. 5. Discussion of required Submittals, including, but not limited to, Work Plans, Traffic Control Plans, Safety Programs, Construction Photographs. 6. Procedures and processing of Shop Drawings and other submittals, substitutions, Applications for Payment, Requests for Information, Request for Proposal, Change Orders, and Contract Closeout. 7. Scheduling of the Work and coordination with other contractors. 8. Review of Subcontractors. 9. Appropriate agenda items listed in this Section, 1.06 "Site Mobilization Conference", when Preconstruction Conference and Site Mobilization Conference are combined. 10. Procedures for testing. 11. Procedures for maintaining Project Record Documents. 12. Designation of the individual authorized to execute change documents and their responsibilities. 13. Discussion of requirements of a Trench Safety Program. 1.06 SITE MOBILIZATION CONFERENCE A When required by Section 01100—Summary of Work, Engineer will schedule a Site Mobilization Conference at the Project Site prior to Contractor occupancy. B Attendance Required: Engineer representatives, Consultants, Contractor's Superintendent, and major Subcontractors. C Agenda: 1. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor 2. Safety and first aid procedures 3. Construction controls provided by Owner 4. Temporary utilities 5. Survey and layout 6. Security and housekeeping procedures 1.07 PROGRESS MEETINGS A Progress Meetings shall be held at Project Site or other location as designated by the Engineer. Meeting shall be held at monthly intervals, or more frequent intervals if directed by Engineer. B Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Engineer representatives, and Consultants as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. C Engineer or City's representative will make arrangements for meetings,and recording minutes. D Engineer or City's representative will prepare the agenda and preside at meetings. 02/2008 01310-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND COORDINATION.AND MEETINGS E Contractor shall provide required information and be prepared to discuss each agenda item. F Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meeting. 2. Review of Construction Schedule, Applications for Payment, payroll and compliance submittals. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of Submittal Schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review status of Requests for Information, Requests for Proposal. 7. Review status of Change Orders. 8. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 9. Maintenance of updates to Construction Schedule. 10. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 11. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 12. Coordination of projected progress. 13. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 14. Effect of proposed changes on Construction Schedule and coordination. 15. Other items relating to the Work. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 11116 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 02/2008 01310-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS Section 01350 SUBMITTALS 1.0 GENERAL This Section contains general lists of Submittals and Technical Specifications that may be required for the Work. When Submittals are required elsewhere in these Technical Specifications, refer to this Section for Submittal requirements and procedures. 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Submittal procedures for: 1. Schedule of Values 2. Construction.Schedules 3. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples 4. Operations and Maintenance Data 5. Manufacturer's Certificates 6. Construction Photographs 7. Project Record Documents 8. Design Mixes B References to the following Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01310—Coordination &Meetings 2. Section 01630—Product Options & Substitutions 3. Section 01100—Summary of Work 4. Section 01380—Construction Photographs 5. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 6. Section 02530—Gravity Sanitary Sewers 1.02 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A Scheduling and Handling 1. Schedule Submittals well in advance of the need for material or equipment for construction. Allow time to make delivery of material or equipment after Submittal is approved. 2. Develop a Submittal Schedule that allows sufficient time for initial review, correction,resubmission and final review of all submittals.The Engineer will review and return submittals to the Contractor as expeditiously as possible but the amount of time required for review will vary depending on the complexity and quantity of data submitted. In no case will a Submittal Schedule be acceptable which allows less than 30 days for initial review by the Engineer. This time for review shall in no way be justification for delays or additional compensation to the Contractor. 3. The Engineer's review of submittals covers conformity to the Plans,Technical (11111'‘ Specifications, and dimensions which affect the layout. The Contractor is responsible for quantity determination. The Contractor is responsible for any errors, omissions or deviations from the Contract requirements; review of 01/2008 01350- 1 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS submittals in no way relieves the Contractor from his obligation to furnish required items according to the Plans and Technical Specifications. 4. Submit 5 copies of documents unless otherwise specified in this Section or by individual Technical Specifications. 5. Revise and resubmit submittals as required. Identify all changes made since previous submittal. 6. The Contractor shall assume the risk for material or equipment which is fabricated or delivered prior to approval. No material or equipment shall be incorporated into the Work or included in Applications for Payment until approval has been obtained in the specified manner. B Transmittal Form and Numbering 1. Transmit each submittal to the Engineer with a transmittal form. 2. Sequentially number each transmittal form beginning with the number 1. Re- Submittals shall use the original number with an alphabetic suffix(i.e.,2A for first Re-Submittal of Submittal 2 or 15C for third Re-Submittal of Submittal 15). Each submittal shall only contain one type of work, material, or equipment. Mixed submittals will not be accepted. 3. Identify variations from requirements of Contract Documents and identify product or system limitations. 4. For submittal numbering of video tapes, see this Section, 1.10 "Video". C Contractor's Certification 1. Each submittal shall contain a statement or stamp signed by the Contractor, certifying that the items have been reviewed in detail and are correct and in accordance with Contract Documents, except as noted by any requested variance. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A Submit a Schedule of Values at least 10 days prior to the first Application for Payment. A Schedule of Values shall be provided for each of the items indicated as Lump Sum (LS) in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal for which the Contractor requests to receive Progress Payments. B Schedule of Values shall be typewritten on 8-1/2"x 11",plain bond,white paper. Use the Table of Contents of this Project Manual as a format for listing costs of Work by Section. C Round off figures for each listed item to the nearest $100.00 except for the value of one item, if necessary, to make the total price for all items listed in the Schedule of Values equal to the applicable Lump Sum in Section 00300—Bid Proposal. D For Unit Price Contracts, items should include a proportional share of Contractor's overhead and profit, such that the total of all items listed in the Schedule of Values equals the Contract amount. For Stipulated Price Contracts,Mobilization,Bonds,and Insurance may be listed as separate items in the Schedule of Values. 01/2008 01350-2 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS E For Lump Sum equipment items, where Submittals for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports in conjunction with Operation and Maintenance Data are required, include a separate item for equipment Operation and Maintenance Data Submittals and a separate item for Submittals of equipment Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Reports, each valued at five (5) percent of the Lump Sum. F Revise the Schedule of Values and resubmit for items affected by contract modifications,Change Orders,and Work Change Directives. Submit revised Schedule of Values 10 days prior to the first Application for Payment after the changes are approved by the Engineer. 1.04 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES A Submit Construction Schedules for the Work in accordance with the requirements of this Section. The Construction Schedule Submittal shall be,at a minimum,a bar chart, (computer generated or prepared manually) and a narrative report. B During the Preconstruction Meeting, as noted in Section 01310 - Coordination and Meetings, the Contractor shall provide a sample of the format to be used for the Construction Schedule Submittal. The format is subject to approval by the Engineer. Review of the Submittal will be provided within 7 days of the Submittal of the sample. C Within 7 days of the receipt of approval of the Contractor's format, or 14 days of the Notice to Proceed, whichever is later, the Contractor shall submit a proposed Construction Schedule for review. The Construction Schedule Submittal shall meet the following requirements: 1. The Construction Schedule shall usually include a total of at least 20 but not more than 50 activities. Fewer activities may be accepted, if approved by the Engineer. 2. For Projects with work at different physical locations,each location should be indicated separately within the Construction Schedule. 3. For projects with multiple crafts or significant subcontractor components,these elements should be indicated separately within the Construction Schedule. 4. For Projects with multiple types of tasks within the scope,these types of work should be indicated separately within the Construction Schedule. 5. For Projects with significant major equipment items or materials worth over 25 percent of the Total Contract Price, the Construction Schedule shall indicate dates when these items are to be purchased,when they are to be delivered,and when installed. 6. For Projects where operating plants are involved, each period of work which will require the shut down of any process or operation shall be identified in the Construction Schedule and must be agreed to by the Engineer prior to starting work in the area. 7. A Billing Schedule(tabulation of the estimated monthly billings)for the Work shall be prepared and submitted by the Contractor with the first Construction r' Schedule. This information is not required in the monthly updates, unless significant changes in Work require re-submittal of the Construction Schedule for review. The total for each month and a cumulative total will be indicated. 01/2008 01350-3 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS These monthly forecasts are only for planning purposes of the Engineer. Monthly payments for actual work completed will be made by the Engineer in accordance with Section 00700 - General Conditions of Agreement. D The Contractor must receive approval of the Engineer for the Construction Schedule and Billing Schedule prior to the first monthly Application for Payment. No payment will be made until these are accepted. E Upon written request from the Engineer, the Contractor shall revise and submit for approval all or any part of the Construction Schedule to reflect changed conditions in the Work or deviations made from the original plan and schedule. F The Contractor's Construction Schedule shall thereafter be updated with the Actual Start and Actual Finish Dates, Percent Complete, and Remaining Duration of each Activity and submitted monthly. The date to be used in updating the monthly Construction Schedule shall be the same Date as is used in the monthly Application for Payment. This monthly update of the Construction Schedule shall be required before the monthly Application for Payment will be processed for payment. G The narrative Construction Schedule Report shall include a description of changes made to the Construction Schedule; Activities Added to the Construction Schedule; Activities Deleted from the Construction Schedule; any other changes made to the Construction Schedule other than the addition of Actual Start Dates and Actual Finish Dates and Remaining Durations. 1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA,AND SAMPLES A Shop Drawings 1. Submit Shop Drawings for review as required by the Technical Specifications. 2. Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02 "Submittal Procedures" shall be placed on each Shop Drawing. 3. The Shop Drawing shall accurately and distinctly present the following: a. Field and erection dimensions clearly identified as such. b. Arrangement and section views. c. Relation to adjacent materials or structure including complete information for making connections between work under this Contract and work under other contracts. d. Kinds of materials and finishes. e. Parts list and descriptions. f. Assembly Shop Drawings of equipment components and accessories showing their respective positions and relationships to the complete equipment package. g. Where necessary for clarity, identify details by reference to sheet numbers and detail numbers, schedule or room numbers as shown on the Plans. 4. Shop Drawing Drawings shall be to scale, and shall be a true representation of the specific equipment or item to be furnished. 01/2008 01350-4 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS B Product Data 1. Submit Product Data for review when required in individual Technical Specifications. 2. Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02 "Submittal Procedures" shall be placed on each data item submitted. 3. Mark each copy to identify applicable products,models,options to be used in this Project. Supplement manufacturers'standard data to provide information unique to this Project, where required by the Technical Specification. 4. For products specified only by reference standard,submit manufacturer,trade name, model or catalog designation, and applicable reference standard. 5. For Approved Products, those designated in the Technical Specifications followed by the words"or approved equal",submit manufacturer,trade name, model or catalog designation, and applicable reference standard. 6. For products proposed as alternates to Approved Products, refer to Section 01630-Product Options and Substitutions, 1.04"Selection Options"and 1.07 "Substitution Procedures". 7. For products that are neither Pre-Approved, Approved, specified only by reference standard, nor proposed as alternates, submit product description, trade name, manufacturer, and supplier. Contractor shall provide additional information upon written request by Engineer or Owner. C Samples 1. Submit samples for review as required by the Technical Specification. rib\ 2. Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02 "Submittal Procedures", shall be placed on each sample or a firmly attached sheet of paper. 3. Submit the number of samples specified in the Technical Specification;one of which will be retained by the Engineer. 4. Reviewed samples which may be used in the Work are identified in the Technical Specifications. 1.06 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA A When specified in Technical Specification, submit manufacturers'printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, operation, adjusting, finishing, and maintenance. B Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section. 1.02 "Submittal Procedures", shall be placed on front page of each document. C Identify conflicts between manufacturers' instructions and Contract Documents. 1.07 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES A When specified in Technical Specification, submit manufacturers' certificate of (11116.\ compliance for review by Engineer. B Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02 "Submittal Procedures", shall be placed on front page of the certificate. 01/2008 01350-5 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS C Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. D Manufacturer's Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable to Engineer. 1.08 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A Submit photographs in accordance with Section 01380—Construction Photographs. 1. Prints: Prepare 2 prints of each view and submit 1 print directly to the City's Representative within 7 days of taking photographs. One print shall be retained by the Contractor and made available at all times for reference on the job site. B PRECONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS: 1. Prior to the commencement of any construction,take digital color photographs on the entire route of the project 2. Photographs: Two prints, color, matte finish; 3 x 5 inch size, mounted on 81/ x 11-inch soft card stock, with left edge binding margin for three hole punch, or in plastic pockets in three-ring notebook. 3. Th photographs shall show: a. Date photographs were taken b. Location of the photograph, house number and street name. (This information may be shown on a chalk board in the photograph by a label on the mountings.) 4. Photographs should show the condition of the following a. Esplanades and boulevards b. Yards (near, side and far side of street) c. Housewalk, sidewalk and driveway; curb d. Area between walk and curb 1) Particular features(yard lights, shrubs, fences, trees, etc.) 2) Landscaping and decorative features. C POST CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 1. On completion of construction, provide photographs of any public or private property which has been repaired or restored and any damage which is or may be the subject of complaints. 1.09 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A Submit Project Record Documents in accordance with Section 01760—Project Record Documents. 1.10 VIDEO A Submit television video in DVD format as required in individual Technical Specifications. B Transmittal forms for video disks shall be numbered sequentially beginning with TO1, T02, T03, etc. 01/2008 01350-6 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBMITTALS 1.11 DESIGN MIXES A When specified, submit design mixes for review. B Contractor's Certification, as described in this Section, 1.02 "Submittal Procedures", shall be placed on front page of each design mix. C Mark each design mix to identify proportions,gradations,and additives for each class and type of design mix submitted. Include applicable test results on samples for each mix. D Maintain a copy of approved design mixes at mixing plant. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION C C 01/2008 01350-7 of 6 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 SECTION 013516 -ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Work, in general, includes procedures pertaining to remodeling, alteration, minor demolition, cutting, patching, removal, refinishing, relocation, and disposal work required throughout the Project and becomes a part of each Section and Division where remodeling, alteration, minor demolition, cutting, patching, removal, refinishing, relocation, and disposal work is required, with the same force and effect as if written in full therein. B. Visit the Project Site to determine by inspection all existing conditions, including access to the Site, the nature of structures, objects, and materials to be encountered, and all other facts concerning or affecting the Work. Information on the Drawings showing existing conditions does not constitute a guarantee that other items may not be found or encountered. C. Obvious existing conditions, installations, and obstructions affecting work of this Section shall be (111.1 taken into consideration as necessary work and included as part of work of this Section, the same as though completely shown or described. D. Employ a licensed exterminator and treat the entire building in accordance with governing health regulations. 1.3 RELATED WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS: A. Coordinate work of this Section with work of other Sections as required to properly execute the Work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of other Sections. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Perform remodeling, alteration, minor demolition, cutting, patching, removal, refinishing, relocation, and disposal work in accordance with Federal, State, and local health and safety standards, codes and ordinances. Where conflicts occur, comply with the more restrictive requirements. B. Perform remodeling, alteration, minor demolition, cutting, patching, removal, refinishing, and relocation work in such a manner as to preserve the aesthetic and structural integrity of materials and construction. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Protections: Provide temporary protections and conduct operations to prevent injury to persons, buildings, including adjacent facilities and structures. 1. Provide temporary closures and covers to prevent entry of water and weather into existing facilities. ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 013516- 1 TOM REED LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 2. Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, and support as necessary to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of structures to be demolished or removed and adjacent facilities to remain. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Matching Existing Work: Except where otherwise specifically indicated or specified as a definite change, the finish materials and appearance of the new work shall match the existing contiguous materials and finishes in all respects. Repairs and/or continuations of existing work shall be relatively imperceptible in the finished work when viewed under finished lighting conditions from a distance of 6'. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION: A. Check Drawings carefully and thoroughly investigate existing building construction. 3.2 PREPARATION: A. Protect work to remain from damage. Use barricades, tarpaulins, temporary walls, plywood, planking, masking, and other suitable means and methods as accepted. 1. Restore accidental or careless damage to work to remain in place to a condition as good as or better than existed before work was commenced and at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Provide all shoring and bracing necessary to positively protect existing elements of the building. Use material adequate to support anticipated loads with a properly calculated margin of safety. Provide for transfer of stresses to successively lower construction. C. Carefully remove and replace items of existing construction indicated to remain upon completion of the Contract, but which require removal to complete the work. Match condition of construction prior to the start of the Work unless otherwise required. Carefully remove items indicated for relocations in new Work, or to be retained by Owner, to avoid damage, thoroughly clean, and reinstall as indicated or store as directed. 1. Existing items in the Library shall be protected during construction and cleaned just prior to Substantial Completion. D. Items of salvable value to the Contractor may be removed from the structure as the work progresses. Salvaged items must be transported from the Project Site as they are removed. Storage or sale of removed items on the Project Site will not be permitted. E. At Concrete Areas to Receive New Flooring Finishes: 1. Prior to installation of nonbreathing floor finishes on floor substrate which can transmit moisture in the form of vapor(concrete slabs on grade being one example), perform the following: a. Existing Construction (where under side of floor is inaccessible): (1) Test the substrate at frequencies and using means as recommended by the floor finish manufacturer to determine amount of moisture being emitted. (2) If moisture is non-acceptable, notify Architect prior to proceeding. ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 013516 -2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 (111111.\ (3) Once an acceptable moisture transmission rate is confirmed, or is brought within acceptable tolerances, submit a written certification, jointly signed by the floor finish manufacturer and installer, attesting that the substrate is acceptable. 3.3 PERFORMANCE: A. Minor Demolition and Removals: 1. Carefully remove and store all items indicated or required to be reused. 2. Perform minor demolition and removal work completely and remove debris from the Site. Use such methods as required to complete the work within the limitations of governing regulations. a. Proceed with demolition and removal work in a systematic manner, from the top to the bottom in areas indicated. b. Remove debris and lower to ground by means of hoists, derricks, or other suitable methods as approved by Owner. c. Locate demolition equipment throughout the structure and remove materials so as to not impose excessive loads to supporting walls,floors, or framing. B. Cutting: 1. Structural Elements: If not specifically shown, but removal or alteration is required, perform such removal or alteration only upon written approval of the Structural Engineer. Do not damage or alter any structural element of the existing building. Where drilling or fastening to post-tensioned reinforced concrete construction is required, X-ray existing structure to determine tendon locations and potential for tendon tension release before proceeding. Notify Architect/Structural Engineer in each instance when conflict occurs. Architect/Structural Engineer will determine corrective action required. Do not proceed until corrective action has been received. 2. Concrete: Saw cut where exposed to view. Jack hammering with electric or pneumatic equipment is acceptable only with scheduled approval of Owner. 3. Masonry: Cut back masonry to joint lines and remove old mortar allowing space for repairs. 4. Ceramic, Structural Clay Tile, and Quarry Tile: Saw cut to natural joint lines; remove so that repairs or continuations of new work will be relatively imperceptible. 5. Resilient Tiles: Remove resilient floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations of the Resilient Floor Covering Institute's (RFCI) "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings"and Addendum. a. Remove residual adhesive and prepare substrate for new floor coverings by one of the methods recommended by RFCI. 6. Plaster: Cut back to sound plaster on straight lines, and backbevel edges of remaining plaster. Trim and prepare existing lath for tying of new lath. 7. Woodwork: Cut back to a joint or panel line. 8. Existing Doors, Frames, and Sash: Remove in such manner as to facilitate filling in of openings or installation of new work, as required by the Drawings. 9. Cutting for Access to Mechanical and Electrical Systems: The removal of existing ceilings and the removal, cutting, and patching and/or replacement of existing walls, partitions, and floors as may be necessary for access to valves, piping, conduit, and tubing by mechanical and electrical trades shall be included and performed as an obligation of, and as directed by the Contractor and accepted by Architect. C. Patching, Repairing, and Finishing of Existing Work: 1111 1. Perform in compliance with the applicable requirements of the Specification technical Section covering the work to be performed and the requirements of this Section. ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 013516-3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 a. All holes and damaged areas exposed to view in ceilings, walls, and floors of all finished spaces shall be repaired. Repaired construction shall match existing adjacent construction and finish, unless otherwise indicated or specified. b. Minor surface abrasions, small nail holes, cracks, aged checked natural wood finish and other similar deterioration not visible, when viewed under finished lighting conditions,from a distance of 6'will not be required to be repaired if the base material is sound and suitable to receive the scheduled finishes, if any. c. Interior penetration holes in walls, ceilings, and floors of unfinished spaces and spaces not exposed to view shall be grouted and sealed with accepted materials as required for sound sealing and firestops where required. d. Penetration holes through exterior walls above grade shall be grouted and sealed as required to produce a weathertight seal. e. Penetration holes through exterior walls below grade shall be grouted and sealed as required to produce a watertight seal. 2. Concrete: Edges of existing concrete shall be kept damp for 24 hours and scrubbed with neat portland cement grout just before new concrete is placed; in lieu thereof, an accepted epoxy concrete adhesive may be used. Finish shall match existing adjoining work. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete for patching shall be 3,000 psi concrete. Reinforcing bars and dowels shall be provided where required. Where installation of concrete is impracticable, the openings shall be filled with dry packed non-shrink grout as directed. 3. Concrete Floor Leveling: Where existing concrete floors do not meet the following requirements, provide specified floor leveling compounds which provide the following tolerances in accordance with ASTM E 1155: a. Sub-floors for thin coverings (VCT, epoxy toppings, paint, carpeting)- FF =30, FL=25. b. Floor Leveling Compound: Equal to Ardex, Inc. "Ardex K-15 Self-Leveling Underlayment", complete with all accessories required and recommended by manufacturer; install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Masonry: Patch with sound whole units to match existing. Joints shall match adjoining surfaces. 5. Lath: Lath areas to be patched as required, install as required for new lath, and wire-tie to existing lath at edges at 6" intervals. Lap lath 3"minimum. 6. Plaster: Dampen edges of existing plaster. Plaster patching shall be 3 coat work of type, thickness, and finish to match the existing work. 7. Damages: Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by demolition and removal operations at no additional cost to the Owner. 8. Painting and Finishing: a. Preparation: Prepare patched areas as required for new work. Wash areas to be repainted with neutral soap or detergent, thoroughly rinse, and sand when dry. Feather remaining paint edges smooth with sandpaper. b. Painting and Finishing: Conform to the applicable provisions of Painting Section. Prepare and build up bare areas and patches in existing painted surfaces with proper primer and intermediate coats, sand smooth and flush with adjoining surfaces. Paint all areas scheduled to be painted and/or repainted as specified in Painting Section of the Specifications, except the first or primer coat may be omitted on existing painted surfaces. D. Disposal of Debris: Clean up all material, debris, and rubbish resulting from remodeling work, remove from the building and Site, and legally dispose of. Leave all areas of work in "broom clean" condition. END OF SECTION 013516 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES 013516-4 CITY OF PEARLAND CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS Section 01380 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Requirements for construction photographs and submittals. B References Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01100—Summary of Work 2. Section 01350—Submittals 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for Construction Photographs under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for installed Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A When required by Section 01100 — Summary of Work, submit photographs in accordance applicable provisions of this Section. Make Submittals required by this and related Sections under the provisions of Section 01350—Submittals. C Prepare three (3) prints of each view and submit two (2) prints directly to the Project Manager within seven(7) days of taking photographs. One(1)print shall be retained by the Contractor in the field office at the Project Site and available at all times for reference. D When requested by the Project Manager, the Contractor shall submit extra prints of photographs, for distribution directly to designated parties who will pay the costs for the extra prints directly to the photographer. E When required by individual Sections, submit photographs taken prior to start of the Work to show original Project Site conditions. F When required by Contract Documents, submit photographs with Application for Payment. G When required by individual Sections,submit photographs taken following completion of the Work to show the condition in which the Project Site will be left. H With each submittal,include photographic negatives in protective envelopes,identified by Project Name, Contractor, and date photographs were taken. (11111b*\' 01/2008 01380- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Contractor shall be responsible for the timely execution of the photographs, their vantage point, direction of shot, and quality. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 PHOTOGRAPHS A Photographs shall be digital quality and shall be submitted on a CD. B The photographs shall show on a non-elective chalkboard or white board,readable in the photograph: 1. Job number. 2. Date and time photographs were taken. 3. Location of the photograph, house number and street, along with the project number. C Indicate the condition of the following: 1. Esplanades and boulevards. 2. Yards (near side and far side of street). 3. House-walk and sidewalk. 4. Curb. 5. Area between walk and curb. 6. Particular features (yard lights, shrubs, fence, trees, etc.). 7. Date shall be on negative. 8. Provide notation of vantage point marked for location and direction of shot on a key plan of the Project Site. D Sufficient number of photographs shall be taken to show the existence or non- existence of cracked concrete and the condition of trees, shrubs and grass. E Identify each photograph with an applied label or rubber stamp on the back with the following information: 1. Name of the Project. 2. Name and address of the photographer (if a professional photographer is used). 3. Name of the Contractor. 4. Date the photograph was taken. 5. Photographs to be in plastic pockets and bound in three -ring notebook for easy access and viewing. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PRECONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A Prior to the commencement of the Work, take photographs of the entire route of the Project Site. 01/2008 01380-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 3.02 POST-CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A Following the completion of the Work,take photographs from corresponding vantage points and direction of shots. 3.03 PROGESS PHOTOGRAPHS A Take photographs at intervals, coinciding with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment and submit on CD with monthly Application for Payment. B Select the vantage points for each shot each month to best show the status of construction and progress since the last photographs were taken. Take not less than two (2) shots from the same vantage point creating a time-lapsed sequence. C Follow direction when given by the Project Manager in selecting vantage points. END OF SECTION 01/2008 01380-3 of 3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality- assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document (°1111116'\1 requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. D. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. E. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000- 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 F. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. G. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. H. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s). I. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels:The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and responsibilities. B. Qualification Data : For Contractor's quality-control personnel. C. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems: 1. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force- resisting system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect. D. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000-2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required. 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service. 1.6 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice to Proceed, and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule. B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained and experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project. C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review. D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following: 1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and inspections. 2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the "Statement of Special Inspections." 3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups. F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.7 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Date of issue. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000-3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000-4 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists. G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL:A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. (111.1. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following: 1. Contractor responsibilities include the following: a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements. d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000-5 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work. f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and mockups; do not reuse products on Project. 2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. K. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that will be employed during the construction at Project. 4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup. 6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 1.9 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as authorized by Change Orders. 3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor. B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000-6 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 5. - Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality- control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 7 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance ^� and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing r construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality- control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's quality- control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses. 1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. 1.10 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency]to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows: 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work. 7. Refer to individual technical sections for testing requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000- 8 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300 "Execution." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION 014000 (1111111'\ QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000-9 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS Section 01420 (.11.16 REFERENCED STANDARDS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A General quality assurance as related to Reference Standards and a list of references. B References to Technical Specifications: None 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A For Products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or Federal Standards comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on the date as stated in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. C Request clarification from Engineer before proceeding should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF REFERENCES AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials 444 North Capitol Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20001 ACI American Concrete Institute P.O. Box 19150 Reford Station Detroit, MI 48219-0150 AGC Associated General Contractors of America 1957 E Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20006 AI Asphalt Institute Asphalt Institute Building College Park, MD 20740 ATTC American Institute of Timber Construction 333 W. Hampden Avenue Englewood, CO 80110 (.11.16.\ 02/2008 01420- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS AISC American Institute of Steel Construction 400 North.Michigan Avenue, Eighth Floor Chicago, IL 60611 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 1000 16th Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20036 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 ANSI American National Standards Institute 1430 Broadway New York, NY 10018 APA American Plywood Association Box 11700 Tacoma, WA 98411 API American Petroleum Institute 1220 L Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20005 AREA American Railway Engineering Association 50 F Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20001 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 1916 Race Street Philadelphia, PA 19103 AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association 7735 Old Georgetown Road Bethesda, MD 20014 AWS American Welding Society P.O. Box 35104 Miami, FL 33135 AWWA American Water Works Association 6666 West Quincy Avenue Denver, CO 80235 02/2008 01420-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS (1.1' CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute 1101 Connecticut Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20036 CRD U.S.A. Corps of Engineers Code of Ordinances City of Pearland 3519 Liberty Drive Pearland, TX 77581 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 933 Plum Grove Road Schaumburg, IL 60173-4758 EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association 707 Westchester Avenue White Plains, NY 10604 FDA U.S. Food and Drug Administration 5600 Fisher Lane Rockville, MD 20857-0001 FS Federal Standardization Documents General Services Administration, Specifications Unit (WFSIS) 7th and D Street S.W. Washington, DC 20406 ICEA Insulated Cable Engineer Association P.O. Box 440 S. Yarmouth, MA 02664 IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 445 Hoes Lane P.O. Box 1331 Piscataway, NJ 0855-1331 MIL Military Specifications General Services Administration, Specifications Unit(WFSIS) 7th and D Street S.W. Washington, DC 20406 NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers P. O. Box 986 Katy, TX 77450 02/2008 01420-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association 2101 L Street, N.W., Suite 300 Washington, DC 20037 NFPA National Fire Protection Association Batterymarch Park, P.O. Box 9101 Quincy, MA 02269-9101 OSHA Occupational Safety Health Administration U.S. Department of Labor, Government Printing Office Washington, DC 20402 PCA Portland Cement Association 5420 Old Orchard Road Skokie, IL 60077-1083 PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute 201 North Wacker Drive Chicago, IL 60606 SDI Steel Deck Institute Box 9506 Canton, OH 44711 SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council 4400 Fifth Avenue Pittsburgh, PA 15213 TAC Texas Administrative Code TCEQ Texas Commission on Environmental Quality P. O. Box 13087 Austin, TX 78711-3087 TxDOT Texas Department of Transportation 125 East 1 lth Street Austin, TX 78701-2483 Texas MUTCD Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (2003 Adoption) (published by Texas Department of Transportation) UL Underwriters'Laboratories, Inc. 333 Pfingston Road Northbrook, IL 60062 UNI-BELL UNI-BELL Pipe Association 2655 Villa Creek Drive, Suite 155 02/2008 01420-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND REFERENCED STANDARDS Dallas, TX 75234 WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute 942 Main Street—Suite 300 Hartford, CT 06103 WWD/PI Water Well Drillers and Pump Installers Advisory Council Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation P.O. Box 12157 Austin, TX 78711 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION C 02/2008 01420-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL Section 01430 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Quality assurance and control of installation and manufacturer's field services and reports. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 1.02 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE/CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce the Work of specified quality at no additional cost to the Owner. ' B Comply fully with manufacturers' installation instructions, including each step in sequence. C Request clarification from Project Manager before proceeding should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents. D Comply with specified Standards as minimum requirements for the Work except when more stringent tolerances,codes,or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E Perform work by persons qualified to produce the specified level of workmanship. F Obtain copies of Standards and maintain at Project Site when required by individual Technical Specifications. 1.04 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS A When specified in individual Technical Specifications, provide material or product suppliers' or manufacturers' technical representative to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation,quality of workmanship,start-up of equipment, operator training, test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate operation,as required. Conform to minimum time requirements for start-up operations and operator training if defined in Technical Specifications. 02/2008 01430- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL B At the Project Manager's request, submit qualifications of manufacturer's representative to Project Manager fifteen (15) days in advance of required representative's services. The representative shall be subject to approval of Project Manager. C Manufacturer's representative shall report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers'written instructions. Submit report within one(1)day of observation to Project Manager for review. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 02/2008 01430-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND OBSERVATION SERVICES Section 01440 OBSERVATION SERVICES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Observation services and references. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 INSPECTION A Project Manager will appoint an Observer as a representative of the Owner to oversee inspections,tests, and other services specified in individual Technical Specifications. B Alternately, Project Manager may appoint, employ, and pay an independent firm to provide additional observation or construction management services as indicated in Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services. C Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to Project Manager,Engineer,and Contractor, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Documents. D Contractor shall assist and cooperate with the Observer;furnish samples of materials, design mix, equipment, tools, and storage. E Contractor shall notify Project Manager 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring services. Notify Engineer and independent firm when noted. F Contractor shall sign and acknowledge report for Observer. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION rihs 09/2009 01440- 1 of 1 CITY OF PEARLAND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES Section 01450 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Testing Laboratory Services and Contractor responsibilities related to those services. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 3740, "Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction" b. ASTM E 329, "Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction" 1.02 SELECTION AND PAYMENT rgIA\, A Owner will select,employ,and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory to perform inspection and testing identified in individual Technical Specifications. B Employment of testing laboratory shall not relieve Contractor of obligation to perform work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. C Owner or designated representative shall schedule and monitor testing as required to provide timely results and to avoid delay to the Work. D Contractor shall be responsible for paying for services of commercial testing laboratory, with prior approval of Owner, to perform the following: 1. Pipe diameter deflection tests on all flexible and semi-rigid sanitary sewer collection system pipe installation 2. Laboratory services required to establish mix design proposed for use for Portland cement concrete, asphaltic concrete mixtures and other material mixes requiring control by testing laboratory when required because of change in source of materials or other conditions not caused by Owner. 3. Tests required to establish optimum moisture of earth and base materials and to determine required compactive effort to meet density requirements. 4. Cores to test for thickness. 5. Testing and inspection performed for the Contractor's convenience. 6. Retesting and repetitions of laboratory services when initial tests indicate rbIN work does not comply with requirements of Contract Documents. 04/2008 01450- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 1.03 LABORATORY REPORTS A The Engineer will receive 1 copy, the Project Manager will receive 2 copies, and the Contractor will receive 2 copies of Laboratory Reports from the testing laboratory. One of the Contractor's copies shall remain at the Project Site for duration of Project. Test results which indicate non-conformance shall be transmitted immediately via fax from the testing laboratory to the Contractor and Project Manager. 1.04 LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY A Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. B Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. C Laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor. D Laboratory has no authority to stop the Work. 1.05 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A Notify Project Manager and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring inspection and testing services. Notify Engineer if specification section requires the presence of the Engineer. B Cooperate with laboratory personnel in collecting samples to be tested or collected on Project Site. C Provide access to the Work and to manufacturer's facilities. D Provide samples to laboratory in advance of their intended use to allow thorough examination and testing. E Provide incidental labor and facilities for access to the Work to be tested;to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested; and to facilitate tests and inspections including storage and curing of test samples. F Arrange with laboratory and pay for: 1. Retesting required for failed tests. 2. Retesting for nonconforming Work. 3. Additional sampling and tests requested by Contractor for his own purposes. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION 04/2008 01450-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 3.01 CONDUCTING TESTING (17 A Laboratory sampling and testing shall conform to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 329,as well as other test standards specified in individual Technical Specifications. END OF SECTION 04/2008 01450-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Section 01500 TEMPORA Y FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Temporary facilities and the necessary controls for the Work including utilities, telephone, sanitary facilities, field office, storage sheds and building, safety requirements,first aid equipment,fire protection, security measures,protection of the Work and property, access roads and parking, environmental controls, disposal of trash,debris,and excavated material,pest and rodent control,water runoff and erosion control. B References to Technical Specifications: Section 00200—Instructions to Bidders Section 01100—Summary of Work Section 01350—Submittals Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation Section 01100—Summary of Work Section 01600—Material &Equipment Section 01570—Trench Safety System Section 01555 —Traffic Control &Regulation Section 01720—Field Surveying Section 01563 —Tree &Plant Protection Section 01564—Control of Ground Water& Surface Water Section 13730- Computer Equipment C Referenced Standards: Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Code of Ordinances, City of Pearland, Texas D Definitions: Underground Structures - sewer, water, gas, and other piping, and manholes, chambers, electrical and signal conduits, tunnels, and other existing subsurface installations located within or adjacent to the limits of the Work. Surface Structures - existing buildings, structures and other constructed installations above the ground surface. Included with such structures are their foundations or any extension below the surface. Surface structures include, but are not limited to 12-2-2011 01500- 1 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS buildings, tanks, walls, bridges, roads, dams, channels, open drainage, piping, poles, wires, posts, signs, markers, curbs, walks, guard cables, fencing, and other facilities that are visible above the ground surface. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.04 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY A The facilities and controls specified in this Section are considered minimum for the Work. The Contractor may provide additional facilities and controls for the proper execution of the Work and to meet Contractor's responsibilities for protection of persons and property. B Comply with applicable requirements specified in other Technical Specifications. Maintain and operate temporary facilities and systems to assure continuous service. Modify and extend systems as Work progress requires. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no longer required. Restore existing facilities used for temporary services to specified or to original condition. 1.05 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A Temporary Service Make arrangements with utility service companies for such temporary services as are necessary to construct the work and manage the site. Abide by rules and regulations of the utility service companies or authorities having jurisdiction. Be responsible for utility service costs until the Work is Substantially Complete. Included are fuel,power,light,heat,and other utility services necessary for execution, completion, testing, and initial operation of the Work. B Water Provide water required for and in connection with Work to be performed and for specified tests of piping, equipment, devices, or for other use as required for proper completion of the Work. 12-2-2011 01500-2 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS For water to be drawn from public water supply, obtain special permit or license and (.11 meter from the proper City officials. For facilities under construction, establish a water/sewer billing account with City's Utility Billing Department.A deposit based on rates established by latest ordinance will be required. For water drawn from fire hydrants, apply for and receive a construction water meter from City' Public Works Department. Identify specific location for construction water meter installation. Once installed,water meter may not be moved without notification of Public Works Department. Install backflow preventer on fire hydrant supply if not included in City provided meter. • Provide and maintain an adequate supply of potable water for domestic consumption by Contractor personnel. C Electricity and Lighting 1 Provide temporary electric power service in Contractor's name, as required for the prosecution of the Work, including testing of Work. Provide power for lighting, operation of the Contractor's equipment, or for any other use by Contractor or as necessary to maintain any of Owner's on-going operations as may continue on the site during any scheduled shutdown. Minimum lighting level shall be 5 foot-candles for open areas; 10 foot-candles for stairs and shops. 2 Provide permanent electric power service,in the Contractor's name,to the work or site as and when required by the schedule of the work to achieve Substantial Completion or 1111.1 Partial Substantial Completion.Contractor to establish service billing in its name and transfer service and billing to the Owner upon acceptance of the work as Substantially Complete and suitable for beneficial occupancy by the Owner. D Natural Gas Provide and pay for natural gas service to the work as and when required by the schedule to achieve Substantial Completion. Contractor to establish service billing in its name and transfer service and billing to the Owner upon acceptance of the work as Substantially Complete and suitable for beneficial occupancy by the Owner. E Temporary Heat and Ventilation Provide temporary heat as necessary for protection or completion of the Work. Provide temporary heat and ventilation to assure safe working conditions; maintain enclosed areas at a minimum of 50 degrees F. F Telephone Provide emergency telephone service at the Project Site for use by Contractor personnel and others performing work or furnishing services. G Sanitary Facilities Provide and maintain sanitaryfacilities for persons on the Project Site, in compliance with federal, state, and local regulations. Locate toilets on the Project Site near the 12-2-2011 01500-3 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS work and secluded from view insofar as possible. Keep toilets clean and supplied throughout the course of the Work. Enforce the use of sanitary facilities by construction personnel at the Project Site. Such facilities shall be enclosed. Pit-type toilets will not be permitted. No discharge will be allowed from these facilities. Collect and store sewage and waste so as not to cause a nuisance or health problem; have sewage and waste hauled off-site and properly disposed in accordance with local regulations. Control areas where sanitary facilities are located in conformance with Section 01566 —Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation. 1.06 FIELD OFFICE A Provision of a Field Office and other specific temporary facilities as required in paragraph B below UNLESS otherwise stated in Section 00800 - Special Conditions of the Agreement,or Section 01100—Summary of Work. Provide for transportation,move-in, set-up,tie-down and, when project is complete,removal and move-out. The Contractor shall confirm location of office and other temporary facilities with Owner's Representative at Pre-Construction Meeting prior to delivery and set up. Location of temporary facilities shall be approved by the Owner's Representative by way of the submittal process. B. At a minimum, the Contractor's field office shall provide for, contain or serve to: provide a secured space for project administrative operations, periodic progress meetings,on-site storage for project files and plans,office space for CONTRACTOR's field supervisory personnel and provide a separate securable office space for OWNER's Representative including: meeting table and chairs, a single two drawer filing cabinet, a built-in drawing table and plan holders. Provide electric lighting and HVAC to the mobile office. 1. Field Office shall provide for, at a minimum, a high speed internet connection for use by Owner's Representative or Construction Manager as controlled by Paragraph A above. 1.07 STORAGE OF MATERIALS A Provide for storage of materials under the provisions of Section 01600—Material & Equipment. 1.08 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A Contractor shall prepare, submit and follow a Safety Program that complies with federal, state, and local safety codes, statutes, and practices. Include in the Safety Program documented response to excavation, embankment, and trench safety requirements as specified in Section 01570—Trench Safety System. B Conduct operations in strict accord with applicable federal,state and local safety codes and statutes and with good construction practice. The Contractor is fully responsible and obligated to establish and maintain procedures for safety of all work, personnel and equipment involved in the Work. 12-2-2011 01500-4 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS C Observe and comply with Texas Occupational Safety Act (Art. 5182a, V.C.S.) and rilk\ with all safety and health standards promulgated by Secretary of Labor under Section 107 of Contract Work Hours and Standards Act, published in OSHA Standards - 29 CFR, Part 1926, and adopted by Secretary of Labor under the Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, and to any other legislation enacted for safety and health of Contractor employees. Such safety and health standards apply to subcontractors and their employees as well as to the Contractor and its employees. D Observance of and compliance with the regulations shall be solely and without qualification the responsibility of the Contractor without reliance or superintendence of or direction by the Engineer or the Engineer's representative. Immediately advise the Engineer of investigation or inspection by Federal Safety and Health inspectors of the Contractor or subcontractor's work or place of work on the Project Site under this Contract,and after such investigation or inspection,advise the Engineer of the results. Submit one copy of accident reports to Engineer within ten (10) days of occurrence. E Protect areas occupied by workmen using the best available devices for detection of lethal and combustible gases. Test such devices frequently to assure their functional capability. Constantly observe infiltration of liquids into the Work area for visual or odor evidence of contamination. Take immediate and appropriate steps to seal off entry of contaminated liquids to the Work area. F Safety measures, including but not limited to safety personnel, first-aid equipment, ventilating equipment and safety equipment,in the Plans and Technical Specifications are obligations of the Contractor. G Maintain required coordination with the local Police and Fire Departments during the entire period covered by the Contract. 1.09 FIRST AID EQUIPMENT A Provide a first aid kit throughout the construction period. List telephone numbers for physicians, hospitals, and ambulance services in each first aid kit. B Have at least one person thoroughly trained in first aid procedures present on the Project Site whenever work is in progress. 1.10 FIRE PROTECTION A Fire Protection Standards. Conform to specified fire protection and prevention requirements as well as those that may be established by Federal, State, or local governmental agencies. B. Comply with all applicable provisions of NFPA Standard No. 241, Safeguarding Building Construction and Demolition Operations. Provide portable fire extinguishers, rated not less than 2A or 5B in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 10,Portable Fire Extinguishers,for each temporary building,and for every 3000 square feet of floor area of facilities under construction. 12-2-2011 01500-5 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Locate portable fire extinguishers within 50 feet maximum from any point on the Project Site. C. Fire Prevention and Safety Measures. Prohibit smoking in hazardous areas. Post suitable warning signs in areas that are continuously or intermittently hazardous. Use metal safety containers for storage and handling of flammable and combustible liquids. Do not store flammable or combustible liquids in or near stairways or exits. Maintain clear exits from all points within a structure. 1.11 SECURITY MEASURES A Protect all materials, equipment, and property associated with the Work from loss, theft,damage, and vandalism. Contractor's duty to protect property includes Owner's property. B If existing fencing or barriers are breached or removed for purposes of construction, provide and maintain temporary security fencing equal to existing as approved by Owner's Representative. 1.12 PROTECTION OF PUBLIC UTILITIES A Prevent damage to existing public utilities during construction. These utilities are shown on the Plans at their approximate locations. Give owners of these utilities at least 48 hours notice before commencing Work in the area, for locating the utilities during construction,and for making adjustments or relocation of the utilities when they conflict with the proposed Work. 1.13 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Preventive Actions. Take precautions, provide programs, and take actions necessary to protect the Work and public and private property from damage. Take action to prevent damage, injury or loss, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Store apparatus,materials, supplies, and equipment in an orderly, safe manner that will not unduly interfere with progress of the Work or the Work of any other contractor, any utility service company, or the Owner's operations. b. Provide suitable storage for materials that are subject to damage by exposure to weather, theft, breakage, or otherwise. c. Place upon the Work or any part thereof only such loads as are consistent with the safety of that portion of the Work. d. Frequently clean up refuse,rubbish,scrap materials,and debris caused by construction operations, keeping the Work safe and orderly. 12-2-2011 01500-6 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS e. Provide safe barricades and guard rails around openings, for scaffolding, for temporary stairs and ramps, around excavations, elevated walkways, and other hazardous areas. Obtain written consent from proper parties before entering or occupying with workers, tools,materials or equipment,privately owned land except on easements provided for construction. Assume full responsibility for the preservation of public and private property on or adjacent to the site. If any direct or indirect damage is done by or on account of any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in execution of the Work by the Contractor, it shall be restored by the Contractor to a condition equal to or better than that existing before the damage was done. B Barricades and Warning Signals. Where Work is performed on or adjacent to any roadway, right-of-way, or public place, furnish and erect barricades, fences, lights, warning signs, and danger signals; provide watchmen;and take other precautionary measures for the protection of persons or property and protection of the Work.Conform to Section 01555—Traffic Control& Regulation. C Preserving Control Points Maintain permanent benchmarks,public or private elevation or property demarcation and control monumentation, or other reference points. Unless otherwise directed in writing, replace at no cost to the Owner, those monuments, property corners or other permanent demarcations that are damaged or destroyed in accordance with Section 01720—Field Surveying. D Tree and Plant Protection. Protect trees, shrubs,lawns, outside of grading limits and within the grading limits as designated on the Plans,and in accordance with requirements of Section 01563—Tree &Plant Protection. E Protection of Underground and Surface Structures Known underground structures, including water, sewer, electric, and telephone services are shown on the Plans in accordance with the best information available,but is not guaranteed to be correct or complete. Contractor is responsible for making Locate Calls. Explore ahead of trenching and excavation work and uncover obstructing underground structures sufficiently to determine their location, to prevent damage to them and to prevent interruption of utility services. Restore to original condition damages to underground structure at no additional cost to the Owner. Immediately notify the agency or company owning any existing utility which is damaged,broken,or disturbed. Obtain approval from the Engineer and agency for any repairs or relocations, either temporary or permanent. 12-2-2011 01500-7 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Necessary changes in location of the Work may be made by the Engineer to avoid unanticipated underground structures. If permanent relocation of an underground structure or other subsurface installations is required and not otherwise provided for in the Contract Documents,the Engineer will direct Contractor in writing to perform the Work, which shall be paid for under the provisions for changes in the Contract Price as described in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. Support in place and protect from direct or indirect injury to underground and surface structures located within or adjacent to the limits of the Work. Install such supports carefully and as required by the party owning or controlling such structure. Before installing structure supports,Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that the methods and procedures to be used have been approved by the owner of the structure. Avoid moving or in any way changing the property of public utilities or private service corporations without prior written consent of a responsible official of that service or public utility. Representatives of these utilities reserve the right to enter within the limits of this project for the purpose of maintaining their properties,or of making such changes or repairs to their property that may be considered necessary by performance of this Contract. Notify the owners and/or operators of utilities and pipelines of the nature of construction operations to be performed and the date or dates on which those operations will be performed. When construction operations are required in the immediate vicinity of existing structures,pipelines,or utilities,give a minimum of five (5) working days advance notice. Probe and flag the location of underground utilities prior to commencement of excavation. Keep flags in place until construction operations reach and uncover the utility. Assume risks attending the presence or proximity of underground and surface structures within or adjacent to the limits to the Work including but not limited to damage and expense for direct or indirect injury caused by the Work to any structure. Immediately repair damage caused, to the satisfaction of the owner of the damaged structure. 1.14 PROTECTION OF THE WORK Provide protection of installed products to prevent damage from subsequent operations. Remove protection facilities when no longer needed,prior to completion of the Work. Control traffic to prevent damage to equipment, materials, and surfaces. 1.15 ROADS AND PARKING A Prevent interference with traffic and Owner operations on existing roads. B Minimize use of existing streets and driveways by construction traffic. ^� C Control traffic to prevent damage to equipment, materials, and surfaces. 12-2-2011 01500-8 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS D Construct and maintain temporary detours, ramps, and roads to provide for normal public traffic flow when use of public roads or streets is closed by necessities of the Work. E Provide mats or other means to prevent overloading or damage to existing roadways from tracked equipment or exceptionally large or heavy trucks or equipment F Designate temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. When site space is not adequate, provide additional off-site parking. Locate as approved by Engineer. G Do not allow heavy vehicles or construction equipment unnecessarily in existing parking areas. 1.16 ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS A Provide and maintain methods, equipment, and temporary construction as necessary for controls over environmental conditions at the construction site and adjacent areas. B Comply with statutes,regulations, and ordinances which relate to the proposed Work for the prevention of environmental pollution and preservation of natural resources, including but not limited to the National Environmental Policy Act of 1969, PL 91- 190, Executive Order 11514. r• C Provide, install and maintain storm water runoff control including but not limited to temporary entrance, silt fencing, etc. as specified in Contract Documents. D Recognize and adhere to the environmental requirements of the Project. Disturbed areas shall be strictly limited to boundaries established by the Contract Documents. Burning of rubbish, debris or waste materials is not permitted. 1.17 POLLUTION CONTROL A Provide methods,means,and facilities required to prevent contamination of soil,water or atmosphere by discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. B Provide equipment and personnel to perform emergency measures required to contain any spillage,and to remove contaminated soils or liquids. Excavate and dispose of any contaminated earth off-site, and replace with suitable compacted fill and topsoil. C Take special measures to prevent harmful substances from entering receiving streams or storm water conveyance systems in conformance with TPDES requirements and Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation. D Provide systems for control of atmospheric pollutants. Prevent toxic concentrations of chemicals. Prevent harmful dispersal of pollutants into the atmosphere. 12-2-2011 01500-9 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS E Use equipment during construction that conforms to current federal, state, and local laws and regulations. 1.18 PEST AND RODENT CONTROL A Provide rodent and pest control as necessary to prevent infestation of Project Site. B Employ methods and use materials which will not adversely affect conditions at the Project Site or adjoining properties. 1.19 NOISE CONTROL A Provide vehicles, equipment, and construction activities that minimize noise to the greatest degree practicable. Noise levels shall conform to OSHA Standards- 29 CFR and in no case will noise levels be permitted which create a nuisance in the surrounding neighborhoods. B Conduct construction operations during daylight hours from 7:30 a.m. to 6:00 p.m. except as approved by Engineer. C Comply with Chapter 19 NOISE, Codes of Ordinances, City of Pearland, Texas. 1.20 DUST CONTROL A Control objectionable dust caused by operation of vehicles and equipment under the provisions of Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation. 1.21 WATER RUNOFF AND EROSION CONTROL A Provide methods to control surface water,runoff,subsurface water,and water pumped from excavations and structures to prevent damage to the Work, the Project Site, or adjoining properties in accordance with Section 01564—Control of Ground Water& Surface Water and Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation. B Inspect earthwork periodically to detect any evidence of the start of erosion. Apply corrective measures as required to control erosion. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 12-2-2011 01500- 10 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND MOBILIZATION (1111.b. Section 01505 MOBILIZATION 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES • A Mobilization of construction equipment and facilities onto the Work. B Referenced Standards: 1. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT) 2. Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (Texas MUTCD) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Payment for Mobilization is on a Lump Sum basis and shall not exceed three percent(3%) of the total bid price. B. Payment for 50% of the Mobilization lump sum bid item maybe included in the first monthly Application for Payment. Payment is subject to the receipt and approval by Engineer of the following items, as applicable: 1. Schedule of Values (Section 01350—Submittals) (.6\ 2. Trench Safety Program(Section 01570—Trench Safety System) 3. Construction Schedule(Section 01350—Submittals) 4. Pre-construction Photographs (Section 01380—Construction Photographs) 5. Installation and acceptance of Project Identification Sign(s) (Section 01580—Project Identification Signs) 6. Installation and acceptance of Field Office (Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls) 7. Installation and acceptance of TPDES requirements (Section 01565 - TPDES Requirements) C. Payment for 25% of the Mobilization lump sum bid item may be included in the second monthly Application for Payment. Payment is subject to the receipt and approval by Engineer of the following items, as applicable: 1. Installation of High Speed Internet Access (Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls) 2. Laptop Computer(Section 00800—Special Conditions of Agreement) D. Payment for 15% of the Mobilization lump sum bid item may be included in the third monthly Application for Payment. E. Payment for the remaining 10% of the Mobilization lump sum bid item may be included in the fourth monthly Application for Payment. (11111 09/2012 01505- 1 of 1 CITY OF PEARLAND MOBILIZATION G. Mobilization payments will be subject to Retainage as stipulated in Section 00700 General Conditions of Agreement. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS A. Provide specified number of project identification sign(s)per Section 01580. The name, address and contact information of the general contractor for the project shall be shown on the sign per Section 01580 and the attached exhibit. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PLACEMENT OF PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS A. Place a Project Identification Sign as described in Section 01580, part 1.03, D visible to passing traffic or as directed by Engineer. END OF SECTION 09/2012 01505 - 1 of 1 CITY OF PEARLAND STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION EXITS Section 01550 STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION EXITS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Installation of erosion and sediment control for Stabilized Construction Exits used during construction and until final development of the Project site. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal 3. Section 01565—TPDES Requirements 4. Section 01566— Source Controls for Erosion& Sedimentation C Referenced Standards: 1. American.Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 4632, "Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid.Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required in this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Manufacturer's catalog sheets and other product data on Geotextile fabric. C Sieve analysis of aggregates conforming to requirements in this Section,2.02"Course Aggregates". 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC A Provide woven or non-woven geotextile fabric made of either polypropylene, polyethylene, ethylene, or polyamide material. B By ASTM D 4632, geotextile fabric shall have a minimum grab strength of 270 psi any principal direction, and the equivalent opening size between 50 and 140. C Both the geotextile and threads shall be resistant to chemical attack, mildew, and rot and shall contain ultraviolet ray inhibitors and stabilizers to provide a minimum of 6 months of expected usable life at a temperature range of 0°F to 120°F. 12/2015 01550- 1 of3 CITY OF PEARLAND STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION EXITS D Representative Manufacturers: Mirafi, Inc., Or-Equal. 2.02 COARSE AGGREGATES A Coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed stone,gravel,concrete,crushed blast furnace slag,or a combination of these materials. Aggregate shall be composed of clean,hard, durable materials free from adherent coatings,salt, alkali, dirt, clay, loam, shale, soft or flaky materials, or organic and injurious matter. B Course aggregates shall be open graded with a size 3" to 6". 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION A The Contractor shall provide stabilized construction exits at the construction,staging, parking, storage, and disposal areas to keep the street clean of mud carried by construction vehicle and equipment. Such erosion and sediment controls shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements shown on the Plans and specified in this Section. B Erosion and sediment control measures shall be in place prior to the start of any Work that exposes the soil, other than as specifically directed by the Engineer to allow soil testing and surveying. C Maintain existing erosion and sediment control systems located within the Project Site until acceptance of the Work or until directed by the Engineer to remove and discard the existing system. Maintenance shall be performed routinely to remove soil build up or, as required by the Engineer. D Regularly inspect and repair or replace components of stabilized construction exits. Unless otherwise directed, maintain them until the Work is accepted by the Owner. Remove stabilized construction exits promptly when directed by the Engineer. Discard removed materials in accordance with Section 01562 — Waste Material Disposal. E Equipment and vehicles shall be prohibited by the Contractor from maneuvering on areas outside of dedicated rights-of-way and easements for construction. Damage caused by construction traffic to erosion and sediment control systems, including vegetative systems shall be repaired immediately. F Conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the erosion control practices described in the Section 01566-Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation and Section 01565 TPDES Requirements. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION METHODS ^� A Provide stabilized access roads, subdivision roads, parking areas, and other on-site vehicle transportation routes where shown on Plans. 12/2015 01550-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND STABILIZED CONSTRUCTION EXITS B Provide stabilized construction exits, and truck washing areas when approved by Engineer, of the sizes and locations where shown on Plans or as specified in this Section. C Vehicles leaving construction areas shall have their tires cleaned to remove sediment prior to entrance onto public right-of-way. When washing is needed to remove sediment, Contractor shall construct a truck washing area. Truck washing shall be done on stabilized areas which drain into a drainage system protected by erosion and sediment control measures. D Details for Stabilized Construction Exits are shown on the Plans. Construction of all other stabilized areas shall be to the same requirements. Roadway width shall be at least 14 feet for one-way traffic and 20 feet for two-way traffic and shall be sufficient for all ingress and egress. Furnish and place geotextile fabric as a permeable separator to prevent mixing of coarse aggregate with underlying soil. Exposure of geotextile fabric to the elements between laydown and cover shall be a maximum of 14 days to minimize damage potential. E Roads and parking areas shall be graded to provide sufficient drainage away from stabilized areas. Use sandbags,gravel,boards,or similar methods to prevent sediment from entering public right-of-way, receiving stream or storm water conveyance system. F The stabilized areas shall be inspected and maintained daily. Provide periodic top dressing with additional coarse aggregates to maintain the required depth. Repair and clean out damaged control measures used to trap sediment. All sediment spilled, dropped,washed,or tracked onto public right-of-way shall be removed immediately. G The length of the stabilized area shall be as shown on the Plans, but not less than 50 feet. The thickness shall not be less than 8 inches. The width shall not be less than full width of all points of ingress or egress. H Stabilization for other areas shall have the same coarse aggregate,thickness,and width requirements as the stabilized construction exit,except where shown otherwise on the Plans. I Stabilized area may be widened or lengthened to accommodate truck washing area when authorized by Engineer. J Alternative methods of construction may be utilized when shown on Plans, or when approved by the Engineer. END OF SECTION 12/2015 01550-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND STREET SIGNS Section 01554 STREET SIGNS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Materials, hardware and installation of Traffic Signs. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises C Referenced Standards: 1. Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (Texas MUTCD) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Signs installed or replaced will be measured by the each sign. Signs refurbished will be measured by each sign. B Payment for installation of traffic signs will be on the basis of each sign installed. C The price is full compensation for furnishing and installing new signs and hardware. Cost of associated posts, footings, and miscellaneous mounting hardware will not be paid for directly but is to be included in the unit price bid for installation of each traffic sign. D Non-standard signs installed or replaced will be measured by the square foot of the sign face. Non-standard signs shall not be installed without prior approval from the City 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Contractor shall submit a list of intended suppliers and products to be used for all signs, posts, and associated hardware. City reserves the right to request actual product samples prior to approval. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Comply with Texas MUTCD regulations. 12/2015 01554- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND STREET SIGNS B The following ASTM Standards and documents, of the issue in effect on the date of Invitation for Bid, form a part of this specification to the extent herein. 1. ASTM B 209 Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate. 2. ASTM D 523 Standard Method for Test for Specular Gloss 3. ASTM D 4956 Standard Specification for Retroreflective Sheeting for Traffic Control. 4. ASTM E 284 Standard Definition of Terms Relating to Appearance of Materials. 5. ASTM E 308 Computing the Colors of Objects by Using the CIE System 6. ASTM E 810 Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Retroreflection of Retroreflective Sheeting. 7. ASTM E 1164 Standard Practice for Obtaining Spectrophotometric Data for Object-Color Evaluation. C Substrate (Sign Blanks)—This shall be aluminum alloy 5052-R38. The thickness of sign shall be 0.125 inch with 3/4"radius corner. 1. Metal working—The aluminum shall be free of burrs and pits on both sides, including edges and holes, and shall be made ready for applications of sheeting. 2. Surface preparation.—The aluminum shall be thoroughly cleaned and degreased with solvent and alkaline emulsions cleaner by immersion, spray, or vapor degreasing and dried prior to application of the gold chromate sheeting coat. The aluminum shall be new and corrosion-free with holes drilled or punched, corners round to radii 3/4" and all edges smoothed prior to application of sheeting. The heavy or medium chromate coating shall conform in color and corrosion resistance to that imparted by the Alodine 1200F treatment. 3. Size—The dimension of substrate application for regulatory, warning, and guide signs shall be as specified by the Engineer and as shown on the plans. D Sign Face (Background, Legends, Symbols, and Colors) — These shall be in accordance with the Standard Highway Signs Designs(SHSD)for Texas and with the Texas Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (TMUTCD) 1. Street Name shall be constructed from Avery Dennison OL—2007 Green Electronic Cutable Film, using Highway B Series Font, 6"Upper/Lower case, 3" Suffix for St., Dr., Ave. designations. Signs shall have a '/2" White Border. a. Tolerance for Horizontal Alignment- Letters, numerals and symbols shall be horizontally aligned to a tolerance of 1/16 inch. b. Tolerance for Vertical Alignment — Letters, numerals, and symbols shall be vertically aligned to a tolerance of 1/16 inch on each letter in each line. 2. All sign blanks shall be covered with Avery Dennison T—7500 White Vinyl reflective sheeting. 3. Signs requiring "No Outlet" or"Dead End" designations shall be constructed from Avery Dennison Black PC—500— 190—0 Vinyl, 2 1/4" 12/2015 01554-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND STREET SIGNS (1.141 upper case lettering. Arrow shall be 1 1/4"x 4 1/4"Long, overlaid with Avery Dennison OL—2001 Yellow electronic Cutable Film 5 %2" x 8". E Street Name Sign shall have a 3/4"x 3/4" City of Pearland dating sticker indicating the month and year of manufacture of each sign. Dating sticker shall be applied to the White Reflective Vinyl, covered by the Green EC film in the manufacturing process. F Avery Dennison is the approved manufacturer of vinyls for the City of Pearland.Any substitutions will require submission of sample materials and specifications sheets to the City Of Pearland Traffic Operations manager prior to use.Any and all components are to be match components. Uses of non-matching components are prohibited. G Sign Posts - Steel post shall conform to the standard specification for hot rolled carbon sheet steel, structural quality, ASTM designation A570, Grade 50. Average minimum yield strength after cold forming is 60,000 psi. 1. The location, height, size and the foundation of the sign post shall conform to the City's standard detail. 2. The signs shall be installed using RPB412F— 12"Round Post Cap and RPB412F— 12" Cross Piece Brackets. Posts caps shall be attached to sign post using 5/16" Carriage Bolts and 5/16" Tuff Nuts. Signs are to be attached to brackets using same. H Warranty- The Contractor shall warrant the materials and workmanship of each sign in accordance with the maximum limits of material warranties extended by manufacturers of raw materials, subject to the conditions they specify. The retro- reflective sheeting will be considered unsatisfactory if it has deteriorated due to natural causes to the extent that: (1) the sign is ineffective for its intended purpose when viewed from a moving vehicle under normal day and night driving conditions; or (2) the coefficient of retro-reflection is less than the minimum specified for that sheeting. When sign failure occurs prior to the minimum years indicated and an inspection demonstrates that the failure is caused by materials warranted to contractor to endure at least that long, the sign will be replaced or repaired free of materials charges. When failure occurs and inspection demonstrates that such failure is due to poor workmanship, the sign will be replaced or repaired at Contractor's expense, including shipping charges. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EQUIPMENT The contractor shall provide machinery, tools, and equipment necessary for proper execution of the work. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION A Construction shall be high quality with no visible defects in the finished product. Fabrication shall be in accordance with these specifications. Street name signs 12/2015 01554-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND STREET SIGNS shall always be supplied and installed at each project intersection whether signs '-"14) previously existed at the location or not. B The removal of existing signs shall be coordinated with the Traffic Operations Section of the Public Works Department (281-652-1900) and arrangements made for a convenient time to deliver City signs and poles. All salvaged traffic signs shall be delivered to the Traffic Operations Center located at 2559 Hillhouse Road, Pearland. All deliveries to the Traffic Operations Center requires a minimum notice of two (2) working days prior to returning or delivering any sign and/or sign related material. 3.03 RESPONSIBILITIES A The contractor is responsible for providing and supplying aluminum traffic signs covered with retro-reflective sheeting, applying standard legends (or special legends if shown in the plans) to the covered sign blanks, galvanized steel sign poles,pole anchors, all hardware for installing the signs and poles, and for installing traffic signs, poles and anchors as shown in the plans or call for in the contract documents, complete and ready for field installations. 3.04 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. B Remove equipment and devices when no longer required. C Repair damage caused by installation. END OF SECTION 12/2015 01554-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION Section 01555 TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Requirements for traffic control plans,signs,signals,control devices,flares,lights and traffic signals, as well as construction parking control, designated haul routes and bridging of trenches and excavations. B Requirements for and qualifications of Flaggers. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises D Referenced Standards: 1. Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (Texas MUTCD) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Traffic Control and Regulation. Measurement is on a Lump Sum basis for Traffic Control and Regulation, including submittal of a traffic control plan if different from the one provided on the Plans, provision of traffic control devices, and provision of equipment and personnel as necessary to protect the Work and the public. The amount invoiced shall be determined based on the Schedule of Values submitted for traffic control and regulation. B Flaggers. Measurement is on a Lump Sum basis for Flaggers as required for the Work. The amount invoiced shall be determined based on the Schedule of Values submitted for Flaggers. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B A Traffic Control Plan responsive to the Texas MUTCD and sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer is incorporated into the Plans. If the Contractor proposes to implement traffic control different than the plan provided, he shall submit a Traffic Control Plan in conformance with Texas MUTCD for approval of the Engineer. C For both the Traffic Control Plan and Flaggers' use, submit Schedules of Values within 30 days following the Notice to Proceed. D Each week submit a daily log for Flaggers listing name,badge number,time start,time finish, and hours worked. 03/2008 01555- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION 1.04 FLAGGERS A Unless otherwise specified, use only Flaggers who are off-duty, regularly employed, uniformed Peace Officers. B Flaggers are required at the following locations: 1. Where multi-lane vehicular traffic must be diverted into single-lane vehicular traffic. 2. Where vehicular traffic must change lanes abruptly. 3. Where construction equipment either enters or crosses vehicular traffic lanes and walks. 4. Where construction equipment may intermittently encroach on vehicular traffic lanes and unprotected walks and cross-walks. 5. Where construction activities might affect public safety and convenience. 6. Where traffic regulation is needed due to rerouting of vehicular traffic around the work site. 7. When requested by Owner. C The use of Flaggers is for the purpose of assisting in the regulation of traffic flow and movement, and does not in any way relieve the contractor of full responsibility for taking such other steps and provide such other Flaggers or personnel as the Contractor may deem necessary to protect the work and the public, and does not in any way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for any damage for which he would otherwise be liable. Flaggers shall be used and maintained at such points for such periods of time as may be required to provide for the public safety and convenience of travel. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 SIGNS, SIGNALS,AND DEVICES A Comply with Texas MUTCD regulations. B Traffic Cones and Drums, Flares and Lights: As approved by agencies having jurisdiction. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PUBLIC ROADS A Abide by laws and regulations of governing authorities when using public roads. If the Contractor's work requires that public roads be temporarily impeded or closed, approvals shall be obtained from governing authorities and permits paid for before starting any work. Coordinate activities with the Engineer. B Contractor shall maintain at all times a 10-foot-wide all-weather lane adjacent to work } areas which shall be kept free of construction equipment and debris and shall be for the use of emergency vehicles, or as otherwise provided in the Traffic Control Plan. 03/2008 01555-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION C Contractor shall not obstruct the normal flow of traffic from 7:00 a.m.to 9:00 a.m.and (1116\' 4:00 p.m. to 6:00 p.m. on designated major arterials or as directed by the Engineer. D Contractor shall maintain local driveway access to residential and commercial properties adjacent to work areas at all times. E Cleanliness of Surrounding Streets: 1. Keep streets used for entering or leaving the job area free of excavated material, debris, and any foreign material resulting from construction operations. Leave the area broom-clean or its equivalent at the end of the work day. F Control vehicular parking to prevent interference with public traffic and parking, and access by emergency vehicles. G Monitor parking of construction personnel's vehicles in existing facilities. Maintain vehicular access to and through parking areas. H Prevent parking on or adjacent to access roads or in non-designated areas. 3.02 FLARES AND LIGHTS A Provide flares and lights during hours of low visibility to delineate traffic lanes and to guide traffic. 3.03 HAUL ROUTES A Utilize haul routes designated by Owner or shown on the Plans for construction traffic. B Confine construction traffic to designated haul routes. C Provide traffic control at critical areas of haul routes to regulate traffic and minimize interference with public traffic. D Contractor shall be responsible for any damage caused by vehicles utilizing haul routes. 3.04 TRAFFIC SIGNS AND SIGNALS A Install traffic control devices at approaches to the site and on site, at crossroads, detours, parking areas, and elsewhere as needed to direct construction and affected public traffic. B Relocate traffic signs and control devices as Work progresses to maintain effective traffic control. 3.05 BRIDGING TRENCHES AND EXCAVATIONS A Whenever necessary,bridge trenches and excavation to permit an unobstructed flow of traffic. 03/2008 01555-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TRAFFIC CONTROL AND REGULATION B Secure bridging against displacement by using adjustable cleats, angles,bolts or other devices whenever bridge is installed: 1. On an existing bus route; 2. When more than five percent of daily traffic is comprised of commercial or truck traffic; 3. When more than two separate plates are used for the bridge; or 4. When bridge is to be used for more than five consecutive days. C Install bridging to operate with minimum noise. D Adequately shore the trench or excavation to support bridge and traffic. E Extend steel plates used for bridging a minimum of one foot beyond edges of trench or excavation. Use temporary paving materials (premix) to feather edges of plates to minimize wheel impact on secured bridging. F Use steel plates of sufficient thickness to support H-20 loading, truck or lane, that produces maximum stress. 3.06 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. B Remove equipment and devices when no longer required. C Repair damage caused by installation. D Remove post settings to a depth of 2 feet. END OF SECTION 03/2008 01555-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND FILTER FABRIC FENCE Section 01560 FILTER FABRIC FENCE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Installation of filter fabric fence to control erosion and contain sediments and pollutants from overland flow. Filter fabric fence is not for use in channelized flow areas. Filter fabric fence may be reinforced. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement &Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal 4. Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 3786,"Standard Test Method for Hydraulic Bursting strength of Textile Fabrics" b. ASTM D 4632, "Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and rib\ Elongation of Geotextiles" 1.02 MEASURMENT AND PAYMENT A Filter fabric fence will be measured by the linear foot between the limits of the beginning and ending of wooden stakes. B Payment for filter fabric fence will include and be full compensation for all labor, equipment,materials,supervision,and all incidental expenses for construction of these items,complete in place,including,but not limited to protection of trees,maintenance requirements, repair and replacement of damaged sections, removal of sediment deposits, and removal of erosion and sediment control systems at the end of construction. C Refer to Section 01200—Measurement&Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Manufacturer's catalog sheets and other Product Data on geotextile fabric. (.1111 03/2008 01560- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND FILTER FABRIC FENCE 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 FILTER FABRIC A Provide woven or nonwoven geotextile filter fabric made of either polypropylene, polyethylene, ethylene, or polyamide material. B By ASTM D 4632, geotextile fabric shall have a grab strength of 100 psi in any principal direction, a Mullen burst strength exceeding 200psi by ASTM-D3786, and the equivalent opening size between 50 and 140. C Filter fabric shall contain ultraviolet inhibitors and stabilizers to provide a minimum of 6 months of expected usable construction life at a temperature range of 0 degrees F to 120 degrees F. D Representative Manufacturer: Mirafi, Inc., or equal. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION A Provide erosion and sediment control systems at the locations shown on Plans. Such systems shall be of the type indicated and shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements shown on the Plans and specified in this Section. r -7 B Erosion and sediment control measures shall be in place prior to the start of any Work that exposes the soil, other than as specifically directed by the Engineer to allow soil testing and surveying. C Regularly inspect and repair or replace damaged components of filter fabric fence as specified in this Section, 3.02F. Unless otherwise directed, maintain the erosion and sediment control systems until the Work is accepted by the Owner. Remove erosion and sediment control systems promptly when directed by the Engineer. Discard removed materials in accordance with Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal. D Conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the erosion control practices described in Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion& Sedimentation. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION METHODS A Provide filter fabric fence systems in accordance with the Plan detail for Filter fabric fence. Filter fabric fence shall be installed in such a manner that surface runoff will percolate through the system in sheet flow fashion and allow sediment to be retained and accumulated. B Attach the filter fabric to 2-inch by 2-inch wooden stakes spaced a maximum of 3 feet apart and embedded a minimum of 8 inches. If filter fabric is factory preassembled 03/2008 01560-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND FILTER FABRIC FENCE with support netting,then maximum spacing allowable is 8 feet. Install wooden stakes (1111 at a slight angle toward the source of anticipated runoff. C Trench in the toe of the filter fabric fence with a spade or mechanical trencher as shown on the Plans. Lay filter fabric along the edges of the trench. Backfill and compact trench. D Filter fabric fence shall have a minimum height of 18 inches and a maximum height of 36 inches above natural ground. E Provide the filter fabric in continuous rolls and cut to the length of the fence to minimize the use of joints. When joints are necessa , splice the Fabric together only at a support post with a minimum 6-inch overlap and seal securely. F Inspect filter fabric fence systems after each rainfall,rydaily during periods of prolonged rainfall, and at a minimum once each week. Repair or replace damaged sections immediately. Remove sediment deposits when silt reaches a depth one-third the height of the fence or 6 inches, whichever is less. END OF SECTION 03/2008 01560-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND REINFORCED FILTER FABRIC BARRIER Section 01561 (117 REINFORCED FILTER FABRIC BARRIER 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Installation of reinforced filter fabric barrier to control erosion and contain sediments and pollutants in channelized flow areas. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement&Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 3786,"Standard Test Method for Hydraulic Bursting strength of Textile Fabrics" b. ASTM D 4632, Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles" r1.02 MEASURMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for reinforced filter fabric barrier is on a linear foot basis between the limits of the beginning and ending fence posts, measured, accepted, and complete in place. B Payment for filter fabric barrier will include and be full compensation for all labor, equipment, materials, supervision, and incidental expenses for construction of these items,complete in place,including,but not limited to protection of trees,maintenance requirements, repair and replacement of damaged sections, removal of sediment deposits, and removal of erosion and sediment control systems at the end of construction.. C Refer to Section 01200—Measurement&Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Manufacturer's catalog sheets and other product data on geotextile fabric. 05/2008 01561 - 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND REINFORCED FILTER FABRIC BARRIER 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 FILTER FABRIC "..11) A Provide woven or nonwoven geotextile filter fabric made of either polypropylene, polyethylene, ethylene, or polyamide material. B By ASTM - D4632, geotextile fabric shall have a grab strength of 100 psi in any principal direction, a Mullen burst strength exceeding 200psi by ASTM-D3786,and the equivalent opening size between 50 and 140. C Filter fabric shall contain ultraviolet inhibitors and stabilizers to provide a minimum of 6 months of expected usable construction life at a temperature range of 0 degrees F to 120 degrees F. D Representative Manufacturer: Mirafi, Inc., or equal. 2.02 FILTER FABRIC REINFORCEMENT A Provide woven galvanized steel wire fence with minimum thickness of 14 gauge and a maximum mesh spacing of 6 inches. B Welded wire shall be galvanized, 2-inch by 4-inch, welded wire fabric, 121/ gauge. 2.03 EXECUTION 2.04 PREPARATION A Provide erosion and sediment control systems at the locations shown on Plans. Such systems shall be of the type indicated and shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements shown on the Plans and specified in this Section. B Erosion and sediment control measures shall be in place prior to the start of any Work that exposes the soil, other than as specifically directed by the Engineer to allow soil testing and surveying. C Regularly inspect and repair or replace damaged components of filter fabric barrier. Unless otherwise directed,maintain the erosion and sediment control systems until the Work is accepted by the Owner. Remove erosion and sediment control systems promptly when directed by the Engineer. Discard removed materials in accordance with Section 1562—Waste Material Disposal. D Conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the erosion control practices described in Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion& Sedimentation. 05/2008 01561 -2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND REINFORCED FILTER FABRIC BARRIER (1.1'\ 2.05 INSTALLATION A Install reinforced filter fabric barriers for erosion and sediment control used during construction and until the final development of the Project Site. Reinforced filter fabric barriers are used to retain sedimentation in channelized flow areas. B Provide reinforced filter fabric barrier in accordance with the Plan detail for Reinforced Filter Fabric Barrier. Reinforced filter fabric barrier systems shall be installed in such a manner that runoff will, percolate through the system and allow sediment to be retained and accumulated. C Trench in the toe of the reinforced filter fabric barrier with a spade or mechanical trencher as shown on the Plans. Lay filter fabric along the edges of the trench. Backfill and compact trench. D Reinforced filter fabric barrier shall have a height of 18 inches. E Securely fasten the filter fabric to the wire with tie wires. F Provide the filter fabric in continuous rolls and cut to the length of the fence to minimize the use of joints. When joints are necessary, splice the fabric together only at a support post with a minimum 6-inch overlap and seal securely. G Inspect the reinforced filter fabric barrier systems after each rainfall, daily during rh\ periods of prolonged rainfall, and at a minimum once each week. Repair or replace damaged sections immediately. Remove sediment deposits when silt reaches a depth one-third the height of the barrier or 6 inches, whichever is less. END OF SECTION 05/2008 01561 -3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL Section 01562 (1.1"b.\ WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Disposal of waste material and salvageable material. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation 3. Section 01600—Materials &Equipment 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. ("b\ B Obtain and submit applicable permits for proposed disposal sites. C Submit a Waste Material Disposal Plan. D Submit a copy of written permission from property owners,along with a description of the property,prior to disposal of excess material adjacent to the Project Site. Submit a written and signed release from property owner upon completion of disposal work. City of Pearland requires individual fill placement permits for all fill placed within the City limits. 1.04 WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL PLAN A Contractor shall formulate and implement a plan for the collection and disposal of waste materials on the Project Site which includes the following information: 1. Schedule for collection and inspection. 2. Location of trash and waste receptacles. 3. Provisions for liquid waste and potential water pollutants material. B The plan shall comply with applicable federal, state, and local health and safety regulations and Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 07/2006 01562- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 SALVAGEABLE MATERIAL A Excavated material: When indicated on Plans, load, haul, and deposit excavated material at a location or locations outside the limits of Project Site. B Base, surface, and bedding material: Deliver gravel, asphaltic, or other base and surfacing material designated for salvage to the location designated by the Engineer. C Pipe culvert: Deliver culverts designated for salvage to Owner's storage area. D Other salvageable materials: Conform to requirements of individual Technical Specifications. E Coordinate delivery of salvageable material with Engineer. F When temporary, on-site storage of salvaged materials is required, comply with applicable provisions of Section 01600—Materials &Equipment. 3.02 SEDIMENT DISPOSAL A Remove sediment deposits and dispose of them at the designated spoil site for the Project. If a spoil site is not designated on the Plans, dispose of sediment off site at a location not in or adjacent to a stream or floodplain. B Off-site disposal is the responsibility of the Contractor. C Sediment to be placed at the Project Site should be spread evenly throughout the designated area,compacted and stabilized. Sediment shall not be allowed to flush into a stream or drainage way. D If sediment has been contaminated,it shall be disposed of in accordance with existing federal, state, and local rules and regulations. 3.03 EXCESS MATERIAL, WASTE,AND EQUIPMENT A Vegetation,rubble,broken concrete,debris,asphaltic concrete pavement,excess soil, and other materials not designated for salvage,shall become the property of Contractor and shall be removed from the Project Site and legally disposed of. B Dispose of removed equipment,materials,waste and debris in a manner conforming to applicable laws and regulations C Excess soil may be deposited on private property adjacent to the Project Site when written permission is obtained from property owner under the provisions of this Section, 1.03D. 07/2006 01562-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND WASTE MATERIAL DISPOSAL D Verify the flood plain status of any proposed disposal site. Do not dispose of ///^.\. excavated materials in an area designated as within the 100-year Flood Hazard Area. E Waste materials shall be removed from the site on a daily basis, such that the site is maintained in a neat and orderly condition. F No materials shall be disposed in a manner to damage the Owner in any way. END OF SECTION 07/2006 01562-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION • Section 01563 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Tree and plant protection. B References to Technical Specifications: None 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS A Preserve and protect existing trees and plants to remain from foliage,branch,trunk,or root damage that could result from construction operations. B Prevent following types of damage: 1. Compaction of root zone by foot or vehicular traffic, or material storage. 2. Trunk damage from equipment operations, material storage, or from nailing \\ or bolting. 3. Trunk and branch damage caused by ropes or guy wires or machine impacts. 4. Root poisoning from spilled solvents, gasoline,paint, and other noxious materials. 5. Branch damage due to improper pruning or trimming. 6. Damage from lack of water due to: a. Cutting or altering natural water migration patterns near root zones. b. Failure to provide adequate watering. 7. Damage from alteration of soil pH factor caused by depositing lime, concrete, plaster, or other base materials near roots. 8. Cutting.feeder of roots or roots larger than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. 1.04 DAMAGE ASSESSMENT A When trees, other than those designated for removal, are destroyed or badly damaged as a result of construction operations,remove and replace with same size,species,and variety up to and including 8 inches in trunk diameter. Trees larger than 8 inches in diameter shall be replaced with an 8-inch diameter tree of the same species and variety and total contract amount will be reduced by an amount determined from the following International Shade Tree Conference formula: 0.7854 x D2 x $10.00 where D is diameter in inches of tree or shrub trunk measured 12 inches above grade. B All necessary tree replacements shall be as approved by Engineer/Urban Forester. 02/2013 01563 - 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Asphalt paint: Emulsified asphalt or other adhesive, elastic, antiseptic coating formulated for horticultural use on cut or injured plant tissue, free from kerosene and coal creosote. B Burlap: Suitable for use as tree wrapping. C Fertilizer: Liquid containing 20 percent nitrogen, 10 percent phosphorus, and 5 percent potash. D. Temporary Barrier Fence: Plastic, bright orange color for visibility, 48 inches in height, 8.5 pounds weight minimum. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF EXISTING TREES AND SHRUBS A Except for trees and shrubs shown on Plans to be removed,all trees and shrubs within the Project Site area are to remain and be protected from damage. B For designated trees to be removed,perform the following: 1. Stake right-of-way limits and identify any tree of diameter greater than 4 inches which is to be removed. Mark trees prior to felling with an X in orange paint, clearly visible, on the trunk, and at eye level. 2. After marking trees give a minimum of 48-hours notice in writing to the Engineer of intent to begin felling operations. 3. Trees whose trunks are only partially in the right-of-way shall be protected and preserved as described below. C For trees or shrubs to remain, perform the following: 1. Trim trees and shrubs only as necessary. a. Trees and shrubs requiring pruning for construction should also be pruned for balance as well as to maintain proper form and branching habit. b. Cut limbs at branch collar. No stubs should remain on trees. Branch cuts should not gouge outer layer of tree structure or trunk. 2. Use extreme care to prevent excessive damage to root systems. a. Roots in construction areas will be cut smoothly with a trencher before excavation begins. Do not allow ripping of roots with a backhoe or other equipment. b. Temporarily cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying out. c. Cover exposed roots with soil as soon as possible. 3. Prevent damage or compaction of root zone (area inside dripline) by construction activities. a. Do not allow scarring of trunks or limbs by equipment or other means. 02/2013 01563 -2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION b. Do not store construction materials, vehicles, or excavated material inside dripline of trees.. c. Do not pour liquid materials inside dripline. 4. Water and fertilize trees and shrubs that will remain to maintain their health during construction period. a. Supplemental watering of landscaping during construction should be done once a week in months receiving average rainfall and twice a week in months receiving below average rainfall. b. This watering shall consist of saturating soils at least 6 to 8 inches beneath surface. 5. Water areas currently being served by private sprinkler systems while systems are temporarily taken out of service to maintain health of existing landscapes. 6. At option of the Contractor and with the Engineer's permission, trees and shrubs to remain may be temporarily transplanted and returned to original positions under supervision of professional horticulturist. 3.02 PROTECTIVE CONTROLS A Protection of trees or shrubs in open area: 1. Install steel drive-in fence posts in protective circle, approximately 8 feet on center, at the dripline of the leaf canopy of trees or 2 ft. around shrubs. 2. Drive steel drive-in fence posts 3 feet minimum into ground, leaving 5 feet minimum above ground. 3. For trees or shrubs in paved areas,use moveable posts constructed from concrete-filled steel pipe 2-1/2 inches minimum in diameter mounted in rubber auto tires filled with concrete. 4. Mount plastic temporary barrier safety fence on posts. B Timber-wrap protection for trees in close proximity of moving or mechanical equipment and construction work: 1. Wrap trunk with layer of burlap. 2. Install 2 x 4's or 2 x 6's (5-foot to 6-foot lengths) vertically, spaced 3 inches to 5 inches apart around circumference of tree trunk. 3. Tie in place with 12 to 9 gage steel wire. 3.03 MAINTENANCE OF NEWLY PLANTED TREES A Water newly planted trees adequately to maintain and support healthy plants at the time of planting. B The Contractor guarantees that trees planted for this Work shall remain alive and healthy at least until the end of a one-year warranty period. 1. Within four weeks of notice from Owner, Contractor shall replace, at his expense, any dead trees or any trees that in the opinion of Owner, have (Fib\ become unhealthy or unsightly or have lost their natural shape as a result of additional growth, improper pruning or maintenance, or weather conditions. 02/2013 01563 -3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION 2. When tree must be replaced, the guarantee period for that tree shall begin on date of replacement of tree, subject to the Owner's inspection, for no less than one year. 3. Straighten leaning trees and bear entire cost. 4. Dispose of trees rejected at any time by Engineer at Contractor's expense. END OF SECTION 02/2013 01563 -4 of 4 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER Section 01564 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER AND SURFACE WATER 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Dewatering,depressurizing,draining,and maintaining trench and structure excavations and foundation beds in dry and stable condition. B Protecting work against surface runoff and rising flood waters. C Disposing of removed water. D References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement &Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01570—Trench Safety Systems 4. Section 01565 —TPDES Requirements 5. Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation E Referenced Standards: 111117\ 1. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 2. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) 3. Code of Ordinances, City of Pearland, Texas 4. Water Well Drillers and Pump Installers Advisory Council (WWD/PI) F Definitions: 1. Ground Water Control Systems -installations external to the excavation such as well points, eductors, or deep wells. Ground water control includes dewatering and depressurization. a. Dewatering-lowering the water table and intercepting seepage which would otherwise emerge from slopes or bottoms of excavations and disposing of removed water. The intent of dewatering is to increase stability of excavated slopes; prevent dislocation of material from slopes or bottoms of excavations;reduce lateral loads on sheeting and bracing; improve excavating and hauling characteristics of excavated material; prevent failure or heaving of the bottom of excavations; and to provide suitable conditions for placement of backfill materials and construction of structures and other installations. b. Depressurization -reduction in piezometric pressure within strata not controlled by dewatering alone, as required to prevent failure or heaving of excavation bottom. 2. Surface Water Control - diversion and drainage of surface water runoff and rain water away from the excavation. 3. Excavation Drainage -keeping excavations free of surface and seepage water. 02/2008 01564- 1 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for and control of ground water for open cut pipe excavations shall be on a linear foot basis and shall not exceed the length of open cut pipe installation in the area requiring ground water control. B Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for control of ground water for any condition(s) other than those described in this Section, 1.02A. No separate payment will be made for control of surface water. Include the cost to control non-pipe excavation ground water and surface water in price for Work requiring such controls. C Refer to Section 01200—Measurement&Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit a Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan for review by the Engineer prior to start of any field work. The plan shall be signed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Texas. The plan shall include the following: 1. Results of subsurface investigation and description of the extent and characteristics of water bearing layers subject to ground water control. 2. Names of equipment suppliers and installation subcontractors. 3. A description of proposed ground water control systems indicating arrangement, location, depth and capacities of system components, installation details and criteria, and operation and maintenance procedures. 4. A description of proposed monitoring and control system indicating depths and locations of piezometers and monitoring wells, monitoring installation details and criteria, type of equipment and instrumentation with pertinent data and characteristics. 5. A description of proposed filters including types, sizes, capacities and manufacturer's application recommendations. 6. Design calculations demonstrating adequacy of proposed systems for intended applications. Define potential area of influence of ground water control operation near contaminated areas. 7. Operating requirements, including piezometric control elevations for dewatering and depressurization. 8. Excavation drainage methods including typical drainage layers, sump pump application and other necessary means. 9. Surface water control and drainage installations. 10. Proposed methods and locations for disposing of removed water. C Submit the following records upon completed initial installation: 1. Installation and development reports for well points, eductors, and deep wells. 02/2008 01564-2 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER 2. Installation reports and baseline readings for piezometers and monitoring wells. 3. Baseline analytical test data of water from monitoring wells. 4. Initial flow rates. D Submit the following records on a weekly basis during operations: 1. Records of flow rates and piezometric elevations obtained during monitoring of dewatering and depressurization. Refer to this Section, 3.02 "Requirements for Eductor, Well Points, or Deep Wells". 2. Maintenance records for ground water control installations, piezometers, and monitoring wells. E Submit the following records at end of the Work. Decommissioning(abandonment) reports for monitoring wells and piezometers installed by other during the design phase and left for Contractor's monitoring and use. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A Conduct subsurface investigations to identify groundwater conditions and to provide parameters for design, installation, and operation of groundwater control systems. B Design a ground water control system, compatible with the requirements of OSHA Standards - 29 CFR, Part 1926, and Section 01570 - Trench Safety Systems of these Technical Specifications, to produce the following results: 1. Effectively reduce the hydrostatic pressure affecting excavations. 2. Develop a substantially dry and stable subgrade for subsequent construction operations. 3. Preclude damage to adjacent properties, buildings, structures, utilities, installed facilities, and other work. 4. Prevent the loss of fines, seepage, boils, quick condition, or softening of the foundation strata. 5. Maintain stability of sides and bottom of excavations. C Ground water control systems may include single-stage or multiple-stage well point systems, eductor and ejector-type systems, deep wells, or combinations of these equipment types. D Provide drainage of seepage water and surface water, as well as water from any other source entering the excavation. Excavation drainage may include placement of drainage materials, such as crushed stone and filter fabric, together with sump pumping. E Provide ditches,berms,pumps and other methods necessary to divert and drain surface water from excavation and other work areas. rib\ F Locate ground water control and drainage systems so as not to interfere with utilities, construction operations, adjacent properties, or adjacent water wells. 02/2008 01564-3 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER G Assume sole responsibility for ground water control systems and for any loss or ''st) damage resulting from partial or complete failure of protective measures and any settlement or resultant damage caused by the ground water control operations. Modify ground water control systems or operations if they cause or threaten to cause damage to new construction, existing site improvements, adjacent property, or adjacent water wells,or affect potentially contaminated areas. Repair damage caused by ground water control systems or resulting from failure of the system to protect property as required. H Provide an adequate number of piezometers installed at the proper locations and depths as required to provide meaningful observations of the conditions affecting the excavation, adjacent structures, and water wells. I Provide environmental monitoring wells installed at the proper locations and depths as required to provide adequate observations of hydrostatic conditions and possible contaminant transport from contamination sources into the work area or into the ground water control system. J Decommission piezometers and monitoring wells installed during design phase studies and left for Contractors monitoring and use. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A Comply with requirements of agencies having jurisdiction. r'`*) B Comply with TCEQ regulations and WWD/PI Advisory Council for development, drilling, and abandonment of wells used in dewatering system. C Obtain permit from TCEQ under the Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES),for storm water discharge from construction sites. Refer to Section 01565— TPDES, 3.02 "Certification Requirements". D Obtain all necessary permits from agencies with control over the use of groundwater and matters affecting well installation, water discharge, and use of existing storm drains and natural water sources. Because the review and permitting process may be lengthy, take early action to pursue and submit for the required approvals. E Monitor ground water discharge for contamination while performing pumping in the vicinity of potentially contaminated sites. F Implement control of ground and surface water under the provisions of Section 01566 —Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A Equipment and materials are at the option of Contractor as necessary to achieve desired results for dewatering. Selected equipment and materials are subject to review 02/2008 01564-4 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER of the Engineer through Submittals required in Section 01350 — Submittals, 1.06 "Operations and Maintenance Data". B Eductors, well points, or deep wells, where used, must be furnished, installed and operated by an experienced contractor regularly engaged in ground water control system design, installation, and operation. C Equipment and instrumentation for monitoring and control of the ground water control system includes piezometers and monitoring wells, and devices, such as flow meters, for observing and recording flow rates. D All equipment must be in good repair and operating order. E Sufficient standby equipment and materials shall be kept available to ensure continuous operation, where required. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 GROUND WATER CONTROL A Perform a subsurface investigation by borings as necessary to identify water bearing layers,piezometric pressures,and soil parameters for design and installation of ground water control systems. Perform pump tests, if necessary to determine the drawdown characteristics of the water-bearing layers. The results shall be presented in the Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan. Refer to this Section, 1.03B. B Provide labor, material, equipment, techniques and methods to lower, control and handle ground water in a manner compatible with construction methods and site conditions. Monitor effectiveness of the installed system and its effect on adjacent property. C Install, operate, and maintain ground water control systems in accordance with the Plan. Notify Engineer in writing of any changes made to accommodate field conditions and changes to the Work. Provide revised drawings and calculations with such notification. D Provide for continuous system operation, including nights, weekends, and holidays. Arrange for appropriate backup if electrical power is primary energy source for dewatering system. E Monitor operations to verify that the system lowers ground water piezometric levels at a rate required to maintain a dry excavation resulting in a stable subgrade for prosecution of subsequent operations. F Where hydrostatic pressures in confined water bearing layers exist below excavation, depressurize those zones to eliminate risk of uplift or other instability of excavation or installed works. Allowable piezometric elevations shall be defined in the Plan. 02/2008 01564-5 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER G Maintain water level below subgrade elevation. Do not allow levels to rise until foundation concrete has achieved design strength. H During backfilling,dewatering may be reduced to maintain water level a minimum of 5 feet below prevailing level of backfill. However, do not allow that water level to result in uplift pressures in excess of 80 percent of downward pressure produced by weight of structure or backfill in place. Do not allow water levels to rise into cement stabilized sand until at least 48 hour after placement. I Provide a uniform diameter for each pipe drain run constructed for dewatering. Remove pipe drain when it has served its purpose. If removal of pipe is impractical, provide grout connections at 50-foot intervals and fill pipe with cement-bentonite grout or cement-sand grout when pipe is removed from service. J Extent of construction ground water control for structures with a permanent perforated underground drainage system may be reduced,such as for units designed to withstand hydrostatic uplift pressure. Provide a means of draining the affected portion of underground system,including standby equipment. Maintain drainage system during operations and remove it when no longer required. K Remove system upon completion of construction or when dewatering and control of surface or ground water is no longer required. L Compact backfill as required by the Contract Documents. 3.02 REQUIREMENTS FOR EDUCTOR, WELL POINTS, OR DEEP WELLS A For aboveground piping in ground water control system, include a 12-inch minimum length of clear, transparent piping between every eductor well or well point and discharge header so that discharge from each installation can be visually monitored. B Install sufficient piezometers or monitoring wells to show that all trench or shaft excavations in water bearing materials are predrained prior to excavation. Provide separate piezometers for monitoring of dewatering and for monitoring of depressurization. Install piezometers and monitoring wells for tunneling as appropriate for Contractor's selected method of work. C Install piezometers or monitoring wells not less than one week in advance of beginning the associated excavation. D Dewatering may be omitted for portions of underdrains or other excavations,but only where auger borings and piezometers or monitoring wells show that soil is predrained by an existing system such that the criteria of the Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan are satisfied. 02/2008 01564-6 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER E Replace installations that produce noticeable amounts of sediments after development. F Provide additional ground water control installations or change the methods in the event that the installations according to the Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan do not provide satisfactory results based on the performance criteria defined by the Plan and by this Section. Submit a revised Plan according to this Section, 1.03A. G Mechanical dewatering equipment shall comply with Chapter 19 NOISE, Code of Ordinances, City of Pearland, Texas. 3.03 EXCAVATION DRAINAGE A Contractor may use excavation drainage methods if necessary to achieve well drained, stable trench conditions. The excavation drainage may consist of the following methods or combination of methods: 1. Sump pumping in combination with: a. Layer of crushed stone and filter fabric. b. Sand and gravel drains. 2. Wells for ground water control. B Use sump pumping and a drainage layer, as defined in ASTM D 2321, placed on the foundation beneath pipe bedding or thickened bedding layer of Class I material. (f", 3.04 MAINTENANCE AND OBSERVATION A Conduct daily maintenance and observation of piezometers or monitoring wells while the ground water control installations or excavation drainage are operating in an area. Keep system in good operating condition. B Replace damaged and destroyed piezometers or monitoring wells with new piezometers or wells as necessary to meet observation schedule. C Cut off piezometers or monitoring wells in excavation areas where piping is exposed, only as necessary to perform observation as excavation proceeds. Continue to maintain and make observations, as specified. D Remove and grout piezometers inside or outside the excavation area when ground water control operations are complete. Remove and grout monitoring wells when directed by the Engineer. 3.05 MONITORING AND RECORDING A Monitor and record average flow rate of operation for each deep well, or for each wellpoint or eductor header used in dewatering system. Also monitor and record water level and ground water recovery. These records shall be obtained daily until steady conditions are achieved, and twice weekly thereafter. 02/2008 01564-7 of 8 CONTROL OF GROUND WATER CITY OF PEARLAND AND SURFACE WATER B Observe and record elevation of water level daily as long as ground water control system is in operation, and weekly thereafter until the Work is completed or piezometers or wells are removed, except when Engineer determines that more frequent monitoring and recording are required. Comply with Engineer's direction for increased monitoring and recording and take measures as necessary to ensure effective dewatering for intended purpose. 3.06 SURFACE WATER CONTROL A Intercept surface water and divert it away from excavations through use of dikes, ditches,curb walls,pipes,sumps or other approved means. The requirement includes temporary works required to protect adjoining properties from surface drainage caused by construction operations. B Divert surface water and seepage water into sumps and pump it into drainage channels or storm drains, when approved by agencies having jurisdiction. Provide settling basins when required by such agencies. C Provide additional surface water control measures or change the methods in the event that the measures according to the Ground Water and Surface Water Control Plan do not provide satisfactory results based on the performance criteria defined by the Plan and by this Section. Submit a revised Plan according to this Section, 1.03B. END OF SECTION 02/2008 01564-8 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND TPDES REQUIREMENTS Section 01565 TPDES REQUIREMENTS 1.0 GENERAL A DEFINITIONS As used herein and in conjunction with TPDES General Permit No. TXR150000, the term OPERATOR refers to the CONTRACTOR. 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Description of the required documentation to be prepared signed and submitted by the Contractor before conducting construction operations, in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES) General Permit TXR150000 as issued March 5, 2003, re-issued March 5, 2013, by the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality under the provisions of Section 402 of the Clean Water Act and Section 26.040 of the Texas Water Code. B Contractor's responsibility for implementation, maintenance, and inspection of storm water pollution prevention control measures including, but not limited to, erosion and sediment controls, storm water management plans, waste collection and disposal, off-site vehicle tracking, and other practices shown on the Plans or specified elsewhere in this or other Technical Specifications. This Specification provides guidelines and Best Management Practices (BMP's) information for the Contractor to use in adhering to all local, state and federal environmental regulations with respect to storm water pollution prevention during construction activity. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350— Submittals 2. Section 01310—Coordination&Meetings 3. Section 01770—Contract Closeout D Referenced Standards: 1. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) E Other References: 1. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) found in Appendix A of these Technical Specifications. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 04-2013 01565- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TPDES REQUIREMENTS 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 REQUIRED NOTICES A The Contractor shall complete, sign, and date the Contractor's Notice of Intent (NOI) attached in Appendix A. The Contractor's NOI shall be submitted to the TCEQ. It is the Contractor's responsibility to pay for any fees associated with the permit. Submission of the NOI is required by the Contractor before construction operations begin. B Upon completion of construction and acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Contractor shall complete, sign, date and submit the Contractor's Notice of Termination (NOT) attached in Appendix A. 3.02 CERTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS A On the Operator's Information form attached in Appendix A, the Contractor shall complete name, address, and telephone number for the Contractor; the names of persons or firms responsible for maintenance and inspection of erosion and sediment control measures and all Subcontractors. B The Contractor and Subcontractors named in the Contractor's Information form shall read, sign, and date the Contractor's/Subcontractor's Certification form, attached in Appendix A. C The persons or firms responsible for maintenance and inspection of erosion and sediment control measures shall read, sign, and date the Contractor's Inspection and Maintenance Certification form, attached in Appendix A. D The Contractor's Information form and all certification forms shall be submitted to the Owner before beginning construction. E Contractor shall review implementation of the SWPPP in a meeting with the Owner and Engineer prior to start of construction in accordance with Section 01310 — Coordination&Meetings. 3.03 RETENTION OF RECORDS A The Contractor shall keep a copy of the SWPPP at the Project Site or at the Contractor's office from the date that it became effective to the date the Work is accepted by the Owner. B At Contract Closeout, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner all TPDES forms and certifications, as well as a copy of the SWPPP, in accordance with Section 04-2013 01565 -2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TPDES REQUIREMENTS 01770 — Contract Closeout. The SWPPP records and data will be retained by Owner for a period of 3 years from the date the Work is accepted by the Owner. 3.04 POSTING OF NOTICES A The following notices shall be posted from the date that this SWPPP goes into effect until the date the Work is accepted by the Owner: 1. Copies of the Notices of Intent submitted by the Contractor and a brief Description of Construction Activity being conducted at the Project Site, as given in Article 1 of the SWPPP, shall be posted at the Project Site or at Contractor's office in a prominent place for public viewing. 2. Notice to drivers of equipment and vehicles, instructing them to stop, check, and clean tires of debris and mud before driving onto traffic lanes. Post such notices at every stabilized construction exit area. 3. In an easily visible location on Project Site, post a notice of waste disposal procedures. 4. Notice of hazardous material handling and emergency procedures shall be posted with the NOI on Project Site. Keep copies of Material Safety Data Sheets at a location on Project Site that is known to all personnel. 5. Keep a copy of each signed certification at the Project Site or at Contractor's office. APPENDIX A FOLLOWS THIS SECTION END OF SECTION 04-2013 01565-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TPDES REQUIREMENTS Section 01565 TPDES REQUIREMENTS (APPENDIX A) TABLE OF CONTENTS TCEQ General Permit NOI TCEQ Form - 20022 TCEQ Form - 20134 NOC TCEQ Form - 20391 NOT TCEQ Form -20023 Site Notice Forms 04-2013 01565 -4 of 4 Texas Commission on Environmental Quality P.O. Box 13o87,Austin,Texas 78711-3087 • GENERAL PERMIT TO DISCHARGE UNDER THE TEXAS POLLUTANT DISCHARGE ELIMINATION SYSTEM under provisions of Section 402 of the Clean Water Act and Chapter 26 of the Texas Water Code This permit supersedes and replaces TPDES General Permit No.TXR15oo00,issued March 5, 20o8 Construction sites that discharge stormwater associated with construction activity located in the state of Texas may discharge to surface water in the state only according to monitoring requirements and other conditions set forth in this general permit, as well as the rules of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ or Commission),the laws of the State of Texas,and other orders Of the Commission of the TCEQ. The issuance of this general permit does not grant to the permittee the right to use private or public property for conveyance of stormwater and certain non-stormwater discharges along the discharge route. This includes property belonging to but not limited to any individual,partnership, corporation or other entity. Neither does this general permit authorize any invasion of personal rights nor any violation of federal,state, or local laws or regulations. It is the responsibility of the permittee to acquire property rights as may be necessary to use the discharge route. This general permit and the authorization contained herein shall expire at midnight,five years from the permit effective date. EFFECTWE DATE: March 5, 2013 ISSUED DATE: F E B _' 9 2013 re For C mission Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 TPDES GENERAL PERMIT NUMBER TXRl50000 RELATING TO STORMWATER DISCHARGES ASSOCIATED WITH CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES Table of Contents Part I. Flow Chart and Definitions 5 Section A. Flow Chart to Determine Whether Coverage is Required 5 Section B. Definitions 6 Part II. Permit Applicability and Coverage 12 Section A. Discharges Eligible for Authorization 12 1. Stormwater Associated with Construction Activity 12 2. Discharges of Stormwater Associated with Construction Support Activities 12 3. Non-Stormwater Discharges 12 4. Other Permitted Discharges 13 Section B. Concrete Truck Wash Out 13 Section C. Limitations on Permit Coverage 13 1. Post Construction Discharges 13 2. Prohibition of Non-Stormwater Discharges 13 3. Compliance With Water Quality Standards 13 4. Impaired Receiving Waters and Total Maximum Daily Load(TMDL) Requirements 14 5. Discharges to the Edwards Aquifer Recharge or Contributing Zone 14 6. Discharges to Specific Watersheds and Water Quality Areas 14 7. Protection of Streams and Watersheds by Other Governmental Entities 14 8. Indian Country Lands 14 9. Oil and Gas Production 15 10. Stormwater Discharges from Agricultural Activities 15 11. Endangered Species Act 15 12. Other 15 Section D. Deadlines for Obtaining Authorization to Discharge 15 1. Large Construction Activities 15 2. Small Construction Activities 15 Section E. Obtaining Authorization to Discharge 16 1. Automatic Authorization for Small Construction Activities With Low Potential for Erosion. 16 2. Automatic Authorization For All Other Small Construction Activities. 17 3. Authorization for Large Construction Activities: 17 Page 2 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 4. Waivers for Small Construction Activities. 18 rik\ 5. Effective Date of Coverage 18 6. Notice of Change(NOC) 18 7. Signatory Requirement for NOI Forms,Notice of Termination(NOT)Forms,NOC Letters, and Construction Site Notices 19 8. Contents of the NOI 19 Section F. Terminating Coverage 20 1. Notice of Termination(NOT)Required 20 2. Minimum Contents of the NOT 20 3. Termination of Coverage for Small Construction Sites and for Secondary Operators at Large Construction Sites 20 4. Transfer of Operational Control 21 Section G. Waivers from Coverage 21 1. Waiver Applicability and Coverage 22 2. Steps to Obtaining a Waiver 22 3. Effective Date of Waiver 22 4. Activities Extending Beyond the Waiver Period 22 Section H. Alternative TPDES Permit Coverage 23 rib\ 1. Individual Permit Alternative 23 2. Individual Permit Required 23 3. Alternative Discharge Authorization 23 Section I. Permit Expiration 23 Part III. Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plans(SWP3) 24 Section A. Shared SWP3 Development 24 Section B. Responsibilities of Operators 25 1. Secondary Operators and Primary Operators with Control Over Construction Plans and Specifications 25 2. Primary Operators with Day-to-Day Operational Control 25 Section C. Deadlines for SWP3 Preparation,Implementation, and Compliance 25 Section D. Plan Review and Making Plans Available 26 Section E. Revisions and Updates to SWP3s 26 Section F. Contents of SWP3 26 Section G. Erosion and Sediment Control Requirements Applicable to All Sites 34 Part IV. Stormwater Runoff from Concrete Batch Plants 35 Section A. Benchmark Sampling Requirements 35 Section B. Best Management Practices(BMPs) and SWP3 Requirements 37 Section C. Prohibition of Wastewater Discharges 39 Page 3 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 Part V. Concrete Truck Wash Out Requirements 40 Part VI. Retention of Records 40 Part VII.Standard Permit Conditions 40 Part VIII. Fees 41 Appendix A: Automatic Authorization 43 Appendix B: Erosivity Index(EI)Zones in Texas 45 Appendix C: Isoerodent Map 46 Appendix D: Erosivity Indices for EI Zones in Texas 47 -"'") Page 4 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Part I. Flow Chart and Definitions Section A. Flow Chart to Determine Whether Coverage is Required How much land will be disturbed? (*1) <1 acre 1 or more acres (*1) (*I) NO Do you meet the yes Will 5 or more e definition of • acres be disturbed? "operator?"(*2) (*I) :NO YES • Permit Coverage Required • Prepare and Implement SWP3 • Post Site Notice • Submit Copy of Site Notice to MS4 Operator • 1 • Are you a"primary v0 operator?"(*2) • Permit Coverage Not YES Required.Unless Part Permit Coverage Required 1 of a Larger Common • Prepare and Implement SWP3 Plan of Development • Submit NOI to TCEQ or Sale • Post Site Notice J • Submit Copy of NOI to MS4 Operator (*I) To determine the size of the construction project,use the size of the entire area to be disturbed,and include the size of the larger common plan of development or sale,if the project is part of a larger project(refer to Part I.K., "Definitions,"for an explanation of"common plan of development or sale"). (*2) Refer to the definitions for"operator,""primary operator,"and"secondary operator"in Part I., Section R.of this permit. Page 5 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 Section B. Definitions Arid Areas-Areas with an average annual rainfall of 0 to 10 inches. Best Management Practices(BMPs)-Schedules of activities,prohibitions of practices, maintenance procedures,structural controls,local ordinances, and other management practices to prevent or reduce the discharge of pollutants. BMPs also include treatment requirements,operating procedures, and practices to control construction site runoff,spills or leaks,waste disposal,or drainage from raw material storage areas. Commencement of Construction-The initial disturbance of soils associated with clearing,grading,or excavation activities, as well as other construction-related activities (e.g.,stockpiling of fill material, demolition). Common Plan of Development-A construction activity that is completed in separate stages,separate phases, or in combination with other construction activities. A common plan of development(also known as a"common plan of development or sale")is identified by the documentation for the construction project that identifies the scope of the project, and may include plats,blueprints,marketing plans,contracts,building permits, a public notice or hearing,zoning requests,or other similar documentation and activities. A common plan of development does not necessarily include all construction projects within the jurisdiction of a public entity(e.g., a city or university). Construction of roads or buildings in different parts of the jurisdiction would be considered separate"common plans,"with only the interconnected parts of a project being considered part of a"common plan"(e.g., a building and its associated parking lot and driveways,airport runway and associated taxiways, a building complex,etc.). Where discrete construction projects occur within a larger common plan of development or sale but are located 1/4 mile or more apart,and the area between the projects is not being disturbed, each individual project can be treated as a separate plan of development or sale,provided that any interconnecting road,pipeline or utility project that is part of the same"common plan"is not included in the area to be disturbed: Construction Activity-Includes soil disturbance activities,including clearing,grading, and excavating; and does not include routine maintenance that is performed to maintain the original line and grade,hydraulic capacity,or original purpose of the site(e.g.,the routine grading of existing dirt roads, asphalt overlays of existing roads,the routine clearing of existing right-of-ways, and similar maintenance activities). Regulated construction activity is defined in terms of small and large construction activity. Dewatering—The act of draining rainwater or groundwater from building foundations, vaults,and trenches. Discharge—For the purposes of this permit,the drainage,release, or disposal of pollutants in stormwater and certain non-stormwater from areas where soil disturbing activities(e.g., clearing,grading,excavation,stockpiling of fill material, and demolition), construction materials or equipment storage or maintenance(e.g.,fill piles,borrow area, concrete truck wash out,fueling),or other industrial stormwater directly related to the construction process (e.g.,concrete or asphalt batch plants)are located. Drought-Stricken Area—For the purposes of this permit, an area in which the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration's U.S. Seasonal Drought Outlook indicates for the period during which the construction will occur that any of the following conditions are likely: (1)"Drought to persist or intensify", (2) "Drought ongoing,some improvement", (3) "Drought likely to improve,impacts ease",or(4)"Drought development likely". See http://www.cpc.ncep.noaa.gov/products/expert assessment/seasonal drought.html. Edwards Aquifer-As defined under Texas Administrative Code(TAC) § 213.3 of this title (relating to the Edwards Aquifer),that portion of an arcuate belt of porous,water-bearing, predominantly carbonate rocks known as the Edwards and Associated Limestones in the Balcones Fault Zone trending from west to east to northeast in Kinney,Uvalde,Medina, Bexar, Comal,Hays,Travis,and Williamson Counties; and composed of the Salmon Peak Page 6 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Limestone,McKnight Formation,West Nueces Formation,Devil's River Limestone,Person (IIlb\ Formation,Kainer Formation, Edwards Formation,and Georgetown Formation. The permeable aquifer units generally overlie the less-permeable Glen Rose Formation to the south,overlie the less-permeable Comanche Peak and Walnut Formations north of the Colorado River, and underlie the less-permeable Del Rio Clay regionally. Edwards Aquifer Recharge Zone-Generally,that area where the stratigraphic units constituting the Edwards Aquifer crop out,including the outcrops of other geologic formations in proximity to the Edwards Aquifer,where caves,sinkholes,faults,fractures,or other permeable features would create a potential for recharge of surface waters into the Edwards Aquifer. The recharge zone is identified as that area designated as such on official maps located in the offices of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) and the appropriate regional office. The Edwards Aquifer Map Viewer,located at http://www.tceq.texas.gov/compliance/field ops/eapp/mapdisclaimer.html,can be used to determine where the recharge zone is located. Edwards Aquifer Contributing Zone-The area,or watershed where runoff from precipitation flows downgradient to the recharge zone of the Edwards Aquifer.The contributing zone is located upstream(upgradient)and generally north and northwest of the recharge zone for the following counties: all areas within Kinney County,except the area within the watershed draining to Segment No. 2304 of the Rio Grande Basin; all areas within Uvalde,Medina, Bexar, and Comal Counties; all areas within Hays and Travis Counties, except the area within the watersheds draining to the Colorado River above a point 1.3 miles upstream from Tom Miller Dam,Lake Austin at the confluence of Barrow Brook Cove, Segment No. 1403 of the Colorado River Basin; and all areas within Williamson County, except the area within the watersheds draining to the Lampasas River above the dam at Stillhouse Hollow reservoir,Segment No.1216 of the Brazos River Basin.The contributing zone is illustrated on the Edwards Aquifer map viewer at (1."\, http://www.tceq.texas.gov/compliance/field ops/eapp/mapdisclai.mer.htrnl. Effluent Limitations Guideline(ELG)—Defined in 4o Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) § 122.2 as a regulation published by the Administrator under§3o4(b)of the Clean Water Act(CWA)to adopt or revise effluent limitations. Facility or Activity—For the purpose of this permit,a construction site or construction support activity that is regulated under this general permit,including all contiguous land and fixtures(for example,ponds and materials stockpiles),structures,or appurtances used at a construction site or industrial site described by this general permit. Final Stabilization-A construction site status where any of the following conditions are met: A. All soil disturbing activities at the site have been completed and a uniform(that is,evenly distributed,without large bare areas)perennial vegetative cover with a density of at least 70%of the native background vegetative cover for the area has been established on all unpaved areas and areas not covered by permanent structures,or equivalent permanent stabilization measures(such as the use of riprap,gabions,or geotextiles)have been employed. B. For individual lots in a residential construction site by either: (1) the homebuilder completing final stabilization as specified in condition(a)above; or (2) the homebuilder establishing temporary stabilization for an individual lot prior to the time of transfer of the ownership of the home to the buyer and after informing the homeowner of the need for, and benefits of,final stabilization.If temporary stabilization is not feasible,then the homebuilder may fulfill this requirement by retaining perimeter controls or BMPs, and informing the homeowner of the need for removal of temporary controls and the establishment of final stabilization. Page 7 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Fullfillment of this requirement must be documented in the homebuilder's stormwater pollution prevention plan(SWP3). C. For construction activities on land used for agricultural purposes (such as pipelines across crop or range land),final stabilization may be accomplished by returning the disturbed land to its preconstruction agricultural use. Areas disturbed that were not previously used for agricultural activities, such as buffer strips immediately adjacent to surface water and areas that are not being returned to their preconstruction agricultural use must meet the final stabilization conditions of condition(a)above. D. In arid,semi-arid, and drought-stricken areas only, all soil disturbing activities at the site have been completed and both of the following criteria have been met: (1) Temporary erosion control measures(for example,degradable rolled erosion control product) are selected, designed, and installed along with an appropriate seed base to provide erosion control for at least three years without active maintenance by the operator,and (2) The temporary erosion control measures are selected, designed, and installed to achieve 7o%of the native background vegetative coverage within three years. Hyperchlorination of Waterlines—Treatment of potable water lines or tanks with chlorine for disinfection purposes,typically following repair or partial replacement of the waterline or tank, and subsequently flushing the contents. Impaired Water-A surface water body that is identified on the latest approved CWA §3o3(d)List as not meeting applicable state water quality standards. Impaired waters include waters with approved or established total maximum daily loads(TMDLs), and those where a TMDL has been proposed by TCEQ but has not yet been approved or established. Indian Country Land—(from 4o CFR§122.2) (1) all land within the limits of any Indian reservation under the jurisdiction of the United States government, notwithstanding the issuance of any patent,and,including rights-of-way running through the reservation; (2)all dependent Indian communities with the borders of the United States whether within the originally or subsequently acquired territory thereof, and whether within or without the limits of a state; and(3)all Indian allotments,the Indian titles to which have not been extinguished,including rights-of-way running through the same. Indian Tribe-(from 4o CFR§122.2) any Indian Tribe,band,group,or community recognized by the Secretary of the Interior and exercising governmental authority over a Federal Indian Reservation. Large Construction Activity-Construction activities including clearing,grading,and excavating that result in land disturbance of equal to or greater than five(5)acres of land. Large construction activity also includes the disturbance of less than five(5) acres of total land area that is part of a larger common plan of development or sale if the larger common plan will ultimately disturb equal to or greater than five(5)acres of land. Large construction activity does not include routine maintenance that is performed to maintain the original line and grade,hydraulic capacity, or original purpose of the site(for example,the routine grading of existing dirt roads, asphalt overlays of existing roads,the routine clearing of existing right-of-ways,and similar maintenance activities.) Linear Project—Includes the construction of roads,bridges, conduits,substructures, pipelines,sewer lines,towers,poles,cables,wires,connectors,switching, regulating and transforming equipment and associated ancillary facilities in a long,narrow area. Minimize-To reduce or eliminate to the extent achievable using stormwater controls that are technologically available and economically practicable and achievable in light of best ^� industry practices. Page 8 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System(MS4)-A separate storm sewer system owned or operated by the United States, a state,city,town,county,district,association,or other public body(created by or pursuant to state law)having jurisdiction over the disposal of sewage,industrial wastes,stormwater,or other wastes,including special districts under state law such as a sewer district,flood control or drainage district, or similar entity,or an Indian tribe or an authorized Indian tribal organization,that discharges to surface water in the state. Notice of Change(NOC)—Written notification to the executive director from a discharger authorized under this permit,providing changes to information that was previously provided to the agency in a notice of intent form. Notice of Intent(NOI)-A written submission to the executive director from an applicant requesting coverage under this general permit. Notice of Termination(NOT)-A written submission to the executive director from a discharger authorized under a general permit requesting termination of coverage. Operator-The person or persons associated with a large or small construction activity that is either a primary or secondary operator as defined below: Primary Operator—the person or persons associated with a large or small construction activity that meets either of the following two criteria: (a) the person or persons have on-site operational control over construction plans and specifications,including the ability to make modifications to those plans and specifications; or (b) the person or persons have day-to-day operational control of those activities at a construction site that are necessary to ensure compliance with a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan(SWP3)for the site or other permit conditions(for example,they are authorized to direct workers at a site to carry out activities (.1.b"", - required by the SWP3 or comply with other permit conditions). Secondary Operator—The person or entity,often the property owner,whose operational control is limited to: (a) the employment of other operators,such as a general contractor,to perform or supervise construction activities; or - (b) the ability to approve or disapprove changes to construction plans and specifications, but who does not have day-to-day on-site operational control over construction activities at the site. Secondary operators must either prepare their own SWP3 or participate in a shared SWP3 that covers the areas of the construction site where they have control over the plans and specifications. If there is not a primary operator at the construction site,then the secondary operator is defined as the primary operator and must comply with the requirements for primary operators. Outfall-For the purpose of this permit, a point source at the point where stormwater runoff associated with construction activity discharges to surface water in the state and does not include open conveyances connecting two municipal separate storm sewers,or pipes, tunnels,or other conveyances that connect segments of the same stream or other water of the U.S. and are used to convey waters of the U.S. Permittee-An operator authorized under this general permit. The authorization may be gained through submission of a notice of intent,by waiver,or by meeting the requirements for automatic coverage to discharge stormwater runoff and certain non-stormwater discharges. Page 9 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR1500o0 Point Source—(from 4o CFR§122.2)Any discernible,confined, and discrete conveyance, including but not limited to,any pipe, ditch, channel,tunnel,conduit,well,discrete fissure, container,rolling stock concentrated animal feeding operation,landfill leachate collection system,vessel or other floating craft from which pollutants are,or maybe,discharged. This term does not include return flows from irrigated agriculture or agricultural stormwater runoff. Pollutant-Dredged spoil,solid waste,incinerator residue, sewage,garbage, sewage sludge, filter backwash,munitions,chemical wastes,biological materials,radioactive materials,heat, wrecked or discarded equipment,rock,sand,cellar dirt,and industrial,municipal,and agricultural waste discharged into any surface water in the state. The term"pollutant"does not include tail water or runoff water from irrigation or rainwater runoff from cultivated or uncultivated rangeland,pastureland, and farmland. For the purpose of this permit,the term "pollutant"includes sediment. Pollution-(from Texas Water Code(TWC) §26.001(14))The alteration of the physical, thermal,chemical,or biological quality of, or the contamination of, any surface water in the state that renders the water harmful, detrimental,or injurious to humans,animal life, vegetation,or property or to public health,safety, or welfare,or impairs the usefulness or the public enjoyment of the water for any lawful or reasonable purpose. Rainfall Erosivity Factor(R factor)-the total annual erosive potential that is due to climatic effects, and is part of the Revised Universal Soil Loss Equation(RUSLE). Receiving Water-A"Water of the United States"as defined in 4o CFR§122.2 into which the regulated stormwater discharges. Semiarid Areas-areas with an average annual rainfall of 10 to 20 inches Separate Storm Sewer System-A conveyance or system of conveyances(including roads with drainage systems,streets, catch basins,curbs,gutters,ditches,man-made channels, or storm drains),designed or used for collecting or conveying stormwater;that is not a combined sewer,and that is not part of a publicly owned treatment works (POTW). Small Construction Activity-Construction activities including clearing,grading,and excavating that result in land disturbance of equal to or greater than one(1)acre and less than five(5)acres of land. Small construction activity also includes the disturbance of less than one(1)acre of total land area that is part of a larger common plan of development or sale if the larger common plan will ultimately disturb equal to or greater than one(1) and less than five(5)acres of land. Small construction activity does not include routine maintenance that is performed to maintain the original line and grade,hydraulic capacity,or original purpose of the site(for example,the routine grading of existing dirt roads, asphalt overlays of existing roads,the routine clearing of existing right-of-ways, and similar maintenance activities.) Steep Slopes—Where a state,Tribe,local government, or industry technical manual(e.g. stormwater BMP manual)has defined what is to be considered a"steep slope",this permit's definition automatically adopts that definition.Where no such definition exists,steep slopes are automatically defined as those that are 15 percent or greater in grade. Stormwater(or Stormwater Runoff) -Rainfall runoff,snow melt runoff, and surface runoff and drainage. Stormwater Associated with Construction Activity-Stormwater runoff from a construction activity where soil disturbing activities(including clearing,grading, excavating) result in the disturbance of one(1) or more acres of total land area, or are part of a larger common plan of development or sale that will result in disturbance of one(1) or more acres of total land area. Structural Control(or Practice)-A pollution prevention practice that requires the construction of a device,or the use of a device,to reduce or prevent pollution in stormwater Page 10 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 runoff. Structural controls and practices may include but are not limited to: silt fences, earthen dikes, drainage swales,sediment traps,check dams,subsurface drains,storm drain inlet protection,rock outlet protection,reinforced soil retaining systems,gabions,and temporary or permanent sediment basins. Surface Water in the State- Lakes,bays,ponds,impounding reservoirs,springs,rivers, streams,creeks,estuaries,wetlands,marshes,inlets,canals,the Gulf of Mexico inside the territorial limits of the state(from the mean high water mark(MHWM) out 10.36 miles into the Gulf),and all other bodies of surface water,natural or artificial,inland or coastal,fresh or salt,navigable or nonnavigable, and including the beds and banks of all water-courses and bodies of surface water,that are wholly or partially inside or bordering the state or subject to the jurisdiction of the state; except that waters in treatment systems which are authorized by state or federal law,regulation,or permit,and which are created for the purpose of waste treatment are not considered to be water in the state. Temporary Stabilization-A condition where exposed soils or disturbed areas are provided a protective cover or other structural control to prevent the migration of pollutants. Temporary stabilization may include temporary seeding,geotextiles, mulches, and other techniques to reduce or eliminate erosion until either permanent stabilization can be achieved or until further construction activities take place. Total Maximum Daily Load(TMDL)-The total amount of a pollutant that a water body can assimilate and still meet the Texas Surface Water Quality Standards. Turbidity—A condition of water quality characterized by the presence of suspended solids and/or organic material. Waters of the United States-(from 4o CFR§122.2)Waters of the United States or waters of the U.S.means: (/111111"\. (a) all waters which are currently used,were used in the past,or may be susceptible to use in interstate or foreign commerce,including all waters which are subject to the ebb and flow of the tide; (b) all interstate waters,including interstate wetlands; (c) all other waters such as intrastate lakes,rivers,streams (including intermittent streams),mudflats,sandflats,wetlands,sloughs,prairie potholes,wet meadows, playa lakes, or natural ponds that the use, degradation,or destruction of which would affect or could affect interstate or foreign commerce including any such waters: (1) which are or could be used by interstate or foreign travelers for recreational or other purposes; (2) from which fish or shellfish are or could be taken and sold in interstate or foreign commerce; or (3) which are used or could be used for industrial purposes by industries in interstate commerce; (d) all impoundments of waters otherwise defined as waters of the United States under this definition; (e) tributaries of waters identified in paragraphs(a)through(d)of this definition; (f) the territorial sea; and (g) wetlands adjacent to waters(other than waters that are themselves wetlands) identified in paragraphs(a)through(f)of this definition. Waste treatment systems,including treatment ponds or lagoons designed to meet the requirements of CWA(other than cooling ponds as defined in 4o CFR§423.11(m)which also meet the criteria of this definition) are not waters of the U.S. This exclusion applies only to manmade bodies of water which neither were originally created in waters of the U.S. (such as Page 11 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 disposal area in wetlands)nor resulted from the impoundment of waters of the U.S. Waters of the U.S. do not include prior converted cropland. Notwithstanding the determination of an area's status as prior converted cropland by any other federal agency,for the purposes of the CWA,the final authority regarding CWA jurisdiction remains with EPA. Part II. Permit Applicability and Coverage Section A. Discharges Eligible for Authorization 1. Stormwater Associated with Construction Activity Discharges of stormwater runoff from small and large construction activities may be authorized under this general permit. 2. Discharges of Stormwater Associated with Construction Support Activities Examples of construction support activities include,but are not limited to,concrete batch plants,rock crushers,asphalt batch plants,equipment staging areas,material storage yards,material borrow areas,and excavated material disposal areas. Construction support activities authorized under this general permit are not commercial operations, and do not serve multiple unrelated construction projects. Discharges of stormwater runoff from construction support activities may be authorized under this general permit,provided that the following conditions are met: (a) the activities are located within one(1) mile from the boundary of the permitted construction site and directly support the construction activity; (b) an SWP3 is developed for the permitted construction site according to the provisions of this general permit,and includes appropriate controls and measures to reduce erosion and discharge of pollutants in stormwater runoff from the construction support activities; and (c) the construction support activities either do not operate beyond the completion date of the construction activity or, at the time that they do, are authorized under separate Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System(TPDES) authorization. Separate TPDES authorization may include the TPDES Multi Sector General Permit(MSGP), TXRo50oo0 (related to stormwater discharges associated with industrial activity), separate authorization under this general permit if applicable, coverage under an alternative general permit if available,or authorization under an individual water quality permit. 3. Non-Stormwater Discharges The following non-stormwater discharges from sites authorized under this general permit are also eligible for authorization under this general permit: (a) discharges from fire fighting activities (fire fighting activities do not include washing of trucks,run-off water from training activities,test water from fire suppression systems, or similar activities); (b) uncontaminated fire hydrant flushings (excluding discharges of hyperchlorinated water,unless the water is first dechlorinated and discharges are not expected to adversely affect aquatic life),which include flushings from systems that utilize potable water,surface water, or groundwater that does not contain additional pollutants (uncontaminated fire hydrant flushings do not include systems utilizing reclaimed wastewater as a source water); (c) water from the routine external washing of vehicles,the external portion of buildings or structures,and pavement,where detergents and soaps are not used,where spills or leaks of toxic or hazardous materials have not occurred(unless spilled materials Page 12 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 have been removed; and if local state,or federal regulations are applicable,the (111b.. materials are removed according to those regulations), and where the purpose is to remove mud,dirt,or dust; (d) uncontaminated water used to control dust; (e) potable water sources,including waterline flushings,but excluding discharges of hyperchlorinated water,unless the water is first dechlorinated and discharges are not expected to adversely affect aquatic life; (f) uncontaminated air conditioning condensate; (g) uncontaminated ground water or spring water,including foundation or footing drains where flows are not contaminated with industrial materials such as solvents; and (h) lawn watering and similar irrigation drainage. 4. Other Permitted Discharges Any discharge authorized under a separate National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System(NPDES),TPDES,or TCEQ permit may be combined with discharges authorized by this general permit,provided those discharges comply with the associated permit. Section B. Concrete Truck Wash Out The wash out of concrete trucks at regulated construction sites must be performed in accordance with the requirements of Part V of this general permit. Section C. Limitations on Permit Coverage Cub'\ 1. Post Construction Discharges Discharges that occur after construction activities have been completed,and after the construction site and any supporting activity site have undergone final stabilization,are not eligible for coverage under this general permit. Discharges originating from the sites are not authorized under this general permit following the submission of the notice of termination(NOT)or removal of the appropriate site notice,as applicable,for the regulated construction activity. 2. Prohibition of Non-Stormwater Discharges Except as otherwise provided in Part II.A.of this general permit,only discharges that are composed entirely of stormwater associated with construction activity may be authorized under this general permit. 3. Compliance With Water Quality Standards Discharges to surface water in the state that would cause,have the reasonable potential to cause,or contribute to a violation of water quality standards or that would fail to protect and maintain existing designated uses are not eligible for coverage under this general permit. The executive director may require an application for an individual permit or alternative general permit(see Parts II.H.2.and 3.)to authorize discharges to surface water in the state if the executive director determines that any activity will cause, has the reasonable potential to cause,or contribute to a violation of water quality standards or is found to cause,has the reasonable potential to cause, or contribute to, the impairment of a designated use. The executive director may also require an application for an individual permit considering factors described in Part II.H.2. of this general permit. Page 13 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR15o000 4. Impaired Receiving Waters and Total Maximum Daily Load(TMDL) Requirements New sources or new discharges of the pollutants of concern to impaired waters are not authorized by this permit unless otherwise allowable under 3o TAC Chapter 305 and applicable state law. Impaired waters are those that do not meet applicable water quality standards and are listed on the EPA approved CWA§3o3(d)List.Pollutants of concern are those for which the water body is listed as impaired. Discharges of the pollutants of concern to impaired water bodies for which there is a TMDL are not eligible for this general permit unless they are consistent with the approved TMDL. Permittees must incorporate the conditions and requirements applicable to their discharges into their SWP3,in order to be eligible for coverage under this general permit. For consistency with the construction stormwater-related items in an approved TMDL,the SWP3 must be consistent with any applicable condition,goal,or requirement in the TMDL,TMDL Implementation Plan(I-Plan), or as otherwise directed by the executive director. 5. Discharges to the Edwards Aquifer Recharge or Contributing Zone Discharges cannot be authorized by this general permit where prohibited by 3o TAC Chapter 213(relating to Edwards Aquifer). In addition, commencement of construction (i.e.,the initial disturbance of soils associated with clearing,grading,or excavating activities,as well as other construction-related activities such as stockpiling of fill material and demolition)at a site regulated under 3o TAC Chapter 213,may not begin until the appropriate Edwards Aquifer Protection Plan(EAPP)has been approved by the TCEQ's Edwards Aquifer Protection Program. (a) For new discharges located within the Edwards Aquifer Recharge Zone,or within that area upstream from the recharge zone and defined as the Contributing Zone (CZ),operators must meet all applicable requirements of,and operate according to, 30 TAC Chapter 213 (Edwards Aquifer Rule)in addition to the provisions and requirements of this general permit. (b) For existing discharges located within the Edwards Aquifer Recharge Zone,the requirements of the agency-approved Water Pollution Abatement Plan(WPAP) under the Edwards Aquifer Rule is in addition to the requirements of this general permit. BMPs and maintenance schedules for structural stormwater controls,for example,may be required as a provision of the rule. All applicable requirements of the Edwards Aquifer Rule for reductions of suspended solids in stormwater runoff are in addition to the requirements in this general permit for this pollutant. 6. Discharges to Specific Watersheds and Water Quality Areas Discharges otherwise eligible for coverage cannot be authorized by this general permit where prohibited by 3o TAC Chapter 311(relating to Watershed Protection)for water quality areas and watersheds. 7. Protection of Streams and Watersheds by Other Governmental Entities This general permit does not limit the authority or ability of federal,other state,or local governmental entities from placing additional or more stringent requirements on construction activities or discharges from construction activities. For example,this permit does not limit the authority of a home-rule municipality provided by Texas Local Government Code§401.002. 8. Indian Country Lands Stormwater runoff from construction activities occurring on Indian Country lands are not under the authority of the TCEQ and are not eligible for coverage under this general permit. If discharges of stormwater require authorization under federal NPDES Page 14 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 regulations, authority for these discharges must be obtained from the U.S. (.1" Environmental Protection Agency(EPA). 9. Oil and Gas Production Stormwater runoff from construction activities associated with the exploration, development,or production of oil or gas or geothermal resources,including transportation of crude oil or natural gas by pipeline,are not under the authority of the TCEQ and are not eligible for coverage under this general permit. If discharges of stormwater require authorization under federal NPDES regulations, authority for these discharges must be obtained from the EPA. 10. Stormwater Discharges from Agricultural Activities Stormwater discharges from agricultural activities that are not point source discharges of stormwater are not subject to TPDES permit requirements. These activities may include clearing and cultivating ground for crops,construction of fences to contain livestock, construction of stock ponds,and other similar agricultural activities. Discharges of stormwater runoff associated with the construction of facilities that are subject to TPDES regulations,such as the construction of concentrated animal feeding operations,would be point sources regulated under this general permit. 11. Endangered Species Act Discharges that would adversely affect a listed endangered or threatened aquatic or aquatic-dependent species or its critical habitat are not authorized by this permit,unless the requirements of the Endangered Species Act are satisfied.Federal requirements related to endangered species apply to all TPDES permitted discharges and site-specific controls may be required to ensure that protection of endangered or threatened species (11111116'\, is achieved. If a permittee has concerns over potential impacts to listed species,the permittee may contact TCEQ for additional information. 12. Other Nothing in Part II of the general permit is intended to negate any person's ability to assert the force majeure(act of God,war,strike,riot,or other catastrophe)defenses found in 3o TAC§70.7. Section D. Deadlines for Obtaining Authorization to Discharge 1. Large Construction Activities (a) New Construction-Discharges from sites where the commencement of construction occurs on or after the effective date of this general permit must be authorized,either under this general permit or a separate TPDES permit,prior to the commencement of those construction activities. (b) Ongoing Construction-Operators of large construction activities continuing to operate after the effective date of this permit, and authorized under TPDES general permit TXR150000 (effective on March 5,2008),must submit an NOI to renew authorization or a NOT to terminate coverage under this general permit within 90 days of the effective date of this general permit. During this interim period,as a requirement of this TPDES permit,the operator must continue to meet the conditions and requirements of the previous TPDES permit. 2. Small Construction Activities (a) New Construction-Discharges from sites where the commencement of construction occurs on or after the effective date of this general permit must be authorized, either Page 15 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 under this general permit or a separate TPDES permit,prior to the commencement of those construction activities. (b) Ongoing Construction-Discharges from ongoing small construction activities that commenced prior to the effective date of this general permit, and that would not meet the conditions to qualify for termination of this permit as described in Part II.E.of this general permit,must meet the requirements to be authorized,either under this general permit or a separate TPDES permit,within go days of the effective date of this general permit.During this interim period, as a requirement of this TPDES permit,the operator must continue to meet the conditions and requirements of the previous TPDES permit. Section E. Obtaining Authorization to Discharge 1. Automatic Authorization for Small Construction Activities With Low Potential for Erosion: If all of the following conditions are met,then a small construction activity is determined to occur during periods of low potential for erosion, and a site operator may be automatically authorized under this general permit without being required to develop an SWP3 or submit an NOI: (a) the construction activity occurs in a county listed in Appendix A; (b) the construction activity is initiated and completed,including either final or temporary stabilization of all disturbed areas,within the time frame identified in Appendix A for the location of the construction site; (c) all temporary stabilization is adequately maintained to effectively reduce or prohibit erosion,permanent stabilization activities have been initiated, and a condition of final stabilization is completed no later than 3o days following the end date of the time frame identified in Appendix A for the location of the construction site; (d) the permittee signs a completed TCEQ construction site notice,including the certification statement; (e) a signed copy of the construction site notice is posted at the construction site in a location where it is readily available for viewing by the general public,local, state, and federal authorities prior to commencing construction activities, and maintained in that location until completion of the construction activity; (f) a copy of the signed and certified construction site notice is provided to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge at least two days prior to commencement of construction activities; (g) any supporting concrete batch plant or asphalt batch plant is separately authorized for discharges of stormwater runoff or other non-stormwater discharges under an individual TPDES permit,another TPDES general permit,or under an individual TCEQ permit where stormwater and non-stormwater is disposed of by evaporation or irrigation(discharges are adjacent to water in the state); and (h) any non-stormwater discharges are either authorized under a separate permit or authorization,or are not considered to be a wastewater. Part II.G.of this general permit describes how an operator may apply for and obtain a waiver from permitting,for certain small construction activities that occur during a period with a low potential for erosion,where automatic authorization under this section is not available. Page i6 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 2. Automatic Authorization For All Other Small Construction Activities: Operators of small construction activities not described in Part II.E.i.above may be automatically authorized under this general permit,and operators of these sites shall not be required to submit an NOI,provided that they meet all of the following conditions: (a) develop a SWP3 according to the provisions of this general permit,that covers either the entire site or all portions of the site for which the applicant is the operator,and implement that plan prior to commencing construction activities; (b) sign and certify a completed TCEQ small construction site notice,post the notice at the construction site in a location where it is safely and readily available for viewing by the general public,local,state, and federal authorities,prior to commencing construction,and maintain the notice in that location until completion of the construction activity(for linear construction activities, e.g.pipeline or highway,the site notice must be placed in a publicly accessible location near where construction is actively underway;notice for these linear sites may be relocated, as necessary,along the length of the project,and the notice must be safely and readily available for viewing by the general public;local,state,and federal authorities); and (c) provide a copy of the signed and certified construction site notice to the operator of any municipal separate storm sewer system receiving the discharge prior to commencement of construction activities. Operators of small construction activities as defined in Part I.B of this general permit shall not submit an NOI for coverage unless otherwise required by the executive director. As described in Part I(Definitions) of this general permit,large construction activities include those that will disturb less than five(5) acres of land,but that are part of a larger common plan of development or sale that will ultimately disturb five(5)or more acres of (11.6\ land, and must meet the requirements of Part II.E.3.below. 3. Authorization for Large Construction Activities: Operators of large construction activities that qualify for coverage under this general permit must meet all of the following conditions: (a) develop a SWP3 according to the provisions of this general permit that covers either the entire site or all portions of the site for which the applicant is the operator,and implement that plan prior to commencing construction activities; (b) primary operators must submit an NOI,using a form provided by the executive director, at least seven(7)days prior to commencing construction activities,or if utilizing electronic submittal,prior to commencing construction activities. If an additional primary operator is added after the initial NOI is submitted,the new primary operator must submit an NOI at least seven(7)days before assuming operational control, or if utilizing electronic NOI submittal,prior to assuming operational control. If the primary operator changes after the initial NOI is submitted,the new primary operator must submit a paper NOI or an electronic NOI at least ten(10)days before assuming operational control; (c) all operators of large construction activities must post a site notice in accordance with Part III.D.2.of this permit. The site notice must be located where it is safely and readily available for viewing by the general public,local,state, and federal authorities prior to commencing construction,and must be maintained in that location until completion of the construction activity(for linear construction activities,e.g.pipeline or highway,the site notice must be placed in a publicly accessible location near where construction is actively underway; notice for these linear sites may be relocated, as (1111bb' necessary,along the length of the project, and the notice must be safely and readily available for viewing by the general public;local,state, and federal authorities); Page 17 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150o00 (d) prior to commencing construction activities, all primary operators must(1)provide a copy of the signed NOI to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge and to any `� secondary construction operator, and(2)list in the SWP3 the names and addresses of I all MS4 operators receiving a copy; (e) all persons meeting the definition of"secondary operator"in Part I of this permit are hereby notified that they are regulated under this general permit,but are not required to submit an NOI,provided that a primary operator at the site has submitted an NOI,or is required to submit an NOI, and the secondary operator has provided notification to the operator(s)of the need to obtain coverage(with records of notification available upon request). Any secondary operator notified under this provision may alternatively submit an NOI under this general permit, may seek coverage under an alternative TPDES individual permit,or may seek coverage under an alternative TPDES general permit if available; and (f) all secondary operators must provide a copy of the signed and certified Secondary Operator construction site notice to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge prior to commencement of construction activities. 4. Waivers for Small Construction Activities: Part II.G. describes how operators of certain small construction activities may obtain a waiver from coverage. 5. Effective Date of Coverage (a) Operators of small construction activities as described in either Part II.E.i.or II.E.2. above are authorized immediately following compliance with the applicable conditions of Part II.E.1.or II.E.2. Secondary operators of large construction activities as described in Part II.E.3.above are authorized immediately following compliance with the applicable conditions in Part II.E.3. For activities located in areas regulated by 3o TAC Chapter 213,related to the Edwards Aquifer,this authorization to discharge is separate from the requirements of the operator's responsibilities under that rule. Construction may not commence for sites regulated under 3o TAC Chapter 213 until all applicable requirements of that rule are met. (b) Primary operators of large construction activities as described in Part II.E.3. above are provisionally authorized seven(7)days from the date that a completed NOI is postmarked for delivery to the TCEQ,unless otherwise notified by the executive director. If electronic submission of the NOI is provided, and unless otherwise notified by the executive director,primary operators are authorized immediately following confirmation of receipt of the NOI by the TCEQ. Authorization is non- provisional when the executive director finds the NOI is administratively complete and an authorization number is issued for the activity. For activities located in areas regulated by 3o TAC Chapter 213,related to the Edwards Aquifer,this authorization to discharge is separate from the requirements of the operator's responsibilities under that rule. Construction may not commence for sites regulated under 3o TAC Chapter 213 until all applicable requirements of that rule are met. (c) Operators are not prohibited from submitting late NOIs or posting late notices to obtain authorization under this general permit. The TCEQ reserves the right to take appropriate enforcement actions for any unpermitted activities that may have occurred between the time construction commenced and authorization was obtained. 6. Notice of Change(NOC) If relevant information provided in the NOI changes, an NOC must be submitted at least 14 days before the change occurs,if possible. Where 14-day advance notice is not possible,the operator must submit an NOC within 14 days of discovery of the change. If Page 18 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 the operator becomes aware that it failed to submit any relevant facts or submitted incorrect information in an NOI,the correct information must be provided to the executive director in an NOC within 14 days after discovery. The NOC shall be submitted on a form provided by the executive director,or by letter if an NOC form is not available. A copy of the NOC must also be provided to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge,and a list must be included in the SWP3 that includes the names and addresses of all MS4 operators receiving a copy. Information that may be included on an NOC includes,but is not limited to,the following: the description of the construction project,an increase in the number of acres disturbed(for increases of one or more acres),or the operator name. A transfer of operational control from one operator to another,including a transfer of the ownership of a company,may not be included in an NOC. A transfer of ownership of a company includes changes to the structure of a company, such as changing from a partnership to a corporation or changing corporation types,so that the filing number(or charter number)that is on record with the Texas Secretary of State must be changed. An NOC is not required for notifying TCEQ of a decrease in the number of acres disturbed. This information must be included in the SWP3 and retained on site. 7. Signatory Requirement for NOI Forms,Notice of Termination(NOT)Forms,NOC Letters,and Construction Site Notices NOI forms,NOT forms,NOC letters, and Construction Site Notices that require a signature must be signed according to 3o TAC§305.44(relating to Signatories for Applications). (.**\. 8. Contents of the NOI The NOI form shall require,at a minimum,the following information: (a) the TPDES CGP authorization number for existing authorizations under this general permit,where the operator submits an NOI to renew coverage within 90 days of the effective date of this general permit; (b) the name, address,and telephone number of the operator filing the NOI for permit coverage; (c) the name(or other identifier), address, county,and latitude/longitude of the construction project or site; (d) the number of acres that will be disturbed by the applicant; (e) confirmation that the project or site will not be located on Indian Country lands; (f) confirmation that a SWP3 has been developed in accordance with this general permit, that it will be implemented prior to construction,and that it is compliant with any applicable local sediment and erosion control plans;for multiple operators who prepare a shared SWP3,the confirmation for an operator maybe limited to its obligations under the SWP3 provided all obligations are confirmed by at least one operator; (g) name of the receiving water(s); (h) the classified segment number for each classified segment that receives discharges from the regulated construction activity(if the discharge is not directly to a classified segment,then the classified segment number of the first classified segment that those discharges reach); and (i) the name of all surface waters receiving discharges from the regulated construction activity that are on the latest EPA-approved CWA§3o3(d)List of impaired waters. Page 19 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Section F. Terminating Coverage 1. Notice of Termination(NOT) Required Each operator that has submitted an NOI for authorization under this general permit must apply to terminate that authorization following the conditions described in this section of the general permit. Authorization must be terminated by submitting an NOT on a form supplied by the executive director. Authorization to discharge under this general permit terminates at midnight on the day the NOT is postmarked for delivery to the TCEQ. If electronic submission of the NOT is provided, authorization to discharge under this permit terminates immediately following confirmation of receipt of the NOT by the TCEQ. Compliance with the conditions and requirements of this permit is required until an NOT is submitted. The NOT must be submitted to TCEQ, and a copy of the NOT provided to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge(with a list in the SWP3 of the names and addresses of all MS4 operators receiving a copy),within 3o days after any of the following conditions are met: (a) final stabilization has been achieved on all portions of the site that are the responsibility of the permittee; (b) a transfer of operational control has occurred(See Section II.F.4.below);or (c) the operator has obtained alternative authorization under an individual TPDES permit or alternative TPDES general permit. 2. Minimum Contents of the NOT The NOT form shall require, at a minimum,the following information: (a) if authorization was granted following submission of an NOI,the permittee's site- specific TPDES authorization number for the construction site; (b) an indication of whether the construction activity is completed or if the permittee is simply no longer an operator at the site; (c) the name, address, and telephone number of the permittee submitting the NOT; (d) the name(or other identifier),address,county, and location(latitude/longitude)of the construction project or site; and (e) a signed certification that either all stormwater discharges requiring authorization under this general permit will no longer occur,or that the applicant is no longer the operator of the facility or construction site, and that all temporary structural erosion controls have either been removed,will be removed on a schedule defined in the SWP3,or have been transferred to a new operator if the new operator has applied for permit coverage. Erosion controls that are designed to remain in place for an indefinite period,such as mulches and fiber mats,are not required to be removed or scheduled for removal. 3. Termination of Coverage for Small Construction Sites and for Secondary Operators at Large Construction Sites Each operator that has obtained automatic authorization and has not been required to submit an NOI must remove the site notice upon meeting any of the conditions listed below,complete the applicable portion of the site notice related to removal of the site notice, and submit a copy of the completed site notice to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge(or provide alternative notification as allowed by the MS4 operator,with documentation of such notification included in the SWP3),within 30 days of meeting any of the following conditions: Page 20 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 (a) final stabilization has been achieved on all portions of the site that are the (.1.6\ responsibility of the permittee; (b) a transfer of operational control has occurred(See Section II.F.4.below); or (c) the operator has obtained alternative authorization under an individual or general TPDES permit. Authorization to discharge under this general permit terminates immediately upon removal of the applicable site notice. Compliance with the conditions and requirements of this permit is required until the site notice is removed. 4. Transfer of Operational Control Coverage under this general permit is not transferable. A transfer of operational control includes changes to the structure of a company,such as changing from a partnership to a corporation,or changing to a different corporation type such that a different filing(or charter)number is established with the Texas Secretary of State. When the primary operator of a large construction activity changes or operational control is transferred,the original operator must submit an NOT within ten(io)days prior to the date that responsibility for operations terminates, and the new operator must submit an NOI at least ten(io)days prior to the transfer of operational control,in accordance with condition(a)or(b)below. A copy of the NOT must be provided to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge in accordance with Section II.F.r. above. Operators of regulated construction activities who are not required to submit an NOI must remove the original site notice, and the new operator must post the required site notice prior to the transfer of operational control,in accordance with condition(a)or(b) below. A copy of the completed site notice must be provided to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge,in accordance with Section II.F.3. above. A transfer of operational control occurs when either of the following criteria is met: (a) Another operator has assumed control over all areas of the site that have not been finally stabilized; and all silt fences and other temporary erosion controls have either been removed,scheduled for removal as defined in the SWP3,or transferred to a new operator,provided that the permitted operator has attempted to notify the new operator in writing of the requirement to obtain permit coverage. Record of this notification(or attempt at notification)shall be retained by the operator in accordance with Part VI of this permit. Erosion controls that are designed to remain in place for an indefinite period,such as mulches and fiber mats, are not required to be removed or scheduled for removal. (b) A homebuilder has purchased one or more lots from an operator who obtained coverage under this general permit for a common plan of development or sale. The homebuilder is considered a new operator and shall comply with the requirements listed above,including the development of a SWP3 if necessary. Under these circumstances,the homebuilder is only responsible for compliance with the general permit requirements as they apply to lot(s)it has operational control over,and the original operator remains responsible for common controls or discharges,and must amend its SWP3 to remove the lot(s)transferred to the homebuilder. Section G. Waivers from Coverage The executive director may waive the otherwise applicable requirements of this general permit for stormwater discharges from small construction activities under the terms and conditions described in this section. Page 21 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 1. Waiver Applicability and Coverage Operators of small construction activities may apply for and receive a waiver from the requirements to obtain authorization under this general permit,where all of the following conditions are met. This waiver from coverage does not apply to non- stormwater discharges. The operator must insure that any non-stormwater discharges are either authorized under a separate permit or authorization, or are not considered to be a wastewater. (a) the calculated rainfall erosivity(R)factor for the entire period of the construction project is less than five(5); (b) the operator submits to the TCEQ a signed waiver certification form,supplied by the executive director, certifying that the construction activity will commence and be completed within a period when the value of the calculated R factor is less than five (5); and (c) the waiver certification form is postmarked for delivery to the TCEQ at least seven(7) days before construction activity begins or,if electronic filing is available,then any time following the receipt of written confirmation from TCEQ that a complete electronic application was submitted and acknowledged. 2. Steps to Obtaining a Waiver The construction site operator may calculate the R factor to request a waiver using the following steps: (a) Estimate the construction start date and the construction end date. The construction end date is the date that final stabilization will be achieved. (b) Find the appropriate Erosivity Index(EI)zone in Appendix B of this permit. (c) Find the EI percentage for the project period by adding the results for each period of the project using the table provided in Appendix D of this permit,in EPA Fact Sheet 2.1,or in USDA Handbook 703,by subtracting the start value from the end value to find the percent EI for the site. (d) Refer to the Isoerodent Map (Appendix C of this permit) and interpolate the annual isoerodent value for the proposed construction location. (e) Multiply the percent value obtained in Step (c) above by the annual isoerodent value obtained in Step(d). This is the R factor for the proposed project. If the value is less than 5,then a waiver may be obtained. If the value is five(5)or more,then a waiver may not be obtained, and the operator must obtain coverage under Part II.E.2.of this permit. Alternatively,the operator may calculate a site-specific R factor utilizing the following online calculator: http://ei.tainu.edu/index.html,or using another available resource. The waiver certification form is not required to be posted at the small construction site. 3. Effective Date of Waiver Operators of small construction activities are provisionally waived from the otherwise applicable requirements of this general permit seven(7) days from the date that a completed waiver certification form is postmarked for delivery to TCEQ, or immediately upon receiving confirmation of approval of an electronic submittal,if electronic form submittals are available. 4. Activities Extending Beyond the Waiver Period If a construction activity extends beyond the approved waiver period due to circumstances beyond the control of the operator,the operator must either: Page 22 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 (a) recalculate the R factor using the original start date and a new projected ending date, and if the R factor is still under five(5),submit a new waiver certification form at least two(2)days before the end of the original waiver period; or (b) obtain authorization under this general permit according to the requirements delineated in either Part II.E.2. or Part II.E.3.before the end of the approved waiver period. Section H. Alternative TPDES Permit Coverage 1. Individual Permit Alternative Any discharge eligible for coverage under this general permit may alternatively be authorized under an individual TPDES permit according to 3o TAC§305(relating to Consolidated Permits). Applications for individual permit coverage should be submitted at least three hundred and thirty(330)days prior to commencement of construction activities to ensure timely authorization. 2. Individual Permit Required The executive director may suspend an authorization or deny an NOI in accordance with the procedures set forth in 3o TAC§205 (relating to General Permits for Waste Discharges),including the requirement that the executive director provide written notice to the permittee. The executive director may require an operator of a construction site, otherwise eligible for authorization under this general permit,to apply for an individual TPDES permit in the following circumstances: (a) the conditions of an approved TMDL or TMDL I-Plan on the receiving water; (b) the activity being determined to cause a violation of water quality standards or being found to cause, or contribute to,the loss of a designated use of surface water in the state: and (c) any other consideration defined in 30 TAC Chapter 205 (relating to General Permits for Waste Discharges)including 3o TAC Chapter 2o5.4(c)(3)(D),which allows the commission to deny authorization under the general permit and require an individual permit if a discharger"has been determined by the executive director to have been out of compliance with any rule, order,or permit of the commission,including non- payment of fees assessed by the executive director." Additionally,the executive director may cancel,revoke, or suspend authorization to discharge under this general permit based on a finding of historical and significant noncompliance with the provisions of this general permit,relating to 3o TAC§60.3 (Use of Compliance History). Denial of authorization to discharge under this general permit or suspension of a permittee's authorization under this general permit shall be done according to commission rules in 3o TAC Chapter 205 (relating to General Permits for Waste Discharges). 3. Alternative Discharge Authorization Any discharge eligible for authorization under this general permit may alternatively be authorized under a separate general permit according to 30 TAC Chapter 205 (relating to General Permits for Waste Discharges),if applicable. Section I. Permit Expiration 1. This general permit is effective for a term not to exceed five(5)years. All active discharge authorizations expire on the date provided on page one(1)of this permit. Following public notice and comment, as provided by 3o TAC§205.3(relating to Page 23 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 Public Notice, Public Meetings, and Public Comment),the commission may amend, revoke,cancel,or renew this general permit. 2. If the executive director publishes a notice of the intent to renew or amend this general permit before the expiration date,the permit will remain in effect for existing,authorized discharges until the commission takes final action on the permit. Upon issuance of a renewed or amended permit,permittees maybe required to submit an NOI within 90 days following the effective date of the renewed or amended permit,unless that permit provides for an alternative method for obtaining authorization. 3. If the commission does not propose to reissue this general permit within 90 days before the expiration date,permittees shall apply for authorization under an individual permit or an alternative general permit. If the application for an individual permit is submitted before the expiration date, authorization under this expiring general permit remains in effect until the issuance or denial of an individual permit. No new NOIs will be accepted nor new authorizations honored under the general permit after the expiration date. Part III. Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plans(SWP3) All regulated construction site operators shall prepare an SWP3,prior to submittal of an NOI,to address discharges authorized under Parts II.E.2. and II.E.3. of this general permit that will reach Waters of the U.S.,including discharges to MS4s and privately owned separate storm sewer systems that drain to Waters of the U.S.,to identify and address potential sources of pollution that are reasonably expected to affect the quality of discharges from the construction site,including off-site material storage areas, overburden and stockpiles of dirt,borrow areas,equipment staging areas,vehicle repair areas,fueling areas, etc.,used solely by the permitted project. The SWP3 must describe the implementation of practices that will be used to minimize to the extent practicable the discharge of pollutants in stormwater associated with construction activity and non-stormwater discharges described in Part II.A.3.,in compliance with the terms and conditions of this permit. Individual operators at a site may develop separate SWP3s that cover only their portion of the project,provided reference is made to the other operators at the site. Where there is more than one SWP3 for a site,permittees must coordinate to ensure that BMPs and controls are consistent and do not negate or impair the effectiveness of each other. Regardless of whether a single comprehensive SWP3 is developed or separate SWP3s are developed for each operator,it is the responsibility of each operator to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of this general permit in the areas of the construction site where that operator has control over construction plans and specifications or day-to-day operations. Section A. Shared SWP3 Development For more effective coordination of BMPs and opportunities for cost sharing,a cooperative effort by the different operators at a site is encouraged. Operators must independently obtain authorization,but may work together to prepare and implement a single, comprehensive SWP3 for the entire construction site. 1. The SWP3 must clearly list the name and,for large construction activities,the general permit authorization numbers,for each operator that participates in the shared SWP3. Until the TCEQ responds to receipt of the NOI with a general permit authorization number,the SWP3 must specify the date that the NOI was submitted to TCEQ by each operator. Each operator participating in the shared plan must also sign the SWP3. ^� Page 24 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 2. The SWP3 must clearly indicate which operator is responsible for satisfying each (11.b.\ shared requirement of the SWP3. If the responsibility for satisfying a requirement is not described in the plan,then each permittee is entirely responsible for meeting the requirement within the boundaries of the construction site where they perform construction activities. The SWP3 must clearly describe responsibilities for meeting each requirement in shared or common areas. 3. The SWP3 may provide that one operator is responsible for preparation of a SWP3 in compliance with the CGP,and another operator is responsible for implementation of the SWP3 at the project site. Section B. Responsibilities of Operators 1. Secondary Operators and Primary Operators with Control Over Construction Plans and Specifications All secondary operators and primary operators with control over construction plans and specifications shall: (a) ensure the project specifications allow or provide that adequate BMPs are developed to meet the requirements of Part III of this general permit; (b) ensure that the SWP3 indicates the areas of the project where they have control over project specifications,including the ability to make modifications in specifications; (c) ensure that all other operators affected by modifications in project specifications are notified in a timely manner so that those operators may modify their BMP s as necessary to remain compliant with the conditions of this general permit; and (d) ensure that the SWP3 for portions of the project where they are operators indicates the name and site-specific TPDES authorization number(s)for operators with the day-to-day operational control over those activities necessary to ensure compliance with the SWP3 and other permit conditions. If the party with day-to-day operational control has not been authorized or has abandoned the site,the person with control over project specifications is considered to be the responsible party until the authority is transferred to another party and the SWP3 is updated. 2. Primary Operators with Day-to-Day Operational Control Primary operators with day-to-day operational control of those activities at a project that are necessary to ensure compliance with an SWP3 and other permit conditions must ensure that the SWP3 accomplishes the following requirements: (a) meets the requirements of this general permit for those portions of the project where they are operators; (b) identifies the parties responsible for implementation of BMPs described in the SWP3; (c) indicates areas of the project where they have operational control over day-to-day activities; and (d) includes,for areas where they have operational control over day-to-day activities,the name and site-specific TPDES authorization number of the parties with control over project specifications,including the ability to make modifications in specifications. Section C. Deadlines for SWP3 Preparation,Implementation, and Compliance 1111116.` The SWP3 must be prepared prior to obtaining authorization under this general permit, and implemented prior to commencing construction activities that result in soil Page 25 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 disturbance. The SWP3 must be prepared so that it provides for compliance with the terms and conditions of this general permit. Section D. Plan Review and Making Plans Available 1. The SWP3 must be retained on-site at the construction site or,if the site is inactive or does not have an on-site location to store the plan, a notice must be posted describing the location of the SWP3. The SWP3 must be made readily available at the time of an on-site inspection to: the executive director; a federal,state,or local agency approving sediment and erosion plans,grading plans,or stormwater management plans;local government officials; and the operator of a municipal separate storm sewer receiving discharges from the site. If the SWP3 is retained off-site,then it shall be made available as soon as reasonably possible. In most instances,it is reasonable that the SWP3 shall be made available within 24 hours of the request. 2. A primary operator of a large construction activity must post the TCEQ site notice near the main entrance of the construction site. An operator of a small construction activity seeking authorization under this general permit and a secondary operator of a large construction activity must post the TCEQ site notice required in Part 2.,or 3. of this general permit in order to obtain authorization. If the construction project is a linear construction project,such as a pipeline or highway,the notices must be placed in a publicly accessible location near where construction is actively underway. Notices for these linear sites maybe relocated,as necessary, along the length of the project.The notices must be readily available for viewing by the general public;local,state, and federal authorities; and contain the following information: (a) the site-specific TPDES authorization number for the project if assigned; (b) the operator name, contact name,and contact phone number; (c) a brief description of the project; and (d) the location of the SWP3. 3. This permit does not provide the general public with any right to trespass on a construction site for any reason,including inspection of a site; nor does this permit require that permittees allow members of the general public access to a construction site. Section E. Revisions and Updates to SWP3s The permittee must revise or update the SWP3 whenever the following occurs: 1. a change in design, construction,operation, or maintenance that has a significant effect on the discharge of pollutants and that has not been previously addressed in the SWP3; 2. changing site conditions based on updated plans and specifications,new operators, new areas of responsibility, and changes in BMPs; or 3. results of inspections or investigations by site operators,operators of a municipal separate storm sewer system receiving the discharge, authorized TCEQ personnel, or a federal,state or local agency approving sediment and erosion plans indicate the SWP3 is proving ineffective in eliminating or significantly minimizing pollutants in discharges authorized under this general permit. Section F. Contents of SWP3 The SWP3 must include,at a minimum,the information described in this section and must comply with the construction and development effluent guidelines in Part III, Section G of the general permit. Page 26 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 1. A site or project description,which includes the following information: (a) a description of the nature of the construction activity; (b) a list of potential pollutants and their sources; (c) a description of the intended schedule or sequence of activities that will disturb soils for major portions of the site,including estimated start dates and duration of activities; (d) the total number of acres of the entire property and the total number of acres where construction activities will occur,including off-site material storage areas, overburden and stockpiles of dirt, and borrow areas that are authorized under the permittee's NOI; (e) data describing the soil or the quality of any discharge from the site; (f) a map showing the general location of the site(e.g.a portion of a city or county map); (g) a detailed site map(or maps)indicating the following: (i) drainage patterns and approximate slopes anticipated after major grading activities; (ii) areas where soil disturbance will occur; (iii) locations of all controls and buffers,either planned or in place; (iv) locations where temporary or permanent stabilization practices are expected to be used; (v) locations of construction support activities,including off-site activities, (11111N, that are authorized under the permittee's NOI,including material,waste, borrow,fill,or equipment or chemical storage areas; (vi) surface waters(including wetlands)either at, adjacent, or in close proximity to the site,and also indicating those that are impaired waters; (vii) locations where stormwater discharges from the site directly to a surface water body or a municipal separate storm sewer system; (viii) vehicle wash areas; and (ix) designated points on the site where vehicles will exit onto paved roads(for instance,this applies to construction transition from unstable dirt areas to exterior paved roads). Where the amount of information required to be included on the map would result in a single map being difficult to read and interpret,the operator shall develop a series of maps that collectively include the required information. (h) the location and description of support activities authorized under the permittee's NOI,including asphalt plants,concrete plants,and other activities providing support to the construction site that is authorized under this general permit; (i) the name of receiving waters at or near the site that maybe disturbed or that may receive discharges from disturbed areas of the project; (j) a copy of this TPDES general permit; (k) the NOI and acknowledgement certificate for primary operators of large construction sites, and the site notice for small construction sites and for secondary operators of large construction sites; r**\, (1) stormwater and allowable non-stormwater discharge locations,including storm drain inlets on site and in the immediate vicinity of the construction site; and Page 27 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 (m)locations of all pollutant-generating activities,such as paving operations; concrete,paint and stucco washout and water disposal; solid waste storage and disposal; and dewatering operations. 2. A description of the BMPs that will be used to minimize pollution in runoff. The description must identify the general timing or sequence for implementation. At a minimum,the description must include the following components: (a) General Requirements (i) Erosion and sediment controls must be designed to retain sediment on-site to the extent practicable with consideration for local topography,soil type, and rainfall. (ii) Control measures must be properly selected,installed, and maintained according to the manufacturer's or designer's specifications. (iii) Controls must be developed to minimize the offsite transport of litter, construction debris, and construction materials. (b) Erosion Control and Stabilization Practices The SWP3 must include a description of temporary and permanent erosion control and stabilization practices for the site,compliant with the requirements of Part III.G.1 and G.2 of this general permit, including a schedule of when the practices will be implemented.Site plans should ensure that existing vegetation is preserved where it is possible. (i) Erosion control and stabilization practices may include but are not limited to: establishment of temporary or permanent vegetation,mulching, geotextiles,sod stabilization,vegetative buffer strips,protection of existing trees and vegetation,slope texturing,temporary velocity dissipation devices,flow diversion mechanisms, and other similar measures. (ii) The following records must be maintained and either attached to or referenced in the SWP3,and made readily available upon request to the parties listed in Part III.D.1 of this general permit: (A) the dates when major grading activities occur; (B) the dates when construction activities temporarily or permanently cease on a portion of the site; and (C) the dates when stabilization measures are initiated. (iii) Erosion control and stabilization measures must be initiated immediately in portions of the site where construction activities have temporarily ceased and will not resume for a period exceeding 14 calendar days. Stabilization measures that provide a protective cover must be initiated immediately in portions of the site where construction activities have permanently ceased. The term"immediately"is used to define the deadline for initiating stabilization measures. In the context of this requirement,"immediately"means as soon as practicable,but no later than the end of the next work day,following the day when the earth-disturbing activities have temporarily or permanently ceased. Except as provided in (A)through(D)below,these measures must be completed as soon as practicable,but no more than 14 calendar days after the initiation of soil stabilization measures: (A) Where the immediate initiation of stabilization measures after construction activity temporarily or permanently ceased is precluded Page 28 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 by snow cover or frozen ground conditions,stabilization measures must be initiated as soon as practicable. (B) In arid areas,semi-arid areas, or drought-stricken areas where the immediate initiation of stabilization measures after construction activity has temporarily or permanently ceased or is precluded by arid conditions,erosion control and stabilization measures must be initiated as soon as practicable. Where vegetative controls are not feasible due to arid conditions,the operator shall immediately install, and within 14 calendar days of a temporary or permanent cessation of work in any portion of the site complete,non-vegetative erosion controls. If non-vegetative controls are not feasible,the operator shall install temporary sediment controls as required in Paragraph(C) below. (C) In areas where temporary stabilization measures are infeasible,the operator may alternatively utilize temporary perimeter controls. The operator must document in the SWP3 the reason why stabilization measures are not feasible,and must demonstrate that the perimeter controls will retain sediment on site to the extent practicable. The operator must continue to inspect the BMPs at the frequency established in Section III.F.7.(a)for unstabilized sites. (D) If the initiation or completion of vegetative stabilization is affected by circumstances beyond the control of the permittee,vegetative stabilization must be initiated or completed as soon as conditions or circumstances allow it on the site. The requirement to initiate stabilization is triggered as soon as it is known with reasonable certainty that work will be stopped for 14 or more additional calendar days. (iv) Final stabilization must be achieved prior to termination of permit coverage. (v) TCEQ does not expect that temporary or permanent stabilization measures to be applied to areas that are intended to be left un-vegetated or un- stabilized following construction(e.g.,dirt access roads,utility pole pads, areas being used for storage of vehicles,equipment,or materials). (c) Sediment Control Practices The SWP3 must include a description of any sediment control practices used to remove eroded soils from stormwater runoff,including the general timing or sequence for implementation of controls. (i) Sites With Drainage Areas of Ten or More Acres (A) Sedimentation Basin(s) (1) A sedimentation basin is required,where feasible,for a common drainage location that serves an area with ten(io)or more acres disturbed at one time. A sedimentation basin may be temporary or permanent,and must provide sufficient storage to contain a calculated volume of runoff from a 2-year, 24-hour storm from each disturbed acre drained. When calculating the volume of runoff from a 2-year,24-hour storm event,it is not required to include the flows from offsite areas and flow from onsite areas that are either undisturbed or have already undergone permanent rilh\ stabilization,if these flows are diverted around both the disturbed areas of the site and the sediment basin. Capacity calculations shall be included in the SWP3. Page 29 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 (2) Where rainfall data is not available or a calculation cannot be performed,the sedimentation basin must provide at least 3,600 cubic feet of storage per acre drained until final stabilization of the site. (3) If a sedimentation basin is not feasible,then the permittee shall provide equivalent control measures until final stabilization of the site. In determining whether installing a sediment basin is feasible,the permittee may consider factors such as site soils, slope, available area,public safety,precipitation patterns,site geometry,site vegetation,infiltration capacity,geotechnical factors,depth to groundwater,and other similar considerations. The permittee shall document the reason that the sediment basins are not feasible, and shall utilize equivalent control measures, which may include a series of smaller sediment basins. (4) Unless infeasible,when discharging from sedimentation basins and impoundments,the permittee shall utilize outlet structures that withdraw water from the surface. (B) Perimeter Controls: At a minimum,silt fences,vegetative buffer strips,or equivalent sediment controls are required for all down slope boundaries of the construction area,and for those side slope boundaries deemed appropriate as dictated by individual site conditions. (ii) Controls for Sites With Drainage Areas Less than Ten Acres: (A) Sediment traps and sediment basins may be used to control solids in stormwater runoff for drainage locations serving less than ten(10) acres. At a minimum,silt fences,vegetative buffer strips, or equivalent sediment controls are required for all down slope boundaries of the construction area, and for those side slope boundaries deemed appropriate as dictated by individual site conditions. (B) Alternatively,a sediment basin that provides storage for a calculated volume of runoff from a 2-year, 24-hour storm from each disturbed acre drained may be utilized. Where rainfall data is not available or a calculation cannot be performed,a temporary or permanent sediment basin providing 3,60o cubic feet of storage per acre drained may be provided. If a calculation is performed,then the calculation shall be included in the SWP3. (C) If sedimentation basins or impoundments are used,the permittee shall comply with the requirements in Part III.G.6 of this general permit. 3. Description of Permanent Stormwater Controls A description of any measures that will be installed during the construction process to control pollutants in stormwater discharges that may occur after construction operations have been completed must be included in the SWP3. Permittees are only responsible for the installation and maintenance of stormwater management measures prior to final stabilization of the site or prior to submission of an NOT. 4. Other Required Controls and BMPs (a) Permittees shall minimize,to the extent practicable,the off-site vehicle tracking of sediments and the generation of dust. The SWP3 shall include a description of controls utilized to accomplish this requirement. Page 30 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 (b) The SWP3 must include a description of construction and waste materials expected to be stored on-site and a description of controls to minimize pollutants from these materials. (c) The SWP3 must include a description of potential pollutant sources from areas other than construction(such as stormwater discharges from dedicated asphalt plants and dedicated concrete batch plants), and a description of controls and measures that will be implemented at those sites to minimize pollutant discharges. (d) Permittees shall place velocity dissipation devices at discharge locations and along the length of any outfall channel(i.e.,runoff conveyance)to provide a non- erosive flow velocity from the structure to a water course,so that the natural physical and biological characteristics and functions are maintained and protected. (e) Permittees shall design and utilize appropriate controls to minimize the offsite transport of suspended sediments and other pollutants if it is necessary to pump or channel standing water from the site. (f) Permittees shall ensure that all other required controls and BMPs comply with all of the requirements of Part III.G of this general permit. 5. Documentation of Compliance with Approved State and Local Plans (a) Permittees must ensure that the SWP3 is consistent with requirements specified in applicable sediment and erosion site plans or site permits,or stormwater management site plans or site permits approved by federal,state,or local officials. (11.11\ (b) SWP3s must be updated as necessary to remain consistent with any changes applicable to protecting surface water resources in sediment erosion site plans or site permits,or stormwater management site plans or site permits approved by state or local official for which the permittee receives written notice. (c) If the permittee is required to prepare a separate management plan,including but not limited to a WPAP or Contributing Zone Plan in accordance with 30 TAC Chapter 213(related to the Edwards Aquifer),then a copy of that plan must be either included in the SWP3 or made readily available upon request to authorized personnel of the TCEQ. The permittee shall maintain a copy of the approval letter for the plan in its SWP3. 6. Maintenance Requirements (a) All protective measures identified in the SWP3 must be maintained in effective operating condition. If,through inspections or other means,the permittee determines that BMPs are not operating effectively,then the permittee shall perform maintenance as necessary to maintain the continued effectiveness of stormwater controls,and prior to the next rain event if feasible. If maintenance prior to the next anticipated storm event is impracticable,the reason shall be documented in the SWP3 and maintenance must be scheduled and accomplished as soon as practicable. Erosion and sediment controls that have been intentionally disabled,run-over,removed,or otherwise rendered ineffective must be replaced or corrected immediately upon discovery. (b) If periodic inspections or other information indicates a control has been used incorrectly,is performing inadequately,or is damaged,then the operator shall replace or modify the control as soon as practicable after making the discovery. (111116\ (c) Sediment must be removed from sediment traps and sedimentation ponds no later than the time that design capacity has been reduced by 5o%. For perimeter Page 31 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 controls such as silt fences,berms,etc.,the trapped sediment must be removed before it reaches 50%of the above-ground height. (d) If sediment escapes the site, accumulations must be removed at a frequency that minimizes off-site impacts, and prior to the next rain event,if feasible. If the permittee does not own or operate the off-site conveyance,then the permittee shall work with the owner or operator of the property to remove the sediment. 7. Inspections of Controls (a) Personnel provided by the permittee must inspect disturbed areas of the construction site that have not been finally stabilized, areas used for storage of materials that are exposed to precipitation,discharge locations,and structural controls for evidence of,or the potential for,pollutants entering the drainage system. Personnel conducting these inspections must be knowledgeable of this general permit,familiar with the construction site, and knowledgeable of the SWP3 for the site. Sediment and erosion control measures identified in the SWP3 must be inspected to ensure that they are operating correctly. Locations where vehicles enter or exit the site must be inspected for evidence of off-site sediment tracking. Inspections must be conducted at least once every 14 calendar days and within 24 hours of the end of a storm event of 0.5 inches or greater. Where sites have been finally or temporarily stabilized or where runoff is unlikely due to winter conditions(e.g.site is covered with snow,ice, or frozen ground exists),inspections must be conducted at least once every month. In arid,semi-arid,or drought-stricken areas,inspections must be conducted at least once every month and within 24 hours after the end of a storm event of 0.5 inches or greater. The SWP3 must also contain a record of the total rainfall measured, as well as the approximate beginning and ending dates of winter or drought conditions resulting in monthly frequency of inspections. As an alternative to the above-described inspection schedule of once every 14 calendar days and within 24 hours of a storm event of 0.5 inches or greater,the SWP3 may be developed to require that these inspections will occur at least once every seven(7)calendar days. If this alternative schedule is developed,then the inspection must occur regardless of whether or not there has been a rainfall event since the previous inspection. The inspections may occur on either schedule provided that the SWP3 reflects the current schedule and that any changes to the schedule are conducted in accordance with the following provisions: the schedule may be changed a maximum of one time each month,the schedule change must be implemented at the beginning of a calendar month, and the reason for the schedule change must be documented in the SWP3 (e.g., end of"dry"season and beginning of"wet" season). (b) Utility line installation,pipeline construction, and other examples of long, narrow,linear construction activities may provide inspection personnel with limited access to the areas described in Part III.F.7.(a) above. Inspection of these areas could require that vehicles compromise temporarily or even permanently stabilized areas,cause additional disturbance of soils, and increase the potential for erosion. In these circumstances,controls must be inspected at least once every 14 calendar days and within 24 hours of the end of a storm event of 0.5 inches or greater,but representative inspections may be performed. For representative inspections,personnel must inspect controls along the construction site for 0.25 mile above and below each access point where a roadway,undisturbed right-of-way,or other similar feature intersects the construction site and allows access to the areas described in Part III.F.7.(a) Page 32 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 above. The conditions of the controls along each inspected o.25 mile portion (111""\, may be considered as representative of the condition of controls along that reach extending from the end of the o.25 mile portion to either the end of the next o.25 mile inspected portion,or to the end of the project,whichever occurs first. As an alternative to the above-described inspection schedule of once every 14 calendar days and within 24 hours of a storm event of 0.5 inches or greater,the SWP3 may be developed to require that these inspections will occur at least once every seven(7)calendar days. If this alternative schedule is developed,the inspection must occur regardless of whether or not there has been a rainfall event since the previous inspection. The inspections may occur on either schedule provided that the SWP3 reflects the current schedule and that any changes to the schedule are conducted in accordance with the following provisions: the schedule may be changed a maximum of one time each month, the schedule change must be implemented at the beginning of a calendar month, and the reason for the schedule change must be documented in the SWP3(e.g., end of"dry"season and beginning of"wet"season). (c) In the event of flooding or other uncontrollable situations which prohibit access to the inspection sites,inspections must be conducted as soon as access is practicable. (d) The SWP3 must be modified based on the results of inspections,as necessary,to better control pollutants in runoff. Revisions to the SWP3 must be completed within seven(7)calendar days following the inspection. If existing BMPs are modified or if additional BMPs are necessary,an implementation schedule must be described in the SWP3 and wherever possible those changes implemented before the next storm event. If implementation before the next anticipated storm event is impracticable,these changes must be implemented as soon as practicable. (e) A report summarizing the scope of the inspection,the date(s)of the inspection, and major observations relating to the implementation of the SWP3 must be made and retained as part of the SWP3. Major observations should include: The locations of discharges of sediment or other pollutants from the site; locations of BMPs that need to be maintained;locations of BMPs that failed to operate as designed or proved inadequate for a particular location; and locations where additional BMPs are needed. Actions taken as a result of inspections must be described within,and retained as a part of,the SWP3. Reports must identify any incidents of non-compliance. Where a report does not identify any incidents of non-compliance,the report must contain a certification that the facility or site is in compliance with the SWP3 and this permit. The report must be signed by the person and in the manner required by 30 TAC§3o5.128(relating to Signatories to Reports). The names and qualifications of personnel making the inspections for the permittee may be documented once in the SWP3 rather than being included in each report. 8. The SWP3 must identify and ensure the implementation of appropriate pollution prevention measures for all eligible non-stormwater components of the discharge,as listed in Part II.A.3.of this permit. 9. The SWP3 must include the information required in Part III.B.of this general permit. 10. The SWP3 must include pollution prevention procedures that comply with Part III.G.4 of this general permit. Page 33 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TX10.50000 Section G. Erosion and Sediment Control Requirements Applicable to All Sites Except as provided in 4o CFR§§125.3o-125.32,any discharge regulated under this general permit,with the exception of sites that obtained waivers based on low rainfall erosivity,must achieve, at a minimum,the following effluent limitations representing the degree of effluent reduction attainable by application of the best practicable control technology currently available(BPT). 1. Erosion and sediment controls. Design,install,and maintain effective erosion controls and sediment controls to minimize the discharge of pollutants.At a minimum,such controls must be designed,installed, and maintained to: (a) Control stormwater volume and velocity within the site to minimize soil erosion; (b) If any stormwater flow will be channelized at the site,stormwater controls must be designed to control both peak flowrates and total stormwater volume to minimize erosion at outlets and to minimize downstream channel and streambank erosion; (c) Minimize the amount of soil exposed during construction activity; (d) Minimize the disturbance of steep slopes; (e) Minimize sediment discharges from the site.The design,installation, and maintenance of erosion and sediment controls must address factors such as the amount,frequency,intensity and duration of precipitation,the nature of resulting stormwater runoff, and soil characteristics,including the range of soil particle sizes expected to be present on the site; (f) If earth disturbance activities are located in close proximity to a surface water, provide and maintain appropriate natural buffers if feasible and as necessary, around surface waters, depending on site-specific topography,sensitivity,and proximity to water bodies. Direct stormwater to vegetated areas to increase sediment removal and maximize stormwater infiltration. If providing buffers is infeasible, the permittee shall document the reason that natural buffers are not feasible, and shall implement additional erosion and sediment controls to reduce sediment load; (g) Preserve native topsoil at the site,unless infeasible; and (h) Minimize soil compaction in post-construction pervious areas. In areas of the construction site where final vegetative stabilization will occur or where infiltration practices will be installed,either: (1) restrict vehicle and equipment use to avoid soil compaction; or (2) prior to seeding or planting areas of exposed soil that have been compacted, use techniques that condition the soils to support vegetative growth,if necessary and feasible; (i) TCEQ does not consider stormwater control features(e.g.,stormwater conveyance channels,storm drain inlets,sediment basins)to constitute"surface waters"for the purposes of triggering the buffer requirement in Part III.G.(f) above. 2. Soil stabilization. Stabilization of disturbed areas must, at a minimum,be initiated immediately whenever any clearing,grading,excavating, or other earth disturbing activities have permanently ceased on any portion of the site, or temporarily ceased on any portion of the site and will not resume for a period exceeding 14 calendar days. In the context of this requirement,"immediately"means as soon as practicable, but no later than the end of the next work day,following the day when the earth- disturbing activities have temporarily or permanently ceased. Temporary Page 34 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR1500o0 stabilization must be completed no more than 1.4 calendar days after initiation of soil stabilization measures, and final stabilization must be achieved prior to termination of permit coverage. In arid,semi-arid,and drought-stricken areas where initiating vegetative stabilization measures immediately is infeasible, alternative non- vegetative stabilization measures must be employed as soon as practicable.Refer to Part III.F.2.(b)for complete erosion control and stabilization practice requirements. 3. Dewatering. Discharges from dewatering activities,including discharges from dewatering of trenches and excavations,are prohibited,unless managed by appropriate controls. 4. Pollution prevention measures. Design,install,implement, and maintain effective pollution prevention measures to minimize the discharge of pollutants.At a minimum,such measures must be designed,installed,implemented, and maintained to: (a) Minimize the discharge of pollutants from equipment and vehicle washing,wheel wash water,and other wash waters.Wash waters must be treated in a sediment basin or alternative control that provides equivalent or better treatment prior to discharge; (b) Minimize the exposure of building materials,building products,construction wastes,trash,landscape materials,fertilizers,pesticides,herbicides,detergents, sanitary waste,and other materials present on the site to precipitation and to stormwater; and (c) Minimize the discharge of pollutants from spills and leaks, and implement chemical spill and leak prevention and response procedures. 5. Prohibited discharges.The following discharges are prohibited: (a) Wastewater from wash out of concrete trucks,unless managed by an appropriate control(see Part V of the general permit); (b) Wastewater from wash out and cleanout of stucco,paint,form release oils,curing compounds and other construction materials; (c) Fuels,oils,or other pollutants used in vehicle and equipment operation and maintenance; and (d) Soaps or solvents used in vehicle and equipment washing. 6. Surface outlets.When discharging from basins and impoundments,utilize outlet structures that withdraw water from the surface,unless infeasible. Part IV. Stormwater Runoff from Concrete Batch Plants Discharges of stormwater runoff from concrete batch plants at regulated construction sites maybe authorized under the provisions of this general permit provided that the following requirements are met for concrete batch plant(s)authorized under this permit. If discharges of stormwater runoff from concrete batch plants are not covered under this general permit, then discharges must be authorized under an alternative general permit or individual permit. This permit does not authorize the discharge or land disposal of any wastewater from concrete batch plants at regulated construction sites. Authorization for these wastes must be obtained under an individual permit or an alternative general permit. Section A. Benchmark Sampling Requirements 1. Operators of concrete batch plants authorized under this general permit shall sample the stormwater runoff from the concrete batch plants according to the requirements Page 35 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR15o000 of this section of this general permit,and must conduct evaluations on the effectiveness of the SWP3 based on the following benchmark monitoring values: '-11.6 � Table 1.Benchmark Parameters / Benchmark Benchmark Value Sampling Sample Type Parameter Frequency Oil and Grease 15 mg/L 1/quarter(*I) (*2) Grab(*3) Total Suspended ioo mg/L 1/quarter(*I) (*2) Grab(*3) Solids pH 6.0-9.0 Standard I/quarter(*I) (*2) Grab(*3) Units Total Iron 1.3 mg/L I/quarter(*I) (*2) Grab(*3) (*I) When discharge occurs. Sampling is required within the first 30 minutes of discharge. If it is not practicable to take the sample, or to complete the sampling,within the first 3o minutes, sampling must be completed within the first hour of discharge. If sampling is not completed within the first 30 minutes of discharge,the reason must be documented and attached to all required reports and records of the sampling activity. (*2) Sampling must be conducted at least once during each of the following periods. The first sample must be collected during the first full quarter that a stormwater discharge occurs from a concrete batch plant authorized under this general permit. January through March April through June July through September October through December For projects lasting less than one full quarter, a minimum of one sample shall be collected,provided that a stormwater discharge occurred at least once following submission of the NOI or following the date that automatic authorization was obtained under Section II.E.2.,and prior to terminating coverage. (*3) A grab sample shall be collected from the stormwater discharge resulting from a storm event that is at least 0.I inches of measured precipitation that occurs at least 72 hours from the previously measurable storm event. The sample shall be collected downstream of the concrete batch plant, and where the discharge exits any BMPs utilized to handle the runoff from the batch plant,prior to commingling with any other water authorized under this general permit. 2. The permittee must compare the results of sample analyses to the benchmark values above, and must include this comparison in the overall assessment of the SWP3's effectiveness. Analytical results that exceed a benchmark value are not a violation of this permit, as these values are not numeric effluent limitations. Results of analyses are indicators that modifications of the SWP3 should be assessed and may be necessary to protect water quality.The operator must investigate the cause for each exceedance and must document the results of this investigation in the SWP3 by the end of the quarter following the sampling event. Page 36 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 The operator's investigation must identify the following: (16\ (a) any additional potential sources of pollution,such as spills that might have occurred, (b) necessary revisions to good housekeeping measures that are part of the SWP3, (c) additional BMPs,including a schedule to install or implement the BMPs,and (d) other parts of the SWP3 that may require revisions in order to meet the goal of the benchmark values. Background concentrations of specific pollutants may also be considered during the investigation. If the operator is able to relate the cause of the exceedance to background concentrations,then subsequent exceedances of benchmark values for that pollutant may be resolved by referencing earlier findings in the SWP3. Background concentrations may be identified by laboratory analyses of samples of stormwater runon to the permitted facility,by laboratory analyses of samples of stormwater run-off from adjacent non-industrial areas,or by identifying the pollutant is a naturally occurring material in soils at the site. Section B. Best Management Practices(BMPs) and SWP3 Requirements Minimum SWP3 Requirements—The following are required in addition to other SWP3 requirements listed in this general permit(including,but not limited to Part III.F.7. of this permit): 1. Description of Potential Pollutant Sources-The SWP3 must provide a description of potential sources(activities and materials)that may reasonably be expected to affect the quality of stormwater discharges associated with concrete batch plants authorized under this permit. The SWP3 must describe practices that that will be used to reduce r."\, the pollutants in these discharges to assure compliance with this general permit, including the protection of water quality, and must ensure the implementation of these practices. The following must be developed,at a minimum,in support of developing this description: (a) Drainage—The site map must include the following information: (1) the location of all outfalls for stormwater discharges associated with concrete batch plants that are authorized under this permit; (2) a depiction of the drainage area and the direction of flow to the outfall(s); (3) structural controls used within the drainage area(s); (4) the locations of the following areas associated with concrete batch plants that are exposed to precipitation:vehicle and equipment maintenance activities (including fueling,repair,and storage areas for vehicles and equipment scheduled for maintenance); areas used for the treatment, storage,or disposal of wastes;liquid storage tanks; material processing and storage areas; and loading and unloading areas; and (5) the locations of the following: any bag house or other dust control device(s); recycle/sedimentation pond,clarifier or other device used for the treatment of facility wastewater(including the areas that drain to the treatment device); areas with significant materials; and areas where major spills or leaks have occurred. (b) Inventory of Exposed Materials—A list of materials handled at the concrete batch plant that may be exposed to stormwater and that have a potential to Page 37 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 affect the quality of stormwater discharges associated with concrete batch plants that are authorized under this general permit. '11.4} (c) Spills and Leaks-A list of significant spills and leaks of toxic or hazardous pollutants that occurred in areas exposed to stormwater and that drain to stormwater outfalls associated with concrete batch plants authorized under this general permit must be developed,maintained, and updated as needed. (d) Sampling Data-A summary of existing stormwater discharge sampling data must be maintained,if available. 2. Measures and Controls-The SWP3 must include a description of management controls to regulate pollutants identified in the SWP3's"Description of Potential Pollutant Sources"from Part IV.B.i.(a)of this permit, and a schedule for implementation of the measures and controls. This must include,at a minimum: (a) Good Housekeeping-Good housekeeping measures must be developed and implemented in the area(s) associated with concrete batch plants. (1) Operators must prevent or minimize the discharge of spilled cement, aggregate(including sand or gravel),settled dust,or other significant materials from paved portions of the site that are exposed to stormwater. Measures used to minimize the presence of these materials may include regular sweeping or other equivalent practices. These practices must be conducted at a frequency that is determined based on consideration of the amount of industrial activity occurring in the area and frequency of precipitation,and shall occur at least once per week when cement or aggregate is being handled or otherwise processed in the area. (2) Operators must prevent the exposure of fine granular solids,such as cement,to stormwater.Where practicable,these materials must be stored in enclosed silos,hoppers or buildings,in covered areas,or under covering. (b) Spill Prevention and Response Procedures-Areas where potential spills that can contribute pollutants to stormwater runoff, and the drainage areas from these locations,must be identified in the SWP3. Where appropriate,the SWP3 must specify material handling procedures,storage requirements,and use of equipment. Procedures for cleaning up spills must be identified in the SWP3 and made available to the appropriate personnel. (c) Inspections-Qualified facility personnel(i.e., a person or persons with knowledge of this general permit,the concrete batch plant, and the SWP3 related to the concrete batch plant(s)for the site)must be identified to inspect designated equipment and areas of the facility specified in the SWP3.The inspection frequency must be specified in the SWP3 based upon a consideration of the level of concrete production at the facility,but must be a minimum of once per month while the facility is in operation.The inspection must take place while the facility is in operation and must, at a minimum,include all areas that are exposed to stormwater at the site,including material handling areas,above ground storage tanks,hoppers or silos, dust collection/containment systems, truck wash down and equipment cleaning areas. Follow-up procedures must be used to ensure that appropriate actions are taken in response to the inspections. Records of inspections must be maintained and be made readily available for inspection upon request. (d) Employee Training-An employee training program must be developed to educate personnel responsible for implementing any component of the SWP3, or personnel otherwise responsible for stormwater pollution prevention,with the provisions of the SWP3. The frequency of training must be documented in Page 38 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 the SWP3, and at a minimum,must consist of one training prior to the Clib\ initiation of operation of the concrete batch plant. (e) Record Keeping and Internal Reporting Procedures-A description of spills and similar incidents,plus additional information that is obtained regarding the quality and quantity of stormwater discharges, must be included in the SWP3. Inspection and maintenance activities must be documented and records of those inspection and maintenance activities must be incorporated in the SWP3. (f) Management of Runoff-The SWP3 shall contain a narrative consideration for reducing the volume of runoff from concrete batch plants by diverting runoff or otherwise managing runoff,including use of infiltration,detention ponds, retention ponds,or reusing of runoff. 3. Comprehensive Compliance Evaluation—At least once per year,one or more qualified personnel(i.e.,a person or persons with knowledge of this general permit, the concrete batch plant,and the SWP3 related to the concrete batch plant(s)for the site)shall conduct a compliance evaluation of the plant. The evaluation must include the following. (a) Visual examination of all areas draining stormwater associated with regulated concrete batch plants for evidence of,or the potential for,pollutants entering the drainage system. These include but are not limited to: cleaning areas, material handling areas,above ground storage tanks,hoppers or silos, dust collection/containment systems, and truck wash down and equipment cleaning areas. Measures implemented to reduce pollutants in runoff(including structural controls and implementation of management practices)must be evaluated to determine if they are effective and if they are implemented in accordance with the terms of this permit and with the permittee's SWP3. The (111.1\ operator shall conduct a visual inspection of equipment needed to implement the SWP3,such as spill response equipment. (b) Based on the results of the evaluation,the following must be revised as appropriate within two weeks of the evaluation: the description of potential pollutant sources identified in the SWP3(as required in Part W.B.1., "Description of Potential Pollutant Sources"); and pollution prevention measures and controls identified in the SWP3(as required in Part IV.B.2., "Measures and Controls"). The revisions may include a schedule for implementing the necessary changes. (c) The permittee shall prepare and include in the SWP3 a report summarizing the scope of the evaluation,the personnel making the evaluation,the date(s)of the evaluation,major observations relating to the implementation of the SWP3,and actions taken in response to the findings of the evaluation. The report must identify any incidents of noncompliance. Where the report does not identify incidences of noncompliance,the report must contain a statement that the evaluation did not identify any incidence(s),and the report must be signed according to 3o TAC§305.128,relating to Signatories to Reports. (d) The Comprehensive Compliance Evaluation may substitute for one of the required inspections delineated in Part IV.B.2.(c) of this general permit. Section C. Prohibition of Wastewater Discharges Wastewater discharges associated with concrete production including wastewater disposal by land application are not authorized under this general permit. These wastewater discharges must be authorized under an alternative TCEQ water quality permit or otherwise disposed of in an authorized manner. Discharges of concrete truck wash out at construction sites maybe authorized if conducted in accordance with the requirements of Part V of this general permit. Page 39 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Part V. Concrete Truck Wash Out Requirements This general permit authorizes the wash out of concrete trucks at construction sites regulated under Sections II.E.1.,2.,and 3.of this general permit,provided the following requirements are met. Authorization is limited to the land disposal of wash out water from concrete trucks. Any other direct discharge of concrete production waste water must be authorized under a separate TCEQ general permit or individual permit. 1. Direct discharge of concrete truck wash out water to surface water in the state, including discharge to storm sewers,is prohibited by this general permit. 2. Concrete truck wash out water shall be discharged to areas at the construction site where structural controls have been established to prevent direct discharge to surface waters,or to areas that have a minimal slope that allow infiltration and filtering of wash out water to prevent direct discharge to surface waters. Structural controls may consist of temporary berms,temporary shallow pits,temporary storage tanks with slow rate release, or other reasonable measures to prevent runoff from the construction site. 3. Wash out of concrete trucks during rainfall events shall be minimized. The direct discharge of concrete truck wash out water is prohibited at all times, and the operator shall insure that its BMPs are sufficient to prevent the discharge of concrete truck wash out as the result of rainfall or stormwater runoff. 4. The discharge of wash out water must not cause or contribute to groundwater contamination. 5. If a SWP3 is required to be implemented,the SWP3 shall include concrete wash out areas on the associated site map. Part VI. Retention of Records The permittee must retain the following records for a minimum period of three(3)years from the date that a NOT is submitted as required by Part II.E.3. For activities in which an NOT is not required,records shall be retained for a minimum period of three(3)years from the date that the operator terminates coverage under Section II.F.3. of this permit. Records include: 1. A copy of the SWP3; 2. All reports and actions required by this permit,including a copy of the construction site notice; 3. All data used to complete the NOI,if an NOI is required for coverage under this general permit; and 4. All records of submittal of forms submitted to the operator of any MS4 receiving the discharge and to the secondary operator of a large construction site,if applicable. Part VII. Standard Permit Conditions 1. The permittee has a duty to comply with all permit conditions. Failure to comply with any permit condition is a violation of the permit and statutes under which it was issued,and is grounds for enforcement action,for terminating,revoking, or denying coverage under this general permit,or for requiring a discharger to apply for and obtain an individual TPDES permit. 2. Authorization under this general permit may be suspended or revoked for cause. Filing a notice of planned changes or anticipated non-compliance by the permittee does not stay any permit condition. The permittee must furnish to the executive director,upon request and within a reasonable time,any information necessary for the executive director to determine whether cause exists for revoking,suspending, or Page 4o Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 terminating authorization under this permit. Additionally,the permittee must provide to the executive director,upon request, copies of all records that the permittee is required to maintain as a condition of this general permit. 3. It is not a defense for a discharger in an enforcement action that it would have been necessary to halt or reduce the permitted activity to maintain compliance with the permit conditions. 4. Inspection and entry shall be allowed under TWC Chapters 26-28,Texas Health and Safety Code§§361.032-361.o33 and 361.037, and 4o CFR§122.41(i).The statement in TWC§26.014 that commission entry of a facility shall occur according to an establishment's rules and regulations concerning safety,internal security,and fire protection is not grounds for denial or restriction of entry to any part of the facility or site,but merely describes the commission's duty to observe appropriate rules and regulations during an inspection. 5. The discharger is subject to administrative,civil, and criminal penalties, as applicable,under TWC Chapter 7 for violations including but not limited to the following: (a) negligently or knowingly violating the federal CWA§§3oi,302,306,307,308, 318,or 405,or any condition or limitation implementing any sections in a permit issued under CWA§402,or any requirement imposed in a pretreatment program approved under CWA§§4o2(a)(3)or 4o2(b)(8); (b) knowingly making any false statement, representation,or certification in any record or other document submitted or required to be maintained under a permit,including monitoring reports or reports of compliance or noncompliance; and (c) knowingly violating§303 of the federal CWA, and placing another person in imminent danger of death or serious bodily injury. 6. All reports and other information requested by the executive director must be signed by the person and in the manner required by 3o TAC§305.128(relating to Signatories to Reports). 7. Authorization under this general permit does not convey property or water rights of any sort and does not grant any exclusive privilege. 8. The permittee shall take all reasonable steps to minimize or prevent any discharge in violation of this permit that has a reasonable likelihood of adversely affecting human health or the environment. 9. The permittee shall at all times properly operate and maintain all facilities and systems of treatment and control(and related appurtenances)which are installed or used by the permittee to achieve compliance with the conditions of this permit. Proper operation and maintenance also includes adequate laboratory controls and appropriate quality assurance procedures.This provision requires the operation of back-up or auxiliary facilities or similar systems which are installed by a permittee only when the operation is necessary to achieve compliance with the conditions of the permit. 10. The permittee shall comply with the reporting requirements in 4o CFR§122.41(1),as applicable. Part VIII. Fees 1. A fee of must be submitted along with the NOI: (a) $325 if submitting a paper NOI,or (b) $225 if submitting an NOI electronically. Page 41 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 2. Fees are due upon submission of the NOI. An NOI will not be declared administratively complete unless the associated fee has been paid in full. 3. No separate annual fees will be assessed for this general permit. The Water Quality Annual Fee has been incorporated into the NOI fees as described above. l Page 42 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Appendix A: Automatic Authorization (1111 : Periods of Low Erosion Potential by County-Eligible Date Ranges Andrews: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Ector: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Archer: Dec. 15-Feb.14 Edwards: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Armstrong: Nov. 15-Apr.30 El Paso: Jan. 1-Jul. 14,or May 15-Jul. Bailey: Nov. -Apr.30,or Nov. 15-May 31,or Jun. 1-Aug. 14,or Jun. 15-Sept. 14, 14 or Jul. 1-Oct. 14,or Jul. 15-Oct.31,or Aug. 1-Apr.30,or Aug. 15-May 14,or Baylor: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Sept. 1-May 30,or Oct. 1-Jun. 14,or Borden: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Nov. 1-Jun. 30,or Nov. 15-Jul. 14 Brewster: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Fisher: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Briscoe: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Floyd: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Brown: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Foard: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Callahan: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Gaines: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Carson: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Garza: Nov. 15-Apr. 30 Castro: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Glasscock: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Childress: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Hale: Nov. 15.-Apr. 30 Cochran: Nov. 1-Apr.30,or Nov. 15- Hall: Feb. -Mar.30 May 14 Hanford: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Coke: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Hardeman: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 (1111.6\ Coleman: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Hartley: Nov. 15-Apr. 30 Collingsworth: Jan. 1-Mar.30, or Dec. 1- Haskell: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Feb. 28 Hockley: Nov. 1-Apr. 14,or Nov. 15- Concho: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Apr.30 Cottle: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Howard: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Crane: Nov. -Apr.3o Hudspeth: Nov. 1-May 14 Crockett: Nov. 15-Jan. 14,or Feb. 1- Hutchinson: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Mar.3o Irion: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Crosby: Nov.15-Apr. 30 Jeff Davis: Nov. 1-Apr.30 or Nov. 15- Culberson: Nov. 1-May 14 May 14 Dallam: Nov. 1-Apr. 14,or Nov. 15-Apr. Jones: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 30 Kent: Nov.15-Jan. 14 or Feb. 1-Mar.30 Dawson: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Kerr: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Deaf Smith: Nov.15-Apr.3o Kimble: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Dickens: Nov. 15-Jan. 14, or Feb. 1-Mar. 30 King: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Dimmit: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Kinney: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Donley: Jan. 1-Mar.30, or Dec. 1-Feb. Knox: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 28 Lamb: Nov. 1-Apr. 14,or Nov.15-Apr. Eastland: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 30 Page 43 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Loving: Nov. 1-Apr.30,or Nov. 15-May Scurry: Nov. 15-Apr.30 �4 Shackelford: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Lubbock: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Sherman: Nov.15-Apr.30 Lynn: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Stephens: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Martin: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Sterling: Nov. 15-Apr. 30 Mason: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Stonewall: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Maverick: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Sutton: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 McCulloch: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Swisher: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Menard: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Taylor: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Midland: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Terrell: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Mitchell: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Terry: Nov. 15-Apr. 30 Moore: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Throckmorton: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Motley: Nov. 15-Jan. 14,or Feb. 1-Mar. Tom Green: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 30 Nolan: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Upton: Nov. 15-Apr. 30 Oldham: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Uvalde: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Parmer: Nov. 1-Apr. 14,or Nov. 15-Apr. Val Verde: Nov. 15-Jan. 14, or Feb. 1- Mar.30 30 Pecos: Nov.15-Apr. 3o Ward: Nov. 1-Apr. 14,or Nov. 15-Apr. 30 Potter: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Wichita: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Presidio: Nov. 1-Apr.30, or Nov. 15- May 14 Wilbarger: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 Randall: Nov. 15-Apr.3o Winkler: Nov.1-Apr.30,or Nov. 15- May 14 Reagan: Nov. 15-Apr.30 Yoakum: Nov. 1-Apr.30, or Nov. 15- Real: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 May 14 Reeves: Nov. 1-Apr.30,or Nov. 15-May Young: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 14 Wheeler: Jan. 1-Mar.30,or Dec. 1-Feb. Runnels: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 28 Schleicher: Dec.15-Feb. 14 Zavala: Dec. 15-Feb. 14 J Page 44 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Appendix B: Erosivity Index(EI)Zones in Texas ("1"4`, r�.r of.rQ a a . I. ti k r R.r n t m 't'ia d••..1,g*aia..... , u -3 ! -7 ""eaar,�c,. s. ar ::.r e: as e� a a q1'9 a a -6, , F NIP 3.i9_@,,g m ill g.- am._,_ .r- t © �.:� 6 4 • a's rr at a .41 a a.i. s of era11, *ki 7 7•� 1� , '��. ., _ a,neaa a N..,r i 1.i'ar;.-...; F'- • ' :.t' •a .r•I:6 r ta a aA m 47 Is e m et�, tt - -".. ar...sa..-.. c.. .. aa,o • k 1i ,.,, ra a -.a- a i .F . :�.c droll,_�. :: le ti, - a ^vr•. A 4 a .'a a a a a as n T. 4.§.. t --r ee.' g.p'• ,{*.--4 ,.. „I $"$4-ts :e� e c a®c tc m �A ter+. ..��,_,i?P r3 s s ..}ti` s.+al,'r1 m a a s a r n a • 'k! �a a•-eh IP s' 'ro at•.. awe �7.�� t it i ,.a 1-, a a as ��' i 4 m • - '� ._ a i �"�La 1P' I maa4_aai 1 �8i,1 _ :�. �_ I' ,* '..,;«a+ ; 'erer'r 47 ' m a es a a. es a le'.F�er,•9''Ili �: °y'- �t lam` a1. rah ...� � •.a. ��qq '�c Ill j -: •g -a a -a m a r am.r± . - , na rm�e p: as e s.a,yr- naua r• P..-sr-;, • @ r sna _.a. u .m.ems_ r 'al '%,,ew s as �3. e '* }r r n c i g a 4 ' ME c� >�,m �� :i.e'a�a a`p- ,Iir a a' s. r r. .g,r�, i. �'1 y.•, {,.,a n a a."r"m..ram can on ram e.� ear. • .:6.-a @_ r' e^r? ,e ha is r• raa •�rs ib a'e i s� .....4 VIES v m. _ram ma ma, �ear -- e e a, a ca. au..,,• 'e9 s.,rr;; .r "NQ r r r Q•imar . ma e3 am�' 8 a 1,'L�� ma a•«1 aaam na.r . - a,rd"' ,, •a �� aaam'tom'._J'L^SS�' `G 3 ,, C a;jai a a K r..4..4.a rasa'a a a a,l�;- , ®: sin,+s, .a ® r mm T. roc'. ,er sS"®a m;.;1, r: ..4;? 1,64 a'a asaaaara ®a otaw. tmtmaram 7nr • ' f i. i € . � epga 5aa a s „ a g a r a' r e' it r• a o r r e a . "r dF>.,�n • 71 _,inaa„-;.a r''a 7%!• aa•r-!,a as -ems salt =..:® — r:�, ram..•+r aat e e e.s• •• a b9 s a 'a a' ..A I. i to a a a•m ..,.,,zev,�® rasa arx em r ., .!*, 4 at a} 5.� a a a a a "•a�'e� a _-_ .-¢, ..,-a ,- .'a- ? ,• � a a•''# �' 4' r'-'ta a e' .s;ta i° 1 ei , .aa sanca=.r _., _ — .• ...r.,,,_,,,,, .. . .. .. _ 8,9 i,'.a'a. is a"t ti�aaaa a er ,,,, m 'G.cam©— w �'``'� • tE tt8.. r, as as 6;160', 'a`�s, +.t r..- c�.3= ti , g r.� e� _ i a i aaa,at P...**aaaaaa alr s� a ... ri.k,.s 4., �" S'yy a�, Eli 'r��'P 3:a: t a' m4e_ R ea a'Ce a41.2. ear r+a� __ _ _�24` :y"' Z • •V a . • a a a r, a e e C a g.m ms to ,.._ _ " 4 _,p at r:a`a,F/asap ap-'f t e. '.a`afi'a.'.aw,.aam ss saM'iser 4_ p::4 3 N. • Pi abs ar 7 m s•a�:ses a+`r �i w� f ��Yy 4�m_ta! CIIIIIN , ,.. ,=I=1, .....):::'..,„,... --k,-.11..f., ,,,r, r i,.r"li,r7. •_ a. h ,.r _. ! :Ili 4 . -;Y r. Ji a ' z r ' F.,t-' sy� a Adapted from Chapter 2 of USDA Agriculture Handbook 703:`Predicting Soil Erosion by Water:A Guide to Conservation Planning With the Revised Universal Soil Loss Equation(RUSLE),"U.S.Department of Agriculture,Agricultural Research Service Page 45 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXR150000 Appendix C: Isoerodent Map 7 . ..„ _ .......„,. _ It alri swallialararAlPsiewit miuNiPrm Irlaritral idatriorpiparemiiiirodylit trariiirs ff N rAjfAi i 'fig Low is i .1-,,:iiiiimufamithririsiagivAi leit.--josirldiri—iirmirrinek iltitaakt411"1/5"iliallriiirriligi" nil 111111111.11111111161091111%htilinialw IrC14 ' _30 P Iiiilliarila111119111,11161114114101107141.I OT4 reitfillUffillirinir i lik 07/0111111.400.10.111 DO Ir ' IA kl Jh ir ,1* PeriMidlirailrek sOpiiiim,400wiro perilL to with, isilairiableraltA0111#4100- Ntisfri,V iir rim Mr";rim rtfir,Altar,74024r. �L 3 4-r kw 1-.' • mar will � � �9�� r,�..�.:c. VHS.fl 1 Will' _ *waim INV" It ow 2°"WM I ler kt6 ill OE -0a.— eii 1 T--__ Adapted from Chapter 2 of USDA Agriculture Handbook 703:`Predicting Soil Erosion by Water:A Guide to Conservation Planning With the Revised Universal Soil Loss Equation(RUSLE),"U.S.Department of Agriculture,Agricultural Research Service n Page 46 Construction General Permit TPDES General Permit TXRi50000 Appendix D: Erosivity Indices for EI Zones in Texas Periods: El# 1/1 1/16 1/31 2/15 3/1 3/i6 3/31 4/15 4/30 5/15 5/30 6/14 6/29 7/14 7/29 8/13 8/28 9/12 9/27 10/12 10/2711/11 11/26 12/11 12/31 89 0 1 1 2 3 4 7 2 8 27 38 48 55 62 69 76 83 90 94 97 98 99- 100 100 100 90 0 1 2 3 4 6 8 13 21 29 37 46 54 6o 65 69 74 81 87 92 95 97 98 99 100 91 o 0 0 0 1 1 1 26 16 29 39 46 53 60 67 74 81 88 95 99 99 100 100 100 92 o 0 0 0 1 1 1 26 16 29 39 46 53 60 67 74 81 88 95 99 99 100 100 100 93 0 1 1 2 3 4 6 8 13 25 40 49 56 62 67 72 76 8o 85 91 97 98 99 99 100 94 0 1 2 4 6 8 10 15 21 29 38 47 53 57 61 65 7o 76 83 88 91 94 96 98 100 95 0 1 3 5 7 9 11 14 18 27 35 41 46 51 57 62 68 73 79 84 89 93 96 98 100 96 0 2 4 6 9 12 17 23 30 37 43 49 54 58 62 66 7o 74 78 82 86 90 94 97 100 97 0 1 3 5 7 10 14 20 28 37 48 56 61 64 68 72 77 81 86 89 92 95 98 99 100 io6 0 3 6 9 13 17 21 27 33 38 44 49 55 61 67 71 75 78 81 84 86 90 94 97 100 Each period begins on the date listed in the table above and lasts until the day before the following period. The final period begins on December i1 and ends on December 31. Table adapted from Chapter 2 of USDA Agriculture Handbook 703:`Predicting Soil Erosion by Water:A Guide to Conservation Planning With the Revised Universal Soil Loss Equation(RUSLE),"U.S.Department of Agriculture, (1.1116 Agricultural Research Service Page 47 TCEQ Office Use Only Permit No.: RN: CN: Region: (.111b\ imum 46 TCEQ Notice of Intent (NOI) for Stormwater Discharges Associated with Construction Activity under TPDES General Permit (TXR150oo0) IMPORTANT: • Use the INSTRUCTIONS to fill out each question in this form. • Use the CHECKLIST to make certain all you filled out all required information. Incomplete applications WILL delay approval or result in automatic denial. • Once processed your permit can be viewed at: http://www2.tceq.texas.gov/wq dpa/index.cfm ePERMITS: Sign up now for online NOI: https://www3.tceq.texas.gov/steers/index.cfm Pay a$225 reduced application fee by using ePermits. APPLICATION FEE: • You must pay the$325 Application Fee to TCEQ for the paper application to be complete. • Payment and NOI must be mailed to separate addresses. • Did you know you can pay on line? • Go to https://www .tceq.texas.gov/epay/index.cfm • Select Fee Type: GENERAL PERMIT CONSTRUCTION STORM WATER DISCHARGE NOI APPLICATION • Provide your payment information below,for verification of payment: ❑Mailed Check/Money Order No.: Name Printed on Check: ❑EPAY Voucher No.: Is the Payment Voucher copy attached? ❑ Yes RENEWAL: Is this NOI a Renewal of an existing General Permit Authorization? (Note:A permit cannot be renewed after June 3, 2o13.) ❑Yes The Permit number is: TXR15 (If a permit number is not provided, a new number will be assigned.) ❑No i) OPERATOR (Applicant) a) If the applicant is currently a customer with TCEQ,what is the Customer Number(CN) issued to this entity? You may search for your CN at: http://wwwl2.tceq.texas.gov/crpub/index.cfin?fuseaction=cost.CustSearch CN TCEQ 20022(03/05/2013) Page 1 b) What is the Legal Name of the entity(applicant) applying for this permit? (The legal name must be spelled exactly as filed with the Texas Secretary of State, County,or in the legal document forming the entity.) c) What is the name and title of the person signing the application? The person must be an executive official meeting signatory requirements in TAC 305.44(a)• Prefix(Mr.Ms.Miss): First/Last Name: Suffix: Title: Credential: d) What is the Operator Contact's (Responsible Authority) contact information and mailing address as recognized by the US Postal Service(USPS)? You may verify the address at: http://zip4.usps.com/zip4/welcomejsp Phone #: ext: Fax#: E-mail: Mailing Address: Internal Routing(Mail Code, Etc.): City: State: ZIP Code: If outside USA: Territory: Country Code: Postal Code: e) Indicate the type of Customer(The instructions will help determine your customer type): ❑Individual ❑ Limited Partnership ❑ Sole Proprietorship-DBA ❑Joint Venture El General Partnership ❑ Corporation ❑Trust ❑ Estate ❑ Federal Government El State Government ❑County Government ❑ City Government ❑Other Government f) Independent Operator? El Yes El No (If governmental entity, subsidiary, or part of a larger corporation, check"No".) g) Number of Employees: ❑0-20; ❑21-100; 1=1l01-250; ❑251-500; or ❑501 or higher h) Customer Business Tax and Filing Numbers: (REQUIRED for Corporations and Limited Partnerships. Not Required for Individuals, Government, or Sole Proprietors) State Franchise Tax ID Number: Federal Tax ID: Texas Secretary of State Charter (filing)Number: DUNS Number(if known): 2) APPLICATION CONTACT If TCEQ needs additional information regarding this application,who should be contacted? Is the application contact the same as the applicant identified above? ❑Yes,go to Section 3). ❑ No, complete section below. Prefix(Mr. Ms. Miss): First/Last Name: Suffix: Title: Credential: TCEQ 20022(03/05/2013) Page 2 Organization Name: (111 , Phone No.: ext: Fax Number: E-mail: Mailing Address: Internal Routing(Mail Code,Etc.): City: State: ZIP Code: Mailing Information if outside USA: Territory: Country Code: Postal Code: 3) REGULATED ENTITY(RE)INFORMATION,ON PROJECT OR SITE If the site of your business is part of a larger business site or if other businesses were located at this site before yours, a Regulated Entity Number(RN) may already be assigned for the larger site. Use the RN assigned for the larger site. Search TCEQ's Central.Registry to see if the larger site may already be registered as a regulated site at: http://wwwl2.tceq.texas.gov/crpub/index.cfm?fuseaction=regent.RNSearth. If the site is found,provide the assigned Regulated Entity Reference Number and provide the information for the site to be authorized through this application below. The site information for this authorization may vary from the larger site information. a) TCEQ issued RE Reference Number(RN): RN b) Name of project or site(the name known by the community where located): c) In your own words,briefly describe the primary business of the Regulated Entity: (Do not repeat the SIC and NAICS code): d) County(or counties if> 1) e) Latitude: Longitude: f) Does the site have a physical address? ['Yes, complete Section A for a physical address. ❑No, complete Section B for site location information. Section A: Enter the physical address for the site. Verify the address with USPS. If the address is not recognized as a delivery address,provide the address as identified for overnight mail delivery, 911 emergency or other online map tools to confirm an address. Physical Address of Project or Site: Street Number: Street Name: City: State: Texas ZIP Code: TCEQ 20022(03/05/2013) Page 3 Section B: Enter the site location information. If no physical address (Street Number&Street Name),provide a written location access description to the site. (Ex.: located 2 miles west from intersection of Hwy 290 &IH35 accessible on Hwy 290 South) City where the site is located or, if not in a city,what is the nearest city: State: Texas ZIP Code where the site is located: 4) GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS'' a) Is the project/site located on Indian Country Lands? ❑ Yes-If the answer is Yes,you must obtain authorization through EPA, Region 6. ❑ No b) Is your construction activity associated with a facility that,when completed,would be associated with the exploration,development, or production of oil or gas or geothermal resources? ❑ Yes-If the answer is Yes,you maybe under jurisdiction of the Railroad Commission of Texas and may need to obtain authorization through EPA, Region 6. ❑ No c) What is the Primary Standard Industrial Classification (SIC) Code that best describes the construction activity being conducted at the site? Primary SIC Code: d) If applicable,what is the Secondary SIC Code(s): e) What is the total number of acres disturbed? f) Is the project site part of a larger common plan of development or sale? ❑ Yes-If the answer is Yes,the total number of acres disturbed can be less than 5 acres. ❑ No -If the answer is No,the total number of acres disturbed must be 5 or more. If the total number of acres disturbed is less than 5 then the project site does not qualify for coverage through this Notice of Intent. Coverage will be denied. See the requirements in the general permit for small construction sites. g) What is the name of the first water body(s)to receive the stormwater runoff or potential runoff from the site? h) What is the segment number(s) of the classified water body(s)that the discharge will eventually reach? fl TCEQ 20022(03/05/2013) Page 4 i) Is the discharge into an MS4? ❑ Yes-If the answer is Yes,provide the name of the MS4 operator below. ❑ No If Yes,provide the name of the MS4 operator: Note: The general permit requires you to send a copy of the NOI to the MS4 operator. j) Are any of the surface water bodies receiving discharges from the construction site on the latest EPA-approved CWA 3o3(d) List of impaired waters? ❑ Yes-If the answer is Yes,provide the name(s) of the impaired water body(s)below. ❑ No If Yes,provide the name(s) of the impaired water body(s): k) Is the discharge or potential discharge within the Recharge Zone,Contributing Zone, or Contributing Zone within the Transition Zone of the Edwards Aquifer as defined in 3o TAC Chapter 213? ❑ Yes-If the answer is Yes,complete certification below by checking"Yes." ❑ No I certify that a copy of the TCEQ approved Plan required by the Edwards Aquifer Rule (3o TAC Chapter 213)is either included or referenced in the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan. ❑ Yes (111 TCEQ 20022(03/05/2013) Page 5 5) CERTIFICATION Check Yes to the certifications below. Failure to indicate Yes to ALL items may result in denial of coverage under the general permit. a) I certify that I have obtained a copy and understand the terms and conditions of the Construction General Permit(TXRi50000). El Yes b) I certify that the full legal name of the entity applying for this permit has been provided and is legally authorized to do business in Texas. ❑Yes c) I understand that a Notice of Termination(NOT)must be submitted when this authorization is no longer needed. ['Yes d) I certify that a Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan has been developed,will be implemented prior to construction and to the best of my knowledge and belief is compliant with any applicable local sediment and erosion control plans, as required in the general permit TXR150000. Note: For multiple operators who prepare a shared SWP3,the confirmation of an operator maybe limited to its obligations under the SWP3 provided all obligations are confirmed by at least one operator. ❑Yes :Operator Certification I, Typed or printed name Title certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gather and evaluate the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system, or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information,the information submitted is,to the best of my knowledge and belief,true, accurate,and complete. I am aware there are significant penalties for submitting false information,including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. I further certify that I am authorized under 3o Texas Administrative Code 305.44 to sign and submit this document, and can provide documentation in proof of such authorization upon request. Signature: Date: (Use blue ink) TCEQ 20022(03/05/2013) Page 6 NOTICE,OF INTENT CHECKLIST (TXRi50000 • Did you complete everything? Use this checklist to be sure! • Are you ready to mail your form to TCEQ? Go to the General Information Section of the Instructions for mailing addresses. This checklist is for use by the operator to ensure a complete application. Missing information may result in denial of coverage under the general permit. (See NOI process description in the Instructions) Application Fee: If paying by Check: 0 Check was mailed separately to the TCEQs Cashier's Office. (See Instructions for Cashier's address and Application address.) 0 Check number and name on check is provided in this application. If using ePay: El The voucher number is provided in this application or a copy of the voucher is attached. PERMIT NUMBER: n Permit number provided—if this application is for renewal of an existing authorization. OPERATOR INFORMATION-Confirm each item is completer 0 Customer Number(CN)issued by TCEQ Central Registry 0 Legal name as filed to do business in Texas (Call TX SOS 512/463-5555) 0 Name and title of responsible authority signing the application 0 Mailing address is complete&verifiable with USPS. www.usps.com n Phone numbers/e-mail address 0 Type of operator(entity type) 0 Independent operator 0 Number of employees 0 For corporations or limited partnerships —Tax ID and SOS filing numbers El Application contact and address is complete&verifiable with USPS.http://www.usps.com REGULATED ENTITY(RE) INFORMATION ON PROJECT OR SITE-Confirm each item is complete: 0 Regulated Entity Reference Number(RN) (if site is already regulated by TCEQ) 0 Site/project name/regulated entity 0 Latitude and longitude http://www.tceq.texas..ov/gis/sgmaview.html 0 County 0 Site/project physical address. Do not use a rural route or post office box. El Business description GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS -Confirm each item is complete: 0 Indian Country Lands—the facility is not on Indian Country Lands 0 Construction activity related to facility associated to oil,gas, or geothermal resources 0 Standard Industrial Classification(SIC) Code www.osha.gov/oshstats/sicser.html 0 Acres disturbed is provided and qualifies for coverage through a NOI 0 Common plan of development or sale 0 Receiving water body(s) 0 Segment number(s) 0 Impaired water body(s) El MS4 operator n Edwards Aquifer rule ,CERTIFICATION ` 0 Certification statements have been checked indicating"Yes" 0 Signature meets 3o Texas Administrative Code(TAC) 305.44 and is original. TCEQ-2oo22 Checklist(03/05/2013) Page 1 Notice of Intent (NOI) for Stormwater Discharges Associated with Construction Activity under TPDES General Permit (TXR150000) General Information and Instructions GENERAL INFORMATION Where to Send the Notice of Intent(NOI): BY REGULAR U.S. MAIL BY OVERNIGHT/EXPRESS MAIL Texas Commission on Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Environmental Quality Stormwater Processing Center Stormwater Processing Center (MC228) (MC228) P.O. Box 13087 12100 Park 35 Circle Austin,Texas 78711-3087 Austin,TX 78753 TCEQ Contact List: Application—status and form questions: 512/239-3700, swpermit@tceq.texas.gov Technical questions: 512/239-4671, swgp@tceq.texas.gov Environmental Law Division: 512/239-0600 Records Management-obtain copies of forms: 512/239-0900 Reports from databases (as available): 512/239-DATA (3282) Cashier's office: 512/239-0357 or 512/239-0187 (11111b\ •— Notice of Intent Process When your NOI is received by the program,the form will be processedas follows: 1) Administrative Review: Each item on the form will be reviewed for a complete response. In addition,the operator's legal name must be verified with Texas Secretary of State as valid and active(if applicable). The address(s) on the form must be verified with the US Postal service as receiving regular mail delivery. Never give an overnight/express mailing address. 2) Notice of Deficiency: If an item is incomplete or not verifiable as indicated above, a notice of deficiency(NOD)will be mailed to the operator. The operator will have 3o days to respond to the NOD. The response will be reviewed for completeness. 3) Acknowledgment of Coverage: An Acknowledgment Certificate will be mailed to the operator. This certificate acknowledges coverage under the general permit. -or- Denial of Coverage: If the operator fails to respond to the NOD or the response is inadequate, coverage under the general permit maybe denied. If coverage is denied,the operator will be notified. General Permit (Your Permit) For NOIs submitted electronically through ePermits,provisional coverage under the general permit begins immediately following confirmation of receipt of the NOI form by the TCEQ. For paper NOIs,provisional coverage under the general permit begins 7 days after a completed NOI is postmarked for delivery to the TCEQ. TCEQ-2oo22 Instructions(03/05/2oi3) Page 1 You should have a copy of your general permit when submitting your application. You may view and print your permit for which you are seeking coverage, on the TCEQ web site http://www.tceq.texas.gov. Search using key word TXR150000. General Permit Forms The Notice of Intent(NOI),Notice of Termination(NOT), and Notice of Change (NOC) (including instructions) are available in Adobe Acrobat PDF format on the TCEQ web site http://www.tceq.texas.gov. Change in Operator An authorization under the general permit is not transferable. If the operator of the regulated entity changes,the present permittee must submit a Notice of Termination and the new operator must submit a Notice of Intent. The NOT and NOI must be submitted no later than io days prior to the change in Operator status. TCEQ Central Registry Core Data Form The Core Data Form has been incorporated into this form. Do not send a Core Data Form to TCEQ. After final acknowledgment of coverage under the general permit,the program will assign a Customer Number and Regulated Entity Number. You can find the information on the Central Registry web site at http://wwwl2.tceq.texas.gov/crpub/index.cfm. You can search by the Regulated Entity(RN), Customer Number(CN) or Name(Permittee), or by your permit number under the search field labeled"Additional ID". Capitalize all letters in the permit number. The Customer(Permittee) is responsible for providing consistent information to the TCEQ, and '".°) for updating all CN and RN data for all authorizations as changes occur. For General Permits, a Notice of Change form must be submitted to the program area. Fees associated with a General Permit Payment of the fee maybe made by check or money order,payable to TCEQ, or through EPAY (electronic payment through the web). Application Fee: This fee is required to be paid at the time the NOI is submitted. Failure to submit payment at the time the application is filed will cause delays in acknowledgment or denial of coverage under the general permit. Mailed Payments: Payment must be mailed under separate cover at one of the addresses below using the attached Application Fee submittal form. (DO NOT SEND A COPY OF THE NOI WITH THE APPLICATION FEE SUBMITTAL FORM) BY REGULAR U.S. MAIL BY OVERNIGHT/EXPRESS MAIL Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Financial Administration Division Financial Administration Division Cashier's Office, MC-214 Cashier's Office, MC-214 P.O. Box 13088 12100 Park 35 Circle Austin,TX 78711-3088 Austin,TX 78753 TCEQ-2oo22 Instructions(03/05/2013) Page 2 ePAY Electronic Payment: http://www.tceq.texas.gov/epay When making the payment you must select Water Quality, and then select the fee category "General Permit Construction Storm Water Discharge NOI Application". You must include a copy of the payment voucher with your NOI. Your NOI will not be considered complete without the payment voucher. INSTRUCTIONS FOR FILLING OUT THE NOI FORM Renewal of General Permit. Dischargers holding active authorizations under the expired General Permit are required to submit a NOI to continue coverage. The existing permit number is required. If the permit number is not provided or has been terminated, expired, or denied a new permit number will be issued. 1. Operator(Applicant) a)Enter assigned Customer Number(CN) TCEQ's Central Registry will assign each customer a number that begins with CN,followed by nine digits.This is not a permit number, registration number, or license number. If this customer has not been assigned a CN,leave the space for the CN blank. If this customer has already been assigned this number, enter the permittee's CN. b) Legal Name Provide the current legal name of the permittee, as authorized to do business in Texas.The name must be provided exactly as filed with the Texas Secretary of State (SOS), or on other legal documents forming the entity,that is filed in the county where doing business.You may contact the SOS at 512/463-5555,for more information related to filing in Texas. If filed in the county where doing business, provide a copy of the legal documents showing the legal name. c) Person Signing Application Provide information about person signing section 5) Certification. d) Operator Contact's (Responsible Authority) Contact Information and Mailing Address Provide a complete mailing address for receiving mail from the TCEQ.The address must be verifiable with the US Postal Service at http://www.usps.com for regular mail delivery(not overnight express mail). If you find that the address is not verifiable using the USPS web search, please indicate the address is used by the USPS for regular mail delivery. The area code and phone number should provide contact to the operator. Leave Extension blank if not applicable. The fax number and e-mail address are optional and should correspond to the operator. e)Type of Customer(Entity Type) Check only one box that identifies the type of entity. Use the descriptions below to identify the appropriate entity type. Note that the selected entity type also indicates the name that must be provided as an applicant for a permit, registration or authorization. TCEQ-2oo22 Instructions (03/05/2013) Page 3 Sole Proprietorship —DBA A sole proprietorship is a customer that is owned by only one person and has not been incorporated. This business may: • be under the person's name • have its own name (doing business as or d.b.a.) • have any number of employees If the customer is a Sole Proprietorship or DBA,the`legal name'of the individual business`owner'must be provided. The DBA name is not recognized as the`legal name' of the entity.The DBA name maybe used for the site name(regulated entity). Individual An individual is a customer who has not established a business,but conducts an activity that needs to be regulated by the TCEQ. Partnership • A customer that is established as a partnership as defined by the Texas Secretary of State Office (TX SOS).A Limited Partnership or Limited Liability Partnership (Partnership)is required to file with the Texas Secretary of State.A General Partnership or Joint Venture is not required to register with the state. • Partnership (Limited Partnership or Limited Liability Partnership):A limited partnership is defined in the Act as a partnership formed by two or more persons under the provisions of Section 3 of the Uniform Limited Partnership Act (Art. 6132a, Revised Civil Statutes of Texas) and having as members one or more general partners and one or more limited partners.The limited partners as such are not bound by the obligations of the partnership. Limited partners may not take part in the day-to-day operations of the business.A Limited Partnership must file with the Texas Secretary of State.A registered limited liability partnership is a general or limited partnership that is registered with the Texas Secretary of State.The partnership's name must contain the words "Registered Limited Liability Partnership"or the abbreviation"L.L.P." as the last words or letters of its name. • General Partnership:A general partner may or may not invest,participates in running the partnership and is liable for all acts and debts of the partnership and any member of it.A General Partnership does not have limited partners. For a General Partnership,there is no registration with the state or even written agreement necessary for a general partnership to be formed.The legal definition of a partnership is generally stated as "an association of two or more persons to carry on as co-owners a business for profit" (Revised Uniform Partnership Act§ 101 [1994]). • Joint Venture:A joint venture is but another name for a special partnership. It might be distinguished from a general partnership in that the latter is formed for the transaction of a general business,while a joint venture is usually limited to a single transaction.That is, a joint venture is a special combination of persons in the nature of a partnership engaged in the joint prosecution of a particular transaction for mutual benefit or profit. Corporation A customer meets all of these conditions: • is a legally incorporated entity under the laws of any state or country • is recognized as a corporation by the Texas Secretary of State TCEQ-2oo22 Instructions (03/05/2013) Page 4 • has proper operating authority to operate in Texas. • The corporation's `legal name'as filed with the Texas Secretary of State must be provided as applicant. An`assumed'name of a corporation is not recognized as the`legal name'of the entity. Government Federal, state, county, or city government(as appropriate) The customer is either an agency of one of these levels of government or the governmental body itself. The government agency's `legal name'must be provided as the applicant. A department name or other description of the organization should not be included as a part of the`legal name'as applicant. Trust or Estate A trust and an estate are fiduciary relationships governing the trustee/executor with respect to the trust/estate property. Other Government A utility district,water district,tribal government, college district, council of governments, or river authority.Write in the specific type of government. f)Independent Entity Check No if this customer is a subsidiary,part of a larger company, or is a governmental entity. Otherwise, check Yes. g)Number of Employees Check one box to show the number of employees for this customer's entire company, at all locations.This is not necessarily the number of employees at the site named in the application. h) Customer Business Tax and Filing Numbers These are required for Corporations and Limited Partnerships. These are not required for Individuals, Government, and Sole Proprietors. State Franchise Tax ID Number Corporations and limited liability companies that operate in Texas are issued a franchise tax identification number. If this customer is a corporation or limited liability company, enter this number here. Federal Tax ID All businesses, except for some small sole proprietors, individuals, or general partnerships should have a federal taxpayer identification number(TIN). Enter this number here. Use no prefixes, dashes, or hyphens. Sole proprietors, individuals, or general partnerships do not need to provide a federal tax ID. TX SOS Charter (filing)Number Corporations and Limited Partnerships required to register with the Texas Secretary of State are issued a charter or filing number. You may obtain further information by calling SOS at 512/463-5555. DUNS Number Most businesses have a DUNS (Data Universal Numbering System) number issued by Dun and Bradstreet Corp. If this customer has one, enter it here. TCEQ-2oo22 Instructions(03/05/2013) Page 5 2. APPLICATION CONTACT Provide the name,title and communication information of the person that TCEQ can contact for additional information regarding this application. 3. REGULATED ENTITY(RE)INFORMATION ON PROJECT OR SITE a) Regulated Entity Reference Number(RN) A number issued by TCEQ's Central Registry to sites (a location where a regulated activity occurs) regulated by TCEQ.This is not a permit number, registration number, or license number. If this regulated entity has not been assigned an RN,leave this space blank. If the site of your business is part of a larger business site, a Regulated Entity Number(RN) may already be assigned for the larger site. Use the RN assigned for the larger site. Search TCEQ's Central Registry to see if the larger site may already be registered as a regulated site at: http://wwwl 2.tceq.texas.gov/crpub/index.cfm?fuseaction=regent.RNSearch If the site is found,provide the assigned Regulated Entity Reference Number(RN) and provide the information for the site to be authorized through this application. The site information for this authorization may vary from the larger site information. An example is a chemical plant where a unit is owned or operated by a separate corporation that is accessible by the same physical address of your unit or facility. Other examples include industrial parks identified by one common address but different corporations have control of defined areas within the site. In both cases, an RN would be assigned for the physical address location and the permitted sites would be identified separately under the same RN. b) Site/Project Name/Regulated Entity Provide the name of the site as known by the public in the area where the site is located.The name you provide on this application will be used in the TCEQ Central Registry as the Regulated Entity name. c) Description of Activity Regulated In your own words,briefly describe the primary business that you are doing that requires this authorization. Do not repeat the SIC Code description. d) County Identify the county or counties in which the regulated entity is located. e) Latitude and Longitude Enter the latitude and longitude of the site in degrees, minutes, and seconds or decimal form. For help obtaining the latitude and longitude, go to: http://www.tceq.texas.gov/gis/sgmaview.html or http://nationalmap.gov/ustopo f) Site/Project(RE) Physical Address/Location Information Enter the complete address for the site in Section A if the address can be validated through the US Postal Service. If the physical address is not recognized as a USPS delivery address,you may need to validate the address with your local police (911 service) or through an online map site used to locate a site. Please confirm this to be a complete and valid address. Do not use a rural route or post office box for a site location. TCEQ-2oo22 Instructions (03/05/2013) Page 6 If a site does not have an address that includes a street(or house) number and street name, enter NO ADDRESS for the street name in Section A. In Section B provide a complete written location description. For example: "The site is located 2 miles west from intersection of Hwy 290 &IH35,located on the southwest corner of the Hwy 290 South bound lane." Provide the city(or nearest city) and zip code of the facility location. 4. GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS a) Indian Country Lands If your site is located on Indian Country Lands,the TCEQ does not have authority to process your application. You must obtain authorization through EPA, Region 6, Dallas. Do not submit this form to TCEQ. b) Construction activity associated with facility associated with exploration, development, or production of oil, gas, or geothermal resources If your activity is associated with oil and gas exploration, development, or production,you may be under jurisdiction of the Railroad Commission of Texas and may need to obtain authorization from EPA Region 6. For more information, see: http://info.sos.state.tx.us/pls/pub/readtac$ext.TacPage?s1=R&app=9&p dir=&p rloc=&p tlo c=&p ploc=&pg=i&p tac=&ti=16&pt=i&ch=3&r1=20 Construction activities associated with a facility related to oil,gas or geothermal resources may include the construction of a well site;treatment or storage facility; underground hydrocarbon or natural gas storage facility; reclamation plant; gas processing facility; compressor station; terminal facility where crude oil is stored prior to refining and at which refined products are stored solely for use at the facility; a carbon dioxide geologic storage facility; and a gathering, transmission, or distribution pipeline that will transport crude oil or natural gas,including natural gas liquids,prior to refining of such oil or the use of the natural gas in any manufacturing process or as a residential or industrial fuel. Where required by federal law,discharges of stormwater associated with construction activities under the Railroad Commission's jurisdiction must be authorized by the EPA and the Railroad Commission of Texas, as applicable.Activities under Railroad Commission of Texas jurisdiction include construction of a facility that,when completed,would be associated with the exploration, development, or production of oil or gas or geothermal resources, such as a well site;treatment or storage facility; underground hydrocarbon or natural gas storage facility; reclamation plant; gas processing facility; compressor station;terminal facility where crude oil is stored prior to refining and at which refined products are stored solely for use at the facility; a carbon dioxide geologic storage facility under the jurisdiction of the Railroad Commission of Texas; and a gathering,transmission, or distribution pipeline that will transport crude oil or natural gas, including natural gas liquids,prior to refining of such oil or the use of the natural gas in any manufacturing process or as a residential or industrial fuel.The Railroad Commission of Texas also has jurisdiction over stormwater from land disturbance associated with a site survey that is conducted prior to construction of a facility that would be regulated by the Railroad Commission of Texas. Under 33 U.S.C. §1342(1)(2) and§1362(24), EPA cannot require a permit for discharges of stormwater from"field activities or operations associated with{oil and gas}exploration,production,processing,or treatment operations, or transmission facilities, including activities necessary to prepare a site for drilling and for the movement and placement of drilling equipment,whether or not such field activities or operations may be considered to be construction activities"unless the discharge is contaminated by contact with any overburden, raw material,intermediate product,finished product,byproduct, or waste product located on the site of the facility. Under§3.8 of this title(relating to Water Protection),the Railroad TCEQ-2oo22 Instructions(03/05/2013) Page 7 Commission of Texas prohibits operators from causing or allowing pollution of surface or subsurface water. Operators are encouraged to implement and maintain best management practices (BMPs)to minimize discharges of pollutants, including sediment,in stormwater during construction activities to help ensure protection of surface water quality during storm events. c) Primary Standard Industrial Classification (SIC) Code Provide the SIC Code that best describes the construction activity being conducted at this site. Common SIC Codes related to construction activities include: • 1521-Construction of Single Family Homes • 1522- Construction of Residential Bldgs. Other than Single Family Homes • 1541-Construction of Industrial Bldgs. and Warehouses • 1542-Construction of Non-residential Bldgs, other than Industrial Bldgs. and Warehouses • 1611-Highway and Street Construction, except Highway Construction • 1622- Bridge,Tunnel, and Elevated Highway Construction • 1623 -Water, Sewer, Pipeline and Communications, and Power Line Construction For help with SIC Codes,go to: http://wvay.osha.gov/p1s/imis/sicsearch.html d) Secondary SIC Code Secondary SIC Code(s) may be provided. Leave blank if not applicable. For help with SIC Codes, go to: http://www.osha.gov/p1s/imis/siesearch.html e) Total Number of Acres Disturbed Provide the approximate number of acres that the construction site will disturb. Construction activities that disturb less than one acre,unless they are part of a larger common plan that disturbs more than one acre, do not require permit coverage. Construction activities that disturb between one and five acres,unless they are part of a common plan that disturbs more than five acres, do not require submission of an NOI. Therefore,the estimated area of land disturbed should not be less than five, unless the project is part of a larger common plan that disturbs five or more acres. Disturbed means any clearing, grading, excavating, or other similar activities. If you have any questions about this item,please contact the stormwater technical staff by phone at(512)239-4671 or by email at swgp@tceq.texas.gov. f) Common Plan of Development Construction activities that disturb less than five acres do not require submission of an NOI unless they are part of a common plan of development or for sale where the area disturbed is five or more acres.Therefore,the estimated area of land disturbed should not be less than five, unless the project is part of a larger common plan that disturbs five or more acres. Disturbed means any clearing, grading, excavating, or other similar activities. For more information on"What is a common plan of development?"go to: www.tceq.texas.gov/permitting/stormwater/common plan of development steps.html For further information, go to the TCEQ stormwater construction webpage at: www.tceq.texas.gov/goto/construction and search for"Additional Guidance and Quick Links".If TCEQ-2oo22 Instructions (03/o5/2013) Page 8 you have any further questions about this item,please call the stormwater technical staff at raN, (512)239-4671. g) Identify the water body(s)receiving stormwater runoff The stormwater may be discharged directly to a receiving stream or through a MS4 from your site. It eventually reaches a receiving water body such as a local stream or lake,possibly via a drainage ditch.You must provide the name of the water body that receives the discharge from the site(a local stream or lake). If your site has more than one outfall you need to include the name of the first water body for each outfall,if they are different. h) Identify the segment number(s) of the classified water body(s) Identify the classified segment number(s) receiving a discharge directly or indirectly. Go to the following link to find the segment number of the classified water body where stormwater will flow from the site: www.tceq.texas.gov/waterquality/monitoring/viewer.html You may also find the segment number in TCEQ publication GI-316: www.tceq.texas.gov/publications/gi/gi-316 If the discharge is into an unclassified receiving water and then crosses state lines prior to entering a classified segment, select the appropriate watershed: • moo (Canadian River Basin) • 0200 (Red River Basin) • 0300 (Sulfur River Basin) • 0400 (Cypress Creek Basin) • 0500 (Sabine River Basin) Call the Water Quality Assessments section at(512)239-4671 for further assistance. i) Discharge into MS4 — Identify the MS4 Operator The discharge may initially be into a municipal separate storm sewer system (MS4). If the stormwater discharge is into an MS4,provide the name of the entity that operates the MS4 where the stormwater discharges. An MS4 operator is often a city,town, county, or utility district,but possibly can be another form of government. Please note that the Construction General Permit requires the Operator to supply the MS4 with a copy of the NOI submitted to TCEQ. For assistance,you may call the technical staff at(512)239-4671. j) Surface Water bodies on list of impaired waters —Identify the impaired water body(s) Indicate Yes or No if any surface water bodies receiving discharges from the construction site are on the latest EPA-approved CWA 3o3(d) List of impaired waters. Provide the name(s) of surface water bodies receiving discharges or potential discharges from the construction site that are on the latest EPA-approved CWA 3o3(d) List of impaired waters.The EPA-approved CWA 3o3(d) List of impaired waters in Texas can be found at: www.tceq.texas.gov/waterquality/assessment/3o5 3o3.htm1 NOTE: Do not use any"draft" documents. riihN TCEQ-2oo22 Instructions(03/05/2013) Page 9 k) Discharges to the Edwards Aquifer Recharge Zone and Certification See maps on the TCEQ website to determine if the site is located within the Recharge Zone, Contributing Zone, or Contributing Zone within the Transition Zone of the Edwards Aquifer at: www.tceq.texas.gov/field/eapp/viewer.html If the discharge or potential discharge is within the Recharge Zone, Contributing Zone, or Contributing Zone within the Transition Zone of the Edwards Aquifer, a site specific authorization approved by the Executive Director under the Edwards Aquifer Protection Program(3o TAC Chapter 213) is required before construction can begin. The certification must be answered"Yes"for coverage under the Construction General Permit. The TCEQ approved plan must be readily available for TCEQ staff to review at the time that the NOI is submitted. The general permit requires the approved Contributing Zone Plan or Water Pollution Abatement Plan to be included or referenced as a part of the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan. For questions regarding the Edwards Aquifer Protection Program, contact the appropriate TCEQ Regional Office. For projects in Hays,Travis and Williamson Counties:Austin Regional Office, 12100 Park 35 Circle,Austin,TX 78753, 512-339-2929. For Projects in Bexar, Comal, Kinney,Medina and Uvalde Counties: TCEQ San Antonio Regional Office, 14250 Judson Rd., San Antonio,TX 7$233-448o, 210-49o-3096. 5. CERTIFICATIONS Failure to indicate Yes to ALL of the certification items may result in denial of coverage under the general permit. a) Certification of Understanding the Terms and Conditions of Construction General Permit(TXRi 0000) Provisional coverage under the Construction General Permit(TXR150000)begins 7 days after the completed paper NOI is postmarked for delivery to the TCEQ. (Electronic applications submitted through ePermits have immediate provisional coverage). You must obtain a copy and read the Construction General Permit before submitting your application.You may view and print the Construction General Permit for which you are seeking coverage at the TCEQ web site: www.tceq.texas.gov/goto/construction b) Certification of Legal Name The full legal name of the applicant as authorized to do business in Texas is required.The name must be provided exactly as filed with the Texas Secretary of State (SOS), or on other legal documents forming the entity,that is filed in the county where doing business.You may contact the SOS at(512)463 5555,for more information related to filing in Texas. c) Understanding of Notice of Termination A permittee shall terminate coverage under this Construction General Permit through the submittal of a NOT when the operator of the facility changes,final stabilization has been reached,the discharge becomes authorized under an individual permit, or the construction activity never began at this site. d) Certification of Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan The SWP3 identifies the areas and activities that could produce contaminated runoff at your site and then tells how you will ensure that this contamination is mitigated. For example, in describing your mitigation measures,your site's plan might identify the devices that collect and TCEQ-2oo22 Instructions (03/05/2o13) Page io filter stormwater,tell how those devices are to be maintained, and tell how frequently that maintenance is to be carried out.You must develop this plan in accordance with the TCEQ general permit requirements.This plan must be developed and implemented before you complete this NOI.The SWP3 must be available for a TCEQ investigator to review on request. Operator Certification: The certification must bear an original signature of a person meeting the signatory requirements specified under 3o Texas Administrative Code(TAC) §305.44• IF YOU ARE A CORPORATION: The regulation that controls who may sign an NOI or similar form is 30 Texas Administrative Code§305.44(a)(1) (see below). According to this code provision, any corporate representative may sign an NOI or similar form so long as the authority to sign such a document has been delegated to that person in accordance with corporate procedures. By signing the NOI or similar form,you are certifying that such authority has been delegated to you. The TCEQ may request documentation evidencing such authority. IF YOU ARE A MUNICIPALITY OR OTHER GOVERNMENT ENTITY: The regulation that controls who may sign an NOI or similar form is 30 Texas Administrative Code§305.44(a)(3) (see below). According to this code provision, only a ranking elected official or principal executive officer may sign an NOI or similar form. Persons such as the City Mayor or County Commissioner will be considered ranking elected officials. In order to identify the principal executive officer of your government entity,it may be beneficial to consult your city charter, county or city ordinances, or the Texas statute(s) under which your government entity was formed.An NOI or similar document that is signed by a government official who is not a ranking elected official or principal executive officer does not conform to §305.44(a)(3).The signatory requirement may not be delegated to a government representative other than those identified in the regulation. By signing the NOI or similar form,you are certifying that you are either a ranking elected official or principal executive officer as required by the administrative code. Documentation demonstrating your position as a ranking elected official or principal executive officer may be requested by the TCEQ. If you have any questions or need additional information concerning the signatory requirements discussed above,please contact the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality's Environmental Law Division at(512)239-0600. 3o Texas Administrative Code §305.44• Signatories to Applications (a) All applications shall be signed as follows. (1) For a corporation,the application shall be signed by a responsible corporate officer. For purposes of this paragraph, a responsible corporate officer means a president, secretary,treasurer, or vice-president of the corporation in charge of a principal business function, or any other person who performs similar policy or decision-making functions for the corporation; or the manager of one or more manufacturing,production, or operating facilities employing more than 25o persons or having gross annual sales or expenditures exceeding $25 million(in second-quarter 198o dollars), if authority to sign documents has been assigned or delegated to the manager in accordance with corporate procedures. Corporate procedures governing authority to sign permit or post-closure order applications may provide for assignment or delegation to applicable corporate positions rather than to specific individuals. TCEQ-2oo22 Instructions(03/05/2013) Page i1 (2) For a partnership or sole proprietorship,the application shall be signed by a general partner or the proprietor, respectively. (3) For a municipality, state,federal, or other public agency,the application shall be signed by either a principal executive officer or a ranking elected official. For purposes of this paragraph, a principal executive officer of a federal agency includes the chief executive officer of the agency, or a senior executive officer having responsibility for the overall operations of a principal geographic unit of the agency(e.g., regional administrator of the EPA). TCEQ-2oo22 Instructions (03/05/2o1.3) Page 12 Texas Commission on Environmental Quality General Permit Payment Submittal Form Use this form to submit your Application Fee only if you.are mailing your payment. • Complete items 1 through 5 below: • Staple your check in the space provided at the bottom of this document. • Do not mail this form with your NOI form. • Do not mail this form to the same address as your NOI. Mail this form and your check to: BY REGULAR U.S.MAIL BY OVERNIGHT/EXPRESS MAIL Texas Commission on Environmental Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Quality Financial Administration Division Financial Administration Division Cashier's Office,MC-214 Cashier's Office,MC-214 P.O. Box 13088 12100 Park 35 Circle Austin,TX 78711-3088 Austin,TX 78753 Fee Code: GPA General Permit: TXR150000 1. Check/Money Order No: 2. Amount of Check/Money Order: 3. Date of Check or Money Order: 4. Name on Check or Money Order: 5. NOI INFORMATION If the check is for more than one NOI,list each Project/Site(RE) Name and Physical Address exactly as provided on the NOI. DO NOT SUBMIT A COPY OF THE NOI WITH THIS FORM AS IT COULD CAUSE DUPLICATE PERMIT ENTRIES. See Attached List of Sites(If more space is needed,you may attach a list.) Project/Site(RE)Name: Project/Site(RE) Physical Address: Staple P e Check in This Space r TCEQ-20134(04/13/2oo6) Pagel Notice of Change (NOC) to an Authorization TCEQ Office Use Only (1111.1 Fi°1 for Stormwater Discharges Associated with RN it No.: Construction Activity under TPDES General CN: TCEQ Permit (TXR1 50000) *****IMPORTANT***** PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION AND INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE FILLING OUT THIS FORM. The form will be returned for one of the following reasons: 1)the permit number is not provided,invalid,or no longer active, 2) a wet ink signature of person meeting signatory requirements for permittee is not provided, 3)the current permittee is not the applicant,°and; 4)a requested change in operator'name is not a legal name change. THIS FORM CANNOT BE USED FOR A CHANGE IN OPERATOR. REFER TO YOUR GENERAL PERMIT. "- What is the Permit Number of the authorization to be changed? TXR15 A. APPLICANT INFFORMATION: Search°Central Registry at°wws 12.tcen:texas aovlcmub/ 1.Operator(Permittee) a. What is the full Legal Name of the current Operator as on the authorization? b. What is the TCEQ Central Registry Customer Number assigned to this Operator? CN 2.Permitted Site(required) What is the TCEQ Central Registry Regulated Entity Number assigned for this permitted site? RN B. REQUESTED CHANGE TO PERMITTED INFORMATION What information has changed or needs corrected? (Check one or more of the sections being updated and enter the new information in the corresponding section of this form.) ❑ Operator Legal Name Change with Texas Secretary of State(TX SOS). Go to Section 1 &/or 2 as applicable. (.1114"\, (Note: Permits are not transferable. If a change in entity has occurred,this NOC is not attainable.) ❑ Address and contact information for Operator,Billing for Annual Fee,or Discharge Monitoring Report forms. Site Information(Regulated Entity) (Note: Permits under a general permit are site specific. If a change in site location has occurred,this NOC is not attainable.) ElGeneral Characteristics relating to the regulated activity. 1. OPERATOR LEGAL NAME CHANGE a. What is the NEW active Legal Name with TX SOS or on other legal document? New Legal Name: b. What is the TX SOS Filing Number for us to confirm this official name change? (This is only applicable to Limited Partnership or Corporations.) 2. ADDRESS&CONTACT INFORMATION'CHANGE a. What mailing address and/or contact information has changed? (check one or more as applicable) Operator for permit correspondence ❑ Site(RE)Mailing Address and contact information Billing address/contact for Receiving Annual Fee 0 Reporting address/contact for Receiving Discharge Monitoring Statement Reports(DMRs) b. If you selected more than one,is the information to be updated the same for each selection? O Yes—Provide the updated information in the fields below. ▪No— Attachment 1 of the NOC is attached to this form,to provide the different addresses. ATTN or C/O: Address: Suite No./Bldg.No./Mail Code: City: State: ZIP Code: Country Mailing Information(if outside USA). Country Code: Postal Code: Phone No.: ( ) Ext: Fax No.: ( ) E-Mail: TCEQ-20391 (07/13/2007) Page 1 3. REGULATED ENTITY(RE) SITE INFORMATION CORRECTION a. Is this a change to the location of the permitted activity? ❑Yes- this requested change will not be processed since the authorizations are site specific. ❑No—go to next question. /) b. New or Corrected Name of Project or Site: c. Updated Physical Address(new 911 address): Street Number: Street Name: Bldg/Ste No. City: ZIP Code: County(Counties if>1): d. Update or Corrected location access description,if no physical address(Street Number&Street Name): e. Corrected Latitude: N Corrected Longitude: W 4. CHANGE IN CHARACTERISTICS PROVIDED ON ORIGINAL FORM Identify the specific change and provide the updated information. If an attachment is need,please reference it below. C. APPLICATION CONTACT If TCEQ needs additional information regarding this application,who should be contacted? 1. Name: Title: Company: 2.Phone No.: ( ) Ext: Fax No.: ( ) E-Mail: D. CERTIFICATION Operator Certification: Typed or printed name(REQ(JIRED) Title(REQUIRED) certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gather and evaluate the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons 111 who manage the system,or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information,the information submitted is,to the best of my knowledge and belief,true,accurate,and complete. I am aware there are significant penalties for submitting false information,including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. I further certify that I am authorized under 30 Texas Administrative Code§305.44 to sign and submit this document,and can provide documentation in proof of such authorization upon request. Signature: Date:_ (Use blue ink) (REQl.JIRED) (REQUIRED) TCEQ-20391 (07/13/2007) Page 2 (1111h\ Attachment 1 to a NOC Form for Providing Different Address& Contact Information Related to a Specific Permit under General Permit TXR150000 What is the Permit No.? TXR15 (REQIIRED) ADDITIONAL ADDRESS&CONTACT INFORMATION Fill in the changes as applicable. Incomplete and invalid addresses will not be used. Verify mailing addresses at USPS.com. Operator ATTN or C/O: Address: Suite No./Bldg.No./Mail Code: City: State: ZIP Code: Country Mailing Information(if outside USA). Country Code: Postal Code: Phone No.: ( ) Ext: Fax No.: ( ) E-Mail: Billing Address for Receiving Annual Fee Statement ATTN or C/O: Address: Suite No./Bldg.No./Mail Code: City: State: ZIP Code: Country Mailing Information(if outside USA). Country Code: Postal Code: Phone No.: ( ) Ext: Fax No.: ( ) E-Mail: Site(RE)Mailing Address ATTN or C/O: Address: Suite No./Bldg.No./Mail Code: City: State: ZIP Code: Country Mailing Information(if outside USA). Country Code: Postal Code: Phone No.: ( ) Ext: Fax No.: ( ) E-Mail: (111111 . TCEQ-20391 NOC Attachment 1(07/13/2007) Page 1 Notice of Change (NOC) to an Authorization for Stormwater Discharges Associated with Construction Activity under TPDES General Permit (TXR1 50000) General Information and Instructions GENERAL INFORMATION Where to Send the Notice of Change(NOC): BY REGULAR U.S.MAIL BY OVERNIGHT/EXPRESS MAIL Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Stormwater Processing Center (MC228) Stormwater Processing Center (MC228) P.O.Box 13087 12100 Park 35 Circle Austin,TX 78711-3087 Austin,TX 78753 TCEQ Contact list: Application Processing Questions relating to the status and form requirements: 512/239-3700 or email swpennit@tceq.texas.gov Technical Questions relating to the general permit: 512/239-4671 Environmental Law Division: ' 512/239-0600 Records Management for obtaining copies of forms submitted to TCEQ: I 512/239-0900 Information Services for obtaining reports from program data bases(as available):512/239-DATA (3282) Financial Administration's Cashier's office: 512/239-0357 or 512/239-0187 Notice of Change Process: When your NOC is received by the program,the form will be processed as follows: I 1. Administrative Review: The form will be reviewed to ensure the request is from the permittee(operator)on the authorization,the permit is active and initial coverage was acknowledged. Each item on the form will be reviewed for a complete response that qualifies for a NOC.In addition,the operator's legal name change must be verified with Texas Secretary of State(if applicable). The address(s)on the form must be verified with the US Postal service as an address receiving regular mail delivery.Never give an overnight/express mailing address. If an item is incomplete or not verifiable as indicated above,the operator may be notified by letter,phone call or email. In some instances as noted at the beginning of the form,the request may simply be returned. 2. NOC Confirmation: An updated Acknowledgment Certificate will be mailed to the operator only if the NOC is to change information provided on the acknowledgment certificate. The original coverage effective date will not change. General Permit(Your Permit) You may view and print your general permit on the TCEQ web site www.tceq.texas.gov. Enter the general permit number as the key word in the search box to locate the specific web page. General Permit Forms The Notice of Intent(NOI),Notice of Termination(NOT),and Notice of Change(NOC)with instructions are available in Adobe Acrobat PDF format on the TCEQ web site www.tceq.texas.gov. Change in Operator An authorization under the general permit is not transferable. If the operator of the regulated entity changes,the present permittee must submit a Notice of Termination and the new operator must submit a Notice of Intent. The NOI must be submitted not later than 10 days prior to the change in Operator status. Note that the NOT is effective on the postmarked date.It may be necessary to not terminate the existing permit until coverage by the new entity is confirmed. TCEQ Central Registry Core Data Form The Core Data Form has been incorporated into this form. Do not send a core data form to TCEQ. You can find the information on the Central Registry web site at wwwl2.tceq.texas.eov/crpub/. You can search by the Regulated Entity(RN),Customer Number(CN)or Name(Permittee),or by your permit number under the search field labeled "Additional ID". The Customer(Permittee)is responsible for providing consistent information to the TCEQ,and for updating all CN and RN data for all associated authorizations as changes occur. For General Permits,a Notice of Change form must be submitted to the program area for approval to update the CN and RN data in central registry. TCEQ-20391 NOC Instructions (07/13/2007) Page 1 INSTRUCTIONS FOR FILLING OUT THE NOC FORM A.Applicant Information(Operator) I. Provide the current permittee(s)full legal name as on the permit. b. Provide the TCEQ Issued Customer Number(CN)for the entity. Go to http://www12.tceq.fexas.gov/crpub/to locate your CN. If the name(s)provided do not match the current permittee name(s),this form will be returned. It is the responsibility of the permittee(s)to comply with the general permit. Note: If a change is being made to the CN and the CN has other TCEQ authorization types,it is the entity's responsibility to update those authorizations at the same time. If an authorization has been cancelled or terminated,the name can not be changed on the permit. Because of this,a new CN may be issued for the new name. 2. Provide the TCEQ Issued Regulated Entity number assigned for this permitted activity. Go to http://v w12.tceq.texas.Rov/crpub/ to locate your CN. If the site has changed or the information provided indicates a new location,this form will be returned. It is the responsibility of the(permittees)to comply with the general permit. B. REQUESTED CHANGE TO PERMITTED INFORMATION Check one or more of the available options indicating the information in the form that is to be updated. Provide the updated information in Section 1 for Legal Name Change, Section 2 for Address&Contact Information Change,Section 3 for Regulated Entity Site Information Change,or Section 4 for General Characteristics Change,as applicable. 1.LEGAL NAME CHANGE Provide the new legal name. If the entity is a Limited Partnership or Corporation,the name change must be verifiable with Texas Secretary of State. The TX SOS filing number must be provided to verify only a name change occurred. You may contact the SOS at 512/463-5555,for more information related to filing in Texas. If filed in the county where doing business,provide a copy of the legal documents showing the legal name change. Legal name changes of a Corporation and Limited Partnership will be verified with Texas Secretary of State. If the entity is filed as a new entity with a new filing number,then the change cannot be made through a NOC. The permits are not transferable. If the operator changes,the old entity must terminate their permit and the new entity must submit a form for a new permit. 2.ADDRESS&CONTACT INFORMATION CHANGE Indicate the type of address and contact information that has changed from the original NOI or last NOC submitted to TCEQ. If the address and/or contact information is the same for all types,then check each type and enter the information in the fields on the form. If some types have different information,then use the NOC ATTACHMENT I. The permit number MUST be written on ATTACHMENT 1 to indicate it is a part of the NOC form for the permit being updated. The updates cannot be made without reference to the submitted NOC form. Mailing Address The address MUST BE verifiable with the US Postal Service at www.usps.com.,for regular mail delivery(not overnight express mail). If you find that the address is not verifiable using the USPS web search,please indicate the address is used by the USPS for regular mail delivery. Failure to provide a valid mailing address will delay or prohibit us from updating the permit. Please note that address updates relating to a general permit authorization can ONLY be made through a Notice of Change. Address changes submitted through any other form can not be processed. 3. REGULATED ENTITY(RE)SITE INFORMATION CORRECTION The NOC form is only for use to update or correct information submitted on the original application or last NOC for the authorization. The authorization under a general permit is site specific. If this change is related to a new location,a Notice of Change is not attainable. Provide the updated site name,updated site addresses,and/or corrected latitude and longitude,as applicable to your NOC request. A new physical address for an existing location is usually the result of a newly assigned 911 address for emergencies. If providing a corrected latitude and longitude,enter the latitude and longitude of the site in either degrees,minutes,and seconds or decimal form.For help obtaining the latitude and longitude,go to: www.tceq.state.tx.us/gis/drgview.html or www.terraserver.microsoft.com/advfind.aspx. 4.GENERAL CHARACTERISTIC Indicate the change to information originally supplied. For example if the number of acreas of area disturbed has changed,then state:"The number acres of area disturbed has increase to 40 acres." C.Application Contact Provide the name,title and communication information of the person that TCEQ can contact for additional information regarding this application. TCEQ-20391 NOC Instructions (07/13/2007) Page 2 D. CERTIFICATIONS The certification must bear an original signature of a person meeting the signatory requirements specified under 30 Texas Administrative Code(TAC) §305.44. IF YOU ARE A CORPORATION: The regulation that controls who may sign an N OI or similar form is 30 Texas Administrative Code§305.44(a)(1)(see below). A ccording to this code provision,any corporate representative may sign an NOI or similar form so long as the authority to sign such a document has been delegated to that person in accordance with corporate pro cedures. By signing the NOI or si milar form,you are certifying that such authority has been deleg ated to you. The TCEQ may request documentation evidencing such authority. IF YOU ARE A MUNICIPALITY OR OTHER GOVERNMENT ENTITY: The regulation that contro Is who may sign an N OI or similar form is 30 Texas Administrative Code§305.44(a)(3)(see below). According to this code provision,only a ranking elected official or principal executive officer may sign an NOI or similar form. Persons such as the City Mayor or County Commissioner will be considered ranking elected officials. In order to identify the principal executive officer of your government entity,it may be beneficial to consult your city charter,county or city ordinances,or the Texas statute(s)under which your government entity was formed.An NOI or similar document that is signed b y a governm ent official who is not a rankin g elected official or princip al executive officer does not conform to §305.44(a)(3).The signatory requirement may not be delegated to a government representative other than those identified in the regulation.By signing the NOI or similar form,you are certifying that you are either a ranking elected official or principal executive officer as required by the administrative code. Documentation demonstrating your position as a ranking elected official or principal executive officer may be requested by the TCEQ. If you have any questions or need addition al information concerning the signatory requirements discussed above,please contact the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality's Environmental Law Division at 512/239-0600. 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44. Signatories to Applications. (a) All applications shall be signed as follows. (1) For a corporation,the application shall be signed by a responsible corporate officer. For purposes of this paragraph,a responsible corporate officer means a pres ident,secretary,treasurer,or v ice-president of the corpor ation in charge of a pr incipal business function,or any other person who performs si milar policy or decisi on-making functions for the corpor ation;or the manager of one or more manufacturin g,production,or operating facili ties employing m ore than 250 persons or having gross annual sales or expend itures exceeding $25 m illion(in sec ond-quarter 1980 dollars),if authority to sign docu ments has been assigned or de legated to the manager in accordance with corpor ate procedures. Corporate pro cedures governing authority to sign permit or post-closure order applicati ons may provide for assignment or delegation to applicable corporate positions rather than to specific individuals. (2) For a partnership or sole proprietorship,the application shall be signed by a general partner or the proprietor,respectively. (3) For a municipality,state,federal,or other public agency,the application shall be signed by either a principal executive officer or a ranking elected official. For purposes of this paragraph,a principal executive officer of a federal agency includes the chief executive officer of the agency,or a senior executive officer having responsibility for the overall operations of a principal geographic unit of the agency(e.g.,regional administrator of the EPA). TCEQ-20391 NOC Instructions (07/13/2007) Page 3 Notice of Termination (NOT) TCEQ Office Use Only Permit No.: w�e for Authorizations under RN: Iniimml TPDES General Permit TXR150000 CN: TCEQ ilii Sign up now for on,line NOT at https:!/www6.tceq.texas.gov/steers! Get your NOT Confirmation letter immediately after submitting the on line NOT form. What is the permit number to be terminated? Processing will be delayed without the permit number. TXR15 A. OPERATOR(applicant) 1. What is the Customer Number(CN)issued to this entity? CN 2. What is the full Legal Name of the current permittee? This must be the current permittee of the permit to be terminated. 3. What is the applicant's mailing address as recognized by the US Postal Service? Address: Suite No./Bldg.No./Mail Code: City: State: ZIP Code: Country Mailing Information(if outside USA). Country Code: Postal Code: 4. Phone No.: ( ) Extension: 5. Fax No.: ( ) E-mail Address: B. REGULATED ENTITY(RE)INFORMATION ON PROJECT OR SITE 1. What is the TCEQ Issued RE Reference Number(RN)? RN 2. Name of Project or Site as currently permitted): (11116\ (example:phase and name of subdivision or name of project that's unique to the site) ' 3. Physical Address of Project or Site as currently permitted: (enter in spaces below) Street Number: Street Name: City: ZIP Code: County(Counties if>1): 4. If no physical address(Street Number&Street Name),provide the written location access description to the site: C. REASON FOR TERMINATION Check the reason for termination: ❑Final stabilization has been achieved on all portions of the site that are the responsibility of the Operator and all silt fences and other temporary erosion controls have either been removed,or scheduled for removal as defmed in the SWP3. 0 Another permitted Operator has assumed control over all areas of the site that have not been finally stabilized,and temporary erosion controls that have been defmed in the SWP3 have been transferred to the new Operator. O The activity is now authorized under an alternate TPDES permit. ❑The activity never began at this site that is regulated under the general permit. D.CERTIFIC ATION I, Typed or printed name Title certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gather and evaluate the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system,or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information,the information submitted is,to the best of my knowledge and belief,true, accurate,and complete. I am aware there are significant penalties for submitting false information,including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. I further certify that I am authorized under 30 Texas Administrative Code§305.44 to sign and submit this document,and can provide documentation in proof of such authorization upon request. r‘. Signature: Date: (Use blue ink) TCEQ-20023(02/06/2007) Page 1 Notice of Termination (NOT) for Authorizations under TPDES General Permit TXR150000 General Information and Instructions GENERAL INFORMATION Where to Send the Notice of Intent(NOI): BY REGULAR U.S.MAIL BY OVERNIGHT/EXPRESS MAIL Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Stormwater Processing Center(MC228) Stormwater Processing Center(MC228) P.O.Box 13087 12100 Park 35 Circle Austin,TX 78711-3087 Austin,TX 78753 TCEQ Contact list: Application Processing Questions relating to the status and form requirements: 512/239-3700 or swpermit@tceq.texas.gov Technical Questions relating to the general permit: 512/239-4671 Environmental Law Division: 512/239-0600 Records Management for obtaining copies of forms submitted to TCEQ: 512/239-0900 Information Services for obtaining reports from program data bases(as available): 512/239-DATA(3282) Financial Administration's Cashier's office: 512/239-0357 or 512/239-0187 Notice of Termination Process: A Notice of Termination is effective on the date postmarked for delivery to TCEQ. When your NOT is received by the program,the form will be processed as follows: 1. Administrative Review: The form will be reviewed to confirm the following: rik\ • the permit number is provided • the permit is active and has been approved • the entity terminating the permit is the current permittee • the site information matches the original permit record • the form has the required original signature with title and date 2. Notice of Deficiency: If an item is incomplete or not verifiable as indicated above,a phone call will be made to the applicant to clear the deficiency. A letter will not be sent to the permittee if unable to process the form. 3. Confirmation of Termination: A Notice of Termination Confirmation letter will be mailed to the operator. General Permit(Your Permit) Coverage under the general permit begins 48 hours after a completed NOI is postmarked for delivery to the TCEQ. You should have a copy of your general permit when submitting your application. You may view and print your permit for which you are seeking coverage,on the TCEQ web site www.tceq.texas.nov General Permit Forms The Notice of Intent(NOI),Notice of Termination(NOT),and Notice of Change(NOC)with instructions are available in Adobe Acrobat PDF format on the TCEQ web site w vw.tceq.texas.aov. Change in Operator An authorization under the general permit is not transferable. If the operator or owner of the regulated entity changes,the present permittee must submit a Notice of Termination and the new operator must submit a Notice of Intent. The NOT and NOI must be submitted not later than 10 days prior to the change in Operator status. TCEQ Central Registry Core Data Form The Core Data Form has been incorporated into this form. Do not send a core data form to TCEQ. After final acknowledgment of coverage under the general permit,the program will assign a Customer Number(CN)and Regulated Entity Number(RN). For Construction Permits,a new RN will be assigned for each Notice of Intent filed with TCEQ,since construction project sites can overlap with other Customers. The RN assigned to your construction project will not be assigned to any other TCEQ authorization. You can find the information on the Central Registry web site at wwwl 2.tceq.texas.gov/crnub/. You can search by the Regulated Entity(RN),Customer Number(CN)or Name(Permittee),or by your permit number under the search field labeled "Additional ID". Capitalize all letters in the permit number. (11111111\ TCEQ-20023 Instructions(02/06/2007) Page 1 The Customer(Permittee)is responsible for providing consistent information to the TCEQ,and for updating all CN and RN data for all authorzations as "ails) changes occur. For General Permits,a Notice of Change form must be submitted to the program area. Annual Water Quality Fee: This fee is assessed to operators with an active authorization under the general permit on September 1 of each year. The operator will receive an invoice for payment of the annual fee in November of each year. The payment will be due 30 days from the invoice date. A 5% penalty will be assessed if the payment is received by TCEQ after the due date. Annual fee assessments cannot be waived as long as the authorization under the general permit is active on September 1. It's important for the operator to submit a Notice of Termination(NOT)when coverage under the general permit is no longer required.A NOT is effective on the postmarked date of mailing the form to TCEQ. It is recommended that the NOT be mailed using a method that documents the date mailed and received by TCEQ. •Mailed Payments: You must return your payment with the billing coupon provided with the billing statement. •ePAY Electronic Payment: Go to www6.tceo.texas.eov/epav/ You must enter your account number provided at the top portion of your billing statement. Payment methods include Mastercard,Visa,and electronic check payment(ACH). A transaction over$500 can only be made by ACH. INSTRUCTIONS FOR FILLING OUT THE NOT FORM A.OPERATOR(current permittee.) I.TCEQ Issued Customer Number(CN) 2. Legal Name of Operator The operator must be the same entity as previously submitted on the original Notice of Intent for the permit number provided. 3.Operator Mailing Address Provide a complete mailing address for receiving mail from the TCEQ. Update the address if different than previously submitted in the Notice of Intent or Notice of Change. 4.Phone Number,Fax Number,and E-mail Address Provide updated contact information. B.REGULATED ENTITY(RE)INFORMATION ON PROJECT OR SITE 1.Regulated Entity Reference Number(RN) 2.Site/Project Name/Regulated Entity Provide the name of the site as previously submitted in the Notice of Intent for the permit number provided. 3.Site/Project(RE)Physical Address Provide the physical address or location access description as previously submitted for the permit number provided. C. REASON FOR TERMINATION Indicate the reason for terminating the permit by checking one of the options. If the reason is not listed then provide an attachment that explains the reason for termination. Please read your general permit carefully to determine when to terminate your permit. Permits will not be reactivated after submitting a termination form. The termination is effective on the date postmarked for delivery to TCEQ. D. CERTIFICATIONS The certification must bear an original signature of a person meeting the signatory requirements specified under 30 Texas Administrative Code(TAC) §305.44. IF YOU ARE A CORPORATION: The regulation that controls who may sign an NOI or similar form is 30 Texas Administrative Code§305.44(a)(1)(see below). According to this code provision,any corporate representative may sign an NOI or similar form so long as the authority to sign such a document has been delegated to that person in accordance with corporate procedures. B y signing the NOI or similar form,you are certifying that such authority has been delegated to you. The TCEQ may request documentation evidencing such authority. IF YOU ARE A MUNICIPALITY OR OTHER GOVERNMENT ENTITY: The regulation that controls who may sign an NOI or similar form is 30 Texas Administrative Code§305.44(a)(3)(see below). According to this code provision,only a ranking elected official or principal executive officer may sign an NOI or similar form. Persons such as the City Mayor or County Commissioner will be considered ranking elected officials. In order to identify the principal executive officer of your government entity,it may be beneficial to consult your city charter,county or city ordinances,or the Texas statute(s)under which your government entity was formed.An NOI or similar document that is signed by a government official who is not a ranking elected official or principal executive officer does not conform to TCEQ-20023 Instructions(02/06/2007) Page 2 §305.44(a)(3).The signatory requirement may not be delegated to a government representative other than those identified in the regulation.By signing the NOI or similar form,you are certifying that you are either a ranking elected official or principal executive officer as required by the administrative code. Documentation demonstrating your position as a ranking elected official or principal executive officer may be requested by the TCEQ. If you have any questions or need additional information concerning the signatory requirements discussed above,please contact the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality's Environmental Law Division at 512/239-0600. 30 Texas Administrative Code §305.44. Signatories to Applications. (a) All applications shall be signed as follows. (1) For a corporation,the application shall be signed by a responsible corporate officer. For purposes of this paragraph,a responsible corporate officer means a president,secretary,treasurer,or v ice-president of the corpor ation in charge of a principal business function,or any other person who performs similar policy or decision-making functions for the corporation;or the manager of one or more manufacturing,production,or operating facilities employing more than 250 persons or having gross annual sales or expenditures exceeding$25 m illion(in second-quarter 1980 dollars),if authority to sign documents has been assigned or delegated to the manager in accordance with corporate procedures. Corporate procedures governing authority to sign permit or post-closure order applications may provide for assignment or delegation to applicable corporate positions rather than to specific individuals. (2) For a partnership or sole proprietorship,the application shall be signed by a general partner or the proprietor,respectively. (3) For a municipality,state,federal,or other public agency,the application shall be signed by either a principal executive officer or a ranking elected official. For purposes of this paragraph,a principal executive officer of a federal agency includes the chief executive officer of the agency,or a senior executive officer having responsibility for the overall operations of a principal geographic unit of the agency(e.g.,regional administrator of the EPA). • (lib\ TCEQ-20023 Instructions(02/06/2007) Page 3 MEW NiMiOffi PIMP Arai Y v. SMALL CONSTRUCTION SITE NOTICE FOR THE Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) Stormwater Program TPDES GENERAL PERMIT TXR150000 The following information is posted in compliance with Part II.E.2. of the TCEQ General Permit Number TXR150000 for discharges of stormwater runoff from small construction sites. Additional information regarding the TCEQ stormwater permit program may be found on the interriet at: http://www.tceq.state.tx.us/nav/permits/wq construction.html Operator Name: Contact Name and Phone Number: (11111*\ Project Description: Physical address or description of the site's location, estimated start date and projected end date, or date that disturbed soils will be stabilized Location of Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan: For Small Construction Activities Authorized Under Part II.E.2. (Obtaining Authorization to Discharge) the following certification must be completed: I (Typed or Printed Name Person Completing This Certification)certify under penalty of law that I have read and understand the eligibility requirements for claiming an authorization under Part II.E.2.of TPDES General Permit TXR150000 and agree to comply with the terms of this permit. A stormwater pollution prevention plan has been developed and will be implemented prior to construction, according to permit requirements. A copy of this signed notice is supplied to the operator of the MS4 if discharges enter an MS4. I am aware there are significant penalties for providing false information or for conducting unauthorized discharges, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. Signature and Title Date Date Notice Removed MS4 operator notified per Part II.F.3. C r_ rnaA taiga weir LARGE CONSTRUCTION SITE NOTICE FOR THE Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) Stormwater Program TPDES GENERAL PERMIT TXR150000 "SECONDARY OPERATOR "NOTICE This notice applies to secondary operators of construction sites operating under Part II.E.3. of the TPDES General Permit Number TXR150000 for discharges of stormwater runoff from construction sites equal to or greater than five acres, including the larger common plan of development. The information on this notice is required in Part III.D.2. of the general permit. Additional information regarding the TCEQ stormwater permit program may be found on the internet at: http://www.tceq.state.tx.us/nav/permits/wq construction.html Site-Specific TPDES Authorization Number: �} Operator Name: Contact Name and Phone Number: Project Description: Physical address or description of the site's location, and estimated start date and projected end date, or date that disturbed soils will be stabilized. Location of Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan(SWP3): For Large Construction Activities Authorized Under Part II.E.3. (Obtaining Authorization to Discharge) the following certification must be completed: I (Typed or Printed Name Person Completing This Certification)certify under penalty of law that I have read and understand the eligibility requirements for claiming an authorization under Part II.E.3. of TPDES General Permit TXR150000 and agree to comply with the terms of this permit. A stormwater pollution prevention plan has been developed and will be implemented prior to construction, according to permit requirements. A copy of this signed notice is supplied to the operator of the MS4 if discharges enter an MS4. I am aware there are significant penalties for providing false information or for conducting unauthorized discharges, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. Signature and Title Date Date Notice Removed MS4 operator notified per Part ILF.3. * Noma Nis! rSs!MI LARGE CONSTRUCTION SITE NOTICE FOR THE Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) Stormwater Program TPDES GENERAL PERMIT TXR150000 "PRIMARY OPERATOR"NOTICE This notice applies to construction sites operating under Part II.E.3. of the TPDES General Permit Number TXR150000 for discharges of stormwater runoff from construction sites equal to or greater than five acres, including the larger common plan of development. The information on this notice is required in Part III.D.2. of the general permit. Additional information regarding the TCEQ stormwater permit program may be found on the internet at: (010 http://www.tceq.state.tx.us/nav/permits/wq construction.html Site-Specific TPDES Authorization Number: Operator Name: Contact Name and Phone Number: Project Description: Physical address or description of the site's location, and estimated start date and projected end date, or date that disturbed soils will be stabilized Location of Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan: rPir a E z. SMALL CONSTRUCTION SITE NOTICE: LOW POTENTIAL FOR EROSION FOR THE Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) Stormwater Program TPDES GENERAL PERMIT TXR150000 The following information is posted in compliance with Part II.E.1. of the TCEQ General Permit Number TXR150000 for discharges of stormwater runoff from small construction sites automatically authorized based on low rainfall erosivity. Additional information regarding the TCEQ stormwater permit program may be found on the internet at: http://www.tceq.state.tx.us/nav/permits/wq constniction.html Operator Name: Contact Name and Phone Number: Project Description: (Physical address or description of the site's location, estimated start date and projected end date,or date that disturbed soils will be stabilized) For Small Construction Sites Authorized Under Part II.E.1., the following certification must be completed: I (Typed or Printed Name Person Completing This Certification)certify under penalty of law that I have read and understand the eligibility requirements for claiming an automatic authorization based on low rainfall erosivity under Part II.E.1. of TPDES General Permit TXR150000 and agree to comply with the terms of this permit. Construction activities at this site shall occur within a time period listed in Appendix A of the TPDES general permit for this county, that period beginning on and ending on . I understand that if construction activities continue past this period, all stormwater runoff must be authorized under a separate provision of the general permit. A copy of this signed notice is supplied to the operator of the MS4 if discharges enter an MS4. I am aware there are significant penalties for providing false information or for conducting unauthorized discharges, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. Signature and Title Date Date Notice Removed MS4 operator notified per Part ILF.3. CITY OF PEARLAND SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION Section 01566 SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Descriptions of measures and practices, in response to TPDES General Permit TXR 150000, which shall be used on the Work to eliminate or significantly minimize pollutants in discharges into Surface Water in the State by controlling erosion and m at h B Referencessedients tot Technicaleirsource.Specifications: 1. Section 01550—Stabilized Construction Exit 2. Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal 3. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls C Definitions: 1. Potential Water Pollutant- any substance that could potentially alter the physical, thermal, chemical, or biological quality of the Surface Water in the State, rendering the water harmful, detrimental, or injurious to humans, animal life, vegetation, or property, or to public health, safety or welfare, or rh\: impairs the usefulness or the public enjoyment of the water for any lawful or reasonable purpose. 1.02 MEAUSREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 2.0 PRODUCTS - NotUsed 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the erosion control practices described in the Plans and this Technical Specification. B Erosion and sediment control measures shall be in place prior to the start of any Work that exposes the soil, other than as specifically directed by the Engineer to allow soil testing and surveying. C The Contractor shall install, maintain, and inspect erosion and sediment control measures and practices that operate effectively and as specified in the Plans and in this or other Technical Specifications. 07/2006 01566- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION D Equipment and vehicles shall be prohibited by the Contractor from maneuvering on areas outside of the limits of construction or dedicated rights-of-way and easements. Damage caused by construction traffic to erosion and sediment control systems shall be repaired immediately by the Contractor. E The Contractor shall be responsible for collecting, storing, hauling, and disposing of spoil, silt, waste materials, and contaminated material resulting from erosion and sediment control measures as specified in this or other Technical Specifications and in compliance with applicable federal, state, and local rules and regulations. 3.02 EXPOSED SOIL A When soil is exposed as a result of clearing,grading,excavating,stockpiling,or other soil disturbing activities, the Contractor shall implement measures to effectively control erosion and prevent the escape of sediments from the Project Site. B Control measures may include the following practices: 1. Preserve existing vegetation to the extent possible. 2. Construct drainage swales, berms, or sediment basins. 3. Maintain grades to minimize the velocity of sheet flow over disturbed areas and promote evaporation and infiltration of storm water directly into the ground. 4. Install filter fabric fences or barriers, sediment traps, seepage basins, gabions, or storm drain inlet protection devices. 5. Utilize vegetative buffer strips, mulching, or riprap C When the placement of topsoil, bank sand, or other soil material is specified, after an area has been brought to grade and immediately prior to placement, loosen the subgrade discing or by scarifying to a depth of at least 2 inches to permit bonding to the subsoil. D When all soil disturbing activities have been completed, establish a perennial vegetative cover on all areas that are not paved, covered by permanent structures, or otherwise permanently stabilized. 3.03 DUST CONTROL A Implement control measures to minimize dust creation and movement on construction sites and roads and to prevent airborne sediment from reaching receiving streams or storm water conveyance systems, to reduce on-site and off-site damage, to prevent health hazards, and to improve traffic safety. B Control blowing dust by using one or more of the following measures: 1. Mulches bound with chemical binders. 2. Temporary vegetative cover. 3. Tillage to roughen surface and bring clods to the surface. 4. Irrigation by water sprinkling. 07/2006 01566-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION 5. Barriers using solid board fences, burlap fences, crate walls, bales of hay, or similar materials. C Implement dust control measures immediately whenever dust can be observed blowing on the Project Site. 3.04 DEMOLITION AREAS A Demolition activities which create large amounts of dust with significant concentrations of heavy metals or other potential water pollutants shall use methods described in this Section,3.03"Dust Control",to limit transport of airborne pollutants. However, water or slurry used to control dust contaminated with heavy metals or potential water pollutants shall be retained on the Project Site and shall not be allowed to run directly into watercourses or storm water conveyance systems by the appropriate use of control measures described in this Section. Methods of ultimate disposal of these materials shall be carried out in accordance with applicable local, state, and federal health and safety regulations. 3.05 SEDIMENT TRACKING A Minimize off-site tracking of sediments and the generation of dust by construction vehicles, keeping the streets clean or construction debris and mud, by implementing rb.\ one or more of the following control measures: 1. Restrict all ingress and egress to stabilized construction exits. 2. Stabilize areas used for staging, parking, storage or disposal. 3. Stabilize on-site vehicle transportation routes. 4. Remove mud and other debris, washing if necessary, from vehicles prior to entrance onto public roadways from the Project Site. 5. Maintain grade to minimize the occurrence of mud on the Project Site. B Construct stabilized construction areas under the provisions of Section 01550 — Stabilized Construction Exists. C In addition to Stabilized Construction Exits shovel or sweep the pavement to the extent necessary to keep the street clean. Water-hosing or sweeping of debris and mud off of the street into adjacent areas is not allowed. 3.06 EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR A Control equipment maintenance and repair so that oils,gasoline,grease,solvents,and other potential water pollutants cannot be washed directly into receiving streams or storm water conveyance systems. B Control measures may include the following practices: 1. Confine maintenance and repair of construction machinery and equipment to areas specifically designated for that purpose. 2. Provide these areas with adequate waste disposal receptacles for liquid as well as solid waste. 07/2006 01566-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION 3. Clean and inspect maintenance and repair areas daily. 4. Stabilize the area with coarse aggregate. 5. Maintain grade to prevent surface water from flowing over the area. 6. Place plastic matting, packed clay, tar paper, or other impervious material to prevent contamination of soil in the area. 7. Isolate areas of contaminated soil or other materials to facilitate proper removal and disposal. C Where effective control measures are not feasible,equipment shall be taken off-site for maintenance and repair. 3.07 WASTE COLLECTION AND DISPOSAL A Conduct operations in conformance with the plan provided in Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal and utilize such control measures,described in this Section,as may be necessary to eliminate or significantly reduce the discharge of possible water pollutants from the Project Site as a result of waste collection and disposal. B Keep receptacles and waste collection areas neat and orderly to the extent possible. Waste shall not be allowed to overflow its container or accumulate from day-to-day. Locate trash collection points where they will least likely be affected by concentrated storm water runoff. 3.08 WASHING AREAS A Vehicles such as concrete delivery trucks or dump trucks and other construction equipment shall not be washed at locations where the runoff will flow directly into a watercourse or storm water conveyance system. Preventative measures may include the following practices: 1. Designate special areas for washing vehicles. 2. Locate these areas where the wash water will spread out and evaporate or infiltrate directly into the ground, or where the runoff can be collected in a temporary holding or seepage basin. 3. Beneath wash areas construct a gravel or rock base to minimize mud production. B Construct washing areas under the provisions of Section 01550 — Stabilized Construction Exists. 3.09 STORAGE AND USAGE OF POTENTIAL WATER POLLUTANTS A Store and use potential water pollutants such as pesticides,fertilizers, distillate fuels, lubricants, solvents, cements, paints, acids, caustics, and other toxic substances in accordance with manufacturers' guidelines, Material Safety Data Sheets, and with local, state, and federal regulations. 07/2006 01566-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SOURCE CONTROLS FOR EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION B Isolate these substances in areas where they are to be stored,opened or used such that they will not cause pollution of runoff from the Project Site. Preventative measures may include the following practices: 1. Stabilize the area with coarse aggregate. 2. Store containers on raised platforms. 3. Place plastic matting, packed clay, tar paper, or other impervious material to prevent contamination of soil in the area. 4. Provide protective cover or weather proof enclosure. 5. Minimize accidental spillage. 6. Keep containers tightly closed. 7. Periodically inspect containers for leakage. 8. Maintain grade to prevent surface water from flowing over the area. 9. Provide berms, filter fabric fences or barriers, or sediment basins. 10. Designate washing areas for containers and other items that have come in contact with potential water pollutants. C Avoid overuse of substances such as pesticides and fertilizers which could produce contaminated runoff. 3.10 SANITARY FACILITIES A Provide the Project Site with adequate portable toilets for workers in accordance with Clb\, Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls,and applicable health regulations. B Control areas where sanitary facilities are located so that sewage or chemicals will not be washed directly into receiving streams or storm water conveyance systems by using one or more of the following measures. 1. Inspect the facilities daily. 2. Service the facilities as often as necessary to maintain cleanliness and prevent overflows. 3. Stabilize the area with coarse aggregate 4. Maintain grade to prevent surface water from flowing over the area END OF SECTION 07/2006 01566-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM Section 01570 TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Trench safety system for the construction of trench excavations. B. Trench safety system for excavation of utilities, excavation of structures, and embankment which fall under provisions of federal, state, or local excavation safety laws. C. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement&Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals D. Referenced Standards: 1. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) (.111\ E. Definitions: 1. Trench. A narrow excavation (in relation to its depth) made below the surface of the ground. In general, the depth is greater than the width, but the width of a trench (measured at the bottom) is not greater than 15 feet. 2. Trench safety system requirements apply to larger open excavations if the erection of structures or other installations limits the space between the excavation slope and the installation to dimensions equivalent to a trench as defined. 3. Trench safety systems include both Protective Systems and Shoring Systems but are not limited to sloping, sheeting, trench boxes or trench shields, slide rail systems, sheet piling, cribbing, bracing, shoring, dewatering or diversion of water to provide adequate drainage. 5/2013 01570- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM a. Protective System: A method of protecting employees from cave-ins, from material that could fall or roll from an excavation face or into an excavation, or from the collapse of an adjacent structure. b. Shoring System: A structure, which supports the sides of an excavation, to prevent cave-ins, maintain stable soil conditions, or to prevent movements of the ground affecting adjacent installations or improvements. c. Special Shoring: A shoring system meeting Special Shoring Requirements for locations identified on the Plans. 4. Competent Person- one who is capable of identifying existing and predictable hazards in the surroundings or working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to employees, and who has authorization to take prompt corrective measures to eliminate them. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for trench safety systems used on utility excavations is on a linear foot basis, measured along the centerline of the trench. Payment for trench safety systems includes payment for manholes and other line structures. B. Unless indicated in as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for shoring systems under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for trench safety systems. C. If shown on the Plans and included in Section 00300—Bid Proposal as a separate Bid Item, Measurement and Payment for Special Shoring system installation for trench excavation is on a square foot basis, measured and completed in place. D. Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for trench safety systems used on structural excavations under this Section. Include cost for trench safety system used on structural excavations in applicable structure installation. E. Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for trench safety systems used on roadway excavation or embankment under this Section. Include cost in applicable Sections. F. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement&Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit a safety plan specifically for the construction of trench excavation, excavation of utilities, excavation of structures, and embankment which fall under provisions of 5/2013 01570-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM federal, state, or local excavation safety laws. Design the Trench Safety Plan to be in accordance with OSHA Standards - 29CFR governing the presence and activities of individuals working in and around trench excavations, and in accordance with any Special Shoring requirements at locations shown on the Plans. Include in the plan, submittal of the contact information for the Competent Person. C. Have Shop Drawings for trench safety systems sealed, as required by OSHA, by a Professional Engineer, licensed by the State of Texas, retained and paid by the Contractor. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Install and maintain trench safety systems in accordance with the provision of Excavations,Trenching,and Shoring,OSHA Standards-29 CFR,Part 1926,Subpart P, as amended,including Final Rule,published in the Federal Register Vol.54,No.209 on Tuesday, October 31, 1989. The sections that are incorporated into these Technical Specifications, by reference, include Standard 1926.650—652. B. A reproduction of the OSHA Standards — 29 CFR included in Subpart P — "Excavations"from the Federal Register Vol. 54,No. 209 is available upon request to Contractors bidding on the Work. The Owner assumes no responsibility for the accuracy of the reproduction. The Contractor is responsible for obtaining a copy of this section of the Federal Register. C. Include in the Trench Safety Program measures that establish compliance with the standard interpretation of the General Duty Clause,Section 5.(a)(1),of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970—20 USC 654 which states, "Employers must shore or otherwise protect employees who walk/work at the base of an embankment from possible collapse." D. Legislation that has been enacted by the State of Texas with regard to Trench Safety Systems is hereby incorporated, by reference, into these specifications. Under Texas Statutes, refer to Chapter 756 of the Health and Safety Code, SUBCHAPTER C. TRENCH SAFETY. E. Reference materials, if developed for this Work, will be issued by the Engineer along with the Bid Documents, including the following: 1. Geotechnical information obtained for use in design of the trench safety system. 2. Special Shoring Requirements. 1.05 INDEMNIFICATION A. Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, its employees, and agents, from any and all damages, costs (including,without limitation, legal fees, court costs, and the cost of investigation),judgments or claims by anyone for injury or death of 5/2013 01570-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM persons resulting from the collapse or failure of trenches constructed under this Contract. B. Contractor acknowledges and agrees that this indemnity provision provides indemnity for the Owner in case the Owner is negligent either by act or omission in providing for trench safety, including, but not limited to safety program and design reviews, inspections, failures to issue stop work orders, and the hiring of the Contractor. C. Review of the safety program by the Engineer will only be in regard to compliance with the Contract Documents and will not constitute approval by the Engineer nor relieve Contractor of obligations under state and federal trench safety laws. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install and maintain trench safety systems in accordance with provisions of OSHA Standards—29 CFR. B. Specially designed trench safety systems shall be installed in accordance with the Contractor's trench excavation safety program for the locations and conditions identified in the program. C. Install Special Shoring at the locations shown on the Plans. D. Obtain verification from a Competent Person, defined in this Section and as identified in the Contractor's Trench Safety Program, that trench boxes and other pre- manufactured systems are certified for the actual installation conditions. 3.02 INSPECTION A. Conduct daily inspections by Contractor or Contractor's independently retained consultant, of the trench safety systems to ensure that the installed systems and operations meet OSHA Standards—29 CFR and other personnel protection regulations requirements. B. If evidence of possible cave-ins or slides is apparent, immediately stop work in the trench and move personnel to safe locations until necessary precautions have been taken to safeguard personnel. C. Maintain a permanent record of daily inspections. 5/2013 01570-4of5 CITY OF PEARLAND TRENCH SAFETY SYSTEM 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Verify specific applicability of the selected or specially designed trench safety systems to each field condition encountered on the Work. END OF SECTION r6\ 5/2013 01570-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS rb\' Section 01580 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Project identification sign description. B. Installation. C. Maintenance and removal. 1.02 UNIT PRICES A. No separate payment will be made for design, fabrication, installation, and maintenance of project identification signs under this Section. Include cost of work performed under this Section in the pay item for Section 01505 -Mobilization. B. If changes to project identification signs are requested by the City Engineer to keep them current,payment will be made by change order. C. Skid-mounted signs shall be relocated as directed by the City Engineer at no additional cost to the City. Post-mounted signs shall be relocated once, if directed in writing by the City Engineer, at no additional cost to the City. If a post-mounted sign is relocated more than once at the written direction of the City Engineer, payment will be made by change order. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Sign Construction: Project identification signs shall be constructed of new materials and painted new for the project. Construct post-mounted signs as shown on Construction Sign Details. B. Appearance: Project identification signs shall be maintained to present a clean and neat look throughout the project duration. C. Sign Manufacturer/Maker: Experienced as a professional sign company. D. Sign Placement: Place signs at locations as directed by the City Engineer. The City Engineer will provide sign placement instructions at the Pre-construction Meeting. 1. A linear project is one involving paving, overlay, sewer lines, storm drainage, or water mains that run in the right-of-way over a distance. A 10/2014 01580-1 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS linear project requires a project identification sign at each end of the construction site. 2. Single Site or Building Projects: Provide one project identification sign. 3. Multiple Sites: Provide one project identification sign at each site. 4. Sign Relocation: As work progresses at each site, it may be necessary to move and relocate project identification signs. Relocate signs as directed in writing by the City Engineer. E. Alternate Skid-mounted Sign Construction: Post-mounted signs are preferred, but skid-mounted signs are allowed, especially for projects with noncontiguous locations where work progresses from one location to another. The skid structure shall be designed so that the sign will withstand a 60-mile-per-hour wind load directly to the face or back of the sign. Use stakes, straps, or ballast. Approval of the use of skid-mounted signs shall not release the Contractor from responsibility of maintaining a project identification sign on the project site and shall not make the City responsible for the security of such signs. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01350 - Submittal Procedures. B. Show content, layout, lettering style, lettering size, and colors. Make sign and lettering to scale, clearly indicating condensed lettering, if used. '-**) 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 SIGN MATERIALS A. Structure and Framing: All sign materials shall be new. 1. Sign Posts: Use 4-inch by 4-inch treated wood posts, sized to fix top of sign at 6 FEET ABOVE GROUND. 2. Sign Supports and Skid Bracing: 2-inch by 4-inch wood framing material. 3. Skid Members: 2-inch by 6-inch wood framing material. 4. Fasteners: a. Use galvanized steel fasteners. b. Use 3/8-inch by 5-1/2-inch button head carriage bolts to attach sign to posts. Secure with nuts and flat head washers at locations as recommended by Sign Manufacturer. c. Cover button heads with white reflective film or paint to match sign background B. Sign and Sign Header: Use medium density overlaid marine plywood, minimum 1/2-inch thick. Use full-size 4-foot by 8-foot sheets for sign and a single piece for header to minimize joints; do not piece wood to fabricate a sign face. C. Paint and Primers: White paint used to prime surfaces and to resist weathering shall be an industrial grade,fast-drying,oil-based paint with gloss finish. Paint structural 10/2014 01580-2 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS and framing members white on all sides and edges to resist weathering. Paint sign and sign header material white on all sides and edges to resist weathering. Paint all sign surfaces with this weather-protective paint prior to adding any sign paint or adhesive applications. D. Colors: Follow criteria established by attached Exhibit 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install project identification signs within 10 calendar days after Date of Commencement. B. Erect signs where designated by the City Engineer at the Pre-construction Meeting or as described in part 1.03 of this Section. Position the sign in such a manner as to be fully visible and readable to the general public. C. Erect sign level and plumb. D. If mounted on posts, sink posts a minimum of 30 inches below grade in 10-inch diameter posthole. Stabilize posts with sharp sand or concrete to minimize lateral motion. Leave a minimum of 8 feet of post above existing grade for mounting of the sign and header. E. Erect sign so that the top edge of the sign, is no higher than 6 feet above existing grade. 3.02 MAINTENANCE AND REMOVAL A. Keep signs and supports clean. Repair deterioration and damage. B. Remove signs, framing, supports, and foundations to a depth of 2 feet upon completion of Project. Restore the area to a condition equal to or better than before construction. END OF SECTION rN, 10/2014 01580-3 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS (111.14\ PROJECT IDENTIFICATION SIGN EXHIBIT k.a,„.. .. Xmpression PROJECT NAME LOCATED HERE "OP Ara PROJECT NO. 12345678 Capital Improvement CITY OF PEARLAND I Signage Layout CAPITAL PROJECT PROJECT SCHEDULE MONTH/YEAR Pam; Various t I MAYOR:TOM REED E BUDGET: $DOLLAR AMOUNT PIySTATD: COUHCII POSITION is iONY CARBONE ENGINEER/ARCHITECT: PeaElanEl,Texas COUNCIL POSmON 2:scars SHERMAN DATE: October 2014 COUNCIL POSITION 3:GARY MOORE. L NAME GOES HERE i6f.N.ME' MAYOR PRO TEM!KEITH ORDENEAUX j capital improvement M CI COUNCIL POSITION sa GREG NU CONTRACTOR: 4x8 blank template :; CITE MANAGER: CLAY PEARSON CONTRACTOR NAME GOES HERE act°barzota o. - DEPUTY CITY MANAOERt JON DRANSON TOLS.ISZCII'1.t1W`V Hat XIXTILT TLAVSSINITED ASSTCITY MANAGER:TRENT EPPERSON pearlandtx.gov/departments!engineering-capital-projects/projects ICF1A&%35.'ACTII CIT/1a'rOFiD.Tt' I, ,r,...4_ 6LliPoAVALR110:.:.i TMIT7bHCETEI .._......_ ............. .. .............. ... ........... .....___' P_V'Ii.iC.�MITIXISLCLFCRDISCVITTACCE DITMEtFi'3&Pw'{yj.";atTADVIIIIIEEhW471! SPECIAL NOTE:CONTACT CITY SECRETARY FOR CURRENT COUNCIL NAMES ERstlMsmusEEMzr (11111t.\ SINGLE SIDE MDO MARINE GRADE PLYWOOD FINISHED WITH ALKYD ENAMEL GLOSS WHITE CLIENT TO PPov1°E au PRIMARY E20 VOLT ELECTRICAL SERVICE COMPUTER CUT VINYL AND DIGITAL PRINT 5 YEAR LIFE MINIMUM MATERIALS ELECTRICAL u Ee oT„rmse TO THE SION ' SSPE L INSTALL ON TWO 4"X4"TREATED POSTS,MIN.DEPTH IS 24",OR SKID MOUNTED AS SITE REO'D.. CLIENT APPROVAL 10/2014 01580-4 CITY OF PEARLAND MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT Section 01600 MATER IAL AND EQUIPMENT 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Requirements for transportation, delivery, handling, and storage of materials and equipment. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01566—Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this work is a component. 1.03 PRODUCTS A Products: Means material,equipment,or systems forming the Work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation,fabrication,conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components designated for reuse. B Do not reuse materials and equipment, designated to be removed,except as specified by the Contract Documents. C Provide equipment and components from the fewest number of manufacturers as is practical, in order to simplify spare parts inventory and to allow for maximum interchangeability of components. For multiple components of the same size,type or application, use the same make and model of component throughout the Work. 1.04 TRANSPORTATION A Make arrangements for transportation, delivery, and handling of equipment and materials required for timely completion of the Work. B Transport and handle products in accordance with instructions. C Consign and address shipping documents to the proper party giving name of Project, street number, and City. Shipments shall be delivered to the Contractor. 1.05 DELIVERY (1111116\ A Arrange deliveries of products to accommodate the Construction Schedule and in ample time to facilitate inspection prior to installation. Avoid deliveries that cause lengthy storage or overburden of limited storage space. 07/2006 01600- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT B Coordinate deliveries to avoid conflict with Work and conditions at the Project Site and to accommodate the following: 1. Work of other contractors or the Owner. 2. Limitations of storage space. 3. Availability of equipment and personnel for handling products. 4. Owner's use of premises. C Have products delivered to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened, labeled containers. D Immediately upon delivery, inspect shipment to assure: 1. Product complies with requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Quantities are correct. 3. Containers and packages are intact; labels are legible. 4. Products are properly protected and undamaged. 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING A Coordinate the off-loading of materials and equipment delivered to the Project Site. If necessary to move stored materials and equipment during construction, Contractor shall relocate materials and equipment at no additional cost to the Owner. B Provide equipment and personnel necessary to handle products, including those provided by the Owner, by methods to prevent damage to products or packaging. C Provide additional protection during handling as necessary to prevent breaking scraping, marring, or otherwise damaging products or surrounding areas. D Handle products by methods to prevent over bending or overstressing. E Lift heavy components only at designated lifting points. F Handle materials and equipment in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. G Do not drop, roll, or skid products off delivery vehicles. Hand carry or use suitable materials handling equipment. 1.07 STORAGE OF MATERIAL A Store and protect materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and requirements of these Technical Specifications. Control storage of potential water pollutants in conformance with Section 01566 — Source Controls for Erosion & Sedimentation. B Make necessary provisions for safe storage of materials and equipment. Place loose soil materials,and materials to be incorporated into the Work to prevent damage to any part of the Work or existing facilities and to maintain free access at all times to all '—*°') parts of the Work and to utility service company installations in the vicinity of the Work. 07/2006 01600-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT C Keep materials and equipment neatly and compactly stored in locations that will cause a minimum of inconvenience to other contractors, public travel, adjoining owners, tenants, and occupants. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. D Provide adequately ventilated, watertight storage facilities with floor above ground level for materials and equipment susceptible to weather damage. E Restrict storage to areas available on the construction site for storage of material and equipment as shown on Plans or approved by the Project Manager. F Provide off-site storage and protection when on-site storage is not adequate. G Do not use lawns, grass plots, or other private property for storage purposes without written permission of the owner or other person in possession or control of such premises. Damage to lawns,sidewalks,streets or other improvements shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Project Manager. H Protect stored materials and equipment against loss or damage. I Store materials in manufacturers' unopened containers. J Materials delivered and stored along the line of the Work shall be not closer than 3 feet to any fire hydrant. Public and private drives and street crossings shall be kept open. K The total length which materials may be distributed along the route of construction at any one time is 1000 lineal feet, unless otherwise approved in writing by the Project Manager. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 07/2006 01600-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS Section 01630 (111 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Options for making product or process selections. B Procedures for proposing equivalent construction products or processes,including pre- approved, and approved products or processes C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 1.02 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this and related Sections under the provisions of Section 01350—Submittals. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A Product: Means,materials,equipment,or systems incorporated into the Work.Product does not include machinery and equipment used for production,fabrication,conveying, and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components designated for re-use. B Process: Any proprietary system or method for installing system components resulting in an integral, functioning part of the Work. For this Section, the word Product includes Processes. 1.04 SELECTION OPTIONS A Pre-approved Products: Products of certain manufacturers or suppliers are designated in the Technical Specifications as"pre-approved". Products of other manufacturers or suppliers will not be acceptable under this Contract and will not be considered under the submittal process for approving alternate products. B Approved Products: Products of certain manufacturers or suppliers designated in the Technical Specifications followed by the words "or approved equal". Approval of alternate products not listed in the Technical Specifications may be obtained through provisions of this Section and Section 01350—Submittals. The procedure for approval of alternate products is not applicable to Pre-approved Products. C Product Compatibility: To the maximum extent possible,provide products that are of rib\ the same type or function from a single manufacturer, make, or source. Where more than one choice is available as a Contractor's option, select a product which is compatible with other products already selected, specified, or in use by the Owner. 07/2006 01630- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 1.05 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY A Furnish information the Engineer deems necessary to judge equivalency of the alternate product. B Pay for laboratory testing as well as any other review or examination cost needed to establish the equivalency between products which enables the Engineer to make such a judgment. C If the Engineer determines that an alternate product is not equivalent to that named in the Technical Specifications,the Contractor shall furnish one of the specified products. 1.06 ENGINEER'S REVIEW A Alternate products may be used only if approved in writing by the Engineer. The Engineer's determination regarding acceptance of a proposed alternate product is final. B Alternate products will be accepted if the product is judged by the Engineer to be equivalent to the specified product or to offer substantial benefit to the Owner. C The Owner retains the right to accept any product deemed advantageous to the Owner, and similarly, to reject any product deemed not beneficial to the Owner. 1.07 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURE A Collect and assemble technical information applicable to the proposed product to aid in determining equivalency as related to the Approved Product specified. B Submit a written request for a product to be considered as an alternate product along with the product information within fourteen(14)days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. C After the submittal period has expired, requests for alternate products will be considered only when a specified product becomes unavailable because of conditions beyond the Contractor's control. D Submit 5 copies of each request for alternate product approval. Include the following information: 1. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. 2. For products: a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address. b. Manufacturer's literature with product description, performance and test data, and reference standards. c. Samples, as applicable. d. Name and address of similar projects on which product was used and date of installation. Include the name of the Owner, Architect/Engineer, and installing contractor. 07/2006 01630-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS 3. For construction methods: a. Detailed description of proposed method. b. Shop Drawings illustrating methods. 4. Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product or method specified. 5. Data relating to changes in Construction Schedule 6. Relationship to separate contracts, if any. 7. Accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with product or method specified. 8. Other information requested by the Engineer. E Approved alternate products will be subject to the same review process as the specified product would have been for Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION r 07/2006 01630-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND FIELD SURVEYING Section 01720 FIELD SURVEYING 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Requirements for surveyors and surveys. B Procedures pertaining to survey control points and reference points. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 QUALITY CONTROL A Conform to State of Texas laws for surveys requiring licensed surveyors. Employ a land surveyor acceptable to Engineer. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit to Engineer the name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey work. C Submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work on request. 1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. B Submit Record Documents under provisions of Section 01760 — Project Record Documents. 1.06 EXAMINATION A Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting Work. Notify Engineer immediately of any discrepancies discovered. 07/2006 01720- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND FIELD SURVEYING 1.07 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS A Control datum for survey is that established by Owner-provided survey and indicated on Plans. B Locate and protect survey control points, including property corners,prior to starting site work. Use caution to preserve permanent reference points during construction. C The Contractor shall not reset; nor cause to be reset, lost, disturbed, or damaged; control points. Promptly notify Engineer of disturbance or damage to any control point(s). D Notify Engineer 48 hours in advance of need for relocation of reference points due to changes in grades or other reasons. E Report promptly to Engineer the loss or destruction of any reference point. F Any re-staking of control points lost,disturbed,or damaged by Contractor's operations will be provided by Owner at Contractor's expense. G Employ a Registered Public Land Surveyor to reset any missing,disturbed,or damaged monumentation. 1.08 SURVEY REQUIREMENTS A Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. B Establish a minimum of two permanent bench marks on Project Site, referenced to established control points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. C Establish and record in survey notes elevations, lines and levels to provide quantities required for Measurement and Payment and to provide appropriate controls for the Work. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading; fill and topsoil placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations. 2. Grid or axis for structures. 3. Mounumented Baseline. D Verify periodically layouts by same means. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION - NotUsed END OF SECTION 07/2006 01720-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND STARTING SYSTEMS Section 01750 STARTING SYSTEMS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Starting systems. B Demonstration and instructions. C Testing, adjusting, and balancing. D References to Technical specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01430—Contractor's Quality Control 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A Contractor shall conduct all start-up operations under this Contract in conformance with Section 01430—Contractor's Quality Control. B Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. C Notify Engineer 7 days prior to startup of each item. D Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions which may cause damage. E Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. 07/2006 01750- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND STARTING SYSTEMS F Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. G Execute start-up under Contractor's supervision in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. H When specified in individual specification sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect,check and approve equipment or system installation prior to and during start-up,and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. 3.02 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner two weeks minimum prior to date of Substantial Completion. B Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. C Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed-upon times, at equipment location. D Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. 3.03 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING A Contractor shall start, test, adjust, balance, and provide reports on all installed equipment as provided for in this section. B Owner may also appoint, employ, and pay for services of an independent firm to perform testing, adjusting, and balancing. Reports will be submitted by the independent firm to the Owner indicating observations and results of the tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with specified requirements and with the requirements of the Contract Documents. C Owner's employment of an independent firm shall not relieve the Contractor's responsibility under this section. END OF SECTION 07/2006 01750-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Section 01760 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Maintenance and Submittal of Record Documents and Samples. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01770—Contract Closeout 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this and related Sections under the provisions of Section 01350—Submittals. 1.04 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES A Maintain one copy of Record Documents at the Project Site in accordance with Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement, 3.02 "Keeping Plans and Specifications Accessible". B Store Record Documents and Samples in field office if a field office is required by Contract Documents, or in a secure location. Provide files, racks, and secure storage for Record Documents and Samples. C Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat, large, printed letters. D Maintain Record Documents in a clean,dry,and legible condition. Do not use Record Documents for construction purposes. E Keep Record Documents and Samples available for inspection by Engineer. 1.05 RECORDING A Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. B Plans, Change Orders, and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record all actual construction, or "as built" conditions, including: 1. Measured horizontal locations and elevations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 07/2006 01760- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND PROJECT.RECORD DOCUMENTS 2. Elevations of underground utilities referenced to bench marks utilized for the Work. '®'} 3. Field changes of dimension and detail. 4. Changes made by modifications. 5. Details not on original Plans. 6. References to related Shop Drawings and Modifications. C Record information with a red pen or pencil on a set of drawings indicated as the Record Document Set, provided by Engineer. 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION A Deliver Record Documents and Samples to Owner in accordance with Section 01770— Contract Closeout. END OF SECTION 07/2006 01760-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACT CLOSEOUT Section 01770 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Closeout procedures including final submittals such as operation and maintenance data, warranties, and spare parts and maintenance materials. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate paymentwill be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.04 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A Comply with Section 00700 — General Conditions of Agreement regarding Final Completion and Final Payment when Work is complete and ready for Engineer's final inspection. B Provide Record Documents under provisions of Section 01760 — Project Record Documents. C Complete or correct items on punch list,with no new items added. Any new items will be addressed during warranty period. D The Owner will occupy portions of the Work as specified in Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement. E Contractor shall request Final Inspection at least two weeks prior to Final Acceptance. 1.05 FINAL CLEANING A Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection. B Clean debris from drainage systems. C Clean Project Site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. 09/2009 01770- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND CONTRACT CLOSEOUT D Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and temporary construction facilities from the Project Site following the final test of utilities and completion of the Work. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A Submit Operations and Maintenance data under provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.07 WARRANTIES A Provide one original of each warranty from Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Manufacturers. B Provide Table of Contents and assemble warranties in 3-ring/D binder with durable plastic cover. C Submit warranties prior to Final Application for Payment. 1. Warranties shall commence in accordance with the requirements of Section 00700—General Conditions of Agreement, 1.09 "Substantially Completed". 2.0 PRODUCTS - Not Used 3.0 EXECUTION Contractor shall diligently pursue completion of the items and activities contained in the Contract Close Out and Project Record Document sections of the project manual. Notwithstanding any performance of warranty work, the work of Contract Closeout shall be complete within thirty (30) days of the date of Final Completion and Acceptance of the work. END OF SECTION 09/2009 01770-2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 2 SITE WORK 07/2006 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE PREPARATION Section 02200 SITE PREPARATION 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Removal of topsoil, stripping and stockpiling, clearing and grubbing. B Removal and disposal of waste materials, excess materials, debris and trash. C Removal of obstructions. D Excavation and fill. E Salvaging of designated item. F References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 4. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 5. Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Material (1111. 6. Section 02330—Embankment 7. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises G Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 4318, "Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. B If Site Preparation is included as a Bid Item, measurement will be based on the Units shown in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200 — Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. (1111114) B Submit embankment material sources and product quality information in accordance this Section. 07/2006 02200- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE PREPARATION 1.04 TESTING A Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Contractor shall provide materials used as embedment, backfill, back-dressing, and embankment identified on the Plans in accordance with Section 02255 — Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Material. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 CLEARING AND GRUBBING. A Clear Project Site of trees,shrubs,and other vegetation,except for those designated by Owner to be left standing. B Use only hand methods for grubbing inside drip line of trees designated to remain. C Completely remove stumps,roots,and other debris protruding through ground surface. 1. On areas required for roadway, channel, or structural excavation, remove stumps, 2" diameter or larger limbs and roots, to depth of 2 feet below lower elevation of excavation. 2. On areas required for embankment construction, remove 2" diameter limbs, stumps and roots to depth of 2 feet below ground surface 3. Trees and stumps may be cut off as close to natural ground as practicable on areas which are to be covered by at least 3 feet of embankment D Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. 1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 6 inches loose depth, and thoroughly compact to density equal to adjacent original ground. E Complete operations by bulldozing,blading, and grading so that prepared area is free of holes, unplanned ditches, abrupt changes in elevations and irregular contours, and preserve drainage of area. 1. Blade entire area to prevent ponding of water and to provide drainage, except in areas to be immediately excavated 07/2006 02200-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE PREPARATION 3.02 TOPSOIL STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING A Obtain approval of topsoil quality before excavating and stockpiling. B Excavate topsoil for esplanades and areas to receive grass or landscaping from areas to be further excavated. C Topsoil Stripping: 1. Remove growths of grass from areas before stripping. 2. Topsoil is defined as surface soil found of depth of not less than 4 inches. 3. Strip topsoil to depths encountered. 4. Perform stripping in a manner to prevent intermingling of topsoil with underlying sterile subsoil and remove objectionable materials, including clay lumps, stones over 2 in. in diameter, weeds, roots, leaves, and debris. 5. Where trees are designated by Owner to be left standing,stop topsoil stripping at extreme limits of tree drip line to prevent damage to main root system. D Topsoil Stockpiling: 1. Stockpile in areas designated on Plans. 2. Construct storage piles to freely drain surface water. 3. Cover storage piles, if required to prevent wind-blown dust. 4. Stockpile topsoil to depth not exceeding 8 feet. Stockpile in a manner to prevent erosion. 3.03 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL A Undercut, remove, and replace material which Engineer designates as unsuitable for subsequent construction. B Material used to replace unsuitable material shall be suitable material from site excavation or as indicated on Plans. 3.04 EXCAVATION AND FILL A Depressed site areas shall be filled using material from high areas, insofar as practicable. B When fill obtained from high areas is exhausted, fill to indicated rough grade elevations under roadways with"Structural Fill"and open areas not under structures or roadways with"General Fill", or as indicated on Plans. C Place and compact fill in accordance with Section 02330—Embankment. 3.05 SALVAGEABLE ITEMS AND MATERIAL A Items designated by Engineer to be salvaged are to be carefully removed,so as to cause no damage to the salvaged items and delivered to Owner's storage yard. 07/2006 02200-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE PREPARATION 3.06 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. END OF SECTION J 07/2006 02200-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION Section 02220 SITE DEMOLITION 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Demolishing and removing existing pavements, structures, equipment and materials only to the extent as indicated on the Plans. B Removing concrete paving, asphaltic concrete pavement, and base courses. C Removing concrete curbs, concrete curb and gutters, sidewalks and driveways. D Removing pipe culverts and sewers. E Removing miscellaneous structures of wood, plastics, metals, concrete, masonry, or combination of concrete and masonry, etc. F Disposing of demolished materials and equipment. G References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Control 4. Section 01100—Summary of Work 5. Section 01730—Cutting and Patching 6. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises 7. Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for removing and disposing of existing pavement and structures under this Section. Include cost for removing and disposing of existing pavement and structures in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. B If indicated as a Bid Item, measurement will be as follows: 1. Measurement for removing and disposing of concrete base and surfacing, and removing asphaltic surfacing,is on a square yard basis measured between lips of gutters. 2. Measurement for removing and disposing of cement stabilized shell base course, with or without asphalt surfacing, is on a square yard basis. 3. Measurement for removing and disposing of concrete base and surfacing with curbs,is on a square yard basis measured from back to back of curbs. Payment includes removal of all base,asphaltic surfacing,concrete pavement,esplanade curbs, curb and gutters, and paving headers. 04/2008 02220- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION 4. Measurement for removing and disposing of concrete pavement is on a square yard basis measured from back to back of curbs. 5. Measurement for removing and disposing of monolithic curb and gutter, removing monolithic concrete curb,and removing concrete curb,is on a lineal foot basis measured along the face of the curb. 6. Measurement for removing and disposing of concrete sidewalk and driveway is on a square yard basis. 7. Measurement for removing and disposing of miscellaneous concrete and masonry removal is on a cubic yard basis of the structure in place. 8. Measurement for removing and disposing of pipe culverts and sewers is on a lineal foot basis for each diameter of type of pipe removed. 9. Measurement for removing and disposing of unlisted materials shall be on the lump sum basis. C No payment will be made for work outside maximum payment limits indicated on Plans, or in areas removed for Contractor's convenience. D Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit proposed methods, equipment, materials and sequence of operations for demolition. Describe coordination for shutting off,capping,and removing temporary utilities. Plan operations to minimize temporary disruption of utilities to existing facilities or adjacent property. C Submit proposed demolition and removal schedule for approval. Notify Engineer in writing at least 48 hours before starting demolition. D Submit an approved copy of demolition schedule to Engineer prior to commencement of demolition operations. E Obtain a permit for building demolition, as required. 1.04 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. B The Contractor shall be responsible for safety and integrity of adjacent structures and shall be liable for any damage due to movement or settlement. Provide proper framing and shoring necessary for support. Cease operations if an adjacent structure appears to be endangered. Resume demolition only after proper protective measures have been taken. 04/2008 02220-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION 1.05 OWNERSHIP OF MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT A Materials and equipment designated for reuse or salvage are listed in Section 01100— Summary of Work. Protect items designated for reuse or salvage from damage during demolition, handling and storage. Restore damaged items to satisfactory condition. B Materials and equipment not designated for reuse or salvage become the property of the Contractor. 1.06 STORAGE AND HANDLING A Store and protect materials and equipment designated for reuse until time of installation. B Deliver and unload items to be salvaged to storage areas indicated on Plans. C Remove equipment and materials not designated for reuse or salvage and all waste and debris resulting from demolition from site. Remove material as work progresses to avoid clutter. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS FOR DEMOLITION (1111bh\ A Use equipment and materials approved as prescribed in this Section, 1.03"Submittals'. B Use of a"drop hammer" must have the Engineer's prior approval. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Prior to demolition, make an inspection with Engineer to determine the condition of existing structures and features adjacent to items designated for demolition. B Engineer will mark or list existing equipment to remain the property of the Owner. C Do not proceed with demolition or removal operations until after the joint inspection and subsequent authorization by Engineer. D Stop demolition and notify Engineer if underground fuel storage tanks, asbestos, PCB's, contaminated soils, or other hazardous materials are encountered. 3.02 UTILITY SERVICES A Follow rules and regulations of authorities or companies having jurisdiction over communications, pipelines, and electrical distribution services. B Notify and coordinate with utility company and adjacent building occupants when temporary interruption of utility service is necessary. 04/2008 02220-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION C When required by the Work, cutting, patching, and fitting of Work to existing facilities,accommodating installation or connection of Work with existing facilities,or uncovering Work for access, inspection, or testing shall be performed in accordance with Section 01730—Cutting and Patching 3.03 MECHANICAL WORK ITEMS A Mechanical removals consist of dismantling and removing existing piping, pumps, motors,water tanks,equipment and other appurtenances. It includes cutting,capping, and plugging required to restore use of existing utilities. B Remove existing process, water, chemical, gas, fuel oil and other piping not required for new work. Take out piping to the limits shown or to a point where it will not interfere with the new work. Piping not indicated to be removed or which does not interfere with new work shall be removed to the nearest solid support,capped,and the remainder left in place. Purge chemical and fuel lines and tanks. Verify that such lines are safe prior to removal or capping. C Where piping that is to be removed passes through existing walls, cut and cap piping on each side of the wall. Use cap appropriate for pipe material to be capped. Provide fire-rated sealant for walls classified as fire-rated. D When underground piping, which is not located in the public right-of-way, is to be altered or removed,cap the remaining piping. Abandoned underground piping may be left in place unless it interferes with new work or is shown or specified to be removed. Piping less than 15 inches in diameter may be plugged and abandoned in place. For piping 15 inches in diameter and greater to be abandoned,fill with sand,pressure grout or other approved method and plug with concrete or brick masonry bulkhead. E Remove waste and vent piping to points shown. Plug pipe and cleanouts and plugs. Where vent stacks pass through an existing roof that is to remain,remove the stack and patch the hole in the roof,making it watertight. Comply with requirements of existing roof installer so as to maintain roof warranty. F Conform to applicable codes when making any changes to plumbing and heating systems. 3.04 ELECTRICAL WORK ITEMS A Electrical removals consist of disconnecting and removing existing switchgear, distribution switchboards, control panels,bus duct, conduits and wires,panel boards, lighting fixtures, and miscellaneous electrical equipment. B Remove existing electrical equipment and fixtures to prevent damage to allow continued operation of existing systems and to maintain the integrity of the grounding systems. 04/2008 02220-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SITE DEMOLITION C Remove poles and metering equipment, if designated for removal on the Plans. Coordinate electrical removals with the power company, as necessary. Verify that power is properly de-energized and disconnected. D Where shown or otherwise required, remove wiring in underground duct systems. Verify function of wiring before disconnecting and removing. Plug ducts which are not to be reused at entry to buildings. E Changes to electrical systems shall conform to applicable codes. 3.05 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. B Remove from the site all items contained in or upon the structure not designated for reuse or salvage in accordance with this Section and Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal. C Follow method of disposal as required by regulatory agencies. END OF SECTION (111Pb.\ 04/2008 02220-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CEMENT STABILIZED SAND Section 02252 CEMENT STABILIZED SAND 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Cement stabilized sand for backfill and bedding. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350— Submittals 2. Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 558, "Standard Test Methods for Moisture-Density (Unit Weight) Relations of Soil-Cement Mixtures" b. ASTM D 1632, "Practice for Making and Curing Soil-Cement Compression and Flexure Test Specimens in the Laboratory" c. ASTM D 1633, "Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Molded Soil-Cement Cylinders" d. ASTM C 150, "Standard Specification for Portland Cement" (11"6\' e. ASTM C 33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates" f. ASTM D 2487, "Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)" g. ASTM C 142, "Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates" h. ASTM C 123, "Standard Test Method for Lightweight Particles in Aggregate" i. ASTM C 40, "Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete" j. ASTM C 4318, "Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" k. ASTM C 94, "Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete" 1. ASTM C 31,"Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as an Extra Item, no separate payment will be made for cement stabilized sand under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for applicable utility or structure installation. B If use of cement stabilized sand is allowed, based on the Engineer's direction, and indicated in Section 00300—Bid Proposal as an Extra Item,measurement will be on a per ton basis. A conversion between volumes calculated based on theoretical limits and total weight will be made based on a ratio of 1.64 tons per cubic yard. 02/2009 02252- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CEMENT STABILIZED SAND 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit material qualification and design mix tests to include: 1. Three series of tests of sand or fine aggregate material from the proposed source. Tests shall include procedures defined in this Section, 2.01 "Materials". 2. Three moisture-density relationship tests prepared using the material qualified by the tests in this Section, 1.03B 1. Blends of fine aggregate from crushed concrete and bank run sand shall be tested at the ratio to be used for the design mix testing. 3. Design mix report to meet the specifications of this Section, 1.04 "Design Requirements". The design mix shall include compressive strength tests after 48-hours and 7 days curing. 1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A Design sand-cement mixture to produce a minimum unconfined compressive strength of 100 pounds per square inch in 48 hours when compacted to a minimum 95 percent in accordance with ASTM D 558 and when cured in accordance with ASTM D 1632, and tested in accordance with ASTM D 1633. Mix shall contain a minimum of 1-1/2 sacks of cement per cubic yard. Compact mix with a moisture content on the dry side of optimum. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Cement shall be Type 1 Portland cement conforming to ASTM C 150. B Sand shall be clean, durable, and meet grading requirements for fine aggregates of ASTM C 33 and the following requirements: 1. Classified as SW, SP or SM by the United Soil Classification System of ASTM D 2487. 2. Deleterious material content: a. Clay lumps shall comprise less than 0.5 percent by ASTM C 142. b. Lightweight pieces shall comprise less than 5.0 percent by ASTM C 123. c. Organic impurities shall produce color no darker than the standard color by ASTM C 40 ASTM. 3. Plasticity index of 4 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318. C Fine aggregate,manufactured from crushed concrete meeting the quality requirements for crushed rock material in Section 02255 - Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials, may be used as a complete or partial substitute for Bank Sand. The blending ratio of fine aggregate from crushed concrete and Bank Sand shall be defined -in the mix design report. 02/2009 02252-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CEMENT STABILIZED SAND D Water shall be potable,free of oils,acids,alkalies,organic matter,or other deleterious substances, meeting requirements of ASTM C 94. 2.02 MIXING MATERIALS A Thoroughly mix sand, cement and water in proportions of the mix design using a pugmill-type mixer. The plant shall be equipped with automatic weight controls to ensure correct mix proportions. B Stamp batch ticket at plant with time of loading directly after mixing. Material not placed and compacted within 4 hours after mixing shall be rejected. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION A Place sand-cement mixture in 8-inch-thick loose lifts and compact to a minimum of 95 percent of ASTM D 558, unless otherwise specified on Plans. The moisture content during compaction shall be on the dry side of optimum but sufficient for hydration. Perform and complete compaction of sand-cement mixture within 4 hours after addition of water to mix at the plant. B Do not place or compact sand-cement mixture in standing or free water. 1/11*1 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01450 - Testing Laboratory Services. B Mixing plant inspections will be performed periodically. Material samples will be obtained and tested in accordance with this Section, 2.01 "Materials", if there is evidence of change in material characteristic. C One sample of cement stabilized sand shall be obtained for each 150 tons of material placed per day with no less than one sample per day of production. Random samples of delivered cement stabilized sand shall be taken in the field at point of delivery in accordance with ASTM 3665.Obtain three individual samples of approximately 12 to 15 lb each from the first, middle, and last third of the truck and composite them into one sample for test purpose. D Prepare and mold four specimens (for each sample obtained) in accordance with ASTM D558,Method A,without adjusting moisture content. Samples will be molded at approximately same time material is being used,but no later than 4 hours after water is added to mix. E After molding, specimens will be removed from molds and cured in accordance with ASTM D 1632. (111w, 02/2009 02252-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CEMENT STABILIZED SAND F Specimens will be tested for compressive strength in accordance with ASTM D 1633, Method A. Two specimens will be tested at 48 hours plus or minus 2 hours and two specimens will be tested at 7 days plus or minus 4 hours. G A strength test will be average of strengths of two specimens molded from same sample of material and tested at same age. Average daily strength will be average of strengths of all specimens molded during one day's production and tested at same age. H Precision and Bias: Test results shall meet recommended guideline for precision in ASTM D 1633 Section 9. I Reporting: Test reports shall contain, as a minimum, the following information: 1. Supplier and plant number 2. Time material was batched 3. Time material was sampled 4. Test age (exact hours) 5. Average 48-hour strength 6. Average 7-day strength 7. Specification section number 8. Indication of compliance/non-compliance 9. Mixture identification 10. Truck and ticket numbers 11. The time of molding 12. Moisture content at time of molding 13. Required strength 14. Test method designations 15. Compressive strength data as required by ASTM D 1633 16. Supplier mixture identification 17. Specimen diameter and height, in. 18. Specimen cross-sectional area, sq. in. J The cement content will be checked on samples obtained in the field whenever there are apparent changes in the mix properties. 3.03 ACCEPTANCE A Strength level of material will be considered satisfactory if: 1. The average 48-hour strength is greater than 100 psi with no individual strength test below 70 psi. 2. All 7-day individual strength tests(average of two specimens)are greater than or equal to 100 psi. B Material will be considered deficient when 7-day individual strength test(average of two specimens) is less than 100 psi but greater than 70 psi. See Paragraph 3.04 Adjustment for Deficient Strength. C The material will be considered unacceptable and subject to removal and replacement at Contractors expense when individual strength test(average of two specimens)has 7-day strength less than 70 psi 02/2009 02252-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CEMENT STABILIZED SAND D When moving average of three daily 48-hour averages falls below 100 psi,discontinue shipment to project until plant is capable of producing material,which exceeds 100 psi at 48 hours. Five 48-hour strength tests shall be made in this determination with no individual strength tests less than 100 psi. E Testing laboratory shall notify Contractor,Project Manager,and material supplier by facsimile of tests indicating results falling below specified strength requirements within 24 hours. F If any strength test of laboratory cured specimens falls below the specified strength, Contractor may, at his own expense, request test of cores drilled from the area in question in accordance with ASTM C42. In such cases,three(3)cores shall be taken for each strength test that falls below the values given in 3.03.A. G Cement stabilized sand in an area represented by core tests shall be considered satisfactory if the average of three(3)cores is equal to at least 100 psi and if no single core is less that 70 psi.Additional testing of cores extracted from locations represented by erratic core strength results will be permitted. 3.04 ADJUSTMENT FOR DEFICIENT STRENGTH A When mixture produces 7-day compressive strength greater than or equal to 100 psi, then material will be considered satisfactory and bid price will be paid in full. 1 B When mixture produces 7-day compressive strength less than 100 psi and greater than or equal to 70 psi,material shall be accepted contingent on credit in payment Compute credit by the following formula: Credit per Cubic Yard= $30.00 x 2 (100 psi - Actual psi) 100 C When mixture produces 7-day compressive strength less than 70 pounds per square inch, then remove and replace cement-sand mixture and paving and other necessary work at no cost to City. END OF SECTION (", 02/2009 02252-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS rh\ Section 02255 BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A A reference source for materials used as embedment, backfill, back-dressing, and embankment,specified elsewhere in the Technical Specifications,and their associated material qualification testing requirements. B Source qualifications and handling of these materials. C Material use and application is specified on the Plans or in individual Technical Specifications referencing materials either by Material Classification or by Product Description. D References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete 2. Section 02910—Topsoil 3. Section 02252—Cement Stabilized Sand E Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 2487, "Standard Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System)" b. ASTM C 142, "Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates" c. ASTM C 123, "Standard Test Method for Lightweight Particles in Aggregate" d. ASTM C 40, "Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete" e. ASTM C 4318, "Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" f. ASTM D 1140, "Standard Test Methods for Amount of Material in Soils Finer the No. 200 (70-urn) Sieve" g. ASTM C 33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates" h. ASTM C 136, "Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates" i. ASTM C 131, "Standard Test Methods for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine" 07/2007 02255- 1 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING, BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL CLASSIFICATIONS A Materials shall be classified for the purpose of quality control in accordance with the Unified Soil Classification Symbols as defined in ASTM D 2487. 1. Class I: Well-graded gravels and sands, gravel-sand mixtures, crushed well- graded rock, little or no fines (GW, SW): a. Plasticity index: non-plastic. b. Gradation: D60/Dio - greater than 4 percent; amount passing No. 200 sieve- less than or equal to 5 percent. 2. Class II: Poorly graded gravels and sands, silty gravels and sands, little to moderate fines: a. Plasticity index: non-plastic to 4. b. Gradations: Gradation (GP, SP): amount passing No. 200 sieve - less than 5 percent. Gradation(GM,SM): amount passing No. 200 sieve-between 12 percent and 50 percent. c. Borderline gradations with dual classifications (e.g., SP-SM): amount passing No. 200 sieve - between 5 percent and 12 percent. 3. Class III: Clayey gravels and sands, poorly graded mixtures of gravel, sand, silt, and clay (GC, SC, and dual classifications, e.g., SP-SC): a. Plasticity index: greater than 7. b. Gradation: amount passing No. 200 sieve-between 12 percent and 50 percent. 4. Class WA: Lean clays (CL). a. Plasticity Indexes: Plasticity index: greater than 7, and above A line. Borderline plasticity with dual classifications (CL-ML): PI between 4 and 7. b. Liquid limit: less than 50. c. Gradation: amount passing No..200 sieve - greater than 50 percent. d. Inorganic. 5. Class IVB: Fat clays (CH) a. Plasticity index: above A line. b. Liquid limit: 50 or greater. c. Gradation: amount passing No. 200 sieve- greater than 50 percent. d. Inorganic. B Use soils with dual class designation according to ASTM D 2487, and which are not defined above, according to the more restrictive class. 2.02 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS A Unsuitable Material. Unsuitable soil materials are the following: 07/2007 02255-2 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS 1. Materials that are classified as ML,CL-ML,MH,PT,OH and OL according to ASTM D 2487. 2. Materials that cannot be compacted to the required density due to either gradation, plasticity, or moisture content. 3. Materials that contain large clods, aggregates, stones greater than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, vegetation, waste or any other deleterious materials. 4. Materials that are contaminated with hydrocarbons or other chemical contaminants. B Suitable Material. Soil materials meeting specification requirements. Unsuitable soils meeting specification requirements for suitable soils after treatment with,for example, lime or cement shall be considered suitable, unless otherwise indicated. C General Fill. Material that is free of stones greater than 3 inches,free of roots,waste, debris,trash,organic material,unstable material,non-soil matter,hydrocarbon or other contamination, conforming to the following limits for deleterious materials: 1. Clay lumps: Less than 0.5 percent for Class I, and less than 2.0 percent for Class II, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 142. 2. Lightweight pieces: Less than 5 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C 123. 3. Organic impurities: No color darker than standard color when tested in accordance with ASTM C 40. 11/11b.`, Random Fill. Soils defined by ASTM D 2487 as Class I, II, III, IV, or fat clay(CH), sand,gravel,or a combination,from excavation or borrow,which can be compacted to form stable embankments, and conforming to: 1. Liquid Limit: 65 maximum, ASTM -D4318. 2. Plasticity Index: 0 minimum, 45 maximum, ASTM -D4318. 3. Free from trash, vegetation, organic matter, large stones, hard lumps of earth and frozen, corrosive or perishable material. 4. Well broken up, free of clods greater than 6 inches, hard earth, rocks, and stones greater than 2-inch dimension. E Structural Fill. Soils defined by ASTM D 2487 as Class I,II,III,or IV,sand,gravel,or a combination, from excavation or borrow, which can be compacted to form stable embankments and fills conforming to: 1. Liquid Limit: 45 maximum, ASTM D 4318. 2. Plasticity Index: 12 minimum, 20 maximum, ASTM D 4318. 3. Free from trash, vegetation, organic matter, large stones, hard lumps of earth and frozen, corrosive or perishable material. 4. Well broken up, free of clods greater than 6 inches, hard earth, rocks, and stones greater than 2-inch dimension. F Select Fill. Class III clayey gravel or sand or Class IV lean clay or clayey soils treated with lime or cement, and conforming to: 07/2007 02255-3 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS 1. Plasticity Index: 7 minimum, 20 maximum, ASTM D 4318. 2. Free from trash, vegetation, organic matter, large stones, hard lumps of earth and frozen, corrosive or perishable material. 3. Well broken up, free of clods greater than 6. inches, hard earth, rocks, and stones greater than 2-inch dimension. G Concrete Fill. Conform to requirements for Class B concrete as specified in Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. H Topsoil. Conform to requirements specified in Section 02910 -Topsoil. Bank Sand: Durable Bank Sand classified as SP, SW, or SM by the Unified Soil Classification System (ASTM D 2487) meeting the following requirements: 1. Less than 15 percent passing the number 200 sieve when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1140. The amount of clay lumps or balls not exceeding 2 percent. 2. Material passing the number 40 sieve shall meet the following requirements when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318: a. Liquid limit: not exceeding 25 percent. b. Plasticity index: not exceeding 7. J Cement Stabilized Sand. Conform to requirements of Section 02252 - Cement Stabilized Sand. K Concrete Sand. Natural sand, manufactured sand, or a combination of natural and manufactured sand conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 33 and graded within the following limits when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136: SIEVE PERCENT PASSING 3/8" 100 No. 4 95 to 100 No. 8 80 to 100 No. 16 50 to 85 No. 30 25 to 60 No. 50 10 to 30 No. 100 2 to 10 L Gem Sand. Sand conforming to the requirements of ASTM C 33 for course aggregates specified for number 8 size and graded within the following limits when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136: SIEVE PERCENT PASSING 3/8" 95 to 100 No. 4 60 to 80 '-4) No. 8 15 to 40 07/2007 02255-4 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS M Pea Gravel. Durable particles composed of small, smooth,rounded stones or pebbles and graded within the following limits when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136: SIEVE PERCENT PASSING 1/2" 100 3/8" 85 to 100 No. 4 10 to 30 No. 8 0 to 10 No. 16 0 to 5 N Crushed Aggregates. Crushed aggregates consist of durable particles obtained from an approved source and meeting the following requirements: 1. Materials of one product delivered for the same construction activity from a single source. 2. Non-plastic fines. 3. Los Angeles Abrasion Test wear not exceeding 45 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131. 4. Crushed aggregate shall have a minimum of 90 percent of the particles retained on the No.4 sieve with 2 or more crushed faces as determined by TxDOT Tex- 460-A, Part I. 5. Crushed stone: Produced from oversize plant processed stone or gravel,sized (1111 by crushing to predominantly angular particles from a naturally occurring single source. Uncrushed gravel are not acceptable materials for embedment where crushed stone is shown on the applicable utility embedment drawing details. 6. Crushed Concrete: Crushed concrete is an acceptable substitute for crushed stone as utility backfill. Gradation and quality control test requirements are the same as crushed stone. Provide crushed concrete produced from normal weight concrete of uniform quality; containing particles of aggregate and cement material, free from other substances such as asphalt, reinforcing steel fragments, soil, waste gypsum(calcium sulfate), or debris. 7. Gradations, as determined in accordance with TxDOT Tex-110-E. PERCENT PASSING BY WEIGHT FOR PIPE SIEVE EMBEDMENT BY RANGES OF NOMINAL PIPES SIZES >15" 15" - 8" <8" 1" 95 - 100 100 - 3/4" 60 - 90 90— 100 100 1/2" 25 - 60 - 90— 100 3/8" - 20—55 40 - 70 No. 4 0 - 5 0- 10 0 - 15 No. 8 - 0 - 5 0 - 5 07/2007 02255-5 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 SOURCE QUALIFICATIONS FOR BORROW MATERIAL A Use of material encountered in excavations is acceptable, provided applicable requirements are satisfied. If excavation material is not acceptable,provide from other approved source. B Identify off-site sources for materials at least 14 days ahead of intended use so that the Engineer may obtain samples for verification testing. C Obtain approval for each material source by the Engineer before delivery is started. If sources previously approved do not produce uniform and satisfactory products,furnish materials from other approved sources. Materials may be subjected to inspection or additional verification testing after delivery. Materials which do not meet the requirements will be rejected. Do not use material which, after approval,has become unsuitable for use due to segregation, mixing with other materials, or by contamination. Once a material is approved by the Engineer, a Change Order is required to change to a different material. D Bank sand, select fill, and random fill, if available in the project excavation, may be obtained by selective excavation and acceptance testing. Obtain additional quantities of these materials and other materials required to complete the Work from off-site ".") sources. E The Owner does not represent or guarantee that any soil found in the excavation work will be suitable and acceptable as backfill material. 3.02 MATERIAL HANDLING A When material is obtained from either a commercial or non-commercial borrow pit, open the pit to expose the vertical faces of the various strata for identification and selection of approved material to be used. Excavate the selected material by vertical cuts extending through the exposed strata to achieve uniformity in the product. B Establish temporary stockpile locations for practical material handling and control,and verification testing by the Engineer in advance of final placement. Obtain approval from landowner for storage of backfill material on adjacent private property. C When stockpiling material near the Project Site,use appropriate methods to eliminate blowing of materials into adjacent areas and prevent runoff containing sediments from entering the drainage system. D Place material suitable for backfilling in stockpiles at a distance from the trench to prevent slides or cave-ins. Do not place stockpiles of excavated materials on public streets. 07/2007 02255-6 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND BEDDING,BACKFILL,AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS E Place stockpiles in layers to avoid segregation of processed materials. Load material by making successive vertical cuts through entire depth of stockpile. END OF SECTION trilh‘ 07/2007 02255-7 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR ROADWAYS I Section 02316 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR ROADWAYS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavation of materials for roadways. B. Excavation of materials for roadside ditches. C. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 4. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 5. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 6. Section 02255—Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Material 7. Section 01570—Trench Safety Systems 8. Section 01564—Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 9. Section 01720—Field Surveying 10. Section 02220—Site Demolition 11. Section 02200—Site Preparation 12. Section 02330—Embankment 13. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises D. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 698, "Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort" b. ASTM D 1556,"Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method" c. ASTM D 2922, "Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)" d. ASTM D 3017, "Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT rTh; A. Measurement shall be by the cubic yard measured in place,including labor,equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 5/2013 02316- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR ROADWAYS B. Payment includes control of ground water and surface water, trench safety systems, removal of existing pavements and structures,repair and maintenance of excavated or backfilled areas, and other measures specified in this Section and not included in payment elsewhere. C. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. D. No payment will be made for material excavated under the following conditions: 1. More than 2 feet outside of vertical planes behind back of curbs. 2. For portion within limits of trench for utilities constructed by open-cut methods. 3. As indicated otherwise on Drawings. E. Excavation and Backfill quantities that exceed the construction plans shall be substantiated with topographic survey of finished grade by survey (RPLS) and verified by the Engineer at contractor's expense. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit product quality,material sources, and field quality information in accordance with this Section. C. Submit field red lines documenting location of roadway excavation as installed, referenced to survey Control Points,under the provisions of Section 01760—Project Record Documents, 1.04C. Include location of utilities and structures encountered or rerouted. Give horizontal dimensions, elevations, inverts and gradients. 1.04 TESTING A. Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A. Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 5/2013 02316-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR ROADWAYS rb"\, 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Contractor shall provide materials used as embedment, backfill, back-dressing, and embankment identified on the Plans in accordance with Section 02255 — Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Material. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Employ a Trench Safety Plan as specified in Section 01570—Trench Safety Systems. B. Install and operate necessary dewatering and surface water control measures in accordance with requirements of Section 01564 — Control of Ground Water and Surface Water. C. Identify required lines, levels, and datum. Coordinate with Section 01720 — Field Surveying. D. Identify existing structures and utilities above and below grade. Stake and flag their location. E. Remove existing pavements and structures, including sidewalks and driveways, in conformance with requirements of Section 02220—Site Demolition, as applicable. F. Area shall be cleared and grubbed under the provisions of Section 02200 — Site Preparation prior to excavation. G. Strip and stockpile topsoil under the provisions of Section 02200—Site Preparation. H. Upon discovery of unknown or badly deteriorated utilities, or concealed conditions, discontinue work. Notify Engineer and obtain instructions before proceeding in such areas. 3.02 EXCAVATION A. Excavate to lines and grades shown on Plans. B. Areas of unsuitable material shall be removed,backfilled with embankment materials, and compacted under the provisions of Section 02330—Embankment. C. At intersections,grade back at minimum slope of one inch per foot. Produce a smooth (1111111 riding junction with intersecting street. Maintain proper drainage. 5/2013 02316-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BAC]KFILL FOR ROADWAYS D. Fill over-excavated areas in accordance with requirements of Section 02330 — Embankment at no cost to the Owner. 3.03 COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain moisture content of embankment materials to attain required compaction density. B. Compact to minimum densities at moisture content of optimum to 3 percent above optimum as determined by ASTM D 698,unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 1. Areas under future paving and shoulders: Minimum density of 95 percent of maximum dry density. 2. Other areas: Minimum density of 90 percent of maximum dry density. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Top of compacted surface:Plus or minus 1/2 inch in cross section,or in 16 foot length. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Compaction Testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017 under provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services. B. Three or more tests,at Engineer's/Owner's option,will be taken for each 1,000 linear feet per lane of roadway or 500 square yards of embankment per lift. C. If tests indicate work does not meet specified compaction requirements, recondition, re-compact, and retest at Contractor's expense. 3.06 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A. Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140 - Contractor's Use of Premises. B. In unpaved areas, grade surface as a uniform slope from installed appurtenances to natural grade and stabilize as indicated on Plans. 5/2013 02316-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR ROADWAYS (17) 3.07 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A. Maintain excavation and embankment areas until start of subsequent work. Repair and re-compact slides,washouts,settlements,or areas with loss of density at no cost to the Owner B. Prevent erosion at all times. Maintain ditches and cut temporary swales to allow natural drainage in order to avoid damage to roadway. Do not allow water to pond in excavations. C. Distribute construction traffic evenly over compacted areas,where practical,to aid in obtaining uniform compaction. Protect exposed areas having high moisture content from wheel loads that cause rutting. END OF SECTION 5/2013 02316-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES Section 02317 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Excavation, backfilling, and compaction of backfill for structures. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350 - Submittals 3. Section 01760-Project Record Documents 4. Section 01450 -Testing Laboratory Services 5. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 6. Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 7. Section 01570 - Trench Safety System 8. Section 01564 - Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 9. Section 02220 - Site Demolition 10. Section 02200—Site Preparation 11. Section 02252 - Cement Stabilized Sand 12. Section 01562 -Waste Material Disposal C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 698, "Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort" b. ASTM D 4318, "Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" c. ASTM D 1556,"Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method" d. ASTM D 2922, "Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)" e. ASTM D 3017, "Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)" 2. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 3. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) a. Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing b. Tex-110-E, Particle Size Analysis of Soils D Definitions: 1. Backfill - material meeting specified quality requirements, placed and compacted under controlled conditions around pavements, structures and utilities. 07/2006 02317- 1 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES 2. Foundation Backfill - natural soil or manufactured aggregate meeting Class I requirements and Geotextile fabrics as required to control drainage and material separation placed and compacted where needed to provide stable support for the structure foundation base. Foundation backfill may include crushed aggregate with filter fabric as required, cement stabilized sand, or concrete seal slab. 3. Foundation Base - provides a smooth, level working surface for the construction of the concrete foundation. 4. Foundation Subgrade-the surface of the natural soil which has been excavated and prepared to support the foundation base or foundation backfill, where needed. 5. Over-Excavation - excavation of subgrade soils with unsatisfactory bearing capacity or composed of otherwise unsuitable materials below the foundation as shown on the Plans. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT UNIT PRICES A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Excavation and Backfill for Structures under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for construction of structures. B If Excavation and Backfill for Structures is included as a Bid Item,measurement will be based on the Units shown in Section 00300—Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. L03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350— Submittals. B Submit for each structure a work plan for excavation and backfill with a complete written description which identifies details of the proposed method of construction and the sequence of operations for construction relative to excavation and backfill activities. The descriptions, with supporting illustrations, shall be sufficiently detailed to demonstrate to the Engineer that the procedures meet the requirements of the Plans and Technical Specifications. C Submit product quality,material sources,and field quality information in accordance with this Section. D Submit field red lines documenting location of structures as installed,referenced to survey Control Points, under the provisions of Section 01760 — Project Record Documents, 1.04C. Include location of utilities and structures encountered or rerouted. Give horizontal dimensions, elevations, inverts and gradients. 07/2006 02317-2 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES 1.04 TESTING A Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 - Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Contractor shall provide materials used as embedment,backfill,back-dressing, and embankment identified on the Plans in accordance with Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Material. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A Perform excavation with equipment suitable for achieving the requirements of this Section. B Use equipment which will produce the degree of compaction specified. Backfill within 3 feet of walls shall be compacted with hand operated equipment. Do not use equipment weighing more than 10,000 pounds closer to walls than a horizontal distance equal to the depth of the fill at that time. Use hand operated power compaction equipment where use of heavier equipment is impractical or restricted due to weight limitations. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A Employ a Trench Safety Plan as specified in Section 01570-Trench Safety Systems. B Install and operate necessary dewatering and surface water control measures in accordance with requirements of Section 01564 - Control of Ground Water and Surface Water. C Remove existing pavements and structures, including sidewalks and driveways, in accordance with requirements of Section 02220 - Site Demolition, as applicable. (.11114\ D Area shall be cleared and grubbed under the provisions of Section 02200 - Site Preparation prior to excavation. 07/2006 02317-3 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACI£FILL FOR STRUCTURES E Strip and stockpile topsoil under the provisions of Section 02200- Site Preparation F Upon discovery of unknown utilities, badly deteriorated utilities not designated for removal, or concealed conditions, discontinue work. Notify Engineer and obtain instructions before proceeding in such areas. 3.02 EXCAVATION A Perform excavation work so that the underground structure can be installed to depths and alignments shown on Plans Drawings. Use caution during excavation work to avoid disturbing surrounding ground and existing facilities and improvements. Keep excavation to the absolute minimum necessary. No additional payment will be made for excess excavation not authorized by Engineer. B Avoid settlement of surrounding soil due to equipment operations, excavation procedures, vibration, dewatering, or other construction methods. C Prevent voids from forming outside of sheeting. Immediately fill voids with grout, concrete fill, cement stabilized sand, or other material approved by Engineer. D After completion of the structure, remove sheeting, shoring, and bracing unless Engineer has approved in writing that such temporary structures may remain. Remove sheeting,shoring,and bracing in such a manner as to maintain safety during backfilling operations and to prevent damage to the Work and adjacent structures or improvements. E Immediately fill and compact voids left or caused by removal of sheeting with cement stabilized sand or material approved by Engineer. 3.03 DEWATERING A Maintain ground water control as directed by Section 01564 - Control of Ground Water and Surface Water and until the structure is sufficiently complete to provide the required weight to resist hydrostatic uplift with a minimum safety factor of 1.2. B Maintain the ground water surface a minimum of two feet below the bottom of the foundation base. 3.04 FOUNDATION EXCAVATION A Notify Engineer at least 48 hours prior to planned completion of foundation excavations. Do not place the foundation base until the excavation is accepted by the Engineer. B Excavate to elevations shown on Plans Drawings,as needed to provide space for the foundation base, forming a level undisturbed surface, free of mud or soft material. Remove pockets of soft or otherwise unstable soils and replace with foundation backfill material or a material as directed by the Engineer. Prior to placing material 07/2006 02317-4 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES (11.6\ over it,re-compact the subgrade,scarifying as needed,to 95 percent of the maximum Standard Proctor Density according to ASTM D 698. If the specified level of compaction cannot be achieved, moisture condition the subgrade and re-compact until 95 percent is achieved, over-excavate to provide a minimum layer of 24 inches of founkfil mril, or a th Ee C Fill unauthorizeddationbac excessivelate excavationa other withmens foundationacceptable back tofill e mate nginerialr.or other material as directed by,the Engineer. D Protect open excavations from rainfall, runoff, freezing groundwater, or excessive drying so as to maintain foundation subgrade in a satisfactory,undisturbed condition. Keep excavations free of standing water and completely free of water during concrete placement. E Soils which become unsuitable due to inadequate dewatering or other causes, after initial excavation to the required subgrade, shall be removed and replaced with foundation backfill material, as directed by Engineer, at no additional cost to the Owner. F Place foundation base, or foundation backfill material where needed, over the subgrade on same day that excavation is completed to final grade. Where base of excavations are left open for longer periods,protect them with a seal slab or cement- stabilized sand. r7`, G Where directed by the Plans Drawings,all crushed aggregate,and other free draining Class I materials,shall have a Geo-textile filter fabric separating it from native soils or select material backfill. The fabric shall overlap a minimum of 12 inches beyond where another material stops contact with the soil. H Crushed aggregate, and other Class I materials, shall be placed in uniform layers of 8-inch maximum thickness. Compaction shall be by means of at least two passes of a vibratory compactor. 3.05 FOUNDATION BASE A After the subgrade is properly prepared, including the placement of foundation backfill where needed, the foundation base shall be placed. The foundation base shall consist of a 12-inch layer of crushed aggregate or cement stabilized sand. Alternately, a 4-inch minimum seal slab may be placed. The foundation base shall extend a minimum of 12 inches beyond the edge of the structure foundation. B Where the foundation base and foundation backfill are of the same material,both can be placed in one operation. 07/2006 02317-5 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES 3.06 BACKFILL A Complete backfill to surface of natural ground or to lines and grades shown on Plans Drawings. Use existing material that qualifies as select material, unless indicated otherwise. Deposit backfill in uniform layers and compact each layer as specified. B Do not place backfill against concrete walls or similar structures until laboratory test breaks indicate that the concrete has reached a minimum of 85 percent of the specified compressive strength. Where walls are supported by slabs or intermediate walls,do not begin backfill operations until the slab or intermediate walls have been placed and concrete has attained sufficient strength. C Remove concrete forms before starting backfill and remove shoring and bracing as work progresses. D Maintain fill material at no less than 2 percent below and no more than 2 percent above optimum moisture content. Place fill material in uniform 8-inch maximum loose layers. Compaction of fill shall be to at least 95 percent of the maximum Standard Proctor Density according to ASTM D 698 under paved areas. Compact to at least 90 percent around structures below unpaved areas. E Where backfill is placed against a sloped excavation surface, run compaction equipment across the boundary of the cut slope and backfill to form a compacted slope surface for placement of the next layer of backfill. F Place backfill using cement stabilized sand in accordance with Section 02252 - Cement Stabilized Sand. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Tests will be performed initially on minimum of three different samples of each material type for plasticity characteristics,in accordance with ASTM D 4318,and for gradation characteristics, in accordance with TxDOT Tex-101-E and Tex-110-E. Additional classification tests will be performed whenever there is a noticeable change in material gradation or plasticity. B In-place density tests of compacted subgrade and backfill will be performed according to ASTM D 1556, or ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017, and at the following frequencies and conditions: 1. A minimum of one test for every 100 cubic yards of compacted backfill material. 2. A minimum three density tests for each full work shift. 3. Density tests will be performed in all placement areas. 4. The number of tests will be increased if inspection determines that soil types or moisture contents are not uniform or if compacting effort is variable and not considered sufficient to attain uniform density. 07/2006 02317-6 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES C7' C At least three tests for moisture-density relationships will be initially performed for each type of backfill material in accordance with ASTM D 698. Additional moisture-density relationship tests will be performed whenever there is a noticeable change in material gradation or plasticity. D If tests indicate work does not meet specified compaction requirements,recondition, re-compact, and retest at Contractor's expense. 3.08 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140 - Contractor's Use of Premises. B In unpaved areas, grade surface as a uniform slope from installed appurtenances to natural grade and stabilize as indicated on Plans. 3.09 PROTECTION OF TI3E WORK A Maintain excavation and embankment areas until start of subsequent work. Repair and re-compact slides,washouts,settlements,or areas with loss of density at no cost to the Owner B Prevent erosion at all times. Do not allow water to pond in excavations. ri"\, C Distribute construction traffic evenlyover compacted areas,where practical,to aid in P obtaining uniform compaction. Protect exposed areas having high moisture content from wheel loads that cause rutting. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02317-7 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES ("7- Section 02318 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavation,trenching,foundation,embedment,and backfill for installation of utilities, storm sewers including manholes, pipeline structures and other associated appurtenances. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01570—Trench Safety System 4. Section 01564—Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 5. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 6. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 7. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 8. Section 02255—Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 9. Section 02370—Geotextile 10. Section 02220— Site Demolition 11. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises C. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 2321, "Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications" b. ASTM D 698, "Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort" c. ASTM D 558, "Standard Test Methods for Moisture-Density (Unit Weight) Relations of Soil-Cement Mixtures" d. ASTM D 4318, "Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" e. ASTM D 1556,"Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method" f. ASTM D 2922, "Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)" g. ASTM D 3017, "Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and • Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)" 5/2013 02318- 1 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 2. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) 14°4) a. Tex-101-E, Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing b. Tex-110-E, Particle Size Analysis of Soils D. Definitions: 1. Excavation - Any man-made cut, cavity, trench, or depression in an earth surface, formed by removal of material. a. Extra Hand Excavation- excavation by manual labor at locations designated by the Engineer, which is not included in other Bid Items. b. Extra Machine Excavation- excavation by machine at locations designated by the Engineer, which is not included in other Bid Items. c. Special Excavation-excavation necessitated by obstruction of pipes, ducts, or other structures, not shown on Plans, which interfere with installation of utility piping by normal methods of excavation or augering. Contractor shall be responsible for locating such underground obstructions,sufficiently in advance of trench excavation or augering, to preclude damage to the obstructions. 2. Pipe Foundation-suitable and stable native soils that are exposed at the trench subgrade after excavation to depth of bottom of the bedding as shown on the Plans, or foundation backfill material placed and compacted in over- excavations. 3. Pipe Bedding-the portion of trench backfill that extends vertically from top of foundation up to a level line at bottom of pipe, and horizontally from one trench sidewall to opposite sidewall. 4. Haunching-the material placed on either side of pipe from top of bedding up to spring-line of pipe and horizontally from one trench sidewall to opposite sidewall. 5. Initial Backfill - the portion of trench backfill that extends vertically from spring-line of pipe(top of haunching)up to a level line 12 inches above top of pipe, and horizontally from one trench sidewall to opposite sidewall. 6. Pipe Embedment - the portion of trench backfill that consists of bedding, haunching, and initial backfill. 7. Trench Zone-the portion of trench backfill that extends vertically from top of pipe embedment up to pavement subgrade or up to final grade when not beneath pavement. 5/2013 02318-2 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 8. Trench Conditions - description of the stability of trench bottom and trench walls of pipe embedment zone. Maintain trench conditions that provide for effective placement and compaction of embedment material directly on or against undisturbed soils or foundation backfill,except where structural trench support is necessary. a. Dry Stable Trench: Stable and substantially dry trench conditions exist in pipe embedment zone as a result of typically dry soils or achieved by ground water control (dewatering or depressurization) for trenches extending below ground water level. b. Stable Trench with Seepage: Stable trench in which ground water seepage is controlled by excavation drainage. 1) Stable Trench with Seepage in Clayey Soils: Excavation drainage is provided in lieu of or to supplement ground water control systems to control seepage and provide stable trench subgrade in predominately clayey soils prior to bedding placement. 2) Stable Wet Trench in Sandy Soils: Excavation drainage is provided in the embedment zone in combination with ground water control in predominately sandy or silty soils. c. Unstable Trench: Unstable trench conditions exist in the pipe embedment zone if ground water inflow or high water content causes soil disturbances,such as sloughing,sliding,boiling,heaving or loss of density. 9. Sub-trench - a special case of benched excavation. Sub-trench excavation below trench shields or shoring installations may be used to allow placement and compaction of foundation or embedment materials directly against undisturbed soils. Depth of a sub-trench depends upon trench stability and safety as determined by the Contractor. 10. Trench Dam - a placement of low permeability material in pipe embedment zone or foundation to prohibit ground water flow along the trench. 11. Over-Excavation and Backfill - excavation of subgrade soils with unsatisfactory bearing capacity or composed of otherwise unsuitable materials below top of foundation as shown on Plans, and backfilled with foundation backfill material. 12. Foundation Backfill Materials - natural soil or manufactured aggregate of controlled gradation, and geo-textile filter fabrics as required, to control 5/2013 02318 -3 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES drainage and material separation. Foundation backfill material is placed and '"..4) compacted as backfill to provide stable support for bedding. Foundation backfill materials may include concrete seal slabs. 13. Trench Shield(Trench Box) - a portable worker safety structure moved along the trench as work proceeds, used as a Protective System and designed to withstand forces imposed on it by cave-in, thereby protecting persons within the trench. Trench shields may be stacked if so designed or placed in a series depending on depth and length of excavation to be protected. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for trench excavation, embedment,and backfill under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for all excavation and backfill associated with the placement and construction of: underground piping,boxes,manholes and associated appurtenances including conduit, or duct work. B. If Special Excavation is allowed, based on the Engineer's direction, and indicated in Section 00300—Bid Proposal as an Extra Item, measurement will be on a cubic yard basis, measured in place, without deduction for space occupied by portions of pipes, ducts, or other structures left in place across trenches excavated under this item. 1. Payment for Special Excavation shall include: a. Dewatering and surface water control. b. Protection of pipes, ducts, or other structures encountered including bracing, shoring, and sheeting necessary for support. c. Replacement of pipes, ducts, or structures damaged by special excavation operations, except where payment for replacement is authorized by Engineer due to deteriorated condition of pipes,ducts,or structure. d. Temporary disconnecting,plugging, and reconnecting of low volume water pipes,to allow machine excavation or augering,when approved by Engineer. Pipe for replacement shall be new and conform to specification requirements for type of existing pipe removed. e. Placement of material from Special Excavation. f. Geo-textile material and concrete trench dams required to complete the placement of material from Special Excavation. g. Re-sodding required for surface restoration within designated limits of Special Excavation. h. Disposal of excess excavated material not suitable for bedding or backfill, or not required for the Work. 2. The items listed below will not be included in payment for Special Excavation. Include cost in Bid Items for which the Work is a component: 5/2013 02318 -4 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES a. Trench safetysystem includingsheetingand shoring. Y g b. Utility piping installed in trenches excavated under this item. c. Removal and replacement of associated streets, driveways, and sidewalks. C. If Extra Hand Excavation is allowed,based on the Engineer's direction,and indicated in Section 00300—Bid Proposal as an Extra Item,measurement will be on a cubic yard basis, measured in place. 1. Payment for Extra Hand Excavation shall include: a. Dewatering and surface water control. b. Disposal of excess excavated material not suitable for bedding or backfill, or not required for the Work. c. Placement of material from Extra Hand Excavation. d. Re-sodding required for surface restoration within designated limits of Extra Hand Excavation. 2. The items listed below will not be included in payment for Special Excavation. Include cost in Bid Items for which the Work is a component.: a. Trench safety system including sheeting and shoring. b. Removal and replacement of associated streets, driveways, and sidewalks. D. If Extra Machine Excavation is allowed, based on the Engineer's direction, and indicated in Section 00300—Bid Proposal as an Extra Item,measurement will be on a cubic yard basis, measured in place. 1. Payment for Extra Machine Excavation shall include: a. Dewatering and surface water control. b. Disposal of excess excavated material not suitable for bedding or backfill, or not required for the Work. c. Placement of material from extra machine excavation. d. Re-sodding required for surface restoration within designated limits of Extra Machine Excavation. 2. The items listed below will not be included in payment for Special Excavation. Include cost in Bid Items for which the Work is a component: a. Trench safety system including sheeting and shoring. b. Removal and replacement of associated streets, driveways, and sidewalks. 5/2013 02318-5 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES E. Refer to Section 01200-Measurement and Payment Procedures. No payment will be made for delays in completion of Work resulting from Extra Item Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit a written description for information only of the planned typical method of excavation, backfill placement and compaction, including: 1. Sequence of work and coordination of activities. 2. Selected trench widths. 3. Procedures for foundation and embedment placement, and compaction. 4. Procedure for use of trench boxes and other pre-manufactured systems while assuring specified compaction against undisturbed soil. 5. Procedure for installation of Special Shoring at locations identified on the Plans. C. Submit product quality,material sources, and field quality information in accordance with this Section. D. Submit field red lines documenting location of Utilities as installed, referenced to survey Control Points, under the provisions of Section 01760 — Project Record Documents, 1.04C. Include location of utilities and structures encountered or rerouted. Give horizontal dimensions, elevations, inverts and gradients. 1.04 TESTING A. Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A. Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. rTh 5/2013 02318-6 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 1.06 SPECIAL SHORING DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Special Shoring shall be, in accordance with Section 01570—Trench Safety System, designed by a Professional Engineer, licensed by the State of Texas, At Contractor's expense. B. Special Shoring shall be designed to provide support for the sides of the excavations, including soils and hydrostatic ground water pressures as applicable, and to prevent ground movements affecting adjacent installations or improvements such as structures, pavements and utilities. C. Special Shoring may be a pre-manufactured system or a field fabricated system that meets the requirements of the Work. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Contractor shall provide materials used as embedment, backfill, back-dressing, and embankment identified on the Plans in accordance with Section 02255 — Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Material. B. Manufactured materials, such as crushed concrete,may be substituted for natural soil or rock products where indicated in the product specification, and approved by the Engineer,provided that the physical property criteria are determined to be satisfactory by testing. C. Geotextile (Filter Fabric): Conform to requirements of Section 02370—Geotextile. D. Concrete for Trench Dams: Concrete backfill or 3 sack premixed(bag) concrete. E. Timber Shoring Left in Place: Untreated oak. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Perform excavation with track mounted excavator or other equipment suitable for achieving the requirements of this Section. B. Use only hand-operated tamping equipment until a minimum cover of 12 inches is obtained over pipes, conduits, and ducts. Do not use heavy compacting equipment until adequate cover is attained to prevent damage to pipes, conduits, or ducts. C. Use trench shields or other Protective Systems or Shoring Systems which are designed and operated to achieve placement and compaction of backfill directly against C"\i' undisturbed native soil. 5/2013 02318-7 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES D. Use Special Shoring systems where required which may consist of braced sheeting, braced soldier piles and lagging, slide rail systems, or other systems meeting the Special Shoring design requirements. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Employ a Trench Safety Program as specified in Section 01570 — Trench Safety Systems. B. Install and operate necessary dewatering and surface water control measures conform to Section 01564—Control of Ground Water and Surface Water. C. Remove existing pavements and structures, including sidewalks and driveways, to conform with requirements of Section 02220—Site Demolition, as applicable. D. Area shall be cleared and grubbed under the.provisions of Section 02200 — Site Preparation prior to excavation. E. Strip and stockpile topsoil under the provisions of Section 02200—Site Preparation F. Schedule work so that pipe embedment can be completed on the same day that acceptable foundation has been achieved for each section ofpipe installation,manhole, or other structures. 3.02 EXCAVATION A. Except as otherwise specified or shown on the Plans, install underground utilities in open cut trenches with vertical sides. B. Perform excavation work so that pipe,conduit,and ducts can be installed to depths and alignments shown on the Plans. Avoid disturbing surrounding ground and existing facilities and improvements. C. Determine trench excavation widths using the following schedule as related to pipe outside diameter(O.D.). Maximum trench width shall be the minimum trench width plus 24 inches. NOMINAL MINIMUM TRENCH PIPE SIZE, INCHES WIDTH, INCHES Less than 18 O.D. + 18 18 to 30 O.D. +24 Greater than 30 O.D. + 36 5/2013 02318 -8 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES D. Use sufficient trench width or benches above the embedment zone for installation of well point headers or manifolds and pumps where depth of trench makes it uneconomical or impractical to pump from the surface elevation. Provide sufficient space between shoring cross braces to permit equipment operations and handling of forms,pipe, embedment and backfill, and other materials. E. Upon discovery of unknown utilities, badly deteriorated utilities not designated for removal, or concealed conditions, discontinue work at that location. Notify the Engineer and obtain instructions before proceeding. F. Shoring of Trench Walls. 1. Install Special Shoring in advance of trench excavation or simultaneously with the trench excavation, so that the soils within the full height of the trench excavation walls will remain fully laterally supported at all times. 2. For all types of shoring, support trench walls in the pipe embedment zone throughout the installation. Provide trench wall supports sufficiently tight to prevent washing the trench wall soil out from behind the trench wall support. 3. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer,leave sheeting driven into or below the pipe embedment zone in place to preclude loss of support of foundation (111.1\ and embedment materials. Leave rangers,walers, and braces in place as long as required to support sheeting,which has been cut off,and the trench wall in the vicinity of the pipe zone. 4. Employ special methods for maintaining the integrity of embedment or foundation material. Before moving supports,place and compact embedment to sufficient depths to provide protection of pipe and stability of trench walls. As supports are moved, finish placing and compacting embedment. 5. If sheeting or other shoring is used below top of the pipe embedment zone,do not disturb pipe foundation and embedment materials by subsequent removal. Maximum thickness of removable sheeting extending into the embedment zone 1 inch. Fill voids left on removal of supports with compacted backfill material. G. Use of Trench Shields. When a trench shield(trench box) is used as a worker safety device, the following requirements apply: 1. Make trench excavations of sufficient width to allow shield to be lifted or pulled freely, without damage to the trench sidewalls. 2. Move trench shields so that pipe, and backfill materials, after placement and compaction, are not damaged nor disturbed, nor the degree of compaction reduced. 5/2013 02318-9 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 3. When required, place, spread, and compact pipe foundation and bedding materials beneath the shield. For backfill above bedding, move the shield as backfill is placed and ramped in. Place and compact backfill materials against undisturbed trench walls and foundation. 4. Maintain trench shield in position to allow sampling and testing to be performed in a safe manner. 3.03 TRENCH FOUNDATION A. Excavate bottom of trench to uniform grade to achieve stable trench conditions and satisfactory compaction of foundation or bedding materials. B. Place trench dams in Class I foundations in line segments longer than 100 feet between manholes, and not less than one in every 500 feet of pipe placed. Install additional dams as needed to achieve workable construction conditions. Do not place trench dams closer than 5 feet from manholes. 3.04 PIPE EMBEDMENT PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION A. Immediately prior to placement of embedment materials,the bottoms and sidewalls of t-.44►, trenches shall be free of loose, sloughing, caving, or otherwise unsuitable soil. B. Place Geotextile,if specified,to prevent particle migration from the in-situ into open- graded (Class I) embedment materials or drainage layers. C. Place embedment including bedding, haunching and initial backfill to meet requirements indicated on Plans. PVC & HDPE require cement stabilized sand bedding and backfill to one foot below subgrade or below grade if under pavement,or one foot above top of pipe if not under pavement. D. For pipe installation,manually spread embedment materials around the pipe to provide uniform bearing and side support when compacted. Do not allow materials to free-fall from heights greater than 24 inches above top of pipe. Perform placement and compaction directly against the undisturbed soils in the trench sidewalls, or against sheeting which is to remain in place. E. Do not place trench shields or shoring within height of the embedment zone unless means to maintain the density of compacted embedment material are used. If moveable supports are used in embedment zone, lift the supports incrementally to allow placement and compaction of the material against undisturbed soil. F. Do not damage coatings or wrappings of pipes during backfilling and compacting operations. When embedding coated or wrapped pipes, do not use crushed stone or other sharp, angular aggregates. 5/2013 02318- 10 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES G. Place haunching material manually around the pipe and compact it to provide uniform bearing and side support. If necessary, hold small-diameter or lightweight pipe in place during compaction of haunch areas and placement beside the pipe with sand bags or other suitable means. H. Place electrical conduit directly on foundation without bedding. Shovel pipe embedment material in place and compact it using pneumatic tampers in restricted spaces,and vibratory-plate compactors or engine-powered jumping jacks in unrestricted spaces. Compact each lift before proceeding with placement of the next lift. 1. Class I embedment materials. a. Maximum 6-inches compacted lift thickness. b. Systematic compaction by at least two passes of vibrating equipment. Increase compaction effort as necessary to effectively embed the pipe to meet the deflection test criteria. c. Moisture content as determined by Contractor for effective compaction without softening the soil of trench bottom,foundation or trench walls. 2. Class II embedment and cement stabilized sand. a. Maximum 6-inches compacted thickness. b. Compaction by methods determined by Contractor to achieve a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined according to ASTM D 698 for Class II materials and according to ASTM D 558 for cement stabilized materials. c. Moisture content of Class II materials within 3 percent of optimum as determined according to ASTM D 698. Moisture content of cement stabilized sands on the dry side of optimum as determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration. J. Place trench dams in Class I embedments in line segments longer than 100 feet between manholes, and not less than one in every 500 feet of pipe placed. Install additional dams as needed to achieve workable construction conditions. Do not place trench dams closer than 5 feet from manholes. 3.05 TRENCH ZONE BACKFILL PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION A. Place backfill for pipe or conduits and restore surface as soon as practicable. Leave only the minimum length of trench open as necessary for construction. Backfill placement and compaction shall apply to all soils excavated for the trench especially including any areas that were "benched" or over-excavated in place of trenched shoring. All disturbed soils generated during excavation,whether inside the trench or associated with it, shall be considered to fall under this requirement. 5/2013 02318- 11 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES B. Where damage to completed pipe installation work is likely to result from withdrawal "g3/4) of sheeting, leave the sheeting in place. Cut off sheeting 1.5 feet or more above the crown of the pipe. Remove trench supports within 5 feet from the ground surface. C. For sewer pipes,use backfill materials described here as determined by trench limits. As trench zone backfill in paved areas for streets and to one foot back of curbs and pavements,use cement stabilized sand for pipe of nominal sizes less than 36 inches,or Bank Sand for pipe of nominal sizes 36 inches and larger as indicated on the Drawings. Uniformly backfill trenches unless specified otherwise according to the paved area criteria. Use select backfill within one foot below pavement subgrade for rigid pavement. For asphalt concrete,use flexible base material within one foot below pavement subgrade. D. For water lines,backfill in trench zone, including auger pits,with Bank Sand, Select Fill, or Random Fill material as specified in this Section. E. For trench excavations under pavement,place trench zone backfill in lifts and compact by methods indicated below. Fully compact each lift before placement of the next lift. 1. Bank Sand. a. Maximum 9-inches compacted lift thickness. b. Compaction by vibratory equipment to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698. c. Moisture content within 3 percent of optimum determined according to ASTM D 698 2. Cement Stabilized Sand. a. Maximum lift thickness determined by Contractor to achieve uniform placement and required compaction, but not exceeding 24 inches. b. Compaction by vibratory equipment to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558. c. Moisture content on the dry side of optimum determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for cement hydration. 3. Select Fill. a. Maximum 6-inches compacted thickness. b. Compaction by equipment providing tamping or kneading impact to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698. c. Moisture content within 2 percent of optimum determined according to ASTM D 698. F. For trench excavations outside pavements, a Random Fill of suitable material may be used in the trench zone. 5/2013 02318 - 12of15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES C.16\ 1. Fat clays (CH)may be used as trench zone backfill outside paved areas at the Contractor's option. If the required density is not achieved,the Contractor,at his option and at no additional cost to the Owner,may use lime stabilization to achieve compaction requirements or use a different suitable material. 2. Maximum 9-inch compacted lift thickness for clayey soils and maximum 12- inch lift thickness for granular soils. 3. Compact to a minimum of 90 percent of the maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698, or to same density as adjacent soils. 4. Moisture content as necessary to achieve density. 3.06 MANHOLES,JUNCTION BOXES AND OTHER PIPELINE STRUCTURES A. Meet the requirements of adjoining utility installations for backfill of pipeline structures, as shown on the Plans. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Quality Control 1. The Engineer may sample and test backfill at: a. Sources including borrow pits, production plants and Contractor's designated off-site stockpiles. b. On-site stockpiles. c. Materials placed in the Work. 2. The Engineer may resample material at any stage of work or location if changes in characteristics are apparent. B. Production Verification Testing: The Owner's testing laboratory will provide verification testing on backfill materials,as directed by the Engineer. Samples may be taken at the source or at the production plant, as applicable. C. Provide excavation and Trench Safety Systems at locations and to depths required for testing and retesting during construction. D. Tests will be performed on a minimum of three different samples of each material type for plasticity characteristics, in accordance with ASTM D 4318, and for gradation (1111'\ characteristics, in accordance with Tex-101-E and Tex-110-E. Additional classification tests will be performed whenever there is a noticeable change in material gradation or plasticity. 5/2013 02318 - 13 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES E. At least three tests for moisture-density relationships will be performed initially for backfill materials in accordance with ASTM D 698, and for cement stabilized sand in accordance with ASTM D 558. Additional moisture-density relationship tests will be performed whenever there is a noticeable change in material gradation or plasticity. F. In-place density tests of compacted pipe foundation, embedment and trench zone backfill soil materials will be performed according to ASTM D 1556, or ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017, and at the following frequencies and conditions. 1. A minimum of one test for every 100 linear feet measured along pipe for compacted embedment and for every 100 linear feet measured along pipe for compacted trench zone backfill material. Testing shall be performed for each lift thickness for different backfill material specified in Item 3.05. 2. A minimum of three density tests for each full shift of Work when backfill is placed. 3. Density tests will be distributed among the placement areas. Placement areas are: foundation, bedding, haunching, initial backfill and trench zone. 4. The number of tests will be increased if inspection determines that soil type or moisture content are not uniform or if compacting effort is variable and not considered sufficient to attain uniform density, as specified. 5. Density tests may be performed at various depths below the fill surface by pit excavation. Material in previously placed lifts may therefore be subject to acceptance/rejection. 6. Two verification tests will be performed adjacent to in-place tests showing density less than the acceptance criteria. Placement will be rejected unless both verification tests show acceptable results. 7. Re-compacted placement will be retested at the same frequency as the first test series, including verification tests. G. Recondition,re-compact,and retest at Contractor's expense if tests indicate Work does not meet specified compaction requirements. For Cement Stabilized Sand with nonconforming density,core and test for compressive strength at Contractor's expense. H. Acceptability of crushed rock compaction will be determined by inspection. 3.08 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A. Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. 5/2013 02318- 14 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 3.09 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A. Maintain excavation and embankment areas until start of subsequent work. Repair and re-compact slides,washouts,settlements,or areas with loss of density at no cost to the Owner B. Prevent erosion at all times. Do not allow water to pond in excavations. C. Distribute construction traffic evenly over compacted areas,where practical,to aid in obtaining uniform compaction. Protect exposed areas having high moisture content from wheel loads that cause rutting. D. Coordinate excavation within 15 feet of existing utilities with utility representative. Excavate by hand to locate existing utility, support utility with methods agreed upon by utility representative. All work shall be subsidiary to bid items in Section 00300 Bid Proposal. No additional cost to City. END OF SECTION 5/2013 02318- 15 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND EMBANKMENT Section 02330 (11.4.\ EMBANKMENT 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Construction of embankments with excess excavated material and borrow. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350— Submittals 3. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 4. Section 01570—Trench Safety System 5. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 6. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 7. Section 02255 —Bedding,Backfill and Embankment Material 8. Section 02910—Topsoil 9. Section 01564—Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 10. Section 01720—Field Surveying 11. Section 02220—Site Demolition 12. Section 02200—Site Preparation 13. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 698, "Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort" b. ASTM D 1556,"Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method" c. ASTM D 2922, "Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)" d. ASTM D 3017, "Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for Embankment under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. (glib\ B If embankment is included as a Bid Item, measurement will be based on the Units shown in Section 00300 — Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200 — Measurement and Payment Procedures. 5/2013 02330- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EMBANKMENT 1.03 . SUBMITTALS ,-"aksj A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit product quality,material sources, and field quality information in accordance with this Section. C Submit field red lines documenting location of embankments as installed,referenced to survey Control Points, under the provisions of Section 01760 — Project Record Documents, 1.04C. Include location of utilities and structures encountered or rerouted. Give horizontal dimensions, elevations, inverts and gradients. D Submit a Trench Safety Plan under the provisions of Section 01570—Trench Safety System that included measures that establish compliance with the standard interpretation of the General Duty Clause, Section 5.(a)(1),of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 — 20 USC 654 which states, "Employers must shore or otherwise protect employees who walk/work at the base of an embankment from possible collapse." 1.04 TESTING A Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Contractor shall provide materials used as embedment, backfill, back-dressing, and embankment identified on the Plans in accordance with Section 02255 — Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Material. B Topsoil: Conform to requirements of Section 02910—Topsoil. C Borrow Material: Conform to requirements of intended use. Take borrow material from sources approved by Engineer. 5/2013 02330-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EMBANKMENT 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Verify borrow and excess excavated materials to be reused, are approved. B Verify removals, and clearing and grubbing operations, have been completed. C Verify backfill of new or relocated utilities and structures, below future grade, is complete. 3.02 PREPARATION A Employ a Trench Safety Plan as specified in Section 01570—Trench Safety Systems. B Install and operate necessary dewatering and surface water control measures in accordance with requirements of Section 01564 — Control of Ground Water and Surface Water. C Identify required lines, levels, and datum. Coordinate with Section 01720 — Field Surveying. D Remove existing pavements and structures, including sidewalks and driveways, in (11.16'' conformance with requirements of Section 02220—Site Demolition, as applicable. E Area shall be cleared and grubbed under the provisions of Section 02200 — Site Preparation prior to placing embankment or opening borrow source. F Strip and stockpile topsoil under the provisions of Section 02200—Site Preparation. G Backfill test pits, or stump holes and other surface irregularities such as small swales with embankment materials and compact in proper lift depths according to the compaction requirements of this Section. H Areas of unsuitable material shall be removed,backfilled with embankment materials and compacted in proper lift depths according to the compaction requirements of this Section. I Upon discovery of unknown or badly deteriorated utilities, or concealed conditions, discontinue work. Notify Engineer and obtain instructions before proceeding in such areas. 3.03 PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION A Do not conduct placement operations during inclement weather or when existing C' ground or embankment materials exceed 3 percent of optimum moisture content. Contractor may manipulate wet material to facilitate drying,by disking or windrowing, at Contractor's expense. 5/2013 02330-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EMBANKMENT B Do not place embankment material until density and moisture content of previously placed material complies with specified requirements. C Scarify areas to receive embankment to a minimum depth of 4 inches to bond existing and new materials. Mix with first layer of embankment material. D Spread embankment material evenly,from dumped piles or windrows,into horizontal layers approximately parallel to finished grade. Place to meet specified compacted thickness. Break clods and lumps and mix materials by blading,harrowing,-discing,or other approved method. Each layer shall extend across full width of embankment. E Each layer shall be homogeneous and contain uniform moisture content before compaction. Mix dissimilar abutting materials to prevent abrupt changes in composition of embankment. F Layers shall not exceed depth as indicated on the Plans. G Where shown on Plans for steep slopes, cut benches into slope and scarify before placing embankment. Place increasingly wide horizontal layers of specified depth,to the level of each bench. H Build embankment layers on back slopes,adjacent to existing roadbeds,to level of old roadbed. Scarify top of old roadbed to minimum depth of four inches and re-compact with next layer. I Construct to lines and grades shown on Plans. 3.04 COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS A Maintain moisture content of embankment materials to attain required compaction density. B Compact to minimum densities shown on the Plans with a moisture content of optimum to 3 percent above optimum as determined by ASTM D 698. 3.05 TOLERANCES A Top of compacted surface: Plus or minus 1/2 inch in cross section,or in 16 foot length. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017 under provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services. B A minimum of three tests will be taken for each 1,000 linear feet per lane of roadway or 500 square yards of embankment per lift. 5/2013 02330-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND EMBANKMENT C If tests indicate work does not meet specified compaction requirements, recondition, re-compact, and retest at Contractor's expense. 3.07 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. B In unpaved areas, grade surface as a uniform slope from installed appurtenances to natural grade and stabilize as indicated on Plans. 3.08 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Maintain all embankment areas in good condition until completion of Work. B Repair and re-compact slides, washouts, settlements, areas with loss of density, or excavation damaged by Contractor's operations at no additional cost to Owner. C Distribute construction traffic evenly over compacted areas,where practical,to aid in obtaining uniform compaction. Protect exposed areas having high moisture content from wheel loads that cause rutting. END OF SECTION 5/2013 02330-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE Section 02335 (1.11'\' SUBGRADE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Foundation course of lime and Portland Cement stabilized in situ subgrade material. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 4. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 5. Section 01564—Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 6. Section 01720—Field Surveying 7. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises C. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 4318, "Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" b. ASTM D 698, "Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort" c. ASTM D 1556,"Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method" d. ASTM D 2922, "Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)" e. ASTM D 3017, "Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)" f. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. g. ASTM D 558 - Standard Test Method for Moisture-Density Relations of Soil-Cement-Mixtures. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for subgrade is on a square yard basis. Separate payment will be made for each different required type and thickness of stabilized Subgrade. Limits of measurement shall match actual pavement replaced, but no greater than maximum pavement replacement limits shown on Drawings. Limits for measurement will be extended to include installed stabilized subgrade material that extends 2 foot beyond outside edge of pavement to be replaced, except where proposed pavement section 5/2013 02335- 1 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE shares common longitudinal or transverse edge with existing pavement section. No payment will be made for stabilized subgrade in areas beyond these limits. B. Measurement for hydrated lime and quicklime is by the ton of 2,000 pounds dry- weight basis, determined by the area to be covered and the rate of application. Do not include cost of hydrated lime or quicklime in Bid Item for subgrade. C. Measurement for lime slurry is by the ton of 2,000 pounds of lime calculated on the percentage by weight of dry solids for the grade of slurry. Do not include cost of lime slurry in Bid Item for subgrade. D. Measurement for Portland Cement is by the ton of 2,000 pounds of dry weight basis. Do not include cost of Portland Cement in Bid Item for subgrade. E. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit certificates stating that hydrated lime, commercial lime slurry and quicklime complies with the requirements in this Section. C. Submit weight tickets,certified by supplier,with each bulk delivery of lime to Project Site. D. Submit manufacturer's description and characteristics for rotary speed mixer and compaction equipment for approval. 1.04 TESTING AND SAMPLING A. Testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01450 —Testing Laboratory Services. B. Tests and analysis of soil materials will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 4318. C. Sampling and testing of lime slurry shall be in accordance with Tex-600-J. D. Sample mixtures of Portland Cement,hydrated lime or quicklime in slurry form will be tested to establish compliance with the requirements in this Section. E. Soil will be evaluated to establish percent of hydrated lime,quicklime,or lime slurry to be applied to subgrade material. F. Moisture-density relationship will be established on material sample from roadway, after stabilization, in accordance with ASTM D 698. 5/2013 02335 -2 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE G. Soil will be evaluated to establish ratio of cement to soil to obtain desired stability. (11111lb\ Normal range is 6 percent to 10 percent by weight. H. The percentage of moisture in soil, at time of cement application,will be determined by ASTM D 558. Moisture will not be allowed to exceed quantity that will permit uniform, complete mixture of soil and cement during dry mixing operations nor specified optimum moisture content for soil cement mixture, as determined. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A. Contractor shall conduct all. construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Bagged lime shall bear manufacturer's name, product identification, and certified weight.Bags varying more than 5 percent of certified weight may be rejected;average weight of 50 random bags in each shipment shall not be less than certified weight. B. Store lime in weatherproof enclosures. Protect lime from ground dampness. (11.6\ C. Quicklime can be dangerous; exercise extreme caution if used for the Work. Contractor shall become informed about recommended precautions in the handling, storage and use of quicklime. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 WATER A. Water shall be clean; clear; and free from oil, acids, alkali, or organic matter. 2.02 LIME A. Type A-Hydrated Lime: Dry material consisting essentially of calcium hydroxide or mixture of calcium hydroxide and an allowable percentage of calcium oxide and magnesium hydroxide. B. Type B-Lime Slurry:Liquid mixture consisting essentially of lime solids and water in slurry form. Water or liquid portion shall not contain dissolved material in sufficient quantity to be injurious or objectionable for purpose intended. C. Type C - Quicklime: Dry material consisting essentially of calcium oxide. Furnish quicklime in either of the following grades: 5/2013 02335 -3 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE 1. Grade DS: Pebble quicklime of a gradation suitable for use in the preparation (411) of a slurry for wet placing. 2. Grade S:Finely-graded quicklime for use in the preparation of a slurry for wet placing. Do not use Grade S quicklime for dry placing. (So called "Blue Lime" is not acceptable.) D. Lime shall conform to following requirements: CHEMICAL COMPOSITION TYPE A B C Active lime content, 1 2 %by weight Ca(OH)2+CaO 90.0 min 87.0 min - Unhydrated lime content, %by weight CaO 5.0 max - 87.0 min Free water content, %by weight H2O 5.0 max - - SIZING Wet Sieve, as %by weight residue retained: No. 6 0.2 max 0.2 max2 8.0 max3 No. 30 4.0 max 4.0 max2 - Dry sieve, as %by weight residue retained: 1-inch - - 0.0 3/4-inch - - 10.0 max Notes: 1 Maximum 5.0%by weight CaO shall be allowed in determining total active lime content. 2 Maximum solids content of slurry. 3 Total active lime content, as CaO, in material retained on the No. 6 sieve shall not exceed 2.0%by weight of original Type C lime. E. Lime Slurry may be delivered to the Project Site as Commercial Lime Slurry, or may be prepared at the Project Site using Hydrated Lime or Quicklime. The slurry shall be free of liquids other than water and shall be of a consistency that can be handled and uniformly applied without difficulty. 2.03 PORTLAND CEMENT (ONLY WHEN DIRECTED BY ENGINEER) A. ASTM C 150 Type I, bulk or sacked. 5/2013 02335 -4 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE 2.04 SOIL A. Provide soil consisting of approved material free from vegetation or other objectable matter encountered in existing roadbed. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify backfill of new or relocated utilities and structures below future grade is complete. B. Verify compacted subgrade is ready to support imposed loads. C. Verify subgrade lines and grades are correct. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Install and operate necessary dewatering and surface water control measures in accordance with requirements of Section 01564 — Control of Ground Water and Surface Water. B. Identify required lines, levels, and datum. Coordinate with Section 01720 — Field Surveying. C. Cut material to bottom of subgrade using an approved cutting and pulverizing machine meeting following requirements: 1. Cutters accurately provide a smooth surface over entire width of cut to plane of secondary grade. 2. Visible indication that cut is to proper depth. D. Alternatively, scarify or excavate to bottom of stabilized subgrade. Remove material or windrow to expose secondary grade. Correct wet or unstable material below secondary grade by scarifying,adding lime,and compacting. Obtain uniform stability. E. Upon discovery of unknown or badly deteriorated utilities, or concealed conditions, discontinue work. Notify Engineer and obtain instructions before proceeding in such areas. 3.03 LIME SLURRY APPLICATION A. Mix hydrated lime or quicklime with water to form a slurry of the solids content specified. Commercial lime slurry shall have dry solids content as specified. Conform to cautionary requirements in this Section, 1.06C, concerning use of quicklime. 5/2013 02335 -5 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUB GRADE B. Apply slurry with a distributor truck equipped with an agitator to keep lime and water in a consistent mixture. Make successive passes over measured section of roadway to attain proper moisture and lime content. Limit spreading to an area where preliminary mixing operations can be completed on the same working day. 3.04 PRELIMINARY MIXING A. Do not mix and place material when temperature is below 40 degrees F and falling. Base maybe placed when temperature taken in shade and away from artificial heat is above 35 degrees F and rising. B. Use approved single-pass or multiple-pass rotary speed mixers to mix soil, lime, and water to required depth. Obtain a homogeneous friable mixture free of clods and lumps. C. Shape mixed subgrade to final lines and grades. D. Seal subgrade as a precaution against heavy rainfall by rolling lightly with light pneumatic rollers. E. Cure soil-lime material for 1 to 4 days. Keep subgrade moist during cure. 3.05 FINAL MIXING A. Use approved single-pass or multiple-pass rotary speed mixers to uniformly mix cured soil and lime to required depth. B. Add water to bring moisture content of soil mixture to a minimum of optimum or above. C. Mix and pulverize until all material passes a 1 inch sieve; a minimum of 90 percent, excluding non-slaking fractions,passes a 3/4-inch sieve;and a minimum of 65 percent excluding non-slaking fractions passes a No. 4 sieve. D. Shape mixed subgrade to final lines and grades. E. Do not expose hydrated lime to open air for more than 6 hours during interval between application and mixing. Avoid excessive hydrated lime loss due to washing or blowing. 3.06 MIXING- PORTLAND CEMENT (ONLY WHEN DIRECTED BY ENGINEER) A. Do not place and mix cement when temperature is below 40 degrees F and falling. Place Portland Cement base when temperature taken in shade and away from artificial heat is above 35 degrees F and rising. 5/2013 02335 -6 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE B. Spread cement uniformly on soil at rate specified by laboratory. When bulk cement spreader is used,position it by string lines or other approved method to ensure uniform distribution of cement. Apply cement only to area where operations can be continuous and completed in daylight,within 1 hour of application. Amount of moisture in soil at time of cement placement shall not exceed quantity that will permit uniform mixture of soil and cement during dry mixing operations. Do not exceed specified optimum moisture content for soil cement mixture. C. Do not allow equipment other than that used in spreading and mixing, to pass over freshly spread cement until it is mixed with soil. D. Dry mix cement with soil after cement application. Continue mixing until cement has been sufficiently blended with soil to prevent formation of cement balls when water is applied. Mixture of soil and cement that has not been compacted and finished shall not remain undisturbed for more than 30 minutes. E. Immediately after dry mixing is complete, uniformly apply water as necessary and incorporate it into mixture. Pressurized equipment must provide adequate supply to ensure continuous application of required amount of water to sections being processed within 3 hours of cement application. Ensure proper moisture distribution at all times. After last increment of water has been added, continue mixing until thorough and uniform mix has been obtained. F. Ensure percentage of moisture in mixture,based on dry weights,is within 2 percentage points of specified optimum moisture content prior to compaction. When uncompacted soil cement mixture is wetted by rain indicating that average moisture content exceeds tolerance given at time of final compaction,reconstruct entire section in accordance with this Section at no additional cost to City. 3.07 COMPACTION-LIME SUBGRADE A. Aerate or sprinkle to attain optimum moisture content as determined by Testing Laboratory. Remove and reconstruct sections where average moisture content exceeds ranges specified at time of final compaction. B. Start compaction immediately after final mixing,unless approved by Engineer. C. Spread and compact in two or more approximately equal layers where total compacted thickness is to be greater than 8 inches. D. Compact with approved heavy pneumatic or vibrating rollers, or a combination of tamping rollers and light pneumatic rollers. Begin compaction at the bottom and continue until entire depth is uniformly compacted. E. Do not allow stabilized base to mix with underlying material. Correct irregularities or weak spots immediately by replacing material and re-compacting. 5/2013 02335 -7 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUB GRADE F. Compact to following minimum densities at a moisture content of optimum to 3 percent above optimum as determined by ASTM D 698,unless otherwise indicated on the Plans: 1. Areas to receive pavement without subsequent base course:Minimum density of 98 percent of maximum dry density. 2. Areas to receive subsequent base course: Minimum density of 95 percent of maximum dry density. G. Seal with approved light pneumatic tired rollers: Prevent surface hair line cracking. Rework and re-compact at areas where hair line cracking develops. H. Contractor shall conduct operations to minimize elapsed time between mixing and compacting stabilized subgrade in order to take advantage of rapid initial set characteristics. Complete compaction within 2 hours of commencing compaction and not more than 6 hours after adding and mixing the last stabilizing agent. 3.08 COMPACTION-PORTLAND CEMENT SUBGRADE(ONLY WHEN DIRECTED BY ENGINEER) A. Prior to beginning compaction, ensure mixture is in loose condition for its full depth. Uniformly compact the loose mixture to specified density, lines and grades. '"`'� B. After soil and cement mixture is compacted,apply water uniformly as needed and mix / thoroughly. Then reshape surface to required lines, grades and cross section and lightly scarify to loosen imprints left by compacting or shaping equipment. C. Roll resulting surface with pneumatic-tired roller and "skin" surface with power grader. Thoroughly compact mixture with pneumatic roller,adding small increments of moisture, as needed. When aggregate larger than No.4 sieve is present in mixture, make one complete coverage of section with flat-wheel roller immediately after skinning operation. When approved by Project Manager, surface finishing methods may be varied from this procedure, provided dense uniform surface, free of surface compaction planes, is produced. Maintain moisture content of surface material at its specified optimum during finishing operations. Compact and finish surface within period not to exceed 2 hours, to produce smooth, closely knit surface, free of cracks, ridges, or loose material, conforming to crown, grade and line shown on Drawings within period not to exceed 2 hours. 3.09 CURING A. Moist cure for a minimum of 3 days before placing base or surface course,or opening to traffic. Time may be adjusted as approved by Engineer. Subgrade may be opened to traffic after 2 days if adequate strength has been attained to prevent damage.Restrict traffic to light pneumatic rollers or vehicles weighing less than 10 tons. 5/2013 02335 -8 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUBGRADE B. Keep subgrade surface damp by sprinkling. Roll with light pneumatic roller to keep (11.14\. surface knit together. C. Place base, surface, or seal course within 14 days after final mixing and compaction unless prior approval is obtained from Engineer. 3.10 TOLERANCES A. Top of compacted surface:Plus or minus 1/4 inch in cross section or in 16 foot length. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. A minimum of three phenolphthalein test will be made at random locations per 1000 linear feet per lane of roadway or 500 square yards of base to determine in-place depth. B. Contractor may, at his own expense, request additional cores in the vicinity of cores indicating nonconforming in-place depths. If the average of the tests falls below the required depth,place and compact additional material at no cost to the Owner. C. Compaction Testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017 at random locations near depth determination tests. Three tests will be performed for each 1000 foot roadway section. Rework and re-compact areas that do not conform to compaction requirements at no cost to the Owner. 3.12 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A. Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. B. Fill test pits with new compacted lime stabilized subgrade. C. Completed surface shall be smooth and conform to typical section and established lines and grades. D. In unpaved areas, grade surface as a uniform slope from installed appurtenances to natural grade and stabilize as indicated on Plans. 3.13 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A. Maintain stabilized Subgrade to lines and grades and in good condition until placement of base or surface course. B. Protect the asphalt membrane, if used, from being picked up by traffic. 5/2013 02335-9 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND SUB GRADE C. Repair settlements, areas with loss of density, or areas of subgrade damaged by Contractor's operations at no additional cost to Owner by replacing and re-compacting material to full depth. D. Distribute construction traffic evenly over compacted areas,where practical,to aid in obtaining uniform compaction. Protect exposed areas having high moisture content from wheel loads that cause rutting. END OF SECTION 5/2013 02335 - 10 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND GEOTEXTILE Section 02370 GEOTEXTILE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Geotextile, also called filter fabric, in applications such as under a granular fill, as a pipe embedment wrap,around the exterior of a tunnel liner,or around the foundations of pipeline structures. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) a. ASTM D 4632, Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles" b. ASTM D 4533,"Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles" c. ASTM D 4833, "Standard Test Method for Index Puncture Resistance (1111'N' d. of Geotextiles, Geomembranes, and Related Products" ASTM D 3786,"Standard Test Method for Hydraulic Bursting strength of Textile Fabrics" e. ASTM D 4751, "Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile" f. ASTM D 4491, "Standard Test Method for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity" 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for Work requiring geotextile. B If Geotextile is included as a Bid Item,measurement will be based on the Units shown in Section 00300—Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. (.1111'\ B Submit the standard manufacturer's catalog sheets and other pertinent information,for approval, prior to installation. 07/2006 02370- 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND GEOTEXTILE C Submit installation methods, as a part of the work plan for tunneling or for excavation and backfill for utilities. Obtain approval from Engineer for Geotextile material and the proposed installation method prior to use of the geotextile. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 GEOTEXTILE A Provide a geotextile(filter fabric)designed for use in geotechnical applications which forms a permeable layer or media while retaining the soil matrix. B Use a fabric which meets the physical requirements for Class A Subsurface Drainage installation conditions as defined in AASHTO M288 and as specified in this Section, 2.02 "Properties". 2.02 PROPERTIES A Material: Non-woven, non-biodegradable,fabric consisting only of continuous chain polymer filaments or yarns, at least 85 percent by weight poly-olefins, polyesters or polyamide, formed into a dimensionally stable network. B Chemical Resistance: Inert to commonly encountered chemicals and hydrocarbons over a n 3 to 12. C PhysicalpH Resistance:rageof Resistant to mildew and rot, ultraviolet light exposure, insects and rodents. D Minimum Test Values: PROPERTY VALUE (MIN) TEST METHOD Grab strength 180 lbs ASTM D 4632 Trapezoidal Tear Strength 50 lbs ASTM D 4533 Puncture Strength 80 lbs ASTM D 4833 Mullen Burst Strength 290 psi ASTM D 3786 Apparent Opening Size(1) 0.25 mm ASTM D 4751 Permittivity(sec-1) 0.2 ASTM D 4491 (1) Maximum average roll value 3.0 EXECUTION - Notused END OF SECTION 07/2006 02370-2 of 2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 (111111''', SECTION 02 41 19- SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Refer also to Section 02220—Demolition for site demolition work. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. B. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. C. Existing to Remain: Leave existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119- 1 (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician. B. Engineering Survey: Submit engineering survey of condition of building. C. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control and for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. D. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of elevator and stairs. 5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work. E. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by demolition operations. Comply with Section 01380 "Construction Photographs." Submit before Work begins. F. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered. G. Warranties: Documentation indicating that existing warranties are still in effect after completion of selective demolition. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 -2 (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Engage a professional engineer to perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations. 1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities. C. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs or video. 1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01380 "Construction Photographs." SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 -3 (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 2. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide (4.1) photographs or video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations. 3: Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant .from mechanical equipment according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.3 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material and leave in place. c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material and leave in place. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 -4 (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No. 3—2/16/2017 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain-shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. - 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. 2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. 5. Maintain fire watch during and for at least two hours after flame-cutting operations. 6. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 7. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site. 8. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 9. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 10. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. C. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119-5 (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) TOM REED LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their (I") original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.6 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, and then remove concrete between saw cuts. B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, and then remove masonry between saw cuts. C. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, and then break up and remove. D. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings." Do not use methods requiring solvent-based adhesive strippers. E. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than what can be covered in one day by new roofing and so that building interior remains watertight and weathertight. See Section 07 52 16 — SBS Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing for new roofing requirements. 1. Remove existing roof membrane,flashings, copings, and roof accessories. 2. Remove existing roofing system down to substrate. ("7 3.7 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and dispose of them in an EPA-approved construction and demolition waste landfill acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. 3.8 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. 3.9 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE A. Remove and Reinstall: Refer to Drawings. B. Existing to Remain: Refer to Drawings. , SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119-6 (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 (.11°\ Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 END OF SECTION 02 41 19 (1111.16‘ SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 -7 (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) CITY OF PEARLAND AUGERING PIPE OR CASING FOR SEWERS CP '\ Section 02415 AUGERING PIPE OR CASING FOR SEWERS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Installation of pipe and casing for sanitary sewer by methods of augering. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01570—Trench Safety System 2. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 3. Section 01350—Submittals 4. Section 01563 —Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 5. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 6. Section 02530—Gravity Sanitary Sewers 7. Section 02430—Tunnel Grout 8. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 9. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises C Referenced Standards: ("1"."' 1. American Railway Engineering Association (AREA) Manual for Railway Engineering 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) 3. American Water Works Association (AWWA) a. AWWA C200, Steel Water Pipe - 6 in. (150 mm) and Larger D Definitions: 1. Dry Augering - installation of steel casing by excavating the soil at the advancing end of casing and transporting the spoil through the casing by an otherwise uncased auger, while advancing the casing by jacking at the same rate as the auger excavation progresses. 2. Slurry Augering - installation of casing or sewer pipe by first drilling a small diameter pilot hole from auger pit to auger pit,followed by reaming the bore to full diameter by augering with slurry, and installing the casing or pipe by a pull-back or jacking method. 3. Augered Pipe-the Contractor's installed water or sewer pipe in augered hole. 4. Augered Casing with Pipe - the Contractor's installed water or sewer pipe in augered casing. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT rb\ A Measurement for augered casing with sewer pipe will be on a linear foot basis measured from end to end of the casing. 07/2006 02415- 1 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND AUGERING PIPE OR CASING FOR SEWERS B Payment of augered casing with sewer pipe will be full compensation for all labor, equipment,casing,sewer pipe,materials and supervision for construction complete in place including dewatering,augering,joints,spoil removal,pipe installation,grouting, utility adjustments,testing, and cleanup, and other work necessary for construction as shown on the Plans and as specified. C Measurement of augered sewer pipe will be on a linear foot basis along the axis of the pipe from auger pit to auger pit. D Payment of augered sewer pipe will be full compensation for labor,pipe, equipment, materials, and supervision for construction complete in place including dewatering, jacking,utility adjustments,testing,cleanup,and other work necessary for construction as shown on the Plans and as specified. E No separate payment will be made for auger pits and other excavations under this section. Include cost of excavation, surface restoration, pavement repair, etc., for auger pits or observation pits in Sections related to the open-cut sewer installation portion of the Work. Include cost of trench safety for auger pits or observation pits in Section 01570—Trench Safety Systems. F Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Review. Submittal shall be made in accordance with Section 01350—Submittals. The Engineer will review submitted plans, details and data for compliance with specifications. Contractor shall not commence work on any items requiring pipe and casing augering work plan, or other submittal until the submittal have been reviewed and accepted by the Engineer. Such review by the Engineer shall not be construed in any way of relieving the Contractor of his responsibilities under the Contract,shall not be construed by the contractor as an endorsement by the Engineer that such methods are constructable or will work for the specific subsurface soils encountered. Structural designs and other engineered components shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Texas. B Pipe and Casing Augering Operation. 1. Submit for review a Pipe and Casing Augering Work Plan with complete drawings and written description identifying details of the proposed method of construction and the sequence of operations to be performed during construction, as required. The drawings and descriptions shall be sufficiently detailed to demonstrate to the Engineer whether the proposed materials and procedures will meet the requirements of this Section. 2. Depending on the Contractor's method of construction, the Pipe and Casing Augering Work Plan shall be submitted on the following items: a. Arrangement drawings and technical specifications of the augering equipment and experience record of the Contractor. b. Method of controlling line and grade of augering operation. 07/2006 02415-2 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND AUGERING PIPE OR CASING FOR SEWERS c. Method of spoil and slurry removal, including surface storage and disposal. d. Details of the pipe or casing installation. e. Grouting techniques to be used for filling annular void between casing and sewer pipe,where required, and for filling over excavation,if any, including equipment,pumping and injection procedures,pressure grout types, and mixtures. f. Location and construction of auger pits, including details for all required ground support installation not included in the Trench Safety Plan. g. Groundwater control system per requirements in this section and in accordance with Section 01563—Control of Ground Water and Surface Water, as required by construction method. 3. Casing and pipe fabrication drawings, including joint details. C Trench Safety 1. Shall be in accordance with Section 01570—Trench Safety System. 2. To the extent that excavation for pipe and casing augering involves work not covered by Contractor's Trench Safety Plan, the safety provisions of these excavations shall be addressed in the Pipe and Casing Augering Work Plan. D Quality Control Methods. At least 30 days prior to the start of augering,the Contractor shall submit a description of the quality control methods proposed for use in this operation to the Project Manager. The submittal shall include: 1. Supervision. Supervisory control to ensure that work is performed in accordance with the Plans and Specifications, and Pipe and Casing Augering Work Plan. 2. Line & Grade. Procedures for surveying, controlling and checking line and grade, including field forms. 3. Augering Observation and Monitoring. Procedures for preparing and submitting daily logs of augering operations, including field forms. 4. Products.and Materials. A plan for testing and submittal of test results to demonstrate compliance with the specification and Contractor's design criteria for permanent products, material and installations. The plan shall identify applicable standards and procedures for testing and acceptance. 5. Monitoring Settlement. Submit a settlement Monitoring Plan if requested by the Engineer. 1.04 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 07/2006 02415-3 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND AUGERING PIPE OR CASING FOR SEWERS 1.05 CRITERIA FOR DETERMINING INSTALLATION LOADS A Pipes and casings shall be selected by the Contractor to carry overburden pressure and applicable surcharge and installation loads. B The criteria to be used for truck loading shall be HS-20 vehicle loading distributions in accordance with AASHTO. C The Contractor shall be responsible for the selection of the casing,pipe,and pipe joints to carry the thrust of the jacks or loads due to the pulling mechanism. D The Contractor shall select the diameter of the casing to meet the minimum dimensions defined in the Plans, and to permit practical installation(including skids, pipe spiders and shims, if applicable) and grouting, where required. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Casing shall be provided where shown on Plans or indicated in Technical Specifications and be new, uncoated welded steel pipe, manufactured in accordance with AWWA C200. The design stress in the pipe wall shall be 50 percent of the minimum yield point of the steel or 18,000 psi, whichever is less, when subjected to the loading conditions. The design deflection to be used in determining wall thickness shall not exceed 3 percent of nominal casing pipe size. B Sewer pipe shall be provided in accordance with Section 02530 — Gravity Sanitary Sewers. The sewer pipe shall be selected by the Contractor and verified by the Contractor's engineer to safely withstand all service loads, including overburden pressures and surcharge loads together with all forces and pressures induced in pipe and joints during installation. C For grouting materials refer to Section 02430—Tunnel Grout. D Where casings are required by Plans,casing insulator width 8 inches for pipe sizes 4 to 14 inches; 12 inches for pipe sizes 16 to 30 inches. 1. For welded steel pipe 12 inches and smaller, use Pipeline Seal & Insulator Model PE, or approved equal. 2. For other pipe materials, use Pipeline Seal & Insulator Model C8G-2 or approved equal for pipe sizes up to 12 inches. 3. For all pipe sizes above 12 inches,use Pipeline Seal&Insulator Model C 12G- 2 or approved equal. E Casing End Seals: Provide Pipeline Seal &Insulator Model C or approved equal. 3.0 EXECUTION 07/2006 02415-4 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND AUGERING PIPE OR CASING FOR SEWERS 3.01 DRY AUGERING (CASING ONLY) A Provide horizontal augering equipment of sufficient capacity for the diameter and length of the casing to be installed and the anticipated ground conditions. B Provide heavy-duty jacks of a capacity suitable for forcing the excavating auger and casing through the ground and a suitable jacking frame or backstop. Use operating jacks constructed so that even pressure is applied to all jacks used. C Provide steerable front section of casing to allow vertical grade adjustments. A water level or other means shall be provided to allow monitoring of the grade elevation of the auger casing. D Set casing to be jacked on guides, properly braced together, to support the section of pipe and direct it to proper line and grade. Place the whole jacking assembly so as to line up with the direction and grade of the pipe. E In unconsolidated soil formations,bentonite may be used to seal the voids outside the wall and furnish lubrication for the installation of casing. The use of water to assist in lubrication to facilitate the removal of spoil is permitted,however,water jetting of the soil is not allowed when jacking the casing. F Insofar as practical and depending on the character of the soil encountered during the r"'*\ augering operation, conduct operations without interruption to prevent the pipe from seizing up in the hole before the installation is complete. G Repair casing damaged in augering operations by method acceptable to the Engineer or remove and replace it. 3.02 SLURRY AUGERING A Provide horizontal boring equipment for drilling of pilot hole, slurry augering equipment for excavating the full-sized hole for casing or pipe installation. B Drill a small diameter pilot hole for the entire length of the augered pipe. Check the pilot hole for line and grade at the receiving end to determine if the larger diameter casing hole will comply with this Specification. The pilot hole shall be redrilled if the installed pipe would not meet the specified tolerances. C Auger the large-diameter hole by mechanical means for reaming the pilot hole. The diameter of the augered hole shall be not more than 1 inch greater than the outside diameter of the installed pipe measured from the barrel of the pipe. Place excavated material outside the working pit and dispose of it, as specified in Section 01500 — Temporary Facilities and Controls. Jetting is not permitted. Augered holes which do not meet the specified tolerances shall be grouted. (lib\ D In unconsolidated soil formations,use a bentonite slurry to maintain a stable hole and furnish lubrication for the installation of the pipe. Install the pipe or casing in one 07/2006 02415-5 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND AUGERING PIPE OR CASING FOR SEWERS operation with the displacement of cuttings and slurry from the hole in potentially unstable soils to prevent casing and settlement of the ground surface. E Depending on the character of the soil encountered during the augering operation, conduct operations without interruption,insofar as practical,to prevent the pipe from seizing up in the hole before the installation is complete. F Repair casing or sewer pipe damaged in augering operations by method acceptable to the Engineer or remove and replace it. 3.03 AUGER PITS A Contractor's Pipe and Casing Augering Work Plan shall identify the location, size, depth and layout, and ground support design of all augering and observation pits, as well as a schedule of dates that each pit is expected to be open. B Auger pits that are excavated as a part of open-cut sewer construction shall be in accordance with Section 02318 —Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. C Install sheeting,lining,shoring,and bracing required for the protection of the workmen and the public in accordance with Section 01570—Trench Safety Systems. 3.04 PIPE IN CASING A Pipes shall be installed in augered casings in accordance with this Section, as applicable. B Bottom of trench adjacent to each end of casing should be graded to provide firm, uniform, and continuous support for carrier pipe. If trench requires some backfill to establish final trench bottom grade, backfill material should be placed in 6-inch lifts and each layer properly compacted. C Install casing end seals in accordance with manufactures specifications. 3.05 SPACER AND INSULATOR INSTALLATION A Casing spacers and/or insulators should be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Special care should be taken to ensure that all subcomponents are correctly assembled and evenly tightened,and that no damage occurs during tightening or carrier pipe insertion. B Spacing of spacers or insulators should ensure that carrier pipe is adequately supported throughout its length, particularly at ends, to offset settling and possible electrical shorting. End spacer must be within 6 inches of end of casing pipe,regardless of size of casing and carrier pipe or type of spacer used. Casing spacers are designed to withstand much greater loads than can be safely applied to most coatings. Therefore, spacing between spacers depends largely on load bearing capabilities of pipe coating and flexibility of pipe. 07/2006 02415 -6 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND AUGERING PIPE OR CASING FOR SEWERS 1. Spacing shall be as shown on Plans with maximum distance between spacers to be 10 feet for pipe sizes 4 to 14 inches and 8 feet for pipe sizes 16 to 30 inches. 2. For ductile iron pipe, flanged pipe, or bell-and-spigot pipe, spacers should be installed within one foot on each side of bell or flange and one in center of joint when 18- to 20-foot-long joints are used. 3. If casing or carrier pipe is angled, bent, or dented, spacing should be reduced. C Where metallic carrier pipe is to be placed in metallic casing, provide electric insulating type spacers to ensure no contact between carrier pipe and casing. 3.06 TOLERANCES A Acceptance criteria for Augered Casing,as defined in this Section, 1.01D, shall be±6 inches in horizontal alignment from theoretical at any point between manholes, including the receiving end, and ±1-1/2 inches in elevation from the theoretical. B Acceptance criteria for Augered Pipe, as defined in this Section, 1.01D, shall be±6 inches in horizontal alignment from theoretical at any point between manholes, including the receiving end, and±1/8 inch in elevation from the theoretical. C If a deviation exceeds these tolerances,the Contractor may be required to re-auger the casing or sewer pipe at no additional cost to the City, including any backfilling or grouting of the abandoned hole. Any redesign of the sewer and manholes made necessary by out-of-tolerance casing or sewer pipe shall be at the Contractor's expense and shall be signed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Texas. The installed pipe must be capable of meeting the design flow and velocities for a full pipe condition. Contractor is responsible for final selection of casing diameter to assure these tolerances. 3.07 HELD QUALITY CONTROL A Sewer pipes installed under this Section shall be tested under the provisions of the applicable Technical Specification for the type of sewer pipe installed. 3.08 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. 3.09 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Protect and maintain all pipe and casing augering in good condition until completion of Work. rh\ END OF SECTION 07/2006 02415-7 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND AUGERING PIPE OR CASING FOR WATER LINES Section 02417 AUGERING PIPE OR CASING FOR WATER LINES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Installation of pipe and casing for water lines by methods of augering. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01570—Trench Safety System 2. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 3. Section 01350—Submittals 4. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 5. Section 02635 —Steel Pipe and Fittings 6. Section 02318 —Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 7. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises C Referenced Standards: 1. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT UNIT PRICES (1111'\ A Measurement for augered casing with water pipe will be on a linear foot basis measured from end to end of the casing. B Payment of augered casing with water pipe will be full compensation for all labor, equipment,casing,water pipe,materials and supervision for construction complete in place including dewatering,augering,joints,spoil removal,pipe installation,grouting, utility adjustments,testing,and cleanup,and other work necessary for construction as shown on the Plans and as specified. C Measurement of augered water pipe will be on a linear foot basis along the axis of the pipe from auger pit to auger pit. D Payment of augered water pipe will be full compensation for labor, pipe, equipment, materials, and supervision for construction complete in place including dewatering, jacking,utility adjustments,testing,cleanup,and other work necessary for construction as shown on the Plans and as specified. E No separate payment will be made for auger pits and other excavations under this section. Include cost of excavation, surface restoration, pavement repair, etc., for auger pits or observation pits in Sections related to the open-cut utility installation portion of the Work. Include cost of trench safety for auger pits or observation pits in Section 01570—Trench Safety Systems. F Refer to Section 01200 - Measurement and Payment Procedures. 02/2008 02417- 1 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND AUGERING PIPE OR CASING FOR WATER LINES 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Submit product data in accordance with requirements of Section 01350 - Submittals. B Submit product data for casing insulators for approval. C Prior to commencement of work, furnish for the Engineer's approval, a plan showing pit locations. Approval of this plan will not relieve Contractor from responsibility to obtain specified results. D Show actual pit locations dimensioned on as-built drawings so that they can be identified in field. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A Conform to Texas Department of Transportation for installations under state highways. Owner will obtain required permits for State Highway crossings. City will make submittal to TxDOT. Contractor will supply Traffic Control Plans. B Installations under railroads: 1. Secure and comply with requirements of right-of-entry for crossing railroad company's easement or right-of-way from railroad companies affected. Comply with railroad permit requirements. Submit copy to the Engineer. 2. Use dry auger method only. 3. No extra compensation for damages due to delays caused by the railroad requesting work to be done at hours which will not inconvenience the railroad. 4. Maintain minimum 35-foot clearance from centerline of tracks. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 1.06 CRITERIA FOR DETERMINING INSTALLATION LOADS A Pipes and casings shall be selected by the Contractor to carry overburden pressure and applicable surcharge and installation loads. B The criteria to be used for truck loading shall be HS-20 vehicle loading distributions in accordance with AASHTO. C The Contractor shall be responsible for the selection of the casing,pipe,and pipe joints to carry the thrust of the jacks or loads due to the pulling mechanism. D The Contractor shall select the diameter of the casing to meet the minimum dimensions defined in the Plans, and to permit practical installation (including skids, ^� pipe spiders and shims, if applicable) and grouting, where required. 02/2008 02417-2 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND AUGERING PIPE OR CASING FOR WATER LINES 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Piping and Fittings: As required by Plans. B Casings: Where required by Plans,in accordance with Section 02635 -Steel Pipe and Fittings. C Insulators: Where casings are required by Plans, casing insulator width 8 inches for pipe sizes 4 to 14 inches; 12 inches for pipe sizes 16 to 30 inches. 1. For welded steel pipe 12 inches.and smaller, use Pipeline Seal & Insulator Model PE, or approved equal. 2. For other pipe materials, use Pipeline Seal & Insulator Model C8G-2 or approved equal for pipe sizes up to 12 inches. 3. For all pipe sizes above 12 inches, use Pipeline Seal & Insulator Model Cl 2G-2 or approved equal. D Casing End Seals: Provide Pipeline Seal &Insulator Model C or approved equal. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A Do not exceed 100 feet for length of auger hole for uncased PVC pipe less than 12 inches in diameter without intermediate pit. B Do not exceed 75 feet for length of auger hole for uncased PVC pipe 12 inches to 16 inches in diameter without intermediate pit. C Do not exceed 80 feet for length of auger hole for uncased PVC pipe greater than 16- inches in diameter without intermediate pit. 3.02 PREPARATION A Secure right-of-entry for crossing railroad company's easement or right-of-way. 3.03 JACKING A Comply with Section 01570 - Trench Safety Systems for all pits, access shafts, end trenches and other excavations relating to work required by this specification. B If grade of pipe at jacking end is below ground surface, excavate suitable pits or trenches for conducting jacking operations and for placing end joints of pipe. Wherever end trenches are cut in sides of embankment or beyond it, sheath securely and brace such work to prevent earth caving. C No more than one joint shall be made-up in pit or trench prior to jacking. 02/2008 02417-3 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND AUGERING PIPE OR CASING FOR WATER LINES D Construction shall not interfere with operation of railroad, street, highway, or other facility, nor weaken or damage embankment or structure. E During construction operations,furnish and maintain barricades and lights to safeguard traffic and pedestrians as directed by the Engineer,until such time as backfill has been completed and removed from site. F Provide heavy-duty jacks suitable for forcing pipe through embankment. Use suitable jacking head, usually of timber, and suitable bracing between jacks and jacking head and suitable jacking frame or backstop so that jacking pressure will be applied to pipe uniformly around ring of pipe. Set pipe to be jacked on guides, properly braced together, to support section of pipe and to direct it in proper line and grade. Place jacking assembly in line with direction and grade of pipe. Excavate embankment material just ahead of pipe and remove material through pipe. Force pipe through embankment with jacks, into space thus provided. G Conform excavation for underside of pipe to contour and grade of pipe,for at least one third of circumference of pipe. Provide clearance of not more than 2 inches for upper half of pipe. Taper off upper clearance to zero at point where excavation conforms to contour of pipe. II Distance that excavation shall extend beyond end of pipe depends on character of material, but it shall not exceed 2 feet in any case. Decrease distance on instructions from the Engineer,if character of material being excavated makes it desirable to keep advance excavation closer to end of pipe. I Jack pipe from low or downstream end. Lateral or vertical variation in final position of pipe from line and grade established by the Engineer will be permitted only to extent of 1 inch in 10 feet, provided such variation is regular and only in one direction and that final grade of flow line is in direction indicated on plans. J Use cutting edge of steel plate around head end of pipe extending short distance beyond end of pipe with inside angles or lugs to keep cutting edge from slipping back onto pipe. K Once jacking of pipe is begun, carry on without interruption to prevent pipe from becoming firmly set in embankment. L Remove and replace any pipe damaged in jacking operations. M Backfill pits or trenches excavated to facilitate jacking operations immediately after completion of jacking of pipe. N Grout annular space when loss of embankment occurs or when clearance of two inches is exceeded. 02/2008 02417-4 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND AUGERING PIPE OR CASING FOR WATER LINES 3.04 AUGERING (BORING) A Auger from approved pit locations. Excavate for pits and install shoring as outlined above under "Jacking." Auger mechanically with use of a pilot hole entire length of crossing and check for line and grade on opposite end of bore from work pit. The large hole is to be no more than 2 inches larger than diameter of bell. Place excavated material outside working pit and dispose of as required. Use water or other fluids in connection with boring operation only to lubricate cuttings; jetting will not be permitted. B In unconsolidated soil formations, a gel-forming colloidal drilling fluid may be used. Fluid is to consist of at least 10 percent of high-grade processed bentonite and shall consolidate cuttings of bit, seal walls of hole, and shall furnish lubrication for subsequent removal of cuttings and installation of pipe. 3.05 PIPE IN CASING A Pipes shall be installed in augered casings in accordance with this Section, as applicable. B Bottom of trench adjacent to each end of casing should be graded to provide firm, uniform, and continuous support for carrier pipe. If trench requires some backfill to establish final trench bottom grade, backfill material should be placed in 6-inch lifts 11116, and each layer properly compacted. C Install casing end seals in accordance with manufactures specifications. 3.06 INSULATOR INSTALLATION A Casing spacers and/or insulators should be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Special care should be taken to ensure that all subcomponents are correctly assembled and evenly tightened,and that no damage occurs during tightening or carrier pipe insertion. B Spacing of spacers or insulators should ensure that carrier pipe is adequately supported throughout its length, particularly at ends, to offset settling and possible electrical shorting. End spacer must be within 6 inches of end of casing pipe,regardless of size of casing and carrier pipe or type of spacer used. Casing spacers are designed to withstand much greater loads than can be safely applied to most coatings. Therefore, spacing between spacers depends largely on load bearing capabilities of pipe coating and flexibility of pipe. 1. Spacing shall be as shown on Plans with maximum distance between spacers to be 10 feet for pipe sizes 4 to 14 inches and 8 feet for pipe sizes 16 to 30 inches. 2. For ductile iron pipe, flanged pipe, or bell-and-spigot pipe, spacers should be installed within one foot on each side of bell or flange and one in center of joint when 18- to 20-foot-long joints are used. 11111.6 3. If casing or carrier pipe is angled,bent, or dented, spacing should be reduced. 02/2008 02417-5 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND AUGERING PIPE OR CASING FOR WATER LINES C Where metallic carrier pipe is to be placed in metallic casing, provide electric insulating type spacers to ensure no contact between carrier pipe and casing. 3.07 FILLING ANNULAR SPACE A Allowable variation from line and grade shall be as specified under"Jacking." Block void space around pipe in augered hole with approximately 12 inches of packed clay or similar material approved by the Engineer,to prevent bedding or backfill from entering the void around the pipe in the augered hole when compacted. For pipe diameters 4 inches through 8 inches use minimum 1/2 cubic foot clay for pipe diameters 12 inches through 16 inches use minimum 3/4 cubic foot clay. 3.08 AUGER PITS A Locate auger pits where there is minimum interference with traffic or access to property. B Pit Size: Provide minimum 6-inch space between pipe and walls of bore pit. Maximum allowable width of pit shall be 5 feet unless approved by the Engineer. Width of pit at surface shall not be less than at bottom. Maximum allowable length of pit shall be no more than 5 feet longer than one full joint of pipe and shall not exceed 25 feet unless approved by the Engineer. C Excavate bore pits to finished grade at least 6 inches lower than grade indicated by stakes or as approved by the Engineer. D Backfill in accordance with Section 02318 —Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. 3.09 CLEAN UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. 3.10 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Protect and maintain all pipe and casing augering in good condition until completion of Work. END OF SECTION 02/2008 02417-6 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS Section 02510 WATER MAINS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Installation of water mains, including valves, fire hydrants,wet connections, cut and plug of mains, disinfection, and hydrostatic testing for pipelines. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200 -Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350 - Submittals 3. Section 02514 -Fire Hydrant Assembly 4. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete 5. Section 02512 -Polyethylene Wrap 6. Section 02417 -Augering Pipe for Water Lines 7. Section 02515 -Water Tap and Service Line Installation 8. Section 02318 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 9. Section 02980 - Pavement Repair 10. Section 01450 - Testing Laboratory Services 11. Section 02634 -Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings C. Referenced Standards: 1. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) 2. American Water Works Association(AWWA) 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for water mains open cut or augered, with or without casing, is on a linear foot basis for each size of pipe installed. Mains: Measure along axis of pipe and include fittings and valves. Branch Pipe: Measure from axis of main to end of branch. B. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Pipe shall bear Underwriter's Laboratories(UL)or Factory Mutual(FM)label. 6/2014 02510- 1 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 2. Pipe material acceptable without penalty to State's community fire insurance rating agency. 3. System acceptable to City and TCEQ. 4. Bacteriological disinfection acceptable to local health officials and Texas Department of Health, and TCEQ. 5. Water taps and draw off lines in compliance with local municipal specifications and regulations. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Product Data: 1. Obtain from pipe manufacturer installation instructions,manuals, and printed recommendations, except for Owner furnished pipe. 2. Retain product data on job site for reference. 3. Submit certified record of tests of pipe, fittings, or valves upon request of Engineer. 4. Submit hydrant manufacturer flow and friction loss curve. C. Samples: 1. Notify City when system is pressure tested and disinfected. City will take all samples for bacteriological testing as required by TCEQ. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver pipe to trench in sound, undamaged condition. B. Cut pipe neatly avoiding sharp, ragged, or unbeveled, plain ends and do not damage lining by cutting. C. Remove damaged or rejected materials from project site. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not lay pipe when it is raining or when trench is muddy, soft,or contains standing water. B. 6/2014 02510-2 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PRESSURE PIPE A. Conform to requirements of Section 02534-PVC Pipe. All pipe used for water mains shall be blue. 2.02 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE A. Conform to requirements of Section 02532W-HDPE 2.03 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR LARGE DIAMETER WATER LINES A. Conform to requirements of Section 02513 - Steel Pipe and Fittings for Large Diameter Water Lines. 2.04 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Conform to requirements of Section 02634 - Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings. 2.05 FIRE HYDRANTS A. Conform to requirements of Section 02514 -Fire Hydrant Assembly. 2.06 VALVES A. General: Conform to requirements of Section 02541 —Water and Wastewater Line Valves. 1. Manual operators: a. Provide hand wheel manual operators for in-plant valves. b. Equip buried valves with 2 in. square operating nuts. 2. Furnish no less than one operating key with each lot of 10 buried valves with nut operators. 3. Rotation: a. Direction: OPEN COUNTERCLOCKWISE (OPEN LEFT). 4. Shop coating: a. Shop coat ferrous metal surfaces of valves both interior and exterior for corrosion protection. b.Protect internal and external iron surfaces of valves with coating of 4 mils of two-part thermosetting epoxy: AWWA C 550. 5. Working and test pressures: a. Valves 2 in. through 12 in.: 200 psi working pressure, 400 psi hydrostatic test pressure. b. Valves 14 in. through 36 in.: 150 psi working pressure, 300 psi hydrostatic test pressure. 6/2014 02510-3 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS B. Gate Valves (2 in. Through 36 in.): 1. Buried valves: a. Comply with AWWA C500,non-rising stem(NRS); resilient wedge. b. Epoxy-coated ductile iron body and bonnet, inside screw. c. Bronze: Seat and disc rings, stem and mountings, and disc wedges. d. "0"ring sealed stem and 2 in. square operating nut. e. Valves 2 in. through 12 in.: Vertical type without by-passes. f. Valves 16 in.through 36 in.: Horizontal type with enclosed steel bevel gears resilient wedge, standard size by-pass valves. g. Stuffing box and bonnet bolts and nuts to be 304 stainless steel. h. Install in section of horizontal pipe. i. Mechanical joint ends with gasket complying with AWWA C 111. j. Acceptable product: 1) East Jordan, American Flow Control, Mueller Co. "A-2380 Series" C. Tapping Valves and Tapping Sleeves: 1. Tapping sleeves shall be solid stainless steel and valves shall conform with all others as mentioned above. D. Valve Boxes: 1. Cast iron,threaded screw extension sleeve type,adjustable suitable for depth of cover over pipe, with base and cover. 2. 3/16 in. thick, 5 in. diameter minimum. 3. Provide with suitable cast iron bases and covers. 4. Covers: Cast name designating type of service, e.g., "WATER" for water service. 2.07 RELATED MATERIALS r'") A. Concrete: As specified in Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete. 6/2014 02510-4 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS B. Meter Box: 1. Cast iron to Owner's dimensions: ASTM A 48. C. The service line between Curb stop and Corporation Stop shall be CTS Polyethylene, SDR—9. D. Corporation and Curb Stops and Fittings: ASTM B 62, NSF 61 lead free 3.0 EXECUTION A. Conform to requirements in Section 02534 -PVC Pipe, Section 02634-Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings, Section 02532W—HDPE, Section 02635 Steel Pipe and Fittings, and Section 02513 - Steel Pipe and Fittings for Large Diameter Water Lines. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Thoroughly clean pipe interiors of foreign matter before being lowered into trench. B. Clean hydrant and valve interiors of foreign matter before installation. C. Employ workmen who are skilled and experienced in laying pipe of type and joint configuration being furnished. Provide watertight pipe and pipe joints. D. Lay pipe to lines and grades shown on Drawings and Details. E. If asbestos-cement (A.C.) pipe is encountered, follow safety practices outline in American Water Works Association's publication, "Work Practices for A/C Pipe". Strictly adhere to "recommended practices" contained in this publication and make them"mandatory practices" for this project. F. For pipe diameters 36 inches and greater,clearly mark each section of pipe and fitting with unique designation on inside of pipe along with pressure class. Locate unique identifying mark minimum of five feet away from either end of each section of pipe. Provide one unique identifying mark in middle of each fitting. Place markings at consistent locations. Use permanent black paint and minimum letter height of 4 inches to mark designations. G. Contractor is responsible for assuring chosen manufacturer fulfills requirements for extra fittings and, therefore, is responsible for costs due to downtime if requirements are not met. 3.03 INSTALLATION �'� A. Inspection: ` 1. Carefully examine each piece of pipe for soundness and specifications compliance after delivery at trench before placing in trench. 6/2014 02510-5 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 2. Remove rejected pipe and fittings from site of work and replace with sound ' pipe. 3. Pipe and fittings will be rejected because of any of the following: a. Cracks in pipe or fittings. b. Damaged or cracked ends. c. Damaged gaskets or gasket grooves. d. Less than minimum wall thickness. e. Defects and deformations. B. Cleaning: 1. Clean interior of pipe and fittings of foreign matter before laying. 2. Keep interiors and ends clean during installation. 3. Keep joint contact surfaces clean during installation. 4. Take precautions to prevent foreign material from entering pipe during installation. 5. Do not place rubbish, tools, rags, or other materials in pipe. 6. Whenever pipe laying is stopped, place plugs in uncompleted ends of pipe. C. Installation: 1. Install pipe, couplings, and fittings in accordance with pipe manufacturer's recommendations. Conform to applicable installation specifications for types of pipes use. 2. Install gaskets and lubricants as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Full length of each barrel of pipe shall rest solidly on pipe bed with recesses excavated to accommodate bells and joints. 4. Take up and relay pipe that has grade or joint disturbed. 5. Do not joint pipe with water in trench. 6. Keep water out of trench until jointing is completed. 7. Do not lay water pipe closer than 10 ft. horizontally from sanitary sewer. 8. Do not locate joints at cross-overs with sanitary sewers closer than 9 ft. from cross-over point. 6/2014 02510-6 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS (.16) 9. Where water lines cross sanitary sewers,construct in accordance with the City of Pearland Engineering Design Criteria Manual for water line or TCEQ standards whichever is more stringent 10. Where pipe ends are left for future connections, install valve and plug or cap end. Forty feet minimum line section required between valve and plug or cap end. 11. Install concrete thrust blocking at bends and tees and at ends of lines to provide adequate reaction backing. 12. Lay not more than 100 feet of pipe in trench ahead of backfilling operations. 13. Dig trench proper width as shown in details. When trench width below top of pipe becomes 4 feet wider than specified, install higher class of pipe or improved bedding,as determined by Engineer. No additional payment will be made for higher class of pipe or improved bedding. 14. Use adequate surveying methods and equipment;employ personnel competent in use of this equipment. Horizontal and vertical deviations from alignment as indicated on Drawings shall not exceed 0.10 feet. Measure and record "as built"horizontal alignment and vertical grade at maximum of every 100 feet on record drawings. 15. Before assembling couplings,lightly coat pipe ends and outside of gaskets per manufacturer's specification. 16. Prevent damage to coating when placing backfill. Use backfill material free of large rocks or stones, or other material which could damage coatings. D. Setting Valves, Valve Boxes and Fire Hydrants: 1. Set plumb. 2. Center valve boxes on valves. 3. Where feasible, locate valves outside area of roads and streets. 4. Carefully tamp back fill around each valve box to distance of 4 ft. on all sides or to undisturbed trench face if less than 4 ft. 5. Set hydrants at elevation so that connecting pipe will not have less cover than mains. 6. Set hydrants on concrete pad. 7. Depth of bury of hydrant is defined as distance from bottom of inlet pipe to ground line. 6/2014 02510-7 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 8. Place concrete thrust block back of hydrant opposite pipe connections set ^� against vertical face of trench to prevent from blowing off line. 9. Use 5/8 in. stock stainless steel bridle rods and rod collars. 10. Place not less than 5 cu. ft. of broken stone around base of hydrant to ensure drainage. 11. Compact backfill to grade in accordance with specification section 02318 — Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 12. Tighten stuffing boxes. 13. Test hydrant and valve in opened and closed position to ensure that parts are in working condition. E. Joints and Jointing: 1. Rubber Gasketed Bell-and-Spigot Joints for PVC,Steel,and Ductile Iron Pipe: 2. a.After rubber gasket is placed in spigot groove of pipe,equalize rubber gasket cross section by inserting tool or bar recommended by manufacturer under rubber gasket and moving it around periphery of pipe spigot. b. Lubricate gaskets per manufacturer's specification. c.Fit pipe units together in manner to avoid twisting or otherwise displacing or damaging rubber gasket. d.After pipe sections are joined,check gaskets to ensure that no displacement of gasket has occurred.If displacement has occurred,remove pipe section and remake joint as for new pipe. Remove old gasket, inspect for damage and replace if necessary before remaking joint. e.Where preventing movement of 16-inch diameter or greater pipe is necessary due to thrust, use restrained joints as shown on Drawings. 1) Include buoyancy conditions for soil unit weight when computing thrust restraint calculations. 2) Do not include passive resistance of soil in thrust restraint calculations. f. Except for PVC pipe, provide means to prevent full engagement of spigot into bell as shown on Drawings. Means may consist of wedges or other types of stops as approved by Engineer. 6/2014 02510-8 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 2. Flanged Joints where required on Ductile Iron Pipe, or Steel Pipe: a. AWWA C 207. Prior to installation of bolts, accurately center and align flanged joints to prevent mechanical prestressing of flanges,pipe and equipment. Align bolt holes to straddle vertical, horizontal or north-south center line.Do not exceed 3/64 inch per foot inclination of flange face from true alignment. b. Use full-face gaskets for flanged joints. Provide 1/8-inch-thick cloth inserted rubber gasket material. Cut gaskets at factory to proper dimensions. c. Use stainless steelnuts and bolts to match flange material.Use stainless steelnuts and bolts underground.Tighten bolts progressively to prevent unbalanced stress. Maintain at all times approximately same distance between two flanges at points around flanges.Tighten bolts alternately (180°apart)until all are evenly tight.Draw bolts tight to ensure proper seating of gaskets. d. Full length bolt isolating sleeves and washers shall be used with flanged connections. e. For in-line flange joints 30 inches in diameter and greater and at butterfly valve flanges, provide Pyrox G-10 with nitrite seal, conforming to ANSI A 21.11 mechanical joint gaskets. For in-line flange joints sized between 12 inches in diameter and greater and 24 inches in diameter and smaller,provide Phenolic PSI with nitrite seal gasket conforming to ANSI A 21.11 mechanical joint gaskets. 3. Welded Joints (Steel Pipe): a. Prior to starting work,provide certification of qualification for welders employed on project for type of work procedures and positions involved. b. Joints: AWWA C 206. Full-fillet, single lap-welded slip-type either inside or outside, or double butt-welded type; use automatic or hand welders; completely penetrate deposited metal with base metal; use filler metal compatible with base metal; keep inside of fittings and joints free from globules of weld metal which would restrict flow or become loose. Do not use mitered joints. For interior welded joints, complete backfilling before welding. For exterior field-welded joints, provide adequate working room under and beside pipe. Use exterior welds for 30-inch and smaller. 6/2014 02510-9 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS c. Furnish welded joints with trimmed spigots and interior welds for 36- inch and larger pipe. d. Bell-and-spigot,lap-welded slip joints:Deflection may be taken at joint by pulling joint up to 3/4 inch as long as 1 'IA inch minimum lap is maintained. Spigot end may be miter cut to take deflections up to 5 degrees as long as joint tolerances are maintained. Miter end cuts of both ends of butt-welded joints may be used for joint deflections of up to 5 degrees. e. Align piping and equipment so that no part is offset more than 1/8 inch. Set fittings and joints square and true, and preserve alignment during welding operation. For butt welded joints, align abutting ends to minimize offset between surfaces. For pipe of same nominal wall thickness, do not exceed 1/16 inch offset. Use line-up clamps for this purpose; however, take care to avoid damage to linings and coatings. f. Protect epoxy or cement lining during welding by draping an 18-inch wide strip of heat resistant material over top half of pipe on each side of lining holdback to avoid damage to lining by hot splatter. Protect tape coating similarly if external welding is required. g. Welding rods: Compatible with metal to be welded to obtain strongest bond, E-7018. Root or"Stringer"pass shall be performed with 6011 rods and Filler and Cap shall be done using 7018 rods. h. Deposit metal in successive layers to provide at least 2 passes or beads for automatic welding and 3 passes or beads for manual welding in completed weld. i. Deposit no more than 1/4 inch of metal on each pass.Thoroughly clean each individual pass with wire brush or hammer to remove dirt,slag or flux. j. Do not weld under weather condition that would impair strength of weld, such as wet surface, rain or snow, dust or high winds, unless work is properly protected. k. Make tack weld of same material and by same procedure as completed weld. Otherwise, remove tack welds during welding operation. 1. Remove dirt,scale,and other foreign matter from inside piping before tying in sections, fittings, or valves. m. Welded Joints for Large Diameter Water Lines: 'Th 6/2014 02510- 10 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 1) Furnish pipe with trimmed spigots and interior welds for 36 inch and larger pipe. 2) Use exterior welds for 30 inch and smaller. 3) Only one end maybe miter cut. Miter end cuts of both ends of butt-welded joints may be used for joint deflections of up to 2 1/2 degrees. 4) For large diameter water lines,employ an independent certified testing laboratory, approved by Engineer, to perform weld acceptance tests on welded joints. Include cost of such testing and associated work to accommodate testing in contract unit price bid for water line. Furnish copies of test reports to Engineer for review. Engineer has final decision as to suitability of welds tested. A) Weld acceptance criteria: i) Cracking. ii) Lack of fusion/penetration. iii) Slag which exceeds one-third (t) where (t) quals material thickness. iv) Porosity/Relevant rounded indications greater than 3/16 inch; rounded indication is one of circular or elliptical shape with length equal to or less than three times its width. v) Relevant linear indications in which length of linear indication exceeds three times its width. vi) . Four or more relevant 1/16 inch rounded indications in line separated by 1/16 inch or less edge to edge. n. After pipe is joined and prior to start of welding procedure, make spigot and bell essentially concentric by jacking, shimming or tacking to obtain clearance tolerance around periphery of joint except for deflected joints. o. Furnish each welder employed steel stencil for marking welds,so work of each welder can be identified. Mark pipe with assigned stencil adjacent to weld. When welder leaves job, stencil must be voided and not duplicated.Welder making defective welds must discontinue work and leave project site. Welder may return to project site only after recertification p. Provide cylindrical corrosion barriers for epoxy lined steel pipe 24 inch diameter and smaller,unless minimum wall thickness is 0.5 inches or greater. 6/2014 02510- 11 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 1) In additional to welding requirements contained herein Paragraph 3.06, conform to protection fitting manufacturer's installation recommendations. 2) Provide services of technical representative of manufacturer available on site at beginning of pipe laying operations. Representative to train welders and advise regarding installation and general construction methods. Welders must have 12 months prior experience installing protection fittings. 3) All steel pipe is to have cutback 3/4 inch to no greater than 1 inch of internal diameter coating from weld bevel. 4) Furnish steel fittings with cylindrical corrosion barriers with shop welded extensions to end of fittings. Extension length to measure no less than diameter of pipe. Shop apply lining in accordance with AWWA C210 or AWWA C213. 5) All steel pipe receiving field adjustments are to be cold cut using standard practices and equipment. No cutting using torch is to be allowed. 4. Restrained Joints: a. For existing water lines and water lines less than 16 inches in diameter, restrain pipe joints with concrete thrust blocks. b. Thrust restraint lengths shown on Drawings are minimum anticipated lengths. These lengths are based on deflections indicated for large diameter lines and ductile iron pipe for small diameter lines. Adjustments in deflections or use of other pipe material may result in reduction or increase of thrust lengths. Perform calculations by pipe manufacturer to verify proposed thrust restraint lengths. Submit calculations for all pipe materials sealed by a registered Professional Engineer in State of Texas for review by Engineer. Make adjustments in thrust restraint lengths at no additional cost to City. c. Passive resistance of soil will not be permitted in calculation of thrust restraint. d. For 16 inch lines and larger use minimum 16 foot length of pipe in and out of joints made up of beveled pipe where restraint joint lengths are not identified on Drawings. Otherwise, provide restraint joints for a minimum length of 16 feet on each side of beveled joints. e. Installation: 6/2014 02510- 12 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 1) Install restrained joints mechanism in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2) Examine and clean mechanism; remove direct, debris and other foreign material. 3) Apply gasket and joint NSF 61 FDA per manufacturer's specification. 4) Verify gasket is evenly seated. 5) Do not over stab pipe into mechanism f. Prevent any lateral movement of thrust restraints throughout pressure testing and operation. g. Place 2500 psi concrete conforming to Section 03315 - Concrete for Utility Construction, for blocking at each change in direction of existing water lines, to brace pipe against undisturbed trench walls. Finish placement of concrete blocking, made from Type I cement, 4 (1111 , days prior to hydrostatic testing of pipeline. Test may be made 2 days after completion of blocking if Type II cement is used. 5. Joint Grout (Steel Pipe): a. Mix cement grout mixture by machine except when less than 1/2 cubic yard is required. When less than 1/2 cubic yard is required,grout may be hand mixed. Mix grout only in quantities for immediate use. Place grout within 20 minutes of mixing. Discard grout that has set. Retempering of grout by any means is not permitted. b. Prepare grout in small batches to prevent stiffening before it is used. Do not use grout which has become so stiff that proper placement cannot be assured without retempering. Use grout for filling grooves of such consistency that it will adhere to ends of pipe. c. Surface Preparation: Remove defective concrete, laitance, dirt, oil, grease and other foreign material from concrete surfaces with wire brush or hammer to sound, clean surface. Remove rust and foreign materials from metal surfaces in contact with grout. 6/2014 02510- 13 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS d. Follow established procedures for hot and cold weather concrete placement. e. Complete joint grout operations and backfilling of pipe trenches as closely as practical to pipe laying operations. Allow grouted exterior joints to cure at least 1 hour before compacting backfill. f. Grouting exterior joint space: Hold wrapper in place on both sides of joint with minimum 5/8-inch-wide steel straps or bands. Place no additional bedding or backfill material on either side of pipe until after grout band is filled and grout has mechanically stiffened. Pull ends of wrapper together at top of pipe to form access hole. Pour grout down one side of pipe until it rises on other side. Rod or puddle grout to ensure complete filling of joint recess. Agitate for 15 minutes to allow excess water to seep through joint band. When necessary, add more grout to fill joint completely. Protect gap at top of joint band from backfill by allowing grout to stiffen or by covering with structurally protective material. Do not remove band from joint. Proceed with placement of additional bedding and backfill material. g. Interior Joints for Pipe 24 inches and Smaller: Circumferentially butter bell with grout prior to insertion of spigot,strike off flush surplus grout inside pipe by pulling filled burlap bag or inflated ball through pipe with rope. After joint is engaged, finish off joint grout smooth and clean. Use swab approved by Project Manager for 20-inch pipe and smaller. h. Protect exposed interior surfaces of steel joint bands by metallizing,by other approved coatings,or by pointing with grout.Joint pointing may be omitted on potable water pipelines if joint bands are protected by zinc metalizing or other approved protective coatings. i. Remove and replace improperly cured or otherwise defective grout. j. Strike off grout on interior joints and make smooth with inside diameter of pipe. k. When installed in tunnel or encasement pipe and clearance within casing does not permit outside grout to be placed in normal manner, apply approved flexible sealer,such as Flex Protex or equal,to outside joint prior to joint engagement. Clean and prime surfaces receiving ^� sealer in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Apply sufficient quantities of sealer to assure complete protection of steel in 6/2014 02510- 14 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS joint area. Fill interior of joint with grout in normal manner after joint closure. 1. Interior Joints for Water Lines 30 inches and Larger: Clean joint space, wet joint surfaces,fill with stiff grout and trowel smooth and flush with inside surfaces of pipe using steel trowel so that surface is smooth. Accomplish grouting at end of each work day. Obtain written acceptance from Project Engineer of inside joints before proceeding with next day's pipe laying operation. During inspection, insure no delamination of joint mortar has occurred by striking joint mortar lining with rubber mallet. Remove and replace delaminated mortar lining. m. Work which requires heavy equipment to be over water line must be completed before mortar is applied to interior joints. n. Do not apply grout to joints that are out of tolerance until acceptable repairs are made. 6. Large Diameter Water Main Joint Testing: In addition to testing individual joints with feeler gauge approximately 1/2 inch wide and 0.015-inch thick,use other joint testing procedure approved or recommended by pipe manufacturer which will help ensure watertight installation prior to backfilling.Perform tests at no additional cost to City. 7. Make curves and bends by deflecting joints or other method as recommended by manufacturer and approved by the Engineer. Submit details of other methods of providing curves and bends which exceed manufacturer's recommended deflection prior to installation. a. Deflection of pipe joints shall not exceed maximum deflection recommended by pipe manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. b. If deflection exceeds that specified but is less than 5 percent, repair entire deflected pipe section such that maximum deflection allowed is not exceeded. c. If deflection is equal to or exceeds 5 percent from that specified, remove entire portion of deflected pipe section and install new pipe. d. Replace, repair, or reapply coatings and linings as required. e. Assessment of deflection may be measured by the Engineer at location along pipe. Arithmetical averages of deflection or similar average measurement methods will not be deemed as meeting intent of standard. 6/2014 02510- 15 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS f. When rubber gasketed pipe is laid on curve, join pipe in straight alignment and then deflect to curved alignment. 8. Closures Sections and Approved Field Modifications to Steel Pipe and Fittings: a. Apply welded-wire fabric reinforcement to interior and exterior of exposed interior and exterior surfaces greater than 6 inches in diameter. Welded-wire fabric: minimum W 1; maximum spacing 2 inches by 4 inches; 3/8 inch from surface of steel plate or middle third of lining or coating thickness for mortar thickness less than 3/4 inch. b. Fill exposed interior and exterior surfaces with nonshrink grout. c. For pipe diameters 36 inches and greater, perform field welds on interior and exterior of pipe. d. For large diameter water lines,provide minimum overlap of 4 inches of butt strap over adjacent piece on butt-strap closures. F. Cathodic Protection Appurtenances: 1. Where identified on Drawings,modify pipe for cathodic protection as detailed on Drawings and specified. Unless otherwise noted, provide insulation kits including test stations at connections to existing water system or at locations to isolate one type of cathodic system from another type, between water line, access manhole piping and other major openings in water line,or as shown on Drawings. 2. Bond joints for pipe installed in tunnel or open cut, except where insulating flanges are provided. Weld strap or clip between bell and spigot of each joint or as shown on Drawings. No additional bonding required where joints are welded for thrust restraint.Repair coatings as specified by appropriate AWWA standard, as recommended by manufacturer, and as approved by the Engineer 3. Bonding Strap or Clip: Free of foreign material that may increase contact resistance between wire and strap or clip. 6/2014 02510- 16 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS G. Anchorage of Fittings: 1. Anchor tees, elbows and plugs in water mains with concrete thrust blocks. 2. Place blocks so that joints will be accessible for inspection and repair. H. Handling: 1. Place pipe along project site where storm water or other water will not enter or pass through pipe. 2. Load, transport, unload, and otherwise handle pipe and fittings to prevent damage of any kind. Handle and transport pipe with equipment designed, constructed and arranged to prevent damage to pipe,lining and coating.Do not permit bare chains, hooks, metal bars, or narrow skids or cradles to come in contact with coatings. Where required, provide pipe fittings with sufficient interior strutting or cross bracing to prevent deflection under their own weight. 3. Hoist pipe from trench side into trench by means of sling of smooth steel cable, canvas, leather, nylon or similar material. 4. For large diameter water lines, handle pipe only by means of sling of canvas, (1117: leather,nylon,or similar material. Sling shall be minimum 36 inches in width. Do not tear or wrinkle tape layers. 5. Use precautions to prevent injury to pipe,protective linings and coatings. a. Package stacked pipe on timbers.Place protective pads under banding straps at time of packaging. b. Pad fork trucks with carpet or other suitable material.Use nylon straps around pipe for lift when relocating pipe with crane or backhoe. c. Do not lift pipe using hooks at each end of pipe. d. Do not place debris, tools, clothing, or other materials on pipe. 6. Repair damage to pipe or protective lining and coating before final acceptance. 7. For cement mortar line and coated steel pipe,permit no visible cracks longer than 6 inches,measured within 15 degrees of line parallel to pipe longitudinal axis of finished pipe, except: (1111sh' a. In surface laitance of centrifugally cast concrete. b. In sections of pipe with steel reinforcing collars or wrappers. c. Within 12 inches of pipe ends. 6/2014 02510- 17 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 8. Reject pipe with visible cracks (not meeting exceptions) and remove from project site. \� I. Cleaning: Thoroughly clean and dry interior of pipe and fittings of foreign matter before installation, and keep interior clean until Work has been accepted. Keep joint contact surfaces clean until jointing is completed.Do not place debris,tools,clothing or other materials in pipe. After pipe laying and joining operations are completed, clean inside of pipe and remove debris. J. Inspection: Before installation, inspect each pipe and fitting for defects. Reject defective, damaged or unsound pipe and fittings and remove them from site. 3.04 WET CONNECTIONS A. Definitions: 1. Wet connections consist of isolating sections of pipe to be connected with installed valves,draining the isolated sections,and completing the connections. 2. Connection of 2 inch or smaller lines,which may be referred to on Plans as"2 inch standard connections"or"gooseneck connections"will be measured as 2" wet connections. This item is not to be used as any part of a 2-inch service line. ,) B. Materials: 1. Corporation stops and saddles shall conform to requirements of Section 02515- Water Tap and Service Line Installation. 2. Valves shall conform to requirements of Section 02541 — Fire Hydrant Assembly. 3. Brass fittings shall conform to requirements of AWWA C800. C. Execution: 1. Plan wet connections in such manner and at such hours as to least inconvenience public. Notify Public Works Department at least 48 hours in advance of making connections. 2. DO NOT OPERATE VALVES ON MAINS IN USE BY OWNER.Owner will handle, at no cost to Contractor, all operations involving opening and closing valves for wet connections. 3. Conduct connection operations when Inspector is at job site. Connection work `—*') shall progress without interruption until complete, once existing mains have been cut or plugs have been removed for making connections. 6/2014 02510- 18 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS D. 2-Inch Wet Connections: 1. Tap water main. Provide and install corporation stops,saddles,as required for line and grade adjustment; and brass fittings necessary to adapt to existing main. Provide one Corporation Stop at main line and one Curb Stop at meter. The service line between Curb Stop and Corporation Stop shall be CTS Polyethylene, SDR-9. 3.05 CUT, PLUG AND ABANDONMENT OF MAINS A. Materials: 1. Concrete for thrust blocks: Class B conforming to requirements of Section 03305. 2. Plugs and clamps shall be suitable for type of pipe to be plugged. B. Execution: 1. Do not begin cut,plug and abandonment operations until replacement main has been constructed, disinfected, and tested, and all service lines have been transferred to replacement main. 2. Install plug, clamp, and concrete thrust block and make cut at location shown on Plans. 3. Main to be abandoned shall not be valved off and shall not be cut or plugged other than at supply main or as shown on Plans. 4. After main to be abandoned has been cut and plugged,check for other sources feeding abandoned main. If sources are found, notify Engineer immediately. Cut and plug abandoned main at point of other feed as directed by Engineer. 5. Plug or cap all ends or openings in abandoned main in an acceptable manner approved by Engineer. 6. Remove and dispose of all surface identifications such as valve boxes and fire hydrants. Valve boxes in improved streets,other than shell,may be poured full of concrete after removing cap. 7. Backfill all excavations in accordance with Section 02318 —Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. 8. Repair all street surfaces in accordance with Section 02980—Pavement Repair. 6/2014 02510- 19 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 3.06 HYDROSTATIC TESTING A. Hydrostatically test all new water pipelines for liquids before connecting to water distribution system. B. Pipelines shall be tested in lengths between valves, or plugs, of not more than 1,500 feet unless greater length is approved by Engineer. C. Conduct hydrostatic tests in presence of Engineer. D. Preparation: 1. Disinfect water system pipelines prior to hydrostatic testing. E. Test Procedures: 1. Furnish,install,and operate connections,pump,meter and gages necessary for hydrostatic testing. 2. Allow pipeline to sit minimum of 24 hours from time it is initially disinfected until testing begins, to allow pipe wall or lining material to absorb water. Contractor should be aware that periods of up to 7 days may be required for mortar lining to become saturated. 3. Expel all air and apply a minimum test pressure of 125 psi or 150 psi as directed by Engineer. 4. Maintain test pressure for 8 hours. If a large quantity of water is required to maintain pressure during test,testing shall be discontinued until cause of water loss is identified and corrected. F. Allowable Leakage for Water Mains: 1. During hydrostatic tests,no leakage will be allowed for sections of water mains consisting of welded joints. 2. Maximum allowable leakage for water mains with rubber gasketed joints: 11.65 gallons per inch nominal diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours while testing at the required pressure. G. Correction for Failed Tests: 1. Repair all joints showing visible leaks on surface regardless of total leakage shown on test. Check all valves and fittings to ensure that no leakage occurs that could affect or invalidate test. Remove any cracked or defective pipes, fittings and valves discovered during pressure test and replace with new items. 2. Repeat test until satisfactory results are obtained. 6/2014 02510-20 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS 3.07 DISINFECTION A. All waterlines constructed shall be promptly disinfected before any tests are conducted on waterlines and before waterlines are connected to water distribution system. B. Water for disinfection and flushing will be furnished without charge to Contractor. C. Preparation: 1. Furnish all required temporary blind flanges,cast-iron sleeves,plugs,and other items needed to facilitate disinfection of new mains prior to connecting them to water distribution system. Normally,each valved section of waterline requires two each 3/4-inch taps. A 2-inch minimum blow-off is required for waterlines up to and including 6-inch diameter. 2. .Fire hydrants shall be used as blow-offs to flush newly constructed waterlines 8-inch diameter and above. Where fire hydrants are not available on waterlines, locations and designs for blow-offs shall be as indicated on Plans. Install temporary blow-off valves and remove promptly upon successful completion of disinfection and testing. Abandon by turning off corp and using a stainless steel cap. (°11 3. Slowly fill each section of pipe with water in a manner approved by Engineer. Average water velocity when filling pipeline should be less than 1 fps and shall not, under any circumstance, exceed 2 fps. Before beginning disinfection operations, expel all air from pipeline. 4. All excavations made shall be backfilled immediately after installation of risers or blow-offs. 5. Install blow-off valves at end of main to facilitate flushing at all dead-end water mains. Install permanent blow-off valves/auto flusher per drawing Ll D. Disinfection: 1. Use not less than 100 parts of chlorine per million parts of water. Introduce chlorinating material to water lines in accordance with AWWA C651. After contact period of not less than 24 hours, flush system with clean water until residual chlorine is no greater than 1.0 parts per million parts of water. Open and close valves in lines being sterilized several times during contact period.If super-chlorinated water (i.e. chlorine concentration above 4mg/1) is used for cleaning water main disinfection and flushing,the water must be dechlorinated prior to discharge.The water discharged into the stormsewer system or natural waterway must meet the Clean Water Act (33 USC § 1251 et seq.) and any (1."‘. subsequent amendments thereof 2. If a chemical compound is used for a sterilizing agent, it shall be placed in pipes as directed by Engineer. 6/2014 02510-21 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER MAINS E. Bacteriological Testing: disinfection and flushingof waterlines, bacteriological tests will be 1. After g performed by Owner or testing laboratory in accordance with Section 01450— Testing Laboratory Services. If test results indicate need for additional disinfection of waterlines based upon Texas Department of Health and TCEQ requirements,Contractor shall perform additional disinfection operations at no additional cost to the Owner. E. Completion: 1. Upon completion of disinfection and testing, remove risers except those approved for use in subsequent hydrostatic testing, and backfill excavation promptly. END OF SECTION 6/2014 02510-22 of 22 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER METERS Section 02511 WATER METERS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Water meters for customer service, including submeters (i.e., cooling tower meters, sewer credit meters, etc.), for fire service in sizes 5/8 inch through 10 inches. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment 2. Section 02510—Water Mains 3. Section 02541 —Water and Wastewater Line Valves 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for installation of water meters furnished by the Owner is on an each basis for each meter type and size. Payment includes all labor and materials required for installation of water meters furnished by the Owner as indicated on Plans. (1111b B Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A Water meters shall be furnished by the Owner. 2.02 CONNECTIONS AND FITTINGS A Connections: Provide pipe in accordance with Section 02510 — Water Mains, restrained joints only. B Fittings: Restrained ductile iron; push-on bell joints or mechanical joint fittings outside of meter vault installations; Class 125 flanged inside meter vaults; cement mortar lined and sealed. 2.03 LAYING LENGTHS A The minimum length (with 1 inch tolerance) for meter and standard strainer shall be shown as indicated on the detail drawing for water meters. 03/2008 02511 - 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER METERS 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 TAPPING AND SERVICE LINE INSTALLATION A Refer to Section 02541—Water and Wastewater Line Valves for tapping requirements. END OF SECTION 03/2008 02511 -2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND FIRE HYDRANT ASSEMBLY Section 02514 FIRE HYDRANT ASSEMBLY 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Fire hydrants. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section.02634—Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 4. Section 02635—Steel Pipe and Fittings 5. Section 02534—PVC Pipe 6. Section 02510—Water Mains C Referenced Standards: 1. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA) 2. American Water Works Association(AWWA) 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 4. National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE) (1°1111 5. Food and Drug Administration(FDA) 6. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) 7. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) 8. National Sanitation Foundation(NSF) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for installation of fire hydrants is on a per each basis,complete in place. Payment includes all valves,fittings,bedding,backfill,and thrust blocking required for the installation of the fire hydrant assembly. B If fire hydrant leads are included as a Bid Item, measurement will be on a linear foot basis. Separate payment will be made for open cut and augered leads. C Measurement for removing and salvaging of fire hydrants is on a per each basis. Payment includes removing hydrant and valve if available, plugging lead, and removing materials from site or returning salvaged fire hydrants to Owner. D Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 06/2014 02514- 1 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND FIRE HYDRANT ASSEMBLY 1. Shop drawing(s) for proposed hydrant: Include model number,parts list, and material specifications, unique drawing number and descriptive legend '11116) identifying hydrant. 2. Material safety data sheets for lubricants. 3. Affidavit of compliance for coating materials. 4. Certified hydraulic performance test report for proposed hydrant 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 HYDRANT MATERIALS A Hydrants: AWWA C502; dry barrel design; tamper resistant; same manufacturer throughout project. 1. 0-Ring Seal Packing: Prevent water leakage between barrel and lubrication chamber. Provide dynamic seals of Buna "N" or other oil resistant material and static seals of Buna "N" or other approved synthetic rubber. 2. Bronze: Hydrant components in waterway to contain not more than 1.5 percent zinc and not more than 8 percent lead. 3. Acceptable Manufacturer:Mueller Super Centurian 250,American Darling B- 84-B, or East Jordan Iron Works WaterMaster 5CD250. B Operating Stems: Everdur, or other high-quality non-corrodible metal where threads are located in barrel or waterway. Bronze-to-bronze working parts in waterway; genuine wrought iron or steel where threads are not located in barrel or waterway, bronze bushed at penetration of stuffing box; seal threads against contact with water regardless of open or closed position of main valve. Connect operating stems with breakable coupling. C Main Valve (shut-off valve): Circular; compression-type; closes with line pressure; minimum opening of 5-1/4 inches in diameter. Seal bottom end of stem threads from contact with water with cap nut. D Valve Mechanism: Bronze valve seat ring threaded into bronze drain ring; seat ring and main valve assembly removable from above ground through upper barrel with lightweight seat removal wrench;breakable stem coupling opposite barrel breakaway; bronze or corrosion-resistant pins and locking devices;bronze valve stem sleeve, 0- ring seals and travel stop; sealed lubricating reservoir at top and bottom which fully lubricates threads and bearing surfaces when opening or closing main valve; thrust bearing or lubricated thrust collar for operating assembly. Lubricants: Food Grade. Valve Seat: Molded "Natural" rubber; scale durometer rating of 90 ±5; minimum thickness of 1/2 inch. Natural Rubbers: Resistant to microbiological attack. E Lower Hydrant Barrel: Single piece coupled to upper barrel to allow 360°rotation of upper barrel. Bury Length: Distance from bottom of inlet to ground line as specified. Ground Line: Clearly marked on barrel. Indicate inside diameter and wall thickness (with tolerances)for upper barrel,lower barrel,and bonnet sections. Show dimensions at minimum sections to demonstrate compliance with Paragraph 3.2.6 of AWWA C502. 06/2014 02514-2 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND FIRE HYDRANT ASSEMBLY F Extensions: Permit use of one or more standard extensions available from manufacturer in lengths from 6 inches to 60 inches in 6 inch increments. G Provide hydrants with automatic, positively operating, non-corrodible drain or drip valve to drain hydrant completely when main valve is shut. Bronze or corrosion resistant drain line. Tapping of drain holes is not required. H Inlet Connection: Elbow with AWWA Standard bell designed for 6-inch mechanical joint,restrained push-on,or flanged joint and valves. Flanged ends shall comply with ANSIIASME B16.1, class 125 flanges. Joints: ANSI A21.11; AWWA C111. I Operating Nut and Hold-down Nuts: Stainless steel or cast or ductile iron with bronze inserts or, as an alternative, provide security device with bronze operating nut. Any such security devices shall not require special tools for normal off/on operation of hydrant. Fabricate hold-down assemblies of suitable metallic materials for service intended. J Field-Replaceable Nozzles: NFPA No. 194,ANSI B26-1925;mechanically attached to hydrant body counterclockwise; sealed with 0-rings and mechanically located into place; provide two hose nozzles with 2-1/2 inch nominal inside diameter and one pumper nozzle with 4.492"nominal inside diameter;National Standard Threads;lock in place with security device. K Pumper Nozzle: Allow a minimum unobstructed radius of 10 inches from threaded surface of nozzle throughout path of travel of wrench or other device used to fasten hose to nozzle. L Nozzle Caps: Security chains to hydrant barrel,minimum 1/8 inch diameter;"Natural" rubber or neoprene gasket seals. M Hydrant shoe with 6-inch cast or ductile-iron pipe diameter inlet, flanged, swivel or slip joint with harnessing lugs for restrained joints. Underground flanging shall incorporate minimum of six, full, 3/4-inch stainless steel bolts or four 5/8-inch diameter stainless steel bolts. All bolts and nuts shall be stainless steel. N Provide traffic model hydrants equipped with safety flange on hydrant barrel and stem. Equip body of hydrant with breakable flange, or breakable bolts, above finish grade. O Lubricants: Food grade oil or grease meeting requirements of FDA 21 CFR178.3570 and manufactured with FDA approved oxidation inhibitors. P Hydrant Painting: 1. COLOR CODE (BONNETS) Main Size 6" and less Gloss White Code No 225A120 8" Safety Orange Code No 225A122 10" and 12" John Deere Green Code No 225A133 16" and 20" John Deere Yellow Code No 225A138 22" and up Safety Red Code No 225A123 06/2014 02514-3 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND FIRE HYDRANT ASSEMBLY 2. COLOR CODE ^} Fire Hydrant Barrel Safety Blue Code No 225A120 Fire Hydrant Caps (Same as Bonnet Color) Q Shop coated as follows: 1. Exterior Above Traffic Flange (including bolts and nuts) a. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP10 (NACE 2); near white blast cleaned surface. b. Fire hydrants shall be power coated with zinc rich primer followed by a polyester powder coating of 10 to 12 mils, shall meet all the requirements of ANSUAWWA C-550 (latest edition) and AAMA 2604. 2. Exterior Below Traffic Flange: a. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 10 (NACE 2); near white blast cleaned surface. b. Fire hydrants shall be power coated with zinc rich primer followed by a polyester powder coating of 10 to 12 mils, shall meet all the requirements of ANSUAWWA C-550 (latest edition) and AAMA 2604. 3. Interior Surfaces Above and Below Main Valve: a. All materials used for internal coating of hydrant interior ferrous surfaces must conform to ANSI/NSF Standard 61 as suitable for contact with potable water as required by TCEQ, Chapter 290, Subchapter D: Rules and Regulations for Public Water Systems. b. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP10 (MACE 2); near white blast cleaned surfaces. c. Coating: Powder coating in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. 4. General Coating Requirements: a. Coatings: Applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. No requirements of this specification shall cancel or supersede written directions and recommendations of specific manufacturer so as to jeopardize integrity of applied system. b. Hydrant supplier shall furnish an affidavit of compliance that all materials and work furnished complies with requirements of this specification and applicable standards referenced herein. 2.02 HYDRANT PERFORMANCE STANDARDS A Hydraulic Performance Standards: 1. Provide hydrants capable of a free discharge of 1500 gpm or greater from single pumper nozzle at a hydrant inlet static pressure not exceeding 20 PSIG as measured at or corrected to hydrant inlet at its centerline elevation. 2. Provide hydrants capable of a discharge of 1500 gpm or greater from single pumper nozzle at a maximum permissible head loss of 8.0 psig (when 06/2014 02514-4 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND FIRE HYDRANT ASSEMBLY rr and outlet velocity head)for an inlet operating pressure not exceedingcorectedfo 37 psiginlet as measured at or corrected to hydrant inlet at its centerline elevation. B Hydraulic Performance Testing: AWWA C502; conduct certified pressure loss and quantity of flow test by qualified testing laboratory on production model(5-foot bury length)of hydrant(same catalog number)proposed for certification. Submit certified test report containing following information: 1. Date of test, no more than five years prior to date of proposed use, on fire hydrant with similar hydraulic characteristics. 2. Name, catalog number, place of manufacture, and date of production of hydrant(s) tested. 3. Schematic drawing of testing apparatus, containing dimensions of piping elements including: a. Inside diameter and length of inlet piping. b. Distance from flow measuring points to pressure measurement point. c. Distance from flow and pressure monitoring points to hydrant inlet. d. Distance from pressure monitoring point to nozzles. e. Inside diameter and length of discharge tubing. 4. Elevation of points of measurement, inlet, and reports, or certificates documenting accuracy of measuring devices used in test. 5. Conduct test on at least three separate hydrants of same fabrication design. Inlet water temperature: 70° F+ 5° F. C Provide hydrants equipped with breakable barrel feature and breakable valve stem coupling such that vehicular impact will result in clean and complete break of barrel and valve stem at breakable feature. Provide hydrant shutoff valve which remains closed and tight against leakage upon impact. 2.03 LEADS A Branches(Leads): Conform to requirements of Section 02634—Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings, Section 02635 — Steel Pipe and Fittings, Section 02534 — PVC Pipe, and section 02532W -HDPE. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A Set fire hydrant plumb and brace at locations and grades as shown on Plans. When barrel of hydrant passes through concrete slab, place a piece of standard sidewalk expansion joint material, 3/4 inch thick, around section of barrel passing through concrete. B Locate nozzle centerline minimum 18 inches above finish grade. C Place 12-inch x 12-inch yellow indicators (plastic, sheet metal, plywood, or other material approved by Engineer) on pumper nozzles of new or relocated fire hydrants 06/2014 02514-5 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND FIRE HYDRANT ASSEMBLY installed on new mains not in service. Remove indicators after new main is tested and approved by Engineer. D Do not cover drain ports when placing concrete thrust block. E Lubricate hydrants with food grade oil or with grease meeting requirements of FDA 21CFR178.3570 and manufactured with FDA approved oxidation inhibitors. F Accomplish replenishment of lubricant for hydrant working parts without removing hydrant bonnet. Store lubricant system in reservoir. Lubricate bearing surfaces and working parts during normal operation of fire hydrant. G All changes in profile from approved plans due to obstructions not shown on plans which require a change in depth of bury of fire hydrant shall be approved in writing by Engineer for design prior to installation of hydrant. Any adjustment required in flow line of water main or to barrel length of fire hydrant shall be incidental to unit price of fire hydrant and no separate payment shall be made for such adjustments. H Remove and dispose of or salvage fire hydrants shown on Plans. I Owner may,at any time prior to or during installation of hydrants for a specific project, randomly select a furnished hydrant for disassembly and laboratory inspection, at Owner's expense,to verify compliance with Owner's requirements. If such hydrant is found to be non-compliant, replace at Contractor's expense, all or a portion of furnished hydrants with hydrants that comply with Owner's requirements. J Install leads in accordance with Section 02510—Water Mains. END OF SECTION r—b J 06/2014 02514-6 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER TAP AND SERVICE LINE INSTALLATION Section 02515 (.16) WATER TAP AND SERVICE LINE INSTALLATION 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Tapping existing mains and furnishing and installing new service lines for water. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 02318 —Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 3. Section 02520—Valve Boxes, Meter Boxes, and Meter Vaults C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 2737, "Standard Specification for polyethylene (PE)Plastic Tubing" 2. American Water Works Association (AWWA) a. AWWA C800 Standard Underground Service Line Valves and Fittings b. AWWA C900 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4"— 12" for Water Distribution D Definitions: 1. Short Side Connection - service line connecting proposed curb stop, located inside water meter box, to water main on same side of street. 2. Long Side Connection - service line connecting proposed curb stop, located inside water meter box,to water main on opposite side of street or from center of streets where supply main is located in street center such as boulevards and streets with esplanades. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for installation of 1 inch water taps and service lines is on a per each basis. Separate measurements will be made for "Short Side" and "Long Side" connections. B Measurement for installation of 2 inch water taps and service lines s is on a per each basis. Separate measurements will be made for "Short Side" and "Long Side" connections. C Payment for installation of water taps and service lines includes locating water main, tap installation and connection to meter,restoring site, excavation,bedding,backfill, compaction, push-under, etc., and all other labor and materials required to complete installation as indicated on Plans. 111.6) D Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 06/2014 02515- 1 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER TAP AND SERVICE LINE INSTALLATION 1.03 SUBMITTALS "47 A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit manufacturer's product data for approval. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Polyethylene Tubing- SDR 9 CTS. B Corporation Stops: AWWA C800 as modified herein: 1. Inlet End: AWWA standard thread. 2. Valve Body:, Tapered plug type,0-ring seat ball type,or rubber seat ball type. 3. Outlet End: Compression type fitting for use with type-K, soft copper as well as CTS. C Provide taps for various water main types and sizes inaccordance with following schedule: PIPE TAPPING SCHEDULE WATER MAIN SERVICE SIZE TYPE AND DIAMETER 1" 2" • 4" Cast Iron or Ductile DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS Iron 4" Asbestos Cement WBSS DSS, WBSS 4"PVC (AWWA DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS C900) 6" and 8" Cast Iron or DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS Ductile Iron 6" and 8" Asbestos DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS Cement 6" and 8" Cast Iron or DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS Ductile Iron 6" and 8" PVC DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS (AWWA C900) 12" Cast Iron or Ductile DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS Iron 12" Asbestos Cement DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS 12" PVC (AWWA DSS, WBSS DSS, WBSS C900) 16" and Up Cast Iron or DWBSS DWBSS Ductile Iron 06/2014 02515-2 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER TAP AND SERVICE LINE INSTALLATION 16" and Up Asbestos DWBSS DWBSS Cement 16" and Up PVC DWBSS DWBSS (AWWA C900) DSS —Dual Strap Saddles WBSS—Wide Band Strap Saddles DWBSS —Dual Wide Band Strap Saddles *Mueller H-15092, or equal D Dual Strap Saddles: Red brass body and straps; ductile-iron; vinyl-coated body and straps; or ductile-iron,vinyl-coated body and stainless-steel straps. E Taps for PVC Water Mains: Use dual-strap or single,wide-band strap saddles which provide full support around circumference of pipe and bearing area of sufficient width along axis of pipe, 2 inches minimum, ensuring that pipe will not be distorted when saddle is tightened. Romac Series 101N wide-band,stainless-steel tapping saddle with AWWA standard thread(Mueller thread) or equal. F Taps for Steel Pipe: Not allowed, unless specifically approved by Engineer. Use saddle only if tap is approved on steel pipe. G Curb Stops and Brass Fittings: All Brass fittings shall be lead free conforming to the latest EPA's guideline. AWWA C800 as modified herein. 1. Inlet End: Compression-type fitting. 2. Valve Body: Straight-through or angled,meter-stop design equipped with the following: a. 0-Ring seal straight plug type. b. Rubber seat ball type. 3. Outlet End: Female, iron-pipe thread or swivel-nut, meter-spud thread on 1 inch stops and 2-hole flange on 2 inch sizes. 4. Fittings:Ford or approved equal;use same size open end wrenches and tapping machines as used with respective Ford fittings. 5. Factory Testing of Brass Fittings: a. Submerge in water for 10 seconds at 85 psi with stop in both closed and open positions. b. Reject any fitting that shows air leakage. Owner may confirm tests locally. Entire lot from which samples were taken will be rejected when random sampling discloses unsatisfactory fittings. H Angle Stops: In accordance with AWWA C800; ground-key, stop type with bronze lock-wing head stop cap; inlet and outlet threads conform to application tables of AWWA C800; and inlets compression connection. 1. Outlet for 1-inch size: Meter swivel nut with saddle support. 2. Outlet for 2 inch size: 0-ring sealed meter flange, iron pipe threads. Fittings: In accordance with AWWA C800 and: 1. Castings: Smooth, free from burrs, scales, blisters, sand holes, and defects which would make them unfit for intended use. 06/2014 02515-3 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER TAP AND SERVICE LINE INSTALLATION 2. Nuts: Smooth cast and have symmetrical hexagonal wrench flats. 3. Thread fittings, of all types, shall have N.P.T. or AWWA threads, and male threaded ends shall be protected in shipment by plastic coating or other equally satisfactory means. 4. Compression tube fittings shall have Buna-N beveled gasket. 5. Stamp of manufacturer's name or trademark and size on body. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A Set service taps at right angles to proposed meter location and locate taps in upperpipe segment within 45 degrees of pipe springline unless otherwise approved by Engineer. B For service lines and lateral connections larger than those allowed in this Section,Part 2.01C, branch connections must be used. C All 2-inch and smaller service taps on pressurized water mains: Use tapping machine manufactured for pressure tapping purposes. D Install service lines in open-cut trench in accordance with Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities except that service lines under all paved roadways, other paved areas and areas indicated on Plans shall be installed in bored hole as specified in this Section. E Unless otherwise approved by Engineer, lay service lines with minimum of 30 inches of cover as measured from top of curb or, in absence of curbs, from centerline elevation of crowned streets or roads. Provide minimum of 18 inches of cover below flow line of all ditches to service lines, unless otherwise approved by Engineer. F Service lines across existing street(push-unders): Pull service line through prepared hole under paving. Only full lengths of tubing will be used. Take care not to damage tubing when pulling it through hole. A compression-type union is only permitted if Contractor cannot span underneath pavement with a full length of tubing. Contractor is allowed one compression-type union for each full length of tubing,provided it is not under the pavement. G Maintain service lines free of dirt, coupons and foreign matter at all times. H Install service lines per City of Pearland. Standard Details. I Locate water meters in accordance with City of Pearland Standard Details. Contact Engineer when major landscaping or trees conflict with service line and meter box location. No additional payment will be made for work on customer side of meter. J Joints 1. Minimum joint spacing for 1 inch tubing shall be in multiples of 60 feet and for 2 inch tubing shall be in multiples of 40 feet. 06/2014 02515 -4 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER TAP AND SERVICE LINE INSTALLATION 2. Cut tubing squarely by using an approved cutting tool and avoiding excessive r' pressure on the cutting wheels which might bend or flatten pipe walls. 3. For compression fittings,cut tubing squarely prior to insertion into the fitting. Final assembly shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedure. K Bends 1. Gradual changes in direction may be made by bending PE pipe. The bending radius should not be less than the coil radius when bending with the coil. 3.02 CURB STOP INSTALLATION A Set curb stops or angle stops at outer end of service line inside of meter box. Secure opening in curb stop to prevent unwanted material from entering. In close quarters, make an "S" curve in the field. No flattening of tube. In all 1-inch services, install meter coupling,swivel-nut,or curb stop ahead of meter. Install straight meter coupling on outlet end of meter. 3.03 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS A Open trench for proposed service line in accordance with Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. B Install curb stop on meter end of service line. C With curb stop open and prior to connecting service line to meter in slack position, open corporation stop and flush service line thoroughly. Close curb stop, leaving corporation stop in full-open position. D Check service line for apparent leaks. Repair any leaks before proceeding. E Call Project Representative to schedule inspection prior to backfilling. After inspection, backfill in accordance with Section 02318 —Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. F Install meter box centered over meter with top of lid 3-inches above finished grade for grasses or landscaped areas,and flush with finished grade for paved areas. Meter box: Refer to Section 02520—Valve Boxes, Meter Boxes, and Meter Vaults. END OF SECTION 06/2014 02515-5 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND VALVE BOXES,METER BOXES, AND METER VAULTS Section 02520 VALVE BOXES, METER BOXES, AND METER VAULTS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Valve boxes for water service. B Meter boxes for water service. C Meter vaults for water service. D References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 03300-Cast-in-Place Concrete 4. Section 02542—Concrete Manholes and Accessories 5. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 6. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for valve boxes under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. B No separate payment will be made for installation of meter boxes furnished by the Owner under this Section. Include cost of installation of meter boxes in Bid Items for which the Work is a component. C Measurement for installation of meter vaults is on a per each basis for each meter vault type and size,complete in place. Payment includes all labor and materials required to complete installation as indicated on Plans. D Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit manufacturer's product data for following items for approval: 1. Each type of valve box and lid. 2. Each type of meter box and cover. 3. Each type of meter vault frame and cover. 06/2014 02520- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND VALVE BOXES, METER BOXES, AND METER VAULTS C Submit Shop Drawings for cast-in-place meter vaults for approval if proposed construction varies from Plans. D Submit manufacturer's certification that meter boxes purchased for Work meet the requirements of this Section. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 VALVE BOXES A Provide adjustable, cast-iron, screw-type, valve boxes as manufactured by Bass and Hays Foundry,Inc.,or approved equal. Design of valve box shall minimize stresses on valve imposed by loads on box lid. B Cast the word"WATER" into lid, 1/2 inch in height and raised 3/32 inch, for valves serving potable water lines. C Provide 6-inch PVC, Class 150, DR 18, riser pipes. D Concrete for valve box placement: 1. For locations in new concrete pavement, use strength and mix design of new pavement. 2. For other locations, use class "A" concrete, with minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi, conforming to requirements of Section 03300—Cast-in- Place Concrete. 2.02 METER BOXES A Refer to City of Pearland Standard Details or contact the Public Works Department for list of acceptable products. 2.03 METER VAULTS A Meter vaults may be constructed of precast concrete, cast-in-place concrete, or solid masonry unless a specific type of construction is required by Plans. B Concrete for meter vaults: Class A concrete, conforming to requirements of Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete,with minimum compressive strength of 4000 psi at 28 days. C Vaults for meters 3" and greater shall be procured through the City's utility billing department. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION 06/2014 02520-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND VALVE BOXES,METER BOXES, AND METER VAULTS A Obtain approval from the City Engineer or designee for location of meter vault. B Verify lines and grades are correct. C Verify compacted subgrade will support loads imposed by vaults. 3.02 VALVE BOXES A Provide riser pipe with suitable length for depth of cover indicated on Plans or to accommodate actual finish grade. B Install adjustable valve box and riser piping plumbed in a vertical position. Provide 6 inches telescoping freeboard space between riser pipe top butt end,and interior contact flange of valve box, for vertical movement damping. Riser may rest on valve flange, or provide suitable footpiece to support riser pipe. C Paint covers of new valve boxes as directed by the Owner. 3.03 METER BOXES A Install plastic boxes in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B Construct concrete meter boxes to dimensions shown on Plans. C Adjust top of meter boxes to conform to cover elevations specified in this Section, 3.05 "Frame and Cover for Meter Vaults". D Do not locate under paved areas unless approved by Engineer. Use approved traffic- type box with cast iron lid when meter must be located in paved areas. 3.04 METER VAULTS A Construct concrete meter vaults to dimensions and requirements shown on Plans.Do not cast in presence of water. Make bottom as uniform as practicable. B Precast Meter Vaults: 1. Install precast vaults in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Set level on a minimum 3 inch thick bed of sand conforming to the requirements of Section 02318 —Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. 2. Seal lifting holes cement-sand mortar or non-shrink grout. C Meter Vault Floor Slab: 1. Construct floor slabs of 6-inch-thick reinforced concrete. Slope floor 1/4 inch per foot toward sump. Make sump 12 inches in diameter,or 12 inches square, and 4 inches deep, unless other dimensions are required by Plans. Install (1.11b6' dowels at maximum of 18 inches,center-to-center,or install mortar trench for keying walls to floor slab. 2. Precast floor slab elements may be used for precast vault construction. 06/2014 02520-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND VALVE BOXES, METER BOXES, AND METER VAULTS 3.05 FRAME AND COVER FOR METER VAULTS '"114) A Diamond Plate Aluminum as follows: 1. In unpaved areas, set top of meter box or meter vault cover 2 to 3 inches above natural grade. 2. In sidewalk areas,set top of meter box or meter vault cover 1/2 to 1 inch above adjacent concrete. 3.06 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises B Backfill and compact in accordance with Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. C In unpaved areas, slope backfill around meter boxes and vaults to provide a uniform slope 1 to 5 from top to natural grade. D Meter boxes are not allowed in sidewalk. END OF SECTION 06/2014 02520-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS Section 02530 GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Gravity sanitary sewers and appurtenances, including cleanouts, stacks, service connections, and reconnections. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 02415 -Augering Pipe or Casing for Sewers 2. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 3. Section 01350—Submittals 4. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 5. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 6. Section 01570—Trench Safety System 7. Section 02318 —Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 8. Section 01564—Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 9. Section 02220— Site Demolition 10. Section 01140 - Contractor's Use of Premises C Reference Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 1784,"Standard Specification for Rigid Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride (CPVC) Compounds" b. ASTM F 477,"Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals(Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe" c. ASTM D 3034, "Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings" d. ASTM F 679, "Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings" e. ASTM F 949,"Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC) Corrugated Sewer Pipe with a Smooth Interior and Fittings" f. ASTM D 794,"Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC) Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter" g. ASTM D 2241,"Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series)" h. ASTM D 3212,"Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals" i. ASTM D 3139, "Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals" (111 j. ASTM D 2444, "Standard Test Method for Determination for the Impact Resistance of Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings by Means of a Tup (Falling Weight)" 4/2013 02530- 1 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS k. ASTM F 714, "Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) Based on Outside Diameter" 1. ASTM D 2657, "Standard Practice for Heat Fusion Joining and Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings" m. ASTM D 1248, "Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable" n. ASTM D 3350, "Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastic Pipe and Fittings Materials" o. ASTM D 3681, "Standard Test Method for Chemical Resistance of Fiberglass (Glass-Fiber Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe in a Deflected Condition" p. ASTM D 4161, "Standard Specification for Fiberglass (Glass-Fiber- Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe Joints Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals" q. ASTM D 3262, "Standard Specification for Fiberglass (Glass-Fiber- Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Sewer Pipe" r. ASTM D 3754, "Standard Specification for Fiberglass (Glass-Fiber- Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Sewer and Industrial Pressure Pipe" s. ASTM D 618, "Standard Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing" t. ASTM C 828, "Standard Test Method for Low-Pressure Air Test of Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines" u. ASTM C 924, "Standard Practice for Testing Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines by Low-Pressure Air Test Method" v. ASTM F 1417, "Standard Test Method for Installation Acceptance of Plastic Gravity Sewer Lines Using Low-Pressure Air" 2. American Water Works Association (AWWA) a. AWWA C 900 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4"— 12"for Water Distribution b. AWWA C 905 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Water Transmission Pipe, Nominal Diameters, 14in. Through 36 in. 3. Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI) a. PPI TR3,"Policies and Procedures for Developing Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB), Pressure Design Basis (PDB), Strength Design Basis (SDB), and Minimum Required Strength (MRS) Ratings for Thermoplastic Piping Materials or Pipe" 4. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) 5. Texas Administrative Code (TAC) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement of pipe installed at depths 8-feet and less by open cut method is on a linear foot basis,measured and complete in place. Measurement will be taken along the center line of the pipe from center line to center line of manholes,except for pipe in casing or augered installation. B Payment includes sewer pipe, excavation, bedding, backfill and special backfill, shoring, earthwork, connections to existing manholes and pipe, stacks, cleanouts, 4/2013 02530-2 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS accessories, inspection and testing. Depths beyond 8'will be paid by 2 vertical feet increments. C Refer to Section 02415 —Augering Pipe or Casing for Sewers for measurement and payment of augered sewer pipe. D Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit inspection reports,testing reports, and video tape of television inspections as directed by Engineer. C Submit proposed methods, equipment, materials and sequence of operations for Gravity Sanitary Sewer construction. Plan operations to minimize disruption of utilities to occupied facilities or adjacent property. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Qualifications. Gravity Sanitary Sewer shall be watertight both in pipe-to-pipe joints and in pipe-to-manhole connections. Perform testing in accordance with this Section r**, and Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services. B Regulatory Requirements. 1. Install Gravity Sanitary Sewer to meet the minimum separation distance from any potable water line,as scheduled below. The separation distance is defined as the distance between the outside of the water pipe and the outside of the sewer pipe. When possible, install new Gravity Sanitary Sewers no closer to water lines than 9 feet in all directions. Where this separation distance cannot be achieved,new Gravity Sanitary Sewers shall be installed as specified in this Section. 2. Make notification to the Engineer if water lines are uncovered during Gravity Sanitary Sewer installation where the minimum separation distance cannot be maintained. 3. Lay Gravity Sanitary Sewers lines in straight alignment and grade. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A Inspect pipe and fittings upon arrival of materials at the Project Site. 4/2013 02530-3 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS B Handle and store pipe materials and fittings to protect them from damage due to impact,shock,shear,or free fall. Do not drag pipe and fittings along the ground. Do not roll pipe unrestrained from delivery trucks. C Use mechanical means to move or handle pipe. Employ acceptable clamps, rope or slings around the outside barrel of pipe and fittings. Do not use hooks,bars,or other devices in contact with the interior surface of the pipe to lift or move lined pipe 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 GASKET MATERIAL FOR USE IN POTENTIALLY CONTAMINATED AREAS A Gravity Sanitary Sewer pipes to be installed in potentially contaminated areas, especially where free product is found near the elevation of the proposed sewer,shall have the following Gasket Material for the noted contaminants: CONTAMINANT GASKET MATERIAL REQUIRED Petroleum(diesel, gasoline) Nitrile Rubber Other contaminants As recommended by the pipe manufacturer 2.02 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE A Use PVC compounds in the manufacture of pipe that contain no ingredient in an amount that has been demonstrated to migrate into water in quantities considered to be toxic. B Furnish PVC pressure pipe manufactured from Class 12454-A or Class 12454-B virgin PVC compounds as defined in ASTM D 1784. Use compounds qualifying for a rating of 4000 psi for water at 73.4° F per requirements of PPI TR3. Provide pipe which is homogeneous throughout, free of voids, cracks, inclusions, and other defects, uniform as commercially practical in color, density, and other physical properties. Deliver pipe with surfaces free from nicks and scratches with joining surfaces of spigots and joints free from gouges and imperfections which could cause leakage. All pipe used for gravity sanitary sewer shall be green. C Gaskets: 1. Gaskets shall meet the requirements of ASTM F477. When no contaminant is identified,use elastomeric factory-installed gaskets to make joints flexible and watertight. D Lubricant for rubber-gasketed joints: Water soluble, non-toxic, non-objectionable in taste and odor imparted to fluid, non-supporting of bacteria growth, having no deteriorating effect on PVC or rubber gaskets. 4/2013 02530-4 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS E PVC Gravity Sanitary Sewer pipe shall be green in color and shall be in accordance rwith the provisions in the following table: WALL PRODUCT ASTM SDR(MAX.)/ DIAMETER TYPE MANUFACTURER STIFFNESS SIZE OPTIONS DESIGNATION (MIN.) RANGE Solid J-M Pipe Approved D 3034 SDR 26/PS 115 6" to 15" CertainTeed Can-Tex Approved F 679 SDR 26/PS 115 18"to 48" Carlon Approved AWWA C900 DR 18/N/A*** 4"to 12" Diamond Approved AWWA C905 DR 18/N/A*** 14" to 36" Profile* Contech A-2000** Only when F 949 N/A/50 psi 12" to 36" ETI Ultra-Rib included in F 794 N/A/46 psi 12"to 48" the Bid Lamson Vylon Schedule F 794 N/A/46 psi 21"to 48" * Allowed to be used where there are no service taps. ** Allowed to be used to a maximum depth of 10' only. ***For water-sewer separation requirements unless specifically noted in Bid Schedule. F When solid wall PVC pipe 18 inches to 27 inches in diameter is required in SDR 26, provide pipe conforming to ASTM F 679,except provide wall thickness as required for SDR 26 and pipe strength of 115 psi. G For Gravity Sanitary Sewers up to 12 inch diameter crossing over waterlines, or crossing under waterlines with less than 2 feet separation,provide minimum 150 psi pressure-rated pipe conforming to ASTM D 2241 with suitable PVC adapter couplings. H Joints: Spigot and integral wall section bell with solid cross section elastometric or rubber ring gasket conforming to requirements of ASTM D 3212 and ASTM F 477, or ASTM D 3139 and ASTM F 477, shall be provided. Gaskets shall be factory- assembled and securely bonded in place to prevent displacement. The manufacturer shall test a sample from each batch conforming to requirements ASTM D 2444. I Fittings: Provide PVC gravity sanitary sewer bends, tee, or wye fittings for new sanitary sewer construction. PVC pipe fittings shall be full-bodied, either injection molded or factory fabricated. Saddle-type tees,wye fittings,or solvent welds are not acceptable. 2.03 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE(HDPE)SOLID AND PROFILE WALL PIPE A Provide HDPE pipe as follows and only when listed as a Bid Item: WALL PRODUCT ASTM PIPE DIAMETER TYPE MANUFACTURER OPTIONS DESIGNATION STIFFNESS RANGE (MIN) (INCHES) Solid Wall Drisco 1000 Drisco 8600 Approved F 714 115 psi 8 to 10 Quail Pipe 4/2013 02530-5 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS Poly Pipe Plexco B Solid wall pipe shall be produced with plain end construction for heat joining (butt fusion)conforming to ASTM D 2657. Utilize controlled temperatures and pressures for joining to produce a fused leak-free joint. C Pipe and Fittings: High density, high molecular weight polyethylene pipe material meeting the requirements of Type III,Class C, Category 5,Grade P34,as defined in ASTM D1248. Material meeting the requirements of cell classification in accordance with ASTM D 3350 are also suitable for making pipe products under these specifications. D Gaskets: 1. Use gaskets meeting requirement of ASTM F 477. Use gasket molded into a circular form or extruded to the proper section and then spliced into circular form. When no contaminant is identified, use gaskets of a properly cured, high-grade elastomeric compound. The basic polymer shall be natural rubber, synthetic elastomer, or a blend of both. E Lubricant. Use a lubricant for assembly of gasketed joints which has no detrimental effect on the gasket or on the pipe, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. F Furnish pipe and fittings that are homogeneous throughout and free from visible cracks,holes,foreign inclusions,or other injurious defects. Provide pipe as uniform as commercially practical in color, opacity, density, and other physical properties. 2.04 CENTRIFUGALLY CAST FIBERGLASS PIPE A Manufacturers 1. Pre-approved manufacturer for centrifugally cast fiberglass pipe is Hobas Pipe USA, Inc. B Materials 1. Resin Systems: The manufacturer shall use only polyester resin systems with a proven history of performance in this particular application. The historical data shall have been collected from applications of a composite material of similar construction and composition as the proposed product. 2. Glass Reinforcements: The reinforcing glass fibers used to manufacture the components shall be of highest quality commercial grade glass filaments with binder and sizing compatible with impregnating resins. 3. Fillers: Silica sand or other suitable materials may be used. 4. Additives: Resin additives,such as pigments,dyes,and other coloring agents, if used, shall in no way be detrimental to the performance of the product nor shall they impair visual inspection of the finished products. 5. Rubber Gaskets: Supply from an approved gasket manufacturer in accordance with ASTM F 477, when no contaminant is identified and suitable for the service intended. Gaskets shall either be affixed to the pipe by means of a 4/2013 02530-6 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS suitable adhesive or shall be installed in such a manner so as to prevent the gasket from rolling out of the pre-cut groove in the pipe or sleeve coupling. 6. The internal liner resin shall be suitable for service as sewer pipe,and shall be highly resistant to exposure to sulfuric acid as produced by biological activity from hydrogen sulfide gases. Pipe shall meet or exceed requirements of ASTM D 3681. C Pipes 1. Furnish pipes in the diameters specified and within the tolerances specified below. 2. Manufacture pipe by the centrifugal casting process to result in a dense, nonporous, corrosion-resistant, consistent composite structure to meet the operating conditions as shown on the Plans. 3. Do not use stiffening ribs or rings. D Couplings: Unless otherwise specified, the pipe shall be field connected with fiberglass sleeve couplings that utilize elastomeric sealing gaskets as the sole means to maintain joint watertightness. The joints must meet the performance requirements of ASTM D 4161. E Fittings: Flanges, elbows, reducers, tees, and other fittings shall be capable of withstanding operating conditions when installed. They may be contact molded or manufactured from mitered sections of pipe joined by glass fiber reinforced overlays. (.11.1'\ F Manhole Connections: Provide a water stop flange (wall pipe) for connection to a cast-in-place manhole base or other structure. G Grout Ports: Provide grout ports in the wall of pipe when required. Provide plugs of 316 stainless steel or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with the pipe. Grout port plugs shall be designed and installed to meet the test pressure of the pipe. H Dimensions 1. Diameters:The actual outside diameter of the pipes shall be in accordance with Table 3 of ASTM D 3262 for Gravity Sanitary Sewers, or ASTM D 3754 for force mains. 2. Lengths: The pipe standard length will be approximately 20 feet. A maximum of 10 percent of the lengths,excluding special order pipes,maybe supplied in random lengths. 3. Wall Thickness: The minimum average wall thickness shall be the stated design thickness. The minimum single point thickness shall not be less than 90 percent of the stated design thickness. 4. End Squareness: Pipe ends shall be square to the pipe axis. 5. Tolerance of Fittings: The tolerance of the angle of an elbow and the angle between the main and leg of a wye or tee shall be plus or minus 2 degrees. The tolerance on the laying length of a fitting shall be plus or minus 2 inches. Stiffness Classes 4/2013 02530-7 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS 1. Stiffness class of FRP pipe shall satisfy design requirements, but shall not be less than 46 psi, when used in direct bury operation; 36 psi, when installed within a primary tunnel liner. 2. Stiffness class of FRP in a pipe jacking operation shall be governed either by the ring deflection limitations or by a pipe design providing longitudinal strength required by the jacking method and shall satisfy design requirements stated below. Submit design calculations as required in Paragraph 1.05, Submittals. a. Pipe stress calculations based on jacking loads shall be provided by the pipe supplier. b. Ring deflection calculations shall conform to design requirements of 30 TAC Chapter 317.20 pertaining to flexible pipe used in Gravity Sanitary Sewers. The pipe deflection calculations shall ensure that predicted deflection will be less than 5 percent under long-term loading conditions (soil prism load) for the highest density of soil overburden and surcharge loads. Deflection on calculations shall be prepared using long-term (drained) values for soil parameters contained in the geotechnical investigation report for the Project, or other site-specific data obtained by the Contractor as approved by the Engineer. J Testing 1. Pipes shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D 3262 or ASTM D 3754, as applicable, except that the factory hydrostatic pressure testing is not required. 2. Joints: Coupling joints shall be qualified per the tests of Section 7 of ASTM D 4161. K Packaging, Handling, and Shipping 1. Packing, handling, and shipping should be done in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. L Installation 1. Install pipe and fittings in accordance with requirements of this Section. 2. The manufacturer must supply a suitable qualified field service representative to be present periodically during the installation of pipe. 3. Pipe Bedding: Conform to requirements of Section 02318 —Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. 4. Pipe Handling: Use textile slings. 5. Jointing a. Clean ends of pipe and coupling components. b. Check pipe ends and couplings for damage. Correct any damage found. c. Coupling grooves must be completely free of dirt. d. Apply joint lubricant to pipe ends and rubber seals of coupling. Use only lubricants approved by the pipe manufacturer. e. Use suitable auxiliary equipment, such as a wire rope puller, to pull joints together. 4/2013 02530-8 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS f. Do not exceed forces recommended by the manufacturer for coupling pipe. If excessive force is required,remove coupling,determine source of problem, and correct it. g. In the process of jointing the pipe, do not allow the deflection angle to exceed the deflection permitted by the manufacturer. 6. If pressure grouting of the pipe is conducted as part of a pipe jacked tunnel installation,seal the grout holes with liner resin to a thickness equal to the pipe liner thickness, or with a threaded plug for that purpose. 7. Tests: Conform to requirements of this Section. 2.05 INSPECTIONS A The Engineer reserves the right to inspect pipes or witness pipe manufacturing. Such inspection shall in no way relieve the manufacturer of the responsibilities to provide products that comply with the applicable standards and these Specifications. B Manufacturer's Notification to Customer. Should the Engineer wish to witness the manufacture of specific pipes, the manufacturer shall provide the Engineer with adequate advance notice of when and where the production of those specific pipes will take place. C Failure to Inspect. Approval of the products or tests is not implied by the Engineer's decision not to inspect the manufacturing, testing, or finished pipes. 2.06 TEST METHODS A Conditioning. Conditioning of samples prior to and during tests are subject to approval by the Engineer. When referee tests are required,condition the specimens in accordance with Procedure A in ASTM D 618 at 73.4 degrees F plus or minus 3.6 degrees F(23 degrees C plus or minus 2 degrees C)and 50 percent relative humidity plus or minus 5 percent relative humidity for not less than 40 hours prior to test. Conduct tests under the same conditions of temperature and humidity unless otherwise specified. B Flattening. Flatten three specimens of pipe, prepared in accordance with Paragraph 2.05A, in a suitable press until the internal diameter has been reduced to 40 percent of the original inside diameter of the pipe. The rate of loading shall be uniform and at 2-inches per minute. The test specimens,when examined under normal light and with the unaided eye, shall show no evidence of splitting, cracking, breaking, or separation of the pipe walls or bracing profiles. C Joint Tightness. Test for joint tightness in accordance with ASTM D 3212, except replace the shear load transfer bars and supports with 6 inch wide support blocks that can be either flat or contoured to conform to the pipe's outer contour. D Purpose of Tests. The flattening and the joint tightness tests are not intended to be routine quality control tests, but rather to qualify pipe to a specified level of performance. 4/2013 02530-9 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS 2.07 MARKING A Mark each standard and random length of pipe in compliance with these Specifications with the following information: 1. Pipe size 2. Pipe class 3. Production code 4. Material designation 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A Employ a Trench Safety Plan as specified in Section 01570—Trench Safety Systems. B Install and operate dewatering and surface water control measures in accordance with Section 01564 - Control of Ground Water and Surface Water. C Remove existing pavements and structures, including sidewalks and driveways, in conformance with requirements of Section 02220—Site Demolition, as applicable. 3.02 DIVERSION PUMPING A Install and operate required bulkheads, plugs, piping, and diversion pumping equipment to maintain sewage flow and to prevent backup or overflow. Obtain approval for diversion pumping equipment and procedures from the Engineer. B Design piping,joints and accessories to withstand twice the maximum system pressure or 50 psi, whichever is greater. C No sewage shall be diverted into any area outside of the sanitary sewer. D In the event of accidental spill or overflow, immediately stop the overflow and take action to clean up and disinfect spillage. Promptly notify the Engineer so that required reporting can be made to the TCEQ and the Environmental Protection Agency by the Engineer. 3.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING A Acceptance testing of sanitary sewers including: 1. Visual inspection of sewer pipes 2. Mandrel testing for flexible sewer pipes. 3. Leakage testing of sewer pipes. 4. Leakage testing of manholes. B Performance Requirements: 1. Gravity sanitary sewers are required to have a straight alignment and uniform grade between manholes. 4/2013 02530- 10 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS 2. Flexible pipe,including"semi-rigid"pipe,is required to show no more than 5 percent deflection. Test pipe no sooner than.30 days after backfilling of a line segment but prior to final acceptance using a standard mandrel to verify that installed pipe is within specified deflection tolerances. 3. Maximum allowable leakage for Infiltration or Exfiltration a. The total exfiltration,as determined by a hydrostatic head test,shall not exceed 50 gallons per inch diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours at a minimum test head of 2 feet above the crown of the pipe at the upstream manhole or 2 feet above the groundwater elevation, whichever is greater. b. When pipes are installed more than 2 feet below the groundwater level, an infiltration test shall be used in lieu of the exfiltration test. The total infiltration shall not exceed 50 gallons per inch diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours. Groundwater elevation must be at least 2 feet above the crown of the pipe at the upstream manhole. c. Refer to Table 2530-1,Water Test Allowable Leakage,at the end of the Section, for measuring leakage in sewers. Perform leakage testing to verify that leakage criteria are met. 4. Perform air testing in accordance with requirements of this Section and the Texas Natural Resources Conservation Commission requirements. Refer to Table 02530-2, Time Allowed For Pressure Loss From 3.5 psig to 2.5 psig, Table 02530-3,Minimum Testing Times for Low Pressure Air Test,and Table 02530-4, Vacuum Test Time Table, at the end of this Section. C Gravity Sanitary Sewer Quality Assurance: 1. Repair, correct, and retest manholes or sections of pipe which fail to meet specified requirements when tested. 2. Provide testing reports and video tape of television inspection as directed by Engineer. 3. Upon completion of tape reviews by Engineer, Contractor will be notified regarding final acceptance of the sewer segment. D Sequencing and Scheduling: 1. Perform testing as work progresses. Schedule testing so that no more than 1000 linear feet of installed sewer remains untested at any one time. 2. Coordinate testing schedules with Engineer. Perform testing under observation of Engineer. E Deflection Mandrel: 1. Mandrel Sizing. The rigid mandrel shall have an outside diameter(O.D.)equal to 95 percent of the inside diameter(I.D.) of the pipe. The inside diameter of the pipe, for the purpose of determining the outside diameter of the mandrel, shall be the average outside diameter minus two minimum wall thicknesses for O.D. controlled pipe and the average inside diameter for I.D. controlled pipe, dimensions shall be per appropriate standard. Statistical or other "tolerance riah\ packages" shall not be considered in mandrel sizing. 2. Mandrel Design. The rigid mandrel shall be constructed of a metal or a rigid plastic material that can withstand 200 psi without being deformed. The 4/2013 02530- 11 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS mandrel shall have nine or more"runners"or"legs"as long as the total number of legs is an odd number. The barrel section of the mandrel shall have a length of at least 75 percent of the inside diameter of the pipe. The rigid mandrel shall not have adjustable or collapsible legs which would allow a reduction in mandrel diameter during testing. A proving ring shall be provided and used for modifying each size mandrel. 3. Proving Ring. Furnish a"proving ring"with each mandrel. Fabricate the ring of 1/2 inch thick, 3-inch-wide bar steel to a diameter 0.02 inches larger than approved mandrel diameter. 4. Mandrel Dimensions (5 percent allowance). Average inside diameter and minimum mandrel diameter are specified in Table 02530-5,Pipe vs. Mandrel Diameter,at the end of this Section. Mandrels for higher strength,thicker wall pipe or other pipe not listed in the table may be used when approved by the Engineer. F Exfiltration Test: 1. Water Meter: Obtain a transient water meter from the City for use when water for testing will be taken from the City system. Conform to City requirements for water meter use. 2. Test Equipment: a. Pipe plugs. b. Pipe risers where the manhole cone is less than 2 feet above highest point in pipe or service lead. G Infiltration Test: 1. Test Equipment: a. Calibrated 90 degree V-notch weir. b. Pipe plugs. H Low Pressure Air Test: 1. Minimum Requirement for Equipment: a. Control panel. b. Low-pressure air supply connected to control panel. c. Pneumatic plugs: Acceptable size for diameter of pipe to be tested; capable of withstanding internal test pressure without leaking or requiring external bracing. d. Air hoses from control panel to: 1) Air supply. 2) Pneumatic plugs. 3) Sealed line for pressuring. 4) Sealed line for monitoring internal pressure. 2. Testing Pneumatic Plugs: Place a pneumatic plug in each end of a length of pipe on the ground. Pressurize plugs to 25 psig;then pressurize sealed pipe to 5 psig. Plugs are acceptable if they remain in place against the test pressure without external aids. I Ground Water Determination: 4/2013 02530- 12 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS 1. Equipment: Pipe probe or small diameter casing for ground water elevation determination. J Visual Inspection: 1. Check pipe alignment visually by flashing a light between structures. Verify if alignment is true and no pipes are misplaced. In case of misalignment or damaged pipe, remove and re-lay or replace pipe segment. K Mandrel Testing: 1. Perform deflection testing on flexible and semi-rigid pipe to confirm pipe has no more than 5 percent deflection. Mandrel testing shall conform to ASTM D 3034. Perform testing no sooner than 30 days after backfilling of line segment, but prior to final acceptance testing of the line segment. 2. Pull the approved mandrel by hand through sewer sections. Replace any section of sewer not passing the mandrel. Mandrel testing is not required for stubs. 3. Retest repaired or replaced sewer sections. L Leakage Testing: 1. Test Options: a. Test Gravity Sanitary Sewer pipes for leakage by either exfiltration or infiltration methods, as appropriate, or with low pressure air testing. b. Test new or rehabilitated sanitary sewer manholes with water or low pressure air. Manholes tested with low pressure air shall undergo a physical inspection prior to testing. c. Leakage testing shall be performed after backfilling of a line segment, and prior to tie-in of service connections. d. If no installed piezometer is within 500 feet of the sewer segment, Contractor shall provide a temporary piezometer for this purpose. 2. Compensating for Ground Water Pressure: a. Where ground water exists,install a pipe nipple at the same time sewer line is placed. Use a 1/2-inch capped pipe nipple approximately 10 inches long. Make the installation through manhole wall on top of the sewer line where line enters manhole. b. Immediately before performing line acceptance test,remove cap,clear pipe nipple with air pressure,and connect a clear plastic tube to nipple. Support tube vertically and allow water to rise in the tube. After water stops rising, measure height in feet of water over invert of the pipe. Divide this height by 2.3 feet/psi to determine the ground water pressure to be used in line testing. 3. Exfiltration test: a. Determine ground water elevation. b. Plug sewer in downstream manhole. c. Plug incoming pipes in upstream manhole. d. Install riser pipe in outgoing pipe of upstream manhole if highest point in service lead (house service) is less than 2 feet below bottom of manhole cone. 4/2013 02530- 13 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS e. Fill sewer pipe and manhole or pipe riser,if used,with water to a point 2-1/2 feet above highest point in sewer pipe, house lead, or ground water table, whichever is highest. f. Allow water to stabilize for one to two hours. Take water level reading to determine drop of water surface, in inches, over a one-hour period, and calculate water loss (1 inch of water in 4 feet diameter manhole equals 8.22 gallons) or measure the quantity of water required to keep water at same level. Loss shall not exceed that calculated from allowable leakage according to Table 02530-1 at the end of this Section. 4. Infiltration test: Ground water elevation must be not less than 2.0 feet above highest point of sewer pipe or service lead(house service). a. Determine ground water elevation. b. Plug incoming pipes in upstream manhole. c. Insert calibrated 90 degree V-notch weir in pipe on downstream manhole. d. Allow water to rise and flow over weir until it stabilizes. e. Take five readings of accumulated volume over a period of 2 hours and use average for infiltration. The average must not exceed that calculated for 2 hours from allowable leakage according to the Table 02530-1 at the end of this Section. 5. Low Air Pressure Test: When using this test conform to ASTM C 828,ASTM C 924, or ASTM F 1417, as applicable, with holding time not less than that listed in Table 02530-2. a. Air testing for sections of pipe shall be limited to lines less than 36- inch average inside diameter. b. Lines 36-inch average inside diameter and larger shall be tested at each joint. The minimum time allowable for the pressure to drop from 3.5 pounds per square inch gauge to 2.5 pounds per square inch during a joint test shall be 10 seconds, regardless of pipe size. c. For pipe sections less than 36-inch average inside diameter: 1) Determine ground water level. 2) Plug both ends of pipe. For concrete pipe, flood pipe and allow 2 hours to saturate concrete. Then drain and plug concrete pipe. 3) After a manhole-to-manhole section of sanitary sewer main has been sliplined and prior to any service lines being connected to new liner, plug liner at each manhole with pneumatic plugs. 4) Pressurize pipe to 4.0 psig. Increase pressure 1.0 psi for each 2.3 feet of ground water over highest point in system. Allow pressure to stabilize for 2 to 4 minutes. Adjust pressure to start at 3.5 psig (plus adjustment for ground water table). Refer to Table 02530-2 at the end of this Section. '—*°) 5) To determine air loss, measure the time interval for pressure to drop to 2.5 psig. The time must exceed that 4/2013 02530- 14 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS listed in the Table 02530-2 at the end of this Section for (0111`,, pipe diameter and length. For sliplining, use diameter of carrier pipe. 6. Retest: Any section of pipe which fails to meet requirements shall be repaired and retested. M Test Criteria Tables 1. Exfiltration and Infiltration Water Tests: Refer to Table 02530-1,Water Test Allowable Leakage, at the end of this Section. 2. Low Pressure Air Test: a. Times in Table 02530-2, Time Allowed For Pressure Loss From 3.5 psig to 2.5 psig, at the end of this Section, are based on the equation from TCEQ Design Criteria for Sewerage Systems: 317.2(a)(4)(B). T=0.0850(D)(K)/(Q) Where: T = Time for pressure to drop 1.0 pounds per square inch gauge in seconds K = 0.000419 DL, but not less than 1.0 D = Average inside diameter in inches L = Length of line of same pipe size in feet Q = Rate of loss, 0.0015 ft3/min./sq. ft. internal surface b. Since a K value of less than 1.0 shall not be used, there are minimum testing times for each pipe diameter as given in Table 02732-3, Minimum Testing Times for Low Pressure Air Test. Notes: 1. When two sizes of pipe are involved, the time shall be computed by the ratio of lengths involved. 2. Line with a 27-inch average inside diameter and larger may be air tested at each joint. 3. Lines with an average inside diameter greater than 36 inches must be air tested for leakage at each joint 4. If the joint test is used, a visual inspection of the joint shall be performed immediately after testing. 5. For joint test, the pipe is to be pressurized to 3.5 psi greater than the pressure exerted by groundwater above the pipe. Once the pressure has stabilized, the minimum times allowable for the pressure to drop from 3.5 pounds per square inch gauge to 2.5 pounds per square inch gauge shall be 10 seconds. N Leakage Testing for Manholes 4/2013 02530- 15 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS 1. After completion of manhole construction, wall sealing, or rehabilitation,but prior to backfilling, test manholes for water tightness using hydrostatic or vacuum testing procedures. 2. Plug influent and effluent lines, including service lines, with suitably-sized pneumatic or mechanical plugs. Ensure plugs are properly rated for pressures required for test; follow manufacturer's safety and installation recommendations. Place plugs a minimum of 6 inches outside of manhole walls. Brace inverts to prevent lines from being dislodged if lines entering manhole have not been backfilled. 3. Vacuum testing: a. Install vacuum tester head assembly at top access point of manhole and adjust for proper seal on straight top section of manhole structure. Following manufacturer's instructions and safety precautions,inflate sealing element to the recommended maximum inflation pressure; do not over-inflate. b. Evacuate manhole with vacuum pump to 10 inches mercury(Hg), disconnect pump, and monitor vacuum for the time period specified in Table 02530-4, Vacuum Test Time Table. c. If the drop in vacuum exceeds 1 inch Hg over the specified time period tabulated above,locate leaks, complete repairs necessary to seal manhole and repeat test procedure until satisfactory results are obtained. 4. Hydrostatic exfiltration testing shall be performed as follows: a. Seal wastewater lines coming into the manhole with an internal pipe plug. Then fill the manhole with water and maintain it full for at least one hour. b. The maximum leakage for hydrostatic testing shall be 0.025 gallons per foot diameter per foot of manhole depth per hour. c. If water loss exceeds amount tabulated above, locate leaks, complete repairs necessary to seal manhole and repeat test procedure until satisfactory results are obtained. 3.04 BACKFILL A Backfill and compact soil in accordance with Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. B Backfill the trench in specified lifts only after pipe installation is approved by the Engineer. 3.05 CLEAN UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140 - Contractor's Use of Premises. 4/2013 02530- 16 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS 3.06 PROTECTION OF THE WORK C.6\ A Maintain gravity sanitary sewer installations in good condition until completion of the work. Table 02530-1 WATER TEST ALLOWABLE LEAKAGE DIAMETER OF VOLUME PER INCH OF DEPTH ALLOWANCE LEAKAGE* RISER OR STACK IN INCHES INCH GALLONS PIPE SIZE IN GALLONS/MINUTE INCHES PER 100 FT. 1 0.7854 .0034 6 0.0039 2 3.1416 .0136 8 0.0053 2.5 4.9087 .0212 10 0.0066 3 7.0686 .0306 12 0.0079 4 12.5664 .0306 15 0.0099 5 19.6350 .0544 18 0.0118 6 28.2743 .1224 21 0.0138 8 50.2655 .2176 24 0.0518 27 0.0177 30 0.0197 36 0.0237 42 0.0276 For other diameters, multiply square of diameters by Equivalent to 50 gallons per inch value for 1" diameter inside diameter per mile per 24 hours * Allowable leakage rate shall be reduced to 10 gallons per inch of inside diameter per mile per 24 hours,when sewer is identified as located within the 25-year flood plain. 4/2013 02530- 17 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS Table 02530-2 ACCEPTANCE TESTING FOR SANITARY SEWERS TIME ALLOWED FOR PRESSURE LOSS FROM 3.5 PSIG TO 2.5 PSIG Pipe Min. Length Time for Specification Time for Length(L)Shown(min:sec) Diam Time for Min. Longer m (ft) Length ( ) (min:sec) Time (sec) 100 ft 150 ft 200 ft 250 ft 300 ft 350 ft 400 ft 450 ft 500 ft 550 ft 600 ft 6 5:40 398 0.8548 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:40 5:42 6:25 7:07 7:50 8:33 8 7:33 298 1.5196 7:33 7:33 7:33 7:33 7:36 8:52 10:08 11:24 12:40 13:36 15:12 10 9:27 239 2.3743 9:27 9:27 9:27 9:54 11:52 13:51 15:50 17:48 19:47 21:46 23:45 12 11:20 199 3.4190 11:20 11:20 11:20 14:15 17:06 19:57 22:48 25:39 28:30 31:20 34:11 15 14:10 159 5.3423 14:10 14:10 17:48 22:16 26:43 31:10 35:37 40:04 44:31 48:58 53:25 18 17:00 133 7.6928 17:00 19:14 25:39 32:03 38:28 44:52 51:17 57:42 64:06 70:31 76:56 21 19:50 114 10.4708 19:50 26:11 34:54 43:38 52:21 61:05 69:48 78:32 87:15 95:59 104:42 24 22:40 99 13.6762 22:48 34:11 45:35 56:59 68:23 79:47 91:10 102:34 113:58 125:22 136:46 27 25:30 88 17.3089 28:51 43:16 57:42 72:07 86:33 100:58 115:24 129:49 144:14 158:40 173:05 30 28:20 80 21.3690 35:37 53:37 71:14 89:02 106:51 124:39 142:28 160:16 178:05 195:53 213:41 33 31:10 72 25.8565 43:06 64:38 86:11 107:44 129:17 150:50 172:23 193:55 215:28 237:01 258:34 Table 02530-3 MINIMUM TESTING TIMES FOR LOW PRESSURE AIR TEST PIPE MINIMUM LENGTH FOR TIME FOR DIAMETER TIME MINIMUM TIME LONGER LENGTH (INCHES) (SECONDS) (FEET) (SECONDS) 6 340 398 0.855 (L) 8 454 298 1.520 (L) 10 567 239 2.374 (L) 12 680 199 3.419 (L) 15 850 159 5.342 (L) 18 1020 133 7.693 (L) 21 1190 114 10.471 (L) 24 1360 100 13.676 (L) 27 1530 88 17.309 (L) 30 1700 80 21.369 (L) 33 1870 72 25.856 (L) 4/2013 02530- 18 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS (.1. \ Table 02530-4 VACUUM TEST TIME TABLE TIME IN SECONDS BY PIPE DIAMETER DEPTH IN FEET 48" 60" 72" 4 10 13 16 8 20 26 32 12 30 39 48 16 40 52 64 20 50 65 80 24 60 78 96 * 5.0 6.5 8.0 *Add T times for each additional 2-foot depth. (The values listed above have been extrapolated from ASTM C 924-85) (IIPIlb 4/2013 02530- 19 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND GRAVITY SANITARY SEWERS Table 02530-5 (611) PIPE VS. MANDREL DIAMETER NOMINAL AVERAGE MATERIAL AND SIZE I.D. MINIMUM MANDREL WALL CONSTRUCTION (INCHES) (INCHES) DIAMETER(INCHES) PVC-Solid(SDR 26) 6 5.764 5.476 8 7.715 7.329 10 9.646 9.162 PVC-Solid(SDR 35) 12 11.737 11.150 15 14.374 13.655 18 17.629 16.748 21 20.783 19.744 24 23.381 22.120 27 26.351 25.033 PVC-Profile(ASTM F 794) 12 11.740 11.153 15 14.370 13.652 18 17.650 16.768 21 20.750 19.713 24 23.500 22.325 27 26.500 25.175 30 29.500 28.025 36 35.500 33.725 42 41.500 39.425 48 47.500 45.125 HDPE-Profile 18 18.000 17.100 21 21.000 19.950 24 24.000 22.800 27 27.000 25.650 30 30.000 28.500 36 36.000 34.200 42 42.000 39.900 48 48.000 45.600 54 54.000 51.300 60 60.000 57.000 Fiberglass-Centrifugally Cast 12 12.85 11.822 (Class SN 46) 18 18.66 17.727 20 20.68 19.646 24 24.72 23.484 30 30.68 29.146 36 36.74 34.903 42 42.70 40.565 48 48.76 46.322 54 54.82 52.079 60 60.38 57.361 END OF SECTION 4/2013 02530-20 of 20 CITY OF PEARLAND SANITARY SEWER SERVICE LEADS OR RECONNECTIONS Section 02531 SANITARY SEWER SERVICE LEADS OR RECONNECTIONS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Installation of service stubs on new sanitary sewers serving areas where sanitary sewer service did not previously exist. B Reconnection of existing service connections along parallel, replacement, or rehabilitated sanitary sewers. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 01760—Project Record Documents 3. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 4. Section 01570—Trench Safety System 5. Section 01564—Control of Ground Water and Surface Water 6. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 7. Section 02530—Gravity Sanitary Sewers (.116\ 8. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises D Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 1784,"Standard Specification for Rigid Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride (CPVC) Compounds" b. ASTM D 3034, "Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings" c. ASTM D 3212,"Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for single, near-side service leads is on a per each basis, complete in place. B Measurement for double, near-side service leads is on a per each basis, completed in place. C Measurement for single,far-side service leads is on a per each basis,complete in place. Measurement for double, far-side service leads is on a per each basis, complete in (.1.16\ place. 02/2008 02531 - 1 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SANITARY SEWER SERVICE LEADS OR RECONNECTIONS E Payment for service leads includes service connections, couplings, clean-outs, adapters, disconnecting existing services, reconnecting new service, fittings, excavation, backfill, and testing. F Measurement for sanitary sewer stacks up to 3 vertical feet is on a per each basis, complete in place. Payment includes riser pipe,service connections,couplings,clean- outs, adapters, disconnecting existing services, reconnecting new service, fittings, excavation, backfill, and testing. G Measurement for extra depth sanitary sewer stacks greater than 3 vertical feet is on a vertical foot basis from the top of the receiving sewer to the invert of the service connection, measured and complete in place. Payment includes excavation, pipe, bedding, and backfill for that portion of the stack in excess of 3 feet. H Measurement for sanitary sewer service reconnections with stacks located within 5 feet of the sanitary sewer main centerline shall be per each reconnection,complete in place. I Measurement for sanitary sewer service reconnections without stacks located within 5 feet of the sanitary sewer main centerline shall be per each reconnection, complete in place. J Payment for sanitary sewer service reconnections includes include service connections, couplings, clean-outs, adapters disconnecting existing services, reconnecting new service, fittings, excavation, backfill, and testing. K Augered pipe for service leads will be paid as provided in Section 02415—Augering Pipe or Casing for Sewer. L One or more connections discharging into a common point are considered one service connection. The Contractor shall not add service reconnections without approval of the Engineer. The Engineer may require reconnections to be moved or relocated to avoid having more than two single family units per reconnection. M Measurement for abandonment of service connection is on a per each basis. No additional payment will be made for abandonment of service connection unless excavation is required beyond new or replacement sewer or service lead trench zone. No separate payment will be made for excavation of sanitary sewer services within the new or replacement sewer trench. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit product data for each pipe product, fitting, coupling and adapter. C Submit field red lines documenting location of sanitary sewer stubs and reconnections as installed,referenced to survey Control Points,under the provisions of Section 01760 02/2008 02531 -2 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SANITARY SEWER SERVICE LEADS OR RECONNECTIONS — Project Record Documents, 1.04C. Include location of utilities and structures encountered or rerouted. Give horizontal dimensions, elevations, inverts and gradients. Record the exact distance from each service connection to the nearest downstream manhole. 1.04 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 PVC SERVICE CONNECTION A As stubouts, use PVC sewer pipe, 4-inch through 10-inch, conforming to ASTM D 1784 and ASTM D 3034, with a cell classification of 12454-B. The SDR (ratio of diameter to wall thickness) shall be 26 for pipe 10 inches in diameter or less. B PVC pipe shall be gasket jointed with gasket conforming to ASTM D3212. C Provide service connection pipe in sizes shown on the Plans. For reconnection of existing services, select service connection pipe diameter to match existing service diameter. D Provide a 6-inch service connection when more than one service discharges into a single pipe. E Connect service pipes to new parallel or replacement sewer mains with prefabricated, full-bodied tee or wye fittings conforming to specifications for the sewer main pipe material as specified in other Sections for all sewers up to 18 inches in diameter. F Where new sewers are installed using pipe augering or tunneling, or where the new sewer is greater than 18 inches in diameter, use Fowler"Inserta-Tee" to connect the service to the new sewer main. 2.02 PIPE SADDLES A Use pipe saddles only on rehabilitated sanitary sewer mains. Comply with Paragraph` 2.01E for new parallel and replacement sanitary sewer mains. 02/2008 02531 -3 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SANITARY SEWER SERVICE LEADS OR RECONNECTIONS 2.03 COUPLINGS AND ADAPTERS '°1"') A For connection between new PVC pipe stubout and existing service; 4-, 6-, or 8-inch diameter, use flexible adapter coupling consisting of a neoprene gasket and stainless steel shear ring, with 1/2-inch stainless steel band clamps: 1. Fernco Pipe Connectors, Inc., Series 1055 with shear ring SR-8; 2. Band Seal by Mission Rubber Co., Inc.; 3. Approved equal. B For connection between new PVC pipe stub out and new service,use rubber-gasketed adapter coupling: 1. GPK Products, Inc., IPS & Sewer Adapter. 2. Approved Equal. 2.04 STACKS A Provide stacks for service connections wherever the crown of the sewer is 8 feet or more below finished grade. B Construct stacks of the same material as the sanitary sewer and as shown on the Plans. C Provide stacks of the same nominal diameter at the sanitary service line. 2.05 CLEAN-OUTS A Install clean-outs at property line on each service connection as shown in detail on the Plans. 2.06 PLUGS AND CAPS A Seal the upstream end of unconnected sewer service stubs with rubber gasketed plugs or caps of the same pipe type and size. Provide plugs or caps by GPK Products,Inc., or equal. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A Accurately field locate service connections, whether in service or not, as pipe laying progresses from downstream to upstream. B Properly disconnect existing connections from the sewer and reconnect to the new sewer, as described in this Section. C Reconnect service connections, including those that go to unoccupied or abandoned buildings, unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. Plug the service connection at the R.O.W. for vacant lots. 02/2008 02531 -4 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SANITARY SEWER SERVICE LEADS OR RECONNECTIONS D Connect services 8 inches in diameter and larger to the sewer by construction of a manhole. 3.02 PREPARATION A Employ a Trench Safety Plan as specified in Section 01570—Trench Safety System. B Install and operate necessary dewatering and surface water control measures in accordance with requirements of Section 01564 — Control of Ground Water and Surface Water. C Provide a minimum of 48 hours notice to customers whose sanitary sewer service will potentially be interrupted. D Schedule Work so that reconnection of service lines can be completed within 24 hours after disconnection. E Where sewers are existing,field locate existing service connections,whether in service or not. Use existing service locations for reconnection of service lines to new liner or new sanitary sewer main. F For new parallel and replacement sanitary sewer mains, complete testing and acceptance of downstream sewers as applicable. 3.03 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. 3.04 RECONNECTION ON NEW SEWER A Install the new service connection on the new sanitary sewer main for each service connection. B Remove and replace cracked, offset or leaking service line for up to 5 feet,measured horizontally, from the centerline of the new sanitary sewer main. C Make up the connection between the new main and the existing service line using PVC sewer pipe and approved couplings, as shown on the Plans. D Test service connections before backfilling. E Embed the service connection and service line as specified for the new sanitary sewer main at this location, and as shown on the Plans. Place and compact trench zone backfill in compliance with Section 02318 —Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. 02/2008 02531 -5 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND SANITARY SEWER SERVICE LEADS OR RECONNECTIONS 3.05 INSTALLATION OF NEW SERVICE LEADS A Install the new service connections on the new sanitary sewer main for each service connection. Provide the length of stub indicated on the Plans. Install plug or cap on the upstream end of the service stub as needed. B Test service connections before backfilling. C Embed the service connection and service line as specified for the new sanitary sewer main at this location, and as shown on the Plans. Place and compact trench zone backfill in compliance with Section 02318 —Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Test service reconnections and service stubs. Follow applicable procedures given in Section 02530—Gravity Sanitary Sewers. 3.07 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. 3.08 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Protect and maintain all installations good condition until completion of Work. B Replace installations by Contractor's operations at no cost to Owner. C Do not allow sand, debris or runoff to enter sewer system. END OF SECTION 02/2008 02531 -6 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) SOLID WALL PIPE Section 02532 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) SOLID WALL PIPE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) pipe for gravity sewers and drains, including fittings. B HDPE pipe for sanitary sewer force mains, including fittings. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 02630—Storm Sewers 4. Section 02530—Gravity Sanitary Sewers D Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM F 714, "Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) Based on Outside Diameter" b. ASTM D 2657, "Standard Practice for Heat Fusion Joining and Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings" c. ASTM D 1248, "Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable" d. ASTM D 350, "Standard Test Method for Flexible Treated Sleeving Used for Electrical Insulation" e. ASTM F 477,"Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals(Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe" f. ASTM D 618,"Standard Practice for Conditioning Plastics for Testing" g. ASTM D 3212,"Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for HDPE pipe under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for gravity sanitary sewers and storm sewers. B If HDPE pipe is included as a Bid Item,measurement will be based on the units shown in Section 00300—Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 07/2006 02532- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) SOLID WALL PIPE 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit Shop Drawings showing design of pipe and fittings indicating alignment and grade, laying dimensions, fabrication, fittings, flanges, and special details. C Submit product quality, material sources, and field quality information in accordance with this Section. 1.04 PRODUCT QUALITY CONTROL A Provide the manufacturer's certificate of conformance to the Technical Specifications. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED AND PREAPPROVED PRODUCTS A Provide HDPE pipe as follows: PRODUCT ASTM PIPE DIAMETER WALL TYPR MANUFACTURER STIFFNESS RANGE OPTIONS DESIGNATION (MIN) (INCHES) Solid Wall Drisco 1000 Approved F 714 Drisco 8600 115 psi 8 to 10 Quail Pipe Poly Pipe 46 psi 12 to 48 Plexco B Solid wall pipe shall be produced with plain end construction for heat-joining (butt fusion) conforming to ASTM D 2657. Utilize controlled temperatures and pressures for joining to produce a fused leak-free joint. 2.02 MATERIALS A Pipe and Fittings: High density, high molecular weight polyethylene pipe material meeting the requirements of Type III, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34, as defined in ASTM D 1248. Material meeting the requirements of cell classification in accordance with ASTM D 350 are also suitable for making pipe products under these specifications. B Gaskets 1. Use gaskets meeting requirement of ASTM F 477. Use gasket molded into a circular form or extruded to the proper section and then spliced into circular form. When no contaminant is identified, use gaskets of a properly cured, high-grade elastomeric compound. The basic polymer shall be natural rubber, synthetic elastomer, or a blend of both. 07/2006 02532-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) SOLID WALL PIPE rN. 2. Pipes to be installed in potentially contaminated areas, especially where free product is found near the elevation of the proposed sewer, shall have the following gasket materials for the noted contaminants: CONTAMINANT GASKET MATERIAL REQUIRED Petroleum(diesel, gasoline) Nitrile Rubber Other Contaminants As recommended by the pipe manufacturer C Lubricant. Use a lubricant for assembly of gasketed joints which has no detrimental effect on the gasket or on the pipe, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2.03 WORKMANSHIP A Furnish pipe and fittings that are homogeneous throughout and free from visible cracks,holes,foreign inclusions,or other injurious defects. Provide pipe as uniform as commercially practical in color, opacity, density, and other physical properties. 2.04 INSPECTIONS A The Engineer reserves the right to inspect pipes or witness pipe manufacturing. Such inspection shall in no way relieve the manufacturer of the responsibilities to provide products that comply with the applicable standards and these Specifications. B Manufacturer's Notification to Customer. Should the Engineer wish to witness the manufacture of specific pipes, the manufacturer shall provide the Engineer with adequate advance notice of when and where the production of those specific pipes will take place. C Failure to Inspect. Approval of the products or tests is not implied by the Engineer's decision not to inspect the manufacturing, testing, or finished pipes. 2.05 TEST METHODS A Conditioning. Conditioning of samples prior to and during tests are subject to approval by the Engineer. When referee tests are required,condition the specimens in accordance with Procedure A in ASTM D 618 at 73.4 degrees F plus or minus 3.6 degrees F(23 degrees C plus or minus 2 degrees C) and 50 percent relative humidity plus or minus 5 percent relative humidity for not less than 40 hours prior to test. Conduct tests under the same conditions of temperature and humidity unless otherwise specified. B Flattening. Flatten three specimens of pipe, prepared in accordance with Paragraph 2.05A,in a suitable press until the internal diameter has been reduced to 40 percent of the original inside diameter of the pipe. The rate of loading shall be uniform and at 2- inches per minute. The test specimens, when examined under normal light and with 07/2006 02532-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) SOLID WALL PIPE the unaided eye, shall show no evidence of splitting,cracking,breaking,or separation of the pipe walls or bracing profiles. C Joint Tightness. Test for joint tightness in accordance with ASTM D 3212, except replace the shear load transfer bars and supports with 6-inch-wide support blocks that can be either flat or contoured to conform to the pipe's outer contour. D Purpose of Tests. The flattening and the joint tightness tests are not intended to be routine quality control tests, but rather to qualify pipe to a specified level of performance. 2.06 MARKING A Mark each standard and random length of pipe meeting the requirements of this Section with the following information: 1. Pipe size 2. Pipe class 3. Production code 4. Material designation 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A Conform to requirements of the following Sections: 1. Section 02630—Storm Sewers 2. Section 02530—Gravity Sanitary Sewers B All HDPE installations shall be bedded and backfilled to top or pipe zone with cement stabilized sand. C All HDPE pipe must terminate in manholes, concrete headwalls, or safety and treatment structures. D Install pipe in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02532-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND PVC PIPE Section 02534 PVC PIPE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Polyvinyl chloride pressure pipe for water distribution in nominal diameters 4 inches through 16 inches. B. Polyvinyl chloride sewer pipe for gravity sanitary sewers in nominal diameters 4 inches through 48 inches. C. Polyvinyl chloride pressure pipe for gravity sanitary sewers and force mains in nominal diameters 4 inches through 36 inches. D. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 02634—Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 3. Section 02533 — Sanitary Sewage Force Mains 4. Section 02512-Polyethylene Wrap 5. Section 02510—Water Mains 6. Section 02530—Gravity Sanitary Sewers 7. Section 02731 —Sanitary Sewage Force Mains 8. Section 02630—Storm Sewers 9. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities E. Referenced Standards: 1. American Water Works Association(AWWA) a. AWWA C900 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4"— 12" for Water Distribution. b. AWWA C905 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Water Transmission Pipe, Nominal Diameters, 14in. Through 36 in. c. AWWA C110 Ductile-Iron and Gray Iron Fittings for Water. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 1784,"Standard Specification for Rigid Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride (CPVC) Compounds" b. ASTM F 477,"Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals(Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe" 05/2013 02534- 1 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND PVC PIPE c. ASTM D 3139,"Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals" d. ASTM D 3034, "Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings" e. ASTM F 949, "Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC) Corrugated Sewer Pipe with a Smooth Interior and Fittings" f. ASTM D 794,"Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC) Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter" g. ASTM F 679, "Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings" h. ASTM D 2241,"Standard Specification for Poly Vinyl Chloride(PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series)" i. ASTM D 3212,"Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals" j. ASTM D 2444, "Standard Test Method for Determination for the Impact Resistance of Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings by Means of a Tup (Falling Weight)" k. ASTM D 1248, "Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable" 1. ASTM D 2321, "Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications" 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) a. ANSI A21.10 Cast Iron and Ductile Iron Fittings,2 thru 48 in./Water. b. ANSI A21.11 Rubber Gasket Joints Cast and Ductile Iron Press Pipe. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for PVC pipe under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for Water Mains, Gravity Sanitary Sewer,and Sanitary Sewage Force Mains. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit Shop Drawings showing design of new pipe and fittings indicating alignment and grade, laying dimensions, fabrication, fittings, flanges, and special details. 05/2013 02534-2 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND PVC.PIPE 1.04 QUALITY CONTROL A. Submit manufacturer's certifications that PVC pipe and fittings meet requirements of this Section and AWWA C900 or AWWA C905 for pressure pipe applications,or the appropriate ASTM standard specified for gravity sewer pipe. B. Submit manufacturer's certification that PVC pressure pipe has been hydrostatically tested at the factory in accordance with AWWA C900 or AWWA C905 and this Section. C. When foreign manufactured material is proposed for use, have material tested for conformance to applicable ASTM requirements by certified independent testing laboratory located in United States. Certification from any other source is not acceptable. Furnish copies of test reports to the Engineer for review. Cost of testing shall be borne by Contractor or Supplier. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL A. Use PVC compounds in the manufacture of pipe that contain no ingredient in an amount that has been demonstrated to migrate into water in quantities considered to be toxic. B. Furnish PVC pressure pipe manufactured from Class 12454-A or Class 12454-B virgin PVC compounds as defined in ASTM D 1784. Use compounds qualifying for a rating of 4000 psi for water at 73.4 degrees F per requirements of PPI TR3. Provide pipe which is homogeneous throughout,free of voids,cracks,inclusions,and other defects, uniform as commercially practical in color, density, and other physical properties. Deliver pipe with surfaces free from nicks and scratches with joining surfaces of spigots and joints free from gouges and imperfections which could cause leakage. C. For PVC pressure pipe used for water mains,provide self-extinguishing PVC pipe that bears Underwriters'Laboratories mark of approval and is acceptable without penalty to Texas State Fire Insurance Committee for use in fire protection lines. D. Gaskets: 1. Gaskets shall meet the requirements of ASTM F 477. Use elastomeric factory- installed gaskets to make joints flexible and watertight. 2. Pipes to be installed in potentially contaminated areas, especially where free product is found near the elevation of the proposed sewer, shall have the following gasket materials for the noted contaminants. (111.6' 05/2013 02534-3 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND PVC PIPE CONTAMINANT GASKET MATERIAL REQUIRED "1.14/ Petroleum (diesel, gasoline) Nitrile Rubber Other contaminants As recommended by the pipe manufacturer E. Lubricant for rubber-gasketed joints: Water soluble, non-toxic, non-objectionable in taste and odor imparted to fluid, non-supporting of bacteria growth, having no deteriorating effect on PVC or rubber gaskets. 2.02 WATER SERVICE PIPE A. Pipe 4-inch through 12-inch: AWWAC900, Class 150, DR 18; nominal 20-foot lengths; cast iron equivalent outside diameters. B. Pipe 16-inch: AWWA C905; Class 235; DR 18; nominal 20 foot lengths; cast iron equivalent outside diameter. C. Joints: ASTM D 3139; push-on type joints in integral bell or separate sleeve couplings. Do not use socket type or solvent weld type joints. D. Make curves and bends by deflecting the joints. Do not exceed maximum deflection recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Submit details of other methods of providing curves and bends for review by the Engineer. E. Hydrostatic Test: AWWA C900, AWWA C905, ANSI A21.10 (AWWA C110); at point of manufacture; submit manufacturer's written certification. 2.03 BENDS AND FITTINGS FOR PVC PRESSURE PIPE A. Bends and Fittings: ANSI A21.10, ductile iron; ANSI A21.11 single rubber gasket push-on type joint; minimum 150 psi pressure rating. B. Coatings and Linings: Conform to requirements of Section 02634—Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings. 2.04 GRAVITY SANITARY SEWER PIPE A. PVC gravity sanitary sewer pipe shall be in accordance with the provisions in the following table: 05/2013 02534-4 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND PVC PIPE WALL PRODUCT ASTM SDR(MAX.)/ DIAMETER TYPE MANUFACTURER OPTIONS DESIGNATION STIFFNESS(MIN.) SIZE RANGE Solid J-M Pipe Approved D3034 SDR 26/PS 115 6"to 15" CertainTeed Approved F679 SDR 26/PS 115 18" to 48" Can-Tex Approved AWWA C900 DR 18/N/A*** 4"to 12" Carlon Diamond Approved AWWA C905 DR 18/N/A*** 14" to 36" Profile* Contech A-2000** Only when F949 N/A/50 psi 12"to 36" included in the ETI Ultra-Rib Bid Schedule F794 N/A/46 psi 12"to 48" Lamson Vylon F794 N/A/46 psi 21"to 48" * Allowed to be used where there are no service taps. ** Allowed to be used to maximum depth of 10' only. ***For water-seer separation requirements unless specifically noted in Bid Schedule. B. When solid wall PVC pipe 18 inches to 27 inches in diameter is required in SDR 26, provide pipe conforming to ASTM F679,except provide wall thickness as required for SDR 26 and pipe strength of 115 psi. C. For sewers up to 12-inch-diameter crossing over waterlines, or crossing under waterlines with less than 2 feet separation, provide minimum 150 psi pressure-rated pipe conforming to ASTM D 2241 with suitable PVC adapter couplings. D. Joints: Spigot and integral wall section bell with solid cross section elastometric or rubber ring gasket conforming to requirements of ASTM D 3212 and ASTM F 477. E. ASTM D 3139 and ASTM F 477 shall be provided. Gaskets shall be factory- assembled and securely bonded in place to prevent displacement. The manufacturer shall test a sample from each batch conforming to requirements ASTM D 2444. F. Fittings: Provide PVC gravity sewer sanitary bends, tee, or wye fittings for new sanitary sewer construction. PVC pipe fittings shall be full-bodied, either injection molded or factory fabricated. Saddle-type tee or wye fittings are not acceptable. 2.05 SANITARY SEWER FORCE MAIN PIPE A. Provide PVC pressure pipe conforming to the requirements for water service pipe,and conforming to the minimum working pressure rating specified in Section 02533 — Sanitary Sewage Force Mains. B. Acceptable pipe joints are integral bell-and-spigot,containing a bonded-in elastomeric sealing ring meeting the requirements of ASTM F 477. In designated areas requiring restrained joint pipe and fittings, use EBAA Iron Series 2000PV, Uniflange Series 1350 restrainer,or equal joint restraint device conforming to UNI-B-13,for PVC pipe (111.1 . 12-inch diameter and less. 05/2013 02534-5 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND PVC PIPE C. Fittings: Provide ductile iron fittings as per this Section,2.03 "Bends and Fittings for PVC Pressure Pipe", except furnish all fittings with one of the following internal linings: 1. Nominal 40 mils (35 mils minimum) virgin polyethylene complying with ASTM D 1248,heat fused to the interior surface of the fitting,as manufactured by American Cast Iron Pipe "Polybond", or U.S. Pipe "Polyline". 2. Nominal 40 mils(35 mils minimum)polyurethane, Corro-pipe II by Madison Chemicals, Inc. 3. Nominal 40 mils(35 mils minimum)ceramic epoxy,Protecto 401 by Enduron Protective Coatings. D. Exterior Protection: Provide polyethylene wrapping of ductile iron fittings as required by Section 02512-Polyethylene Wrap. E. Hydrostatic Tests: Hydrostatically test pressure rated pipe in accordance with this Section, 2.02E. F. Manufacturers: Approved manufacturers of pressure rated, solid wall PVC pipe for sanitary sewer force mains are: 1. J &M Manufacturing Company, Inc. '-**°� 2. CertainTeed Corporation // 3. Diamond Plastics Corporation 4. Carlon Company 5. North American Pipe Corporation (NAPCO) 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION A. Store pipe under cover out of direct sunlight and protect from excessive heat or harmful chemicals in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Conform to requirements of Section 02510-Water Mains, Section 02530-Gravity Sanitary Sewers, Section 02731 -Sanitary Sewage Force Mains,and Section 02630- Storm Sewers. B. Install PVC pipe in accordance with Section 02318 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities, ASTM D 2321, and manufacturer's recommendations. 05/2013 02534-6 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND PVC PIPE C. Water service pipe 12 inches in diameter and smaller: Installed to clear utility lines (11/**`. and have minimum 4 feet of cover below lowest property line grade of street,unless otherwise required by Plans. D. For water service,exclude use of PVC within 200 feet(along the public right-of-way) of underground storage tanks or in undeveloped commercial acreage. Underground storage tanks are primarily located on service stations but can exist at other commercial establishments. E. Avoid imposing strains that will overstress or buckle the pipe when lowering pipe into trench. F. Hand shovel pipe bedding under the pipe haunches and along the sides of the pipe barrel and compact to eliminate voids and ensure side support. END OF SECTION 05/2013 02534-7 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND TAPPING SLEEVES & VALVES Section 02540 TAPPING SLEEVES & VALVES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Tapping sleeves and valves for connections to existing water system. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement&Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 02541 —Water&Wastewater Line Valves 4. Section 02520—Valve Boxes, Meter Boxes, &Meter Vaults 5. Section 02512—Polyethylene Wrap 6. Section 02318 —Excavation &Backfill for Utilities C Referenced Standards: 1. American Water Works Association (AWWA) a. AWWA C500 Gate Valves, 3 Through 48 in. NPS, for Water and Sewage Systems. b. AWWA C110 Ductile-Iron and Gray Iron Fittings for Water c. AWWA C207 Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service—Sizes 4 In. Through 144 In. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for installation of tapping sleeves and valves is on a per each basis. Payment includes all labor and materials required for installation as indicated on Plans. B Refer to Section 01200—Measurement&Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 1.04 QUALITY CONTROL A Provide manufacturer's affidavit that all valves purchased for tapping of existing waterlines conform to Section 02541 — Water & Wastewater Line Valves and to applicable requirements of AWWA C500 and that they have been satisfactorily tested in accordance with AWWA C500. 02/2008 02540- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TAPPING SLEEVES & VALVES 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Tapping Sleeves: 1. Tapping Sleeve Bodies: Stainless steel; in two sections to be bolted together with high-strength,corrosion-resistant,low-alloy, steel bolts;mechanical joint ends. a. 12 inch and smaller: stainless steel; JCM 432, Romac, or approved equal. b. 16 inch and larger: epoxy coated ductile iron;JCM,or approved equal. 2. Branch Outlet of Tapping Sleeve: Flanged; machined recess; AWWA C207, Class D, ANSI 150 lb drilling. Gasket: Affixed around recess of tap opening to preclude rolling or binding during installation. 3. Where fire service from 6-inch main is approved, use cast iron split sleeve. B Tapping Valves: Meet all requirements of Section 02541 —Water&Wastewater Line Valves with following exceptions: 1. Inlet Flanges: a. AWWA C110; Class 125. b. AWWA C110; Class 150 and higher: Minimum eight hole flange. 2. Outlet: Standard mechanical or push-on joint; to fit any standard tapping machine. 3. Valve Seat Opening: Accommodate full-size shell cutter for nominal size tap without any contact with valve body; double disc. 4. Open Left operation only. C Valve Boxes: Furnish and install according to Section 02520—Valve Boxes, Meter Boxes, &Meter Vaults. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A Install tapping sleeves and valves at locations and of sizes as shown on Drawings. B Thoroughly clean tapping sleeve, tapping valve and pipe prior to installation and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C Hydrostatically test installed tapping sleeve to 150 psig for a minimum of 15 minutes. Inspect sleeve for leaks, and remedy leaks prior to tapping operation. D When tapping concrete pressure pipe, size on size, use shell cutter one standard size smaller than waterline being tapped. E Do not use Large End Bell(LEB)increasers with a next size tap unless existing pipe is asbestos-cement. 02/2008 02540-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TAPPING SLEEVES &VALVES 3.02 INSTALLATION A Tighten bolts in proper sequence so that undue stress is not placed on pipe. B Align tapping valve properly and attach it to tapping sleeve. C Make tap with sharp, shell cutter: 1. For 12-inch and smaller tap, use minimum cutter diameter one-half inch less than nominal tap size. 2. For 16-inch and larger tap, use manufacturer's recommended cutter diameter. D Withdraw coupon and flush all cuttings from newly-made tap. E Wrap completed tapping sleeve and valve in accordance with Section 02512 — Polyethylene Wrap. F Place concrete thrust block behind tapping sleeve (NOT over tapping sleeve and valve). G Block under valve using concrete blocks. H Request inspection of installation prior to backfilling. I Backfill in accordance with Section 02318 —Excavation &Backfill for Utilities. °117\* END OF SECTION 02/2008 02540-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES Section 02541 WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Gate valves, Plug Valves, Butterfly Valves, Air Release and Pressure Reducing Valves. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350 - Submittal Procedures 3. Section 02520—Valve Boxes, Meter Boxes, and Meter Vaults 4. Section 02542—Concrete Manholes 5. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 6. Section 02510—Water Mains C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM A 307, "Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength" b. ASTM B 763,"Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Casting for Valve Applications" c. ASTM B 62, "Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings" d. ASTM D 429,"Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property-Adhesion to Rigid Substrates" e. ASTM A 126, "Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings" f. ASTM A 48, "Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings" g. ASTM A 240,"Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium- Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications" h. ASTM A 276, "Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes" i. ASTM B 584,"Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications" j. ASTM A 313,"Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Spring Wire" 2. American Water Works Association (AWWA) a. AWWA C500 Gate Valves, 3 Through 48 in. NPS, for Water and Sewage Systems. b. AWWA C509 or AWWA C515 Resilient-seated Gate Valves, 3 through 12 NPS, for Water and Sewage Systems c. AWWA C550 Protective Epoxy Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants d. AWWA C504 Rubber-Sealed Butterfly Valves 04/2009 02541 - 1 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for valves under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for water mains. B Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. C Stipulated Price (Lump Sum). If the Contract is a Stipulated Price Contract,payment for work in this Section is included in the total Stipulated Price. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit manufacturer's product data for proposed valves for approval. 1.04 QUALITY CONTROL A Submit manufacturer's affidavit that gate valves are manufactured in the United States and conform to stated requirements of AWWA C500, AWWA C509 and AWWA C515 and this Section,and that they have been satisfactorily tested in the United States in accordance with AWWA C500, AWWA C509 and AWWA C515. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 GATE VALVES A Gate Valves: AWWA C500, AWWA C509 or C515 and additional requirements of this Section.Direct bury valves and those in subsurface vaults,aboveground and plant valves open counterclockwise. B If type of valve is not indicated on Plans, use gate valves as line valves for sizes less than 16-inches. If type of valve is indicated, no substitute is allowed. C Gate Valves 1-1/2 Inches in Diameter and Smaller: 125 psig; bronze; rising-stem; single-wedge; disc type; screwed ends; such as Crane No. 428, or approved equal. D Coatings for Gate Valves 2 Inches and Larger: AWWA C550; Indurall 3300 or approved equal, non-toxic,imparts no taste to water,functions as physical,chemical, and electrical barrier between base metal and surroundings, minimum 8-mil-thick, fusion-bonded epoxy. Prior to assembly of valve, apply protective coating to interior and exterior surfaces of body. E Gate Valves 2 Inches in Diameter: Iron body,double gate,non-rising stem, 150-pound test, 2 inch square nut operating clockwise to open. 04/2009 02541 -2 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES F Gate Valves 4 Inches to 12 Inches in Diameter: Non-directional, resilient seated rib\ (AWWA C509 or AWWA C515) or parallel seat double disc (AWWA C500), 200 psig, bronze mounting, push-on bell ends with rubber joint rings, and nut-operated unless otherwise specified. Provide resilient seated valves manufactured by American Darling AFC-500, US Pipe Metroseal 200, or approved equal. Provide double disc valves manufactured by American Darling 52, Clow F-6102, or approved equal. Comply with following requirements: 1. Design: Fully encapsulated rubber wedge or rubber seat ring mechanically attached with minimum 304 stainless-steel fasteners or screws; threaded connection isolated from water by compressed rubber around opening. 2. Body: Cast or ductile iron, flange bonnet and stuffing box together with ASTM A 307 Grade B bolts.Manufacturer's initials,pressure rating, and year manufactured shall be cast in body. 3. Bronze: Valve components in waterway to contain not more than 15 percent zinc and not more than 2 percent aluminum. 4. Stems: ASTM B 763 bronze, alloy number 995 minimum yield strength of 40,000 psi; minimum elongation in 2 inches of 12 percent, non-rising. 5. 0-rings: AWWA C509, sections 2.2.6 and 4.8.2. 6. Stem Seals: Consist of three 0-rings, two above and one below thrust collar with anti-friction washer located above thrust collar. 7. Stem Nut: Independent or integrally cast of ASTM B 62 bronze. 8. Resilient Wedge: Molded, synthetic rubber,vulcanized and bonded to cast or ductile iron wedge or attached with 304 stainless steel screws tested to meet or exceed ASTM D 429, Method B; seat against epoxy-coated surface in valve body. 9. Bolts: AWWA C509 Section 4.4; stainless steel; cadmium plated, or zinc coated. G Gate Valves 16 Inches to 24 Inches in Diameter: AWWA C500 by Mueller;push-on bell ends with rubber rings and nut-operated unless otherwise specified, double disc, 150 psi, and comply with the following: 1. Body: Cast or ductile iron; flange together bonnet and stuffing box with ASTM A 307 Grade B bolts. Manufacturer's initials,pressure rating,and year manufactured shall be cast in body. Equip with rollers, tracks, and scrapers. 2. Stems: Machined from ASTM B 62 bronze rod with integral forged thrust collar machined to size; non-rising. 3. Stem Seals: Consist of one 0-ring above and one 0-ring below thrust collar with anti-friction washer located above thrust collar for operating torque. 4. Stem Nut: Independent or integrally cast of ASTM B 62 bronze. 5. Discs: Cast iron with bronze disc rings securely peened into machined dovetailed grooves. 6. Wedging Device: Solid bronze or cast-iron, bronze-mounted wedges. Thin plates or shapes integrally cast into cast-iron surfaces are acceptable. Other moving surfaces integral to wedging action shall be bronze monel or nickel alloy-to-iron. 04/2009 02541 -3 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES 7. Bronze Mounting: Built as integral unit mounted over, or supported on, cast iron base and of sufficient dimensions to be structurally sound and adequate for imposed forces. 8. Gear Cases: Cast iron;furnished on 18-inch and larger valves and of extended type with steel side plates, lubricated, gear case enclosed with oil seal or 0- rings at shaft openings. 9. Stuffing Boxes: Located on top of bonnet and outside gear case. H Gate Valves 20 Inches and Larger: Furnish and equip with bypass valves. 1. Sizes: Provide 3-inch bypass valves for 16-inch through 20 inch gate valves. Provide 4-inch bypass valves for 24-inch gate valves. I Valves 4 Inches through 12 Inches for Installation in Vertical Pipe Lines: 1. Double disc, square bottom. J Valves 14 Inches and Larger for Installation in Horizontal Pipe Lines: 1. Equipped with bronze shoes and slides. K Gate Valves Installed at Greater than 4 foot Depth: 1. Provide non-rising, extension stem having coupling sufficient to attach securely to operating nut of valve. Upper end of extension stem shall terminate in square wrench nut no deeper than 4 feet from finished grade. L Gate Valves in Factory Mutual (Fire Service) Type Meter Installations: ^ 1. Conform to provisions of this specification; outside screw and yoke valves; J carry label of Underwriters'Laboratories,Inc.;flanged,Class 125;clockwise to close. M Provide flanged joints when valve is connected to steel or PCCP. 2.02 BUTTERFLY VALVES AND ACTUATORS A Butterfly Valves and Actuators: Conform to AWWA C504, except as modified or supplemented herein. Provide valves manufactured by Keystone International, American-Darling, or approved equal. B If type of valve is not indicated on Plans, butterfly valves shall be used for line valve sizes 16 inch and larger. If type of valve is specified, no substitute will be allowed. C Butterfly valves shall be short-body,flanged design and installed at locations as shown on Plans. D Direct-bury valves,valves in subsurface vaults. Above-ground and plant valves shall open counterclockwise. E Provide flanged joints when valve is connected to steel or PCCP. F Butterfly Valves and Actuators (Additional Requirements for Large-Diameter Water Mains): Valves larger than 72 inches in diameter shall have all components designed 04/2009 02541 -4 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES so that the allowable stresses at rated pressure shall not exceed one-third of the yield strength or one-fifth of the ultimate strength of the material used. Provide valves manufactured by Keystone International, American-Darling, or equal. 2.03 BUTTERFLY VALVE CONSTRUCTION A Valves: AWWA C504, Class 150B. Body: Cast iron, ASTM A 126, Class B. Flanges: ANSI B 16.1, Class 125 lb. B Discs for Butterfly Valves: Either cast iron or ductile iron. C Seats: Buna-N or neoprene, and may be applied to disc or body. Seats shall be mechanically secured and may not rely solely on adhesive properties of epoxy or similar bonding agent to attach seat to body. Seats on disc shall be mechanically retained by stainless steel(18-8)retaining ring held in place by stainless steel(18-8) cap screws that pass through rubber seat for added retention. When seat is on disc, seat shall be retained in position by shoulders located on both disc and stainless-steel retaining ring. Mating surfaces for seats: Type 304 or 316,stainless steel and secured to disc by mechanical means. Sprayed-on or plated mating surfaces will not be allowed. D Coat interior wetted ferrous surfaces of valve, including disc,with epoxy suitable for potable-water conditions. Epoxy, surface preparation, and epoxy application: In re\. accordance with AWWA C550 and coating manufacturer's recommendations. Provide two coats of two-component, high-build epoxy with minimum dry thickness of 10 mils. Epoxy coating: Indurall 3300 or approved equal. Coatings shall be holiday tested and measured for thickness. E Valve shaft and keys, dowel pins, or taper pins used for attaching valve shaft to valve disc: Type-304 or 316 stainless steel. Shaft Bearings: Stainless steel,bronze,nylon, or Teflon (supported by fiberglass mat or backing material with proven record of preventing Teflon flow under load) in accordance with AWWA C504. F Packing: Field-adjustable, split-V type, and replaceable without removing operator assembly. G Retaining Hardware for Seats: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel. Nuts and screws used with clamps and discs for rubber seats shall be held securely with locktight, or other approved method, to prevent loosening by vibration or cavitational effects. H Valve disc shall seat in position at 90 degrees to the pipe axis and shall rotate 90 degrees between full-open and tight-closed position. Install valves with valve shafts horizontal and convex side of disc facing anticipated direction of flow, except where shown otherwise on Plans. 2.04 BUTTERFLY VALVE ACTUATOR CONSTRUCTION A Provide actuators for valves with size based on line velocity of 16 feet per second, and, unless otherwise shown on Plans, equip with geared manual actuators. Provide 04/2009 02541 -5 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES fully enclosed and traveling-nut type, rack-and-pinion type, or worm-gear type for valves 24 inches and smaller. B Provide actuator designed for installation with valve shaft horizontal unless otherwise indicated on Plans. C Provide valve shaft extended from valve to actuator. Space between actuator housing and valve body shall be completely enclosed so that no moving parts are exposed to soil or elements. D Provide oil-tight and watertight actuator housings for valves,specifically designed for buried service or submerged service when located in valve vaults, and factory packed with suitable grease. E Install a valve position indicator on each actuator housing located above ground or in valve vaults. Valves shall be equipped with 2-inch actuator nut only. F Indicate direction of opening of valve on exposed visible part of assembly. G Design worm-gear or traveling-nut actuators so that a torque of 150 foot-pounds, or less,will operate valve at most adverse condition for which valve is designed.Vertical axis of actuating nut shall not move as valve is opened or closed. 2.05 VALVE BOXES A Provide standard adjustable valve boxes only conforming to requirements of Section 02520—Valve Boxes, Meter Boxes, and Meter Vaults. 2.06 VALVE SERVICE MANHOLES A For large-diameter water mains, provide manholes to dimensions shown on Plans conforming to requirements of Section 02542—Concrete Manholes. 2.07 AIR RELEASE AND VACUUM RELIEF VALVES A Air Release Valves: Apco No. 200, GA Industries Fig. 2-AR, or equal. Materials: body and cover, ASTM A 48, Class 30, cast iron; float and leverage mechanism, ASTM A 240 or A276 stainless steel;orifice and seat,stainless steel against Buna-N or Viton mechanically retained with hex head nut and bolt;other valve internals,stainless steel or bronze. Provide inlet and outlet connections, and orifice as shown on Plans. B Air Release and Vacuum Valves: Provide single-body, standard combination or duplex-body custom combination valves as indicated on Plans. 1. For 2 inch and 3 inch, single-body valves, provide inlet and outlet sizes as shown on Plans and orifice sized for 100 psi working pressure. Valve materials: body, cover and baffle, ASTM A 48, Class 35, or ASTM A 126, Grade B cast iron;plug or poppet,ASTM A 276 stainless steel;float,ASTM A 240 stainless steel; seat, Buna-N; other valve internals, stainless steel. Valve exterior: Painted with shop-applied primer suitable for contact with potable 04/2009 02541 -6 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES water. Provide Apco Model 145C or 147C, Val-Matic Series 200, or equal valves. 2. For 3 inch and larger duplex body valves as shown on Plans, provide Apco Series 1700 with No. 200 air release valve, GA Industries Fig. No. AR/GH- 21K/280, or equal. Air and vacuum valve materials: body and cover,ASTM A 48, Class 35, cast iron; float, ASTM A 240 stainless steel; seat, Type-304, stainless steel and Buna-N;other valve internals,stainless steel or bronze. Air release valve: Constructed as specified in paragraph above on Air Release Valves. C Vacuum Relief Valves: Provide air inlet vacuum relief valves with flanged inlet and outlet connections as shown on Plans. Provide air release valves in combination with inlet and outlet, and orifice as shown on Plans. Valve shall open under pressure differential not to exceed 0.25 psi. Provide Apco Series 1500 with a No. 200A air release valve, GA Industries Fig. No. HCARV, or approved equal. Materials for vacuum relief valves: valve body, ASTM A 48, Class 35, cast iron; seat and plug, ASTM B 584 bronze, copper alloy 836; spring, ASTM A 313, Type-304, stainless steel;bushing,ASTM B 584 bronze,copper alloy 932;retaining screws,ASTM A 276, Type-304, stainless steel. D Air Release Valve Vault as detailed in Plans. 2.08 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES A Provide Cla-Val Model 90-01, or approved equal, PRV with strainer in location and arrangement as shown on Plans. Valve body: ASTM A 48,cast iron or ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with ANSI B 16.1, Class 125, flanges. Valve cover: ASTM A 48 cast iron. Valve internals: Type-303, stainless steel or B-62 bronze. Rubber parts: Buna-N. No leather parts shall be allowed. Resilient seat shall have rectangular cross section. B Control Tubing: Contain shutoff cocks with "Y" strainer. C PRV: Equip with valve position indicator. Initially set in field by authorized manufacturer's representative with 60 psi downstream pressure. D Provide basket strainer upstream of PRV as shown on Plans. Strainer body: quick- opening type, fabricated-steel construction with ANSI B 16.1, Class 150, flanges. Basket: Type-304, stainless steel. Provide Hayward Model 90, or equal, for PRV 4- inch through 24-inch. Provide Hayward Model 510, or equal, for PRV 14 inches or greater when space limitations dictate the use of smaller strainer housing. E Pilot Systems for PRV: Adjustable and pressure sustaining. F Valve Box: Valve Box conforming to requirements of Section 02520—Valve Boxes, Meter boxes, and Meter Vaults. 04/2009 02541 -7 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND WATER AND WASTEWATER LINE VALVES 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A Earthwork. Conform to applicable provisions of Section 02318 — Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. B. Operation. Do not use valves for throttling without prior approval of manufacturer. 3.02 SETTING VALVES AND VALVE BOXES A Remove foreign matter from within valves prior to installation. Inspect valves in open and closed positions to verify that parts are in satisfactory working condition. B Install valves and valve boxes where shown on Plans. Set valves plumb and as detailed. Center valve boxes on valves. Carefully tamp earth around each valve box for minimum radius of 4 feet, or to undisturbed trench face if less than 4 feet. Install valves completely closed when placed in water line. C For pipe section of each valve box,use only cast iron,ductile iron,or DR18 PVC pipe cut to proper length. Size to allow future operation of valve. Assemble and brace box in vertical position as indicated on Plans. 3.03 DISINFECTION AND TESTING A Perform disinfection and testing of valves and appurtenances as required by Section 02510—Water Mains. B Repair or replace valves which exceed the allowable specified leakage rate. 3.04 PAINTING OF VALVES A Paint valves in vaults, stations, and above ground using ACRO Paint No. 2215, or approved equal. END OF SECTION 04/2009 02541 -8 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES Section 02542 rib\ CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pre-Cast Concrete Manholes for sanitary. B. Pre-Cast and Cast-in-Place Manholes for storm sewer. C. Iron castings for manhole frames and covers, inlet frames and grates, catch basin frames and grates, meter vault frames and covers, adjustment rings and extensions. D. Ring grates. E. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 4. Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete ("'\ 5. Section 02255—Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 6. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 7. Section 02530—Gravity Sanitary Sewers 8. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises F. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM C 478,"Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections" b. ASTM C 443,"Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets" c. ASTM C 270, "Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry" d. ASTM C 923, "Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures,Pipes and Laterals" e. ASTM C 1107,"Standard Specification for Packaged Dry,Hydraulic- Cement Grout(Nonshrink)" f. ASTM A 48, "Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings" g. ASTM A 615, "Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" h. ASTM D 698, "Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort" 05/2013 02542- 1 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) 3. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 4. American Welding Society(AWS) a. AWS D12.1, "Reinforcing Steel Welding Code" 5. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ) a. Chapter 217.55 "Minimum Clear Opening" G. Definitions: 1. Shallow Depth Manholes-manholes having a depth of 4 feet or less measured from the top of cover to sewer invert. 2. Normal Depth Manholes-manholes having a depth of greater than 4 feet and up to 8 feet measured from top of cover to sewer invert. 3. Extra Depth Manholes- manholes having a depth of greater than 8 feet measured from the top of cover to sewer invert. 4. Corrosion Resistant Manholes- concrete manholes incorporating additional material, such as liners or coatings, which make them more resistant to corrosion than typical concrete manholes. 5. Standard Manholes Drops- drops of up to 3 vertical feet measured from the invert of the T-fitting to the sewer invert. 6. Extra Depth Manhole Drops-drops in excess of 3 vertical feet measured from the invert of the T-fitting to the sewer invert. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for Normal Depth Manholes and/or Normal Depth Corrosion Resistant Manholes shall be per each. B. Measurement for Shallow Depth Manholes and/or Shallow Depth Corrosion Resistant Manholes shall be per each. C. Measurement for Extra Depth Manholes and/or Extra Depth Corrosion Resistant Manholes is on a vertical foot basis for each foot of depth greater than 8 feet. D. Payment for Manholes under this Section shall be for complete installation including riser, frames, grates, adjustment rings, stainless steel inflow preventers, cut-in work, covers,penetrations,other appurtenances,and be in accordance with Section 01200— Measurement and Payment Procedures. 05/2013 02542-2 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES E. Measurement for Standard Manhole Drops shall be per each. F. Measurement for Extra Depth Manhole Drops is on a vertical foot basis for each foot of Drop greater than 3 feet. G. Payment for Drops under this Section shall be for assembly components,encasement, other appurtenances, and be in accordance with Section 01200 — Measurement and Payment Procedures. H. Payment for Air Release Manhole with Valves and Fittings installed is on a unit price basis for each manhole with air release valves,fittings and appurtenances installed and in accordance with Section 01200 Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Perform work needed to make manholes structurally sound, improve flow, prevent entrance of inflow or groundwater, prevent entrance of soil or debris, and provide protection against hydrogen sulfide gas attack. B. Manufacturer's Product Support. 1. Through the Contractor,manufacturers of wall sealing or lining systems shall submit to Engineer for review and approval a detailed description of the proposed coating installation process. Describe surface preparation, independent laboratory test results, mix design procedures and method of controlling uniform thickness. 2. A representative employed by the manufacturer and having technical training in epoxy or cementitious liner shall be named and available for consultation by telephone during business hours and on site upon 48 hours notice. 3. Manufacturer's representative on concrete lining systems shall provide technical assistance to applicators to ensure proper usage of dispensing equipment and accurate proportions of admixtures. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit proposed design mix and test data for each type and strength of concrete. C. Submit manufacturer's data and details of following items for approval: 1. Frames, grates, rings, and covers. 2. Materials to be used in fabricating drops. 05/2013 02542-3 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES 3. Materials to be used for pipe connections at manhole walls. 4. Materials to be used for stubs and stub plugs. 5. Plugs to be used for sanitary sewer hydrostatic testing. 6. Shop Drawings of manhole sections and base units and construction details, including reinforcement,jointing methods, materials and dimensions. 7. Certification from manufacturer that precast manhole design is in full accordance with ASTM C 478 and design criteria as established in this Section, 2.03E, "Design Loading Criteria". 8. Product data, materials and procedures for corrosion resistant liner and coatings, if required. For coating and resistant liner systems requiring 10-yr manufacturer warranty, submit specific coating system including product, thickness, and application for Engineer's approval. 9. Manufacturer's data for pre-mix(bag)concrete,if used for channel inverts and benches. D. Installer Qualifications: Installers of liners and wall repair systems shall submit qualifications to Engineer at least 14 days prior to start of any material application. Submittal shall consist of: 1. Manufacturer's approved equipment list, by name and model number for application of product and contractor's equipment list showing approved equipment available for use in product application. 2. List of contractor's personnel who have satisfactorily completed manufacturer's training in product application within previous two years. Include date of certification for each person. E. Provide Shop Drawings for fabrication and erection of casting assemblies. Include plans, elevations, sections and connection details. Show anchorage and accessory items. Include Setting Drawings for location and installation of castings and anchorage devices. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete shall conform to requirements in Section 03300 - Cast-In Place Concrete. B. Minimum concrete compressive strength of 4000 psi. 05/2013 02542-4 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES C. Reinforcing Steel shall conform to requirement in Se ction 03300-Cast-In Place Concrete. D. Mortar shall conform to requirements of ASTM C 270,Type S using Portland cement. 2.02 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES A. Use manhole sections and base sections conforming to ASTM C 478. Use base riser section with integral floors,unless shown otherwise. Provide adjustment rings which are standard components of the manufacturer of the manhole sections meeting material requirements of ASTM C 478. Mark date of manufacture and name or trademark of manufacturer on inside of barrel. B. Construct barrels for precast manholes from 48-inch diameter standard reinforced concrete manhole sections unless otherwise indicated on Plans. Use various lengths of manhole sections in combination to provide the correct height with the fewest joints. Wall sections shall be designed for depth as shown and loading conditions as described in this Section,2.03E,"Design Load Criteria",but shall not be less than 5 inches thick. Base section shall have a minimum thickness of 12 inches under the invert. C. Provide cone tops to receive 30-inch cast iron frames and covers, unless indicated otherwise. Use tops designed to support an AASHTO H-20 loading. Clik\ D. Where the Plans indicate that manholes larger than 48-inch diameter are required, precast base sections of the required diameter shall be provided with flat slab top precast sections used to transition to 48-inch diameter manhole access riser sections. Transition can be concentric or eccentric. The transition shall be located to provide a minimum of 7-foot head clearance from the top of bench to underside of transition. E. Design Loading Criteria: The manhole walls,transition slabs,cone tops,and manhole base slab shall be designed by the manufacturer to the requirements of ASTM C 478 for the depth as shown on Plans and the following design criteria: 1. AASHTO H-20 loading applied to the manhole cover and transmitted down to the transition and base slabs. 2. Unit soil weight of 120 pcf located above all portions of the manhole, including base slab projections. 3. Lateral soil pressure based on saturated soil conditions producing an at-rest equivalent fluid pressure of 100 pcf, with soil pressure acting on empty manhole. 4. Internal liquid pressure based on a unit weight of 63 pcf, with manhole filled with liquid from invert to cover, with no balancing external soil pressure. 5. Dead load of manhole sections fully supported by the transition and base slabs. 05/2013 02542-5 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES 6. Design additional reinforcing steel to transfer stresses at openings. 7. The minimum clear distance between any two wall penetrations shall be 12 inches or half the diameter of the smaller penetration, whichever is greater. F. Form joints between sections with 0-ring gaskets conforming to ASTM C 443. G. Do not incorporate manhole steps in manhole sections. H. Do not use brick masonry in construction of sanitary sewer manholes. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS METALS A. Provide cast-iron frames, grates, rings, covers, and stainless steel inflow preventers conforming to requirements of this Section and the City of Pearland Standard Construction Details. 2.04 DROPS A. Drops shall conform to the same pipe material requirements used in the main pipe, unless otherwise indicated on the Plans. 2.05 PIPE CONNECTIONS A. Use resilient connectors conforming to requirements of ASTM C 923. Metallic mechanical devices as defined in ASTM C 923 shall be made of the following materials: 1. External clamps: a. Type 304 stainless steel. 2. Internal, expandable clamps on standard manholes: a. Type 304 stainless steel, 11 gage minimum. 3. Internal, expandable clamps on corrosion-resistant manholes: a. Type 316 stainless steel, 11 gage minimum. b. Type 304 stainless steel, 11 gage minimum, coated with minimum 16 mm fusion-bonded epoxy conforming to AWWA C-213. 4. All precast openings shall be fully circular, 360° openings. B. Where rigid joints between pipe and a cast-in-place manhole base are specified or shown on the Plans, use polyethylene-isoprene water-stop meeting the physical property requirements of ASTM C 923, Press-Seal WS Series, or equal. 05/2013 02542-6 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES C. Storm sewer pipe connections: 1. Connections acceptable for sanitary sewers. 2. Line pipe grouted in place with mortar. Rehabilitate. 2.06 WALL CLEANING MATERIAL A. Cleaners: Detergent or muriatic acid capable of removing dirt, grease, oil and other matter which would prevent a good bond of sealing material to wall. Refer to sealing material manufacturer's recommendations. 2.07 SEALANT MATERIALS A. Sealing materials between precast concrete adjustment ring and manhole cover frame shall be Adeka Ultraseal P201, or approved equal. 2.08 WALL REPAIR MATERIALS A. Hydraulic Cements:Use a blend of cement powders or hydraulic cement to stop active leaks in the manhole structure. B. Quickset Mortar: Use a quickset mortar to repair wide cracks, holes or disintegrated mortar. 2.09 CORROSION RESISTANT MANHOLE MATERIALS A. Provide one of the following as indicated on the Plans: 1. Precast cylindrical Portland cement concrete sanitary sewer manhole sections, base sections, and cone sections with one of the following factory applied internal coatings or approved equal: a. NeoPoxyTM NPR-5300 Series "PureEpoxy" spray on epoxy liner and other required fillers/sealants per manufacturer's recommendations: b. NeoPoxy NPR-3501 high tensile elongation epoxy elastomeric gout and sealant. c. NeoPoxy NPR-5305 trowelable epoxy filler, grout and sealant, d. Chemical and cementitious rapid set hydraulic grouts such as Strong-Plug, Strong-Seal QSR, Quadex Hyperform and Quadex Hydro-Plug, or other equivalents pre-approved by the engineer. 05/2013 02542-7 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES e. NeoPoxy P-88 ultraviolet light resistant topcoat. f. EMACO liner(contact City of Pearland Public Works Department for specific type). g. Raven liner(contact City of Pearland Public Works Department for specific type). h. SewperCoat 100% Calcium aluminate by KerneosTM Aluminate Technologies. 2. Type I Coating: The manufacturer of these applied products shall provide a minimum 10-year material and labor warranty. A 10-year manufacturer warranty shall be applicable for the following sanitary sewer manholes: a. Manholes that receive force main discharge. b. Manholes within the lift/pump station site including last manhole before wet well. c. Manholes with 5 feet diameter and larger or manholes that receive discharge from 15" or larger diameter gravity sewer. d. Manholes as determined by City Engineer. 3. Type II Coating: All other sanitary sewer manholes shall be coated with minimum 125 mil thick coating of products specified in Section 2.09.1.a-d,or approved equal. 2.10 BACKFILL MATERIALS A. Backfill materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 02255 — Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials. 2.11 NON-SHRINK GROUT A. For non-shrink grout,use prepackaged, inorganic, flowable,non-gas-liberating,non- metallic, cement-based grout requiring only the addition of water. It shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 1107 and shall have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 7000 psi. 05/2013 02542-8 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES 2.12 CASTINGS A. Castings for frames, grates, rings and covers shall conform to City of Pearland Standard Construction Details and shall be ASTM A 48, Class 30. Provide locking covers if indicated on Plans. B. Castings shall be capable of withstanding the application of an AASHTO H-20 loading without permanent deformation. C. Fabricate castings to conform to the shapes, dimensions, and with wording or logos shown on the Plans. D. Castings shall be clean, free from blowholes and other surface imperfections. Cast holes in covers shall be clean and symmetrical, free of plugs. 2.13 BEARING SURFACES A. Machine bearing surfaces between covers or grates and their respective frames so that even bearing is provided for any position in which the casting may be seated in the frame. 2.14 SPECIAL FRAMES AND COVERS (11111164' A. Where indicated on the Plans,provide watertight manhole frames and covers with a minimum of four bolts and a gasket designed to seal cover to frame. Supply watertight manhole covers and frames, Model R-1916 manufactured by Neenah Foundry Company, Model V-2420 by East Jordan Iron Works, or approval equal. B. Where personnel entry is anticipated, minimum clear openings of 30-inches is required. 2.15 FABRICATED RING GRATES A. Ring grates shall be fabricated from reinforcing steel conforming to ASTM A 615. B. Welds connecting the bars shall conform to AWS D12.1. 2.16 INFLOW PREVENTERS A. Provide stainless steel inflow preventers with air release vents on all sanitary sewer manholes. 05/2013 02542-9 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines and grades are correct. B. Determine if the subgrade,when scarified and re-compacted, can be compacted to 95 percent of maximum Standard Proctor Density according to ASTM D 698 prior to placement of foundation material and base section. If it cannot be compacted to that density,the subgrade shall be moisture conditioned until that density can be reached or shall be treated as an unstable subgrade. C. Do not build sanitary or storm sewer manholes in ditches, swales, or drainage paths unless approved by the Engineer. 3.02 PLACEMENT OF PRECAST MANHOLES A. Install precast manholes to conform to locations and dimensions shown on Plans. B. Place manholes at points of change of alignment, grade, size, pipe intersections, and end of sewer. 3.03 MANHOLE BASE SECTIONS AND FOUNDATIONS A. Place precast base on 12-inch-thick(minimum)foundation of cement stabilized sand or a concrete foundation slab. Compact cement-sand in accordance with requirements of Section 02318 —Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. B. Unstable Subgrade Treatment: When unstable subgrade is encountered,the subgrade will be examined by the Engineer to determine if the subgrade has heaved upwards after being excavated. If heaving has not occurred, the subgrade shall be over- excavated to allow for a 24-inch thick layer of crushed stone wrapped in filter fabric as the foundation material under the manhole base. If there is evidence of heaving,a pile- supported concrete foundation, as detailed on the Plans, shall be provided under the manhole base, when indicated by the Engineer. 3.04 PRECAST MANHOLE SECTIONS A. Install sections, joints, and gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's printed recommendations. B. Install precast or steel adjustment rings above tops of cones or flat-top sections as required to adjust the finished elevation and to support manhole frame. C. Seal any lifting holes with non-shrink grout. 05/2013 02542- 10 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES D. Where PVC liners are required, seal joints between sections in accordance with rh\' manufacturers recommendations. 3.05 PIPE CONNECTIONS AT MANHOLE A. Install approved resilient connectors at each pipe entering and exiting sanitary sewer manholes in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Ensure that no concrete,cement stabilized sand,fill,or other rigid material is allowed to enter the space between the pipe and the edge of the wall opening at and around the resilient connector on either the interior or exterior of the manhole. If necessary, fill the space with a compressible material to guarantee the full flexibility provided by the resilient connector. All pipe openings shall be fully circular, 360° openings. C. Where a new manhole is to be constructed on an existing sewer, install precast manhole base with factory installed Fernco type connections and pipe stubouts at least two (2) feet outside manhole wall. Manhole shall be cut-in to existing pipe. No "horseshoe" or"dog house"type connections will be permitted. D. Do not construct joints on sanitary sewer pipe within wall sections of manholes. Use approved connection material. 1104, E. Construct pipe stubs with resilient connectors for future connections at locations and with material indicated on Plans. Install approved stub plugs at interior of manhole. F. Test connection for watertight seal before backfilling. 3.06 INVERTS FOR SANITARY SEWERS A. Construct invert channels to provide a smooth flow transition waterway with no disruption of flow at pipe-manhole connections. Conform to following criteria: 1. Slope of invert bench: 1 inch per foot minimum; 1-1/2 inch per foot maximum. 2. Depth of bench to invert: Pipes smaller than 15-inches: one-half largest pipe diameter Pipes 15 to 24-inches: three-fourths the largest pipe diameter Pipes larger than 24-inches: equal to the largest pipe diameter 3. Invert slope through manhole: 0.10-foot drop across manhole with smooth transition of invert through manhole, unless otherwise indicated on Plans. B. Form invert channels with class A concrete if not integral with manhole base. For direction changes of mains, construct channels tangent to mains with maximum possible radius of curvature. Provide curves for side inlets and smooth invert fillets for flow transition between pipe inverts. 05/2013 02542- 1.1 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES 3.07 DROPS FOR SANITARY SEWERS A. Construct Drops with same materials used in main pipe unless otherwise indicated on Plans or approved by the Engineer. Install a Drop when a sewer line enters a manhole higher than 30-inches above the invert of the manhole. All drops must be interior drops. B. Terminate encasement of blind drops a minimum of 5 inches below top of bell and not less than 12 inches above top of next lower bell. Install approved plug at bell. 3.08 MANHOLE FRAME AND ADJUSTMENT RINGS A. Combine precast concrete adjustment rings so that the elevation of the installed casting cover is 3/8 inch below the pavement surface. Seal between adjustment ring and the manhole top with non-shrink grout; do not use mortar between adjustment rings. Apply a latex-based bonding agent to concrete surfaces to be joined with non-shrink grout. Set the cast iron frame on the adjustment ring in a bed of approved sealant. The sealant bed shall consist of two beads of sealant, each bead having minimum dimensions of 1/2-inch and 3/4-inch wide. B. For manholes in unpaved areas,top of frame shall be set a minimum of 6 inches above existing ground line unless otherwise indicated on Plans. In unpaved areas,encase the manhole frame in mortar or non-shrink grout placed flush with the face of the manhole '") ring and the top edge of the frame. Provide a rounded corner around the perimeter. 3.09 BACIKFILL A. Place and compact backfill materials in the area of excavation surrounding manholes in accordance with requirements of Section 02318 — Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. Use embedment zone backfill material,as specified for the adjacent utilities, from manhole foundation up to an elevation 12 inches over each pipe connected to the manhole. Provide trench zone backfill,as specified for the adjacent utilities,above the embedment zone backfill. B. Where rigid joints are used for connecting existing sewers to the manhole, backfill under the existing sewer up to the spring-line of the pipe with Class B concrete or flowable fill. 3.10 MANHOLE WALL CLEANING A. The floor and interior walls of the manhole shall be thoroughly cleaned and made free of all foreign materials including dirt, grit, roots, oils, grease, sludge, incompatible existing coatings,waxes,form release,curing compounds,efflorescence,sealers,salts, or other contaminants which may affect the performance and adhesion of the coating to the substrate. 05/2013 02542- 12 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES 1. High pressure water blasting with a minimum of 3,500 psi shall be used to r'\ clean free all foreign material within the manhole 2. When grease and oil are present within the manhole,an approved detergent or muriatic acid shall be used integrally with the high pressure cleaning water. 3. All materials resulting from the cleaning of the manhole shall be removed prior to application of the coating. 4. All loose grout, ledges, steps and protruding ledges shall be removed to provide an even surface prior to application of coating. B. Prevent any foreign material from entering the adjoining pipes. Remove droppings of foreign and wall sealant materials before they harden on the bottom of the manhole. C. No separate pay shall be made for this item. Include cost for sealing in the unit price for manholes. D. Manufacturer's representative shall be available at all times on site to answer questions and approve manhole preparation work prior to lining. 3.11 MANHOLE WALL SEALING A. Seal active leaks in the manhole structure by using non-shrink grout. B. Remove loose or defective wall material. Wipe or brush surface clean prior to the application of hydraulic cement C. Drill weep holes at bottom of manhole walls to relieve hydrostatic pressure to stop leaks. Plug pressure relief holes after leaks are stopped using hydraulic cement materials. Lead wool may also be used to plug large leaks. D. Repair wide cracks,or holes with quickset mortars. Follow manufacturer's application procedures. E. Shape manhole inverts before wall sealing work. Apply concrete to cleaned manhole benches as specified in Section 03300. F. After all active leaks have been stopped, clean and prepare walls for application of selected liner material. G. Properly apply the sealing compound to provide the minimum required uniform coating to the wall surface. H. Prevent any foreign material from entering the adjoining pipes. Remove droppings of foreign and wall sealant materials before they harden on the bottom of the manhole. 05/2013 02542- 13 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES I. Strictly follow product manufacturer's published technical specifications and recommendations for surface preparation, application and proportioning. 3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Conduct leakage testing of manholes in accordance with requirements of Section 02530—Gravity Sanitary Sewers. Vacuum test shall be completed prior to coating of the manhole. 3.13 INSPECTION A. After manhole wall sealing has been completed, visually inspect the manhole in the presence of Engineer. Check for cleanliness and for elimination of active leaks. B. At completion of manhole construction, assist Engineer in verifying installation of minimum coating thickness of concrete liner. Test several points on the manhole wall. Repair verification points prior to final acceptance for payment. C. During application of corrosion resistant liner, a wet film thickness gauge, meeting ASTM D4414, shall be used. Measurements shall be taken, documented and attested by the Contractor for submission to the Owner. D. At completion of manhole construction, assist Engineer in inspection of installation. 3.14 TESTING A. After the coating product(s)have set in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, all surfaces shall be inspected for holidays with high-voltage holiday detection equipment. Reference NACE RPO 188-99 for performing holiday detection. All detected holidays shall be marked and repaired by abrading the coating surface with grit disk paper or other hand tooling method. After abrading and cleaning,additional coating can be hand applied to the repair area. All touch-up/repair procedures shall follow the coating manufacturer's recommendations. Documentation on areas tested, results and repairs made shall be provided to Owner by Contractor. B. Visual inspection shall be made by the Project Engineer and/or Inspector. Any deficiencies in the finished coating shall be marked and repaired according to the procedures set forth herein by Contractor. 3.15 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A. Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. 05/2013 02542- 14 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE MANHOLES AND ACCESSORIES 3.16 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A. Protect Manholes from damage until subsequent work has been accepted. B. Repair or replace damaged elements of Manholes at no additional cost to the Owner. C. In unpaved areas,provide positive drainage away from manhole frame to natural grade. END OF SECTION (11111*.: 05/2013 02542- 15 of 15 THERMOPLASTIC City of Pearland PAVEMENT MARKING Section 02582 THERMOPLASTIC PAVEMENT MARKING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Thermoplastic pavement markings. 1.02 UNIT PRICES A. Measurement for linear pavement markings is on a linear foot basis for each width, measured in place. B. Measurement for words and symbols is on a lump sum basis for each word or symbol. C. Refer to Section 01025 — Measurement and Payment for unit price procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform to requirements of Section 01300—Submittals. B. Each container shall be clearly marked to indicate the color, weight, Type of material, manufacturer's name and the lot/batch number. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. Pavement markings are thermoplastic type marking materials that require heating to elevated temperatures for application. B. Materials shall conform to TxDOT Specification Item 666. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Prepare pavement surfaces and install markings in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and TxDOT specifications. (1111 B. Accurately locate and install approved markings to conform to classes, colors, lengths, widths, and configurations indicated on Drawings. Page 1 of 2 THERMOPLASTIC City of Pearland PAVEMENT MARKING 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean and repair surfaces to receive markups. Blast clean surfaces indicated on Drawings or where directed by the Engineer in accordance with requirements of Section 02581. Do not clean portland cement concrete pavements by grinding. 3.04 SURFACE INSTALLATION A. Test pavement surface for moisture content prior to application of markings. Place an approximate 2 square foot sheet of clear plastic or tar paper on road surface and hold in place for 20 minutes. Immediately inspect the sheet for build up of condensed moisture. If sufficient moisture has condensed to cause water to drip from sheet, do not apply markings. Repeat test as necessary until adequate moisture has evaporated from pavement to allow placement. B. Observe manufacturer's recommended pavement and ambient air temperature requirements for application. If manufacturer has no temperature recommendations, do not install markings if pavement temperature is below 60 degrees F or above 120 degrees F. C. Prime pavement surface and apply markings as recommended by manufacturer. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Pavement markings shall present a neat, uniform appearance. B. Repair or replace improperly installed markers at Contractors expense. 3.06 CLEANING A. Keep project site free of unnecessary traffic hazards at all times. B. Clean area upon completion of work and remove rubbish from work site. 3.07 WARRANTY A. Contractor shall warrant material and labor for a period of twelve months from date of installation of markings. Immediately upon notification, replace portions of pavement marking lines or legends that have lifted, shifted or spread, lost daytime color, or nighttime retro-reflectivity. END OF SECTION Page 2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND FRAMES, GRATES, RINGS, AND COVERS Section 02603 FRAMES, GRATES,RINGS,AND COVERS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Iron castings for manhole frames and covers, inlet frames and grates, catch basin frames and grates, meter vault frames and covers, adjustment rings and extensions. B. Ring grates. C. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350 - Submittals D. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM A 48, "Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings" b. ASTM A 615, "Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" c. ASTM C 270, "Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry" 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) a. AASHTO M 306, "Drainage, Sewage, Utility, and Related Castings" 3. American Welding Society (AWS) a. AWS D12.1, "Reinforcing Steel Welding Code" 4. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) a. Chapter 217.55 "Minimum Clear Opening" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for frames, grates, rings, covers, and seals under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. B. If frames, grates, rings, covers, and seals are included as a Bid Items, measurement will be based on the Units shown in Section 00300—Bid Proposal and in accordance rilb\ with Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 12/2015 02603 - 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND FRAMES, GRATES, RINGS, AND COVERS 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Provide copies of manufacturer's specifications, load tables, dimension diagrams, anchor details, and installation instructions. Manufacturer shall be East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. or as approved by public works. C. Provide Shop Drawings for fabrication and erection of casting assemblies. Include plans, elevations, sections and connection details. Show anchorage and accessory items. Include Setting Drawings for location and installation of castings and anchorage devices. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 CASTINGS A. Castings for frames,grates,rings and covers shall conform to ASTM A 48,Class 35B and AASHTO M 306. Provide locking covers if indicated on Plans. B. Castings shall be capable of withstanding the application of an AASHTO H-20 loading without permanent deformation. C. Fabricate castings to conform to the shapes, dimensions, and with wording or logos shown on the Plans. D. Castings shall be 75% post-consumer recycled material, clean, free from blowholes and other surface imperfections. Cast holes in covers shall be clean and symmetrical, free of plugs. 2.02 BEARING SURFACES A. Machine bearing surfaces between covers or grates and their respective frames so that even bearing is provided for any position in which the casting may be seated in the frame. 2.03 SPECIAL FRAMES AND COVERS A. Where indicated on the Plans,provide stainless steel inflow preventers and watertight manhole frames and covers with a minimum of four bolts and a gasket designed to seal cover to frame. Supply watertight manhole Frames and Covers, Model R-1916 manufactured by Neenah Foundry Company, Model V-2420 by East Jordan Iron Works, or as approved by public works. B. Where personnel entry is anticipated,minimum clear opening of 30-inches is required. 12/2015 02603 -2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND FRAMES, GRATES, RINGS,AND COVERS rib\ 2.04 FABRICATED RING GRATES A. Ring grates shall be fabricated from reinforcing steel conforming to ASTM A 615. B. Welds connecting the bars shall conform to AWS D12.1. 2.05 MORTAR A. Conform to requirements of ASTM C 270, Type S using Portland cement. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All installations that have an elevation difference between the final elevation of the manhole cover and the surrounding finished grade greater than 18 inches will be required to be hinged, lift assist gasketed ring and cover. B. Install castings according to approved Shop Drawings, instructions given in related Sections, and applicable directions from the manufacturer's printed materials. C. Set castings accurately at required locations to proper alignment and elevation. Keep castings plumb, level, true and free of rack. Measure location accurately from established lines and grades. Brace or anchor frames temporarily in formwork until permanently set. D. Ring grates shall be fabricated in accordance with Plans and shall be set in mortar in the mouth of the pipe bell. END OF SECTION (11.h' 12/2015 02603 -3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND SAFETY END TREATMENTS Section 02629 (glib\ SAFETY END TREATMENTS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Safety End Treatments for storm sewers. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200 -Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350 - Submittals 3. Section 01450 -Testing Laboratory Services 4. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete 5. Section 02255 -Bedding, Backfill and Embankment Materials 6. Section 02318 -Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 7. Section 02630 - Storm Sewers 8. Section 02631 -Precast Inlets, Headwalls and Wingwalls 9. Section 02633 - Cast-in-Place Inlets, Headwall and Wingwalls C. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM C 76, "Standard and Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe" 2. Texas Department of Transportation (TX-DOT) a. Item 467, Safety End Treatment. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Safety End Treatments of all types will be measured by each barrel of each structure end. B. Payment for Safety End Treatments includes materials, earthwork, connections, and accessories. C. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 5/2013 02629- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND SAFETY END TREATMENTS 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make submittals in accordance to Section 01350 - Submittals. B. Submit manufacturer's literature for product specifications and installation instructions. 1.04 TESTING A. Testing shall be performed under the provisions in Section 01450 - Testing Laboratory Services. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete: Class A concrete with minimum compressive strength of 4000 psi. B. Reinforcing Steel: Conform to requirements of Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. C. Corrugated Metal Pipe: Prefabricated metal end sections. 2.02 PRECAST CONCRETE UNITS A. Fabricate Precast Units in accordance with Section 02631 -Precast Inlets, Headwalls and Wingwalls. B. Furnish Precast Concrete Units as indicated on the plans. C. Provide adequate lifting devices based on size and weight of the unit. 2.03 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE A. Provide RCP mitered to the proposed slope. B. Reinforced Concrete Pipe shall conform to Section 02630 - Storm Sewers. 2.04 CORRUGATED METAL PIPE A. Provide galvanized steel prefabricated metal end sections. 5/2013 02629-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND SAFETY END TREATMENTS B. Corrugated Metal Pipe and Fittings shall conform to Section 02630 - Storm Sewers. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 STORAGE AND SHIPMENT A. Store Precast Units on a level surface. B. Do not place any loads or ship Precast Units until the design strength is reached. 3.02 CAUSES FOR REJECTIONS A. Individual Units may be rejected due to fractures, cracks passing through the wall surfaces, surface defects or damages to galvanizing. Remove rejected Units from project and replace with acceptable Units at no additional cost to City. 3.03 EXCAVATION, BEDDING AND BACIKFILL A. Conform to requirements in Section 02318 - Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. B. Take special precautions in placing and compacting the backfill to avoid any movement or damaged to the Units. C. Bed Units on foundations of firm and stable material accurately shaped to conform to the Units. D. Provide adequate means to lift and place the Units. 3.04 CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to new or existing facilities as needed, at no additional cost to City. END OF SECTION 5/2013 02629-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS Section 02630 STORM SEWERS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Storm sewers and appurtenances. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 4. Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete 5. Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 6. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 7. Section 02415 —Augering Pipe or Casing for Sewers 8. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises 9. Section 02629 - Safety End Treatments C. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM C 76,"Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe b. ASTM C 443,"Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets" c. ASTM C 506, "Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe" d. ASTM C 877, "Standard Specification for External Sealing Bands for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections" e. ASTM C 507, "Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe" f. ASTM C 655, "Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete D- Load Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe" g. ASTM D 3350, "Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastic Pipe and Fittings Materials" h. ASTM C 1433, "Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains, and Sewers" i. ASTM B 633, "Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel" ($111.1‘ j. ASTM A 760, "Standard Specification for Corrugated Steel Pipe, Metallic-Coated for Sewers and Drains" 5/2013 02630- 1 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for storm sewers is on a linear foot basis taken along the center line of the pipe from center line to center line of manholes or from end to end of culverts, measured and complete in place. Separate measurement will be made for each type and size of pipe installed. B. Payment for storm sewer includes pipe, earthwork, connections to existing manholes and pipe,accessories,equipment and execution required are incidental to storm sewer work. C. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit manufacturer's literature for product specifications and installation instructions. C. Submit product quality,material sources, and field quality information in accordance with this Section. 1.04 TESTING A. Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The condition for acceptance will be a storm sewer that is watertight both in pipe-to- pipe,box-to-box joints and in pipe-to-manhole connections and in box connections. 5/2013 02630-2 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Handle pipe, fittings, and accessories carefully with approved handling devices. Do not drop or roll pipe off trucks or trailers. Materials cracked,gouged,chipped,dented, or otherwise damaged will not be approved for installation. C. Store pipe and fittings on heavy timbers or platforms to avoid contact with the ground. D. Unload pipe,fittings,and specials as close as practical to the location of installation to avoid unnecessary handling. E. Keep interiors of pipe and fittings completely free of dirt and foreign matter. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL A. Materials for storm sewers shall be of the sizes and types indicated on the Plans. B. Materials for pipe and fittings, other than those specified or referenced, may be considered for use in storm sewers. (.11b\ C. For consideration of other materials, submit complete manufacturer's data including materials,sizes,flow carrying capacity,installation procedures,and history of similar installations to Engineer for pre-bid evaluations, if allowed, or as a substitution. 2.02 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE A. Circular reinforced concrete pipe shall conform to requirements of ASTM C 76, for Class III wall thickness. Joints shall be rubber gasketed conforming to ASTM C 443. B. Reinforced concrete arch pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 506 for Class A-III. Joints shall conform to ASTM C 877. C. Reinforced concrete elliptical pipe, either vertical or horizontal, shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 507 for Class VE-III for vertical or Class HE-III for horizontal. Joints shall be rubber gaskets conforming to ASTM C 877. D. Reinforced concrete D-load pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 655. 5/2013 02630-3 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS 2.03 PRECAST AND CAST-IN-PLACE REINFORCED CONCRETE BOX SEWERS A. All box sewer sections shall conform to ASTM C1433. B. All pipe and boxes shall be machine-made or cast by a process which will provide for uniform placement of concrete in the forms and compaction by mechanical devices which will assure a dense concrete. C. Concrete shall conform to requirements of Section 03300 — Cast-in-Place Concrete with minimum compressive strength of 4000 psi. D. Concrete shall be mixed in a central batch plant or other batching facility from which the quality and uniformity of the concrete can be assured. Transit-mixed concrete is not acceptable. E. Make test specimens in test cylinders at the same time and in the same manner as the box sections they represent. Make a minimum of 4 test cylinders for each day's production run and each mix design. Cure test cylinders in the same manner and for the same times as the boxes they represent. The producer must furnish all equipment required for testing concrete for boxes produced in a precasting plant. F. For precast boxes,provide no more than 4 lifting holes in each section. Lifting holes may be cast, cut into fresh concrete after form removal, or drilled. Provide lifting holes of sufficient size for adequate lifting devices based on the size and weight of the box section. Do not use lifting holes larger than 3 in. in diameter. Do not cut more than 1 longitudinal. G. Rubber gaskted joints for precast reinforced concrete box culverts and sewers may be selected in lieu of boxes with preformed,flexible,mastic gasket material.When rubber gasket joints are selected, they shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 1677 for design of the joints, performance and joint tolerances. When selecting the rubber gasket joint for box, neither filter fabric nor external joint wrap shall be required. 2.04 CORRUGATED METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Corrugated metal pipe may be galvanized steel, aluminized steel, aluminum or precoated galvanized steel as indicated on Plans and conforming to the following: Galvanized Steel AASHTO M218 Aluminized Steel AASHTO M274 Aluminum AASHTO M197 Precoated Galvanized Steel AASHTO M246 1. Reference to gauge of metal is to U.S. Standard Gauge for uncoated sheets. Tables in AASHTO M218 and AASHTO M274 list thicknesses for coated sheets in inches. The tables in AASHTO M197 list thicknesses in inches for clad aluminum sheets. 5/2013 02630-4 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS B. Coupling bands and other hardware for galvanized or aluminized steel pipe shall (11.6"\ conform to requirements of AASHTO M36 for steel pipe and AASHTO M196 for aluminum pipe. 1. Coupling bands shall be not more than 3 nominal sheet thicknesses lighter than thickness of pipe to be connected and in no case lighter than 0.052 inch for steel or 0.048 inch for aluminum. 2. Coupling bands shall be made of same base metal and coating (metallic or otherwise) as pipe. 3. Minimum width of corrugated locking bands shall be as shown below for corrugations which correspond to end circumferential corrugations on pipes being joined: a. 10 '/2 inches wide for 2 2A inch x 1/2-inch corrugations. b. 12 inches wide for 3 inch x 1 inch corrugations. 4. Helical pipe without circumferential end corrugations will be permitted only when it is necessary to join a new pipe to an existing pipe which was installed with no circumferential end corrugations. In this event pipe furnished with helical corrugations at ends shall be field jointed with either helically corrugated bands or with bands with projections (dimples). The minimum (11111‘‘ width of helical corrugated bands shall conform to the following: a. 12 inches wide for 1/2 inch-deep helical end corrugations. b. 14 inches wide for one inch-deep helical end corrugations. 5. Bands with projections shall have circumferential rows ofprojections with one projection for each corrugation. Width of bands with projections shall be not less than the following: a. 12 inches wide for pipe diameters up to and including 72 inches. Bands shall have two circumferential rows of projections. b. 16 '/a inches wide for pipe diameters of 78 inches and greater. Bands shall have four circumferential rows of projections. 6. Bolts for coupling bands shall be 1/2 inch diameter. Bands 12 inches wide or less will have a minimum of 2 bolts per end at each connection, and bands greater than 12 inches wide shall have a minimum of 3 bolts at each connection. 7. Galvanized bolts may be hot dip galvanized in accordance with requirements of AASHTO M 232,mechanically galvanized to provide same requirements as AASHTO M 232, or electro-galvanized per ASTM B 633, Type RS. 5/2013 02630-5 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS C. Bituminous coated pipe or pipe arch shall be coated inside and out with a bituminous coating which shall meet these performance requirements and requirements of AASHTO M190. 1. Pipe shall be uniformly coated inside and out to a minimum thickness of 0.05 inch, measured on crests of corrugations. 2. Bituminous coating shall adhere to the metal so that it will not chip, crack, or peel during handling and placement;and shall protect pipe from corrosion and deterioration. 3. Where a paved invert is shown on Plans,pipe or pipe arch,in addition to fully- coated treatment described above,shall receive additional bituminous material, same as specified above, applied to the bottom quarter of circumference to form a smooth pavement. Maintain a minimum thickness of 1/8 inch above crests of corrugations. D. Furnish all fittings and specials required for bends, end sections, branches, access manholes,and connections to other fittings. Design fittings and specials in accordance with Plans and ASTM A 760. Fittings and specials are subject to same internal and external loads as straight pipe. 2.05 PIPE FABRICATION A. Steel Pipe: 1. Galvanized or aluminized steel pipe shall be full circle or arch pipe conforming to AASHTO M 36, Type I, Type IA, or Type II, as indicated on the Plans. 2. Fabrication with circumferential corrugations, lap joint construction with riveted or spot-welded seams,helical corrugations with continuous helical lock seam, or ultra-high frequency resistance butt-welded seams is acceptable. B. Aluminum Pipe: 1. Pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 196,Type I,Type IA, circular pipe, or Type II, pipe arch as indicated on the Plans. 2. Fabrication with circumferential corrugations, lap.joint construction with riveted or spot-welded seams,or helical corrugations with a continuous helical lock seam. 3. Portions of aluminum pipe that will be in contact with concrete or metal other than aluminum, shall be insulated from these materials with a coating of bituminous material meeting requirements of AASHTO M 190. Extend coating a minimum distance of one foot beyond area of contact. 5/2013 02630-6 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS C. Precoated Galvanized Steel Pipe: 1. Pipe shall be full circle or arch pipe conforming to AASHTO M 245, Type I, Type IA or Type II as indicated on the Plans. 2. Fabrication with circumferential corrugations, lap joint construction with riveted seams, or helical lock seams is acceptable. 3. Inside and outside coating shall be a minimum of 10 mils. 2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Tolerances: Allowable casting tolerances for concrete units are plus or minus 1/4 inch from dimensions shown on the Plans. Concrete thickness in excess of that required will not constitute cause for rejection provided that such excess thickness does not interfere with proper jointing operations. B. Precast Unit Identification: Mark date of manufacture and name or trademark of manufacturer clearly on the inside of inlet, headwall or wingwall. C. Rejection: Precast units may be rejected for non-conformity with these specifications and for any of the following reasons: 1. Fractures or cracks passing through the shell,except for a single end crack that do not exceed the depth of the joint. 2. Surface defects indicating honeycombed or open texture. 3. Damaged or misshaped ends, where such damage would prevent making a satisfactory joint. D. Replacement: Immediately remove rejected units from the work site and replace with acceptable units. E. Repairs: Occasional imperfections resulting from manufacture or accidental damage may be repaired if, in the opinion of the Engineer, repaired units conform to requirements of these specifications. 2.07 BEDDING, BACKFILL, AND TOPSOIL MATERIAL A. Bedding and Backfill Material: Conform to Plans and requirements of Sections 02255 —Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials. 5/2013 02630-7 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Conform to requirements of Section 02318 — Excavation and Backfill for Utilities, 3.02 "Preparation". 3.02 EARTHWORK A. Excavate in accordance with requirements of Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities, except where tunneling or jacking methods are shown on the Plans. When pipes are laid in a trench,the trench when completed and shaped to receive the pipe,shall be of sufficient width to provide free working space for satisfactory bedding and jointing and thorough tamping of backfill and bedding material under and around pipe. B. Bed pipe in accordance with Plans and Specifications. When requested by Engineer, furnish a simple template for each size and shape of pipe for use in checking shaping of bedding. Template shall consist of a thin plate or board cut to match lower half of cross section. C. Where rock in either ledge or boulder form exists below pipe,remove the rock below grade and replace with suitable materials so that a slightly yielding compacted earth cushion is provided below pipe a minimum of 12 inches thick. D. Where soil encountered at established grade is quicksand, muck or similar unstable materials, such unstable soil shall be removed and replaced in accordance with requirements of Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. Do not allow cement stabilized materials for backfill to come into contact with any uncoated aluminum or aluminized pipe surface. E. After metal pipe structure has been completely assembled on proper line and grade and headwalls constructed when required by the drawing details,place selected material from excavation or borrow along both sides of the completed structures equally, in uniform layers not exceeding 6 inches in depth(loose measurement),wetted if required and thoroughly compacted between adjacent structures and between structure and sides of trench, or for a distance each side of structure equal to diameter of pipe. Backfill material shall be compacted to the same density requirements as specified for adjoining sections of embankment in accordance with specifications. Above three-fourths point of structure, place uniformly on each side of pipe in layers not to exceed 12 inches. F. Only hand operated tamping equipment will be allowed within vertical planes 2 feet beyond horizontal projection of outside surface of structure for backfilling, until a minimum cover of 12 inches is obtained. Remove and replace damaged pipe. G. Do not permit heavy earth moving equipment to haul over structure until a minimum of 4 feet of permanent or temporary compacted fill has been placed. 5/2013 02630-8 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS H. During backfilling, obtain uniform backfill material and uniform compacted density throughout length of structure so that unequal pressure will be avoided. Provide proper backfill under structure. I. Prior to adding each new layer of loose backfill material,an inspection will be made of inside periphery of structure for local or unequal deformation caused by improper construction methods. Evidence of deformation will be reason for such corrective measures as may be directed by Engineer. 3.03 CORRUGATED METAL PIPE INSTALLATION A. Place pipes on prepared foundation starting at outlet end. Join sections firmly together, with side laps or circumferential joints pointing upstream and with longitudinal laps on sides. B. Metal in joints which is not protected by galvanizing or aluminizing shall be coated with an approved asphaltum paint. C. Provide proper equipment for hoisting and lowering sections of pipe into trench without damaging pipe or disturbing prepared foundation and sides of trench. Pipe which is not in alignment or which shows undue settlement after laying,or is damaged, shall be taken up and relaid. D. Multiple installations of corrugated metal pipe and pipe arches shall be laid with the center lines of individual barrels parallel. Unless otherwise indicated on the Plans, maintain the following clear distances between outer surfaces of adjacent pipes: DIAMETER CLEAR DISTANCE BETWEEN PIPES PIPE ARCH OF PIPE FULL CIRCLE AND PIPE ARCH DESIGN NO. 18" 1' 2" 2 24" 1' 5" 3 30" 1' 8" 4 36" 1' 11" 5 42" 2' 2" 6 48" 2' 5" 7 54" 2' 10" 8 60"—84" 3' 2" 9 90"— 120" 3' 5" 10 & Over E. Where extensions are attached to existing structures, install a proper connection between structure and existing as indicated on Plans, coat the connection with bituminous material when required. F. When existing headwalls and aprons are indicated for reuse on the Plans,sever portion to be reused from the existing culvert, and relocate to prepared position. Damaged 5/2013 02630-9 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS headwalls, aprons or pipes attached to the headwall, shall be restored to their original condition. 3.04 JOINTING A. Field joints shall maintain pipe alignment during construction and prevent infiltration of side material. B. Coupling bands shall lap equally on pipes being connected to form a tightly-closed joint. C. Use corrugated locking bands to field join pipes furnished with circumferential corrugations including pipe with helical corrugations having reformed circumferential corrugations on ends. Fit locking bands into a minimum of one full circumferential corrugation of pipe ends being coupled. 3.05 CONCRETE PIPE INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with the Plans and pipe manufacturer's recommendations and as specified in this Section. B. Install pipe only after excavation is completed, the bottom of the trench shaped, bedding material is installed, and the trench has been approved by the Engineer. C. Install pipe to the line and grade indicated. Place pipe so that it has continuous bearing of barrel on bedding material and is laid in the trench so the interior surfaces of the pipe follow the grades and alignments indicated. D. Install pipe with the spigot ends toward the direction of flow. E. Form a concentric joint with each section of adjoining pipe so as to prevent offsets. F. Place and drive home newly laid sections with come-a-long winches so as to eliminate damage to sections. Use of back hoes or similar powered equipment will not be allowed unless protective measures are provided and approved in advance by the Engineer. G. Keep the interior of pipe clean as the installation progresses. Where cleaning after laying the pipe is difficult because of small pipe size,use a suitable swab or drag in the pipe and pull it forward past each joint immediately after the joint has been completed. H. Keep excavations free of water during construction and until final inspection. I. When work is not in progress, cover the exposed ends of pipes with an approved plug to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe. 5/2013 02630- 10 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS 3.06 PRECAST AND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE BOX SEWERS INSTALLATION A. Placement of Boxes: when precast boxes are used to form multiple barrel structures, place the box sections in conformance with the plans or as directed. Place material to be used between barrels as shown on the plans or as directed. Unless otherwise authorized, start the laying of boxes on the bedding at the outlet end and proceed toward the inlet end with the abutting sections properly matched. Fit,match, and lay the boxes to form a smooth,uniform conduit true to the established lines and grades. For trench installations, lower the box sections into the trench without damaging the box or disturbing the bedding and the sides of the trench. Carefully clean the ends of the box before it is placed. Prevent the earth or bedding material from entering the box as it is laid. Remove and re-lay, without extra compensation, boxes that are not in alignments or that show excessive settlement after laying. Form and place cast-in- place boxes in accordance with Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. B. Connections and Stub Ends: Make connections of boxes to existing boxes, pipes, storm drains, or storm drain appurtenances as shown on the plans. Mortar or concrete the bottom of existing structures if necessary to eliminate any drainage pockets created by the connections. Connect boxes to any required headwalls,wingwalls, safety end treatments or riprap, or other structures as shown on the plans or as directed. Repair any damage to the existing structure resulting from making the connections. Finish stub ends for connections to future work not shown on the plans by installing watertight plugs into the free end of the box. C. For precast boxes,fill lifting holes with mortar or concrete and cure. Precast concrete or mortar plugs may be used. 3.07 INSTALLATION OTHER THAN OPEN CUT A. For installation of pipe by augering,boring, or jacking pipe, conform to requirements of Section 02415 - Augering Pipe or Casing for Sewers. B. Design pipe and box sewers for jacking,boring or tunneling considering the specific installation conditions such as the soil conditions, installation methods, anticipated deflection angles and jacking pressures. When requested, provide design notes and drawings signed by a Texas licensed professional engineer. 3.08 CONNECTIONS A. Connect inlet leads to the inlets as shown on the Plans. Use non-shrink grout jointing material as shown on the Plans Drawing or as approved. Make connections water tight. 5/2013 02630- 11 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND STORM SEWERS 3.09 FINISHES A. Cut off inlet leads neatly at the inside face of inlet wall. Point up with mortar or field galvanizing. B. When the box section of the inlet has been completed, shape the floor of the inlet with mortar to conform to the detailed Plans. C. Finish concrete surfaces in accordance with requirements of Section 03300—Cast-in- Place Concrete. 3.10 BACKFILL A. Backfill the trench only after pipe and box sewer installation is approved by the Engineer. B. Bed pipes with materials conforming to requirements of Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities and as indicated on Plans. C. Backfill and compact soil in accordance with Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. 3.11 INSPECTION A. Remove and replace all nonconforming work at no additional cost to City. 3.12 SAFETY END TREATMENTS (SET) A. Install safety end treatments in accordance with Section 02629 and as indicated on the plans. Use only approved pre-cast SET's with cross bars. 3.13 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A. Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. B. In unpaved areas,grade surface as a uniform slope to natural grade as indicated on the Plans. END OF SECTION 5/2013 02630- 12 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND ADJUSTING MANHOLES,INLETS, AND VALVE BOXES Section 02633 ADJUSTING MANHOLES,INLETS,AND VALVE BOXES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Adjusting elevation of manholes,inlets, and valve boxes to new grades. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200-Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete 4. Section 02542—Concrete Manholes and Accessories 5. Section 02318—Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 6. Section 02910—Topsoil 7. Section 02921 —Hydromulch Seeding C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM C 270, "Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 1111116 A Measurement for adjusting utility structures to grade is on a lump sum basis for: 1. Adjusting manholes. 2. Adjusting inlets. 3. Adjusting valve boxes. B Refer to Section 01200 - Measurement and Payment Procedures. C Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS A For cast in place concrete, refer to Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete. B For precast concrete manhole sections and adjustment rings,refer to Section 02542— Concrete Manholes and Accessories. C For mortar mix, conform to requirements of ASTM C 270, Type S using Portland cement. (111.16\' 07/2006 02633- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND ADJUSTING MANHOLES,INLETS, AND VALVE BOXES 2.02 CAST IRON ADJUSTING RINGS A For cast iron adjusting rings, refer to Section 02542 — Concrete Manholes and Accessories. 2.03 PIPING MATERIALS A For riser pipes and fittings, refer to applicable piping materials specifications in Sections 02542—Concrete Manholes and Accessories. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Examine existing structure, valve box, frame and cover or inlet box,frame and cover or inlet,and piping and connections for damage or defects that would affect adjustment to grade. Report such damage or defects to the Engineer. 3.02 ESTABLISHING GRADE A Coordinate grade related items with existing grade and finished grade or paving, and relate to established bench mark or reference line. 3.03 ADJUSTING MANHOLES AND INLETS A Elevation of manhole or inlet can be raised using precast concrete rings or metal adjusting rings. Use of brick for adjustment to grade is prohibited. Elevation of manhole or inlet can be lowered by removing existing masonry, adjusting rings or the top section of the barrel below the new elevation and then rebuilding or raising the elevation to the proper height. B Grout inside and outside adjusting ring joints. C Salvage and reuse cast iron frame and cover or grate. D Protect or block off manhole or inlet bottom using wood forms shaped to fit so that no debris or soil falls to the bottom during adjustment. E Set the cast iron frame for the manhole cover or grate in a full mortar bed and adjust to the established elevation. In streets, adjust covers to be flush to 1/8 inch above pavement. F Verify that manholes and inlets are free of visible leaks as a result of reconstruction. Repair leaks in a manner subject to the Engineer's approval. 3.04 ADJUSTING VALVE BOXES A If usable, salvage and reuse valve box and surrounding concrete block. 07/2006 02633-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND ADJUSTING MANHOLES,INLETS,AND VALVE BOXES B Remove and replace 6 inch ductile iron riser pipe with suitable length for depth of (1.7 cover required to establish the adjusted elevation to accommodate actual finish grade. C Reinstall in-kind adjustable valve box and riser piping plumbed in vertical position. Provide minimum 6 inches telescoping freeboard space between riser pipe top butt end and interior contact flange of valve box for vertical movement damping. D After valve box has been set, aligned, and adjusted so that top lid is level with final grade, pour a 24 inch by 24 inch by 8 inch thick concrete pad around valve box. Center valve box horizontally within concrete slab. 3.05 BACKFILL AND GRADING A Backfill the area of excavation surrounding each adjusted manhole, inlet, and valve box and compact according to requirements of Section 02318 — Excavation and Backfill for Utilities. B Grade the ground surface to drain away from each manhole and valve box. Place earth fill around manholes to the level of the upper rim of the manhole frame. Place earth fill around the valve box concrete block. C In unpaved areas,grade surface at a uniform slope of 1 to 5 from the manhole frame to natural grade. Provide a minimum of 4 inches of topsoil conforming to requirements of Section 02910—Topsoil and seed in accordance with Section 02921—Hydromulch /1"*N. Seeding. END OF SECTION rib\ 07/2006 02633-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS Section 02634 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ductile iron pipe and fittings for water mains,wastewater force mains,gravity sanitary sewers, and storm sewers. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 02676—Hydrostatic Testing of Pipelines 3. Section 02533 — Sanitary Sewage Force Mains 4. Section 02630—Polyethylene Wrap 5. Section 02510—Water Mains 6. Section 02530—Gravity Sanitary Sewers C. Referenced Standards: 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) a. ANSI A21.51, Ductile-Iron Pipe Centrifugal Cast, in Metal Molds b. ANSI A21.11,Rubber Gasket Joints Cast and Ductile Iron Press Pipe c. ANSI A21.15, Flanged Cast and Ductile Iron d. ANSI A21.50, Thickness Design of Ductile Iron Pipe e. ANSI A21.10, Cast Iron and Ductile Iron Fittings,2 thru 48 in./Water f. ANSI B 16.1, Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings g. ANSI A21.53, Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service h. ANSI A21.4, Cement-Mortar lining/Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 2. American Water Works Association (AWWA) a. AWWA C 111 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings b. AWWA C110 Ductile-Iron and Gray Iron Fittings for Water c. AWWA C153 Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings for Water Service d. AWWA C600 Installation for Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances 3. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) a. SSPC-SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning 4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 5/2013 02634- 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS a. ASTM G 62,"Standard Test Method for Holiday Detection in Pipeline Coatings" b. ASTM D 1248, "Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for ductile iron pipe and fittings under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for Water Mains, Sanitary Sewage Force Mains, Gravity Sanitary Sewers, and Storm Sewers. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit Shop Drawings showing design of new pipe and fittings indicating alignment and grade, laying dimensions, fabrication, fitting, flange, and special details. Show station numbers for pipe and fittings corresponding to Plans. Production of pipe and fittings prior to review by the Engineer is at Contractor's risk. 1.04 QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide manufacturer's certifications that all ductile iron pipe and fittings meet provisions of this Section and have been hydrostatically tested at factory and meet requirements of ANSI A21.51. B. Provide certifications that all pipe joints have been tested and meet requirements of ANSI A21.11. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE A. Ductile iron pipe barrels: ANSI A21.15,ANSI A21.50 or ANSI A21.51;bear mark of Underwriters' Laboratories approval. B. Provide pipe sections in standard lengths,not less than 18 feet long,except for special fittings and closure sections as indicated on Shop Drawings. C. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings,use minimum Pressure Class 250 for waterlines or thickness Class 52 for waterlines in casing or augered hole. Provide minimum thickness Class 52 for sanitary sewers. Provide minimum Pressure Class 350 for flanged pipe. 5/2013 02634-2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 2.02 JOINTS A. Joint types: ANSI A21.11 push-on;ANSI A21.11 mechanical joint; or ANSI A21.15 flanged end. Provide push-on joints unless otherwise indicated on the Plans or required by these specifications.For bolted joints,bolts shall conform to requirements of AWWA C 111. B. Where restrained joints for buried service are required by Plans, provide one of the following, or Approved Equal (restrained joints shall be polyethylene wrapped): 1. Super-Lock Joint by Clow Corporation. 2. Flex-Ring or Lok-Ring by American Cast Iron Pipe Company. 3. TR-Flex Joint by U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company. 4. EBAA IRON MEGALUG Mechanical Joint Restraint. C. Threaded or grooved type joints which reduce pipe wall thickness below minimum required are not acceptable. D. Provide for restrained joints designed to meet test pressures required under Section 02676 - Hydrostatic Testing of Pipelines or Section 02533— Sanitary Sewage Force Mains, as applicable. E. Where ductile iron water main is cathodically protected from corrosion,bond rubber gasketed joints as shown on Plans to provide electrical continuity along entire pipeline, except where insulating flanges are required by Plans. 2.03 GASKETS A. Furnish, when no contaminant is identified, plain rubber (SBR) gasket material; for flanged joints 1/8-inch thick gasket in accordance with ANSI A21.15. B. Pipes to be installed in potentially contaminated areas,especially where free product is found near the elevation of the proposed pipeline, shall have the following gasket materials for the noted contaminants: CONTAMINANT GASKET MATERIAL REQUIRED Petroleum (diesel, gasoline) Nitrile Rubber,Nitrile Rubber, FKM Viton Type Gasket(ASTM 1418) Other contaminants As recommended by the pipe manufacture 5/2013 02634-3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 2.04 FITTINGS A. Use fittings of same size as pipe. Reducers are not permitted to facilitate an off-size fitting. Reducing bushings are also prohibited. Make reductions in piping size by reducing fittings. Line and coat fittings as specified for pipe they serve. B. Push-on Fittings will not be allowed above grade. C. Flanged Fittings: ANSI A21.10; ANSI B16.1 cast or ductile iron. Flanges: ANSI B 16.1, Class 125; pressure rated at 250 psig. D. Mechanical Joint Fittings: ANSI A21.10 (AWWA C110); pressure rated at 250 psi. E. Ductile Iron Compact Fittings for Water Mains:ANSI A21.53 (AWWA C 153);4-inch through 12-inch diameter; cement-mortar lining; conform to requirements of Section 02630—Polyethylene Wrap. 2.05 COATINGS AND LININGS A. Water Main Interiors: ANSI A21.4, cement lined with seal coat. B. Sanitary Sewer and Force Main Interiors: 1. Preparation: Commercial blast cleaning conforming to SSPC-SP6. 2. Liner thickness: Nominal 40 mils, minimum 35 mils, for pipe barrel interior; minimum 6- 10 mils at gasket groove and outside spigot end to 6-inches back from end. 3. Testing: ASTM G 62, Method B for voids and holidays; provide written certification. 4. Acceptable Lining Materials: a. Virgin polyethylene conforming to ASTM D 1248, with inert fillers and carbon black to resist ultraviolet degradation during storage heat bonded to interior surface of pipe and fittings;"Polyline"by American Cast Iron Pipe Company; or Approved Equal. b. Polyurethane: Corro-pipe II by Madison Chemicals. c. Ceramic Epoxy: Protecto-401 by Enduron Protective Coatings. C. Sanitary Sewer Point Repair Pipe: For pipes which will be lined with high density polyethylene liner pipe or cured-in-place liner,provide cement-lined with seal coat in accordance with ANSI A21.4. For pipes which will not be provided with named liner, provide pipe as specified in this Section, 2.05B "Sanitary Sewer and Force Main Interiors". 5/2013 02634-4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS D. Exterior: Prime coat and outside asphaltic coating conforming to ANSI A21.10,ANSI A21.15, or ANSI A21.51 for pipe and fittings in open cut excavation and in casings. E. Polyethylene Wrap: For buried water lines and sanitary sewers, including point repairs, provide polyethylene wrap unless otherwise specified or shown. Provide Polyethylene Wrap for all buried ductile iron pipe,including polyurethane coated pipe. F. For flanged joints in buried service,provide petrolatum wrapping system,Denso, or Approved Equal, for the complete joint and all alloy steel fasteners. Alternatively, provide bolts made of Type 304 Stainless Steel. G. Pipe to be installed in potentially contaminated areas shall have coatings and linings recommended by the manufacturer as resistant to the contaminants. 2.06 MANUFACTURERS A. Pre-approved manufacturers of ductile iron are American Cast Iron Pipe Co.,McWane Cast Iron Pipe Co., and U. S. Pipe and Foundry Co. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Conform to installation requirements of Section 02510—Water Mains, Section 02530 —Gravity Sanitary Sewers,and Section 02533—Sanitary Sewage Force Mains,except as modified in this Section. B. Install in accordance with AWWA C600 and manufacturer's recommendations. C. Install all ductile iron pipe in polyethylene wrap, unless cathodic protection is provided. Do not use polyethylene wrap with a cathodic protection system. 3.02 GRADE A. Unless otherwise specified on Plans,install ductile iron pipe for water service to clear utility lines with following minimum cover: DIAMETER DEPTH OF COVER (INCHES) (FEET) 16 and 24 5 12 and smaller 4 (.11\, END OF SECTION 5/2013 02634-5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS Section 02635 (IP') STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A New steel pipe and fittings for water mains,pumping facilities, and casings. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 02636—Polyurethane Coatings on Steel or Ductile Iron Pipe 3. Section 02510—Water Mains C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM A 36, "Standard Specification for Carbon structural Steel" b. ASTM A 570, "Standard Practice for Roof System Assemblies Employing Steel Deck, Performed Roof Insulation, and Bituminous Built-Up Roofing" c. ASTM A 53, "Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot- Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless" d. ASTM A 135,"Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe" e. ASTM A 139, "Standard Specification for Electric-Fusion (arc)- Welded Steel Pipe (NPS 4 and Over)" f. ASTM C 150, "Standard Specification for Portland Cement" g. ASTM C 33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates" h. ASTM D 512, "Standard Test Method for Chloride Ion in Water" i. ASTM D 1293, "Standard Test Method for pH of Water" j. ASTM D 4541, "Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers" 2. American Water Works Association (AWWA) a. AWWA C200 Steel Water Pipe—6 in. and Larger b. AWWA C206 Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe c. AWWA Ml 1 Steel Water Pipe: A Guide for Design and Installation, Fourth Edition d. AWWA C207 Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service—Sizes 4 in. Through 144 in. e. AWWA C214 Tape Coating Systems for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines f. AWWA C210 Liquid-Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior of Special Sections,Connections,and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines 02/2008 02635- 1 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS g. AWWA C205 Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe—4 in. and Larger—Shop Applied h. AWWA C602 Cement-Mortar Lining of Water Pipelines in Place-4 in. and Larger i. AWWA C209 Cold-Applied Tape Coatings for the Exterior of Special Sections, Connections, and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 4. National Sanitation Foundation (NFS) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item, no separate payment will be made for steel pipe and fittings under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for water mains, pumping facilities and casings. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit Shop Drawings for aerial crossings and water plant/facilities. Include design of new pipe and fittings indicating alignment and grade,laying dimensions,lining and coating systems,proposed welding procedures,fabrication,fitting,flange,and special details. C Show station numbers for pipe and fittings corresponding to Plans. 1.04 QUALITY CONTROL A Provide manufacturer's certifications that all pipe and fittings have been hydrostatically tested at factory in accordance with AWWA C200, Section 3.4. B Provide manufacturer's affidavits that polyurethane coatings,linings and tape coatings comply with applicable requirements of this Section and that coatings were applied and allowed to cure at a temperature 5 degrees above the dew point. C Provide manufacturer's affidavits that mortar coatings and linings comply with applicable requirements of this Section and that linings were applied and allowed to cure at a temperature above 32 degrees F. D Prior to work being started, provide proof of certification of qualification for all welders employed for type of work,procedures and positions involved. Qualifications shall be in accordance with AWWA C206. E Production of pipe and fittings prior to review by the Engineer shall be at Contractor's risk. 02/2008 02635 -2 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 STEEL PIPE A Provide steel pipe designed and manufactured in conformance with AWWA C200 and AWWA Ml l except as modified herein. Steel shall be minimum of ASTM A 36, ASTM A 570 Grade 36, ASTM A 53 Grade B, ASTM A 135 Grade B, or ASTM A 139 Grade B. B Minimum Allowable Steel-Wall Thickness: In accordance with following table for HS-20 live loads and depths of bury of up to 16 feet and AWWA C200 new uncoated welded steel. CASING PIPE (ENCASEMENT SLEEVES) CASING MINIMUM WALL APPROXIMATE WEIGHT PIPE SIZE PER O.D. THICKNESS LINEAR FOOT UNCOATED 8" 8.625" 0.219" 19.64 10" 10.75" 0.219" 24.60 12" 12.75" 0.219" 29.28 14" 14.00" 0.219" 32.00 16" 16.00" 0.219" 36.86 20" 20.00" 0.250" 52.73 24" 24.00" 0.250" 63.41 30" 30.00" 0.250" 79.43 C Provide pipe sections in lengths of no less than 20 feet except as required for special fittings or closure sections. D Fittings: Factory forged for sizes 4 inches through 24 inches; long radius bends; beveled ends for field butt welding; wall thickness: equal to or greater than pipe to which fittings is to be welded; unless otherwise shown on the Plans. E Joints: 1. Standard field joint for steel pipe; including casings: AWWA C206. a. Single-welded, lap joint. b. Double-welded, butt joint. 2. Provide mechanically coupled or flanged joints where required for valves and fittings, and as shown on Plans. Flanges: AWWA C207, Class D; same (11116\i diameter and drilling as Class 125 cast iron flanges, ASA B 16.1. Maintain electrically isolated flanged joints between steel and cast iron by using epoxy- 02/2008 02635-3 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS coated bolts, nuts, washers and insulating type gasket unless otherwise approved by Engineer. F Make curves and bends by use of beveled joints unless otherwise indicated on Plans. Contractor may submit details of other methods of providing curves and bends for consideration by the Engineer. If other methods are deemed satisfactory,install at no additional cost to Owner. G Provide shop coated and shop lined steel pipe with minimum of one coat of shop applied primer approved for use in potable water transmission on all exposed steel surfaces. Primer for tape coated steel pipe to be used for field-applied coatings shall have no less than 5 percent solids. Provide primer compatible with coating system and in accordance with coating manufacturer's recommendations. H Standard or Special Sections: Within 1/8 inch + of specified or theoretical lengths. Flanges: Square with pipe with bolt holes straddling both horizontal and vertical axis. Provide 1/2-inch gap between pipe ends where pipe is to be coupled.with sleeve couplings. 2.02 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEMS FOR BURIED STEEL PIPE A General: Supplied with either tape coatings as specified herein. 1. Tape Coating: AWWA C214; 80-mil, shop-applied,Polyken YG-III,Tek-Rap Yard-Rap,or equal,except as modified herein. Components: primer,one 20- mil layer of inner-layer tape for corrosion protection and two 30-mil layers of outer-layer tape for mechanical protection. Primer: compatible with tape coating, supplied by coating-system manufacturer. Provide pipe with shop coatings cut back from joint ends to facilitate joining and welding of pipe. Taper successive tape layers by 1-inch staggers to facilitate field wrapping of joints. Cut back approximately 4 to 4-1/2 inches to facilitate welding. Inner and outer tape widths: DIAMETER TAPE WIDTH 4"—6" 6" 8„— 12" 9„ 14" — 16" 12" 18"—24" 18" 2.03 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR STEEL PIPE IN TUNNEL, CASING OR AUGER HOLES A Provide exterior coating system of pipe in augered holes or casing, without annular grout, as specified in Section 02636—Polyurethane Coatings on Steel or Ductile Iron Pipe. No additional exterior coating is required for mortar coated pipe. 02/2008 02635-4 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 2.04 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR STEEL PIPE INSTALLED ABOVEGROUND (OR EXPOSED) A Provide a 3-coat epoxy/polyurethane coating system as designated below. Surface Preparation SSPC SP10 Near White Blast Clean 2.0 to 3.0 mils surface profile Prime Coat ACRO 4422 Inhibitive Epoxy Primer, or approved equal 2.0 to 4.0 mils DFT Intermediate Coat ACRO 4460 Chemical Resistant Epoxy, or approved equal 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT Finish Coat ACRO 4428 Polyurethane, or approved equal 1.5 to 2.0 mils DFT B Total minimum allowable dry film thickness for system: 10 mils. C All materials shall be from same manufacturer. 2.05 INTERNAL LINING SYSTEMS FOR STEEL PIPE A General: Supply steel pipe with either epoxy lining or shop applied cement mortar lining,capable of conveying water at temperatures not greater than 140°F. All linings shall conform to American National Standards. Institute/National Sanitation Foundation (ANSI/NFS) Standard 61 and certified by an organization accredited by ANSI. Unless otherwise noted, coat all exposed (wetted) steel parts of flanges,blind flanges, bolts, access manhole covers, etc., with epoxy lining, as specified herein. B Epoxy Lining: AWWA C210 - White, or approved equal for shop and field joint applied, except as modified herein. 1. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP-10(64);Near White Blast Clean;2.0 to 3.0 mils surface profile. 2. Prime Coat: ACRO 4460 NSF Certified Epoxy-Buff; 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT or approved equal. 3. Intermediate Coat: ACRO 4460 NSF Certified Epoxy-Buff: 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT or approved equal. 4. Finish Coat: ACRO 4460 NSF Certified Epoxy-White 4.0 to 6.0 mils DFT or approved equal. 5. Minimum allowable dry film system thickness: 12.0 mils. 6. Maximum allowable dry film system thickness: 18.0 mils. 7. Minimum field adhesion: 700 psi. 8. Dry film thicknesses for approved alternate products in accordance with the product manufacturer's recommendations. 9. The lining system may consist of three or more coats of the same approved alternate epoxy lining without the use of a separate primer. 02/2008 02635 -5 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 10. Provide materials from the same manufacturer. C Shop Applied Cement Mortar Lining: AWWA C205; shop-applied, cement mortar linings, except as specified herein 3/8 inch minimum thickness for pipe diameters 24 inches and smaller.Pipe with cut back lining from joint ends no more than 2 inches to facilitate joining and welding of pipe. 2.06 MORTAR FOR EXTERIOR JOINTS A Cement Mortar: One part cement to two parts of fine, sharp clean sand; mix with water to a consistency of thick cream. B Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. C Sand: 1. Inside joints: AWWA C602; fine graded natural sand. 2. Outside joints: ASTM C 33; natural sand with 100 percent passing No. 16 sieve. D Water: total dissolved solids less than 1000 mg/1;ASTM D 512 chloride ions less than 100 mg/1 for slurry and mortar cure; ASTM D 1293 pH greater than 6.5. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING INSTALLATION A Conform to applicable provisions of Section 02510—Water Mains except as modified herein. 3.02 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR BURIED STEEL PIPE A Tape Coating System: 1. Inspect pipe, prior to shipment, for holidays and damage to coating. Perform electrical holiday test of minimum of 6,000 volts with a 60 cycle current audio detector. If test indicates no holidays and outer wrap(s) is torn, remove damaged layers of outer wrap by carefully cutting with sharp razor-type utility knife. Wash with Xylol area to be patched and at least 4 inches of undamaged tape where hand-applied tape wrap will overlap. AWWA C209 cold-applied tape; compatible with tape-wrapping system applied for each layer of outer- wrap tape that has been removed. If damaged area shows holiday when tested, remove outer layers and expose inner wrap. Prime exposed area and overlaps with light coat of primer. Firmly press into place patch of inner wrap of sufficient size to extend 4 inches from holidays in all directions. Holiday test patch to verify that it is installed satisfactorily. Retrim outer layer of tape to expose first wrap of outer-wrap tape sufficiently to allow minimum lap of 2 inches in all directions. Wash exposed outer wrap tape with Xylol and prime. Apply two layers of AWWA C209 outer wrap with 35 mils minimum thickness. 02/2008 02635-6 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 2. Regardless of results of electrical holiday test, bubbles in tape coating system r‘s are not allowed. Cut out bubbles and patch as detailed above. 3. Field repairs and applications of coatings: AWWA C209 around joint cutbacks except as modified herein. Field-welded joints: clean shop-primed ends of weld splatter, damaged primer and rust to achieve required surface preparation prior to field repair of linings and coatings. a. Immediately prior to placing joint in trench, remove shop-applied primer by abrasive blasting,solvent or other method as approved by the Engineer. Avoid damage to adjacent existing coatings. Clean surfaces to achieve surface preparation at least equivalent to SSPC SP6 in accordance with AWWA C209. Solvent: environmentally safe and compatible with coating-system primer. b. Apply primer immediately prior to application of first layer of tape to achieve maximum bond. Apply tape while primer is still "tacky" with 3-inch minimum overlap over shop-applied coating. 4. Do not expose tape coatings to harmful ultraviolet light for more than 90 days. Discard (remove) and replace outer layer of tape coating when exposure exceeds 90 days. In case of factory applied coatings,remove joint from site for removal and reapplication of outer layer of tape coatings. B At Owner's option,coating system and application may be tested and inspected at plant site in accordance with AWWA C214. C Cement Mortar Coating: AWWA C205; 1-inch minimum thickness; cut back from joint ends no more than 2 inches to facilitate joining and welding of pipe. 3.03 EXTERNAL COATING SYSTEM FOR STEEL PIPE INSTALLED ABOVEGROUND, IN VAULTS, TUNNELS OR CASINGS, AND INTERNAL LINING FOR ALL INSTALLATIONS A Cement Mortar Lining: AWWA C205; 1/2-inch minimum thickness; cut back from joint ends to facilitate joining and welding of pipe. B Safety: Paints,coatings,and linings specified herein are hazardous materials. Vapors may be toxic or explosive. Protective equipment, approved by appropriate regulatory agency, is mandatory for all personnel involved in painting, coating, and lining operations. C Workmanship: 1. Application: By qualified and experienced workers who are knowledgeable in surface preparation and application of high-performance industrial coatings. 2. Paint Application Procedures: SSPC Good Painting Practices, Volume 1. D Surface Preparation: 1. Prepare all surfaces for painting with abrasive blasting. 2. Schedule cleaning and painting so that detrimental amounts of dust or other contaminants do not fall on wet,newly-painted surfaces. Protect surfaces not intended to be painted from effects of cleaning and painting operations. 02/2008 02635-7 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 3. Prior to blasting, clean surfaces to be coated or lined of grease, oil and dirt by steaming or detergent cleaning in accordance with SSPC SP1. 4. Metal and Weld Preparation: Remove all surface defects such as gouges,pits, welding and torch-cut slag, welding flux and spatter by grinding to 1/4-inch minimum radius. 5. Abrasive Material: a. Blast only as much steel as can be coated same day of blasting. b. Use sharp, angular, properly-graded abrasive capable of producing depth of profile specified herein. Transport abrasive to jobsite in moisture-proof bags or airtight bulk containers. Copper slag abrasives are not acceptable. c. After abrasive blast cleaning, verify surface profile with replica tape such as Tes-Tex Coarse or Extra Coarse Press-O-Film Tape, or approved equal. Furnish tapes to Owner for filing and future reference. d. Do not blast if metal surface may become wet before priming commences, or when metal surface is less than 5 degrees F above dew point. 6. Remove all dust and abrasive residue from freshly blasted surfaces by brushing or blowing with clean, dry air. E Coating and Lining Application: 1. Environmental Conditions: Do not apply coatings or linings when metal temperature is less than 50 degrees F;when ambient temperature is less than 5 degrees F above dew point; when expected weather conditions are such that ambient temperature will drop below 40 degrees F within 6 hours after application of coating;or when relative humidity is above 85 percent. Measure relative humidity and dew point by use of sling psychrometer in conjunction with U.S. Department of Commerce Weather Bureau Psychometric Tables. Provide dehumidifiers for all field-applied coatings and linings to maintain proper humidity levels. 2. Application Procedures: a. Apply coatings and linings in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and requirements of this Section. Provide a finish free of runs, sags, curtains, pinholes, orange peel, fish eyes, excessive overspray or de-laminations. b. Thin materials only with manufacturer's recommended thinners. Thin only amount required to adjust viscosity for temperature variations, proper atomization and flow-out. Mix material components using mechanical mixers. c. Discard catalyzed materials remaining at end of day. 3. Apply primer immediately after surface has been cleaned. Thoroughly dry pipe before primer is applied. Apply succeeding coats before contamination of under surface occurs. 4. Allow each coat of paint either to dry or cure amount of time recommended by coating or lining manufacturer before successive coats of paint are applied. Apply all successive coats of paint within recoat threshold time as 02/2008 02635-8 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS recommended by coating or lining manufacturer on printed technical data sheets or through written communications. 3.04 INSPECTION A Procure services of an independent testing laboratory or inspection service, approved by the Engineer, to perform tests on all portions of coating and lining applications. Laboratory shall supply services of NACE Certified Coatings Inspectors having Level HE Certification for all coating and linings inspection work. Include cost of such testing in contract unit price bid for water main. Furnish copies of all test reports to the Engineer for review. If defective coatings or lining are revealed,cost of repair and testing of repair will be paid for by Contractor. The Engineer shall have full and final decision as to suitability of all coatings and linings tested. B For all field applied coatings and linings,including joints,notify Owner sufficiently in advance of work so that Owner can perform examination of and acceptance of surface preparation and application of each coat prior to application of next coat. Furnish appropriate test data to Owner verifying compliance with requirements of this Section of each coat prior to proceeding with next coat. Recoat or repair runs, overspray, roughness and/or abrasives in coating, or other indications of improper application in accordance with coating or lining manufacturer's and the Engineer's instructions. C Repairs, surface preparation and painting will be subject to inspection by Owner. r Guidelines published by Steel Structures Painting Council will be used as basis for acceptance or rejection of cleaning, painting or coating application. SSPC VIS 1, Pictoral Surface, along with single-probe magnetic pull-off type dry film thickness gages,electrical holiday detectors, and standard wet film thickness gages will be used to determine acceptability of paint applications. D Check film thickness with nondestructive magnetic pull-off gage such as Mikrotest Model DFG-100 or electronic thickness gage. National Bureau of Standards certified thickness calibration plates will be used to verify accuracy of thickness gage. Determine maximum and minimum thickness in accordance with SSPC PA2 for frequency and method. Evaluate each length of pipe under SSPC PA2. Consider each field joint area separate and discrete for purpose of DFT measurements. Perform five spot DFT measurements on each field joint area (15 individual readings). Check thickness of each individual coat as well as thickness of overall system with respect to compliance with this Section. Failure to meet either overall system thickness requirements or requirements of component coats shall be cause for rejection and recoat or repair of entire joint or length of pipe. E Holiday Test: 1. Begin inspection after coating has sufficiently cured,usually one to five days. (Consult coating manufacturer for specific curing schedule.) 2. Use high-voltage d-c holiday detector such as D.E. Stearns Company Model (11111'\ 14/20 or Tinker & Rasor Model AP/W. Use 1600 volts, plus or minus 100 volts. Use brass brush type electrode. 02/2008 02635-9 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 3. Ground high-voltage d-c holiday detector to metal being inspected. Earth-type ground tape is not acceptable. Mark detected defects with white chalk,repair and reinspect. 4. Adhesion Tests: ASTM D 4541; pull-off testing using an Elcometer Model 106 Fixed Alignment Adhesion Tester. Adhesion testing may be directed by the Engineer on any length of pipe or joint which exceeds maximum coating thickness limitations specified in this Section. 3.05 COATINGS AND LININGS INSPECTION A Owner reserves right to inspect or acquire service of independent third-party inspector who is fully knowledgeable of, and qualified to inspect, surface preparation and application of high-performance coatings to inspect any and all phases of all coatings and linings work,whether field or shop applied. Contractor responsible for application and performance of coating and lining whether or not Owner provides such inspection. END OF SECTION 1 02/2008 02635 - 10 of 10 CITY OF PEARLAND POLYURETHANE COATING ON STEEL OR DUCTILE IRON PIPE Section 02636 POLYURETHANE COATING ON STEEL OR DUCTILE IRON PIPE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Two-component polyurethane coating system for use as an internal or external coating for steel or ductile iron pipe. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01350—Submittals 2. Section 02634-Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 3. Section 02635 —Steel Pipe and Fittings C Referenced Standards: 1. American Water Works Association (AWWA) a. AWWA C210, Liquid Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 16, "Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, (.17\' Materials, and Applications" b. ASTM D 1737, "Standard Guide for Testing Industrial Water- Reducible Coatings" 3. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) a. SSPC-PA 2, Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gauges b. SSPC-PA 3, A Guide to Safety in Paint Application c. SSPC-PS Guide 17.00,Guide for Selecting Urethane Painting Systems d. SSPC-SP 1, Solvent Cleaning e. SSPC-SP 10, Near-White Blast Cleaning 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for work performed under this Section.Include cost of polyurethane coatings in Bid Items for steel pipe or ductile iron pipe. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit coating manufacturer's catalog sheets and technical information for approval, prior to delivery of pipe. 07/2006 02636- 1 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND POLYURETHANE COATING ON STEEL OR DUCTILE IRON PIPE C Obtain from coating manufacturer and submit a coating "affidavit of compliance" to requirements of this Section stating that coatings were applied in factory and in accordance with manufacturer's minimum requirements. 1.04 SAFETY A Secure, from manufacturer, Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for polyurethane coatings and repair materials listed in this Section. B Safety requirements stated in this and related Sections apply in addition to applicable federal, state and local rules and regulations. Comply with instructions of coating manufacturer and requirements of insurance underwriters. C Follow handling and application practices of SSPC-PA Guide 3; SSPC-PS Guide 17.00; Coating Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheet. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A Use standard containers to prevent gelling,thickening deleteriously or forming of gas in closed containers within period of one year from date of manufacture. B Label each container of separately packaged component clearly and durably to indicate date of manufacture, manufacturer's batch number, quantity, color, component identification and designated name or formula specification, number of coatings together with special instructions. Do not use coating components older than one year. C Deliver coating materials to pipe manufacturer in sealed containers showing designated name, batch number, color, date of manufacture and name of coating manufacturer. D Store materials on site in enclosures which are out of direct sunlight, and in warm, ventilated, and dry area. E Prevent puncture, inappropriate opening, or other action which may lead to product contamination. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 COATING MATERIAL A Coating Standard: ASTM D 16. B Coating System: Use Type V system which is a 2-package polyisocyanate, polyol- cured urethane coating, mixed in 1:1 ratio at time of application. The components shall be balanced viscosities in their liquid state and not require agitation during use. C Exterior Coating Material: CORROPIPE 11-TX and Joint Coating Material CORROPIPE II-PW, manufactured by Madison Chemical Industries, Inc., 5673 Old Dixie Road, Forest Park, Georgia 30050, or approved equal. 07/2006 02636-2 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND POLYURETHANE COATING ON STEEL OR DUCTILE IRON PIPE D Internal Coating Material: Joint Coating Material CORROPIPE lI-PW,manufactured by Madison Chemical Industries, Inc., 5673 Old Dixie Road, Forest Park, Georgia 30050, or approved equal. E Cured Coating Properties: 1. Conversion to Solids by Volume: 97 percent plus or minus 3 percent. 2. Temperature Resistance: Minus 40 degrees F and plus 130 degrees F. 3. Minimum.Adhesion: 500 psi,when applied without primer to ductile iron pipe which has been blasted to comply with SSPC-SP 10. 4. Cure Time: For handling in 1 minute at 120 degrees F, and full cure within 7 days at 70 degrees F. 5. Maximum Specific Gravities: Polyisocyanate resin, 1.20. Polyol resin, 1.15. 6. Minimum Impact Resistance: 80 inch-pounds using 1-inch diameter steel ball where coating is applied at 30 mils to ductile iron pipe surface which has been blasted to SSPC No. 10 finish. 7. Minimum Tensile Strength: 2000 psi. 8. Hardness: 55 plus or minus 5 Shore D at 70 degrees F. 9. Flexibility Resistance: ASTM D 1737 using 1-inch mandrel. Allow coating to cure for 7 days. Perform testing on test coupons held for 15 minutes at temperature extremes specified in this Paragraph. 2.02 REPAIR AND TOUCHUP MATERIAL A CORROPIPE II PW (two-component, brush applied, or approved equal). Mix in accordance with coating manufacturer's recommendations. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION A Remove deposits of oil,grease or other organic contaminates before blast cleaning by using solvent wash as specified in SSPC-PA Guide 3. Clean and dry surfaces making them completely dry, free of moisture, dust, grit, oil, grease or any other deleterious substances prior to application of coating. B Exterior and Interior Surfaces: SSPC-SP10, near-white metal blast cleaning. The blasting shall be done with clean, hard, sharp cutting abrasives with no steel or cast iron shot in the mix. C Ductile Iron Pipe: Prior to the start of production blasting, prepare specimens for a white metal blast and a near-white metal blast using the equipment and abrasives proposed for the work. During preparation of the specimens,the blasting intensity and abrasive shall be changed as necessary to provide the degree of cleaning required by SSPC-SP10,except that the color of the blasted substrate is not expected to match the (W, color of blasted steel. After examination and concurrence by the Engineer, the production blasting may begin. Monitor and control the production blasting so that production pipe surfaces match the surface of the approved blasting specimens. 07/2006 02636-3 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND POLYURETHANE COATING ON STEEL OR DUCTILE IRON PIPE 3.02 THICKNESS A External Coatings: Minimum DFT of 25 mils (0.025 inch). B Internal Coatings: Minimum DFT of 35 mils. C Thickness Determinations: Use Type 1 magnetic thickness gauge as described in SSP- PA2 specification. Individual readings below 90 percent of specified minimum are not acceptable. Average individual spot readings(consisting of three point measurements within 3 inches of each other) less than 95 percent of minimum are not acceptable. Average of all spot readings less than minimum thickness specified is not acceptable. 3.03 FACTORY APPLICATION OF POLYURETHANE COATING A Equipment: Two-component, 1:1 mix ratio, heated airless spray unit. B Temperature: Minimum 5 degrees F above dew point temperature. The temperature of the surface shall not be less than 60 degrees F during application. C Humidity: Heating of pipe surfaces may be required to meet the requirements of this Section, 2.01E, "Cured Coating Properties", if relative humidity exceeds 80 percent. D Do not thin or mix resins; use as received. Store resins at a temperature above 55 degrees F at all times. E Application: Conform to coating manufacturer's recommendations. Apply directly to substrate to achieve specified thickness. Multiple-pass,one-coat application process is permitted provided maximum allowable recoat time specified by coating manufacturer is not exceeded. F Recoat only when coating has cured less than maximum time specified by coating manufacturer. When coating has cured for more than recoat time, brush-blast or thoroughly sand coating surface. Blow-off cleaning using clean, dry, high pressure compressed air. G Cure at ambient temperature above 0 degrees F. Do not handle pipe until coating has been allowed to cure as follows: AMBIENT MINIMUM FULL TEMPERATURE CURE TIME Over 70 degrees F 7 days 50 to 70 degrees F 9 days 0 to 50 degrees F 12 days 07/2006 02636-4 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND POLYURETHANE COATING ON STEEL OR DUCTILE IRON PIPE 3.04 JOINTS A Apply coating to unlined pipe surfaces including inside of bell socket and outside of spigot. B Coating thickness on sealing areas of spigot end of pipe exterior: Minimum 8 mils (0.008 inch), maximum of 10 mils (0.010 inch). Maximum 10 mils may be exceeded in spigot end provided maximum spigot diameter as specified by pipe manufacturer is not exceeded. 3.05 INSPECTION A Engineer may inspect coatings at coating applicator's facilities. B Secure approval of surface preparation by coating manufacturer's representative prior to coating application. C Holiday Inspection: Conform to AWWA C 210, Section 5.3.3.1. Follow coating manufacturer's recommendation. Conduct inspection any time after coating has reached initial cure. Repair in accordance with this Section, 3.07 "Repair and Field Touchup". 3.06 PIPE INSTALLATION A When required by the Engineer,provide services of manufacturer's representative for period of not less than 2 weeks at beginning of actual pipe laying operations to advise Contractor regarding installation including but not limited to handling and storing, cleaning and inspecting,coatings repairs,and general construction methods as to how they may affect pipe coatings. B Use nylon straps, padded lifts and padded storage skids. Field cuts should be kept to minimum. Repair damage to coating due to handling or construction practices. Refer to Section 02634 -Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings and Section 02635—Steel Pipe and Fittings for additional requirements. C Just before each section of pipe is to be placed into the trench, conduct a visual and holiday inspection. Defects in the coating system shall be repaired before the pipe is installed. 3.07 REPAIR AND FIELD TOUCHUP A Apply repair and touchup materials in conformance with factory application of polyurethane coating requirements specified in this Section, excluding equipment requirements. B Repair Procedure - Holidays: 1. Remove traces of oil, grease, dust, dirt, and other deleterious materials 2. Roughen area to be patched by sanding with rough grade sandpaper(40 grit). 07/2006 02636-5 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND POLYURETHANE COATING ON STEEL OR DUCTILE IRON PIPE 3. Apply one coat of repair material described above. Work repair material into scratched surface by brushing. C Repair Procedure - Field Cuts or Large Damage: 1. Remove burrs from field cut ends or handling damage and smooth out edge of polyurethane coating. 2. Remove traces of oil, grease, dust, dirt, and other deleterious materials 3. Roughen area to be patched with rough grade sandpaper (40-grit). Feather edges and include overlap of 1 inch to 2 inches of roughened polyurethane in area to be patched. 4. Apply thick coat of repair material described above. Work repair material into scratched surface by brushing. Feather edges of repair material into prepared surface. Cover at least 1 inch of roughened area surrounding damage, or adjacent to field cut. D Repair Procedure - Thermite Brazed Connection Bonds: 1. Remove polyurethane coating with power wire brush from area on metal surface which is to receive thermite brazed connection. 2. Grind metal surface to shiny metal with power grinder and coarse grit grinding wheel. 3. Apply thermite-brazed connection using equipment, charge and procedure recommended by manufacturer of thermite equipment. 4. After welded surface has cooled to temperature below 130 degrees F, apply protective coating repair material to weld, exposed pipe surface and damaged areas of polyurethane coating. 5. Do not cover or backfill freshly repaired areas of coating at thermite-brazed connection until repair material has completely cured. Allow material to cure in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02636-6 of 6 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT (Pub\' Section 02710 BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Base course of crushed stone, recycled crushed concrete base, cement-stabilized crushed stone,cement-stabilized bank-run gravel,recycled crushed stone and hot mix asphalt base course. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350 - Submittals 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 4. Section 02742—Prime Coat C. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM C 131, "Standard Test Methods for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine" b. ASTM D 4318, "Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils" c. ASTM C 150, "Standard Specification for Portland Cement" d. ASTM C 33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates" e. ASTM D 1557, "Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort" f. ASTM D 1556,"Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method" g. ASTM D 2922, "Standard Test Method for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)" h. ASTM D 3017, "Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)" 2. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT) a. Tex-101-E, "Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing" b. Tex-110-E, "Particle Analysis of Soils" c. Tex-120-E, "Soil-Cement Testing" d. Tex-106-E, "Calculating the Plasticity Index of Soils" e. Tex-203-F, "Sand Equivalent Test" 5/2013 02710- 1 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT f. Tex-126-E,"Molding,Testing,and Evaluating Bituminous Black Base Material" g. Tex-204-F, "Design of Bituminous Mixtures" h. Tex-208-F, "Test for Stabilometer Value of Bituminous Material" i. Tex-227-F, "Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity of Bituminous Mixtures" j. Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets and Bridges, 2004 Adoption 1) Item 340, "Dense-Graded Hot-Mix Asphalt(Method)" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for base course is on a square yard basis. Separate measurement will be made for each different required thickness of base course. B. When required by Section 01100—Summary of Work,unit price adjustments shall be made for insufficient in-place depth determined by cores as follows: 1. Adjusted unit price shall be reduced by a ratio of average thickness determined by cores to thickness bid upon, times unit price bid. 2. Adjustment shall apply to lower limit of 90 percent of unit price bid. C. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit samples of crushed stone, gravel,crushed concrete and soil binder for testing. C. Submit weight tickets,certified by supplier,with each bulk delivery of cement to work site. D. Submit manufacturer's description and characteristics for pug mill and associated equipment, spreading machine, and compaction equipment for approval. E. Submit manufacturing description and characteristics of spreading and finishing machine for approval. 1.04 TESTING A. Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the 5/2013 02710-2 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT (1111bN' provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stockpiles shall be made up of layers of processed aggregate materials. Load material by making successive vertical cuts through entire depth of stockpile. Comply with applicable requirements of Section 01600 — Material and Equipment and Section 02255—Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Material. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 CRUSHED STONE FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE A. Crushed Stone: Material retained on the No. 40 Sieve meeting the following requirements: 1. Durable particles of crusher-run broken limestone,sandstone,gravel or granite obtained from an approved source. 2. Los Angeles abrasion test percent of wear not to exceed 40 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131. B. Soil Binder: Material passing the No. 40 Sieve meeting the following requirements when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318: 1. Maximum Liquid Limit: 40. 2. Maximum Plasticity Index: 12. 3. Maximum Lineal Shrinkage: 7(when calculated from volumetric shrinkage at liquid limit). C. Mixed Materials shall meet the following requirements: 1. Minimum compressive strength of 35 psi at 0 psi lateral pressure and 175 psi at 15 psi lateral pressure using triaxial testing procedures. 2. Grading in accordance with Tex-101-E and Tex-110-E within the following limits: SIEVE PERCENT RETAINED 1 3/4-inch 0 to 10 No. 4 45 to 75 No. 40 60 to 85 5/2013 02710-3 of 12 • CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT 2.02 CEMENT STABILIZED BASE COURSE "41.1) A. Cement: ASTM C 150 Type I; bulk or sacked. B. Water: Clean; clear; and free from oil, acids, alkali, or vegetable matter. C. Crushed Stone: material retained on the No. 40 Sieve meeting the following requirements: 1. Durable particles of crusher-run broken limestone obtained from an approved source. 2. Los Angeles abrasion test percent of wear not to exceed 40 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131. D. Gravel: Durable particles of bank-run gravel or processed material. E. Soil Binder: Material passing the No. 40 Sieve meeting the following requirements when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318: 1. Maximum Liquid limit: 35. 2. Maximum Plasticity index: 10. F. Mixed aggregate and soil binder shall meet the following requirements: '614) 1. Grading in accordance with Tex-101-E and Tex-110-E within the following limits: PERCENT RETAINED SIEVE CRUSHED PROCESSED GRAVEL BANKRUN STONE GR. 1 GR.2 GRAVEL 1 3/4-inch 0 to 10 0 to 5 - 0 to 5 '/2-inch - - 0 - No. 4 45 to 75 30 to 75 15 to 35 30 to 75 No. 40 55 to 80 60 to 85 55 to 85 65 to 85 2. Obtain prior permission from Engineer for use of additives to meet above requirements. G. Cut back asphalt: MC30 conforming to requirements of Section 02742—Prime Coat. H. Emulsified petroleum resin: EPR-1 Prime conforming to requirements of Section 02742—Prime Coat. 5/2013 02710-4 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT I. Design mix for minimum average compressive strength of 200 psi at 48 hours using Tex-120-E unconfined compressive strength testing procedures. Provide minimum cement content of 1-1/2 sacks, weighing 94 pounds each, per ton of mix. J. Increase cement content if average compressive strength of tests on field samples fall below 200 psi. Refer to Part 3 concerning field samples and tests. K. Mix in stationary pug mill equipped with feeding and metering devices which shall add specified quantities of base material, cement, and water into mixer. Dry mix base material and cement sufficiently to prevent cement balls from forming when water is added. L. Resulting mixture shall be homogeneous and uniform in appearance. 2.03 CEMENT-STABILIZED RECYCLED CRUSHED CONCRETE BASE (RCCB) COURSE A. System Description: Provide RCCB with following performance: 1. Minimum 5 percent cement. 2. Minimum Compressive Strength: 650 psi at 7 days following TxDOT Tex-. 120-E. 3. Prepare concrete product in an on- or off-site pug mill, or in an on-or off-site portable concrete mixer. B. Preliminary Design: Prepare preliminary mix for 4 cement ratios; 5, 6, 7 and 8 percent. 1. Designate source of concrete for crushing. 2. Results of compression tests will be used by Engineer to select the final mix design. C. Cement: ASTM C 150 Type I, II or III; bulk or sacked. D. Water: Potable. E. Aggregate: Recycled Crushed Concrete: Material retained on the No. 40 Sieve, and durable coarse particles of crusher-run reclaimed cured Portland cement concrete, obtained from an approved source. Organic material is prohibited. F. Soil Binder (classified below): Meeting the following requirements when tested following TxDOT Tex-106-E: 1. Maximum Liquid Limit: 35 2. Maximum Plasticity Index: 10 5/2013 02710-5 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT G. Mixed Aggregate and Soil Binder: Grading following Tex-101-E and Tex-110-E within the following limits: SIEVE PERCENT RETAINED 1 3/4-inch 0 to 10 No. 4 45 to 75 No. 40 55 to 80; classified as "Soil Binder" 1. Obtain prior permission from Engineer for use of additives to meet above requirements. H. Asphaltic Seal Cure: 1. Use following as Contractor's option to curing by sprinkling, at no additional cost or time. 2. Cut-back asphalt: MC30 following Section 02742—Prime Coat. 3. Emulsified petroleum resin: EPR-1 Prime following Section 02742 —Prime Coat. Material Mix and Mixing Equipment 1. Design mix for minimum compressive strength of 650 psi at 7 days following Tex-120-E unconfined compressive strength. 2. Cement Ratio: If compressive strength of field samples of installed products fails to meet strength requirements above, increase cement content in one percent increments up to a maximum of 8 percent. 3. Mix according to the requirement s of this Section, 2.03A, with metering devices adding specified quantities of crushed concrete,cement,and water into mixer. Dry mix crushed concrete and cement to prevent cement balls from forming when water is added. Produce homogeneous and uniformly mixed product. 2.04 HOT MIX ASPHALT BASE COURSE (BLACK BASE) A. Coarse Aggregate: Gravel or crushed stone,or combination thereof that is retained on No. 10 sieve, uniform in quality throughout and free from dirt, organic, or other injurious matter occurring either free or as coating on aggregate. Aggregate shall conform to ASTM C 33 except for gradation. Furnish rock or gravel with Los Angeles abrasion loss not to exceed 40 percent by weight when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131. 5/2013 02710-6 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT ("b.' B. Fine Aggregate: Sand or stone screenings, or combination thereof, passing No. 10 sieve. Aggregate shall conform to ASTM C 33 except for gradation. Use sand composed of sound,durable stone particles free from loains or other injurious foreign matter. Furnish screenings of same or similar material as specified for coarse aggregate. Plasticity index of that part of fine aggregate passing No. 40 sieve shall be not more than 6 when tested by Tex-106-E. Sand equivalent shall have a minimum value of 45 when tested by Tex-203-F. C. Composite Aggregate: Conform to the grading limits of TxDOT Item 340 for the paving type indicated on the Plans. D. Asphaltic Material: Moisture-free homogeneous material which will not foam when heated to 347°F, meeting the following requirements: VISCOSITY GRADE TEST AC-10 AC-20 min. max. min. max. Viscosity, 140°F stokes 1000 ±200 2000 ±400 Viscosity, 275°F stokes 1.9 - 2.5 - Penetration, 77°F, 100 g, 5 sec. 85 - 55 - Flash Point, C.E.C., F. 450 - 450 - Solubility in trichloroethylene,percent 99.0 - 99.0 - Tests on residues from thin film oven tests: Viscosity, 140°F stokes - 3000 - 6000 Ductility, 77°F, 5 cros per min., cms 70 - 50 Spot tests Negative for all 1. Material shall not be cracked. 2. Engineer will designate grade of asphalt to use after design tests have been made. Use only one grade of asphalt after grade is determined by test design for project. E. Mixing Plant: Weight-batching or drum mix plant with capacity for producing continuously mixtures meeting specifications. Plant shall have satisfactory conveyors, power units, aggregate handling equipment, hot aggregate screens and bins, and dust collectors. Provide equipment to supply materials adequately in accordance with rated capacity of plant and produce finished material within specified tolerances. Following equipment is essential: 1. Cold aggregate bins and proportioning device 2. Dryer 3. Screens 5/2013 02710-7 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT 4. Aggregate weight box and batching scales (4.1) 5. Mixer 6. Asphalt storage and heating devices 7. Asphalt measuring devices 8. Truck scales F. Bins: Separate aggregate into minimum of four bins to produce consistently uniform grading and asphalt content in completed mix. G. Mix: Employ and pay certified testing laboratory to prepare design mixes. Test in accordance with Tex-126-E, Tex-204-F, Tex-208-F, and Tex-227-F. H. Density and Stability Requirements: PERCENT DENSITY PERCENT HVEEM STABILITY PERCENT MIN MAX OPTIMUM NOT LESS THAN 95 99 97 35 I. Proportions for Asphaltic Material:As specified in TxDOT Item 340 for the mix type shown on the Plans. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify compacted subgrade is ready to support imposed loads. B. Verify lines and grades are correct. 3.02 PLACEMENT A. Do not mix and place cement stabilized base when temperature is below 40° F and falling. Base may be placed when temperature taken in shade and away from artificial heat is above 35°F and rising. B. Place material on prepared subgrade in uniform layers to produce thickness indicated on Plans. Depth of layers shall not exceed 8 inches. Do not dump material in piles or windrows. C. Spread with approved spreading machine. Conduct spreading so as to eliminate planes of weakness or pockets of non-uniformly graded material resulting from hauling and dumping operations. 5/2013 02710-8 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT D. Provide construction joints between new material and stabilized base that has been in place 4 hours or longer. Joints shall be approximately vertical. Form joint with a temporary header or make vertical cut of previous base immediately before placing subsequent base. E. Use only one longitudinal joint at center line under main lanes and shoulder. Do not use longitudinal joints under frontage roads and ramps. F. Place base so that projecting reinforcing steel from curbs remain at approximate center of base. Secure a firm bond between reinforcement and base. G. Do not place asphaltic base when air temperature is below 50 F and falling. Base may be placed when air temperature taken in shade and away from artificial heat is above 40 F and rising. H. Haul prepared and heated asphaltic concrete mixture to project in tight vehicles previously cleaned of foreign material. Mixture shall be at temperature between 250° F and 325°F when laid. I. Spread material into place with approved mechanical spreading and finishing machine of screening or tamping type. Use track-mounted finish machine to place base course directly on earth subgrade. J. Place base courses 4 inches or greater in thickness in two or more layers, each having compacted thickness of not greater than 4 inches. Spread all lifts. Attain smooth course of uniform density to section, line and grades as indicated on Plans. K. Place courses as nearly continuously as possible. Pass roller over unprotected ends of freshly laid mixture only when mixture has become cooled. When work is resumed, cut back laid material to produce slightly beveled edge for full thickness of course. Remove old material which has been cut away and lay new mix against fresh cut. L. When new asphalt/concrete is laid against existing asphalt, existing asphalt/concrete shall be saw cut full depth to provide straight smooth joint. M. In restricted areas where use of paver is impractical, spread and finish asphalt by mechanical compactor. Use wood or steel forms, rigidly supported to assure correct grade and cross section. Carefully place materials to avoid segregation of mix. Do not broadcast material. Remove any lumps that do not break down readily. Place asphalt courses in same sequence as if placed by machine. 3.03 COMPACTION A. Start compaction as soon as possible but not more than 60 minutes from start of moist mixing. Compact loose mixture with approved tamping rollers until entire depth is uniformly compacted. Do not allow stabilized base to mix with underlying material. 5/2013 - 02710-9 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT B. Correct irregularities or weak spots immediately by replacing material and recompacting. C. Apply water to maintain moisture between optimum and 3 percent above optimum moisture as determined by ASTM D 1557. Mix in with a spiked tooth harrow or equal. Reshape surface and lightly scarify to loosen imprints made by equipment. D. Remove and reconstruct sections where average moisture content exceeds ranges specified at time of final compaction. E. Finish by blading surface to final grade after compacting final course. Seal with approved pneumatic tired rollers which are sufficiently light to prevent surface hair line cracking. Rework and recompact at areas where hair line cracking develops. F. Compact to minimum density of 95 percent of modified Proctor density at a moisture content of treated material between optimum and 3 percent above optimum as determined by ASTM D 1557, unless otherwise indicated on the Plans. G. Maintain surface to required lines and grades throughout operation. 3.04 CURING A. Moist cure for minimum of 7 days before adding pavement courses. Restrict traffic on base to local property access. Keep subgrade surface damp by sprinkling. B. If indicated on Plans, cover base surface with a curing membrane as soon as finishing operation is complete. Apply with approved self-propelled pressure distributer at following rates, or as indicated on Plans: 1. MC30: 0.1 gallon per square yard. 2. EPR-1 Prime: 0.15 gallon per square yard. C. Do not use cutback asphalt during the period of April 16 to September 15. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Completed surface shall be smooth and conform to typical section and established lines and grades. B. Top surface of base course: Plus or minus 1/4 inch in cross section, or in 16 foot length. 5/2013 02710- 10 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. At the direction of the Engineer, a minimum of one core will be taken at random locations per 1,000 linear feet per lane of roadway or 500 square yards of base to determine in-place depth. B. Contractor may, at his own expense, request additional cores in the vicinity of cores indicating nonconforming in-place depths. If the average of the tests falls below the required depth,place and compact additional material at no cost to the Owner. C. Compaction Testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D 1556 or ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017 at a random location near each depth determination core. Rework and recompact areas that do not conform to compaction requirements at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Fill cores and density test sections with new compacted cement stabilized base. 3.07 NONCONFORMING PAVEMENT A. Recompact pavement sections not meeting specified densities or replace them with new asphaltic concrete material. Replace with new material, sections of base course not meeting surface test requirements or having unacceptable surface texture. Patch asphalt pavement sections in accordance with procedures established by Asphalt Institute. B. Remove and replace areas of asphaltic concrete base course found by cores to be deficient in thickness by more than 10 percent at no cost to Owner. Use new asphaltic concrete base material of thickness shown on Plans. C. Areas of asphaltic concrete base course found by cores to be deficient in thickness by less than 10 percent shall be remedied at the Owner's direction by one of the following methods: 1. Remove and replace using new asphaltic concrete base material of thickness shown on Plans and in accordance with the requirements of this Section at no cost to Owner. 2. Reduce the Unit Price by the ratio of the average thickness (as determined by cores) to the thickness required. D. No adjustments will be made for excess thickness. 3.08 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A. Maintain stabilized base in good condition until completion of work. Repair defects immediately by replacing base to full depth. 5/2013 02710- 11 of 12 i CITY OF PEARLAND BASE COURSE FOR PAVEMENT B. Protect the asphalt membrane,if used,from being picked up by traffic. The membrane may remain in place when proposed surface courses or other base courses are to be applied. END OF SECTION 5/2013 02710- 12 of 12 CITY OF PEARLAND ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT Section 02741 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface courses of compacted mixture of coarse and fine aggregates and asphaltic material. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350 - Submittals 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 4. Section 02742—Prime Coat 5. Section 02743 —Tack Coat C. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM C 33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates" b. ASTM C 131, "Standard Test Methods for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine" 2. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT) a. Tex-106-E, "Calculating the Plasticity Index of Soils" b. Tex-203-F, "Sand Equivalent Test" c. Tex-126-E,"Molding,Testing,and Evaluating Bituminous Black Base Material" d. Tex-204-F, "Design of Bituminous Mixtures" e. Tex-208-F, "Test for Stabilometer Value of Bituminous Material" f. Tex-207-F, "Determining Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures" g. Tex-227-F, "Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity of Bituminous Mixtures" h. Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets and Bridges, 2004 Adoption 1) Item 340, "Dense-Graded Hot-Mix Asphalt(Method)" 5/2013 02741 - 1 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for asphaltic concrete pavement is on square yard basis. Separate measurement will be made for each different required thickness of pavement. B. Payment for asphaltic concrete pavement includes all labor and materials required to complete placement as indicated on Plans. C. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. D. Refer to this Section,3.07"Noncomforming Pavement"for unit price adjustments for deficient thickness. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit certificates that asphaltic materials and aggregates meet requirements of this Section. C. Submit proposed design mix and test data for each type and strength of surface course in Work. D. Submit manufacturer's description and characteristics of mixing plant for approval. E. Submit manufacturer's description and characteristics of spreading and finishing machine for approval. 1.04 TESTING A. Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Coarse Aggregate: Crushed stone or gravel or combination thereof,that is retained on No. 10 sieve, uniform in quality throughout and free from dirt, organic or other injurious matter occurring either free or as coating on aggregate. Aggregate shall conform to ASTM C 33 except for gradation. Furnish rock or gravel with Los Angeles 5/2013 02741 -2 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT (11°6\,' abrasion loss not to exceed 40 percent by weight when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131. B. Fine Aggregate: Sand or stone screenings or combination of both passing No. 10 sieve. Aggregate shall conform to ASTM C 33 except for gradation. Use sand composed of sound,durable stone particles free from loams or other injurious foreign matter. Furnish screenings of same or similar material as specified for coarse aggregate. Plasticity index of that part of fine aggregate passing No.40 sieve shall be not more than 6 when tested by Tex-106-E. Sand equivalent shall have a minimum value of 45 when tested by Tex-203-F. C. Composite Aggregate: Conform to the grading limits of TxDOT Item 340 for the paving type indicated on the Plans. D. Asphaltic Material: Moisture-free homogeneous material which will not foam when heated to 347°F, meeting following requirements: VISCOSITY GRADE TEST AC-10 AC-20 MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX. (111 , Viscosity, 140° stokes 1000 ±200 2000 ±400 Viscosity, 275° stokes 1.9 - 2.5 - Penetration, 77°, 100 g, 5 sec. 85 - 55 - Flash Point, C.O.C., F. 450 - 450 - Solubility in trichloroethylene, percent 99.0 - 99.0 - Tests on residues from thin film oven tests: Viscosity, 140° stokes - 3000 - 6000 Ductility, 77°, 5 cms per min., cms 70 - 50 - Spot tests Negative for all grades 1. Material shall not be cracked. 2. The Engineer will designate grade of asphalt to use after design tests have been made. Use only one grade of asphalt after grade is determined by test design for project. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Mixing Plant: Weight-batching or drum mix plant with capacity for producing continuously mixtures meeting specifications. Plant shall have satisfactory conveyors, power units, aggregate handling equipment,hot aggregate screens and bins, and dust 5/2013 02741 -3 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT collectors. Provide equipment to supply materials adequately in accordance with rated capacity of plant and produce finished material within specified tolerances. Following equipment is essential: 1. Cold aggregate bins and proportioning device. 2. Dryer. 3. Screens. 4. Aggregate weight box and batching scales. 5. Mixer. 6. Asphalt storage and heating devices. 7. Asphalt measuring devices. 8. Truck scales. B. Bins: Separate aggregate into minimum of four bins to produce consistently uniform grading and asphalt content in completed mix. 2.03 MIXES A. Employ and pay certified testing laboratory to prepare design mixes. Test in accordance with Tex-126-E or Tex-204-F and Tex-208-F. B. Density and Stability Requirements: PERCENT DENSITY PERCENT HVEEM STABILITY PERCENT MIN. MAX. OPTIMUM NOT LESS THAN 95 99 97 35 C. Proportions for Asphaltic Material: As specified in TxDOT Item 340 for the paving type shown on the Plans. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify compacted base course is ready to support imposed loads. B. Verify lines and grades are correct. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prime Coat: If indicated on the Plans,apply a prime coat conforming to requirements of Section 02742—Prime Coat. Do not apply a tack coat until primed base has cured to satisfaction of the Engineer. 5/2013 02741 -4 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT B. Tack Coat: Conform to requirements of Section 02743 — Tack Coat. Where the mixture will adhere to the surface on which it is to be placed without use of a tack coat, tack coat may be eliminated if approved by the Engineer. C. Do not use cutback asphalt during the period of April 16 to September 15. 3.03 PLACEMENT A. Do not place asphaltic mixture in rain or when air temperature is below 50° F and falling. Mixture may be placed when air temperature taken in shade and away from artificial heat is above 40 F and rising. B. Haul prepared and heated asphaltic concrete mixture to the project in tight vehicles previously cleaned of foreign material. Mixture shall be at temperature between 250° F and 325°F when laid. C. Spread material into place with approved mechanical spreading and finishing machine of screening or tamping type. Use track-mounted finish machine to place base course directly on earth subgrade. D. Surface Course Material: Surface course 2 inches or less in thickness may be spread in �• one lift. Spread all lifts in such manner that,when compacted,finished course will be smooth, of uniform density, and will be to section, line and grade as shown. Coincide construction joints on surface courses with lime lines, or as directed by the Engineer. E. Place courses as nearly continuously as possible. Pass roller over unprotected ends of freshly laid mixture only when mixture has cooled. When work is resumed, cut back laid material to produce slightly beveled edge for full thickness of course. Remove old material which has been cut away and lay new mix against fresh cut. F. When new asphalt is laid against existing or old asphalt mat, existing or old asphalt shall be saw cut full depth to provide straight smooth joint. G. In restricted areas where use of paver is impractical, spread and finish asphalt by mechanical compactor. Use wood or steel forms, rigidly supported to assure correct grade and cross section. Carefully place materials to avoid segregation of mix. Do not broadcast material. Remove any lumps that do not break down readily. Place asphalt courses in same sequence as if placed by machine. 3.04 COMPACTION A. Begin rolling while pavement is still hot and as soon as it will bear roller without undue displacement or hair cracking. Keep wheels properly moistened with water to prevent adhesion of surface mixture. Do not use excessive water. 5/2013 02741 -5 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT B. Compress surface thoroughly and uniformly, first with power-driven, 3-wheel, or tandem rollers weighing from 8 to 10 tons. Obtain subsequent compression by starting at side and rolling longitudinally toward center of pavement,overlapping on successive trips by at least one-half width of rear wheels. Make alternate trips slightly different in length. Continue rolling until no further compression can be obtained and all rolling marks are eliminated. Complete all rolling before mixture temperature drops below 175 F. C. Use tandem roller for final rolling. Double coverage with approved pneumatic roller on asphaltic concrete surface is acceptable after flat wheel and tandem rolling has been completed. D. Along walls,curbs,headers and similar structures,and in all locations not accessible to rollers, compact mixture thoroughly with lightly oiled tamps. E. Compact binder course and surface course to density not less than 93 percent of the maximum possible density of voidless mixture composed of same materials in like proportions. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Furnish templates for checking surface in finished sections. Maximum deflection of templates, when supported at center, shall not exceed 1/8 inch. B. Completed surface,when tested with 10-foot straightedge laid parallel to center line of pavement,shall show no deviation in excess of 1/8 inch in 10 feet. Correct any surface not meeting this requirement. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. At the direction of the Engineer, minimum of one core may be taken at random locations per 1,000 feet per lane of roadway or 500 square yards of asphalt concrete pavement to determine in-place depth and density. B. In-place density will be determined in accordance with Tex-207-F and Tex-227-F from cores or sections of asphaltic base located near each core. Other methods of determining in-place density,which correlate satisfactorily with results obtained from roadway specimens, may be used when approved by the Engineer. C. Contractor may,at his own expense,request three additional cores in vicinity of cores indicating nonconforming in-place depths. In-place depth at these locations shall be average depth of four cores. D. Fill cores and density test sections with new compacted asphaltic concrete pavement. 5/2013 02741 -6 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT rb 3.07 NONCONFORMING PAVEMENT A. Recompact pavement sections not meeting specified densities or replace them with new asphaltic concrete material. Replace with new material sections of surface course pavement not meeting surface test requirements or having unacceptable surface texture. Patch asphalt pavement sections in accordance with procedures established by Asphalt Institute. B. Remove and replace areas of asphaltic concrete pavement found by cores to be deficient in thickness by more than 10 percent at no cost to Owner: Use new asphaltic concrete pavement of thickness shown on Plans. C. Areas of asphaltic concrete pavement found by cores to be deficient in thickness by less than 10 percent shall be remedied at the Owner's direction by one of the following methods: 1. Remove and replace using new asphaltic concrete pavement of thickness shown on Plans and in accordance with the requirements of this Section at no cost to Owner. 2. Reduce the Unit Price by the ratio of the average thickness (as determined by cores)to the thickness required. D. No adjustments will be made for excess thickness. 3.08 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A. Do not open pavement to traffic until 12 hours after completion of rolling,or as shown on Plans. B. Maintain asphaltic concrete pavement in good condition until completion of Work. C. Repair defects immediately by replacing asphaltic concrete pavement to full depth at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION 5/2013 02741 -7 of 7 CITY OF PEARLAND PRIME COAT Section 02742 PRIME COAT 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Prime coat for asphaltic concrete paving B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for prime coat under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. B. If prime coat is included as a Bid Item,measurement will be based on the units shown in Section 00300—Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit product data for proposed prime coat. C. Submit report of recent calibration of distributor. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 CUTBACK ASPHALT A. Provide moisture-free homogeneous material which will not foam when heated to 347° F and which meets following requirements: 1. Asphalt material for prime coat shall be MC-30 or MC-70 and shall meet following requirements: 5/2013 02742- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND PRIME COAT TYPE-GRADE MC-30 MC-70 PROPERTIES MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX. Water,percent --- 0.2 --- 0.2 Flash Point, T.O.C., °F 100 --- 100 --- Kinematic Viscosity at 140°F, cst 30 60 70 140 2. Distillate shall be as follows,expressed as percent by volume of total distillate to 680°F: MC-30 MC-70 MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX. to 437°F --- 25 --- 20 to 500°F 40 70 20 60 to 600°F 75 93 65 90 Residue from 680°F Distillation, Volume,percent 50 --- 55 --- 3. Tests on Distillation Residue: MC-30 MC-70 MIN. MAX. MIN. MAX. Penetration at 77°F, 100g, 5 sec. 120 250 120 250 Ductility at 77°F, 5 cm/min. ems 100* --- 100* --- Solubility in trichloroethylene, % 99 --- 99 --- Spot Test All Negative * If penetration of residue is more than 200 and ductility at 77°F is less than 100 cm, material will be acceptable if its ductility at 60°F is more than 100. 5/2013 02742-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND PRIME COAT 2.02 EMULSIFIED PETROLEUM RESIN A. EPR-1 Prime: Slow curing emulsion of petroleum resin and asphalt cement conforming to the following requirements: PROPERTIES MIN. MAX. Fural Viscosity at 77 °F, sec 14 40 Residue by Evaporation, %by weight 60 - Sieve Test, % - 0.1 Particle Charge Test Positive Tests on the Distilation Residue: Flash Point, COC (F) 400 - Kinematic Viscosity @ 140 °F (cSt) 190 350 B. For use,EPR-1 may be diluted with water up to a maximum of three parts water to one part EPR-1 in order to achieve the desired concentration of residual resin/asphalt and facilitate application. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION (isib*\ A. Verify base is ready to support imposed loads. B. Verify lines and grades are correct. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Thoroughly clean base course surface of loose material by brooming prior to application of prime coat. B. Prepare sufficient base in advance of paving for efficient operations. 3.03 APPLICATION, GENERAL A. Apply prime coat with approved type of self-propelled pressure distributor. Distribute prime coat evenly and smoothly under pressure necessary for proper distribution. B. Keep all storage tanks,piping,retorts,booster tanks and distributors used in handling asphaltic materials clean and in good operating conditions. Conduct operations so that asphaltic material does not become contaminated. C. If yield of asphaltic material appears to be in error, recalibrate distributor prior to continuing Work. 5/2013 02742-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND PRIME COAT D. Maintain the surface until Work is accepted by Owner. 3.04 APPLICATION, CUTBACK ASPHALT A. Do not use cutback asphalt during the period of April 16 to September 15. B. Do not place prime coat in rain or when air temperature is below 60° F and falling. Materials may be placed when air temperature taken in shade and away from artificial heat is above 50°F and rising. C. Distribute at rate of 0.25 to 0.35 gallons per square yard. D. Provide all necessary facilities for determining temperature of asphaltic material in all heating equipment and in distributor, for determining rate of application, and for obtaining uniformity at junction of two distributor loads. Provide and maintain in good working order, recording thermometer at storage heating unit at all times. E. Temperature of application shall be based on temperature-viscosity relationship that will permit application of asphalt with viscosity of 100 to 125 centistokes. Maintain asphalt within 15°F of temperature required to meet viscosity. Selected temperature shall be within following range: PRIME COAT TYPE MINIMUM (° F) MAXIMUM (° F) MC-30 70 150 MC70 125 175 F. Do not allow temperature of MC-30 to exceed 175°F at any time. G. Do not allow temperature of MC-70 to exceed 200°F at any time. 3.05 APPLICATION, EMULSIFIED PETROLEUM RESIN A. Do not place prime coat in rain or when air temperature is below 36°F and falling. B. Distribute at rate of 0.15 to 0.25 gallons per square yard. 3.06 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A. No traffic or placing of subsequent courses shall be permitted over freshly applied prime coat until authorized by the Engineer. END OF SECTION 5/2013 02742-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TACK COAT Section 02743 TACK COAT 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Tack coat for asphaltic concrete paving. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350 - Submittals C. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 244, "Standard Test Methods and Practices for Emulsified Asphalts" rN 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for tack coat under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. B. If tack coat is included as a Bid Item,measurement will be based on the units shown in Section 00300—Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit product data for proposed tack coat. C. Submit report of recent calibration of distributor. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 CUTBACK ASPHALT (11111.6\' A. Provide moisture-free, homogeneous material which will not foam when heated to 347° F and which meets following requirements: 5/2013 02743 - 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TACK COAT 1. Asphalt material for tack coat: RC-250 and meet following: PROPERTIES MIN. MAX. Water,percent --- 0.2 Flash Point, T.O.C., °F 80 --- Kinematic Viscosity at 140°F, cst 250 400 2. Distillate: Expressed as percent by volume of total distillate to 680° F: MIN MAX to 437°F 40 75 to 500°F 65 90 to 600°F 85 --- Residue from 680°F Distillation Volume,percent 70 --- 3. Tests on Distillation Residue: MIN. MAX Penetration at 77°F, 100g, 5 sec. 100 150 Ductility at 77°F, 5 cms 100 --- Solubility in trichloroethylene, % 99 --- Spot Test All Negative 2.02 EMULSION A. Provide homogeneous material which shall show no separation of asphalt after mixing and shall meet the viscosity requirements at any time within 30 days after delivery. 1. Emulsion material for tack coat: SS-1 and meet following: 5/2013 02743 -2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TACK COAT MIN. MAX Furol Viscosity at 77°F, sec. 30 100 Residue by Distillation, % 60 --- Oil Portion of Distillate, % --- 2 Sieve Test, % --- 0.1 Miscibility(Standard Test) Passing Passing Cement Mixing, % --- 2.0 Storage Stability, 1 Day, % --- 1 Test on Residue: Penetration at 77°F, 100 g, 5 sec 120 160 Solubility in Trichloroethylene, % 97.5 --- Ductility at 77°F, 5 cm/min, cms 100 --- 2. For emulsions used for tack coats during the period of April 16 to September 15,volatile organic compound solvents(VOC)shall not exceed 12%by weight when tested in accordance with ASTM D 244. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify compacted base is ready to support imposed loads. B. Verify lines and grades are correct. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Thoroughly clean base course or concrete surface of loose material by brooming prior to application of tack coat. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply tack coat uniformly by use of approved distributor at rate not to exceed 0.05 gallons per square yard of surface. B. Paint all contact surfaces of curbs and structures, and all joints with thin uniform coat of tack coat. 5/2013 02743 -3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TACK COAT C. Cutback Asphalt: 1. Do not use cutback asphalt during the period of April 16 to September 15. 2. Do not place tack coat in rain or when air temperature is below 50° F and falling. Materials maybe placed when air temperature taken in shade and away from artificial heat is above 40° F and rising. 3. Temperature of tack coat shall be between 125° F and 180° F when applied. 4. Do not heat tack coat above 200° F at any time. 3.04 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A. No traffic or placing of subsequent courses shall be permitted over freshly applied tack coat until authorized by the Engineer. END OF SECTION 5/2013 02743 -4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SINGLE COURSE SURFACE TREATMENT Section 02744 SINGLE COURSE SURFACE TREATMENT 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A A wearing surface, also known as Seal Coat or Chip-Seal, composed of a single application of asphaltic material, covered with aggregate, constructed on a prepared surface or base course. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01100—Summary of Work 2. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 3. Section 01350—Submittals 4. Section 02980—Pavement Repair C Referenced Standards: 1. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) a. Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets and Bridges, 2004 Adoption 1) Item 300, "Asphalts, Oils, and Emulsions" 2) Item 302, "Aggregates for Surface Treatments" (1111b) 3) Item 316, "Surface Treatments" 4) Item 210, "Rolling" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for Single Course Surface Treatment is on square yard basis,measured and completed in place. Payment includes materials, equipment, preparation, and work associated with the application of the Surface Treatment. B Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for repair of failed or defective areas of pavement prior to resurfacing. C If paving repair is included as a Bid Item,measurement is on a square yard basis. The limits are as defined in Section 01100—Summary of Work, or as shown on Plans. D Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 - Submittals. B Submit test results and certifications that asphaltic materials and aggregates meet requirements of this Section prior to use. 07/2006 02744- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SINGLE COURSE SURFACE TREATMENT C Submit manufacturer's description and characteristics of aggregate spreading and finishing machine(s) for approval. D Submit calibration report of emulsion distributor. The requirement of this submittal may be waived by Engineer when a computer controlled distributor is used. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 EMULSION A Asphaltic material shall conform to the requirements of TxDOT,Item 300,"Asphalts, Oils, and Emulsions". B The asphaltic material shall be Grade CRS-1P or CRS-2P 1. The CRS-1P shall be a rapid setting, cationic emulsion for use in placing surface treatments when the air temperature is between 40°F and 70°F. 2. The CRS-2P shall be a rapid setting, cationic emulsion for use in placing surface treatments when the air temperature is 60°F and rising. C The emulsion shall break and cure in a reasonable amount of time when the aggregate is applied, regardless of sunlight or humidity conditions. 2.02 AGGREGATE A Aggregate material shall conform in type, grade, classification, and quality to the requirements of TxDOT, Item 302, "Aggregates for Surface Treatments". Samples submitted for testing shall be taken from stockpiles located on the Project Site. B Stockpile aggregate separately. Take necessary steps to prevent stockpiles from being contaminated. Do not add materials to approved stockpiles without the Engineer's approval. C When tested by TxDOT, Tex-200-F, Part 1, the aggregate gradation shall meet the requirements in the table below for the specified grade: Aggregate Gradation Requirements (Cumulative % Retained) SIEVE GRADE GRADE SIZE 3 4 3/4 in 0 5/8in 0-2 0 s/in 20-40 0-5 %in 80— 100 20—40 'Ain 95 - 100 — #4 — 95 — 100 #8 99 — 100 98 — 100 07/2006 02744-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SINGLE COURSE SURFACE TREATMENT 2.03 EQUIPMENT A Equipment used in each phase of application shall conform to the requirements of TxDOT, Article 316.3 "Equipment". 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Verify compacted base or prepared surface is ready to support imposed loads. B Verify lines and grades are correct. 3.02 _ PREPARATION A All holes, ruts, depressions, or other defects in the surface shall be repaired and defective areas cleaned out by scarifying or acceptable hand methods under the provisions of Section 02980—Pavement Repair. B Fill defects with new material of the same character,or other materials approved by the Engineer, the road surface shall be compacted by rolling or tamping so that a smooth, hard, well cemented surface,conforming to the lines,grade, and typical cross-section shown on the plans is secured. C After the patches have been allowed to set-up under traffic, sweep the surface of the roadway clean from dirt, dust, and other deleterious matter by means of mechanical, rotary street sweeper, hand brooms, or compressed air. D Before any asphaltic material is applied,all cakes of dust or clay and all foreign matter shall be removed and the surface thoroughly cleaned until the embedded aggregate is cleaned but not discharged or loosened. E The surface may be lightly sprinkled just prior to application of the asphalt if found necessary by the Engineer. 3.03 APPLICATION A Air temperature shall be taken in the shade and away from artificial heat. 1. Treatment may be applied when air temperature is above 40°F and rising. 2. Do not apply treatment when air temperature is below 50°F and falling. 3. Do not apply treatment when roadway surface temperature is below 60°F. 4. When, in the opinion of the Engineer, general weather conditions are not suitable, do not apply treatment. B When Grade 3 aggregate is specified, the asphaltic material shall be applied on the prepared surface at a rate of approximately 0.35 gallons per square yard. C When Grade 4 aggregate is specified, the asphaltic material shall be applied on the prepared surface at a rate of approximately 0.30 gallons per square yard. 07/2006 02744-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SINGLE COURSE SURFACE TREATMENT D When Type B (crushed gravel,crushed slag,crushed stone,or limestone rock asphalt) aggregate is specified, the rate of spread shall be one cubic yard to each 90 square yards of surface area. E When Type PB (precoated crushed gravel, crushed slag, crushed stone, or limestone rock asphalt) aggregate is specified, the rate of spread shall be one cubic yard to each 95 square yards of surface area. F The surface shall be thoroughly rolled as soon as aggregate is applied with a self- propelled light, pneumatic roller in accordance with applicable sections of TxDOT, Item 316, "Surface Treatment" and TxDOT, Item 210, "Rolling". G The Contractor shall repair all fatty areas with additional cover material and all lean areas by adding asphalt to the extent that a uniformly dense treatment is finally obtained. Should depressions, unevenness, or irregular spots develop on the surface, they shall be remedied and the surface brought to true grade and cross-section. H The surface shall be broomed to remove excess aggregate as soon as aggregate has sufficiently bonded. Brooming shall be repeated the following work day. 3.04 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A No traffic or placing of subsequent courses shall be permitted over freshly applied tack coat until authorized by the Engineer. B Contractor is responsible for maintaining Single Course Surface Treatment until Owner accepts the Work. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02744-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE.PAVEMENT Section 02751 CONCRETE PAVEMENT 1.0 GENERAL, 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Portland Cement Concrete Pavement for Concrete Streets,Driveways and Sidewalks; Joints and Curing Materials. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services C Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM C 150, "Standard Specification for Portland Cement" b. ASTM C 94, "Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete" c. ASTM C 33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates" d. ASTM C 131, "Standard Test Methods for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine" e. ASTM C 136, "Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates" f. ASTM C 40, "Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete" g. ASTM C 260 h. ASTM C 494, "Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete" i. ASTM A 615, "Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" j. ASTM D 994,"Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type)" k. ASTM D 1751,"Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction(Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Type) 1. ASTM D 6690, "Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot-Applied, for Concrete and Asphaltic Pavements" m. ASTM C 39, "Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Concrete" n. ASTM C 31,"Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field" o. ASTM C 143,"Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete" 08/2011 02751 - 1 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT p. ASTM C 138,"Standard Test Method for Density(Unit Weight),Yield, and Air Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete" q. ASTM C 231,"Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method" r. ASTM C 171, "Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete" s. ASTM C 309,"Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete" t. ASTM C 42,"Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete" 2. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) a. Tex-406-A, "Material Finer than 75-pm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates (Decantation Test for Concrete Aggregates) b. Tex-203-F, "Sand Equivalent Test" c. Standard Specifications for Construction and Maintenance of Highways, Streets and Bridges, 2004 Adoption 1) Item 438 "Cleaning and Sealing Joints and Cracks (Rigid Pavements and Bridge Decks)" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for concrete paving is on square yard basis. Separate measurement will be made for each different required thickness of pavement. B Payment includes all labor and materials required for installation of concrete paving, joints and curing material, as indicated on Plans. C Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. D Refer to this Section,3.26"Noncomforming Pavement"for unit price adjustments for deficient thickness. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. Submittals shall conform to requirements of Section 01350-Submittals. B Submit proposed mix design and test data for each type and strength of concrete in Work. Include proportions and actual compressive strength obtained from design mixes at required test ages. C Submit manufacturer's description and characteristics for mixing equipment, and for traveling form paver, if proposed for use, for approval. D Submit manufacturer's certificates giving properties of reinforcing steel. Provide specimens for testing when required by the Engineer. 08/2011 02751 -2 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT E Submit product data for joint sealing compound and proposed sealing equipment for approval. F Submit samples of dowel cup,metal supports, and deformed metal strip for approval. 1.04 HANDLING AND STORAGE A Do not mix different classes of aggregate without written permission of the Engineer. B Class of aggregate being used may be changed before or during Work with written permission of the Engineer. New class shall comply with specifications. C Segregated aggregate will be rejected. Before using aggregate whose particles are separated by size, mix them uniformly to grading requirements. D Aggregates mixed with dirt, weeds or foreign matter will be rejected. E Do not dump or store aggregate in roadbed. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Portland Cement: 1. Sample and test cement to verify compliance with Standards of ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III. 2. Bulk cement which meets referenced standards may be used if the method of handling is approved by the Engineer. When using bulk cement, provide satisfactory weighing devices. B Water: Conform to requirements for water in ASTM C 94. C Coarse Aggregate: Gravel or crushed stone, or combination thereof, which is clean, hard, durable, conforms to requirements of ASTM C 33, and has abrasion loss not more than 45 percent by weight when subjected to Los Angeles Abrasion Test(ASTM C 131). No pit run gravel will be allowed. 1. Maximum percentage by weight of deleterious substances shall not exceed following values: PERCENT BY WEIGHT ITEM OF TOTAL SAMPLE MAXIMUM Clay lumps and friable particles. 3.0 Material finer than 75-µm(No. 200) sieve: Concrete subject to abrasion. 3.0* 08/2011 02751 -3 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT All other concrete. 5.0* Coal and lignite: Where surface appearance of concrete is of 0.5 importance. All other concrete. 1.0 * In case of manufactured sand, if material finer than 75-pm (No. 200) sieve consists of dust of fracture, essentially free from clay or shale, these limits may be increased to 5 and 7 percent, respectively. 2. Coarse aggregate(size 1 1/2 inch to No.4 sieve)shall conform to requirements of ASTM C 33. Gradation shall be within following limits when graded in accordance with ASTM C 136: SIEVE DESIGNATION (PERCENTAGE BY WEIGHT) (SQUARE OPENINGS) Retained on 1 3/4 inch sieve 0 Retained on 1 1/2 inch sieve 0 to 5 Retained on 3/4 inch sieve 30 to 65 Retained on 3/8 inch sieve 70 to 90 Retained on No. 4 sieve 95 to 100 Loss by Decantation Test *Method Tex-406-A 1.0 maximum * In case of aggregates made primarily from crushing of stone, if material finer than 200 sieve is dust of fracture essentially free from clay or shale as established by Part HE of Tex-406-A, percent may be increased to 1.5 D Fine Aggregate: Sand,manufactured sand,or combination thereof,composed of clean, hard,durable,uncoated grains,free from loams or other injurious foreign matter. Fine aggregate for concrete shall conform to requirements of ASTM C 33. Gradation shall be within following limits when graded in accordance with ASTM C 136: SIEVE DESIGNATION (PERCENTAGE BY WEIGHT) (SQUARE OPENINGS) Retained on 3/8 inch sieve 0 Retained on No. 4 sieve 0 to 5 Retained on No. 8 sieve 0 to 20 Retained on No. 16 sieve 15 to 50 Retained on No. 30 sieve 35 to 75 J Retained on No. 50 sieve 65 to 90 08/2011 02751 -4 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT Retained on No. 100 sieve 90 to 100 Retained on No. 200 sieve 97 to 100 1. When subjected to color test for organic impurities (ASTM C 40), fine aggregate shall not show color darker than standard color. Fine aggregate shall be subjected to Sand Equivalent Test(Tex-203-F). Sand equivalent value shall not be less than 80, unless higher value is shown on Plans. E Air Entraining Agent: Furnish an air entraining agent conforming to requirements of ASTM C 260. F Water Reducer: Water reducing admixture conforming to requirements of ASTM C 494 may be used if required to improve the workability of concrete. Amount and type of such admixture shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. G Reinforcing Steel: 1. Provide new billet steel manufactured by open hearth process and conforming to ASTM A 615,Grade 60. Store steel to protect it from mechanical injury and rust. At time of placement,steel shall be free from dirt,scale,rust,paint,oil or other injurious materials. 2. Cold bend reinforcing steel to shapes shown. Once steel has been bent,it may not be rebent. 2.02 CONCRETE JOINTS A When allowed on the Plans, or with approval of the Engineer,Board Expansion Joint Material may be used: Filler board of selected stock. Use wood of density and type as follows: 1. Clear, all-heart cypress weighing no more than 40 pounds per cubic foot,after being oven dried to constant weight. 2. Clear,all-heart redwood weighing no more than 30 pounds per cubic foot,after being oven dried to constant weight. 3. Use wood only when part of a load transmission device assembly. B Unless specified otherwise,use Preformed Expansion Joint Material: Bituminous fiber and bituminous mastic composition material conforming to ASTM D 994 and ASTM D 1751. C Joint Sealing Compound: 1. Hot poured rubber-asphalt compound meeting the requirements of ASTM D 6690. 2. When indicated on Plans, self-leveling Low Modulas Silicone sealant single component meeting the requirements of TxDOT Specification 438. D Load Transmission Devices: 08/2011 02751 -5 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT 1. Smooth, steel dowel bars conforming to ASTM A 615, Grade 60. When indicated on Plans,encase one end of dowel bar in approved cap having inside diameter 1/16 inch greater than diameter of dowel bar. 2. Deformed steel tie bars conforming to ASTM A 615, Grade 60. E Metal Supports for Reinforcing Steel and Joint Assembly: Employ metal supports of approved shape and size that will secure reinforcing steel and joint assembly in correct position during placing and finishing of concrete. Space supports as directed by the Engineer. 2.03 EQUIPMENT A Equipment: Conform to requirements of ASTM C 94. 2.04 MIXING A Employ and pay certified testing laboratory to prepare mix designs. Compressive strength shall be as specified using test specimens prepared in accordance with ASTM C 31 and tested in accordance with ASTM C 39. Contractor shall determine and measure batch quantity of each ingredient,including all water for batch designs and all concrete produced for Work. Mix shall conform to these specifications and other requirements indicated on Plans. B Mix design to produce concrete which will have a minimum compressive strength of 2500 psi at 7days and 3500 psi at 28 days. When high-early-strength cement is used,it shall reach a minimum compressive strength of 3500 psi at 7 days and 4000 at 28 days. Slump of concrete shall be at least 2 inch, but no more than 5 inches, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 143. 1. Concrete pavement shall contain at least 5 1/2 sacks (94 pounds per sack) of cement per cubic yard,with not more than 6.5 gallons of water,net,per sack of cement (water cement ratio maximum 0.57). Cement content shall be determined in accordance with ASTM C 138. Addition of mineral filler may be used to improve workability or plasticity of concrete to limits specified. 2. Coarse dry aggregate shall not exceed 85 percent of loose volume of concrete. 3. Add air-entraining admixture to ensure uniform distribution of agent throughout batch. Base air content of freshly mixed air-entrained concrete upon trial mixes with materials to be used in Work, adjusted to produce concrete of required plasticity and workability. Percentage of air entrainment in mix shall be 4 1/2 percent plus or minus 1 1/2 percent. Air content shall be determined by testing in accordance with ASTM C 231. 4. Use retardant when temperature exceeds 90 degrees F. Proportion shall be as recommended by manufacturer. Use same brand as used for air-entraining agent. Add and batch material using same methods as used for air-entraining agent. Accelerators will not be allowed unless approved by the Engineer. 08/2011 02751 -6 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT (.1') 2.05 COVER MATERIALS FOR CURING A Curing materials shall conform to one of following: 1. Polyethylene Film: Opaque pigmented white film conforming to requirements ofASTMC 171. 2. Waterproofed Paper: Paper conforming to requirements of ASTM C 171. 3. Cotton Mats: Single layer of cotton filler completely enclosed in cover of cotton cloth. Mats shall contain not less than 3/4 of a pound of uniformly distributed cotton filler per square yard of mat. Cotton cloth used for covering materials shall weigh not less than 6 ounces per square yard. Mats shall be stitched so that mat will contact surface of pavement at all points when saturated with water. 4. Liquid Membrane-forming Compounds: Liquid membrane-forming compounds shall conform to ASTM C 309. Membrane shall restrict loss of water to not more than 0.55 kg/m2 of surface in 72 hours. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Verify compacted base is ready to support imposed loads and meets compaction requirements. B Verify lines and grades are correct. 3.02 PREPARATION A Properly prepare, shape and compact each section of subgrade before placing forms, reinforcing steel or concrete. After forms have been set to proper grade and alignment, use subgrade planer to shape subgrade to its final cross section. Check contour of subgrade with template. B Remove subgrade that will not support loaded form. Replace and compact subgrade to required density. 3.03 EQUIPMENT A Alternate equipment and methods, other than those required by this article, may be used provided the Contractor demonstrates that equal, or better, results will be obtained. Maintain equipment for preparing subgrade and for finishing and compacting concrete in good working order. Unless approved otherwise by the Engineer or the Plans, slip form paving methods shall be used. B Subgrade Planer and Template: 1. Use subgrade planer with adjustable cutting blades to trim subgrade to exact section shown on Plans. Select planer mounted on visible rollers which ride on forms. Planer frame must have sufficient weight so that it will remain on form 08/2011 02751 -7 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT at all times, and have such strength and rigidity that, under tests made by changing support from wheels to center, planer will not develop deflection of more than 1/8 inch. Tractors used to pull planer shall not produce ruts or indentations in subgrade. When slip form method of paving is used, operate subgrade planer on prepared track grade or have it controlled by electronic sensor system operated from string line to establish horizontal alignment and elevation of subbase. 2. Provide template for checking contour of subgrade. Template shall be long enough to rest upon side forms and have such strength and rigidity that,when supported at center, maximum deflection shall not exceed 1/8 inch. Fit template with accurately adjustable rods projecting downward at 1 foot intervals. Adjust these rods to gauge cross sections of slab bottom when template is resting on side forms. C Texturing Equipment 1. Carpet Drag a. Provide a carpet drag mounted on a work bridge or a moveable support system. Provide a single piece of carpet of sufficient transverse length of carpet is in contact with the concrete being placed to produce the desired texture. D Machine Finisher: Provide a power-driven,transverse finishing machine designed and operated to strike off and consolidate concrete. Machine shall have two screeds accurately adjusted to crown of pavement and with frame equipped to ride on forms. Use finishing machine with rubber tires if it operates on concrete pavement. E Hand Finishing: 1. Provide mechanical strike and tamping template 2 feet longer than width of pavement to be finished. Shape template to pavement section. 2. Provide two bridges to ride on forms and span pavement for finishing expansion and dummy joints. Provide floats and necessary edging and finishing tools. F Vibrators: Furnish mechanically operated synchronized vibrators mounted on tamping bar which rides on forms and hand-manipulated mechanical vibrators. Furnish vibrators with frequency of vibration to provide maximum consolidation of concrete without segregation. 3.04 FORMS A Side Forms: Use clean metal forms of approved shape and section. Preferred depth of form shall be equal to required edge thickness of pavement. Forms with depths greater or less than required edge thickness of pavement will be permitted,provided difference between form depth and edge thickness if not greater than 1 inch,and further provided that forms of depth less than pavement edge are brought to required edge thickness by securely attaching wood or metal strips to bottom of form, or by grouting under form. 08/2011 02751 -8 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT Bottom flange of form shall be same size as thickness of pavement. Aluminum forms are not allowed. All forms shall be approved by the Engineer. Length of form sections shall be not less than 10 feet and each section shall provide for staking in position with not less than 3 pins. Flexible or curved forms of wood or metal of proper radius shall be used for curves of 200 foot radius or less. Forms shall have ample strength and shall be provided with adequate devices for secure setting so that when in-place they will withstand, without visible springing or settlement, impact and vibration of finishing machine. In no case shall base width be less than 8 inches for form 8 inches or more in height. Forms shall be free from warp, bends or kinks and shall be sufficiently true to provide reasonable straight edge on concrete. Top of each form section, when tested with straight edge, shall conform to requirements specified for surface of completed pavement. Provide sufficient forms for satisfactory placement of concrete. For short radius curves, forms less than 10 feet in length or curved forms may be used. For curb returns at street intersections and driveways, wood forms of good grade and quality may be used. B Form Setting: 1. Rest forms directly on subgrade. Do not shim with pebbles or dirt. Accurately set forms to required grade and alignment and, during entire operation of placing, compacting and finishing of concrete, do not deviate from this grade and alignment more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet of length. Do not remove forms for at least 8 hours after completion of finishing operations. Provide supply of forms that will be adequate for orderly and continuous placing of concrete. Set forms and check grade for at least 300 feet ahead of mixer or as approved by the Engineer. 2. Adjacent slabs may be used instead of forms, provided that concrete is well protected from possible damage by finishing equipment. These adjacent slabs shall not be used for forms until concrete has aged at least 7 days. 3.05 REINFORCING STEEL AND JOINT ASSEMBLIES A Accurately place reinforcing steel and joint assemblies and position them securely as indicated on Plans. Wire reinforcing bars securely together at intersections and splices. Bars and coatings shall be free of rust, dirt or other foreign matter when concrete is placed. Place all reinforcing steel and secure to chairs. All reinforcing steel must be positively supported before pour begins. B Place pavement joint assemblies at required locations and elevations, and rigidly secure all parts in required positions. Install dowel bars accurately in joint assemblies as shown, each parallel to pavement surface and to center line of pavement. Rigidly secure in required position to prevent displacement during placing and finishing of concrete. Accurately cut header boards,joint filler and other material used for forming joints to receive each dowel bar. Drill dowels into existing pavement, secure with epoxy, and provide paving headers, as required, to provide rigid pavement sections. 08/2011 02751 -9 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT 3.06 PLACEMENT ' 111*J A Place concrete only in rain-free days when air temperature taken in shade and away from artificial heat is above 35 degrees F and rising. Concrete shall not be placed when temperature is below 40 degrees F and falling. Place concrete that is between 40 degrees F and 95 degrees F at the time of discharge. Do not exceed 60 minutes between introduction of cement to the aggregates and discharge. When the weather is such that the concrete temperature would exceed 90 degrees F, employ effective means, such as pre-cooling of aggregates and mixing water, using ice or placing at night, as necessary to maintain concrete temperature, as placed, below 95 degrees F. Do not place when concrete temperature is above 95 degrees F at the time of discharge. B Place concrete within 60 minutes of mixing. Remove and dispose of concrete not placed within this period. C Concrete slump during placement shall be 2 to 5 inches,except when using traveling- form paver slump shall be a maximum of 3 inches. D Deposit concrete rapidly and continuously on subgrade or subbase in successive batches. Distribute concrete to required depth and for entire width of placement in manner that will require as little rehandling as possible. Where hand spreading is r'q necessary, distribute concrete with shovels or by other approved methods. Use only concrete rakes in handling concrete. At end of day or in case of unavoidable interruption of more than 30 minutes, place transverse construction joint at point of stopping work. Remove and replace sections less than 10 feet long. E Take special care in placing and spading concrete against forms and at longitudinal and transverse joints to prevent honeycombing. Voids in edge of finished pavement will be cause for rejection. 3.07 FINISHING A Finish concrete pavement with power-driven transverse finishing machines or by hand finishing methods. 1. Use transverse finishing machine to make at least two trips over each area. Make last trip continuous run of not less than 40 feet. After transverse screeding, use hand-operated longitudinal float to test and level surface to required grade. 2. Hand finish with mechanical strike and tamping template as wide as pavement to be finished. Shape template to pavement section. Move strike template forward in direction of placement, maintaining slight excess of material in front of cutting edge. Make at least two trips over each area. Screed pavement surface to required section. Work screed with combined transverse and longitudinal motion in direction work is progressing. Maintain screed in contact with forms. Use longitudinal float to level surface. 08/2011 02751 - 10 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT B On narrow strips and transitions,finish concrete pavement by hand. Thoroughly work concrete around reinforcement and embedded fixtures. Strike off concrete with strike- off screed. Move strike-off screed forward with combined transverse and longitudinal motion in direction work is progressing,maintaining screed in contact with forms,and maintaining slight excess of materials in front of cutting edge. Tamp concrete with tamping template. Use longitudinal float to level surface. C While concrete is still workable,give surface final belting to produce a uniform surface of gritty texture. Perform belting with short rapid transverse strokes having sweeping longitudinal motion. 3.08 JOINTS AND JOINT SEALING A When new work is adjacent to existing concrete, place joints at same location as existing joints in adjacent pavement. B If the limit of removal of existing concrete or asphaltic pavement does not fall on existing joint, saw cut existing pavement minimum of 1 1/2 inches deep to provide straight, smooth joint surface without chipping, spalling or cracks. 3.09 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS A Place transverse construction joint wherever concrete placement must be stopped for more than 30 minutes. Place longitudinal construction joints at interior edges of pavement lanes using No.5 deformed tie bars,30 inches long and spaced 18 inches on centers. 3.10 EXPANSION JOINTS A Place 3/4 inch expansion joints at locations shown on Plans. Use no filler shorter than 6 feet. When pavement is 24 feet or narrower, use not more than 2 lengths of filler. Secure pieces to form straight joint. Shape filler accurately to cross section of concrete slab. Use load transmission devices of type and size shown on Plans. Seal with joint sealing compound. 3.11 CONTRACTION JOINTS A Place contraction joints at same locations as in adjacent pavement or at spaces indicated on Plans. Maximum spacing of contraction/construction joints,20 feet. Seal groove with joint sealing compound. 3.12 LONGITUDINAL WEAKENED PLANE JOINTS A Place longitudinal weakened plane joints at spaces indicated on Plans. Seal groove with joint sealing compound. 08/2011 02751 - 11 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT 3.13 SAWED JOINTS A Contractor may use sawed joints as an alternate to contraction and weakened plane joints. Circular cutter shall be capable of cutting straight line groove minimum of 1/2 inch wide.Depth shall be one quarter of pavement thickness plus 1/2 inch. Commence sawing as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit cutting without chipping, spalling or tearing and prior to initiation of cracks. Once sawing has commenced, it shall be continued until completed. Make saw cut with one pass. Complete sawing within 24 hours of concrete placement. Saw joints at required spacing consecutively in sequence of concrete placement. B Concrete Saw: Provide sawing equipment adequate in power to complete sawing to required dimensions and within required time. Provide at least one standby saw in good working order. Maintain an ample supply of saw blades at work site at all times during sawing operations. Sawing equipment shall be on job at all times during concrete placement. 3.14 JOINTS FOR CURB,AND CURB AND GUTTER A Place 3/4 inch preformed expansion joints through curb and gutters at locations of expansion and contraction joints in pavement; at end of radius returns at street intersections and driveways; and at curb inlets. Maximum spacing shall be 60 foot centers. 3.15 JOINTS FOR CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS A Provide 3/4 inch expansion joints conforming to ASTM D 1751 across driveway in line with street face of sidewalks, at existing concrete driveways, and along intersections with sidewalks and other structures. Extend expansion joint material full depth of slab. Where dowels are used, wrap or sleeve one end. 3.16 JOINT SEALING A Seal joints only when surface and joints are dry, ambient temperature is above 50 degrees F but less than 85 degrees F, and weather is not foggy or rainy. B Joint sealing equipment shall be in first-class working condition, and be approved by the Engineer. Use concrete grooving machine or power-operated wire brush and other equipment such as plow, brooms, brushes, blowers or hydro or abrasive cleaning as required to produce satisfactory joints. C Clean joints of loose scale,dirt,dust and curing compound. Term joint includes wide joint spaces, expansion joints, dummy groove joints or cracks, either preformed or natural. Remove loose material from concrete surfaces adjacent to joints. 08/2011 02751 - 12 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT (11.1 D Fill joints neatly with joint sealer to depth shown. Pour sufficient joint sealer into joints so that, upon completion, surface of sealer within joint will be 1/4 inch below level of adjacent surface or at elevation as directed. 3.17 CONCRETE CURING A Concrete pavement shall be cured by protecting it against loss of moisture for period of not less than 72 hours immediately upon completion of finishing operations. Do not use membrane curing for concrete pavement to be overlaid by asphaltic concrete. B Where curing requires use of water,curing shall have prior right to all water supply or supplies. Failure to provide sufficient cover material shall be cause for immediate suspension of concreting operations. 3.18 POLYETHYLENE FILM CURING A Immediately after finishing surface, and after concrete has taken its initial set, apply water in the form of a fine spray. Cover surface with polyethylene film so film will remain in intimate contact with surface during specified curing period. B Cover entire surface and both edges of pavement slab. Joints in film sheets shall overlap minimum of 12 inches. Immediately repair tears or holes occurring during curing period by placing acceptable moisture-proof patches or by replacing. 3.19 WATERPROOFED PAPER CURING A Immediately after finishing surface, and after concrete has taken its initial set, apply water in form of fine spray. Cover surface with waterproofed paper so paper will remain in intimate contact with surface during specified curing period. B Prepare waterproofed paper to form blankets of sufficient width to cover entire surface and both edges of pavement slab, and not be more than 60 feet in length. Joints in blankets caused by joining paper sheets shall lap not less than 5 inches and shall be securely sealed with asphalt cement having melting point of approximately 180 degrees F. Place blankets to secure an overlap of at least 12 inches. Tears or holes appearing in paper during curing period shall be immediately repaired by cementing patches over defects. 3.20 COTTON MAT CURING A Immediately after finishing surface, and after concrete has taken its initial set, completely cover surface with cotton mats,thoroughly saturated before application,in such manner that they will contact surface of pavement equally at all points. B Mats shall remain on pavement for specified curing period. Keep mats saturated so that,when lightly compressed,water will drip freely from them. Keep banked earth or cotton mat covering edges saturated. 08/2011 02751 - 13 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT 3.21 LIQUID MEMBRANE-FORMING COMPOUNDS A Immediately after finishing surface, and after concrete has taken its initial set, apply liquid membrane-forming compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.22 TOLERANCES A Test entire surface before initial set and correct irregularities or undulations. Bring surface within requirements of following test and then finish. Place 10 foot straightedge parallel to center of roadway to bridge any depressions and touch all high spots. Do not permit ordinates measured from face of straight edge to surface of pavement to exceed 1/16 inch per foot from nearest point of contact. Maximum ordinate with 10 foot straightedge shall not exceed 1/8 inch. Grind spots in excess of requirements of this paragraph to meet surface test requirements. Restore texture by grooving concrete to meet surface finishing specifications. 3.23 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A Testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01450 —Testing Laboratory Services. B Test Specimens: Four test specimen cylinders for compressive strength tests will be made for each 150 cubic yards or less of pavement that is placed in one day. Two specimens will be tested at 7 days. For failed 7-day tests, remaining two specimens will be tested at 28 days. Specimens will be made,cured and tested in accordance with ASTM C 31 and ASTM C 39. C Yield test will be made in accordance with ASTM C 138 for cement content per cubic yard of concrete. If such cement content is found to be less than that specified per cubic yard, reduce batch weights until amount of cement per cubic yard of concrete conforms to requirements. D At the Engineer's direction a minimum of one 4-inch core may be taken at random locations per 1,000 feet per lane or 500 square yards of pavement to measure in-place depth. Each core may be tested for 28 day compressive strength according to methods of ASTM C 42. The 28 day compressive strength of each core tested shall be a minimum of 3000 pounds per square inch. E Contractor may,at his own expense,request three additional cores in vicinity of cores indicating nonconforming in-place depths. In-place depth at these locations shall be the average of depth of four cores. F Fill cores and density test sections with new concrete paving or non shrink grout. 08/2011 02751 - 14 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE PAVEMENT 3.24 NONCONFORMING PAVEMENT A Remove and replace areas of pavement found by cores to be deficient in thickness by more than 10 percent, or that fail compressive strength tests, with new concrete pavement of thickness shown on Plans at no cost to the Owner. B Areas of concrete pavement found by cores to be deficient in thickness by less than 10 percent shall be remedied at the Owner's direction by one of the following methods: 1. Remove and replace using new concrete pavement of thickness shown on Plans and in accordance with the requirements of this Section at no cost to Owner. 2. Reduce the Unit Price by the ratio of the average thickness (as determined by cores) to the thickness required. C No adjustments will be made for excess thickness. 3.25 PAVEMENT MARKINGS A Restore pavement markings to match those existing in accordance with City of Pearland Standard Details and the Engineer's requirements. 3.26 PROTECTION A Barricade pavement section from use until concrete has attained minimum design strength. B On those sections of pavement to be opened to traffic,seal joints,clean pavement and place earth against pavement edges before permitting use by traffic. Such opening of pavement to traffic shall not relieve Contractor from his responsibility for Work. C Maintain concrete paving in good condition until completion of Work. D Repair defects by replacing concrete to full depth. END OF SECTION (1111.6\ 08/2011 02751 - 15 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY AND REMOVABLE REFLECTORIZED PAVEMENT MARKINGS rN Section 02762 TEMPORARY AND REMOVABLE REFLECTORIZED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Temporary retroreflective preformed pavement markings. B Wet retroreflective markers. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 02981 —Blast Cleaning of Pavement D Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 4061, "Standard Test Methods for Retroreflectance of Horizontal Coatings" b. ASTM E 1347, "Standard Test Methods for Color and Color- Difference Measurement by Tristimulus (Filter) Colorimetry" c. ASTM E 303, "Standard Test Methods for Measuring Surface Frictional Properties Using British Pendulum Tester" d. ASTM D 1056, "Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials-Sponge or Expanded Rubbber" e. ASTM E 809, "Standard Practice for Measuring Photometric Characteristics of Retroreflectors" f. ASTM E 808, "Standard Practice for Describing Retroreflection"ASTM D 1056, "Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials-Sponge or Expanded Rubbber" 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for temporary pavement markings is on a linear foot basis,for each class, measured and complete in place. B Payment includes all labor and materials required to complete installation as indicated on Plans. C Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 07/2006 02762- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY AND REMOVABLE REFLECTORIZED PAVEMENT MARKINGS B Submit manufacturer's product data for each proposed class of marking material and installation instructions for approval. Include certificate by manufacturer that each class of marking conforms to the requirements of this specification. C Submit details of manufacturer's replacement policy for each class of marker. 1.04 TEMPORARY PAVEMENT MARKING CLASSIFICATIONS A Class I- Temporary preformed pavement markings suitable for longitudinal and word and symbol markings where removability will be required. B Class II- Temporary non-removable preformed pavement markings suitable for overlay lane lines, edge lines, and channelizing lines where pavement will be resurfaced. C Class III- Class I markers with wet reflective markers added every 8 feet. D Class IV - Class II markers with wet reflective markers added every 8 feet. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A Deliver preformed plastic marking material in rolls or strips. B Store material in cool dry conditions until application. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 PREFORMED MARKINGS A Retroreflective preformed markings: White or yellow retroreflective tape on conformable backing with pigments conforming to standard highway colors. Glass beads shall be incorporated in film and a reflective layer of beads shall be bonded to the top surface of the film. Bead adhesion shall be such that beads cannot be easily removed by scratching with a thumbnail. B Preformed marking shall be precoated with pressure sensitive adhesive and shall have a demonstrated ability to adhere to roadways under climatic and traffic conditions normally encountered in a construction work zone when properly applied. C Class I markings shall be removable from portland cement and asphaltic concrete pavements intact,or in large pieces, at temperatures above 40 degrees F without use of heat, solvents, grinding, or blast cleaning. Marking film shall be removable after exposure to following minimum traffic exposure when tested on transverse test decks with rolling traffic: 1. Time in Place (days) 632 2. ADT per lane (23% trucks, 3.5 axles/unit) .. 9,000 3. Minimum Axle Hits . 13,000,000 07/2006 02762-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY AND REMOVABLE REFLECTORIZED PAVEMENT MARKINGS ("lb\ D Quality performance characteristics: CLASS I CLASS II TEST WHITE YELLOW WHITE YELLOW METHOD 1. Init. Retroreflectance (mcd•ft 2•fc'), min.. * @ 86.00, 0.2° 1770 1310 1360 820 ASTM D 4061 * @ 86.50, 1.0° 750 450 500 350 2. Daytime Reflectance 65 36 65 36 ASTM E 97 Factor"Y" %, min. 3. Init. Skid Resistance, 50 35 ASTM E 303 Avg. BPN 4. Refractive Index of Liquid Beads, min. 1.9 1.9 Immersion 5. Thickness, without 40 9 Caliper Gauge adhesive, mils, min. * (Entrance Angle, Observation Angle). 2.02 RAISED WET REFLECTIVE MARKERS A Raised Markers: Expanded rubber extrusions capable of being elastically compressed and deflected when impacted by rotating vehicle tires. Marker body shall have the following properties when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1056: 1. Compression deflection < 16 psi @ 25°deflection. 2. Oven aged compression deflection . % change, +18. 3. Compress set low 10%. 4. Water absorption <9%. 5. Density(lbs/ft) (-24). B Markers shall be precoated with pressure sensitive adhesive capable of holding markers to top of preformed marking film. C Markers shall have enclosed retroreflective lens sheeting elements attached to marker bodies with pressure sensitive adhesive. 1. Retroreflective lenses elements shall have the following initial minimum reflectance when measured in accordance with ASTM E 809: COLOR WHITE YELLOW WHITE YELLOW WHITE YELLOW WHITE YELLOW Observation Angle 0.2° 0.5° 1.0° 1.5° Coeff. of Luminous Intensity, R 1.00 0.60 0.40 0.24 0.19 0.11 0.14 0.08 (cd•fc 1) Notes: 1. Test at an entrance angle (Beta 2 horizontal entrance component described in ASTM E 808) of 4°measured from an axis perpendicular to top edge of marker when viewed from above. 07/2006 02762-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TEMPORARY AND REMOVABLE REFLECTORIZED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 2. Angle formed by reflective surface and base of marker shall be between 75° and 90°prior to measurement. 2. Marker reflective elements shall be visible at night,to motorists with low beam headlights, under the following conditions: a. Dry conditions .. 1500 feet b. Rainfall at a rate of 1" per hour 1000 feet c. Rainfall at a rate of 8" per hour 250 feet 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A Apply markings to clean dry surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations at locations indicated on Plans, or as directed by the Engineer. B Place markings on each paving lift that is to be opened to traffic prior to the end of each day's work. C Maintain markings, and replace as needed, until they are covered with subsequent paving courses or replaced by permanent markings on final lifts. 3.02 REMOVAL A Remove and obliterate markings on existing and final lifts used for redirecting traffic during construction. If blast cleaning is required,comply with requirements of Section 02981 —Blast Cleaning of Pavement. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02762-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CURB, CURB & GUTTER,AND HEADERS Section 02770 CURB, CURB & GUTTER,AND HEADERS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Reinforced concrete curb, reinforced monolithic concrete curb and gutter, and mountable curb. B Paving headers and railroad headers poured monolithically with concrete base or pavement. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 02751 —Concrete Pavement 4. Section 02335 —Subgrade 5. Section 02710—Base Course for Pavement 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for curbs and for curbs and gutter is on linear foot basis measured along face of curb. B Measurement for headers is on linear foot basis measured between lips of gutters adjacent to concrete base and measured between backs of curbs adjacent to concrete pavement. C No separate payment will be made for curbs poured monolithically with concrete pavement. D Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit details of proposed formwork for approval. C Submit proposed mix design and test data for each type and strength of concrete in Work. Include proportions and actual flexural strength obtained from design mixes at required test ages. D Submit manufacturer's certifications giving properties of reinforcing steel. Provide specimens for testing when required by the Engineer. 07/2006 02770- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CURB, CURB & GUTTER,AND HEADERS 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Concrete: Conform to material and proportion requirements for concrete of Section 02751 —Concrete Pavement. B Reinforcing Steel: Conform to material requirements for reinforcing steel of Section 02751 —Concrete Pavement. C Grout: Nonmetallic, nonshrink grout containing no chloride producing agents conforming to the following requirements. Compressive strength at 7 days 3,500 psi Compressive strength at 28 days 8,000 psi Initial set time 45 minutes Final set time 1.5 hours D Preformed Expansion Joint Material: Conform to material requirements for preformed expansion joint material of Section 02751 —Concrete Pavement. E Joint Sealing Compound: Conform to material requirements of Section 02751 — Concrete Pavement. F Mortar: Mortar finish composed of one part Portland cement and 11/2 parts of fine aggregate. Use only when approved by the Engineer. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A Prepare subgrade or base in accordance with applicable portions of Section 02335 — Subgrade or Section 02710—Base Course for Pavement. 3.02 PLACEMENT A Guideline: Set to follow top line of curb. Attach indicator to provide constant comparison between top of curb and guideline. Insure flow lines for monolithic curb and gutters conform to slopes indicated on Plans. B Forms: Brace sufficiently to maintain position during pour. Use metal templates cut to section shown on Plans. C Reinforcement: Secure in proper position so that steel will remain in place throughout placement. 07/2006 02770-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CURB, CURB & GUTTER,AND HEADERS D Joints: Place in accordance with Section 02751 —Concrete Pavement. Place dummy groove joints at 6-foot centers at right angles to curb lines. Cut dummy grooves 1/4 inch deep using an approved edging tool. E Place concrete in forms to required depth. Consolidate thoroughly. Do not permit rock pockets in form. Entirely cover top surfaces with mortar. 3.03 MANUAL FINISHING A After concrete is in place,remove front curb forms. Form exposed portions of curb, and of curb and gutter,using mule which conforms to curb shape, as shown on Plans. B Thin coat of mortar may be worked into exposed face of curb using mule and two- handled wooden darby at least 3 feet long. C Before applying final finish move 10 foot straightedge across gutter and up curb to back form of curb. Repeat until curb and gutter are true to grade and section. Lap straightedge every 5 feet. D Steel trowel finish surfaces to smooth, even finish. Make face of finished curb true and straight. E Edge outer edge of gutter with 1/4-inch edger. Finish edges with tool having 1/4 inch radius. F Finish visible surfaces and edges of finished curb and gutter free from blemishes,form g marks and tool marks. Finished curb or curb and gutter shall have uniform color, shape and appearance. 3.04 MECHANICAL FINISHING A Mechanical curb forming and finishing machines may be used instead of, or in conjunction with,previously described methods,if approved by the Engineer. Use of mechanical methods shall provide specified curb design and finish. 3.05 CURING A Immediately after finishing operations, cure exposed surfaces of curbs and gutters in accordance with Section 02751 —Concrete Pavement. 3.06 TOLERANCES A Top surfaces of curb and gutter shall have uniform width and shall be free from humps, sags or other irregularities. Surfaces of curb top,curb face and gutter shall not vary more than 1/8 inch from edge of a 10-foot long straightedge laid along them, except at grade changes. 3.07 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Maintain curbs and gutters in good condition until completion of Work. 07/2006 02770-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CURB, CURB & GUTTER,AND HEADERS B Replace damaged curbs and gutters to comply with this Section. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02770-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE SIDEWALKS Section 02771 (.111b'\ CONCRETE SIDEWALKS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Portland Cement Concrete Pavement for Concrete Sidewalks. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200 -Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350 - Submittals 3. Section 01450 - Testing Laboratory Services 4. Section 02751 - Concrete Pavement C. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM C 150, "Standard Specification for Portland Cement" b. ASTM C 94, "Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete" (Pik' c. ASTM C 33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates" d. ASTM A 615, "Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" e. ASTM D 994, "Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type)" f. ASTM D 1751, "Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non extruding and Resilient Bituminous Type) g. ASTM D 6690, "Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot-Applied, for Concrete and Asphaltic Pavements" h. ASTM C 39, "Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Concrete" i. ASTM C 31, "Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field" j. ASTM C 138, "Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight),Yield, and Air Content(Gravimetric) of Concrete" k. ASTM C 231,"Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method" 1. ASTM C 42, "Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete" 2. Texas Accessibility Standards of Architectural Barriers Act, Article 9102, Texas Civil Statues 5/2013 02771 - 1 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE SIDEWALKS 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for concrete sidewalks is on square foot basis. B. Payment includes all labor and materials required for installation of concrete sidewalks,joints and curing material. No payment will be made for work in areas where sidewalk has been removed for contractor's convenience. C. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform to requirements of Section 01350 - Submittals. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete: Conform to material and proportion requirements for concrete of Section 02751 - Concrete Paving. B. Reinforcing Steel: conform to material requirements of Section 02751 - Concrete Paving for reinforcing steel. Use No. 4 reinforcing bars. C. Preformed Expansion Joint Material: Conform to material requirements for preformed expansion joint material of Section 02751 - Concrete Paving. D. Expansion Joint Filler: Conform to material requirements for expansion joint material of Section 02751 - Concrete Pavement. E. Forms: Use straight, unwarped wood or metal forms with nominal depth equal to or greater than proposed sidewalk thickness. F. Sand Bed: Conform to material requirements for bank run sand. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 REPLACEMENT A. Replace sidewalks which are removed or damaged during construction with thickness and width equivalent to one removed or damaged unless otherwise shown on Drawings. Finish surface (exposed aggregate, brick pavers, etc.) to match existing sidewalk. B. Provide replaced and new sidewalks with wheelchair ramps when sidewalk intersects curb at street. 5/2013 02771 -2 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE SIDEWALKS 3.02 PREPARATION A. Identify and protect utilities which are to remain. B. Protect living trees, other plant growth and features designated to remain. C. Conduct clearing and grubbing operations in accordance with Section 02200 - Site Preparation. D. Determine sidewalk horizontal and vertical alignment to facilitate drainage and prevent ponding. Location and slopes must be in compliance with Texas Accessibility Academy Standards latest edition and revisions. E. Excavate subgrade 6 inches beyond outside lines of sidewalk. Shape to line, grade and cross section. Compact 6 inches of select fill to minimum of 95% maximum dry density at optimal or above optimal moisture content as per ASTM D698. For soils with plasticity index above 40 percent, stabilize soil with lime in accordance with Section 02335 - Subgrade. Compact subgrade to minimum of 90 percent maximum dry density at optimum to 3 percent above optimum moisture content, as determined by ASTM D 698. No separate pay for this requirement. This work shall be subsidiary to sidewalk square foot unit pricing. F. Immediately after subgrade is prepared, cover with compacted sand bed to depth as shown on Drawings. Lay concrete when sand is moist but not saturated. 3.03 PLACEMENT A. Setting Forms: Straight, unwarped wood or metal forms with nominal depth 1/2" greater than proposed sidewalk thickness. Securely stake forms to line and grade. Maintain position during concrete placement. B. Reinforcement: 1. Install No. 4 reinforcing bars. 2. Install reinforcing steel as shown on the Drawings. Lay longitudinal bars in walk continuously through expansion joints. Reinforcing bars shall not vary from plan placement by more than 1/4 inch. 3. Use sufficient number of chairs to support reinforcement in manner to maintain reinforcement in center of slab vertically during placement. 4. Drill dowels into existing paving, sidewalk and driveways, secure with epoxy and provide headers as required. C. Expansion Joints: Install expansion joints with load transfer units in accordance (11/11'\, with Section 02751 - Concrete Pavement. 5/2013 02771 -3 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE SIDEWALKS D. Place concrete in forms to specified depth and tamp thoroughly with "jitterbug" tamp, or other acceptable method. Bring mortar to surface. E. Strike off to smooth finish with wood strike board. Finish smoothly with wood hand float. Brush across sidewalk lightly with fine-haired brush. F. Apply coating to wheelchair ramp with contrasting color. G. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, mark off sidewalk joints 1/2 inch deep, at spacing equal to width of walk. Use joint tool equal in width to edging tool. H. Finish edges with tool having 3/8 inch radius. I. After concrete has set sufficiently, refill space along sides of sidewalk to 1 inch from top of walk with suitable material. Tamp until firm and solid, place sod as applicable. Dispose of excess material. Repair driveways and parking lots damaged by sidewalk excavation in accordance with Section 02980 - Pavement Repair and Resurfacing. 3.04 CURING A. Conform to requirements of Section 02751 - Concrete Pavement. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01450 - Testing Laboratory Services. B. Compressive Strength Test Specimens: Four test specimens for compressive strength test will be made in accordance with ASTM C 31 for each 30 cubic yards or less of sidewalk that is placed on one day. Two specimens will be tested at 7 days. Remaining two specimens will be tested at 28 days. Specimens will be tested in accordance with ASTM C 39. Minimum compressive strength: 2500 psi at 7 days and 3500 psi at 28 days. C. Yield test for cement content per cubic yard of concrete will be made in accordance with ASTM C 138. When cement content is found to be less than that specified per cubic yard, reduce batch weights until amount of cement per cubic yard of concrete conforms to requirements. D. If the Contractor places concrete without notifying the City, Contractor will have the concrete tested by means of core test as specified in ASTM C 42. When concrete does not meet specification, cost of test will be deducted from payment. Contractor will replace the cored section of sidewalk at no cost to City. E. Sampling of fresh concrete shall be in accordance with ASTM C 172. 5/2013 02771 -4 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE SIDEWALKS F. Take slump tests when cylinders are made and when concrete slump appears excessive. G. Concrete shall be acceptable when average of two 28 day compression tests is equal to or greater than minimum 28 day strength specified. H. If either of two tests on field samples is less than average of two tests by more than 10 percent, that entire test shall be considered erratic and not indicative of concrete strength. Core samples will be required of in-place concrete in question. I. If 28 day laboratory test indicates that concrete of low strength has been placed, test concrete in question by taking cores as directed by Project Manager. Take and test at least three representative cores as specified in ASTM C 42 and deduct cost from payment due. 3.06 NONCONFORMING CONCRETE A. Remove and replace areas that fail compressive strength tests, with concrete of thickness shown on Drawings. B. Replace nonconforming sections at no additional cost to City. Replacement section shall be no less in length than the width of sidewalks. (11. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Maintain newly placed concrete in good condition until completion of Work. B. Replace damaged areas at no cost to City. END OF SECTION rh`N, 5/2013 02771 -5 of 5 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS Section 02775 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Portland Cement Concrete Pavement for Driveways. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350— Submittals 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 4. Section 02751 - Concrete Pavement C. Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM C 94, "Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete" b. ASTM C 33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates" c. ASTM C 260 d. ASTM A 615, "Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" e. ASTM D 994, "Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type)" f. ASTM D 1751, "Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Type) g. ASTM D 6690, "Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot-Applied, for Concrete and Asphaltic Pavements" h. ASTM C 39, "Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Concrete" i. ASTM C 31, "Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field" j. ASTM C 143, "Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete" k. ASTM C 231,"Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method" 1. ASTM C 171, "Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete" m. ASTM C 309, "Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane- Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete" n. ASTM C 42, "Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete" 5/2013 02775- 1 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for concrete driveways is on square yard basis and includes removal of existing driveway, driveway curbs, select fill subgrade and reinforcement dowels. B. Payment includes all labor and materials required for installation of concrete driveways,joints and curing material. No payment will be made for work in areas where driveway has been removed for contractor's convenience. C. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B. Submit proposed mix design and test data for each type and strength of concrete in Work. Include proportions and actual compressive strength obtained from design mixes at required test ages. C. Submit product data for joint sealing compound and proposed sealing equipment for approval. D. Submit samples of dowel cup, metal supports, and deformed metal strip for approval. 2.0 PRODUCTS, 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete: Conform to material and proportion requirements for concrete of Section 02751 - Concrete Paving. B. Reinforcing Steel: Conform to material requirements for reinforcing steel of Section 02751 - Concrete Paving. Use No. 4 reinforcing bars. C. Subgrade Materials: Conform to subgrade material requirements of Section 02335 - Subgrade. D. Joints: Conform to concrete joint requirements of Section 02751 - Concrete Paving. 5/2013 02775-2 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS (11111"\ 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify compacted subgrade is ready to support imposed loads and meets compaction requirements. B. Verify lines and grades are correct. 3.02 PREPARATION A. When removing existing concrete, all sawcuts shall be full depth unless otherwise approved by City. B. Properly prepare, shape and compact each section of subgrade before placing forms, reinforcing steel or concrete. C. Excavate subgrade 6 inches beyond outside lines of driveway. Shape to line, grade and cross section. Place compacted select fill as needed to bring grade up. Select fill shall be compacted to minimum of 95% maximum dry density at optimal or above optimal moisture content as per ASTM D698. Stabilize top 8" of subgrade with lime in accordance with Section 02335 - Subgrade. Compact subgrade to minimum of 90 percent maximum dry density at optimum to 3 percent above optimum moisture content, as determined by ASTM D 698. No separate pay for this requirement. This work shall be subsidiary to driveway square yard unit pricing. 3.03 FORMS A. Side Forms: Use clean forms of approved shape and section. Preferred depth of form shall be equal to required edge thickness of pavement. Forms with depths greater or less than required edge thickness of pavement will be permitted, provided difference between form depth and edge thickness if not greater than 1 inch, and further provided that forms of depth less than pavement edge are brought to required edge thickness by securely attaching wood or metal strips to bottom of form, or by grouting under form. Bottom flange of form shall be same size as thickness of pavement. Aluminum forms are not allowed. All forms shall be approved by the Engineer. Length of form sections shall be not less than 10 feet and each section shall provide for staking in position with not less than 3 pins. Flexible or curved forms of wood or metal of proper radius shall be used for curves of 200 foot radius or less. Forms shall have ample strength and shall be provided with adequate devices for secure setting so that when in-place they will withstand, without visible springing or settlement, impact and vibration of finishing machine. In no case shall base width be less than 8 inches for form 8 inches or more in height. Forms shall be free from warp, bends or kinks and shall be sufficiently true to provide reasonable straight edge on concrete. Top of each form section, when tested with straight edge, shall conform to requirements specified for surface of completed pavement. Provide sufficient forms for satisfactory placement of 5/2013 02775-3 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS concrete. For short radius curves, forms less than 10 feet in length or curved forms may be used. For curb returns at street intersections and driveways, wood forms of good grade and quality may be used. B. Form Setting: 1. Rest forms directly on subgrade. Do not shim with pebbles or dirt. Accurately set forms to required grade and alignment and, during entire operation of placing, compacting and finishing of concrete, do not deviate from this grade and alignment more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet of length. Do not remove forms for at least 8 hours after completion of finishing operations. 3.04 REINFORCING STEEL AND JOINT ASSEMBLIES A. Accurately place reinforcing steel and joint assemblies and position them securely. Wire reinforcing bars securely together at intersections and splices. Bars and coatings shall be free of rust, dirt or other foreign matter when concrete is placed. Place all reinforcing steel and secure to chairs. All reinforcing steel must be positively supported before pour begins. B. Place pavement joint assemblies at required locations and elevations, and rigidly secure all parts in required positions. Install dowel bars accurately in joint assemblies as shown, each parallel to pavement surface and to center line of pavement. Rigidly secure in required position to prevent displacement during placing and finishing of concrete. Accurately cut header boards, joint filler and other material used for forming joints to receive each dowel bar. Drill dowels into existing pavement, secure with epoxy, and provide paving headers, as required, to provide rigid pavement sections. 3.05 PLACEMENT A. Place concrete only in rain-free days when air temperature taken in shade and away from artificial heat is above 35 degrees F and rising. Concrete shall not be placed when temperature is below 40 degrees F and falling. When concrete temperature is 85 degrees F or above, do not exceed 60 minutes between introduction of cement to the aggregates and discharge. When the weather is such that the concrete temperature would exceed 90 degrees F, employ effective means, such as pre-cooling of aggregates and mixing water, using ice or placing at night, as necessary to maintain concrete temperature, as placed, below 90 degrees F. B. Place concrete within 60 minutes of mixing. Remove and dispose of concrete not placed within this period. C. Concrete slump during placement shall be 2 to 4 inches. 5/2013 02775-4 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS D. Deposit concrete rapidly and continuously on subgrade or subbase in successive Cik\ batches. Distribute concrete to required depth and for entire width of placement in manner that will require as little rehandling as possible. Where hand spreading is necessary, distribute concrete with shovels or by other approved methods. Use only concrete rakes in handling concrete. E. Take special care in placing and spading concrete against forms and at longitudinal and transverse joints to prevent honeycombing. Voids in edge of finished pavement will be cause for rejection. 3.06 FINISHING A. Finish concrete driveway with power-driven transverse finishing machines or by hand finishing methods. 1. Use transverse finishing machine to make at least two trips over each area. Make last trip continuous run of not less than 40 feet. After transverse screeding, use hand-operated longitudinal float to test and level surface to required grade. 2. Hand finish with mechanical strike and tamping template as wide as pavement to be finished. Shape template to pavement section. Move strike template forward in direction of placement, maintaining slight excess of material in front of cutting edge. Make at least two trips over each area. Screed pavement surface to required section. Work screed with combined transverse and longitudinal motion in direction work is progressing. Maintain screed in contact with forms. Use longitudinal float to level surface. B. On narrow strips and transitions, finish concrete driveway by hand. Thoroughly work concrete around reinforcement and embedded fixtures. Strike off concrete with strike-off screed. Move strike-off screed forward with combined transverse and longitudinal motion in direction work is progressing, maintaining screed in contact with forms, and maintaining slight excess of materials in front of cutting edge. Tamp concrete with tamping template. Use longitudinal float to level surface. C. While concrete is still workable, give surface final belting to produce a uniform surface of gritty texture. Perform belting with short rapid transverse strokes having sweeping longitudinal motion. 3.07 JOINTS AND JOINT SEALING A. When new work is adjacent to existing concrete, place joints at same location as /► existing joints in adjacent pavement. ( B. Contractor may use sawed joints as an alternate to contraction and weakened plane joints. Circular cutter shall be capable of cutting straight line groove minimum of 5/2013 02775-5 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS 1/2 inch wide. Depth shall be one quarter of pavement thickness plus 1/2 inch. Commence sawing as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit cutting ' 1'1.4) without chipping, spalling or tearing and prior to initiation of cracks. Once sawing has commenced, it shall be continued until completed. Make saw cut with one pass. Complete sawing within 24 hours of concrete placement. Saw joints at required spacing consecutively in sequence of concrete placement. C. Concrete Saw: Provide sawing equipment adequate in power to complete sawing to required dimensions and within required time. Provide at least one standby saw in good working order. Maintain an ample supply of saw blades at work site at all times during sawing operations. Sawing equipment shall be on job at all times during concrete placement. D. Provide 3/4 inch expansion joints conforming to ASTM D 1751 across driveway in line with street face of sidewalks, at existing concrete driveways, and along intersections with sidewalks and other structures. Extend expansion joint material full depth of slab. Where dowels are used, wrap or sleeve one end. E. Seal joints only when surface and joints are dry, ambient temperature is above 50 degrees F but less than 85 degrees F, and weather is not foggy or rainy. F. Joint sealing equipment shall be in first-class working condition, and be approved by the Engineer. Use concrete grooving machine or power-operated wire brush and other equipment such as plow, brooms, brushes, blowers or hydro or abrasive cleaning as required to produce satisfactory joints. G. Clean joints of loose scale, dirt, dust and curing compound. Term joint includes wide joint spaces, expansion joints, dummy groove joints or cracks, either preformed or natural. Remove loose material from concrete surfaces adjacent to joints. H. Fill joints neatly with joint sealer to depth shown. Pour sufficient joint sealer into joints so that,upon completion, surface of sealer within joint will be 1/4 inch below level of adjacent surface or at elevation as directed. I. Install the first expansion joint at Right-of-Way. The expansion joint shall be spaced at intervals same as the width of driveway. Expansion joint shall be placed at half of the width of the driveway if the width of driveway exceeds 20'. 3.08 CONCRETE CURING A. Concrete driveway shall be cured by protecting it against loss of moisture for period of not less than 72 hours immediately upon completion of finishing operations. Do not use membrane curing for concrete pavement to be overlaid by asphaltic concrete. B. Where curing requires use of water, curing shall have prior right to all water supply or supplies. Failure to provide sufficient cover material shall be cause for immediate suspension of concreting operations. 5/2013 02775-6 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS C. Cotton Mat Curing: 1. Immediately after finishing surface, and after concrete has taken its initial set, completely cover surface with cotton mats, thoroughly saturated before application, in such manner that they will contact surface of pavement equally at all points. 2. Mats shall remain on pavement for specified curing period. Keep mats saturated so that, when lightly compressed, water will drip freely from them. Keep banked earth or cotton mat covering edges saturated. D. Liquid Membrand-Forming Compounds: 1. Immediately after finishing surface, and after concrete has taken its initial set, apply liquid membrane-forming compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.09 TOLERANCES A. Test entire surface before initial set and correct irregularities or undulations. Bring surface within requirements of following test and then finish. Place 10 foot straightedge parallel and longitudinal to center of driveway. Correct any depressions and all high spots. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01450 —Testing Laboratory Services and Section 02751 - Concrete Paving. 3.11 PAVEMENT MARKINGS A. Restore pavement markings to match those existing in accordance with City of Pearland Standard Details and the Engineer's requirements. 3.12 PROTECTION A. Barricade pavement section from use until concrete has attained minimum design strength. B. On those sections of driveway to be opened to traffic, seal joints, clean pavement and place earth against pavement edges before permitting use by traffic. Such opening of driveway to traffic shall not relieve Contractor from his responsibility rfor Work. C. Maintain concrete paving in good condition until completion of Work. 5/2013 02775-7 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS D. Repair defects by replacing concrete to full depth and limits as directed by Project Manager. Replace nonconforming work at no additional cost to City. END OF SECTION 5/2013 02775-8 of 8 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION Section 02811 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Pipe and fittings, valves, sprinkler heads, accessories. B Control system and wiring for automatic control irrigation system. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 02931 —Landscape and Tree Planting 4. Section 01310—Coordination and Meetings D Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM D 2564, "Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item no separate payment will be made for landscape irrigation under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. B If landscape irrigation is included as a Bid Item, measurement will be based on the Units shown in Section 00300—Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200— Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit manufacturer's data and details for landscape irrigation system to include pressure ratings, rated capacities, and settings of selected models for the following: 1. General-duty valves. 2. Specialty valves. 3. Control-valve boxes. 4. Sprinklers. 5. Irrigation accessories. 6. Controllers. C Evidence of State of Texas irrigation license and required experience. 12/2014 02811 - 1 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION D Shop Drawings: Show irrigation system piping, including plan layout, and locations, types, sizes, capacities, and flow characteristics of irrigation system piping components.Include water meters,backflow preventers,valves,piping,sprinklers and accessories,controls,and wiring. Show areas of sprinkler spray and overspray. Show wire size and number of conductors for each control cable. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A Irrigation Lateral Lines: Downstream from control valves to sprinklers, specialties, and drain valves. Piping is under pressure during flow. B Drain Piping: Downstream from circuit-piping drain valves. Piping is not under pressure. C Irrigation Main Piping: Downstream from point of connection to water distribution piping to, and including, control valves. Piping is under water-distribution-system pressure. D Architect: The word Architect as used herein shall refer to the Owner's authorized representative or the Landscape Architect or the design engineer. 1.05 RECORD AND AS-BUILT DRAWINGS A The Contractor shall provide and keep up to date and complete"as-built"record set of drawings which shall be corrected daily and show every change from the original drawings and specifications and the exact "as-built" locations, sizes, and kinds of equipment. This set of drawings shall be kept on the site and shall be used only as a record set. B These drawings shall also serve as work progress sheets and shall be available at all times for inspection and shall be kept in a location designated by the Architect. Should the record as-built progress sheets not be available for review or not up-to-date at the time of any inspection, it will be assumed no work has been completed and the Contractor will be assessed the cost of that site visit at the current billing rate of the Architect.No other observations shall take place prior to payment of that assessment. C The Contractor shall make neat and legible notations on the as-built progress sheets daily as the work proceeds, showing the work as actually installed. D Before the date of the final inspection, the Contractor shall transfer all information from the "as-built" prints to a mylar. Contractor shall use symbols and notation consistent with original drawings. E The Contractor shall dimension from two(2)permanent points of reference,building comers, sidewalk, or road intersections, etc., the location of the following items: 1. Connection to existing water lines 2. Connection to existing electrical power 3. Gate valves 4. Routing of sprinkler pressure lines (dimensions max. 100' along routing) 12/2014 02811 -2 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 5. Sprinkler control valves 6. Routing of control wiring 7. Quick coupling valves 8. Other related equipment as directed by the Architect 9. Sleeve locations 1.06 EXPLANATION OF DRAWINGS A Due to the scale of drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, sleeves, etc., which may be required. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finished conditions affecting all of his work and plan his work accordingly, furnishing such fittings,etc.,as may be required to meet such conditions.Drawings are generally diagrammatic and indicative of the work to be installed. The work shall be installed in such a manner as to avoid conflicts between irrigation systems,planting, and architectural features. B All work called for on the drawings by notes or details shall be furnished and installed whether or not specifically mentioned in the specifications. C The Contractor shall not willfully install the irrigation system as shown on the drawings when it is obvious in the field that obstructions, grade differences or discrepancies in area dimensions exist that might not have been considered in engineering. Such obstructions or differences should be brought to the attention of the Owner's authorized representative. In the event this notification is not performed,the irrigation contractor shall assume full responsibility for any revisions necessary. D No irrigation shall be required for undisturbed natural areas or undisturbed existing trees. 1.07 CONTROLLER CHARTS A As-built drawings shall be approved by the Architect before controller charts are prepared. 1. Index sheet stating Contractor's address and telephone number, list of equipment with name and addresses of local manufacturer's representative. 2. Catalog and parts sheets on every material and equipment installed under this contract. 3. Guarantee statement. 4. Complete operating and maintenance instruction on all major equipment. 1.08 UNIFIED DEVELOPMENT CODE (UDC) REFERENCES A Except for single-family lots and developments,all required landscaping areas shall be 100% irrigated by one of, or a combination of, the following methods: 1. An automatic underground irrigation system: 2. A drip irrigation system; 3. A hose attachment within 100 feet of all plant material, provided, however , that a hose attachment within 200 feet of all plant material in non-street yards shall be sufficient 12/2014 02811 -3 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION B Irrigation zone design-A site plan,at a readable and defined scale, shall be submitted illustrating zones, delineating micro-irrigation zones and areas utilizing irrigation techniques other than micro-irrigation. Fifty (50) percent of the on-site green space shall be allowed to utilize irrigation techniques other than micro-irrigation.Turf areas shall be on separate irrigation zones from other landscaping plant zones.The irrigation system should be prepared by a licensed irrigator and designed to accommodate separate landscape plant zones based on different watering requirements unless approved by the Parks Director as indicated in the UDC Section 4.2.2.5, Item 8.D.1. C Overspray/ Runoff - All irrigation systems shall be designed to avoid overspray / runoff, low head drainage, or other similar conditions where water flows onto or over adjacent property, non-irrigated areas, roadways, walkways, structures, or water features. Narrow areas (four feet wide or less) shall not be irrigated unless micro- irrigation is utilized. D Landscaping - a site plan shall be submitted identifying all existing vegetation to be preserved,proposed turf, and other landscape areas. Installed trees and plants should be grouped together into landscape plant zones according to water and cultural (soil, climate and light) requirements. Plant groupings based on water requirements are as follows: natural, drought tolerant, and oasis. E Turf/Turfgrass-A maximum of fifty(50)percent of green space may be planted with turf grass configured with a permanent irrigation system.Turfgrass planted in excess of this limitation shall not have a permanent irrigation system.Micro-irrigation shall not be used on turfgrass unless approved by the Parks Director as indicated in the UDC Section 4.2.2.5, Item 8.D.1. 1.09 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A Electric solenoid controlled underground irrigation system. B Source Power: 120 volt 1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100,by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B All irrigation systems shall be designed and sealed in accordance with the Texas Licensed Irrigations Act and shall be professionally installed. C Installer-Installation of Irrigation System shall be performed under the direction of a State of Texas licensed irrigator with not less than 5 years' experience in this type of work. D Manufacturer's Directions: Manufacturer's directions and detailed drawings shall be followed in all cases where the manufacturers of articles used in this contract furnish directions covering points not shown in the drawings and specifications. 12/2014 02811 -4 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION E Ordinances,Codes and Regulations:All local,municipal and state laws,and rules and regulations governing or relating to any portion of this work are hereby incorporated into and made a part of these specifications,and their provisions shall be carried out by the Contractor. Anything contained in these specifications shall not be construed to conflict with any of the above rules and regulations and requirements of the same. However, when these specifications and drawings call for or describe materials, workmanship,or construction of a better quality,higher standard,or larger size than is required by the above rules and regulations, these specifications and drawings shall take precedence. 1.11 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A Conform to applicable code for piping and component requirements. 1.12 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A Convene one week prior to commencing work of this Section. 1.13 COORDINATION A Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01310—Coordination and Meetings B Coordinate work under provisions of Section 02931 —Landscape and Tree Planting. C Coordinate the work with site landscape grading and delivery of plant life. 1.14 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND HANDLING A Materials shall be delivered in manufacturer's unopened packaging labeled to indicate manufacturer's name and product identification. Ensure that packaging and labeling remain intact until installation. Materials shall be stored protected from the elements, including direct sunlight. B Pipes shall be handled so as to prevent them from being damaged and to maintain their straightness. Pipe ends shall be wrapped;Pipes shall be stored on beds the full length of the pipes; Damaged or dented pipes or fittings shall not be used. 1.15 SUBSTITUTIONS A If the Irrigation Contractor wishes to substitute any equipment or materials for those equipment or materials listed on the irrigation drawings and specifications,he may do so by providing the following information to the Owner's authorized representative for approval: 1. Provide a statement indicating the reason for making the substitution. Use a separate sheet of paper for each item to be substituted. 2. Provide descriptive catalog literature,performance charts and flow charts for (7- each item to be substituted. 3. Provide the amount of cost savings if the substituted item is approved. 12/2014 02811 -5 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION B Owner's authorized representative shall have the sole responsibility in accepting or rejecting any substituted item as an approved equal to those equipment and materials listed on the irrigation drawings and specifications. 1:16 EXTRA MATERIALS A Furnish extra components listed as Extra Items in Section 00300—Bid Proposal. 1. Two sprinkler heads of each type and size. 2. Two valve box keys. 3. Two wrenches for each type head core and for removing and installing each type head. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ram, products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.02 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS A Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, annealed temper. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B 16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B 16.22,wrought-copper,solder joint fittings.Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated. 2. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy,hexagonal-stock body,with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder joint or threaded ends. B Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K,water tube, drawn temper. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B 16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B 16.22,wrought-copper,solder-joint fittings.Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated. 2. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body,with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder joint or threaded ends. C Mainline PVC pipe: 1. Pressure Main Line: 12/2014 02811 -6 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION a. All main line shall be schedule 40 with solvent welded joints. b. Pipe shall be made from an NSF approved Type I, Grade I, PVC compound conforming to ASTM resin specification D1785. All pipe must meet requirements as set forth in Federal Specification PS-22-70, with an appropriate standard dimension(S.D.R.)(Solvent-weld pipe). 2. PVC Non-Pressure Lateral Line Piping: a. Non-pressure buried lateral line piping shall be PVC class 200 with solvent-weld joints. b. Pipe shall be made from NSF approved, Type I, Grade II PVC com- pound conforming to ASTM resin specification D I 784. All pipes must meet requirements set forth in Federal Specification PS-22-70 with an appropriate standard dimension ratio. 3. Fittings 4"and larger shall be push-on Ductile Iron designed and manufactured using ASTM A-536 Grade 70-50-05 ductile iron with tensile strength of 70,000 psi such as manufactured by,Harco or approved equal. 4. Fittings 3" and smaller shall be Schedule 40, I-2, II-I NSF approved conforming to ASTM test procedure D2466 PVC solvent-weld fittings. 5. Solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent-weld pipe and fittings shall be of Christie's Red Hot Blue Glue and Primer. 6. All PVC pipe must bear the following markings: a. Manufacturer's name. b. Nominal pipe size. c. Schedule or class. d. Pressure rating in P.S.I. e. NSF (National Sanitation Foundation) approval. f. Date of expiration. 7. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, material designation, applicable I.P.S., schedule number and NSF seal of approval D Irrigation Lateral Line pipe 1. Pipes 1/2 inch diameter and larger ASTM D 2231, PVC, 1120 or 1220, SDR 21.0, 200 PSI 2. Pipes 1/4 inch diameter: ASTM D 2241, PVC, 1120 or 1220, SDR 13.5, 315 PSI E Fittings for Threaded Joints 1. ASTM D 2466, PVC, Schedule 80 F Length of pipes used 1. Use of pipe less than five(5)feet in length is prohibited unless otherwise noted on the plans. G No use of small scrap material to extend water lines 2.03 GENERAL DUTY VALVES A Gate valves 4" and smaller shall be MSS SP-80, Class 125, Type 1, nonrising-stem, bronze body with solid wedge, threaded ends, and malleable-iron hand wheel. 12/2014 02811 -7 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION B Gate valves 3"and smaller shall be similar to those manufactured by Nibco,Hammond or approved equal C All gate valves shall be installed per installation detail. D Install six (6) inches of pee gravel into bottom of all valve boxes. E Gate valves 6 inch and larger shall be cast or ductile iron. They shall conform to AWWA C-509. Stem shall be fitted with a 2" x2" square wrench nut and shall be opened counter-clockwise. Stem extension shall be added to bring operating nut to within 2 (two) feet of finished grade. 2.04 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A Plastic Automatic Control Valves:Molded-plastic body,normally closed, diaphragm type with manual flow adjustment, and operated by 24-V ac solenoid. 1. All electric control valves shall be of the same manufacturer. 2. All electric control valves shall have a manual flow adjustment and pressure regulating module. 3. Provide and install one control valve box for each electric control valve. 4. Electric remote control valve shall be Hunter ICV Series. 5. Install six (6) inches of pea gravel into bottom of all valve boxes. B Automatic Drain Valves 1. Spring-loaded-ball type of construction and designed to open for drainage if line pressure drops below 21/2 to 3 psi. C Quick-Couplers 1. Factory-fabricated,bronze or brass,two-piece assembly.Include coupler water- seal valve; removable upper body with spring-loaded or weighted, rubber- covered cap;hose swivel with ASME B 1.20.7,3/4-11.5NH threads for garden hose on outlet; and operating key. a. Manufacturers: i. Hunter 2. All quick couplers shall be installed using "O"-ring style swing joint and located in 10" round valve box with purple lids. D Remote Control-Valve Boxes 1. Box and cover, with open bottom and openings for piping; designed for installing flush with, grade. Include size as required for valves and service. 2. Valve boxes shall be heavy duty plastic 17 inch by 11-3/4 inch by 12 inch depth, black with black cover. 3. Valve box shall be Series 1419, non-hinged, non-bolt cover, by Carson Industries, Inc., or approved equal. a. Manufacturers: i. Carson Industries, LLC. ii. Christy Concrete Products, Inc. E Gate Valve and Control Wire Splice Boxes 12/2014 02811 -8 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 1. Gate valves and control wire splice boxes shall be heavy duty plastic 10 inch diameter by 101/4 inch deep,black with black cover,No. 910-12B, by Carson Industries, Inc. or approved equal. F Drainage Backfill 1. Cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 3/8 inch minimum to 1 inch maximum. 2.05 SPRINKLERS A Brass or plastic housing and corrosion-resistant interior parts designed for uniform coverage over entire spray area indicated,at available water pressure.Manufacturers: Hunter Industries. B Flush, Surface Sprinklers or VANs (Variable Angle Nozzle): Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment. C Bubblers: Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment. D Shrubbery Sprinklers: Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment. E Pop-up, Spray Sprinklers: Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment and stainless-steel retraction spring. F Pop-up, Rotary, Spray Sprinklers: Gear drive, full-circle and adjustable part- circle types. G Pop-up, Rotary, Impact Sprinklers: Impact drive, full-circle and part-circle types. H Aboveground, Rotary, Impact Sprinklers: Impact drive, full-circle and part- circle types. I Matched precipitation rates - Sprays and rotors shall have matching application rates within each irrigation zone. J MP Rotators: wind resistant multi stream nozzle 2.06 CONTROLLERS A The ACC controller shall be capable of two-wire decoder control of up to 99 stations via a plug-in decoder output module. The decoder output module shall be field- installable without tools.The decoder output module shall have an intrinsic capability of up to 99 stations, and shall occupy 3 modular expansion slots inside the ACC controller cabinet. B The decoder output module shall have 6 two-wire output paths to the field. The decoders may be wired in sequence over any combination of the two-wire paths, including all 99 on a single two-wire path.Each path may extend up to 10,000 ft.to the end of the wire run over 14 AWG(1.5mm dia.)wire,or 15,000 ft.over 12 AWG(2mm dia.) 12/2014 02811 -9 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION C The wire paths shall be twisted pair; solid-core, color-coded red/blue pairs with each conductor in a polyethylene jacket suitable for direct burial. The two-wire paths shall be Hunter Industries Model IDWIRE I for 14 AWG (1.5mm) conductors, or Model IDWIRE2 for 12 AWG (2mm) conductors for extended range (over 10,000 ft., up to 15,000 ft.). D All connections in the two-wire paths(outside the controller enclosure)shall be made with 3M DBR-6 waterproof, strain relieving direct burial connectors,or exact equals. Decoder output to solenoid connections shall be made with 3M DBY waterproof, strain-relieving connectors or exact equals.No substitution of wire or wire connection specifications is permissible. All connections, tees, and splices shall be positioned in valve boxes in valve boxes for future location and service. E One Decoder per valve, installed in the valve box is required unless otherwise approved. F The installer shall provide adequate earth ground(not to exceed I 0 Ohms)and connect it to one of the decoder ground leads every 750 ft., or every 10th decoder module, whichever is shorter. Also install on each dead end of the wire path. G The ICD decoders and Sensor Decoders shall be UL and c-UL listed,and shall be CE and C-tick approved. H Final location of automatic controllers shall be approved by the Owner's authorized representative. I Unless otherwise noted on the plans, the 120 volt electrical power to the automatic controller location to be furnished by others. The final electric hook-up shall be the responsibility of the Irrigation Contractor. J If two wire systems are not fitting to the system needed, another Hunter Controller with conventional wiring will be used. K Controllers will be capable of communicating with offsite Hunter software, unless otherwise approved by owner. L Control Equipment - Irrigation control equipment shall include and automatic irrigation controller with the following features; program flexibility such as repeat cycles and multiple program capabilities; battery back-up to retain the irrigation programs; and a rain sensor device. 2.07 WIRING A Wiring: AWG-ULUF 600 volt with solid-copper conductors and insulated cable; suitable for direct burial. 1. Manufacturers: 12/2014 02811 - 10 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION a. Paige Cable b. Regency Wire and Cable c. Approved equal B Feeder-Circuit Cables:No. 12 AWG minimum,between building and controllers and runs over 1,000 LF. Low-Voltage, Branch-Circuit Cables: No. 14 AWG minimum, between controllers and automatic control valves; color coded different from feeder- circuit-cable jacket color;with jackets of different colors for multiple-cable installation in same trench. C Install 3 spare wires from each controller to farthest valve in each direction. D Where more than one(1)wire is placed in a trench,the wiring shall be taped together at intervals of ten (10) feet. E An expansion curl shall be provided within three(3) feet of each wire connection. Expansion curl shall be of sufficient length at each splice connection at each electric control, so that in case of repair, the valve bonnet may be brought to the surface without disconnecting the control wires. F Control wires shall be laid loosely in trench without stress or stretching of control wire conductors. G All splices shall be made with Scotch-Lok #3576 Connector Sealing Packs, DBY (Direct Bury) Splice by 3M or approved equal. Use one splice per connector sealing pack. H Field splices between the automatic controller and electrical control valves, less than 500' apart, will not be allowed without prior approval of the Architect. I All field splices shall be installed in a 10"round valve box as specified in section 2.04 2.08 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A Backflow Preventers shall be bronze and copper,pressure vacuum breaker assembly Febco No.765 by Febco Sales,Inc. (CMB Industries), or approved equal. Size as per drawings. 1. Reduced Pressure Backflow: Febco No. 825Y 2. Double Check Assembly: Febco No. 850 3. Or approved equal. 2.09 REMOTE CONTROL VALVE TIES A Remote control valve ties shall be Christy's Valve I.D.tag model ID-STD-Y with wire to attach numbered tag to valve. 2.10 SOLVENT CEMENT FOR SOLVENT WELDED JOINTS 12/2014 02811 - 11of19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION A CHRISTY'S RED HOT BLUE GLUE T. Christy Enterprises,Inc.,or approved equal. Use a compatible primer recommended by the solvent cement manufacturer. 2.11 SEALANT FOR THREADED JOINTS UNDER CONSTANT PRESSURE A RECTOR SEAL LIQUID TEFLON by Rector Seal Corp., or approved equal. 2.12 SLEEVES UNDER PAVING FOR CONTROL WIRE AND IRRIGATION LINES A ASTM D 2455, PVC, Schedule 40 sized as shown on drawings. 2.13 FITTINGS FOR THREADED JOINTS A ASTM D 2466, PVC, Schedule 80 2.14 BACKFLOW ENCLOSURES A The backflow enclosure shall be of a vandal and weather resistant nature manufactured entirely of formed tubing and rod,coated with a performance polymer alloy coating to prevent injury. The mounting base and locking mechanism shall be manufactured entirely of metal or fiber glass.The locking mechanism shall be of the full release type which allows for complete removal of the enclosure from its mounting base without the use of tools. The handle controlling the locking mechanism shall be concealed within the surface of the enclosure and provide for a padlock. B The backflow enclosure shall be Strong Box Model manufactured by V.I.T.Products Inc., 800-729-1314. No. SBBC-30CR Or approved equal. C Hot Box Enclosure—CDR Systems Corporation or approved equal. 2.15 RAINFALL MONITOR A Provide a Mini-Clik by Hunter Industries or approved equal. 2.16 FLOW SENSOR A Install Flow sensor-Hunter Flow Click 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Site Conditions: 1. Verify location of existing utilities. 2. Verify that required utilities are available,in proper location,and ready for use. 3. All scaled dimensions are approximate. 4. The Contractor shall check and verify all size dimensions and receive Architect's approval prior to proceeding with work under this section. 5. Exercise extreme care in excavating and working near existing utilities. 12/2014 02811 - 12 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 6. Contractor shall be responsible for damages to utilities which are caused by his operations or neglect. Check existing utilities drawings for existing utility locations. 7. Coordinate installation of sprinkler irrigation materials including pipe,so there shall be No interference with utilities or other construction or difficulty in planting trees, shrubs, and ground covers. 8. Coordinate work with other site contractors. 9. The Contractor shall carefully check all grades to satisfy himself that he may safely proceed before starting work on the sprinkler irrigation system. 10. No machine trenching,unless approved by Architect,is to be done within drip line of trees. Trenching is done by hand,tunneling or boring or other methods shall be approved by Architect. 11. It is understood that the piping layout is diagrammatic and piping shall be routed around trees and shrubs in such manner to avoid damage to plants. 3.02 PREPARATION A Physical Layout: 1. Piping and head layout is shown on plans in schematic form only. 2. All pipes to be installed directly behind curbs, walks, and walls wherever possible. 3. Prior to installation, the Contractor shall stake out all pressure supply lines, routing and location of sprinkler heads. (1111/I'N, 4. All layouts shall be approved by Architect prior to installation. 5. Route pipes to avoid plants, ground cover and structures. 6. Review layout requirements with other affected work. Coordinate locations of sleeves under paving to accommodate system. B Water Supply: 1. Sprinkler Irrigation system shall be connected to water supply points-of- connection as indicated on the drawings. 2. Connections shall be made at approximate locations as shown on drawings. Contractor is responsible for minor changes caused by actual site conditions. 3. Reclaimed systems utilizing purple pipe may be requested by owner. In the event of the installation of a reclaimed system.All components will utilize the same previously described manufacturer to provide `purple pipe'components. 4. All Reclaimed/Purple Pipe systems will conform to 30 TAC §344.1 3.03 TRENCHING A Refer to Section 02318 — Excavation and Backfill for Utilities for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. B Location of Heads - Design location is represented as accurately as possible. Make minor adjustments on site with approval of Landscape Architect as necessary to ensure consistent and even spacing where applicable. Set all heads minimum 6"from back of curb and 6" from edge of concrete walls. 12/2014 02811 - 13 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION C Install piping and wiring in sleeves under sidewalks, roadways, parking lots, and railroads. D Drain Pockets: Excavate to sizes indicated. Backfill with cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 3/4 to 3,to 12 inches below grade. Cover gravel or crushed stone with sheet of asphalt-saturated felt and backfill remainder with excavated material. E Provide minimum cover over top of underground piping according to the following: 1. Irrigation Main Piping: Minimum depth of 18 inches below finished grade. 2. Circuit Piping: 12 inches. 3. Drain Piping: 12 inches. 4. Sleeves: 24 inches. F Backfill 1. The trenches shall not be backfilled until all required tests are performed, or until cover up is approved by the owner. 2. Trenches shall be carefully back-filled with the excavated materials approved for backfilling, consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand, or other approved materials, free from large clods of earth or stones. Backfill shall be mechanically compacted in landscaped areas to a dry density equal to adjacent undisturbed soil in planting area. 3. Backfill will conform to adjacent grades without dips,sunken areas,humps or other surface irregularities. 4. A sand material backfill will be initially placed on all lines (minimum 3" depth). No foreign matter larger than one-half(1/2) inch in size will be per- mitted in the initial backfill. 5. Where rock is encountered in trenching, 4" of sand above the pipe and 4" of sand below the pipe will be used as the initial backfill. 6. Flooding of trenches will be permitted only with approval of Architect. 7. If settlement occurs and subsequent adjustments in pipe, valves, sprinkler heads, lawn or planting, or other construction are necessary, the Contractor shall make all required adjustments without cost to the Owner. 8. Trench shall be excavated to accommodate grade changes. 9. Trench shall not be left open overnight unless caution taped or fenced off. 10. Existing Lawns-Where trenching is required across existing lawns,(or in the event of changes or repairs after new lawn has been established),uniformly cut strips of sod 6 inches wider than trench. Remove sod in rolls of suitable size for handling and keep moistened until replanted. 11. Backfill trench to within 6 inches of finished grade and compact. 12. Continue fill with acceptable topsoil and compact to bring sod even with existing lawn. 13. Replant sod within 2 days after removal,roll and water generously;unless new sod or hydro mulch is to be installed. 14. All sod areas not in healthy condition equal to adjoining lawns 30 days after replanting shall be re-sodded and restored to original condition. 3.04 INSTALLATION 12/2014 02811 - 14 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION A Pipes (Ow. 1. Piping Mains and Laterals - Lay out sprinkler mainlines and perform line adjustments and site modifications to laterals prior to excavation.Lay pipe on solid sub base,uniformly sloped without humps or depressions. 2. Coordinate pipe installation with conduit installation. 3. PVC pipe Assembly a. Cut PVC pipe square and de-burr. b. Clean pipe and fittings using primer as recommended by the PVC pipe manufacturer. Use tinted primer to aid in visual inspection and blue glue. c. Apply a thin even flow coat of PVC solvent cement to inside of the fitting and pipe mating surface. d. Cure joints as recommended by the manufacturer and keep pipe and fitting out of service during curing period. e. Construct watertight joints equal or greater in strength than the pipe. Do not tap pipe at fittings. f. Install plastic pipe in dry weather, when temperature is above 40 degrees F. and in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. g. Allow joints to cure at least 24 hours at temperature above 40 degrees F before testing. h. Plastic pipe shall be snaked in the trenches in a manner to provide for expansion and contraction as recommended by pipe manufacturer. i. Extend primer 1/2" beyond glue joint for visual inspection. j. Ensure that the pipe is not laid on top of fittings and put under stress in any way prior to cover-up. B Sleeves under Paving 1. The majority of sleeves under paving exist as shown on drawings. Where boring is required for new sleeves(refer to drawings),it shall be a"wet bore." Install sleeves 12" beyond edge of pavement. Perform trench and backfill in accordance with these specifications. 2. Sleeves shall be marked on the concrete with 1/4" deep "V" cut into curb. C Concrete Thrust Blocks 1. Install where the rubber-gasketed irrigation main changes direction as at ells and tees and where the rubber-gasketed main terminates. 2. Pressure tests shall not be made for a period of 36 to 48 hours following the completion of pouring of the blocks. 3. Blocks for these mains shall be sized and placed in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's specifications and shall be of an adequate size and so placed as to take all thrust created by the maximum internal water pressure. D Irrigation Heads 1. Flush irrigation lines with full head of water and install heads after hydrostatic test is completed. (OW, 2. Install heads at manufacturer's recommended heights. 12/2014 02811 - 15of19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION 3. Locate part-circle heads to maintain a minimum distance of 4, 12, 24, 48 inches from walls and inches from other boundaries, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Check for uniformity of coverage and pattern correctness. Adjust for 100% coverage where required. 5. Install nozzles with water running at reduced pressure starting with the head closest to the valve. 6. Adjust arcs and radius at normal operating pressure. 7. Ensure heads do not spray into areas not intended to receive water. Example: streets and sidewalks. 8. Install heads at minimum of six (6) inches from back of curb. 9. Spacing - Sprinkler spacing shall not exceed 55 percent of the sprinkler diameter of coverage. 10. Separate spray and rotors - Sprays and rotors shall not be combined on the same control valve circuit E Drip Tubing 1. Tubing installed in planting beds is to be placed at spacing indicated on drawings in shallow trench and covered with planting backfill mix 1"-2" deep and then covered with mulch. 2. Tubing is to be placed after bed preparation is complete and plant material is planted and root ball anchor is installed. 3. Drip tubing is to be placed on top of root balls of trees in planting beds to allow for even watering of trees. 4. All tubing is to be reviewed by Owner's Representative prior to burying. F Electric Remote Control Valves 1. Adjust automatic control valves to provide flow rate at rated operating pressure required for each irrigation section. 2. Install valves in valve boxes,arranged for easy adjustment and removal.Locate valves to ensure ease of access for maintenance such that no physical interference with other elements of the project exists. 3. Remote Control Valve Tags to be used in Section 2.09 4. One Remote Control Valve Tag shall be attached to stem of each electric remote control valve. Tags shall be numbered sequentially. Numbers shall correspond to station numbers in electric controller. Provide tags and corresponding numbers for wires pulled for future valves. 5. Valve Boxes - Install valve boxes to cover electric remote control valves. Install one valve per valve box. Top of valve box shall be flush with finished grade. Bury minimum 4 bricks under base of each box as support. 6. Control Wire Splice Boxes-Install control wire splice box to cover any splice in control wire. Top of valve box shall be flush with finished grade. Bury minimum 4 bricks under base of each box as support.Install control wire splice box to cover wires pulled for future valves. ^� G Gravel Backfill 1. Backfill valve boxes and control wire splice boxes with gravel, minimum 6 inch depth. 12/2014 02811 - 16 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION H Electric Controller 1. Controllers shall be fully grounded. 2. Connect remote control valves to controller in clockwise sequence to correspond with stations 1, 2, 3, successively. 3. Affix anon-fading copy of irrigation diagram to cabinet door below controller's name.Irrigation diagram shall be sealed between two plastic sheets, 20 mils. Minimum thickness. Irrigation diagram shall show clearly all valves operated by the controller, showing station number, valve size, and type of planting irrigated. 4. Provide lockable cabinet.Provide two keys to Owner.Keys to be matched with existing controller key locking mechanisms. 5. Power to Controller& Locations: Locations shown on plan for controllers is approximate. Final location shall be determined on site by Owner. 6. Contractor shall supply 120 VAC to controller from adjacent existing power sources. Follow local governing codes in electrical work. 7. Lightning Protection and Grounding: Provide full grounding and lightning protection per system manufacturer's recommendations. 8. Wall mounted controllers; electrical meters and breaker boxes shall be mounted on I-beam structures. Irrigation Control Wires 1. Provide 24 volt system for control of automatic circuit-section valves of underground irrigation system.Provide unit capacity to suit number of circuits rs' indicated. 2. Install control wires with irrigation mains and laterals in common trench where possible.Lay control wires neatly together to side of pipe.Provide looped slack at valves, corners,bores and snake wire in trench to allow for contraction. Tie wires in bundles at 10 foot intervals. Line splices will be allowed on runs of 500 Ft. or more. Splices shall be made and placed in control wire splice boxes. 3. Provide 12 inch long expansion loop within 3 feet of each wire connection and splice on runs of wire 100 feet or longer. J Backflow Preventers 1. Make required connection to water supply according to local codes and manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Install pressure type backflow devices at required grade in accordance with the local Plumbing Code. 3. Insulate all above ground piping. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING A General - Notify Landscape Architect 48 hours in advance when testing will be conducted. Conduct tests in presence of Landscape Architect and owner. B The Parks and Recreation Department will conduct open trench inspections daily,prior to cover-up. 12/2014 02811 - 17 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION C Hydrostatic Test - Test irrigation main line, before backfilling trenches, to a hydrostatic pressure of not less than 100 psi for 1 hour. Piping may be tested in 1 sections to expedite work.Remove and repair or replace piping and connections which do not pass hydrostatic testing. D Shut off mainline at backflow preventer during non-working hours until Contractor has demonstrated the mainline is stable. E Operational Testing - Perform operational testing after hydrostatic testing is completed,backfill is in place and irrigation heads are adjusted to final position. F Demonstrate to Landscape Architect that system meets coverage requirements, is as specified and indicated, and that automatic controls function properly. G Coverage requirements are based on operation of one circuit at a time. H After completion of grading, sodding and rolling of grass areas, carefully adjust lawn sprinkler heads so they will be flush with finish grade. Set shrub sprinkler heads not more than 1/2 inch above top of mulch. I Ensure watering does not extend into unintended areas, such as roadways and sidewalks. J Field inspection and testing will be performed. K Prior to filling,test system for leakage for whole system to maintain 100 psi pressure for one hour. 3.06 FILLING A Provide 3 inch sand cover over piping.Fill trench and compact to subgrade elevation. Protect piping from displacement. 3.07 ADJUSTING A Adjust control system to achieve time cycles required. B Change and adjust head types for full water coverage as directed. 3.08 MAINTENANCE A Contractor shall correctly maintain the irrigation system during the installation process and throughout the landscaping maintenance service period. B Contractor shall provide "As Built" Drawings for new work, showing dimensioned location of valves,meters,backflow preventers,controllers,and mainline. Contractor shall request reproducible mylar from the Landscape Architect in preparation of"As Built" Drawings. Contractor shall also provide a small laminated set of plans in each irrigation controller, which is color coded for each set of heads each valve operates. 12/2014 02811 - 18 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION C Maintenance and management - The landscape and irrigation system shall be maintained and managed to ensure water efficiency, and prevent wasteful practices. This should include,but not limited to:resetting the automatic controller according to the season; flushing the filters; testing the rain sensor device; monitoring, adjusting, and repairing irrigation equipment such that the efficiency of the system is maintained and utilizing turf and landscape best management practices during the maintenance period. 3.09 DEMONSTRATION A Provide system demonstration. B Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of system, including adjustment of sprinkler heads. Use operation and maintenance material as basis for demonstration. END OF SECTION 12/2014 02811 - 19 of 19 CITY OF PEARLAND WOOD FENCES AND GATES Section 02820 WOOD FENCES AND GATES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Fence framework, material components, and accessories. B Excavation for post bases, concrete foundation for posts, and installation of gates. 1. Manual gates and related hardware. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals D Referenced Standards: 1. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for fencing shall be on a linear foot basis for type and height noted, measured and complete in place. B Measurement for gates shall be per each, complete in place. C Payment includes all labor and materials required to complete installation as indicated on Plans. D Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Shop Drawings: Indicate plan layout, spacing of components, post foundation dimensions, hardware anchorage, and specific description of material components. C Product Data: Provide data on material components including posts, rails, bracing, accessories, fittings, and hardware. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A Fence height shall be as indicated on Plans or as noted to match height of existing. B Line post spacing shall not exceed 10 feet, or as shown on Plans. 07/2006 02820- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND WOOD FENCES AND GATES C Provide bracing as appropriate for structural integrity. D Concrete posts in the ground at a depth of, at least, l/the height of the fence. J E The diameter of the post hole shall be, at least, 1 1/2 times that of the post, or as shown on Plans. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A Company specializing in installation of the products specified in this Section with minimum three years experience. 1.06 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings. 2.0 PRODUCTS A When the Work entails replacement of fence structures, the products shall match or exceed the quality of existing. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A Install fence in accordance with the directions of the manufacturer and these Technical Specifications. B Use a Class B concrete base or better to set posts into the ground. Allow concrete to cure for at least 7 days before attaching remainder of fence. C Where type of material applies,use standard fence stretching equipment to stretch the fencing before tying it to the rails and posts. Repeat the stretching and tying operations about every 100 feet. Use bottom tension wire where specified on Plans. D Erect gates so they swing or slide in the appropriate direction. Provide gate stops as required. Secure hardware, adjust, and leave in perfect working order. Adjust hinges and diagonal bracing so that gates will hang level. Adjust rollers and guides of sliding gates so that gates are level. E Accommodate contour of ground as indicated on Plans. F Where new fence joins an existing fence, set a corner post and brace post at the junction, or tie in as directed on Plans. G Nuts and bolts shall be in conformance with ASTM-A307 and shall be galvanized in accordance with AASHTO M232. 07/2006 02820-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND WOOD FENCES AND GATES H Other hardware indicated on Plans shall be in accordance with ASTM Standards. END OF SECTION (111'\ 07/2006 02820-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES Section 02821 (111 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Fence framework, fabric, and accessories. B Excavation for post bases, concrete foundation for posts and center drop for gates. 1. Manual gates and related hardware. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals D Referenced Standards: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) a. ASTM A 570, "Standard Practice for Roof System Assemblies Employing Steel Deck, Performed Roof Insulation, and Bituminous Built-Up Roofing" b. ASTM A 1011, "Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low Alloy and High- Strength Low Alloy with Improved Formability" c. ASTM A 307, "Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength" 2. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for fencing shall be on a linear foot basis for height noted,measured and complete in place. B Measurement for gates shall be per each, complete in place. C Payment for chain link fences and gates includes all labor and materials required to complete installation as indicated on Plans. D Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. 07/2006 02821 - 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES B Shop Drawings: Indicate plan layout, spacing of components, post foundation dimensions, hardware anchorage, and schedule of components. C Product Data: Provide data on fabric, posts, accessories, fittings and hardware that indicates that items match or exceed the quality of existing. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A Fence Height shall be as indicated on Plans or as noted to match height of existing. B Extension arms for barbed wire shall match existing. C Line Post Spacing shall not exceed 10 feet, or as shown on Plans. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum three years experience. 1.06 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Shop Drawings. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 GALVANIZED FENCING A Fence fabric shall be No. 9 steel wire, hot galvanized after weaving, to match or exceed existing. B Framework shall be hot-dipped galvanized with a minimum coating of 2 ounces/sf,or one ounce/sf plus 30 micrograms/square inch chromate conversion coating. C Line posts shall be 2" and conform to ASTM A 570 Grade 45 steel or ASTM A 569, cold rolled steel. All posts shall have spherical plugs. D End corner, angle, and pull posts shall be 2 1//2" and conform to ASTM A 570 Grade 45 steel or ASTM A 569 for steel pipe. E Top rails shall be 1.65 x 1.25 inch formed C-section; or 1.6 inch round ASTM A 569, 1.35 lbs/ft;or one 5/8 inch outside diameter steel pipe,2.27 lbs/ft. Top rails shall pass through openings provided for that purpose in post tops. F Fabric ties shall be hog rings, galvanized steel wire not less than 9-ga with a zinc coating of not less than 1.2 ounces/sf. G Bolts and nuts shall be in conformance with ASTM A 307 and shall be galvanized in accordance with AASHTO M232. 07/2006 02821 -2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES H Install horizontal braces fabricated of one 5/8 inch,2.271b copper bearing steel pipe at all corner, gate, and end posts. (b.\ All posts to have malleable iron top caps. J Bottom tension wire shall be#7 gauge wire. K Gates shall be either swing or slide as shown on the plans. Swing gates shall be hinged to swing 90 degrees from closed to open or hinged to swing 180 degrees from close to open. Slide gates shall be roller type with no vertical obstructions. All gate leaves shall have intermediate members and diagonal stress rods as required for rigid construction and shall be free from sag or twist. All gates shall be fitted with vertical extension arms or shall have frame end number extended to carry barbed wire. Gate posts for gates shall be 4-inch, 9.1 lb pipe. Gate frames shall be made of 2-inch outside diameter, castings. Fabric shall be the same as for the fence. Gates shall have malleable iron ball and socket hinges, catches, stops and padlocks with 3 keys each. Posts for single gates shall be the same as end posts. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A Install chain link fence in accordance with the directions of the manufacturer and these (1.11 Specifications. B Install line fence posts at not more than loft centers and concreted at least 36 inches x 12" diameter into the ground in a Class B concrete base. Allow concrete to cure for at least 7 days before erecting remainder of fence. Fasten fabric to line posts with wire ties spaced about 14 inches apart and to top rail spaced about 24 inches apart. C Use standard chain link fence stretching equipment to stretch the fabric before tying it to the rails and posts. Repeat the stretching and tying operations about every 100 feet. D Erect gates so they swing or slide in the appropriate direction. Provide gate stops as required. Secure hardware,adjust, and leave in perfect working order. Adjust hinges and diagonal bracing so that gates will hang level. Adjust rollers and guides of sliding gates so that gates are level. E At small natural or drainage ditches where it is not practical for the fence to conform to the contour of the ground, span the opening below the fence with wire fastened to stakes of required length. The finished fence shall be plumb, taut, true to line and ground contour. When directed, stake down the chain link fence at several points between posts. rlh\ 07/2006 02821 -3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES F Where new fence joins an existing fence, set a corner post and brace post at the junction and brace as directed. If the connection is made at other than the corner of the `Ia.) new fence the last span of the old fence shall contain a brace. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02821 -4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND TOPSOIL Section 02910 (.1116\ TOPSOIL 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Furnishing and placing topsoil for finish grading and for seeding, sodding, and planting. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200 -Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 4. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 5. Section 02200—Site Preparation 6. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for topsoil under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for which topsoil is a component. rib\ B If topsoil is included as a Bid Item, measurement will be based on the units shown in Section 00300—Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit product quality,material sources, and field quality information in accordance with this Section. 1.04 TESTING A Testing and analysis of product quality, material sources, or field quality shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory provided by the Owner under the provisions of Section 01450 — Testing Laboratory Services and as specified in this Section. 1.05 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 07/2006 02910- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TOPSOIL 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 TOPSOIL A Topsoil shall be fertile, friable, natural sandy loam surface soil obtained from excavation or borrow operations having the following characteristics: 1. pH value of between 5.5 and 6.5. 2. Liquid limit: topsoil not exceed 50 3. Plasticity index: 10 or less. 4. Gradation: maximum of 40 percent with a passing the#280 sieve. B Topsoil shall be reasonably free of subsoil,clay lumps,weeds,non-soil materials and other litter or contamination. Topsoil shall not contain roots,stumps,and stones larger than 2 inches. C Obtain topsoil from the top material from naturally well drained areas where topsoil occurs at a minimum depth of 4 inches and has similar characteristics to that found at the placement site. Do not obtain topsoil from areas infected with a growth of, or reproductive parts of nut grass or other noxious weeds. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Verify that excavation and embankment operations have been completed to correct lines and grades. 3.02 TOPSOIL STRIPPING AND SOTCKPILING A Conform to topsoil stripping and stockpiling requirements of Section 02200 — Site Preparation. 3.03 PLACEMENT A Contractor shall conduct erosion control practices described in Section 01566-Source Controls for Erosion and Sedimentation during topsoil placement operations. B For areas to be seeded or sodded, scarify or plow existing surface material to a minimum depth of 4 inches, or as indicated on the Plans. Remove any vegetation and foreign inorganic material. Place 4 inches of topsoil on the loosened material and roll lightly with an appropriate lawn roller to consolidate the topsoil. C Increase depth of topsoil to 6 inches when placed over cement stabilized sand used as bedding and backfill material. D For areas to receive bushes or trees,excavate existing material and place topsoil to the depth and dimensions shown on the Plans. 07/2006 02910-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND TOPSOIL E Remove spilled topsoil from curbs, gutters, and, paved areas.and dispose of excess topsoil in accordance with requirements of Section 01140 — Contractor's Use of Premises. 3e04 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Protect and maintain topsoil until a vegetative cover is established. B Repair areas damaged by Contractor's operations at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02910-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND HYDROMULCH SEEDING Section 02921 HYDROMULCH SEEDING 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Seeding, fertilizing, mulching, and maintaining areas of commercial, industrial, or undeveloped land disturbed during construction and not paved or designated to be paved, or as indicated on Plans. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls 4. Section 02910—Topsoil 5. Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 6. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises 1.02 MEASUREMEN AND PAYMENT A Measurement for hydromulch seeding is on a per acre basis,measured and complete in place. B Payment for hydromulch seeding shall include all labor, materials, equipment, and preparation necessary for application and maintenance. C No payment shall be made for hydromulch seeding used in restoration of areas disturbed by Contractor outside the limits of construction. D Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit certification from supplier that each type of seed conforms to these specification requirements and the requirements of the Texas Seed Law. Certification shall accompany seed delivery. C Submit a certificate stating that fertilizer complies with these specification requirements and the requirements of the Texas Fertilizer Law. 1.04 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 07/2006 02921 - 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND HYDROMULCH SEEDING 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Topsoil: Conform to material requirements of Section 02910—Topsoil. B Bank Sand: Conform to material requirements of Section 02255—Bedding,Backfill, and Embankment Materials. C Seed: Conform to U.S.Department of Agriculture rules and regulations of the Federal Seed Act and the Texas Seed Law. Seed shall be certified 90 percent pure and furnish 80 percent germination and meet the following requirements: 1. Rye: Fresh, clean, Italian rye grass seed (lollium multi-florum), mixed in labeled Proportions. As tested, minimum percentages of impurities and germination must be labeled. Deliver in original unopened containers. 2. Bermuda: Extra-fancy, treated, lawn type common bermuda (Cynodon dactylon). Deliver in original, unopened container showing weight, analysis, name of vender, and germination test results. 3. Wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged seed will not be accepted. D Fertilizer:Dry and free flowing,inorganic,water soluble commercial fertilizer,which is uniform in composition. Deliver in unopened containers which bear the manufacturers guaranteed analysis. Caked,damaged,or otherwise unsuitable fertilizer will not be accepted. Fertilizer shall contain minimum percentages of the following elements: Nitrogen: 10 Percent Phosphoric Acid: 20 Percent Potash: 10 Percent E Mulch: Virgin wood cellulose fibers from whole wood chips having a minimum of 20 percent fibers 0.42 inches (10.7 mm)in length and 0.01 inches(0.27 mm)in diameter. Mulch shall be dyed green for coverage verification purposes. F Soil Stabilizer: "Terra Tack" 1 or approved equal. G Weed control agent: Pre-emergent herbicide for grass areas, "Benefin" or approved equal. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A Do not start or perform work under conditions that are not satisfactory to perform tasks due to inclement or impending inclement weather. B After the areas to receive hydromulch seeding have been brought to grade,rake out any foreign organic or inorganic material, including stones, hard clay lumps, and other debris. 07/2006 02921 -2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND HYDROMULCH SEEDING C Level with Bank Sand or Topsoil, as approved by the Engineer. D Loosen the subgrade by discing or by scarifying to a depth of at least 4 inches. E Place and compact a layer of topsoil in accordance with requirements of Section 02910 —Topsoil. F Surface of topsoil shall be smooth and free of weeds,rocks,and other foreign material immediately before applying hydromulch seeding. 3.02 APPLICATION A Seed: Apply uniformly at the following rates for type of seed and planting date: APPLICATION PLANTING TYPE RATE DATE POUNDS/A Hulled Common Bermuda Grass 98/88 40 Jan 1 to Mar 31 Unhulled Common Bermuda Grass 98/88 40 Hulled Common Bermuda Grass 98/88 40 Apr 1 to Sep 30 Hulled Common Bermuda Grass 98/88 40 Unhulled Common Bermuda Grass 98/88 40 Oct 1 to Dec 31 Annual Rye Grass(Gulf) 30 B Fertilizer: Apply uniformly at a rate of 500 pounds per acre. C Mulch: Apply uniformly at a rate of 50 pounds per 1000 square feet. D Soil stabilizer: Apply uniformly at a rate of 40 pounds per acre. E Weed control agent: Apply at manufacturer's recommended rate prior to Hydromulching. F Suspend all operations under conditions of drought,excessive moisture,high winds,or extreme or prolonged cold. Obtain the Engineer's approval before resuming operations. 3.03 MAINTENANCE A Maintain grassed areas by watering,fertilizing, weeding, and trimming as required to establish and sustain 70% acceptable vegetative cover. B For areas seeded in the fall, continue maintenance the following spring until an acceptable lawn is established. 3.04 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. 07/2006 02921 -3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND HYDROMULCH SEEDING 3.05 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Protect and maintain grassed areas a minimum of 90 days, or as required to establish an acceptable lawn. B Once a lawn is established, protect and maintain it until completion of the Work. C Replace seeded areas damaged by Contractor's operations at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02921 -4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SODDING Section 02922 SODDING 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Sodding areas of residential lawns disturbed during construction and not paved or designated to be paved, or as indicated on Plans. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200-Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01500-Temporary Facilities and Controls 4. Section 02910—Topsoil 5. Section 02255 —Bedding, Backfill, and Embankment Materials 6. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises C Definitions: 1. Lawn - ground covered with fine textured grass kept neatly mowed. 2. Sod - blocks, squares, strips of turf grass, and adhering soil used for vegetative planting. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for Work performed under this Section. Include cost in Bid Items for utility or paving. B If sodding is included as a Bid Item,measurement will be based on the units shown in Section 00300—Bid Proposal and in accordance with Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. C No payment shall be made for sodding of restoration areas disturbed by Contractor outside the limits of construction. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit material sources and product quality information in accordance with this Section. C Submit a certificate stating that fertilizer complies with these specification requirements and the requirements of the Texas Fertilizer Law. 07/2006 02922- 1 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SODDING 1.04 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Topsoil: Conform to material requirements of Section 02910—Topsoil. B Bank Sand: Conform to material requirements of Section 02255—Bedding,Backfill, and Embankment Materials. C Fertilizer: Available nutrient percentage by weight: 12 percent nitrogen, 4 percent phosphoric acid, and 8 percent potash; or 15 percent nitrogen, 5 percent phosphoric acid, and 10 percent potash. D Weed and Insect Treatment: Provide acceptable treatment to protect sod from weed and insect infestation. Submit treatment method to the Engineer for approval. All insect and disease control shall be installed within guidelines set forth by the Structural Pest Control Board of the State of Texas E Water: Potable, available on-site through Contractor's water trucks. Do not use private resident's water. 2.02 SOD A Species: Bermuda (Cynodon Dactylon), Buffalo (Buchloe Dactyloides), or St. Augustine to match existing or as directed. B Contents: 95 percent permanent grass suitable to climate in which it is to be placed; not more than 5 percent weeds and undesirable grasses; good texture, free from obnoxious grasses, roots, stones and foreign materials. C Size: 12 inch wide strips,uniform in thickness(2 inch minimum with clean-cut edges. D Sod is to be supplied and maintained in a healthy condition as evidenced by the grass being a normal, green color. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A Do not start work until conditions are satisfactory. Do not start work during inclement or impending inclement weather. Perform Sodding only when weather and soil conditions are deemed by Engineer to be suitable for proper placement. 07/2006 02922-2 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SODDING B After the areas to receive sod are brought to grade, rake out any foreign organic or rb\, inorganic material, including stones, hard clay lumps and other debris. C Level with Bank Sand or Topsoil, as approved by the Engineer. D Loosen the subgrade by discing or by scarifying to a depth of at least 4 inches. E Place and compact topsoil in accordance with requirements of Section 02910 — Topsoil. Top soil shall be free of weeds and foreign material immediately before sodding. F Spread 2-inch (±1") layer of Bank Sand over prepared topsoil. G Prior to placing sod,rake areas smooth,free from unsightly variations,bumps,ridges, or depressions, and completely free from stones, hard clay lumps and other debris. H Apply fertilizer at a rate of 25 lbs/1000 SF. Apply after raking soil surface and not more than 48 hours prior to laying sod. Mix thoroughly into upper 2 inches of soil. Lightly water to aid in dissipation of fertilizer. 3.02 APPLICATION A Lay sod with closely fitted joints leaving no voids and with ends of sod strips staggered. Sod shall be laid within 24 hours of harvesting. B After sod is laid, irrigate thoroughly to secure 6-inch minimum penetration into soil below sod. C Tamp and roll sod with approved equipment to eliminate minor irregularities and to form close contact with soil bed immediately after planting and watering. Submit type of tamping and rolling equipment to be used to the Engineer for approval, prior to construction. 3.03 MAINTENANCE A Maintenance Period: 1. Begin maintenance immediately after each section of grass sod is installed and continue for a 30-day period from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Re-sod unacceptable areas. 3. Water, fertilize, control disease and insect pests, mow, edge, replace unacceptable materials, and perform other procedures consistent with good horticultural practice to ensure normal, vigorous and healthy growth. All disease control shall be installed within guidelines set forth by the Structural Pest Control Board of the State of Texas. 4. Notify Engineer 10 days before end of maintenance period for inspection. B Watering: 1. Water lawn areas once a day with minimum 1/2 inch water for the first 3 weeks after area is sodded. 07/2006 02922-3 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND SODDING 2. After 3-week period, water twice a week with 3/4 inch of water each time unless comparable amount has been provided by rain. 3. Make weekly inspections to determine moisture content of soil unless soil is in frozen condition. 4. Water in the morning to enable soil to absorb maximum amount of water with minimum evaporation. C Mowing: 1. Mow sod at intervals which will keep grass height from exceeding 3-1/2 inches. 2. Set mower blades at 2-1/2 inches. 3. Do not remove more than one-half of grass leaf surface. 4. Sodded areas requiring mowing within 1 month after installation, shall be mowed with a light-weight rotary type mower. The sod shall be mowed only when dry and not in a saturated or soft condition. 5. Remove grass clippings during or immediately after mowing. D Fertilizer and Pest Control: 1. Evenly spread fertilizer composite at a rate of 40 pounds per 5,000 square feet or as recommended by manufacturer. Fertilizer shall not be placed until 2 weeks after placement of sod. 2. Restore bare or thin areas by topdressing with a mix of 50 percent sharp sand and 50 percent sphagnum peat moss. 3. Apply mixture 1/4 to 1/2 inch thick. 4. Treat areas of heavy weed and insect infestation as recommended by treatment manufacturer. 3.04 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140 - Contractor's Use of Premises. 3.05 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Protect and maintain sod in good condition until 30 days after Substantial Completion. B Replace sod damaged by Contractor's operations at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION 07/2006 02922-4 of 4 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING Section 02931 rgi.\ LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Furnishing all plants and trees, labor, equipment, appliances and materials for landscape and tree planting. Rough and finish grading is part of the landscape work. B References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 02910—Topsoil 4. Section 02921 —Hydromulch Seeding 5. Section 01562—Waste Material Disposal 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for Landscape Planting is on a Lump Sum. B Payment for Tree Planting is on lump sum basis for each tree planted. C Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit samples of the plants and grasses to be used for approval prior to installation. Inspection will be done on the project site. C Provide materials from the same source and of the same quality and variety as those inspected and approved. D Soils and/or compost materials must be approved at their source prior to delivery. 1.04 REFERENCES A ANSI Z 60.1 -Nursery Stock. B Federal Specification Q-P-166E-Peat, Moss; Peat, Humus; and Peat, Reed-Sedge. 1.05 SCHEDULE A The plant schedule gives quantities, scientific names, common names, sizes, and special remarks. 12/2014 02931 - 1 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING B The plant list conforms with Standardized Plant Names, 1942,and American Standard for Nursery Stock, 1949, revised April 14, 2014, as prepared by the American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature and the American Association of Nurserymen, Inc. C In case of discrepancies between the plant list and drawings, the working drawings shall govern. 1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS A Pack all plant material to provide protection against damage from wind, weather or other possible sources. Tie plants to prevent whipping when shipment is made by truck. B When shipment is made by rail, pack plants and ventilate cars as required to prevent sweating. C Provide a platform from all B&B root balls over 24 inches in diameter. D Store plants on the site as directed. E Spray with anti-transpirant at time of delivery in warm season months. Apply at rates in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. F Ship trees with Certificates of Inspection as required by governing authorities. Label each tree and shrub with securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. Do not remove container grown stock from containers before time of planting. G Deliver packaged materials in fully labeled original containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery, and while stored at Site. H Materials shall not be pruned prior to installation unless approved by the Engineer in writing. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark, break branches, or destroy natural shape. Use protective covering during delivery. 1.07 SUBSTITUTIONS A Substitution of larger size or better grade than specified will be allowed,but with no increase in unit cost. B Substitution of an alternate species may be accepted upon written approval from the Engineer. 1.08 ACCEPTANCE AND APPROVAL A There will be no partial acceptance of grasses. 12/2014 02931 -2 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING B Upon Contractor's request,final approval will be made within 15 working days of date (1°1\' of notice to the Engineer if contracted work has been satisfactorily completed. C Final approval of grasses will be given when the following conditions are met: 1. There are no bare spots larger than 9 inches square. 2. The total area of bare spots does not exceed 5 percent of the entire grass area. 1.09 WARRANTY A Provide 1-year warranty on all plants and grasses. The warranty period commences after final completion. B Replace plants that fail during the warranty period according to the specifications governing the original plants. C Periodically inspect plants for proper watering and spraying, during warranty period. D Damage caused by natural hazards such as hail,high winds or storm is not covered by the warranty. E Plant materials and grasses which die due to normal insects or diseases are included in the warranty. F Existing in situ plant material required to be moved on the site will be protected under the warranty. G Contractor shall warrant trees against defects including death,unsatisfactory growth,or loss of shape due to improper pruning,maintenance, or weather conditions,for 1 year after completion of planting. Contractor shall plumb leaning trees during warranty period. H Remove and replace trees found to be dead during warranty period. Remove and replace trees which are in doubtful condition at end of warranty period,or if approved by the Engineer, extend warranty period for such trees for a full growing season. 1.10 SOIL ANALYSIS A Submit for approval an analysis of all soils obtained from off-site sources prior to delivery. B Analysis of existing soil is not required. 1.11 PLANT CERTIFICATES A Submit inspection certificates approved by the Engineer as required by law with the invoice for each shipment or order of stock: 1. Submit certificates to the Engineer for review in ample time to be reviewed and meet installation schedule. 12/2014 02931 -3 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 1.12 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A Take all reasonable precautions to prevent injury to people and to avoid damage to existing structures,plants and grasses. Keep the area free of hazardous obstructions. B Construct barricades where necessary for the protection ofpersons and property. Mark all barricades with red and white paint and with red reflectors. Erect barricades in the following locations: 1. Areas dangerous to workmen and passersby. 2. Along adjoining property that requires protection. 3. Across streets and walks that are temporarily closed or rerouted. 4. Around plants and trees to be protected. C Excavations larger than 1 foot deep and 1 foot wide must be covered when not attended. D Existing trees which may be subject to damage must be protected by fencing or boxing. E. During the course of planting operations, protect all installed plants and lawns from damage. If heavy equipment or materials must be moved across lawns,use planks or pontoons to protect the turf. Similarly protect walks across which heavy equipment must pass. 1.13 DEFINITIONS A In situ refers to any soil which is existing and in place on the project site at the time landscape work commences. B Establishment period refers to a period of 45 days after installation during which time 5 percent of the construction costs will be withheld. 1.14 QUALITY ASSURANCE A Landscaper shall be a firm specializing in landscape and planting work. B Do not make substitutions of approved trees unless approved in writing by the Engineer. If specified planting material is not obtainable, submit proof of non- availability together with proposal for use of equivalent material. Substitutions of larger size or better grade than specified will be allowed,but with no increase in unit price. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 TOPSOIL A Topsoil: Conform to requirements of Section 02910 -Topsoil. B Peat moss, bark, and fertilizer: Use material recommended by nursery for establishment of healthy stock after replanting. Moss shall conform to requirements of Federal Specification Q-P-166E. 12/2014 02931 -4 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 2.02 FERTILIZER A Provide an inorganic commercial fertilizer which is uniform in composition, dry and free flowing, in original unopened containers, each bearing the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. Caked, damaged or otherwise unsuitable fertilizer will not be accepted. 1. For lawns: 12-24-12. 2. For ground cover areas,shrub beds and tree holes: 20-10-5(Except for Genus Pyrus (Pear). 2.03 ADDITIVES A Adjustment of pH. For topsoil to attain the specified pH level, furnish raw, ground agricultural limestone containing not less than 85 percent calcium carbonate of which 50 percent will pass through a 100-mesh sieve and 90 percent through a 70-mesh sieve. Wait 2 months after planting before application of fertilizer. 1. following table is a guideline to establish the pounds of limestone needed per 1000 square feet of turf: LIMESTONE NEEDED PER 1000 SQUARE FEET SOIL PH SANDS,LOAMY SANDS SANDY LOAM CLAY LOAM,CLAY >6.0 0 0 0 5.1 - 6.0 50 75 100 <5.0 100 125 175 B Humus. Provide a rich humus material free of sticks, stones, weedy roots, or other foreign matter. Humus must have ample water holding capacity and plant food retention. Use a humus with a dark brown to black color. C Dressing Mulch. Provide pine or redwood bark that is evenly shredded,consisting of 90 percent organic matter, brown in color, and free of harmful minerals. Maximum particle size not to exceed 3 inches in diameter. D Sharp Sand. Obtain clean sharp sand of hard durable grains, free from dirt, organic matter or other impurities. Use sand with a grade between 0.05 mm and 2 mm. E Concrete Gravel. Provide clean, crushed stone consisting of hard, durable,uncoated particles free from injurious amounts of soft friable, thin or laminated pieces. Use gravel which conforms to ASTM C 33. The sieve size will be 3/4 inch, 90 to 100 percent passing. 2.04 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS A Root Ball Anchors: 1. Duck bills will be used to secure the root ball anchors. B Edging: 12/2014 02931 -5 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 1. Provide 1/2-inch x 4 inches, Cypress or Treated Lumber headerboard. 2. Provide 1 inch x 2 inches x 12 inches, Cypress or Treated Lumber stakes. C Cloth for Balling Trees. Use burlap of jute weighing at least 7.2 ounces per square yard. Secure balled plants with 2-ply twine made of jute. D Paper for Wrapping Trees. Use first quality, 4-inch-wide bituminous impregnated tape, corrugated or crepe paper, specifically manufactured for tree wrapping and having qualities to resist insect infestation. E Materials for Flagging Trees: 1. Mark guyed trees with surveyors white plastic tape. 2. Use surveyors plastic tape for marking as follows. a. Red to be removed. b. Yellow to be transplanted. c. Green to remain. d. Blue to identify special handling. F Labels. Legibly label plants with durable labels that identify the plant by scientific and common name. Use waterproof ink. G Tree Seal. All pruning cuts,bruises,or scars over 3/4,inch in diameter on trees will be treated with a commercial tree wound dressing. H Polyethylene. Use virgin base,resin blended polyethylene sheeting with carbon black concentrate of 2.5 percent. 2.05 SPRAYS A Sterilization: 1. Use approved solution of Dyclomec 4G, or equal, for areas to be planted. 2. Use Pramitol, or equal, for areas to be paved. B Herbicides: 1. Use an approved systemic non-selective,post emergent herbicide on specified areas to kill all vegetation. 2. Use Confront, or equal, for general control of broadleaf weeds in lawns. 3. Use Preemerg, Eptam, Dryclomec, or equal for ground cover. 4. Use an approved pre-emergent to control seed germination in specified areas. C Antitranspirant: 1. Use approved antitranspirant for all plant material that is stored and/or heeled- in on the site. 2. Use approved antitranspirant on all planted trees and shrubs. D Root Stimulant. Use approved root stimulant on all newly planted trees,shrubs,vines and/or ground cover areas. 12/2014 02931 -6 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 2.06 PLANT CHARACTERISTICS A Provide plants which are true to type and name, and typical of their species or variety. Plants must have a normal, well-developed branch structure, with a vigorous root system, and must be generally sound and healthy. Use plants which are free from defects, including: 1. Disfiguring knots. 2. Sun scald. 3. Injuries. 4. Bark abrasions. 5. Plant diseases. 6. Insect eggs. 7. Borers. 8. Infestations. B Select well-formed plants balanced between height and spread typical of the species or variety with branches in normal position. Heading back plants to meet size limits will not be permitted. C Unless otherwise specified, all plants will be nursery grown and at least twice transplanted. Use plants which have been growing under similar climatic conditions to those of the project for at least 2 years prior to the date of the contract. Recently stepped-up plants will not be acceptable. All B&B or bare root plants must be freshly Clh`. dug; heeled-in or cold storage plants will not be accepted. D Balled,bare root, and container-grown plants will conform to the definitions given in American Standards for Nursery Stock. E No tree will be accepted which has had leaders cut or damaged, or which has a thin, weak trunk and/or poorly formed tops. F Regardless of sample selection, a plant may be rejected at the site by the Engineer. 2.07 NURSERY STOCK A Deciduous Trees. Provide trees which are straight and symmetrical and have a persistently preferred main leader. The crown must be in good overall proportion to the entire height of the tree. Where a clump is specified,a plant having a minimum of three stems originating from a common base at the ground line will be furnish. Measure trees by average caliper of trunk. 1. For trees up to 4 inches in diameter, measure caliper 6 inches above ground. 2. For trunks larger than 4 inches, measure caliper 12 inches above ground. B Evergreen Trees. Form of the top will be typical of the species and not unnaturally sheared or color-treated. Measure by average caliper. Caliper will be taken 6 inches rb\ above the ground on trees up to 4 inches in diameter and 12 inches above the ground on trees larger than 4 inches. 12/2014 02931 -7 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING C Vines and Ground Cover. Provide plants which are container-grown for sufficient time to ensure adequate root growth to hold the soil in place and retain the original shape when removed from the container. 2.08 FIELD-COLLECTED PLANTS A Field-collected plants must be grown in favorable locations that ensure fibrous roots and vigorous growth. Such plants will be selected on site by the Landscape architect. B Provide balls at least 1/3 greater in diameter than those specified for nursery stock. C If dug in dormant season and bare root is acceptable, the spread of roots must be at least 1/3 greater than the spread of roots for bare root nursery stock. 2.09 SEED A Seasonal Limitations: 1. Bermuda: a. Hulled seeds may be planted between October and March. b. Unhulled seeds may be planted between April and September. 2. Rye: a. Plant between October and February. B Bermuda. Provide common Bermuda seed that is extra-fancy, treated, lawn type. Deliver in original,unopened container showing weight,analysis,name of vendor and germination test results. Wet,moldy,or otherwise damaged seed will not be accepted. C Rye. Deliver annual Winter Rye seed in original unopened containers. Seed must be fresh, clean, and mixed in labeled proportions. As tested, minimum percentages of impurities and germination must be labeled. 2.10 HYDROMULCH A Provide hydromulch seeding as noted in Section 02921 —Hydromulch Seeding. 2.11 GRASS A Obtain certified sod from an approved source. B Provide material which is true to type and name,and is typical of the species or variety. C Delivery: 1. Identify and tag sods with correct scientific and common name for each species. 2. Do not deliver more sods than can be planted within 8 hours. 3. Transport and deliver sods in/on pallets. 4. Protect sods against dehydration, overheating or contamination during transportation and delivery. 12/2014 02931 -8 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 5. Cover unplanted sods with moistened burlap to prevent dehydration or overheating while awaiting installation. 6. Sods must be harvested within 12 hours of planting and arrive at the project site in a moist condition. D Products: 1. Material to be uniform in color, leaf texture and density. 2. Material to be graded No. 1, or better. 3. Uniform mowed height at time of harvesting material: 1-1/2 inches. 4. Inspected and certified free of diseases,nematodes,and undesirable insects by authorized representative of State Department of Agriculture. 5. Material will not be acceptable if it contains any quack grass, Johnson grass, poison ivy, nut grass, thistle, common bent grass,wild garlic, morning glory, perennial sorrell, or brome grass. 6. Turf will be considered weed free when found to contain less than 1 percent of dandelion,jimson weed, mustard, chickweed, per 100 square feet. 2.12 TREES A Provide container grown trees which are straight and symmetrical and have a persistently preferred main leader. The crown shall be in good overall proportion to the entire height of tree with branching configuration as recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and species specified. Where a clump is specified,a plant having a minimum of three stems originating from a common base at the ground line shall be furnished. Measure trees by average caliper of trunk as follows: 1. For trunks up to 4 inches or less in diameter, measure caliper 6 inches above top of root ball. 2. For trunks more than 4 inches, measure caliper 12 inches above top of root ball. 3. Caliper measurements shall be by diameter tape measure. Indicated calipers on plans are minimum. Averaging of plant calibers will not be allowed. B Trees shall conform to following requirements: 1. Healthy, vigorous stock, grown in a recognized nursery. 2. Free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae; and free of defects such as knots, sun- scald, injuries, abrasions, disfigurement, or borers and infestations. 2.13 WATER A Water shall be potable from municipal water supplies. 2.14 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A Notify Engineer,prior to installation, of location where trees that have been selected for planting may be inspected. Plant material will be inspected for compliance with (1/1//i'' following requirements. 1. Genus, species, variety, size and quality. 2. Size and condition of balls and root systems, insects, injuries and latent defects. 12/2014 02931 -9 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 2.15 WORK CONDITIONS A Site Availability. Begin no landscape work where conflicting site work is incomplete or as otherwise directed by the Engineer. B Weather Restrictions. Stop all work during inclement weather such as drought, high winds, excessive rain, extreme heat, cold, or freeze. Obtain authorization before resuming work. 2.16 PLANTING PROCEDURES A Temporary Nursery. A temporary nursery may be used to store plants, but no more than 5 days before planting. Keep plants well watered and protected. 1. Immediately upon delivery, heel-in balled and burlapped (B&B) plants and spray all plants with an antitranspirant. Apply spray from top to bottom. Thoroughly cover plants,but not to the point of run-off. Spray block units and not individual plants. Use a low-pressure,fine-mist applicator. Spray at rates recommended in the manufacturer's directions. 2. Handle all balled and burlapped plants by the ball only. 3. Upon delivery, immediately heel-in bare root plants. Open bundles, separate plants, set roots in trenches, and cover with topsoil. Water plants with an approved root stimulant containing vitamin B. 4. Handle container plants by the container. 5. Handle ground cover plants in flats. Pack flats tightly together and sprinkle ^`) plants everyday. 6. Special plants so designated must be kept in an approved enclosure or planted the day of delivery. 7. Store soils and additives on approved platforms. B Digging and Handling: 1. The actual planting operation must proceed without delay and in a manner to avoid undue drying of the in-situ soil or roots because of exposure to air and sun. Keep an ample supply of sawdust available to cover the roots of B&B stock arriving from the storage nursery. Keep the roots well covered and moist until the plants can be placed in the final location and permanently planted. 2. Handle all plant stock with care to prevent injuries to the trunk,branches and roots. 3. Dig bare root plants when fully dormant. Keep all of the root system intact;do not prune the root system. However, any roots that are broken, crushed, or bruised must be cleanly cut back to sound wood. Make the cut on an angle so that the exposed end faces downward. Seal any cut root exceeding 3/4 inch in diameter with an approved tree wound dressing. 4. Balled and burlapped plants must have the root system encased in a firm,solid ball of natural earth,wrapped in burlap and tightly bound. Each ball must be of sufficient size to encompass all the fibrous feeding roots and not smaller than required by American Standards for Nursery Stock. The ball must remain firm and compact throughout the planting operations. 12/2014 02931 - 10 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 SITE PREPARATION A Schedule work so that planting can proceed rapidly as portions of site become available. Plant trees after final grades are established and prior to planting of lawns, unless otherwise approved by Engineer in writing. If planting of trees occurs after seeding work,protect lawn areas and promptly repair damage to lawns resulting from tree planting operations. B Layout individual trees at locations shown on Drawings. In case of conflicts, notify Engineer before proceeding with Work. Trees shall be staked and approved by Engineer prior to planting. C Existing Trees: 1. Protection: Protect tops,trunks and roots of trees to remain on the site. Before starting work, box, fence or otherwise protect trees subject to construction damage. Remove boxing when directed. Permit no stockpiles of heavy equipment within the branch spread of trees. 2. Removal: Remove trees marked for removal. Do not remove any tree without proper authorization. Stumps within 36 inches of final grade must also be removed. 3. Pruning and Surgery: Cut and trim trees only as directed; do not cut any tree without proper authorization. Trim existing trees of dead or diseased limbs. Cut limbs close to the trunk. Cover cuts over 3/4 inch in diameter with an approved tree would dressing. D Grading Around Trees. As required, fill or grade within the branch spread of trees to remain, observing the following requirements. 1. For trenching beneath trees, tunnel under the tree roots with careful hand digging. Where possible, avoid cutting or injuring roots. 2. Do not raise or lower the grade around an existing tree in any way unless so directed. E Placing Topsoil: 1. Disk,drag,harrow,or handrake subgrade. Scarify the subgrade to a depth of 1- 1/2 inches. Before placing topsoil, rake the subsoil surface clear of stones, wood,rubbish and other debris. Place no topsoil until the subgrade preparation has been approved. 2. Spread, rake, and compact topsoil to form a layer with a minimum depth of 4 inches in lawn areas and 6 inches in shrub areas. Place topsoil to conform to fmished gradients as shown on the grading plan. 3. Remove spilled topsoil from curbs, gutters, and, paved areas and dispose of excess topsoil in accordance with requirements of Section 01562 — Waste Material Disposal. 12/2014 02931 - 11 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING F In Situ Soil Preparation: 1. Cross-till in two directions all existing soil in designated areas to be planted,as follows: a. In lawn areas to a minimum depth of 6 inches. b. In shrub areas to a minimum depth of 10 inches. 2. Evenly broadcast fertilizers and soil additives and thoroughly work into soil. a. Smooth all tilled and amended areas to establish a rough gradient. b. Deeply irrigate all tilled and amended areas to thoroughly wet soil particles and promote settlement. c. After a settlement period of not less than 5 days,and before proceeding with any planting, smooth and rake as necessary to establish finish gradient as required. 3. In all areas which have been utilized for parking, storage or construction lots and/or where heavy equipment has been used, cross-rip the entire compacted areas in two directions to a depth of 10 inches before tilling and amending the soil as specified. A heavy float or drag harrow should be used to smooth all surface areas. a. Verify location of all underground utilities before ripping. b. Ripping teeth should not be set at more than 10-inch spacing. G Fertilizer. Evenly broadcast and work fertilizer into soil at the following rates: 1. Lawns: 1-1/2 N pounds per 1000 square feet. 2. Ground Cover, Shrub, and Tree Areas: 1-1/2 N pounds per 1000 square feet. H Additives: 1. Humus. Evenly broadcast and work into in situ soil at a rate of 1 cubic yard per 200 square feet. 2. Sharp Sand. Evenly broadcast and work into in situ soil at a rate of 1 cubic yard per 200 square feet. 3. Concrete Gravel. Utilize as a drainage course as shown on construction drawings. 3.02 PREPARATION OF PLANTING SOIL A Before mixing, clean topsoil of roots, plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful or toxic to plant growth. B Strip and utilize 4-inch layer of top soil,placed on esplanades under Section 02921 — Hydromulch Seeding, for planting soil mixture. C Mix recommended soil amendments with topsoil at following rates: 1. Top soil: 50 percent. 2. Peat moss: 25 percent. 3. Well rotted Bark: 25 percent. 4. Fertilizer: Rate recommended by nursery. D Delay mixing of fertilizer if planting will not follow placing of planting soil within 48 hours,unless otherwise directed. 12/2014 02931 - 12 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING E Incorporate amendments into the soil as a part of the soil preparation process prior to fine grading, fertilizing, and planting. Broadcast or spread amendments evenly at the specified rate over the planting area. Thoroughly incorporate amendments into the top 3 or 4 inches of soil until amendments are pulverized and have become a homogeneous layer of topsoil ready for planting. 3.03 PLANTING A Excavate pits, beds, or trenches with vertical sides and with bottom of excavation raised a minimum of 6 inches at center for proper drainage. Provide following minimum widths: 1. 15-gallon containers or larger, 2 feet wider than diameter of root ball. 2. 1- and 5-gallon containers, 6 inches wider than diameter of root ball. B When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as unsatisfactory soil, obstructions, or adverse drainage conditions, notify the Engineer of such conditions before planting. C Deliver trees after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after deliver, set trees and shrubs in shade,protect from weather and mechanical damage,and keep roots moist by covering with mulch, burlap, or other acceptable means of retaining moisture, and water as needed. D Set root ball on undisturbed soil in center of pit or trench and plumb plant. Place plants at such a level that, after settlement, a natural relationship of plant crown with ground surface will be established. E When set,place additional backfill around base and sides of ball,and work each layer to settle backfill and eliminate voids and air pockets. When excavation is approximately 2/3 full,water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed. F Dish top of backfill to allow for mulching. Mulch pits, trenches and planted areas. Provide no more than 4-inch thickness of mulch,work into top of backfill, and finish level with adjacent finish grades. Cover entire root ball. G Prune, thin out and shape trees in accordance with standard horticultural practice. Prune trees to retain required height and spread. Unless otherwise directed in writing, do not cut tree leaders, and remove only injured and dead branches from flowering trees. Remove and replace excessively pruned or misformed stock resulting from improper pruning. H Inspect tree trunks for injury, improper pruning and insect infestation and take corrective measures. I Anchor root ball immediately after planting. 12/2014 02931 - 13 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING J Control dust caused by planting operations. Dampen surfaces as required. Comply with pollution control regulations of governing authorities. 3.04 PLANTING GRASS A Preparation: Prepare imported topsoil and/or in situ soil. Hand rake to remove all sticks, stones and clods larger than 1 inch. Apply the final grade but do not mechanically compact the soil. B Seed: 1. Evenly broadcast seed specified in 2.09 at the following rates: a. Bermuda: 1 pound per 1000 square feet b. Rye: 6 pounds per 1,000 square feet 2. Roll the entire seeded area in two directions with a dry/weighted roller. 3. Evenly top dress the entire seeded area with an approved sterilized commercial steer manure. Apply at 2 cubic feet per 100 square feet. 4. Lightly but thoroughly sprinkle the entire seeded area with water after top dress application. C Sod: 1. Use Bermuda, Buffalo, or St. Augustine sod in accordance with 2.11A. 2. Prepare soil in accordance with 3.03. 3. Apply eptam (or approved equal) to all areas to be sodded. Follow manufacturer's recommended rates and apply during soil preparation period. ''.**) 4. Lay sod in a running bond pattern. Pieces should be consistently cut with joints tightly butted together. Water the in-place sod liberally and roll it in two direction with a heavy roller. Areas not level due to fluctuations in the sod depth should be covered and leveled with a 50/50 mix of sharp sand and topsoil. Fertilize in 6 weeks as directed by landscape Architect. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A The Engineer may reject unsatisfactory or defective material at anytime during progress of Work. Contractor shall remove rejected trees immediately from site and replace with specified materials. Plant material not installed in accordance with these Specifications will be rejected. B An inspection to determine final acceptance will be conducted by the Engineer at the end of the 12 month maintenance period. Additional inspections will be conducted for extended warranty periods provided for in paragraph 1.07B. 3.06 CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE A Contractor shall maintain trees during planting operations and for a period of 12 months after completion of planting. B Water trees to full depth a minimum of once each week, or as required to maintain a healthy vigorous growth. 12/2014 02931 - 14 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND LANDSCAPE AND TREE PLANTING C Prune, cultivate, and weed as required for healthy growth. Restore planting saucers. Tighten and repair rootball anchors, and reset trees and shrubs to proper grades or vertical position as required. Restore or replace damaged wrappings. Spray as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. 3.07 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A During planting work, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition. B Protect planting work and materials from damage due to planting operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance period. Treat, repair, or replace damaged planting work as directed by the Engineer. C Dispose of excess soil and waste in accordance with requirements of Section 01562 Waste Material Disposal.On-site burning of combustible cleared materials will not be permitted. END OF SECTION rh\, 12/2014 02931 - 15 of 15 CITY OF PEARLAND PAVEMENT REPAIR Section 02980 (Ow PAVEMENT REPAIR 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Repairing streets,highways,driveways,sidewalks,and other pavements that have been cut, broken, or otherwise damaged during construction. B Repairing areas of failed paving in preparation for resurfacing. C References to Technical.Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 3. Section 01500-Temporary Facilities and Controls 4. Section 02335 —Subgrade 5. Section 02710—Base Course for Pavement 6. Section 02330—Embankment 7. Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ' A Unless indicated as a Bid Item,no separate payment will be made for pavement repair under this section. Include cost in Bid Items for which this Work is a component. B If pavement repair is included as a Bid Item,measurement is on a square yard basis. as follows: 1. Trench width plus 48 inches for utilities. 2. Trench width plus 10 feet for structures. 3. As marked in field for failed paving. C If provisions of this Section, 3.01D, require the limits of pavement repairs to be increased, then the payment limits shall be increased to the same extent. D No payment will be made for work outside payment limits, in areas that are not specifically called out as pay items and are incidental to the work or in areas removed for Contractor's convenience. E Refer to Section 01200 - Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make submittals required by this section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. (°1116\' 05/2008 02980- 1 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND PAVEMENT REPAIR 1.04 PROTECTION OF PEOPLE AND PROPERTY A Contractor shall conduct all construction operations under this Contract in conformance with the practices described in Section 01500—Temporary Facilities and Controls. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Provide materials of the same character as existing materials encountered in a cross section of the area to be repaired, or as approved by the Engineer. B Subgrade: Provide on site soil stabilized with lime, lime fly ash, etc., as required by the testing laboratory under the provisions of Section 02335 —Subgrade. C Base: Provide new base material as required by applicable portions of Section 02710— Base Course for Pavement. D Pavement: Provide new paving materials as required by Technical Specifications of applicable surface course treatments. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A Verify backfill is complete before repairing pavement over installed utilities or structures. B Verify remaining subgrade is ready to support imposed loads before repairing areas of failed paving. 3.02 PREPARATION A For installation of utilities and utility appurtenances, saw cut and remove pavement (including base material for asphalt paving)24 inches beyond the width of excavation, unless otherwise indicated on Plans. B For installation of structures, saw cut and remove pavement (including base material for asphalt paving) 5 feet beyond the width of excavation,unless otherwise indicated on Plans. C For repair of areas of failed paving, saw cut and remove pavement (including base material for asphalt paving) where indicated in the field or as directed by Engineer. Remove subgrade that is soft and yielding, or to depth as directed by Engineer. D If removed pavement is greater than one-half of pavement lane width, or within 18 inches of a longitudinal joint, on concrete pavement, replace pavement for full lane width or to nearest longitudinal joint as approved by the Engineer. 05/2008 02980-2 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND PAVEMENT REPAIR E Protect edges of existing pavement to remain from damage during removals, utility placement,backfill,and paving operations. For concrete pavement,leave and protect minimum of 18 inches of undisturbed subgrade on each side of trench to support replacement slab. 3.03 EXAMINATION : A Verify backfill is complete before repairing pavement over installed utilities or structures. B Verify remaining subgrade is ready to support imposed loads before repairing areas of failed paving. 3.04 INSTALLATION A Replace subgrade with material specified in this Section, 2.01B. Place and compact under the provisions of Section 02330—Embankment for areas under future paving to match lines and grade of surrounding subgrade. B Replace base course with material specified in this Section,2.O1C. Place and compact under the provisions of Section 02710—Base Course for Pavement to match lines and grade of surrounding base course. C Replace pavement with material specified in this Section,2.01D,and according to the Technical Specifications of the particular surface course treatment so that a smooth, hard, well cemented surface, conforming to the lines and grade of the surround pavement is secured D For concrete pavement, install size and length of reinforcing steel and pavement thickness indicated on Plans. Place types and spacing of joints to match existing or as indicated on Plans. E Where existing pavement consists of concrete pavement with asphaltic surfacing, resurface with minimum 2-inch depth asphaltic pavement. F Repair state highway crossings in accordance with highway department permit and within 1 week after utility work is installed. 3.05 CLEAN-UP AND RESTORATION A Perform clean-up and restoration in and around construction zone in accordance with Section 01140—Contractor's Use of Premises. 3.06 PROTECTION OF THE WORK A Protect and maintain all pavement in good condition until completion of Work. B Replace pavement damaged by Contractor's operations at no cost to Owner. END OF SECTION 05/2008 02980-3 of 3 CITY OF PEARLAND BLAST CLEANING OF PAVEMENT Section 02981 rl."\ BLAST CLEANING OF PAVEMENT 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A Removal of existing pavement markings. B Preparation of pavement surfaces for new pavement markings. C References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures 2. Section 01350—Submittals 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A Measurement for blast cleaning of lines is on a linear foot basis for each width, measured and complete in place. B Measurement for blast cleaning of symbols and legends is on a square foot basis, measured and complete in place. C Payment includes all labor and materials required to complete blast cleaning where indicated on Plans. D Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment Procedures. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A Make Submittals required by this Section under the provisions of Section 01350 — Submittals. B Submit description and characteristics of proposed blasting medium and equipment for approval. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A Blasting Media: Approved quality commercial product capable of producing specified surface cleanliness without deposition of deleterious materials on cleaned pavement surface. Do not use high silica content sand that may result in high levels of free crystalline silica dust particles as a blasting agent. 2.02 EQUIPMENT rih\ A Equipment shall be power driven and of sufficient capacity to clean the pavement surface to specified cleanliness. Equipment shall utilize moisture and oil traps of 07/2006 02981 - 1 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND BLAST CLEANING OF PAVEMENT sufficient capacity to remove contaminants from the air and prevent deposition of moisture, oil or other contaminants on the pavement surface. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 REMOVAL OF EXISTING MARKINGS A Remove pavement markings where necessary to prevent driver confusion, or where indicated on drawings. Included are areas where it will be necessary for drivers to cross existing markings which they would not normally cross. Remove or obliterate markings to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Do not damage pavement surface. 3.02 CLEANING FOR PLACEMENT OF MARKERS A Remove old pavement markings,loose material,and other contaminants deleterious to the adhesion of new pavement markings to be placed. On Portland cement concrete pavement, minimize over-blasting to prevent damage to pavement surface. Small particles of tightly adhering existing pavement markings may remain if complete removal will result in pavement surface damage. B Follow manufacturer's written instructions for proper cleaning of pavement surfaces to receive pavement marking. END OF SECTION /4"**) 07/2006 02981 -2 of 2 CITY OF PEARLAND TECHNICAL. SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 3 CONCRETE 07/2006 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Section 03300 ("b.' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cast-in-place concrete building frame members,floors,shear walls,foundation walls, and supported slabs, vaults,manholes and wet wells. B. Cast-in-place concrete work for utility construction or rehabilitation,such as slabs on grade,small vaults,site-cast bases for precast units,cast-in-place manholes,including headwalls and miscellaneous small structures. C. Floors and slabs on grade. D. Concrete seal slabs. E. Control, and expansion and contraction joint devices associated with concrete work, including joint sealants. F. Design, construction, erection, and removal of structural concrete formwork. G. Equipment pads, light pole base, thrust blocks. H. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 01200 -Measurement and Payment 2. Section 01350 - Submittals 3. Section 01310 - Coordination and Meetings 4. Section 03600 - Structural Grout 5. Section 03310 - Structural Concrete 6. Section 03100—Concrete Formwork 7. Section 01440—Inspection Services 8. Section 01460—Testing Laboratory Services I. Reference Standards: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) 4. American Welding Society(AWS) 5. Wire Reinforcement Institute (WRI) 6. Encyclopedia of Industrial Chemical Analysis 5/2013 03300- 1 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1.02 UNIT PRICES A. Measurement for cast-in-place concrete is on lump-sum basis for each aforementioned item as bid. Payment includes related work performed on these items in accordance with related sections of these Technical Specifications. B. Measurement for extra cast-in-place concrete is on cubic-yard basis. Payment includes related work performed in accordance with related sections. C. Refer to Section 01200 -Measurement and Payment for unit price procedures. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Hot Weather: Any combination of high air temperature, low relative humidity and wind velocity tending to impair quality of fresh or hardened concrete or otherwise resulting in abnormal properties. Hot weather concreting shall be in accordance with ACI- 305R. B. Cold Weather: Period when,for more than 2 successive days,mean daily temperature is below 40 degrees F. Cold weather concreting shall be in accordance with ACI - 306R. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform to the requirements of Section 01350—Submittals. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit Shop Drawings detailing reinforcement fabrication, bar replacement location, splices, spacing, bar designation, bar type, length, size, bending, number of bars, bar support type, and other pertinent information, including dimensions. Provide sufficient detail for placement of reinforcement without use of Plans. Information shall correspond directly to data listed on bill of materials. 2. Use of reproductions of Plans by Contractor, Subcontractor,erector,fabricator or material supplier in preparation of Shop Drawings(or in lieu of preparation of Shop Drawings) signifies acceptance by that party of information shown thereon as correct,and acceptance of obligation to pay for any job expense,real or implied,arising due to errors that may occur thereon. Remove references to Design Engineer, including seals, when reproductions of Plans are used as Shop Drawings. 3. Detail Shop Drawings in accordance with ACI 315, Figure 6. 5/2013 03300-2 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 4. Submit Shop Drawings showing location of proposed additional construction joints,and obtain approval of the Engineer,prior to submitting reinforcing steel Shop Drawings. C. Bill of Materials: Submit with Shop Drawings. D. Product Data: 1. Mechanical Bar Splices: Submit manufacturer's technical literature,including specifications and installation instructions. 2. Epoxy grout proposed for anchoring reinforcing dowels to hardened concrete: Submit manufacturer's technical literature including recommended installation procedures. 3. Provide data on joint devices, attachment accessories and admixtures. E. Certificates: 1. Submit steel manufacturer's certificates of mill tests giving properties of steel proposed for use. List of manufacturer's test number,heat number, chemical analysis, yield point, tensile strength, and percentage of elongation. Identify proposed location of steel in work. 2. Foreign-manufactured reinforcing bars shall be tested for conformance to ASTM requirements by a certified independent testing laboratory located in United States. Certification from any other source is not acceptable. Submit test reports for review. Do not begin fabrication of reinforcement until material has been approved. 1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01350-Submittals. B. Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components which are concealed from view. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301-99:Specifications for Structural Concrete- IP. B. Acquire cement and aggregate from same source for all work. rib\ C. Conform appropriately to ACI 305R-99:Hot Weather Concreting or ACI 306R.1- 90:Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting. 5/2013 03300-3 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 01310—Coordination and Meetings. / 114'J B. Coordinate the placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM - C 150, Type I - Normal Portland Type II - Moderate Sulphate resistance Portland type. B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM - C33. C. Use coarse limestone aggregate and crushed limestone for fine aggregate. The product of concrete alkalinity(A,as equivalent calcium carbonate)times the thickness of cover over the reinforcing steel (Z, in inches) shall not be less than 0.54, i.e. concrete shall have an AZ factor greater than or equal to 0.54. Provide a minimum concrete cover of 2" over reinforcing steel on the inside of the structures. D. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. 2.02 ADMIXTURES A. Air Entrainment: ASTM - C260. B. Chemical: ASTM - C494, Type A - Water Reducing Type D - Water Reducing and Retarding Type E - Water Reducing and Accelerating admixture. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Bonding Agent: Two component modified epoxy resin. B. Vapor Barrier: 6 mil clear polyethylene film type recommended for below grade application. C. Non-Shrink Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate,cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2,400 psi in 48 hours and 7,000 psi in 28 days. 2.04 JOINT DEVICES AND FILLER MATERIALS A. Joint Filler Type C: ASTM - D1752; Premolded sponge rubber, fully compressible with recovery rate of minimum 95 percent. 5/2013 03300-4 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN=PLACE CONCRETE B. Sealant: ASTM -D1190; synthetic rubber. 2.05 CONCRETE MIX A. Mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM - C94, Alternative No. 3. A minimum of 5.75 bags of cement per cubic yard of concrete shall be used. For Concrete in Contact with sewage use Portland Type II, ASTM- C150, Cement. B. Provide concrete to the following criteria: 1. Compressive Strength 7 days: 2400 psi 2. Compressive Strength 28 days: 4000 psi 3. Slump: 3 to 4 inches for concrete cast against earth in slabs and footings and where used as a topping. 5 to 6 inches for concrete in supported slabs,beams, columns and walls. 4. Maximum Water/Cement Ratio: 0.50. C. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by Engineer. Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements. D. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by Engineer. E. Add air entraining agent to normal weight concrete mix for work exposed to temperature lower than 40 degrees F. Air content shall be 3 percent maximum for concrete with trowel finished surfaces and 3-5 percent for other concrete. 2.06 FORM MATERIAL A. Smooth Forms: New plywood, metal, plastic, tempered concrete-form hardboard, dressed lumber faced with plywood or lining, or metal-framed plywood-faced panel material,to provide continuous,straight,smooth surfaces. Form material shall be free of raised grain, torn surfaces, worn edges, patches, dents or other defects. Furnish material in largest practical sizes to minimize number of joints and,when indicated on Plans,conform to joint system indicated. Form material shall have sufficient strength and thickness to withstand pressure of newly placed concrete without bow or deflection. B. Rough Forms: Plywood, metal, dressed or undressed lumber free of knots, splits or other defects, or other material acceptable to the Engineer of sufficient strength and thickness to withstand pressure of newly placed concrete without bow or deflection. C. Plywood: Conform to PS 1, Class 1. D. Lumber: Conform to PS 20. 5/2013 03300-5 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE E. Edge Forms and Intermediate Screed Strips: Type and strength compatible with the screed equipment and methods used. F. Plastic Forms: One-piece forms for domes,beams and pan joists. Single lengths for columns not exceeding height of 7'-6". For columns over 7'-6",use 7'-6" sections and filler sections as needed. To facilitate removal of pan joist forms, taper sides 1 inch per foot. G. Metal Pan Joist Forms: Removable type; fabricated of minimum 14-gage steel; one piece between end closures. Adjustable forms not allowed. Taper sides 1 inch per foot to facilitate removal. H. Earth Cuts for Forms: 1. Use earth cuts for forming unexposed sides of grade beams cast monolithically with slabs on grade. 2. Where sides of excavations are stable enough to prevent caving or sloughing, following surfaces may be cast against neat-cut excavations: a. Sides of footings. b. Inside face of perimeter grade beams not monolithic with slab on grade. When inside face is cast against earth, increase beam width indicated on Plans by 1 inch. c. Both faces of interior grade beams not monolithic with slab on grade. When grade beam is cast against earth, increase beam width indicated on Plans by 2 inches. Corrugated Fiberboard Carton Forms: 1. Corrugated fiberboard carton forms, when called for, are intended to form a void space beneath pile-supported and pier-supported slabs and other structural elements as shown. 2. Provide products of a reputable manufacturer regularly engaged in commercial production of double-faced corrugated fiberboard carton forms,constructed of waterproof paper and laminated with waterproof adhesive. 3. Fiberboard forms: Capable of supporting required dead load plus construction loads,and designed to lose their strength upon prolonged contact with moisture and soil bacteria. 4. Seal cuts and ends of each form section by dipping in waterproof wax,unless liners and flutes are completely impregnated with waterproofing. 5/2013 03300-6 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE (1.11\; 5. Size forms as indicated on Plans. Assemble as recommended by manufacturer, either with steel banding at4'-0" maximum on centers, or, where liners and flutes are impregnated with waterproofing, with adequate stapling. J. Circular Forms: 1. Form round-section members with paper or fiber tubes, constructed of laminated plies using water-resistant adhesive with wax-impregnated exterior for weather and moisture protection. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist loads imposed by wet concrete without deformation. Provide manufacturer's seamless units to minimize spiral gaps and seams. 2. Fiberglass or steel forms may be used for round-section members. K. Shores: Wood or adjustable metal,with bearing plates;with double wedges at lower end. L. Form Ties: 1. Use commercially-manufactured ties, hangers and other accessories for embedding in concrete. Do not use wire not commercially fabricated for use as a form accessory. 2. Fabricate ties so ends or end fasteners can be removed without causing spalling of concrete faces. Depth from formed concrete face to the embedded portion: At least 1 inch, or twice the minimum dimension of tie,whichever is greater. 3. Provide waterstop feature for form ties used on liquid-containing structures and on concrete walls which will have earth backfill on one side. 4. Removable ties: Taper ties may be used when approved by the Engineer. In the hole left by the removal of the taper tie, insert a preformed neoprene or polyurethane plug sized to seat at the center of the wall. M. Form Coating: Commercial formulation of form oil or form-release agent having proven satisfactory performance. Coating shall not bond with, stain or otherwise adversely affect concrete surfaces, or impair their subsequent treatment, including application of bonding agents, curing compounds, paint, protective liners and membrane waterproofing. N. Coating for Plastic Forms: Alkali-resistant gel-coat. O. Chamfer Strips: Unless otherwise indicated on Plans,provide 3/4 inch chamfer strips in corners of forms to produce beveled edges where required by this Section, 3.0 "Execution". P. Form Gaskets: Polyethylene rod, closed cell, 1-inch diameter. 5/2013 03300-7 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2.07 DESIGN OF FORMWORK A. Conform to ACI 117, ACI 347 and building codes, unless more restrictive requirements are specified or shown on Plans. Contractor shall design and engineer concrete formwork, including shoring and bracing. Design formwork for applicable gravity loads,lateral pressure,wind loads and allowable stresses. Camber formwork to compensate for anticipated deflection during placement of concrete required to maintain specified tolerances. Design formwork to be readily removed without impact, shock or damage to concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. B. Slip Forming: Permitted on written approval of the Engineer. Contractor shall demonstrate suitability of method proposed. 2.08 REINFORCING MATERIAL A. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed bars conforming to ASTM-A615,grade as indicated on Plans, except column spirals and those shown on Plans to be smooth bars. Where grade is not shown on Plans,use Grade 60. B. Smooth Bars: Where indicated on Plans, use smooth bars conforming to ASTM - A36; ASTM - A615, Grade 60; or ASTM -A675, Grade 70. C. Column Spirals: Bars conforming to ASTM-A615,Grade 60,or wire conforming to ASTM -A82. D. Epoxy-Coated Deformed Bars,Column Spirals and Smooth Bars: Conform to ASTM -A775/A775M. E. Welded Wire Fabric: 1. Welded Smooth Wire Fabric: Conform to ASTM -A185. 2. Welded Deformed Wire Fabric: Conform to ASTM- A497. 3. Provide wire size, type and spacing as shown. Where type is not shown on Plans, use welded smooth wire fabric. 4. Furnish welded wire fabric in flat sheets only. F. Tie Wire: 16-1/2 gage or heavier annealed steel wire. Use plastic-coated tie wire with epoxy-coated reinforcing steel. G. Bar Supports: Provide chairs. Use bar supports and accessories of sizes required to provide required concrete cover. Where concrete surfaces are exposed to weather, water or wastewater,provide plastic accessories only;do not use galvanized or plastic- tipped metal in such locations. Provide metal bar supports and accessories rated Class 1 or 2 conforming to CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. Use epoxy-coated bar supports with epoxy-coated reinforcing bars. 5/2013 03300-8 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE H. Slabs on Grade: Provide chairs with sheet metal bases or provide precast concrete bar (111111 supports 3 inches wide, 6 inches long, and thick enough to allow required cover. Embed tie wires in 3-inch by 6-inch side. Mechanical Bar Splices: 1. Conform to ACI 318-05:Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; use where indicated on Plans. a. Compression splices shall develop ultimate stress of reinforcing bar. b. Tension splices shall develop 125 percent of minimum yield point stress of reinforcing bar. 2. Regardless of chemical composition of steel,any heat effect shall not adversely affect performance of reinforcing bar. J. Welded Splices: 1. Provide welded splices where shown and where approved by the Engineer. Welded splices of reinforcing steel shall develop a tensile strength exceeding 125 percent of the yield strength of the reinforcing bars connected. 2. Provide materials for welded splices conforming to AWS D1.4 — Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel. K. Epoxy Grout: High-strength rigid epoxy adhesive,conforming to ASTM-C881,Type IV, manufactured for purpose of anchoring dowels into hardened concrete and the moisture condition, application temperature and orientation of the hole to be filled. Unless otherwise shown, depth of embedment shall be as required to develop the full tensile strength(125 percent of yield strength)of dowel,but not less than 12 diameters. 2.09 FABRICATION OF REINFORCING A. Bending: Fabricate bars to shapes indicated on Plans by cold bending. Bends shall conform to minimum bend diameters specified in ACI 318-05:Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. Do not straighten or rebend bars. Fabricate epoxy-coated reinforcing steel to required shapes in a manner that will not damage epoxy coating. Repair any epoxy coating with patching material conforming to Item 4.4 of ASTM-A775/A775M. B. Splices: 1. Locate splices as indicated on Plans. Do not locate splices at other locations without approval of the Engineer. Use minimum number of splices located at points of minimum stress. Stagger splices in adjacent bars. 2. Length of lap splices: As shown on Plans. 5/2013 03300-9 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3. Prepare ends of bars at mechanical splices in accordance with splice manufacturer's requirements. C. Construction Joints: Unless otherwise shown, continue reinforcing through construction joints. D. Bar Fabrication Tolerances: Conform to tolerances listed in ACI 315,Figures 4 and 5. E. Standard Hooks: Conform to the requirements of ACI 318-05:Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary. F. Marking: Clearly mark bars with waterproof tags showing number of bars,size,mark, length, and yield strength. Mark steel with same designation as member in which it occurs. 2.10 FINISHING MATERIALS A. Sealer/Dustproofer (VOC Compliant): Water-based acrylic sealer; non-yellowing under ultraviolet light after 200-hour test in accordance with ASTM - D4587. Conform to local, state and federal solvent emission requirements. B. Epoxy Floor Topping: Two-component epoxy resin meeting ASTM-C881 Type III, resistant to wear,staining and chemical attack,blended with granite,sand,trap rock or quartz aggregate, trowel-applied over concrete floor. Topping thickness shall be 1/8 inch. Color shall be gray. C. Abrasive Aggregate for Nonslip Finish: Fused aluminum oxide grit,or crushed emery aggregate containing not less than 40 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 25 percent ferric oxide. Material shall be factory graded, packaged, rustproof and nonglazing, and unaffected by freezing, moisture and cleaning materials. D. Epoxy Penetrating Sealer: Low-viscosity,two-component epoxy system designed to give maximum penetration into concrete surfaces. Sealer shall completely seal concrete surfaces from penetration of water, oil and chemicals; prevent dusting and deterioration of concrete surfaces caused by heavy traffic; and be capable of adhering to floor surfaces subject to hydrostatic pressure from below. Color shall be transparent amber or gray. Surface shall be non-slip. E. Latex Bonding Agent: Non-redispersable latex base liquid conforming to ASTM - C 1059. When used in water and wastewater treatment structures,bonding agent shall be suitable for use under continuously submerged conditions. Conformance and suitability certification by manufacturer is required. F. Bonding Grout: Prepare bonding grout by mixing approximately one part cement to one part fine sand meeting ASTM - C144 but with 100 percent passing No. 30 mesh sieve. Mix with water to consistency of thick cream. At Contractor's option, a commercially-prepared bonding agent used in accordance with manufacturer's 5/2013 03300- 10 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE recommendations and instructions may be used. When used in water and wastewater (.1\ treatment structures, bonding agent shall be suitable for use under continuously submerged conditions. Conformance and suitability certification by manufacturer is required. Submit manufacturer's technical information on proposed bonding agent. G. Patching Mortar: 1. Make patching mortar of same materials and of approximately same proportions as concrete, except omit coarse aggregate. Substitute white Portland cement for part of gray Portland cement on exposed concrete in order to match color of surrounding concrete. Determine color by making trial patch. Use minimum amount of mixing water required for handling and placing. Mix patching mortar in advance and allow to stand. Mix frequently with trowel until it has reached stiffest consistency that will permit placing. Do not add water. 2. Proprietary compounds for adhesion or specially formulated cementitious repair mortars may be used in lieu of or in addition to foregoing patching materials provided that properties of bond and compressive strength meet or exceed the foregoing and color of surrounding concrete can be matched where required. Use such compounds according to manufacturer's recommendations. When used in water and wastewater treatment structures, material shall be suitable for use under continuously submerged conditions. Conformance and suitability certification by manufacturer is required. H. Epoxy Adhesive: Two-component, 100 percent solids, 100 percent reactive compound developing 100 percent of strength of concrete, suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. Epoxy used to inject cracks and as a binder in epoxy mortar shall meet ASTM-C881,Type VI. Epoxy used as a bonding agent for fresh concrete shall meet ASTM- C881, Type V. Non-shrink Grout: See Section 03600 - Structural Grout. J. Spray-Applied Coating: Acceptable products are Thoro System Products "Thoroseal Plaster Mix" or approved equal. Color: Gray. K. Concrete Topping: Class H concrete with 3/8-inch maximum coarse aggregate size,as specified in this Section. L. Concrete Fill: Class H concrete with 3/8-inch maximum coarse aggregate size,(Class C where fill thickness exceeds 3 inches throughout a placement), as specified in Section 03310 - Structural Concrete. M. Evaporation Retardant: Confilm, manufactured by Master Builders; Eucobar, manufactured by Euclid Chemical Company; or equal. (11.1'‘ 5/2013 03300- 11 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2.11 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS A. Membrane-forming Curing Compound: Conform to ASTM - C309, Type 1D, and following requirements. 1. Minimum solids content: 30 percent. 2. Compound shall not permanently discolor concrete. When used for liquid- containing structures, curing compound shall be white-pigmented. 3. When used in areas that are to be coated, or that will receive topping or floor covering,material shall not reduce bond of coating,topping,or floor covering to concrete. Curing compound manufacturer's technical information shall state conditions under which compound will not prevent bond. 4. Conform to local,state and federal solvent emission requirements.Conform to local, state and federal solvent emission requirements. 5. White pigmented concrete curing compound shall be sprayed on in one even coat with a hand or power sprayer as soon as the surface water disappears from concrete surface. B. Clear Curing and Sealing Compound(VOC Compliant): Conform to ASTM-C309, Type 1,Class B,and the following requirements: 30 percent solids content minimum; non-yellowing under ultraviolet light after 500-hour test in accordance with ASTM- D4587. Sodium silicate compounds are not permitted. Conform to local, state and federal solvent emission requirements. C. Sheet Material for Curing Concrete: ASTM- C171; waterproof paper,polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheeting. D. Curing Mats(for use in Curing Method 2): Heavy shag rugs or carpets,or cotton mats quilted at 4 inches on center; 12 ounce per square yard minimum weight when dry. E. Water for curing: Clean and potable. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify requirements for concrete cover over reinforcement. B. Verify that anchors,seats,plates,reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not cause hardship in placing concrete. 5/2013 03300- 12 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. In locations where new concrete is dowelled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout. 3.03 PREPARATION OF SURFACES FOR CONCRETING A. Earth Surfaces: 1. Under interior slabs on grade, install vapor barrier. Lap joints at least 6 inches and seal watertight with tape,or sealant applied between overlapping edges and ends. Repair vapor barrier damaged during placement of reinforcing and inserts with vapor barrier material;lap over damaged areas at least 6 inches and seal watertight. 2. Other Earth Surfaces: Thoroughly wet by sprinkling prior to placing concrete, and keep moist by frequent sprinkling up to time of placing concrete thereon. Remove standing water. Surfaces shall be free from standing water,mud and debris at the time of placing concrete. (111"6N. B. Construction Joints: 1. Definition: Concrete surfaces upon or against which concrete is to be placed, where the placement of the concrete has been interrupted so that, in the judgment of the Engineer,new concrete cannot be incorporated integrally with that previously placed. 2. Interruptions: When placing of concrete is to be interrupted long enough for the concrete to take a set,use forms or other means to shape the working face to secure proper union with subsequent work. Make construction joints only where acceptable to the Engineer. 3. Preparation: Give horizontal joint surfaces a compacted,roughened surface for good bond. Except where the Plans call for joint surfaces to be coated, clean joint surfaces of laitance, loose or defective concrete and foreign material by hydroblasting or sandblasting(exposing aggregate),roughen surface to expose aggregate to a depth of at least 1/4 inch and wash thoroughly. Remove standing water from the construction joint surface before new concrete is placed. 4. After surfaces have been prepared cover approximately horizontal construction joints with a 3-inch lift of a grout mix consisting of Class A concrete batched without coarse aggregate; place and spread grout uniformly. Place wall concrete on the grout mix immediately thereafter. 5/2013 03300- 13 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE C. Set and secure reinforcement, anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts and similar embedded items in the forms where indicated on Plans,Shop Drawings and as otherwise required. Obtain the Engineer's acceptance before concrete is placed. Accuracy of placement is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. D. Unless otherwise approved by Engineer,place no concrete until at least 4 hours after formwork,inserts,embedded items,reinforcement and surface preparation have been completed and accepted by the Engineer. Clean surfaces of forms and embedded items that have become encrusted with grout or previously-placed concrete before placing adjacent concrete. E. Casting New Concrete Against Old: Where concrete is to be cast against old concrete (any concrete which is greater than 60 days of age),thoroughly clean and roughen the surface of the old concrete by hydro-blasting or sandblasting (exposing aggregate). Coat joint surface with epoxy bonding agent following manufacturer's written instructions,unless indicated otherwise. Unless noted otherwise,this provision does not apply to vertical wall joints where waterstop is installed. F. Protection from Water: Place no concrete in any structure until water entering the space to be filled with concrete has been properly cut off or diverted and carried out of the forms,clear of the work. Deposit no concrete underwater. Do not allow still water to rise on any concrete until concrete has attained its initial set. Do not allow water to flow over the surface of any concrete in a manner and at a velocity that will damage the surface finish of the concrete. Pumping,dewatering and other necessary operations for removing ground water, if required, are subject to the Engineer's review. G. Corrosion Protection: Position and support pipe, conduit, dowels and other ferrous items to be embedded in concrete construction prior to placement of concrete so there is at least a 2 inch clearance between them and any part of the concrete reinforcement. Do not secure such items in position by wiring or welding them to the reinforcement. H. Where practicable, provide for openings for pipes, inserts for pipe hangers and brackets, and setting of anchors during placing of concrete. I. Accurately set anchor bolts and maintain in position with templates while they are being embedded in concrete. J. Cleaning: Immediately before concrete is placed,thoroughly clean dirt,grease,grout, mortar,loose scale,rust and other foreign substances from surfaces of metalwork to be in contact with concrete. 3.04 FORMWORK INSTALLATION A. Formwork Construction ^� 1. Construct and maintain formwork so that it will maintain correct sizes of l members,shape,alignment,elevation and position during concrete placement and until concrete has gained sufficient strength. Provide for required 5/2013 03300- 14 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN=PLACE CONCRETE openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, anchorages, and inserts. 2. Construct forms for easy removal without damage to concrete surfaces. 3. Make formwork sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of cement paste during concrete placement. Solidly butt joints and provide backup material at joints as required to prevent leakage and fins. Provide gaskets for wall forms to prevent concrete paste leakage at their base. 4. Place chamfer strips in forms to bevel edges and corners permanently exposed to view,except top edges of walls,and slabs which are indicated on Plans to be tooled. Do not bevel edges of formed joints and interior corners unless indicated on Plans. Form beveled edges for vertical and horizontal corners of equipment bases. Unless otherwise indicated on Plans,make bevels 3/4 inch wide. 5. Provide temporary openings at bases of column and wall forms and other points as required for observation and cleaning immediately before concrete is placed. 6. Where runways are required for moving equipment, support runways directly on the formwork or structural members. Do not allow runways or supports to rest on reinforcing steel. 7. Use smooth forms on formed concrete surfaces required to have smooth form finish or rubbed finish. 8. Rough forms maybe used on formed concrete surfaces indicated to have rough form finish. B. Forms for Surfaces Requiring Smooth Form Finish: 1. Drill forms to suit ties used and to prevent leakage of concrete mortar around tie holes. Uniformly space form ties and align in horizontal and vertical rows. Install taper ties, if used, with the large end on the wet face of the wall. 2. Provide sharp, clean corners at intersecting planes, without visible edges or offsets. Back up joints with extra studs or girts to maintain true, square intersections. 3. Form molding shapes, recesses and projections with smooth-finish materials and install in forms with sealed joints to prevent displacement. 4. Form exposed corners of beams and columns to produce square,smooth,solid, unbroken lines. 5/2013 03300- 15 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 5. Provide exterior exposed edges with 3/4-inch chamfer or 3/4-inch radius. 6. Arrange facing material in orderly and symmetrical fashion. Keep number of joints to practical minimum. Support facing material adequately to prevent deflection in excess of allowable tolerances. 7. For flush surfaces exposed to view in completed structure,overlap previously- placed hardened concrete with form sheathing by approximately 1 inch. Hold forms against hardened concrete to maintain true surfaces,preventing offsets or loss of mortar. C. Forms for Surfaces Requiring Rubbed Finish: Provide forms as specified in this Section, 3.04B "Forms for Surfaces Requiring Smooth Form Finish". Use smooth plywood linings or forms, in as large sheets as practicable, and with smooth, even edges and close joints. D. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain required elevations and contours in finished slab surface. Provide and secure supports for types of screeds required. E. Circular Forms: Set forms in one piece for full height of member. F. Surfaces to Receive Membrane Waterproofing: Coordinate surface finish, anchors, reglets, and similar requirements with membrane waterproofing applicator. G. Fireproofing Steel Member: Construct forms to provide not less than the concrete thickness necessary,measured from face of steel member,to provide the required fire rating. Forms for concealed surfaces may be unlined. H. Tolerances: 1. Unless noted otherwise on Plans,construct formwork so concrete surfaces will conform to tolerance limits listed in Tables 03100A and 03100B at end of this Section. 2. Establish sufficient control points and bench marks as references for tolerance checks. Maintain these references in undisturbed condition until final completion and acceptance of the Work. Adjustment of Formwork: 1. Use wedges or jacks to provide positive adjustment of shores and struts. After final inspection and before concrete placement,fasten in position wedges used for final adjustment of forms. 2. Brace forms securely against lateral deflections. Prepare to compensate for settling during concrete placement. 5/2013 03300- 16 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3. For wall openings,construct wood forms that facilitate necessary loosening to counteract swelling of forms. J. Corrugated Fiberboard Carton Forms: 1. Place on smooth firm bed of suitable material to prevent vertical displacement; set tight to prevent horizontal displacement. Exercise care to avoid buckling of forms. Install in accordance with manufacturer's directions and recommendations. 2. Fit carton forms tightly around piles and piers; completely fill the space between subgrade and concrete placement with carton forms to form a void space. 3. Protect carton forms from moisture and maintain in a dry condition until concrete is placed on them. If they become wet before placement of concrete, allow them to dry and carefully inspect for strength before concrete is placed. 4. Before concrete placement,replace damaged or deteriorated forms which are incapable of supporting concrete dead load plus construction live loads. (111.1N. 3.05 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES A. Clean surfaces of forms and embedded materials before placing concrete. Remove accumulated mortar, grout,rust and other foreign matter. B. Coat forms for exposed or painted concrete surfaces with form oil or form-release agent before placing reinforcement. Cover form surfaces with coating material in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Do not allow excess coating material to accumulate in forms or to contact hardened concrete against which fresh concrete will be placed. Remove coating material from reinforcement before placing concrete. C. Forms for unexposed surfaces, other than retained-in-place metal forms,may be wet with water immediately before concrete placement in lieu of coating. When possibility of freezing temperatures exists, however, the use of coating is mandatory. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF REINFORCEMENT A. Placement Tolerances: Place reinforcement within tolerances of Table 03210A at the end of this Section. Bend tie wire away from forms to maintain the specified concrete coverage. B. Interferences: Maintain 2-inch clearance from embedded items. Where reinforcing interferes with location of other reinforcing steel,conduit or embedded items,bars may be moved within specified tolerances or one bar diameter,whichever is greater. Where 5/2013 03300- 17 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE greater movement of bars is required to avoid interference,notify the Engineer. Do not cut reinforcement to install inserts, conduit, mechanical openings or other items without approval of the Engineer. C. Concrete Cover: Provide clear cover measured from reinforcement to face of concrete as listed in Table 03210B at the end of this Section, unless otherwise indicated on Plans. D. Placement in Forms: Use spacers,chairs,wire ties and other accessory items necessary to assemble,space,and support reinforcing properly. Provide accessories of sufficient number, size and strength to prevent deflection or displacement of reinforcement due to construction loads or concrete placement. Use appropriate accessories to position and support bolts, anchors and other embedded items. Tie reinforcing bars at each intersection, and to accessories. Blocking reinforcement with concrete or masonry is prohibited. E. Placement for Concrete on Ground: Support bar and wire reinforcement on chairs with sheet metal bases or precast concrete blocks spaced at approximately 3 feet on centers each way. Use minimum of one support for each 9 square feet. Tie supports to reinforcing bars and wires. F. Vertical Reinforcement in Columns: Offset vertical bars by at least one bar diameter at splices. Provide accurate templates for column dowels to ensure proper placement. G. Splices: 1. Do not splice bars, except at locations indicated on Plans or reviewed Shop Drawings, without approval of the Engineer. 2. Lap Splices: Unless otherwise shown or noted, Class B, conforming to ACI 318-89,Section 12.15.1. Tie securely with wire prior to concrete placement,to prevent displacement of splices during concrete placement. 3. Mechanical Bar Splices: Use only where indicated on Plans or approved by the Engineer. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. a. Couplers located at a joint face shall be of a type which can be set either flush or recessed from the face as shown. Seal couplers prior to concrete placement to completely eliminate concrete or cement paste from entering. b. Couplers intended for future connections: Recess 1/2 inch minimum from concrete surface. After concrete is placed,plug coupler and fill recess with sealant to prevent contact with water or other corrosive materials. c. Unless noted otherwise, match mechanical coupler spacing and capacity to that shown for the adjacent reinforcing. 5/2013 03300- 18 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 4. Construction Joints: Place reinforcing continuous through construction joints, unless noted otherwise. H. Welded Wire Fabric: Install wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Unless otherwise indicated on Plans, lap adjoining pieces at least 6 inches or one full mesh plus 2 inches, whichever is larger. Lace splices with wire. Do not make end laps midway between supporting beams, or directly over beams of continuous structures. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps. Conform to WRI - Manual of Standard Practice for Welded Wire Fabric. I. Field Bending: Shape reinforcing bent during construction operations to conform to Plans. Bars shall be cold-bent; do not heat bars. Closely inspect reinforcing for breaks. When reinforcing is damaged, replace, Cadweld, or otherwise repair, as directed by the Engineer. Do not bend reinforcement after it is embedded in concrete. J. Epoxy-coated Reinforcing Steel: Install in accordance this Section, 3.06J "Field Bending",and in a manner that will not damage epoxy coating. Repair damaged epoxy coating with patching material as specified in Paragraph 2.09 A-Bending. K. Field Cutting: Cut reinforcing bars by shearing or sawing. Do not cut bars with cutting torch. L. Welding of reinforcing bars is prohibited, except where shown on Plans. (111.6\ 3.07 GROUTING OF REINFORCING AND DOWEL BARS A. Use epoxy grout for anchoring reinforcing and dowel steel to existing concrete in accordance with epoxy manufacturer's instructions. Drill hole not more than 1/4 inch larger than steel bar diameter(including height of deformations for deformed bars)in existing concrete. Just before installation of steel,blow hole clean of all debris using compressed air. Partially fill hole with epoxy,using enough epoxy so when steel bar is inserted, epoxy grout will completely fill hole around bar. Dip end of steel bar in epoxy and twist bar while inserting into partially-filled hole. 5/2013 03300- 19 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE TABLE 03210A REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT TOLERANCES PlacementTolerances (in inches) Clear Distance- To formed soffit: -1/4 To other formed surfaces: ±1/4 Minimum spacing between bars -1/4 Clear distance from unformed surface to top reinforcement- Members 8 inches deep or less: ±1/4 Members more than 8 inches deep but less than 24 inches deep: -1/4, +1/2 Members 24 inches deep or greater: -1/4, +1 Uniform spacing of bars ±2 (but the required number of bars shall not reduced): Uniform spacing of stirrups and ties +1 (but the required number of stirrups and ties shall not be reduced): Longitudinal locations of bends and ends of reinforcement- General: +2 Discontinuous ends of members: ±1/2 Length of bar laps: -1 1/2 Embedded length - For bar sizes No. 3 through 11: -1 For bar sizes No. 14 and 18: -2 5/2013 03300-20 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE TABLE 03210B MINIMUM CONCRETE COVER FOR REINFORCEMENT Minimum Surface Cover (in inches) Slabs and Joists - Top and bottom bars for dry conditions— No. 14 and No. 18 bars: 1 1/2 No. 11 bars and smaller: 1 Formed concrete surfaces exposed to earth, water, or weather, over, or in contact with, sewage; and for bottoms bearing on work mat, or slabs supporting earth cover- No. 5 bars and smaller: 1 1/2 No. 6 through No. 18 bars: 2 Beams and Columns - For dry conditions - Stirrups, spirals and ties: 1 1/2 Principal reinforcement: 2 Exposed to earth, water, sewage or weather Stirrups and ties: 2 Principal reinforcement: 2 1/2 Walls - For dry conditions - No. 11 bars and smaller: 1 No. 14 and No. 18 bars: 1 1/2 Formed concrete surfaces exposed to earth,water, sewage or weather, or in contact with ground- Circular tanks with ring tension: 2 All others: 2 Footings and Base Slabs - At formed surfaces and bottoms bearing on concrete work mat: 2 At unformed surfaces and bottoms in contact with earth: 3 Over top of piles: 2 Top of footings - - same as slabs 5/2013 03300-21 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3.08 HANDLING, TRANSPORTING AND PLACING CONCRETE '"3/4) A. Conform to applicable requirements of this Section and Chapter 8 of ACI 301- 99:Specifications for Structural Concrete—IP,Chapter 8. Use no aluminum materials in conveying concrete. B. Rejected Work: Remove concrete found to be defective or non-conforming in materials or workmanship. Replace rejected concrete with concrete meeting requirements of Contract Documents, at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Unauthorized Placement: Place no concrete except in the presence of the Engineer. Notify the Engineer in writing at least 24 hours before placement of concrete. D. Placement in Wall Forms: 1. Do not drop concrete through reinforcing steel. 2. Do not place concrete in any form so as to leave an accumulation of mortar on form surfaces above the concrete. 3. Pump concrete or use hoppers and, if necessary, vertical ducts of canvas, rubber or metal (other than aluminum) for placing concrete in forms so it reaches the place of final deposit without separation. Free fall of concrete shall not exceed 4 feet below the ends of pump hoses, ducts, chutes or buggies. Uniformly distribute concrete during depositing. 4. Do not displace concrete in forms more than 6 feet in horizontal direction from place where it was originally deposited. 5. Deposit in uniform horizontal layers not deeper than 2 feet; take care to avoid inclined layers or inclined construction joints except where required for sloping members. 6. Place each layer while the previous layer is still soft. 7. Provide sufficient illumination in form interior so concrete at places of deposit is visible from the deck or runway. E. Conveyors and Chutes: Design and arrange ends of chutes, hopper gates and other points of concrete discharge in the conveying,hoisting and placing system so concrete passing from them will not fall separated into whatever receptacle immediately receives it. Conveyors, if used, shall be of a type acceptable to the Engineer. Do not use chutes longer than 50 feet. Slope chutes so concrete of specified consistency will readily flow. If a conveyor is used,it shall be wiped clean by a device operated in such a manner that none of the mortar adhering to the belt will be wasted. All conveyors and chutes shall be covered. 5/2013 03300-22 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE F. Placement of Slabs: In hot or windy weather, conducive to plastic shrinkage cracks, apply evaporation retardant to slab after screeding in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Do not use evaporation retardant to increase water content of the surface cement paste. Place concrete for sloping slabs uniformly from the bottom of the slab to the top, for the full width of the placement. As work progresses,vibrate and carefully work concrete around slab reinforcement. Screed the slab surface in an up-slope direction. G. When adverse weather conditions affect.quality of concrete, postpone concrete placement. Do not mix concrete when the air temperature is at or below 40 degrees F and falling. Concrete may be mixed when temperature is 35 degrees F and rising. Take temperature readings in the shade, away from artificial heat. Protect concrete from temperatures below 32 degrees F until the concrete has cured for a minimum of 3 days at 70 degrees F or 5 days at 50 degrees F. When concrete temperature is 85 degrees F or above, do not exceed 60 minutes between introduction of cement to the aggregates and discharge. When the weather is such that the concrete temperature would exceed 90 degrees F, employ effective means, such as pre-cooling of aggregates and mixing water, using ice or placing at night, as necessary to maintain concrete temperature, as placed, below 90 degrees F. 3.09 PUMPING OF CONCRETE A. If pumped concrete does not produce satisfactory results, in the judgment of the Engineer, discontinue pumping operations and proceed with the placing of concrete using conventional methods. B. Pumping Equipment: Use a 2-cylinder pump designed to operate with only one cylinder if one is not functioning, or have a standby pump on site during pumping. C. The minimum hose (conduit) diameter: Comply with ACI 304.2R-96:Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods. D. Replace pumping equipment and hoses (conduits) that do not function properly. E. Do not use aluminum conduits for conveying concrete. F. Field Quality Control: Take samples for slump, air content and test cylinders at the placement(discharge) end of the line. 3.10 CONCRETE PLACEMENT SEQUENCE A. Place concrete in a sequence acceptable to the Engineer. To minimize effects of shrinkage, place concrete in units bounded by construction joints shown. Place alternate units so each unit placed has cured at least 7 days for hydraulic structures,or 3 days for other structures, before contiguous unit or units are placed, except do not 5/2013 03300-23 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE place corner sections of vertical walls until the 2 adjacent wall panels have cured at least 14 days for hydraulic structures and 7 days for other structures. B. Level the concrete surface whenever a run of concrete is stopped. To ensure straight and level joints on the exposed surface of walls, tack a wood strip at least 3/4-inch thick to the forms on these surfaces. Carry concrete about 1/2 inch above the underside of the strip. About one hour after concrete is placed,remove the strip,level irregularities in the edge formed by the strip with a trowel and remove laitance. 3.11 TAMPING AND VIBRATING A. Thoroughly settle and compact concrete throughout the entire depth of the layer being consolidated, into a dense, homogeneous mass; fill corners and angles, thoroughly embed reinforcement,eliminate rock pockets and bring only a slight excess of water to the exposed surface of concrete during placement. Use ACI 309R-96:Guide for Consolidation of Concrete, Group 3, immersion-type high-speed power vibrators (8,000 to 12,000 rpm) in sufficient number and with sufficient(at least one) standby units. Use Group 2 vibrators only when accepted by the Engineer for specific locations. Do not transport concrete by vibrating. B. Use care in placing concrete around waterstops. Carefully work concrete by rodding and vibrating to make sure air and rock pockets have been eliminated. Where flat-strip type waterstops are placed horizontally, work concrete under waterstops by hand, ''`* making sure air and rock pockets have been eliminated. Give concrete surrounding the waterstops additional vibration beyond that used for adjacent concrete placement to assure complete embedment of waterstops in concrete. C. Concrete in Walls: Internally vibrate, ram, stir, or work with suitable appliances, tamping bars, shovels or forked tools until concrete completely fills forms or excavations and closes snugly against all surfaces. Do not place subsequent layers of concrete until previously-placed layers have been so worked. Provide vibrators in sufficient numbers,with standby units as required,to accomplish the results specified within 15 minutes after concrete of specified consistency is placed in the forms. Keep vibrating heads from contact with form surfaces. Take care not to vibrate concrete excessively or to work it in any manner that causes segregation of its constituents. 3.12 PLACING MASS CONCRETE A. Observe the following additional restrictions when placing mass concrete. 1. Use specified superplasticizer. 2. Maximum temperature of concrete when deposited: 70 degrees F. 3. Place in lifts approximately 18 inches thick. Extend vibrator heads into previously-placed layer. 5/2013 03300-24 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE (1.1*.\ 4. Refer to Section 03310 - Structural Concrete for Mass Concreting. 3.13 CONCRETE FINISHING 3.14 FINISHING OF FORMED SURFACES A. Unfinished Surfaces: Finish is not required on surfaces concealed from view in completed structure by earth, ceilings or similar cover,unless indicated otherwise on Plans. B. Rough Form Finish: 1. No form facing material is required on rough form finish surfaces. 2. Patch tie holes and defects. Chip off fins exceeding 1/4 inch in height. 3. Rough form finish may be used on concrete surfaces which will be concealed from view by earth in completed structure,except concealed surfaces required to have smooth form finish, as shown on Plans. C. Smooth Form Finish: 1. Form facing shall produce smooth, hard, uniform texture on concrete. Use plywood linings or forms in as large sheets as practicable, and with smooth, even edges and close joints. 2. Patch tie holes and defects. Rub fins and joint marks with wooden blocks to leave smooth,unmarred finished surface. 3. Provide smooth form finish on the wet face of formed surfaces of water- holding structures, and of other formed surfaces not concealed from view by earth in completed structure,except where otherwise indicated on Plans. Walls that will be exposed after future construction, at locations indicated on Plans, shall have smooth form finish. Smooth form finish on exterior face of exterior walls shall extend below final top of ground elevation. Exterior face of all perimeter grade beams shall have smooth form finish for full depth of grade beam. D. Rubbed Finish: 1. Use plywood linings or forms in as large sheets as practicable, and with smooth, even edges and close joints. 2. Remove forms as soon as practicable,repair defects,wet surfaces,and rub with No. 16 carborundum stone or similar abrasive. Continue rubbing sufficiently to bring surface paste,remove form marks and fins,and produce smooth,dense 5/2013 03300-25 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE surface of uniform color and texture. Do not use cement paste other than that drawn from concrete itself. Spread paste uniformly over surface with brush. Allow paste to reset, then wash surface with clean water. 3. Use rubbed finish at locations indicated on Plans,except where rubbed finish is indicated for a wall which will be containing a liquid, use spray-applied coating. E. Spray-applied Coating: At Contractor's option,in lieu of rubbed finish,spray-applied coating may be applied after defects have been repaired and fins removed. Remove form oil, curing compound and other foreign matter that would prevent bonding of coating. Apply coating in uniform texture and color in accordance with coating manufacturer's instructions. F. Related Unformed Surfaces: Tops of piers, walls, bent caps, and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces shall be struck smooth after concrete is placed. Float unformed surfaces to texture reasonably consistent with that of formed surfaces. Continue final treatment on formed surfaces uniformly across unformed surfaces. 3.15 HOT WEATHER FINISHING A. When hot weather conditions exist, as defined in the Section, 1.03A"Hot Weather", and as judged by the Engineer, apply evaporation retardant to the surfaces of slabs, topping and concrete fill placements immediately after each step in the finishing process has been completed. 3.16 FINISHING SLABS AND SIMILAR FLAT SURFACES TO CLASS A, B AND C TOLERANCES A. Apply Class A, B and C finishes at locations indicated on Plans. Class B or better finish shall be applied if not shown otherwise by the Plans. B. Shaping to Contour: Use strike-off templates or approved compacting-type screeds riding on screed strips or edge forms to bring concrete surface to proper contour. See Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork for edge forms and screeds. C. Consolidation and Leveling: Concrete to be consolidated shall be as stiff as practicable. Thoroughly consolidate concrete in slabs and use internal vibration in beams and girders of framed slabs and along bulkheads of slabs on grade. Consolidate and level slabs and floors with vibrating bridge screeds, roller pipe screeds or other approved means. After consolidation and leveling, do not permit manipulation of surfaces prior to finishing operations. D. Tolerances for Finished Surfaces: Check tolerances by placing straightedge of specified length anywhere on slab. Gap between slab and straightedge shall not exceed tolerance listed for specified class. 5/2013 03300-26 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Straightedge Tolerance Class Length in Feet in Inches A 10 1/8 B 10 1/4 C 2 1/4 E. Raked Finish: After concrete has been placed, struck off, consolidated and leveled to Class C tolerance,roughen surface before final set.Roughen with stiff brushes or rakes to depth of approximately 1/4 inch. Notify the Engineer prior to placing concrete requiring initial raked surface finish so that acceptable raked finish standard may be established for project. Protect raked,base-slab fmish from contamination until time of topping. Provide raked finish for following: 1. Surfaces to receive bonded concrete topping or fill. 2. Steep ramps, as noted on Plans. 3. Additional locations as noted on Plans. F. Float Finish: 1. After concrete has been placed, struck off, consolidated and leveled, do not (°/'11°`, work further until ready for floating. Begin floating when water sheen has disappeared,or when mix has stiffened sufficiently to permit proper operation of power-driven float. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats. Use hand floating with wood or cork-faced floats in locations inaccessible to power- driven machine and on small, isolated slabs. 2. After initial floating, re-check tolerance of surface with 10-foot straightedge applied at not less than two different angles. Cut down high spots and fill low spots to Class B tolerance. Immediately re-float slab to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. 3. Provide float finish at locations not otherwise specified and not otherwise indicated on Plans. G. Trowel Finish: 1. Apply float finish as previously specified. After power floating, use power trowel to produce smooth surface which is relatively free of defects but which may still contain some trowel marks. Do additional troweling by hand after surface has hardened sufficiently. Do final troweling when ringing sound is produced as trowel is moved over surface. Thoroughly consolidate surface by hand troweling operations. 01111N.,. 2. Produce finished surface free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance and conforming to Class A tolerance. On surfaces intended to 5/2013 03300-27 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE support floor coverings,remove defects which might show through covering by grinding. 3. Provide trowel finish for floors which will receive floor covering and additional locations indicated on Plans. H. Broom or Belt Finish: 1. Apply float finish as previously specified. Immediately after completing floated finish, draw broom or burlap belt across surface to give coarse transverse scored texture. 2. Provide broom or belt finish at locations indicated on Plans. 3.17 FINISHING SLABS AND SIMILAR FLAT SURFACES TO "F-NUMBER SYSTEM" FINISH A. Shaping to Contour: Use strike-off templates or approved compacting-type screeds riding on screed strips or edge forms to bring concrete surface to proper contour. Edge forms and screeds: Conform to Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork. B. Consolidation and Leveling: Concrete to be consolidated shall be as dry as practicable. Thoroughly consolidate concrete in slabs and use internal vibration in beams and girders of framed slabs and along bulkheads of slabs on grade. Consolidate and level slabs and floors with vibrating bridge screeds, roller pipe screeds or other approved means. After consolidation and leveling,do not manipulate surfaces prior to finishing operations. C. Tolerances for Finished Surfaces: Independent testing laboratory will check floor flatness and levelness in accordance with this Section,3.23F"Field Quality Control". D. Float Finish: 1. After concrete has been placed, struck off, consolidated and leveled, do not work further until ready for floating. Begin floating when water sheen has disappeared,or when mix has stiffened sufficiently to permit proper operation of power-driven float. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats. Use hand floating with wood or cork-faced floats in locations inaccessible to power- driven machine and on small, isolated slabs. 2. Check tolerance of surface after initial floating with a 10-foot straightedge applied at not less than two different angles. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Immediately refloat slab to uniform, smooth, granular texture to FF20/FL17 tolerance, unless shown otherwise on Plans. 3. Provide "F-Number System" float finish at locations indicated on Plans. 5/2013 03300-28 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE E. Trowel Finish: 1. Apply float finish as previously specified. After power floating, use power trowel to produce smooth surface which is relatively free of defects but which may still contain some trowel marks. Do additional trowelings by hand after surface has hardened sufficiently. Do final troweling when ringing sound is produced as trowel is moved over surface. Thoroughly consolidate surface by hand troweling operations. 2. Produce finished surface free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance and conforming to an FF25/FL20 tolerance for slabs on grade and FF25/FL17 for elevated slabs, unless shown otherwise on Plans. On surfaces intended to support floor coverings, remove defects, which might show through covering, by grinding. 3. Provide "F-Number System" trowel finish at locations indicated on Plans. 3.18 BONDED CONCRETE TOPPING AND FILL A. Surface Preparation: 1. Protect raked, base-slab finish from contamination until time of topping. Mechanically remove oil, grease, asphalt, paint, clay stains or other contaminants, leaving clean surface. 2. Prior to placement of topping or fill, thoroughly dampen roughened slab surface and leave free of standing water. Immediately before topping or fill is placed, scrub coat of bonding grout into surface. Do not allow grout to set or dry before topping or fill is placed. B. Concrete Fill: 1. Where concrete fill intersects a wall surface at an angle steeper than 45 degrees from vertical, provide a 1.5-inch deep keyway in the wall at the point of intersection; size keyway so that no portion of the concrete fill is less than 1.5 inches thick. Form keyway in new walls; create by saw cutting the top and bottom lines and chipping in existing walls. 2. Apply wood float finish to surfaces of concrete fill. 3. Provide concrete fill at locations shown on Plans. C. Bonded Concrete Topping in Bottom of Clarifiers and Thickeners: 1. Minimum thickness of concrete topping: 1 inch. Maximum thickness when swept in by clarifier and thickener equipment: 3 inches. 5/2013 03300-29 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 2. Compact topping and fill by rolling or tamping,bring to established grade,and float. Topping grout placed on sloping slabs shall proceed uniformly from the bottom of the slab to the top,for the full width of the placement. Coat surface with evaporation retardant as needed between finishing operations to prevent plastic shrinkage cracks. 3. Screed topping to true surface using installed equipment. Protect equipment from damage during sweeping-in process. Perform sweeping-in process under supervision of equipment manufacturer's factory representative. After topping has been screeded, apply wood float finish. During finishing, do not apply water, dry cement or mixture of dry cement and sand to the surface. 4. As soon as topping or fill finishing is completed, coat surface with curing compound. After the topping is set and sufficiently hard in clarifiers and where required by the Engineer, fill the tank with sufficient water to cover the entire floor for 14 days. 5. Provide bonded concrete topping in bottom of all clarifiers and thickeners. 3.19 EPDXY PENETRATING SEALER A. Surfaces to receive epoxy penetrating sealer: Apply wood float finish. Clean surface and apply sealer in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Rooms with concrete curbs or bases: Continue application of floor coating on curb or base to its juncture with masonry wall. Rooms with solid concrete walls or wainscots: Apply minimum 2-inch-high coverage of floor coating on vertical surface. C. Mask walls, doors, frames and similar surface to prevent floor coating contact. D. When coving floor coating up vertical concrete walls, curbs, bases or wainscots,use masking tape or other suitable material to keep a neat level edge at top of cove. E. Provide epoxy penetrating sealer at locations indicated on Plans. 3.20 EPDXY FLOOR TOPPING A. Surfaces to receive epoxy floor topping: Apply wood float finish unless recommended otherwise by epoxy floor topping manufacturer. Clean surface and apply epoxy floor topping in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. Thickness of topping: 1/8 inch. B. Rooms with concrete curbs or bases: Continue application of floor coating on curb or base to its juncture with masonry wall. Rooms with solid concrete walls or wainscots: apply 2-inch-high coverage of floor coating on vertical surface. 5/2013 03300-30 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE C. Mask walls, doors, frames and similar surfaces to prevent floor coating contact. D. When coving floor coating up vertical concrete walls, curbs, bases or wainscots,use masking tape or other suitable material to keep a neat level edge at top of cove. E. Finished surface shall be free of trowel marks and dimples. F. Provide epoxy floor topping at locations indicated on Plans. 3.21 SEALER/DUSTPROOFER A. Where sealer or sealer/dustproofer is indicated on Plans,just prior to completion of construction, apply coat of specified clear sealer/dustproofing compound to exposed interior concrete floors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.22 NONSLIP FINISH A. Apply float finish as specified. Apply two-thirds of required abrasive aggregate by method that ensures even coverage without segregation and re-float. Apply remainder of abrasive aggregate at right angles to first application, using heavier application of aggregate in areas not sufficiently covered by first application. Re-float after second application of aggregate and complete operations with troweled finish. Perform finishing operations in a manner that will allow the abrasive aggregate to be exposed and not covered with cement paste. B. Provide nonslip finish at locations indicated on Plans. 3.23 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed in accordance with ACI 301- 99:Specifications for Structural Concrete-IP and under provisions of Sections 01440 —Inspection Services and Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services. B. Provide free access to Work and cooperate with appointed firm. C. Submit proposed mix design to inspection and testing firm for review prior to commencement of Work. D. Tests of cement and aggregates may be performed to ensure conformance with specified requirements. E. Three concrete test cylinders will be taken for every 50 cu yds or less of concrete or as directed by the Engineer. F. One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather concreting,cured on job site under same conditions as concrete it represents. 5/2013 03300-31 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE G. One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken. H. Provide the results of alkalinity tests of concrete used in sanitary structures. Provide one test for each structure. These tests shall be performed by an independent testing laboratory. Perform the test on the concrete covering reinforcing steel on the inside of the pipe or structure. Alkalinity tests are to be in accordance with Encyclopedia of Industrial Chemical Analysis, Vol. 15, Page 230, Interscience Publishers Division, John Wiley and Sons. 3.24 PATCHING A. Allow Engineer to inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms. B. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify Engineer upon discovery. C. Patch imperfections in accordance with ACI 301-99:Specifications for Structural Concrete -IP. 3.25 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Engineer. C. Do not patch, fill, touch-up,repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Engineer for each individual area. 3.26 CURING A. Comply with ACI 308.1-98:Standard Specifications for Curing Concrete. Cure by preventing loss of moisture, rapid temperature change and mechanical injury for a period of 7 curing days when Type II or IP cement has been used and for 3 curing days when Type III cement has been used. Start curing as soon as free water has disappeared from the concrete surface after placing and finishing. A curing day is any calendar day in which the temperature is above 50 degrees F for at least 19 hours. Colder days may be counted if air temperature adjacent to concrete is maintained above 50 degrees F. In continued cold weather, when artificial heat is not provided, removal of forms and shoring may be permitted at the end of calendar days equal to twice the required number of curing days. However, leave soffit forms and shores in place until concrete has reached the specified 28-day strength, unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. B. Cure formed surfaces not requiring rub-finished surface by leaving forms in place for the full curing period. Keep wood forms wet during the curing period. Add water as 5/2013 03300-32 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE needed for other types of forms. Or, at Contractor's option, forms may be removed after 2 days and curing compound applied. C. Rubbed Finish: 1. At formed surfaces requiring rubbed finish, remove forms as soon as practicable without damaging the surface. 2. After rub-finish operations are complete, continue curing formed surfaces by using either approved curing/sealing compounds or moist cotton mats until normal curing period is complete. D. Unformed Surfaces: Cure by membrane curing compound method. 1. After concrete has received a final finish and surplus water sheen has disappeared, immediately seal surface with a uniform coating of approved curing compound, applied at the rate of coverage recommended by manufacturer or as directed by the Engineer. Do not apply less than 1 gallon per 180 square feet of area. Provide satisfactory means to properly control and check rate of application of the compound. 2. Thoroughly agitate the compound during use and apply by means of approved mechanical power pressure sprayers equipped with atomizing nozzles. For (91k) application on small miscellaneous items,hand-powered spray equipment may be used. Prevent loss of compound between nozzle and concrete surface during spraying operations. 3. Do not apply compound to a dry surface. If concrete surface has become dry, thoroughly moisten surface immediately prior to application. At locations where coating shows discontinuities,pinholes or other defects, or if rain falls on a newly coated surface before film has dried sufficiently to resist damage, apply an additional coat of compound at the specified rate of coverage. 3.27 CURING MASS CONCRETE A. Observe the following additional restrictions when curing mass concrete. 1. Minimum curing period: 2 weeks. 2. When ambient air temperature falls below 32 degrees F, protect surface of concrete against freezing. 3. Do not use steam or other curing methods that will add heat to concrete. 4. Keep forms and exposed concrete continuously wet for at least the first 48 hours after placing, and whenever surrounding air temperature is above 90 degrees F during final curing period. 5/2013 03300-33 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 5. During 2-week curing period,provide necessary controls to prevent ambient air temperature immediately adjacent to concrete from falling more than 30 degrees F in 24 hours. 3.28 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Time Limits: 1. When repair of surface defects or finishing is required before concrete is aged, forms on vertical surfaces may be removed as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations. 2. Remove top forms on sloping surfaces of concrete as soon as concrete has attained sufficient stiffness to prevent sagging. Loosen wood forms for wall openings as soon as this can be accomplished without damage to concrete. Leave formwork for water-retaining structures in place for at least 2 days. Formwork for non-water-retaining columns, walls, sides of beams and other formwork components not supporting weight of concrete may be removed after 12 hours, provided concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations, and provided removal of forms will not disturb members supporting weight of concrete. 3. Forms and shoring supporting weight of concrete or construction loads: Leave in place until concrete has reached minimum strength specified for removal of forms and shoring. Do not remove such forms in less than 4 days. B. Circular Paper or Spiral Tube Forms: Follow manufacturer's directions for form removal. Take necessary precautions to prevent damage to concrete surface. When removal is done before completion of curing time,replace form,tie in place, and seal to retard escape of moisture. C. Removal Strength: 1. Control Tests: Suitable strength-control tests will be required as evidence that concrete has attained specified strength for removal of formwork or shoring supporting weight of concrete in beams, slabs and other structural members. Furnish test cylinders and data to verify strength for early form removal. a. Field-cured Test Cylinders: When field-cured test cylinders reach specified removal strength,formwork or shoring may be removed from respective concrete placements. b. Laboratory-cured Test Cylinders: When concrete has been cured as specified for structural concrete for same time period required by laboratory-cured cylinders to reach specified strength, formwork or shoring may be removed from respective concrete placements. 5/2013 03300-34 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Determine length of time that concrete has been cured by totaling the days or fractions of days,not necessarily consecutive,during which air temperature surrounding concrete is above 50 degrees F and concrete has been damp or thoroughly sealed against evaporation and loss of moisture. 2. Compressive Strengths: The minimum concrete compressive strength for removal of formwork supporting weight of concrete is 75 percent of specified minimum 28-day strength for class of concrete involved. 3.29 RESHORING A. When reshoring is permitted, plan operations in advance and obtain the Engineer's approval of such operations. While reshoring is under way, keep live load off new construction. Do not permit concrete in any beam, slab, column or other structural member to be subjected to combined dead and construction loads in excess of loads permitted for developed concrete strength at time of reshoring. B. Place reshores as soon as practicable after form-stripping operations are complete but in no case later than end of day on which stripping occurs. Tighten reshores to carry required loads without over stressing construction. Leave reshores in place until tests representative of concrete being supported have reached specified strength at time of (111.6\. removal of formwork supporting weight of concrete. C. Floors supporting shores under newly-placed concrete: Leave original supporting shores in place, or re-shore. Locate reshores directly under shore position above. Extend reshoring over a sufficient number of stories to distribute weight of newly- placed concrete, forms and construction live loads in such manner that design superimposed loads of floors supporting shores are not exceeded. 3.30 FORM REUSE A. Do not reuse forms that are worn or damaged beyond repair. Thoroughly clean and recoat forms before reuse. For wood and plywood forms to be used for exposed smooth finish,sand or otherwise dress concrete contact surface to original condition or provide form liner facing material. For metal forms, straighten, remove dents and clean to return forms to original condition. C 5/2013 03300-35 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE TABLE 03100A TOLERANCES FOR FORMED SURFACES CONCRETE IN BUILDINGS** For any Variation For any Maximum 20-foot From Variation In 10-foot length or for Entire length any bay Dimension Lines and Surfaces of Columns, 1/4" - - - 1" Plumb or Piers, Walls and Anises Specified Exposed Corner Columns, Control - - - 1/4" 1/2" Batter Joint Grooves, and Other Conspicuous Lines Slab Soffits, Ceilings, Beam Soffits, 1/4" 3/8" 3/4" Level of and Anises (measured before Specified removal of shores), Grade Exposed Lintels, Sills, Parapets, - - - 1/4" 1/2" Horizontal Grooves and Other Conspicuous Lines Drawing Position of Linear Building Lines, - - - 1/2" 1" Dimensions Columns, Walls and Partitions Size and Location of Sleeves, Floor - - - -- - ±1/4" 7 Openings and Wall Openings Cross Section of Columns, Beams, - - - - - - +1/2", -1/4" Slabs, and Walls Footings* in Plan - - - - - - +2", -1/2" Footing Misplacement or Eccentricity - - - - - - 2% of Width in Direction of Error(the lesser of) or 2" Footing Thickness Decrease - - - - - - 5% Footing Thickness Increase - - - - - - No Limit Step Rise in Flight of Stairs -- - - - - +1/8" Step Tread in Flight of Stairs - - - - - - +1/4" Consecutive Step Rise - - - - - - ±1/16" Consecutive Step Tread - - - - - - +1/8" *Footing tolerances apply to concrete dimensions only,not to positioning of vertical reinforcing steel, dowels, or embedded items **Includes water and wastewater process structures 7'111) 5/2013 03300-36 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE TABLE 03100B TOLERANCE FOR FORMED SURFACES CONCRETE IN BRIDGES, WHARVES AND MARINE STRUCTURES Variation From Variation In Maximum Plumb of Specified Surfaces of columns,piers and walls 1/2" in 10' Batter Level or Top surfaces of slabs See Section 03345 Specified Grade Top surfaces of curbs and railings 3/16" in 10' Drawing Cross section of columns, caps, walls, beams, and ±1/2", -1/4" Dimensions similar members Thickness of deck slabs +1/4", -1/8" Size and location of slab and wall openings +1/2" Footings in plan +2, -1/2" Footing misplacement or eccentricity in direction 2% of width or 2" of error(the lesser of) Footing thickness decrease 5% Footing thickness increase No limit Step rise in flight of stairs ±1/8" Step tread in flight of stairs +1/4" Consecutive step rise ±1/16" Consecutive step tread ±1/8" (61111*.\ 5/2013 03300-37 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 3.31 PROTECTION '-11.4) A. Protect concrete against damage until final acceptance by the Owner. B. Protect fresh concrete from damage due to rain, hail, sleet or snow. Provide such protection while the concrete is still plastic and whenever such precipitation is imminent or occurring. C. Do not backfill around concrete structures or subject them to design loadings until all components of the structure needed to resist the loading are complete and have reached the specified 28-day compressive strength, except as authorized otherwise by the Engineer. END OF SECTION 5/2013 03300-38 of 38 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE SECTION 03310 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 1.0 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cast-in-place normal-weight structural concrete and mass concrete. B. References to Technical Specifications: 1. Section 00300—Bid Proposal 2. Section 01200—Measurement 3. Section 01350—Submittals 4. Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services 5. Section 03300—Cast-in-Place Concrete 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Measurement for structural concrete is on an each basis for each structure as bid. (111.116 Payment includes related work performed on these structures in accordance with related sections of these Specifications. B. If Extra Structural Concrete is allowed, based on the Engineer's direction, and indicated in Section 00300—Bid Proposal as an Extra Item,measurement will be on a cubic-yard basis, measured in place. Payment includes related work performed in accordance with related sections of these Specifications. C. Refer to Section 01200—Measurement and Payment for unit price procedures. D. No provisions shall be provided for temperature controlled curing of test cylinder. Test cylinder(s) shall be cured in identical environment until picked up by lab. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Mass Concrete: Concrete sections 4 feet or more in least dimension. B. Hot Weather: Any combination of high air temperature, low relative humidity and wind velocity tending to impair quality of fresh or hardened concrete or otherwise resulting in abnormal properties. Hot weather concreting shall be done in accordance with ACI- 305R. C. Cold Weather: Period when,for more than 2 successive days,mean daily temperature is below 40 degrees F. Cold weather concreting shall be done in accordance with ACI 306R. 5/2013 03310-1 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Conform to Section 01350— Submittals. B. Mill Certificates: Required for bulk cement. C. Design Mixes: 1. Submit test data on proposed design mixes for each type of concrete in the Work, including each class, and variations in type, source or quantity of material. Include type, brand and amount of cementitious materials; type, brand and amount of each admixture; slump; air content; aggregate sources, gradations, specific gravity and absorption; total water(including moisture in aggregate); water/cement ratio; compressive strength test results for 7 and 28 days;and shrinkage tests for Class C and D concrete at 21 or 28 days of drying. 2. Submit abrasion loss and soundness test results for limestone aggregate. 3. Testing of aggregates, including sieve analysis, shall be performed by a certified independent testing laboratory. Tests shall have been performed no earlier than 3 months before Notice to Proceed. 4. Provide standard deviation data for plant producing concrete. Data shall include copies of laboratory test results and standard deviation calculated in accordance with ACI 318, Item 5.3.1. Laboratory tests shall have been performed within past 12 months. When standard deviation data is not available, comply with ACI 318, Table 5.3.2.2. 5. Review and acceptance of mix design does not relieve Contractor of responsibility to provide concrete of quality and strength required by these Specifications. D. Admixtures: Submit manufacturer's technical information, including following: 1. Air-Entraining Admixture: Give requirements to control air content under all conditions,including temperature variations and presence of other admixtures. 2. Chemical Admixtures: Give requirements for quantities and types to be used under various temperatures and job conditions to produce uniform,workable concrete mix. Submit evidence of compatibility with other admixtures and cementitious materials proposed for use in design mix. E. High-Range Water Reducer (Superplasticizer): When proposed for use, submit manufacturer's technical information and instructions for use of superplasticizer. State whether superplasticizer will be added at ready-mix plant or job site. When superplasticizer will be added at job site, submit proposed plan for measuring and adding superplasticizer to concrete mix at job site, and establish dosing area on site with holding tanks and metering devices. When superplasticizer is to be added at 5/2013 03310-2 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE ready-mix plant,submit contingency plans for adding additional superplasticizer at job site when required due to delay in placing concrete. Identify portions of Work on which superplasticizer is proposed for use. F. Hot and Cold Weather Concreting: Submit,when applicable,proposed plans for hot and cold weather concreting. Review and acceptance of proposed procedure will not relieve Contractor of responsibility for quality of finished product. G. Project Record Drawings: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and components that are concealed from view. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide necessary controls during evaluation of materials,mix designs,production and delivery of concrete, placement and compaction to assure that the Work will be accomplished in accordance with Contract Documents. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record dates, locations, quantities, air temperatures, and test samples taken. B. Code Requirements: Concrete construction for buildings shall conform to ACI 318. Concrete construction for water and wastewater treatment and conveying structures shall conform to ACI 318 with modifications by ACI 350R, Item 2.6. Where this Specification conflicts with ACI 318 or ACI 350R, this Specification governs. C. Testing and Other Quality Control Services: 1. Concrete testing required in this section,except concrete mix design,limestone aggregate test data, and testing of deficient concrete,will be performed by an independent commercial testing laboratory employed and paid by the Owner in accordance with Section 01450—Testing Laboratory Services. 2. Provide material for and cooperate fully with Owner's testing laboratory technician in obtaining samples for required tests. 3. Standard Services: The following testing and quality control services will be provided by Owner in accordance with Section 01450 —Testing Laboratory Services: a. Verification that plant equipment and facilities conform to NRMCA "Certification of Ready-Mix Concrete Production Facilities". b. Testing of proposed materials for compliance with this Specification. c. Review of proposed mix design submitted by Contractor. 5/2013 03310-3 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE d. Obtaining production samples of materials at plants or stockpiles during work progress and testing for compliance with this Specification. e. Strength testing of concrete according to following procedures: 1) Obtaining samples for field test cylinders from every 100 cubic yards and any portion less than 100 cubic yards for each mix design placed each day, according to ASTM C172, with each sample obtained from a different batch of concrete on a representative, random basis. Selecting test batches by any means other than random numbers chosen before concrete placement begins is not allowed. 2) Molding four specimens from each sample according to ASTM C31, and curing under standard moisture and temperature conditions as specified in Sections 7(a)and(b)of ASTM C31. 3) Testing two specimens at 7 days and two specimens at 28 days according to ASTM C39, reporting test results averaging strengths of two specimens. However, when one specimen evidences improper sampling, molding or testing, it will be discarded and remaining cylinder considered test result. When high-early-strength concrete is used,specimens will be tested at 3 and 7 days. f. Air content: For each strength test, determination of air content of normal weight concrete according to ASTM C231. g. Slump: For each strength test, and whenever consistency of concrete appears to vary, conducting slump test in accordance with ASTM C143. h. Temperature: For each strength test,checking concrete temperature in accordance with ASTM C1064. Lightweight concrete: For each strength test,or more frequently when requested by the Engineer,determination of air content by ASTM C567 and unit weight by ASTM C567. j. Monitoring of current and forecasted climatic conditions to determine when rate of evaporation,as determined by Figure 2.1.5 of ACI 305R, will produce loss of 0.2 pounds of water, or more,per square foot per hour. Testing lab representative will advise Contractor to use hot weather precautions when such conditions will exist during concrete ''11811) placement,and note on concrete test reports when Contractor has been advised that hot weather conditions will exist. 5/2013 03310-4 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE ("I") k. Class A and D Concrete Shrinkage Tests: Performance of drying shrinkage tests for trial batches as follows: 1) Preparation and Testing of Specimens: Compression and drying shrinkage test specimens will be taken in each case from the same concrete sample; shrinkage tests will be considered a part of the normal compression tests for the project. 4-inch by 4-inch by 11-inch prisms with an effective gage length of 10 inches, fabricated, cured, dried and measured in accordance with ASTM C157,modified as follows: (a). Wet curing: Remove specimens from molds at an age of 23 hours ±1 hour after trial batching and immediately immerse in water at 70 degrees F +3 degrees F for at least 30 minutes; (b). Measure within 30 minutes after first 30 minutes of immersion to determine original length (not to be confused with "base length"); (c). Then submerge in saturated limewater, at 73 degrees F f3 degrees F, for 7 days; (d). Then measure at age 7 days to establish "base length" for drying shrinkage calculations ("zero" days drying age); (e). Calculate expansion (base length expressed as a percentage of original length); (f). Immediately store specimens in a temperature and humidity controlled room maintained at 73 degrees F, ±3 degrees, and 50 percent relative humidity, +4 percent, for the remainder of the test. (g). Measure to determine shrinkage, expressed as percentage of base length. Compute the drying shrinkage deformation of each specimen as the difference between the base length (at ?zero@ days drying age) and the length after drying at each test age. Compute the average drying shrinkage deformation of the specimens to the nearest 0.0001 inch at each test age. If the drying shrinkage of any specimen departs from the average of that test age by more than 0.0004 inch,disregard the results obtained from that specimen. 5/2013 03310-5 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE Report results of shrinkage tests to the nearest 0.001 percent of shrinkage. (h). Report shrinkage separately for 7, 14, 21, and 28 days of drying after 7 days of moist curing. 4. Additional Testing and Quality Control Services: The following will be performed by an independent commercial testing laboratory employed and paid by the Owner in accordance with Section 01450,Testing Laboratory Services, when requested by the Engineer. a. Checking of batching and mixing operations. b. Review of manufacturer's report of each cement shipment and conducting laboratory tests of cement. c. Molding and testing reserve 7-day cylinders or field cylinders. d. Conducting additional field tests for slump,concrete temperature,and ambient temperature. e. Alkalinity Tests: For concrete used in sanitary structures, one test for each structure. Perform alkalinity tests on concrete covering reinforcing steel on the inside of the pipe or structure in accordance with "Encyclopedia of Industrial Chemical Analysis," Vol. 15, page 230. 5. Contractor shall provide the following testing and quality control services: a. Employ an independent commercial testing laboratory, acceptable to Owner, to prepare and test design mix for each class of concrete for which material source has been changed. b. Notify commercial testing laboratory employed by Owner 24 hours prior to placing concrete. 6. Testing of deficient concrete in place: a. When averages of three consecutive strength test results fail to equal or exceed specified strength, or when any individual strength test result falls below specified strength by more than 500 psi, strength of concrete shall be considered potentially deficient and core testing, structural analysis or load testing may be required by the Engineer. b. When concrete in place proves to be deficient, Contractor shall pay costs, including costs due to delays, incurred in providing additional 5/2013 03310-6 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE testing and analysis services provided by the Engineer, or the r6\ independent commercial testing laboratory selected by the Owner. c. Replace concrete work judged inadequate by core tests, structural analysis or load tests at no additional cost to the Owner. d. Core Tests: 1) Obtain and test cores in accordance with ASTM C42. Where concrete in structure will be dry under service conditions, air dry cores (temperature 60 to 80 degrees F, relative humidity less than 60 percent) for 7 days before test; test dry. Where concrete in structure will be more than superficially wet under service conditions, test cores after moisture conditioning in accordance with ASTM C42. 2) Take at least three representative cores from each member or area of concrete in place that is considered potentially deficient. Location of cores shall be determined by the Engineer so as to least impair strength of structure. When,before testing,one or more cores shows evidence of having been damaged during or after removal from structure, replace the damaged cores. 3) Concrete in area represented by core test will be considered adequate when average strength of cores is equal to at least 85 percent of specified strength, and when no single core is less than 75 percent of specified strength. 4) Patch core holes in accordance with Section 03300—Cast-in- Place Concrete, Paragraph 3.13. e. Structural Analysis: When core tests are inconclusive or impractical to obtain, the Engineer may perform additional structural analysis at Contractor's expense to confirm safety of structure. f. Load Tests: When core tests and structural analysis do not confirm safety of structure, load tests may be required, and their results evaluated, in accordance with ACI 318. g. Testing by impact hammer, sonoscope, probe penetration tests (Windsor probe), or other nondestructive device may be permitted by the Engineer to determine relative strengths at various locations in structure,to evaluate concrete strength in place,or for selecting areas to be cored. However, such tests, unless properly calibrated and '` correlated with other test data,shall not be used as basis for acceptance \ or rejection of structure's safety. 5/2013 03310-7 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 1.06 STORAGE AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS A. Cement: Store cement in weather tight buildings, bins or silos to provide protection from dampness and contamination and to minimize warehouse set. When there is any doubt as to the expansive potential of shrinkage-compensating cements because of method or length of storage and exposure, laboratory test cement before use. B. Aggregate: Arrange and use aggregate stockpiles to avoid excessive segregation or contamination with other materials or with other sizes of like aggregates. Build stockpiles in successive horizontal layers not exceeding 3 feet in thickness. Complete each layer before next is started. C. Fine Aggregate: Before using, allow fine aggregate to drain until uniform moisture content is reached. D. Admixtures: Store admixtures to avoid contamination, evaporation or damage. For those used in form of suspensions or non-stable solutions,provide suitable agitating equipment to assure uniform distribution of ingredients. Protect liquid admixtures from freezing and other temperature changes which would adversely affect their characteristics. E. Lightweight Aggregates: Uniformly pre-dampen lightweight aggregates as necessary to prevent excessive variations in moisture content. Allow pre-dampened aggregates to remain in stockpiles,under continuous fog spray, for minimum of 24 hours before use. Provide adequate drainage in stockpile areas to eliminate excess water and accumulation of contaminated fines. 2.0 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cement: 1. Use same brand of cement used in concrete mix design. Use only one brand of each type in each structure, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I or Type II,gray in color. Use Type III only when specifically authorized by the Engineer in writing. Use Type II, including the requirements of Table 2, in construction of liquid-containing structures and cooling towers, unless shown otherwise on Drawings. B. Admixtures: 1. Do not use calcium chloride, thiocyanate or admixtures containing more than 0.05 percent chloride ions. 2. Air-Entraining Admixtures: ASTM C260, compatible with other admixtures used. 5/2013 03310-8 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE r, 3. Chemical Admixtures: Polymer type,non-staining, chloride-free admixtures conforming to ASTM C494, Type A, C, D or E. 4. High-Range Water Reducer (Superplasticizer): ASTM C494, Type F or G, compatible with and by the same manufacturer as other admixtures. C. Mixing Water: Use clean, potable water, free from harmful amounts of oils, acids, alkalis or other deleterious substances, meeting requirements of ASTM C94. D. Aggregates: Use coarse aggregate from only one source and fine aggregate from only one source, for exposed concrete in any single structure. 1. Coarse Aggregate: Gravel,crushed gravel or crushed limestone conforming to ASTM C33. 2. Fine Aggregate: Natural sand complying with ASTM C33. 3. Limestone aggregate shall conform to ASTM C33 and the following additional requirements: a. Clean,hard,strong and durable particles free of chemicals and coatings of silt, clay, or other fine materials that may affect hydration and bond of cement paste. b. Select crushed limestone: High-calcium limestone (minimum 95 percent CaCO3 and maximum 3.5 percent MgCO3)with maximum Los Angeles Abrasion loss of 38 percent, when tested in accordance with ASTM C131 or ASTM C535. c. Test aggregate for soundness in accordance with ASTM C88; maximum loss shall not exceed 18 percent after 5 cycles of magnesium sulfate test. 4. Maximum size of coarse aggregate: a. Normal weight concrete, except as noted below: 1-1/2 inches. b. Formed members 6 inches or less in least dimension: 1/5 least dimension. c. Slabs: 1/3 depth of slab. d. Drilled shafts: 1/3 clearance between reinforcing steel,but not greater than 3/4 inch. e. Concrete fill, seal slabs and bonded concrete topping in clarifiers: 3/8 inch. 5/2013 03310-9 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 5. Coarse aggregate for lightweight concrete: ASTM C330. Grading limits: 3/4 inch to No. 4. 6. Abrasive Aggregate: Conform to requirements of Section 03300 — Cast-in- Place Concrete, Paragraph 3.13. E. Calcium Chloride: Not permitted. F. Evaporation Retardant: Masterbuilders "Confilm", Euclid "Eucobar", or equal. G. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Bonding Agent: Two-component modified epoxy resin. 2. Vapor barrier: 6-mil clear polyethylene film of type recommended for below- grade application. 3. Non-shrink grout: premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement and water-reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength of 2,400 psi in 48 hours and 7,000 psi in 28 days. 2.02 CONCRETE MIX A. Objective: Select proportions of ingredients to produce concrete having proper placability, durability, strength, appearance and other specified properties. B. Mix Design: Employ and pay an independent commercial testing laboratory, acceptable to Owner, to prepare and test mix designs for each type of concrete specified. Proportion mix design ingredients by weight. Submit mix designs and test results for approval. 1. During the trial batches, aggregate proportions may be adjusted by the testing laboratory using two coarse aggregate size ranges to obtain the required properties. If one size range produces an acceptable mix, a second size range need not be used. Such adjustments shall be considered refinements to the mix design and shall not be the basis for extra compensation to the Contractor. Concrete shall conform to the requirements of this Section, whether the aggregate proportions are from the Contractor's preliminary mix design, or whether the proportions have been adjusted during the trial batch process. Prepare trial batches using the aggregates,cement and admixtures proposed for the project. Make trial batches large enough to obtain 3 drying shrinkage test specimens and 6 compression test specimens from each batch. Shrinkage testing is required only for Class A and D concrete. 5/2013 03310-10 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 2. Determine compressive strength by testing 6-inch diameter by 12-inch high cylinders,made,cured and tested in accordance with ASTM C 192 and ASTM C39. Test 3 compression test cylinders at 7 days and 3 at 28 days. Average compressive strength for the 3 cylinders tested at 28 days for any given trial batch shall be not less than 125 percent of the specified compressive strength. 3. Perform sieve analysis of the combined aggregate for each trial batch according to of ASTM C136. Report percentage passing each sieve. 4. In mix designs for Class A and D concrete, fine aggregate shall not exceed 41 percent of total aggregate by weight. C. Shrinkage Limitations, Class A and D Concrete 1. Maximum concrete shrinkage for specimens cast in the laboratory from the trial batch: 0.036 percent as measured at 21-day drying age or 0.042 percent at 28-day drying age. Use for construction only mix designs that meet trial batch shrinkage requirements. Shrinkage limitations apply only to Class A and D concrete. 2. Maximum concrete shrinkage for specimens cast in the field shall not exceed the trial batch maximum shrinkage requirement by more than 25 percent. 3. If the required shrinkage limitation is not met during construction,take any or all of the following actions,at no additional cost to the Owner,for securing the specified shrinkage requirements: Changing the source or aggregates,cement or admixtures; reducing water content; washing of aggregate to reduce fines; increasing the number of construction joints; modifying the curing requirements; or other actions designed to minimize shrinkage or its effects. D. Selecting Ingredient Proportions for Concrete: 1. Proportion concrete mix according to ACI 301, Chapter 3. 2. Establish concrete mix design by laboratory trial batches prepared by independent testing laboratory, or on basis of previous field experience in accordance with provisions of ACI 318,Item 5.3;however,minimum cement content for each class of concrete shall not be less than specified. 3. Concrete mix design data submitted for review shall have average 28-day compressive strength calculated in accordance with ACI 318, Item 5.3.2.1. When data is not available to determine standard deviation in accordance with ACI 318, Item 5.3.1, average 28-day strength of mix design shall conform to ACI 318, Table 5.3.2.2. E. Water-Cement Ratios: 1. Maximum allowable water-cement ratios shall be as follows: 5/2013 03310-11 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE a. Concrete for liquid-containing structures: 0.45. b. Concrete subjected to brackish water, salt spray or deicers: 0.40. c. All other concrete: 0.55. 2. Superplasticizer may be added to maintain specified maximum water-cement ratios. Include free water in aggregate in water-cement ratio computations. F. Adjustment of Mix Proportions: After sufficient data becomes available during construction,mix may be adjusted upon approval of the Engineer,in accordance with ACI 318,Item 5.5;however,minimum cement content for each class of concrete shall not be less than specified. G. Entrained Air: Air-entrain all concrete except drilled shafts. Total air content in accordance with ASTM C 173: 4 to 6 percent. H. Consistency, Workability, and Slump: 1. The quantity of water in a batch of concrete shall be just sufficient, with a normal mixing period,to produce concrete which can be worked properly into place without segregation, and which can be compacted by vibratory methods as specified, to give the desired strength, density, impermeability and smoothness of surface. Change the quantity of water as necessary, with variations in the nature or moisture content of the aggregates, to maintain uniform production of a desired consistency. Determine the consistency of the concrete in successive batches by slump tests in accordance with ASTM C 143. Slumps shall be as follows: Concrete Type Minimum Slump Maximum Slump Portland Cement Concrete 2" 4" Concrete to be dosed with superplasticizer: 1" 3" Normal Weight Concrete after dosing with superplasticizer 4" 9" Lightweight Concrete after dosing with superplasticizer 4" 7" Drilled Shaft Concrete: 4"* 8" *Minimum slump where drilled shafts are cast in temporary casings: 5 inches 2. Specified slump shall apply at time when concrete is discharged at job site. Perform slump tests to monitor uniformity and consistency of concrete delivered to job site; however, do not use as basis for mix design. Do not exceed water-cement ratios specified. 5/2013 03310-12 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE Admixtures: Proportion admixtures according to manufacturer's recommendations. Use of accelerator is permitted when air temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Use of retarder is permitted when temperature of placed concrete exceeds 65 degrees F. J. High-Range Water Reducers (Superplasticizers): Use superplasticizer to improve workability of concrete or delay hydration of cement,in accordance with requirements and recommendations of product manufacturer and approved submittals. K. Concrete Classification and Strength: 1. Strength: Conform to values for class of concrete indicated on Drawings for each portion of Work. Requirements are based on 28-day compressive strength. If high early-strength concrete is allowed,requirements are based on 7-day compressive strength. 2. Classification: Minimum 28-day Class Compressive Strength Minimum Cement Content (Normal-weight) (psi) Pounds per Cubic Yard Concrete for Structures Containing Water or Wastewater A 4,000 564 (6 sacks) B 1,500 329 (3 %2 sacks) (°w"\, C 3,000 470 (5 sacks) D 5,000 658 (7 sacks) H 3,000 611 (6 %2 sacks) Concrete for Buildings, Slabs on Grade and Miscellaneous Structures AB 4,000 Not Applicable BB 1,500 Not Applicable CB 3,000 Not Applicable DB 5,000 Not Applicable Minimum 28-day Class Compressive Strength Minimum Cement Content (Light-weight) (psi) Pounds per Cubic Yard E 3,000 Not Applicable F 4,000 Not Applicable G 5,000 Not Applicable 3. Maximum size aggregate for Class H concrete: 3/8 inch. Maximum size aggregate for all other normal-weight concrete: 1-1/2 inches, except as specified in Paragraph 2.01D.4. 4. When required strength is not obtained with minimum cement content as (111. specified,add cement,lower water-cement ratio or provide other aggregates as necessary. 5/2013 03310-13 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 5. In addition to conforming to specified strength, lightweight concrete must be within specified unit weight limits. Maximum air-dry unit weight is 118 pounds per cubic foot; minimum is 110 pounds per cubic foot unless shown otherwise on Drawings. Determine air-dry unit weight in accordance with ASTM C567. Correlate air-dry unit weight with fresh unit weight of the same concrete as a basis for acceptance during construction. L. Use of Classes of Concrete: 1. Use classes of concrete as indicated on the Drawings and in other specifications. 2. Liquid-containing structures: If not otherwise indicated, use the following classes for structures containing water or wastewater and for utility applications in the locations described: a. Class A: All reinforced concrete and where not otherwise defined. b. Class B: Unreinforced concrete used for plugging pipes, seal slabs, thrust blocks, and trench dams, unless indicated otherwise. c. Class H: Fill and topping. Where concrete fill thickness exceeds 3 inches in the majority of a placement and is not less than 1.5 inches thick, Class A concrete may be used. 3. All other structures: If not otherwise indicated,use the following classes in the locations described: a. Class AB: All reinforced concrete and where not otherwise defined. b. Class CB: Duct banks; see Section 16402—Underground Duct Banks for additional requirements. c. Class BB: Unreinforced concrete fill under structures. 2.03 MIXING NORMAL WEIGHT CONCRETE A. Conform to ACI 301, Chapter 7. B. Ready-Mixed Concrete: 1. Measure,batch,mix and transport ready-mixed concrete according to ASTM C94. Plant equipment and facilities shall conform to NRMCA "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities". 5/2013 03310-14 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 2. Provide batch tickets with information specified in ASTM C94. Deliver batch ticket with concrete and give to Owner's on-site testing laboratory representative. C. Batch Mixing at Site: 1. Mix concrete in batch mixer conforming to requirements of CPMB "Concrete Plant Mixer Standards". Use mixer equipped with suitable charging hopper, water storage tank and water measuring device. Batch mixer shall be capable of mixing aggregates, cement and water into uniform mass within specified mixing time, and of discharging mix without segregation. Operate mixer according to rated capacity and recommended revolutions per minute printed on manufacturer's rating plate. 2. Charge batch into mixer so some water will enter before cement and aggregates. Keep water running until one-fourth of specified mixing time has elapsed. Provide controls to prevent discharging until required mixing time has elapsed. When concrete of normal weight is specified,provide controls to prevent addition of water during mixing. Discharge entire batch before mixer is recharged. 3. Mix each batch of 2 cubic yards or less for not less than 1 minute and 30 seconds.Increase minimum mixing time 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or fraction of cubic yard. 4. Keep mixer clean. Replace pick-up and throw-over blades in drum when they have lost 10 percent of original depth. D. Admixtures: 1. Charge air-entraining and chemical admixtures into mixer as solution using automatic dispenser or similar metering device. Measure admixture to accuracy within+ 3 percent. Do not use admixtures in powdered form. 2. Two or more admixtures may be used in same concrete, provided that admixtures in combination retain full efficiency and have no deleterious effect on concrete or on properties of each other. Inject admixtures separately during batching sequence. 3. Add retarding admixtures as soon as practicable after addition of cement. E. Temperature Control: 1. When ambient temperature falls below 40 degrees F, keep as-mixed temperature above 55 degrees F to maintain concrete above minimum placing temperature. 5/2013 03310-15 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 2. When water or aggregate has been heated, combine water with aggregate in mixer before cement is added. Do not add cement to mixtures of water and aggregate when temperature of mixture is greater than 100 degrees F. 3. In hot weather, maintain temperature of concrete below maximum placing temperature. When necessary, temperature may be lowered by cooling ingredients, cooling mixer drum by fog spray, using chilled water or well- crushed ice in whole or part for added water,or arranging delivery sequence so that time of transport and placement does not generate unacceptable temperatures. 4. Submit hot weather and cold weather concreting plans for approval. 2.04 MIXING LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE A. Determining Absorption of Aggregates: Mixing procedures vary according to total absorption by weight of lightweight aggregates. Determine total absorption by weight before pre-damping in accordance with ASTM C 127. B. Ten Percent or Less Absorption: Follow same requirements as for mixing normal- weight concrete when preparing concrete made with low-absorptive lightweight aggregates having 10 percent or less total absorption by weight. To be low-absorptive, aggregates must absorb less than 2 percent additional water in first hour after mixing. C. More Than 10 Percent Absorption: Batch and mix concrete made with lightweight aggregates having more than 10 percent total absorption by weight, as follows: 1. Place approximately 80 percent of mixing water in mixer. 2. If aggregates are pre-dampened, add air-entraining admixture and all aggregates. Mix for minimum of 30 seconds, or 5 to 10 revolutions of truck mixer. 3. When aggregates have not been pre-dampened, mix aggregates and water for minimum of 1 minute and 30 seconds, or 15 to 30 revolutions of truck mixer. Then add air-entraining admixture and mix for additional 30 seconds. 4. Then,in the following sequence,add specified or permitted admixtures(other than air-entraining agent), all cement, and mixing water previously withheld. 5. Complete mixing using procedures for normal-weight concrete. 2.05 MASS CONCRETE A. Do not use high early-strength cement(Type III) or accelerating admixtures. 5/2013 03310-16 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE B. Use high-range water-reducing admixture(superplasticizer)to minimize water content and cement content. C. Specified water-reducing retarding admixture may be required to prevent cold joints when placing large quantities of concrete, to permit revibration of concrete, to offset effects of high temperature in concrete or weather, and to reduce maximum temperature or rapid temperature rise. 2.06 EQUIPMENT A. Select equipment of size and design to ensure continuous flow of concrete at delivery end. Conform to following equipment and operations requirements. B. Truck mixers, agitators and manner of operation: Conform to ASTM C94. Use of non-agitating equipment for transporting concrete is not permitted. C. Belt conveyors: Configure horizontally, or at a slope causing no segregation or loss. Use approved arrangement at discharge end to prevent separation. Discharge long runs without separation into hopper. D. Chutes: Metal or metal-lined (other than aluminum). Arrange for vertical-to- horizontal slopes not more than 1 to 2 or less than 1 to 3. Chutes longer than 20 feet or (ilata`, not meeting slope requirements may be used if concrete is discharged into hopper before distribution. E. Do not use aluminum or aluminum-alloy pipe or chutes for conveying concrete. 3.0 EXECUTION 3.01 SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS A. Concreting Under Water: Not permitted except where shown otherwise on Drawings or approved by the Engineer. When shown or permitted,deposit concrete under water by methods acceptable to the Engineer so fresh concrete enters mass of previously- placed concrete from within,causing water to be displaced with minimum disturbance at surface of concrete. B. Protection from Adverse Weather: Unless adequate protection is provided or the Engineer's approval is obtained, do not place concrete during rain, sleet, snow or freezing weather. Do not permit rainwater to increase mixing water or to damage surface finish. If rainfall occurs after placing operations begin, provide adequate covering to protect Work. 3.02 PREPARATION OF SURFACES FOR CONCRETING A. Earth Surfaces: 5/2013 03310-17 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 1. Under interior slabs on grade,install vapor barrier. Lap joints at least 6 inches and seal watertight with tape,or sealant applied between overlapping edges and ends. Repair vapor barrier damaged during placement of reinforcing and inserts with vapor barrier material;lap over damaged areas at least 6 inches and seal watertight. 2. Other Earth Surfaces: Thoroughly wet by sprinkling prior to placing concrete, and keep moist by frequent sprinkling up to time of placing concrete thereon. Remove standing water. Surfaces shall be free from standing water,mud and debris at the time of placing concrete. B. Construction Joints: 1. Definition: Concrete surfaces upon or against which concrete is to be placed, where the placement of the concrete has been interrupted so that, in the judgment of the Engineer,new concrete cannot be incorporated integrally with that previously placed. 2. Interruptions: When placing of concrete is to be interrupted long enough for the concrete to take a set,use forms or other means to shape the working face to secure proper union with subsequent work. Make construction joints only where acceptable to the Engineer. 3. Preparation: Give horizontal joint surfaces a compacted,roughened surface for good bond. Except where the Drawings call for joint surfaces to be coated, clean joint surfaces of laitance,loose or defective concrete and foreign material by hydroblasting or sandblasting (exposing aggregate), roughen surface to expose aggregate to a depth of at least 1/4 inch and wash thoroughly. Remove standing water from the construction joint surface before new concrete is placed. 4. After surfaces have been prepared cover approximately horizontal construction joints with a 3-inch lift of a grout mix consisting of Class A concrete batched without coarse aggregate; place and spread grout uniformly. Place wall concrete on the grout mix immediately thereafter. C. Set and secure reinforcement, anchor bolts, sleeves, inserts and similar embedded items in the forms where indicated on Contract Drawings, shop drawings and as otherwise required. Obtain the Engineer's acceptance before concrete is placed. Accuracy of placement is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. D. Place no concrete until at least 4 hours after formwork, inserts, embedded items, reinforcement and surface preparation have been completed and accepted by the Engineer. Clean surfaces of forms and embedded items that have become encrusted /gm.,) with grout or previously-placed concrete before placing adjacent concrete. l 5/2013 03310-18 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE E. Casting New Concrete Against Old: Where concrete is to be cast against old concrete (any concrete which is greater than 60 days of age),thoroughly clean and roughen the surface of the old concrete by hydroblasting or sandblasting (exposing aggregate). Coat joint surface with epoxy bonding agent following manufacturer's written instructions,unless indicated otherwise. Unless noted otherwise,this provision does not apply to vertical wall joints where waterstop is installed. F. Protection from Water: Place no concrete in any structure until water entering the space to be filled with concrete has been properly cut off or diverted and carried out of the forms,clear of the work. Deposit no concrete underwater without special methods. Do not allow still water to rise on any concrete until concrete has attained its initial set. Do not allow water to flow over the surface of any concrete in a manner and at a velocity that will damage the surface finish of the concrete. Pumping,dewatering and other necessary operations for removing ground water, if required, are subject to the Engineer's review. G. Corrosion Protection: Position and support pipe, conduit, dowels and other ferrous items to be embedded in concrete construction prior to placement of concrete so there is at least a 2 inch clearance between them and any part of the concrete reinforcement. Do not secure such items in position by wiring or welding them to the reinforcement. H. Where practicable, provide for openings for pipes, inserts for pipe hangers and brackets, and setting of anchors during placing of concrete. (11.1b'i I. Accurately set anchor bolts and maintain in position with templates while they are being embedded in concrete. J. Cleaning: Immediately before concrete is placed,thoroughly clean dirt,grease,grout, mortar,loose scale,rust and other foreign substances from surfaces of metalwork to be in contact with concrete. 3.03 HANDLING, TRANSPORTING AND PLACING CONCRETE A. Conform to applicable requirements of Chapter 8 of ACI 301 and this Section. Use no aluminum materials in conveying concrete. B. Rejected Work: Remove concrete found to be defective or non-conforming in materials or workmanship. Replace rejected concrete with concrete meeting requirements of Contract Documents, at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Unauthorized Placement: Place no concrete except in the presence of the Engineer. Notify the Engineer in writing at least 24 hours before placement of concrete. D. Placement in Wall Forms: (°1Pb's\ 1. Do not drop concrete through reinforcing steel that will not be covered by current pour. 5/2013 03310-19 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE 2. Do not place concrete in any form so as to leave an accumulation of mortar on form surfaces above the concrete. 3. Pump concrete or use hoppers and, if necessary, vertical ducts of canvas, rubber or metal (other than aluminum) for placing concrete in forms so it reaches the place of final deposit without separation. Free fall of concrete shall not exceed 4 feet below the ends of pump hoses, ducts, chutes or buggies. Uniformly distribute concrete during depositing. 4. Do not displace concrete in forms more than 6 feet in horizontal direction from place where it was originally deposited. Do not transport concrete with vibrators. 5. Deposit in uniform horizontal layers not deeper than 2 feet; take care to avoid inclined layers or inclined construction joints except where required for sloping members. 6. Place each layer while the previous layer is still soft. Rate of placement shall not exceed 5 feet of vertical rise per hour. 7. Provide sufficient illumination in form interior so concrete at places of deposit is visible from the deck or runway. E. Conveyors and Chutes: Design and arrange ends of chutes, hopper gates and other points of concrete discharge in the conveying,hoisting and placing system so concrete passing from them will not fall separated into whatever receptacle immediately receives it. Conveyors, if used, shall be of a type acceptable to the Engineer. Do not use chutes longer than 50 feet. Slope chutes so concrete of specified consistency will readily flow. If a conveyor is used,it shall be wiped clean by a device operated in such a manner that none of the mortar adhering to the belt will be wasted. All conveyors and chutes shall be covered. F. Placement of Slabs: In hot or windy weather, conducive to plastic shrinkage cracks, apply evaporation retardant to slab after screeding in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Do not use evaporation retardant to increase water content of the surface cement paste. Place concrete for sloping slabs uniformly from the bottom of the slab to the top, for the full width of the placement. As work progresses,vibrate and carefully work concrete around slab reinforcement. Screed the slab surface in an up-slope direction. G. When adverse weather conditions affect quality of concrete, postpone concrete placement. Do not mix concrete when the air temperature is at or below 40 degrees F and falling. Concrete may be mixed when temperature is 35 degrees F and rising. Take temperature readings in the shade, away from artificial heat. Protect concrete from temperatures below 32 degrees F until the concrete has cured for a minimum of 3 days at 70 degrees F or 5 days at 50 degrees F. 5/2013 03310-20 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE H. When concrete temperature is 85 degrees F or above, do not exceed 60 minutes between introduction of cement to the aggregates and discharge. When the weather is such that the concrete temperature would exceed 90 degrees F, employ effective means, such as pre-cooling of aggregates and mixing water, using ice or placing at night, as necessary to maintain concrete temperature, as placed, below 90 degrees F. 3.04 PUMPING OF CONCRETE A. If pumped concrete does not produce satisfactory results, in the judgment of the Engineer, discontinue pumping operations and proceed with the placing of concrete using conventional methods. B. Pumping Equipment: Use a 2-cylinder pump designed to operate with only one cylinder if one is not functioning, or have a standby pump on site during pumping. C. The minimum hose (conduit) diameter: Comply with ACI 304.2R. D. Replace pumping equipment and hoses (conduits) that do not function properly. E. Do not use aluminum conduits for conveying,concrete. F. Field Control: Take samples for slump,air content and test cylinders at the placement (discharge) end of the line. (11111. 3.05 CONCRETE PLACEMENT SEQUENCE A. Place concrete in a sequence acceptable to the Engineer. To minimize effects of shrinkage, place concrete in units bounded by construction joints shown. Place alternate units so each unit placed has cured at least 7 days for hydraulic structures,or 3 days for other structures, before contiguous unit or units are placed, except do not place corner sections of vertical walls until the 2 adjacent wall panels have cured at least 14 days for hydraulic structures and 7 days for other structures. B. Level the concrete surface whenever a run of concrete is stopped. To ensure straight and level joints on the exposed surface of walls, tack a wood strip at least 3/4-inch thick to the forms on these surfaces. Carry concrete about 1/2-inch above the underside of the strip. About one hour after concrete is placed,remove the strip,level irregularities in the edge formed by the strip with a trowel and remove laitance. 3.06 TAMPING AND VIBRATING A. Thoroughly settle and compact concrete throughout the entire depth of the layer being consolidated, into a dense, homogeneous mass; fill corners and angles, thoroughly embed reinforcement,eliminate rock pockets and bring only a slight excess of water to the exposed surface of concrete during placement. Use ACI 309R Group 3 immersion- type high-speed power vibrators (8,000 to 12,000 rpm)in sufficient number and with 5/2013 03310-21 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE sufficient(at least one) standby units. Use Group 2 vibrators only when accepted by the Engineer for specific locations. B. Use care in placing concrete around waterstops. Carefully work concrete by rodding and vibrating to make sure air and rock pockets have been eliminated. Where flat-strip type waterstops are placed horizontally, work concrete under waterstops by hand, making sure air and rock pockets have been eliminated. Give concrete surrounding the waterstops additional vibration beyond that used for adjacent concrete placement to assure complete embedment of waterstops in concrete. C. Concrete in Walls: Internally vibrate, ram, stir, or work with suitable appliances, tamping bars, shovels or forked tools until concrete completely fills forms or excavations and closes snugly against all surfaces. Do not place subsequent layers of concrete until previously-placed layers have been so worked. Provide vibrators in sufficient numbers,with standby units as required,to accomplish the results specified within 15 minutes after concrete of specified consistency is placed in the forms. Keep vibrating heads from contact with form surfaces. Take care not to vibrate concrete excessively or to work it in any manner that causes segregation of its constituents. 3.07 PLACING MASS CONCRETE A. Observe the following additional restrictions when placing mass concrete. 1. Use specified superplasticizer. 2. Maximum temperature of concrete when deposited: 70 degrees F. 3. Place in lifts approximately 18 inches thick. Extend vibrator heads into previously-placed layer. • 3.08 REPAIRING SURFACE DEFECTS AND FINISHING A. Conform to Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 3.09 CURING A. Conform to Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 3.10 PROTECTION A. Protect concrete against damage until final acceptance by the Owner. B. Protect fresh concrete from damage due to rain, hail, sleet or snow. Provide such protection while the concrete is still plastic and whenever such precipitation is imminent or occurring. 5/2013 03310-22 of 23 CITY OF PEARLAND STRUCTURAL CONCRETE C. Do not backfill around concrete structures or subject them to design loadings until all rh\ components of the structure needed to resist the loading are complete and have reached the specified 28-day compressive strength, except as authorized otherwise by the Engineer. END OF SECTION 5/2013 03310-23 of 23 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 4 �'' MASONRY TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 SECTION 04 20 00- UNIT MASONRY 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Clay face brick. 3. Mortar and grout. 4. Steel reinforcing bars. 5. Masonry-joint reinforcement. 6. Ties and anchors. 7. Embedded flashing. 8. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s). B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending, lap lengths, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315. Show elevations of reinforced walls. C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following: 1. Clay face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. 2. Pigmented mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project. 3. Cavity vents. 4. Accessories embedded in masonry. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, (limb\ source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates. UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 1. Submittal is for information only. Receipt of list does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing. B. Qualification Data: For testing agency. C. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following: 1. Masonry units. a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. b. For brick, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls within specified tolerances. c. For exposed brick, include test report for efflorescence according to ASTM C 67. d. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations establishing average net-area compressive strength of units. 2. Cementitious materials. Include name of manufacturer, brand name, and type. 3. Mortar admixtures. 4. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 5. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 6. Reinforcing bars. 7. Joint reinforcement. 8. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories. D. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91/C 91 M for air content. 2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement. E. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. F. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups for exposed unit masonry construction in sizes approximately 6' long x 4' high by full thickness, including face and backup wythes and accessories. a. Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches (400 mm) long in exterior wall mockup. UNIT MASONRY 042000-2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 b. Include lower corner of-window opening, with cast stone trim, at upper corner of exterior wall mockup. Make opening approximately 12 inches (300 mm)wide by 16 inches (400 mm) high. c. Include through-wall flashing installed for a 24-inch (600-mm) length in corner of exterior wall mockup approximately 16 inches (400 mm) down from top of mockup, with a 12-inch (300-mm) length of flashing left exposed to view (omit masonry above half of flashing). d. Include metal studs, sheathing, dampproofing, veneer anchors, flashing, cavity drainage material in exterior masonry-veneer wall mockup. - 2. Where masonry-is to match existing, erect mockups adjacent and parallel to existing surface. 3. Clean one-half of exposed faces of mockups with masonry cleaner as indicated. 4. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. 5. Approval of mockups is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; and aesthetic qualities of workmanship. a. Approval of mockups is also for other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. b. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 6. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos. E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. UNIT MASONRY 042000-3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches (600 mm) down both sides of walls, and hold cover securely in place. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least three days after building masonry walls or columns. C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning. E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in /41") TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required. B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths at 28 days. 1. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry by testing masonry prisms according to ASTM C 1314. UNIT MASONRY 042000 -4 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 2.3 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL A. MasonryStandard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE p Y 6, except as modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units where such defects are exposed in the completed Work. C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with requirements for fire-resistance-rated assembly designs indicated. 1. Where fire-resistance-rated construction is indicated, units shall be listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.4 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. 2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated. B. CMUs:ASTM C 90. 1. Density Classification: Lightweight unless otherwise indicated]. 111.14 2. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions. 3/8 inch (10 mm) less than nominal dimensions. 2.5 BRICK A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching finish and color of exposed faces of adjacent units: 1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished. 2. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions, including those at corners, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels. B. Clay Face Brick: Shall match existing face brick. 1. Where shown to "match existing," provide face brick matching color range, texture, and size of existing adjacent brickwork. 2.6 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color ( indicated. \ 1. Alkali content shall not be more than 0.1 percent when tested according to ASTM C 114. UNIT MASONRY 042000 -5 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 B. Hydrated Lime:ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979/C 979M. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar. D. Aggregate for Mortar:ASTM C 144. 1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone. 2. For joints less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve. 3. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. 4. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color. E. Aggregate for Grout:ASTM C 404. F. Water: Potable. 2.7 REINFORCEMENT A. Uncoated-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60 (Grade 420). B. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells and to hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch (3.77- mm) steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated. C. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M. 1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized carbon steel. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm)diameter. 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm)diameter. 5. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.148-inch (3.77-mm) diameter. 6. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches (407 mm)o.c. 7. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet(3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units. D. Masonry-Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Ladder type with single pair of side rods. 2.8 TIES AND ANCHORS A. General: Ties and anchors shall extend at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into veneer but with at least a 3/4" cover on outside face. B. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, (47 Class B-2 coating. UNIT MASONRY 042000-6 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 2. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel, G60 (Z180) zinc coating. 3. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating. 4. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches (100 mm) wide. 1. Z-shaped ties with ends bent 90 degrees to provide hooks not less than 2 inches (50 mm) long may be used for masonry constructed from solid units. 2. Where wythes do not align, use adjustable ties with pintle-and-eye connections having a maximum adjustment of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm). 3. Wire: Fabricate from 1/4-inch- (6.35-mm-)diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire. D. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Steel Framing: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch- (6.35-mm-) diameter, hot- dip galvanized steel wire. 2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie made from 0.25-inch- (6.35-mm-) diameter, hot- dip galvanized steel wire E. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Concrete: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 1. Masonry Anchors to Concrete with Dovetail Slots: Flexible two-piece anchors consisting of (1.116 3/16" diameter trapezoidal shaped wire ties with 16 gage dovetail locking tab and 24 gage minimum steel continuous dovetail slot, completely filled with compressible filler, designed for attachment to formwork prior to placing concrete. a. Furnish dovetail slots to concrete trade for installation. b. Acceptable products include Hohmann & Barnard "305 Dovetail Anchor Slot", or Heckmann Building Products, Inc. "100/103", or equal by Wire Bond. F. Concrete Inserts: 1. Unit Type: Furnish cast-iron or malleable iron inserts of the type and size shown, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication with 1.5 oz. zinc coating, ASTM A 153, Class B-2. 2. For installation of concrete inserts, see Section 03 30 00. Advise concrete installer of specific requirements regarding his placement of inserts which are to be used by the masonry installer for anchoring of masonry work. G. Brick Veneer Anchors at Metal Stud Back-Up Construction: Flexible two-piece anchors consisting of 3/16" diameter trapezoidal shaped galvanized steel wire ties and 14 gage minimum galvanized steel strap designed for screw attachment into metal stud framing. 1. Acceptable products include Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. "DW-10NBT", or equal by Wire Bond. H. Partition Top Anchors: 0.105-inch- (2.66-mm-) thick metal plate with a 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter metal rod 6 inches (152 mm) long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube UNIT MASONRY 042000-7 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. 2.9 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"and as follows: 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) thick. 2. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches (2400 mm) long minimum, but not exceeding 12 feet (3.7 m). Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing. 3. Fabricate through-wall metal flashing embedded in masonry from stainless steel, with ribs at 3-inch (76-mm) intervals along length of flashing to provide an integral mortar bond. 4. Fabricate through-wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face where indicated to receive counterflashing. B. Flexible Flashing: Use the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. EPDM Flashing: Sheet flashing product made from ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer, complying with ASTM D 4637/D 4637M, 0.040 inch (1.02 mm)thick. C. Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following: 1. Where flashing is indicated to receive counterflashing, use metal flashing. 2. Where flashing is indicated to be turned down at or beyond the wall face, use metal flashing. 3. Where flashing is partly exposed and is indicated to terminate at the wall face, use metal flashing with a drip edge or flexible flashing with a metal sealant stop. D. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: 1. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer. 2. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and remain watertight. E. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates. F. Termination Bars for Flexible Flashing: Stainless steel bars. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene. UNIT MASONRY 042000- 8 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated felt complying with ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). D. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity. 1. Configuration: Provide two layers of the following: a. Strips, not less than 1 inch thick and 10. inches (250 mm) high, with dimpled surface designed to catch mortar droppings and prevent weep holes from clogging with mortar. E. Rope Wick: Natural color, non-staining, fiberglass or nylon rope, 3/8" diameter. 2.11 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 2.12 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent. B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry. 1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. 3. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and nonload-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior nonload-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N. 4. For interior nonload-bearing partitions, Type 0 may be used instead of Type N. C. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product to match existing. 1. Pigments shall not exceed 10 percent of portland cement by weight. 2. Mix to match existing. 3. Application: Use pigmented mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units: a. Clay face brick. UNIT MASONRY 042000-9 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi (14 MPa). 3. Provide grout with a slump of 10 to 11 inches (250 to 280 mm) as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. For the record,prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. 2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. 4. Verify that substrates are free of substances that impair mortar bond. B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. (A") 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated. B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections. C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to opening. D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed. F. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry. G. Wetting of Brick: As required, wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested according to ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying. UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 10 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 rb\ 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements: 1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch (12 mm)or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). 2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch (12 mm). 3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) in a story height or 1/2 inch (12 mm)total. B. Lines and Levels: 1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet(6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum. 3. For vertical lines and surfaces,do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet(9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum. 4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet(6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum. 5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet(9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum. 6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet((6 mm in 3 m),) or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum. 7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units. C. Joints: 1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm). 2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). 3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch (9 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm). 4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm). Do not vary from adjacent bed-joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch (3 mm). 5. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm)from one masonry unit to the next. 3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 11 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in bond to match existing, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings; do not use units with less-than- nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 4 inches (100 mm). Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by stepping back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry. E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated. G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below, and rod mortar or grout into core. H. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated. I. Build nonload-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above. 3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay CMUs as follows: 1. Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted. 5. Fully bed units and fill cells with mortar at anchors and ties as needed to fully embed anchors and ties in mortar. B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. C. Tool exposed joints to match existing. . 3.6 ANCHORED MASONRY VENEERS A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing and concrete and masonry backup with masonry- veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements: UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 12 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 1. Fasten screw-attached anchors through sheathing to wall framing and to concrete and (.111b.\, masonry backup with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener. 2. Embed tie sections in masonry joints. 3. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down. 4. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 18 inches (458 mm) o.c. vertically and horizontally. Install additional anchors within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 24 inches (610 mm), around perimeter. B. Provide not less than 2 inches (50 mm) of airspace between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing. 1. Keep airspace clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds away from airspace, to minimize mortar protrusions into airspace. Do not attempt to trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into airspace. 3.7 MASONRY-JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement. B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units. 3.8 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete, where masonry abuts or faces structural steel or concrete, to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch (25 mm) wide between masonry and structural steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically and 36 inches (915 mm) o.c. horizontally. 3.9 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control- and expansion-joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in- ,1.11'` plane wall or partition movement. UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 13 TOM REED LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows using one of the following methods: 1. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. C. Form expansion joints in brick as follows: 1. Build in compressible joint fillers where indicated. D. Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by either leaving an airspace or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," but not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm). 1. Locate horizontal, pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry. 3.10 LINTELS A. Install steel lintels where indicated. B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches (200 mm) at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. 3.11 FLASHING AND CAVITY VENTS A. General: Install embedded flashing in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated: 1. At masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across airspace behind veneer, and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches (200 mm); with upper edge tucked under water-resistive barrier, lapping at least 4 inches (100 mm). Fasten upper edge of flexible flashing to sheathing through termination bar. 2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches (150 mm) at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm)to form end dams. 3. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall, and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge. 4. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall, and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination. 5. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed. C. Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell pans with upturned edges located below face shells and webs of CMUs above and with weep spouts aligned with face of wall. Install CMU web covers so that they cover upturned edges of CMU cell pans at CMU webs and extend from face shell to face shell. D. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry. E. Install weep holes in exterior wythes and veneers in head joints of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing. 1. Space weep holes 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 14 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 C1.16\ F. Place cavity drainage material in airspace behind veneers to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories"Article. 3.12 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION A. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6. B. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches (1520 mm). 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. B. Inspections: Special inspections according to Level B in TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5. 1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site- prepared mortar. (911'.\ 2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement. 3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout. C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests. D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. (464 sq. m) of wall area or portion thereof. E. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 67 for compressive strength. F. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength. G. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. H. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test mortar for compressive strength. I. Grout Test(Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019. J. Prism Test: For each type of construction provided, according to ASTM C 1314 at 7 days and at 28 days. UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 15 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 3.14 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated. C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. 6. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in NCMA TEK 8-4A. 7. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 042000 UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 16 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 5 METALS TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 (111111'\ SECTION 051200-STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Structural steel. ,2. Grout. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.CIP6\ 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Sustainable Design Submittals: 1. See Architectural/Commissioning Documents. C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. B. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties. C. Source quality-control reports. D. Field quality-control and special inspection reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200- 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification (4.4) Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code- Steel." D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC 303. 2. AISC 360. 3. RCSC's"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM_A 325 or A 490 Bolts." PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear and axial connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated. 1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC 360. 2. Use Load and Resistance Factor Design; data are given at factored-load level. B. Moment Connections: Type FR, fully restrained. (4111) 2.2 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS A. See Architectural/Commissioning Documents for sustainable design requirements. B. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M. C. Channels, Angles, M, S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M. D. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M. E. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections:ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B, structural tubing. F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or Type S, Grade B. G. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 2.3 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish. 1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325, compressible-washer type with plaintd.4) finish. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200-2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No.(11111 \ B. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts or tension-control, bolt-nut-washer assemblies with splined ends; ASTM A 563, Grade DH, heavy-hex.carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers with plain finish. 1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 490, compressible-washer type with plain finish. C. Zinc-Coated High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade DH heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: Hot-dip or mechanically deposited zinc coating. 2. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325, compressible-washer type with mechanically deposited zinc coating, baked epoxy-coated finish. D. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, TYpe 1, heavy-hex or round head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain or mechanically deposited zinc coating. E. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1 M, Type B. F. Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 minimum, unless noted otherwise in Structural Drawings. 1. Configuration: Straight. 2. Finish: Plain or hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C. G. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 1. Finish: Plain or hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C. H. Clevises and Turnbuckles: Made from cold-finished carbon . steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1035. 2.4 PRIMER A. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. Comply with Architectural Paint and Coating requirements. 2.5 GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 -3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 2.6 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360. B. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions. 2.7 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts"for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: As indicated in Structural Documents. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 2.8 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches. 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces of high-strength bolted, slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing). 5. Galvanized surfaces. 6. Surfaces enclosed in interior construction. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning." C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 -4 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Cab\ 1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. B. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test shop-bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Welded Connections: Inspect connections according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following testing procedures: 1. Inspections required by weld type: a. Visual inspection of all shop-welded connections and additional testing as required, at testing agency's option. b. Testing of all full penetration and partial penetration shop-welded connections. 2. Testing Procedures: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. Reports shall indicate compliance with specifications. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete-and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing. plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360. B. Base plates, Bearing Plates, and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete-.and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates. 1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with limb` manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200-5 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 3.3 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts"for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened, pretensioned, or slip critical, as indicated in Structural Documents. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Coordinate with Architectural documents for all locations where backing bars or runoff tabs shall be removed, back gouged, and where steel shall be ground smooth. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges,"for mill material. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. Verify structural-steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details. 2. Verify weld materials and inspect welds. 3. Verify connection materials and inspect high-strength bolted connections. B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." D. Welded Connections: Inspect connections according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following testing procedures: 1. Inspections required by weld type: a. Visual inspection of all field-welded connections and additional testing as required, at testing agency's option. b. Testing of all full penetration and partial penetration field-welded connections. 2. Testing Procedures: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection:ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 -6 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 END OF SECTION 051200 (.111114' STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200-7 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 SECTION 052100 -STEEL JOIST FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1.. K-series steel joists. 2. K-series steel joist substitutes. 3. Joist accessories. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product. B. Sustainable Design Submittals: 1. See Architectural/Commissioning Documents. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Include layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacing of joists. 2. Include joining and anchorage details; bracing, bridging, and joist accessories; splice and connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. B. Manufacturer certificates. C. Mill Certificates: For each type of bolt. D. Field quality-control reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying with applicable standard specifications and load tables in SJI's "Specifications." 1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services for designing special joists to comply with performance requirements. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify field-welding procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1 M, "Structural Welding Code- Steel." STEEL JOIST FRAMING 052100- 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SUSTAINABILITY REQUIREMENTS 1. See Architectural/Commissioning Documents. 2.2 K-SERIES STEEL JOISTS A. Manufacture steel joists of type indicated according to "Standard Specification for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel-angle top- and bottom-chord members, underslung ends, and parallel top chord. B. Steel Joist Substitutes: Manufacture according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI's "Specifications,"with steel-angle or-channel members. 2.3 PRIMERS A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance requirements in SSPC-Paint 15. Comply with Architectural Paint and Coating requirements. 2.4 JOIST ACCESSORIES A. Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal or diagonal bridging of material, size, and type required by SJI's "Specifications" for type of joist, chord size, spacing, and span. Detail and fabricate according to SJI's "Specifications." Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability. B. Furnish ceiling extensions, either extended bottom-chord elements or a separate extension unit of enough strength to support ceiling construction. Extend ends to within 1/2 inch of finished wall surface unless otherwise indicated. C. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain or hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50. D. Furnish miscellaneous accessories including splice plates and bolts required by joist manufacturer to complete joist assembly. 2.5 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories. B. Apply one coat of shop primer to joists and joist accessories. C. Shop priming of joists and joist accessories is specified in other specification sections. Comply / with Architectural Paint and Coating requirements. STEEL JOIST FRAMING 052100 -2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured. B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting construction according to SJI's "Specifications,"joist manufacturer's written instructions, OSHA requirements, and requirements in this Section. 1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece. 2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening. 3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that joists are stabilized during construction. C. Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates and framework. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. D. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using high-strength structural bolts or carbon-steel bolts. Comply with RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts"for high-strength structural bolt installation and tightening requirements. E. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. C. Visually inspect bolted connections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 052100 STEEL JOIST FRAMING 052100 -3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 (111111\ SECTION 053100-STEEL DECKING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Roof deck. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated. B. Sustainable Design Submittals: 1. See Architectural/Commissioning Documents. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. B. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck. C. Evaluation reports. D. Field quality-control reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code- Sheet Steel." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 11111. A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members." STEEL DECKING 053100- 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 B. See Architectural/Commissioning Documents for sustainable design requirements. 2.2 ROOF DECK A. Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, and with the following: 1. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33], G90 zinc coating. 2. Galvanized and Shop-Primed Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33, G90 zinc coating; cleaned, pretreated, and primed with manufacturer's standard baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer. a. Color: See Architectural Documents. 3. Deck Profile: As indicated. 4. Profile Depth: As indicated. 5. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated. B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws. C. Side-Lap Fasteners: As indicated. D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber. E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application. F. Flat Sump Plates: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick, of same material and finish as deck. For drains, cut holes in the field. G. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780/A 780M. H. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. B. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection. STEEL DECKING 053100 -2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 (1°116N C. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck. D. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work. E. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work. F. Deck attachment: As indicated. G. Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof deck and weld or mechanically fasten flanges to top of deck. Space welds or mechanical fasteners not more than 12 inches apart with at least one weld or fastener at each corner. 1. Install reinforcing channels or zees in ribs to span between supports and weld or mechanically fasten. H. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates,finish strips, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Weld or mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation. 1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels unless otherwise indicated. I. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure according to SDI recommendations unless otherwise indicated. J. Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck, according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of deck. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Field welds will be subject to inspection. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780/A 780M and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas of prime-painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint, as required. END OF SECTION 053100 STEEL DECKING 053100-3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 SECTION 054000-COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed steel framing product and accessory. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. 2. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For cold-formed steel framing. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agency. B. Welding certificates. C. Product Test Reports: For each listed product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1. Steel sheet. 2. Expansion anchors. 3. Power-actuated anchors. 4. Mechanical fasteners. 5. Vertical deflection clips. 6. Horizontal drift deflection clips 7. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories. D. Research Reports: For non-standard cold-formed steel framing, from ICC-ES. ® 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE '" A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000- 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 B. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic-coating thickness. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M, "Structural Welding Code- Steel." 2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code- Sheet Steel." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect cold-formed steel framing from corrosion, moisture staining, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AllSteel &Gypsum Products, Inc. 2. ClarkDietrich Building Systems. 3. Consolidated Fabricators Corp.; Building Products Division. 4. Marino\WARE. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section Testing Laboratory Requirements," to design cold-formed steel framing. B. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed steel framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Design Loads: As indicated. 2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following: a. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall height. 3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members located outside the insulated building envelope without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F (67 deg C). 4. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as follows: a. Upward and downward movement of 3/4 inch (19 mm). COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 -2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 5. Design exterior non-load-bearing wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection without regard for contribution of sheathing materials. C. Cold-Formed Steel Framing Design Standards: 1. Floor and Roof Systems: AISI S210. 2. Wall Studs: AISI S211. 3. Headers: AISI S212. 4. Lateral Design:AISI S213. D. AISI Specifications and Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with AISI S100 and AISI S200. E. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency. 2.3 COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows: 1. Grade: As required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G90 (Z275)or equivalent. (611111.h.* B. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection and Drift Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows: 1. Grade:As required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G90 (Z275). 2.4 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm). 2. Flange Width:As indicated. B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs. 2. Flange Width: As indicated. C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web. 1111116.s' D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 -3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm). 2. Flange Width: 1 inch (25 mm) plus the design gap for plus twice the design gap for other than one story applications. E. Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges. 1. Outer Track: Of web depth to allow free vertical movement of inner track, with flanges designed to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure. 2. Inner Track: Of web depth indicated. F. Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web and structure. 2.5 FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members. B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows: I 1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. Anchor clips. 5. End clips. 6. Gusset plates. 7. Stud kickers and knee braces. 8. Hole reinforcing plates. 9. Backer plates. 2.6 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554. C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load or strength design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified testing agency. D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated according to ICC- ES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 -4 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping, steel drill screws. 1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere. F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or MIL-P-21035B. B. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, and nonleaching; or of cold-formed steel of same grade and coating as framing members supported by shims. C. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. 1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by no fewer than three exposed screw threads. 4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed steel framing by welding, bolting, pneumatic pin fastening, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings. B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion. C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows: 1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel framing assembly to a maximum out-of- square tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm). C COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 -5 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. B. After applying sprayed fire-resistive materials, remove only as much of these materials as needed to complete installation of cold-formed framing without reducing thickness of fire- resistive materials below that are required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage. C. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of load-bearing wall bottom track and the top of foundation wall or slab at locations with a gap larger than 1/4 inch (6 mm) to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled. B. Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200 and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure. 1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). D. Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened. 1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting.Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to. Shop Drawings, and complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration. E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 -6 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. G. Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold-formed steel framing. Independently frame both sides of joints. H. Install insulation, specified in Section 07 21 00 "Thermal Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work. I. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved or standard punched openings. J. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet(1:960) and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm)from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 3.4 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated. B. Fasten both flanges of studs to bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows: 1. Stud Spacing: As indicated. 2. Stud Spacing: As indicated. C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. 1. Install single deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Install double deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor outer track to building structure. 3. Connect vertical deflection clips to bypassing and infill studs and anchor to building structure. 4. Connect drift clips to cold-formed metal framing and anchor to building structure. E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches (1220 mm) apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12 inches (305 mm) of single deflection track. Install a combination of bridging and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs, secured to stud webs or flanges. a. Install solid blocking at centers indicated, or centers indicated on approved Shop Drawings. COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000-7 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 2. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall- framing system. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.. B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting. C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 054000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 8 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS rsb. Project No. 14171 SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes furnishing and installing: 1. Rough hardware. 2. Miscellaneous framing and supports for the following: a. Applications where framing and supports are not specified in other sections. 3. Pipe bollards. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Coordinate work of this Section with work of other Sections as required to properly execute the Work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of other Sections. 1.4 REFERENCES A. Comply with the provisions of the following codes, standards and specifications, except as otherwise shown and specified. 1. AISC: Follow AISC "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings", including "Commentary of the AISC Specifications". 2. AISI: Follow AISI "Specifications for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members". 3. ASTM: Follow ASTM A 6 "General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet Piling and Bars for Structural Use". 4. AWS: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel" and D1.3 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel". Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification. 1.5 DESIGN/PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fabrication Workmanship: Provide the following classes of workmanship for miscellaneous metal fabrication items indicated or required. 1. Class 1 Workmanship: Items that are exposed to view in finished spaces in completed Work. a. Exposed Surfaces: Sandblast surfaces smooth; grind off mill marks; fill nicks and scratches so that defects do not show when painted. Remove sharp corners and edges. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 b. Welds: Conceal welds where possible. Where exposed, grind welds to small radius with uniform sized cove. When painted, welds shall be undetectable. c. Bolts: Use only flat head countersunk bolts in exposed locations. d. Straightness: Distortions visible to the eye will be rejected. e. Joints: Fit joints to hairline finish. 2. Class 2 Workmanship: Items that are exposed to view in utility areas of the completed Work. a. Exposed Surfaces: Moderate irregularities not visible at 30-feet (9 m) may remain. Mill marks may remain. Remove sharp corners and edges. b. Welds: Provide neat welds of uniform size. Remove splatter and protrusions. c. Bolts: Use only flat or oval head, countersunk bolts where exposed to view. d. Straightness: Minor distortions not exceeding 1/8-inch (3 mm) in 8'-0" (2.4 m) will be permitted. e. Joints: Provide maximum gap of 1/16-inch (1.5 mm). 3. Class 3 Workmanship: Items that are concealed from view in the completed Work. a. Exposed Surfaces: Mill finish with surface preparation for galvanizing or priming. b. Welds: Grinding not required. c. Bolts: Exposed bolts permitted. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data for each type of manufactured product and accessory required. B. Submit shop drawings detailing the fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. 2. Show anchorage and accessory items. 3. Provide templates for anchors and anchor bolts specified for installation as part of the work of other Sections. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view upon completion of the Work, provide materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes. Do not use materials whose exposed surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, roughness, and, for steel sheet, variations in flatness exceeding those permitted by reference standards for stretcher- leveled sheet. B. Ferrous Metals: 1. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36, pickled when exposed to view. 2. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate (stair treads and platforms): ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS (1111111'N' Project No. 14171 3. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type S, Grade A, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless otherwise indicated or required by structural loads, black finish unless galvanized finish is required. 4. Cold-Rolled Structural Steel Sheet: ASTM A 611, Grade A. 5. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 569. 6. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Commercial Quality Grade (or ASTM A 446, Grade A), with G90 zinc coating, unless another grade is required for fabrication or design loading. 7. Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A 47, grade 32510. 8. Welding Rod and Bar Electrodes: Select in accordance with AWS Specifications for the metal alloy to be welded. 2.2 ACCESSORY ITEMS A. Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, prepackaged complying with Corps of Engineers CRD-C 621; Master Builders . "Masterflow 713", Cormix Construction Chemicals "Supreme Grout", Sonneborn Building Products "Sonogrout", or L & M Construction Chemicals "Crystex". B. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Premixed, prepackaged, nonstaining hydraulic expansion cement formulation; Minwax Construction Products "Super Por-Rok". C. Fasteners, General: Provide zinc-coated fasteners for exterior use and where exposed to moisture. Select fasteners for the type, grade and class required for the installation of miscellaneous metal items. (I"'\, 1. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head, ASTM A 307, Grade A. 2. Lag Bolts: Square head type, FS FF-B-561. 3. Machine Screws: Cadmium plate steel, FS FF-S-92. 4. Plain Washers: Round carbon steel, FS FF-W-92. 5. Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84. 6. Drilled-in Sleeve Type Expansion Anchors: FS FF-S-325, Group II, Type 3 externally threaded stud with full-length expanding sleeve; Hilti sleeve anchor, or equivalent by Powers or Simpson. 7. Drilled-in Wedge-Type Expansion Anchors: FS FF-S-325, Group II, Type 4 externally threaded stud with single-piece wedge; Hilti Kwik Bolt II, or equivalent by Powers or Simpson. 8. Epoxy Adhesive Anchors for Concrete: Hilti Corp., Tulsa, OK, (Tel) 800-879- 8000 or 713-462-8699, "HVA Adhesive Anchor", 3/8" (10 mm) x 4" (100 mm) long unless otherwise indicated or required for proper fastening of items indicated, or equivalent by Powers (Rawl), Ramset/Redhead, or Simpson. D. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fabricator's standard, fast-curing, lead and chromate free, VOC compliant, corrosion resistant primer compatible with finish paint systems indicated. E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc-dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel containing not less than 93% zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint 20. 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 A. Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated but not less than that needed to comply with performance requirements indicated. Work to dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials indicated or specified for various components of • each metal fabrication. B. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or if not indicated, use flat head countersunk Phillips screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous. Form bent-metal corners to the smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the work. C. Weld corners and seams continuously and in accordance with the recommendations of AWS. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blend so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour at welded surfaces match adjacent surfaces. D. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for the intended use. Coordinate with supporting structure. E. Preassemble items in the shop to the greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain the structural value of the joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. F. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. G. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes where water may accumulate. 2.4 ROUGH HARDWARE A. Furnish custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels, and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes in the sizes, shapes and dimensions required for framing and supporting and anchoring rough carpentry. Hot-dip galvanize where exposed to atmosphere or embedded into concrete. Furnish malleable iron washers for bolt heads and nuts that bear on wood connections; elsewhere furnish steel washers. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. Provide steel framing and supports for applications indicated or that are not part of the structural steel framework, as required to complete work. 1. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports in exterior locations. 2. Fabricate units to sizes, shapes and profiles indicated and required to receive adjacent other construction retained by framing and supports. 3. Fabricate from structural steel plates, shapes and bars of welded construction, using mitered joints for field connection. 4. Cut, drill and tap units to receive hardware, hangers and similar items. 5. Equip units with integrally welded 1-1/4" (31 mm) x 1/4" (31 mm) x 8" (200 mm) anchors for casting into concrete and building into masonry. 6. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-4 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 2.6. SHOP FINISHES A. Galvanize Coated Metal: For shelf angles, exterior wall lintels, other metal fabrications items with exterior exposure hot dip galvanize items in accordance with ASTM A 153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware ASTM A 123 for galvanizing both fabricated and unfabricated iron and steel products made of uncoated rolled, pressed, and forged shapes, plates, bars, and strip 0.0299" (0.74 mm) thick and heavier. B. Shop Painting of Uncoated Metal: Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning" for exterior exposures (SSPC Zone 1 B), SSPC-SP3 "Power Tool Cleaning" for interior exposures (SSPC Zone 1A), and SSPC- SP1 "Solvent Cleaning" for both interior and exterior exposures to remove oil, grease and similar contaminants. 1. Brush or spray 1 coat of primer paint to fabricated metal items, except apply 2 coats of primer at edges, corners, crevices, welds and concealed surfaces of exterior exposure items. 2. Do not paint surfaces and edges to be field welded or embedded in concrete. Provide minimum 2.0 mill (0.05 mm) dry film thickness per coat. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FASTENING TO IN-PLACE CONSTRUCTION (_ A. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners for securing miscellaneous metal items to in- place construction; include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws and other connectors. 3.2 CUTTING, FITTING, AND PLACEMENT A. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for the installation of the miscellaneous metal items. B. Set the work accurately in location, alignment and elevation; with edges and surfaces plumb, level, true and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete masonry or similar construction. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. E. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. 3.3 FIELD WELDING A. Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding work. (00",, METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-5 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 B. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. C. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent. 3.4 TOUCH-UP-PAINTING A. Cleaning and touch-up painting of field welds in other than hot-dip galvanized items, bolted connections, and abraded areas of the shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Section 099000. B. For galvanized surfaces clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A780. END OF SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-6 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 SECTION 055813-COLUMN COVERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes snap-together metal column covers. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including finishing materials. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for column covers. (111111" C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or design. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on 6-inch- (150- mm-) square Samples of metal of same thickness and material indicated for the Work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing column covers similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. B. Organic-Coating Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in successfully applying organic coatings of type indicated to metals of types indicated and that employs competent control personnel to conduct continuing, effective quality-control program to ensure compliance with requirements. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver column covers wrapped in protective coverings and strapped together in suitable packs or in heavy-duty cartons. Remove protective coverings before they stain or bond to finished surfaces. (1111111h\ COLUMN COVERS 055813 - 1 (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SNAP-TOGETHER COLUMN COVERS A. Manufacturers and Types: Provide Pittcon Industries EEC Snap-Lock Column Covers (basis of design), or subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Fry Reglet Corporation. 2. MM Systems Corporation. B. Form column covers to shapes indicated from metal of type and minimum thickness indicated below. Return vertical edges and bend to form hook that engages continuous mounting clips. 1. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), with not less than strength and durability properties of Alloy 5005-H32, 0.063 inch (1.60 mm)thick. a. Finish: High-performance organic coating. 2. Column covers may be fabricated from prefinished metal sheet in lieu of finishing after fabrication provided unfinished edges are concealed from view. 3. Increase metal thickness or reinforce with concealed stiffeners, backing materials, or both, as needed to provide flat surfaces where indicated. 4. Support joints with concealed stiffeners as needed to hold exposed faces of adjoining sheets in flush alignment. 5. Form returns at vertical joints to accommodate backer rod and sealant. 6. Fabricate column covers without horizontal joints. 7. Fabricate base ring to match column covers. 8. Fabricate with calk stop/stiffener ring. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Fabricated from same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with materials joined. 1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting column covers and for attaching them to other work unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard fastening method. B. Sound-Deadening Materials: 1. Insulation: Unfaced, mineral-fiber blanket insulation complying with ASTM C 665, Type I, and passing ASTM E 136 test. 2. Mastic: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M. C. Backing Materials: Provided or recommended by column cover manufacturer. COLUMN COVERS 055813 -2 (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 (..b\ Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Coordinate dimensions and attachment methods of column covers with those of adjoining construction to produce integrated assemblies with closely fitting joints and with edges and surfaces aligned unless otherwise indicated. B. Form metal to profiles indicated, in maximum lengths to minimize joints. Produce flat, flush surfaces without cracking or grain separation at bends. 2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Apply organic and anodic finishes to formed metal after fabrication unless otherwise indicated. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2604 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, rb\I and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of column covers. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place column covers plumb and in alignment with adjacent construction. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install column covers. 1. Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return items with such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete refinishing, or provide new units as required. B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. COLUMN COVERS 055813 -3 (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 C. Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide reveals and openings for sealants and joint fillers as indicated. D. Corrosion Protection: Apply bituminous paint or other permanent separation materials on concealed surfaces where metals would otherwise be in direct contact with substrate materials that are incompatible or could result in corrosion or deterioration of either material or finish. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new units. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes from damage during construction period. Remove temporary protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 055813 COLUMN COVERS 055813 -4 (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) r \ TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 6 WOODS, PLASTICS & COMPOSITES TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 C.11.\ SECTION 061000-ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK OF THIS SECTION: A. Work includes furnishing and installing plywood panels, wood blocking, nailers, cants, and related hardware items required for work of this Section. 1.3 RELATED WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS: A. Coordinate work of this Section with work of other Sections as required to properly execute the Work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of other Sections. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Factory-mark each piece of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill and grading agency identification; except omit marking from surfaces to receive transparent finish, and submit mill certificate that material has been inspected and graded in accordance with requirements if it cannot be marked on a concealed surface. B. Mark each unit of fire-retardant treated lumber and plywood with classification marking of Underwriters Laboratory, Inc., or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Place marking on surfaces which will not be exposed after installation. 1.5 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit wood treatment manufacturer's instructions for proper use of each type of treated material. 1. For each type pressure treatment specified, include certification by treating plant stating type of preservative chemicals and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained, and conformance with applicable standards. 2. For water-borne preservatives, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels indicated prior to shipment to Project Site. 3. Include certification by treating plant that fire-retardant treatment material complies with specified standard and other requirements. 1.6 PROJECT HANDLING: A. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber and plywood and provide air circulation within stacks and under temporary coverings, including polyethylene and similar material. 1. For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, sticker between each course to provide air circulation. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow proper attachment of other work. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER: A. Manufacture lumber to comply with DOC PS 20 "American Softwood Lumber Standard" and with applicable grading rules of the inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimen- sions. Provide actual sizes as required by DOC PS 20, for the moisture content specified for each use. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise shown or specified. B. Provide dry and air-seasoned not less than 30 days with moisture content not to exceed 19%. C. All lumber shall be graded and grade-marked as herein specified and shall comply with the latest grading rules of the association under whose rules the material was produced. In the event Contractor wishes to use lumber of other species or grades, he shall submit pertinent data for Architect's acceptance prior to placing orders. 1. All nailers, blocking, and plates in contact with concrete or masonry shall be Standard Grade Douglas Fir, or No. 1 Southern Pine. Material shall be preservative treated as hereinafter specified. Treatment shall be applied after members are shaped. 2.2 PLYWOOD: B. Panel Type: 1.. Plywood Panels: Provide fire-retardant-treated plywood panels with grade, C-D Plugged Exposure 1, in thickness indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, not less than 15/32 inch ^� (11.9 mm)thick. 2.3 PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT: A. Where lumber or plywood is indicated as "Trt-Wd" or "Treated," or is specified herein to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber) and C9 (Plywood), except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX). 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and one of the following: a. Ammoniacal copper citrate(CC) b. Copper azole,Type A(CBA-A). c. Oxine copper(copper-8-quinolinolate) in a light petroleum solvent. B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 2.4 FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT: A. Where fire-retardant treated wood ("FRTW") is indicated, pressure impregnate lumber and plywood with fire-retardant chemicals to comply with AWPA C20 and C27, respectively, for treatment type indicated below; identify "FRTW" lumber with appropriate classification marking of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, Inc. or other testing and inspecting ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 (11"6\ agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. For FRTW wood exposed to exterior, use treatment chemicals and process which show no increase in surface burning characteristics when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2898, Method A(Standard Rain Test). 2. For FRTW wood used in interior applications not exposed to relative humidities in excess of 92%, use treatment chemicals with reduced hygroscopicity which are non-corrosive to metal fasteners, are non-blooming and permit use of transparent oil-based finishes. B. Current Evaluation/Research Reports: Provide fire-retardant-treated wood for which a current model code evaluation/research report exists that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and that evidences compliance of fire-retardant-treated wood for application indicated. C. Interior Type A: For interior locations, use chemical formulation that produces treated lumber and plywood with the following properties under conditions present after installation: 1. Bending strength, stiffness, and fastener-holding capacities are not reduced below values published by manufacturer of. chemical formulation under elevated temperature and humidity conditions simulating installed conditions when tested by a qualified independent testing agency. 2. No form of degradation occurs due to acid hydrolysis or other causes related to treatment. 3. Contact with treated wood does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. D. Inspect each piece of lumber and plywood or each unit of finish carpentry after drying; do not use twisted,warped, bowed or otherwise damaged or defective wood. E. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products complying with specified requirements as manufactured by one of the following: 1. Interior Type A Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: a. Hickson Corporation. b. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc. c. Osmose Wood Preserving Co., Inc. F. All wood blocking and cants shall be fire-retardant treated. 2.5 FASTENERS: A. Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of Type 304 stainless steel. 2. Nails,Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105. 3. Power Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. 4. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6. 5. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. 6. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and where indicated,flat washers. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry and that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines,with members plumb,true to line, cut, and fitted. C. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction. D. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and plywood. E. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. CABO NER-272 for power-driven staples, P-nails, and allied fasteners. 2. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer. 3. "Recommended Nailing Schedule" of referenced framing standard and with AFPA's "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction." 4. "Table 23-I-Q--Nailing Schedule"of the Uniform Building Code. 5. "Table 2305.2--Fastening Schedule"of the BOCA National Building Code. 6. "Table 1705.1--Fastening Schedule,"of the Standard Building Code. F. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; predrill as required. G. Use hot-dip galvanized or stainless-steel nails where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground f"4 contact, or in area of high relative humidity. 3.2 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING,AND SLEEPERS A. Install wood grounds, nailers, cants, blocking, and sleepers where shown and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes shown and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. END OF SECTION 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-4 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 (.111lb'\ SECTION 061600—GYPSUM SHEATHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Gypsum sheathing. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: As tested according to ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency. 2.2 WALL SHEATHING A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: Georgia-Pacific Building Products "Densglass", or equal by National Gypsum, or United States Gypsum Co. 2. Type and Thickness Type X, 5/8 inch (15.9 mm)thick. 3. Size: 48 by 108 inches (1219 by 2743 mm). GYPSUM SHEATHING 061600- 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 4. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 5/8 inch (16 mm). 2.3 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Provide fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws, in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing to be attached. 1. For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick, use screws that comply with ASTM C 954. 2.4 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS A. Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Silicone emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834, compatible with sheathing tape and sheathing and recommended by tape and sheathing manufacturers for use with glass-fiber sheathing tape and for covering exposed fasteners. 1. Sheathing Tape: Self-adhering glass-fiber tape, minimum 2 inches (50 mm) wide, 10 by 10 or 10 by 20 threads/inch (390 by 390 or 390 by 780 threads/m), of type recommended by sheathing and tape manufacturers for use with silicone emulsion sealant in sealing joints in glass-mat gypsum sheathing and with a history of successful in-service use. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members. B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated. C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the ICC's International Building Code. 2. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in the ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two- Family Dwellings. 3. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener. D. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly. GYPSUM SHEATHING 061600-2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 E. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements. F. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast. 3.2 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 2. Install panels with a 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural elements. 3. Install panels with a 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking. B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing, but do not cut into facing. C. Vertical Installation: Install vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges with those of adjacent panels.Attach at perimeter and within field of panel to each stud. 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch (9.5 mm)from edges and ends of panels. D. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Apply sufficient amount of sealant to completely cover joints and fasteners after troweling. Seal other penetrations and openings. 2. Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing joints and apply and trowel sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other penetrations and openings. END OF SECTION 061600 GYPSUM SHEATHING 061600-3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 SECTION 061601 —PLYWOOD SHEATHING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wall sheathing. 2. Parapet sheathing. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. ($11111\, 1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials. 2. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated plywood both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5516. 3. For products receiving waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 1. Fire-retardant-treated plywood. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire- retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. PLYWOOD SHEATHING 061601 - 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: As tested according to ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency. 2.2 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS A. Emissions: Products shall meet the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers." B. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness indicated. C. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard. 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED PLYWOOD A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire- test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire- retardant-treated plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. 3. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber plywood shall be tested according to ASTM D 5516 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to '''�� ASTM D 6305. Span ratings after treatment shall be not less than span ratings specified. l PLYWOOD SHEATHING 061601 -2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 rh\ C. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. D. Identify fire-retardant-treated plywood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. E. Application: Treat all plywood unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 WALL SHEATHING A. Oriented-Strand-Board Sheathing: DOC PS 2,Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 24/0. 2. Nominal Thickness:Not less than 1/2 inch(13 mm). 2.5 PARAPET SHEATHING A. Plywood Sheathing: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, Exterior, Structural I sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 24/0. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 5/8". (.111b\ 2.6 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. For parapet and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117. B. Nails,Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,based on ICC-ES AC70. D. Screws for Fastening Wood Structural Panels to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members. PLYWOOD SHEATHING 061601 -3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated. C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the ICC's International Building Code. 2. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener. D. Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood. E. Coordinate wall and parapet sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly. F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements. G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast. 3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Wall Sheathing: a. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. b. Space panels 1/8 inch(3 mm) apart at edges and ends. END OF SECTION 06160 PLYWOOD SHEATHING 061601 -4 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 SECTION 064000- INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK OF THIS SECTION A. This Section includes the following: 1. Plastic-laminate clad cabinets, end panels, and countertops. 1.3 RELATED WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS: A. Coordinate work of this Section with work of other Sections as required to properly execute the Work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of other Sections. 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items, unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including cabinet hardware and accessories, handrail brackets. B. Product Data: For plywood, high-pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate, thermoset decorative overlay, cabinet hardware and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details half size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. D. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of material indicated. 1. Plastic laminates. 2. Thermoset decorative overlays. E. Samples for Verification: For the following: 1. Plastic-laminate-clad panel products, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish,with separate samples of unfaced panel product used for core. 2. Thermoset decorative-overlay surfaced panel products, 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for (111111'‘ each type, color, pattern, and surface finish. 3. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish. F. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of woodwork certifying that products furnished comply INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064000 - 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 with requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork, construction, finishes, and other requirements. 1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program labels or compliance certificate indicating that woodwork complies with requirements of grades specified. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only. in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. B. Thermoset Decorative Overlay: Particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, or medium- density fiberboard complying with ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, with surface of thermally fused, melamine- impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1. C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated, or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. Refer to Drawings for laminate selection. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure decorative INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064000 -2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 laminates by one of the following: 1111*'.1 a. Formica Corporation. b. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc. D. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Provide waterproof type as recommended by decorative laminate manufacturer. 1. Adhesive shall contain less than 250 volatile organic compounds (VOCs). 2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. Hardware Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.9 for items indicated by referencing BHMA numbers or items referenced to this standard. B. Cabinet Hardware and Miscellaneous Item Schedule: 1. Pulls: 4 Inch Wire Aluminum, satin finish. 2. Cabinet Door and Drawer Locks: Comp X National Cabinet Lock No. C8053-14A-KA415A. 3. Hinges: Concealed 165 degree with automatic spring: Hafele, Duomatic. 4. Drawer Slides: Accuride Model 3832C/3834C at desk locations, or indicated. 5. Shelf Pins: Hafele #282.04.711 (behind cabinet door locations); Knape & Vogt Model No. 255 standards and No. 256 clips(at open cabinets) 6. Continuous Hinges: Stanley 472911, Stainless Steel. 7. Shelf Standards and Brackets:. Knape&Vogt#80 standards and#180 brackets C. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide Custom grade interior woodwork complying with the referenced quality standard, unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas. C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064000 -3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF.PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment. E. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. 2.5 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for laminate cabinets, unless otherwise indicated. B. Grade: Custom. C. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: As indicated. D. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements: 1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: HGS. 3. Vertical Surfaces: HGS. 4. Edges: HGS minimum thickness, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. E. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces: Provide surface materials indicated below: 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative overlay, equal to Melamine. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood. F. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 1. Provide Architect's selections from laminate manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes in solid colors. G. End panels of plastic laminate faced panels shall be provided at all open cabinet ends. 2.6 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for high-pressure decorative laminate countertops, except as otherwise specified herein. B. Grade: Custom,with exterior grade plywood core. C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS. D. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements: 147 1. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of colors and finishes in the following categories: INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064000 -4 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 a. Solid colors. E. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. F. Core Material: Exterior-grade plywood. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AW I Section 1700 for the same grade specified in Part 2 of this Section for type of woodwork involved. B. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops)to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged finish at cuts. (611111'\ D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. E. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch (25-mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips or No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish or toggle bolts through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish. F. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 3. Secure backsplashes to walls with adhesive. 4. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064000 -5 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. END OF SECTION INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064000 -6 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 SECTION 066116 - SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS. PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes furnishing and installing solid polymer fabrications (solid surfacing) as follows: 1. Countertops with matching aprons and splashes. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Coordinate work of this Section with work of other Sections as required to properly execute the Work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of other Sections. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings detailing fabrication of solid surfacing. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of fabrication construction, including related work such as blocking to be built into other work, holes and other pertinent data. Show and note field dimensions requiring field measurement for verification and coordination with related work. Include, as applicable, a schedule of finishes and similar information. B. Submit solid surfacing samples for color verification. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Take field measurements at each location to assure fit of fabricated units to existing conditions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: A. Solid Surfacing: 1. DuPont "Corian," filled methyl methacrylate; Clam Shell 2. Countertop, Apron and Splash Thickness and Size: 3/4" (19 mm) thick x full depth x maximum length pieces to limit joints. B. Accessory Materials: Provide solvent adhesive, joint sealant and other similar materials recommended by solid surfacing manufacturer for fabrication and installation of solid surfacing. 2.2 FABRICATION SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS 06616- 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 A. Fabricate solid surfacing material as shown and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions, and to provide a quality uniform appearance with a minimum of joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Confirm that supporting work is securely fastened in place, is plumb, level and ready to receive subsequent construction. Do not proceed with installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. 3.2 EXECUTION A. Install the work rigid, plumb, level and true with no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8'-0" for plumb and level, and with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces. Install solid surfacing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, including joint adhesives and sealers. B. Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work leaving gap of 1/32 inch to adjacent surfaces. Repair or replace damaged finish at cuts. Do not use seam sealer or adhesive for this purpose. C. Where field cutting or trimming is necessary, perform Work in a neat, accurate, professional manner without damaging solid surfacing and adjacent Work. D. Anchor solid surfacing to supporting subtops and blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates with adhesives and concealed fasteners. E. Repair damaged and defective solid surfacing and finishes; where possible eliminate functional and visual defects; where repair is not possible, replace item. F. Clean completed work and protect in accordance with solid surfacing manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 066116 SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS 06616 -2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 SECTION 071113-BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK OF THIS SECTION: A. Work includes furnishing and installing bituminous dampproofing and related work. 1.3 RELATED WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS: A. Coordinate work of this Section with work of other Sections as required to properly execute the Work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of other Sections. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product specified, including data substantiating that materials comply with requirements for each dampproofing material specified. Include recommended method of application, recommended primer, number of coats, coverage or thickness, and recommended protection course. 1. Certification by dampproofing manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed bituminous dampproofing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers from one source and by a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Substrate: Proceed with dampproofing only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed. B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with dampproofing only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed according to manufacturer's recommendations and warranty requirements. C. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation during application of dampproofing in enclosed spaces. Maintain ventilation until dampproofing has thoroughly cured. PART 2- PRODUCTS BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 071113 - 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cold-Applied,Asphalt Emulsion Dampproofing: a. BASF Construction Chemicals Building Systems; Sonneborn Building Products . b. Euclid Chemical Co., an RPM Co. c. Karnak Corporation. d. W.R. Meadows, Inc. 2.2 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING A. General: Provide products recommended by manufacturer for designated application. 1. Odor Elimination: For interior and concealed-in-wall uses, provide type of bituminous dampproofing material warranted by manufacturer to be substantially odor free after drying for 24 hours under normal conditions. B. Cold-Applied, Asphalt Emulsion Dampproofing: Asphalt-based emulsions recommended by the manufacturer for dampproofing use when applied according to the manufacturer's instructions. 1. At Gypsum Sheathing - Semimastic Grade: Emulsified asphalt semimastic, prepared with mineral-colloid emulsifying agents and containing fibers other than asbestos, complying with ASTM D 1227,Type III, Class 1. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Asphalt primer complying with ASTM D 41,for asphalt-based dampproofing. B. Glass Fabric: Woven glass fabric, treated with asphalt, complying with ASTM D 1668, Type I. C. Joint Tape: Self-adhering butyl membrane laminated to a polyethylene film, 4"width. Include primers recommended by tape manufacturer. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of projections and substances detrimental to work; comply with recommendations of prime materials manufacturer. B. Install cant strips and similar accessories as shown and as recommended by prime materials manufacturer even though not shown. C. Fill voids, seal joints, and apply bond breakers, if any, as recommended by prime materials manufacturer,with particular attention at construction joints. D. Tape joints in substrate, including transitions between different materials, with accepted flashing and joint tape, or bond reinforcing and flashing mesh in manner recommended by prime materials manufacturer. Comply with details shown and manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Tape all joints and penetrations in gypsum sheathing with a 4"wide layer of joint tape. 2. Install flashing tape on all shelf angles, starting at nosing and working back toward wall, up shelf angle back leg, and onto back-up wall construction, lapping all joints and edges shingle fashion. BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 071113 -2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 CI.6\ 3. Where joint tape and flashing tape will be used in conjunction with hot-applied bituminous dampproofing, install joint tape and flashing tape only after hot-applied dampproofing has cooled and only after cut-back type dampproofing has cured for a minimum of 24 hours. Primers are not required for joint tape and flashing tape installed over dampproofing. 4. Tape all other joints of dampproofing substrate not suitable to receive flashing and joint tape with a 6" wide layer of glass fabric mesh tape set in initial coat of dampproofing. Topcoat tape extending topcoat application approximately 3" onto initial coat. Lap all tape splices shingle fashion a minimum of 3". Apply top coat of dampproofing material as specified. E. Install separate flashings and corner protection stripping, as recommended by prime materials manufacturer, where indicated to precede application of dampproofing. Comply with details shown and with manufacturer's recommendations. Pay particular attention to requirements at building expansion joints, if any. F. Prime substrate as recommended by prime materials manufacturer. G. Protection of Other Work: Do not allow liquid and mastic compounds to enter and clog drains and conductors. Prevent spillage and migration onto other surfaces of work by masking or otherwise protecting adjoining work. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations except where more stringent requirements are indicated and where Project conditions require extra precautions to ensure satisfactory performance of work. B. Application: Apply dampproofing to the following surfaces. 1. Gypsum sheathing surfaces in cavity walls, 100% coverage required. C. Reinforcement: At changes in plane or where otherwise shown as "reinforced," install lapped course of glass fabric in first coat of dampproofing compound before it thickens. D. Bituminous Cant Strips: Install 2-by-2-inch (50-by-50-mm) cant strip of bituminous grout at base of vertical dampproofing where it meets horizontal surface. 3.3 COLD-APPLIED,ASPHALT EMULSION DAMPPROOFING A. Semimastic Grade: Brush or spray apply a coat of asphalt emulsion dampproofing at a rate of 5 gal./100 sq.ft. (2 Usq. m),to produce a uniform, dry-film thickness of not less than 30 mils(0.8 mm). 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Owner will engage an independent testing agency to perform field inspections, sample and test materials being used, and report whether tested Work conforms to or deviates from requirements. 1. Testing agency will identify, seal, and certify samples of materials delivered to Project site, with Contractor present. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for any of the product characteristics specified, using referenced test procedures and other tests cited in manufacturer's Product Data. 3. Testing agency will verify thickness of dampproofing membrane. 4. Testing agency will examine back side of dampproofed substrate and terminations for evidence of leaks. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove dampproofing that does not comply with requirements, repair BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 071113 -3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF.PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 substrates, reapply dampproofing, and repair sheet flashings. C. Additional testing, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with requirements. END OF SECTION 071113 1 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 071113 -4 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 rib\ Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 SECTION 072100 -THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Glass-fiber blanket. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET A. Glass-Fiber Blanket, Kraft Faced: ASTM C 665, Type II (nonreflective faced), Class C (faced surface not rated for flame propagation); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), 3-1/2 inch and 6" thickness, where indicated. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company. 3. Knauf Insulation. 4. Owens Corning. THERMAL INSULATION 072100- 1 (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids: 1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation, including removing projections capable of puncturing insulation or vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation attachment. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time. C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION A. Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation. 4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm), support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs. 5. Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder facings, and seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation. a. Exterior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward exterior of construction. THERMAL INSULATION 072100 -2 (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials: 1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu.ft. (40 kg/cu. m). 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 072100 THERMAL INSULATION 072100-3 (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 SECTION 072216—ROOF BOARD INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide all labor, materials, and equipment to install the specified insulation over the prepared substrate as specified herein and as shown on the drawings. Fastening pattern is based upon uplift pressures as determined by ASCE 7-05 for 125 mph winds. 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacture's unopened packages, dry, undamaged, seals and labels intact. Once at the job site, the original manufacturer's wrappings shall be cut in order to let the material breathe. B. Store insulation with tarpaulins (not polyethylene) to avoid damage from water and wind. Remove damaged or unsuitable material from the job site. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit samples and products literature for all products listed. 1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Apply insulation only when the weather conditions are in compliance with the roof system limitations. B. Application of the roof system shall immediately follow the installation of the roof insulation. C. Protect the installed insulation from water penetration at the end of each day's work. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ROOF INSULATION A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by roofing manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of thicknesses indicated. Base thickness exclusive of tapered insulation shall be 3.5 inches minimum. B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type 1, Class 1, Grade 3, glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces. C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches or as required to maintain tapered insulation high points below existing perimeter flashings. D. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. ROOF BOARD INSULATION 072216 - 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 2.2 INSULATION COVER BOARD A. USG Securock Gypsum-Fiber Roof Board as manufactured to conform to ASTM C1278, "Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Panel." 2.3 RELATED MATERIALS A. Cant Strips:Wood cant strips as specified in Section 061000 Rough Carpentry. B. Roofing Mastic: As specified in Section 07 52 16—Modified Roof Membrane. C. Insulation Adhesive: Two-part high-rise foam adhesive. Insul-Lock HR by The Garland Co. or pre-approved equal. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXECUTION GENERAL A. Comply with requirements of Division 01 Section "Common Execution Requirements." 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Contractor and the Roofing Manufacturer to verify the deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, waves, or projections. B. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through the roof are solidly set, wood nailing strips are in place. C. Verify all specifications related to Deck preparation have been followed prior to beginning installation of insulation. D. Beginning installation means acceptance of substrate. 3.3 PROTECTION A. During execution of work covered by this Section, the Contractor shall provide protections for the roof insulation from water and wind penetration at the end of each day's work. B. Protect the roof insulation in areas that will receive excessive traffic with a surface protection such as plywood. C. All workmen shall wear clean, soft rubber-soled shoes for any application work where they may be walking insulation board in place. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Mechanically fasten Specified Base Layer of Polyisocyanurate utilizing Specified Fasteners and a pattern determined through ASCE 7-05 calculations for 125 mph wind speed. B. All insulation board shall be cut and fitted where the roof deck intersects a vertical surface. The insulation boards shall be cut to fit a maximum of 1/4"away from the vertical surface. ROOF BOARD INSULATION 072216 - 2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 C'! C. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line, with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm)with insulation. 1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch (6 mm)of nailers, projections, and penetrations. D. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water. E. Set all flame resistant cant strips in a trowelable mastic. F. Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install first layer of insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type. 1. Fasten first layer of insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof and to restrain the individual panels from ridging. 2. Fasteners and plates shall be approved by the primary roofing product manufacturer. 3. The fastening pattern for each insulation panel shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer and approved by the primary roofing product manufacturer. 4. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive at manufacturer's recommended rate to achieve wind uplift pressures, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place. a. Wait until lowrise foam has risen to a height of no less than 3/4 inch. b. Apply weight to the insulation boards until the adhesive has cured and secured the insulation to the substrate. G. Install cover boards over insulation utilizing specified adhesive with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together and adhere to the substrate (tolerance'/4 inch max). END OF SECTION C' ROOF BOARD INSULATION 072216 - 3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 SECTION 075216 - STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Styrene-butadiene-styrene (SBS)-modified bituminous membrane roofing. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 072216 "Roof Board Insulation" 2. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): 1. ASCE 7-05, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM D41 Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Damp Proofing and Waterproofing. 2. ASTM D312 Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in Roofing. 3. ASTM D451 Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Granular Mineral Surfacing for Asphalt Roofing Products. 4. ASTM D1079 Standard Terminology Relating to Roofing, Waterproofing and Bituminous Materials. 5. ASTM D1227 Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt used as a Protective Coating for Roofing. 6. ASTM D1863 Standard Specification for Mineral Aggregate used as a Protective Coating for Roofing. 7. ASTM D2178 Standard Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt used as a Protective Coating for Roofing. 8. ASTM D2822 Standard Specification for Asphalt Roofing Cement. 9. ASTM D2824 Standard Specification for Aluminum-pigmented Asphalt Roof Coating. 10. ASTM D4601 Standard Specification for Asphalt Coated Glass Fiber Base Sheet used in Roofing. 11. ASTM D5147 Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials. 12. ASTM D6162 Standard Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials using a combination of Polyester and Glass Fiber Reinforcements. 13. ASTM D6163 Standard Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials using Glass Fiber Reinforcements. 14. ASTM E108 Standard Test Methods for Fire Test of Roof Coverings. C. Factory Mutual Research (FM): 1. Roof Assembly Classifications. STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 075216 - 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 D. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA): 1. Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. Fire Hazard Classifications. F. Warnock Hersey (WH): 1. Fire Hazard Classifications. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's technical product data for each type of roofing product specified. Include data substantiating that materials comply with specified requirements. B. Specimen Warranty: Provide an unexecuted copy of the warranty specified for this Project, identifying the terms and conditions required of the Manufacturer and the Owner. Thirty Year, Leak-Free Warranty. C. Any material submitted as equal to the specified material must be accompanied by a report signed and sealed by a professional engineer licensed in the state in which the installation is to take place. This report shall show that the submitted equal meets the Design and Performance criteria in this specification. Substitution requests submitted without licensed engineer approval will be rejected for non-conformance. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions and recommendations indicating special precautions required for installing the membrane. B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that roof system furnished is approved by Factory Mutual, Underwriters Laboratories, Warnock Hersey or approved third party testing facility in accordance with ASTM E108, Class A for external fire and meets local or nationally recognized building codes. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that the roof system furnished is approved or accepted by Factory Mutual Approval Standard 4470. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that materials are manufactured in the United States and conform to requirements specified herein, are chemically and physically compatible with each other, and are suitable for inclusion within the total roof system specified herein. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Submit a certified copy of the roofing manufacturer's ISO 9001 compliance certificate F. Test Reports: Submit test reports, prepared by an independent testing agency, for all modified bituminous sheet roofing, indicating compliance with ASTM D5147. 14116) G. Written certification from the roofing system manufacturer certifying the applicator is currently authorized for the installation of the specified roof system. STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 075216 - 2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 H. Design Loads: Submit copy of manufacturer's minimum design load calculations according to ASCE 7-05, Method 2 for Components and Cladding, sealed by a registered professional engineer. In no case shall the design loads be taken to be less than those detailed in Design and Performance Criteria article of this specification. I. Qualification data for firms and individuals identified in Quality Assurance Article below. 1.5 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. General: Comply with Requirements of Division 01 Section - Closeout Submittals. B. Special Project Warranty: Provide specified warranty for the Project, executed by the authorized agent of the Manufacturer. C. Roofing Maintenance Instructions. Provide a manual of manufacturer's recommendations for maintenance of installed roofing systems. D. Insurance Certification: Assist Owner in preparation and submittal of roof installation acceptance certification as may be necessary in connection with fire and extended coverage insurance on roofing and associated work. E. Demonstration and Training Schedule: Provide a schedule of proposed dates and times for instruction of Owner's personnel in the maintenance requirements for completed roofing work. Refer to Part 3 for additional requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with not less than 15 years documented experience and have ISO 9001 certification. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in modified bituminous roofing installation with not less than 5 years experience and authorized by roofing system manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's roofing materials. C. Installer's Field Supervision: Maintain a full-time Supervisor/Foreman on job site during all phases of roofing work while roofing work is in progress. Supervisor/Foremen must be fluid in the English language and maintain proper supervision of workmen. D. Maintain a copy of the Contract Documents in the possession of the Supervisor/Foreman and on the roof at all times. E. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of roof system from a single manufacturer. Secondary products that are required shall be recommended and approved in writing by the roofing system Manufacturer. 1. Upon request of the Owner, submit Manufacturer's written approval of secondary components in list form, signed by an authorized agent of the Manufacturer. STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 075216 - 3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 F. Source Quality Control: Manufacturer shall have in place a documented, standardized quality control program such as ISO-9001. 1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Pre-installation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment. 2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including set up and mobilization areas for stored material and work area. 3. Review and finalize construction schedule, and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening. 5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. 6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affects roofing system. 7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. 8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. 9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. 10. Review notification procedures for weather or non-working days. 1.8 MANUFACTURERS INSPECTIONS A. While the project is in progress, the roofing manufacturer will provide the following: 1. Report progress and quality of the work as observed. Reports shall contain photos and written documentation of work observed. 2. Provide job site inspections, minimum of three days per week, by a full time employee of the manufacturer. 3. Report to the owner and architect, in writing, any refusal or failure of the contractor to correct unacceptable practices called to the roofing contractor's attention. 4. Confirm after completion that the manufacturer has observed no application procedures in conflict with the specifications other than those that may have been previously reported and corrected. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Proceed with roofing work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit a unit of work to be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and warranty requirements. B. Do not apply roofing insulation or membrane to damp deck surface. STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 075216 - 4 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 (°11I \ C. Do not expose materials subject to water or solar damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed during same day 1.10 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence installation of roofing with related units of work specified in other Sections to ensure that roof assemblies, including roof accessories, flashing, trim and joint sealers, are protected against damage from effects of weather, corrosion and adjacent construction activity. B. Complete all roofing field assembly work each day. Phased construction will not be accepted. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Upon completion of installation, and acceptance by the Owner and Architect, the Manufacturer will supply to the Owner an "NDL" warranty, without monetary limitations in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Thirty (30) years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Manufacturer's warranty shall cover all sheet metal components and bituminous roofing. B. Installer's Warranty: Provide roofing installers warranty, to the membrane manufacturer, in which the roofing installer will, at his own expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition 1. Warranty Period: Two (2) years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.12 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Uniform Wind Uplift Load Capacity: 1. Installed roof system shall withstand negative (uplift) design wind loading pressures complying with the following criteria. Attachment shall be installed exactly as given in Part 3. a. Design Code: ASCE 7-05, Method 2 for Components and Cladding b. Category III Building with an Importance Factor of'1.15. c. Wind Speed: 125 mph d. Ultimate Pullout Value: N/A e. Exposure Category: C f. Design Roof Height: 18 feet, unless otherwise indicated. g. Minimum Building Width: Refer to Drawings. h. Roof Pitch: 0.25 inches per foot minimum i. Topographic Factor: 1.00 j. Roof Area Design Uplift Pressure: 1) Zone 1 - Field of roof 33.9 psf 2) Zone 2 - Perimeter 56.8 psf 3) Corners 85.5 psf 4) Zones 2 and 3 to extend 7' 3" on to roof area. STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 075216 - 5 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 B. Live Load: 20 psf, or not to exceed original building design. 1.13 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. 1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. D. Handle and store roofing materials, and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck. 1.14 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS GENERAL A. Basis of Design: Materials, manufacturer's product designations, and/or manufacturer's names specified herein shall be regarded as the minimum standard of quality required for work of this Section. Comply with all manufacturer and contractor/fabricator quality and performance criteria specified in Part 1. 2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The Basis of Design is: 1. The Garland Company, Inc. 2. Manufacturer's Representative - Blake Dieste: 3. bdieste@garlandind.com 4. (m) 832-488-4783 5. Alternate Manufacturers: Must meet and/or exceed physical properties as specified herein. Products proposed as an alternate to the Basis of Design must be approved in writing by the Architect and Owner prior to bid. Acceptance will STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 075216 - 6 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 be based on Warranty Terms/Duration, Physical Properties, Manufacturer's Mandatory Field Services and compliance with the Owner's Division 7 Construction Standards. B. Modified bituminous roofing work including but not limited to: 1. Base Ply Sheet Modified Membrane: Type II membrane complying with ASTM 6163, Grade S. Physical requirements below. 2. Cap Ply Sheet Modified Membrane: Type III membrane complying with ASTM 6163, Grade G. Physical requirements below. 3. Stripping Ply Sheet Modified Membrane: Type II membrane complying with ASTM 6163, Grade S. Physical requirements below. 4. Base Flashing Assembly: Two ply modified, heat fused with the finished ply meeting Type III membrane complying with ASTM 6163, Grade G minimum requirements and base ply meeting Type II membrane complying with ASTM 6163, Grade G minimum. 2.3 ROOFING SHEET MATERIALS A. Base Ply Sheet Modified Membrane: ASTM D 6163, Grade S, Type II, 110 mil SBS- modified asphalt sheet; suitable for application method specified, and as follows: HPR Torchbase by The Garland Company, Inc. 1. Tensile Strength, ASTM D 5147: a. 2 in/min. @ 73.4 +/- 3.6 deg. F MD 210 lbf/in XD 210 lbf/in b. 50 mm/min. @ 23 +/- 2 deg. C MD 36.75 kN/m XD 36.75 kN/m 2. Tear Strength, ASTM D 5147: a. 2 in/min. @ 73.4 +/- 3.6 deg. F MD 250 lbf XD 250 lbf b. 50 mm/min. @ 23 +/- 2 deg. C MD 1112N X D 1112N 3. Elongation at Maximum Tensile, ASTM D 5147: a. 2 in/min. @ 73.4 +/- 3.6 deg. F MD 4.0% XD 4.0% b. 50 mm/min. © 23 +/- 2 deg. C MD 4.0% XD 4.0% 4. Low Temperature Flexibility, ASTM D5147, Passes -35 deg. F (-37 deg. C) B. Granule-Surfaced Roofing Cap Sheet: ASTM D 6163, Grade G, Type III, 195 mil SBS- modified asphalt sheet with fiberglass and polyester composite scrim; suitable for application method specified, and as follows: Stressply IV Plus UV Mineral by The Garland Company, Inc. 1. Tensile Strength, ASTM D 5147: a. 2 in/min. @ 73.4 +/- 3.6 deg. F MD 310 lbf/in XD 310 lbf/in b. 50 mm/min. @ 23 +/- 2 deg. C.MD 54.25 kN/m XD 54.25 kN/m 2. Tear Strength, ASTM D 5147: a. 2 in/min. @ 73.4 +/- 3.6 deg. F MD 510 lbf XD 510 lbf b. 50 mm/min. @ 23 +/- 2 deg. C MD 2269 N XD 2269 N 3. Elongation at Maximum Tensile, ASTM D 5147: a. 2 in/min. @ 73.4 +/- 3.6 deg. F MD 6% XD 6% b. 50 mm/min. @ 23 +/- 2 deg. C MD 6% XD 6% 4. Low Temperature Flexibility, ASTM D 5147, Passes -40 deg. F (-40 deg. C) 5. Granule Color: White. STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 075216 - 7 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 2.4 BASE FLASHING SHEET MATERIALS f) A. Base Ply Sheet Modified Membrane: ASTM D 6163, Grade S, Type II, 110 mil SBS- modified asphalt sheet; suitable for application method specified, and as follows: HPR Torchbase by The Garland Company, Inc. 1. Tensile Strength, ASTM D 5147: a. 2 in/min. @ 73.4 +/- 3.6 deg. F MD 210 lbf/in XD 210 Ibf/in b. 50 mm/min. @ 23 +/- 2 deg. C MD 36.75 kN/m XD 36.75 kN/m 2. Tear Strength, ASTM D 5147: a. 2 in/min. @ 73.4 +/- 3.6 deg. F MD 250 lbf XD 250 Ibf b. 50 mm/min. @ 23 +/- 2 deg. C MD 1112N XD 1112N 3. Elongation at Maximum Tensile, ASTM D 5147: a. 2 in/min. @ 73.4 +/- 3.6 deg. F MD 4.0% XD 4.0% b. 50 mm/min. @ 23 +/- 2 deg. C MD 4.0% XD 4.0% 4. Low Temperature Flexibility, ASTM D5147, Passes -35 deg. F (-37 deg. C) B. Granule-Surfaced Roofing Cap Sheet: ASTM D 6163, Grade G,Type III, 195 mil SBS- modified asphalt sheet with fiberglass and polyester composite scrim; suitable for application method specified, and as follows: Stressply IV Plus UV Mineral by The Garland Company, Inc. 1. Tensile Strength, ASTM D 5147: a. 2 in/min. @ 73.4 +/- 3.6 deg. F MD 310 lbf/in XD 310 lbf/in b. 50 mm/min. @ 23 +/- 2 deg. C MD 54.25 kN/m XD 54.25 kN/m 2. Tear Strength, ASTM D 5147: a. 2 in/min. @ 73.4 +/- 3.6 deg. F MD 510 lbf XD 510 lbf b. 50 mm/min. @ 23 +/- 2 deg. C MD 2269 N XD 2269 N 3. Elongation at Maximum Tensile, ASTM D 5147: a. 2 in/min. @ 73.4 +/- 3.6 deg. F MD 6% XD 6% b. 50 mm/min. © 23 +/- 2 deg. C MD 6% XD 6% 4. Low Temperature Flexibility, ASTM D 5147, Passes -40 deg. F (-40 deg. C) 5. Granule Color: White. 2.5 BITUMINOUS ROOFING MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with roofing. B. Liquid Flashing - Tuff-Flash: An asphaltic-polyurethane, low odor, liquid flashing material designed for specialized details unable to be waterproofed with typical modified membrane flashings. C. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41/D 41M. Garla-Prime by The Garland Company, Inc. D. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required by roofing system manufacturer for application. Flashing-Bond by The Garland Company, Inc. E. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene, plain or modified bitumen; non-hardening, non- migrating, non-skinning, and non-drying. Garla-Flex by The Garland Company, Inc. F. Miscellaneous Materials: Provide those recommended by roofing system manufacturer. STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 075216 - 8 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 2.6 SURFACING A. Roofing Granules: Ceramic-coated roofing granules as provided by the prime material manufacturer, No. 11 screen size with 100 percent passing No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve and 98 percent of mass retained on No. 40 (0.425-mm) sieve, color to match roofing. B. Reflective Base Flashing Coating: Water-based Acrylic with self-curing Latex Polymers. Pyramic by The Garland Company, Inc. 2.7 RELATED MATERIALS A. Drain Flashings should be 4Ib (1.8kg) sheet lead formed and rolled. B. Plumbing stacks should be 4Ib (1.8kg) sheet lead formed and rolled. C. Scuppers should be 304 Stainless Steel and fully welded. D. Nails and Fasteners: Non-ferrous metal or galvanized steel, except that hard copper nails shall be used with copper; aluminum or stainless steel nails shall be used with aluminum; and stainless steel nails shall be used with stainless steel. Fasteners shall be self-clinching type of penetrating type as recommended by the manufacturer of the deck material. Nails and fasteners shall be flush-driven through flat metal discs of not less than one (1) inch diameter. Omit metal discs when one-piece composite nails or fasteners with heads not less than one (1) inch diameter are used. E. Butyl Tape: 100% solids, asbestos free and compressive tape designed to seal as recommended and furnished by the membrane manufacturer. F. Non-Shrink Grout: Use an all weather fast setting chemical action concrete material to fill pitch pans. GarRock by The Garland Company or pre-approved equal. 1. Flexural Strength (ASTM C78 (modified)) 7 days 1100psi 2. High Strength (ASTM C109 (modified)) 24 days 8400Ibs (3810kg) 2.8 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Installed roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight. 1. Accelerated Weathering: Roofing system shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155. 2. Impact Resistance: Roofing system shall resist impact damage when tested according to ASTM D 3746 or ASTM D 4272. B. Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another and adjacent materials under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience. C. Solar Reflectance Index: Not less than 78 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980, based on testing identical products by a qualified testing agency. STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 075216 - 9 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 D. Energy Star Listing: Roofing system shall be listed on the DOE's ENERGY STAR "Roof 77 Products Qualified Product List" for low-slope roof products. E. Energy Performance: Roofing system shall have an initial solar reflectance index of not less than 0.70 and an emissivity of not less than 0.75 when tested according to CRRC-1. F. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108 or UL 790, Class A; for application and roof slopes indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. G. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly designs indicated. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXECUTION GENERAL A. Comply with requirements of Division 01 Section "Common Execution Requirements." 3.2 EXAMINATION A. Verify that deck surfaces and project conditions are ready to receive work of this Section. B. Verify that deck is supported and secured to structural members. C. Verify that deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions, projections or ripples, and is properly sloped. D. Verify that adjacent roof substrate components do not vary more than [1] inch in height. E. Verify that deck surfaces are dry. F. Confirm that moisture content does not exceed twelve (12) percent by moisture meter tests. On concrete deck, pour hot asphalton to deck, if it bubbles/ foams and once cooled does not adhere to the substrate, the moisture levels are too high. G. Verify that openings, curbs, pipes, conduit, sleeves, ducts, and other items which penetrate the roof are set solidly, and that wood cant strips, wood nailing strips, and reglets are set in place. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Cooperate with manufacturer, inspection and test agencies engaged or required to perform services in connection with installing the roof system. (") B. Insurance/Code Compliance: Where required by code, install and test the roofing system to comply with governing regulation and specified insurance requirements. STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 075216 - 10 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 C. Protect other work from spillage of roofing materials and prevent materials from entering or clogging drains and conductors. Replace or restore other work damaged by installation of the modified bituminous roofing system. D. Coordinate installation of roofing system components so that insulation and roofing plies are not exposed to precipitation or left exposed overnight. Provide cut-offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed ply sheets and insulation. Remove cut-offs immediately before resuming work. E. Substrate Joint Penetrations: Prevent bitumen from penetrating substrate joints, entering building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction. F. Apply roofing materials as specified by manufacturer's instructions: 1. Keep roofing materials dry before and during application. 2. Do not permit phased construction. 3. Complete application of roofing plies, modified sheet and flashing in a continuous operation. 4. Begin and apply only as much roofing in one day as can be completed that same day. G. Cut-Offs (Waterstops): At end of each day's roofing installation, protect exposed edge of incomplete work, including ply sheets and insulation. H. Broadcast minerals into the bleed out of bitumen while bitumen is at its recommended EVT temperature to achieve a monolithic appearance. 3.4 ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cooperate with manufacturer, inspection and test agencies engaged or required to perform services in connection with installing the roof system. B. Insurance/Code Compliance: Where required by code, install and test the roofing system to comply with governing regulation and specified insurance requirements. C. Protect other work from spillage of roofing materials and prevent materials from entering or clogging drains and conductors. Replace or restore other work damaged by installation of the coal tar modified bituminous roofing system. D. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and applicable recommendations in ARMA/NRCA's "Quality Control Guidelines for the Application of Polymer Modified Bitumen Roofing". E. Coordinate installation of roofing system so insulation and other components of the roofing system not permanently exposed are not subjected to precipitation or left uncovered at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. 1. Provide tie-offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed roofing sheets and insulation with a course of coated felt set in roofing cement or hot roofing asphalt, with joints and edges sealed. 2. Complete terminations and base flashings, and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system. 3. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 075216 - 11 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 F. Substrate Joint Penetrations: Prevent bitumen from penetrating substrate joints, entering building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction. G. Apply roofing materials as specified by manufacturer's instructions: 1. Keep roofing materials dry before and during application. 2. Do not permit phased construction. 3. Complete application of roofing plies, modified sheet and flashing in a continuous operation. 4. Begin and apply only as much roofing in one day as can be completed that same day. H. Cut-Offs (Waterstops): At end of each day's roofing installation, protect exposed edge of incomplete work, including ply sheets and insulation. Provide temporary covering of two (2) plies of #15 organic roofing felt set in full moppings of bitumen with joints and edges sealed. I. Broadcast minerals into the bleed out of bitumen while bitumen is at its recommended EVT temperature to achieve a monolithic appearance. 3.5 BASE PLY INSTALLATION A. Install base ply and modified bituminous cap sheet according to roofing manufacturer's written instructions, starting at low point of roofing system. Extend roofing membrane sheets over and terminate beyond cants, installing as follows: 1. Lay out the roll in the course to be followed and unroll 6 feet (1.8 m). 2. Using a roofing torch, heat the surface of the coiled portion until the burn-off backer melts away. At this point, the material is hot enough to lay into the substrate. Progressively unroll the sheet while heating and press down with your foot to insure a proper bond. 3. After the major portion of the roll is bonded, re-roll the first 6 feet (1.8 m) and bond it in a similar fashion. 4. Repeat this operation with subsequent rolls with side laps of 4 inches (101 mm) and end laps of 8 inches (203 mm). 5. Give each lap a finishing touch by passing the torch along the joint and spreading the melted bitumen evenly with a rounded trowel to insure a smooth, tight seal. 6. Extend underlayment 2 inches (50 mm) beyond top edges of cants at wall and projection bases. 7. Install base flashing ply to all perimeter and projections details. B. Laps: Accurately align roofing sheets, without stretching, and maintain uniform side and end laps. Stagger end laps. Completely bond and seal laps, leaving no voids. 1. Repair voids in laps and lapped seams not completely sealed. C. Install roofing sheets so side and end laps shed water. 3.6 SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS CAP SHEET MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install modified bituminous base ply and cap sheet according to roofing manufacturer's written instructions, starting at low point of roofing system. Extend roofing membrane sheets over and terminate beyond cants, installing as follows: STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 075216 - 12 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 1. Using a roofing torch, heat the surface of the coiled portion until the burn-off backer melts away. At this point, the material is hot enough to lay into the substrate. Progressively unroll the sheet while heating and press down with your foot to insure a proper bond. 2. After the major portion of the roll is bonded, re-roll the first 6 feet (1.8 m) and bond it in a similar fashion. 3. Repeat this operation with subsequent rolls with side laps of 4 inches (101 mm) and end laps of 8 inches (203 mm). 4. Give each lap a finishing touch by passing the torch along the joint and spreading the melted bitumen evenly with a rounded trowel to insure a smooth, tight seal. 5. Immediately broadcast new granules into bleedout while hot bitumen is still at EVT. All loose granules to be removed at end of project. 3.7 FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloped and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at penetrations through roof, and secure to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Minimum base-flashing height of 8 inches (200 mm) is required. Install modified bituminous roofing sheet and cap sheet according to roofing manufacturer's written instructions, starting at low point of roofing system. Extend roofing membrane sheets over and terminate beyond cants, installing as follows: 1. Seal all curb, wall and parapet fleshings with an application of mastic and mesh on a daily basis. Do not permit conditions to exist that will allow moisture to enter behind, around or under the roof or flashing membrane. 2. Prepare all walls, penetrations, expansion joints [and where shown on the drawings] to be flashed with asphalt primer at the rate of one hundred (100) square feet per gallon. Allow primer to dry tack free. 3. Heat fuse entire base ply membrane until burn off paper is gone. Fully adhere membrane to the underlying substrate. 4. After the laps have been tested and complete positive bond has been achieved, the applicator shall heat the seam edge and trowel along the seam edge. Troweling shall continue until a sloped, beveled edge has been produced. 5. Heat fuse finished membrane in the same manner as base ply. Seal all vertical laps of flashing membrane with a three-course application of trowel-grade mastic and fiberglass mesh. Install termination bar at top of assembly and seal with a three-course application of trowel-grade mastic and fiberglass mesh. 6. Terminate all base flashings using extruded aluminum termination bar. Three- course all terminations with PVC Mesh and specified mastic. B. Install roofing cap-sheet stripping where metal flanges and edgings are set on roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. C. Roof Drains: Set 30-by-30-inch- (760-by-760-mm) lead flashing in bed of asphaltic adhesive on completed roofing membrane sheet. Cover metal flashing with roofing membrane sheet stripping, and extend a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) beyond edge of metal flashing onto field of roofing membrane. Install completed cap sheet over entire assembly. Clamp roofing membrane, metal flashing, and stripping into roof-drain clamping ring. 1. Install stripping according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Set all roof layers in mastic six inches around drain perimeter. STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 075216 - 13 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 3.8 REFLECTIVE BASE FLASHING COATING APPLICATION A. Prior to coating application, all existing non-embedded granule surfacing material shall be removed by means of a stiff bristle street broom, powered mechanical sweeper, or vacuuming. All loose dirt and dust remaining after granule removal must be broomed and/or vacuumed from the roof. All blisters, ridges and other imperfections must be secured so that the surface will be clean and dry and a secure base for coating application. 1. The first coat of the Pyramic Base Coat shall be applied the same day as the surface is cleaned. In no case shall the coating be applied over a dirty surface. 2. The Pyramic coating system shall be sprayed or roller applied in a cross hatch technique without causing runs or puddles. 3. The Pyramic coating system shall be evenly applied in at least 2 separate coats to achieve a minimum system of 22-32 mils dry film thickness. Allow thorough dry time between coats. 4. No coating shall be applied if weather will not allow it to dry prior to exposure to precipitation or freezing temperatures. 3.9 ROOFING DETAILS AND.ACCESSORIES A. Coordinate counter flashing, cap fleshings, expansion joints, and similar work with modified bitumen roofing work [as specified in other Sections]. B. Coordinate roof accessories, miscellaneous sheet metal accessory items, including piping vents and other devices with the roofing system work [as specified in other Sections]. C. Curb Detail/Air Handling Station & Exhaust Fan: 1. Minimum curb height is eight (8) inches. Prime vertically at a rate of one hundred (100) square feet per gallon and allow to dry. 2. Set cant in bitumen. Run all field plies over cant a minimum of two (2) inches. 3. Install base flashing assembly per Paragraph 3.7. 4. Install pre-manufactured counter-flashing with fasteners and neoprene washers or per manufacturer's recommendations. 5. Set equipment on neoprene pad and fasten as required by equipment manufacturer. D. Plumbing Stack: 1. Minimum stack height is twelve (12) inches. 2. Run roof system over the entire surface of the roof. Seal the base of the stack with elastomeric sealant. 3. Prime both surfaces of flange of new sleeve. Install properly sized sleeves set in (1) inch bed of roof cement. 4. Install stripping as described in Paragraph 3.7. 5. Turn sleeve a minimum of one (1) inch down inside of stack. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection and as required a minimum of three (3) days per week. B. Correct defects or irregularities discovered during field inspection. STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 075216 - 14 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 C. Require attendance of roofing materials manufacturers' representatives at site during installation of the roofing system. A copy of the specification should also be on site at all times. 3.11 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. C. Remove bitumen adhesive drippings from all walls, windows, floors, ladders and finished surfaces. D. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by asphalt or any other sources of soiling caused by work of this Section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning instructions and conform to their instructions. E. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section. 3.12 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT A. Remove and properly dispose of waste products generated during roofing procedures. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.13 FINAL INSPECTION A. At completion of roofing installation and associated work, meet with Contractor, Architect, installer, installer of associated work, Owner, roofing system manufacturer's representative, and other representatives directly concerned with performance of roofing system. B. Walk roof surface areas of the building, inspect perimeter building edges as well as flashing of roof penetrations, walls, curbs and other equipment. List all items requiring correction or completion and furnish copy of list to each party in attendance. C. The roofing system manufacturer reserves the right to request a thermographic scan of the roof during final inspection to determine if any damp or wet materials have been installed. The thermographic scan shall be provided by the Roofing Contractor. D. If core cuts verify the presence of damp or wet materials, the Roofing Contractor shall be required to replace the damaged areas at his own expense. (.11\ E. Repair or replace deteriorated or defective work found at time above inspection as required to a produce an installation which is free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 075216 - 15 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 F. Notify the Owner and Architect upon completion of corrections. G. Following the final inspection, provide written notice of acceptance of the installation from the roofing system manufacturer. H. Immediately correct roof leakage during construction. If the Contractor does not respond within twenty four (24) hours, the Owner will exercise rights to correct the Work under the terms of the Conditions of the Contract. 3.14 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. At a time and date agreed to by the Owner, instruct the Owner's facility manager, or other representative designated by the Owner, on the following procedures: 1. Roof troubleshooting procedures. 2. Notification procedures for reporting leaks or other apparent roofing problems. 3. Roofing maintenance. 4. The Owner's obligations for maintaining the roofing warranty in effect and force. 5. The Manufacturer's obligations for maintaining the roofing warranty in effect and force. END OF SECTION STYRENE-BUTADIENE-STYRENE (SBS) MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 075216 - 16 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 SECTION 076200—SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flashing and Sheet Metal required to prevent penetration of water through exterior shell of the building. Metal edge and all sheet metal components shall be included in the "Roofing Warranty'as specified in Section 075216 Modified Bitumen Roofing. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualification of Installers: At least one person shall be present at all times during execution of this work who is thoroughly trained and experienced in the materials and method required to fabricate and install the flashing and sheet metal work specified herein. B. Codes and Standards: 1. Comply with all pertinent codes and regulations. C. References: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. ASTM A653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. b. ASTM A792 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated by Hot Dip Process. c. ASTM B209 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. d. ASTM B221 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. e. ASTM D692 Standard Specification for Coarse Aggregate for Bituminous Paving Mixtures. 2. American National Standards Institute and Single Ply Roofing Institute (ANSI/SPRI): a. ANSI/SPRI ES-1 Testing and Certification Listing of Shop Fabricated Edge Metal. 3. Warnock Hersey International, Inc., Middleton, WI (WH) 4. Factory Mutual Research Corporation (FMRC) 5. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 6. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): a. 1993 Edition Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 7. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA): a. Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. 8. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): a. ASCE 7-05 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations for each specified sheet material and fabricated product. B. Submit two (2) 12" long completely finished units of specified factory-fabricated products exposed as finished work. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for review showing layout, joining, profiles, and anchorage of fabricated work, including major counter flashings, trim/fascia units. 1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection: Protect flashing and sheet metal materials before and during installation. B. Replacements: In event of damage, make all repairs and replacements necessary. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND GAUGES A. Where sheet metal is required and no material or gauge is indicated, furnish and install the highest quality and gauges commensurate with referenced standard to match existing. 1. Coping System, as indicated on drawings: a. R-mer Edge Coping, by The Garland Co. b. Aluminum-zinc alloy (galvanized) coated steel, ASTM A792, coating designation AZ-50, with Kynar 500 flourocarbon finish, 24 gauge supplied by prime roofing manufacturer. 2. Counter flashings, as indicated on drawings: a. Aluminum-zinc alloy (galvanized) coated steel, ASTM A792, coating designation AZ-50, with Kynar 500 flourocarbon finish, 24 gauge supplied by prime roofing manufacturer. 3. Gutters and Downspouts, as indicated on drawings: a. Aluminum-zinc alloy (galvanized) coated steel, ASTM A792, coating designation AZ-50, with Kynar 500 flourocarbon finish, 24 gauge supplied by prime roofing manufacturer. 4. Continuous Cleats and Hat Sections: G-90; Galvanized, 22 gauge. 5. Pitch Pans, Bonnets, Draw bands, and Pipe Hoods: ASTM A 67; commercial quality, 2D annealed finish, 304 stainless steel, 24 gauge. 6. Scuppers: ASTM A 67; commercial quality, 2D annealed finish, 304 stainless steel, 24 gauge. 7. Lead Flashings: Sheet complying with FS QQ-L-201. Grade B; formed from Common Desilverized Pig Lead complying with ASTM B-29. Weight 4.0 lbs/sq.ft. unless otherwise specified. 8. Termination Bar: 1/8"X 3/4" extruded Aluminum, or approved equivalent. 2.2 NAILS, RIVETS AND FASTENERS A. Nails: Copper, Stainless Steel or Galvanized depending on application. B. Rivets: Copper, Aluminum, Stainless Steel or Galvanized depending on application. C. Exposed Fasteners and Washers: Stainless Steel Screws with covered neoprene gaskets. D. Unexposed Fasteners and Washers: Cadmium plated. 2.3 RELATED MATERIALS A. Flux: Raw Muriatic Acid killed with Zinc Chloride. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 B. Solder: Conform with current ASTM B-12. 50% tin and 50% lead. C. Burning Rod for Lead: Same composition as lead sheet. D. Joint Sealant: Tri-polymer by Garland or pre-approved substitute. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify all existing work is complete to a point where this installation may commence. B. In the event of discrepancy, notify architect and/or owner. Do not proceed until discrepancies have been resolved. C. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work. 3.2 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate work to greatest extent possible. Comply with details shown, and with applicable requirements of SMACNA, ANSI/SPRI and NRCA Practices. B. Fabricate for waterproof and weather-resistant performance; with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage or deterioration of work. C. Form exposed sheet metal work without excessive oil-canning, buckling and tool marks, true to line and levels as indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 3.3 CLEATS A. Provide continuous cleats where indicated or specified to secure loose edges of the sheet metal work. B. Space butt joints approximately 1/8"apart. C. Fasten cleats to the supporting construction with fasteners evenly spaced not over 12" on center. Fasten to concrete or masonry with screws driven in expansion shields set in concrete or masonry. Cleat should be fabricated to a size to ensure a rigid installation. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed metal surface removing substances which might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finish. END OF SECTION SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 rob., SECTION 078413 -PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. 2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies. 3. Penetrations in smoke barriers. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 078443 "Joint Firestopping" for joints in or between fire-resistance-rated construction, at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections, and in smoke barriers. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location, illustration of firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 1. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping system, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly. Obtain approval of authorities having jurisdiction prior to submittal. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For each penetration firestopping system, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that penetration firestopping systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements." 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping system when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping system manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Install and cure penetration firestopping materials per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or,where this is inadequate,forced-air circulation. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping systems can be installed according to specified firestopping system design. B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping systems. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: 1. Perform penetration firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Penetration Firestopping Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Penetration firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified testing agency. 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 2) Intertek Group in its "Directory of Listed Building Products." 3) FM Global in its "Building Materials Approval Guide." PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 -2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 (.1"k\i 2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. Penetration Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire,passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. 3M Fire Protection Products. b. Hilti, Inc. c. Specified Technologies, Inc. B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg(2.49 Pa). 1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg(2.49 Pa). C,; 1. F-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 2. T-Rating: At least one hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall. 3. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping systems showing no evidence of water leakage when tested according to UL 1479. D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Penetration firestopping systems with ratings determined per UL 1479,based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.30-inch wg(74.7 Pa). 1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. (0.025 cu. m/s per sq. m) of penetration opening at and no more than 50-cfm (0.024-cu. m/s) cumulative total for any 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) at both ambient and elevated temperatures. E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450,respectively,per ASTM E 84. F. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for conditions indicated. 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials. 2. Substrate primers. C 3. Collars. 4. Steel sleeves. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 -3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 2.3 FILL MATERIALS A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket. B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture. C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant. D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced intumescent elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet. E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening, water-resistant, intumescent putties containing no solvents or inorganic fibers. F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side. G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking,homogeneous mortar. H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily removed. I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible,nonshrinking foam. J. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based,neutral-curing elastomeric sealants. 2.4 MIXING A. Penetration Firestopping Materials: For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 -4 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 r‘, PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing penetration firestopping systems, clean out openings immediately to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping materials. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. (1111'1h\ B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install penetration firestopping systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications. B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not forming permanent components of firestopping. C. Install fill materials by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories and penetrating items to achieve required fire-resistance ratings. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 -5 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth,uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Wall Identification: Permanently label walls containing penetration firestopping systems with the words "FIRE AND/OR SMOKE BARRIER-PROTECT ALL OPENINGS," using lettering not less than 3 inches (76 mm)high and with minimum 0.375-inch(9.5-mm) strokes. 1. Locate in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling, or attic space at 15 feet(4.57 m) from end of wall and at intervals not exceeding 30 feet(9.14 m). B. Penetration Identification: Identify each penetration firestopping system with legible metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of penetration firestopping system edge so labels are visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping systems. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address,and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. / 1144) 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections according to ASTM E 2174. B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping system is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping system to comply with requirements. C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 -6 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping material and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements. 3.7 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Refer to Drawings. END OF SECTION 078413 (1111111\ rs' PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 -7 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 ("I.\ SECTION 078443 -JOINT FIRESTOPPING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions. 2. Joints at exterior curtain-wall/floor(storefront) intersections. 3. Joints in smoke barriers. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS rib\ A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Product Schedule: For each joint firestopping system. Include location, illustration of firestopping system, and design designation of qualified testing agency. 1. Engineering Judgments: Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing agency's illustration for a particular joint firestopping system condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by joint firestopping system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire- resistance-rated assembly. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For each joint firestopping system, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating that joint firestopping systems have been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written instructions. JOINT FIRESTOPPING 078443 - 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with UL's "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements." 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install joint firestopping systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by joint firestopping system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Install and cure joint firestopping systems per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilation or,where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that joint firestopping systems can be installed according to specified firestopping system design. B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate joint firestopping systems. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: 1. Perform joint firestopping system tests by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Test per testing standards referenced in "Joint Firestopping Systems" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Joint firestopping systems shall bear classification marking of a qualified testing agency. 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 2) Intertek Group in its "Directory of Listed Building Products." 2.2 JOINT FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. Joint Firestopping Systems: Systems that resist spread of fire,passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assemblies in or between which joint firestopping systems are installed. Joint firestopping systems shall accommodate building movements without impairing their ability to resist the passage of fire and hot gases. JOINT FIRESTOPPING 078443 -2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 B. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Provide joint firestopping systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. 3M Fire Protection Products. b. Hilti, Inc. c. Specified Technologies, Inc. 2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the wall, floor, or roof in or between which it is installed. C. Joints at Exterior Curtain-Wall/Floor Intersections: Provide joint firestopping systems with rating determined per ASTM E 2307. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. 3M Fire Protection Products. b. Hilti, Inc. c. Specified Technologies, Inc. 2. F-Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the floor assembly. (1111"1\,' D. Joints in Smoke Barriers: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with ratings determined per UL 2079 based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.30-inch wg(74.7 Pa). 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. 3M Fire Protection Products. b. Hilti, Inc. c. Specified Technologies, Inc. 2. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfmift. (0.00775.cu. m/s x m) of joint at both ambient and elevated temperatures. E. Exposed Joint Firestopping Systems: Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450,respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. F. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials, that are needed to install elastomeric fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only components specified by joint firestopping system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for conditions indicated. (111"N\. JOINT FIRESTOPPING 078443 -3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Before installing fire-resistive joint systems, clean joints immediately to comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of elastomeric fill materials or compromise fire-resistive rating. 2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with elastomeric fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. B. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by joint firestopping system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support elastomeric fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing elastomeric fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of fire-resistive joint system. C. Install elastomeric fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Elastomeric fill voids and cavities formed by joints and forming materials as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply elastomeric fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. 3. For elastomeric fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth,uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. JOINT FIRESTOPPING 078443 -4 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 (1111bN 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Joint Identification: Identify joint firestopping systems with legible metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of joint edge so labels are visible to anyone seeking to remove or joint firestopping system. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning-Joint Firestopping-Do Not Disturb.Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address,and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections according to ASTM E 2393. B. Where deficiencies are found or joint firestopping systems are damaged or removed due to testing,repair or replace joint firestopping systems so they comply with requirements. C. Proceed with enclosing joint firestopping systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess elastomeric fill materials adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by joint firestopping system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which joints occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure joint firestopping systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire- resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements. 3.7 JOINT FIRESTOPPING SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Refer to Drawings. END OF SECTION 078443 JOINT FIRESTOPPING 078443 -5 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Summary: Section includes furnishing and installing joint sealants and back-up materials at locations indicated and required to comply with performance requirements. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Coordinate work of this Section with work of other Sections as required to properly execute the Work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of other Sections. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. It is required that sealant work provide durable weathertight joint seals that are well cured, of uniform depth, tooled to provide good adhesion to sealant bond surfaces, and not to deteriorate in excess of limits published by sealant manufacturer. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's product data and details showing layout of recommended minimum and maximum joint width to depth relationships, and recommended primers for substrates and conditions indicated. Include material specifications showing compliance with requirements. B. Preconstruction Sealant Testing: Perform sealant manufacturer's standard tests for compatibility and adhesion of sealants with each material that will come in contact with sealants and each condition required by systems. 1. Test a minimum of 12 samples of each metal, glazing, and other material. Determine adhesion test data of sealant bond to actual production samples of finished metal and glass that will be incorporated into the work. Perform adhesion tests in accordance with ASTM C 794. 2. Prepare samples using techniques and primers required for installed systems. 3. Perform tests under environmental conditions that duplicate those under which systems will be installed. 4. For materials that fail tests, determine corrective measures required to prepare each material to ensure compatibility with and adhesion of sealants, including, but not limited to, specially formulated primers. After performing these corrective measures on the minimum number of samples required for each material, retest materials. 5. Compatibility statement that the materials in contact with the sealant such as gaskets, spacers, setting blocks, are compatible with the sealant after 21-days exposure to 2000 to 4000 microwatts of ultraviolet radiation. 6. Stress statements that the sealant dimensions (per detail) do not exceed 20-psi when exposed to the specified wind load (6:1 Safety Factor). JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 - 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 7. Certification from sealant manufacturer that the sealant manufacturer has reviewed all sealant details and finds same suitable for the purpose intended and compatible with the surfaces with which they are in contact. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform preconstruction joint sealer/substrate tests to confirm adhesion and compatibility and field tests to confirm technique required for appearance and adhesion. B. Mockups: Prior to installing exterior joint sealant work, construct mockups of joint sealants between each type of substrate construction and finish required to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate sealant joint adhesion and compatibility, aesthetic effects, as well as qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for Work. 1. Locate mockups on-site in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect 7-days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before start of Work. 5. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION '-.4) A. Deliver materials and store in manufacturer's original unopened containers. Store materials between 40-degrees F (4-degrees C) and 90-degrees F (32-degrees C). 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not apply joint sealants, primers, and related materials to surfaces without first verifying compatibility required by the Quality Assurance paragraph. Install sealants when air temperature and substrate temperature are over 40-degrees F (4-degrees C) and rising, but less than 100-degrees F (37-degrees C). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SEALANT MATERIALS A. One-Part Non-Acid Curing Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, and Uses NT, M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, 0; medium modulus with a tensile strength between 45 psi and 75 psi at 100% elongation when tested after 14 days at 77-degrees F (25-degrees C.) and 50% relative humidity per ASTM D 412. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either General Electric "Silpruf 2000" or Dow Corning "795 Building Construction Sealant." 2. Locations: All exterior locations not otherwise noted or specified, including interior sealant joints on interior side of components subject to thermal movement from exterior heat sources. 3. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 -2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS (ilgt*\ Project No. 14171 B. Two-Part Pourable Urethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P Class 25, and YP � Uses T, M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Pecora "NR-200 Urexpan" or Sika "Sikaflex-2C-SL" or Bostik Construction Products Division "Chem-Calk 550" or Sonneborn "Sonolastic SL 2." 2. Locations: a. Exterior locations subject to pedestrian and vehicular traffic. 3. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard available colors. C. Two-Part Low-Sag or Non-Sag Urethane Sealant: Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, and Uses T, M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Pecora "Dynatred" or Bostik Construction Products Division "Chem-Calk 500," or Sika "Sikaflex-2C- NS," or Sto "CR671 Traffic Joint Sealant," or Sonneborn "NP-2" for slopes over 12 percent. 2. Locations: Exterior locations subject to pedestrian and vehicular traffic. 3. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard available colors. D. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, one- part, non-sag, mildew- resistant, acrylic-emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834, formulated to be paintable and recommended for exposed applications on interior and protected exterior exposures involving joint movement of not more than ± 7.5%. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Bostik Construction Products Division "Chem-Calk 600" or Pecora Corp. "AC-20+Silicone" or Polymeric Systems, Inc. "PSI-701" or Sonneborn Building Products Division/Rexnord Chem. Products, Inc. "Sonolac". 2. Locations: All exposed interior locations. 3. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. E. One-Part Non-Acid Curing Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, and Uses NT, M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated,O; medium modulus sealant formulated with fungicide that are intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other non-porous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures to high humidity and temperature extremes. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either Dow Corning "786 Mildew Resistant Sealant," or GE Silicones "Sanitary 1700 Sealant," or Pecora "898 Silicone," or Polymeric Systems, Inc. "PSI 611". 2. Locations: Interior tile and other similar locations subject to both high humidity and temperature extremes. 3. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. F. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard, nondrying nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce transmission of airborne sound. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Pecora Corp. "BA- 98" or US Gypsum "Acoustical Sealant" or Sika "Sikaflex 11 FC." JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 -3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 2. Locations: Concealed gypsum drywall partitions perimeter and penetrations. 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by the sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. B. Joint Sealant Backing: 1. ASTM C1330; closed-cell polyethylene foam rod, non-gassing; Nomaco "Noma Spec," or approved equivalent. 2. Expanding foam sealant; Polytite B by Polytite Manufacturing Corp. or Polyseal by Sandell Mfg. Co., or "Colorseal" by Emseal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Examination: 1. Examine substrates and verify that joint dimensions are correct and that substrate is in proper condition to receive sealants. 2. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Cleaning Joints: 1. Clean out joints just before installing sealants; follow joint sealer manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Remove dust; paints, except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer; oil, grease, water repellents, water, surface dirt and frost, and other similar materials which would prevent or reduce sealant bond. 3. Clean metal, glass, and other non-porous surfaces by means that are not harmful to substrates or leave residues capable of interfering with sealant adhesion. C. Joint Sealant Backing: Install joint backing without twisting, compress more than 50%, or stretch during installation. Install sealant backup materials to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. For joints 1/4-inch to 1/2-inch wide, install backer rod to provide sealant joint depth equal to joint width. 2. For joints wider than 1/2-inch, install backer rod at depth to provide 1/2-inch sealant joint depth. 3. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint-fillers. Do not stretch, twist, puncture or tear joint-fillers. Remove absorbent joint-fillers that have become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry material. 4. Install bond breaker tape between sealants and joint-fillers, compression seals or back of joints where required to prevent third-side adhesion of sealant to back of joints. JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 -4 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 5. Provide sealant over all sight jointg exposed backer rod, expansion joint filler, and expanding foam sealant. D. Bond Surface Priming: 1. Prime cleaned joint substrates where recommended by joint sealer manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealer-substrate tests or prior experience. 2. Follow joint sealer manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Confine primers to sealant bond area; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. 4. Prime bond surfaces prior to installation of sealant joint backing. E. Mixing: 1. Mix multi-part sealants in accordance with sealant manufacturer's printed instruction, using only whole units. 2. Do not use partial units. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Manufacturer's Instructions: Follow sealant manufacturers' printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. B. Masking: Mask surfaces that might be permanently stained or damaged by sealant contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Promptly remove tape after tooling without disturbing joint seal. C. Installation Technique: Install sealants using techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability. D. Tooling: Tool non-sag sealants slightly concave prior to time skinning or curing begins to form smooth, uniform beads, to eliminate air bubbles and air pockets, and to assure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. E. Protection: Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Procedure: Make a cut in the sealant across the joint for the entire depth of the sealant. Make two vertical cuts several inches long, paralleling the sides of the joint as closely as possible and extending down from the cross cut. Grasp the free length of sealant and pull at a 90-degree angle, tearing sealant from joint for several inches. B. Interpretation of Results: Field quality control test results shall be interpreted as follows: rIbN, 1. Sealant Tears Cohesively: Pass JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 -5 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 2. Sealant Fails in Adhesion at Joint Face: Fail; remove sealant, prepare joint bond surfaces anew, and reinstall sealant to comply with requirements. END OF SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00 -6 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 SECTION 079513.16 -EXTERIOR EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes exterior building expansion joint cover assemblies. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for expansion joint cover assemblies. B. Shop Drawings: For each expansion joint cover assembly. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, splices, block-out requirement, attachments to other work, and line diagrams showing entire route of each expansion joint. 2. Where expansion joint cover assemblies change planes, provide isometric or clearly detailed drawing depicting how components interconnect. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of exposed finish. 1. Include manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors and finishes available for each exposed metal and elastomeric seal material. D. Expansion Joint Cover Assembly Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of the supplier. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Manufacturer and model number for each expansion joint cover assembly. 2. Expansion joint cover assembly location cross-referenced to Drawings. 3. Nominal,minimum, and maximum joint width. 4. * Movement direction. 5. Materials, colors, and finishes. 6. Product options. C EXTERIOR EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES 079513.16 - 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION A. Furnish units in longest practicable lengths to minimize field splicing. B. Include factory-fabricated closure materials and transition pieces,T joints, corners,curbs,cross- connections, and other accessories as required to provide continuous expansion joint cover assemblies. 2.2 EXTERIOR.EXPANSION JOINT COVERS A. Exterior Metal-Plate Joint Cover: Assembly consisting of sliding metal cover plate in continuous contact with gaskets mounted on metal frames fixed to sides of joint gap. 1. Product and Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Construction Specialties, Inc. Model ASM-200X or equal products by one of the following: a. Balco,Inc b. MM Systems Corporation. 2. Application: Wall to wall. 3. Installation: Surface mounted. 4. Exposed Metal: a. Aluminum: Clear anodic, Class I. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M),Alloy 6061-T6 for sheet and plate. 1. Apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on aluminum surfaces to be placed in contact with cementitious materials. B. Elastomeric Seals: Manufacturer's standard preformed elastomeric membranes or extrusions to be installed in metal frames. C. Moisture Barrier: Manufacturer's standard, flexible elastomeric material. 2.4 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611,AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. '47 EXTERIOR EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES 079513.16 -2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Moisture Barriers: Manufacturer's standard continuous, waterproof membrane within joint and attached to substrate on sides of joint. B. Manufacturer's standard attachment devices. Include anchors, clips, fasteners, set screws, spacers, and other accessories compatible with material in contact, as indicated or required for complete installations. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces where expansion joint cover assemblies will be installed for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Notify Architect where discrepancies occur that will affect proper expansion joint cover assembly installation and performance. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. (.111 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to expansion joint cover assembly manufacturer's written instructions. B. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, and instructions for installing expansion joint cover assemblies. Provide fasteners of metal, type, and size to suit type of construction indicated and to provide for secure attachment of expansion joint cover assemblies. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for storing, handling, and installing expansion joint cover assemblies and materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Metal Frames: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install expansion joint cover assemblies. 1. Install in true alignment and proper relationship to joints and adjoining finished surfaces measured from established lines and levels. 2. Adjust for differences between actual structural gap and nominal design gap due to ambient temperature at time of installation. 3. Cut and fit ends to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of metal without buckling of frames. 4. Install frames in continuous contact with adjacent surfaces. a. Shimming is not permitted. EXTERIOR EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES 079513.16 -3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 5. Locate anchors at interval recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 3 inches (75 rmil) mm)from each end and not more than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. C. Install with hairline mitered corners where expansion joint cover assemblies change direction or abut other materials. D. Terminate exposed ends of expansion joint cover assemblies with field- or factory-fabricated termination devices. E. Moisture Barrier Drainage: If indicated,provide drainage fitting and connect to drains. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Do not remove protective covering until finish work in adjacent areas is complete. When protective covering is removed, clean exposed metal surfaces to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Protect the installation from damage by work of other Sections. END OF SECTION 079513.16 EXTERIOR EXPANSION JOINT COVER ASSEMBLIES 079513.16 -4 r6' TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 8 OPENINGS TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS rw\ Project No. 14171 SECTION 081113 — HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Summary: Section includes furnishing and installing hollow metal doors and frames. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Coordinate work of this Section with work of other Sections as required to properly execute the Work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of other Sections. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated, include door designation, type, level and model, material description, core description, construction details, label compliance, sound and fire-resistance ratings, and finishes. Cub' B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors including vertical and horizontal edge details. 3. Frame details for each frame type including dimensioned profiles. 4. Details and locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, accessories,joints, and connections. 7. Coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements. C. Door Schedule: Use same reference designations indicated on Drawings in preparing schedule for doors and frames. D. Oversize Construction Certificates: For door assemblies required to be fire-protection rated and exceeding size limitations of labeled assemblies. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with ANSI A 250.8, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 1. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric pressure. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors and frames. B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage, and notify shipper and supplier if damage is found. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items match new work and are acceptable to Architect. Remove and replace damaged items that cannot be repaired as directed. C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch- (100-mm-) high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If door packaging becomes wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) spaces between stacked doors to permit air circulation. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Submit data and schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where acceptance of schedule must precede fabrication of units that must be built into other work. Coordinate door and frame work with wood doors specified in Section 08 14 00 —Wood Doors and finish hardware specified in Section 08 71 00 — Door Hardware. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Project requirements, provide steel door and frame units produced by one of the following: 1. Amweld Building Products, Inc. (330) 527-4385. 2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company; Medallion Series handed doors and frames 3. Curries Co. (515) 423-1334. 4. Deansteel Manufacturing Co. (210) 226-8271 5. The Kewanee Corp. (800) 666-4481. 6. Mesker Door Co. (205) 851-6670. 7. Premier Products, Inc. (318) 361-0796. 8. Republic Builders Products (901) 352-3383. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet, General: Thickness dimensions, including those referenced in ANSI A250.8, are minimums as defined in referenced ASTM standards for both uncoated steel sheet and the uncoated base metal of metallic-coated steel sheets. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 569/A 569M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. C. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366/A 366M, Commercial Steel (CS), or ASTM A 620/A 620M, Drawing Steel (DS), Type B; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. D. Anchors and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard units suitable for type of wall construction, and as follows. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 -2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 1. Provide square profile stops with mitered corners for glazing and louvers. 2. Use galvanized items for units built into exterior walls. 3. Provide 18 x 14 mesh galvanized steel insect screen on roll formed galvanized steel frames with mitered corners, mounted on interior side of door louvers. 4. Provide countersunk flat or small oval head Philips or Jackson head fasteners where exposed to view. E. Primer: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer, suitable as a base for specified finish paints. 2.3 DOORS AND FRAMES A. General: Provide doors of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated. B. Provide the following doors and frames complying with ANSI/SDI A250.8 "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames," and as specified. 1. Exterior Doors: Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A for Extra Heavy Duty, Model 2 doors, "Seamless Design," fabricated with minimum 0.053" (1.3 mm) thick (old 16 gage) hot-dip galvanized steel faces and edges, "Steel Stiffened Core," with top and bottom flush end closures sealed to eliminate moisture entry into door, and with closer reinforcement. 2. Interior Doors: Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B for Heavy Duty, Model 2 doors, "Seamless Design" fabricated from minimum 0.042" (1.0 mm) thick (old 1111.1) 18 gage) steel faces, with "Steel Stiffened Core" and with closer reinforcement. 3. Exterior Frames: Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A for Extra Heavy Duty frames, fabricated from minimum 0.053" (1.3 mm) thick (old 16 gage) hot- dip galvanized steel with mitered and continuously seam welded (including rabbets and stop) corners, and with temporary spreader bar at bottom. 4. Interior Frames: Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B for Heavy Duty frames, fabricated from minimum 0.042" (1.0 mm) thick (old 18 gage) steel sheet with mitered reinforced mechanically joined corners. 5. Transom Panels: Provide units matching adjacent door panels unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate steel door and frame units to comply with ANSI A250.8 and to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects including warp and buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site. B. . Exterior Door Construction: For exterior locations and elsewhere as indicated, fabricate doors, panels, and frames from metallic-coated steel sheet. Close top and bottom edges of doors flush as an integral part of door construction or by addition of 0.053- inch- (1.3-mm-) thick (old 16 gage), metallic-coated steel channels with channel webs placed even with top and bottom edges. C. Interior Door and Panel Faces: Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush units, from the following material: (1.-\1 1. Cold-rolled steel sheet. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 -3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 D. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction of the type specified that produces a door complying with SDI standards. E. Clearances for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Not more than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at jambs and heads, except not more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) between pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) at bottom. F. Clearances for Fire-Rated Doors: As required by NFPA 80. G. Single Acting, Door-Edge Profile: Square edge, unless beveled edge is indicated. H. Double Acting, Door-Edge Profile: Round vertical edges with 2-1/8-inch (54-mm) radius. I. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." J. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers, and moldings from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. K. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts. L. Thermal-Rated (Insulating) Assemblies: At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or scheduled, provide doors fabricated as thermal-insulating door and frame assemblies and tested according to ASTM C 236 or ASTM C 976 on fully operable door assemblies. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide thermal-rated assemblies with U-value of 0.41 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (2.33 W/sq. m x K) or better. M. Sound-Rated (Acoustical) Assemblies: Where shown or scheduled, provide door and frame assemblies fabricated as sound-reducing type, tested according to ASTM E 1408, and classified according to ASTM E 413. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide acoustical assemblies with STC sound ratings of 33 or better. N. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according to final door hardware schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI A250.6 and ANSI A115 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. 1. For concealed overhead door closers, provide space, cutouts, reinforcement, and provisions for fastening in top rail of doors or head of frames, as applicable. 2. For surface applied hardware, reinforce doors and frames for surface applied hardware. Drilling and/or tapping shall be completed by others; See Section 08 71 00 — Door Hardware. O. Frame Construction: Fabricate frames to shape shown. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners and 14.1) seamless face joints. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 -4 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 2. For exterior applications, fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners, rabbets, stops, and seamless face joints. 3. Provide welded frames with temporary spreader bars. P. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied hardware may be done at Project site. Q. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8. R. Glazing Stops: Manufacturer's standard, formed from 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick (old 20 gage) steel sheet. 1. Provide nonremovable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors for glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. 2. Provide screw-applied, removable, glazing stops on inside of glass, louvers, and other panels in doors. S. Astragals: As required by NFPA 80 to provide fire ratings indicated. 2.5 FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied coat of rust-inhibiting primer complying with ANSI A250.10 for acceptance criteria. rib.\ PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's data, and as specified. B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions in SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 1. Except for frames located in existing walls or partitions, place frames before construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. 2. In masonry construction, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include masonry wire anchors and masonry T-shaped anchors. 3. In existing concrete or masonry construction, provide at least three completed opening anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Set frames and secure to adjacent construction with bolts and masonry anchorage devices. 4. In metal-stud partitions, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Attach wall anchors to studs with screws. 5. Install fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. 6. For openings 90 inches (2286 mm) or more in height, install an additional anchor at hinge and strike jambs. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 -5 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 7. Seal open seams in exterior units to whatever extent not completed at the factory prior to painting. C. Door Installation: Comply with ANSI A250.8. Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with SDI 122 and ANSI/DHI A115.1G. 1. Fire-Rated Doors: Install within clearances specified in NFPA 80. 2. Smoke-Control Doors: Install to comply with NFPA 105. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Cleanup: Remove excess weld splatter by grinding flush with adjacent surfaces, without grinding skips or gouging parent metal. Refer to Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings for surface preparation, primer and field applied finish coats. B. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after installation, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch up of compatible air-drying primer. C. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames. END OF SECTION 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 -6 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 (111.6‘ SECTION 081210-PREFABRICATED INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK OF THIS SECTION: A. Work includes furnishing and installing prefabricated interior aluminum frames; cutting, fitting, and preparation of frames to receive finish hardware and accessories; and shop painting. 1.3 RELATED WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS: A. Coordinate work of this Section with work of other Sections as required to properly execute the Work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of other Sections. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Frames shall be fire-rated and labeled and listed for ratings indicated by Warnock Hersey or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Provide required label on each frame. (1111116N 1.5 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit copies of frame manufacturer's printed specifications and installation instructions for review. B. Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of prefabricated aluminum frame work. Include details of each frame type, conditions at openings, details of construction, location, and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide a schedule of frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Architect's Drawings. 1. Coordinate submittals with other doors, frames, and hardware and use the same "opening number identification"as given on the Drawings and the Door Schedule. a. Submittals not using the numbering identification system shown on Architect's Drawings and Schedules will be rejected. C. Furnish representative samples of aluminum finish proposed for this work for acceptance before any material is shop assembled,finished, or delivered. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Deliver aluminum frames cartoned or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. B. Inspect aluminum frame work upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided the repaired items are equivalent in all respects to new work; otherwise remove and replace damaged �` work as directed. \ PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: PREFABRICATED INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMES 081210- 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following manufacturers: 141.1) 1. RACO Interior Products. 2. Avalon International; Dual-Lock Partition Systems, Inc. 3. Frameworks Manufacturing Company. 2.2 MATERIALS: A. Aluminum extrusions conforming to ASTM B 211, Alloy 6063-T5, free of scratches and blemishes on exposed surfaces with specified finish. B. Factory finish extruded frame and door components so that all parts exposed to view upon completion of installation are uniform in finish and color. Exposed surfaces shall be free of scratches and other serious blemishes. - C. Manufacturer's standard painted finish; color as selected by Architect. 2.3 FABRICATION: A. The required sizes for door frame units, and the profile requirements are shown on the Drawings. Verify conditions of related work prior to fabrication, including dimensions of openings and finished floor elevations. B. Fabricate frame connections in accordance with notes, schedules, and details, and as shown on accepted shop drawings. 1. Conceal fasteners in an accepted manner. r� 2. Provide recesses and reinforcements as necessary for butts, lock strikes, closers, brackets, and surface applied hardware. Prepare for hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturer's approved templates or the physical hardware. 3. Provide door stops with an accepted vinyl or wool pile sound stripping. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Install work in accordance with accepted shop drawings and details, plumb, level, and true,with proper alignment,and proper relationship to work of adjoining trades. B. Exposed surfaces shall be free from warp, wave, and buckle. Provide well formed mitered joints with faces of metal in contact having hairline joints. END OF SECTION 081210 (41114) PREFABRICATED INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMES 081210-2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 SECTION 081400-WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Solid-core doors with plastic-laminate faces. 2. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. 1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3. Indicate fire ratings for fire doors. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Color charts consisting of actual materials in small sections for the following: 1. Plastic-Laminate Door Faces: Show the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Plastic laminate, 6 inches (150 mm)square, for each color, texture, and pattern selected. 2. Corner sections of plastic-laminate-clad doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm),for each color, texture, and pattern selected. 3. Frames for light openings, 6 inches (150 mm) long, for each material, type, and finish required. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. (011',„ WOOD DOORS 081400 - 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in manufacturer's standard packaging. C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch (1067-by-2134-mm) section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch (0.25 mm in a 75-mm) span. 1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial Completion: a. Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer. B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors." C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at posi- tive pressure according to UBC Standard 7-2 or UL 10C. 1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested as- semblies, provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door as- semblies except for size. 2. Temperature-Rise Limit: At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, pro- vide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F (250 deg C) above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure. PART 2- PRODUCTS WOOD DOORS 081400-2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Marshfield Don Systems 5- ply hot pressed door, or equal by one of the following: 1. Flush Wood Doors: a. Algoma Hardwoods Inc. b. Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division. c. VTI Industries. 2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL A. Plastic-Laminate-Faced Doors: 1. Grade: Custom. 2. Laminate Faces: High-pressure decorative laminates complying with NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS. 3. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes:As indicated on the Drawings. 4. Stiles: Plastic-laminate matching faces, applied before faces. 2.3 SOLID-CORE DOORS A. Particleboard Cores: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2. 2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware. 3. Provide doors with structural composite lumber cores instead of particleboard cores at locations where exit devices are indicated. B. Interior Plastic-Laminate-Faced Doors: 1. Core: Structural composite lumber. 2. Construction: Five plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before faces and crossbands are applied. C. Fire-Rated Doors: 1. Construction: Construction and core specified above for type of face indicated or manufacturer's standard mineral-core construction as needed to provide fire rating indicated. 2. Blocking: For mineral-core doors, provide composite blocking with improved screw- holding capability approved for use in doors of fire ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware. 3. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile matching face veneer, and laminated backing at hinge stiles for improved rbN screw-holding capability and split resistance. WOOD DOORS 081400-3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 411)4. Pairs: Provide fire-rated pairs with fire-retardant stiles matching face veneer that are r labeled and listed for kinds of applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. 2.4 LIGHT FRAMES A. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard wood beads as follows unless otherwise indicated. 1.Wood Species: Species compatible with door faces. 2. Profile: Flush rectangular beads. B. At wood core doors with 20-minute fire-protection ratings, provide wood beads and meetal glazing clips approved for such use. Fire-Rated Doors: C. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048-inch thick cold-rolled steel sheet; with baked enamel or powder coated finish, and approved for fire-protection rating indicated. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. 2. Metal Astragals: Premachine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire-rated doors. C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors at factory. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2 Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 08 80 00—Glass and Glazing. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors. WOOD DOORS 081400-4 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 C.6\ 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 081400 (6111.6\ WOOD DOORS 081400 -5 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 (11."*\\ SECTION 084113 -ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior storefront framing. 2. Exterior manual-swing entrance doors and door-frame units. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. (1.11 \ 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior. 2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum- framed entrances and storefronts, showing the following: a. Joinery, including concealed welds. b. Anchorage. c. Expansion provisions. d. Glazing. e. Flashing and drainage. 3. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes. D. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of assemblies, made from 12- (.1116\' inch(300-mm) lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following: ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 1. Joinery, including concealed welds. 2. Anchorage. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Glazing. 5. Flashing and drainage. E. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: By Hardware section. F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and field testing agency. B. Energy Performance Certificates: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each aluminum- framed entrance and storefront. C. Product Test Reports: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. D. Source quality-control reports. E. Field quality-control reports. F. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated and accredited by IAS or ILAC Mutual Recognition Arrangement as complying with ISO/IEC 17025. C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 -2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines,to one another, and to adjoining construction. 1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include,but are not limited to,the following: a. Structural failures including,but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. c. Deterioration of metals, and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas. e. Failure of operating components. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. B. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. 1. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Failure also includes the following: a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. b. Glass breakage. c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners,attachments, and other components. e. Failure of operating units. C. Structural Loads: ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 -3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. D. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch (19.1 mm),whichever is less. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch(3.2 mm), whichever is smaller. E. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity,but not less than 10 seconds. F. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows: 1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area: a. Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.30 L/s per sq. m) at a static-air- ' pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa). 2. Entrance Doors: a. Single Doors: Maximum air leakage of 0.5 cfm/sq. ft. (2.54 L/s per sq. m) at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa). G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows: 1. No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind- load design pressure,but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa). H. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes: 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. EFCO Corporation. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 -4 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 (.11IkN 2. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company. 3. Vistawall Architectural Products. B. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of aluminum-framed entrance and storefront system, including framing and accessories, from single manufacturer. 2.3 FRAMING A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Construction: Shall match existing storefront system. 2. Finish: Dark bronze color anodic finish. 3. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system. B. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not integral,where framing abuts adjacent construction. C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining,nonferrous shims for aligning system components. D. Materials: 1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M. d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. 2. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00;applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. a. Structural Shapes,Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. b. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. c. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M. 2.4 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation. 1. Door Construction: Shall match existing storefront doors. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate '` concealed tie rods. (00 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 -5 TOM REID LIBRARY.ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 a. Thermal Construction: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum members exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior. 2. Door Design: Medium stile,unless otherwise required to match existing. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Shall match existing, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. 2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE A. Entrance Door Hardware: Hardware not specified in this Section is specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware." 2.6 GLAZING A. Glazing: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing." B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers. C. Glazing Sealants: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing." 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements,wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. B. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch (25.4 mm) that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer. 1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements. C. Concealed Flashing: Dead-soft, 0.018-inch- (0.457-mm-) thick stainless steel, ASTM A 240/A 240M of type recommended by manufacturer. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 -6 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. C. Fabricate components that,when assembled,have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing. 6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. E. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using system to match existing. F. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware. 1. At exterior doors,provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. G. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. 1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable strip and mortised into door edge. 2. At exterior doors,provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms. H. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: By hardware section. 2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611,AA-M 12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. 1. Color: Dark bronze. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 -7 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. 6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or by installing nonconductive spacers. 2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation. D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades. E. Install operable units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust weather-stripping contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation. F. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing." G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping. 2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet(3.2 mm in 3 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet(6.35 mm in 12.2 m). 2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet(3.2 mm in 6 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet(6.35 mm in 12.2 m). 3. Alignment: a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to �'`� 1/2 inch(12.7 mm)wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch(1.6 mm). J ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 8 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch (12.7 to 25.4 mm)wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch(3.2 mm). c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch (25.4 mm) wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch(6 mm). 4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m); 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) over total length. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Field Quality-Control Testing: Perform the following test on representative areas of aluminum- framed entrances and storefronts. 1. Water-Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designated by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration. a. Perform a minimum of two tests in areas as directed by Architect. b. Perform tests in each test area as directed by Architect. Perform at least three tests, prior to 10, 35, and 70 percent completion. C. Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 084113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 -9 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 C`. SECTION 087111 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes furnishing and installing door hardware, thresholds, weatherstripping and seals. It is the hardware supplier's/bidder's responsibility to include in his bid a complete working solution at each opening shown on the plans and no additional change order requests will be accepted unless there is a change in the scope of work requested by the architect or owner. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Coordinate work of this Section with work of other Sections as required to properly execute the Work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of other Sections. C'`\, 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Furnish and install each door hardware item to provide proper operation and required function of every unit without binding or failure. 1. Interior Door Opening Force: Adjust hardware operation at interior non-fire-rated doors to provide an opening force not greater than 5 lbs at a point 3" from latch, measured to leading edge of door. 2. Exterior and Fire Rated Door Opening Force: At exterior doors and fire-rated doors, adjust hardware opening force in small increments above the opening force required for interior non-fire-rated doors to close and latch the door. 3. Closer Sweep Adjustment: Adjust closer sweep period so that from a 70 degree open position, door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3" from latch, measured to leading edge of door. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each item of hardware. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated on the Drawings, organize schedule into vertical format"hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Use specification heading numbers with any variations suffixed a, b, etc B. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size thickness, hand, function, and finish of hardware. If requested by Architect, submit one sample of each type of exposed hardware unit, finished as required, and tagged with full description for coordination with schedule. Submit data and schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where acceptance of schedule must precede fabrication of other work (e. g. hollow metal (11/*"\ frames)that is critical to the Project construction schedule. 1. Type, style,function, size and finish of each hardware item. DOOR HARDWARE 087111 - 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 2. Name and manufacturer of each item.. 3. Fastenings and other pertinent information. 4. Hardware set location cross-referenced to both Drawing floor plan and door schedule indications. 5. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes in schedule. 6. Mounting locations for hardware. 7. Door and frame sizes and materials. , 8. Date of jobsite visit. (delete if new work) C. Coordinate keying instructions, and keying information. Deliver keys and key control box to Owner in person and obtain receipt(No Exceptions). 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized finish hardware supplier who has been furnishing hardware in the Project's vicinity for a period of not less than 2 years, and who is, or employs an experienced hardware consultant(AHC)who is available, at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation about Project's hardware requirements, to Owner, Architect and Contractor. 1. Responsible for detailing, scheduling and ordering of finish hardware. Detailing implies that the submitted schedule of hardware is correct and complete for the intended function and performance of the openings. B. Coordination and Schedules: Hardware units and usage specified in Part 2 of this Section and scheduled on the Drawings establish quality, quantity, function and finish required for each door opening. Review, coordinate and confirm that hardware specified for each opening is the proper function. In case of controversy, make appropriate notations of proposed changes from specified requirements on supplier's hardware schedule and request written clarification from the Architect prior to proceeding. C. Hardware: Free of defects, blemishes and excessive play. Obtain each kind of hardware (latch and locksets, exit devices, hinges and closers)from one manufacturer. D. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire rated openings that comply with NFPA Standards No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and tested by UL or Warnock Hersey for given type/size opening and degree of label. Provide proper latching hardware, door closers, approved-bearing hinges and seals whether listed in the Hardware Schedule or not. All hardware shall comply with standards UBC 702 (1997) and UL 10C. 1. Where emergency exit devices are required on fire-rated doors (with supplementary marking on doors' UL labels indicating "Fire Door to be equipped with Fire Exit Hardware") provide UL label on exit devices indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS AND COORDINATION: A. Where exact types of hardware specified are not adaptable to finished shape or size of members requiring hardware, provide suitable types having as nearly as practical the same operation and quality as type specified, subject to Architect's approval. B. Coordination: Coordinate hardware with other work. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use on doors and frames of the thickness, profile, swing, security and similar requirements indicated, as necessary for proper installation and function, regardless of omissions or conflicts (.0) DOOR HARDWARE 087111 -2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 in the information on the Contract Documents. Furnish related trades with the following information: 1. Location of embedded and attached items to concrete. 2. Location of wall-mounted hardware, including wall stops. 3. Location of finish floor materials and floor-mounted hardware. 4. Locations for conduit and raceways as needed for electrical, electronic and electro- pneumatic hardware items. Fire/life-safety system interfacing. Point-to-point wiring diagrams plus riser diagrams to related trades. 5. Manufacturer templates to door and frame fabricators. C. Check Shop Drawings for doors and entrances to confirm that adequate provisions will be made for proper hardware installation. Do not order hardware until the submittal has been reviewed by the frame and door suppliers for compatibility with their products. D. Prior to submittal, carefully inspect,existing conditions at each opening to verify finish hardware required to complete Work, including sizes, quantities, existing hardware scheduled for re-use, and sill condition material. If conflict or incompatibility between the specified/scheduled hardware and existing conditions, submit request for direction from Architect. Include date of jobsite visit in the submittal. 1. Submittals prepared without thorough jobsite visit by qualified hardware expert will be rejected as non-compliant. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. B. Packaging of door hardware is the responsibility of supplier. As material is received by hardware supplier from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware set number to match set numbers of approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets may be packed in same container. C. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct. D. Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of installation (shop or Project site). E. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable so that completion of the Work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special warranties: 1. Door Closers: Ten year period 2. Exit Devices: Three year period 3. Locks and Cylinders: Three year period 1.9 MAINTENANCE DOOR HARDWARE 087111 -3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for. Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. B. Parts kits: Furnish manufacturer's standard parts kits for locksets, exit devices, and door closers. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. General: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for, self-tapping sheet metal screws. With each hardware item, furnish machine screws for installation into steel, and provide threaded to the head wood screws for installation into wood; all-purpose threads are not acceptable. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed screws to match the hardware finish. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when the door is closed, except to the extent no standard units of the type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Provide through bolts for closer installation. 2.2 HARDWARE UNITS AND USAGE A. Units specified below establish the design, grade, function, finish, size, and other qualities required for this Project. Provide the following hardware units in the quantities specified and locations indicated on the Door Schedule. Provide US 26D finish unless otherwise specified. Refer to Door Schedule on Drawings for hardware selection, door sizes, fire ratings, hardware function, exit devices, door closers, and other requirements at each door opening. Except as indicated on the Drawings, provide: 1. Butt Hinges: Provide the following butt hinges produced by Ives, or equivalent butt hinges produced by, Hager, or Bommer, as approved. Provide 1-1/2 pair per door leaf up to 7'- 6" high and one additional hinge per leaf for each additional 2'-6" of door height. Provide 5" hinge height for doors 3'-6"to 4'-0"wide and 6" hinge height for doors over 4'-0"wide. a. Out-Swinging Exterior Doors Except Storefront: Ives 5BB1 HW 4.5 x 4.5 NRP x non-ferrous. b. In-swinging Exterior Doors: Ives 5BB1 HW 4.5 x 4.5 non-ferrous. c. Out-Swinging Interior High Frequency Doors: Ives 5BB1HW 4.5 x 4.5 x NRP. d. In-Swinging Interior High Frequency Doors: Ives 5BB1 HW 4.5 x 4.5 e. Out-Swinging Interior Average Frequency Doors: Ives 51131 4.5 x 4.5 NRP. f. In-Swinging Interior Average Frequency Doors: Ives 5BB1 4.5 x 4.5. 2. Door Closers:. Adjust closers to comply with ADA requirements. Provide type of arm recommended by closer manufacturer for door conditions (use, door hand and swing) indicated. a. Closers for fire-rated doors shall be provided with temperature stabilizing fluid that complies with standards UBC 7-2 (1997)and UL 10C. b. Door closer shall have fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action. Closer shall have 1-1/2-inch in diameter piston. c. Hydraulic fluid shall be of a type requiring no seasonal closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to minus 30 degrees F. (4.1) DOOR HARDWARE 087111 -4 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 111111. d. Spring power shall be continuously adjustable over the full range of closer sizes, and allow for reduced opening force for the physically handicapped. Closers shall have separate adjustment for latch speed, general speed, and back check. e. Provide powder coating certified to exceed 100 hours salt Spray testing by ETL, an independent testing laboratory used by BHMA for ANSI certification. f. Pressure relief valves are not accepted. g. Closers to be installed to allow door swing as shown on plans. Doors swinging into exit corridors shall provide for corridor clear width as required by code. Where possible, mount closers on room side of door. h. Door closers meeting this specification: Falcon SC60/80 Series or equal product by LCN. 3. Cylindrical Locks and latches: as scheduled, fastened with through-bolts and threaded chassis hubs. a. Chassis: Cold-rolled steel, handing field-changeable. b. Latch bolts: 1/2" inch projection. c. Lever Trim: Through-bolt, accessible design, cast lever or metal-filled wrought types as schedule. d. Strikes: 16 gauge curved steel, bronze or brass with 1" deep box construction, lips of sufficient length to clear trim and project clothing. e. Certifications: ANSI A156.2, Grade 2 ii. UL listed for 3-hour doors f. Approved Manufacturers: Falcon B Series x Dane Lever Design or equal product by Schlage. 4. Exit Devices: Provide the following at the locations shown on the Door Schedule: a. Exit Devices shall be touchpad type, fabricated of bronze, brass, stainless steel, or aluminum, plated to the standard architectural finishes to match the balance of the door hardware. b. Touchpad shall extend a minimum of one half of the door width. c. Exit devices shall be UL listed panic exit hardware. All exit devices for fire rated openings shall be UL labeled fire exit hardware. d. Lever trim for exit devices shall be vandal-resistant type, which will travel to a 90- degree down position when more than 35 pounds of torque are applied, and which can easily be re-set. e. Exit devices meeting this specification: Von Duprin 22 Series. 5. Stops, Flush Bolts, Dust Proof Strikes, & Silencers: Provide the following at locations designated; IVES, or equivalent by Trimco. a. Floor Stops: Ives FS436 b. Where a wall or floor stop cannot be used, provide an overhead stop. Acceptable products are as manufactured by Glynn-Johnson. Use a 100 series concealed overhead stop where appearance is a primary consideration or 450 series at interior and 90 series at exterior locations. c. Silencers: IVES SR 64; (3) per single leaf opening, (2) per double leaf opening. 6. Weather stripping, Seals and Thresholds: Provide the following at locations designated; National Guard Products or equivalent by Zero Weatherstripping. 2.3 KEYING REQUIREMENTS ("II\ DOOR HARDWARE 087111 -5 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 A. Key System Requirements: Initiate and conduct meeting(s) with Owner to determine. Furnish Owner's written approval of the system. 1. All locks shall be keyed to a new grand master key system. 2. All locks/cylinders to be construction masterkeyed. 3. Permanent keys: deliver only to Owner's representative. 4. Key Transcript(bitting list): Supply to Owner upon completion. 5. Mark permanent cylinders, cores and keys with applicable blind code for identification. These visual key control marks or codes shall not include actual key cuts. 6. Provide 5 of each cut Master key and higher level. 7. Provide 3 each cut key per lock. 8. Provide 2 each emergency over-ride master keys for locksets that use these. 9. Provide 10 each construction master keys. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise directed by Architect. Reinforce the attachment substrate for secure installation and adjust for proper operation. Provide clean, properly sized mortises and drilled holes for all mortised and surface applied finish hardware 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. B. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. Before painter's finish is applied, remove all finish hardware, except prime painted items. After finish coats are dry, permanently replace and readjust finish hardware for proper operation. C. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location D. Cut and fit threshold and floor covers to profile of doorframes, with mitered corners and hairline joints. Join units with concealed welds or concealed mechanical joints. Cut smooth openings for bolts and similar items, if any. Screw thresholds to substrate with No. 10 or larger stainless steel screws 3.3 ADJUSTMENT A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. B. Six month hardware installation survey is to be performed by a certified "AHC" in the employ of the hardware supplier. 3.4 HARDWARE SCHEDULE: Refer to Drawings. DOOR HARDWARE 087111 -6 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 END OF SECTION 087111 (°11°' (11111'\ IIIbN DOOR HARDWARE 087111 -7 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 SECTION 088000 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Glass for windows. Doors, interior borrowed lites, and storefront framing. 2. Glazing sealants and accessories. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036. C. IBC: International Building Code. D. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Glass Samples: For each type of the following products; 12 inches (300 mm)square. 1. Insulating glass. C. Glazing Accessory Samples: For sealants and colored spacers, in 12-inch (300-mm) lengths. D. Glazing.Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. GLAZING 088000- 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and (.7 design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer, glass testing agency and sealant testing agency. B. Product Certificates: For glass. C. Product Test Reports: For insulating glass and glazing sealants, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within previous 36-month period. D. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report. E. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. B. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program. C. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. 1.8 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glass product, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants. 1. Testing is not required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted. 2. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint-preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates. 3. Test no fewer than four Samples of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. 4. Schedule enough time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 5. For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including the use of specially formulated primers. GLAZING 088000 -2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 (11. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written instructions for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain,frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). 1.11 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AGC Glass Company North America, Inc. 2. Guardian Industries Corp.; SunGuard. 3. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope TM. B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type. C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method. GLAZING 088000-3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS .(I") A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements,"to design glazing. C. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined according to the IBC and ASTM E 1300. 1. Design Wind Pressures:As indicated on Drawings. 2. Design Wind Pressures: Determine design wind pressures applicable to Project according to ASCE/SEI 7, based on heights above grade indicated on Drawings. a. Wind Design Data: As indicated on Drawings. b. Basic Wind Speed: As indicated. Importance Factor: As indicated. Exposure Category: As indicated. 3. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-glass deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1 inch (25 mm), whichever is less. D. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II. E. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6 mm thickness. 2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite. 2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC. D. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum.[ Provide glass that complies (411) with performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated.] GLAZING 088000 -4 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: 1/4 inch. E. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat- strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened float glass is indicated, provide heat- strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements"Article. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass. 2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear)or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. B. Heat-Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I, Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. rik‘ 2.5 INSULATING GLASS A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190. 1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with polyisobutylene and silicone primary and secondary sealants. 2. Spacer: Aluminum with dark bronze, color anodic finish to match framing 3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or a blend of both. 2.6 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: 1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants:As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT. GLAZING 088000-5 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation. b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc. c. Tremco Incorporated. 2. Applications: All exterior exposed and interior on exterior side of construction. 2.7 GLAZING TAPES A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 804.3 tape. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, with requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type 0 (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. 2.9 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. 1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components. GLAZING 088000 -6 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 (11Ph.s a. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces. B. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed Work. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance. C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm). GLAZING 088000 -7 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. I. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. J. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 3.4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed. F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. GLAZING 088000 - 8 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 (0."\. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure- glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of (111157' dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains. 1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings. C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period. D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. 3.7 MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE A. Glass: Clear fully tempered float glass. 1. Minimum Thickness: 6 mm. 2. Safety glazing required. 3.8 INSULATING GLASS SCHEDULE A. Glass: Clear insulating glass. 1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6 mm. 3. Outdoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass. 4. Interspace Content: Argon. GLAZING 088000-9 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 '�`� 5. Indoor Lite: Fully tempered float glass. J 6. Safety glazing required. END OF SECTION 088000 GLAZING 088000 - 10 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 9 �' FINISHES TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No. 3 —2/16/2017 SECTION 092116 — GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes furnishing and installing: 1. Screw type steel drywall framing and ceiling system. 2. Gypsum drywall board. 3. Gypsum drywall accessories. 4. Gypsum drywall finishing. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Coordinate work of this Section with work of other Sections as required to properly execute the Work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of other Sections. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit product data for each drywall material and accessory required, including specifications showing compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent testing agency. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 092116- 1 (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No. 3 — 2/16/2017 A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS AND MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Metal Support Materials; a. Clark Dietrich Building Systems. b. National Gypsum Co. c. Maverick Steel Inc. d. Unimast, Inc. 2. Gypsum Board and Related Products: a: Georgia Pacific Building Products. b. National Gypsum Co. c. USG. 3. Direct Suspension Systems: a. Armstrong World Industries. b. Chicago Metallic Corp. c. United States Gypsum Co. 2.2 FRAMING AND SUPPORT SYSTEMS A. Screw Type Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, fabricated from minimum 0.0179" thick zinc coated steel in sizes indicated. Provide 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" angle runner at perimeter of ceiling suspension panels for support of drywall panel edge and extruded aluminum ceiling panel edge closure trim. B. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system required. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; 640/660 Drywall Ceiling Suspension. c. United State Gypsum Company; Drywall Suspension System. 2.3 BOARD MATERIALS B. Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M. 1. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. C. Flexible Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396, manufactured to bend to fit tight radii and to be more flexible than standard regular-type panels of the same thickness. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 092116-2 (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS C16\ Project No. 14171 Addendum No. 3 —2/16/2017 1. Thickness: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Location: As indicated. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS, ACCESSORIES, AND TRIM A. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033- to 0.112-inch (0.84- to 2.84-mm) thick. B. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. 2. Acceptable Products: US Gypsum "Thermafiber Sound Attenuation Blanket" or Owens-Corning "Sound Attenuation Batts", or equal by CertainTeed. . C. Acoustical Sealant: See Section 079000 —Joint Sealants. D. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. E. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following: 1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), non-perforated. 2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size. F. Galvanized steel casing beads, corner beads, and other metal trim accessories as required. G. Extruded Aluminum Trim: Fry Reglet Corp., Norcross, GA; MM Systems Corp, Tucker, GA; or Pittcon Industries "Softforms," Riverdale, MD. Provide shapes as indicated. H. Joint Tape: ASTM C 475, plain or perforated. I. Interior Joint Compound: ASTM C 475 in two grades; one for bedding tape and filling depressions and one for topping and sanding. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 092116-3 (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) TOM REID LIBRARY.ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No. 3 —2/16/201.7 raal) A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow- metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Suspended Ceilings: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive ceiling hangers at spacing required to support ceilings and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1. - Furnish concrete inserts and other devises indicated to other -trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction. 3.3 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Installation Standards: ASTM C 754, and ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation, except as follows: 1. Partitions With Brittle Finishes: Use stud manufacturer's published limiting heights for construction and single span conditions with a limiting deflection of L/360 and uniform transverse load values as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Partitions Without Brittle Finishes, More Than 10'-0" High: Use stud manufacturer's published limiting heights for construction and single span conditions with a limiting deflection of L/240 and uniform transverse load values as indicated on the Drawings. 3. Do not bridge building expansion joints with support system. Frame both sides of joints with supports as indicated. 4. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at terminations in the work and for support of.fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, and similar work to comply with details indicated or if not otherwise indicated, to comply with applicable published recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, or if not available, of "Gypsum Construction Handbook" published by US Gypsum Co. 5. Isolate stud system from transfer of structural loading to system, both horizontally and vertically. Provide slip or cushioned type joints to attain lateral support and avoid axial loading. - - 6. Install runner tracks at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and columns where gypsum drywall stud system abuts other work, except as otherwise indicated. 7. Terminate partition stud system at ceilings, except where indicated to be extended to structural support or substrate above. 8. Space studs 16-inches on center, unless otherwise indicated. 9. Frame door openings to comply with details indicated. If not shown, comply with applicable published recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer or of "Gypsum Construction Handbook" published by U. S. Gypsum Co. Attach vertical studs at jambs with screws either directly to frames or to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for jack studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. 10. Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated or if not indicated, in same manner as required for door openings; and install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. (-1.1) B. Curved Partitions: GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 092116-4 (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS C Project No. 14171 Addendum No. 3 —2/16/2017 1. Cut top and bottom track (runners) through leg and web at 2-inch (50-mm) intervals for arc length. In cutting lengths of track, allow for uncut straight lengths of not less than 12 inches (300 mm) at ends of arcs. 2. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs. 3. Support outside (cut) leg of track by clinching steel sheet strip, 1-inch- (25-mm-) high-by-thickness of track metal, to inside of cut legs using metal lock fasteners. 4. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs at stud spacing recommended in writing by gypsum board manufacturer for radii indicated. On straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. 3.4 INSTALLING CEILING SUPPORT SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. 3.5 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216. B. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. D. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place. E. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. F. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. G. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. H. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members using resilient channels, or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 092116-5 (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No. 3 — 2/16/2017 I. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. J. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8-sq. ft. (0.7-sq. m) in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, concrete joists, and other structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant. 4. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. 5. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. 6. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.6 SINGLE LAYER APPLICATION A. Partition/Walls: Apply gypsum board vertically with vertical joints located over supports, but offset at least one stud space on opposite faces of partition/walls. Use maximum practical length boards to minimize end joints. B. Wall Tile Base: Where drywall is base for thin-set ceramic tile and similar rigid applied wall finishes, install glass mesh mortar units. Space fasteners not more than 8-inches on center. C. Curved Partitions: 1. Install panels horizontally and unbroken, to the extent possible, across curved surface plus 12-inch- (300-mm-) long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to them. 2. Wet gypsum panels on surfaces that will become compressed where curve radius prevents using dry panels. Comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations for curve radii, wetting methods, stacking panels after wetting, and other preparations that precede installing wetted gypsum panels. 3. On convex sides of partitions, begin installation at one end of curved surface and fasten gypsum panels to studs as they are wrapped around curve. On concave side, start fastening panels to stud at center of curve and work outward GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 092116- 6 (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No. 3 — 2/16/2017 to panel ends. Fasten panels to framing with screws spaced 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. 4. For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws spaced 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. 5. Allow wetted gypsum panels to dry before applying joint treatment. 3.7 DOUBLE LAYER APPLICATION A. Mechanically Fastened Layers: Fasten both layers to supports with screws. For base layer, do not exceed 24-inches on center spacing at edges and intermediate supports, and for face layer do not exceed 16-inches on center spacing along supports of non-fire rated construction. At fire rated construction, comply with requirements of fire rated design indicated. B. On walls, apply both layers vertically with vertical joints staggered on opposite side of partitions and offset not less than 12-inches between layers. 3.8 INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL TRIM AND ACCESSORIES, GENERAL A. Where feasible, use the same fasteners, to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fasten gypsum board to the supports. Otherwise, fasten flanges by nailing or stapling in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. (111 1. Install metal corner beads at external corners of drywall work. 2. Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or semi-exposed. Provide type with face flange to receive joint compound. Install L-type trim where work is tightly abutted to other work, and install special kerf-type where other work is kerfed to receive long leg of L-type trim. Install U-type trim where edge is exposed, revealed, gasketed, or sealant- filled (including expansion joints). Locate control joints (expansion joints) at the following locations and as indicated on the drawings: a. Where a partition, furring, or column fireproofing abuts a structural element; b. Where a ceiling or soffit abuts a structural element, dissimilar wall or partition, or other vertical penetration; c. Where construction changes within the plane of the partition or ceiling; d. Where a partition or ceiling run exceeds 30 feet; e. Where ceiling dimensions exceed 50 feet in either direction with perimeter relief, or 30 feet without perimeter relief; f. Where wings of L-, U-, and T-shaped ceiling areas are joined. 3. Install extruded aluminum trim at locations indicated. Cope and miter joints for neat appearance without voids. 3.9 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. Apply treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions), flanges of trim accessories, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare work for decoration. Prefill open joints and rounded or beveled edges, if any, using type of compound recommended by manufacturer. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 092116-7 (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No. 3 — 2/16/2017 B. Exposed Drywall to Receive Paint and Other Finishes: Apply joint compound in 3 coats (not including prefill of openings in base), and sand between last two coats and after last coat. C. Concealed Drywall: Omit third coat and sanding on concealed drywall work that is not indicated for drywall finishing or for which finishing is not required to achieve fire- resistance rating, sound rating or to act as air or smoke barrier. D. Provide the following levels of gypsum board finish per ASTM C 840 and GA-214: 1. Level 0: Gypsum board within unfinished areas; taping, floating and trim is not required. 2. Level 1: Gypsum board within ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, unless a higher finish is required for fire resistance rated assemblies and sound rated assemblies. 3. Level 2: Gypsum board substrates to receive ceramic tile and similar solid finish materials. 4. Level 3: Gypsum board ceiling and wall surfaces specified to receive flat and satin paint or heavily textured wall coverings over non-textured surfaces. 5. Level 4: Gypsum board wall surfaces to receive flat or semi-gloss paint and light textured wall coverings. 6. Level 5: Gypsum board ceiling and wall surfaces specified to receive gloss paint and other reflective applied finishes over non-textured surfaces. E. At all corridor partitions, smoke-stop partitions, horizontal exit enclosures, and fire walls, permanently mark both sides of wall construction above ceilings with the words "Fire and Smoke Barrier-Do Not Penetrate". Use stencils and paint letters 3" high with message repeated JJ every 10'-0"o.c. unless otherwise required by applicable Code. END OF SECTION 092116 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 092116-8 (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 SECTION 092400 -CEMENT PLASTERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior vertical plasterwork (stucco). 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and installation of control and expansion joints, including plans, /�►� elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of factory-prepared finish coat and for each color and texture specified. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of factory-prepared finish coat and for each color and texture specified, 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm), and prepared on rigid backing. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover, and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements. B. Exterior Plasterwork: 1. Apply and cure plaster to prevent plaster drying out during curing period. Use procedures required by climatic conditions, including moist curing, providing coverings, and providing barriers to deflect sunlight and wind. 2. Apply plaster when ambient temperature is greater than 40 deg F (4.4 deg C). 3. Protect plaster coats from freezing for not less than 48 hours after set of plaster coat has occurred. CEMENT PLASTERING 092400- 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 C. Factory-Prepared Finishes: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for (.7 environmental conditions for applying finishes. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide cement plaster assemblies identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance according to ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. 2.2 METAL LATH A. Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C 847, cold-rolled carbon-steel sheet with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized-zinc coating. 1. Diamond-Mesh Lath: Flat, 3.4 lb/sq. yd. (1.8 kg/sq. m). 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063, and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required. B. Metal Accessories: 1. Cornerite: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized-zinc coating. 2. External- (Outside-) Corner Reinforcement: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized-zinc coating. 3. Cornerbeads: Fabricated from zinc. a. Smallnose cornerbead with expanded flanges; use unless otherwise indicated. b. Smallnose cornerbead with perforated flanges; use on curved corners. c. Smallnose cornerbead with expanded flanges reinforced by perforated stiffening rib; use on columns and for finishing unit masonry corners. d. Bullnose cornerbead, radius 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum, with expanded flanges; use at locations indicated on Drawings. 4. Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc; square-edged style; with expanded flanges. 5. Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc; one-piece-type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint. 6. Two-Piece Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc; formed to produce slip-joint and square-edged reveal that is adjustable from 1/4 to 5/8 inch (6 to 16 mm) wide; with perforated flanges. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories. CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 -2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 (1/1/1.\. B. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch (13 mm) long, free of contaminants, manufactured for use in cement plaster. C. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates:ASTM C 1063. D. Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, not less than 0.0475-inch (1.21- mm) diameter unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 PLASTER MATERIALS AND MIXES A. Provide three-coat cement plaster on metal lath, complying with ASTM C 1063 and ASTM C 926 and at the locations indicated on the Drawings. B. Scratch Coat Mix: 1-part Portland cement, 1-to 2-parts masonry cement, 2-1/2-to 4-parts sand (ASTM C 897). C. Brown Coat Mix: 1-part Portland cement, 1-to 2-parts masonry cement, 3-to 5-parts sand (ASTM C 897). D. Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings: Factory-mixed acrylic-emulsion coating systems formulated with colorfast mineral pigments and fine aggregates; for use over cement plaster base coats. Include manufacturer's recommended primers and sealing topcoats for acrylic-based finishes. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. DriVit Systems, Inc.; STO Finish Systems Div., STO.Corp.; or Thoro System Products. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 3. Factory-Prepared Finish-Coat Mixes: For acrylic-based finish coatings, comply with manufacturer's written instructions. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects caused by plastering. rlibN B. Prepare smooth, solid substrates for plaster according to ASTM C 926. CEMENT PLASTERING 092400-3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Install components according to requirements for design designations from listing organization and publication indicated on Drawings. 3.4 INSTALLING METAL LATH A. Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063. 1. Partition Framing and Vertical Furring: Install flat-diamond-mesh lath. 3.5 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings. B. Reinforcement for External (Outside) Corners: 1. Install cornerbead at exterior locations. 2. Install cornerbead at interior locations. C. Control Joints: Locate as approved by Architect for visual effect and as follows: 1. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) of the following maximum sizes: a. Vertical Surfaces: 144 sq.ft. (13.4 sq. m). 2. At distances between control joints of not greater than 18 feet (5.5 m) o.c. 3. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) with length-to-width ratios of not greater than 2-1/2:1. 4. Where control joints occur in surface of construction directly behind plaster. 5. Where plasterwork areas change dimensions, to delineate rectangular-shaped areas (panels) and to relieve the stress that occurs at the corner formed by the dimension change. 3.6 PLASTER APPLICATION A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926. 1. Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m) from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces when measured by a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge placed on surface. 2. Finish plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster ground unless otherwise indicated. Where casing bead does not terminate plaster at metal frame, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove finish coat at junctures with metal. 3. Provide plaster surfaces that are ready to receive field-applied finishes indicated. B. Walls; Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: For scratch and brown coats, for three-coat plasterwork with 3/4-inch (19-mm)total thickness. CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 -4 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 C. Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings: Apply coating system, including primers, finish coats, and sealing topcoats, according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Concealed Exterior Plasterwork: Where plaster application is used as a base for adhered finishes, INCLUDE finish coat. 3.7 PLASTER REPAIRS A. Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed. 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work after plastering is complete. Promptly remove plaster from door frames, windows, and other surfaces not indicated to be plastered. Repair floors, walls, and other surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during plastering. END OF SECTION 092400 CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 -5 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 SECTION 09 30 00-TILING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Tile floor, walls and base. 2. Tile backing panels at walls. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified. B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in its "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile." 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For grout, and accessories involving color selection. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Make samples at least 36 inches (900 mm) square, but not fewer than four tiles. Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed Work. 2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory. TILING 093000 - 1 (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and. that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. 2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages. B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided. D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type, color or finish from single source or producer. 1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area. B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from single source or producer. 1. Obtain setting and grouting materials, except for unmodified Portland cement and aggregate, from single manufacturer. TILING 093000-2 (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise indicated. 2. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction, ANSI A137.1: Not less than 0.42. B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified. C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back-or edge-mounted tile assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance. 2.3 TILE PRODUCTS A. Porcelain Tile- Refer to Drawings. 1. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Mounting: Factory, back mounted. 3. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable. a. External Corners for Thinset Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, same size as adjoining flat tile. b. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners. For coved base and cap use angle pieces designed to fit with stretcher shapes. B. Manufacturers: American Tile; Dal-Tile, or equal by American Olean; a division of Dal-Tile Corporation, or Crossville, Inc. 2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C 1325, Type A, in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 2. SETTING MATERIALS AND GROUT B. Dry-Set Mortar (Thin Set Floors): Bostik "Tile-Mate 710/760" with "Hydroment 425 Multi- (01"`N` Purpose Acrylic Additive," complying with ANSI A 118.1 and ANSI A 108.5 installation specifications. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide equivalent products by C- TILING 093000-3 (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 Cure, Mapei , Laticrete International, or Texas Cement Products will be acceptable as (1.1) approved. C. Organic Tile Adhesive (Thin Set Walls): Bostik "Hydroment Ultra-Premium Ceramic Tile Mastic," complying with ANSI A 136.1, Type I. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide equivalent products by C-Cure, Mapei, Laticrete International, or Texas Cement Products will be acceptable as approved. D. Grout: Prepackaged standard unsanded Portland cement grout designed for joints 1/8 inch or narrower, conforming with ANSI A118.6 Color as selected by Architect. 1. Manufacturers: Laticrete International, Inc.; Bostik Construction Products; C-Cure Corporation. 2.5 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers'written instructions. B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions. C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Metal Edge Strips(Corner Guards): Bull-nose type profile. Material and Finish stainless steel Schluter No.E100EB. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Blanke Corporation. b. Ceramic Tool Company,Inc. c. Schluter Systems L.P. (Basis of design RONDEC). PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. TILING 093000-4 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Cliw\ Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified. b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding. 3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed: 4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer. B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot (1:50)toward drains. C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. 3.3 TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. 1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: a. Tile floors in wet areas. B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. D. Where available, provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges. TILING 093000-5 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 1 E. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting-bed thickness so that tiles are flush. F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area.Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. 1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work. 2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints. 3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated. G. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths: 1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). 2. Quarry Tile: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). 3. Pressed Floor Tile: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). 4. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). 5. Porcelain Tile: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). H. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them. 3.4 TILE BACKING PANEL INSTALLATION A. Install panels and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. Use latex-portland cement mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written instructions. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. TILING 093000 -6 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No.3—2/16/2017 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed. C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces. 3.7 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor: 1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA F113; tinset mortar. a. Thinset Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. b. Grout: As specified. B. Interior Wall Installations, Metal Studs or Furring: 1. Ceramic Tile Installation : TCNA W244C; organic adhesive on cement board. a. Grout: As specified. END OF SECTION 09 30 00 TILING 093000 -7 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 (°11 \. SECTION 095100-ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK OF THIS SECTION: A. Work includes furnishing and installing acoustical ceilings, suspension systems, and related work. 1.3 RELATED WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS: A. Coordinate work of this Section with work of other Sections as required to properly execute the Work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of other Sections. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product specified. rb", C. Coordination drawings for reflected ceiling plans drawn accurately to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Show the following: 1. Ceiling suspension system members. 2. Method of attaching suspension system hangers to building structure. 3. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures; air outlets and inlets; speakers; sprinklers; and special moldings at walls, column penetrations, and other junctures of acoustical ceilings with adjoining construction. D. Samples for verification of each type of exposed finish required, prepared on samples of size indicated below. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. 1. 6-inch-square samples of each acoustical unit type, pattern, and color. 2. Full-size samples of each acoustical unit type, pattern, and color. 3. Set of 12-inch-long samples of exposed suspension system members, including moldings, for each color and system type required. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS: A. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. B. Product test reports from a qualified independent testing agency that are based on its testing of current products for compliance of acoustical ceilings and components with requirements. C. Research reports or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that show compliance of acoustical ceilings and components with the building code in effect for the Project. ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEMS 095100- 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE. A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed acoustical ceilings similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service performance. B. Single-Source Responsibility for Ceiling Units: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling unit from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. C. Single-Source Responsibility for Suspension System: Obtain each type of suspension system from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. 1. Obtain both acoustical units and suspension system from the same manufacturer. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical units and suspension system components to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical units, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. "`*1 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS JJ A. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in spaces is completed and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are being maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical units and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system components (if any), and partition assemblies(if any). 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 1.0 percent of amount installed. 2. Exposed Suspension System Components: Furnish quantity of each exposed component equal to 1.0 percent of amount installed. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SUSPENSION SYSTEM MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS: (47 A. Provide metal suspension systems of type, structural classification and finish indicated which comply with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements. ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEMS 095100-2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 B. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated. For exposed suspension members and accessories with painted finish, provide color indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. C. Size attachment devices for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung. D. Provide concrete inserts formed from hot-dipped galvanized sheet steel and designed for attachment to concrete forms and for embedment in concrete,with holes or loops for attachment at hanger wires. 2.2 EXPOSED GRID SYSTEM: A. Exposed Grid System: Shall match existing; complying with ASTM C 635 intermediate-duty requirements. 2.3 ACOUSTIC UNIT MATERIALS: A. Provide units of configuration indicated which are prepared for mounting method designated and which comply with ASTM E 1264 requirements, including those indicated by reference to type, pattern, acoustic ratings, light reflectance coefficient(LR), edge detail, and joint detail (if any). 1. Mounting Method for Measuring Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): Type E-400 (plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from the test surface) per ASTM E 795. C.6N B. Acoustic units are specified below by manufacturer and design to establish standards of appearance and performance. Equivalent products of other manufacturers may be incorporated into the work if accepted by the Architect. C. Provide lay-in acoustic panels to match existing units. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage, and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordination: Furnish layouts for cast-in-place anchors, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose installation is specified in other Sections. 1. Furnish cast-in-place anchors and similar devices to other trades for installation well in advance of time needed for coordinating other work. B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at ,/� opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with \ layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEMS 095100-3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with publications referenced below per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's"Ceiling Systems Handbook." 1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension System Installations: Comply with ASTM C 636. B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Splay hangers only where required and, if permitted with fire-resistance-rated ceilings, to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 4. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. 5. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure; that are appropriate for substrate; and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 6. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both structure to which hangers are attached and type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 7. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or drilled-in anchors that extend through forms into concrete. 8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 10. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; and provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends of each member. C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or post-installed anchors. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm)from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet(3 mm in 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system runners ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEMS 095100 -4 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 (111..\ and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings. 2. Paint cut panel edges remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this . purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. 3. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire-resistance- rated assembly. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner may engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality- control testing. B. Extent and Testing Frequency: Testing will take place in successive stages in areas described below. Proceed with installation of acoustical panel ceilings only after test results for previously installed hangers comply with requirements. 1. Extent of Each Test Area: When installation of ceiling suspension systems on each floor has reached 20 percent completion but no panels have been installed. 2. Within each test area, testing agency will select one of every 10 powder-actuated fasteners and postinstalled anchors used to attach hangers to concrete and will test them for 200 lbf(890 N)of tension; it will also select one of every two postinstalled anchors used to attach bracing wires to concrete and will test them for 440 lbf(1957 N)of tension. 3. When testing discovers fasteners and anchors that do not comply with requirements, testing agency will test those anchors not previously tested until 20 consecutively pass and then will resume initial testing frequency. C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Remove and replace those fasteners and anchors that test results indicate do not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional Testing: Where fasteners and anchors are removed and replaced, additional testing will be performed to determine compliance with specified requirements. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 095100 ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEMS 095100-5 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 SECTION 096500- RESILIENT FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Vinyl composition tile (VCT). 2. Resilient wall base and accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Cb.'\ B. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of resilient floor tile required. 1. Resilient Wall Base and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long, of each resilient product color and pattern required. C. Maintenance Data: For resilient products to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products identical to those tested for fire- exposure behavior per test method indicated by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). Store tiles on flat surfaces. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS RESILIENT FLOORING 096500 - 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C), in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C)or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C). C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation. D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation. E. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. VCT Tile Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed below: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by (.1") one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Congoleum Corporation. c. Mannington Mills, Inc. B. Resilient Base and Accessories Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; a division of Burke Industries Inc. 2. Johnsonite; a Tarkett company. 3. Roppe Corporation, USA. 2.2 COLORS AND PATTERNS A. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect unless indicated on the Drawings. 2.3 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE A. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, class and pattern as required by vct scheduled on the Drawings. B. Wearing Surface: Smooth /411) C. Manufacturer and types and patterns as indicated on the Drawings. RESILIENT FLOORING 096500 -2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 (1"*\\ 2.4 RESILIENT BASE A. Type (Material Requirement): TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset). B. Group (Manufacturing Method): I (solid). C. Style: Cove (with top-set toe) with tile, and straight base without cove at carpeted areas. D. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). E. Height: 4-1/2". F. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches (1219 mm) long or coils in manufacturer's standard length. G. Outside Corners: Premolded. H. Inside Corners: Premolded. I. Surface: Smooth. J. Colors: As selected by Architect unless indicated on the Drawings. 2.5 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. C. Concrete slab primer, non-staining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION RESILIENT FLOORING 096500 - 3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 3. Moisture Testing: a. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed.with installation only after substrates pass testing. C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. E. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 TILE INSTALLATION A. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1. Lay tiles in pattern of colors and sizes indicated. B. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds, and nosings. C. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. D. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. E. Install tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of tile installed (41111 RESILIENT FLOORING 096500 -4 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 on covers. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. F. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 3.4 RESILIENT WALL BASE INSTALLATION A. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. B. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. C. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. D. Do not stretch wall base during installation. E. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. F. Premolded Corners: Install premolded corners before installing straight pieces. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer. B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1. Apply protective floor polish to horizontal surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes if recommended in writing by manufacturer. a. Use commercially available product acceptable to manufacturer. b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance service. 2. Cover products installed on horizontal surfaces with undyed, untreated building paper until Substantial Completion. 3. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over surfaces. Place hardboard or plywood panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. RESILIENT FLOORING 096500 - 5 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 END OF SECTION 096500 RESILIENT FLOORING 096500 - 6 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 SECTION 096813-TILE CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes modular carpet tile. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. 2. Include manufacturer's written installation recommendations for each type of substrate. (11.1h\ B. Shop Drawings: For carpet tile installation, plans showing the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles. 2. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. 3. Type of subfloor. 4. Type of installation. 5. Pattern of installation. 6. Pattern type, location, and direction. 7. Pile direction. 8. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 9. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 10. Transition details to other flooring materials. C. Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples. D. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 [INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. TILE CARPETING 096813- 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 B. Product Test Reports: For carpet tile, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. t) C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. (8.3 sq. m). 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockups at locations and in sizes shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard." 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard" for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period. C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. TILE CARPETING 096813-2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install carpet tiles before installing these items. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. More than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, and runs. b. Dimensional instability. c. Excess static discharge. d. Loss of tuft-bind strength. e. Loss of face fiber. f. Delamination. • 3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET TILE A. Refer to Drawings for Carpet Tile. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile, and are recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. B. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. TILE CARPETING 096813- 3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 C. Concrete Slabs: Verify that finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and that surfaces are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. 1. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq. ft. (18.6 sq. m), and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas. a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours. b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement. c. Perform additional moisture tests recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet tile manufacturers. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standards" and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. C. Concrete Substrates: Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet tile manufacturers. D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard," Section 18, "Modular Carpet" and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. C. Maintain dye-lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area. D. Maintain pile-direction patterns recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. E. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. TILE CARPETING 096813 -4 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 (.11"..\ F. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on carpet tile as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. H. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1. Remove excess adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard," Section 20, "Protecting Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. (1151 , END OF SECTION 09 68 13 TILE CARPETING 096813-5 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 (Sr.\ SECTION 099113 -EXTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates. 1. Concrete masonry units (CMU). 2. Steel. 3. Galvanized metal. 4. Aluminum(not anodized or otherwise coated). 5. Stainless-steel flashing. 6. Exterior portland cement plaster(stucco). (11111h.' 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a matte flat finish. B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a high-side sheen flat, velvet-like finish. C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, an eggshell finish. D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a satin-like finish. E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a semi-gloss finish. F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a gloss finish. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product. EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. VOC content. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Coating Maintenance Manual: Provide coating maintenance manual including area summary with fmish schedule, area detail designating location where each product/color/finish was used, product data pages, material safety data sheets, care and cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, and color samples of each color and finish used. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 5 percent,but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L) of each material and color applied. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m). b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 -2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Handling: Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed containers, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking,protecting, and installing. Packaging shall bear the manufacture's label with the following information: 1. Product name and type(description). 2. Batch date. 3. Color number. 4. VOC content. 5. Environmental handling requirements. 6. Surface preparation requirements. - 7. Application instructions. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7-deg C). 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F(10 and 35 deg C). B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. C. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. I. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Sherwin-Williams Company products indicated or comparable product from one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore&Co. EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 -3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 2. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. "Ewa't 3. Pratt&Lambert. B. Source Limitations: Obtain paint materials from single source from single listed manufacturer. 1. Manufacturer's designations listed on a separate color schedule are for color reference only and do not indicate prior approval. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer,based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. B. VOC Content: Provide materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Colors: Match Architect's samples. 1. '""46) 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed,and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 -4 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. Where acceptability of substrate conditions is in question, apply samples and perform in-situ testing to verify compatibility, adhesion, and film integrity of new paint application. 1. Report, in writing, conditions that may affect application, appearance, or performance of paint. B. Substrate Conditions: 1. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: a. Masonry(Clay and CMU): 12 percent. b. Portland Cement Plaster: 12 percent. 2. Portland Cement Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured. 3. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected; application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer,but not less than the following: 1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 -5 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning." 4. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal." F. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces. G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. H. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation,paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only. 3. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door frames. 4. Paint entire exposed surface of window frames and sashes. 5. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification,performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 6. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint the following work where exposed to view: a. Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 -6 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 (ION d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. (11.16\ B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Portland Cement Plaster(Stucco): 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Latex, exterior,matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex,exterior,matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, flat, (Gloss Level 1): S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Flat, A6 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.2 mils dry,per coat. B. CMU Substrates: 1. Latex System: EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 -7 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 a. Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior: S-W PrepRite Block Filler, B25W25, at 75 to 125 sq. ft. per gal (1.8 to 3.1 sq. m per 1). b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior,matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low-sheen, (Gloss Level 3-4): S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Low Sheen,Al2 Series,at 4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry,per coat. C. Ferrous Metal, Galvanized-Metal,and Aluminum Substrates: 1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System: a. Prime Coat (except where shop primed): Primer, water-based, anti-corrosive for metal: S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series, 5.0 to 10.0 mils wet,2.0 to 4.0 mils dry. b. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, gloss, (Gloss Level 6): S- W Pro Industrial Acrylic Gloss Coating, B66-600 Series, at 2.5 to 4.0 mils dry,per coat. END OF SECTION 099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 8 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 CI'N‘; SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates. 1. Galvanized metal. 2. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated). 3. Gypsum board. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a matte flat finish. (1.°111' B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a high-side sheen flat, velvet-like finish. C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, an eggshell finish. D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a satin-like finish. E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a semi-gloss finish. F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523, a gloss finish. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Coating Maintenance Manual: Provide coating maintenance manual including area summary with finish schedule, area detail designating location where each product/color/finish was used, product data pages, material safety data sheets, care and cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, and color samples of each color and finish used. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS (411) A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. (3.8 L)of each material and color applied. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq.ft. (9 sq. m). b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations /4.1) in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Handling: Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed containers, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. Packaging shall bear the manufacturer's label with the following information: 1. Product name and type (description). 2. Batch date. 3. Color number. 4. VOC content. 5. Environmental handling requirements. 6. Surface preparation requirements. 7. Application instructions. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. ,e411) INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 -2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C). B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C)above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. C. Lead Paint: It is not expected that lead paint will be encountered in the Work. 1. If suspected lead paint is encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Sherwin-Williams Company products indicated or comparable product from one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 3. Pratt& Lambert. B. Source Limitations: Obtain paint materials from single source from single listed manufacturer. 1. Manufacturer's designations listed on a separate color schedule are for color reference only and do not indicate prior approval. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. B. Low-Emitting Materials: Interior paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." C. Colors: Match Architect's samples. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 -3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 1. Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. Where acceptability of substrate conditions is in question, apply samples and perform in-situ testing to verify compatibility, adhesion, and film integrity of new paint application. 1. Report, in writing, conditions that may affect application, appearance, or performance of paint. B. Substrate Conditions: 1. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: a. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 2. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. C. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected; application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 -4 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Concrete Floors: Remove oil, dust, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials. Comply with SSPC-SP-13/NACE 6 or ICRI 03732. E. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces. F. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. G. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint the following work where exposed in equipment rooms: a. Equipment, including panelboards and switch gear. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 -5 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. h. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. 2. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces: a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. h. Other items as directed by Architect. 3. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 -6 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 (1111.1 A. Metal Substrates (Aluminum, Steel, Galvanized Steel): 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, rust-inhibitive, water based: S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series, at 5.0 to 10 mils wet, 2.0 to 4.0 mils dry. b. Intermediate Coat:Water-based acrylic, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Water-based acrylic, semi-gloss, (Gloss Level 5) : S-W Pro Industrial Acrylic Semi-Gloss Coating, B66-650 Series, at 2.5 to 4.0 mils dry, per coat. B. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, interior: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Primer, B28W2600, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, eggshell[, (Gloss Level 3): S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Eg-Shel, B20-2600 Series, at 4.0 mils wet, 1.7 mils dry, per coat. END OF SECTION 099123 (11111.1 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 -7 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No. 3 —2/16/2017 SECTION 09 93 23.15 — SEALED CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes furnishing and installing sealer to all areas indicated to receive sealed concrete finish. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Coordinate work of this Section with work of other Sections as required to properly execute the Work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of other Sections. 1.4 DESIGN/PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Performance Requirements: Provide a uniform application of water repellent sealer over areas indicated that prevents water absorption into the treated substrate and does not deteriorate in excess of limitations published by the manufacturer. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data for each stained finish system component required. Include application instructions applicable to Project conditions. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer: Arrange for work of this Section to be applied by an applicator specializing in water concrete staining work for at least 3 years, with a minimum of 3 successful installations similar to work required for Project. B. Products: Provide primary products, including each type of concrete stain and sealer produced by a single manufacturer,which has produced that type product successfully for not less than 3 years. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Schedule concrete sealing near the end of construction when construction operation will permit sealing without damage or deterioration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER AND PRODUCT A. Sealer: SEALED CONCRETE 099323.15- 1 (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) TOM REID LIBRARY.ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Addendum No. 3 —2/16/2017 (4") 1. Sealer: Clear, odorless, water-based, 0.0 VOC, penetrating "silconate" water- repellent sealer/hardener treatment for concrete, formulated to provide chemical hardened and densified surface that will not yellow, discolor, chip, peel, or show unsightly wear patterns with use. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide L. M. Scofield "Cementone" clear sealer, Houston, TX, (Tel) 800-800-9900, or equivalent by H & C Concrete Coatings, Cleveland, OH (Tel) 800-867-8246, or ProSoCo "Consolideck LS". PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Confirm that substrate is clean, dry, and free of substances that might interfere with penetration/adhesion of sealers. B. Test for moisture content in accordance with sealer manufacturer's instruction, to ensure that surface is sufficiently dry. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect adjoining work, including drywall, paint, cabinets, base, aluminum frames, wood doors, and similar work, from spillage or blowover of stains and sealers. B. Clean sealers from adjoining surfaces immediately after spillage. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning. ,14") C. Restore contaminated surfaces to new condition or replace contaminated assembly, at no additional cost to Owner,whichever, in the opinion of the Architect, is necessary to restore the work to new condition. 3.3 CONCRETE SEALER SYSTEM APPLICATION A. Apply materials in accordance with material manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations, using materials and procedures, including number of coats. 3.4 PROTECTION A. After completion and curing of sealed finish, cover completed floor stain with Kraft paper or other suitable protection so the completed floors will be without damage or deterioration at time of final acceptance. END OF SECTION 09 93 25.15 (4111) SEALED CONCRETE 099323.15-2 (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 SECTION 102113.16 -TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK OF THIS SECTION A. This Section includes toilet partitions and screens. 1.3 RELATED WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS A. Coordinate work of this Section with work of other Sections as required to properly execute the Work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of other Sections. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. (/1/*N, B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories. 2. Show locations of reinforcements for compartment-mounted grab bars. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of unit indicated. D. Samples for Verification: Of each type of color and finish required for units, prepared on 6- inch- (150-mm-) square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements in CID-A-A-60003, "Partitions, Toilets, Complete." 1. 6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating toilet compartments without field measurements. Coordinate wall, floor, ceilings, and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113.16-1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE UNITS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Accurate Partitions Corporation. 2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 3. Global Steel Products Corp. 4. Metpar Corp. 5. Sanymetal; a Crane Plumbing Company. 6. Weis-Robart Partitions, Inc. B. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, HGS, 0.048-inch (1.2-mm) nominal thickness. 1. Color and Pattern: One color and pattern in each room as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns. Refer to Drawings for plastic laminate selection. C. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Plastic-laminate facing sheets are pressure laminated to core material without splices or joints in facings or cores. Laminate is applied to edges before broad surfaces to seal edges and prevent laminate from being pried loose. Exposed core material is sealed at cutouts to protect core from moisture. 1. Core Material: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 particleboard with 45-lb (20.4-kg) density. 2. Doors and Panels: Finished to not less than 1 inch (25 mm) thick. 3. Pilasters: Provide construction to comply with one of the following: a. Finished to not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) thick and with internal, 0.1196-inch- (3.0-mm-)thick steel-sheet reinforcement. b. Finished to 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) thick and with manufacturer's standard core of corrosion-resistant steel sheet laminated to both sides of honeycomb of resin- impregnated kraft paper in lieu of particleboard core. c. Finished to not less than 1 inch (25 mm) thick and with internal, 0.1196-inch- (3.0- mm-) thick steel-sheet reinforcement. D. Pilaster Shoes and Caps: Stainless steel, ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304, not less than 0.0312 inch (0.8 mm) specified thickness and 3 inches (75 mm) high, finished to match hardware. E. Brackets (Fittings): 1. Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets, chrome-plated, nonferrous, cast zinc alloy (zamac) or clear anodized aluminum. 2.2 ACCESSORIES TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113.16-2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories. 1. Material: Chrome-plated, nonferrous, cast zinc alloy (zamac) or clear anodized aluminum. B. Support Posts for Urinal Screens: Manufacturer's standard aluminum post with floor shoe for anchoring to floor construction. C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip galvanized or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Floor-Anchored Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies complete with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural connection to floor. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage. B. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- (813-mm-) wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. 1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees. 2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. 3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. 4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors. 5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. 1. Maximum Clearances: TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113.16-3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 1 a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch (13 mm). b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with not less than three brackets attached at midpoint and near top and bottom of panel. a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. B. Floor-Anchored Units: Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 2 inches (50 mm) into structural floor, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Level, plumb, and tighten pilasters. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are level with tops of pilasters when doors are in closed position. C. Wall-Hung Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb and to resist lateral impact. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out- swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position. / END OF SECTION 102113.16 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113.16-4 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 SECTION 102800-TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Public-use washroom accessories. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonryas required to prevent delaying the Work. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. 2. Include anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. 2. Identify accessories using designations indicated. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's special warranty. TOILET ACCESSORIES 102800- 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Mirrors: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace mirrors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include,but are not limited to,visible silver spoilage defects. 2. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS A. Source Limitations: Obtain public-use washroom accessories from single source from single manufacturer. B. Manufacturers: Provide products by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, or equal by American Specialties, Inc. C. Refer to Drawings for toilet accessory items. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch (0.8-mm) minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated. B. Brass: ASTM B 19, flat products; ASTM B 16/B 16M, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings. C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036- inch(0.9-mm) minimum nominal thickness. D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M,with G60 (Z180)hot-dip zinc coating. E. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and- theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. G. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service). H. Mirrors:ASTM C 1503,Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors,nominal 6.0 mm thick. TOILET ACCESSORIES 102800 -2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 (1.1b\ 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested according to ASTM F 446. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. (111111 B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 102800 TOILET ACCESSORIES 102800-3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 SECTION 105200—FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK OF THIS SECTION: A. Work shall include furnishing and installing fire extinguishers,cabinets,and accessories. 1.3 RELATED WORK OF OTHERSECTIONS: A. Coordinate work of this Section with work of other Sections as required to properly execute the Work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of other Sections. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers." B. Provide new portable fire extinguishers which comply with applicable UL standard and are labeled by UL. C. Provide portable fire extinguishers and cabinets by one manufacturer, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. 1.5 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for all fire extinguishers and cabinets required. For fire extinguisher cabinets include roughing-in dimensions, and details showing mounting methods, relationships to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type and materials, trim style and door construction, style, and materials.Where color selection is required include color charts showing full range of manufacturer's standard colors and designs available. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS: A. Provide fire extinguishers for each location indicated on the Drawings, in colors and finishes selected from manufacturer's standard which comply with requirements of governing authorities. Fill and service extinguishers to comply with requirements of governing authorities and manufacturer's requirements. Abbreviations indicated below to identify extinguisher types relate to UL classification and ratings system and not, necessarily, to type and amount of extinguishing material contained in extinguisher. B. Provide fire extinguisher types as follows: 1. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 3-A:40-B:C, 5-lb (2.3-kg) nominal capacity,with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container. FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 105200-1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS: A. Provide fire extinguisher cabinets where indicated. Provide sizes required for housing specified fire extinguishers, and as follows: 1. Manufacturer's standard 18 gage enameled steel trimless recessed box and recessed solid door. 2. Provide black vinyl die-cut letters indicating"FIRE EXTINGUISHER". PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Install items included in this Section in locations indicated on Drawings, and at heights complying with applicable regulations of governing authorities. 1. Securely fasten cabinet to substrate construction, square and plumb, to comply with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 105200 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 105200-2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 11 1°^ EQUIPMENT TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 (111111b\ SECTION 115116-BOOK DEPOSITORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to work specified in this Section. 1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF WORK OF THIS SECTION: A. Work includes furnishing and installing the book depository. 1.3 RELATED WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS: A. Coordinate work of this Section with work of other Sections as required to properly execute the work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of other Sections. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible, to ensure proper fitting of the work. Allow for trimming and fitting wherever the taking of field mea- surements before fabrication might delay the Work. B. Preassemble in the shop to the greatest extent possible. Disassemble only to the extent necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark for reassembly and coordinated installation. 1.5 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit shop drawings for fabrication and installation of depository. Show all anchorage and accessory items and finishes. Provide location template drawings as required. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENT: A. Provide book depository as manufactured by Kingsley Library Equipment Co., Model No. "Ease Through Wall Book Return", 22-1/2" wide by 20-1/2" high by 14-1/8" deep; or The JMC Group; or equivalent accepted by Architect. 1. Provide depository assembly complete for installation in finished wall as indicated with stainless steel face plate, aluminum interior parts. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. Install depository rigidly anchored, straight, plumb, and level. B. Set door frame square and flush with finish walls. C. Protection, Cleaning, and Final Adjustments: 1. Protect unit during delivery, storage, and after erection so that there will be no indication of use or BOOK DEPOSITORIES 115116 - 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 damage at the time of acceptance. Replace damaged work as directed. 2. Perform all final adjustments just prior to final inspection. END OF SECTION 11058 BOOK DEPOSITORIES 115116 - 2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 12 FURNISHING5 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 SECTION 123640-STONE COUNTERTOPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes stone countertops. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Show locations and details of joints. 2. Show direction of veining, grain, or other directional pattern. B. Samples for Verification: 1. For each stone type indicated, in sets of Samples not less than 12 inches (300 mm) square. Include two or more Samples in each set and show the full range of variations in appearance characteristics expected in completed Work. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For stone countertops to include in maintenance manuals. Include product data for stone-care products used or recommended by Installer, and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of construction to receive stone countertops by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. PART2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GRANITE A. Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 615. r"‘ B. Varieties: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: STONE COUNTERTOPS 123640- 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 1. Venetian Gold granite. C. Cut stone from contiguous, matched slabs in which natural markings occur. D. Finish: Polished on all exposed surfaces and edges. 2.2 ADHESIVES, GROUT, SEALANTS, AND STONE ACCESSORIES A. General: Use only adhesives formulated for stone and ceramic tile and that are recommended by their manufacturer for the application indicated. B. Stone Adhesive: Two-part epoxy adhesive, formulated specifically for bonding stone to stone, with an initial set time of not more than two hours at 70 deg F (21 deg C). 1. Color: Clear. C. Sealant for Countertops: Manufacturer's standard sealant of characteristics indicated below that complies with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and will not stain the stone it is applied to. 1. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealant: Mildew resistant, single component, nonsag, neutral curing, silicone. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. D. Stone Cleaner: Specifically formulated for stone types, finishes, and applications indicated, as recommended by stone producer. Do not use cleaning compounds containing acids, caustics, harsh fillers, or abrasives. 2.3 STONE FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Select stone for intended use to prevent fabricated units from containing cracks, seams, and starts that could impair structural integrity or function. B. Grade and mark stone for final locations to produce assembled countertop units with an overall uniform appearance. C. Fabricate stone countertops in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements indicated. 1. For granite, comply with recommendations in NBGQA's "Specifications for Architectural Granite." 2. Clean sawed backs of stones to remove rust stains and iron particles. 3. Dress joints straight and at right angle to face unless otherwise indicated. 4. Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stone for anchors, supports, and attachments. 5. Provide openings, reveals, and similar features as needed to accommodate adjacent work. 6. Fabricate molded edges with machines having abrasive shaping wheels made to reverse contour of edge profile to produce uniform shape throughout entire length of edge and with precisely formed arris slightly eased to prevent snipping, and matched at joints between units. Form corners of molded edges as indicated with outside corners slightly eased unless otherwise indicated. STONE COUNTERTOPS 123640-2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 7. Finish exposed faces of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish of each stone type required and to match approved Samples. Provide matching finish on exposed edges of countertops, splashes, and cutouts. D. Carefully inspect finished stone units at fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units. 2.4 STONE COUNTERTOPS A. General: Comply with recommendations in MIA's "Dimension Stone - Design Manual VI." B. Nominal Thickness: Provide thickness indicated. Gage backs to provide units of identical thickness. C. Edge Detail: As indicated. D. Splashes: Provide 3/4-inch- (20-mm-) thick backsplashes and end splashes unless otherwise indicated. 1. Height:As indicated. 2. Top-Edge Detail: As indicated. E. Joints: Fabricate countertops without joints if possible. (1.11111 F. Joints: Fabricate countertops in sections for joining in field, with joints at locations indicated and as follows: 1. Bonded Joints: 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) or less in width. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to receive stone countertops and conditions under which stone countertops will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of stone countertops. B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of stone countertops. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Before installing stone countertops, clean dirty or stained stone surfaces by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives. Allow stone to dry before installing. STONE COUNTERTOPS 123640 -3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm), 1/4 inch (6 mm) maximum. B. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than one-fourth of nominal joint width. C. Variation in Plane at Joints (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/64-inch (0.4-mm) difference between planes of adjacent units. D. Variation in Line of Edge at Joints (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/64-inch (0.4-mm) difference between edges of adjacent units, where edge line continues across joint. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF COUNTERTOPS A. General: Install countertops over plywood subtops with full spread of water-cleanable epoxy adhesive. B. Do not cut stone in field unless otherwise indicated. If stone countertops or splashes require additional fabrication not specified to be performed at Project site, return to fabrication shop for adjustment. C. Do necessary field cutting as stone is set. Use power saws with diamond blades to cut stone. Cut lines straight, true, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping. D. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated. Shim and adjust stone to locations indicated, with uniform joints of widths indicated and with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances E. Bond joints with stone adhesive and draw tight as countertops are set. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. F. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to prevent damage while cutting. Use power saws with diamond blades to cut stone. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping. G. Install backsplashes and end splashes by adhering to wall with water-cleanable epoxy adhesive and to countertops with stone adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. H. Apply sealant to joints and gaps specified for filling with sealant; comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." Remove temporary shims before applying sealant. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean countertops as work progresses. Remove adhesive, grout, mortar, and sealant smears immediately. B. Remove and replace stone countertops of the following description: STONE COUNTERTOPS 123640 -4 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION & RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 1. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect. 2. Defective countertops. 3. Defective joints, including misaligned joints. 4. Interior stone countertops and joints not matching approved Samples and mockups. 5. Interior stone countertops not complying with other requirements indicated. C. Replace in a manner that results in stone countertops matching approved Samples and mockups, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement. D. Clean stone countertops no fewer than six days after completion of sealant installation, using clean water and soft rags. Do not use wire brushes, acid-type cleaning agents, cleaning compounds with caustic or harsh fillers, or other materials or methods that could damage stone. E. Sealer Application: Apply stone sealer to comply with stone producer's and sealer manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 123640 (1111.1'' STONE COUNTERTOPS 123640-5 CITY OF PEARLAND PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. The contractor shall furnish and install a complete microprocessor based access control system as specified herein. The system shall include, but not be limited to, all control equipment, power supplies, power circuits, electronic door locks, signal initiating and signaling devices, conduit, wire,fittings, and all other accessories required to provide a complete and operable system. 1.2 WORK INCLUDES A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, apply to this Section. B. Provide all equipment, materials, labor, software, licensing, supervision, and services necessary for or incidental to the installation of a card reader operated door access control system, as shown or indicated on the drawings and as specified. C. This access control system shall provide for controlled entry doors to be released when a valid proximity card is presented to the proximity card reader located adjacent to the door. This system shall monitor for unauthorized entry attempts, control access to the building, and log entry information. The system shall in no way impede free emergency exit from the building. Exit from the building shall not require special effort or knowledge. D. In shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to obtain all required approvals and certifications from authorities having jurisdiction. E. It shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to provide and install all conduit systems, stadard electrical boxes, and operating power for the building access systems as outlined on the project drawings. This Contractor shall coordinate all system requirements with and provide special back boxes to the Electrical Contractor prior to installation of conduit. F. The electrical contractor shall provide 120-volt power as required to the security system through separate dedicated branch circuits, maximum 20 amperes each. Each such circuit shall be labeled at the power distribution panel as ACCESS CONTROL. The location of all circuit breakers serving the system shall be posted in the control unit cabinets. Each cabinet shall be grounded securely to the building grounding system. G. Provide all testing, documentation, training, and warranty service as outlined in these specifications. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 26 - Provisions of conduit for communication, security&safety Systems.—General Contractor will be responsible to provide& install required conduits for communication, security&safety systems as it pertains to the card reader. B. Section 27 - Data Cabling. General Contractor will be responsible to provide & install required data cabling as it pertains to the card reader. 281300—Access Control (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) CITY OF PEARLAND 1.4 CODES AND REGULATIONS A. Perform all work in strict accordance with the requirements and recommendations stated in the codes and standards except when requirements are exceeded by the contract documents. B. The equipment, materials, and installation shall confirm to the latest version of all applicable codes, standards and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction including the following: 1. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. 2. NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code. 3.Americans with Disabilities Act. 4. Texas Accessibility Standards. 5. International Building Codes (IBC). 6. Local and State Building Codes. 7. All requirements of the local Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal procedures B. Submit a complete submittal package within 30 calendar days after award of this work for approval. Equipment is not to be ordered without approval. Partial submittals are not acceptable for review. Each submittal shall include a dated transmittal. C. Submittal may be electronically transmitted in PDF file format(preferred) or paper copies may be provided in quantities indicated in Division 1. Paper copies shall be organized including index tabs in a 3-ring black binder of sufficient size. D. Quality Assurance Submittal: 1. Letter from manufacturer stating that the Contractor is an Authorized Factory Distributor for the area where the project is located. 2. The Contractor and Manufacturer shall supply sufficient information to indicate that the proposed system is based on the latest hardware, software technology available. 3. Current copy of the Contractors Electronic Access Control Device Security Company license issued by the Texas Department of Public Safety Private Security Board. 4. Calculations for device circuit current drop and battery backup calculations. E. Product Data Submittal including special boxes, cable, and other material as requested by the Architect including: 1.A cover sheet with the name and location of the project, the name, address, and telephone number of the Contractor, and the name, address, and telephone number of the submitting sub-contractor. Include on or after the cover sheet sufficient space for review stamps. 2.An indication of any deviations from Contract Document requirements, including variations and limitations. Show any revisions to equipment layout required by use of selected equipment. 3.A product data index and complete equipment list including for each product submitted for approval the manufactures name and part number, including options and selections. 4. Cut-sheets or catalog data illustrating the physical appearance, size, function, compatibility, standards compliance, and other relevant characteristics of each product on the equipment list. Indicate by prominent notation (an arrow, circle, or other means)on each sheet the exact product and options being submitted. 5. Submit design data, when the scope of work requires, including calculations, schematics, risers, sequences, or other data. 281300—Access Control (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) CITY OF PEARLAND 6. Any resubmittal shall include a complete revised equipment list and any product data that is revised. F. Submit shop drawings locating all components of the system, indicating circuit routing, cable type, and gauge. Shop or coordination drawings shall include information that will allow to the Contractor to coordinate interdisciplinary work and when necessary guide the manufacturer or fabricator in producing the product. Shop or coordination drawings shall be specifically prepared to illustrate the submitted portion of work, this may require diagrams, schedules, details, and accurate to scale equipment and device layouts prepared using a CAD or BIM engineering drawing program. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS OF A PROPOSED CONTRACTOR A. Proposed contractors who do not currently possess the necessary qualifications, trained and experienced personnel, financial capacity, and meet the other requirements herein described will be disqualified. B.The Contractor shall be currently licensed under the Texas Department of Public Safety Private Security Board as an Electronic Access Control Service Installer Company to sell, install, and service private security systems. C.The proposed contractor, as a business entity, shall be an authorized distributor and designated representative of the security panel manufacturer, with full warranty privileges, and shall have been actively engaged in the business of selling, installing, and servicing commercial building alarm systems for a period of at least 5 years. D. Recently formed companies are acceptable only if specific pre-approval is requested, and granted by the Architect/Engineer, based on experience of key personnel, current and completed projects, and all licensing requirements are met 10 working days prior to the contract proposal date. E. All employees working on the project must be registered alarm system installers. The Contractor shall employ factory trained technicians capable of supporting the maintenance of the system. No contract employees are allowed unless they have been to the factory service school within the last 18 months. A certificate of this training shall be provided with the Contractors submittal. F.The contractor shall employ full time local technicians and installers. The manufacturer shall Maintain a full time factory employed service staff for product support and service. G. The proposed Contractor shall have an office within 100-miles of the job site, staffed with trained technicians who are qualified and licensed to supervise the installation, to be responsible that the system is installed as submitted, to conduct system start up and perform a 100 percent operational audit of all installed devices, to instruct the Owners representatives in the proper operation of the system, and to provide service throughout the warranty period.The contractor shall be capable of dispatching technicians to repair a system within six hours of a service request. H. The proposed contractor shall be fully experienced in the design and installation of the type of security system herein specified, and shall furnish with the contract proposal an itemized list of the installations of the type specified herein. The list shall include the name of the project, date of completion, the amount of the contract, the name, and telephone number of a qualified person to contact for reference I. The Contractor shall employ factory-trained technicians capable of supporting the maintenance of the system. No contract employees are allowed unless they have been to the factory service (11111.*N school within the last 12 months. A certificate of this training shall be provided with the contractors' 281300—Access Control (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) CITY OF PEARLAND Submittal. J. The Proposed Contractor shall not have any grievances or complaints of record regarding workmanship, code compliance, or service response. A Proposed Contractor that has any prior finding(s) of a code or license violation, or has any litigation in process concerning the installation of a communication system is unacceptable. K.The ability of a proposed Contractor to obtain plans and provide a performance bond shall not be regarded as the sole qualification of the Contractors' competency and responsibility to meet the requirements and obligations of the contract. L.The Builder shall be satisfied that a proposed Contractor meets all the requirements expressed herein before including the Contractor's proposal in the project. M. The Owner may investigate, as they deem necessary to determine the ability of the proposed Contractor to perform the work.The proposed Contractor shall furnish to the Owner with any information or data requested for this purpose. N. The Owner reserves the right to reject any contract proposal if the evidence submitted, or their investigation, fails to indicate that the Contractor is qualified to fulfill of any part of the contract or to complete the work contemplated therein. O. The Owner reserves the right to reject the proposal of any Contractor who has previously failed to perform properly, or complete on time, contracts of a similar nature. 1.7 PRE-APPROVAL A. Proposed Contractors wishing to propose systems which differ in manufacturer, features, functions, or operating characteristics other than those outlined in these specifications must do so in writing to the specifying authority at least ten (10) days prior to the proposal opening. B. For manufacturers equipment or models other than that specified, the Proposed Contractor shall supply proof that such substitute equipment equals or exceeds the features, functions, performance, and quality of the specified equipment. Proposals must include detailed information showing all deviations from the system as specified. C. Proposed Contractors that do not obtain prior approval will not be considered an acceptable supplier for this project. Final approval of the alternate system shall be based on the decision of the Owner and Architect. Prior approval to make a proposal for this project does not automatically insure the system will be an acceptable equivalent. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. The system shall be fully compatible and integrated expansion of the existing City Wide Open Options Inc. software platform incorporating Mercury Security Systems Access hardware. Provide complete and satisfactorily operating Access Control System as described herein, using materials and equipment of types, sizes, ratings, and performances as indicated. Use materials and equipment that comply with referenced standards and manufacturers' standard design and construction, in accordance with published product information. Coordinate the features of all 281300—Access Control (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) CITY OF PEARLAND materials and equipment so they form a functional system, with components and interconnections matched for optimum performance of specified functions. C. The system and all components shall be tested and found suitable for the specified purpose as part of a commercial building security system by a nationally recognized approvals agency acceptable to the AHJ. D.The control units, power supplies, batteries, subassemblies, software,firmware, and all cable, devices control units, power supplies, batteries, subassemblies, software, firmware, cable, and all accessories provided shall be listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.for commercial security system use under the latest appropriate testing standard. E.All date keeping hardware, firmware, and software provided shall be fully compliant with the calendar year designated in four-digit date format. Any time equations must function normally, leap year, and daylight savings time must be supported. F. Only equipment devices have been shown on the contract drawings. Specific wiring between equipment has not been shown. G. The system shall include but not be limited to all control units, power supplies, batteries, subassemblies, card sensors, software, firmware, and all cable, door release equipment, and all accessories required to provide a complete operating system. H. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with manufacturers' recommendations and the requirements of the components UL listing. Consult the manufacturer's Cift.\ installation manuals for all wiring diagrams, schematics, electrical requirements, cable types, and physical equipment sizes, etc., before beginning system installation. Refer to the manufacturers' riser/connection diagrams for all specific system installation/termination/wiring data. I.All equipment and components shall be new, and the manufacturer's current model. All like devices shall be of the same manufacturer and model number. J.All equipment shall be attached to walls and ceiling/floor assemblies and shall be held firmly in place (e.g., detectors shall not be supported solely by suspended ceilings). Fasteners and supports shall be adequate to support the required load. 2.2 RELATED WORK- NETWORK CONNECTIVITY A. The system shall be utilizing the customer's existing Ethernet system backbone for all security devices communications. B. No Ethernet cabling, network RJ-45 jacks, or patch cords are included in the scope of this Specification Section. C. The Owner will provide this Contractor with a terminated network drop at security devices, and the required TCP/IP configuration settings: static IP address, domain, gateway, and subnet mask. D. This contractor will program and test all access control system devices for connection to the network. E. This contractor will provide complete programming of all device parameters in accordance with the Owners requirements. Clulb\ 281300—Access Control (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) CITY OF PEARLAND 2.3 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURES A.All references to manufacturer's model numbers and other pertinent information herein are intended to establish minimum standards of performance, function, and quality. With approval, equivalent, compatible, UL listed equipment from other manufacturers may be substituted for the specified equipment as long as all requirements are met. B. The system herein specified is an expansion of the existing City Wide Open Options Inc. Carrolton, Texas software platform incorporating Mercury Security Systems Access hardware, fully licensed solution, and this shall constitute the functionality, quality, compatibility, and performance of the system to be furnished, no exceptions. Any other proposed suppliers systems must be preapproved. 2.4 BUILDING ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM SOFTWARE A. The building access control system software suite, hereafter"System", system shall utilize Open Options software designed to secure facilities, people, and assets across multiple offices, buildings, or locations from any web browser. The total system expansion capacities shall include up to 500,000 individual credential identities, 50 concurrent web client connections for system operators, 2,048 card readers, 5,060 alarm input points, 5,060 relay output points, and shall store an on-line event history log of up to 150,000,000 events. B. The System shall provide a highly resilient, scalable software platform and enable seamless integration with IT and physical security including an OpenLDAP directory based credential database, Microsoft Active Directory Services user access authorization, operator activity logging, and auto-logout. The System shall support future implementation of additional survivability/ redundancy options including replication, IAM and SIEM integration, or hot standby/auto fail-over C. The System shall allow Administrators to configure how each alarm and event is announced by priority in the Alarm Monitor window with their associated event type and trigger source. Events may be conditionally configured to automatically send email message notifications, shunt/un-shunt doors, or activate mass denial of credentials ("lock down"). D. The System shall feature a web-based user interface and provide for identity management, digital video integration, and event and alarm monitoring that can incorporate graphical maps and floor plans. E. The System shall include an embedded calendar and be configurable to allow credential holders access to particular secure areas by access group, reader location,and day/time schedule. The System shall support up to 255 schedules, each with up to 10 intervals and 8 holiday types. Individual credential holders may be assigned to up to 16 access groups out of 255 possible access groups. F. The System shall support role-based reporting from the event database which may incorporate configurable parameters including door groups, door forced filters, alarm masking, door held open pre-alarm, extended cardholder strike times by credential holder and reader location, and custom device mapping/local alarm group assignments. G. Administrators shall have the ability to assign local alarm groups a unique group of alarm attributes for specific device-alarm combinations that will override the global settings for specific events including forced door, off schedule, or invalid credential presented. Input Control Module relay input or output events may be assigned options by location, including; J 281300—Access Control (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) CITY OF PEARLAND (1.1111'\ debounce time (a delay to prevent the natural reverberation of an electrical contact from being registered as a separate event), end of line resistance, normally open, normally closed, supervised, unsupervised, hold time, alarm masking, and whether to log all change of state events or only when the event is not masked. I. Output Control Module relay input or output events may be assigned options by location, including whether the System shall consider the output an active component of the on-line system, relay output mode, pulse time, and active by schedule. J. The System shall support input/output/event linkage whereby an input/output/event in an enterprise Intelligent Field Controller can trigger an action within the same enterprise Intelligent Field Controller.All linkage decisions shall be made local to the Intelligent Enterprise controller. Administrators shall be able to create macros linked to events and including up to 30 actions, each consisting of a sequence of actions to be performed, such as changing card reader modes and activating outputs. 2.5 BUILDING ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM DATABASE SERVER A. Utilize the existing city wide system and IP networking connection, provide additional licensing as required for this expansion. 2.6 ACCESS SYSTEM INTELLIGENT CONTROLLER/CARD READER INTERFACE A. Provide as required Open Options model SSP-D2 Intelligent Controllers with a built-in reader interface module allowing control of two doors off the board and a total of 64 using additional reader and/or 10 modules. B. Provide as required Open Options model RSC-2 Dual Reader Sub-controllers which provide the interface between door devices and the SSP Series Intelligent Controllers, each shall support two readers for two completely separate doors and also include additional inputs and outputs beyond the requirements for a typical door configuration allowing for system expansion. 2.7 PROXIMITY CARD READERS A. Controlled access door location as indicated on plans shall be provided with an entry card reader to allow access to authorized individuals as scheduled. Readers shall a weatherproof design capable of operation in indoor or outdoor environments with a temperature range of-31 to 150° F and a relative humidity range of 5 to 95%. B. Each proximity card reader shall mount on a standard single-gang electrical wall box, mullion, or on the surface of an interior or exterior wall and feature a read range of 6 to 9 inches. The electronics shall be potted with UL Listed potting compound to protect the reader from harsh environmental conditions. C. Outdoor weatherproof back boxes shall be flush mounted and connected to a '/z"threaded rigid pipe conduit and sealed. The reader casing shall be grounded to prevent electrostatic discharge from interfering with the operation of the reader. D. Threaded conduit is required for outdoor applications and dielectric grease shall be used to coat field connections. E. Provide low profile proximity card readers, black in color, designed for standard wall mount or (11110`,, narrow mullion mount as required. Standard size readers shall mount on a standard single-gang 281300—Access Control (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) CITY OF PEARLAND electrical wall box, weatherproof for outdoor installations. Standard size reader to be 3.0"x 4.7"x 0.68". Narrow mullion mount size reader to be 1.7"x 6.0"x 1.0 F. Manufacturer/Model: 1. For all wall mount locations provide HID multiclass SE RP 40 readers standard single gang proximity card readers with mounting plate and gasket for outdoor installations. 2. For all mullion mount locations provide HID multiclass SE RP 15 readers narrow mullion mount prox- imity card readers with mullion mounting plate and gasket for outdoor installations. 3. For all outdoor gate reader locations provide HID multiclass SE RP 40 readers with mounting plate and gasket for outdoor installation. 2.8 DOOR CONTROLLER MODULES A.The following Mercury Security Corporation open platform controllers shall be configured to automatically receive policy and schedule updates for all identities and hardware configurations as distributed by the Open Options software platform.The controllers shall ensure security is enforced at the controlled doors -even when upstream network communications are temporally interrupted. B. All system programming shall be maintained in non-volatile memory such that program information is maintained even if all external AC and battery power is removed. C. Provide as required Power-over-Ethernet and/or RS-485 serial interface controllers and door modules that include a door/reader interface module all in one unit and support standard reader technologies, including Wiegand, clock and data, magnetic stripe, keypads, LCD and biometrics. D. Each module shall be housed in a wall enclosure and connected, internally or adjacently, to a 12 VDC battery backed up power supply. E. Intelligent door controllers (Network Controllers)—EP series control modules shall include an Ethernet port for communication with the Physical Access Control System Enterprise Appliance (EPACS) server network and an RS-485 serial output interface for communication with a group of door reader interface sub-modules. 1. One Door PoE Capable Controller, expandable to host a total of Seventeen doors, with data network Ethernet communications port, requires 12 VDC input or may be PoE IEEE 802.3af powered - 150mA maximum. RS-485 serial output control port for MR series interface modules and includes two onboard reader ports (for a single opening), two tamper inputs, and two outputs. Shall be Open Options/Mercury Security model EP1501. 2. Two Door Controller, expandable to host a total of Sixty-Four doors, with data network Ethernet communications port, requires 12 VDC input-500mA maximum. RS-485 serial output control port for MR series interface modules and includes two onboard reader ports, eight tamper and power monitor inputs, and four outputs. Shall be Open Options/Mercury Security model EP1502. 3. Controller to host up to Sixty-Four doors, with data network Ethernet communications port, requires 12 VDC input- 300mA maximum. RS-485 serial output control port for MR series interface modules, but does not include any onboard reader ports, inputs, or outputs. Shall be Open Options/Mercury Security model EP2500 intelligent controller. F. Door reader interface sub-modules (Interface Modules)- MR series interface modules shall include card reader ports, input monitor points, and control relay outputs. The following door controllers shall be auto-addressable, directly managed by an assigned Mercury Security EP series intelligent host controller, and shall be capable of elaborate processes and procedures 281300—Access Control (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) CITY OF PEARLAND without host intervention, provide as follows: 1. One Door Ethernet interface controller, requires 12 VDC input or may be PoE IEEE 802.3af capable-300mA maximum, includes two onboard reader ports (for a single opening), four inputs, and two outputs. Shall be Open Options/Mercury Security model MR51 E. 2. One Door RS-485 serial interface controller, requires 12 VDC input- 150mA maximum, includes one onboard reader port, two inputs, and two outputs. Shall be Open Options/Mercury Security model MR50. 3. Two Door RS-485 serial interface controller, requires 12 VDC input-450mA maximum, includes two onboard reader ports, eight inputs, and six outputs. Shall be Open Options/ Mercury Security model MR52. G. Input Modules: 1. Open Options/Mercury Security model MR16IN EP series RS-485 serial interface multidevice panel providing the ability to monitor high concentrations of system auxiliary inputs. Each shall be capable of supporting 16 general purpose input circuits which can be individually set for normally-open or normally-closed operations and can be declared supervised and non-supervised. Individually configurable parameters can be set for sensitivity ranges, timing parameters, and end-of-line resistance values. H. Output Modules: 1. Open Options/Mercury Security model MRI6OUT EP series RS-485 serial interface multidevice panel providing the ability to control high concentrations of system auxiliary outputs. Each shall provide 16 general purpose outputs as Form C relay contacts, each with individually configurable parameters, which may be set for timing and for fail-safe vs.fail secure modes. Each relay output can be configured to control outboard devices and can be activated by the condition of selected system devices locally or regionally without host intervention. 2.9 MODULE ENCLOSURES AND POWER SUPPLY/BATTERY BACKUPS A. Provide as required to house all modules, enclosures that shall be 19 gauge high grade steel with textured black finish enclosures for indoor use, suitable for surface wall mounting, and shall include battery backup power supplies where required. Each enclosure shall include a removable back plate for module mounting, a keyed lock, and tamper switch. Access power enclosures shall include a single AC power connection (for power supply), a pre-wired LSP power section. Each tamper switch shall be wired to a module input circuit for monitoring by the System. B. Provide UL 294 listed power limited source, filtered and electronically regulated 12 VDC output power supplies with short circuit/thermal overload protection, and automatic switch over to standby battery backup when AC fails. Each power supply shall include a built-in charger and sealed type battery. C. Power supply/chargers and batteries shall operating and emergency power to the system. Provide sufficient battery capacity for operation without AC power for all control modules, card readers, and electric unlocking/locking devices for a minimum of 4-hours (design calculations required). Include a 20% safety factor in battery calculations to ensure adequate performance for the service life of batteries. D. Enclosures and power supplies shall be LifeSafety Power Inc., FlexPower, MCLASS Mercury series, Unity/Altronix. 281300—Access Control (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) CITY OF PEARLAND I. Power Controller Modules (Lock Controller Modules), multiple modules can be daisy chained from an expandable FPO series power supply to provide additional outputs that are relay controlled by the System with fault detection and reporting to host power supply. Each input may be programmed to respond to: normally open dry contact transition, normally closed dry contact transition, application of voltage between 9 and 33VDC, or removal of voltage between 9 and 33VDC. Each output circuit output may be programmed for the following modes: voltage output from power supply one, voltage output from power supply two, fail-safe, fail-secure, normally open dry contact, normally closed dry contact, or fire alarm over ride for egress lock: 1. C4P, Power Controller Module with.4 inputs/4 Class II (Power Limited) 12VDC controlled outputs (2.5A each output). 2. C8P, Power Controller Module with 8 inputs/8 Class II (Power Limited) 12VDC controlled outputs (2.5A each output). J. Batteries: Provide an up to 12Ah size sealed maintenance free battery per power supply/charger sized as required. 2.10 LOCAL ALERT SOUNDER A. Specifically identified individual controlled door locations as indicated on plans shall include a local alert sounder to indicate a propped open or held open too long alert. Provide at these locations adjacent to the door and affixed to a standard single gang electrical box concealed above the finished ceiling B. Provide an Edwards Signaling model 15 series, low voltage Miniature Lungen Buzzer with adjustable volume, chrome cover, and zinc plated base. Mount buzzer concealed above the ceiling, immediately above the related door. 2.11 DOOR SWITCHES (ACCESS SYSTEM DOOR CONTACTS) A. Provide door switches where indicated on floor plans with conduit run to a nearby, accessible, junction box located above ceiling. B. Door frame flush mount: Provide recessed magnetic contact door switch - GE UTC 1078-M switch to support access control system with wire leads as required or equivalent. C. Doors surface mount, heavy duty armored: Provide magnetic contact door switches -Sentrol, Inc. 2500 series as required or equivalent. 2.12 DOOR RELEASE HARDWARE A. Install all wiring and control devices necessary to enable limited access to the indicated points of entry. Each controlled access door shall be fitted with a door switch (above), control relay, and an electric latch or strike. Each controlled door shall be setup to allow entry as permitted by the building access system, to prevent unauthorized entry, and to allow free exit from the building without special knowledge or effort. Magnetic force holding or'mag' locks are prohibited by this specification. B. NOTE: All electric door locks shall be configured for fail-safe un-delayed free egress operation and fail-secure to prevent unauthorized entry on loss of power. C. Verify 281300—Access Control (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) CITY OF PEARLAND D. Only when the door hardware does not include an integrated Request-to-Exit Switch, provide a request-to-exit sensor when required (see below). 2.13 REQUEST-TO-EXIT SWITCH OR SENSOR A. The system shall not be programmed to unlock a door automatically from a request to exit signal, as this presents a security breach. The request to exit signal shall be used only to indicate a normal exit status, as opposed to a forced entry. Exit shall be made with the normal door hardware and shall not be impeded or assisted by the electronic system. Exit shall not be affected if the power is off and the battery backup exhausted. When no request-to-exit switch is provided integrated into the door hardware (see above), provide at the exit side of each controlled door a request-to-exit passive infrared detector with x-y targeting and digital signal pro B. Request-to-Exit Switch Manufacturer/Model: Von Duprin/Sargent option request-to-exit switch or equivalent. E. Request-to-Exit Sensor Manufacturer/Model: Provide Kantech T.Rex model T.REX-LT or Bosch Security Systems DS150i series, PIR request-to-exit detectors, or equivalent. 2.14 CABLING A.All wiring shall be NEC type CM low voltage cable. B. All exterior cabling shall be in threaded rigid metallic conduit. All connectors must be fastened, tied, and crimped for maximum reliability. C.Avoid if at all possible junctions or splicing -all junctions in cable shall be made by proper splicing techniques in a junction box. D. All cabling is to be concealed where construction permits. E. This contractor shall provide and install new and unused ASTM bare stranded copper conductor wire per ANSI/NEMA codes. Follow the manufacturer's instructions. All wire shall recommended by the manufacturer for the application. F.All cable shall have a machine printed label located within 2"from every terminal block and within 6"from all other connections utilizing self-laminating flexible vinyl film labels. G.Wire gauge shall be selected per circuit based on cable length and current requirements based upon manufacture requiremetns LOW VOLTAGE CABLE TYPES Device Conductors Min. AWG Description RS-485 Serial Interface* 1-Pair Twisted 24 Overall Shield Point Contact/Relay 1 Pair-twisted 18 Overall Shield Card Reader(TTL)6-Wire 18 Overall Shield Low Voltage Power Combined 2-Pair Twisted 18 Unshielded Composite cable preferred at Card Reader locations to accommodate reader, door contact, rex, and (1111°11.\ Electronic door lock power 281300—Access Control (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) CITY OF PEARLAND Tappan, Commscope, Belden approved cabling manufacturues 2.15 Electronic door locking hardware and power supplies A. The access control c contractor will provide the door power supplies for the new electronic latch retraction, electric strike, mortise, and conventional exit devices. Reference the door hardware spec- ifications for any information regarding the power supplies or door hardware. The electrical contractor will be responsible for connection power to these power supplies B. The access control contractor will provide all Electronic door locking hardware including installation unless otherwise noted by the City of Pearland. C. The access control contractor will wire/connect the power supply to both the provided power source, to the EPT transfer hinge (if applicable-refer to the door hardware specs for pathways for all door locations) and to the door hardware for a complete circuit. The EPT or armored loop will be provided and installed by the door hardware contractor. Coordinate all installation wiring with the hardware contractor. D. Contractor will review the door hardware specifications to ensure there are no support issues with the door power supplies and the access control system. Report any conflicts to the Architect immediately. E. Acceptable manufactures 1. Schlage (SC), Sargent(SA), Vonduprin (VO), Folders Adam (FO), HESS (HS); as directed by City '.-"') of Pearland for each building. a. Electromechanical Mortise locks - Sargent Manufacturing (SA)-8200 Series.Schlage (SC)- L9000 Series b. Conventional Push Rail Exit devices-Sargent Manufacturing (SA)-80 Series.Schlage (VD- Vonduprin 35a/98/99 QEL series c. Security RIM Strike-Sargent Manufacturing (SA)-90 Series (FO)-Foldger Adams-310 Series d. Electric strikes- HES 2.16 CABLE TIES A. HALAR Fluoropolymer cable ties shall be furnished and installed to attach wire bundles to supports and for appropriate wire management as required. 1. HALAR wire tie, 4.0", miniature - Panduit PLT1 M-C702 or equivalent. 2. HALAR wire tie, 7.4", standard - Panduit PLT2S-C702 or equivalent. 3. HALAR wire tie, 11.6", standard - Panduit PLT3S-C702 or equivalent. 2.17 SURGE AND AMPERAGE PROTECTION A. Electrical surge protection shall be provided for all service entrance connections and on each copper pair that connects one building to another(i.e. any other portion of a building complex not under one continuous roof) at both exit points to prevent damage to equipment. 281300-Access Control (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) CITY OF PEARLAND B. System circuit surge protectors shall be mounted in a standard grounded metallic electric box. Shall be Ditek, 12345-A Starky Road, Largo, Florida 34643 model numbers as follow, multiple pair units are available, or equivalent: 1. Part No. DTK-1 LVLP-X 2 wire protector for 12 Volt circuits. 2. Part No. DTK-1 LVLP-D 2 wire protector for 5 Volt circuits. 3. Part No. DTK-Z8LVLP-GP 8-pair protector for RS-485 serial circuits. All electrical surge protection handled by Electrical contractor 2.18 CABLE ROUTING, INSTALLATION, AND SUPPORT A. System wiring and equipment installation shall be in accordance with good engineering practices as established by the NFPA. Wiring shall meet all state and local electrical code requirements. B. Cable pathways, conduit, and cable support systems shall be complete with bushings, de-burred, cleaned, and secure prior to installation of cable. C. Before energizing the system check all cables for correct connections and test for short circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation. D. In all exposed areas such as gymnasiums, shops,field houses,janitors' closets, or mechanical/ electrical rooms all access system cable shall be fully enclosed in conduit. E. Ring and String: For low voltage Class 2 devices, indoor use in non-corrosive environments, in non-fire rated fishable walls only„ ring and string open cable placement may be utilized with a metal bracket/mounting plate with wing attachments in the drywall opening, provide in wall cable management where cable passes through metal studs and top plates, and a pull wire in lieu of an electrical back box and conduit stub. Mounting plate brackets shall be Caddy MP1 S single gang or MP2S two gang for attachment to wall studs, and for cut-in Caddy MPLS single gang or MPLS2 two gang, no exceptions. Plastic or flimsy thin metal brackets are not acceptable. F. In wall cable management for open cables may include, but shall not be limited to: 1.Arlington Industries SB series non-metallic stud bushings and 440#plastic snap-in bushings. 2. Caddy ESG series easy snap grommets. 3. Carlon Plenum-Gard plenum rated lightweight corrugated conduit. 4. Panduit MSG and CSM series cable stud managers and grommets. G. Access system cables shall be run in conduit stubs from wall boxes to accessible areas above finished ceilings. Conduit shall be required only within walls and concealed spaces to provide access. Provide bushings to protect the cable from damage for conduit ends, box openings, and passage through metal studs. H.Access system cables shall be run in bundles above accessible ceilings and supported from building structure by j-hooks, conduit or cable tray. Cabling shall be loosely bundled with cable ties randomly spaced at 30 to 48 inches on center, cable ties shall not be tight enough to deform cabling and shall not be used to support the cabling. I. Do not attach any supports to joist bridging or other lightweight members.The support system shall provide a protective pathway to eliminate stress that could damage the cabling. J. Mount all equipment firmly in place such that vibration or jarring will not interfere with system rbbN operation. Route cable in a professional, neat, and orderly installation. 281300—Access Control (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) CITY OF PEARLAND K.The cable shall not be crushed, deformed, skinned, crimped, twisted, or formed into tight radius bends that could compromise the integrity of the cabling. L.Access system cable must not be fastened to electrical conduits, mechanical ductwork/piping, sprinkler pipes, or routed to obstruct access to hatches, doors, utility access panels, or service work areas. Do not route cables through fire doors, ventilation shafts, grates, or parallel for more than four-feet with line voltage electrical conductors. Access system cables shall not be run loose on ceiling grid or ceiling tiles. M. Support shall be provided by mounting appropriate fasteners that may be loaded with multiple cables. If the weight load is carried by the support rod or wire, the support assembly may attach to the ceiling grid for lateral stabilization. The required support wires for the ceiling grid or light fixtures shall not be utilized. Any fastener attached to the ceiling grid shall not interfere with inserting or removing ceiling tiles. The cable pathway of supports must be positioned at least 12 inches above the ceiling grid. N.All cable shall have a label on both ends utilizing self-laminating, flexible vinyl film, non-smear, machine printed labels. O. Each cable run shall include a three-foot service loop with wire tie located in the ceiling above the control unit panel. This is to allow for future re-termination or repair. P. Provide for adequate ventilation to all equipment housings and take precautions to prevent electromagnetic or electrostatic hum. Q.All conduit, ducts, track, and raceways shall be supported from the structure at industry standard intervals for the size specified, utilizing proper anchoring devices. Cable fill may not exceed the manufacturers' instructions for each type of support. R.All conduit, duct, track, and raceway runs shall be spaced apart to allow for maintenance, such as the installation of couplings, without disturbing adjacent pathways. S. Each cable run shall be free of splices. No terminations, splices, or equipment will be installed in or above ceilings. T.All cabling will be placed with regard to the environment, EMI/RFI interference, and its effect on communication signal transmission. U. Do not route any communication cable within two feet of any light fixture, HVAC unit, service access area, electric panel, or any device containing a motor or transformer. V.Access system cable will not be installed in the same conduit, duct, or track with line voltage electrical cable. W. Maximum cable pulling tension should not exceed 25 pounds force (110 N)or the manufactures recommendation, whichever is less. X.Any pulling compounds utilized must be approved by the cable manufacturer and shall not degrade the strength or electrical characteristics of the cable. 2.19 TERMINATION PRACTICES 281300—Access Control (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) CITY OF PEARLAND (1.1116'\, A. Strip back only as much cable jacket as required to terminate. B. Do not"loop" over wiring terminals, the cable could come loose and the condition not be detected as an open circuit or disconnected device. C. Preserve wire twists as closely as possible to point of termination (0.5" maximum)to keep signal impairment to a minimum. D. Avoid twisting cable jacket during installation. 2.20 BUSHINGS A. Provide a plastic snap in bushing at each box opening, passage through a metal stud, and at the end of all open conduit stubs or sleeves prior to cable installation to protect the cabling from damage: 1. Box openings-Thomas & Betts Knockout Bushing Series 3210, or equivalent. 2. Metal stud passage-Thomas & Betts Twist It Bushing Catalog Number SB1216-SC, or equivalent. 3. Conduit ends-Thomas& Betts Anti-Short Bushing Series 390 or Tite-Bite Combination Coupling Series 442, or equivalent. 2.21 CEILING MOUNTED DEVICE BOX HANGERS A. All ceiling mounted devices including: smoke detectors, heat detectors, remote power/status LEDs, ceiling mounted strobes and horn/strobes, et cetera, when mounted in a drop ceiling shall be supported by an electrical box hanger(Caddy#512 or#512A for deep boxes -24"span), or equivalent. Box hangers shall be attached to the ceiling grid only for lateral stabilization, separate support wires shall be provided. The required support wires for the ceiling grid or light fixtures shall not be utilized. The backbox shall be flush and level with the bottom of the ceiling tile and the hole neatly cut for a finished appearance when the device is installed. B. Device and box hanger assemblies shall not be supported solely by suspended ceilings. Fasteners and supports shall be adequate to support the required load. 2.22 J-HOOKS A.Attachments for cabling support shall be spaced at approximately 48 to 60 inches on center. Each cable bundle shall be routed with enough slack to prevent damage to cables but not allowed to sag more than 12 inches mid-span between attachments.Attachments shall be sized as follows: Single cables or bundles up to four cables may be supported directly by the building structure. Bundles up to 1/2" dia. (Ten 1/4" cables)2" bridle ring, Caddy#4BRT32 or equivalent Bundles up to 3/4" dia. (Sixteen 1/4"cables) 3/4"J-Hook, Caddy#CAT12 or equivalent Bundles up to 1-5/16"dia. (Fifty 1/4"cables) 1-5/16"J-Hook, Caddy#CAT21 or equivalent Bundles up to 2"dia. (Eighty 1/4" cables)2"J-Hook, Caddy#CAT32 or equivalent Split bundles greater than 2"dia. or provide cable tray. B. Do not mix different signal strength cables on the same J-Hook (i.e. access system with telephone/data cable). Multiple J-Hooks can be placed on the same attachment point, up to the rated weight load of the attachment device. 2.23 FIRE STOPPING, DRAFT/NOISE STOPPING, PENETRATIONS, AND CORING (111.6' A. UL Listed fire stopping methods that match the fire rating of the wall or floor being penetrated are 281300—Access Control (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) CITY OF PEARLAND to be used at all fire barrier penetrations. Seal the interior of the conduit sleeve around the cables and around the outside of the sleeve on each side of the penetration with fire-stop caulk or putty, install according to the manufacturers' instructions. B.All penetrations through fire rated walls or floors shall feature a suitable length of metal conduit. Hole diameter shall not exceed %" larger than the conduit or sleeve to be installed. The hole shall be neatly cut, not oversize or irregular. Do not share wall/floor penetrations with ductwork, piping, line voltage electrical conduits, etc. C. All gypsum board or plaster penetrations shall tool cut using an appropriate hole saw/mandrel or manufactured assembly. D. Draft/Noise Stopping -All penetrations through non-rated walls shall include draft/noise stopping to minimize the transfer of air and sound between enclosed areas. This shall include but not limited to: 1. Neatly cutting all non-rated wall penetrations with a 1" maximum clearance. All gypsum board or plaster penetrations shall be tool cut using an appropriate hole saw/mandrel or manufactured assembly. The hole shall be neatly cut and not oversize or irregular. Do not share wall penetrations with other types of ductwork, piping, line voltage electrical conduits, communications cabling, etc. 2. Provide and install non-combustible mineral wool, fiberglass, cellulose insulation, caulk, and/or sealant as required. Seal the interior of conduit sleeves around the cables and around the outside of the sleeve on each side of the penetration with caulk or putty, install materials according to the manufacturers' instructions. E.The Contractor shall make every effort to coordinate with the building Architect, Engineer, Builder, and Electrical Contractor to have sleeves placed in new construction so that later coring or drilling of building structural members will not be required. The Contractor must consult with the building Architect, Engineer, and Builder prior to drilling, coring, or sawing of any wall, floor, etc. All penetrations shall be made at approved, appropriate, locations. F. Upon approval, the Contractor shall be required to supply all labor, equipment, tools, and materials to create any additional penetrations, and shall provide the sleeve, temporary and final fire stopping. Special care shall be taken not to stress, overheat, or penetrate any building support member. Coring shall be made with equipment appropriate for the dry penetration of concrete and block materials. Under no circumstances shall penetrations be made utilizing a chisel or percussion type equipment. Concrete, block, or plaster cores shall be made by dry saw methods only. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Scheduled automatic door unlocking/locking of specific entry doors shall be programmed to require verification before being enacted. A card from a select group at the local facility (including the principal/vice principals, etc. as requested) must be presented at the facility within a two-hour period prior to the scheduled unlocking event. This is to prevent the entrance doors from be unlocked when no one is present to supervise the students, such as due to a snow day or other unsched- uled occurrence. If a scheduled unlocking event is delayed, and a card from the select group is presented within two hours after the unlocking event was scheduled, the unlocking shall be enacted immediately. 281300—Access Control (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) CITY OF PEARLAND (BUILDING ACCESS SYSTEM A. This access control system shall provide for controlled access through entry doors and into restricted areas when a valid proximity card is presented to the proximity card reader located adjacent to the door, only if the users' group access rights and time schedules allow for access. This system shall monitor for unauthorized entry attempts, control access to the building, and log entry information. The system shall in no way impede free emergency exit from the building. Exit from the building shall not require special effort or knowledge. Controlled door locks shall fail secure from outside entry on loss of power and backup power. B. The scheduling of unlocking/locking exterior doors and closing/opening gates for normal operating hours and after hours events should be the responsibility of each facility. Scheduled automatic door unlocking/locking of specific entry doors shall be programmed to require daily verification before being enacted. A card from a select group at the local facility(including the principal/vice principals, etc. as requested) must be presented at the facility within a two-hour period prior to the scheduled unlocking event. This is to prevent the entrance doors from be unlocked when no one is present to supervise the building, such as due to a snow day or other unscheduled occurrence. If a scheduled unlocking event is delayed, and a card from the select group is presented within two hours after the unlocking event was scheduled, the unlocking shall event be enacted immediately. C. The system shall provide the capability for individual controlled door locations as noted on plans to include a local sounder. Unless otherwise required, the local sounder shall annunciate when a door is held open, left ajar, or propped open for over one minute. If the door remains held open for over three minutes, a system Door Held Open Alarm alert shall pop-up and generate an entry in the log file for later review, the alert shall be automatically silenced and cleared once the door is closed. D. Door Forced and/or Door Held Open alarms shall have the capacity to be locally annunciated via Auxiliary Output relays on the individual controllers. This annunciation shall be controlled as follows. A direct one-to-one relationship shall be able to be programmed between the Door Forced and/or Door Held Open alarm and the auxiliary output.When either condition exists, the auxiliary output is energized.When either condition is cleared, the auxiliary output is de-energized. E. The system shall provide the capability for individual controlled door locations as noted on plans to include a local sounder. The local sounder shall annunciate when a door is held open, left ajar, or propped open for over one minute. If the door remains held open for over three minutes, a system Door Held Open Alarm alert shall pop-up and generate an entry in the log file for later review, the alert shall be automatically silenced and cleared once the door is closed. F. Controlled doors using a retractable latch strike shall, on a valid card read, activate the output to retract the door latch and immediately allow the exit door to be entered by standard pull lever operation; the door may then be opened without retracting the latch bolt.When the door closes, the latch bolt shall ride over the strike lip. The installation shall include dual switch monitoring, the strike shall have two SPDT contacts; one switch shall monitor the tripper, which is depressed when the latch bolt is inserted into the strike pocket. The second switch shall monitor the condition of the strike lip, indicating open or closed and locked conditions. G. Controlled doors with frame or mullion retractable strike, on a valid card read, activate the output to retract the door strike and immediately allow the exit door to be entered by standard pull lever operation; the door may then be opened without retracting the latch bolt.When the door closes 281300—Access Control (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) CITY OF PEARLAND the beveled latch bolt shall ride over the lip and fall into the electric strike pocket. The installation shall include dual switch monitoring, the strike shall have two SPDT contacts; one switch shall monitor the tripper, which is depressed when the latch bolt is inserted into the strike pocket. The second switch shall monitor the condition of the strike lip, indicating open or closed and locked conditions. H. Controlled doors with a crash bar shall include electric latch retraction and a request-to-exit switch, the access control system shall, on a valid card read, activate the output to retract the latch bolt and immediately allow the door to be entered by standard pull handle operation. I.Where required, the system shall interface with electric door openers utilized for ADA access. This interface shall interconnect to door control interface to mechanically open the door when a valid card is read and the exterior door button is pressed. The exterior button shall also open the door when the door is scheduled to be unlocked without a card read. The interior door open button shall always be functional, allowing full egress, regardless of the status of the access control system; the interior button shall also be interfaced to the request to exit function. J. The request-to-exit switch or sensor shall provide a means for the system to monitor the status of the controlled door and detect a forced entry condition. The request-to-exit signal shall be used only to indicate a normal exit status, as opposed to a forced entry. Exit shall be made with the normal door hardware and shall not be impeded or assisted by the electronic system. Exit shall not be affected if the power is off and the battery backup exhausted. K. The access system door contact switch shall provide a means for the system to monitor the open/closed status of the controlled door and detect if the door is held open or left ajar after a valid card read. L. This system shall allow for normal exit, but also detect door held open too long (propped) and door forced entry conditions. Either situation shall generate a status condition event that is logged and acted upon in accordance with the system programming. M. The system shall have the capability of mapping inputs to outputs in a one-to-one capacity. When the input is triggered, the output turns on.When the input clears, the output turns off. N. Individual door switches shall also have the capability of being monitored for status. When the door is opened, the door switch shall trigger an internal controller timer. That timer will set a fixed uninterruptible time frame for another interlocked output to be turned on. This output is to be energized on any one of the three following situations: 1. A normal situation when there is a legitimate card read and the door is opened. 2.A situation where a key is used to open the door without a legitimate card read. 3.A situation where an ordinary Door Forced event occurs. O. The building access control shall be controlled, accessed, and updated via the web-based Client Software Application via a PC and the facility Ethernet network and by an Internet connection (if the network is configured for access). P. The building security system shall be controlled from its own internal software. Interface to the building access control shall be via hard-wired interface points. Q. All system programming shall be maintained in non-volatile memory such that program information is maintained even if all AC and battery power is removed. The master system database shall reside on the server and shall be constantly updated to all the Access Control System Panels via the Ethernet network connection. In the event the Ethernet network connection goes off line, the 281300—Access Control (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) CITY OF PEARLAND (°111111\, system shall continue to operate in accordance with the latest copy of the master system database until the network connection is restored and the database updated. R. The web-based Client Software Application shall provide for authorized operators password protected access to the functions and operation of system including real time monitoring of status messages, verify and controlling settings and conditions, and for generating reports. S. The web-based Client Software Application Graphical User Interface shall include a real-time system status monitor that graphically depicts all logical devices on dynamic graphical maps with indicator icons to represent input/output points, and logical devices. The interactive maps shall display the state and condition of alarm points and the ability to monitor system status and event logs. T.The web-based Client Software Application software shall allow authorized operators to add and delete users, assign users into and out of various groups, to disable cards reported lost or stolen, and to re-enable recovered cards. Authorized operators shall be able to adjust the operating parameters of the system including group access rights and scheduling. 3.4 SYSTEM SOFTWARE A. Develop, install, and test hardware configurations, software settings, and databases for the complete and proper operation of systems involved. Assign software licensing to the Owner. The Contractor is responsible for the entire programming and setup of the system such that no additional programming is required. Programming shall include the setup of all available features of the software. C. Perform a full system back-up at completion of initial programming and deliver the configuration to the Owner. D. Perform field software changes after the initial programming session to"fine tune"operating parameters and sequence of operations based on any revisions to the Owners' operating requirements. E. The contractor is responsible for providing any additional software license to complete a project. 3.5 TESTING,WARRANTY SERVICE A. A factory trained representative of the manufacturer shall supervise the final connections and testing of the system and it shall be subject to the final acceptance of the Architect/Engineer and Owner. B. This contractor will thoroughly test all components of the systems and devices proposed herein to assure equipment specifications are met. This contractor will start up, test, and debug systems to ensure that all aspects of the system are working, documented, and reporting properly. C. This Contractor shall make a thorough inspection and test of the complete installed security system including all components and controls to ensure the following: 1. Complete and functional system. 2. Installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Verify proper operation and processing of signals. D.The installation will be verified through use of testing procedures designed to test all specific 281300—Access Control (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) CITY OF PEARLAND J functions and requirements of your system under various operating conditions. E. This Contractor shall provide a warranty of the installed system against defects in material or workmanship for a period of one (1)year from the date of substantial completion. Any equipment or wiring shown to be defective shall be replaced, repaired, or adjusted free of charge. All labor and materials shall be provided at no expense to the Owner. All equipment will carry a one-year warranty or manufacturer's warranty whichever is greater. 3.6 DRAWINGS, MANUALS, AND TRAINING A.As-built drawings and operating and maintenance manuals may be electronically transmitted in PDF file format(preferred) or paper copies may be provided in quantities indicated in Division 1. Paper copies shall be organized including index tabs in a 3-ring black binder of sufficient size. B. Upon completion of the installation, and prior to final inspection, the Contractor shall furnish asbuilt drawings. The architect/Engineer must submits CAD background to the contractor to provide engineered drawings per the As-builts. C. In addition, the contractor shall furnish complete operating and maintenance manuals listing the manufacturer's name(s), including technical data sheets. Manuals shall include wiring diagrams to indicate internal wiring for each device and the interconnections between the items of equipment. Provide a clear and concise description of operation that gives, in detail, the information required to properly operate the equipment and system. Provide a parts list with manufacturer and model number for commonly replaced parts. Include complete instructions for the inspection, testing, and maintenance of the system. Include copies of all programming sheets used to configure the system. D. Provide the Owner a copy of the panel control software including the licensed program, site specific data file, and passwords that the Owner may require to maintain the system. Formal on-site training sessions shall be conducted by this Contractor. It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to coordinate time and location of training sessions with the Owner. Provide documented general instruction as follows: 1. Provide instruction to designated personnel on the functions and operation of the building access system including capabilities, limitations, reporting, monitoring, and the meaning of status messages. State the proper procedure for testing, routine maintenance, and request for service. Provide detailed instruction on the operation of the system including group scheduling, adding users, deleting users, and changing passwords. Provide a minimum of two (2) hours—two 2-hour sessions separated by a minimum of two weeks. 3. Provide the maintenance personnel to include the location, inspection, maintenance, testing, and operation of all system components. Provide a minimum of four(4) hours—two 2-hour sessions separated by a minimum of two weeks. END SECTION 1 281300—Access Control (ADDENDUM #3; ISSUED: 2.16.17) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK TOM REID LIBRARY RENOVATION &ADDITION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 SECTION 312300-EARTHWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE WORK OF THIS SECTION: A. Earthwork includes excavation, backfill, rough and finish grading of the Site, and related work. B. Data in subsurface investigation reports was used for the basis of the design and are available to the Contractor for information only. Conditions are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity between soil borings. The Owner and the Architect are not responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this data by Contractor. 1. Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be performed by Contractor, at the Contractor's option; however, no change in the Contract Sum will be authorized for such additional exploration. 2. Where this Section and the project Geotechnical report differ, the Geotechnical Report's recommendations shall be prevail. 1.3 RELATED WORK OF OTHER SECTIONS: A. Coordinate work of this Section with work of other Sections as required to properly execute the Work and as necessary to maintain satisfactory progress of the work of other Sections. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Layout work to the lines and levels required before excavation, and record actual measurements of each footing's horizontal axial location, shaft diameter or plinth dimensions, bottom and top elevations, deviations from specified tolerances, and other data as required. B. Footing design dimensions shown are minimums. The design of the footings is based on the assumed strata bearing capacity. If the indicated depth of footing excavation is reached without developing the required strata bearing capacity, immediately suspend excavation operations and inform the Architect. The Architect will determine the procedures to be followed in each instance. Revisions will be paid for in accordance with the Contract conditions relative to changes in the Work. C. Owner will engage a soil testing and inspection service for quality control testing during earthwork operations as specified in Part 3 of this Section. D. Engage, at Contractor's expense, a soil test and inspection service acceptable to Architect. Test soil materials proposed for use in work and promptly submit test result reports. 1. Provide one optimum moisture-maximum density curve for each type of soil encountered in subgrade and fills under building slabs and foundations and paved areas. Determine maximum densities in accordance with ASTM D 1557 and ASTM D 4254, as applicable. a. Determine suitability of materials to be used as fill. EARTHWORK 312300-1 TOM REID LIBRARY RENOVATION &ADDITION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 2. For borrow materials, perform a mechanical analysis (AASHTO T88), plasticity index (ASTM D 4318 or AASHTO T90), moisture-density curve (AASHTO T180 or ASTM D 1557), and frost susceptibility analysis. 1.5 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit 4 copies of the following test reports directly from testing laboratory to Architect (2), Soils Engineer(1), and Contractor(1): 1. Test reports showing plasticity index and moisture density test relationship on each borrow material. 2. Verification of each footing subgrade. 3. One optimum moisture-maximum density curve for each existing subgrade type of soil en- countered. 1.6 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Locate existing underground utilities in the areas of work by hand excavation. If utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate means of protection during earthwork operations. 1. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult the Owner's representative immediately for directions as to procedure. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner. B. Use of explosives is not permitted. C. Protection of Persons and Property: 1. Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights. Operate warning lights during hours from dusk to dawn each day. 2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining,washout and other hazards created by earthwork. 3. Accidental or Careless Damage to Work to Remain in Place: Restore to a condition as good as or better than existed before work was commenced as accepted by Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.7 UNIT PRICES: A. Include excavation work and other earthwork necessary to produce the work required. B. Payment for changes in earthwork will be made on the actual net volume change of foundation in place and accepted based on design dimensions shown. No additional compensation will be made for excavation, concrete fill, reinforcing, or other costs due to unauthorized over-excavating in any dimension. C. Quote Unit Prices which include full compensation for labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals required for excavation, trimming, shoring, casing as required, dewatering, and other necessary items for complete installation. Provide Unit Prices for the following items, as set forth in the Contract conditions, which will apply in the event additions to or deductions from the Work are required and authorized by a written order from the Architect and approved by Owner to the Contractor. Refer to Section 033000 for concrete, reinforcing steel, and dowel Unit Price requirements. EARTHWORK 312300-2 TOM REID LIBRARY RENOVATION &ADDITION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 1. Soil excavation, per cu.yd. 2. Rock excavation, per cu.yd. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS: A. Select Fill Material: Sandy clay or clayey sand with a Plasticity Index of between 7 and 20, with a minimum Liquid Limit of 40, with less than 50% by weight passing a No. 200 sieve, and free of rock or gravel larger than 2"in any dimension, debris,waste,vegetable, or other deleterious matter. 2.2 DRILLED PIER MATERIALS: A. When required to produce straight,true, undisturbed shafts, provide full-length watertight steel casings of sufficient thickness to withstand compressive displacement and withdrawal stresses and to maintain the shaft walls. Temporary casings may be left in place or may be withdrawn as the concrete is placed, at the Contractor's option. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION: A. Provide shoring and bracing or slope sides of all trenches and other excavations to comply with applicable codes and ordinances. Provide and maintain materials for shoring and bracing, in good serviceable condition. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in a safe condition until completion of backfilling. B. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific written direction of Owner's representative. 1. Under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls, fill unauthorized excavation by extending the indicated bottom elevation of the footing or base to the excavation bottom, without altering required top elevations. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to proper position, only when accepted by Architect. 2. Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations of same classification, unless otherwise directed by Architect. C. When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, notify Architect who will make an inspection of conditions. 1. If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at required subgrade elevations, carry excavations deeper and replace excavated material as directed by Architect. 2. Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will be paid on basis of contract conditions relative to changes in work. D. Protect soils exposed at the base of completed foundation excavations against disturbance from con- struction activities and changes in moisture content. Where foundations cannot be poured the same day an excavation is completed, clear footing subgrade of all loose and unsatisfactory material, com- pact at optimum moisture content as specified herein, and protect with a minimum 3"thick seal slab of lean concrete. Contractor may, where bottom of foundation will be exposed to movement of crawler type heavy equipment, leave about 1' of undisturbed soil above indicated bottom of footing elevations until just prior to final excavation. EARTHWORK 312300-3 TOM REID LIBRARY RENOVATION &ADDITION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 7 1. Protect side slopes of excavation from surface runoff and rainfall with pneumatically placed concrete, custom designed tarpaulins with regularly spaced hold-downs, or by other accepted means which will prevent water from entering below top edge of protective covering. E. Prevent surface water from flowing into excavations and from flooding Project Site and surrounding area. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Provide and maintain dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations. F. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10', and extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit installation of services, other construction required, and for inspection. 1. Excavate by hand to final grade and remove all loose material and debris just before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 2. Proofroll exposed subgrade below building with a heavy pneumatic tired vehicle such as a loaded dump truck. Conduct proofrolling operations only in the presence of the Architect. Undercut areas which "pump" or "rut" during proofrolling operations to firm natural soil, and backfill and compact as specified. G. Excavate unsatisfactory soil materials encountered that extend below required elevations,to additional depth directed by the Owner's representative. Such additional excavation, provided it is not due to fault or neglect of Contractor, will be measured as directed by Owner's representative and paid for as a change in the Work. H. Excavate holes for drilled piers to the required bearing strata or elevation as shown on the Drawings. Excavate holes for closely spaced drilled piers, and those occurring in fragile or sand stratas, only after adjacent holes are filled with concrete and allowed to set for a minimum of 24 hours. 1. Excavate drill pier shafts and underreams to sizes, depths and spacings indicated on Drawings. Maintain shafts in true alignment in all directions, with vertical variations on centerline not to exceed 1" o.c. from top to bottom, and horizontal variation for drilled shaft center locations not to exceed 3". Tolerances and variations are non-cumulative. Report any deviations to the Architect and take whatever corrective measures as may be directed. 2. Provide casings only if necessary to provide finished shafts that are straight and true, with sides and bottoms free of loose earth and completely dry. Except as specifically directed otherwise by the Architect, casings may be withdrawn as concrete is placed. 3. Refer to notes on the Structural Drawings for additional requirements. 4. Each drilled pier must be inspected and be acceptable to the Architect before placing any concrete. 5. Provide facilities as required to assist in the inspection and testing of excavations, and cooperate with inspecting and testing personnel to expedite the work. 6. Notify the Architect and the testing facility at least 6 hours prior to the time excavation will be ready for inspection and tests. 7. Immediately following completion of drilling each shaft, and upon acceptance of the Architect, carefully and accurately place reinforcing steel and completely fill shaft with specified concrete. Except as otherwise accepted by the Architect, do not leave drilled shafts open from one work day to another. 3.3 COMPACTION: A. Compact soil to the following percentages of maximum dry density for soils which exhibit a EARTHWORK 312300-4 TOM REID LIBRARY RENOVATION &ADDITION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 (.1.116\1 well-defined moisture density relationship determined in accordance with ASTM D 698; and to the following percentages of relative density, determined in accordance with ASTM D 4254,for soils which will not exhibit a well-defined moisture-density-relationship: 1. Structures, Slabs and Pavements: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at the optimum moisture content (plus or minus 2%) to 95% maximum density for cohesive soils and to at least 95% relative density for cohesionless material. 2. Refer to Structural Drawings for additional requirements. B. Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade, or layer of soil material, to prevent free water appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compaction to specified density. 1. Scarify exposed subgrade below slabs and paving areas to a depth of 6", moisture conditioned to not less than the optimum moisture content and compacted to the specified requirements. 3.4 BACKFILL AND FILL: A. In excavations, use specified select fill or satisfactory excavated material conforming to select fill requirements as determined by sampling and testing by soil testing agency. Place in layers to required subgrade elevations indicated. 1. Under building slabs, use select fill material. B. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following: 1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including,where applicable,waterproofing. 2. Inspection,testing, acceptance, and recording location of underground utilities. 3. Removal of concrete formwork, shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids with satisfactory materials. 4. Removal of trash and debris. 5. Permanent or temporary horizontal bracing is in place on horizontally supported walls. C. Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills. Plow, strip, or break-up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so that fill material will bond with existing surface. D. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8" in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4" in loose depth for material compacted by hand- operated tampers. 1. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy,frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, to required elevations. Take care to prevent wedging action of backfill against structures by carrying material uniformly around structure to approximately same elevation in each lift. Compact backfill material within 10' of structures with mechanical hand-operated tampers. 3.5 GRADING: A. Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this Section, including adjacent transition areas. EARTHWORK 312300-5 TOM REID LIBRARY RENOVATION &ADDITION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are shown, or between such points and existing grades. B. Grade areas outside and adjacent to building lines to drain away from structures and to prevent ponding. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface change, and as follows: 1. Grassed Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within not more than 0.10' above or below the required subgrade elevations. 2. Walks: Shape surface of areas under walks to line, grade and cross-section, with finish surface not more than 0.10'above or below the required subgrade elevation. 3. Pavements: Shape surface of areas under pavement to line, grade and cross-section, with finish surface not more than 0.05'above or below the required subgrade elevation. C. Grade surface of fill under building slabs smooth and even,free of voids, compacted as specified, and to required elevation. Provide final grades within a tolerance of 0.02' when tested with a 10' straightedge. D. After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and percentages of maximum density specified. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Quality Control Testing During Construction: Allow Owner's testing service to inspect subgrades and fill layers before further construction work is performed. 1. Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D 1556 (sand cone method) or ASTM D 2167(rubber balloon method)or ASTM D 2922(nuclear method), as applicable. 2. Footing Subgrade: For each strata of soil on which footings will be placed, conduct as least 1 test to verify required design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of each footing subgrade may be based on a visual comparison of each subgrade with related tested strata,when acceptable to Architect. 3. Building Slab Subgrade: Make at least 1 field density test of subgrade for every 2,000 sq. ft. of paved area or building slab, but in no case less than 3 tests. In each compacted fill layer, make 1 field density test for every 2,000 sq. ft. of overlaying building slab or paved area, but in no case less than 3 tests. 4. If in the opinion of Architect, based on testing service reports and inspection, subgrade or fills which have been placed are below specified density, provide additional compaction and testing at no additional expense. 5. Results of density tests which may be selected will be considered satisfactory when they are in each instance equal to or greater than specified density, and if not more than 1 density test out of 5 has a value greater than 2% below required density. 3.7 MAINTENANCE: A. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion, and keep free of trash and debris. B. Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, reshape, and compact to required density prior to further construction. C. Where settling is measurable or observable at excavated areas during general project warranty period, remove surface (pavement, lawn, or other finish), add backfill material, compact, and replace surface treatment. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of surface or finish to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. EARTHWORK 312300-6 TOM REID LIBRARY RENOVATION &ADDITION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 3.8 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS: A. Remove from Owner's property and legally dispose of all excess excavated material,trash, debris and waste materials. END OF SECTION 312300 EARTHWORK 312300-7 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 SECTION 316329- DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Dry-installed drilled piers. 1.2 UNIT PRICES A. Drilled Piers: Actual net volume of drilled piers in place and approved. Actual length, shaft diameter, and bell diameter if applicable, may vary, to coincide with elevations where satisfactory bearing strata are encountered. These dimensions may also vary with actual bearing value of bearing strata determined by an independent testing and inspecting agency. Adjustments are made on net variation of total quantities, based on design dimensions for shafts and bells. 1. Base bids on indicated number of drilled piers and, for each pier, the design length from top elevation to bottom of shaft, extended through the bell, if applicable, and the diameter of shaft and bell. 2. Unit prices include labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals required for excavation, trimming, shoring, casings, dewatering, reinforcement, concrete fill, testing and inspecting, and other items for complete drilled-pier installation. B. Rock Measurement: Volume of rock actually removed, measured in original position, but not to exceed outside dimensions of drilled piers cast against rock. Unit prices for rock excavation include replacement with approved materials. 1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. C. Shop Drawings: For concrete reinforcement. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Welding certificates. B. Material certificates. DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS 316329 - 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 C. Material test reports. t) D. Field quality-control reports. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record drawings. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M, "Structural Welding Code- Steel." 2. AWS D1.4/D1.4M, "Structural Welding Code- Reinforcing Steel." 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Project-Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by geotechnical engineer. Owner is not responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this data. 1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for l drilled piers. 2. The geotechnical report is included elsewhere in the Project Manual. B. Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to perform surveys, layouts, and measurements for drilled piers. Before excavating, lay out each drilled pier to lines and levels required. Record actual measurements of each drilled pier's location, shaft diameter, bottom and top elevations, deviations from specified tolerances, and other specified data. 1. Record and maintain information pertinent to each drilled pier and indicate on record Drawings. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Drilled-Pier Standard:ACI 336.1 except as modified in this Section. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed. B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed. C. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, as drawn. DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS 316329 -2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 ' 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I. Supplement with the following: a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F. b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120. B. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33/C 33M, graded, 1-inch-nominal maximum coarse- aggregate size. 1. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. C. Water:ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. D. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 3. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 4. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. 2.4 CONCRETE MIXTURES AND MIXING A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301. B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement according to ACI 301 limits as if concrete were exposed to deicing chemicals. C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to [0.15] [0.30] percent by weight of cement. D. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3000 psi. E. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to bearing elevations regardless of character of surface and (�'' subsurface conditions encountered. DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS 316329 -3 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 B. Classified Excavation: Excavation is classified as standard excavation, special excavation, and obstruction removal and includes excavation to bearing elevations as follows: 1. Standard excavation includes excavation accomplished with conventional augers fitted with soil or rock teeth, drilling buckets, or underreaming tools attached to drilling equipment of size, power, torque, and downthrust necessary for the Work. 2. Special excavation includes excavation that requires special equipment or procedures where drilled-pier excavation equipment used in standard excavation, operating at maximum power, torque, and downthrust, cannot advance the shaft. 3. Obstructions: Payment for removing unanticipated boulders, concrete, masonry, or other subsurface obstructions that cannot be removed by conventional augers fitted with soil or rock teeth, drilling buckets, or underreaming tools attached to drilling equipment of size, power, torque, and downthrust necessary for the Work is according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. C. Excavate shafts for drilled piers to indicated elevations. Remove loose material from bottom of excavation. D. Notify and allow testing and inspecting agency to test and inspect bottom of excavation. If unsuitable bearing stratum is encountered, make adjustments to drilled piers as determined by Geotechnical Engineer. 1. Do not excavate shafts deeper than elevations indicated unless approved by Geotechnical Engineer. 2. Payment for additional authorized excavation is according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. E. End-Bearing Drilled Piers: Probe with auger to a depth below bearing elevation, equal to diameter of the bearing area of drilled pier. Determine whether voids, clay seams, or solution channels exist. F. Bells: Excavate bells for drilled piers to shape, base thickness, and slope angle indicated. Excavate bottom of bells to level plane and remove loose material before placing concrete. G. Tolerances: Construct drilled piers to remain within ACI 336.1 tolerances. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with recommendations in CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. B. Place concrete in continuous operation and without segregation immediately after inspection and approval of shaft by a qualified testing agency. C. Place concrete to fall vertically down the center of drilled pier without striking sides of shaft or steel reinforcement. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS 316329 -4 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND,TEXAS Project No. 14171 1. Drilled piers. 2. Excavation. 3. Concrete. 4. Steel reinforcement welding. B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. Drilled-Pier Tests and Inspections: For each drilled pier, before concrete placement. 1. Soil Testing: Bottom elevations, bearing capacities, and lengths of drilled piers indicated have been estimated from available soil data. Actual elevations and drilled-pier lengths and bearing capacities are determined by testing and inspecting agency. Final evaluations and approval of data are determined by Architect. D. Concrete Tests and Inspections: ACI 301. 3.4 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 316329 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS 316329 -5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 32 �''' EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 C SECTION 323113 -CHAIN LINK GATES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Swing pedestrian gates. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components (111111111' and profiles, and finishes for the following: a. Gate posts,rails, and fittings. b. Chain-link fabric,reinforcements, and attachments. c. Gates and hardware. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of fence and gate assembly. 1. Include plans, elevations,sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2. Include accessories,hardware, gate operation, and operational clearances. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For each type of chain-link fence gate. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify layout information for chain-link fence gates shown on Drawings in relation to property survey and existing structures.Verify dimensions by field measurements. C CHAIN LINK GATES 323113 - 1 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION &RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CHAIN-LINK FENCE FABRIC A. General: Provide fabric in one-piece heights measured between top and bottom of outer edge of selvage knuckle or twist according to "CLFMI Product Manual" and requirements indicated below: 1. Fabric Height: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Steel Wire for Fabric: Wire diameter of 0.192 inch(4.88 mm). a. Mesh Size: 2 inches (50 mm). b. Zinc-Coated Fabric: ASTM A 392, Type II, Class 1, 1.2 oz./sq. ft. (366 g/sq. m) with zinc coating applied before weaving. 2.2 SWING GATES A. General: ASTM F 900 for gate posts and single swing gate types. 1. Gate Leaf Width: As indicated. 2. Framework Member Sizes and Strength: Based on gate fabric height as indicated. B. Pipe and Tubing: 1. Zinc-Coated Steel: ASTM F 1043 and ASTM F 1083; protective coating and finish to match fence framework. 2. Gate Posts: Round tubular steel. 3. Gate Frames and Bracing: Round tubular steel. C. Frame Corner Construction: Welded or assembled with corner fittings. D. Hardware: 1. Hinges: 180-degree outward swing. 2. Latch: Permitting operation from both sides of gate with provision for padlocking accessible from outside side of gate. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Do not begin installation before final grading is completed unless otherwise permitted by Architect. CHAIN LINK GATES 323113 -2 TOM REID LIBRARY ADDITION&RENOVATION CITY OF PEARLAND, TEXAS Project No. 14171 B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 GATE INSTALLATION A. Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. Attach fabric as for fencing. Attach hardware using tamper- resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation. END OF SECTION 323113 r CHAIN LINK GATES 323113 -3